You are on page 1of 978

Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide

19852011NemetschekVectorworks,Incorporated.All RightsReserved. NemetschekVectorworks,Inc.,hereafterreferredtoas NemetschekVectorworks,anditslicensorsretainall ownershiprightstotheMiniCADVectorworks computerprogramandallothercomputerprogramsas wellasdocumentationofferedbyNemetschek Vectorworks.UseofNemetschekVectorworkssoftwareis governedbythelicenseagreementaccompanyingyour originalmedia.Thesourcecodeforsuchsoftwareisa confidentialtradesecretofNemetschekVectorworks.You maynotattempttodecipher,decompile,developor otherwisereverseengineerNemetschekVectorworks software.Informationnecessarytoachieve interoperabilitywiththissoftwaremaybefurnished uponrequest.

Macintosh,QuickDraw3D,QuickTime,andQuartz2D areregisteredtrademarksofAppleComputer,Inc. MicrosoftandWindowsareregisteredtrademarksofthe MicrosoftCorporationintheUnitedStatesandother countries. Adobe,AdobePDFLibrary,AdobeAIR,andtheAdobe logoaretrademarksofAdobeSystemsIncorporated. ParasolidisaregisteredtrademarkofSiemensProduct LifecycleManagementSoftwareInc. CINEMA4DisaregisteredtrademarkofMAXON ComputerGmbH,MAXONComputerInc.andMAXON ComputerLtd. SpaceNavigatorisatrademarkof3Dconnexion. OpenEXRisatrademarkofLucasfilm,Ltd. ACISandSATareregisteredtrademarksofSpatial Corporation. TheForboflooringtexturesarebasedontextures suppliedbyForboHoldingS.A. Theshaderappendixcontainscontent,copyright MAXONComputerGmbH,MAXONComputerInc.and MAXONComputerLtd.Allrightsreserved.Reprinted withpermission. TheRenderworksCameratoolwasdevelopedbyJulian Carr,OzCAD,Sydney,Australia. Allotherbrandorproductnamesaretrademarksor registeredtrademarksoftheirrespectivecompaniesor organizations. ForDefenseAgencies:RestrictedRightsLegend.Use, reproduction,ordisclosureissubjecttorestrictionsset forthinsubparagraph(c)(1)(ii)oftheRightsofTechnical DataandComputerSoftwareclauseat252.2277013. Forcivilianagencies:RestrictedRightsLegend.Use, reproduction,ordisclosureissubjecttorestrictionsset forthinsubparagraphs(a)through(d)ofthecommercial ComputerSoftwareRestrictedRightsclauseat52.22719. Unpublishedrightsreservedunderthecopyrightlawsof theUnitedStates.Thecontractor/manufactureris NemetschekVectorworks,Incorporated,7150Riverwood Drive,Columbia,MD,21046,USA.

Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide


TheVectorworksFundamentalsUsersGuidewaswritten andillustratedbyAlexandraDuffy,TeresaHeaps,and SusanCollins. Thismanual,aswellasthesoftwaredescribedinit,is furnishedunderlicenseandmayonlybeusedorcopied inaccordancewiththetermsofsuchlicense.The informationinthismanualisfurnishedforinformational useonly,issubjecttochangewithoutnotice,andshould notbeconstruedasacommitmentbyNemetschek Vectorworks.NemetschekVectorworksassumesno responsibilityorliabilityforanyerrorsorinaccuracies thatmayappearinthismanual. Exceptaspermittedbysuchlicense,nopartofthis publicationmaybereproduced,storedinaretrieval system,ortransmitted,inanyformorbyanymeans, electronic,mechanical,recording,orotherwise,without theexpresspriorwrittenpermissionofNemetschek Vectorworks. Existingartworkorimagesthatyoumaydesiretoscanor copymaybeprotectedundercopyrightlaw.The unauthorizedincorporationofsuchartworkintoyour workmaybeaviolationoftherightsoftheauthoror illustrator.Pleasebesuretoobtainanypermission requiredfromsuchauthors. Vectorworks,Renderworks,andMiniCADareregistered trademarksofNemetschekVectorworks,Inc. VectorScript,SmartCursor,andtheDesignandDrafting ToolkitaretrademarksofNemetschekVectorworks,Inc. Thefollowingarecopyrightsortrademarksoftheir respectivecompaniesororganizations:

Contributions
ContributionswereprovidedbyBiplabSarkar,Dave Donley,WesGardner,EricGilbey,GuntherMiller,Don Ward,andTimConnors. SplashscreendesignedbyKathleenRyland.Product iconsdesignedbyStephanMnninghoff.

RiccardoMartiresMasterWorkscontestfilesubmission wasusedasthebasisforavarietyofillustrations. EvanstonGreenTownhomesfileusedasthebasisfor illustrations2008NathanKipnisArchitects,Inc.

Registration and Updates


Ifyouhavenotalreadydoneso,pleaseregisteryourcopy oftheVectorworkssoftwarewithNemetschek Vectorworksathttp://register.nemetschek.net. Ifyouwouldliketoreceiveautomaticnotificationof Vectorworkssoftwareupdates,youcanselectto automaticallycheckforupdatesonaweeklyormonthly basisfromtheSessiontabofVectorworkspreferences (SeeSessionPreferencesonpage 21intheVectorworks FundamentalsUsersGuide.)

Vectorworks License Agreement


Thelicenseagreementbindingtheuseofthissoftware canbefoundintheVectorworksReleaseNotesdirectory orbyclickingLicenseintheAboutVectorworksdialog box.

Table of Contents
Preface ...........................................................................................................................................................i
Installing Vectorworks Products................................................................................................................................i Updating Vectorworks Products............................................................................................................................... ii New Features.......................................................................................................................................................... iii Learning Vectorworks ............................................................................................................................................. xi Technical Support and Training .............................................................................................................................xiii Vectorworks Service Select .................................................................................................................................. xiv

1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................................1
Understanding Vectorworks.....................................................................................................................................1 The Fundamentals Workspace ................................................................................................................................4 The View Bar ...........................................................................................................................................................7 Palettes and Tool Sets.............................................................................................................................................9 Palette Layout Options...........................................................................................................................................10 List Box Functionality .............................................................................................................................................14 Additional Key Functionality...................................................................................................................................15 Screen Tips............................................................................................................................................................15 Object Editing Mode...............................................................................................................................................16 Setting Vectorworks Preferences...........................................................................................................................17 Setting Document Preferences ..............................................................................................................................28 Setting Quick Preferences .....................................................................................................................................33 Context Menus.......................................................................................................................................................34

2 Getting Started .........................................................................................................................................39


Creating a New File ...............................................................................................................................................39 Opening a File........................................................................................................................................................39 Using Finder Quick Look (Macintosh OS X 10.5+ Only)........................................................................................41 Closing a File .........................................................................................................................................................43 Saving a File ..........................................................................................................................................................43 Reverting to the Last Saved Version .....................................................................................................................45 Converting Previous Version Files.........................................................................................................................45

ii

| Table of Contents Exiting Vectorworks ...............................................................................................................................................51 Drawing Techniques ..............................................................................................................................................51 Undoing and Redoing Actions ...............................................................................................................................52 Moving Around.......................................................................................................................................................53 Selecting Objects ...................................................................................................................................................58 Setting Up the Drawing ..........................................................................................................................................71 Setting Default Object Attributes............................................................................................................................80 Creating Templates................................................................................................................................................80 Printing...................................................................................................................................................................81 Using Drawing Tablets...........................................................................................................................................86

3 Drawing Structure ....................................................................................................................................89


Organizing the Drawing .........................................................................................................................................89 Managing Layers ...................................................................................................................................................93 Managing Classes ...............................................................................................................................................105 Setting Class and Design Layer Options .............................................................................................................113 Managing Viewports ............................................................................................................................................113 Managing Saved Views .......................................................................................................................................114 Setting Visibilities .................................................................................................................................................118 Workgroup Referencing .......................................................................................................................................121

4 Drawing with Snapping..........................................................................................................................133


Setting Snapping Parameters ..............................................................................................................................133 Drawing with Snapping ........................................................................................................................................147 SmartCursor Cues ...............................................................................................................................................153

5 Using Vectorworks Resources..............................................................................................................157


Libraries ...............................................................................................................................................................157 Default Content in Vectorworks Fundamentals and Renderworks ......................................................................157 Using the Resource Browser ...............................................................................................................................159 Understanding Symbols.......................................................................................................................................173

Table of Contents |

iii

Creating New Symbols ........................................................................................................................................175 Inserting Symbols ................................................................................................................................................178 Editing Symbols ...................................................................................................................................................183 Record Formats ...................................................................................................................................................191 Global Symbol Commands ..................................................................................................................................199

6 Creating Objects.....................................................................................................................................207
Vectorworks Modeling Environment....................................................................................................................207 Using the Data Bar...............................................................................................................................................209 Creating Lines......................................................................................................................................................213 Creating Rectangles ............................................................................................................................................218 Creating Rounded Rectangles.............................................................................................................................221 Creating Circles ...................................................................................................................................................223 Creating Ovals .....................................................................................................................................................227 Creating Arcs .......................................................................................................................................................229 Creating Quarter Arcs ..........................................................................................................................................234 Creating Polylines ................................................................................................................................................234 Creating Triangles ...............................................................................................................................................241 Creating 2D Polygons ..........................................................................................................................................242 Creating 3D Polygons ..........................................................................................................................................249 Closing and Opening Polygons and Polylines .....................................................................................................249 Creating Spheres .................................................................................................................................................251 Creating Hemispheres .........................................................................................................................................252 Creating Cones ....................................................................................................................................................253 Creating Loci........................................................................................................................................................255

7 Editing Objects .......................................................................................................................................257


Editing Object Information....................................................................................................................................257 Moving Objects ....................................................................................................................................................263 Cutting, Copying, and Pasting Objects ................................................................................................................268 Removing Objects................................................................................................................................................270

iv

| Table of Contents Duplicating Objects ..............................................................................................................................................273 Smoothing Objects...............................................................................................................................................279 Composing and Decomposing Objects and Surfaces .........................................................................................280 Selecting Connected Objects...............................................................................................................................281 Locking and Unlocking Objects............................................................................................................................282 Rotating Objects ..................................................................................................................................................282 Mirroring Objects..................................................................................................................................................286 Converting Objects ..............................................................................................................................................289 Grouping Objects .................................................................................................................................................291 Aligning and Distributing Objects .........................................................................................................................292 Compressing Images ...........................................................................................................................................295 Tracing Bitmaps ...................................................................................................................................................296

8 Object Operations ..................................................................................................................................297


Extruding Objects.................................................................................................................................................297 Sweeping Objects ................................................................................................................................................301 Reshaping Objects...............................................................................................................................................302 Offsetting Objects ...............................................................................................................................................315 Trimming and Clipping Objects............................................................................................................................318 Resizing Objects ..................................................................................................................................................320 Shearing Objects .................................................................................................................................................324 Joining Objects ....................................................................................................................................................324 Combining and Connecting Objects ....................................................................................................................326 Splitting Objects and NURBS Surfaces ...............................................................................................................332 Creating Fillets and Chamfers .............................................................................................................................335 Editing Object Surfaces .......................................................................................................................................339 Obtaining Engineering Properties ........................................................................................................................345 Obtaining Volumetric Properties ..........................................................................................................................346 Drafting Aids ........................................................................................................................................................347

Table of Contents |

9 Adding Text and Annotation..................................................................................................................353


Inserting Text .......................................................................................................................................................353 Modifying Text......................................................................................................................................................357 Using Text Styles .................................................................................................................................................364 Checking Spelling ................................................................................................................................................367 Finding and Replacing Text .................................................................................................................................369 Inserting Callouts .................................................................................................................................................370 Inserting a Leader Line ........................................................................................................................................375 Adding a Sheet Border.........................................................................................................................................376 Using Notation Objects ........................................................................................................................................385

10 Advanced 3D Modeling........................................................................................................................393
3D Power Pack Fundamentals ............................................................................................................................393 Creating NURBS Curves .....................................................................................................................................400 NURBS Surfaces .................................................................................................................................................402 Extracting Geometry ............................................................................................................................................420 NURBS Surface-curve Interaction .......................................................................................................................422 Creating Helix-Spirals ..........................................................................................................................................432 Creating Contours................................................................................................................................................434 Solids Operations.................................................................................................................................................434 Converting to Generic Solids ...............................................................................................................................443

11 Creating Building Elements ................................................................................................................445


Creating Floors ....................................................................................................................................................445 Creating Walls......................................................................................................................................................445 Editing Walls ........................................................................................................................................................464 Creating Roof Faces ............................................................................................................................................473 Creating Roof Objects..........................................................................................................................................478 Editing Roof Objects ............................................................................................................................................480

12 Adding Building Elements...................................................................................................................495


Structural Shapes and Details .............................................................................................................................495

vi

| Table of Contents Inserting and Editing Symbols Within a Wall .......................................................................................................509 Creating Columns ................................................................................................................................................520 Creating Simple Stairs .........................................................................................................................................522

13 Applying Object Attributes..................................................................................................................525


The Attributes Palette ..........................................................................................................................................525 Transferring Attributes ........................................................................................................................................526 Fill Attributes ........................................................................................................................................................530 Pen Attributes ......................................................................................................................................................532 Opacity Attributes ................................................................................................................................................532 Line Style Attributes .............................................................................................................................................533 Marker Attributes..................................................................................................................................................538 Using Hatch Fills ..................................................................................................................................................541 Using Tile Fills......................................................................................................................................................548 Using Gradient Fills..............................................................................................................................................552 Using Image Fills .................................................................................................................................................557 Mapping Fills with the Attribute Mapping Tool .....................................................................................................561 Applying Colors....................................................................................................................................................566

14 Viewing the Drawing ............................................................................................................................575


Using Standard Views..........................................................................................................................................575 Projection .............................................................................................................................................................577 Perspective .........................................................................................................................................................578 Simulating Movement ..........................................................................................................................................578 Setting a 3D View ................................................................................................................................................585 Setting a Camera View in Renderworks ..............................................................................................................586 Fit to Objects........................................................................................................................................................591 Fit to Page Area ...................................................................................................................................................592 Viewing History ....................................................................................................................................................592 Using Working Planes..........................................................................................................................................593

Table of Contents |

vii

15 Creating and Mapping Textures..........................................................................................................607


Renderworks Commands and Tools....................................................................................................................607 Textures and Shaders..........................................................................................................................................608 Creating Textures ................................................................................................................................................609 Editing Textures and Shaders..............................................................................................................................622 Creating Image Prop Objects...............................................................................................................................626 Adding 3D Plants .................................................................................................................................................628 Creating Layer Backgrounds ...............................................................................................................................629 Applying and Mapping Textures ..........................................................................................................................635 Applying Textures to Symbols, Walls, and Roofs ................................................................................................651 Applying Renderworks Backgrounds ...................................................................................................................656

16 Rendering the Drawing ........................................................................................................................659


Adding Light.........................................................................................................................................................660 Advanced Renderworks Lighting .........................................................................................................................674 Preparing to Render.............................................................................................................................................681 Rendering with Vectorworks ................................................................................................................................681 Rendering with Renderworks...............................................................................................................................689 Rendering a Selected Area..................................................................................................................................701 Batch Rendering ..................................................................................................................................................703 Managing Lights and Cameras with the Visualization Palette .............................................................................705

17 Dimensioning and Constraints ...........................................................................................................709


Dimensioning .......................................................................................................................................................709 Marking Object Centers .......................................................................................................................................726 Angular Dimensioning..........................................................................................................................................727 Arc Length Dimensioning.....................................................................................................................................729 Converting Objects to Dimensions.......................................................................................................................730 Modifying Dimensions..........................................................................................................................................731 Measuring Distance .............................................................................................................................................738 Parametric Constraints ........................................................................................................................................740

viii

| Table of Contents

18 Presenting Vectorworks Drawings .....................................................................................................753


Animating Drawings with QuickTime ...................................................................................................................753 Presenting Drawings with Sheet Layer Viewports ...............................................................................................762 Cutting Sections...................................................................................................................................................783 Layer Linking........................................................................................................................................................784

19 Importing and Exporting Files ............................................................................................................789


Importing Files .....................................................................................................................................................789 Exporting Files .....................................................................................................................................................791 Exporting a Rendered Drawing............................................................................................................................799 DXF and DWG File Formats ................................................................................................................................803 DXF/DWG File Export..........................................................................................................................................806 DXF/DWG File Import ..........................................................................................................................................818

20 Worksheets ...........................................................................................................................................833
Creating Worksheets ...........................................................................................................................................833 Using Worksheets................................................................................................................................................837 Entering Data in Spreadsheet Cells.....................................................................................................................851 Entering Data in Database Rows.........................................................................................................................857 Worksheet Functions ...........................................................................................................................................861 Importing Worksheets ..........................................................................................................................................868 Exporting Worksheets..........................................................................................................................................869 Worksheets as Graphic Objects ..........................................................................................................................870

21 Using Scripts ........................................................................................................................................871


Creating Custom Selection Scripts ......................................................................................................................871 Creating Custom Tool/Attribute Scripts................................................................................................................872 Creating VectorScripts .........................................................................................................................................874 Running VectorScripts .........................................................................................................................................874 Managing VectorScripts.......................................................................................................................................875 Managing Script Palettes.....................................................................................................................................877

Table of Contents |

ix

A Using the Workspace Editor .................................................................................................................879


Creating or Editing a Workspace .........................................................................................................................879 Updating Custom Workspaces and Plug-in Objects ............................................................................................889

B Standards and Resources.....................................................................................................................891


Libraries in Vectorworks Fundamentals and Renderworks..................................................................................891 Cursors in Vectorworks Fundamentals ................................................................................................................893 Vectorworks Circle/Arc Conventions....................................................................................................................900 Survey Bearings...................................................................................................................................................900 Correlated Color Temperature .............................................................................................................................900 Architectural Scale ...............................................................................................................................................901

C Renderworks Shader Definitions .........................................................................................................903


Shader Types.......................................................................................................................................................903

Index .........................................................................................................................................................927

| Table of Contents

Preface
WelcometoVectorworksFundamentalssoftwareaCADprogramthatincludesallthe2Dand3Dtoolsand technologyyouneedinoneeasytouse,costeffectivepackage.Inadditiontoprecisiondrafting,itprovidespowerful toolsfor3Dmodelingthatcanbeusedtocreate,present,andevenmanufacturedesigns.Builtindatabaseand worksheetcapabilitieshelptrackcostsandmaterials.Ahostofimportandexportformatsmakesiteasytosharefiles. TheVectorworksFundamentalsproductalsoincludesextensivesymbollibraries,defaultdrawingresources,anda builtinscriptingenvironmentthatcanbeusedtoautomateroutinetasks.

Installing Vectorworks Products


TheVectorworksinstallationprogramliststheinstallationsystemrequirements,anyknowninstallationissues,and anyinformationthatdidnotmakeitintothedocumentation.Toensureasmoothinstallation,confirmthatsystem requirementsaremetandtakenoteofanyissuesorincompatibilitiespriortoinstallingthesoftware. TheinstallationprogramcaninstalltheVectorworksDesigner,Renderworks,Architect,Landmark,Spotlight,and Fundamentalsproductsinanycombination.Theprogramdetermineswhichproductstoinstallbasedontheserial number. Yoursoftwarelicenseallowsforonecopytobemadeforbackuppurposes.TheVectorworkssoftwareshouldbe backeduponaregularbasis.Thesebackupsareinvaluableinrestoringusercustomizedsettingsthatmaybe otherwiselosteitherbyacomputerfailureorbyreinstallationofthesoftware.

Adding and Removing Serial Numbers


Duringinstallationyouaretypicallyrequiredtoentertheserialnumber,whichisprovidedwiththeVectorworks software.Ifyouarenotpromptedtoentertheserialnumberduringinstallation,youmustenteritthefirsttimethe programisaccessed.Youmayalsoneedtoupdateaserialnumbertoenablemoreproducts. Toaddaserialnumber: 1. OpentheVectorworksprogram. TheSerialNumbersdialogboxopensthefirsttimetheprogramisaccessed.Thereafter,itisaccessedbyclicking SerialNumbersfromtheSessiontabofVectorworkspreferences.

2. ClickAdd. TheAddNewSerialNumberdialogboxopens. 3. Entertheserialnumberexactlyasitappearsonthelabel.Theserialnumberiscasesensitive.Thelettersoandi arenotusedinserialnumbers;enterzerooroneinstead. 4. ClickAdd.

ii

| Preface
ThelistofEnabledProductsintheSerialNumbersdialogboxdisplaysallproductsenabledbythisserial number.Forsecurity,serialnumbersthatbeginwiththeletterAarepartiallyhiddenwherevertheydisplayin Vectorworks. 5. Onlyoneserialnumbercanbeappliedatatime.Whentheserialnumberisset,clickDone.

Toremoveaserialnumber: 1. ClickSerialNumbersfromtheSessiontabofVectorworkspreferences. TheSerialNumbersdialogboxopens. 2. Selecttheserialnumbertoremove,andthenclickRemove. 3. ClickDone.

Viewing the Vectorworks License Agreement


ThelicenseagreementfortheVectorworkssoftwarecanbeviewedatanytime. Toviewthelicenseagreement: 1. OnWindows,selectHelp>AboutVectorworks,oronMacintoshselectVectorworks>AboutVectorworks. 2. ClickLicensetodisplaythelicenseagreementtext. 3. ClickOKtwicetoreturntotheprogram.

Network Protection
WhenyourunmultiplecopiesoftheVectorworksprogramacrossanetwork,serialnumbersarecheckedwhenthe programislaunched,andalsoperiodicallythroughoutthesession. Ifthesameserialnumberisfoundtobeinuse,theAllSerialNumbersInUsedialogboxopens.Fromthisdialogbox, clickUserInformationtodisplaytheUserName,ifgiven,andtheIPaddressoftheotherlocation.ClickEdit Numberstodeletetheexistingserialnumberandenteranewone.Oncethesituationisresolved,clickRetry Numberstoregainaccesstotheprogram.Iftheserialnumberisstillinuseafterthreeattempts,theprogram automaticallyshutsdown.

Updating Vectorworks Products


VectorworkssoftwareupdatesarecalledServicePacks,andareconsideredmaintenancereleases.Thereareseveral waystoobtainupdates: ClickCheckforUpdatesfromHelp>AboutVectorworks.Alternatively,selectHelp>CheckforUpdates (Windows)orVectorworks>CheckforUpdates(Macintosh). Adialogboxopenstoindicatewhetherthesoftwareisuptodate,orifanupdateisavailable.Ifanupdateis available,clickMoreInfotoopenawebbrowsertodisplayanddownloadavailableupdates.Ifitisinconvenient toupdatethesoftwareatthistime,clickCancel. SelecttoAutomaticallycheckforupdatesonaweeklyormonthlybasisfromtheSessiontabofVectorworks preferences(seeSessionPreferencesonpage 21). Updatesareavailablefordownloadatwww.vectorworks.net/downloads

New Features |

iii

New Features
ThisreleaseincludesmanynewfeaturesandsignificantenhancementstotheVectorworksFundamentalsand Renderworksproducts,andtotheFundamentalsworkspace,asdescribedinthefollowingsections.

New Vectorworks Fundamentals Features


ThefollowingtablecontainsalistofnewandimprovedfeaturesforthereleaseoftheVectorworks2012software,and indicatesthesectionwherethefunctionalityisdocumented.

Feature
ContextsensitivehelpandPDF files Twonewquickpreference buttons

Purpose
TheVectorworkshelpsystem,keyboard shortcutfile,andPDFfileshavebeenupdated toreflectversion2012functionality TheShowGridandShowPageBoundary optionsarenowavailableforeasyaccess fromtheQuickPreferencesmenuontheTool bar Libraryfileswhichcanonlybeusedwith specificDesignSeriesproductsarenow clearlyidentifiedasfingerprinted Anewstatisticisnowavailableforlistingthe numberoffilesthatwerenotprocessed duringthebatchconversionprocessdueto beingdamaged Duringazoomoperation,thenormal appearanceofthedrawingismaintainedin mostcases,resultinginimprovedand accuratezooming WhentheSelectiontoolisactive,thenew CoincidentSelectionkey(Jbydefault)or SelectCoincidentObjectscommand identifiesandallowsselectionofoneormore objectswhoseedgesorpointsarecoincident. ThenewXrayFillsModekey(theBkeyby default)allowsyoutoseeandselectobjects thatarehiddenbehind2Dobjectsthathavea fill

Location
Notapplicable

SettingQuickPreferenceson page 33

Fingerprintimprovements

Watermarkedand FingerprintedFilesonpage 40 ConvertingPreviousVersion FilesasaBatchonpage 46

NewBatchConvertstatistic

Improvedzooming

Zoomingonpage 54

Coincidentobjectselection

CoincidentObjectSelection onpage 61

XrayFillsmode

XrayFillsModeonpage 62

iv

| Preface
Purpose
TheInteractiveAppearanceSettingsdialog boxnowhasoptionstosetthebackground colorsindividuallyforsheetlayers,design layersinTop/Planview,anddesignlayersin 3Dviews. Ifablackbackgroundisinuse,the backgroundwillstillalwaysbeblack,butthe settingsforthevariousinteractivedrawing elementscannowbecustomized.

Feature
Drawingenvironment backgroundoptions

Location
ConfiguringInteractive Displayonpage 65

Morelevelsinclassmenu Clarifyrendersettingsfor savedviews

Usingdashes,classnamescannowbe designatedwithuptofourlevelsofhierarchy Whensavingviewsoreditingsavedviews, theRenderSettingsparameterhasbeen renamedtoSaveRenderModeandOptions, tobemoreclear Whenpastingalayerplaneobjectfromthe clipboardintoasymboldefinition,anew optionallowstheobjecttobeassignedtothe screenplaneforcorrectrepresentationin2D view Wheneditingpagebased(green)symbols, theeditingwindowisautomaticallysettoa 1:1scaleforeasyediting.Otherobjectsinthe editingwindowthatarenotata1:1scaleare stillvisible,butarenotsnappable. Previously,thelengthofafieldnameina recordformatwaslimitedto20characters; now,thelimithasbeenextendedto63 characters Previously,thelengthofatextfieldina recordformatwaslimitedto255characters; thetextlengthisnowunlimited Toassistwithdrawingin3Dwithcertain drawingtools,anautomaticworkingplane appearsonsuitableobjectsurfacesasthe cursormovesoverdrawingobjectswiththe toolselected.Simplyselectatoolandclickto createobjectsonany3Dsurface.The automaticworkingplanegreatlyimproves andspeedsup3Ddrawingworkflows;2D drawingworkflowsremainunchanged. Anewmodeforplanartoolsallowsgeometry tobeextrudedimmediatelyaftercreation

CreatingClassesonpage 106 ManagingSavedViewson page 114

Planarobjectsupportfor symbolediting

EditingSymbolsonpage 183

Editingpagebasedsymbols

EditingSymbolDefinitions onpage 185

Removalof20characterlimit forrecordfieldnames

CreatingRecordFormatson page 191

Unlimitedlengthforrecordtext fields Automaticworkingplane

CreatingRecordFormatson page 191 TheAutomaticWorking Planeonpage 208, UnderstandingtheWorking Planeonpage 593

Push/pullmodeforplanartools

Push/PullModeofPlanar Toolsonpage 208

New Features | Feature


Accesstofrequentlyused settingsintheToolbar

Purpose
ThefollowingtoolsnowhaveeasyToolbar accesstosettings: DoubleLine DoubleLinePolygon RegularPolygon MovebyPoints Connect/Combine Fillet Chamfer ChamferEdge FilletEdge

Location
CreatingDoubleLineson page 215,DoubleLine PolygonToolonpage 247, Regular(Equalsided) Polygononpage 248,Moving ObjectsbyClickingon page 265,Connect/Combine Toolonpage 326,FilletTool onpage 335,ChamferToolon page 337,ModifyingEdgesby Chamferingonpage 438, ReshapingEdgesbyFilleton page 439,ConnectingRoof Facesonpage 475,Moving SymbolsinWallswiththeMove byPointsToolonpage 514 CreatingPolylineson page 234,ConvertingPolyline VerticesfromArctoRadiuson page 309,SmoothingObjects onpage 279,andPolyline Parametersonpage 261

Polylinearcediting improvements

Anewpolylineradiusvertex,createdbythe TangentArcandPointonArcmodes,ismuch easiertoreshapethanarcvertices.Thenew contextmenucommand,ConvertArcto RadiusPolyline,convertsthearcverticesofa polyline(orpathpolyline)toradiusvertices, totakeadvantageoftheeasierediting.The newsmoothingcommand,Radius Smoothing,similarlyusesradiusverticesto smoothapolylineorNURBScurve. WhenyouusetheUngroupcommandonan objectthathasrecordsattachedtoit,younow havetheoptiontodiscardtherecordsor transferthemtotheungroupedobjects The2DReshapetooland3DReshapetool havebeencombinedintoasingleReshape tool,availablefromtheBasicpalette.The currentlyselectedobject(s)andtheview determinethereshapefunctionalityavailable, makingitmucheasiertoreshapeobjects. IntheMoveVertexmodeoftheReshapetool, severalverticesofaNURBScurvecanbe selectedbypressingtheShiftkeyorcreatinga marquee TheOffsettoolhasanewpreferencetoClose OpenCurves;whenselected,linesaredrawn atbothendsoftheoriginalandoffsetobjects, tocreateaclosedshape

Preserverecordsduring ungroupoperation

Ungroupingonpage 291

UnifiedReshapetool

ReshapingObjectson page 302

Reshapingmultipleverticesof NURBScurves

ReshapingNURBSCurveson page 312

Createclosedshapesfromopen curvesusingtheOffsettool

OffsettingObjectson page 315

vi

| Preface
Purpose
Nowyoucanformatcallouttextbefore placementfromtheCalloutPreferences dialogbox,androtatecallouttexttoaspecific anglebeforeorafterplacement. NewoptionscandrawatangenttoaNURBS curve,ordrawanormaltoaNURBSsurface Thestartingandendingpeaksofwalls(top andbottom)canbeadjustedindependently, withoutaffectingtheoverallwallheight.This isusefulwhenreshapingwalls,when adjustingwallswiththeFitWallstoRoof command(VectorworksArchitectrequired), andwhenwallcomponentsdonotfollow wallpeaks. Anewoptionwhencreatingtilefills automaticallyscalesandrotatesthemwithin walls,whichisextremelyusefulforcreating insulationfillsforwallsandwallandslab components Anewcontextmenumakesiteasytocreatea newhatchortiledefinitionfromalocally editedhatchortile Fordesignlayersandviewportsthatuse hiddenlinerendering,thenewoption GenerateIntersectingLineswillgenerate lineswheresurfacesintersect Thedimensioningtoolsnowcansensethe3D featuresunderthecursor,toimprove3D dimensioningworkflows Thevisibilityofviewportcropobjectsisnow controlledbytheCropVisiblesettingonthe ObjectInfopalette.Previously,thevisibility wascontrolledbychangingthecropobjects attributes,orbychangingthecropobjects classvisibilityintheviewportsettings.

Feature
Calloutimprovements

Location
CreatingaCalloutObjecton page 371

Tangent/normalcurvecreation usingtheAnalysistool Walltopandbottomheights

AnalyzingNURBSCurvesand Surfacesonpage 422 ChangingWallPeakHeight onpage 467

Automaticallyscalingand rotatingtilefills

DefiningTilesonpage 548

Createnewhatch/tilefrom locallymappedhatch/tile Hiddenlineintersectionedge improvements

CreatingaNewResourcefrom aLocallyMappedHatchor Tileonpage 563 LineRenderOptionson page 686

Dimensioning3Dfeatures

Dimensioningonpage 709

CropVisiblecheckboxon ObjectInfopalette

PropertiesofSheetLayer Viewportsonpage 766inthis guide;intheDesignSeries UsersGuide,Propertiesof DesignLayerViewportson page 696,PropertiesofSheet LayerSectionViewportson page 711,andPropertiesof DesignLayerSection Viewportsonpage 715 ExportingFilesonpage 791

ExporttoFivePrevious VersionsofVectorworks ExportParasolidX_Tupdate

Supporthasbeenincludedtoexportfilesto thefivemostrecentolderversionsof Vectorworks ParasolidX_Texporthasbeenupdatedto exporttothelatestversion,23.0

ExportinginParasolidX_T Formatonpage 797

New Features | Feature


Supportforimagefillsduring DXF/DWGimportandexport

vii

Purpose
ImagefillscannowbeexportedasDXF/ DWGclippedimages;previously,image fillswereexportedassolidtypehatches ClippedDXF/DWGimagesnowimportas clippedpolygonswithimagefills; previously,clippedimageswouldbecome unclippeduponimport

Location
DXFandDWGFileFormats onpage 803

Supportforgradientfills duringDXF/DWGimportand export

GradientfillscannowbeexportedasDXF/ DWGgradienttypehatches;previously, gradientfillswereexportedassolidtype hatches. GradienttypeDXF/DWGhatchesnow importasobjectswithagradientfill; previously,theywereimportedasobjects withasolidfill.

DXFandDWGFileFormats onpage 803

Supportforversion2012DXF/ DWGfilesforbothimportand export Supportfortransparencyofall DXF/DWGentitiesduring importandexport SaveDXF/DWGexportoptions Optiontoexportonlyselected objectsduringDXF/DWG export

OntheDXFDWGExportOptionsdialogbox, thereisnowaversion2011/2012option TransparencywasaddedwithDXF/DWG version2011;thispropertyisnowsupported duringbothimportofDXF/DWGentitiesand exportofVectorworksentities Multiplesetsofexportoptionscannowbe savedandreusedwhennecessary. OntheDXFDWGExportOptionsdialogbox, anewoptionwillExportOnlySelected Objects;previouslytheVectorworksprogram exportedallobjectsthatwerevisibleinthe selectedportionsofthedrawing. OntheDXFDWGExportOptionsdialogbox, theExportHatchesoptionnowcontrolsthe exportofhatchfills;previously,hatcheswere alwaysexported. IfyousaveasetofoptionsfromtheDXF DWGImportOptionsdialogbox,any mappingsyoucreatedontheMapLine WeightstoColorsdialogboxarenowsaved also;previously,thelineweightmappings werenotkeptwiththeothersavedsettings.

DXFandDWGFileFormats onpage 803 DXFandDWGFileFormats onpage 803

DXF/DWGExportOptions onpage 865 DXF/DWGExportOptions onpage 865

Optiontoexporthatches duringDXF/DWGexport

DXF/DWGExportOptions onpage 811

Savelineweightmappings duringDXF/DWGimport

GraphicAttributesTabon page 827

viii

| Preface
Purpose
OntheDXFDWGImportOptionsdialogbox, theIgnoreBlockClippingoptionimportsa clippedblockasanormalscaledorunscaled Vectorworkssymbol.Bydefault,theoptionis deselected,andaclippedblockisimportedas acroppeddesignlayerviewport(ifDesign Seriesisinstalled)orasacroppedlayerlink. Previously,asetofdatabasesubrowsina worksheetwaslimitedtothreesortandthree summaryoperators.Nowupto20sortsand anunlimitednumberofsummariesare allowed. Previously,thelengthofatextblockina worksheetcellwaslimitedto255characters; thetextlengthisnowunlimited Severalworksheetfunctionsthatdidnot returnvaluesintheexpecteddocumentunits havebeenreplacedwithnewversions.Each oldfunctionhasbeenrenamedtothesame namewitha_Legacysuffix(asin Area_Legacy).Thelegacyfunctionsno longerappearintheinterface,butexisting worksheetsthatusethefunctionswillstill workproperly.Thefollowingfunctionsare affected: Area,BotBound,LeftBound,Length, Perim,RightBound,SurfaceArea, TopBound,Volume,Xcenter,Ycenter, Zcenter Additionally,thefollowingfunctionswere removedbecausetheybecameredundant: CriteriaArea,CriteriaSurfaceArea, CriteriaVolume

Feature
NewoptionforimportofDXF/ DWGclippedblocks

Location
ObjectsTabonpage 830

Increasednumberofsortsand summariesallowedfor worksheetcolumns

DatabaseRowSortand SummaryFunctionson page 845

Remove255characterlimitfor worksheetcells Worksheetfunction improvementsfordocument units

FormattingWorksheetCells onpage 846 WorksheetFunctionson page 861

Newsearchcriteria

Whencreatingcustomselectionscriptsand specifyingsearchcriteria,penpattern,story (DesignSeriesrequired),andopacitycanbe setassearchcriteria

CreatingCustomSelection Scriptsonpage 871

New Features | Feature


Fasterviewportvisibilityresets

ix

Purpose
Viewportvisibilityresetsarenowthreetoten timesfaster;thiswillbeparticularly noticeableincomplexfileswithnumerous viewports.Abroadrangeoffunctionsinthe Vectorworksapplicationareaffected, includingzooming,panning,switching layers,openingandsavingfiles,editing groups;andupdatingofviewports,plugin objects,andreferencedobjects. Theworksheetdatastructurewasrevisedto allowforfeatureimprovementsinthisand futureversions The3DModelingtoolsethasbeen streamlined,withthefollowingtools removed: SymbolInsertiontool(nowlocatedin Basicpaletteonly) Reshapetool(locatedinBasicpaletteonly) NURBSCircletool NURBSArctool ExtrudedRectangletool ExtrudedPolygontool Cylindertool

Location
Notapplicable

Worksheetdataformat improvements Workspacechanges

Notapplicable

Variouslocations

Toolpalettescocoaconversion

OntheMacintosh,somedisplayissueswith toolpalettesandtearoffpaletteshavebeen fixed Thewww.caddetails.comlibraryhasbeen movedtotheObjectsLandscape&Sitefolder

Notapplicable

Contentfor2012

Notapplicable

New Renderworks Features


Thefollowingtablecontainsalistofnewandimprovedfeaturesforthisrelease,andindicatesthesectionwherethe functionalityisdocumented.

| Preface

Feature
AttributeMappingtool improvements

Purpose
VariouschangestotheAttributeMapping toolmakeiteasiertoworkwith,includingthe following: Thetoolnowworksbetterwithsnapping. whichsolvesproblemswitherratic movementofthetextureframe. Additionally,aplanarfilternowensures thatonlyrelevantsnappointsareshown. Whenyouresizeatextureframe,adotted diagonallineisnowdrawnacrossthe textureimage,tomaketheaspectratio constraintmoreclear.Ifsnappingisinuse, graydottedlinesaredrawnfromtheresize handletopossiblesnappoints. Thecursornowchangeswhenitisover3D axes,toindicatethatyoucanclickonthe axestobringupthe3Dmappingcontrols. NewoptionsontheToolbarallowyouto choosewhethertoscaleandrotatethe texturebythecenterofthetextureframe, orbythehandleoppositetothehandle thatwasclickedon.Previously,scale/rotate bycenterwasactivatedbypressingtheAlt key(Windows)orOptionkey(Macintosh). Autoalignmenthasbeenchangedfroman optionforthePlanemaptypeintoa separatemaptype(AutoAlignPlane). Whenyoutrytousethetoolonaplugin objectthatisnotsupported,analert displays;previously,thetexturecontrols woulddisplaybutnotfunction. Thecylinderandspheremaptypeshave beenimprovedtomakemovementofthe textureframemoreintuitive.

Location
ApplyingandMapping Texturesonpage 635

OpenGLshadow improvements

TheappearanceofshadowsinOpenGL renderinghasbeengreatlyimproved; responsivenesswhenusingtheFlyoverand WalkthroughtoolswithOpenGLshadows hasalsoincreased

OpenGLonpage 684

Learning Vectorworks | Feature


Renderworksstyles

xi

Purpose
Renderingparameters,includingrender settings,lightingoptions,andbackground informationcanbesavedasaRenderworks Styleresource,tobereappliedlaterand sharedbetweenfiles.TheRenderworks productincludesseveralrealisticandartistic preconfiguredstylesforcommonlighting situations. ArtisticRenderworksoptionsnowinclude parameterssuchasedgecolorandthickness, tofurthercustomizetheartisticlook.The artisticparameterscanbesavedaspartofa RenderworksStyleresource. FortheBricksshader,thedimensionsof bricksandmortargapjointsarenowsetby realworlddimensionvalues,whichismuch moreintuitive Internaladjustmentshavebeenmadeto improvetheappearanceandvisualeffectof theMetallicreflectivityshader

Location
RenderworksStyleson page 690

ArtisticRenderworksstyles

ArtisticRenderworksOptions onpage 695

Bricksshaderdimensions

ColorShadersonpage 903

Improvedmetallicshader

Notapplicable

Learning Vectorworks
ThereareanumberofwaystolearnhowtousetheVectorworksprogram,includingtrainingCDs,bothonlinehelp andPDFversionsoftheuserguides,andbothonlineandclassroomtraining.

Users Guides
ThisguideistheVectorworksFundamentalsUsersGuide.Itisacomprehensivereferenceforallusers describingthecoretools,commands,andfeaturesintheVectorworksFundamentalsproduct.Theguidealso describesthepresentationcapabilitiesoftheRenderworksproduct,foruserswhopurchasedit. TheVectorworksDesignSeriesUsersGuidedescribesthefeaturesintheVectorworksArchitect,Landmark, Spotlight,andDesignerproducts.ItisdesignedforuserswhohavepurchasedoneormoreDesignSeries products. Thefollowingtabledescribestheconventionsusedintheguides.Allinstructionsintheguidesarebasedon clickclickdrawing.

Convention
(Macintosh) (Windows)

Meaning
Macintoshspecificinstruction Windowsspecificinstruction IndicatesfunctionalitythatexistsintheVectorworksArchitectandDesignerproductsonly

xii

| Preface
Meaning
IndicatesfunctionalitythatexistsintheVectorworksLandmarkandDesignerproductsonly IndicatesfunctionalitythatexistsintheVectorworksSpotlightandDesignerproductsonly IndicatesfunctionalitythatexistsintheVectorworksArchitect,Landmark,andDesigner productsonly IndicatesfunctionalitythatexistsintheVectorworksArchitect,Spotlight,andDesigner productsonly IndicatesfunctionalitythatexistsinalloftheVectorworksDesignSeriesproductsaswellas Designer IndicatesfunctionalitythatexistsintheRenderworksproductonly

Convention

boldtext blueindentedtext click doubleclick rightclick Keyandmouse combination,asin Shiftclick Keycombination, asinAlt+Shift+D clickclick clickdrag select

Indicatesaspecificbutton,command,class,orexplicitlynameditem Indicatesanote,tip,orwarning Clickthemousebuttonandrelease.TheleftbuttonisalwaysimpliedinWindows. Clicktwotimesquicklyonthemousebuttonandrelease Clickwiththerightmousebuttonandrelease;ontheMacintosh,holddowntheCtrlkeyand clickthemouse Holddownthecommandkey(s)andclick;inthisexample,holddowntheShiftkeyandclick

Holddownthecommandkey(s)andpressthespecifiedletterornumberkey;inthis example,holddownboththeAltandShiftkeys,andpresstheDkey Clickthemousebuttononceandrelease.Movethecursortothedesiredlocationandclick again.Thisisthedefaultdrawingpreferencefortheprogramatinstallation. Clickoncewiththemousebuttonanddonotrelease.Drag(move)thecursortoadesired locationandthenrelease. Clickonanobjectwiththemouse,orclickdragoveranobjectwithmarqueeselection,to highlightit.Theobjectishighlighted,and/orhandlesdisplayontheobjecttoindicatethat itiscurrentlyactive.Thistermalsoreferstoexecutingmenucommands. AmenucommandaccessedbyaCtrlclick(Macintosh)orrightclick(Windows)

Contextmenu

Vectorworks Help System


ThehelpsystemallowsquickaccesstocomprehensivereferenceinformationabouttheVectorworksprogram. Commands,tools,anddialogboxesarelinkedtotheappropriatehelptopic,providinginstantinformation. Thehelpsystemalsoofferslinkstorelatedtopics,allowsfulltextsearches,andcontainsanindexandtableofcontents totopicsacrossallproducts. TheVectorworkshelpsystemincludesthefollowingvolumes:

Technical Support and Training |


xiii

Welcome:Instructionsforusingthehelpsystem VectorworksFundamentals:ContextsensitiveonlineversionoftheVectorworksFundamentalsUsersGuide VectorworksDesignSeries:ContextsensitiveonlineversionoftheVectorworksDesignSeriesUsersGuide VectorScriptLanguageGuide:DescriptionoftheVectorScriptlanguage,whichcanbeusedtoautomateroutine tasks PDFFiles:ProvideslinkstocompleteuserguidePDFs,theVectorScriptLanguageGuide,andotherhelpfullinks

Toaccessthehelpsystem,selectHelp>VectorworksHelpfromwithintheprogram.InthehelpsystemTableof Contents,opentheWelcomebookforcompleteinstructionsonhowtousethesystem.

Technical Support and Training


Thereareavarietyoftechnicalsupportandtrainingoptionsavailabletoyoutoensureyoursuccesswiththe Vectorworksproductandtosupportyourbusinessneeds.

Technical Support
Technicalsupportisavailableforregisteredusersinseveralways.Internationalusersshouldcontacttheirlocal resellerfordetailsconcerningtechnicalsupport;forresellerinformation,seewww.vectorworks.net/international UnitedStatesuserscancontactTechnicalSupportusingthefollowingmethods: Call443.542.0411 Sendanemailtotech@vectorworks.net Visitthetechnicalsupportknowledgebaseatkbase.vectorworks.net WhenyoucontactTechnicalSupport,provideabriefdescriptionoftheproblemthatincludesspecificdetailsabout whatactionsweretakenpriortotheproblemsoccurrence.Themoreinformationyoucangiveyoursupportspecialist, theeasieritwillbetosolveyourproblemquickly. WhenyoucontactTechnicalSupportbyphone,pleasehaveaccesstoyourcomputerandbereadytotellthespecialist: Vectorworkssoftwareserialnumber Vectorworkssoftwareversionnumber Operatingsystem Typeofcomputerbeingused AmountofRAMinstalledinthecomputer Listofanyrecentchangestothecomputerssetup(suchasnewfonts,software,orhardware)

Troubleshooting
TroubleshootingaproblempriortocallingTechnicalSupportwillalsoaidinaspeedyresolution.Basic troubleshootingtipsinclude: Testtoseeiftheproblemoccursinanew,blankfile Testtoseeiftheproblemoccurssystemwide(especiallyprintandfontproblems) Copyandpastepartofthedocumenttoanewfiletoseeiftheproblempersists RunthecomputerinSafeMode(Windows)toseeifthereisasystemconflict Checkthecommunitymessageboardtoseeiftheproblemhasalreadybeenreportedorresolved techboard.vectorworks.net

Training
Fordetailsabouttrainingoptions,visitwww.vectorworks.net/training Tutorialmanuals

xiv

| Preface

Oneononeonlinetraining Customizedonsitetraining Handsonclassroomtraining Tocontactatrainingspecialist,call1.877.202.8871(intheUnitedStates)orsendanemailtotraining@vectorworks.net

Other Resources
ThefollowingadditionalresourcesareavailabletoNemetschekVectorworksusers: DocumentationupdatesthroughtheonlinehelpAutoUpdateContentorCheckforUpdatesfeatures Vectorworkscommunityboardtechboard.vectorworks.net VectorworksYouTubechannelwww.youtube.com/vectorworks Independentlocalusergroupswww.vectorworks.net/community/usergroups.php PlanetVectorworksglobalcommunityauthorednewsletterplanet.vectorworks.net TheeDispatchNemetschekVectorworksauthorednewsletter www.vectorworks.net/community/edisp_subscribe.php Varioussocialmediasites,suchasFacebook,Twitter,Delicious,LinkedIn,andFlickr LISTSERVuserlistswww.nemetschek.net/community/mailinglists.php

Vectorworks Service Select


VectorworksServiceSelectisasoftwareserviceagreementthatallowssubscriberstopurchaseVectorworkssoftware atjustafractionofthecostofanewlicense.Inadditiontoprovidingthemostcosteffectivewayofowning Vectorworkssoftware,VectorworksServiceSelectprovidesbenefitssuchasadditionalbrandnameandgeneric librariesavailableonlytosubscribers,learningresources,preferredsupportstatus,andpredictabilityforyourbudget. WhenyouareinanactiveVectorworksServiceSelectagreement,youllreceivenewupgradestoyourVectorworks softwareandincrementalproductenhancements.Youllalsobethefirsttoknowofnewreleasesandalwayshave accesstothelatestandgreatestinVectorworksproducts.Arangeofsupportandtrainingresourcesareavailable, includingphonesupportandvideolibrarieswithtechtipsandhowtotutorials.TolearnmoreaboutVectorworks ServiceSelect,visithttp://serviceselect.vectorworks.net/learnmore.

Introduction
Understanding Vectorworks

ThissectiondescribesthecoreconceptsoftheVectorworksprogram;eachconceptisdescribedbrieflyinthis overview.Theactualimplementationoftheseconceptsaredescribedthoroughlyintheirrelevantsections.Where possible,therelevantsectionsarereferenced.

Intuitive Design and Drafting Package


TheVectorworksprogramisanessentialgraphicdesigntoolforanyonewhowishestouseCADsoftware immediately.Theprogramemphasizesrapid,accuratedrawingandeasyobjectselection.Thiseaseofuseminimizes thelearningcurve,sothatideascanbeconvertedintodrawingsquickly.

Modeling Environment
TheParasolidmodelingkernel(aSiemensPLMproduct)wasintegratedintotheprogramstartingwithversion2009. Thiskernelprovidesthegeometricfoundationforsophisticatedmodelingoperations.TheParasolidkernelprovides robustness,consistency,andhighperformanceinmodelingaswellasdraftingoperations. InmostCADprograms,itispossibletocreateeithera2Dora3Ddrawing.TheVectorworksprogramallowsyouto doboth,withdrafting,modeling,andeditingoccurringinanyview.

Symbols
Hybridsymbolsdisplaya2Dor3Drepresentationdependingontheview.Thesoftwareincludessymbollibraries, whichcontainanumberofpreconfiguredhybridsymbols;alternatively,createyourownsymbols. Agoodexampleofahybridobjectisadoor.ItdisplaysasalinedrawinginTop/Planviewandasafullyformeddoor ina3Dview.

Top/Plan View

3D View

Oneadvantageofworkingwithsymbolsisthat3Dmodelsareautomaticallycreatedfrom2Ddrawings.Formore informationonsymbols,seeUnderstandingSymbolsonpage 173.

| Chapter 1: Introduction

SmartCursor
Datum

Intersection

DesignwithprecisionusingtheSmartCursor.Byprovidingaseriesofcues(includingtextdisplayedatthecursors currentlocation)thatupdatewitheverymoveofthemouse,thedrawingoptionsareclear.UsetheSmartCursorto createsnapstospecificpointsrelativetootherobjectsortotemporarilysetaneworigin(datum).Drawexact perpendicularlines,angles,andmore.TheSmartCursorisdescribedindetailinDrawingwithSnappingon page 133.

Image Preview
Animagepreviewisusedforavarietyoffunctions,includingdrawingobjects,placingobjects,andtheSmartCursor. Theimagepreviewistheimagedisplayedastheobjectisdrawn,afteratoolhasbeenselectedoranoperationhas beeninvoked,butbeforetheobjectisphysicallyplacedinthedrawing.Theimagepreviewmayexactlyresemblethe objecttobeplaced,oritmaybearepresentationofthatobject,suchasitsboundingbox.Duringthedrawingprocess, theimagepreviewcontainsafeedbacksegment,whichgathersinformationfordisplayintheDatabar.Theprogram alsousesthissegmenttoproperlyinvokeSmartCursorcues.

Layers, Classes, and Views


Layersandclassesprovidetheframeworkfordrawings.Viewportsandviewsdisplayandpresentdrawings.These featuresworktogethertoprovideflexibleorganizationalandviewingcapabilities. Designlayers(wheredrawingsarecreated)canhaveheight.Ifawalliseightfeethigh,thedesignlayercanbeas well.Thisallowsforatrue3Drepresentationofamodel.Showandhidedesignlayersasneeded,todisplaycertain aspectsofadesign.Objectsplacedtogetherindesignlayersarerelatedinspace.Designlayershelpautomatesome aspectsofwallcreationaswellasprovideotheradvantages.Eachdesignlayercanhaveadifferentscale.Special sheetlayersareusedforcreatingviewports;thesearemultiplelinkedviewsofadrawing,completewith annotation,andreadyforthepresentationofafinaldesigntoaclient.IntheVectorworksDesignSeriesproducts, viewportsalsocanbecreatedondesignlayers.Adesignlayerviewportcanshowoneormoredesignlayersfromits ownfile,orfromanexternalfile. Classesassociateobjectsacrosslayers;theyclassifyobjectsandcanhavespecificdisplayattributes,suchascolor. Classesareusedtospeedthedrawingprocess,sinceattributescanbespecifiedatobjectcreation,andtocontrolthe visibilityoftheserelatedgroups.Eachobjectcanonlybeassignedoneclass,buteachobjectcanbecomposedofother nestedobjects,whichcaneachbeassignedadifferentclass. Aparticularviewofthedrawing,suchasonewhichshowsonlycertainlayersandclasses,canbesaved.Takea snapshotofacombinationoflayersandclassesandthenprinttheview.Layers,classes,andviewsaredescribedin detailinDrawingStructureonpage 89.

Understanding Vectorworks |

Viewports
Whenadesigniscomplete,ittypicallyneedstobepresentedtoaclientwithviewsfromseveraldifferentdirections, completewithdetails,annotations,dimensions,andtitleblocks.ToaccomplishthisintheVectorworksprogram, createviewportobjects,whichcanshowotherdesignlayersinthisfile,orevendesignlayersinotherfiles. Viewportscandisplayentireaswellascroppedviewsofadrawing,withspecifiedlayerandclassvisibilitysettings, projection,rendermode,andorientationparameters.Ifthedrawingchanges,theviewportscanbeeasilyupdatedto reflectthechanges. InboththeVectorworksFundamentalsandtheVectorworksDesignSeriesproducts,youcancreateoneormore viewportsonasheetlayer,andeachviewportcanshowoneormoredesignlayersfromthecurrentfile.Additionally, theVectorworksDesignSeriesproductsallowyoutocreateoneormoreviewportsonadesignlayer,andthedesign layersshowncanbeeitherfromthecurrentfile,orreferencedfromanotherfile. ViewportsaredescribedinPresentingDrawingswithSheetLayerViewportsonpage 762inthisguide,andin PresentingDrawingswithDesignLayerViewportsonpage 689intheVectorworksDesignSeriesUsersGuide.

Planes and 3D Space


Eachdrawinglayerhasanassociatedlayerplane.Thisactivelayerplaneispermanentlyplacedandcanbeusedasa constantreferencepointfordrawingin3Dspace.Asecondplanecanbeplacedataspecificangleorrotationtocreate a3Dobjectrelativetothatplane.Thismodifiableplaneiscalledaworkingplane.Workingplanesaredescribedin detailinUsingWorkingPlanesonpage 593.

VectorScript
TheVectorworksprogramhasacomprehensivescriptcapabilitycalledVectorScript.Useexistingscriptsorcreateyour own.Customizetheworkingenvironmentwithscripts,orcreatecustomizedplugintools,commands,andobjects thatfityourneeds.Youcansavevaluabletimeandeffortbycreatingreusablefunctionsfordrawingswiththe VectorScriptscriptinglanguage.SeeUsingScriptsonpage 871fordetails. SeetheVectorScriptLanguageGuideforanintroductiontotheVectorScriptlanguage.TheVectorScriptLanguage Guideisavailableaspartofthehelpsystem,andalsoasaPDFfileinthehelpsystem.TheVectorScriptFunction Referenceisacomprehensivecommandreferenceavailableonline.Itislocatedin:VWHelp/VectorScriptReference/ VSFunctionReference.html.AnothersourceofdeveloperorienteddocumentationrelatedtotheSDKandVectorScript islocatedathttp://developer.vectorworks.net

Worksheets
TheVectorworksprogramhascomprehensiveworksheetanddatabasefunctionality.Objectattributesandrecordscan belistedinaworksheet,andspreadsheetcalculationscanbeperformedonthisdata.Forexample,listalltheroomsin

| Chapter 1: Introduction

adrawing,andautomaticallycalculatethenumberofbedrooms.Createaworksheetlistingtheitemsrequiredto furnishtheroomsandthecost.WorksheetsaredescribedinCreatingWorksheetsonpage 833.

The Fundamentals Workspace


WhentheVectorworksFundamentalsprogramisstarted,themainwindowopenswithanew,blankfile;the Fundamentalsworkspaceisselected,andcontainsmenus,palettes,andtoolsetsinadefaultlayout.Duringawork session,palettesmaybeopened,closed,andmovedaroundasnecessary.Whentheapplicationisclosed,thelast workspacesettingsarepreservedandrestoredforthenextsession. Customworkspacescanbecreated,asdescribedinCreatingorEditingaWorkspaceonpage 879.Toswitchto anotherworkspace,selectTools>Workspaces,andthenselecttheworkspacefromthelistofthoseavailable.
Quick Preferences menu View bar menu Object Info palette - the Render tab displays if Renderworks is installed, or if the Design Series uses sketch rendering Data Bar and Edit Group Options list Zoom Line Thickness preference shortcut

Vectorworks version Menu bar Basic palette

File name

Tool bar

View bar

Rulers

Attributes palette

Vertical scroll bar Snapping palette Resource Browser

Floating Data bar

Tool Sets palette Message bar menu Message bar Horizontal scroll bar Print area border

Vectorworks Application Window on Windows

The Fundamentals Workspace |

Vectorworks Application Window on Macintosh

Windows,palettes,toolsets,anddialogboxesthatcontainasizinghandleintheirbottomrightcornercanberesized; clickdragthesizinghandletothedesiredlocation. ThefollowingtabledescribessomeoftheworkspacefeaturescommontoallVectorworksproducts.

Component
Menubar Titlebar Databar

Description
ContainspulldownmenusthataccessVectorworkscommands Allwindows,palettes,toolsets,anddialogboxeshaveatitlebar;clickanddraganytitlebar tomovetheitemtothedesiredlocation.SeePaletteLayoutOptionsonpage 10. Dependingonthetoolandontheactionbeingperformed,theDatabardisplaysinformation suchascoordinatedata,length,andangle.UsetheDataBarandEditGroupOptionslisttoset theDatabareithertofloatwiththecursor,ortobestationaryontheDatabar.SeeUsing theDataBaronpage 209formoreinformation.Theseoptionscanalsobesetfromthe selectionslistedunderWindows>DataBarOptions.

| Chapter 1: Introduction
Description
Displaysthevariousmodesoftheactivetool;clickamodetoselectit.Thebaralsodisplays modeinformationandaccessesthetoolpreferences,ifany.TheToolbarisdividedinto sectionsgroupedbymodefunction.Tomoveeasilythroughthemodesectionsfromthe keyboard,presstheU,I,O,P,[ (leftbracket),and ](rightbracket)keys.Eachkeycorresponds toaconsecutiveToolbarsection(seetheModeModifiershortcutsinModifyingSnapping andModeShortcutsonpage 887). Containsbuttonsandpulldownmenusthatcontroltheviewinvariousways(seeTheView Baronpage 7) Displaystoolexplanations,undomessages,minoralerts,andaprogressbar(when applicable).ToalsodisplaycursorlocationfieldsontheMessagebar,clickthetriangleatthe farrightofthebar;selecttheoptiontodisplayallpositionalfields,onlycursorbasedlocation fields,ornocursorlocationfields. ThisistheopenportioninthemiddleoftheVectorworksapplicationwindowwhere drawingsarecreated;itincludesboththeprintareaandthespacethatsurroundsit Withinthedrawingarea,agrayborderdefinestheprintarea,ifshown.Onlytheobjectsthat areincludedwithintheprintareaareprinted.Theprintareaisdividedintopages;eachpage equalsaphysicalsheetofpapertobeprinted.Aprintmarginisbuiltinforeachpage(see ThePrintAreaonpage 81). Basedonthecurrentmeasurementsystem,rulersmakeiteasiertopreciselycreateandplace objectswithinthedrawing. The0,0pointontherulersrepresentstheoriginoftheworkingplaneaxes.TheSetOrigin commandmovestheworkingplaneorigintothelayerplaneorigin(seeSetOriginon page 78). TherulerscanbehiddenwithanoptionintheVectorworkspreferences(seeSetting VectorworksPreferencesonpage 17).

Component
Toolbar

Viewbar Messagebar

Drawingarea Printarea

Rulers

Grids

Basedonthecurrentmeasurementsystem,twogridsystemsmakeiteasiertopreciselycreate andplaceobjectswithinthefile.Tohidethereferencegrid,deselectShowGridLines(see SnapandReferenceGridsonpage 77).

Fundamentals and Design Series Workspaces


WhenVectorworksDesignSeriesproductsareinstalled,additionalworkspacesareavailableinadditiontothe Fundamentalsworkspace. TheFundamentalsworkspacecommandsandtoolsalsoappearinDesignSeriesworkspaces.Insomecases,command ortoolfunctionalityisextendedintheVectorworksDesignSeriesproducts,andthelocationintheworkspacemaybe different.IfacommandortoolisdescribedintheVectorworksFundamentalsportionofthedocumentation,the descriptionincludesastatementaboutwhichVectorworksDesignSeriesproductisrequired;whereapplicable,a crossreferencelinkreferstoadditionalinformationintheVectorworksDesignSeriesportionofthedocumentation. Examplesincludestraightandroundwalls,windows,doors,columns,sheetborders,callouts,objectsfrompolyline, androofobjectcreation. SeeCreatingDesignSeriesSlabsandWallsonpage 91andCreatingtheBuildingShellonpage 131inthe VectorworksDesignSeriesUsersGuideforalistofcommandsthatappearindifferentlocationsintheFundamentals andArchitect,Landmark,orSpotlightworkspaces.

The View Bar |

The View Bar


TheViewbarislocatedalongthetopoftheapplicationwindow.Itprovidesquickaccesstovariousoptionsthataffect thedrawingview.SomeViewbaritemshaveequivalentmenucommands.
Next View Shortcut to either the Design Layers tab or the Sheet Layers tab of the Organization dialog box Shortcut to the Layer Scale dialog box

Previous View

Active Class/ Classes list

Active Layer/ Layers list

Look At Working Plane Active Planes list

Saved Views menu Current Layer Scale (display only)

Shortcut to the Classes tab of the Organization dialog box

Fit to Page Area Fit to Objects

Working Plane mode Active Layer Plane mode

Current Render Mode/ Render Modes list/ Available render options

Zoom In/Out Current Zoom

Current View/ Standard Views list Rotated View options (Vectorworks Design Series required)

Unified View (Vectorworks Design Series required) View bar menu

Component
PreviousView NextView Classestabshortcut ActiveClass/Classes list

Description
Displaysthepreviousviewthatwascreatedbyapan,zoom,orscrollinthedrawingarea; Vectorworkskeepstrackofupto50views Displaysthenextview;Vectorworkskeepstrackofupto50views OpenstheClassestaboftheOrganizationdialogbox Displaystheactiveclass,andactivatesaclassthatisselectedfromthelist;anicontothe leftofeachnameindicatesthecurrentvisibilitysettingoftheclass(seeSetting Visibilitiesonpage 118formoreinformation).Atrianglenexttotheclassnameindicates thattheclasshassubgroupsthatcanbeselectedindividually(forexample,awallclass withexteriorandinteriorsubgroups). DependingonwhetheraDesignLayeroraSheetLayerisactive,openseithertheDesign LayerstabortheSheetLayerstaboftheOrganizationdialogbox

DesignLayerstab/ SheetLayerstab shortcut

| Chapter 1: Introduction
Description
Displaystheactivelayer,andactivatesadesignlayerorsheetlayerthatisselectedfrom thelist.Theareatotheleftofeachnameindicatestheviewandvisibilityofthelayer. Dependingontheview,anyofthefollowingiconscandisplayfordesignlayers;sheet layersarealwaysinTop/Planview:

Component
ActiveLayer/Layers list

Top/Plan view

Any standard view other than Top/Plan

Plan Rotation active (Design Series required)

Thevisibilityofthelayerisindicatedasfollows: Blackiconthelayerisvisible Grayiconthelayerisgrayed Noiconthelayerisinvisible ActivePlaneslist Displaystheactiveplane.Dependingonthecurrenttool,view,andpresenceofnamed workingplanes,alsoactivatesaplanethatisselectedfromthelist.SeeTheActivePlanes Listonpage 595. Changestheviewtobeperpendiculartotheworkingplane;inotherwords,rotatestheX, YaxestothescreenXandscreenYposition Activatesasavedviewthatisselectedfromthelist.SelectEditViewtoopentheSaved ViewstaboftheOrganizationdialogbox,orselectSaveViewtoopentheSaveView dialogbox;seeCreatingorEditingSavedViewsUsingtheSavedViewsMenuon page 117. OpenstheLayerScaledialogbox;thescaleoftheactivedesignlayerdisplaystotheright. SeeChangingtheScaleoftheDrawingortheActiveDesignLayeronpage 72. Displaysthewholedrawing(allpages)inthedrawingwindow;seeFittoPageAreaon page 592 Zoomsinoroutsothatalloftheobjectsinadrawingarevisible.Ifanobjectorobjectsare currentlyselected,thezoomisrelativetothoseobject(s);seeFittoObjectsonpage 591. Clicktodoublethemagnificationofthedrawing;toreducethemagnificationofthe drawingbyonehalf,useAltclick(Windows)orOptionclick(Macintosh).Thezoom centersonanyobjectsthatareselected;ifnothingisselected,thezoomcentersonthelast emptyspotthatwasclicked.SeeZoomingfromtheViewBaronpage 55. Zoomsinoroutbythezoomfactorthatisselectedorentered;thisoptionisavailable whentheZoomLongoptionisselectedontheViewbarmenu Displaysglobalcoordinateviews(suchasToporFront)basedonX,Y,andZaxes Displaysworkingplanecoordinateviews(suchasToporFront)basedonX,Y,andZaxes Displaysthecurrentview,andactivatesastandardview(suchasTop)thatisselected fromthelist;seeUsingStandardViewsonpage 575.Iftheviewisnotstandard(for example,iftheFlyovertoolwasused),CustomViewdisplays.

LookAtWorking Plane SavedViewsmenu

LayerScaleshortcut FittoPageArea FittoObjects ZoomIn/Out

CurrentZoom WorkingPlanemode ActiveLayerPlane mode CurrentView/ StandardViewslist

Palettes and Tool Sets | Component


RotatedView (VectorworksDesign Seriesrequired) UnifiedView CurrentRenderMode Options CurrentRenderMode/ RenderModeslist

Description
Rotatestheplanviewbytheanglespecified;seeRotatingthePlanonpage 686inthe VectorworksDesignSeriesUsersGuide TogglesUnifiedViewmode;seeUnifiedLayerViewonpage 730intheVectorworks DesignSeriesUsersGuide Ifthecurrentrendermodehasoptions,displaystheappropriateoptionsdialogbox;this optionisavailablewhentheRenderModeLongoptionisselectedontheViewbarmenu Displaysthecurrentrendermode,andactivatesarendermodeselectedfromthelist; selectOptionsforOtherRenderModestoaccesstheoptionsforaparticularmode.See RenderingwithVectorworksonpage 681andRenderworksRenderingModeson page 689. SelectstheoptionstodisplayontheViewbar

Viewbarmenu

Palettes and Tool Sets


TheFundamentalsworkspacecontainsvariouspalettesforcreatingandeditingobjects.BasicandToolSetsaretool palettes,whichhavespecialfunctionality,asdescribedinToolPaletteFeaturesonpage 11.Ifakeyboardshortcutis currentlyassignedtoamenucommandortool,theshortcutdisplayswhenthemousehoversoverthecommandor tool;tosetupormodifykeyboardshortcuts,seeModifyingMenusandCommandsonpage 881. Dependingontheinitialsettings,somepalettesmaybehiddenwhentheprogramislaunched.

Palette / Tool Set


Snapping Attributes ObjectInfo WorkingPlanes ResourceBrowser

Purpose
ContainsSmartCursorsnappingcontrolsthatcanbetoggledonoroff;seeSetting SnappingParametersonpage 133 Containsaselectionofcolors,fills,pens,andotherobjectattributes;seeTheAttributes Paletteonpage 525 Listscontextsensitiveobjectinformationforviewingandediting;seeEditingObject Informationonpage 257 Containscontrolsforaddingandmodifyingworkingplanes;seeTheWorkingPlanes Paletteonpage 602 Accessestheresourcesavailableforuseindrawings,includinggradientfills,hatch patterns,imagefills,recordformats,scriptsandscriptpalettes,symbolsandsymbol folders,worksheets,textures,backgrounds,andmore.SeeUsingtheResource Browseronpage 159. Accessesalllightsandcamerasinthefile;seeManagingLightsandCameraswiththe VisualizationPaletteonpage 705 Containsasinglesetofbasicobjectcreationandeditingtools;thepalettecanbe customizedthroughtheWorkspaceEditor IntheFundamentalsworkspace,thepaletteincludesthefollowingtoolsets,whose toolsaregroupedbysimilarfunctionality;thepaletteanditstoolsetscanbe customizedthroughtheWorkspaceEditor

Visualization (Renderworksrequired) Basic ToolSets

10

| Chapter 1: Introduction
Purpose
Containstoolsforcreatingandediting3Dobjects,includingsolidsandNURBS Containstoolsforchangingthedrawingviewindifferentways,includingthe WalkthroughandLighttools Containstoolsforaddingdimensionandlabelobjects Containsbasicwallcreationtools Containstoolsforaddingarchitecturaldetailobjects,suchastubing ContainspaletteswithVectorScriptresources

Palette / Tool Set


3DModeling Visualization Dims/Notes Walls Detailing ScriptPalettes

Palette Layout Options


Thedefaultpalettelayoutcanbecustomized.UsetheWindow>Palettesmenutodisplayorhidepalettes. Alternatively,rightclick(Windows)orCtrlclick(Macintosh)onthedrawingarea,andselectPalettesfromthe documentcontextmenu. Clickonthetitlebarofanydisplayedpaletteanddragittothedesiredlocation.Mostpalettescanberesizedbythe standardWindowsorMacintoshresizemethod.Palettesize,position,andvisibilityaresaveduponexitingthe program. Palettepositionsandavarietyofsettingscanbeuserspecified,asdescribedinModifyingPalettePositionsand Settingsonpage 888.SavepalettepositionsandsettingsbyselectingWindow>Palettes>SavePalettePositions.To revertthepalettepositionandsettingsbacktothesettingsestablishedwhenthecustomworkspacewascreated(inthe UserDataandPreferencesfolder),clickResetSavedSettingsfromtheSessiontabofVectorworkspreferences(see SessionPreferencesonpage 21).

Specifying Macintosh Palette Margins


OntheMacintosh,thepalettescanbeplacedinamarginoneithersideofthedrawingarea.Whenthepalettemargins areinuse,thedrawingareacannotexpandpastafixedsize,whichallowsthepalettestoremainoutoftheway.The palettemarginareacanbeturnedonandoffintheVectorworkspreferencesasdescribedinSettingVectorworks Preferencesonpage 17.

Minimizing Palettes
Toincreasetheavailabledrawingarea,palettescanbeminimizedwhilenotinuse,andthenmaximizedwhenneeded. OnMacintosh,clickthepalettesyellowtitlebarbuttonordoubleclickthepalettestitlebartominimizethepalette. Repeattheprocesstomaximizethepalette. OnWindows,clickthepalettespiniconinthetitlebartotogglebetweenminimized(horizontalpinicon)and maximized(verticalpinicon)display.Movethecursoroveraminimizedtitlebartotemporarilymaximizethepalette; movethecursoroffthepalettetominimizeitagain.

Palette Layout Options |

11

Minimized palette

Maximized palette

Docking Windows Palettes


InWindows,mostpalettescanbedockedtoanyofthefourdrawingwindowedges,orsnappedtootherdocked palettes.TheObjectInfo,ResourceBrowser,Attributespalette,andWorkingPlanespalettescanonlybedockedtothe leftandrightwindowedges. TheabilitytodockpalettesisenabledbydefaultintheSessiontaboftheVectorworksPreferencesdialogbox.Deselect thisoptiontodisabledocking.SeeSettingVectorworksPreferencesonpage 17formoreinformation. Todockorundockapalettebydoubleclicking: 1. Doubleclickapalettestitlebar. Ifthepalettewasundocked,doubleclickingdocksitinitspreviouslocation.Ifthepalettewasdocked, doubleclickingundocksitandmovesittoitspreviouslocationinthedrawingarea. 2. Totogglethedocked/undockedstatus,doubleclickthepalettestitlebaragain,asnecessary. Todockapalettebydraggingit: 1. Dragthetitlebarofthedesiredpalettetowardtheedgeofthewindow. Thepalettesviewswitchestoagrayoutline.Whenthepaletteisinrangeofawindowedge,theoutlinechanges shapetorepresentthenewdockedshape. 2. Movethepalettesoutlinetotheedgeofthedockinglocationandrelease.Currentlydockedpalettesadjusttheir locationalongtheedgetoaccommodatethenewpalette. Topreventapalettefromdocking,holddowntheCtrlkeywhiledraggingthepalettenearanedge. Toundockapalettebydraggingit: 1. Dragthetitlebarofthedesiredpaletteawayfromtheedge. Thepalettesviewswitchestoagrayoutline.Whenthepaletteisoutofwindowedgerange,theoutlinechanges shapetorepresentthenewundockedshape. 2. Dragthepalettetothedesiredlocationwithinthedrawingarea.

Tool Palette Features


Boththestandardtoolpalettes(BasicandToolSets)andanycustomtoolpaletteshavespecialfeaturesthatother palettesdonot.ToolpalettesandtheirtoolsetscanbecreatedandcustomizedusingtheWorkspaceEditor(see CreatingorEditingaWorkspaceonpage 879).

12

| Chapter 1: Introduction

Pop-out Tools
Ontoolpalettes,anarrowontherightsideofatooliconorlabelindicatesadditional,relatedpopouttools.Clickand holddownthemousebuttontoopenthemenuofpopouttools.

Utility Menus
Eachtoolpalettehasabuttonatthebottomthatopensautilitymenu,whichcontrolsthepaletteandtooldisplay.

Menu / Command
ViewToolsAs Icons IconsandText Text

Action
Displayonlyaniconforeachtool Displaybothaniconandatextlabelforeachtool Displayonlyatextlabelforeachtool

Palette Layout Options | Menu / Command


SortToolsBy ManualPlacement AscendingAlphabetical DescendingAlphabetical ViewToolSetsAs Icons IconsandText Text SortToolSetsBy ManualPlacement AscendingAlphabetical DescendingAlphabetical PlaceToolSetsAt TopofPalette BottomofPalette Customize DisplaytoolsintheorderappearingintheWorkspaceEditor Displaytoolsinascendingalphabeticalorderaccordingtotextlabels Displaytoolsindescendingalphabeticalorderaccordingtotextlabels (Theseoptionsareavailableonlyfortoolpaletteswithmultipletoolsets) Displayonlyaniconforeachtoolsetinthepalette Displaybothaniconandatextlabelforeachtoolsetinthepalette Displayonlyatextlabelforeachtoolsetinthepalette (Theseoptionsareavailableonlyfortoolpaletteswithmultipletoolsets) DisplaytoolsetsintheorderappearingintheWorkspaceEditor Displaytoolsetsinascendingalphabeticalorderaccordingtotextlabels Displaytoolsetsindescendingalphabeticalorderaccordingtotextlabels (Theseoptionsareavailableonlyfortoolpaletteswithmultipletoolsets) Displaytoolsetselectionbuttonsatthetopofthetoolpalette Displaytoolsetselectionbuttonsatthebottomofthetoolpalette OpenstheWorkspaceEditorOptionsdialogbox(seeCreatingorEditinga Workspaceonpage 879fordetails)

13

Action

Tool Set Selection Buttons and Tear-off Palettes


Ifatoolpalettehasmultipletoolsets(asdoestheToolSetspalette),selectionbuttonsforeachtoolsetdisplayonthe palette.Todisplayatoolsetstools,clicktheappropriatebutton.Thebuttonishighlightedtoindicatewhichtoolsetis active. Toseemultipletoolsetsatonce,dragatoolsetsselectionbuttonoffthemainpalette.Thiscreatesaseparate, temporarypaletteforthetoolset,withaperforatedtopedge.Likeotherpalettes,thesetearoffpalettescanbe docked,resized,andminimized.Tocloseatearoffpalette,clickitsclosebutton.OnWindows,adockedtearoff palettedoesnothaveaperforatededge;instead,ithasaspecialclosebuttonintheshapeofacurvedarrow.

Click the Visualization tool set button to display its tools

Drag the Walls tool set button off the Tool Sets palette to create a Walls tear-off palette

14

| Chapter 1: Introduction

List Box Functionality


Dialogboxesthatcontainlonglistsofinformation(suchastheOrganizationdialogbox)mayhavesomeorallofthe followingfunctionality.

Task
Changethelistssortkey Changeacolumnssortorder Resizeacolumn Selectagroupofitems Selectmultipleitems individually Selectanitemonthelist Editanitemonthelist Openacontextmenuforan itemonthelist ForlistswithaVisibility column,setthesamevisibility forallitemsonthelist

Action
Clicktheheadingofthecolumntosortby;anarrowappearsontherightsideof thecolumnheadingtoindicatethatitisthesortkey Clickthecolumnheading;thesortarrowintheheadingindicateswhetherthe currentsortisascendingordescending Clicktheverticallineontherightsideofacolumnsheadinganddragitleftor right Clickthefirstitem,andthenShiftclickthelastiteminthegroup Clickthefirstitem,andthenCommandclick(Macintosh)orCtrlclick(Windows) eachadditionalitem Typethefirstletter(s)ofthedesireditemsname Doubleclickthedesireditem Ctrlclick(Macintosh)orrightclick(Windows)thedesireditem Optionclick(Macintosh)orAltclick(Windows)thedesiredsetting

Click the heading of a column without the sort arrow to sort the list by that column

The arrow indicates the current sort key and sort order; click the column heading to reverse the sort order

Drag the vertical line on the right side of a column heading to adjust the column size

Option-click (Macintosh) or Alt-click (Windows) one of the Visibility columns to set that visibility for all items on the list

Type the first letter of an items name to select it

Additional Key Functionality |

15

Additional Key Functionality


IntheVectorworksprogram,severalkeyshaveadditionalfunctionalitybeyondthestandardconventions:

Key
Esc

Usage
Cancelsthecurrentoperation.Whenadialogboxisopen,thisistheequivalentof pressingtheCancelbutton.IntheDatabarorObjectInfopalette,cancelstheentryina fieldandreturnsthefocustothedrawingarea.Cancelsrendering.Clearssmartpoints. Deselectstheworkingplane. Whenadialogboxisopen,thisistheequivalenttopressingtheDoneorOKbutton.In afieldintheDatabarorObjectInfopalette,thisacceptstheinformationandreturnsthe focustothedrawingarea. IntheObjectInfopalette,pressShift+Return(Macintosh)orShift+Enter(Windows)to savetheentryandkeepthefocusinthesamefield,sothatyoucanenteradifferent valueifnecessary.

Return(Macintosh)/ Enter(Windows)

Tab Delete(Macintosh)/ Backspace(Windows) Ctrl(Windows) SpaceBar

MovesthecursorfromonefieldtothenextintheDatabar,ObjectInfopalette,and dialogboxes Removesthelastsegmentoforcancelsthecreationofanobjectbeingdrawn Preventspalettesfromdockingwhentheyaremovednearanedge EngagesthePause/Boomerangmode.HoldingdowntheSpaceBartemporarilypauses thecurrenttool.Asecondtoolcanthenbeselectedandused.ReleasetheSpaceBarto returntotheprevioustool. Brieflyexpandsthecurrentlyselectedscreentip

Command(Macintosh)/ Shift(Windows)

Using Arithmetic Expressions


Arithmeticexpressionscanbeenteredintomostoftheeditfields,includingtheObjectInfopalettesShapetabandthe Databar.Forthisreason,thedash()cannotbeusedasaseparatorbetweenfeetandinches. Parenthesescanbeusedtooverridethedefaultoperatorprecedence.Forexample: 1+2*3=7(withoutparentheses) (1+2)*3=9(withparentheses) Valuescanbeenteredinanyunit;theprogramconvertsitintothecurrentunit.Forexample,ifthecurrentunitis Inchesandanentryof4+3cmismadeintotheObjectInfopaletteXfield,theprogramconvertstheunits automatically.Theresult,5.1811,isdisplayed.

Screen Tips
Screentipsareavailablethroughouttheprogramtoidentifyitemssuchastool,mode,andsnappingnames.Toviewa screentip,holdthecursorbrieflyovertheiteminquestion.

16

| Chapter 1: Introduction

Certainitemshavescreentipsthatcanbecollapsed(default)andexpanded.Whencollapsed,onlythenameofthe itemdisplays.Whenexpanded,additionalhelpinformationisdisplayedbelowthename.Toexpandscreentips,hold theCommandkey(Macintosh)orShiftkey(Windows)whilethescreentipisvisible. OnWindows,screentipscanalsobecollapsedorexpandedbyclickingonthedisclosurearrow.Whenascreentipis expanded,itremainsexpandeduntilitismanuallycollapsedagain.Screentipsforallotheritemsareexpandeduntila tipiscollapsedagain.


Disclosure arrow

Collapsed screen tip

Expanded screen tip

Object Editing Mode


Varioustypesofcomplexobjectsareeditedwithinaspecialeditingmodeinwhichyoueditthecomponentsthatmake uptheobject.Whenthiseditingmodeisactivated,anEditwindowwithacoloredborderdisplaysinthedrawing area.Oncetheeditsarecomplete,exittheobjecttoreturntotheregulardrawingmode. Dependingonthetypeofobjectbeingedited,theEditwindowcanshowtheeditedobjectincontextwiththeother objectsinthedrawing. TheEditwindowshowsonlytheobjectbeingeditedforthefollowingtypesofobjects:extrudes,multiple extrudes,taperedextrudes,sweeps,meshes,floors,rooffaces,andsymboldefinitionseditedfromtheResource Browserorfromasheetlayer. TheEditwindowcanshowotherobjectsfromthedrawingwhilethefollowingtypesofobjectsarebeingedited: groups,solids,viewports,andsymboldefinitionsthatareeditedbyclickingasymbolinstanceinadesignlayer. Toenablethisfeature,selecttheoptiontoShowotherobjectswhileineditingmodesintheDisplaytabofthe Vectorworkspreferences(seeDisplayPreferencesonpage 19).Toshowtheotherobjectsinalessobtrusive way,alsoselecttheGrayotherobjectsoption. Toeditanobject: 1. Selecttheobjecttoedit. 2. FromtheModifymenu,selecttheEditcommandfortheobject(forexample,EditSymbolorEditExtrude). Alternatively,doubleclickontheobject,orrightclick(Windows)orCtrlclick(Macintosh)ontheobject,and thenselectEditfromthecontextmenu. 3. Forcertainobjects,onlyonecomponentoftheobjectcanbeeditedatatime.Whenoneoftheseobjectsis selected,oneofthefollowingdialogboxesopenstoallowyoutoselectwhichcomponenttoedit.Selecta componenttoeditandclickOK. Symbol:EditSymboldialogbox

Setting Vectorworks Preferences |


Viewport:EditViewportdialogbox Pathorprofileobject:ChooseComponentdialogbox

17

Alternatively,rightclick(Windows)orCtrlclick(Macintosh)ontheobject,andselectacommandfromthe contextmenutoeditthecomponentdirectly.Forexample,toeditthepathorprofileofapluginobjectdirectly, selectEditPathorEditProfilefromthecontextmenu. 4. TheEditwindowdisplaystheitemtobeedited.Acoloredborderaroundthedrawingwindowindicatesthe editingmodeisactive.TheExitcommandbecomesavailablefromtheModifymenu,andtheExitbuttonis visibleinthetoprightcornerofthedrawingwindow. 5. Makethechangestotheobject. Ifotherobjectsinthedrawingaredisplayed,theobjectsonotherlayersrespectthelayeroptionssettings(for showingandsnappingtoobjectsinotherlayers)andthelayervisibilitysettings.Otherobjectsonthesamelayer astheeditedobjectaresnappable.Oneexceptiontothisiswheneditingpagebased(green)symbols,whichare editedata1:1scale;otherobjectswhicharenotata1:1scalearenotsnappable. Inaddition,theviewcanbeswitchedbetweenregularandunifiedviewmodeasneeded(VectorworksDesign Seriesrequired).(SeeSettingUnifiedViewOptionsonpage 731intheVectorworksDesignSeriesUsersGuide formoreinformation.) 6. ClicktheExitbuttontoreturntotheregulardrawingmode.(Ifanestedobjectisbeingedited,theExitbutton exitsbacktothenextlevel.)

Setting Vectorworks Preferences


Vectorworkspreferencesareoptionsthatapplytoeveryfileyouopen,everytimeyouruntheprogram. TochangetheVectorworkspreferencesettings: 1. SelectTools>Options>VectorworksPreferences. TheVectorworksPreferencesdialogboxopens.Therearesevenpreferencestabs(Edit,Display,Session,3D, Autosave,Interactive,andUserFolders). 2. ClickoneofthetabstosettheVectorworkspreferencesforthattab. 3. ClickOKtosavethesettings.

Edit Preferences
ClicktheEdittabtosetpreferencesthatcontrolvariouseditfunctionsintheprogram.

18

| Chapter 1: Introduction

Parameter
Clickdragdrawing

Description
Letsyoudrawobjectswiththeclickdragmethodratherthantheclickclickmethod (clickclickisthedefault).Clickoncewiththemousebuttonanddonotrelease;dragthe cursortoadesiredlocationandthenrelease.SeeUsingtheMouseonpage 51. Showseighthandles(fourcornerandfourcenter)onmostobjects;deselecttheoptionto displayonlyfourcornerhandles WhenyouusetheDuplicatecommand,placestheduplicateobjectsothatitisoffsetfrom theoriginalobject;deselecttheoptiontoplaceduplicatesdirectlyovertheoriginal WhenyouusetheWalltool,automaticallyjoinswallsatcornersandintersections;when wallsareseparated,theirendsautomaticallyheal;whenwallshavecorecomponents, componentsalsoautomaticallyjoin(seeAutomaticallyJoiningWallsonpage 454) Savesthevieworiginandzoomfactorforeachsheetlayer;deselecttheoptiontousethe sameviewforalldesignlayersandsheetlayers SetsthedefaultbehaviorofthemousewheelandtheMightyMousescrollball.When selected,thewheelzoomsbydefault;whendeselected,thewheelscrollsbydefault.See ZoomingwiththeMouseWheelonpage 55andScrollingwiththeMouseWheelon page 57fordetails. Whenselected,allowsaCtrl+click(Windows)orOption+click(Macintosh)withthe Selectiontooltocreateaduplicatecopyofaselectedobjectinplace.Sinceitissimpleto inadvertentlycreateduplicateobjectsthatcannotbeeasilydetected,leavingthisoption deselectedisrecommended;itisdeselectedbydefault.Regardlessofthesettingmade here,duplicatescanbecreatedwithaCtrl+click/dragorOption+click/drag. Alwaysdisplaysthetexteditingboxinahorizontalposition,evenwhenthetextis rotated(seeCreatingRotatedTextonpage 355) Setsthenumberofsegmentsthatwillbeusedtorepresentpolylinesandcircleswhenyou drawandeditobjects

Eightreshapehandles Offsetduplications Autojoinwalls

Separatesheetviews Mousewheelzooms

Allowctrlclick/ optionclickinplace duplication

Edittexthorizontally bydefault 2Dconversionres

Setting Vectorworks Preferences | Parameter


Defaultcompression

19

Description
Specifiesthedefaultimagecompressiontoapplytoimagesinaviewportcacheandto imagescreatedbytheRenderBitmaptool(Renderworksrequired).PNGcompression providesthebestimagequalitybutproduceslargerfiles,whileJPEGcreatessmallerfiles, butwithpossiblelossofdetail.PNGisselectedbydefault. SpecifieswhethertheSelectiontool,inInteractiveScalingmode,isallowedtoresize symbolinstances;ifallowed,awarningcanbedisplayedtoavoidinadvertentlyscaling symbol.IfNeverisselected,symbolscanstillberesizedfromtheObjectInfopalette;see ScalingSymbolsfromtheObjectInfoPaletteonpage 323. Selectanarrowandmodifierkeycombinationasashortcutforfourcommonoperations; eachkeycombinationcanbeassignedtoonlyoneoperation Selectthekeycombinationthatswitchestheactivelayer(upanddownarrows)andthe activeclass(leftandrightarrows) Selectthekeycombinationthatpansthedrawingbyhalfoftheareacurrentlyinview Selectthekeycombinationthatnudgesobjectsbyonepixel Selectthekeycombinationthatmovesobjects,andselectwhethertomoveobjectsbythe snapgriddistanceorbythespecifiedcustomdistance

AllowInteractive2D symbolscaling

ArrowKeys Switchactivelayer/ class Pandrawing Nudgeobjects Moveobjects

Display Preferences
ClicktheDisplaytabtosetthedisplaypreferences.

Parameter
Rulers ColoredaxesinTop/Plan view Scrollbars

Description
Showstherulers DisplaysX(red)andY(green)axesin2DTop/Planview Showsthescrollbars

20

| Chapter 1: Introduction
Description
Usesablackdrawingbackgroundinsteadofthedefaultsettings Linesinthedrawingappearthickerwhenyouzoomin;thescreensredrawslowerif Quartz(Macintosh)orGDI+(Windows)imagingisenabled Whenyoucreatetextobjects,dimensionobjects,andsomepluginobjectsthat containtext,thetextblockhasnofill,evenifthedefaultattributesaresettoadda filltonewobjects.Thispreventsobjectsbeneaththetextfrombeingobscured. Displaysparametricconstraints Whencertaincomplexobjectsareedited,anEditwindowwithacoloredborder displaysinthedrawingarea. Whenyoueditsolids,groups,symbols(inthedrawingonly),orviewportsinthe Editwindow,selectthisoptiontomaketheotherobjectsfromthedrawingvisible andsnappableduringediting;deselecttheoptiontoshowonlytheobjectbeing edited.(SeeObjectEditingModeonpage 16formoreinformation.) ThisoptiondoesnotapplytoothertypesofobjectsthatareeditedfromtheEdit window,includingextrudes,multipleextrudes,taperedextrudes,sweeps,meshes, floors,androoffaces.Forsymbols,theoptionappliesonlywhenyoueditasymbol definitionbyclickingonasymbolinstanceinadesignlayer. Grayotherobjects IfShowotherobjectswhileineditingmodesisselected,selectthisoptiontogray theobjectsinthedrawingthatarenotbeingedited Cachesvectorinformationforcomplexdocumententities,suchaspolylinesand hatches;whilethismakesscreenredrawsfaster,italsocanpotentiallyincrease RAMrequirementsbyupto50percent Whentheviewischangedtooneofthestandardviews(suchasToporLeft Isometric),automaticallycenterstheviewontheselectedobjectsatthecurrent zoomlevel;ifnoobjectsareselected,theviewissettothecenterofallobjects Drawslinesofequalthicknesswithroundendcaps;alsoprovidesthesefeatures: fillsin3Dplanarobjects variableobjectopacity layertransparency antialiasing objecttransparencyinXrayFillsmode bettersupportforlargeformatprintouts PDFexport(seeExportingFilesonpage 791)

Parameter
Blackbackground Zoomlinethickness Createtextwithoutfill

Showparametricconstraints Showotherobjectswhilein editingmodes

UseVectorCachingforfaster drawing Centeronobjectsafterview change Quartzimaging(Macintosh) orGDI+imaging(Windows)

Antialiasing Displaylightobjects Always Onlyinwireframe Never Display3Dloci

WhenQuartz(Macintosh)orGDI+(Windows)imagingisenabled,blendstheedges offillsandlinesforasmootherappearance Controlsthevisibilityoflightobjects;hidelightobjectstoreducescreenclutterbut maintainlighteffects Lightobjectsarealwaysvisible LightobjectsareonlyvisibleinWireframemode;otherwise,theyarehidden Lightobjectsarehiddenregardlessoftherendermode Controlsthevisibilityof3Dloci

Setting Vectorworks Preferences | Parameter


Always Onlyinwireframe Never EditFontMappings

21

Description
3Dlociarealwaysvisible 3DlociareonlyvisibleinWireframemode;otherwise,theyarehidden 3Dlociarehiddenregardlessoftherendermode Specifiesthereplacementfontsforfontsthatarenotavailable.Fontmappingscan bechangedordeleted.Ifmappingsaredeleted,theFontMappingsdialogbox appearssothatunavailablefontscanbemapped.

Session Preferences
ClicktheSessiontabtosetgeneralVectorworkspreferences.

Parameter
Usesound Logtimeinprogram

Description
SupplementsthevisualSmartCursorcueswithaudiblecues;movethesliderbarleft (toreduce)orright(toincrease)theprogramvolumerelativetothesystemvolume Recordsinalogfilethetimespentintheprogram,aswellasthetimespenttoopen andclosedocuments;thedateformatdependsonthelanguageandregionalsettings intheoperatingsystem.ThelogfileiscalledVWUserLog.txt,anditiscreatedinthe UserDataandPreferencesFolder(whichdisplaysontheUserFolderstabof Vectorworkspreferences). DisplaysminorwarningsontheMessagebarinsteadofinadialogbox HaltsthecompileandexecutionofaVectorScriptroutinewhenawarningis generated Setshowmanyundooperationsarekeptinmemory;themaximumnumberofundos is100

Displayminoralertson messagebar StopVectorScripton warnings Maximumnumberof undos

22

| Chapter 1: Introduction
Description
Presentsadialogboxwhenanactionthatcannotbeundoneisabouttobeperformed Setshowtheprogramhandlesviewchangeswhenyouundoactions Neverignoresalloperationsthatarestrictlyviewchanges GroupingAllViewChangestreatsallconsecutiveviewchangesasonesingle undoableaction GroupingSimilarViewChangestreatssimilarconsecutiveviewchangesasa singleundoableaction Individuallytreatseachindividualviewchangeasanundoableaction

Parameter
Issueundowarnings Undoviewchanges

Enablepalettedocking (Windows) Automaticallyappendfile extensions(Macintosh) Displaydefaultcontent Createanewdocument onstartup Changeactivelayerfor SimilarObjectCreation (VectorworksDesign Seriesrequired) Checkforupdates

Letsyoudockpalettes;deselecttheoptiontodisabledocksandtoundockallactive palettes Appendstheappropriatefileextension(.vwx,or .stafortemplatefiles)toanewly createddrawingfileonaMacintosh Enablespredefinedcontent(suchashatchesandgradients)todisplayforselection throughouttheprogram Createsanew,untitledfilewhentheprogramislaunched.Thenewfileisbasedon theDefault.statemplatefile(ifoneexists);otherwise,itisblank. WhentheCreateSimilarObjectcommandisinvoked,changestheactivelayertobe thatofthesourceobject.Selectthisoptiontocreatethenewobjectonthesamelayer asthesourceobject.SeeCreatingSimilarObjectsonpage 670intheVectorworks DesignSeriesUsersGuide. Selecthowoftentheprogramshouldcheckforavailablesoftwareupdates.Whenthe specifiedupdatecheckintervalhaselapsed,analertdialogboxdisplaysifanew ServicePack(maintenancerelease)ormajorreleaseoftheVectorworkssoftwareis available. IfbothaServicePackandmajorreleaseareavailablesimultaneously,thesystem willsendnotificationabouttheServicePackfirst,followedbynotificationabout themajorreleaseinthenextsession. ClickMoreInfo(orTellMeMore)inthealertdialogboxtoopenawebbrowserto displayanddownloadtheavailableupdate.Youmustexittheprogramto successfullyinstallthesoftwareupdate Ifitisnotconvenienttoupdatethesoftwareatthistime,clickNotNow(or RemindMeLater)inthealertdialogbox.Thealertdialogboxwillredisplaywhen thespecifiedupdatecheckintervalhaselapsed. Todisablenotificationsofamajorreleaseuntilthenextmajorreleaseisavailable, clickNotInterested. Iftheprogramisunabletoconnecttotheupdateserver,itattemptstoconnectoncea dayforsevendaysaftertheoriginalfailedattempt.Ifaconnectiontotheupdate serverstillcannotbeestablished,adialogboxopenstosuggestrunningamanual update.IftheCheckforUpdatescommandisrunaftertheautomaticupdatecheck fails,thenextautomaticupdatecheckoccursthedayafterthemanualcheck.

Setting Vectorworks Preferences | Parameter


Errorreporting

23

Description
Optionallysendsinformationaboutapplicationcrashesandotherbasicusage statisticstoNemetschekVectorworks.Crashdetailsallowourprogrammerstoreceive crashnotifications,includingtheareaoftheprogramwherethecrashoccurred.Usage patternshelpusseewhateventsleduptoaparticularcrash.Thisreportingassistsus withproductdevelopmentwhilemaintaininguserprivacy;toallayanyconcernsyou mayhave,weneverseethedatainyourdrawings,andthereportinghasnoimpacton yoursoftwareoperations. OpenstheSerialNumbersdialogboxtoaddorremoveserialnumbersforallinstalled NemetschekVectorworksproducts(seeAddingandRemovingSerialNumberson page i) Revertstodefaultsettingsinsteadofuserspecifiedsettingsfortoolmodes,dialogbox positions,anddialogboxvalues.Forpalettepositionsandsettings,revertstothe settingsestablishedwhenthecustomworkspacewascreated(intheUserDataand Preferencesfolder). Inthedialogboxthatopens,selectwhethertoresetsettingsforalwaysperformingthe selectedactioninalertdialogboxes.Alsoselectwhethertoresetsettingsforalltool modes,dialogboxpositions,dialogboxvalues,andpalettepositionsandsettings. ClickOKtoreturntotheVectorworksPreferencesdialogbox.

SerialNumbers

ResetSavedSettings

Palettemargins (Macintosh)

Setswhetherthedocumentwindowleavesaspaceforpaletteswhenthewindowis opened

3D Preferences
Clickthe3Dtabtosetpreferencesfor3Dedits.

24

| Chapter 1: Introduction
Description
Setsthedetaillevelthatdisplayswhilethe3Dviewisrotated.SelectDetailedtodisplay objectscompletely,buttorotateslower.SelectResponsivetorotatefaster,buttodisplay objectswithlessdetailduringtherotation. Determinesthedegreetowhichtheprogramretainstherenderedmodelinmemory during3Drotation.SelectNevertoforcethemodeltoalwaysdisplayinWireframe mode;selectAlwaystoforcethemodeltoremainrendered. Setsthesegmentationresolutionusedtodisplaycurved3Dobjects;affectsextrudedand sweptpolylines,circles,andarcs

Parameter
3DRotation

RetainRendering Model 3Dconversionres

Autosave Preferences
ClicktheAutosavetabtosetpreferencesforautomaticfilesavesandbackups.

Parameter
Autosaveevery Confirmbeforesave

Description
EnablestheAutosavefeature;alsosetsthenumberofminutesoroperationsbetween autosaves Beforeeachsave,opensadialogboxsothatyoucanchooseeithertosaveortocontinue toworkwithoutasave.Thetimer/counterresetsregardlessofwhichoptionisselected. SeeAutomaticallySavingFilesonpage 44. Writesovertheoriginalfilewiththelatestchangesduringasave

Overwriteoriginalfile

Setting Vectorworks Preferences | Parameter


Autosaveabackup copyto

25

Description
AutomaticallysavesabackupcopyofthefileeithertoafoldernamedVWBackup(inthe samefolderastheoriginalfile)ortoacustomlocation,suchasanetworkdrive(click Choosetoselectafolder).Theoriginalfileisnotsavedautomatically;tosaveit,useone ofthesavecommandsontheFilemenu. BackupfileshaveuniquenamesthatincludethewordBackupandadateandtime stampappendedtotheoriginalfilename.Usebackupfile(s)torestoreaprojectif somethinghappenstotheoriginalfile.

Keepthe___most recentbackups

IfAutosaveabackupcopytoisselected,specifiesthemaximumnumberofbackupfiles tokeep;theoldestbackupfileisreplacedwhenanewbackupismade

Interactive Preferences
ClicktheInteractivetabtosetpreferencesforthedisplayoftheinteractivedrawingfeatures,suchasthecursor, selectionboxes,andselectionhighlighting.SeeDrawingwithSnappingonpage 133formoreinformationabout snapping.SeeSelectionandPreselectionIndicatorsonpage 63formoreinformationabouthighlighting.

Parameter
Cursor Fullscreencursor Showselectionbox Showsnapbox Showacquisitionhints

Description
Displaysacrosshaircursorthatextendstotheedgesofthedrawingarea Displaysaboxbeneaththecursorthatindicatestheactiveselectionarea;anobject beneaththeboxcanbeselectedwhenthemouseisclicked Displaysaboxaroundthecursorthatindicatestheareainwhichtofindpossiblesnap points;whenasnappointisbeneaththebox,itcanbesnappedto Showgraphicalhintsnearthecursorwhensmartpoints,edges,andvectorlockscan beacquired(seeSnappingIndicatorsonpage 148)

26

| Chapter 1: Introduction
Description
Controlsthesizeoftheselectionbox,ifShowselectionboxisselected;mustbe smallerthanthesnapbox.Theactualsizeoftheselectionboxisshown. Controlsthesizeofthesnapbox,ifShowsnapboxisselected;mustbelargerthanthe selectionbox.Theactualsizeofthesnapboxisshown.

Parameter
Selectionboxsize Snapboxsize Highlighting Selectionhighlighting

Whenenabled,objectsthatareselectedarehighlightedwiththespecifiedcolorsand patterns,andsquarehandlesindicatepointsthatcanbeusedtoreshapeobjectswith thetoolthatiscurrentlyactive. Whenthisoptionisdisabled,squarehandlesindicateobjectsthatareselected,andthe handlesmayormaynotbereshapepoints.

Animation

IfSelectionhighlightingisselected,specifyhowtheselectionhighlightswillbe animatedwhenthecursormovesoutofthedrawingwindoworoverapalette: Offturnsoffallanimationofhighlights Onpulsesthehighlightcontinuously Burstbrieflyhighlightswith100%opacity

Cursorpreselection highlighting Highlightingtimer Marqueepreselection highlighting Snappedobject highlighting Toolhighlighting InteractiveAppearance Settings

Highlightsanyobjectthatcanbeselectedwhenthecursorisovertheobject Whenadrawingobjectisbeneaththecursor,specifiesthenumberofsecondstodelay beforepreselectionhighlightingbegins Asaselectionmarqueeisdrawnoverobjects,highlightsanyobjectthatwillbe selected Highlightsthegeometrythatgeneratedthecurrentsnap Highlightsanyobjectthatcanbemodifiedorusedbythecurrenttoolwhenthecursor isovertheobject Opensadialogboxtochangetheappearanceoftheinteractiveelementsin Vectorworks,includinggeneralelements,objecthighlighting,SmartCursorelements, andsnappoints;seeConfiguringInteractiveDisplayonpage 65

User Folders Preferences


Userscandesignatewhichfolderwillholduserdataandpreferencesfiles.Thesubfolderswithinthisfoldermirror severalofthestandardsubfoldersintheVectorworksapplicationfolder(Libraries,Plugins,Settings,andsoon). Thisduplicationoffoldersinseparatelocationsmakesiteasyforuserstodothefollowing: Backup(ortransfertoanothercomputer)customcontentandpreferences Workinanenvironmentwhereuserpermissionsarelimited(suchasaschoollab) Switchbetweenusersonthesamecomputer UpdatetheVectorworkssoftwarewithnolossofcustomfiles

Whentheprogrampresentsdataintheinterface,itincludescontentfromtheuserfolderaswellasthecontentitships with.Forexample,selectModify>Hatchtoeditahatch;theHatchesdialogboxshowsalldefaulthatchesfromyour Vectorworksapplicationfolderanduserfolders.

Setting Vectorworks Preferences |

27

Afileintheuserfoldertakesprecedenceifafilenameisrepeatedinanyofthefolders.Forexample,ifthe Hatches_Default.vwxfileexistsinboththeuserfolderandtheVectorworksapplicationfolder,onlythecontentfrom theuserfoldershowsinVectorworks. ClicktheUserFolderstabtospecifytheuserfolder.

Parameter
UserDataand PreferencesFolder Choose

Description
Specifiesthefolderthatcontainsprogrampreferences,logfiles,workspaces,andany personalcontentyoucreate.Thismightbeafolderonthelocalcomputer,oronaUSB driveornetworkdrive;thisallowsyoutorunVectorworksfromanycomputer. ClickChoosetochangetheuserdatafolder.Theprogrammustberestartedifyou changethelocationoftheuserdata.SeeUserFoldersPreferencesonpage 26for details. Tolookatthecontentsofthecurrentfolder,clickExplore(toopenWindowsExplorer)or clickRevealinFinder(toopenMacintoshFinder)

Explore(Windows) orRevealinFinder (Macintosh)

User Data and Preferences Folder


TheUserDataandPreferencesfoldercontainstheVectorworksfilesthatarecreatedandusedbyyou.Withinthis folder,theprogramautomaticallycreatessubfoldersforLibraries,PlantDatabase(VectorworksLandmarkrequired), Plugins,Settings,VWHelp,andWorkspaces. TheVectorworksprogramautomaticallyaddsyourcustomizations(suchasworkspacechangesandResource Browserfavorites)totheappropriatefolders.Toaddcontent,placethefileintheappropriatesubfolder.Forexample, toaddacustomlibrary,placethecustomfileintheLibrariesfolder. Theprogramdefaultsthefollowinglocationsfortheuserdatafolder,buttheycanbechanged.Notethat,bydefault, Windowshidestheapplicationdatafolder;ifyouwanttousethedefaultlocation,adjustthefolderoptionsin MicrosoftExplorertomakehiddenfoldersvisible.

28

| Chapter 1: Introduction

WindowsXP: C:\DocumentsandSettings\<Username>\ApplicationData\Nemetschek\Vectorworks\2012\ WindowsVista/7: C:\Users\<Username>\AppData\Roaming\Nemetschek\Vectorworks\2012 Macintosh: /Users/<Username>/Library/ApplicationSupport/Vectorworks/2012/ Tochangetheuserdatafolder: 1. FromtheUserFolderstab,clickChoose. 2. Aconfirmationdialogboxdisplays.ClickYestocontinuewiththefolderchange. 3. Selectafolderfromthedialogboxthatopens,andclickOK(Windows)orChoose(Macintosh). 4. Anotherconfirmationdialogboxdisplays.ClickYestocopytheuserdatatothenewlocation,orclickNotouse theVectorworksdefaults. 5. Ifyoucopythedatatothenewlocation,andthedestinationfolderalreadycontainsafilewiththesamenameas afileinthesourcefolder,theprogramdisplaysanoticethatfilesinthedestinationfolderwillbeoverridden. ClickYestocontinue. 6. Ifanyunsavedfilesarecurrentlyopen,youarepromptedtosavethem.ClickYestocontinue. 7. Theprogramcopiesthefilestothenewlocationandthenclosesautomatically. 8. Restarttheprogram.

Workgroup and Project Folders


IfVectorworksDesignSeriesproductsareinstalled,asectionforWorkgroupandProjectfoldersdisplaysatthebottom ofthistab.SeeWorkgroupFoldersonpage 578intheVectorworksDesignSeriesUsersGuidefordetailsaboutusing workgroupfolders.

Resetting Vectorworks Preferences


ClicktheResetbuttonatthebottomoftheVectorworksPreferencesdialogboxtoresetthepreferencestotheir defaults;thisalsoclearsthetenmostrecentlyopenedfileslistandthefontmappingtable.Serialnumber(s),user name,andcompanynameareleftintact.Thisoperationcannotbeundone.

Setting Document Preferences


Documentpreferencesapplyonlytothecurrentdrawing,andtheyremainineffectuntiltheyarechanged.Whenyou createatemplate,thecurrentdocumentpreferencesaresavedwiththetemplate(seeUsingDrawingTabletson page 86). Tochangethepreferencesettingsinthedocument: 1. SelectFile>DocumentSettings>DocumentPreferences. Alternatively,rightclick(Windows)orCtrlclick(Macintosh)inthedrawingarea,andselectDocument Preferencesfromthedocumentcontextmenu. TheDocumentPreferencesdialogboxopens. Therearethreepreferencestabs(Display,Dimensions,andResolution). 2. Clickoneofthetabstosetthedocumentpreferencesforthattab.

Setting Document Preferences |

29

Display Preferences
ClicktheDisplaytabtosetthedisplaypreferences.

Parameter
Blackandwhiteonly

Description
Drawsobjectsusingonlythecolorsblackandwhite(blackitemsdisplayasblack,and allcolorsincludinggraydisplayaswhite);thischoiceoverridesanyothercolor settings(includingviewportsettings)andisusedmainlyforprintingonblackandwhite printers. TocreateagrayscaleeffectforprintsandPDFswhenthisfeatureisenabled,use patternfillsinsteadofsolidcolorfills.Setthepatternforegroundcolortoblack, andsetthebackgroundcolortoanyothercolor.Patterns4through9inthepattern fillselectionboxdisplayasvariousshadesofgray.
These six patterns display as grays in prints and PDFs

Hidedetailswhenlayer scale<=1:

Selecttohidewallcomponentsandstairdetailswhenthelayerissetto,orisbelow,the scaleratiospecified(thissettingdoesnotaffectwallcomponentdisplayinviewports; seeAdvancedSheetLayerViewportPropertiesonpage 768toshoworhide componentsinviewports) Indicateswhethertosaveviewportcachesinthefile;savingthecachemayincreasefile size,butsavestimewhenfilesthatcontainviewportsareopened.Ifdeselected,any viewportswillrequireupdatingwhenthefileisopened,butfilesizeisreduced.Note thattheviewportcache(s)arealreadycompressedtoPNGorJPEGformattosavespace (theformatdependsontheselectioninVectorworkspreferences;seeEditPreferences onpage 17formoreinformation).

Saveviewportcache

30

| Chapter 1: Introduction
Description
Storesafilteredcopyofthetriangulatedsourcedataandtheexistingandproposedsite model(s),sothatthesitemodelupdatesmoreefficiently.Ifdisabled,updatingthesite modelcausesthesourcedatatoberecalculated,butfilesizeisreduced. Whenspecificpenandfillcolorshavebeensetforadesignlayer,drawsallobjectson thatlayerwiththespecifiedcolors(seeSettingtheDesignLayerColoronpage 102) SmoothsmeshobjectsrenderedwithOpenGLorRenderworks;enterahighercrease anglevalueforasmoothersurface(validvaluesare0to180). Automaticallycoordinatesandupdatessheetnumbersanddrawingnumbersamong sheetborders,drawinglabels,andsectionmarkers

Parameter
Savesitemodelcache (VectorworksDesign Seriesrequired) Uselayercolors Meshsmoothingwith creaseangle Useautomaticdrawing coordination (VectorworksDesign Seriesrequired) Adjustflippedtext

Reorientsmirrored,rotated,andflippedtextinsymbols,pluginobjects,andtext objectssothatthetextisalwaysreadable

Dimension Preferences
ClicktheDimensionstabtosetthedimensionpreferences.

Parameter
Associatedimensions

Description
Associatesdimensionswiththeapplicableobjects.Whenadimensionisassociatedwith anobject,thedimensionautomaticallyupdateswhentheobjectitisappliedtois modified.Formoreinformationaboutassociativedimensioning,seeDimensioningon page 709. Selectthisoptiontoautomaticallyassociateadimensiontothetopmostobjectwhen morethanoneobjectsharesadimensionendpoint AssignsdimensionstotheDimensionclassastheyarecreated(defaultsetting).If deselected,createddimensionsareassignedtotheactiveclass.

Autoassociate Createdimensionsin dimensionclass

Setting Document Preferences | Parameter


DimensionStandard

31

Description
SelectthedefaultDimensionStandardtouse,orclickCustomtoaddacustom dimensionstandard(seeUsingCustomDimensionStandardsonpage 709). Changingthedimensionstandarddoesnotaffectdimensionsthathavealreadybeen placedonthedrawing.

DimensionSlash

SetsthedesiredThicknessoftheslashateachendofadimension,inpoints,mils,or millimeters

Defaultdimensionstandardsarepresentedinthefollowingtable.

Standard

Description

Text Placement Above Dim. Line Within Dim. Line


X X X X X X X X

Marker Style Slash


X X X X X X X X X

Text Rotation Aligned


X X X X X X X X X

Arrow

Horiz.

Arch ASME BSI DIN ISO JIS SIA ASMEDual SideBySide ASMEDual Stacked

ArchitecturalStandards AmericanSocietyofMechanical Engineers BritishStandardsInstitute GermanStandards InternationalStandardsOrganization JapaneseIndustrialStandards SwissStandards AmericanSocietyofMechanical Engineers AmericanSocietyofMechanical Engineers

Resolution Preferences
ClicktheResolutiontabtosettheresolutionpreferences.

32

| Chapter 1: Introduction
Description
Setshowrotatedtextisdisplayed:Highestqualityshowsrotatedtextatthebest qualityavailable,Normalqualityshowsrotatedtextslightlyjagged,andBounding boxshowsonlyaboundingboxrepresentingthetextslocation Setshowbitmapsaredisplayed:Fullresolutionshowsbitmapsatthebestresolution available,Reducedresolutionshowsbitmapsatareduceddetail,andBoundingbox showsonlyaboundingboxrepresentingthebitmapslocation.Reducetheresolution tosavetimewhenusingthePantoolorscrollbars. ThePrintingDPIsettingontherightisavailableforallsystems. TheDPIsettingontheleftisforexporttoPICT,PDF,orWMFformat.Theexport optionavailabledependsontheoperatingsystemandonwhethertheQuartz imagingpreferenceisenabledonMacintosh(seeDisplayPreferencesonpage 19). Forallexporttypes,theDPIsettingsdefinetheresolutionforthefollowing: OpenGLorRenderworksrasterrenderingfordesignlayers(significantlyaffects theoutputfilesize) ThecoordinatesystemforVectorworksgeometry RasteroutputgeneratedtosupportformatconversionofPICTorPDFobjectstoan incompatibleexportformat;thisvariesdependingontheexporttype,asdescribed below Forbitmapsandrenderedviewports,eachsheetlayersDPIsettingdeterminesthe upperlimitforresolution;usetheseDPIsettingstosetalowerresolutionforexport,if needed. PICTExport (Macintoshonly,when Quartzimagingisnot enabled) PDFExport(Quartz Only) (Macintoshonly,when Quartzimagingis enabled) WMFExport (Windowsonly) SetstheresolutionwhentheExportPICTcommandisused. InadditiontorendereddesignlayersandVectorworksgeometry,thissettingaffects PDFandrotatedPICTobjects,whicharerasterizedwhenexportedtoPICT (nonrotatedPICTobjectsarenotrasterized). SetstheresolutionwhentheExportPDF(QuartzOnly)commandisused. ThissettingaffectsrendereddesignlayersandVectorworksgeometry. IfVectorworksDesignSeriesproductsareinstalled,usetheExportPDF commandtoexporttoPDFinstead,andsettheresolutionintheExportPDF dialogbox. SetstheresolutionwhentheExportMetafilecommandisused. InadditiontorendereddesignlayersandVectorworksgeometry,thissettingaffects PDFandPICTobjects,whicharerasterizedwhenexportedtoWMF. SetstheresolutionwhenthePrintcommandisused. Thissettingaffectsrendereddesignlayersonly.AnyPICT/PDFrasterizationand Vectorworksgeometrywillprintattheresolutionoftheprinter.Forbitmapsand renderedviewports,eachsheetlayersDPIsettingdeterminestheupperlimitforprint resolution.SeeSettingthePrintResolutiononpage 86formoreinformation.

Parameter
RotatedTextDisplay

BitmapDisplay

Output

Printing

Setting Quick Preferences |

33

Setting Quick Preferences


ThemostcommonlyusedVectorworksanddocumentpreferencesareavailableforaccessfrombuttonsontheTool bar.TheQuickPreferencesmenucontrolswhichpreferencesbuttonsdisplayontheToolbar.TheDataBarandEdit GroupOptionslistandtheZoomLineThicknesspreferenceareenabledbydefaultontheQuickPreferencesmenu. SelectthedesiredpreferencetodisplayitsshortcutbuttonontheToolbar,ifitisnotalreadypresent.Acheckmarkto theleftofapreferenceindicatesthatitisselected.Buttonsdisplayintheorderthepreferencewasselected,sothefirst selectedpreferencedisplaysthefurthestleftontheToolbar.Iftheapplicationwindowisresized,theToolbarwill truncatethedisplayofbuttonswhennecessaryandreplacethemwithellipsesontheright.
Data Bar and Edit Group Options list Quick Preferences menu

Menu Commands
AutoJoinWalls

Description of Button Functionality


DisplaystheAutoJoinWallspreferencebutton(seeEditPreferences onpage 17) DisplaystheAutosavepreferencebutton(seeAutosavePreferences onpage 24) DisplaystheBlackandWhiteOnlypreferencebutton(seeDisplay Preferencesonpage 29) DisplaystheBlackBackgroundpreferencebutton(seeDisplay Preferencesonpage 19)

Autosave

BlackandWhiteOnly

BlackBackground

34

| Chapter 1: Introduction
Description of Button Functionality
DisplaystheDataBarandEditGroupOptionslist(seeDataBarand EditGroupOptionsonpage 211) DisplaystheHideDetailspreferencebutton(seeDisplayPreferences onpage 29) DisplaystheShowAcquisitionHintspreferencebutton(see InteractivePreferencesonpage 25) DisplaystheShowGridpreferencebutton(seeGridSnappingon page 135) DisplaystheShowOtherObjectsWhileinEditModespreference button(seeDisplayPreferencesonpage 19)

Menu Commands
DataBarandEditGroupOptions

HideDetails

ShowAcquisitionHints

ShowGrid

ShowOtherObjectsWhileinEdit Modes

ShowPageBoundary

DisplaystheShowPageBoundarypreferencebutton(seePageSetup onpage 81) DisplaystheShowRulerspreferencebutton(seeDisplayPreferences onpage 19) DisplaystheUseLayerColorspreferencebutton(seeDisplay Preferencesonpage 29) DisplaystheZoomLineThicknesspreferencebutton(seeDisplay Preferencesonpage 19) OpenstheDocumentPreferencesdialogbox(seeSettingDocument Preferencesonpage 28) OpenstheVectorworksPreferencesdialogbox(seeSetting VectorworksPreferencesonpage 17)

ShowRulers

UseLayerColors

ZoomLineThickness

DocumentPreferences VectorworksPreferences

Context Menus
Clickonanobject,pluginobject,thedrawingarea,orasectionoftheResourceBrowserwitharightclick(Windows) orCtrlclick(Macintosh),todisplayamenucontainingcontextsensitivecommandsthatpertaintotheselecteditemor items.Ifseveralsimilaritemsareselected,onlytheapplicablecontextmenucommandsbecomeavailabletoallthe itemsintheselection.

Context Menus |
Documentandobjectcontextmenuscanbecustomizedtoincludefrequentlyneededcommands;seeModifying ContextMenusonpage 883.

35

Manycontextmenucommandsarealsoavailablefromthemenucommandlists,andaredescribedinthosesections. However,certaincommandsareavailableexclusivelyfromacontextmenu;thesecommandsarelistedhere. Thislistisnotexhaustive,asthecapabilityiscontinuouslybeingextendedtoadditionalcommandsandtools.

Item and Context Commands


Document ActivateClass ActivateLayer ForceSelect ActiveLayerScale Object ActivateClass ActivateLayer

Description
Activatestheclassorlayeroftheobjectnearesttothelastmouseclick. Thesecommandsprovidequickaccesstotheclassorlayerofanyobject currentlydisplayed. Activatestheclass,layer,orboth(asnecessary),andselectstheobject nearesttothelastmouseclick AccessestheLayerScaledialogbox;fromthere,changethescaleofthe activedesignlayer(oralldesignlayers)

Activatestheclassorlayeroftheobjectclickedupon,eveniftheobject couldnotnormallybeselectedduetoadifferentlayerscale,orthe currentclassorlayeroptionsettings.Thesecommandsprovidequick accesstotheclassorlayerofanyobjectcurrentlydisplayed. Activatestheobjectsclass,layer,orboth(asnecessary)andselectsthe object,eveniftheobjectcouldnotnormallybeselectedduetoa differentlayerscale,orthecurrentclassorlayeroptionsettings Createsanobjectthatmatchesanobjectthatisalreadyinthedrawing. SeeCreatingSimilarObjectsonpage 670intheVectorworksDesign SeriesUsersGuide. Accessestheobjectspropertiesdialogbox,whichissimilartotheObject Infopalette;itcontainsinformationspecifictotheselectedobject

ForceSelect

CreateSimilarObject (VectorworksDesignSeriesrequired) Properties PolylineorPathobjectwitharcvertexor vertices ConvertArctoRadiusPolyline

Convertsthearcverticesofanobjecttoradiusvertices,foreasier editing;seeConvertingPolylineVerticesfromArctoRadiuson page 309

PlugInObjects EditProfile,EditPath Ifpermittedbytheobjecttype,allowsyoutoswitchfromeditingthe pathtoeditingtheprofile.Similarly,ifeditingtheprofile,usethe contextmenutoswitchtopathediting.

Symbol Replace SimilartotheReplacebuttonontheObjectInfopalette,accessesthe ChooseaSymboldialogboxforreplacingthesymbolinstancewitha differentsymbol

36

| Chapter 1: Introduction
Description
Editsthe2Dor3Dcomponent,orthe3Dwallholecomponentofthe symbolinstance;ifeditingoneofthecomponents,thecontextmenu allowsyoutoswitchdirectlytoeditingtheothercomponent

Item and Context Commands


Edit2DComponent,Edit3D Component,orEdit3DWallHole Component Resource LocateinResourceBrowser

Whenexecutedfromthedrawing,onaresource(orobjectcontaininga resource,suchasarectanglewithahatch),thiscontextmenucommand locates,navigatesto,andselectsthatresourceintheResourceBrowser; seeLocatingSpecificResourcesonpage 169

SheetBorder ShowGrids TitleBlock WallorRoundWall Join ActivatestheWallJointoolforjoiningwallsegments;seeJoining Wallsonpage 470.Thetooldefaultstothemodeusedpreviouslywith thetool. ActivatestheRemoveWallBreakstooltocleanupwallbreaksorgaps; seeRemovingWallBreaksonpage 470 Togglesbetweenshowingandhidinggridtextandlinesinthesheet bordermargin OpenstheImportTitleBlockdialogbox,foraddingatitleblocktothe sheetborder;seeAddingaTitleBlockonpage 381

RemoveBreak Viewport EditAnnotations,EditCrop,Edit DesignLayer

Provideshortcutstoedittheviewportsannotations,crop,ordesign layer,bypassingtheEditViewportdialogbox(seeCroppingSheet LayerViewportsonpage 774).Thecontextmenucommandscanalso beaccessedwheninaneditviewportmode(forexample,toswitch directlyfromeditingacroptoeditingannotations). Activatesthedesignlayeroftherightclickedobject(iftherightclicked objectdoesnotbelongtoadesignlayer,theEditViewportdialogbox opens) Exitstheviewportdirectlytothedesignlayerwheneditingadesign layerfromasheetlayerviewport.TheExitViewportcontextmenuis onlyavailableifNavigateBacktoViewportisselectedfromtheEdit Viewportdialogbox. Updatestheviewport,similartotheUpdatebuttonontheObjectInfo palette

EditDesignLayer

ExitViewport

Update Light TurnOn/Off SetLighttoView,SetViewtoLight

Togglesthelightonoroff Fordirectional,spot,orcustom(Renderworksrequired)lights,setsthe orientationofthelighttothatofthecurrentview,ortheorientationof theviewtothatofthelight

Dimension

Context Menus | Item and Context Commands


Disassociate ChainDimension AddDimension DeleteSegment/WitnessLine TileResource DisplayTileRepetitions LayerLink ConverttoViewport (VectorworksDesignSeriesrequired) EditCrop EditDesignLayer SiteModel (VectorworksDesignSeriesrequired) EditSourceData EditSiteBorder Convertsthelayerlinktoadesignlayerviewport EnterscropmodeforacroppedlayerlinkCroppingLayerLinkson page 786 Returnstothedesignlayeroftheobjectinthelayerlink

37

Description
Removestheassociationbetweentheclickeddimensionandthe dimensionedobject;seeAssociativeDimensioningonpage 714 Formoreinformationoneditingchaindimensions,seeEditingChain Dimensionsonpage 733 Addsadimensionorwitnesslinetothechain Deletesdimensionorwitnessline

Whileeditingthetilegeometry,togglesthedisplayoftherepetitionsof thetilepatternobject(s);seeDefiningTilesonpage 548

AccessesthesourcedatainEditGroupmode(seeSettingSiteModel Propertiesonpage 297intheVectorworksDesignSeriesUsersGuide) Accessesaneditingmodeforcreatingacustomsiteborder,cropping thesitemodel(seeCroppingaSiteModelonpage 299inthe VectorworksDesignSeriesUsersGuide) Updatesthesitemodel,similartotheUpdatebuttonontheObjectInfo palette

Update Plants (VectorworksLandmarkrequired) CreatePlantfromObject ReplacePlant ExportPlant

Createsaplantdefinitionforthecurrentplantsymbol Replacestheplantsymbol,similartotheReplacePlantbuttononthe ObjectInfopalette Exportstheselectedplanttothespecifiedlocation;seeExporting CustomResourcesonpage 577intheVectorworksDesignSeriesUsers Guide

Hardscape (VectorworksLandmarkrequired) ConverttoBoundary ConverttoPathway Lightinginstrument (VectorworksSpotlightrequired) Convertsapathwayhardscapeobjecttoaboundaryhardscapeobject Convertsaboundaryhardscapeobjecttoapathwayhardscapeobject

38

| Chapter 1: Introduction
Description
Focusesselectedinstrumentsatanexistingfocuspoint,orcreatesanew one

Item and Context Commands


FocusInstrumentsatNextClick

DoubleclickingonanobjectperformsthesamefunctionasselectingEditfromthecontextmenu(italsoreactivates theworkingplaneonwhichaplanarobjectwascreated).

Getting Started
Creating a New File
Tocreateanewfile: 1. SelectFile>New. TheCreateDocumentdialogboxopens. 2. SelectthetypeofdocumenttocreateandclickOKtoopenthenewfile.

ThischapterdescribeshowtogetstartedwiththeVectorworksFundamentalsproduct.Itdescribeshowtosetupbasic programpreferences,units,anddefaultoptions.Printingandusingtabletsarealsodescribed.

Document Type
Createblankdocument Usedocumenttemplate

Description
Opensanewdrawingfilewiththedefaultprogramsettings(attributes,scale,units, etc.) Opensanewdrawingwithsettingsthatweresavedinatemplatefile;selectthe templatetouse(seeCreatingTemplatesonpage 80tolearnmoreabouttemplates)

Vectorworkssearchesyouruserfolder,yourworkgroupfolders,andtheVectorworksapplicationfolderfor templatefiles.Ifnotemplatesarefoundanywhereonthesystem,theCreateDocumentdialogboxdoesnot open.Instead,ablanknewdocumentiscreatedautomatically.

Opening a File
Therearethreewaystoopenafilethatalreadyexists.Uptoeightfilescanbeopenatonceintheprogram. Toopenafilethatalreadyexists: 1. SelectFile>Open. TheOpendialogboxopens. 2. Selectthenameofthefileortemplatetoopen. 3. ClickOpen. Theprogramopensthelastsavedversionoftheselecteddrawingfile. Toopenafilethatwasrecentlyused: SelectFile>OpenRecentandselectanamefromthelistofthelasttenfilesthatwereopenedorsaved.

40

| Chapter 2: Getting Started


Thefileisopened;ifthefileisalreadyopen,itismovedtothefrontofthescreentobecomethecurrentfile.

Toopenafilefromtheoperatingsystem: DoubleclickafiledirectlyinWindowsExplorerorMacintoshFinder. IfmultipleversionsoftheVectorworksprogramareinstalled,andtheprogramisnotyetopen,theversionthat openswhenyoudoubleclickafiledependsontheoperatingsystem. OnWindows,theversionoftheprogramthatwasinstalledmostrecentlyopens. OnMacintoshOSX,theVectorworks2012programopenswhenyoudoubleclickaversion2012file.When youdoubleclickanolderversionfile,theolderversionoftheprogramopens. TheVectorworks2012programcanopenfilesthatwerecreatedinMiniCAD7orinVectorworksversions8andabove. FilesthatwerecreatedinversionsearlierthanMiniCAD7mustbeconvertedtoatleastversion7,withaversionofthe programthatisearlierthanversion12.Ifanearlierversionoftheprogramisnotavailable,contactNemetschek VectorworksSalesSupportforassistance. Whenauserattemptstoopenafilethatanotheruseralreadyhasopen,analertdisplaysthenameoftheuserwhohas thefileopenandwhereitisopen;additionalinformationaboutthefilecanbedisplayed,includingitspath,whenit wasopened,andhowlongithasbeenopen.

Watermarked and Fingerprinted Files


FilesfromtheVectorworkseducationalversionincludeawatermark.Ifthisisthefirsttimethefileisbeingopened,a messagedisplays,notifyingyouthatthedatainthefilemayonlybeusedinotherwatermarkeddocuments.Thistype offileisidentifiedaswatermarkedinthetitlebar.IfaneducationalversionoftheVectorworkssoftwareisbeingused, amessagedisplaystothateffect,andalsowarnsthatanyfilescreatedormodifiedinthisversionofthesoftwarewill bewatermarked. Libraryfileswhichcontainproductspecificcontent,suchasaLandmarklibraryfile,includeafingerprintwhich identifiestheDesignSeriesproduct(s)requiredtobeabletousethecontent.Thistypeoffileisidentifiedas fingerprintedinthetitlebar.Whenafingerprintedfileisopened,amessagedisplays,warningthatthefileoranyfiles createdfromitcanonlybeusedwiththeindicatedDesignSeriesproduct(s).

Mapping Missing Fonts


Whenyouopenafilethatcontainsfontsthatarenotavailableonyoursystem,theFontMappingdialogboxopens. Mapfontsfromtheoriginalfiletoafontavailableonyoursystem,oropenthedocumentquicklybyautomatically mappingfontstothedefaultreplacementfont.

Using Finder Quick Look (Macintosh OS X 10.5+ Only) |

41

Parameter
Replace With OriginalFont ReplacementFont NewMappings AllMappings Tomapmissingfonts:

Description
Autopopulateswhenanoriginalfontisselected Liststhedefaultfontandallavailablesystemfonts(thedefaultfontisthesystemfont forthecomputeronwhichtheprogramisinstalled) Liststheunavailablefontusedinthefile Liststhefontthatwillbeusedtoreplacetheoriginalfont Listsfontsthathavenotpreviouslybeenmapped Listsallfontsregardlessofwhethertheyhavebeenpreviouslymapped

1. PopulatethelistoforiginalfontsbyselectingNewMappingsorAllMappings. 2. Ifthedefaultreplacementfontisacceptableforreplacingalloriginalfonts,clickOKtoopenthedocument. Otherwise,proceedtoStep3. FontmappingscanbechangedatanytimebyclickingEditFontMappingsfromtheDisplaytabofVectorworks preferences. 3. Selectanoriginalfonttomap. TheReplacefielddisplaystheselectedoriginalfont,andtheWithfieldliststhedefaultandallavailablefonts. Selectthedesiredreplacementfont,andthenselectthenextoriginalfonttomap.Repeattheprocessuntilall desiredoriginalfontshavebeenmapped. 4. ClickOKwhenalldesiredoriginalfontshavebeenmapped. MappedfontsarestoredasaVectorworkspreference.IfVectorworkspreferencesaredeleted,theFontMapping dialogboxredisplaysforafilethatmayhavepreviouslyhadthefontsmapped.

Using Finder Quick Look (Macintosh OS X 10.5+ Only)


TheQuickLookpluginprovidesanimagepreviewofthefileandathumbnailiconpreviewtomoreeasilylocatefiles.

42

| Chapter 2: Getting Started

Vectorworks File Preview


Whenafileissaved,animageofthecurrentviewofthefileisalsosavedinthefile.Thisimageisthensuppliedtothe operatingsystemwiththeQuickLookplugin,whichisprovidedwiththeVectorworkssoftware. Apreviewisnotavailableforfilessavedwithautosaveorbatchconvert. Thepreviewimagecanbeviewedinanumberofways: SelectoneormoredocumentswithintheFinder,andthenpresstheSpaceBar SelectadocumentandthenpresstheQuickLookbuttonwithintheFinder Selectadocumentinthecolumnview;thepreviewcolumncontainsthepreviewimage DisplaythepreviewimageinthepreviewsectionforGetInfo

Vectorworks File Thumbnail


VectorworksdocumentscanuseeitherthedocumentthumbnailiconorthestandardVectorworksicon.Thedefault settingforShowiconpreviewisoff(thestandardVectorworksicondisplays),andcanbechangedbytheView> ShowViewOptions(ortheCmd+Jkeyboardshortcut)fromtheFindermenu. WhenShowiconpreviewisenabled,thedefaultbehaviorappliesonlytothecurrentfolder,andtothecurrentfolder view(withorwithoutdetails,forexample).ClickallfoldersinFinderPreferencestoseethethumbnailsforallfolders. ChangethesettingforeachindividualView(listvieworcolumnview,forexample)toseeQuickLookthumbnailsin allfolderviews.

Closing a File |

43

Closing a File
Toclosethecurrentfile: 1. SelectFile>Closeorclickthecloseboxonthedrawingwindow. 2. Ifthefilechangedsinceitwaslastsaved,clickSave(Macintosh)orYes(Windows)tosaveandclosethefile. ClickDontSave(Macintosh)orNo(Windows)toclosethefilewithoutasave. Tocloseallopenfiles(Windowsonly): 1. SelectWindow>CloseAll. 2. Ifthefileschangedsincetheywerelastsaved,clickYestosaveandclosethefiles.ClickNotoclosethefiles withoutasave.

Saving a File
TheSavecommandsavestheopenfile,whichreplacestheearlierversionofthefile.Whenyousaveafileforthefirst time,specifythefilenameandlocation.TheSavecommandisdisabledifnochangeshavebeenmadetothefilesince itwasfirstopenedorcreated. OnWindows,thefilesrequirea.vwxor.mcdextensiontoberecognizedbytheVectorworksprogram.Ifyoudo notenteranextension,theprogramaddsthe .vwxextensionautomatically. Tosavethecurrentfile: 1. SelectFile>Save. Ifthefilehasnotbeensavedbefore,theSaveVectorworksDrawingdialogboxopens. 2. EnteranameforthefileintheNamefield,andthenselectthedestinationforthefile. 3. ClickSave. Theprogramsavesthefile.Thetimerequiredmaydependonthefilesize.

44

| Chapter 2: Getting Started

Save As
Tosavethecurrentfilewithadifferentname: 1. SelectFile>SaveAs. TheSaveVectorworksDrawingdialogboxopens. 2. EnteranewNameforthefile,andthenselectthedestinationforthefile. 3. ClickSave. Theprogramsavesanewcopyofthefile.Thetimerequiredmaydependonthefilesize.

Save a Copy As
Tosaveacopyofthecurrentfileandcontinuetoeditthecurrentfile: 1. SelectFile>SaveACopyAs. TheSavedialogboxopens. 2. EnteranewNameforthefile,andthenselectthedestinationforthefile. 3. ClickSave. Theprogramsavesanewcopyofthefileandkeepstheoriginalfileopenforfurtheredits.Thetimerequired maydependonthefilesize.

Automatically Saving Files


Theautosavefeatureautomaticallysavesthecurrentfileaftereitheraspecifiednumberofminutesoraspecified numberofoperations,asdefinedintheAutosavetaboftheVectorworksPreferencesdialogbox.SeeAutosave Preferencesonpage 24formoreinformation. IftheConfirmbeforesavepreferenceisselected,aconfirmationdialogboxdisplaysbeforetheautosaveisperformed. TheinformationthatdisplaysinthisdialogboxdependsonthesettingsselectedinVectorworkspreferences.

Parameter
Yes No Settings

Description
Savesthefile;ifthedocumenthasnotbeensaved,theSavedialogboxopenstonamethefilefirst Cancelsthesaveoperationandresetstheautosavecounters OpenstheVectorworksPreferencesdialogboxtoedittheautosaveparameters;selectDontbackup thisdocumentfortheremainderofthesessiontodisabletheautosavefeaturefortheactive documentfortheremainderofthesession

Reverting to the Last Saved Version |


Whenthesaveiscomplete,themessageAutosavecompletedisplaysinthelowerrightcornerofthewindow;the messageclearswhenyouclickthemouse.

45

Reverting to the Last Saved Version


TheReverttoSavedcommandreplacestheactivedrawingwiththemostrecentlysavedversion.Thisdeletesall changesmadesincethelastsave,whichcanremoveseveralundesirablechangesinonestep. Toreverttothelastsavedversion: 1. SelectFile>ReverttoSaved. Thisactioncannotbeundone.Confirmthatchangesshouldnotbesaved. 2. ClickOK. Theprogramclosestheactivedrawingandopensthelastsavedversionofthefile.

Converting Previous Version Files


TheVectorworksprogrammusttranslatefilescreatedinpreviousversionsintothecurrentformat.Theprogram cannotconvertMiniCAD6orearlierfiles,however. Toconvertanentirefolderoffilesatonce,usetheBatchConvertcommandasdescribedinConvertingPrevious VersionFilesasaBatchonpage 46. Toconvertonefileatatime,openandsavethefilewiththecurrentversionoftheprogramasdescribedin ConvertingaSinglePreviousVersionFileonpage 49. TheprogramautomaticallyappliesPNGcompressiontoimagescontainedinconvertedfiles. Youmayneedtocorrectthevisibilityofcropobjectsandannotationobjectsinsheetlayerviewports(seeSheetLayer ViewportParametersonpage 766). ForfilesearlierthanVectorworks2009,thegeometryofthedrawingobjectsisautomaticallyconvertedusingthenew Parasolidkernel.Theconversionmayfailforsomesolidsforavarietyofreasons:forexample,ifanobjecthas selfintersectingprofilesinsideanextrudeorsweep,orifanobjectssurfacesdonotpasstheParasolidchecks.Ifthis happens,theprogramconvertsalloftheotherobjectsandalertsyouthatsomeobjectswerenotconverted.A wireframerepresentationofthefailedsolidisincludedinthefile;youmaybeabletoedittheseobjectsandregenerate thesolids. AsofVectorworks2010,alldashstylesarenamed;customdashstylesareautomaticallynamedDashStyleX, (whereXisthenextavailablenumber).Torenameorchangethedisplayorderoftheavailabledashstyles,see CreatingCustomDashStylesonpage 535.

Migrating from Previous Versions


TheUpdatePluginObjectscommandconvertsavarietyoflegacyobjectstothecurrentformat.Thiscommandworks acrossallfilelayers,andasapplicable,onobjectsthatarefreestanding,insertedinwalls,inaplacedsymbol,orina symboldefinition.Allapplicableparametervalues,andanyattachedrecordsarealsotransferredduringthe conversion. Savingacopyofthefilepriortorunningthecommandisrecommended,asthecommandcannotbeundone. Toupdatepluginobjects: 1. Openafilecontaininglegacyobjects.

46

| Chapter 2: Getting Started

2. SelectTools>Utilities>UpdatePluginObjects. TheUpdatePluginObjectsdialogboxopens.

3. Selectthetype(s)ofobjectstoconverttothenewformat,andthenclickOK. Allolderversionobjectsoftheselectedtype(s)areconvertedintothenewformat.

Converting Previous Version Files as a Batch


Duringabatchconversion,theprogramscansallfilesinthesourcefolder(andinsubfolders,optionally),and convertspreviousversionfilestothecurrentformat.NonVectorworksfilesandVectorworksfilesthataretoooldto convertareskippedandrecordedinthelogfile. TherearetwooptionsforVectorworksfilesduringbatchconversions: Bydefault,theprogrammovesthepreviousversionfilestoanarchivefolderandplacestheconvertedversions ofthosefilesinthesourcefolder. Alternatively,theprogrammakesnochangestothesourcefolder.Instead,theconvertedfiles(andcopiesofany currentversionVectorworksfiles)areplacedinaspecifiedfolder. Toconvertabatchoffiles: 1. Placeallfilestobeconvertedinonefolder,orinsubfolderswithinthesourcefolder. 2. IntheVectorworksprogram,selectFile>BatchConvert. TheBatchConvertdialogboxopens.

Converting Previous Version Files |

47

Parameter
SourceFolder

Description
ClickChoosetoopeneithertheChooseSourceFolderdialogbox(Macintosh)orthe BrowseforFolderdialogbox(Windows);selectthefolderthatcontainsthefilesyou wanttoconvert,andthenclickChoose(Macintosh)orOK(Windows)toreturnto theBatchConvertdialogbox Toplacetheconvertedfilesintoadifferentfolder,clickChoosetoopeneitherthe ChooseDestinationFolderdialogbox(Macintosh)ortheBrowseforFolderdialog box(Windows).Selectthefolder,andthenclickChoose(Macintosh)orOK (Windows)toreturntotheBatchConvertdialogbox.ThendeselectConvertin place. Convertsthefileswithinthesubfoldersofthesourcefolder MovestheoriginalVectorworksfilestoanarchivefolder,andplacesthenewly convertedfilesintheoriginalsourcefilelocations.Thearchivefolderiscreated withinthesourcefolderandisnamedOldVersionVectorworksFiles. Deselectthisoptiontoplacetheconvertedfilesinthedestinationfolderandmakeno changestothesourcefolder.

DestinationFolder

Includesubfolders Convertinplace

Convertlayerlinksinto viewports (VectorworksDesignSeries required) Convertreferencedlayers intoreferencedviewports (VectorworksDesignSeries required)

Createsviewportsondesignlayersthatreferenceoneormorelayerswithinthesame file.Selectthisoptiontoconvertanylayerlinksintheolderversionfilesinto viewports.SeePresentingDrawingswithDesignLayerViewportsonpage 689in theVectorworksDesignSeriesUsersGuide. Createsviewportsondesignlayersthatreferenceoneormorelayersinanexternal file.Selectthisoptiontoconvertanyreferencedlayersintheolderversionfilesinto viewports.SeePresentingDrawingswithDesignLayerViewportsonpage 689in theVectorworksDesignSeriesUsersGuide.

48

| Chapter 2: Getting Started


Description
Convertsworkgroupreferenceswithabsolutefilepathstorelativefilepaths,ifa relativefilepathisallowed.Arelativefilepathisnotallowedifthefileisona differentvolumefromthereferencedfile.

Parameter
Convertabsolutereferences intorelativereferences (VectorworksDesignSeries required)

3. ClickOKtoconvertthefiles. Eachfileisbrieflyopenedandresavedintotheappropriatefolder.Subfoldernamesandhierarchiesare recreated,iftheyareincludedintheconversionprocess.IfConvertinplaceisselected,theoriginalfilesare movedtothearchivefolder,intheoriginalsubfolderstructure. 4. Oncetheconversioniscomplete,theBatchConversionResultsdialogboxdisplaysasummary.

Parameter
Totalfilesinsourcefolder Totalfilessuccessfullyconverted Totalcurrentversionfilescopied

Description
Thetotalnumberoffilescontainedinthespecifiedsourcefolder ThetotalnumberoffilessuccessfullyconvertedbytheBatchConvert command Thetotalnumberoffilesthatwerealreadyinthecurrentversionofthe Vectorworksprogram;ifConvertinplaceisselected,thefilesareleftinplace intheoriginalfolder;ifConvertinplaceisnotselected,thefilesarecopiedto thedestinationfolder Thetotalnumberoffilesthatwerenotconverted Thenumberoffilesthatwerenotconvertedbecausetheywerenot Vectorworksfiles Thenumberoffilesthatwerenotconvertedbecausetheydamagedinsome wayandcouldnotbeopenedandprocessed ThenumberoffilesthatwerenotconvertedbecausetheywereMiniCAD6or anearlierversion,whichisnotsupportedbytheBatchConvertcommand Thenumberoffilesthatwerenotconverted,forwhichtheprogramcouldnot detectareason

Totalfilesnotconverted NotaVectorworksfile Damagedfiles UnsupportedVectorworksfile version Unknownreasons

Converting Previous Version Files | Parameter


Oneormorefileshadsolid conversionerrors

49

Description
Thismessageindicatesthatoneormoreofthesuccessfullyconvertedfiles containedasolidthatcouldnotbeproperlygeneratedbytheParasolid kernel.Checkthelogfiletoseewhichfileshadsolidconversionfailures.You maybeabletoedittheconvertedgeometryandregeneratethesolids.

5. ClickDetailstoviewalogfilewithinformationabouteachfileprocessedduringtheconversion.

Converting a Single Previous Version File


Whenyouopenanolderfile,theprogramautomaticallyconvertsthefileandassignsitanappropriatename.By default,theprogramrenamestheconvertedfileandkeepstheoriginalfileintact.Changethedefaultsettingtorename theoriginalfileandusetheoriginalfilenamefortheconvertedfileinstead.Inthiscase,iftheoriginalfileis writeprotected,theprogramcannotrenameit;savetheconvertedfileandgiveitanappropriatename. Toconvertasinglefile: 1. InthecurrentversionoftheVectorworksprogram,openafilethatwascreatedwithapreviousversionofthe program. Aconversionalertboxopens,showingwhichfilewillberenamed,alongwiththenewname.Theaction describedinthedialogboxdependsonthecurrentsettingforconvertingfilenames.

50

| Chapter 2: Getting Started

2. Tochangethewaythisfilewillbeconverted,clickSettings. TheVectorworksdialogboxopens.

Parameter
Keeptheoriginalfilenamewith the Convertlayerlinksintoviewports (VectorworksDesignSeries required) Convertreferencedlayersinto referencedviewports (VectorworksDesignSeries required) Convertabsolutereferencesinto relativereferences (VectorworksDesignSeries required)

Description
Selectwhichfilewillhavetheoriginalfilename:theoriginalfileorthenew file Createsviewportsondesignlayersthatreferenceoneormorelayerswithin thesamefile.Selectthisoptiontoconvertanylayerlinksintheolderfileinto viewports.SeePresentingDrawingswithDesignLayerViewportson page 689intheVectorworksDesignSeriesUsersGuide. Createsviewportsondesignlayersthatreferenceoneormorelayersinan externalfile.Selectthisoptiontoconvertanyreferencedlayersintheolder versionfileintoviewports.SeePresentingDrawingswithDesignLayer Viewportsonpage 689intheVectorworksDesignSeriesUsersGuide. Convertsworkgroupreferenceswithabsolutefilepathstorelativefilepaths, ifarelativefilepathisallowed.Arelativefilepathisnotallowedifthefileis onadifferentvolumefromthereferencedfile.

3. SpecifytheconversionsettingsandclickOKtosavethechange;futurefileconversionswillusethissetting. 4. Intheconversionalertbox,clickOKtocontinuewiththeconversion. 5. IfthefilecontainsasolidthatcouldnotbeproperlygeneratedbytheParasolidkernel,analertdisplaystothis effect. Youmaybeabletoedittheconvertedgeometryandregeneratethesolid.(SeeConvertingPreviousVersion Filesonpage 45formoreinformation.)

Exiting Vectorworks |

51

Exiting Vectorworks
ToclosetheVectorworksprogramalongwithanyopenfiles: 1. FromtheFilemenu(Windows)orVectorworksmenu(Macintosh),selectQuit. 2. Ifthereareanyunsavedfiles,clickSave(Macintosh)orYes(Windows)tosavethechangesandexit.ClickDont Save(Macintosh)orNo(Windows)toexitwithoutasave.

Drawing Techniques
Objectsarecreatedusingthemouse,thekeyboard,oramouseandkeyboardcombination.

Using the Mouse


TheeasiestwaytodrawintheVectorworksprogramistousethemouse.Selecttheappropriatetoolbuttonandcreate anobjectineithertheclickdragortheclickclickmode,dependingonthetypeofobject. Inclickdragmode,clickandcontinuetoholddownthemousebuttonwhileyoucreateanobject;releasethebutton whentheobjectisthedesiredsizeandshape.
1st click

Release

Inclickclickmode,clickthemousetomarkthestartpointofanobject,andthenclickagainateachoftheobjects cornersorvertices.
1st click

2nd click

Theprogramdefaultstoclickclickmode,andallproceduresinthisguidearebasedonclickclickdrawing.This preferencecanbechangedinVectorworkspreferences. UsetheDatabarforaccurateobjectplacementandcreation.SeeUsingtheDataBaronpage 209.

Creating Objects with Object Properties


SomeofthecreationtoolscanbeusedinconjunctionwiththeObjectPropertiesdialogbox.

52

| Chapter 2: Getting Started

Rectangle Tool

TocreateobjectswiththeObjectPropertiesdialogbox: 1. Doubleclickthedesiredtool(orpressthetoolsshortcutkeytwice). ThetoolsObjectPropertiesdialogboxopens. 2. Enterthedesiredcriteria. 3. ClickOKtoacceptthesettingsandexitthedialogbox. IfPositionAtNextClickisselected,clickthemousetoselecttheobjectslocationinthedrawing.

Undoing and Redoing Actions


Specifypreferencestocontrolhowmanyactionscanbeundoneandredone.

Undoing Actions
Oneormoreofthemostrecentactionscanbeundone.Specifythenumberofactionsthatcanbeundoneonthe SessiontabofVectorworkspreferences.SeeSessionPreferencesonpage 21forinformationonthistab.The maximumnumberofactionsthatcanbeundoneis100.SelectIssueundowarningstoopenawarningdialogbox whenattemptingtoundoanactionthatcannotbeundone. Toundorecentchanges: SelectEdit>Undo. Themostrecentchangeisundone.ContinuetoselecttheUndocommandtoundochangesinthereverseorder inwhichtheywereperformed. Thehigherthemaximumnumberofundos,themorememorymayberequired.

Redoing Actions
Actionsthathavebeenundonecanthenberedone.Thenumberofactionsthatcanberedoneisdeterminedbyhow manyundoswereperformed.

Moving Around |
Toredoactionsthatwereundone: SelectEdit>Redo.

53

Themostrecentundoisreversedandtheactionisexecutedagain.ContinuingtoselecttheRedocommandwill redochangesinthereverseorderthattheywereundone.

Moving Around
Thereareseveralwaystomovearoundwithinadrawingfile,whichallowsyoutolookatthewholedrawingorat selectportionsofit.

Panning
UsethePantooltomovethedrawingaroundthedrawingwindow,changingtheareaofdisplay. Topanaroundthedrawing: 1. ClickthePantoolfromtheBasicpalette. 2. Movethehandintothedrawingwindow. 3. Clickandholddownthemousebutton,anddragthedrawingaroundthescreen. Therulersmovewiththepage. 4. Whenthedrawingshowsthedesiredarea,releasethemousebutton. Areasofthedrawingthatwereoffthepagedonotdisplayuntilthemouseisreleased.

DoubleclickthePantooltorefreshthedrawingview.

Panning with the Mouse Wheel


Onawheelmouse,clickandholddownthemousewheeltopanatanytime,regardlessofwhichtooliscurrently selected. Thisfeaturewillnotworkproperlyifthewheelbuttonhasbeenassignedacustomfunctioninthemousesetup.For example,ifthewheelbuttonissettoperformadeletewhenclicked,awheelclickintheVectorworksprogramdeletes ratherthanpans.(Thespecificsettingrequiredforthisfeaturedependsonthetypeofmousebeingused.)

54

| Chapter 2: Getting Started

Panning with the Arrow Keys


Usethearrowkeysonthekeyboardtopanatanytime,regardlessofwhichtooliscurrentlyselected.Specifythe arrowshortcutkeysforpanninginVectorworkspreferences(seeSettingVectorworksPreferencesonpage 17).Press theshortcutkeycombinationoncetomovethedrawingonehalfscreeninthedirectionofthearrow.

Moving the Page Print Boundary


TheMovePagetoolchangesthepositionoftheprintboundarywithinthedrawingarea.Thoughtheboundary moves,therulers,origin,andobjectsremainfixed.In3D,theworkingplanedoesnotmovealongwiththeboundary. Tomovethepage: 1. ClicktheMovePagetoolfromtheBasicpalette. 2. Clickanddragthepageoutlinetothedesiredlocation. Theoriginalpositionofthepagecontinuestodisplay,helpingtomeasureyourmovement. 3. Clicktosetthepositionofthepage.

PasteinPlaceworksfromuserorigin.Ifthepageismoved,theimageisplacedinrelationtotheorigin,notthenew pagelocation. DoubleclicktheMovePagetooltosetthepageorigintobethesameastheuserorigin.

Zooming
Zoomcontrolsthevisualscaleofadrawing.Itdoesnotaffectthephysicalsizeofobjectsassetbythelayerscaleinthe Organizationdialogbox.Likeamagnifyingglass,zoomcontrolshowcloseorfarawayobjectsappearonthescreen. Zoomintogetacloseupviewofadetail,andzoomouttogetabroaderviewofthewholedrawing. Duringazoomoperation,thedrawingcontinuestodisplaynormallyifpossible.Acomplexdrawingmaynotdisplay infulldetailduringazoomoperation,butassoonasthezoomiscomplete,thedrawingdisplaysnormally. TheVectorworksprogramincludeszoomfunctionalitythroughthemousewheel,throughbuttonsontheViewbar, andthroughtheZoomtoolontheBasicpalette.

Moving Around |

55

Zooming with the Mouse Wheel


Onawheelmouse,rollthemousewheelforwardtomagnifythedrawing(theZoomtoolontheBasicpaletteneednot beselected).Rollthemousewheelbackwardtozoomoutfromthedrawing. ThemousewheelbehavioriscontrolledbytheMousewheelzoomssettingintheEdittaboftheVectorworks Preferencesdialogbox.Ifthewheelissettoscrollbydefault,youmustpresstheCtrl(Windows)orOption (Macintosh)keywhileyourollinordertozoom.SeeEditPreferencesonpage 17fordetails. Thisfeaturewillnotworkproperlyifstandardscrollingisdisabledinthemousesetup.Forexample,ifthe mousesscrollingsizeissettonone,mousezoomingintheVectorworksprogramisdisabled.(Thespecific settingsrequiredforthisfeaturedependonthetypeofmousebeingused.)

Zooming from the View Bar


FromtheViewbar,clicktheZoombuttontodoublethemagnificationofthedrawing(asingleclickonthisbutton performsthesamefunctionasadoubleclickontheZoomtoolontheBasicpalette).Toreducethemagnificationby half,presstheAltkey(Windows)orOptionkey(Macintosh)whenyouclicktheZoombutton.Tozoombyaspecific amount,enterazoomfactorintheViewbar,orselectonefromthepulldownlist. Ifanobjectorobjectsarecurrentlyselected,thezoomiscenteredonthoseobject(s).Tozoomonaspecificareaofthe drawing(withnothingselected),clickinanopenareaandthenclicktheZoombutton.

Zoom In/Out

Current Zoom

Zooming with the Zoom Tool


TheZoomtoolhastwomodes.
Marquee Zoom Interactive Zoom

Mode
MarqueeZoom

Description
Magnifiestheportionofthedrawingthatiswithinthemarqueearea;inclickdragmode, simplyclickonce(donotcreateamarqueebox)todoublethezoomfactor Tozoomout,holddowntheOption(Macintosh)orAlt(Windows)keyduringthezoom.

InteractiveZoom

Interactivelyzoomsthedrawingarea

56

| Chapter 2: Getting Started

WiththeZoomtoolselected,doubleclickanywhereinthedrawingtoautomaticallyactivatetheSelectiontool. DoubleclicktheZoomtoolfromtheBasicpalettetodoublethemagnificationofthedrawing.TheZoomIn buttonontheViewbarperformsthesameaction.

Marquee Zoom Mode


Selectaportionofthedrawingtomagnifyusingmarqueeselection. Tomarqueezoom: 1. ClicktheZoomtoolfromtheBasicpalette. 2. ClicktheMarqueeZoommodebutton. 3. Clickanddragtocreateamarqueeboxaroundtheportionofthedrawingtomagnify. 4. Clickagaintozoomin. Vectorworksmagnifiestheselectedsectionsothatitfillsthedrawingwindow.

Tozoomout,holddowntheOption(Macintosh)orAlt(Windows)keywhileyoudrawamarqueeboxarounda portionofthedrawing.Clickagaintozoomout.Theprogramreducesthemagnificationtodisplayadditional portionsofthedrawingaroundtheselectedsection.

Interactive Zoom Mode


Chooseanareaofthedrawingtomagnifyinteractively. Tointeractivelyzoom: 1. ClicktheZoomtoolfromtheBasicpalette. 2. ClicktheInteractiveZoommodebutton.

Moving Around |

57

3. Clickinthedrawingandholddownthemousebutton(Macintosh)orleftmousebutton(Windows)whileyou movethemouseforwardtozoominonthedrawingfromthelocationoftheclick. Tozoomout,clickinthedrawingandholddownthemousebutton(Macintosh)orleftmousebutton(Windows) whileyoumovethemousebackwardtozoomoutofthedrawingfromthelocationoftheclick.

Normal Scale
TheNormalScalecommandautomaticallydisplaysthedrawingfileat100%ofitsrealworldscale.Forexample,ifa drawingscaleissetto1:1,everyinchonthemonitorcorrespondstoaninchonpaper.Normalscaleisthescaleat whichthedrawingisprinted. Tosetthedrawingtonormalscale: 1. SelectView>Zoom>NormalScale. Vectorworkschangestheviewsothattheobjectsscreensizeandprintsizearethesame. 2. Ifthedrawingsizeislargerthanthemonitorsdimensions,scrollorpanaroundthedrawingtoseeallelements.

Scrolling
Automatically Scrolling While Drawing
TheVectorworksprogramautomaticallyscrollsthedrawingareawhenanobjectisbeingdrawn. Touseautoscroll: 1. Selectanydrawingtool. 2. Pressandholddownthemousebuttontobegindrawing. 3. Dragthecursorontopoforpastascrollbarorruler. Thedrawingwindowscrollsinthedirectionofthecursor. Inclickclickmode,ifyoudonotholddownthemousebuttonwhileyoudraw,theautoscrollishaltedifthe cursorpassesascrollbarorruler;thisallowsinteractionwiththescrollbars,toolpalettes,andtoolsets.

Using the Scroll Bars


Usethescrollbarstomovethedrawingaroundthescreen.However,thescrollbarsarebestusedforsmall movements,becausetheyrequirethescreentoredrawmorefrequently.Forlargemovements,thePantoolisfaster.To displayorhidethescrollbars,changethescrollbarssettingintheVectorworksPreferencesdialogbox.

Scrolling with the Mouse Wheel


Onawheelmouse,presstheCtrl(Windows)orCmd(Macintosh)keywhileyourollthewheelforwardorbackward toscrollthewindowupordown.Toscrollthewindowleftorright,presstheShiftkeywhileyouroll. ThemousewheelbehavioriscontrolledbytheMousewheelzoomssettingintheEdittaboftheVectorworks Preferencesdialogbox.Thewheelcanbesettoscrollbydefault,sothatnoadditionalkeymustbepressedwhileyou rollinordertoscroll.SeeEditPreferencesonpage 17fordetails. Thisfeaturewillnotworkproperlyifstandardscrollingisdisabledinthemousesetup.Forexample,ifthe mousesscrollingsizeissettonone,mousescrollingintheVectorworksprogramisdisabled.(Thespecific settingsrequiredforthisfeaturedependonthetypeofmousebeingused.)

58

| Chapter 2: Getting Started

Selecting Objects
UsetheSelectiontoolfromtheBasicpalettetoselectobjectsforthenextcommandoreditoperation.TheShiftkeyand theAlt(Windows)orOption(Macintosh)keyaremodifiersforselectionactions.Createrectangular,lasso,or polygonalmarqueesaroundobjectstoselectsingleormultipleobjects.Thefollowingtabledescribesthevarious selectionmethods.

Method
Click Optionclick(Macintosh)or Ctrlclick(Windows) Shiftclick Optiondrag(Macintosh)or Ctrldrag(Windows) Rectangle,lasso,polygonmarquee Shiftmarquee Optionmarquee(Macintosh)or Altmarquee(Windows) InvertSelectioncommand(onthe Editmenu) Doubleclick

Selection Action
Standardselectionmethod;selectsasingleobjectonly Createsacopyoftheobjectandplacesitdirectlyovertheselectedobject, unlessthepreferencehasbeendisabled(seeEditPreferencesonpage 17) Selectsmultipleobjectsaseachobjectisclicked;alsocanbeusedtodeselect oneormoreobjectswithoutaffectingotherselectedobjects Placesacopyoftheobjectwherethemousebuttonisreleased Selectsallobjectsthatarecompletelycontainedwithinthemarquee Reversestheselectionstatusofobjectsinsideamarquee;ifobjectsinsidethe marqueeareselected,thismethoddeselectsthoseobjects Selectsallobjectsthatthemarqueepassesthrough,aswellasthosecontained withinthemarquee Deselectseverythingthatiscurrentlyselected,andselectsallvisibleobjectsin editablelayersandclassesthatarenotcurrentlyselected Reactivatestheworkingplaneonwhichaplanarobjectwascreated;mayalso haveotherbehaviorsuchassymboleditingorpolygonreshaping,depending onselectedsettings

Todeselectallselectedobjects,clickinanemptyareaofthedrawing,orpressthexkeytwiceinrapidsuccession.

The Selection Tool


UsetheSelectiontooltoselectobjects,tomoveandresizeobjectsinanyview,andtoinsertobjectsinornexttoawall. Anadditionalmode,EnableConnectedWalls,becomesavailablewhentheVectorworksArchitect/Landmarkproduct isinstalled.SeeMovingConnectedWallsonpage 118intheVectorworksDesignSeriesUsersGuideforinformation. Formarqueeselection,presstheOption(Macintosh)orAlt(Windows)keywhiledrawingthemarqueetoselectall objectsthatintersectthemarquee.
Single Object Interactive Scaling Disable Interactive Scaling Wall Insertion Enable Lasso Selection

Enable Polygonal Selection

Unrestricted Interactive Scaling

Enable Rectangular Selection

Selecting Objects | Mode


DisableInteractiveScaling SingleObjectInteractive Scaling

59

Description
Noreshapehandlesdisplayforaselectedobject,sothatitcanbedraggedfromany pointwithoutaccidentallyaffectingitssize Allowsresizingbydraggingareshapehandlethatdisplaysonasingleselectedobject
Drag the middle handle to the right to reduce the rectangles width

Allowssymbolstobescaled,similartotheScalingoptionintheObjectInfopalette, unlesstheAllowInteractive2DsymbolscalingVectorworkspreferencehasbeen disabled;seeEditPreferencesonpage 17. Pagebasedsymbolscanonlybescaledsymmetrically. Torotatecertainobjects(suchasrectangles,roundedrectangles,ovals,textobjects, bitmaps,andPICTimages),presstheOptionkey(Macintosh)orAltkey(Windows) whiledraggingareshapehandle

Drag the lower left handle upward and to the right to rotate the rectangle

UnrestrictedInteractive Scaling

Allowsresizingofmultipleobjectsbydraggingareshapehandlethatdisplaysonone oftheselectedobject(s)
Drag the middle handle to the right to reduce the width of both rectangles

WallInsertion

Allowssymbolsandpluginobjectsthatarealreadyondrawingtobeplacedintoa wallsegment.Whendisabled,symbolscanbemovednexttooronawallwithout becomingpartofthewall.SeeWallInsertionModeonpage 183formore information.

60
Mode

| Chapter 2: Getting Started


Description
Createsamarqueeboxaroundobjectswhenselecting.Clicktosetthestartpoint,drag themouseinthedesireddirection,andreleasetosettheendpoint.Allobjectswithin themarqueeareselected.

EnableRectangular Selection

EnableLassoSelection

Createsafreeformmarquee,allowingamoreexactselectionofirregularshapes. Clicktosetthestartpoint,dragthemouseinthedesireddirection,andreleasetoset theendpoint.Allobjectswithinthemarqueeareselected.

EnablePolygonalSelection

Createsamarqueewithanirregularpolygonalshape.Clicktosetthestartpoint,and thencontinueclickingtodefinetheshape.Doubleclicktofinishthemarquee.All objectswithinthemarqueeareselected.

Toselectobjects: 1. ClicktheSelectiontoolfromtheBasicpalette. 2. Selecttheappropriatemode. 3. Selectthedesiredobject(s).

Selecting Objects |

61

Select All
TheSelectAllcommandselectsallvisibleobjectsineditablelayersandclasses.Theactivelayerisalwayseditable,but otherlayerscanbeeditableiftheyarevisibleandiftheLayerOptionsaresettoShow/Snap/ModifyOthers.Formore informationaboutsettinglayerandclassvisibilityandlayerandclassoptions,seeSettingVisibilitiesonpage 118 andSettingClassandDesignLayerOptionsonpage 113. Toselectallobjectsinthedrawingarea: SelectEdit>SelectAll. Alternatively,rightclick(Windows)orCtrlclick(Macintosh)onthedrawingarea,andselectSelectAllfromthe documentcontextmenu. Theprogramselectsallvisibleobjectsthatcanbemodified.Eachoftheseselectedobjectsisdisplayedwith highlighting.Lockedobjectsarealsoselectedsotheycanbeunlockedformodification.

Previous Selection
ThePreviousSelectioncommandreselectsthesetofobjectsthatweremostrecentlyselected.Thisisespeciallyuseful ifalargenumberofobjectswereaccidentallydeselected. Toreselectpreviouslyselectedobjects,selectEdit>PreviousSelection.

Coincident Object Selection


Whentheedgesorpointsofmultipleobjectsexistatthesamelocationonthedrawing,youmightnotbeabletosimply clickwiththeSelectiontooltoselecttheobject(s)youneed.Thedesiredobjectmighthaveanedgethatcoincideswith theedgeofanotherobject,forexample.Inthissituation,anasterisk(*)isaddedtothevariousselectioncursorsto indicatethatmultipleobjectsexistatthecurrentlocation,asfollows.

Move cursor

Selection cursor

Add Selection cursor

Resize cursor

YoucanthenuseeithertheCoincidentSelectionkeyortheSelectCoincidentObjectscommandfromthecontext menutoopenadialogboxfromwhichyoucanselecttheappropriateobjects. Toselectoneormorecoincidentobjects: 1. ClicktheSelectiontoolfromtheBasicpalette. 2. Whenthecursorindicatesthatmultipleobjectsareavailablebeneathit,pressandholdtheCoincidentSelection key(Jbydefault)andclickthedrawing.Alternatively,rightclick(Windows)orCtrlclick(Macintosh)andselect SelectCoincidentObjectsfromtheobjectcontextmenu. TheCoincidentSelectionkeycanbechangedintheWorkspaceEditor;seeModifyingSnappingandMode Shortcutsonpage 887. 3. TheSelectdialogboxopens.Eachobjectavailableforselectionatthatpointdisplaysinalist,intoptobottom stackingorder.

62

| Chapter 2: Getting Started

4. Clicktoselectoneormoreitemsfromthelist;theselectedobjectsarehighlightedinthedrawing. 5. ClickOKtoclosethedialogboxandselecttheobjects. Alternatively,doubleclickanitemfromthelisttoselectitinthedrawing.

X-ray Fills Mode


A2Dobjectthathasafillobscuresobjectsthatarebeneathitonthesamedesignlayeroronothervisiblelayers.To makeiteasiertoseethesehiddenobjectsandselectthemwiththeSelectiontool,usetheXrayFillsmode.Whenthe designatedkeyispressed,all2Dobjectswithfillbecomesemitransparent,asifyouwerelookingthroughthemwith anXray. InadditiontotheSelectiontool,theXrayFillsModecanbeusedwithothertoolsthatrequiretheselectionofobjects, suchastheEyedropper,Visibility,andSelectSimilartools.GDI+imaging(Windows)orQuartzimaging(Macintosh) mustbeenabledintheDisplaytaboftheVectorworkspreferencesforthisfeaturetowork. ToseeandselectobjectswiththeXrayFillsmode: 1. ClicktheSelectiontoolfromtheBasicpalette. 2. PressandholdtheXrayFillsModekey(theBkeybydefault).All2Dobjectsthathaveafillbecome semitransparent(edgelinesareunaffected). TheXrayFillsModekeycanbechangedintheWorkspaceEditor;seeModifyingSnappingandMode Shortcutsonpage 887. TheopacityoffillsinXrayFillsModecanbechangedintheInteractiveAppearanceSettingsdialogbox;see ConfiguringInteractiveDisplayonpage 65. 3. ClickorShiftclicktoselectobjectsasneeded.Objectsareselectedthesamewaytheyarenormally,exceptthata filledobjectthatisbeneathanotherobjectbehavesasifithasnofill;youmustclicktheedgeoftheobjecttoselect it.

Selecting Objects |

63

Layer 1 has an exterior view of a building made from filled objects. Even though the layer options are set to Show/Snap/Modify Others, the objects on Layer 2 are not visible and cannot be selected by clicking with the Selection tool.

Layer 2 has a section view of the same building, also made from filled objects. When the X-ray Fills Mode key is pressed, all filled objects become transparent. The objects on Layer 2 are visible and can be selected by clicking with the Selection tool.

Selection and Pre-selection Indicators


Whenyoumovethecursorovertheobjectsinadrawing,andwhenyouselectobjects,highlightingandhandles provideinformationaboutthecurrentstateoftheobjects.Theseindicatorscanbecustomizedasneededinthe Vectorworkspreferences.SeeInteractivePreferencesonpage 25fordetails.

Highlighting
Highlightingcanindicatethefollowinginformationaboutanobjectinadrawing. Currentlyselected Currentlypreselectedbecauseitisunderthecursor(orwithintheselectionmarquee) Locked Onaninactivelayer Causingoneofthedisplayedsnappoints Canbeacteduponbythecurrentlyactivetool

IntheVectorworkspreferences,thereareseveraloptionstocustomizethehighlighting. Thedifferenttypesofhighlightingcanbeenabledanddisabledindividually. Thehighlightingforselectedobjectscanbeanimated. Thetimingofthehighlightingforpreselectedobjectscanbeadjusted. Thecolor,opacity,andsizeofeachtypeofhighlightingcanbeadjusted.

Bydefault,allhighlightingoptionsareenabled,andselectedobjectsdisplayasshowninthefollowingillustration.

64

| Chapter 2: Getting Started

The cursor is snapping to the circles center; the circle has gray dashed line highlighting, in addition to the orange selection highlighting

Objects highlighted in orange are on the active layer and are not locked

Objects highlighted in gray are locked

Objects highlighted in dark orange are on an inactive layer Sample highlighting with several types of objects selected

Handles
Inadditiontohighlighting,squarehandlescandisplayonselectedobjects.Theappearanceofthehandlesis controlledbytheSelectionhighlightingsettingontheInteractivetabintheVectorworkspreferences.Also,thecolors ofthehandlescanbecustomized. Ifselectionhighlightingisenabled(thedefaultsetting): Handlesdisplayonaselectedobjectiftheobjectcanbeeditedwiththeactivetool Unlockedobjectsontheactivelayerhavebluehandles Unlockedobjectsonaninactivelayerhavewhitehandles Lockedobjectshavenohandles(sincetheycannotbeedited) Handlescanbeusedasreshapepoints

Ifselectionhighlightingisdisabled: Handlesdisplayonallselectedobjects Unlockedobjectsontheactivelayerhavebluehandles Lockedobjectsontheactivelayerhavegrayhandles Allobjectsonaninactivelayerhavewhitehandles Someofthehandlescanbeusedasreshapepoints,andsomecannot,dependingontheobject,andonwhichtool isactive

Selecting Objects |
Selection highlighting enabled Selection highlighting disabled

65

The selected wall is highlighted in orange; blue handles indicate that the wall can be reshaped with the active tool

With three walls selected, the locked wall (bottom) is highlighted in gray; there are no handles because the objects cannot be reshaped with the active tool

With three walls selected, the locked wall (bottom) has a gray handle on the right side; the unlocked walls have blue handles

Configuring Interactive Display


Youmayfindithelpfultocustomizetheappearanceofinteractiveelementsintheprogram,includinggeneral elements,objecthighlighting,SmartCursorelements,andsnappoints. Toconfiguretheappearanceofinteractiveelements: 1. SelectTools>Options>VectorworksPreferences.OntheInteractivetaboftheVectorworksPreferencesdialog box,clickInteractiveAppearanceSettings. Alternatively,selectTools>SmartCursorSettings.OntheGeneraltaboftheSmartCursorSettingsdialogbox, clickInteractiveAppearanceSettings. TheInteractiveAppearanceSettingsdialogboxopens. 2. SelecteithertheStandardBackgroundorBlackBackgroundtab,dependingonwhethertheblackbackground displaypreferenceisenabled(seeDisplayPreferencesonpage 19).Thesameelementscanbecustomizedfor bothbackgroundtypes,exceptthattherearenooptionsforsettingbackgroundcolorsforblackbackgrounds.

66

| Chapter 2: Getting Started

Element
General ActiveLayerPlane

Description
Setsthecolorandopacityoftheactivelayerplane grid

Example

Background3DViews (StandardBackgroundonly)

Setsthebackgroundcolorofthedrawingareafor designlayersin3Dviews

Selecting Objects | Element


BackgroundSheetLayers (StandardBackgroundonly)

67

Description
Setsthebackgroundcolorofsheetlayers

Example

BackgroundTop/Plan (StandardBackgroundonly)

Setsthebackgroundcolorofthedrawingareafor designlayersinTop/Planview

EditingModesBorder

Setsthecolor,opacity,andthicknessofthecolored borderwheninaneditingmode

Grid

Setsthecolorandopacityofthereferencegrid

PageBoundary

Setsthecolorandopacityofthepageboundary border

ReshapeHandlesActive Layer ReshapeHandlesInactive Layer WorkingPlane

Setsthecolorofthesquarehandlesthatcanbe draggedtoreshapeaselectedobjectontheactive layer Setsthecolorofthesquarehandlesthatcanbe draggedtoreshapeaselectedobjectonaninactive layer Setsthecoloroftheworkingplaneandopacityof itsfillandframe,aswellastheopacityand thicknessoftheworkingplaneaxes

68

| Chapter 2: Getting Started


Description
Setsthecolor,opacity,andthicknessofthe highlightingforobjectsbeingmodified

Element
ObjectHighlighting Action

Example

ActiveLayer

Setsthepattern,forecolor,backcolor,opacity,and thicknessofthehighlightingforanobjectthatis selectedontheactivelayer Setsthepattern,forecolor,backcolor,opacity,and thicknessofthehighlightingforanobjectthatis selectedonaninactivelayer Setsthecolorandopacityoftheautomaticworking plane

InactiveLayer

AutomaticPlaneSource

Locked

Setsthepattern,forecolor,backcolor,opacity,and thicknessofthehighlightingforanobjectthatis locked Setsthecolor,opacity,andthicknessofthe highlightingforanobjectthatispreselectedonthe activelayer;anobjectcanbepreselectedbybeing eitherunderthecursorsselectionbox,orinsidea selectionmarquee Setsthecolor,opacity,andthicknessofthe highlightingforanobjectthatispreselectedonthe inactivelayer Setsthecolor,opacity,andthicknessofthe highlightingforanobjectthatislocked Setsthecolor,opacity,andthicknessofthe highlightingforanobjectthatisbeingsnappedto; thehighlightingisalwaysadashedline Setstheopacityfortherepetitionsoftheselected tileobjectthataredisplayedwhenatileresourceis beingedited

PreSelectionActiveLayer

PreSelectionInactive Layer PreSelectionLocked

SnapObject

TileHighlighting

Selected tile object

Repeated object

Selecting Objects | Element


ToolHighlighting

69

Description
Setsthecolor,opacity,andthicknessofthe highlightingforanobjectthatcanbeeditedbythe activetool

Example

SmartCursor AcquisitionHints Setsthecolor,opacity,andthicknessofthe graphicalhintswhichdisplaynearthecursorto showwhenasmartpoint,smartedge,orvector lockcanbeacquiredorreleased

CueBackground

Specifiesthebackgroundcolorandopacityof SmartCursorcues SetsthecolorandsizeofSmartCursortext

CueText

DatumIndicator

Setsthecolor,opacityandthicknessofthedatum indicator

ExtensionLinesAngle

Setsthecolor,opacityandthicknessofangle extensionlines

ExtensionLinesSmart Point

Setsthecolor,opacityandthicknessofsmartpoint alignmentlines(theselectedcolormaybe overriddenbythedefaultX,Y,andZaxiscolors) Setsthecolorandopacityofangleandalignment planes(theselectedcolormaybeoverriddenbythe defaultX,Y,andZaxiscolors)

Planes

SelectionBox

Setsthecolor,opacity,andthicknessoftheselection boxaroundtheSmartCursor

70

| Chapter 2: Getting Started


Description
Setsthecolor,opacityandthicknessofsmartedge lines

Element
SmartEdges

Example

SmartPoints

Setsthecolor,opacity,andthicknessofsmartpoints

SnapBox

Setsthecolor,opacity,andthicknessofthesnapbox aroundtheSmartCursor

VectorLocks

Setsthecolor,opacity,andthicknessofvectorlocks

SnapPoints Available Setsthecolor,opacity,andthicknessofsnappoints availablenearthecursorandwithinthesnapbox

CongestionIndicator

Setsthecolor,opacity,andthicknessofthesnapbox whentherearetoomanyavailablesnappoints aroundtheSmartCursor(usingthesnaploupeis recommendedinthissituation;seeUsingtheSnap Loupeonpage 152) Setsthecolor,opacity,andthicknessofthecurrent snapindicator Setsthecolor,opacity,andthicknessoftheacquired snappoint

Current

Obtained

Special

Setsthecolor,opacity,andthicknessofsnappoint hintssuchasmidpoint,center,alongline,and tangentsnaps

Setting Up the Drawing | Element


Reset

71

Description
Restoresthedefaultsettingsforallinterface elements

Example

3. Clickthecolumnheadingtosortbyinterfaceelement,ifdesired.Selecttheelementtochange,andthensetthe parametersthatdisplaytotherightoftheelementlistasneeded.Differentparametersdisplay,dependingonthe elementselected.

Parameter
Pattern/ForeColor/BackColor

Description
Touseasolidcolor,selectthecolorfromtheForeColormenu;thenfromthe Patternmenu,selectthesolidpatternforthatcolor Touseapattern,selecttheForeColorandBackColorcolorsfromthemenus(see SelectingaColorfromaColorPaletteonpage 570);thenselectaPattern

Color Opacity Size

Selectthecolorfromthemenu(seeSelectingaColorfromaColorPaletteon page 570) Dragthesliderrighttoincreaseorlefttodecreasetheopacityoftheinteractive element Dragthesliderrighttoincreaseorlefttodecreasethewidthoftheinteractive element

4. ClickOKtosavethesettings,whichapplytoallVectorworksdrawings. 5. FromtheVectorworksPreferencesdialogbox,clickOKagaintosavethepreferences.

Setting Up the Drawing


Beforebeginninganewdrawing,determinedrawingpropertieslikescale,units,interactivedisplays,colorpalettes, linethickness,anddimensionstandards.SeePaletteLayoutOptionsonpage 10tosetthepreferredwindowoptions priortosettingupthedrawing. Thecombinationoflayers,classes,andviewscanproduceavarietyofdrawingsgeneratedfromasinglefile(see DrawingStructureonpage 89).Properfilesetupensuresmaximumusabilityformultipleoutput. Thethreerequireddrawingsettingsarelayerscale,units,anddrawingsize.Oncetheseareestablished,optional drawingsettingscanbefoundindocumentpreferences,scripts,snapandreferencegrids,layersandclasses,andother defaults;althoughmakingthesesettingsisnotrequired,itisrecommended. Settingupthelayersandclasseswhilesettingupthedrawingisrecommended.SeeManagingLayersonpage 93 andManagingClassesonpage 105formoredetailedinformationaboutcreatinglayersandclasses. Whenusingtemplates,manyofthesesettingswillhavealreadybeenspecified.

Design Layer Scale


Layerscaleistheratiooftheactualsizeofanobjecttoitssizeinadrawing.Layerscaleexiststoallowgraphic propertiesofthedrawingormodeltoberepresentedproperly,asthoughyouweredrawingataparticularscaleona pieceofpaper.Forexample,forthedefaultlayerscaleof1:1,everyinchinthedrawingrepresentsaninchinthereal world.Thescalingvalueallowstheproperrepresentationofattributessuchaslineweight,linestyle(dashlength), markersize,textsize,andhatches.

72

| Chapter 2: Getting Started

InWhatYouSeeIsWhatYouGet(WYSIWYG)drawing,anintendedoutputscaleisneededtoproperlydisplay theseattributes;thisallowsyoutoseehowthedrawingwilllookatthatintendedformat.Forpracticaluse,setthe layerscaletobethesameasthatofthepredominantoutputscaleoftheproject.Thiswillnecessitatetheleastamount ofattributescalinginviewports. Vectorworkscansetonescaleforalldesignlayersinadrawing,orsetadifferentscaleforindividualdesignlayers.

Changing the Scale of the Drawing or the Active Design Layer


Tochangethescaleoftheactivedesignlayeroroftheentiredrawing: 1. Rightclick(Windows)orCtrlclick(Macintosh)inthedrawingareatoaccessthedocumentcontextmenu,and thenselectActiveLayerScale.Alternatively,ifthelayerscaleisdisplayedontheViewbar,clicktheLayerScale button. TheLayerScaledialogboxopens.

2. Eitherselectascale,orenteracustomvalueinPaperScale. 3. Tosimultaneouslychangethescaleofallexistingdesignlayersintheentiredrawing,selectAllLayers. 4. Toscaletextproportionallytotherestofthedesignlayer,selectScaleText.DeselectScaleTexttokeepthetextat itscurrentsizeevenifthescalechanges. 5. ClickOKtoreturntothedrawing.

Changing the Scale of Selected Design Layers


Tochangethescaleofoneormoreselecteddesignlayers: 1. SelectTools>Organization. TheOrganizationdialogboxopens.ClickontheDesignLayerstab. 2. Selectthelayer(s)tochangefromtheDesignLayerlistandclickEdit(ordoubleclickasinglelayername). TheEditDesignLayersdialogboxopens(seeSettingDesignLayerPropertiesonpage 97). 3. ClickScale.

Setting Up the Drawing |


TheLayerScaledialogboxopens. 4. Eitherselectoneofthescales,orenteracustomvalueinPaperScale.

73

5. Toscaletextproportionallytotherestofthedesignlayer,selectScaleText.DeselectScaleTexttokeepthetextat itscurrentsizeevenifthescalechanges. 6. MakesurethatAllLayersisnotselected. 7. ClickOK.

Units
TheVectorworksprogramprovidesawiderangeofmeasurementsystemstoselectfromandalsoprovidesthe flexibilitytocreateacustomizedmeasurementsystem.Theselectedmeasurementsystemisappliedglobally throughoutthedrawing,fromthemeasurementsthatdisplayontherulerstothoseusedindimensionsand worksheets. TheUnitscommandopenstheUnitsdialogbox,whichorganizesunitssettingsontwotabbedpanes: TheGeneralDisplayandDimensionstabsettingsaffecttheunitsthroughoutthedrawingandtherounding settingsforprimarydimensions. TheDualDimensionstabcontainsmanyofthesameparametersfoundontheGeneralDisplayandDimensions tab,butitssettingsapplyonlytosecondarydimensions.Ifdualdimensionsarenotbeingused,thesesettings havenoeffect.Formoreinformationondualdimensioning,seeDualDimensioningonpage 722.

Selecting a Unit System


Toselectorchangethecurrentmeasurementsystem: 1. SelectFile>DocumentSettings>Units. TheUnitsdialogboxopens. 2. Specifytheunitsdisplayparameters,andthenclickOK.

74

| Chapter 2: Getting Started

Parameter
Length Units

Description
Selectthedesiredlengthmeasurementsystemfromthelist. Ifthissettingischangedfromonemetricunittoadifferentmetricunit,the DecimalprecisionandDimensionobjectprecisionvaluesareautomatically scaledbythesameratio,tomaintainthesameinherentprecisionthedocument hadbefore.Ifthesettingischangedfromanonmetricunittoametricunit,the precisionvaluesareautomaticallysettonewdefaultvaluessuitableforthe selectedmetricunit.

Custom ShowUnitMark

IftheCustomunitisselected,clickCustomtocreateacustomlengthmeasurement system;seeCreatingaCustomUnitSystemonpage 76 Selecttodisplaytheunitmarkalongwiththeunitvalue;iftheFeet&Inchesunitis selected,Vectorworksautomaticallydisplaysunitmarksandtherefore,ShowUnit Markappearsdimmed Selecttodisplayathousandsseparatorinthevaluesofdimensionobjects;the separatorused(aperiodorcomma)dependsonthecurrentregionalsettinginthe operatingsystem Separatorsarefordisplayonly;theyarenotusedintheObjectInfopalette,orin thedimensiontextasitisbeingedited

ShowThousands SeparatorsinDimension Text

Setting Up the Drawing | Parameter


RoundingStyle Fractional Decimal ExactasFractions/ NonExactasDecimals FractionalDisplayfor Dimensions

75

Description
Roundingonlyaffectshownumbersaredisplayed;ifthenumber1.23456isentered witharoundingof .00,thevalueisrecognizedas1.23456butdisplaysas1.23 Selectforfractionalrounding Selectfordecimalrounding Selectforacombinationoffractionalanddecimalrounding IfafractionalRoundingStylewasselected,selectastyleforthefractionsthatappear indimensions: Standard: Diagonallystacked: Verticallystacked:

RoundingPrecision Fractionprecision Decimalprecision Dimensionobject precision IfafractionalorcombinationRoundingStylewasselected,selectthefractional precisionvalue,upto1/64 IfadecimalorcombinationRoundingStylewasselected,selectuptotendigitsof decimalprecision Selectaprecisionvaluefordimensionobjects;tolinkthedimensionvaluetothe fractionordecimalprecisionvalue,clickthelinkbuttontotherightoftheprecision fields: Selectwhetherdecimalroundingisperformedusingmultiplesoftenths,quarters,or halves;theoptionselectedisreflectedintheDecimalprecisionfield Selectwhetherdimensionroundingisperformedusingmultiplesoftenths,quarters, orhalves;tolinkthedimensionvaluetothedecimalbasevalue,clickthelinkbuttonto therightoftheroundingbasefields:

Decimalroundingbase Dimensionrounding base

DecimalOptions LeadingZero TrailingZeros Area/Volume/Angle Units Selectthearea,volume,andangularmeasurementsystemfromthelist. Ifthissettingischangedfromonemetricunittoadifferentmetricunit,the Precisionvalueisautomaticallyscaledbythesameratio,tomaintainthesame inherentprecisionthedocumenthadbefore.Ifthesettingischangedfroma nonmetricunittoametricunit,theprecisionvalueisautomaticallysettoanew defaultvaluesuitablefortheselectedmetricunit. Custom IftheCustomareaorvolumeunitisselected,clickCustomtocreateacustomareaor volumemeasurementsystem;seeCreatingaCustomUnitSystemonpage 76 Ifoneofthedecimalroundingoptionsischosen,selecttodisplayaleadingzero Ifoneofthedecimalroundingoptionsischosen,selecttodisplaytrailingzero(s)

76

| Chapter 2: Getting Started


Description
Forareaandvolumemeasurementsystems,selectuptotendigitsofdecimal precision.Forangularmeasurementsystems,selecttodisplayangularunitsindegrees (thereare360degreesinacircle,andtheanglemarkis),radians(thereare2pi radiansinacircle,andtheanglemarkisr),orgradians(thereare400gradiansina circle,andtheanglemarkisg);also,selectuptoeightdigitsofangularprecisionor specifydegrees,minutes,and/orseconds.

Parameter
Precision

Creating a Custom Unit System


Tocreateacustomizedmeasurementsystem: 1. SelectFile>DocumentSettings>Units. TheUnitsdialogboxopens. 2. SelectCustomfromthelength,area,orvolumeUnitslist,orifeditinganexistingcustommeasurementsystem, selectthecustomnamefromtheUnitslist. 3. ClickCustom. TheCustomUnits:Length,CustomUnits:Area,orCustomUnits:Volumedialogboxopens,dependingonthe typeofcustomunitbeingcreatedoredited.Theavailablevaluesineachfieldvarybasedonthecustomunit type.

Parameter
UnitName UnitMark SmallerfromLarger LargerfromSmaller

Description
Namegiventothecustommeasurementsystemforexample,Cubit Mark(abbreviation)usedtorepresentaunitinthecustommeasurementsystemfor example,cbt Setthenumberofcustomunitsthatoccurperselectedunitforexample,ThereAre2 UnitsPerInch Setthenumberofselectedunitsthatoccurpercustomunitforexample,ThereAre2 InchesPerUnit

Setting Up the Drawing |


4. ClickOKtoexittheCustomUnitsdialogbox. 5. EntertheremainingcriteriaasdescribedinUnitsonpage 73. 6. ClickOK.

77

Snap and Reference Grids


Therearetwoseparategridsystemsforprecisedrawing:thesnapgridandthereferencegrid.

Reference Grid

Snap Grid

TheSnapGridassistswithdrawingandplacingobjectsprecisely.Thesnapgridappearsassmalldotswhenzoomed in,dependingonthesnapgriddimensions.ThesnapgridisusedincombinationwiththeSnaptoGridsnapping optionontheSnappingpalette.Asthemousemovesacrossthescreen,itautomaticallycatchesateachincrementon thesnapgrid.Whenyouareplacingordrawinganobject,itsnapstothegrid. Withshortcutkeys,objectscanbemovedconstrainedtothesnapgrid.SeeEditPreferencesonpage 17formore information. TheReferenceGridnormallydisplaysonthescreen(dependingonthezoomfactorandgriddimensions),andcanbe printed.Themostusefulwaytosetthereferencegridissothatitisanextensionofthesetscale. Dependingonthedrawing,thesnapandreferencegridscanhaveidenticalordifferentdimensions.Forexample,if youaredesigningkitchencabinetswithatoleranceofonesixteenthofaninch,setthesnapgridto1/16.Itwouldbe hardtodrawonascreenthatdisplayed16horizontalandverticallinessqueezedwithineveryinch.Forthatreason, youmightwanttomarkoffonlywholeinchesonthescreenbysettingthereferencegridto1. Atfilesetup,establishthesnapandreferencegridsettingsbasedonthedrawingscale.SeeGridSnappingon page 135.Thecolorofthereferencegridcanbechanged;seeConfiguringInteractiveDisplayonpage 65.

Guides
TheMakeGuidecommandenablestheplacementofguidelineswhichcanbeusedtovisuallyalignobjectsinthe drawing.Guidescanbeanyshapeandsize.Inadditiontoprovidingvisualclues,guidesworkwiththeSmartCursor toensureprecisealignment.GuideobjectsarelockedintoaclasscalledGuidesandarecoloredlightpurple.Guides areprintedunlesstheHideGuidescommandisselected,ortheDeleteAllGuidescommandhaspermanently removedthem.

78

| Chapter 2: Getting Started

Tocreateaguide: 1. Createtheobjecttobecomeaguide. 2. Selecttheobject. 3. SelectModify>Guides>MakeGuide. TheobjectchangesintoaguideandisplacedinaGuidesclass. OntheGuidescommandsubmenu,thefollowingoptionscanbeselected.

Option
MakeGuides SelectGuides ShowGuides HideGuides DeleteallGuides

Description
Theobjectbecomesaguide Selectsalltheguidesinadrawing Displaysguideswhichwerehidden Temporarilyhidestheguidesinthedrawing Permanentlyremovesallguidesandtheobjectsusedtocreatethem

Youcansnapobjectstotheguide(s)closesttoitbyusingSnaptoObjectfromtheSnappingpalette.Thedistance atwhichtheobjectssnaptotheguidesisdeterminedbytheSnapboxsizesettingintheVectorworks preferences.SeeInteractivePreferencesonpage 25fordetailsonsettingthesnapradiussetting. Todeleteasingleguide,highlightitandthenselectModify>Unlock.Theguideisnoweditable.SelectEdit>Clearto removeitfromthedrawing.Aguidecanalsobeunlockedinordertomoveittoanewlocation.SelectModify>Lock tolocktheguideintoplaceonceitisrelocated.

Set Origin
UsetheSetOrigincommandtochangetheplacementoftheorigininthedrawingarea.Theworkingplaneisalso movedtothelayerplaneorigin.TheoriginisthepointwheretheXandYaxesmeet(0,0).Itsdefaultplacementisat thecenterofthedrawingarea. Alldesignlayershavethesameorigin,buteachsheetlayerhasitsownorigin,independentoftheotherlayers. Tosettheorigin: 1. Tosettheoriginforaspecificsheetlayer,selectthesheetlayerfirst. Alternatively,editthesheetlayerpropertiesfromtheOrganizationpalette. 2. Fordesignlayers,makesuretheactivelayerisinTop/Planview. 3. SelectTools>SetOrigin.TheSetOrigindialogboxopens. Alternatively,doubleclicktheSetOriginbutton(seeSetOriginButtononpage 79).

Setting Up the Drawing |

79

Parameter
SetOrigintoNextMouseClick SetOrigintoDrawingCenter NextMouseClickIs

Description
Changesthecursortoabullseyecursor;clicktosettheorigintoanypoint withinthedrawingarea Setstheorigintotheinternaldrawingcenter;thedrawingcenterisafixed internalpointusedtopositionallobjects Setstheclickedpointtospecificcoordinates.Afterselectingthisoption,enter theXandYcoordinatesofthepoint.Theoriginissetaccordingtothevalues enteredwhenclickingalocuspointoranotherreferencepoint.Thisoptionis mostusefulfordrawingsthathaveadistantreferencepoint. DisablestheSetOriginbutton,topreventtheoriginfrombeingmoved inadvertently

DisabledraggingfortheSet Originbutton 4. ClickOK.

Switching Between Two Origins


Onereasontochangetheoriginistomakeiteasiertoworkwiththerulerbars.Forexample,theSwissuseareference pointsystemforarchitecturalmeasurements,whereeverythingisinrelationtoapointinEurope.Whenabuildingis locatedatasite,thatsiteisreferencedtobeacertaindistanceanddirectionfromthispoint.Usingthissystemcreates largenumbersontherulerbarsandintheObjectInfopalette.IntheSetOrigindialogbox,youcanswitchbetweenthe localorigin(thebuildingsite)andthedistantorigin(thereferencepoint). Aftersettingthelocaloriginandadistantcenter,itiseasytoswitchbetweenthem.Theoffsetvaluesenteredforthe distantoriginaresavedwiththefile,sonoinformationneedstobereenteredunlesstheoriginischanged.

Set Origin Button


TheSetOriginbuttonisatthetopleftofthedrawingwindow,atthejunctionofthetworulers.Thisbuttonperforms thesamefunctionastheSetOrigintoNextMouseClickoptiondescribedinSetOriginonpage 78.

80

| Chapter 2: Getting Started

TousetheSetOriginbutton: 1. ClicktheSetOriginbutton.Whenyoumovethecursoroverthedrawingarea,youarepromptedtoconfirmthat theoriginshouldbemoved. IftheSetOriginbuttonhasbeendisabled,amessagedisplaysintheMessagebar.SelectTools>SetOriginor doubleclicktheSetOriginbuttontoopentheSetOrigindialogboxandenablethebutton. 2. Movethecursortothenewlocation,andclicktosettheorigin. Theworkingplaneisalsomovedtothelayerplaneorigin.

Setting Default Object Attributes


Thedefaultattributesforadocumentaretheattributesthatareautomaticallyappliedtoeachnewobjectwhenitis created.Tosetthedefaultattributes,simplyadjusttheAttributespalettesettingswithnoobjectsselected. Whenyoufirstopenanewdocument,setthedefaultattributestothoseyouusemostoften.Forexample,youmight adjustthefillandlinecolors,dashstyle,andlinethickness.Theavailableattributescanbecustomizedasneeded. Thedefaultattributesapplytothecurrentdocumentonly.Tosaveasetofdefaultattributesorcustomattributesfor futureuse,settheattributesasdesiredandsavethedocumentasatemplate.

Creating Templates
Saveadrawingfileasatemplatetouseitasafoundationfornewfiles.Templatessavelayers,classes,titleblocks, sheetborders,resources,andthecurrentsettingsforattributesandunits.(SeeCreatingaNewFileonpage 39for detailsaboutusingatemplate.) Whenatemplateisopened,theVectorworksprogramautomaticallyopensacopyofthefile.Whenthenewdrawingis savedthefirsttime,theprogrampromptsforanewfilename.Thismakesitimpossibletoaccidentallyreplacethe mastertemplatewiththenewdrawingfile. Tocreateatemplate: 1. Startwithanew,emptyfile. 2. Setupthefilewithallofthedesiredelements. 3. SelectFile>SaveAsTemplate. 4. Enterthenameofthetemplate(.sta)fileandplaceitinanappropriateTemplatesfolder.(SeeUserFolders Preferencesonpage 26fordetailsabouthowtospecifythefolderforyouruserdata.) Tosavethetemplateforpersonaluse,placeitintheTemplatessubfolderinyouruserdatafolder:[User]/ Libraries/Defaults/Templates. IfVectorworksDesignSeriesproductsareinstalled,youcansharethetemplatewithotherusersina workgroup.Todoso,placeitintheTemplatessubfolderofaworkgroupfolderonanetworkdrive;other userscanthenspecifythatworkgroupfolderintheirVectorworkspreferences:[Workgroup]/Libraries/ Defaults/Templates. The .staextensionisrequiredforWindows.ItisrecommendedforuseontheMacintoshifthefilewillbeshared withWindowsusers. 5. ClickSave.

Printing |

81

Theprogramlauncheswithablankdrawingfile,in1:1scale.Tolaunchtheprogramwithafilecontainingdifferent settings,namethetemplatefileDefault.staandsaveitintheTemplatessubfolderinyouruserdatafolder:[User]/ Libraries/Defaults/Templates.

Printing
The Print Area
Withinthedrawingareaisacoloredborderwhichdefinestheprintarea.Anythingwithintheprintareaisprintedand anythingoutsideoftheprintareaisnotprinted.

Print area

Drawing area

ThesettingsfromboththePageSetupandPrinterSetupdialogboxesdeterminethenumberofsheetsofpaper(pages) requiredtoprinttheentiredrawingontheselectedprinter. Thisallowsthesamedrawingtobeprintedorplottedtonumeroussourceswithoutreadjustingthedrawing.For example,ifyouenterthedimensionsofaDsizesheetoftechnicalpaperinthePrintableAreaofthePageSetup dialogbox,andselectLetterpapersizeinthePrinterSetupdialogbox,theprogramdeterminesthatthedrawing needstobetiledacross12sheetsof81/2x11papertoastandardlaserprinter.Thenumberof81/2x11pages requiredforprintinghorizontallyandverticallyareautomaticallyupdatedinthePageSetupdialogbox.Tosendthis samedrawingtoaplotter,changethesettingsinthePageSetupdialogboxforaplotter,andtheprogramconvertsthe pagesrequiredaccordingly. Thecoloroftheprintareabordercanbechanged;seeConfiguringInteractiveDisplayonpage 65. Thepagesetup(includingtheprintablearea)isspecifiedindividuallyforeachsheetlayer(seeSettingSheet LayerPropertiesonpage 104).

Page Setup
ThePageSetupdialogboxsettingsdeterminethenumberofsheetsofpaper(pages)requiredtoprinttheentire drawingontheselectedprinter.Itisalsousedtospecifywhethertodisplaythegraydrawingboundarybox representingtheprintareafordesignlayers,andwhethertodisplaypagebreaksinthedrawingfile. Tochangethepagesetupsettings: 1. SelectFile>PageSetup. ThePageSetupdialogboxopens.

82

| Chapter 2: Getting Started

Parameter
Pages Horizontal Vertical Showpageboundary

Description
Specifythenumberofpagesinthehorizontaldirection Specifythenumberofpagesintheverticaldirection Selecttodisplayagrayborderaroundtheperimeteroftheprintareafordesignlayers (thissettingisselectedbydefault);alternatively,pressAlt+Btotoggleselectioninthis field.Thissettingalsoaffectsthevisibilityofthepageboundaryinaunifiedview (DesignSeriesrequired). Sheetlayersalwaysdisplaythepageboundary.

Showpagebreaks

Indicateshowthedrawingisdividedovereachprintablepage;fordesignlayers,the pageboundarymustbedisplayedinordertoseethepagebreaks(thissettingisselected bydefault) IfthefileiscreatedinaneducationalversionofVectorworkssoftware,itincludesa watermark.Thisoptionisselectedbydefaultandindicateswhethertodisplay watermarksonscreen,atthetopandbottomofeverypageboundary;thepage boundarymustbedisplayedinordertoseethewatermarks. Thetitlebarclearlyindicateswatermarkedfiles.Awatermarkedfilealwaysprints thewatermark,regardlessofthedisplayoptionsethere.

Showwatermarks

PrintableArea Choosesize unavailablein printersetup Size/Width/Height PrinterSetup IfthedesiredpapersizeisnotavailableinthePrinterSetupdialogbox(seePrinter Setuponpage 83),selectthisoption,andthenselectthedesiredpaperSizefromthe list;thisisusefulwhensendingfilestoaprintbureauthathasdifferentpapersizes availablethanyourprinter Tomanuallyspecifythepapersize,selecttheappropriatedrawingunits(inchor millimeter)andenterthepaperWidthandHeight AccessesthePrinterSetupdialogboxforspecifyingtheprinter,papersize,drawing scale,andorientation;seePrinterSetuponpage 83

Printing |
2. Specifythepagesetupoptions,andclickOK.

83

Printer Setup
ThePrinterSetupdialogboxsettingsdeterminetheprinter,papersize,scale,andorientationofthedrawing. Tochangetheprintersetupsettings: 1. SelectFile>PageSetup. ThePageSetupdialogboxopens. 2. ClickPrinterSetup. ThePrinterSetupdialogboxopens,configuredtotheselectedprinter.

3. Scalingresizestheentiredrawingbyaspecifiedpercentage.ToaccesstheScalingfieldintheMacintoshPrinter Setupdialogbox,selectVectorworksfromtheSettingslist. SelectingaprinterinPrinterSetup(Macintosh)onlychangesthedrawingssettings;tochangetheprinterusedforthe drawing,accesstheMacintoshSystemPreferences.

Printing a File
TheprogramcanprintorplottoanydevicethatisselectedinthePrint&FaxSystemPreferences(Macintosh)or PrinterandFaxesControlPanelitem(Windows).Theactualparametersoftheprintedorplottedfilearedetermined bytheprintersetupsettings. Allvisibleobjects,classes,andlayerswithintheprintareaoftheVectorworksfileareprinted. Toprintafile: 1. SelectFile>Print.OntheMacintosh,specifytheprintersetupparametersandthenclickOK. ThePrintdialogboxopens;theoptionsthatdisplaydependonwhichprinterorplotterisselected.

84

| Chapter 2: Getting Started


TodisplayadditionalprintoptionsontheMacintosh,selectVectorworksfromthedropdownboxthatdisplays thedefaultoption,Copies&Pages.

Windows Print dialog box with GDI+ Imaging enabled

Macintosh Print dialog box with Quartz Imaging enabled

2. Specifytheprintoptions,suchaswhichpagestoprintandhowmanycopiestomake.Thefollowingprint settingsareavailable:

Platform
Macintosh

Setting
ApplicationPrint Resolution(DPI)

Description
Setsaresolutionfortheapplicationoutput;thisaffectsonly VectorworksgeometryandanyPICTorPDFobjectsthatmustbe rasterized.Theresolutionforbitmaps,rendereddesignlayers, andviewportsarecontrolledelsewhere;seeSettingthePrint Resolutiononpage 86fordetails. EitherselectarecommendedDPIvalueforthisprintertype(from thedropdownlist),ormanuallyenteravalue.WhenQuartz imagingisenabled,thisalwaysdefaultstoaminimumof300 DPI,foroptimumprintingresults.

MacintoshQuickDraw imagingonly

PrintPostScript only

IfyouhaveaPostScriptprinter,youcanselectthisoptiontosend onlyPostScriptcommandstotheprinter;thiscanspeedtheprint process

Printing | Platform
WindowsandMacintosh

85

Setting
Graylevelfor grayedlayersand classes Enablespecial processingfor transparentcolor bitmaps

Description
Adjuststhelevelofgraywhenprintingwithgrayedlayersand or/classes WhenGDI+imagingisdisabledintheVectorworksdisplay preferencesonWindows,orQuartzisdisabledontheMacintosh, someprinters(includingPostScriptprinters)cannotsupport transparentcolorforrasterimages,whichcanaffectbitmapsand pictureobjectsthathavethefillstylesettoNone.Selectthis optiontouseamoredetailed(andslower)imagingprocessto printtransparencyproperly. Translatesrotatedtextintoabitmapimage,topreventproblems withprinterdriversthatcannotinterpretrotatedtext Printstheviewcurrentlydisplayedinthefilewindow;thisview isscaledlargerorsmallertofittheselectedpagesize

WindowsandMacintosh

MacintoshQuickDraw imagingonly WindowsandMacintosh

Disabledrivertext rotation Printcurrentview only(Macintosh) orCurrentView (Windows) Rasterizeprint output

Windows,Macintosh QuickDrawimaging only WindowsandMacintosh

Printsthedrawingasarasterbitmap.Selectthisoptionwhenthe printermemoryisinsufficient,orwhenimageproblemsoccur (forexample,toprintdesignlayertransfermodesonOSXoron PostScriptprinters). Printsfillpatternsatapproximatelythesamesizeastheyappear onthescreenata100%zoom.(WhenQuickDrawimagingis enabledonMacintosh,thisoptionhasaneffectonlyifthe Rasterizeprintoutputoptionisalsoselected.) Deselectthisoptiontousetheunscaledprinterresolution(which isusuallymuchlower);onnonPostScriptprinters,thisprints faster.

Printpatternsat onscreen resolution

WindowsandMacintosh

Updatevisibleout ofdateviewports priortoprinting Resetallplugin objectsthatrequire aresetpriorto printing

Automaticallyupdatesanyvisible,outofdateviewportsbefore printing Automaticallyresetspluginobjectsthatrequireanupdate(such asdatastamps)beforeprinting

WindowsandMacintosh

3. IftheRasterizeprintoutputoptionisselected,specifytheedgeoftheimageonscreenthatisthefirstedgeto comeoutoftheprinter. Thefirstedgetocomeoutoftheprinterdependsontheprinterdriver,thepageorientation,andtherotation optionsthataresupportedbythedriver.Itcannotbepredictedbytheprogram.Ifthewrongpageedgeis selected,someportionsofthedrawingmayfailtoprintiftheprinterrunsoutofmemory. TheRasterizePrintOutputmethodcanbesignificantlyslowerthanotherprintmethods. 4. ClickPrint(Macintosh)orOK(Windows)toprint.

86

| Chapter 2: Getting Started

Setting the Print Resolution


TheresolutionatwhichVectorworksobjectsareprintediscontrolledbydifferentsettings,dependingonthetypeof objectandonwhetherimagingpreferencesareenabled. ArasterrenderedviewportiscontrolledbytheDPIsettingofitssheetlayer(whichdoesnotaffectvectorgeometry orbitmapsthatareinsidetheviewport).SeeSettingSheetLayerPropertiesonpage 104. ArasterrendereddesignlayeriscontrolledbythePrintingDPIontheResolutiontabintheDocumentPreferences. SeeResolutionPreferencesonpage 31. VectorworksgeometryiscontrolledbytheresolutionselectedfromthePrintdialogbox. RasterizedPICTandPDFobjectsarecontrolledbytheresolutionselectedfromthePrintdialogbox;rasterization occursasfollows: OnMacintosh,ifQuartzimagingisnotenabled,PDFandrotatedPICTobjectsarerasterized. OnWindows,ifGDI+imagingisnotenabled,PDFobjectsarerasterized;PICTobjectsarealwaysrasterized.

Using Drawing Tablets


TheVectorworksprogramcanbeusedwithdrawing,ordigitizingtablets,providinganadditionalwaytocreate drawings.TheprogramiscompatiblewithAppleDesktopBus(ADB)digitizingtabletsaswellasdigitizingtablets thatsupporttheWinTabstandard. Acommonuseforatabletinvolvestracinganexistinghardcopyofadrawing.Placethedrawingonthetabletand tracealongthelinestodigitizethedrawing.Becausetabletsusuallyhavefinerresolutionthanamouse,thereisbetter controlforcreatingobjects.Further,ifthetabletusesastylusforinput,useofthetabletmightfeelmorenatural, similartoholdingapenorpencilversususingamouse. Usingadigitizingtabletrequiresthedriversoftwarethatcomeswiththetablet.SelectTools>Tablet;Vectorworks searchesforthisdriver.Oncefound,theprogramdeterminesthesizeandresolutionofyourtablet.(Iftheprogram cannotfindthedriver,adialogboxopens.) Oncethedriverisfound,agrayboxdisplaysaroundthedrawingarea.Thisboxoutlinestheboundaryofthedrawing tablet;themovementofthetabletstransducerisconstrainedtothisboundarybox.Inordertoaccessmenusand palettesthatareoutsideofthisboundary,eithertoggleoutofTabletmodeorkeepthemouseconnectedanduseitto selecttheseitems. Thetabletboundarydependsonthesizeofthetabletaswellasthecurrentlayerscaleandzoomfactor.Atabletwitha 4x3usableareawithanimperiallayerscaleof1 :100wouldbeconstrainedtoadrawingarea400x300inthe program.Naturally,adjustingthezoomfactorwillreducetheapparentphysicalsizeoftheconstrainedareainrelation tothescreen,buttheinternallyrepresenteddimensionsremainconstant. TheTabletcommandsynchronizesthetabletwiththescaleandunitssettingsforthedrawing.Forexample,ifyou havetheScalesetto1:1andtheUnitssettoFeetandInches,then1inchonthetabletequals1inchinthedrawingarea onthescreen.Further,ifyouhavetheUnitssettoMetersandtheScalesetto1:100,then1inchonthetabletequals2 metersinthedrawingarea. Duetodifferingtabletresolutionsandsizes,thesevaluesmightbedifferentthanwhatisobtainedforthesame settings.Experimentwiththesettingstoachievethedesiredresults.Forexample,foroneinchonthetabletto equal2metersinthedrawingarea,youmighthavetosettheScaleto1:50versus1:100. Touseadrawingtablet: 1. SelectTools>Tablet.

Using Drawing Tablets |


Theprogramdisplaysthetabletasalargegrayborderinthedrawingarea.Thisbordermaynotbevisible, dependingonthezoomandscroll. 2. Followthedirectionsthatcamewiththetabletforusingittotraceordrawobjects.

87

WhileinTabletmodeinWindows,usingbutton1toclickonatoolormenuoutsideofthedrawingareahasno effect.Usebutton2totoggleoutofTabletmodebeforeselectingthetoolormenu. Theprogramassignscertainfunctionstothebuttonsonthetabletcursorandsupportscursorswithuptofour buttons.TheprogramalsoprovidestheoptionofpressingthekeyboardsF2,F3,andF4keysforbuttons2,3,and 4,respectively.Thisisparticularlyusefulfordrawingtabletsthathavefewerthanfourbuttons.Thereisan automaticscrollingfeaturewhich,whenactivatedinTabletmode,scrollsthescreenimagewhenmovingthe cursorpastthedisplayededgeofthedrawing.Thesefunctionsaredescribedinthefollowingtable.

Button No.
1 2 3 4

Function
Samefunctionasa(left)mouseclick TogglestheTabletmodeonandoff Recentersthedisplaytothecurrentpositionofthepointer;noeffectwhenTabletmodeisdisabled Togglesautomaticscrollingonandoff

Aligning a Tablet
Whenyouuseatablet,youhaveoptionsforaligningthetabletwiththedrawingarea.Alignthecenterofthedrawing withthetabletscenter,alignthe2Dlocuspointwiththecenterofthetablet,oralignthe2Dlocuspointwiththe positiononthetabletofthenexttabletcursorclick.Bydefault,theprogramalignsthecenterofthetabletwiththe centerofthedrawingarea. Toalignthe2Dlocuswiththecenterofatablet: 1. Setalocuspoint. SeeCreatingLocionpage 255fordetailsonsettingloci.Keepthelocuspointselected. 2. SelectTools>Tablet. IfalreadyinTabletmode,deselectandselectitagaintoalignthetablet. TheTablettoScreenMappingdialogboxopens. 3. ClickAlignTabletCentertoSelectedLocus. TheAlignNextTabletClicktoSelectedLocusoptionallowsyoutotracemultipleobjectsfromdifferentsources andhavethemdisplayinthedrawingatthecorrectcoordinates.Forexample,iftwobuildingsneedtomaintain asetdistancefromeachother,setalocuspoint,alignthetablettothatlocus,andcreatethefirstbuilding.When thatbuildingiscompleted,setasecondlocuswherethesecondbuildingissupposedtobe,realignthetablet,and createthesecondbuilding.Theboundaryforthetabletismovedandtherelationshipbetweentheobjectsis maintained. 4. ClickOK. Thecenterofthetabletisnowalignedwiththeselectedlocuspoint.Thetabletsboundaryboxmovestoindicate thecenterofthedrawingtabletinrelationtothedrawingarea. Thisactiononlyaffectsthecenterofthedrawingtablet.Thedrawingareasoriginisunaffected.

88

| Chapter 2: Getting Started

Drawing Structure

TheVectorworksprogramhasseveralfeaturestohelporganizeanddisplayadrawing:designlayers,sheetlayers, classes,viewports,andviews.Createastructuredsystemwiththesefeaturestomakeitconsiderablyeasiertoselect, view,andprintdrawingelements. Forefficiencyandconsistency,createmasterlibrariesoflayers,classes,andresourcesthatcanbesharedbymultiple usersviaworkgroupreferencing. Thissectiondescribestheseorganizationalaidsandhowtousethemeffectively.

Organizing the Drawing


Whenyoubeginadrawingproject,firstdevelopalayerandclassstructure,alongwithasystemforassigningitemsto theappropriatelayersandclasses.Alayerisbasicallyacontainerthatholdsitems.Layersarecomparabletothesheets ofvellumthatareusedforhanddrafting;eachitembelongstoalayerinthesamewaythatahanddrafteditem belongstoitsvellumsheet.(Additionally,intheVectorworksArchitectproduct,designlayerscanbelongto buildingstories.) Aclass,however,isanattributeofanobject.Classesspanthelayersandallowyoutocontroltheattributesand visibilityofobjectsacrossmultiplelayers.Tooutputspecificelementsofadrawingquicklyandeasily,simplyselect theappropriatelayersandclassesfordisplay. Theprogramalsoprovideswaystosavethecurrentdrawingdisplaywithhistoriesandsavedviews,andtopresent finaldrawingswithviewports.Viewsandhistoriesprovideasliceoftimelookatthedrawing.Historiesrecord viewsofthedrawinginastacksimilartothewayInternetbrowsersdo,whilesavedviewsstoreoneormoreaspects ofthecurrentdisplay,suchastheview,zoom,andlayerandclassvisibilitysettings.Viewportsareusedtodisplay finalviewsofadrawingforclientpresentation. CreateandmanagethesestructuralelementsusingtheOrganizationdialogbox.Thisdialogboxhasspecialized functionstosortandselectitslistitems;seeListBoxFunctionalityonpage 14. TousetheOrganizationdialogbox: 1. SelectTools>Organization.Alternatively,clicktheClassesorLayersbuttonontheViewbar,orselectEditView fromtheSavedViewsmenuontheViewbar. TheOrganizationdialogboxopens.

90

| Chapter 3: Drawing Structure

2. Selecttheappropriatetabfortheelementtobecreatedoredited:Classes,DesignLayers,SheetLayers, Viewports,SavedViews,orReferences.IntheVectorworksArchitectproduct,theStoriestabisalsoavailable. 3. Fromthetopofthedialogbox,selecteitherDetailsorVisibilitiesview. Generally,theDetailsviewshowsthecurrentsettingsforeachelement,andenableseditingoflayerandclass visibilitiesinthedrawingarea;theVisibilitiesviewenableseditingoflayerandclassvisibilitiesinviewportsand insavedviews. 4. Buttonsatthebottomofeachtabprovidecreationandmanagementfunctions.Alternatively,rightclick (Windows)orCtrlclick(Macintosh)onalistitemtodisplayacontextmenu,whichhasmostofthesame functionsasthetabbuttons.

Button
Classestab New Edit Duplicate

Function
ClickNewtoopentheClassOptions(Macintosh)orNewClass(Windows)dialogbox.See CreatingClassesonpage 106. SelectaclassandclickEdittoedititintheEditClass(es)dialogbox.SeeSettingClass Propertiesonpage 108. SelectaclassandclickDuplicatetocreateacopyofit.Thenameoftheduplicateisthesame astheoriginalclass,withanumberadded(asincabinets2);iftheoriginalnameendsina number,thenextavailablesequentialnumberisused. SelectaclassandclickDeletetoopentheDeleteClass(es)dialogbox.Specifywhattodowith theobjectscurrentlyassignedtotheclass(es)beingdeleted(deletethem,orreassignthemto anotherselectedclass).ClickOKtoreturntotheOrganizationdialogbox.Vectorworks movesallobjectsinthedeletedclass(es)totheappropriateclass,ordeletesthem,asspecified. NotethattheDimensionandNoneclassescannotbedeleted.Thesearedefaultclassesin everydrawing.

Delete

Preview

Displaysapreviewofthecurrentsettingsinthedrawingarea

Organizing the Drawing | Button


DesignLayerstab New Edit Duplicate ClickNewtoopentheNewDesignLayerdialogbox.SeeCreatingLayersonpage 94.

91

Function

SelectalayerandclickEdittoedititintheEditDesignLayersdialogbox.SeeSettingDesign LayerPropertiesonpage 97. SelectadesignlayerandclickDuplicatetocreateacopyofit.Thenameoftheduplicateis thesameastheoriginallayer,withanumberadded(asinfloorplan2);iftheoriginalname endsinanumber,thenextavailablesequentialnumberisused. SelectadesignlayerandclickDelete;whenprompted,clickYestoconfirmthedeletion. Whenadesignlayerisremovedfromthedrawing,allobjectsinthatlayerarealsoremoved. Notethatatleastonedesignlayermustremaininthedrawing.

Delete

Preview Update Reference (onthecontext menuonly) LevelTypes (Vectorworks Architect required) PageSetup Storiestab (Vectorworks Architectrequired) SheetLayerstab New Edit Duplicate

Displaysapreviewofthecurrentsettingsinthedrawingarea (Layerimportreferencingmethodonly)Thisoptionisavailableifadesignlayerhasbeen importedintothisfilewithworkgroupreferencing(thenameofthereferencedlayerdisplays initalics).Toupdatethisfilewithlayerinformationfromthemasterfile,rightclick (Windows)orCtrlclick(Macintosh)thelayer,andselectUpdateReferencefromthecontext menu.SeeWorkgroupReferencingonpage 121. Managesavailableleveltypes;seeManagingLevelTypesonpage 6intheVectorworks DesignSeriesUsersGuide

OpensthePageSetupdialogbox.SeePageSetuponpage 81. Displaysinformationaboutthestoriesinthefile;seeCreatingandManagingStorieson page 7intheVectorworksDesignSeriesUsersGuide

ClickNewtoopentheNewSheetLayerdialogbox.SeeCreatingLayersonpage 94. SelectasheetlayerandclickEdittoedititintheEditSheetLayersdialogbox.SeeSetting SheetLayerPropertiesonpage 104. SelectasheetlayerandclickDuplicatetocreateacopyofit.TheSheetTitleoftheduplicate isthesameastheoriginallayer.TheSheetNumberoftheduplicateisthesameasthe originallayer,withanumberadded(asindetails2);iftheoriginalSheetNumberendsina number,thenextavailablesequentialnumberisused. SelectasheetlayerandclickDelete;whenprompted,clickYestoconfirmthedeletion Displaysapreviewofthecurrentsettingsinthedrawingarea

Delete Preview Viewportstab New

SelectNewtoopentheCreateViewportdialogbox.Forsheetlayerviewports,seeCreating aSheetLayerViewportfromaDesignLayeronpage 762inthisguide.Fordesignlayer viewports(VectorworksDesignSeriesrequired),seeCreatingaReferencedDesignLayer Viewportonpage 692intheVectorworksDesignSeriesUsersGuide.

92

| Chapter 3: Drawing Structure


Function
SelectaviewportandthenselectEdittoedititinthePropertiesdialogbox.Forsheetlayer viewports,seePropertiesofSheetLayerViewportsonpage 766inthisguide.Fordesign layerviewports(VectorworksDesignSeriesrequired),seePropertiesofDesignLayer Viewportsonpage 696intheVectorworksDesignSeriesUsersGuide. SelectaviewportandclickDuplicatetocreateacopyofit.Thenameoftheduplicateisthe sameastheoriginalviewport,withanumberadded(asindetails2);iftheoriginalname endsinanumber,thenextavailablesequentialnumberisused. TheDrawingTitleoftheduplicateisthesameastheoriginalviewport.Iftheoriginal viewporthasadrawinglabel,theDrawingNumberofthelabelintheduplicateviewportis thenextavailablesequentialnumber. Vectorworksplacestheduplicateviewportdirectlyontopoftheoriginal,intheoriginalsheet layer. Delete Preview SelectaviewportandclickDelete;whenprompted,clickYestoconfirmthedeletion Displaysapreviewofthecurrentsettingsinthedrawingarea

Button
Edit

Duplicate

SavedViewstab New Edit Duplicate ClickNewtoopentheSaveViewdialogbox.SeeCreatingSavedViewsonpage 114. SelectasavedviewandclickEdittoedititintheEditSavedViewdialogbox.SeeEditing SavedViewsonpage 116. SelectasavedviewandclickDuplicatetocreateacopyofit.Thenameoftheduplicateisthe sameastheoriginalview,withanumberadded(asindeckview2);iftheoriginalnameends inanumber,thenextavailablesequentialnumberisused. SelectasavedviewandclickDelete;whenprompted,clickYestoconfirmthedeletion

Delete Referencestab New

ClickNewtoopentheOpenFiledialogbox.Forlayerimportreferences,seeAddingand EditingLayerImportReferencesonpage 123inthisguide.Fordesignlayerviewport references(VectorworksDesignSeriesrequired),seeCreatingaReferencedDesignLayer Viewportonpage 692intheVectorworksDesignSeriesUsersGuide. SelectareferencedfileandclickEdittoopentheEditReferencedialogbox.Forlayerimport references,seeAddingandEditingLayerImportReferencesonpage 123inthisguide.For designlayerviewportreferences(VectorworksDesignSeriesrequired),seeCreatinga ReferencedDesignLayerViewportonpage 692intheVectorworksDesignSeriesUsers Guide. SelectareferencedfileandclickDelete.IntheDeleteReferencedialogbox,specifywhatto dowiththeitemsinthefilethatarecurrentlyreferenced.SeeDeletingReferenceson page 130. SelectareferencedfileandclickUpdatetoupdatethisfilewithinformationfromthemaster file.SeeUpdatingReferencesonpage 126. ClickSettingstoopentheReferenceSettingsdialogbox.SeeSettingtheReferencing Optionsonpage 122.

Edit

Delete

Update Settings

Managing Layers |

93

Importing Drawing Structure from Standards or Other Files


Specificaspectsofthedrawingstructure(classes,sheetlayers,anddesignlayers)canbeimportedfromoneormore existingfiles.ThefilesfromwhichyouimportcanbethestandardfilesprovidedwiththeVectorworkssoftware,or otherfilesthatyouhavecreated. Thestandardfiles(.stafiles)arelocatedintheStandardsfolder(in[Vectorworks]/Libraries/Defaults).Layerstandards useonlyapprovedlayernamesforaparticularindustry.Classstandardsuseapprovednameandclasssettingsfora particularindustry.Customlayersorclassescanbecreatedinablankfileandsavedasan .stafileintheStandards folder.OncetheyareplacedintheStandardsfolder,thesenewlayersorclassesbecomepartoftheStandardslistand areavailablewhennewlayersorclassesarecreated. Ifoneofyourworkfilesbecomescorrupted,apossiblerecoverymethodistoimportthedataintoanewfile.Createa newfileandthenimportclasses,sheetlayers,anddesignlayers(andoptionally,designlayerobjects)fromtheoriginal fileasneeded. Toimportdrawingstructure,usetheOrganizationdialogboxtocreateanewclass,sheetlayer,ordesignlayer.Instead ofcreatinganewitem,however,selecttheimportoption.Selectthefilefromwhichtoimport,andthenselectthe specificclassesorlayersfromthatfiletoimport.Foradesignlayer,selectwhethertoimporttheobjectsonthedesign layer,aswellasthelayeritself. SeeCreatingLayersonpage 94andCreatingClassesonpage 106fordetails.

Managing Layers
Createlayersinadrawingtoprovideimmediateflexibility.Stackthedesignlayersinanyorder,ortemporarilyhide someofthem.Reorderthelayers,whichmovesalloftheobjectscontainedwithineachlayertoanotherlocation withoutactuallymodifyingtheobjectsortheiralignmentwitheachother.
Layer 3

Layer 2

Layer 2

Layer 1

Layer 1 Layer order rearranged

Layer 3

Ifyouhanddrawafloorplanontwodesignlayers,onevellumsheetwithamasterdraftingplanandanotherwithan additiontotheplan,itwouldbeeasytolookatthefloorplanwithorwithouttheaddition.IntheVectorworks program,thevellumiselectronic,sofarmorecanbedonewithit.Adistancecanbesetbetweendesignlayersrather thanhavingthemlieflatontopofeachother.Additionally,withtheprogramsmodelingcapabilities,theselayerscan beviewedin3D.Forexample,ifthefirstfloor,secondfloor,basement,androofofahouseareeachplacedintheirown designlayers,notonlycanthe2Ddraftingplanbeprintedforanyoneofthoselayers,butthedesignlayerscanbe linkedtogether,creatingamodelofafullyformed3Dhouse.Useviewportstodisplayseveralviewsofthefinished design,eitherondesignlayers(VectorworksDesignSeriesrequired)oronsheetlayers,whicharespecialpresentation layers.Theoriginaldesignlayersremainunchanged. Layershavemanyotheruses,aswell.Moveelementsbetweendesignlayers,orchangethescaleofalayer,instantly makingadetailofanareaofthedrawingwithoutredrawinganything.Createdesignlayerswithobjectsthatshould alwaysdisplay,orlayersthatcontainobjectsfordisplayonlyatparticulartimes.Controlthevisibilityofthedesign layerstolimittheneedforcreatingnewobjects.

94

| Chapter 3: Drawing Structure

Layer 3 Layer 2 Layer 1 Layer 2 visibility set to Invisible

Layer 3

Layer 1

IntheVectorworksArchitectprogram,designlayerscanbeassociatedwithstories;storiesdefineabsoluteelevations inthebuildingmodel,whilelayerscanbesetatanelevationrelativetothestory.Thismethodoforganizingafile makesitmucheasiertomanageabuildingslayersandcertainassociatedobjectslikewallsandcolumns.SeeSetting UptheBuildingStructurewithStoriesonpage 4intheVectorworksDesignSeriesUsersGuide. Usedesignlayerstodrawandmodelprojects.Usesheetlayerstocreateapresentationversionofthefinalized drawing;thiscanincludeviewports,titleblocks,notes,andotherannotations(seePresentingDrawingswithSheet LayerViewportsonpage 762). OnthelayerslistintheViewbar,sheetlayersarelistedfirst,andthendesignlayers.Aseparatordividesthetwotypes oflayersinthelist. Sheetlayersdisplaywithawidegrayborderrepresentingtheprintmarginarea,asopposedtodesignlayers,which haveathingrayborder(whenthepageboundaryisdisplayed).Thismakesiteasiertodistinguishthelayertypesata glance.

Creating Layers
Whenanewdrawingiscreated,itautomaticallycontainsanemptydesignlayerentitledDesignLayer1.Add designlayerstothedrawingasneededtoorganizeit.Addsheetlayersasneededforpresentation.Createnewdesign layersandsheetlayers,orimportthem(andoptionally,theobjectstheycontain)fromothercurrentversionfilesor fromstandardfiles.InVectorworksDesignSeriesproducts,createadesignlayerviewporttoreferencedesignlayers inotherfileswithoutimportingthem. Tocreateanewlayer: 1. SelectTools>Organization.Alternatively,clicktheLayersbuttonontheViewbar. TheOrganizationdialogboxopens. 2. SelecttheDesignLayersorSheetLayerstabandclickNew. TheNewDesignLayerorNewSheetLayerdialogboxopens.Createanewlayer,orimportalayerandits propertiesfromstandardorexistingVectorworksfiles.

Managing Layers |

95

Parameter
CreateaNewDesignLayer orCreateNewSheetLayer

Description
Createsanewdesignorsheetlayer. Foradesignlayer,alsoenteradescriptiveName. Forasheetlayer,enterauniqueSheetNumber,orusethedefault(asinSht2).The SheetNumbercanbedisplayedindrawinglabels,sectionmarkers,andtitle blocksonsheetlayers.AlsoenteradescriptiveSheetTitle,whichcanbedisplayed intitleblocks.

ImportDesignLayers orImportSheetLayer

Importslayersandtheirattributesfromstandardfilesorfromexistingfiles.Files locatedintheStandardsfolder,aswellasexistingfilesselectedpreviously,are displayedinthelist.Selectafile;theavailablelayersarelistedbeneaththefilename. Ifalayernameinthecurrentfilematchesalayerintheimportfile,thatlayerisnoton thelistasanimportoption. Selectthedesiredlayer(s).Toselectmultiplelayersfromtheimportlist,holddown theCtrl(Windows)orCommand(Macintosh)keywhileyouclick. Formoreinformationaboutstandards,seeImportingDrawingStructurefrom StandardsorOtherFilesonpage 93.

Choose ImportLayerObjects (designlayeronly)

ClickChoosetoselectafileforlayerimport.Filesmustbeinthecurrentversion. Inadditiontoimportingthedesignlayerstructureandattributes,importsthe contentsofthelayers;ifafilehasbecomecorrupted,thisisapossiblewayof recoveringitsdata.Ifthereisanamingconflictwithpreexistingsymbolsor preexistinglayersinthecurrentdocument,renamethesymbolsorlayers.

CreationOptions SavedViewVisibility (designlayeronly) Setsthevisibilityofthenewdesignlayerinsavedviews(whensavedviewsexistin thedrawing)

96

| Chapter 3: Drawing Structure


Description
Setsthevisibilityofthenewdesignlayerinviewports(whenviewportsexistinthe drawing) Immediatelyaftercreation,openstheEditDesignLayersorEditSheetLayersdialog boxtosetthepropertiesofthenewlayer(s);seeSettingDesignLayerPropertieson page 97orSettingSheetLayerPropertiesonpage 104

Parameter
ViewportVisibility (designlayeronly) EditPropertiesAfter Creation

3. ClickOKtocreatethenewdesignorsheetlayer(s). ThelayersdisplayinthelayerlistintheOrganizationdialogbox,andalsointhelayerslistontheViewbar.

Managing Layers |

97

Setting Design Layer Properties


Oncecreated,thedesignlayersdisplayontheDesignLayerstaboftheOrganizationdialogbox,wherevarious propertiescanbesetandedited. Toeditdesignlayers: 1. SelectTools>Organization.Alternatively,clicktheLayersbuttonontheViewbar. TheOrganizationdialogboxopens. 2. SelecttheDesignLayerstab. Alistofthecurrentlayersinthedrawingdisplaysintheirstackingorder.Dependingonwhichviewoptionis selectedatthetopofthedialogbox,eitherdetailsorvisibilitiesofthedesignlayersdisplay.Stackingorder, drawingareavisibility,andactivelayercanbechangedinDetailsview.Thevisibilityoflayersinviewportsand insavedviewscanbechangedinVisibilitiesview. IntheVectorworksArchitectproduct,Detailsviewincludesthestoriesandlayerleveltypesforeachlevel. Layersthatareimportedfromanotherfileforworkgroupreferencingdisplayinitalics.

Displays when the Vectorworks preference for Quartz imaging (Macintosh) or GDI+ imaging (Windows) is enabled Displays when the Vectorworks Architect product is installed

3. Tochangeotherlayerproperties,selectoneormorelayersandclickEdittoopentheEditDesignLayersdialog box.

98

| Chapter 3: Drawing Structure

Displays when the Vectorworks Architect product is installed

Displays when the Vectorworks Architect or Landmark product is installed

Parameter
Name Scale StackingOrder Story (VectorworksArchitect required)

Description
Ifonelayerwasselected,displaysthelayersname,whichcanbeeditedif necessary Setsthescalefortheselectedlayer(s);seeChangingtheScaleofSelectedDesign Layersonpage 72 Changesthe2Dstackingorderofthelayer(s);seeChangingtheDesignLayer StackingOrderonpage 99 Associatesthelayerwithastory;selectthestoryfromthelist,orcreateanew storyforthelayer(seeCreatingandManagingStoriesonpage 7inthe VectorworksDesignSeriesUsersGuide).Ifthedesignlayerdoesnotneedto belongtoastory,selectNone;forexample,adetaillayerdoesnotneedtobe associatedwithabuildingstory. Setstheheightofalayerrelativetothegroundplane. ForVectorworksArchitectusers,theelevationissetrelativetothestory,ifthe layerisassociatedwithastory.Theelevationrelativetothegroundplanealso displays.Forexample,thesecondstoryofabuildingmightbeslightlyoffsetfrom thestoryelevation,andalsoseveralfeetabovestreetlevel. Whenanewlayerisaddedtoadrawing,itselevationvaluesare automaticallyenteredbasedonthepreviouslayerselevationandlayerwall heightvalues.

Elevation

LayerWallHeight

Indicatestheheightofwalls(andcertainotherobjectssuchascolumns)created onthatlayer,whentheTopBoundoptionforthoseobjectsissettoLayerWall Height

Managing Layers | Parameter


LevelType (VectorworksArchitect required) Opacity (Quartzimaging(Macintosh) orGDI+imaging(Windows) enabled TransferMode (Quartzimaging(Macintosh) orGDI+imaging(Windows) disabled RenderworksBackground

99

Description
Specifiesthelayersleveltype;selectthetypefromthelist,orcreateanewlevel type(seeDefaultStoryLayersonpage 4intheVectorworksDesignSeriesUsers Guide).Onlyoneleveltypecanbeusedperstory(alayercannothavetwoceiling leveltypes,forexample). Controlshowtheselectedlayer(s)andothervisiblelayersdisplay;seeSetting theDesignLayerOpacityonpage 100

Controlshowtheselectedlayer(s)andothervisiblelayersdisplay;seeSetting theDesignLayerTransferModeonpage 100

WhentheRenderworksproductisinstalled,selecttheRenderworksbackground tousefortheselectedlayer(s)fromeitherthedefaultcontentorthecurrentfiles content;seeDefaultContentinVectorworksFundamentalsandRenderworks onpage 157andCreatingLayerBackgroundsonpage 629. IftheRenderworksBackgroundchoicesarenotavailable,thebackground selectioniscontrolledbytheRenderworksstyleineffect.Setthe backgroundintheRenderworksstyleinstead;seeRenderworksStyleson page 690.

Colors SavedViews Viewports Georeferenced (VectorworksArchitector Landmarkrequired)

Specifiesthedefaultlayercolorfortheselectedlayer(s);seeSettingtheDesign LayerColoronpage 102 Specifiesthevisibilitysettingsfortheselectedlayer(s)ineachsavedview;see SettingVisibilitiesonpage 118 Specifiesthevisibilitysettingsfortheselectedlayer(s)ineachviewport;see SettingVisibilitiesonpage 118 Enablesgeoreferenceinformationtobeattachedtothelayer(s);clickEdit GeoreferencingtoopentheGeoreferencingdialogbox.SeeGISand Georeferencingonpage 580intheVectorworksDesignSeriesUsersGuidefor details.

Changing the Design Layer Stacking Order


Designlayersareviewedandprintedinstackingorder,thetoptobottomorderintheLayersSetupdialogbox. Initially,layersarestackedintheorderinwhichtheyarecreated,buttheirordercanbechangedatanytime. Tochangethestackingorderofdesignlayers: 1. FromtheOrganizationdialogbox,selecttheDesignLayerstabinDetailsviewtoseethecurrentstackingorder. The#columntotherightofthelayernameindicatesthelayerscurrentpositioninthestack,with1beingthetop layer. 2. Useoneofthefollowingmethodsforchangingthedesignlayerstackingorder: Ifthelistisnotcurrentlysortedbystackingorder,clickthe#columnheadingtochangeit.Thenclickthe# columnofthelayer(s)tobemoved,anddragitupordownthelist(the#columnmustbethecurrentsorting column).Ahorizontallineindicateswherethelayer(s)willbeinsertedinthecurrentorder.

100

| Chapter 3: Drawing Structure


Selectthelayer(s)tomove,andthenclickEdit(ordoubleclickalayerrow)toopentheEditDesignLayers dialogbox.IntheStackingOrderfield,enterthenumberforthenewstackingorderpositionofthelayer(s). ClickOKtoacceptthechanges.

3. TheDesignLayerstabdisplaysthenewstackingorder.ClickOKtoclosetheOrganizationdialogboxandsave thechanges.

Click on a layer and drag it to change its stacking order position in the list

Setting the Design Layer Opacity


WiththeQuartz(Macintosh)orGDI+(Windows)imagingVectorworkspreferenceenabled(itisenabledbydefault), designlayershaveasettingthatcontrolsthetransparencyoflayerobjectsthatoverlapvisibleobjectsinanotherlayer. AnOpacityvalueof100%meansthatnothingbeneaththeactivelayerisvisible.DecreasetheOpacityvalueto increasethetransparencyoftheobjectsonthelayer.(SeeDisplayPreferencesonpage 29forinformationabout settingthispreference.) Tosettheopacityforadesignlayer: 1. FromtheOrganizationdialogbox,selecttheDesignLayerstab.Selectoneorseverallayers,andthenclickEdit. TheEditDesignLayersdialogboxopens. 2. DragtheOpacityslidertothelefttoincreasethetransparency,orenteranopacitypercentage(0100)inthebox totherightoftheslider. 3. ClickOKtoclosetheEditDesignLayersdialogbox,andthenclickOKagaintoclosetheOrganizationdialog box. Individualobjectscanalsohaveanopacitypercentageapplied.SeeOpacityAttributesonpage 532.

Setting the Design Layer Transfer Mode


WhentheQuartz(Macintosh)orGDI+(Windows)imagingVectorworkspreferenceisdisabled,designlayershavea settingthatcontrolsthedisplayoflayerobjectsthatoverlapvisibleobjectsinanotherlayer. Tosetthetransfermodeforadesignlayer: 1. FromtheOrganizationdialogbox,selecttheDesignLayerstab.Selectoneorseverallayers,andthenclickEdit. TheEditDesignLayersdialogboxopens. 2. SelectthedesiredTransferModefromthelist.ClickOKtoclosetheEditDesignLayersdialogbox,andthen clickOKagaintoclosetheOrganizationdialogbox.

Managing Layers | Mode


Paint

101

Description
Makesobjectsinthenewlayersolid,obscuringobjectsinlayersstackedbelowit(thisisthe defaultsetting)

Overlay

Makesitsoobjectsinthenewlayerdonotobscurestackedlayers

Invert

Makesareversed,orphotonegativeimagedisplaywhenanobjectinthenewlayeroverlapsan objectinanotherlayer

Erase

Makesobjectsinthenewlayerdisplayallforegroundpatternsaswhiteandallbackground patternsastransparent

NotPaint

Makesobjectsinthenewlayersolidandinvertsanyareasthatoverlapobjectsinstackedlayers

NotOverlay

Makesobjectsinthenewlayertransparentandinvertslayercolors

NotInvert

Makesobjectsinthenewlayertransparentandconvertsanyblackpixelsfromoverlappingareas towhiteandwhitepixelstotransparent

102

| Chapter 3: Drawing Structure


Description
Makesobjectsinthenewlayertransparentandconvertsanywhitepixelsfromoverlapping areastoblackandblackpixelstotransparent

Mode
NotErase

Mostprinterdevicesdonotsupportallofthesemodes,especiallyPostScriptprintersandvectordevicessuchas penplotters.TheRasterizeprintoutputoptionmayproducethebestresultsforcertaintransfermodes. MacintoshOSXdoesnotsupportlayertransfermodeswhenprinting,buttheyareavailableforonscreen viewing.OntheWindowsplatform,theuseofcolorintransfermodesmayproducecolorblending.

Setting the Design Layer Color


Thefillandpencolorofobjectsthataredrawnonormovedtoadesignlayercanbecontrolledbythecolorsettingsof thedesignlayer.TheUselayercolorssettingintheDocumentPreferencesdialogboxmustbeturnedon(seeDisplay Preferencesonpage 19). ThesesettingsareoverriddenbytheBlackandwhiteonlyoptionintheDocumentPreferencesdialogbox,even withtheUselayercolorsoptionselected. Tocontrolthecolorofobjectsbytheirdesignlayers: 1. FromtheOrganizationdialogbox,selecttheDesignLayerstab.Selectoneorseverallayers,andthenclickEdit. TheEditDesignLayersdialogboxopens. 2. ClickColors. TheColorDefaultsforLayerdialogboxopens.

3. Forboththefillandpen,settheForegroundandBackgroundcolorsbyclickingtheappropriatelistand selectingacolorfromthemainColorMenudialogbox.Apreviewexampleisshownatthebottomofthedialog box. Thefillbackgroundcolorcontrolstheappearanceofobjectswithasolidfill.

Managing Layers |
4. ClickOK.

103

WhentheUselayercolorspreferenceisselected,allobjectsonthelayeraredrawnwiththespecifiedcolors. Viewportshaveseparatecontroloflayercolor(seeAdvancedSheetLayerViewportPropertiesonpage 768).

Setting the Active Design Layer


Tobeabletoadd,remove,oreditobjectsonadesignlayer,eitherthelayermustbeactiveorthelayeroptionsmustbe settoallowmodificationstootherlayers(seeSettingClassandDesignLayerOptionsonpage 113).Thereare severalwaystochangetheactivedesignlayer. Ifthereareasmallnumberofdesignlayers,switchbetweenlayerswiththeSwitchactivelayer/classshortcut keycombinationspecifiedinVectorworkspreferences(seeSettingVectorworksPreferencesonpage 17).This selectsalayerbymovingupordownthroughthelayerlistonelayeratatime.Ifthedrawinghasalargenumber oflayers,useoneofthefollowingoptions.

Setting the Active Design Layer in the Organization Dialog Box


Tosettheactivedesignlayer: 1. FromtheOrganizationdialogbox,selecttheDesignLayerstabinDetailsview. TheactivelayerisindicatedbyacheckmarktotheleftoftheDesignLayerName.Thenameofthelayeralsois highlightedinboldtext. 2. Tomakeadifferentlayeractive,clickthecolumntotheleftofitsname. 3. ClickOK. Thedialogboxclosesandtheactivelayerdisplays.

Setting the Active Design Layer in the View Bar


Tosettheactivedesignlayer: 1. ClicktheActiveLayerontheViewbartodisplayalistofallofthesheetlayers(topsection)anddesignlayers (bottomsection)inthedrawing. OnMacintosh,theactivelayerisindicatedbyacheckmark;onWindows,thelayernameishighlightedinbold text. 2. Clickthedesignlayertobeactivated. Thelayerslistclosesandtheactivelayerdisplays.

104

| Chapter 3: Drawing Structure

Setting the Active Design Layer in the Document Context Menu


Ifmultipledesignlayersaresettobevisible,andthelayeroptionsaresettoshowthoseotherlayers,thedrawingarea maydisplayobjectsthatareonnonactivelayers.UsetheActivateLayercommandtomakethelayerofoneofthese objectsactive. TheForceSelectcommandonthedocumentcontextmenualsochangestheactiveclassandlayer(ifnecessary), andselectstheclickedobject. Tosettheactivedesignlayer: 1. Inthedrawingarea,rightclick(Windows)orCtrlclick(Macintosh)avisibleobjectonanonactivedesignlayer. 2. Fromthedocumentcontextmenu,selectActivateLayer. Theobjectslayerbecomesactive.

Right-click (Windows) or Ctrl-click (Macintosh) on the sink from a gray, non-active layer to open the document context menu

The Activate Layer command activates the sinks layer, and the objects that are not in that layer become grayed

Setting Sheet Layer Properties


Oncecreated,thesheetlayersdisplayontheSheetLayerstaboftheOrganizationdialogbox,wherevariouslayer propertiescanbesetandedited. Sheetlayersarealwaysata1:1scale,ActiveOnly,andsettoTop/Planview. Toeditsheetlayers: 1. SelectTools>Organization.Alternatively,clicktheLayersbuttonontheViewbar. TheOrganizationdialogboxopens. 2. SelecttheSheetLayerstabandtheDetailsview. TheSheetLayerstabopens,withalistofthecurrentlayersinthedrawing.Onlytheactivelayercanbechanged inDetailsview.Visibilitiesviewdoesnotapplytosheetlayers. 3. Tochangelayerproperties,selectoneormorelayersandclickEdittoopentheEditSheetLayersdialogbox.

Managing Classes |

105

Parameter
SheetNumber

Description
Displaysthenumberoftheselectedsheetlayer;thisnumbermustbeuniqueinthedocument.If thisvalueischangedandUseAutomaticDrawingCoordinationisenabledindocument preferences(VectorworksDesignSeriesrequired),anyannotationobjects(sheetborders,drawing labels,orsectionmarkers)thatshowthisnumberareupdatedautomatically. Displaysthedescriptivetitleoftheselectedsheetlayer.IfUseAutomaticDrawingCoordination isenabledindocumentpreferences(VectorworksDesignSeriesrequired),anysheetbordersthat showthisnumberareupdatedautomatically. Specifiestheresolution(DotsPerInch)forprintingandviewingtherasterrenderedviewportsin theselectedlayer(doesnotaffectvectorgeometryorbitmapsthatareinsideviewports);see SettingthePrintResolutiononpage 86formoredetails SpecifiestheXandYcoordinatesofthesheetlayerorigin;eachsheetlayerhasitsownorigin OpensthePageSetupdialogboxforentryofsheetlayerprintingparameters;thissavestimelater, whendifferentsheetlayerscanbeautomaticallysenttodifferentprinterswithdifferentprintarea settings(seePageSetuponpage 81)

SheetTitle

DPI

Origin PageSetup

Managing Classes
Inadditiontodesignlayers,classesareapowerfulwaytoorganizetheelementsinadrawingprojectaccordingto category.Thisallowstheobjectstobeviewed,changed,andtrackedasagroup.Becauseclassesworkacrossdesign layers,theyallowthegroupingofsimilarobjectsinadrawingthatforpracticalreasonsneedtoexistonseparate layers.Classesalsoallowthesamefiletobeusedforallstagesofaprojectandforvariouspurposes.Forexample,the classesshownforalicenseapplicationcouldbedifferentfromthoseshownforthebuildingcontractor. VectorworksclassesaresimilarinfunctiontoandareexportedasAutoCADlayers.Ifadrawingwillbe exportedtoAutoCAD,useclassestomakeiteasytoturnonoroffselectedportionsofthedrawing.Forexample, ifaconsultantusingAutoCADwillbedoingtheductlayoutforabuilding,afurnitureclassallowshimorherto turnoffthefurniturelayer,insteadofdeletingfurnitureobjects. Settinguptheclassesatthebeginningofaprojectisrecommended,sothatobjectscanbeassignedtoappropriate classesastheyarecreated. EachnewdrawingcreatedwiththeVectorworksprogramautomaticallyhastwoclasses:DimensionandNone.Any dimensionscreatedareassigned,bydefault,totheDimensionclass(thisisapreferencesettingthatcanbechanged; seeDimensionPreferencesonpage 30).Groupobjectsareassignedtotheactiveclass.Allotherobjectsandsymbols

106

| Chapter 3: Drawing Structure

areassignedtotheNoneclass,whichisthedefaultactiveclass.Thesetwoclassescanberenamedbutnotdeleted. Ifthedrawingwascreatedfromatemplate,otherclassesmayhavebeenprovided.Newclassescanbecreated, duplicated,edited,ordeleted.Thevisibilityoftheclassescanalsobechanged. Forexample,foradrawingofahousewithfourseparateplanlayers(firstfloor,secondfloor,basement,androof), assignallbathroomfixturestoaclasscalledFixtures.MaketheFixturesclassinvisibletoprintthefloorplans withoutfixtures,andthenmakethemvisibletoprintthebathroomfixturesforeachstoryofthehouse.

Fixtures class invisible

Fixtures class visible

Classinformationcanbelinkedtoworksheets.Usingthehouseexampleinthepreviousparagraph,notonlycanthe plumbingfixturesplanforthehousebeprinted,butarunninginventoryofthecostforallplumbingfixturescanbe kept(seeUsingWorksheetsonpage 837).

Creating Classes
Considerclassnamesatcreation.Iftherearealargenumberofclasses,organizethembynamingeachclasswitha compoundnameconsistingofuptofourparts,separatedbyadash.Eachnamepartrepresentsadifferentlevelinthe classnamingstructure.Forexample,adrawingofabuildingmighthaveaclassstructurethatincludesmaingroups forarchitecture,plumbing,andelectricalobjects.Withinthearchitecturegroup,theremightbedoor,floor,andwall groups.Thosegroupsinturnhavesubgroupsforexample,thewallsubgroupmighthaveinteriorandexterior designations.Aclassisnamedaccordingtoitspositionintheclassstructure,asinArchWallExt,ElecLiteCeiling,or PlumEquipNew. IntheclasseslistontheViewbar,eachmaingroupisamenuoption,withsubmenusforthesubgroups.Inthe followingexample,theArchoptionhasaWallsubmenu,withExtandIntoptions.Thistypeoforganizationmakesit easytoassignclassesasobjectsarecreated.

Classescanbecreatedasnew,orimportedfromothercurrentversionVectorworksfilesorstandardfiles. Tocreateanewclass: 1. SelectTools>Organization.Alternatively,clicktheClassesbuttonontheViewbar. TheOrganizationdialogboxopens. 2. SelecttheClassestabandclickNew.

Managing Classes |
TheNewClassdialogboxopens.Createanewclass,orimportaclassanditspropertiesfromstandardor existingVectorworksfiles.

107

Class Type
CreateNewClass ImportClasses

Action
CreatesaclassbasedoncurrentAttributespalettesettings;enteraclassName Importsclassesandtheirattributesfromstandardfilesorexistingfiles.Fileslocatedin theStandardsfolder,aswellasexistingfilesselectedpreviously,aredisplayedinthe list.Selectafile;theavailableclassesarelistedbeneaththefilename. Selectthedesiredclass(es).Toselectmultipleclassesfromtheimportlist,holdtheCtrl (Windows)orCommand(Macintosh)keywhileyouclick. Formoreinformationaboutstandards,seeImportingDrawingStructurefrom StandardsorOtherFilesonpage 93.

Showonlyclasses thatarenotinthe currentdocument

Ifaclassnameinthecurrentfilematchesaclassintheimportfile,normallythatclassis notincludedonthelistasanimportoption.Todisplayalltheclassestobeimported, deselectthisoption.Theexistingclassesinthefilearereplacedbyanyimportedclasses withthesamename,changingtheexistingclassdefinitions(andanyassociatedobjects) tothoseoftheimportedclasses. ClickChoosetoselectafileforclassimport.Filesmustbeinthecurrentversion.

Choose CreationOptions SavedViewVisibility ViewportVisibility EditPropertiesAfter Creation

Setsthevisibilityofthenewclassinsavedviews(whensavedviewsexistinthe drawing) Setsthevisibilityofthenewclassinviewports(whenviewportsexistinthedrawing) Immediatelyaftercreation,openstheEditClass(es)dialogboxtosetthepropertiesof thenewclass(es)(seeSettingClassPropertiesonpage 108)

108

| Chapter 3: Drawing Structure

3. ClickOKtocreatethenewclass(es). TheclassesdisplayintheclasseslistintheOrganizationdialogbox,andintheclasseslistontheViewbar.

Setting Class Properties


Oncecreated,theclassesdisplayontheClassestaboftheOrganizationdialogbox,wherevariouspropertiescanbeset andedited. Toeditclasses: 1. SelectTools>Organization.Alternatively,clicktheClassesbuttonontheViewbar. TheOrganizationdialogboxopens. 2. SelecttheClassestab. Alistofthecurrentclassesinthedrawingdisplays.Dependingonwhichviewoptionisselectedatthetopofthe dialogbox,eitherdetailsorvisibilitiesoftheclassesdisplay.Thevisibilityofclassesinthedrawingareaandthe activeclasscanbechangedinDetailsview.Thevisibilityofclassesinviewportsandinsavedviewscanbe changedinVisibilitiesview(seeSettingVisibilitiesonpage 118).

3. Tochangeotherclassproperties,selectoneormoreclassesandclickEdittoopentheEditClass(es)dialogbox. 4. Ifdesired,enteranewnamefortheclassintheClassNamefield.Then,setthegraphicattributesoftheclass.See SettingClassAttributesonpage 111formoreinformationaboutgraphicattributes.

Managing Classes |

109

Displays when the Vectorworks preference for Quartz imaging (Macintosh) or GDI+ imaging (Windows) is enabled

Renderworks texture options

Parameter
UseatCreation

Description
Appliestheattributesdisplayedinthisdialogboxwhencreatinganobject assignedtothisclass.IfUseatCreationisnotselected,theseattributescanbe appliedtotheobjectlaterbyassigningtheClassStylefromtheAttributespalette. SeeSettingClassAttributesonpage 111formoreinformation.

Fill Style None Solid Pattern Selectoneofthefollowingfillstylesfromthelist Nofillisappliedtotheobjectsinthisclass Appliesasolidfilltotheobjectsinthisclass;clickthecolorboxtoselectthe desiredcolorfromthemainColorMenudialogbox Appliesapatternedfillandcolortoobjectsinthisclass.Clickthepatternboxto selectthedesiredpattern,andthenselecttheforegroundcolorandbackground colorfromthecolorboxesnexttothepattern. Appliesahatchfilltoobjectsinthisclass.Selectthedesiredhatchfromeitherthe defaultcontentorthecurrentfilescontent(seeDefaultContentinVectorworks FundamentalsandRenderworksonpage 157). Appliesatilefilltoobjectsinthisclass;clickthetilepreviewtoselectatilefrom eitherthedefaultcontentorthecurrentfilescontent(seeDefaultContentin VectorworksFundamentalsandRenderworksonpage 157)

Hatch

Tile

110

| Chapter 3: Drawing Structure


Description
Appliesagradientfilltoobjectsinthisclass;clickthegradientpreviewtoselecta gradientfromeitherthedefaultcontentorthecurrentfilescontent(seeDefault ContentinVectorworksFundamentalsandRenderworksonpage 157) Appliesanimagefilltoobjectsinthisclass;clicktheimagepreviewtoselectan imagefromeitherthedefaultcontentorthecurrentfilescontent(seeDefault ContentinVectorworksFundamentalsandRenderworksonpage 157)

Parameter
Gradient

Image

Pen Style Color LineStyle/LineThickness SelectNone,Solid,Pattern,orDashfromthelist Clickthecolorboxtoselectapenforegroundcolor Selectthelinestyleandthicknessfortheclass;touseacustomthickness,select SetThicknessfromthelinethicknesslisttoaccesstheSetThicknessdialogbox. Thenamesanddisplayorderoftheavailabledashstylescanbechanged;see CreatingCustomDashStylesonpage 535. Markers Selectthemarkerstyleforeachendoflines,dimensions,arcs,polylines,2D polygons,orfreehandlinesinthisclass.Choosethemarkerstylefromthelistof availablemarkers.Touseacustommarkerstyle,selectCustomandspecifythe markersettings,orselectEditMarkerListfromthemarkerstylelisttosetthe availablemarkertypes(seeEditingtheMarkerListonpage 539). WhentheQuartz(Macintosh)orGDI+(Windows)imagingVectorworks preferenceisenabled,specifiestheclasstransparency;dragtheslidertotheleftto increasethetransparency,orenteranopacitypercentageintheboxtotherightof theslider IfRenderworksisinstalled,clickthesetabstosetthetexturepropertiesforwall, roof,andotherobjectsassignedtotheclass.SeeApplyingTexturestoSymbols, Walls,andRoofsonpage 651formoreinformation. Iftherearesavedviewsinthedrawing,openstheSavedViewVisibilitiesdialog box.Setthevisibilityforthenewclass(es)inthesavedviews(Visible,Invisible, Gray,orDontSave).SeeSettingVisibilitiesonpage 118. Ifthereareviewportsinthedrawing,openstheViewportVisibilitiesdialogbox. Setthevisibilityforthenewclass(es)intheviewports(Visible,Invisible,Gray,or DontSave).SeeSettingVisibilitiesonpage 118.

Opacity

Walls,Roofs,andOthertabs

SavedViews

Viewports

5. ClickOKtoreturntotheOrganizationdialogbox.Ifobjectsinaneditedclassalreadyexistinthedrawing,and theclassissettoUseatCreation,whenprompted,specifyhowtoapplythechangestotheexistingobjects. 6. ClickOKfromtheOrganizationdialogboxtosavethechanges. Ifmultipleclassesaresimultaneouslyselectedforediting,andsomearesettoapplyattributeswhileothersarenot, UseatCreationappearsdimmed,indicatinganunknownsetting.Additionally,ifsomeoralloftheattributevalues aredifferentfortheselectedclasses,theeditingfieldsforthosevaluesindicatethatthevalueisunknown.Whenthe OKbuttonisclicked,thecurrentlydefinedsettingsshownareappliedtoalloftheselectedclasses.Anyinformation withanunknownsettingisnotapplied.

Managing Classes |

111

Setting Class Attributes


Therearetwotypesofattributesavailableforeachobject:classattributesandobjectattributes.Classattributes representthegraphicattributesassignedbytheobjectsclass.Objectattributesareassigneddirectlyfromthe Attributespalette.TheattributesthatanobjectuseswhenitiscreatedarecontrolledbyUseatCreationintheEdit Class(es)dialogbox. WhenUseatCreationisselectedforaclass,objectscreatedinthatclassorsubsequentlyassignedtothatclassusethe classattributes.TheAttributespalettedisplaysanarrowtoindicatethattheattributeshavebeensetbyclass.Ifobjects inthatclassalreadyexistedbeforeUseatCreationwasselected,youarepromptedtodecidehowtoapplythe attributestotheexistingobjects. Classattributescanbeoverriddenbyselectingtheobject(s)andapplyingtheattributesdirectlyfromtheAttributes palette.Later,classattributescanbeselectedagainfromtheAttributespalettebyselectingClassStylefromthe attributelist.IfUseatCreationwasnotselectedforaclass,selectingClassStyleforanattributeappliestheclass settingtotheobject(s)atthattime.
Object attribute: controlled by the Attributes palette setting Class attribute: controlled by the attributes set for the objects class

Class attributes are represented by a curved arrow

Formoreinformation,seeTheAttributesPaletteonpage 525.

Setting the Active Class


Tobeabletoremoveoreditobjectsinaparticularclass,eithertheclassmustbeactiveortheclassoptionsmustbeset toallowmodificationstootherclasses(seeSettingClassandDesignLayerOptionsonpage 113).Thereareseveral waystochangetheactiveclass. Ifthereareasmallnumberofclasses,switchbetweenclasseswiththeSwitchactivelayer/classshortcutkey combinationspecifiedintheVectorworkspreferences(seeSettingVectorworksPreferencesonpage 17).This selectsaclassbymovingupordownthroughtheclasslistonelayeratatime.Ifthedrawinghasalargenumber ofclasses,useoneofthefollowingoptions.

Setting the Active Class in the Organization Dialog Box


Tosettheactiveclass: 1. FromtheOrganizationdialogbox,selecttheClassestabinDetailsview. TheactiveclassisindicatedbyacheckmarktotheleftoftheClassName.Thenameoftheclassalsois highlightedinboldtext. 2. Tomakeadifferentclassactive,clickthecolumntotheleftofitsname. 3. ClickOK. Thedialogboxclosesandtheactiveclassdisplays.

112

| Chapter 3: Drawing Structure

Setting the Active Class in the View Bar


Tosettheactiveclass: 1. ClicktheActiveClassontheViewbartodisplayalistofallofthedrawingsclasses. OnMacintosh,theactiveclassisindicatedbyacheckmark;onWindows,theclassnameishighlightedinbold text. 2. Clicktheclasstobeactivated. Theclasseslistclosesandtheactiveclassdisplays.

Setting the Active Class in the Document Context Menu


Ifmultipleclassesaresettobevisible,andtheclassoptionsaresettoshowthoseotherclasses,thedrawingareamay displayobjectsthatareinnonactiveclasses.UsetheActivateClasscommandtomaketheclassofoneoftheseobjects active. TheForceSelectcommandonthedocumentcontextmenualsochangestheactiveclassandtheactivelayer(if necessary),andselectstheclickedobject. Tosettheactiveclass: 1. Inthedrawingarea,rightclick(Windows)orCtrlclick(Macintosh)avisibleobjectinanonactiveclass. 2. Fromthedocumentcontextmenu,selectActivateClass. Theobjectsclassbecomesactive.

Right-click (Windows) or Ctrl-click (Macintosh) on a cabinet in a gray, non-active class to open the document context menu

The Activate Class command activates the cabinets class, and the objects that are not in that class become grayed

Copying and Pasting Classed Objects


Objectsinaclasscanbecopiedandpastedfromonedrawingtoanother,evenifthedestinationdrawingdoesnot containthesameclassastheoriginaldrawing.Theprogramautomaticallycreatesanewclassinthedestination drawingandtransfersalloftheclassinformationfromthesourcedrawing.Ifthedestinationdrawingalreadyhasa

Setting Class and Design Layer Options |

113

classwiththesamenameasthesourcedrawing,onlytheobjectinformationispasted.Alloftheclassinformationfor thedestinationdrawingsclassremainsunchanged. Whenyoupasteobjectsthatcouldbecomeinvisibleduetoclassvisibilitysettings,specifywhethertheinvisibleclasses shouldbemadevisiblesothatthepastedobjectscanbeseen.

Setting Class and Design Layer Options


TheClassOptionsandLayerOptionscommandscontrolhowalltheclassesordesignlayersinadrawingdisplay.For example,adrawingprojectcanbesettodisplayonlytheactiveclass,temporarilyhidingallobjectsassignedtoother classes. Tochangetheoptionsfordisplaying,snappingto,andeditingobjectsinthecurrentclassordesignlayer: 1. SelectView>ClassOptions(orLayerOptions)andthentheoption. Alternatively,rightclick(Windows)orCtrlclick(Macintosh)inthedrawingareaandselectClassOptionsor LayerOptionsfromthedocumentcontextmenu.

Parameter
ActiveOnly GrayOthers Gray/SnapOthers

Description
Displaysonlyobjectsintheactiveclass/layer;onlytheactiveclass/layerprints Displaystheactiveclass/layernormallyandallotherclasses/layersappeardimmed(exceptfor thosesettoinvisible);eventhoughvisible,objectsindimmedclasses/layerscannotbeedited Displaystheactiveclass/layernormallyandallotherclasses/layersappeardimmed(exceptfor thosesettoinvisible);objectsinanynormallydisplayedorgrayclass/layercanbesnappedto. Onlyobjectsintheactiveclass/layercanbeedited. Allclasses/layersdisplaynormally,exceptforthosesettoinvisibleorgrayed;eventhough visible,objectsinclasses/layersotherthantheactiveclass/layerarenoteditableandcannotbe snappedto Allclasses/layersdisplaynormally,exceptforthosesettoinvisibleorgrayed;objectsinany normallydisplayedorgrayclass/layercanbesnappedto.Onlyobjectsintheactiveclass/layer canbeedited. Allclasses/layersdisplaynormally,exceptforthosesettoinvisibleorgrayed.Objectsinany normallydisplayedorgrayclass/layercanbesnappedto;onlyobjectsinnormallydisplayed classes/layerscanbeedited.(Anobjectonanotherlayercanonlybeeditedifitslayerscaleand viewarethesameasthoseoftheactivelayer.)Lockedobjectsdisplaywithgrayhighlighting.

ShowOthers

Show/SnapOthers

Show/Snap/ ModifyOthers

2. Thecurrentclassordesignlayerdisplaychangesaccordingly.

Managing Viewports
Asheetlayerviewportordesignlayerviewport(VectorworksDesignSeriesrequired)showsaspecificportionofone ormoredesignlayers.Theoriginallocationoftheviewportlayerscanbeeitherwithinthisfileoranotherfile.The viewparametersintheviewportcanbedifferentfromthoseoftheoriginallayers.Forexample,thescale,layerand classvisibility,orrendermodemightbechangedtocreateacertaineffect.Asheetlayerviewportdoesnotalways automaticallychangewhentheunderlyingdrawingdoes.Toseethedrawingchangesthatweremadeafterasheet layerviewportwascreated,updatetheviewport.Oneormoreviewportscanbeplacedonasheetlayerordesign layer,toshowvariouspartsofthedrawingprojectindifferentways.

114

| Chapter 3: Drawing Structure

Oncecreated,viewportsdisplayintheOrganizationdialogbox,wheretheycanbeedited,duplicated,ordeleted.For detailedinformationabouthowtocreate,edit,annotate,andupdateviewports,seePresentingDrawingswithSheet LayerViewportsonpage 762inthisguide,andPresentingDrawingswithDesignLayerViewportsonpage 689in theVectorworksDesignSeriesUsersGuide.

Managing Saved Views


Asavedviewislikeacamerathatissetuptoshowadrawingfromacertainorientation,withaspecificsetofviewing parameters,includingwhichclassanddesignlayerareactive,thevisibilitiesoftheclassesandthedesignlayers,the currentzoomandpan,thepagelocation,andtheplanrotation(VectorworksDesignSeriesrequired).

Zoomed in view

Zoomed out view

ViewsarealsousedtocreateMoveAlongPathanimations(seeCreatingMoveAlongPathAnimationsonpage 756 formoreinformation). Savedviewscanbecreated,edited,duplicated,anddeletedfromtheOrganizationdialogboxasdescribedinthe followingsections.

Creating Saved Views


Tosavethecurrentdrawingareaview: 1. SelectView>SaveView. TheSaveViewdialogboxopens. 2. Specifytheviewoptions,theactivelayerandclass,andthevisibilitiesoflayersandclasses.

Managing Saved Views |

115

Parameter
ViewName SaveViewOrientation SaveZoomandPan SavePageLocation

Description
Specifytheviewname Savesthegeneralviewparametersoftheactivelayer,includingplanrotation (VectorworksDesignSeriesrequired),projection,3Dorientation,andpageoriginsettings Savesthezoomandpansettingsoftheactivelayer Savesthedesignlayerpagelocationwiththeview;ifdeselected,thecurrentpagelocation settingisusedwhentheviewisdisplayed.Thepagelocationofsheetlayerscannotbe saved. Savestheunifiedviewstatuswiththeview;ifdeselected,thecurrentunifiedviewsetting isusedwhentheviewisdisplayed Savestherendermodeandoptionswiththeview;ifdeselected,thecurrentrendermode andoptionsareusedwhentheviewisdisplayed Savingtherendersettingswiththeviewisaneffectivemethodofsavingand restoringcustomrenderingoptions.

SaveUnifiedView (VectorworksDesign Seriesrequired) SaveRenderMode andOptions

SaveLayerVisibility LayerOptions ActiveLayer Layers SaveClassVisibility

Specifiesthelayervisibilityoptionstosave;ifdeselected,thecurrentlayervisibility settingsareusedwhentheviewisdisplayed Selectthedesignlayerdisplayoptions(seeSettingClassandDesignLayerOptionson page 113) Selecttheactivelayer;ifasheetlayerisselected,theLayersbuttonisdisabled OpenstheLayerVisibilitiesdialogbox;specifythedesignlayervisibilitiesforthesaved view(seeSettingVisibilitiesonpage 118) Specifiestheclassvisibilityoptionstosave;ifdeselected,thecurrentclassvisibility settingsareusedwhentheviewisdisplayed

116

| Chapter 3: Drawing Structure


Description
Selecttheclassdisplayoptions(seeSettingClassandDesignLayerOptionson page 113) Selecttheactiveclassfromthelistofclasses OpenstheClassVisibilitiesdialogbox;specifytheclassvisibilitiesforthesavedview(see SettingVisibilitiesonpage 118)

Parameter
ClassOptions ActiveClass Classes

3. ClickOKtosavetheviewwiththespecifiedsettings.ThesavedviewisthenavailablefromtheSavedViews menuandfromtheOrganizationdialogbox.

Editing Saved Views


Settheactiveclassandlayer,theclassanddesignlayeroptions,andtheclassanddesignlayervisibilitieswhenyou createthesavedview(intheSaveViewdialogbox).ThoseinitialsettingscanbechangedlaterfromtheOrganization dialogbox. Toeditasavedview: 1. SelectTools>Organization. TheOrganizationdialogboxopens. 2. SelecttheSavedViewstabinVisibilitiesview. Thevisibilitiesofclassesanddesignlayersfortheselectedsavedviewdisplay.

3. SelectaviewtoeditfromtheSavedViewNamelist. 4. IfSaveClassVisibilitywasselectedintheSaveViewdialogbox,ClassOptionsandActiveClassareenabledin theOrganizationdialogbox.IfSaveLayerVisibilitywasselectedintheSaveViewdialogbox,LayerOptions andActiveLayerareenabledintheOrganizationdialogbox.ChangetheActiveLayerandtheActiveClassas necessary.ChangetheClassOptionsandLayerOptionsasdescribedinSettingClassandDesignLayer Optionsonpage 113. 5. Changethevisibilitiesofclassesanddesignlayersasnecessary.SeeSettingVisibilitiesonpage 118.

Managing Saved Views |


6. Tochangeothersavedviewproperties,clickEdit. TheEditSavedViewdialogboxopens.

117

Thesettingsarethesameaswhentheviewiscreated(seeCreatingSavedViewsonpage 114).Classesand layersthatwereaddedafteraviewwascreatedarelistedasvisibleinthevisibilitysettings. Ifthelayerorclassvisibilitywassavedwhentheviewwascreated,RestoreLayerVisibilityandRestoreClass Visibilityareenabled.SelectRestoreLayerVisibilitytorestorethelayervisibilities,thelayeroptions,andthe activelayerthatweresetwhentheviewwassaved.SelectRestoreClassVisibilitytorestoretheclassvisibilities, theclassoptions,andtheactiveclassthatweresetwhentheviewwassaved. SavedviewsaresavedasVectorScriptmacros.Ifnecessary,clickEditScripttoeditthescript. 7. ClickOKtosavethechanges.ClickOKagaintoclosetheOrganizationdialogbox. AnotherwaytoeditasavedviewisthroughtheSavedViewspalette.SelectWindow>ScriptPalettes>SavedViews. PresstheOption(Macintosh)orAlt(Windows)keyanddoubleclicktheviewnametoedit.Doubleclicktheview scriptnametoswitchthecurrentdrawingareatothesavedview.

Creating or Editing Saved Views Using the Saved Views Menu


TheViewbarhasshortcutstosaveaview,toeditasavedview,ortoswitchthecurrentdrawingareaviewtoa previouslysavedview. ViewscanalsobeaccessedthroughtheSavedViewspalette.SelectWindow>ScriptPalettes>SavedViews. Doubleclicktheviewnametoswitchtothatview. TousetheSavedViewsmenu: 1. ClicktheSavedViewsmenuontheViewbar.

118

| Chapter 3: Drawing Structure


Click to open the Saved Views menu List of saved views

2. Selectthedesireditemfromthemenu.

Menu Item
SaveView EditView Listofsavedviews

Description
OpenstheSaveViewdialogbox(seeCreatingSavedViewsonpage 114) OpenstheSavedViewstaboftheOrganizationdialogbox(seeEditingSavedViews onpage 116) Selectasavedviewfromthelisttoswitchtothatview

Setting Visibilities
Theactiveclassanddesignlayerarealwaysvisible;eachinactiveclassanddesignlayercanbesettobevisible, invisible,orgray.Thevisibilitiesofinactiveclassesanddesignlayersarecontrolledinaverysimilarway,andthey bothcanbesetindependentlyforthedrawingarea,savedviews,andviewports. ClassanddesignlayervisibilityinthedrawingareaandinsavedviewsarealsoaffectedbytheClassOptionsand LayerOptionssettings.SeeSettingClassandDesignLayerOptionsonpage 113fordetails.TheVisibilitytoolcan makequickchangestolayerandclassvisibilities(VectorworksDesignSeriesrequired). Formaximumusability,visibilitiescanbesetfrommultipleplaces,butthemethodofsettingvisibilitiesisthesame. Thelevelofgrayforgrayedlayersandclassescanbeadjustedforprinting;seePrintingaFileonpage 83.

Setting Visibilities |

119

Tochangethesettingforasingleclassordesignlayer,clickinoneofitsvisibilitycolumns.Tochangethesettingsfor multipleitems,clickavisibilitycolumnasfollows: PresstheCtrlkey(Windows)orCmdkey(Macintosh)andclickselectedclassorlayerrows PresstheShiftkeyandclickthefirstandlastrowsofagroupofclassesorlayers PresstheAltkey(Windows)orOptionkey(Macintosh)andclickanyrowtochangeallclassesorlayers

Parameter
Visiblecolumn

Description
Class/designlayerisvisible;objectsinthisclass/layerdisplaywhenanotherclass/layeris active Class/designlayerisinvisible;objectsinthisclass/layerdisplayonlywhentheclass/layeris active Class/designlayerisgray;objectsinthisclass/layeraredimmedwhenanotherclass/layeris active Forsavedviews,afourthcolumndisplaystotherightoftheothercolumns.Whenselected, class/designlayervisibilityisnotsavedforthesavedview;thecurrentclass/layervisibilityis usedwhentheviewisdisplayed.

Invisiblecolumn Graycolumn

DontSavecolumn

Setting Class and Design Layer Visibility for the Drawing Area
UsetheOrganizationdialogboxtosetthevisibilitiesofclassesanddesignlayersinthedrawingarea. Tosetthevisibilityinthedrawingarea: 1. FromtheOrganizationdialogbox,selecttheClassesorDesignLayerstabinDetailsview. 2. ChangetheVisibilitysettingsasdesired.(SeeSettingVisibilitiesonpage 118.)

3. Toseethechangesbeforesavingthem,clickPreview. 4. ClickOKtosavethechanges.

120

| Chapter 3: Drawing Structure

Setting Class and Design Layer Visibility for Viewports and Saved Views
Thevisibilitiesofclassesanddesignlayerscanbesetduringcreationoreditingofclasses,designlayers,viewports,or savedviews.ThosesettingscanalsobechangedintheOrganizationdialogbox.

Create or Edit
Classes DesignLayers Viewports SavedViews

Sets
Classvisibility;seeCreatingClassesonpage 106andSettingClassPropertieson page 108 Designlayervisibility;seeCreatingLayersonpage 94andSettingDesignLayer Propertiesonpage 97 Designlayerorclassvisibility;seeCreatingaSheetLayerViewportfromaDesignLayer onpage 762 Designlayerorclassvisibility;seeCreatingSavedViewsonpage 114andEditingSaved Viewsonpage 116

Tosettheclassanddesignlayervisibilityforviewportsandsavedviews: 1. FromtheOrganizationdialogbox,selectatabinVisibilitiesview.

Organization Dialog Box Tab


Classes DesignLayer Viewports SavedViews

Sets Visibility of
Setsvisibilityofaclassinviewportsandsavedviews Setsvisibilityofadesignlayerinviewportsandsavedviews Setsvisibilityofclassesanddesignlayersinaviewport Setsvisibilityofclassesanddesignlayersinasavedview

2. Ontheappropriatetab,selectoneormoreclass,designlayer,viewport,orsavedviewnamesandchangethe VisibilitysettingsforclassesanddesignlayersasdescribedinSettingVisibilitiesonpage 118. 3. OntheSavedViewstab,changetheactivedesignlayerandclass,andthedesignlayerandclassoptionsas describedinEditingSavedViewsonpage 116.

Workgroup Referencing |
4. Toseethechangesbeforesavingthem,clickPreview(notavailableontheSavedViewstab). 5. ClickOKtosavethechanges.

121

Workgroup Referencing
Vectorworks Referencing Capability
Aworkgroupisseveralpeoplewhoworktogetheronaproject.Groupmembersmayworkonthesamefileoron differentfilesforthesameproject.Additionally,itisoftennecessarytocreatestandardelementsandreusethemin differentfiles.Itcanbedifficulttosharethesestandardswithothermembersofaworkgroupandtokeepupwith changestothem. Referencingistheabilitytolinkthecurrent(target)filetoamasterfilethatcontainsthestandards.Layers,classes,and resources(suchashatches,worksheets,orsymbols)inotherVectorworksfilescanbereferenced.InVectorworks DesignSeriesproducts,imagefilesandPDFfilescanalsobereferenced.Whenareferencediteminamasterfile changes,thechangesarereflectedinthetargetfile.Updatestotargetfilescanbeperformedautomaticallyoronly whenmanuallyrequested. Youcanreferencespecificlayerswithalloftheclassesandresourcesusedinthoselayers,aswellasanyresources fromamasterfile.Workgroupreferenceddesignlayerscanbedisplayedinviewports.Referenceditemsareindicated intheResourceBrowserandintheOrganizationdialogboxbyitalicizednames. Therearetwowaystoreferencedesignlayers: IntheVectorworksFundamentalsproduct,designlayersareimportedintothetargetfilewhentheyare referenced.Forbackwardcompatibility,VectorworksDesignSeriesproductssupportthismethod;seeSetting theReferencingOptionsonpage 122. IntheVectorworksDesignSeriesproducts,therecommendedmethodistocreateadesignlayerviewportand thenreferencethedesireddesignlayersfromthemasterfile.SeeCreatingaReferencedDesignLayerViewport onpage 692intheVectorworksDesignSeriesUsersGuidefordetailsaboutthistypeofreference. Dependingonthetypeofobjectreferenced,youmaybeabletoupdatethemasterfilefromthetargetfile. Resourcescanbeeditedorrenamedinthetargetfile,andthecorrespondingresourceinthemasterfileis automaticallyupdated.SeeReferencingResourcesonpage 128. Objectsonlayersreferencedwithlayerimportreferencingarelocked;theycanbeunlockedandeditedinthe targetfile,butthechangewillnotappearinthemasterfile.Moreover,whenthetargetfilesreferencesare updated,referenceditemsareoverwrittentoreflectthemasterfile.Therefore,anypermanentchangetoa referenceditemmustbemadeinthemasterfile. Objectsonlayersreferencedinadesignlayerviewportcannotbeediteddirectly,butthereisanoptionto navigatetothemasterfile,makethechange,andthenreturntothetargetfiletoviewthechange. Keepthefollowingconceptsinmindforbothdesignlayerreferencingmethods. Drawinginformationissharedandupdatedonalayerbylayerbasis. Forlayerimportreferencing,referencedlayersshouldbetreatedasreadonlylayers;anychangestoreferenced informationandanyinformationaddedtoreferencedlayersareremovedthenexttimethereferencedlayeris updated. Referencedlayernamescannotbechanged. Resources(symbolnames)inlayersthatarereferencedfromthemasterfiletakeprecedenceoverresourcesinthe targetfile.

122

| Chapter 3: Drawing Structure

Ifthereisanamingconflictwithpreexistingsymbolsorpreexistinglayersinthecurrentfile,renamethe symbolsorlayers. Sheetlayerviewportscannotdirectlyreferencelayersinexternalmasterfiles.Ifyouareusinglayerimport referencing,createareferencetothemasterfile,andselecttheexternallayerstoimportintothetargetfile;then maketheimportedlayersvisibleinasheetlayerviewport.Ifyouareusingdesignlayerviewportreferencing (VectorworksDesignSeriesrequired),createadesignlayerviewportfromthemasterfileandmakethedesired layersvisible;thenmakethedesignlayerthatcontainstheviewportvisibleinasheetlayerviewport.

Workgroup Referencing Strategies


Communicationwithintheworkgroupisessentialwhenworkgroupreferencingisinuse.Discussastrategyforhow toname,maintain,andupdatemasterfiles.Keepeachotherinformedofmajorchangesespeciallythedeletionofa masterfileorresources,whichcanaffectmultiplefiles. Ifeitherthefilenameorthelocationofareferencedfileischanged,thereferenceisbroken.Itemsreferencedfromthat filecannotbeupdateduntilthebrokenreferenceiscorrected.

Setting the Referencing Options


Thereferencesettingscontrolhowmanualandautomaticupdatestoreferencesareperformedinthecurrentfile.In addition,intheVectorworksDesignSeriesproducts,youhavetheoptiontochangethelayerreferencingmethodfor thisfilefromdesignlayerviewportreferencing(thedefaultfortheVectorworksDesignSeriesproduct)tolayerimport referencing. Tosetthereferencingoptions: 1. SelectTools>Organization. TheOrganizationdialogboxopens. 2. SelecttheReferencestabandclickSettings. TheReferenceSettingsdialogboxopens.

Parameter
Checkforoutofdate referencesevery___

Description
Automaticallychecksreferencedfilesforchangesafterthistimeinterval;ifany referencesareoutofdate,analertdialogboxdisplaystoallowthetargetfiletobe updated

Workgroup Referencing | Parameter


Usereferenceprioritywhen updatingresources

123

Description
Ifthesameresourceexistsinmultiplereferencedmasterfiles,deselectthisoptionto updateeachreferenceditemfromtheoriginalsource,regardlessofthepriority orderofthereferencedfiles.Thisisrecommendedbecause,ifyouchangethe priorityorder,orifyouupdateanindividualreference(insteadofallreferences), youcouldchangethesourcefileofaresourceinadvertently. Selectthisoptiontoupdateresourcesinthetargetfileaccordingtothepriority ordersetintheReferencestaboftheOrganizationdialogbox(seePrioritizing ReferencedFilesonpage 126).Analertmessagepromptsyoutoconfirmthatyou wanttousepriorityupdatingforreferences.

Whenmanuallyupdating

SpecifieswhathappenswhentheUpdatebuttonontheReferencestabofthe Organizationdialogboxisclicked:thebuttoneitherupdatesonlytheselected referencesthatareoutofdate,oritupdatesalloftheselectedreferencesinthe targetfile SpecifieswhichmethodtousetoreferencedesignlayersinotherVectorworks documents.Bydefault,VectorworksDesignSeriesproductsusedesignlayer viewports,asdescribedinCreatingaReferencedDesignLayerViewporton page 692intheVectorworksDesignSeriesUsersGuide.SelectLayerimporttouse thereferencingmethoddescribedinAddingandEditingLayerImportReferences onpage 123inthisguide.

Usethismethodtoreference Vectorworksfiles (VectorworksDesignSeries required)

3. ClickOKtoreturntotheOrganizationdialogbox.

Adding and Editing Layer Import References


IntheVectorworksDesignSeriesproducts,youmustfirstselecttheLayerimportreferencingoptionforthe currentfile,asdescribedinSettingtheReferencingOptionsonpage 122.(SeeCreatingaReferencedDesign LayerViewportonpage 692intheVectorworksDesignSeriesUsersGuideforinformationaboutthedesign layerviewportreferencingoption.) ToaddoreditreferencestodesignlayersinotherVectorworksfiles: 1. Intheactivetargetfile,selectTools>Organization. TheOrganizationdialogboxopens. 2. SelecttheReferencestab. Referencedfilesarelistedinpriorityorder,alongwiththeircurrentstatus,whethertheyaresettoupdate automaticallywhenthetargetfileisopened,andwhethertheyaresettosavecopiesofthereferenceditemswith thefile.

124

| Chapter 3: Drawing Structure

Parameter
New Edit Delete

Description
OpenstheOpenFiledialogboxtoselectanewreferencefile OpenstheEditReferencedialogboxtochangetheparametersofaselectedreferencefile OpenstheDeleteReferencedialogboxtodeleteafilefromthelistofreferencedfiles,and tochoosewhethertokeepthereferencedlayersandresourcesinthetargetfile;see DeletingReferencesonpage 130 Manuallyupdatesthereferenceditemsfromtheselectedfile(s) OpenstheReferenceSettingsdialogboxtosetoptionsforupdatesofreferenceditems; seeSettingtheReferencingOptionsonpage 122

Update Settings

3. Toeditacurrentreferencefile,selectthefileandclickEdit. TheEditReferencedialogboxopens.Proceedtostep5. 4. Toaddanewreferencefile,clickNew. TheOpenFiledialogboxopens.Selectthedesiredfile,andthenclickOpentoopentheappropriatedialogbox: Vectorworksfile:NewReferencedialogbox Imagefile:ImageImportOptionsdialogbox(VectorworksDesignSeriesrequired) PDFfile:ImportPDFdialogbox(VectorworksDesignSeriesrequired) ReferencedVectorworksfilesmustbethesameversionasthetargetfile. 5. FromtheNewReferenceorEditReferencedialogbox,specifytheparametersfortheworkgroupreference.

Workgroup Referencing |

125

Parameter
SourceFile Savereferencelocationas

Description
Displaysthepathandfilenameofthereferencedmasterfile;iftheEditoption wasselected,clickBrowsetoeditthefilelocation Maintainseitheranabsoluteorrelativefilepathreferencefromthecurrentfile tothereferencedfile.Usetheabsolutepathwhenthelocationofthereferenced filewithrespecttothecurrentfileisnotgoingtochange.Usetherelativepath whenthefilesmightbemovedtoanothercomputerorplatform;aslongasthe relativepathbetweenthefilesremainsthesame,thereferencecanbefound. Bothfilesmustbesavedonthesavevolumetoselectthisoption. TheSourceFilepathdisplayseitheranabsoluteorrelativepath,dependingon theselection.

LayersAvailable

Specifythedesignlayerstobereferenced;selectedlayersareindicatedwitha checkmark.Sheetlayerscannotbereferenced.Thisstepisoptional;alayerdoes nothavetobeselectedtoreferenceitsresources.Resourcesintheentire referencedfileareavailablethroughtheReferencecommandintheResource Browser. Selecttheupdateoptions Savesacopyofthereferenceddatawiththetargetfile.Whenthisoptionis deselected,acopyofthereferenceddataisnotsaved,whichmeansthatthe targetfilesizeissmaller;thereferenceddataisrefreshedwhenthetargetfileis opened.

Options Savereferencedcachetodisk

126

| Chapter 3: Drawing Structure


Description
Updatesthereferenceeachtimethetargetfileisopened;whendeselected,the referenceisupdatedonlywhenUpdateisclickedfromtheReferencestabofthe Organizationdialogbox Updatesclassdefinitionsalongwiththereferencedobjectsthatusethose classes Ignorestheuserorigininthemasterfile;referencedobjectswillnotchange locationinthetargetfileiftheuseroriginchangesinthemasterfile Createsalayerlinkforeachnewlyreferencedlayeronthespecifieddesign layer;selectthedesignlayerfromthelistorselectNewLayertospecifyanew designlayer,settothesamescaleasthefirstselectedlayertoreference

Parameter
Automaticallyupdateoutof datereferenceduringfile open Updateclassdefinitions Ignoresourceuserorigin Createlayerlink(s)onlayer

Workgroupreferencedlayerscanbeusedinasheetlayerviewport.Becausesheetlayerviewportscannot directlyreferencedesignlayersinotherfiles,referencethelayersandthencreateasheetlayerviewportthat showsthereferencedlayers. 6. ClickOKtoreturntotheOrganizationdialogbox. Theselectedlayersareaddedtothetargetfile,alongwithanynewlayersandlayerlinks.

Prioritizing Referenced Files


Duringareferenceupdate,theprogramcansearchthereferencedfilesintheorderinwhichtheyarelistedonthe Referencestab,andthenupdatethetargetfilewiththefirstinstanceofeachreferencedresourcethatisfound. Ifthesameresourceexistsinmultiplereferencedmasterfiles,itisrecommendedthatyoudisablethisfeature. Otherwise,ifyouchangethepriorityorder,orifyouupdateanindividualreference,youcouldchangethe sourcefileofaresourceinadvertently.Topreventthisfromhappening,deselecttheoptiontoUsereference prioritywhenupdatingresourcesintheReferenceSettingsdialogbox(seeSettingtheReferencingOptionson page 122). Tosetthepriorityofreferencedfiles: 1. SelectTools>OrganizationtoopentheOrganizationdialogbox. 2. FromtheReferencestab,clickSettingstoopentheReferenceSettingsdialogbox,andensurethattheoptionto Usereferenceprioritywhenupdatingresourcesisselected. 3. FromtheReferencestab,clickthenumberinits#columntoselectthemasterreferencefile(s)tobemoved;drag theitemupordownthelisttothenewpriorityposition.ThefirstfilelistedontheReferencestabhasthehighest priority.

Updating References
Referenceddesignlayersandresourcesareeitherupdatedautomaticallywhenthetargetfileisopened,ortheyare updatedmanuallyuponcommand.ThesepreferencesaresetineithertheNewReferenceortheEditReferencedialog box.Ifthefileissettoupdateautomatically,manualupdatescanstillbeperformedatanytime. Beforeanupdate,correctanybrokenreferencesasdescribedinCorrectingBrokenReferencesonpage 127. Toupdatereferencesmanually: 1. SelectTools>OrganizationtoopentheOrganizationdialogbox.

Workgroup Referencing |
2. FromtheReferencestab,selectthemasterfile(s)thatcontainthereferenceditemstobeupdated. Toupdateallreferencesinthetargetfile,selectallofthefiles. 3. ClickUpdatetoupdatethereferenceditemsinthetargetfilefromtheselectedfiles.

127

Ifpriorityupdatingisdisabled(recommended),referenceditemsarealwaysupdatedfromtheoriginalfile. Ifpriorityupdatingisenabled,referenceditemsareupdatedaccordingtothepriorityorderonthe Referencestab. Formoreinformationaboutpriorityupdating,seeSettingtheReferencingOptionsonpage 122,and PrioritizingReferencedFilesonpage 126. 4. Ifareferenceditemismissing,theReferencedResourcenotFounddialogboxopens.

Parameter
Breakthereference Deletetheresource Replaceresourcewith

Description
Breaksthereferencewiththemasterfile,leavingtheresourceinthetargetfile Deletesalloccurrencesoftheresourceinthetargetfile(fromboththedrawingandthe ResourceBrowser) Toreplacethemissingresourcewithanotheritemfromthemasterfile,selectthis option,andthenselectthereplacementitemfromthelistofavailableresources

5. ClickOKToAlltoperformthesameactionforallmissingresources.Toselectanactionforeachmissing resourceindividually,clickOK;thedialogboxredisplaysforeachmissingitem.

Correcting Broken References


IfareferencehasastatusofBrokenlinkintheReferencestab,theprogramcannotlocatethemasterfile.Items referencedfromthatfilecannotbeupdateduntilthebrokenreferenceiscorrected. Tocorrectbrokenreferences: 1. SelectTools>OrganizationtoopentheOrganizationdialogbox. 2. FromtheReferencestab,selectoneormoremasterfilesthathavebrokenreferences,andclickUpdate. 3. Analertpromptsyoutolocatethemasterfile.Ifyouselectedmultiplereferences,selectLookforsubsequent brokenreferencesinallofthefoldersmanuallylocatedtohavetheprogramsearchthesamelocationforallof them. Ifafileissettoupdateautomaticallywhenitisopened,andoneofitsreferencesisbroken,thisalertdisplays whenyouopenthefile. 4. ClickYestoopentheOpenCurrentVersionDrawingdialogbox.

128

| Chapter 3: Drawing Structure

5. LocatethemasterfileandclickOpen. OntheReferencestab,thestatusofthebrokenreferencechangesfromBrokenlinktoUptodateorOutofdate.If youselectedtheoptiontolookforsubsequentreferencesinthesamelocation,thosereferencesarecorrectedalso. 6. ClickOKtosavethenewnameand/orlocationforthereferences.

Referencing Resources
TheresourcesoffileslistedintheReferencestaboftheOrganizationdialogbox,aswellastheresourcesinany Vectorworksfileofthesameversionnumber,canbereferencedthroughtheResourceBrowser. Toreferencetheresourcesofamasterfile: 1. TodisplaytheresourcesofthemasterfileintheResourceBrowser,eitherusetheBrowseaDocumentcommand ontheFilesmenu,orusetheFileslisttoaccessthemasterfileifitisinaresourcelibrary(seeAccessingExisting Resourcesonpage 164). 2. Rightclick(Windows)orCtrlclick(Macintosh)onthedesiredresource,andselectReferencefromthecontext menu. 3. Iftheresourceisasymbolorpluginobject,theReferenceSymbol(s)dialogboxopens.Specifythelocationofthe referencedsymbolandclickOK.

Parameter
Preservefolderhierarchy Selectdestinationfolder Folderlist NewFolder

Description
Maintainsthesamefolderstructurethereferencedsymbolhadinitssourcefile Addsthereferencedsymboltotheselectedfolder Displaysthetargetfilessymbolfolders;theselectedfolderbecomesthedestinationfor thereferencedsymbol Createsanewfolderwithintheselectedfolder;specifythefoldernameandclickOKto createthesymbolfolder

4. Ifthemasterfilehasneverbeenreferencedinthecurrentfile,theNewReferencedialogboxopens.Specifythe referenceparametersandclickOK.

Workgroup Referencing |

129

Parameter
SourceFile Savereferencelocation as

Description
Displaysthepathandfilenameofthereferencedresourcefile Maintainseitheranabsoluteorrelativefilepathreferencefromthecurrentfiletothe referencedresourcesfile.Usetheabsolutepathwhenthelocationofthereferencedfile withrespecttothecurrentfileisnotgoingtochange.Usetherelativepathwhenthe filesmightbemovedtoanothercomputerorplatform;aslongastherelativepath betweenthefilesremainsthesame,thereferencecanbefound.Bothfilesmustbesaved onthesavevolumetoselectthisoption. TheSourceFilepathdisplayseitheranabsoluteorrelativepath,dependingonthe selection.

Savereferencedcacheto disk Automaticallyupdate outofdatereference duringfileopen Updateclassdefinitions

Savesacopyofthereferencedresourcewiththetargetfile.Whenthisoptionis deselected,acopyofthereferencedresourceisnotsaved,whichmeansthatthetarget filesizeissmaller;thereferencedresourceisrefreshedwhenthetargetfileisopened. Updatesthereferenceeachtimethetargetfileisopened;whendeselected,thereference isupdatedonlywhenUpdateisclickedfromtheReferencestaboftheOrganization dialogbox Updatesclassdefinitionsalongwiththereferencedresourcesthatusethoseclasses

5. Theresourceisaddedtothetargetfile.ReferencedresourcesdisplaywithitalicizednamesintheResource Browser. Thefollowingrulesapplytoreferencedresources.

130

| Chapter 3: Drawing Structure


Description
Areferencedresourcecanbeeditedwithinthetargetfile,providedthesourcefileisnot openedbyanotheruser,andthereferenceisnotbrokenortheresourceoutofdate. Changestothereferencedresourceareautomaticallyexportedtothesourcefile;whilein editmode,thesourcefileislocked. Thefollowingresourcescanbeeditedwithinthereferencedfile:gradients,hatches, recordformats,symboldefinitions,plantsymbols(VectorworksLandmarkrequired), sketchstylesandwallstyles(VectorworksDesignSeriesrequired),Renderworks backgroundsandtextures(Renderworksrequired).

Situation
Editingareferenced resource

Resourcenameconflict

Ifthereisanameconflictbetweenareferencedobjectandanotherobjectduringan update,analertallowsyoutorenametheotherobject.(Iftheotherobjectisalsoa referencedobject,itcannotberenamedandtheupdatefails.) Iftheuseroriginofamasterfileischanged,thelocationofthereferencedresourcesdo notchange,ifIgnoresourceuseroriginisselectedintheEditReferencedialogbox Changestotheclassofareferencedresourceareonlyreflectedinthetargetfileafteran updateifUpdateclassdefinitionsisselectedintheNewReferencedialogbox Ifareferencedresourceisdeletedinamasterfileandtheresourcedoesnotexistinany othermasterfileincludedinanupdate,whenthereferencetothemasterfileisupdated, analertdisplays.ClickOKtoconfirmthattheresourceisanorphan,orclickOKto Alltohideallalertsaboutorphanedresourcesduringthecurrentupdate.Orphaned resourcesarenolongerreferenced.

Changeuseroriginof masterfile Changemasterfile classes Resourcedeletedin masterfile

Tobreakareference,rightclick(Windows)orCtrlclick(Macintosh)onthedesiredresource,andselectBreak Referencefromthecontextmenu.Theresourceremainsinthetargetfile,butitisnolongerreferencedtothe masterfile.

Deleting References
Youcanstopreferencingafile,andchoosewhethertokeepthereferencedlayersandresourcesinthetargetfile. Todeleteareferencetoafile: 1. SelectTools>OrganizationtoopentheOrganizationdialogbox. 2. Selectthefiletostopreferencing,andthenclickDelete. TheDeleteReferencedialogboxopens.

Workgroup Referencing |

131

Parameter
Referenceto ReferencedLayers Keepincurrentdocument Delete ReferencedResources Keepincurrentdocument Deleteifunused

Description
Displaysthemasterfilenameandpath Selectanoptionforlayersthatarecurrentlyreferencedinthetargetfilefromthe masterfile Keepsthelayersinthetargetfile,butremovesthereference Removesreferencedlayersfromthetargetfile,includinglayerlinksandany objectsonthelayer Selectanoptionforresourcesthatarecurrentlyreferencedinthetargetfilefrom themasterfile Keepstheresourcesinthetargetfile,butremovesthereference Deletesunusedreferencedresources;keepsresourcesthathavebeenplacedin thefile,butremovesthereference

3. ClickOK.

Opening Referenced Files


TheVectorworksprogramprovideseasyaccesstothemasterfilesthatatargetfilereferences. Toopenareferencedfile: 1. AccesstheWindowmenu.ThebottomportionofthemenuprovidesasubmenuforeachVectorworksfilethatis currentlyopen. 2. Fromthesubmenuforthetargetfile,selectReferencedFilestodisplaytheVectorworksfilesthatthetargetfile references.ThoughPDFandimagefilescanbereferenced(inVectorworksDesignSeriesproducts),theydonot appearonthemenu. 3. Selectareferencedfiletoopenit.

132

| Chapter 3: Drawing Structure

List of referenced Vectorworks files

Drawing with Snapping

SmartCursorsnappingallowsyoutodrawwithprecisioninboth2Dand3D.Usedinconjunctionwithdrawingtools, theSmartCursorusessnapindicators,hints,extensionlines,text(SmartCursorcues),andsounds,andthenprecisely snapsthecursorbasedonthesnappingcategoriesenabledintheSnappingpalette.

Setting Snapping Parameters


TheSnappingpalettemanagesSmartCursorsnapping;theonscreenfeedbackwhichdisplayswhiledrawingisbased onthesnappingcategoriesenabledintheSnappingpalette.Differentdrawingtasksmayrequireavarietyofsnapping combinations.AsnappingcategoryisenabledbyclickingthedesiredtoolfromtheSnappingpalette.Eachtooltoggles toturnthesnappingcategoryonoroff. Snappingcategoriescanbeusedindividuallyorcombinedforprecisedrawingandsnapping.Forexample,snapto objectpointsandsnaptothegridtofindpointswhicharebothonanobjectandonagridline.Snappingcanalsobe combinedwithDatabarinputtofindaspecificsnappointalongadefinedlocationinthedrawingarea. Snappingisavailableforboth2Dand3Dtools;however,SnaptoTangentonlyappliesto2Dtools,andSnapto WorkingPlaneonlyappliesto3Dtools. ThesnappingparametersofmostofthesnappingtoolsaresetintheSmartCursorSettingsdialogbox.Mostofthese settingsareconsideredapplicationsettings,andapplytoanyfileopenedintheVectorworksprogram.Certainsettings areconsidereddocumentsettingsandaresavedwiththefile;theseincludegriddimensions,alternateangleextension lines,datumandsmartedgeoffset,anddistancesnapsettings.Someofthesnappingtoolsdonothaveadditional parameters,andaresimplytoggledonoroff. Whendrawing,itmaybecomenecessarytotemporarilysuspendSmartCursorsnapping.Pressandholdthe key (backquotekey)tosuspendallsnapping.Thesnappingsettingsareretained,andsnappingresumeswhenthe keyis nolongerpressed.Theshortcutkeyforsuspendingsnappingcanbecustomized;seeModifyingSnappingandMode Shortcutsonpage 887. Tosetupandactivatesnappingcategories: 1. IftheSnappingpaletteisnotopen,selectWindow>Palettes>Snapping. TheSnappingpaletteopens.Thelasttoolonthepaletteisdifferentdependingonwhethera2Dor3Dtoolis currentlyactive.

2D Snapping palette

3D Snapping palette

Snapping suspended with back quote key

2. DoubleclickasnappingtooltoopentheSmartCursorSettingsdialogboxwithspecificsnappingparametersfor thattool.Someofthetoolsdonothaveanyadditionalparameters. TheSmartCursorSettingsdialogboxcanalsobeopenedbyselectingTools>SmartCursorSettings.Eachtabof thedialogboxisdescribedinthefollowingsections. 3. Enterthedesiredcriteria,andthenclickOKtoset. Thecriteriaaredescribedinthefollowingsections.

134

| Chapter 4: Drawing with Snapping

4. Clickasnappingtooltoactivateit. SnappingpaletteshortcutkeyscanbesetintheWorkspaceEditor;seeModifyingSnappingandMode Shortcutsonpage 887. Differentcombinationsofconstraintsandsnappingparametersarerequiredfordifferentdrawingtasks.Select theTools>CustomTool/AttributecommandtoeasilycreateaVectorScriptwiththecurrentSmartCursor settingsandactivetoolsontheSnappingpalette.ExecutethescriptbydoubleclickingonitfromtheResource Browsertoquicklychangesnappingparametersandsettings.SeeCreatingCustomTool/AttributeScriptson page 872formoreinformation.

General Snapping
TheparametersontheGeneraltabspecifyglobalSmartCursorfunctionality. Tosetgeneralsnappingparameters: 1. SelectTools>SmartCursorSettings,ordoubleclickaSnappingpalettetoolthathasadditionalparameters. TheSmartCursorSettingsdialogboxopens.ClicktheGeneraltab.

Parameter
ShowSmartCursorCues

Description
DisplaysSmartCursorcueswhiledrawing.Thecuesdisplayeddependonthe combinationenabledintheSnappingpalette,aswellasthecurrentcursorposition. SmartCursorcuesarelistedinSmartCursorCuesonpage 153. Displaystemporarygraphicalhintstoindicatethatasnappointisavailable;see SnappingIndicatorsonpage 148formoreinformation.Deselecttohidesnap points. Whenusingthesnaploupe(seeUsingtheSnapLoupeonpage 152),setstheline thicknessesrelativetothezoomlevelsothatobjectsdisplaynormallyintheloupe view Snapstotheedgesandcenterofthecombinedprintableareaofdesignlayerand sheetlayerpages

ShowSnapPoints

ZoomLineThicknessesin SnapLoupe SnaptoCombinedPage Area

Setting Snapping Parameters | Parameter


SnaptoIndividualPages IgnoreNonplanarSnapsin PlanarContexts

135

Description
Snapstotheedgesandcenteroftheindividualpageswithindesignlayerandsheet layerpages Snapsonlytosnappointsthatareplanarwithinthecurrentplanescontext, ignoringsnappointsthatarenotcoplanar.Thisisusefulinseveralsituations: whentheautomaticworkingplaneison,andthecursorisoveraplanarface(nota curvedface);andwhentheautomaticworkingplaneisoff,andyouaredrawing planarobjects. Opensadialogboxtochangetheappearanceoftheinteractiveelementsinthe Vectorworksprogram,includinggeneralelements,objecthighlighting, SmartCursorelements,andsnappoints;seeConfiguringInteractiveDisplayon page 65 Remindsyouthatsnappingcanbesuspendedtemporarilybypressingthe key (backquotekey);seeSettingSnappingParametersonpage 133 Restoresdefaultparametersettingsforalltabs

InteractiveAppearance Settings

Note Reset 2. ClickOK.

Grid Snapping
Thesnapandreferencegridsassistwithprecisedrawingonbothdesignandsheetlayers,asdescribedinSnapand ReferenceGridsonpage 77. Whensnaptogridison,theSmartCursorsnapstosetpointsonthesnapgrid.Forexample,ifthegridissetto1,as themousemovesoverthegrid,itautomaticallycatcheseveryinch.Whenyoucreatealine,thelinesfirstandlast pointwill(ifnoothersnappingisactive)lieonthesnapgrid.Snaptogridistheonlytypeofsnappingthatdoesnot provideanysortofvisualcues.Ifsnaptogridison,themouseisalwaysonthegrid,unlessothersnapsarealso selectedwhichoverridesnaptogrid.

Reference grid

Snap grid

Whensnaptogridison,theworkingplanedisplayswithdots.Thedotsdonotdisplayforworkingplaneswhen snaptogridisoff.SeeAppearanceofthePlanesonpage 595. Tosetgridsnapping: 1. SelectTools>SmartCursorSettings,ordoubleclicktheSnaptoGridtoolintheSnappingpalette. TheSmartCursorSettingsdialogboxopens.FromtheGridtab,specifythesnapandreferencegridsettings.

136

| Chapter 4: Drawing with Snapping

Parameter
SnapGrid Symmetrical XandY ReferenceGrid Symmetrical XandY GridOptions ShowGrids

Description
Thegridthataligns(snaps)objectsduringdrawingandediting,whenSnaptoGridis active SelecttoconstraintheYsettingtobethesameastheXsetting,resultingina symmetricalgrid(thissettingisselectedbydefault) SetsthegriddimensionsintheXandYdirections;theYsettingappearsdimmedif Symmetricalisselected Thevisiblegridusedforvisuallyaligningobjectsduringdrawingandediting SelecttoconstraintheYsettingtobethesameastheXsetting,resultingina symmetricalgrid(thissettingisselectedbydefault) SetsthegriddimensionsintheXandYdirection;theYsettingappearsdimmedif Symmetricalisselected Setshowthereferencegridbehavesonscreenandwhenprinting Displaysthereferencegridwhenpossible(evenwiththisoptionselected,the referencegridmaynotdisplaydependingonthezoomfactor);alsodisplaysthe activelayerplanegridin3Dviews.Thissettingisselectedbydefault. Printsthereferencegridonbothdesignlayersandsheetlayers

PrintGrid 3DGridAxes Show3DZAxis

ShowstheZaxisforworkingplanes(thissettingisselectedbydefault)
Z axis

Show3DAxisLabels 2. ClickOK.

Showslabelsforeachaxisintheactivelayerplaneandworkingplane

Setting Snapping Parameters |


3. Toactivatesnappingtothesnapgrid,clicktheSnaptoGridtoolfromtheSnappingpalette.

137

Object Snapping
Whensnaptoobjectison,theSmartCursorfindsspecificpartsofanobject,suchascorners,endpoints,midpoints,or centersof2Dobjectsandarcedges,aswellasmeshes,extrudes,sweeps,spheres,3Dpolygons,3Dplanarfaces,and walls,floors,roofs,rooffaces,loci,andcolumns.Cuesdisplaynearthecursortoidentifythelocation. Tosetobjectsnapping: 1. SelectTools>SmartCursorSettings,ordoubleclicktheSnaptoObjecttoolintheSnappingpalette. TheSmartCursorSettingsdialogboxopens.FromtheObjecttab,specifytheobjectsnapsettings.

Parameter
EndPoint

Description
Findstheendpointofarcs,andtheendofanobjectsedge

Endpoint

Endpoint

MidPointofEdge

Findsthemiddleoftheedgeofanobject

Midpoint Midpoint

138

| Chapter 4: Drawing with Snapping


Description
Locatesthecenterof2Dobjectsandarcedges,aswellasmeshes,extrudes,sweeps, spheres,3Dpolygons,3Dplanarfaces,andwalls,floors,roofs,rooffaces,and columns

Parameter
CenterPoint

Center

Center

2D Object Snapping

3D Object Snapping

QuadrantPoints

Findsthetop,left,right,andbottomofcircles,ovals,rectangles,androunded rectangles
Top Center

InsertionPoint

Locatestheobjectoriginofloci,lights,objects,symbols,text,andfordimensions,one ofthereferencedpoints

Insertion Point

Vertex

Locatesthecornerpointonpolyline,polylineBzier,andpolylinecubicsegments;for 3D,findsthevertexofasolidorthecontrolpointofaNURBScurve

Point Point

Setting Snapping Parameters | Parameter


NearestPointonEdge

139

Description
For2D,findstheclosestpointonanobjectsedge,andfor3D,findsanynonspecific pointalongasolidedgeorNURBScurve.Itmaybemoreconvenienttousesmart edgesnappinginstead;seeSmartEdgeSnappingonpage 143.
Object

2. ClickOKtosettheobjectsnappingoptions. 3. Toactivateobjectsnapping,clicktheSnaptoObjecttoolfromtheSnappingpalette.

Angle Snapping
Twopointsdefineanangle;SnaptoAngleonlyappliestothesecondpointofatwopointfeedbacksegment,suchas whendrawingalineorpolygon.Whensnappingtoangles,theSmartCursorfindstheanglesspecified,andbydefault, theSmartCursoralsofindsanglesrelativetothehorizontalandverticalaxes.SnaptoAnglecanalsodetectaplan rotationangle(VectorworksDesignSeriesrequired);itemscreatedalongthatanglewheninarotatedplanview, appearhorizontalwheninanonrotated,worldcoordinateview. Tosetanglesnapping: 1. SelectTools>SmartCursorSettings,ordoubleclicktheSnaptoAngletoolintheSnappingpalette. TheSmartCursorSettingsdialogboxopens.FromtheAngletab,specifytheanglesnapsettings.

140

| Chapter 4: Drawing with Snapping


Description
Snapstothespecifiedangleswithrespecttothehorizontalorverticalaxes.Forexample,if 45isspecified,theanglesfoundinclude45,135(90+45),225(180+45),andsoon.Specify theanglestodetect,separatedbyasemicolon;45and30aresuggestedbydefault.Upto eightanglescanbeset.

Parameter
Angles Anglesfrom Axes

45 45

Anglesrelativeto priorsegment

Snapstothespecifiedanglesrelativetothepreviouslydrawnsegment,insteadofwith respecttotheaxes.Thisisconvenientwhendrawingmultisegmentshapes,sincetheangle snapisbasedonthepriorsegmentwhiledrawing,andnomentalarithmeticisrequired. The/keytogglesthisoptiononandoff.Whenoff,anglessnaprelativetotheaxesasinthe AnglesfromAxessetting.Theshortcutkeycanbesetintheworkspaceeditor;see ModifyingSnappingandModeShortcutsonpage 887

PlanRotation (Vectorworks DesignSeries required) Alternate CoordinateSystem EnterAngle ExtensionLines

Findstheangleofplanrotation;thissnapisusefulwhendrawinginarotatedtop/plan view,andrequiringobjectstobehorizontalwhentheplanisnolongerrotated

Specifiesanadditionalrotatedcoordinatesystemthatprovidesanglesnapsandalignments alongitsaxes SetsanangleotherthantheanglesenteredinAnglesfromAxes.Enteranalternateangle. Drawsanextensionlinefromasmartpointtothealternateangleand90tothealternate angle


Align Alt / Align Alt 90

HoldingtheShiftkeywhiledrawingforcestheSmartCursortoselectthenearestsnapangle. 2. ClickOKtosettheanglesnappingoptions. 3. Toactivateanglesnapping,clicktheSnaptoAngletoolfromtheSnappingpalette.

Setting Snapping Parameters |

141

Smart Points Snapping


Whensmartpointssnappingison,youcantemporarilyrememberapointwherethecursorpausedforasetlengthof time,orwhereaspecialshortcutkeywaspressed.Onceasmartpointhasbeendefined,youcanaligntoit horizontally,vertically,orataspecificangleusingextensionlinesandSmartCursorcues. Tosetasmartpoint,pausethecursoroveranobjectpointforthesetnumberofseconds,orpresstheTkey.Asmall boxdisplayswhenthesmartpointhasbeenset. Aspecialsmartpoint,calledadatum,canbesettotemporarilycreateaneworiginforsnappingandmeasuring purposes.Thedatumdoesnotneedtobesetoveranobject,butcanbeplacedanywhere.Whenadatumisset,all measurementsalongtheXandYaxisaretakenfromthatpoint,ratherthanthedrawingsorigin,untilthedatumis movedordeactivated. Tosetadatumpoint,pausethecursorforthesetnumberofseconds,orpresstheGkey.Thedatumdisplaysasasmall circlearoundthechosenpoint. TheSmartCursorremembersuptothreesmartpoints,andthentheoldestpointsarereplaced.Asmartpointordatum canbereleasedbypausingthecursororpressingtheshortcutkeyoverthepointagain. PresstheEsckeytoclearallsmartpoints. Acurrentsnapisneededtoacquiresmartpoints,soenablingSnaptoObject,ataminimum,isrecommended. Tosetsmartpointsnapping: 1. SelectTools>SmartCursorSettings,ordoubleclicktheSmartPointstoolintheSnappingpalette. TheSmartCursorSettingsdialogboxopens.FromtheSmartPointtab,specifythesmartpointsnapsettings.

142

| Chapter 4: Drawing with Snapping


Description
Displaysanextensionlinewhenthecursoralignshorizontally,vertically,orin theX,Y,orZdirectionwithasmartpointordatum

Parameter
Horizontal/VerticalExtensions

Align V Align Y

ExtensionLines

Createsanextensionlinefromasmartpointwhendrawingatasnapangleand theSmartCursorisalignedperpendiculartothesmartpoint

15 / Align

SnaptolinebetweenSmart Points

Snapstotheextensionlinebetweensmartpoints
Edge

Allowextensionsfromnearby SmartPoints

Createsextensionlinesfromsmartpointslocatednearthecursor. Whendeselected,preventsextensionlinesgeneratedbysmartpointslocated closetothecursor,sothatalignmentdoesnotoccurtounintentionallyacquired smartpointsincluttereddrawings. Setsasmartpointatthecursorlocationwhenthecursorpausesforthe indicatednumberofseconds.(Experiencedusersmaywishtoreducethepause timeto0.1or0.2seconds.) Alternatively,presstheTkeytosetorreleaseasmartpointatthecursor location,eveniftheAcquireSmartPointoptionisdisabled.

AcquireSmartPoint

Setting Snapping Parameters | Parameter


SetDatum

143

Description
Setsafloatingdatumtodefineatemporarydataoriginbypausingthecursor fortheindicatednumberofseconds(normally,setthistimeintervaltobe longerthanthesmartpointacquisitiontime).Alternatively,presstheGkeyto setorreleaseadatumatthecursorlocation,eveniftheSetDatumoptionis disabled.
Datum

DatumOffset

Setsanoffsetfromthetemporarydatumoriginthatisindicatedbyan additionalmarkeralongtheextensionline;entertheoffsetvalue
Datum Datum

2. ClickOKtosetthesmartpointoptions. 3. Toactivatesmartpointsnapping,clicktheSmartPointstoolfromtheSnappingpalette. Theappearanceofthesmartpointscanbechanged;seeConfiguringInteractiveDisplayonpage 65.The shortcutkeyassignedtosmartpointsandthedatumcanbecustomized;seeModifyingSnappingandMode Shortcutsonpage 887.

Smart Edge Snapping


Whensmartedgesnappingison,theSmartCursorfindspointson,oratacertaindistanceawayfrom,aspecifiededge. Theedgesoflinear2Dgeometry,arcandpolylinecurvesegments,and3Dsegmentsandcurves,canbeacquiredas smartedges.Onceasmartedgehasbeendefined,youcanaligntoithorizontally,vertically,orataspecificangleusing extensionlinesandSmartCursorcues.Asmartedgealsoprovidessnappingtoapointonanedgewithouthavingto activateNearestPointonEdgeobjectsnapping. Tosetasmartedge,slowlymovethecursorovera2Dobjectedgeforthesetnumberofseconds,orpresstheTkey whileoveranedge.Dottedextensionlinesindicatethatthesmartedgehasbeenset. Uptotwosmartedgescanbeset,andthentheoldestedgesarereplaced.Asmartedgecanbereleasedbymovingthe cursorslowlyovertheedgeorpressingtheTkeyovertheedgeagain. Tosetsmartedgesnapping: 1. SelectTools>SmartCursorSettings,ordoubleclicktheSmartEdgetoolintheSnappingpalette. TheSmartCursorSettingsdialogboxopens.FromtheSmartEdgetab,specifythesmartedgesnapsettings.

144

| Chapter 4: Drawing with Snapping

Parameter
AcquireEdge

Description
Setsasmartedgeatthecursorlocationwhenthecursormovesoveranobjectedgefor theindicatednumberofseconds.Alternatively,presstheTkeytosetorreleaseasmart edgeatthecursorlocation,eveniftheAcquireEdgeoptionisdisabled.

Smart Edge

SnaptoBisector

Findspointsalongthebisectorthatintersectstwosmartedges
Bisector Bisector

SnaptoOffset

Setsanoffsetfromeitherendofasmartedgeextensionlinethatisindicatedby additionalmarkersalongtheextensionline;entertheoffsetvalue
Offset Offset / Align V

Setting Snapping Parameters | Parameter


SnaptoExtensionLines

145

Description
Generatesextensionlinesfromsmartpointsperpendicularandparalleltothesmart edge
Align X Align Edge 90

2. ClickOKtosetthesmartedgeoptions. 3. Toactivatesmartedgesnapping,clicktheSmartEdgetoolfromtheSnappingpalette. Theappearanceofthesmartedgecanbechanged;seeConfiguringInteractiveDisplayonpage 65.The shortcutkeyassignedtothesmartedgecanbecustomized;seeModifyingSnappingandModeShortcutson page 887.

Distance Snapping
Whensnaptodistancesnappingison,theSmartCursorfindspointsataselecteddistancealongastraightorcurved line,polygonedges,walledges,andotherlinearobjects.

Along Line

Along Line

Tosetthesnapdistance: 1. SelectTools>SmartCursorSettings,ordoubleclicktheSnaptoDistancetoolintheSnappingpalette. TheSmartCursorSettingsdialogboxopens.FromtheDistancetab,specifythedistancesnapsettings.

146

| Chapter 4: Drawing with Snapping

2. Setthedistanceusingafraction,percentage,oradimensionaldistance.SelectMultipleDivisionstorepeatsnap pointsalongaline.Forexample,theSmartCursorcansnapeveryquarterinch,orevery1/8ofthelengthofthe line. TheSmartCursormeasuresfromeachendpointtothecenteroftheline.Ifalineis10unitslongandthedistance issetto6units,thedistancewillnotbefoundatall,sinceitislongerthanhalfaline.Similarly,anyfraction greaterthan1/2thelengthoftheobjectorlessthan0cannotbeused. 3. ClickOKtosettheSnaptoDistanceoptions. 4. ToactivateDistancesnapping,clicktheSnaptoDistancetoolfromtheSnappingpalette.

Snap to Intersection
Whensnaptointersectionsnappingison,theSmartCursorfindstheintersectionbetweentwoobjectsorbetweenthe partsofanobject.
Object/Object

Toactivatesnappingtointersection: ClicktheSnaptoIntersectiontoolfromtheSnappingpalette.Noparametersarerequired.

Snap to Tangent (2D Only)


TheSnaptoTangentoptionusestheSmartCursortolocatetangentsoncirculararcgeometrywhendrawing. Tangentscannotbefoundonquarterarcs.

Drawing with Snapping |


Toactivatetangentsnapping: ClicktheSnaptoTangenttoolfromtheSnappingpalette.Noparametersarerequired.

147

Tangent

Tangent

While drawing, as the feedback segment approaches a tangent, the special snap points indicator shows that a tangent snap is available

Move the cursor to the tangent snap, and click to create a line that is tangent to the circle

Alternatively, begin drawing a line from the arc geometry, and the feedback segment remains tangent to the circle. Click to create a tangent line.

Use tangent snapping to find the tangent when drawing arcs or polylines in Tangent Arc mode

HolddowntheOption(Macintosh)orAlt(Windows)keytoswitchthetangenttotheoppositesideoftheobject.

Snap to Working Plane (3D Only)


WhenSnaptoWorkingPlanesnappingison,theSmartCursorsnaps/projectsanypointnotontheworkingplane downtoitsshadowpointontheworkingplane. Toactivatesnappingtotheworkingplane: ClicktheSnaptoWorkingPlanetoolfromtheSnappingpalette.Noparametersarerequired.

Shadow point on working plane

While moving along the top edge of the extrude with working plane snapping on, the cursor snaps to the working plane

Drawing with Snapping


Avarietyofsettingsandoptionscombinetofacilitatedrawingwithsnapping.Severaltypesofsnaptypesand snappingindicatorsassistwithsnapping.Thesnaploupetemporarilyzoomsintothedrawingviewnearthecursorto obtainasnapinacomplexdrawing. Snappingisusedwiththefeedbacksegmentpreviewlinethatdisplayswhiledrawingwithmosttools.Forexample, whendrawingaline,youmaywantittobevertical,andalsoalignedwithapointonyourdrawing.Todothis,seta smartpoint(withextensionlines)onthepointtoalignto.Anglesnappingshouldbeenabled(becauseitsnapstothe

148

| Chapter 4: Drawing with Snapping

vertical)alongwithsmartpointsnapping.Thefeedbacksegmentofthelinesnapstotheverticalandtothesmart point,andasecondclickfinishesdrawingthelineasdesired.
Smart point has already been set Vertical / Align V

Feedback segment (Line tool in use)

Feedback segment snaps to vertical and to smart point extension line

Severalareasintheprogramcontrolthevariousaspectsofsnapping.

Functionality
Enable/disablesnappingtools Enable/disableindividualsnapping parameters Changetheappearanceofsnap pointsandindicators Enable/disablesnapbox,selection box,andacquisitionhints Changetheappearanceofthesnap boxandselectionbox SavesnapsettingsinaVectorScript Changesnappingshortcutkeys Snappingtoobjectsinotherlayers orinclassesorlayerssettogray

Location/Description
Snappingpalette,SettingSnappingParametersonpage 133 SmartCursorSettingsdialogbox;SettingSnappingParameterson page 133 InteractiveAppearanceSettingsdialogbox;ConfiguringInteractive Displayonpage 65 InteractivetabofVectorworkspreferences;InteractivePreferenceson page 25 InteractivetabofVectorworkspreferences;InteractivePreferenceson page 25 CustomTool/Attributecommand;CreatingCustomTool/AttributeScripts onpage 872 KeystaboftheWorkspaceEditor;ModifyingSnappingandMode Shortcutsonpage 887 Classandlayeroptioncommands;SettingClassandDesignLayerOptions onpage 113

Snapping Indicators
Thereareseveraltypesofsnappoints.UsetheseincombinationwiththesettingsintheSnappingpalette, SmartCursorSettingsdialogbox,theInteractiveAppearanceSettingsdialogbox,andInteractivetabinVectorworks preferencestotailorsnappingandsnappingappearancetoyourdrawingtask.Inadditiontothesnappoints,other interactiveelementsassistwithsnapping. Availablesnappoints Availablesnappointsdisplaynearthecursor,withinthesnapradius,toindicatethatasnappointisnearthe cursor.

Drawing with Snapping |

149

Specialsnappoints Specialsnappointsdisplayinthegeneralcursorarea,toinformyouthatmidpoint,center,alongline,and/or tangentsnappointsarenearby.ThevisiblesnappointsdependonthesnappingenabledinboththeSmartCursor SettingsdialogboxandtheSnappingpalette.

Special snap points near the cursor

Currentsnappoint ThecurrentsnappointshowsthattheSmartCursorissnapped.

Thecurrentsnappointindicatorisblackin2D.In3D,theindicatordisplayswithred,green,andbluecolors, whichcorrespondtothered(X),green(Y),andblue(Z)axes.Theorientationofthe3Dindicatorisrelativetothe currentworkingplane;dashedlinesindicatethenegativeaxes.

2D current point

3D current point

Obtainedsnappoint Whendrawingwithatool,suchastheLinetool,thefirstclickofthetoolonacurrentsnapbecomestheobtained snappoint.Theobtainedsnappointonlydisplaysforabriefmoment,lettingyouknowthattheclickwas snapped.

Smartpoint WhentheSmartPointsnappingisenabled,uptothreesmartpointscanbedefinedatonetime;seeSmartPoints Snappingonpage 141.Asmartpointdisplaysasaredrectanglebydefault.Ifextensionlinesareenabled,the extensionlineforthesmartpointappearsasadashedline.Adatumisaspecialtypeofsmartpointandcountsas oneofthethreesmartpoints.

150

| Chapter 4: Drawing with Snapping

Smart point

Smart point with extension line

Datum

Datum with extension line

Snapobjecthighlighting Theobjectfromwhichthesnappointsaregeneratedishighlightedwithadashedline.Thisensuresthatthe correctsnappointsarebeingobtainedwithinacongesteddrawing.

SmartCursorselectionboxandsnapbox Twoareasaroundthecursorassistwithdrawing:theselectionboxandsnapbox.
Selection box Snap box

Theselectionboxshowstheareawhereobjectgeometrycanbeselectedorrecognizedbyatoolthatselectsor clicksobjects(suchastheSelectiontoolortheEyedroppertool).Thesnapboxindicatestheareafromwhichthe currentsnapwillbeobtained.Thecurrentsnapisobtainedfromalltheavailablesnapsinsidethesnapbox.The snapboxallowsasnaptobeheldwhiletheselectionboxmovesaroundtochangethesnappingselection. Thesizeandvisibilityoftheselectionboxandsnapboxcanbeadjusted,andtheseindicatorsenabled,fromthe InteractivetabinVectorworkspreferences.SeeInteractivePreferencesonpage 25. Acquisitionhints Acquisitionhintsdisplaythepotentialsnappointsthatcanbeacquirednearthecursor.Theyindicatethata smartpoint,smartedge,orvectorlockcanbeacquired.

Acquisition Hint
Smartpoint

Appearance

Smartedge

Drawing with Snapping | Acquisition Hint


Vectorlock

151

Appearance

The lock acquisition hint indicates that by pressing the T key, a vector lock can be placed at the current cursor location

EnabletheacquisitionhintsfromtheInteractivetabinVectorworkspreferences.SeeInteractivePreferenceson page 25. AlignmentIndicators Lightlycoloredaxisandplaneindicatorsprovidesubtlehintstohelpdeterminewhetherthecursorisalignedto anaxis(2D)oranaxisand/orplane(3D).Thecoloroftheindicatormatchestheaxiscolor(redforX,greenforY, andblueforZ)tohelpyoudeterminewhenthecursorisalignedtoanaxisorplane.

Green Y plane alignment indicator Green Y axis alignment indicator Green Y axis alignment indicator

Creating Vector Locks


Anextensionlinecreatedfromasmartpointindicatesavector,ordirection.Thisvectorcanbelockedtofacilitate drawingandmovingobjects,becausetheSmartCursorstayslockedtothatvectorandservesasaguideforsnapping alongthatvector. Tocreateavectorlock: 1. Selectthetoolfordrawing,anobjecttomove,orotheroperationthatrequiresavectorlock. Itishelpfultodisplayacquisitionhints,whichshowwhenavectorlockcanbeset.ThisisaVectorworks interactivepreference;seeInteractivePreferencesonpage 25. 2. Duringtheoperation,thefeedbacksegmentindicatesthevectordirectionandtheacquisitionhintatthecursor indicatesthatavectorlockcanbeset.Avectorlockcanbesetalongasmartpointextensionline.Asthecursor movesalongtheextensionline,thelockacquisitionhintshowsthatavectorlockcanbeset. 3. PresstheTkeytocreatethevectorlockinthedirectionoftheextensionline. Thevectorlockdisplays.TheappearanceofvectorlockscanbesetasdescribedinConfiguringInteractive Displayonpage 65.

152

| Chapter 4: Drawing with Snapping

Press the T key

The selection needs to move up in a vertical direction

4. TheSmartCursorlockstothevectorandtheoperationissnappedalongthedesireddirection.

Vector locks can also be created in 3D

TheDatabarcancreateavectorlockalongaspecificdirection.EntervaluesintheDatabarasdescribedinUsingthe DataBaronpage 209.Avectorlockdisplays,andtheSmartCursoronlysnapstopointsonthelockedline.

Using the Snap Loupe


Inacongesteddrawing,itcanbedifficulttoobtainthedesiredsnappoint.Thesnaploupetemporarilyzoomsintoa drawingtoobtainthesnap.Inthiszoomedinview,thesnappointsnearthemouseareeasiertosee. Thesnaploupeisnotintendedtoincludenavigationwithintheloupewindow.Itisaconvenientwayobtainingsnap pointsandquicklyreturningtothedrawing. Tousethesnaploupe: 1. Movethemousetotheareawheresnappingisdesired,butdifficult.

SmartCursor Cues |

153

2. PresstheZkey. Thesnaploupewindowopens,displayingtheregionnearthecursorinazoomedview.Withintheloupe window,movethecursortolocatethedesiredpoint.Ifthesnaploupewindowisnotsufficientlymagnifiedto findasnap,presstheZkeyagain. TheZoomLineThicknessinSnapLoupepreferencedetermineshowthedrawingdisplayswithinthesnap loupe.SeeGeneralSnappingonpage 134tochangethissetting.

3. Clicktoperformthedesiredoperation;thesnaploupewindowclosesautomatically,returningtothedrawing. Alternatively,presstheEsckeytoexitthesnaploupewithoutclicking,orclickoutsideoftheloupetocloseit.

SmartCursor Cues
ThefollowingtableliststheindividualcuesthattheSmartCursorusesalongwithadescriptionofeach.Inmanycases, twocuesareusedtogethertoindicatethattwosnapshavebeenactivated.Forexample,thecueAlignH/Anglemeans thatthepointlocatedisbothalignedhorizontallytotheindicatedsmartpointandalsosnappingtoanangle. Somecuesdisplaywhenafirstpointhasalreadybeenfound,andasecondpointisbeingsought.Thesetwopoints formalinecalledthefeedbacksegment.ThissegmentformsanangleandlengthwhichtheSmartCursorusesfor someofitssnaps.

154

| Chapter 4: Drawing with Snapping

Foraline,thefeedbacksegmentisthesameasthelinebeingdrawn.However,forotherobjects,theinteractiveimage doesnotlieonthefeedbacksegment.TheSmartCursorworksonthefeedbacksegmentcreatedfromthefirsttothe secondpoints(forpolygons,fromthepreviouspointtothecurrentpoint).

Cue
SnaptoAngle Alt Alt90 Deltaangle Horizontal Parallel Perpendicular PlanRotation (VectorworksDesign Seriesrequired) Symmetric Vertical X Y Z X Y Z SmartPoint Align AlignH AlignV AlignX AlignY AlignZ AlignX AlignY

Description
Feedbacksegmentisparalleltothealternativecoordinatesystemangle Feedbacksegmentisperpendiculartothealternativecoordinatesystemangle Feedbacksegmentisatthespecifiedsnapanglefromtherotatedgrid Feedbacksegmentishorizontal Feedbacksegmentisparalleltoanobject Feedbacksegmentisperpendiculartoanobject Feedbacksegmentisalignedtotherotatedplanangle

Feedbacksegmentissketchingoutasquareorcircle Feedbacksegmentisvertical FeedbacksegmentisalignedwiththeXaxis FeedbacksegmentisalignedwiththeYaxis FeedbacksegmentisalignedwiththeZaxis,orpointisalignedtoasmartpointin thedirectionoftheZaxis FeedbacksegmentisalignedwiththeXaxisoftherotatedgrid FeedbacksegmentisalignedwiththeYaxisoftherotatedgrid FeedbacksegmentisalignedwiththeZaxisoftherotatedgrid,orpointisalignedto asmartpointinthedirectionoftheZaxisoftherotatedgrid

ExtensionlineusedforallsmartpointcuesexceptDatum Feedbacksegmentisperpendiculartoasegmentfromthecursortoasmartpoint Pointisalignedhorizontallywithasmartpoint Pointisalignedverticallywithasmartpoint PointisalignedwiththeXcoordinateofasmartpoint PointisalignedwiththeYcoordinateofasmartpoint PointisalignedwiththeZcoordinateofasmartpoint PointisalignedwiththeXcoordinateofasmartpoint,inthespaceoftherotated grid PointisalignedwiththeYcoordinateofasmartpoint,inthespaceoftherotated grid

SmartCursor Cues | Cue


AlignZ AlignEdge AlignEdge90 AlignAlt AlignAlt90 Datum O WorkingPlane SnaptoDistance AlongLine 2DPointisataspecifieddistancealongline

155

Description
PointisalignedwiththeZcoordinateofasmartpoint,inthespaceoftherotated grid Pointisalignedtosmartedge Pointisalignedperpendiculartosmartedge Pointisalignedtotheusercoordinatesystem Pointisalignedperpendiculartotheusercoordinatesystem PointistheDatum CirclearoundDatum Pointisonthegridplane

3DPointisataspecifieddistancealonglinefromtheendpointofaNURBScurve, 3Dpolygon,oredgeofasolidobject Databar Angle Length SnaptoObject Arc ArcCenter ArcEnd Bzier BottomCenter BottomLeft BottomRight Center Cursorisoverthecornerpointofapolylinearcsegment Cursorisoverthecenterpointofanarc Cursorisovertheendofanarcsegment CursorisoverthecornerpointofapolylineBziersegment Cursorisoverthebottomcenterofrectangleorgroup Cursorisoverthebottomleftoftheobjectsboundingbox Cursorisoverthebottomrightoftheobjectsboundingbox 2DCursorisoverthecenteroftheobjectsboundingbox 3DCursorisoverthegeometriccenterofcertainobjects,NURBScurves,3D polygons,orthecenterofacircularNURBScurve CenterLeft CenterRight Corner Endpoint Fit InsertionPoint Cursorisoverthecenterleftoftheobjectsboundingbox Cursorisoverthecenterrightoftheobjectsboundingbox Cursorisoverthecornerpointofapolylinesegment Cursorisovertheendofanobjectsedge Cursorisoverthecornerpointofapolylinecubicsegment Cursorisovertheobjectoriginforsymbols,parametricobjects,andtextobjects;for dimensions,thecursorisoveroneofthereferencedpoints ExtensionlineusedtoindicateXorYvalueislocked Feedbacksegmentisconstrainedtoanangle FeedbacksegmentisofafixedlengthsetinDatabar

156
Cue

| Chapter 4: Drawing with Snapping


Description
Cursorisonalight Cursorisonalocus Cursorisona3Dlocus Cursorisoverthemiddleofanobjectsedge 2DCursorisonanobjectsedge 3DCursorisonanynonspecificpointalongasolidedgeorNURBScurve; displaysatallcornerpointswhentheNearestPointonEdgeoptionisdeselectedfor objectsnapping Point 2DCursorisonanobjectpoint 3DCursorisononeoftheverticesofasolid,thecontrolpointofaNURBScurve, thecontrolpointofaNURBSsurface,orNURBScurveinterpolationpoint TopCenter TopLeft TopRight Cursorisoverthetopcenteroftheobjectsboundingbox Cursorisoverthetopleftoftheobjectsboundingbox Cursorisoverthetoprightoftheobjectsboundingbox

Light Locus 3DLocus Midpoint Object

SmartEdge Bisector Edge Edge90 Offset SmartEdge SnaptoTangent Tangent Tangent/Tangent Feedbacksegmentistangenttoanarc Feedbacksegmentistangenttotwoarcs Pointisonthebisectorbetweentwosmartedges Feedbacksegmentisparalleltoasmartedge,orcursorisontheedgebetweentwo smartpoints Feedbacksegmentisperpendiculartoasmartedge Pointisapresetdistancefromasmartedge Pointisonasmartedge,butnotontheobjectitself

Using Vectorworks Resources

TheVectorworksprogramprovidesavarietyofresourcestoaidindrawing.Itisalsopossibletocreatecustom resourcestoyourspecifications.TheseresourcesareeasilyaccessiblefromtheResourceBrowser,whichisthecentral repositoryforallavailableVectorworksresources. Someoftheseresourcesarealsoavailableasdefaultcontentatthepointofusetofacilitatefaster,easierdrawing. Customresourcescanalsobemadeavailablebydefault.Thisprovidestheflexibilitytochooseamongdefaultcontent, customcontent,orallavailableresourceswhiledrawing.

Libraries
Vectorworkssoftwareisinstalledwithhundredsoflibraries,whichcanbeaccessedthroughtheResourceBrowser (seeAccessingExistingResourcesonpage 164).Excludingstandardsandtemplates(whichareinstalledbasedon thedrawingunitselectedduringinstallation),alllibrariesfortheVectorworksFundamentalsandRenderworks productsareuniversal,andareinstalledregardlessofthedrawingunitselectedduringinstallation.Librariesare organizedbyprofessionaldisciplineandsubject,andincludethefollowing: Hatches ImageProps(Renderworksrequired) ObjectsBuildingServices ObjectsMiscellaneous&Entourage Textures(Renderworksrequired) Backgrounds(Renderworksrequired) GradientFills ImageFills TileFills ObjectsBuildingArchitecture&Interior ObjectsBuildingLandscape&Site RenderStyles(Renderworksrequired)

Asubsetofcontent(someofwhichareresourcesavailableinlibraries)isalsoavailablebydefaultatthepointofuse (seeDefaultContentinVectorworksFundamentalsandRenderworksonpage 157).TheVectorworksDesignSeries productscontainadditionallibraries.Foralistoflibrariesandtheproduct(s)towhichtheybelong,seeLibrariesin VectorworksFundamentalsandRenderworksonpage 891inthisguide,orVectorworksDesignSeriesLibrarieson page 989intheVectorworksDesignSeriesUsersGuide.AdditionallibrariesareavailableforVectorworksService Selectsubscribers;seeVectorworksServiceSelectonpage xiv.

Default Content in Vectorworks Fundamentals and Renderworks


Commonlyusedcontentisavailableatthepointofusewhileyoudraw.Thefollowingtableliststhedefaultcontent providedwiththeVectorworksFundamentalsandRenderworksproducts.

Default Content
Cabinethandles Colorpalettes Dashstyles Gradients Hatches Imagefills Renderworksbackgrounds

Location
Libraries\Defaults\CabinetHandles Libraries\Defaults\ColorPalettes Libraries\Defaults\AttributesDashStyles Libraries\Defaults\AttributesGradients Libraries\Defaults\AttributesHatches Libraries\Defaults\AttributesImageFills Libraries\Defaults\RenderworksBackgrounds

Vectorworks
X X X X X X

Renderworks

158

| Chapter 5: Using Vectorworks Resources


Location
Libraries\Defaults\RenderworksTextures Libraries\Defaults\RenderworksRenderStyles Libraries\Defaults\StructuralShapes Libraries\Defaults\TextStyles Libraries\Defaults\AttributesTileFills Libraries\Defaults\SheetBorderTitleBlocks Libraries\Defaults\Walls~SlabsTextures Libraries\Defaults\VBvisualPlant X X X X X X

Default Content
Renderworkstextures Renderworksstyles Structuralshapes Textstyles Tilefills Titleblocks(simple) Walltextures VBvisual3Dplants

Vectorworks

Renderworks
X X

TheabilitytousedefaultcontentisapreferenceontheSessiontaboftheVectorworkspreferences,whichcanbe disabledifdefaultcontentuseisnotdesired;seeSessionPreferencesonpage 21. DefaultcontentisavailablefromavarietyofdialogboxesandalsofromtheAttributesandObjectInfopalettes.Once defaultcontentisselectedforuse,itisautomaticallyimportedintothecurrentfileandifitaresource(suchasahatch orgradient)italsodisplaysintheResourceBrowser;seeCreatingNewResourcesonpage 163.Itcanthenbeshared amongotherdrawingfiles.

Creating Custom Default Content


Tomakecustomcontentavailableasdefaultcontent,useanyofthefollowingmethods. Importcustomcontenttoadefaultcontentfile Addcustomcontentfiletoadefaultcontentfolder Createacustomcontentfileandplaceanaliasof(Macintosh)orshortcutto(Windows)thatfileinadefault contentfolder Filesthatcontaincustomcontentcanbeplacedindifferentfolders,dependingonwhoneedsaccesstothecontent.The folderstructuremustbethesameasthatoftheVectorworksdefaultcontent. Tocreatedefaultcontentforyourselfonly,putthefileintheappropriatesubfolderwithin [User]\Libraries\Defaults(where[User]istheuserdatafolderspecifiedinyourVectorworkspreferences). SeeUserFoldersPreferencesonpage 26formoreinformationaboutuserfolders. IfVectorworksDesignSeriesproductsareinstalled,youcancreatedefaultcontentthatisprojectspecific,orthat issharedwithaworkgroup.Todoso,putthefileonthenetworkintheappropriatesubfolderwithin [Workgroup]\Libraries\Defaults(where[Workgroup]isaworkgroupfolderspecifiedinyourVectorworks preferences).Whencoworkerssetupthisworkgroupfolderintheirpreferences,theyalsohaveaccesstothe defaultcontent. Ifacustomcontentfilecontainsmultipletypesofcontent,theprogramonlydisplaysthecontenttypeforthefolder thatcontainsthecustomfile(oranaliasorshortcuttothefile).Forexample,ifafilecontainsbothwallhatchesand textures,andthefileisintheLibraries\Defaults\WallsTexturesfolder,onlythewalltexturesaredisplayed.

Organizing Content Display


Thecustomanddefaultcontentaredisplayedbelowthecontentinthecurrentfile;eachlistisinascending alphabeticalorder.

Using the Resource Browser |

159

Todisplaythecustomorcurrentfilescontentfirstinaselectionlist,implementanamingstandardthatplacesthe desiredcontenttowardthetopofthelistalphabetically.Toviewonlythecurrentfilescontentinaselectionlist, disabletheDisplaydefaultcontentVectorworkspreference.

Using the Resource Browser


TheResourceBrowseristhecentralrepositoryforallVectorworksresources.Useittocreate,apply,andmanage resourcesinthecurrentfile,andtoaccessresourcesinotherfiles. TousetheResourceBrowser: 1. SelectWindow>Palettes>ResourceBrowser. TheResourceBrowseropens.
A check mark indicates which files resources are currently displayed (Macintosh only) Files menu Files list Home button Resources menu Up one level button Select to always display the resources of the active file Select a favorite file to display its resources, without opening the file File folder list Resource type Resource tooltip Resource preview Select a library option to browse for a file from which to display resources, without opening the file Resource display window Resource name

Select an open file to display its resources

Active symbol button

Feature
Filesmenu

Description
Listsmenucommandsthatareusedtocreateandmanageasetoffavoriteresource files(seeUsingFavoritesFilesonpage 166)andtobrowsetheresourcesinan existingdocument(seeQuickResourceBrowsingonpage 165) SpecifiesthefilefromwhichtodisplayresourcesintheResourceBrowser.Selectafile fromtheOpenFilesorFavoritessectionsofthelist,orselectanoptionfromthe Librariessectionofthelistandbrowsetolocatethefilethatcontainstheresourcesyou need. SelectAlwaysDisplayActiveDocumenttoautomaticallydisplaytheresourcesinthe activefilewheneveryouswitchfromoneopenfiletoanother. SeeUsingResourcesfromOpenFiles,Favorites,andLibrariesonpage 165.

Fileslist

160

| Chapter 5: Using Vectorworks Resources


Description
Displaystheresourcesofthecurrentlyactivefile Listsmenucommandsthatareusedtoworkwithresources;seethefollowing: ViewingResourcesonpage 160 CreatingNewResourcesonpage 163 FindingResourcesonpage 167 WorkingwithResourcesonpage 170

Feature
Homebutton Resourcesmenu

Uponelevelbutton Filefolderlist

MovesonelevelupthesymbolfolderorVectorScriptpalettefolderhierarchy Liststhefilesresourcefolders,iftherearesymbolfoldersorVectorScriptpalette foldersinthefile.Selectafoldertodisplaythefoldersresourcesintheresource displaywindow. Toreturntoaviewoftheentireresourcehierarchy,selectTopLevel.Allresource typesandfoldersthatarecurrentlyselectedtobeshowndisplayintheresource displaywindow.

Resourcetype

InThumbnailsmode,displaysresourcesdividedintocategoriesbytype;thetypesare displayedinheadingsthatcanbeshownandexpanded,orcollapsedandhidden(see HidingandShowingResourcesonpage 162).InListmode,clickthecolumnheader tosortthecolumnsbyresourcenameorbyresourcetype. Showsthefullresourcenameasatooltipwhenthemousepointerhoversovera resource;forreferencedresources,thetooltipalsoshowsthesourcefilename Displaysresourceswithapreviewimage,orliststheresourceswitharepresentational icon(seeViewingResourcesonpage 160) Showstheresourcename;anameinitalicsindicatesareferencedresource.Typethe firstletterofaresourcetoquicklydisplayresourcenamesbeginningwiththatletter. Thecolorofasymbol(black,red,orblue)indicatesthesymboltype(seeSymbol Typesonpage 173). DisplaystheresourcesfromthefileshownintheFileslist,andthesymbolfolder shownintheFileFolderlist.Selectwhichresourcetypestodisplayfromthe Resourcesmenu(seeHidingandShowingResourcesonpage 162). Displaysthecurrentlyactivesymbolintheresourcedisplaywindow

Resourcetooltip Resourcepreview Resourcename

Resourcedisplaywindow

Activesymbolbutton

2. Bydefault,theresourcesfromthecurrentlyactivedocumentdisplay.Locateandselectaresourcetousefrom thisfile,orusetheFileslisttoviewresourcesfromotherfiles.Iftheresourceyouneeddoesnotexist,youcan createone. 3. Oncearesourceisselected,youcanuseitinthedrawing,orselectanotheractionfromtheResourcesmenu,such asEditorExporttoanotherfile.SeeWorkingwithResourcesonpage 170formoredetails.

Viewing Resources
ResourcescanbeviewedineitherThumbnails(default)orListmode.

Using the Resource Browser |

161

Click the column header to select how to sort the resources; click again to change the sort order Representational resource icon

Full color, 64x64 pixel image

Thumbnails mode

List mode

InThumbnailsmode,resourcesaredisplayedin64x64pixelfullcolor.Gradientfills,hatchfills,imagefills,symbols, pluginobjects,textstyles,andtilefillsarepreviewedwithanactualimage;otherresourcesarepreviewedwitha representationalicon.Forsymbols,thethumbnailviewandrendermodecanbesetfromtheResourcemenu,and wheneditingsymbols,thethumbnailviewcanbesettomatchtheeditingview.Longresourcenamesdisplayonupto fivelines,andthenumberofcharactersdisplayeddependsonthesystemfontselected.InListmode,resourcesare displayedas16x16pixelrepresentationalicons.

Resource
GradientFill(seeUsingGradientFillsonpage 552)

Thumbnail Icon

List Icon

HatchFill(seeUsingHatchFillsonpage 541)

ImageFill(seeUsingImageFillsonpage 557)

RecordFormat(seeRecordFormatsonpage 191) ReferencedResource(seeWorkgroupReferencingonpage 121) RenderworksBackground(Renderworksrequired;seeCreatingLayer Backgroundsonpage 629) RenderworksTexture(Renderworksrequired;seeCreatingTextureson page 609) RenderworksPropTexture(Renderworksrequired);seeCreatingImage PropObjectsonpage 626 Resourcenamedisplaysinitalics

162

| Chapter 5: Using Vectorworks Resources


Thumbnail Icon List Icon

Resource
RenderworksStyle(Renderworksrequired);seeCreatingRenderworks Stylesonpage 690 SketchStyle(VectorworksDesignSeriesrequired;seeSketchRendering onpage 641intheVectorworksDesignSeriesUsersGuide) SlabStyle(VectorworksArchitectrequired;seeCreatingSlabsonpage 91 intheVectorworksDesignSeriesUsersGuide) 2DSymbolsandPluginObjects(seeUnderstandingSymbolson page 173) 3DSymbolsandPluginObjects(seeUnderstandingSymbolson page 173) HybridSymbolsandPluginObjects(seeUnderstandingSymbolson page 173) SymbolFolder(seeManagingSymbolsonpage 188) TextStyle(seeUsingTextStylesonpage 364)

TileFill(seeUsingTileFillsonpage 548)

VectorScript(seeUsingScriptsonpage 871)

VectorScriptPalette(seeUsingScriptsonpage 871) WallStyle(VectorworksArchitectrequired) Worksheet(seeCreatingWorksheetsonpage 833)

Tochangetheviewmode: 1. IntheResourceBrowser,selectViewAsfromtheResourcesmenu. 2. Fromthelist,selectThumbnailsorList. SelectWindow>Palettes>SavePalettePositionstosaveselectedviewsacrossVectorworkssessions.Torevert tosettingsestablishedwhenthecustomworkspacewascreated(intheUserDataandPreferencesfolder),click ResetSavedSettingsfromtheSessiontabofVectorworkspreferences(seeSessionPreferencesonpage 21).

Hiding and Showing Resources


Whentherearealargenumberofresourcetypes,itmaybeusefultohideunusedresourcetypesfromview.

Using the Resource Browser |


Tohideorshowresourcetypes: 1. SelectShowObjectTypesfromtheResourcesmenu.

163

2. Selecttheresourcetypetohideorshow.Acurrentlyvisibleresourcetypeisindicatedbyacheckmarknexttoits name.(InListview,hiddenresourcesarenotshownintheresourcedisplaywindow.)

InThumbnailsmode,clickonthedisclosurearrownexttotheresourcetypenameintheResourceBrowsertohideor displayresources.Alternatively,doubleclickontheresourcenamebartohideordisplayresources. SelectWindow>Palettes>SavePalettePositionstosavethecurrentshow/hidestatusacrossVectorworkssessions. Toreverttosettingsestablishedwhenthecustomworkspacewascreated(intheUserDataandPreferencesfolder), clickResetSavedSettingsfromtheSessiontabofVectorworkspreferences(seeSessionPreferencesonpage 21).

Creating New Resources


MostnewresourcesarecreatedthroughtheResourceBrowser.However,customselection,tool/attribute,visibility VectorScripts,andpluginsarecreatedthroughcommandsontheToolsmenu,andsymbolsarecreatedthrough Modify>CreateSymbol.HatchescanbecreatedeitherthroughtheResourceBrowserorthroughModify>Hatch. TextstylescanbecreatedthroughtheResourceBrowser,throughText>FormatText,orthroughtheNewoptionon theTextStylelistontheTexttoolsToolbar. Tocreateanewresource: 1. IntheResourceBrowser,selectNewResourcefromtheResourcesmenu.TheNewResourcemenuopens. Alternatively,rightclick(Windows)orCtrlclick(Macintosh)intheResourceBrowsertoopenthemenu. DoubleclickinanunusedareaoftheresourcedisplayareatoopentheCreateResourcedialogbox.Thedialog boxcontainsthesameitemsastheNewResourcemenu.

164

| Chapter 5: Using Vectorworks Resources

2. Selecttheresourcetypetocreate. Theresourcespecificdialogboxopens. 3. Followthespecificcreationproceduresforthatresource. Oncecreated,theresourcedisplaysintheResourceBrowser.

Quick Resource Creation


Whenyourightclick(Windows)orCtrlclick(Macintosh)inanareaoftheResourceBrowserthatisassociatedwith anexistingresourcetype,thecontextmenucontainsanadditionaloptionforquicklycreatinganotherresourceofthe sametype.Forexample,rightclickorCtrlclickintheHatchessectionandtheNewHatchin(document)option displays.Thecontextmenuthatdisplaysvariesslightly,dependingonwhetheryouclickablankareaoftheResource Browser,ordirectlyonaresource. Also,immediatelyafteranewresourceiscreated,theResourcesmenucontainsanadditionaloptionforquickly creatinganotherresourceofthesametype.
Click here to display the command from the Resources menu Ctrl-click here to display the context menu

Accessing Existing Resources


WhilenewresourcesareautomaticallyaddedtotheResourceBrowseruponcreation,resourcesthatexistinotherfiles mustbeimportedorreferencedintothecurrentfilethroughtheResourceBrowserpalette.Defaultcontentis

Using the Resource Browser |

165

automaticallyimportedintothecurrentfileatthepointofuse,andifitisaresource(suchasahatchorgradient)also displaysintheResourceBrowser;seeDefaultContentinVectorworksFundamentalsandRenderworksonpage 157.

Quick Resource Browsing


Resourcesinanotherfilecanbequicklybrowsedtolocateresourcesandtodeterminewhetherthatfileshouldbe addedasafavorite. Toviewtheresourcesavailableinanotherfilethatisnotyetafavorite: 1. IntheResourceBrowser,selectBrowseaDocumentfromtheFilesmenu. Thestandardfileopendialogboxopens. 2. Selectthefiletobrowse,andthenclickOpen. TheresourcesintheselectedfiletemporarilydisplayintheResourceBrowser.Aresourcefromthatfilecanbe importedintothecurrentfile,butthebrowsedfileisnotsavedasafavorite.

Using Resources from Open Files, Favorites, and Libraries


TheFileslistdisplaysallcurrentlyopenfilesandfavorites.Inaddition,theFileslistprovideseasyaccesstoresource librariesboththehundredsoflibrariesdeliveredwiththeVectorworkssoftware,andanyothercustomlibrariesthat youcreate. VectorworksLibrariesaccessesthelibrariesinstalledwiththeVectorworksprogram. UserLibrariesaccessesthelibrariesplacedinyourUserDataandPreferencesfolder.SeeUserFolders Preferencesonpage 26formoreinformationaboutuserfolders. WorkgroupLibrariesaccessesthelibrariesplacedinyourWorkgroupandProjectfolders(VectorworksDesign Seriesrequired).SeeWorkgroupFoldersonpage 578intheVectorworksDesignSeriesUsersGuidefordetails aboutusingworkgroupfolders. ActiveDocumentdisplayswhenAlwaysDisplayActiveDocumenthasbeenselectedfromtheFileslist;the resourcesfromthecurrentlyactivefilearealwaysdisplayed. Tousearesourcefromadifferentfile: 1. IntheResourceBrowser,dooneofthefollowing: SelectthedesiredopenfileorfavoritefromtheFileslist. Selectthedesiredlibrarytype(Vectorworks,User,orWorkgroup)fromtheFileslist.Fromthestandardfile opendialogbox,locatethedesiredlibraryfileandclickOpen. ThefilenameisdisplayedintheFileslist,anditsresourcesdisplayintheresourcedisplaywindow. 2. Selectthedesiredresourcefromtheresourcedisplaywindow.Multipleresourcescanbeselectedandimported atthesametime. Tousetheresourceimmediately,doubleclickittoactivateit,orselectApplyorMakeActive,ifapplicable, fromtheResourcesmenu.(Alternatively,dragtheresourceontoanobjectortoalocationinthecurrentfile.) Ifsymbolfoldersarepresentinthedrawing,specifythelocationoftheimportedresource. Toimporttheresourceforfutureuse,selectImportfromtheResourcesmenu. Toreferencetheresource,selectReferencefromtheResourcesmenu.Ifthesourcefileisnotcurrently referencedbythisfile,specifythenewreferenceinformation.(SeeReferencingResourcesonpage 128.) TheresourceisaddedtothecurrentfilesResourceBrowser.(Defaultcontentisautomaticallyimportedintothe currentfileatthepointofuse,anddisplaysintheResourceBrowser;seeDefaultContentinVectorworks

166

| Chapter 5: Using Vectorworks Resources

FundamentalsandRenderworksonpage 157.) WhenyouaccesssymbolsorVectorScriptswithinfolders,theselectedfoldernameisdisplayedintheDocument Folderlist,anditscontentsaredisplayedintheresourcedisplaywindow.Toreturntothemainresourcewindow, clickontheDocumentFolderlist,andthenselectTopLevel.Alternatively,clicktheUpOneLevelbuttonuntilthetop levelisreached.

Using Favorites Files


Forquickaccess,theResourceBrowsercanstorelinkstoVectorworksfilesthatcontainresourcesthatyouuse frequently.YoucanthenimportresourcesfromaFavoritesfileintoanyVectorworksfileandnothavetosearchforthe fileagain.Removethelinkwhenthefileisofnofurtheruse.Favoritefilesarerememberedforfuturesessions. UsetheFilesmenuintheResourceBrowsertocreate,use,andmanageyourFavoriteslist.Alternatively,addfiles(or aliasesorshortcutstothefiles)totheappropriateFavoritesfoldermanually.

Making the Current File a Favorite


Tomakethecurrentfileafavorite: IntheResourceBrowser,selectAddCurrenttoFavoritesfromtheFilesmenu. ThefileisaddedtotheFileslistunderFavorites. Thefilemustbesavedtobeaddedasafavorite.

Making an Unopened File a Favorite


Tomakeanunopenedfileafavorite: 1. IntheResourceBrowser,selectAddNewFavoriteFilesfromtheFilesmenu. ThestandardOpendialogboxopens. 2. Selectthefiletomakeafavorite,andthenclickOpen. ThefileisaddedtotheFileslistunderFavorites. ThefilemustbesavedinthesameversionofVectorworkssoftwareasthecurrentfiletobeaddedasafavorite. Multiplefilescanbeselectedandaddedasfavoritesatthesametime;alternatively,pressCtrl+A(Windows)or Command+A(Macintosh)toselectallfilesatonce.

Opening the Current Favorite


Toopenthecurrentfavorite: 1. IntheResourceBrowser,selectthefavoritefiletoopenfromtheFileslist. 2. SelectOpenCurrentFavoritefromtheFilesmenu. Thefileopens.

Refreshing Favorites from Disk


Toupdatetheresourcesfromallfavoritefiles: IntheResourceBrowser,selectRefreshFavoritesfromDiskfromtheFilesmenu. AllcurrentfavoritefilesarereloadedintotheResourceBrowser,toreflectanychangesthatoccurredsincethey wereloadedwhenthisVectorworkssessionbegan.

Using the Resource Browser |

167

Revealing the Location of the Current Favorite


Torevealthelocationofafavoritefile: 1. IntheResourceBrowser,selectthefavoritefiletorevealfromtheFileslist. ThefilenameisdisplayedasthecurrentfileintheFileslist,anditsresourcesdisplayintheresourcewindow. 2. SelectRevealCurrentFavoritefromtheFilesmenu. EitherWindowsExplorerorMacintoshFinderopenstothefolderthatcontainsthefile.

Removing Favorites
Toremoveasinglefavoritefile: 1. IntheResourceBrowser,selectthefavoritefiletodeletefromtheFileslist. 2. SelectRemoveCurrentFavoritefromtheFilesmenu. ThefileisremovedfromtheFavoriteslist. Toremoveallfavoritefiles: 1. IntheResourceBrowser,selectRemoveAllFavoritesfromtheFilesmenu. Aconfirmationdialogboxopens. 2. ClickYestoremoveallfavorites. AllfavoritefilesareremovedfromtheFavoriteslist.

Adding a Favorite Manually


Tocreateafavoritemanually(notthroughtheResourceBrowser): 1. PlacethefilethatyouwanttoappearontheFavoriteslist(orashortcutoraliasthatpointstothefile)inoneof thefollowingfolders.

Favorites Folder
[User]/Libraries/Favorites

Effect on Favorites Lists


ThefileappearsonlyinyourFavoriteslist([User]istheuserdatafolder specifiedinyourVectorworkspreferences).SeeUserFoldersPreferences onpage 26formoreinformationaboutuserfolders. ThefileappearsintheFavoriteslistofanyuserwhohastheworkgroup foldersetupinVectorworkspreferences

[Workgroup]/Libraries/Favorites (VectorworksDesignSeriesrequired)

ThefileisaddedtotheFileslistunderFavorites. 2. IntheResourceBrowser,selectRefreshFavoritesfromDiskfromtheFilesmenu. OnlyfilesthatareinyouruserFavoritesfoldercanberemovedwiththecommandsintheResourceBrowser. (SeeUserFoldersPreferencesonpage 26formoreinformation.)Filesthatwereplacedinaworkgroup Favoritesfoldermustberemovedmanually.

Finding Resources
TherearethreewaystoquicklyaccessspecificresourcesthroughtheResourceBrowser:

168

| Chapter 5: Using Vectorworks Resources

UsetheResourceBrowsersincrementalnamesearchfeaturetolocateandselectaresourcethatisalreadyinthe document. UsetheResourceBrowsersFindResourcecommandtosearchforaspecificresourcenameinthecurrentfileor inanotherfileinaspecifiedfilepath.Whentheresourceisfound,itcanbeselectedfromtheResourceBrowser. Findaninstanceoftheresourceinthedrawing,andthenusetheLocateinResourceBrowsercontextmenu commandtoselecttheresourceintheResourceBrowser.

Incremental Search
Toquicklyaccessaresourcethatisalreadyinthedocument,clickintheresourcedisplaywindowandbegintotype theresourcesname.Theresourcedisplaywindowscrollstothefirstresourceorfolderthatbeginswiththeletter(s) youentered.Theresourcetype(suchasTexturesorWorksheets)mustbeshowninthebrowserwindowtobepartof thesearch.Iftheresourceisinafolder,selectthefolderfromtheFilefolderlistfirst.

Finding a Resource
UsetheFindResourcecommandtoquicklylocatearesourceinanyfilecreatedwiththecurrentversionofthe program,andoptionallytoselectthatresourceintheResourceBrowser. Tolocateandusearesource: 1. IntheResourceBrowser,selectFindResourcefromtheResourcesmenu. TheFindResourcedialogboxopens.

Parameter
Findresourcenamescontaining SearchLocation Currentfile Filesondisk

Description
Enterthefullorpartialresourcenametofind

Selecttosearchfortheresourceinthecurrentfile Selecttosearchfortheresourceinthedisplayedpath.Tosearchfortheresource inadifferentfolder,clickChoose;selectthefoldertosearchin,andthenclick Open(Macintosh)orOK(Windows)toreturntotheFindResourcedialogbox. Selectwhethertoincludesubfoldersinthesearchprocess

Includesubfolders

Using the Resource Browser | Parameter


Options Resourcetypes Matchcase Findwholewordsonly Selecttosearchforallresourcetypesorforonespecificresourcetype Selectwhetherthesearchiscasesensitive

169

Description

Selectthisoptiontosearchforoccurrencesthatarewholewordsonly,andnot partofalargerstringoftext

2. EnterthesearchcriteriaandclickFind. TheFindResourceResultsdialogboxdisplaystheresourcename,type,andfilelocationforallresourcesthat matchthespecifiedsearchcriteria.SelecttheresourcenameandclickSelect(ordoubleclicktheresourcename). Iftheselectedresourceisinadifferentfile,theResourceBrowsertemporarilydisplaysalltheresourcesofthat type(suchasHatches)thatarecontainedinthefile.Theresourceyouselectedishighlighted. 3. Oncetheresourceisfound,therearevariouswaystouseit: Tousetheresourceimmediately,doubleclickittoactivateit,orselectApplyorMakeActive,ifapplicable, fromtheResourcesmenu.(Alternatively,dragtheresourceontoanobjectortoalocationinthecurrentfile.) Ifsymbolfoldersarepresentinthedrawing,specifythelocationoftheimportedresource. Toimporttheresourceforfutureuse,selectImportfromtheResourcesmenu. Toreferencetheresource,selectReferencefromtheResourcesmenu.Ifthesourcefileisnotcurrently referencedbythisfile,specifythenewreferenceinformation.(SeeReferencingResourcesonpage 128.) TheresourceisaddedtothecurrentfilesResourceBrowser.(Defaultcontentisautomaticallyimportedintothe currentfileatthepointofuse,anddisplaysintheResourceBrowser;seeDefaultContentinVectorworks FundamentalsandRenderworksonpage 157.)

Locating Specific Resources


ResourcesusedinadrawingcanbequicklylocatedandselectedintheResourceBrowserwiththeLocateinResource Browsercontextmenucommand. Tolocatearesourcefromthedrawing: 1. Movethecursorovertheresource(orobjectcontainingaresource,suchasarectanglewithahatch)tobelocated. Rightclick(Windows)orCtrlclick(Macintosh)andselectLocateinResourceBrowserfromthecontextmenu. Thecommandnamedynamicallyupdatestoreflecttheresource;ifthecursorisoveranimage,oranobjectwith animageresourceappliedisselected,thecommanddisplaysasLocateImageinResourceBrowser.Textures appliedtoobjectpartscanalsobelocated(Renderworksrequired).Mostresourcetypescanbequicklylocatedby thismethod,exceptforrecordformats,symbolfolders,VectorScripts,andVectorScriptpalettes. 2. TheResourceBrowserautomaticallynavigatesto,andselects,thespecificresource.

Identifying Duplicate Resources


Whenaresourcesnamehasbeenduplicatedinthecurrentfile,theprogramcheckstoseeifanydifferenceexists betweenthetworesources. Ifthetworesourcesareidentical,onlyoneislistedforselection Iftherearevariationsbetweentheresourcescontainingduplicatenames,theprogramappendstheoriginating filenameinparenthesestothedefaultresource,andbothitemsdisplayforselection

170

| Chapter 5: Using Vectorworks Resources

Working with Resources


Availablecommandsaredeterminedbytheresourceselected. Tousearesource: 1. SelecttheresourcetouseintheResourceBrowser. 2. SelectthedesiredcommandfromtheResourcesmenu. Rightclick(Windows)orCtrlclick(Macintosh)onaresourcetoaccessacontextmenu.Thismenuliststhe appropriatecommandsfromtheResourcesmenufortheselectedresource.

Command
Apply Attach

Description
Appliestheresourcetotheselectedobject(s) Attachestherecordtotheselectedobject(s).Opensthe AttachRecorddialogboxtoattacharecordtoaplugin objectorsymbol. DeletestheresourcefromtheResourceBrowser Duplicatestheresourcewithanewname,ifapplicable Openstheeditdialogboxfortheresource. Iftheresourceisreferenced,analertpromptsyou toverifythatyouwanttoedittheresourcebefore theeditdialogboxopens.Editsmadeinthecurrent documentarealsosavedautomaticallytothe sourcedocument,whichmayaffectreferencesto thisresourceinotherfiles.

Shortcut Key Equivalent


Doubleclick Doubleclick(recordformatonly)

Delete Duplicate Edit

Deletekey Notapplicable Ctrl+doubleclick(Windows) Option+doubleclick(Macintosh)

Enter Export (Vectorworks DesignSeries required) ExtractImage(s)

Opensthefoldertodisplayitssymbolresourcesor VectorScripts SeeExportingCustomResourcesonpage 577inthe VectorworksDesignSeriesUsersGuide

Doubleclick Notapplicable

OpenstheBrowseforFolder(Windows)orExportImage File(Macintosh)dialogboxtosavea .pngfileextracted fromtheselectedresource Toextractimagesfromallimagebasedtextures, Renderworksbackgrounds,andimageresourcesin thecurrentdocument,executethiscommandwith noresourcesselected.

Notapplicable

MakeActive Move

ActivatestheSymbolInsertiontoolsothatasymbolor plugincanbeinserted OpenstheMoveSymboldialogboxtoplaceasymbolor pluginobjectresourceinanotherfolder

Doubleclick Notapplicable

Using the Resource Browser | Command


New[resource]

171

Description
Allowsquickcreationoftheresourcetyperelevanttothe sectionoftheResourcewindowinwhichthecontext menuwasinvoked Opensaworksheetonscreenforedits;opensa VectorScriptpalette OpenstheAssignNamedialogboxtorenamethe resource. Iftheresourceisreferenced,analertpromptsyou toverifythatyouwanttorenametheresource beforetheAssignNamedialogboxopens.The namechangemadeinthecurrentdocumentisalso savedautomaticallytothesourcedocument,which maybreakreferencestothisresourceinotherfiles. Referencedsymbols,gradients,recordformats, hatches,tiles,Renderworksbackgrounds,textures, sketchstyles,wallstyles,textstyles,slabstyles, plants,andimageresourcescanberenamed.

Shortcut Key Equivalent


Doubleclick

Open

Ctrl+doubleclick(Windows) Option+doubleclick(Macintosh) Ctrl+doubleclick(Windows) Option+doubleclick(Macintosh) (Imagefillsonly)

Rename

Import Reference BreakReference

Importsaresourceintothecurrentfile Createsareferencedresource(seeReferencing Resourcesonpage 128) Breaksthereferencebetweenamasterfileandthetarget file;theresourceremainsinthetargetfilebutisnolonger referenced RunstheselectedVectorScript.Textdocumentsthat containVectorScriptsmustberunusingtheTools> Scripts>RunVectorScriptcommand. Placestheworksheetonthedrawingfordisplayand printing Appliesaviewtothethumbnailpreviewoftheselected symbol(s),ortoallsymbolswithinfoldersand subfoldersifasymbolfolderisselected,ortoall symbolsinthefileifnothingisselected Appliesarendermodetothethumbnailpreviewofthe selectedsymbol(s),ortoallsymbolswithinfoldersand subfoldersifasymbolisselected,ortoallsymbolsinthe fileifnothingisselected

Notapplicable Notapplicable Notapplicable

Run

Doubleclick

WorksheetOn Drawing SetThumbnail View

Doubleclick Notapplicable

SetThumbnail RenderMode

Notapplicable

ImageresourcescanbecompressedtoreducetheVectorworksfilesize.SeeCompressingImagesonpage 295 formoreinformation.

172

| Chapter 5: Using Vectorworks Resources

Creating Resource Libraries


Resourcelibrariesaresimplyfilesthatcontainspecificresourcestomakeitfasterandeasiertoaccesstheresources whiledrawingintheVectorworksprogram.Librariesdonotincreasethesizeofthecurrentfileorconsumesignificant amountsofmemory.Savesimilarresourcesinthesamelibraryfiletomakeiteasiertosearchforthem. Oncecreated,resourcelibrariescanbeaccessedfromtheResourceBrowserasaFavoritesfile,orlocatedusingthe UserLibrariesorWorkgroupLibrariesoptionsontheFileslist.Resourcelibrariescanalsobeusedascustomdefault content. Tocreatearesourcelibraryfile: 1. SelectFile>New. 2. Importorcreatetheresourcestobeincludedinthelibrary. 3. SelectFile>Save. TheSaveVectorworksDrawingdialogboxopens. 4. Selectthelocationforsavingthefile. 5. EnteranameforthefileintheNamefield. 6. ClickSave. 7. Placethelibraryfileintheappropriatelocation,dependingonhowyouwanttoaccessit:

Access Method
FromtheFileslistintheResource Browser,selectthelibraryfile fromtheFavoritessection,and thenselectaresourcefromthe resourcedisplaywindow FromtheFileslistintheResource Browser,selecttheUserLibraries option,selectthelibraryfile,and thenselecttheresourcefromthe resourcedisplaywindow FromtheFileslistintheResource Browser,selecttheWorkgroup Librariesoption,selectthelibrary file,andthenselecttheresource fromtheresourcedisplaywindow Availablefromanywheredefault contentresourcesareavailable, suchasthehatcheslistinthe Attributespalette

Library File Location


Favoritesfolderinyouruserfolder: [User]/Libraries/Favorites/[foldername]

Reference
Using FavoritesFiles onpage 166

Librariesfolderinyouruserfolder: [User]/Libraries/[foldername]

UserFolders Preferences onpage 26

Librariesfolderinanetworkfolderdesignatedasyour workgroupfolder(VectorworksDesignSeriesrequired): [Workgroup]/Libraries/[foldername]

Workgroup Folderson page 578inthe Vectorworks DesignSeries UsersGuide Creating Custom Default Contenton page 158

Defaultsfolderinyouruserfolder,orinanetworkfolder designatedasyourworkgroupfolder(VectorworksDesign Seriesrequired): [User]/Libraries/Defaults/[standardfoldername] [Workgroup]/Libraries/Defaults/[standardfoldername]

Understanding Symbols |

173

Understanding Symbols
Symbol Advantages
Objectscanbesavedas2D(screenplane),3D(2Dplanaror3D),orhybrid(2Dscreenplaneand3Dcombined)symbol definitions.Vectorworkssoftwarealsoshipswiththousandsofsymbols.Symboldefinitionssavetheobjectproperties, suchassize,color,andclass,withinthesymboldefinition;thesepropertiesareretainedeachtimethesymbolis placed,andwhenasymbolisimportedintoadifferentdrawing. Symbolsprovideseveraladvantages: Smallerfilesizes:Thesymbolanditsdefinitionarestoredonlyonceinthedrawingfile.Placementinformation (locationcoordinates,rotation)isallthatisrequiredforeachsymbolinstance. Onetimeediting:Changestothesymboldefinitionautomaticallyupdatealltheinstancesofthesymbolinthe drawing. Attacheddatabaseinformation:Theinformationassociatedwithasymbolcanbeusedtogeneratereportsand worksheets.Informationattachedtoasymbolisspecifictothatinstance,allowingeachinstancetobeedited individually. Easeofimport:WiththeResourceBrowser,importingsymbolsfromonefiletoanotherisfastandeasy,andany databaseinformationattachedtothesymbolisalsoimported.

Symbol Types
InVectorworks,youcancreate2Dand3Dobjects.Symbols,whichareconvertedobjects,canalsoconsistof2D,3D,or hybridobjects. Inaddition,therearespecialsymbolcategorieswhichindicatethesymbolsbehavioratplacement.Thesecategories arecolorcodedwithintheResourceBrowserforidentification.Thecategoryasymbolbelongstodependsonthetype ofobjectconvertedtoasymbolandtheoptionsselectedatsymbolcreation. Symbolscanbenestedwithinothersymbols.

Symbol Type
2D 3D

Symbol Category
2Dsymbolsarecomposedexclusivelyof2Dscreenplaneobjects.Theinstancesofthesymbolare consideredplanar,andmayoccupythescreenplane,layerplane,ora3Dplane. 3Dsymbolsarecreatedfrom2Dplanarobjectsand/or3Dobjects,haveaheight(Zcoordinate)as wellaswidthsandlengths(XandYcoordinates).TheseobjectsdisplayflatinTop/Planview. However,theyretaintheir3Dproperties.Symbolscreatedfrom3Dobjectsthatarenothybrid objectsappearflatin2Dviews,butshowdimensionin3Dviews. Ahybridsymbolcontainsbotha2Dscreenplaneobjectanda3Dcomponent,anddisplays correctlyaccordingtotheview.Theadvantageofworkingwithhybridsymbolsisthat3Dmodels canautomaticallybecreatedfrom2Ddrawings,orviceversa.Forexample,ahybriddoorsymbol displaysasaswingarcinTop/Plan2Dviewandasafullyformeddoorina3Dview.Hybrid symbolsmustbeinsertedinthelayerplane. Thisisthemostcommontypeofsymbol,thestaticsymbol.Itsparametersaresavedwithinthe symboldefinition,andsetatplacement.Changesmadetothesymboldefinitionaffectallinstances ofthesymbol.

Hybrid

Black

174

| Chapter 5: Using Vectorworks Resources


Symbol Category
Whenplaced,thistypeofsymbolisconvertedtoagroup.Anychangesmadetothesymbol definitionlaterhavenoeffectonthegroup.Atsymbolcreation,selectConverttoGroupinthe insertionoptionstospecifyabluesymbol(seeCreatingNewSymbolsonpage 175). Whenplaced,thistypeofsymbolisconvertedtoapluginobject.Ithasaspecificinsertion behavior(point,linear,rectangular,orpath)andsetparameters,anditcanbemodified,withmany variationsofthesameobjectinthefile.Atsymbolcreation,selectConverttoPluginObjectinthe insertionoptionstospecifyaredsymbol(seeCreatingNewSymbolsonpage 175).Changesto aredsymboldefinitionaffectfutureinstances,butnotexistingones. Thisisapagebasedsymbol.Typicallythesesymbolsareannotationsymbolsthatarescaled relativetothepagesize,suchasaNortharrowindicator.

Symbol Type
Blue

Red

Green

Plug-in Objects
Pluginobjectshaveallthepowerofstandardsymbols,withtheaddedadvantageofbeingcustomizable.Unlike symbols,pluginobjectshavetheoptionofbeingplacedontothedrawingandremainingmodifiable.Thisisusefulif thedrawingneedstocontainmanydifferentvariationsofthesameobject. Sometoolsetsandlibrariescontainpluginobjects;forexample,theScaleBartool,locatedintheDims/Notestoolset, insertsapluginobject.Inadditiontothetoolsets,predefinedpluginobjectsareavailableintheLibrariesfolder(in subfoldersbeginningwiththewordObjectorObjects),andareaccessedthroughtheResourceBrowser. Whenapluginobjectfromatoolsetisinserted,anobjectpropertiesdialogboxmayopenthefirsttimetheitemis placedinthedrawing.Thepropertiesinthisdialogboxsetthedefaultvaluesfortheobjectduringthissession.Modify thepropertiespriortoinsertingtheobject,oracceptthedefaultvaluesandclickOK.Objectinstancescanbemodified throughtheObjectInfopaletteafterinsertion. PluginobjectscanbecreatedmanuallythroughTools>Scripts>VectorScriptPluginEditorusingVectorScript.See VectorScriptPluginEditoronpage 113intheVectorScriptLanguageGuide.Pluginsaredescribedindetailin UsingVectorScriptPluginsonpage 87intheVectorScriptLanguageGuide.TheVectorScriptLanguageGuideis availableaspartofthehelpsystem,andalsoasaPDFfileinthehelpsystem. Inaddition,asymbolcanbesavedasaredsymbolthatbecomesapluginobjectuponinsertion. Therearefourdifferenttypesofpluginobjects:point,linear,rectangular,andpath.Eachtypeisdifferentinhowitis placedinthedrawingandedited. Linearandrectangularobjectscannotbeinserteddirectlyintoawall.However,onceplacedinthedrawing,they canbedraggedontoawalltoinsertthem.

Point Plug-in Objects


Pointpluginobjectsareplacedbyasingleclickinthedrawingtospecifythelocation,andthenasecondclicktoset therotationangle.Thisisthesamewaysymbolsareplacedusingthesymbolinsertiontool.Apreviewimageofthe objectisvisibleatthecursorlocation.Pointpluginobjectscannotbeedited(resizedorrotated)withthecursor;they areeditedusingtheObjectInfopalette.

Linear Plug-in Objects


Linearpluginobjectsareplacedwithtwoclicks.Thefirstclicksetsthebeginningpointandthesecondsetsthe endpointofaline.Theorientationoftheobjectisdeterminedbythisline.Theobjectcanberesizedorrotatedby clickingonareshapehandleateitherendoftheline.ItcanalsobeeditedusingtheObjectInfopalette.

Creating New Symbols | Rectangular Plug-in Objects

175

Rectangularpluginobjectsareplacedbyasequenceofthreeclicksinthedrawing.Therearetwodifferentplacement modeswhichdeterminehowthesethreeclicksareinterpreted.
Center-Line Placement Plug-in object specific preferences Edge Placement

CenterLinePlacementMode:Thefirstclickspecifiestheoriginoftheobject,thesecondclickspecifiesthe length,andthethirdclickdefineshalfthewidthoftherectangularobject.Afterthesecondclick,thecursor displaysfeedbacksymmetricallyonbothsidesofthecenterlineoftherectangle. EdgePlacementMode:Thefirstclickspecifiesonecorneroftherectangularobject,thesecondclickdetermines thelength,andthethirdclickspecifiestheentirewidth. Whenarectangularpluginobjectisselected,thereareeightselectionhandlesvisible.Theobjectcanberesizedby draggingthesehandles,oreditedthroughtheObjectInfopalette.

Path Plug-in Objects


Pathpluginobjectsarecreatedwithasequenceofseveralclicksthatdefinethevertexpointsalongapath.Thereare twodifferenttypesofpathpluginobjectsbasedonthetypeofpaththatisused.A2Dpathpluginobjectusesa polylinepathanda3Dpathpluginobjectusesa3DNURBScurveforitspath. PathpluginobjectscanbeeditedusingtheReshapetooldirectly.TheycanalsobeeditedthroughModify>Edit Group,ortheObjectInfopalette.

Creating New Symbols


TheCreateSymbolcommandcreatessymbolsfrom2Dand/or3Dobjects,includingtext.Symbolscanalsobecreated fromothersymbols,frompluginobjects,groups,andworksheets.Atplacement,thesymbolcanconvert automaticallyintoagrouporpluginobject.Viewportscannotbemadeintosymbols. Formoreinformationonsymboltypesandcolorcategories,seeSymbolTypesonpage 173.

Item
2Dscreenobject 3Dobjectand/or2D planar 2Dscreen+3Dobject Symbol

Convert to
2Dsymbol 3Dsymbol Hybridsymbol Symbol Group Pluginobject

Result
2Dblacksymbol,planar 3Dblacksymbol,foruseina3Dviewonly Hybridblacksymbol,forusein2Dplanand3Dmodels Savesanychangestothecurrentsymbolattributesasanew,black symboldefinition Createsanewbluesymboldefinition,tobeinsertedasagroup Createsanewredsymboldefinition,tobeinsertedasapluginobject Createsanewblacksymboldefinition,withmultipleobjectsexisting withinasymbolcontainer

Group

Symbol

176
Item

| Chapter 5: Using Vectorworks Resources


Convert to
Symbol

Result
Createsanewblacksymboldefinition.Thisallowsallinstancesto changebyeditingthepluginobjectinsidethesymbol,eventhoughthe actualsymbolinstancecannotbeedited. Createsanewredsymboldefinition,tobeinsertedasapluginobject. Thisallowsaneditablepluginobjecttobeplacedinadrawingwith savedparameters.Forexample,adoorpluginobject,whensavedwith awidthof4andinsertedasapluginobject,isinsertedwithawidthof 4ratherthanwiththedefaultwidth. Createsanewbluesymboldefinition,tobeinsertedasagroup.For example,aworksheetcanbesavedasapreformattedreportbysavingit asabluesymboldefinition.

Pluginobject

Pluginobject

Worksheet

Group

Tocreateanewsymbol: 1. Selecttheobject(s)toconvertintoasymbol. Tocreateahybridsymbol,selectboththe2Dand3Dobjects,whichbecomethe2Dand3Dcomponentsofthe symbol.InTop/Planview,aligntheobjectsfirst(symbolalignmentcanbeadjustedaftercreationwiththeEdit Symbolcommand).ThesymbolpreviewthatdisplaysintheResourceBrowserisgeneratedinthesymbolview atcreationorediting. Ifahybridsymbolwillbeinsertedintoawall,youcanoptionallyspecifythe3Dwallholecomponentinaddition tothe2Dand3Dcomponents;seeAddinga3DWallHoleComponenttoaSymbolDefinitiononpage 518. For2Dsymbolsinsertedinwalls,twolocicanbespecifiedaswallbreaklocations.InTop/Planview,placetwo lociatopposinglocationswiththeobjecttoconvert,andselectthemallbeforeconverting.Whenthesymbolis insertedintothewall,thewallbreaksatthelocilocationsinsteadofthesymbolboundingbox. 2. SelectModify>CreateSymbol. TheCreateSymboldialogboxopens.

Creating New Symbols |

177

Parameter
Name InsertionPoint 3DObjectCenter/ PluginOrigin

Description
Provideanameforthenewsymbol.Donotusesinglequotesinsymbolnames.Single quotesinnamesarereservedforuseinVectorScript. Controlshowthesymbolisinserted Placesthesymbolbyusingitsgeometriccenter(asdeterminedbyitsboundingbox)as thesymbolinsertionpoint. Ifconvertingapluginobject,selectPluginOrigintosetthecenteroftheobjectasthe insertionpoint.

NextMouseClick Units Pagebased

Setstheinsertionpointmanually,withthecursor,afterclickingOK Determinesthesymbolssizeunits Setsthesymbolsizeaccordingtothepage.Wheninserted,thesymbolautomatically scalesrelativetothepageenvironment.Thisisusefulforannotationobjectsthatshould alwaysremainthesamesizeonthepage,regardlessofthelayerscale. Setsthesymbolsizeaccordingtoconstantworlddimensions;itsinsertionsizedepends onthelayerscale Selectwhetherthesymbolwillbeinsertableinwalls.WhenWallInsertionmodeis enabled,objectsthathavetheInsertinWallsoptionenabledwillinsertintowalls(see InsertingSymbolsonpage 178). IfInsertinWallsisselected,selecthowthesymbolwillbeinserted.OnCenterlinesnaps thesymbolsinsertionpointtothecenterlineofthewall.OnEdgesnapsthesymbols insertionpointalongeitheredgeofthewall. IfInsertinWallsisselected,selecthowthewallwillbreakaroundthesymbolwhenitis insertedintoawall

Worldbased InsertinWalls

OnCenterline/On Edge WallBreaks OtherOptions LeaveInstance InPlace Change2DObjects fromLayerPlaneto ScreenPlane ConverttoGroup

Whenselected,replacesthecurrentselectionwithasymbolinstance;whendeselected, theobjectisremovedfromthedrawing.Inbothcases,thenewsymboldefinitionis addedtotheResourceBrowser. Convertsanyplanar2Dobjectsinthelayerplaneintoscreenplane2Dobjects,forthe Top/Planrepresentationofthesymbol.Ifdeselected,any2Dplanarobjectsinthelayer planethatarepartofthesymbolwillnotdisplayinTop/Planview,soahybridsymbol maynotdisplayproperlyinTop/Planview. Convertsthesymbolintoagroupedobjectwheninserted,disassociatingitfromthe originalsymboldefinition.ConvertedgroupedobjectsareidentifiedintheResource Browserwithabluename. Deselecttoconvertthesymbolintoablack,unmodifiablesymbol;eachinstanceis controlledbythesymboldefinition.

ConverttoPlugin Object

Convertsthesymbolintoapluginobjectwheninserted,allowingthecurrent parameterstobepresetwhenthepluginobjectisinserted.Convertedpluginobjects areidentifiedintheResourceBrowserwitharedname. Deselecttoconvertthesymbolintoablack,unmodifiablesymbol;eachinstanceis controlledbythesymboldefinition.

178

| Chapter 5: Using Vectorworks Resources


Description
Selecttheclassthesymbolwillbeassignedtouponinsertion;thesymbolcanbeassigned totheactiveclassortoaclassselectedfromtheCustomClasslist

Parameter
AssignTo

3. ClickOK. 4. IftheNextMouseClickinsertionpointoptionwasselected,clicktospecifythedesiredsymbolinsertionpoint. 5. SpecifythefolderlocationforthenewsymbolinthenextCreateSymboldialogbox. Clickthefoldertoselectitasthedestinationforthenewsymbol.

Parameter
Folderlist NewFolder Dontshowthisdialog 6. ClickOK.

Description
Displaysthefilessymbolfolders;theselectedfolderbecomesthedestinationforthenew symbol Createsanewfolderwithintheselectedfolder;specifythefoldernameandclickOKto createthesymbolfolder Hidesthisdialogboxifyouonlywanttoseeitwhenafilealreadycontainssymbolfolders

ThenewsymbolisaddedtotheResourceBrowser.

Inserting Symbols
SymbolsareresourcesavailablefromtheResourceBrowser.ToopentheResourceBrowser,selectWindows> Palettes >ResourceBrowser.DisplaythesymboltoinsertintheResourceBrowser(seeAccessingExisting Resourcesonpage 164). Thecurrentlyactivesymbolisinserted;theactivesymbolsnamedisplaysatthebottomoftheResourceBrowser. Clickingontheactivesymbolbuttonautomaticallydisplaysthecurrentlyactivesymbolintheresourcedisplay window.

Inserting Symbols |
SymbolsareinsertedfromtheResourceBrowserbydragginganddropping,orwiththeSymbolInsertiontool. Symbolscanbeinsertedasindividualobjectsorinsertedtobecomepartofawall.

179

Active symbol button Active symbol name

Drag and Drop Symbol Insertion Method


ToinsertasymbolbydraggingitfromtheResourceBrowser: 1. ClickthesymbolintheResourceBrowseranddragittothedesiredlocationinthedrawing.Toinsertthesymbol intoawall,thesymbolmusthavetheInsertinWallsoptionenabled(seeCreatingNewSymbolsonpage 175). Thesymbolcannotberotatedduringinsertion,sincetheSymbolInsertiontoolisnotautomaticallyactivated. Whenasymbolisdroppedontoawall,roundwall,orroof,Vectorworksinsertsthesymbolintotheobjectusing thedefaultflipvalueandinsertionpoint. Asymbolinsertedbydragginganddroppingisplacedontheactivelayerplanebydefault.PresstheOptionkey (Macintosh)ortheAltkey(Windows)whiledragginganddroppingtoplacethesymbolontheworkingplane. 2. Thesymbolisinserted. Ifnecessary,editthesymbolrotationorflipintheObjectInfopalette.

The Symbol Insertion Tool


UsetheSymbolInsertiontooltoplace2D,3D,andhybridsymbolsinthedrawing.Duringinsertion,apreviewofthe symbolisshowntoaidinplacement.SymbolscanalsobeinsertedbydraggingthemfromtheResourceBrowser. Eachsymbolhasitsowninsertionpoint,alocationonthesymbolshownbycrosshairsintheEditSymbolwindow, thatcontrolshowthesymbolisplacedintothedrawing.Theinsertionpointisspecifiedduringthesymbolscreation. SeeCreatingNewSymbolsonpage 175formoreinformation. Hybridsymbolscanonlybeinsertedonaworkingplanethatisparalleltotheactivelayerplane.Wheninserting ahybridsymbol,iftheworkingplaneisnotparalleltotheactivelayerplane,theworkingplaneisalignedwith theactivelayerplane.(Theworkingplaneoriginremainsunchanged.)

180

| Chapter 5: Using Vectorworks Resources


Symbol Pick Up Symbol Alignment Modes

Standard Insertion Offset Insertion Wall Insertion Mode

Mode
StandardInsertion OffsetInsertion SymbolPickUp WallInsertion

Description
Insertsthesymbolbasedonitsspecifiedinsertionpoint,oralignedaccordingtooneof thesymbolalignmentmodes Insertsthesymbolinawallaccordingtoanoffsetreferencepoint Designatesasymbolfromthedrawingastheactivesymbol Togglesbetweeninsertingasymbolorpluginobjectintoawallwithwallbreaks,and insertingasymbolorpluginobjectnearoronawallwithoutbreakingit. Topreventallsymbolandpluginobjectsfrominsertingintowalls,turnoffWall Insertionmode.WhenWallInsertionmodeisenabled,objectsthathavetheInsertin Wallsoptionenabledwillinsertintowalls(seeCreatingNewSymbolsonpage 175).

SymbolAlignmentModes

ThesealignmentmodesapplytoStandardInsertionmode,andtemporarilyoverride theinsertionpoint.Thesemodeschangethealignmentoftheinsertionpointalongthe Xaxisoftheboundingboxsurroundingthesymbol.Alternatively,keeptheoriginal pointastheinsertionpoint. Movestheinsertionpointtotheleftedgeofthesymbolsboundingbox,alongthe originalXaxis Movestheinsertionpointtothecenterofthesymbolsboundingbox,alongthe originalXaxis Movestheinsertionpointtotherightedgeofthesymbolsboundingbox,alongthe originalXaxis Usesthesymbolsoriginallyspecifiedinsertionpoint

AlignSymbolLeft AlignSymbolCenter AlignSymbolRight AlignActualInsertion Point

Standard Symbol Insertion Mode


Toinsertasymbol: 1. SelectthedesiredsymbolfromtheResourceBrowser. 2. SelectMakeActivefromtheResourcesmenu.TheSymbolInsertiontool,ontheBasicpalette,automatically becomesactive. Alternatively,doubleclickthesymbolintheResourceBrowsertomakethesymbolactiveandselecttheSymbol Insertiontool. 3. ClickStandardInsertionfromtheToolbar. Toinsertthesymbolintoawallwithbreaks,enableWallInsertionmode.ThesymbolalsomusthavetheInsert inWallsoptionenabled(seeCreatingNewSymbolsonpage 175).

Inserting Symbols |
4. Clickthedesiredalignmentmode(seeInsertingSymbolsonpage 178). 5. Clicktosetthelocationofthesymbol.

181

6. Ifthesymbolisnotorientedproperly,movethecursorslightlyawayfromtheinsertionpoint;thenmovethe cursortorotatethesymbolaboutitsinsertionpoint.IntheDatabar,usetheA(angle)andWPA(workingplane angle)fieldstohelppositionthesymbol. 7. Clickasecondtime,withoutmovingthemouse,topositionthesymbolexactlyasinserted.Alternatively,move thecursorslightlyawayfromtheinsertionpointtorotateorflipthesymbolaboutitsinsertionpoint. Forsymbolsplacedinsidewalls,movingthemouseflipsthesymbolaboutoneoftwoaxes:upanddown,orleft andright. Inclickdragmode,clickandholdthemousetoinsertthesymbolandstillbeabletorotateit.Aquickclick eliminatestheabilitytorotateorflipthesymbolandlockstheorientationofthesymbolasitisplaced. 8. Clicktosetthesymbol.

Vertical 2nd click 1st click Horizontal

The first click inserts the symbol horizontally

Move the cursor up to rotate the symbol vertically

Click again to set the symbols position

Toplaceanothercopyofthesymbolinthedrawing,movethecursortoanotherlocationandclick.Theselected symbolandSymbolInsertiontoolremainactiveuntilanothertoolisselected.

Offset Symbol Insertion Mode


UseOffsetInsertionmodetoinsertasymbolintoawallataspecificdistancefromareferencepoint.Theoffset distancecanbemeasuredeithertothesymbolsinsertionpointortoaclickedpointonthesymbol. Toinsertasymbolintoawallwithoffsetinsertion: 1. SelectthedesiredsymbolfromtheResourceBrowser.ThesymbolmusthavetheInsertinWallsoptionenabled (seeCreatingNewSymbolsonpage 175). 2. SelectMakeActivefromtheResourcesmenu.TheSymbolInsertiontool,ontheBasicpalette,becomesactive. Alternatively,doubleclickthesymbolintheResourceBrowsertomakethesymbolactiveandtoselectthe SymbolInsertiontool. 3. ClicktheOffsetInsertionmodebutton. 4. Clickthedesiredalignmentmode. 5. Clicktosetthereferencepointfromwhichthesymbolistobeoffset.Thereferencepointdoesnothavetobe withinthewall.

182

| Chapter 5: Using Vectorworks Resources


Thesymbolpreviewdisplayswhenthecursorisoverawall.

6. Clicktosettheoffsetlocationofthesymbol. 7. Ifthesymbolisnotorientedproperlyinthewall,movethecursorslightlyawayfromtheinsertionpoint,and thenflipthesymbolaboutitsaxistothecorrectposition. Inclickdragmode,clickandholdthemousetoinsertthesymbolandstillbeabletoflipit.Aquickclick eliminatestheabilitytoflipthesymbolandlockstheorientationofthesymbolasitisplaced. 8. Clicktosetthesymbol. TheEnterOffsetdialogboxopens,displayingthedistancebetweentheclickedpoints.Thefieldsavailable dependonwhetherthewallisstraightorround.

Enter Offset dialog box for straight walls

Enter Offset dialog box for round walls

Parameter
Offset

Description
Forstraightwalls,specifytheoffsetdistance.Forroundwalls,specifyeithertheDistanceorthe Anglebetweenthereferencepointandthesymbol.Thedistanceismeasuredalongtheouter arcoftheroundwall. Selectwhethertooffsetthesymbolusingtheinsertionpointorthenextmouseclickonanother pointonthesymbol

OffsetUsing

9. ClickOK. 10. IftheInsertionPointoptionwasselected,thesymbolisplacedintothewallsothattheinsertionpointisoffsetas specifiedfromthereferencepoint. IftheNextClickoptionwasselected,awitnesslineofthespecifiedlengthorangleextendsfromthereference pointtotheendpoint.Clickonthesymboltoindicatetheappropriateoffsetpointandtoplacethesymbolinto thewallsothattheclickedpointisoffsetasspecifiedfromthereferencepoint.

Symbol Pick Up Mode


TheSymbolPickUpmodepicksupanysymbolalreadyinsertedintothedrawingandmakesittheactivesymbol. ThisavoidshavingtolocateandselectthesymbolintheResourceBrowser.

Editing Symbols |
Topickupandplaceasymbol: 1. ClicktheSymbolInsertiontoolfromtheBasicpalette. 2. ClicktheSymbolPickUpmodebutton. 3. Clickasymbolinthedrawing.

183

Thesymbolbecomestheactivesymbol.Notethatthesymbolclickedonisnothighlighted(selectionhandlesdo notdisplay). EithertheStandardInsertionmodeorOffsetInsertionmodeisautomaticallyenabled,dependingonthelast modeused.Selectadifferentinsertionmode,ifdesired. 4. Insertthesymbolaccordingtotheinstructionsforthatmode(seeStandardSymbolInsertionModeon page 180orOffsetSymbolInsertionModeonpage 181). ToswitchtoSymbolPickUpmodequickly,pressandholdtheOption(Macintosh)orAlt(Windows)keywhilethe SymbolInsertiontoolisactive,andthenclickonthedesiredsymbol.Theselectedsymbolisnowreadytobeinserted intothedrawing.

Wall Insertion Mode


Whenenabled,theWallInsertionmodeallowsasymbolorpluginobjecttobeinsertedintoawall.Inaddition,the symbolmusthavetheInsertinWallsoptionenabled(seeCreatingNewSymbolsonpage 175). WhenWallInsertionmodeisdisabled,asymbolorpluginobjectisplacednearorontopofawallwithoutbeing inserteddirectlyintoit. Asymbolorpluginobjectinsertedintoawallisautomaticallymadeparalleltothewallscenterline,byrotatingitto matchthewallsangle.Toremoveasymbolfromawall,clickanddragitoutofthewall.Vectorworksautomatically sealsthecutinthewall. Formoreinformationoninsertingandmovingsymbolsinto,outof,andwithinwalls,seeInsertingandEditing SymbolsWithinaWallonpage 509.

Editing Symbols
Onceasymbolinstanceisplacedinadrawing,itsinformationcanbedisplayedintheObjectInfopalette.Selecta symbolinstancetodisplayitsproperties.Asymbolslocationcanbeadjusted,oritslayerandclassassociationcanbe changedbyselectinganewclassorlayerfromtheappropriatelist.Asymbolcanbereplacedwithanothersymbol, rotatedin2Dor3Dspace,and,forsymbolslocatedinwalls,flipped,replaced,andrepositioned. MostofablacksymbolsphysicalattributescannotbedirectlychangedintheObjectInfoorAttributespalette.Instead, thecomponentsofasymbolmustbeaccessedandeditedthroughtheEditSymbolwindow.Changesmadetoa symboldefinitionaffectallexistingandfutureinstancesofthatsymbol,unlessthesymbolwasinsertedasagroup (blue)orpluginobject(red). Ifyoudeleteasymboldefinitionandthereareinstancesofthatsymbolinthedrawing,youcanspecifywhetherto replaceallinstanceswithlociortodeletethemcompletely.

Rotating Existing Symbols


Rotate2DsymbolsinthescreenplanebyenteringarotationangleintheRotfieldoftheObjectInfopalette.Rotate3D symbolsbyclickingtheRotate3DbuttonintheObjectInfopalette.ThisbuttonaccessestheRotateObjectin3Ddialog boxforspecificationoftherotationangle,center,andaxis;seeRotateToolonpage 282.

184

| Chapter 5: Using Vectorworks Resources

Changing Symbols in Walls


Onceasymbolhasbeenplacedinawall,Vectorworksallowssomespecialactions,eachofwhichisperformedwithin thewallstructure.Flipthesymbolinthewall,repositionit,orcompletelyreplaceit.SeeInsertingandEditing SymbolsWithinaWallonpage 509,andReplacingExistingSymbolsonpage 184formoreinformation.Symbols canalsobemovedalongoroutofthewall,orintoanotherwall.Hybridor3Dsymbolsinsertedinawallcaninclude thewallholegeometryinthesymboldefinition;seeAddinga3DWallHoleComponenttoaSymbolDefinitionon page 518.

Replacing Existing Symbols


Toexchangeasymbolinstancesdefinitionwithanother: 1. Selecttheexistingsymbol. 2. IntheObjectInfopalette,clicktheReplacebutton. Alternatively,rightclick(Windows)orCtrlclick(Macintosh)onasymbol,andselectReplacefromthecontext menu. TheChooseaSymboldialogboxopens.

3. Selectthedesirednewsymbol. Onlythesymbolsthatarecurrentlypartoftheactivedrawingarelisted. 4. ClickOK. Theoldsymbolinstanceisreplacedwiththenewsymbolinstance. Thenewsymbolusesthesettingsfromthereplacedsymbol.Futureoccurrencesofthenewsymbolareunaffectedby thesesettings.

Editing Symbols |

185

Editing Symbol Definitions


MostofablacksymbolsphysicalattributescannotbedirectlychangedintheObjectInfoorAttributespalette.Instead, thecomponentsofasymbolmustbeaccessedandeditedthroughtheEditSymbolwindow.Changesmadetoa symboldefinitionaffectallexistingandfutureinstancesofthatsymbol,unlessthesymbolwasinsertedasagroup (blue)orpluginobject(red). Editingasymbolfromthedrawingareaallowsyoutoeditthesymboldefinitionfromwithinthatsymbolinstance. Otherobjectsinthedrawingcanbevisible,grayed,orhiddendependingontwosettingsintheDisplaytabofthe Vectorworkspreferences:ShowotherobjectswhileineditingmodesandGrayotherobjects.(SeeDisplay Preferencesonpage 19.)Whenotherobjectsarevisible,theyarealsosnappable,whichmakesitiseasiertoeditthe symbolquicklyandaccurately. Wheneditingpagebased(green)symbolsfromthedrawingarea,thescaleofthesymboleditingwindowissetto1:1 sothatthesymboldefinitionisthesamesizeasthesymbolinstance,foreaseofediting.Theactivelayerscalecannot bechangedfromthedocumentcontextmenuwhileinthesymboleditingmode.Thisisanexceptionforpagebased symbolsonly.Duetothescaleadjustment,otherobjectsthatarenotpartofthesymboldefinitionarenotsnappable unlesstheyarealsoata1:1scaleintheactivelayer. Referencedsymbolscanbeeditedorrenamedinthetargetfile,whichchangesthesymboldefinitioninthesourcefile. SeeReferencingResourcesonpage 128. Editingbehaviorandresultsdependonthesymboltype(seeSymbolTypesonpage 173).

Symbol Type
Blackorgreen Blue

Edit Behavior/Result
EditfromtheResourceBrowserorfromthedrawing.Changestothesymbol,whethermade tothedefinitionortheinstance,affectbothexistingandfuturesymbolinstances. EditfromtheResourceBrowser.Changestothedefinitionaffectfuturesymbolinstancesonly. Abluesymbolinsertedonthedrawingasagroupcannotbeeditedfromthedrawinginthe EditSymbolwindow(makeeditsdirectlyfromtheObjectInfoorAttributespalette,andby editingthegroup).Changestoadrawinginstanceaffectthatinstanceonly. EditfromtheResourceBrowser.Changestothedefinitionaffectfuturesymbolinstancesonly. Aredsymbolinsertedonthedrawingasapluginobjectcannotbeeditedfromthedrawing intheEditSymbolwindow(makeeditsdirectlyfromtheObjectInfoorAttributespalette). Changestoadrawinginstanceaffectthatinstanceonly.

Red

Toeditasymboldefinition: 1. IntheResourceBrowser,selectthesymboltoedit,andselectEditfromtheResourcesmenu. Alternatively,editablacksymbolinstancefromthedrawingusingoneofthefollowingmethods: SelectthesymbolandthenselectModify>EditSymbol. Doubleclickthesymbol. Rightclick(Windows)orCtrlclick(Macintosh)thesymbol,andselectEditfromthecontextmenu. Toeditthecomponentsofahybridsymboldirectly,rightclick(Windows)orCtrlclick(Macintosh)the symbol,andselectEdit2DComponent,Edit3DComponent,orEdit3DWallHoleComponentfromthe contextmenu.

186

| Chapter 5: Using Vectorworks Resources

2. Onlyonecomponentofahybridsymbolcanbeeditedatonetime.Ifthesymbolishybrid,theEditSymbol dialogboxopens.InsertionoptionsandunitscanbespecifiedwhenthesymboliseditedfromtheResource Browser,andadditionaldoubleclickbehaviorforthedialogboxcanbespecifiedwhenthesymbolisedited fromthedrawing. Selectthecomponenttoedit.

Edit Symbol dialog box accessed from Resource Browser

Edit Symbol dialog box accessed from drawing

Parameter
2D/3DComponent 3DWallHole Component SymbolOptions Doubleclick

Description
Editsthe2Dscreenplaneorthe2Dplanar/3Dcomponentofthesymbol Editsthe3Dwallholecomponentofthesymboldefinition(seeAddinga3DWallHole ComponenttoaSymbolDefinitiononpage 518) Editsthemethodofinsertingthesymbolintoawall,andwhethersymbolsareworldbasedor pagebased(seeCreatingNewSymbolsonpage 175) Setsthefuturebehaviorwhendoubleclickingonasymbolinadrawing.Selectwhetherto displaytheEditSymboldialogbox,ordirectlyeditthe2Dor3Dcomponentorinsertion options.SelectEditstheComponentbasedoncurrentviewtoautomaticallyeditthe2D componentifinTop/Planview,orthe3Dcomponentifinoneofthe3Dviews. MatchestheResourceBrowserthumbnailviewtotheselectededitingview.Forexample,ifa hybridsymbolsthumbnailpreviewissettoTop/Plan,andthe3Dcomponentofthesymbolis editedwhileinaRightIsometricview,thethumbnailviewswitchestoRightIsometricto match.

Usetheeditview

3. ClickEdit. IfSymbolOptionswasselected,theSymbolOptionsdialogboxopens.SeeCreatingNewSymbolson page 175forinformationonwallinsertionoptionsandunits. Ifoneofthecomponentoptionswasselected,theEditSymbolwindowopens,containingthesymboltobe edited.Acoloredborderaroundthedrawingwindowindicatesthatyouareinaneditingmode.TheExit SymbolcommandbecomesavailablefromtheModifymenu,andtheExitSymbolbuttonisvisibleinthetop rightcornerofthedrawingwindow. Toeditnestedsymbols,selectModify>EditSymbolagain. ThevisibilityofotherobjectswhenineditingmodeiscontrolledbytheShowotherobjectswhileinediting modesoptionintheDisplaytaboftheVectorworkspreferences(seeDisplayPreferencesonpage 19).Toshow theotherobjectsinalessobtrusiveway,alsoselecttheGrayotherobjectsoption.Ifthesymbolwaseditedfrom theResourceBrowser,otherobjectscannotbedisplayed;editasymbolinstancefromthedrawingtodisplay

Editing Symbols |

187

otherobjectswhileineditingmode.SeeObjectEditingModeonpage 16formoreinformation).Ifa pagebased(green)symbolisbeingedited,theeditingmodescalehaschangedto1:1,andwhileotherobjects thatarenotata1:1scalemaybevisibleattheirownactivelayerscale,theyarenotsnappable. Ifyouarepasting2Dlayerplaneobjectsfromtheclipboardwhileeditingasymbol,analertallowsyoutoassign thoseobjectstothescreenplane.Normally,selectYessothatthe2DcomponentsdisplaycorrectlyinTop/Plan view. Inaddition,ifyouareeditinga2Donlysymbolandadding3Dobjects(including2Dplanarobjects)orhybrid objects,oreditinga3Donlysymbolandaddingscreenplaneorhybridobjects,analertinformsyouthatyouare creatingahybridsymbol.Portionsofthesymbolmaynotbevisibleincertainviews.Similarly,ifremoving portionsofahybridsymbolduringediting,youmaybecreatinga2Donlyor3Donlysymbolwhichmaynot displayasexpectedincertainviews.Keepinmindthat2Dobjectsthatarepartofasymbolmustbeinthescreen planetobevisibleinTop/Planview;iftheyareplanar,theywillbevisiblein3Dviews.3Dobjectsthatarepartof asymbolarenotvisibleinTop/Planview. 4. Wheneditingcomponents,makethesymboleditsintheAttributesorObjectInfopalette.Toeditthesymbol insertionpoint,selectallthecomponentsofthesymbol,andrelocatethecomponentsabouttheinsertionpoint crosshairs.TheintersectionofthecrosshairsgivesthefeedbacksegmentLocuswhenencountered.

Crosshairs

Insertion point

Theothercomponentofahybridsymbolisnotautomaticallyadjustedtomatchchangesmadetotheinsertion point.Itmustbeeditedseparately.Switcheasilytotheothercomponentfromthecontextmenu. 5. Afterediting,clicktheExitSymbolbutton(orselectModify>ExitSymbol)toupdateallinstancesofthesymbol andreturntothenormaldrawingmode. Iftheeditedsymbolisnestedinothersymbols,theExitSymbolbuttonreturnsbacktothesymbolcontainer.

Converting a Symbol Instance to a Group


Changesmadetoablacksymboldefinitionaffectallinstancesofthatsymbolinthedrawing.TheConverttoGroup commandchangesaselectedsymbolintoagroupofVectorworksobjects,allowingeditstobemadetothatobject withoutaffectingtheotherinstancesofthesymbolinthedrawing.Thiscommanddisassociatesthesymbolinstance fromitsdefinition.Theeditedsymbolcanthenbeturnedintoanewsymbolifdesired. Beforeusingthiscommandtoeditasymbolinstancethathasbeeninsertedintoawall,firstdragthesymbol outsideofthewall.Thisavoidsconvertingthewallaswell. Toconvertasymboltoagroup: 1. Inthedrawing,selectthesymbolinstancetoedit. 2. SelectModify>Convert>ConverttoGroup. Ifasymbolcontainsmultiplelevelsofgroupedobjects,othersymbols,orpluginobjects,theConverttoGroup Optionsdialogboxopens.Selectthedesiredcriteriaforconvertingthesymbol.

188

| Chapter 5: Using Vectorworks Resources

Parameter
Dontconvertsubobjectstogroups Convertnestedsymbolsandpluginobjects Convertallsubobjects

Description
Excludesanysubobjects,suchasnestedsymbols,fromthe conversionprocess Convertsnestedsymbolsand/orpluginobjectswithinthesymbolto individualobjectswithinthegroup Convertsallobjectswithinthesymboltoindividualobjectswithin thegroup

Usecautionwhenconvertinghybridsymbols.IfinTop/Planview,the3Dcomponentofthesymbolmaybelost duringtheconversion.Similarly,ina3Dview,the2Dscreenplaneportionofthesymbolmaybelost. 3. ClickOK. Thesymbolisconvertedintoagroup.Tomakechangestogroupeditems,selectModify>EditGroupor Ungroup. Theobjectcanbeleftasagroupedobjectorsavedasanewsymbol.Anychangestotheoriginalsymbol definitiondonotaffectthisinstance. Insteadofrepeatedlyconvertingasymboltoagroup,createabluesymbolwhichautomaticallyconvertstoa groupuponinsertion;seeCreatingNewSymbolsonpage 175.

Managing Symbols
Creating a New Symbol Folder
CreatesymbolfolderstoorganizesymbolswithintheResourceBrowser. Tocreateanewsymbolfolder: 1. FromtheResourcesmenu,clickNewResourcetodisplaytheNewResourcemenu. 2. SelectSymbolFolder. TheAssignNamedialogboxopens. 3. Enterthenametoassigntothenewsymbolfolder. 4. ClickOK. ThenewfolderisaddedtotheResourceBrowser.

Moving a Symbol into a Folder


GroupsymbolsaccordingtotopicorplacementbymovingthemintofolderswithintheResourceBrowser. Tomoveasymbolintoafolder: 1. SelectthesymbolintheResourceBrowser. 2. SelectMovefromtheResourcesmenu. TheMoveSymboldialogboxopens.Clickthefoldertoselectitasthedestinationforthenewsymbol.

Editing Symbols |

189

Parameter
Folderlist NewFolder

Description
Displaysthefilessymbolfolders;theselectedfolderbecomesthedestinationforthe symbol Createsanewfolderwithintheselectedfolder;specifythefoldernameandclickOKto createthesymbolfolder

3. ClickOK. Vectorworksmovesthesymboltothenewfolder.

Importing a Symbol or Symbol Folder


ToimportasymbolorsymbolfolderfromanotherVectorworksfile: 1. SelectWindow>Palettes>ResourceBrowser. TheResourceBrowseropens. 2. Locatethefilethatcontainsthesymbolorsymbolfoldertobeimported. ForinformationusingtheResourceBrowsertolocateresourcesinotherVectorworksfiles,seeAccessing ExistingResourcesonpage 164. 3. Selectthesymbolorsymbolfoldertobeimported,andthenselectImportfromtheResourcesmenu. (Alternatively,dragthesymbolorsymbolfolderresourceintothedesiredVectorworksfile.) TheImportSymbol(s)dialogboxopens.

190

| Chapter 5: Using Vectorworks Resources

Parameter
Preservefolder hierarchy(symbol folderimportonly) Selectdestination folder Folderlist NewFolder Dontshowthisdialog whenthecurrentfile hasnosymbolfolders 4. ClickOK.

Description
Importsthesymbolfolder,andanysubfoldersandsymbolsitcontains,andmaintains thesamefolderstructureithadinitssourcefile Forsymbolfolders,importsthesymbolfolder,andanysubfoldersandsymbolsit contains,totheselectedfolder;forsymbols,importsthesymboltotheselectedfolder Displaysthefilessymbolfolders;theselectedfolderbecomesthedestinationforthe symbolorsymbolfolder Createsanewfolderwithintheselectedfolder;specifythefoldernameandclickOKto createthesymbolfolder Ifthecurrentfilehasnosymbolfolders,selectthisoptiontohidethisdialogboxwhen youimportsymbolsorsymbolfoldersbydraggingthemintodrawingsinthefuture

Ifthetargetfilealreadycontainsaresourcewiththesamename,theResourceNameConflictdialogboxopens withthreeoptions:replacetheresource,renametheresource,ordonotimporttheresource. 5. ClickOK. ThesymbolfolderandanysymbolsitcontainsareimportedintotheactiveVectorworksfile.

Deleting Symbols
Whenasymbolresourceisdeleted,allinstancesofthesymbolinthecurrentdocumentcanbeeitherdeletedor replacedwithlocitopreservethesymbollocations. Todeleteasymbolresource: 1. IntheResourceBrowser,selectthesymboldefinitiontodelete,andselectDeletefromtheResourcesmenu.

Record Formats |

191

Alternatively,rightclick(Windows)orCtrlclick(Macintosh)onasymboldefinition,andselectDeletefromthe contextmenu,orselectthesymboldefinitionandpresstheDeletekey. 2. Analertdisplaystoconfirmthattheresourceshouldbedeleted.Ifthereareanyinstancesofthesymbol currentlyinthedocument,specifywhethertoreplaceallinstanceswithlociortodeletethemcompletely.Click Yes. Thesymbolresourceisdeletedandeachsymbolinstanceiseitherdeletedorreplacedwithalocus.

Record Formats
Recordformats,whichstoreawiderangeofdata(likepriceorpartnumbers),canbeattachedtoanyobjectorsymbol. Recordsattachedtoanobjectorsymboldefinitionbecomeapermanentpartofit,remainingwiththeobjectorsymbol evenwhenitisimportedorcutandpastedintoanotherdrawing.Severalrecordformatscanbeattachedtoasingle objectorsymbol,andrecordvaluescanbeindividuallychangedforeachobjecttowhichtherecordisattached. IntheVectorworksDesignSeriesproducts,recordformatscanbelinkedtoanexternaldatabaseforautomated, twowaycommunication;seeDatabaseConnectivityonpage 1009intheVectorworksDesignSeriesUsersGuide.

Creating Record Formats


Creatingrecordformatsinadrawingfileisanimportantsteptocreatingmeaningfuldatabaserowsinworksheets(see EnteringDatainDatabaseRowsonpage 857). Tocreateanewrecordformat: 1. IntheResourceBrowser,selectNewResourcefromtheResourcesmenu. 2. SelectRecordFormat. TheCreateRecordFormatdialogboxopens.

3. EntertheNameoftheRecordFormat. 4. ClickNew. TheEditFielddialogboxopens.

192

| Chapter 5: Using Vectorworks Resources

Parameter
Name Type Integer

Description
Enteranameforthefield,upto63characters Selectthetypeoffield Selecttousewholenumbersrangingfrom32,768to32,767 UsingIntegerrequireslessmemorythanNumber.

Boolean Text Number

SelecttouseadatavalueofeitherTrueorFalse Selecttoenterastringofcharacters(defaultoption),suchasawordorasentence SelecttousenumbersoutsidetherangeofInteger,fractionsordecimals,ortospecifya numberformat.ClickFormattodefinethenumberformatintheNumberFormatdialog box;clickOKtoreturntotheEditFielddialogbox. Thedefaultformat Usesdecimalnumbers;enteravalueforthenumberofdecimalplaces,andifdesired, selecttousecommasasseparators Usesscientificnumbers;enteravalueforthenumberofdecimalplaces Usesfractionalnumbers;entertheroundingvalueforfractions Usesdimensionnumbers Usesdimensionareaformatanddisplaysthespecifiedareaunitsafterthenumber Usesdimensionvolumeformatanddisplaysthespecifiedvolumeunitsafterthenumber Determinestheaccuracyofanglesandmeasurementsystemapplied;measurement systemisdegrees,minutes,andsecondsordecimalnumbersuptoeightdecimalplaces Usesdates;selectthedesireddateformatfromthelist WhentheNumberFormatdialogboxisopenedfromaworksheet,enterthetexttodisplay beforethecellvalue WhentheNumberFormatdialogboxisopenedfromaworksheet,enterthetexttodisplay afterthecellvalue EnterthedatavalueintheDefaulttextbox,ifdesired

General Decimal Scientific Fractional Dimension DimensionArea Dimension Volume Angle Date Leader Trailer Default

Record Formats |
5. ClickOKtoreturntotheCreateRecordFormatdialogbox. 6. Foreachadditionalfieldtoadd,repeatsteps4through6. 7. ClickOKtoreturntothedrawingarea.

193

Whenanobjectisselected,theDatataboftheObjectInfopalettedisplaysallrecordscontainedinthecurrent drawing.

ODBC functionality (Design Series required)

Attaching Record Formats to Symbols and Objects


Oncearecordformathasbeencreated,itcanbeattachedtoanyobjectorsymbolinthesamedrawingfileastherecord format.TheDatataboftheObjectInfopaletteindicatesallrecordformatscurrentlyavailabletoattach. Thissectiondescribeshowtoattacharecordformattoaselectedsymbolorobject.Forglobalsymbolchanges,usethe utilitydescribedinAttachingRecordsonpage 199. Therearetwomethodsforattachingrecordformatstosymbols.Thefirstmethodattachesarecordformattoasingle symbolinstanceortoanobjectinthedrawingwithoutaffectingpreviousorfutureinstances. Thesecondmethodattachesarecordformattoasymboldefinitionthatappliestoeachsymboladdedtothedrawing afterwards.Existinginstancesremainunaffected.

Attaching Record Formats to a Single Symbol Instance or Object


Toattach(ordetach)recordformatstoasinglesymbolorobjectinthedrawingusingtheObjectInfopalette: 1. Selectthesymbol. 2. SelectWindow>Palettes>ObjectInfo. TheObjectInfopaletteopens.

194

| Chapter 5: Using Vectorworks Resources

ODBC functionality (Design Series required)

3. SelecttheDatatab. TheObjectInfopalettelistsallrecordformatsinthedrawing. 4. Inthecheckboxnexttothedesiredrecordformat(s),clicktoattachordeselecttodetachtherecordformat. Ifattachingarecordformat,anXdisplaysintheboxandtherecordisattachedtothatinstanceofthesymbolor object. Ifdetachingarecordformat,confirmtheprocedure. ToattachrecordformatstoasymbolorobjectinthedrawingusingtheResourceBrowser: 1. Selectthesymbol(s)inthedrawing. 2. FromtheResourceBrowser,selecttherecordformattobeapplied.Rightclick(Windows)orCtrlclick (Macintosh)andselectApplyfromthecontextmenu.(Alternatively,doubleclicktherecordformatresourceto applyittotheselectionordragtherecordformatresourceontoasymbolorobject.)

Attaching Record Formats to a Symbol Definition


ToattachrecordformatstoasymboldefinitionfromtheResourceBrowser: 1. SelectWindow>Palettes>ResourceBrowser. TheResourceBrowseropens. 2. Selectasymboldefinition. 3. SelectEditfromtheResourcesmenu. 4. Selectthesymbolcomponenttoedit,andclickEdit. 5. IntheEditSymbolwindow,deselectallbyclickinginanemptyareaofthewindow. 6. IntheObjectInfopalette,clickontheDatatab. Whennoitemsareselected,theDatatabdisplays*SYMBOLDEFAULTS*atthetop. 7. Selecttherecordtoattach. Toattachmultiplerecordstothesamesymboldefinition,clickoneachoftherecords. 8. ClickExitSymbolatthetoprightoftheEditSymbolwindow.

Record Formats |

195

Theattachedrecord(s)isincludedwiththesymboleachtimethesymbolisplacedinthedrawingorimported intoanotherdrawing.Symbolsalreadypresentinthedrawingareunaffected.Changetherecordvaluesofthe recordformatresourcetosetthedefaultvaluesforthesymbolwhenplacedinthedrawing.

Editing Record Formats


Recordformatscanbeeditedinavarietyofways,dependingonthedesiredoutcome.

Method
Edittherecordformatresource,changingthefield listand/ordefaultfieldvalues(seeEditing DefaultRecordFormatsonpage 195) Editthefieldvaluesofarecordattachedtoa selectedobject(seeViewingandEditingObject Recordsonpage 196) Edittherecordfieldvaluesofasymboldefinition (seeEditingSymbolDefaultRecordValueson page 197)

Result
Futureobjectsorsymbolswiththerecordattachedreflectthe changes;existingattachedrecordsareunaffected Changestofieldvaluesaffecttheselectedobjectonly;the recordfieldscannotbechanged.Existingandfutureobjects withtherecordattachedusethedefaultvalues. Changestofieldvaluesaffectfutureinstancesofthesymbol; therecordfieldscannotbechanged.Existingsymbolsand othersymbolswiththerecordattachedareunaffected.

Alternatively,makeglobalchangeswiththesymbolutilities(seeChangingOneRecordFormatFieldonpage 200 andChangingAllRecordFormatFieldsonpage 201).

Editing Default Record Formats


ArecordformatsfieldsanddefaultvaluescanbeeditedfromtheResourceBrowser. Toeditrecordformatvalues: 1. SelectWindow>Palettes>ResourceBrowser. TheResourceBrowseropens. 2. Selecttherecordformat. 3. SelectEditfromtheResourcesmenu. TheEditRecordFormatdialogboxopens.

196

| Chapter 5: Using Vectorworks Resources


Parameter
Name Fieldlist New Edit Remove

Description
Displaysthenameofthecurrentrecordformat Liststhefieldsofthecurrentrecordformat Createsanewfield(asdescribedinCreatingRecordFormatsonpage 191) Editstheselectedfield Deletestheselectedfield

4. SelecttherecordformatfieldtoeditandclickEdittochangethedefaultvalue,orclickNeworRemovetoaddor deletefields. 5. ClickOK. Theeditsdonotaffectexistingvaluesforattachedrecords.Changesareappliedtothedefaultfieldvalueswhen attachedtosymbolsorobjects,orforfuturesymbolswiththerecordattached.

Viewing and Editing Object Records


TheObjectInfopaletteDatatabisusedtoattach,view,andedittherecordvaluesforspecificinstances. Ifselectingmultipleobjectswithdifferentrecordsattached,theDatatabdisplaysrecordsthatareattachedto objectswithagrayedbox,butdoesnotindicatewhichrecordsareattachedtowhichobjects.

ODBC functionality (Design Series required)

Resizethelistboxesbyselectinganddraggingtheresizebarsbetweenthem. Toeditrecordfieldvaluesforaselectedobject: 1. SelectWindow>Palettes>ObjectInfo. TheObjectInfopaletteopens. 2. Selecttheobject. ClicktheDatatabontheObjectInfopalette.TheObjectInfopalettedisplaysinformationabouttherecord format(s)attachedtotheselectedobject(s).

Parameter
Name

Description
Displaysthename,ifany,giventoanobject

Record Formats | Parameter


Record Formats RecordFields

197

Description
Displaysallrecordscontainedinthedrawing;recordsattachedtotheselectedobjectare indicatedwithanXinthecheckboxtotheleftoftherecordname.Ifmorethanoneobjectis selected,onlytherecordsattachedtoallobjectsdisplayanX. Displaysallthefieldsintheselectedrecord;ifadefaultvaluewasassignedtothefield,it displaysafterthefieldname.Ifnoitemiscurrentlyselectedinthedrawing,thelabelRecord FieldDefaultsdisplaysinstead. Editsthefieldvaluesfortheselectedrecord;allenteredvaluesoverrideanydefaultvaluesforthe object

RecordInfo

3. SelectthedesiredrecordintheRecordFormats,andthenthedesiredfieldintheRecordFields.Changethe RecordInfothedefaultvalue. Thisinformationappliestotheselectedobjectonly;othernewandexistingobjectswiththatrecordattachedwill stillusetheoriginal(default)recordformatvalues.Ifaselectedchairhasadifferentpartnumberfromthe defaultvaluethatwasenteredintherecordformat,enterthenewpartnumberforthatchaironly.Ifthepart numberforallchairshaschanged,editthedefaultrecordformatinstead.

Editing Symbol Default Record Values


Thedefaultvaluesofarecordattachedtoasymbolcanbechangedwhileeditingasymboldefinition(seeEditing SymbolDefinitionsonpage 185).Thisdoesnotchangetherecordformatresource;ifothersymbolsorobjectshave therecordattached,theyareunaffected.Itdoeschangethefuturedefaultrecordvaluesforthatsymbol. Tochangethedefaultfieldvaluesofasymbolsrecordformat: 1. Selectasymboldefinition. 2. SelectEditfromtheResourcesmenu. 3. Selectthesymbolcomponenttoedit,andclickEdit. 4. IntheEditSymbolwindow,deselectallbyclickinginanemptyareaofthewindow. 5. IntheObjectInfopalette,clickontheDatatab. Whennoitemsareselected,theDatatabdisplays*SYMBOLDEFAULTS*atthetop. 6. SelectthedesiredrecordintheRecordFormats,andthenthedesiredfieldintheRecordFields.Changethe RecordInfodefaultvalue. 7. ClickExitSymbolatthetoprightofthedrawingwindowtoreturntothedrawing. Thedefaultfieldvaluesoftherecordformatforthatsymboldefinitionhavebeenchanged.

Linking Text to Record Formats


TheLinkTexttoRecordcommandlinksthetextwithinasymboldefinitiontoafieldoftheattachedrecord.Thisis particularlyusefulforlabelingsymbolsinadrawingwithuniqueinformation,suchasapartlistnumberorprice.To usethiscommand,symbolsandrecordformatsmustalreadyexistinthedrawingfile.Thelinkismadewithina symbolsdefinition. Tolinktexttorecordswithinasymboldefinition: 1. Editthe2DsymboldefinitionasdescribedinEditingSymbolDefinitionsonpage 185. 2. IntheEditSymbolwindowwithnothingselected,createalineorblockoftext.

198

| Chapter 5: Using Vectorworks Resources


Ensurethetextisformattedwiththedesiredfontandstyle.Theactualtextisnotimportantatthispoint.If desired,createandassignaclasstothetext.
Text

3. Selectthetextandplaceitintheexactlocationwheretherecorddatavalueistodisplay. 4. Withthetextstillselected,selectTools>Records>LinkTexttoRecord. TheChooseFielddialogboxopens.

Records list

Field list

5. SelecttherecordformatfromtheRecordslist. 6. Inthelistoffields,selectthefieldoftheselectedrecordtoassociatewiththetext. 7. ClickOK. Vectorworksaddsthetextobjecttothesymboldefinition,aswellasallexistinginstancesonthedrawing.The defaultvalueoftheselectedfieldreplacesthedummytext. 8. ClickExitSymbolatthetoprightofthedrawingwindowtoreturntothedrawing. Placethesymbolonthedrawing.Thetextlinkedtotherecorddisplaysthefieldinformation.Ifnecessary,toedit thevalueforthatparticularinstance,selectthefieldwherethetextwasassignedintheObjectInfopaletteData tab.IntheEditFieldbox,enterthetexttodisplayinthesymbol;thelinkedfieldinformationdisplaysonthe attachedsymbol.

Global Symbol Commands |

199

ODBC functionality (Design Series required)

123-456789

Global Symbol Commands


Thesymbolcommandsmanipulaterecorddataattachedtosymbolsinlibrariesandperformglobaldatachanges.Use thesecommandstochangethedefaultrecordformatvaluesofthefield(s)attachedtomultiplesymboldefinitions, eitherafterimportingafilefromadifferentsourceorduringnormalprojectchanges. Thesymbolutilitiesincludethefollowingcommands: AttachRecord DetachRecord ChangeOneField ChangeAllFields ChangeSymbolAttributes ListSymbols

Attaching Records
Thiscommandattachestheselectedrecordformattoallofthesymboldefinitionsinaspecifiedsymbolfolder. Toattacharecord: 1. SelectTools>Records>AttachRecord. TheAttachRecorddialogboxopens.

2. FromtheSymbolFolderlist,selectthecriteriaforattachingarecord.

200

| Chapter 5: Using Vectorworks Resources


SelectNonetoattachtherecordtothesymboldefinition(s)attherootofthesymbollibrary(symboldefinitions notinanyfolder).SelectAlltoattachtherecordformattoallofthesymboldefinition(s)inthefilessymbol library.Selectingasymbolfolderchangesallofthesymboldefinitionsonlyinthatfolderandanysubfolders.

3. FromtheRecordFormatlist,selectoneoftherecordformatsdefinedinthecurrentfiletobeattachedtothe selectedsymboldefinition(s). 4. ClickOK. Confirmtheoperationandthenumberofsymboldefinitionsaffected. Symbolinstancesalreadyonthedrawingarenotaffected. 5. ClickOK. Toquicklyverifythatarecordhasbeenattachedtothesymbollibrary,createareport.SeeCreatingReportson page 833.

Detaching Records
Thiscommanddetachestheselectedrecordformatfromallsymboldefinitionsinaselectedsymbolfolder. Todetacharecord: 1. SelectTools>Records>DetachRecord. TheDetachRecorddialogboxopens.

2. FromtheSymbolFolderlist,selectNone,All,orasymbolfolder,ifany. SelectNonetodetachtherecordfromthesymboldefinition(s)attherootofthesymbollibrary(symbol definitionsnotinanyfolder).SelectAlltodetachtherecordformatfromallofthesymboldefinition(s)inthe filessymbollibrary.Selectingasymbolfolderchangesallofthesymboldefinitionsonlyinthatfolderandany subfolders. 3. FromtheRecordFormatlist,selectoneoftherecordformatsdefinedinthecurrentfiletodetachfromthe symbollibrary. 4. ClickOK. Confirmtheoperationandthenumberofsymboldefinitionsaffected.

Changing One Record Format Field


Thiscommandchangesaspecifiedfielddefaultvalueforaselectedrecordformatattachedtosymboldefinitions. Symbolsalreadyplacedonthedrawingareunaffected.

Global Symbol Commands |


Tochangeonerecordformatfield: 1. SelectTools>Records>ChangeOneField. TheChangeOneFielddialogboxopens.

201

2. FromtheSymbolFolderlist,selectNone,All,orasymbolfolder,ifany. SelectNonetochangetherecordofthesymboldefinition(s)attherootofthesymbollibrary(symboldefinitions notinanyfolder).SelectAlltochangetherecordformatofallofthesymboldefinition(s)inthefilessymbol library.Selectingasymbolfolderchangesallofthesymboldefinitionsonlyinthatfolderandanysubfolders. 3. FromtheRecordFormatlist,selecttherecordformat. TheFieldNameselectionsdependontherecordformatselected. 4. SelecttheFieldNametochange. 5. EntertheNewValue. 6. ClickOK. Confirmtheoperationandthenumberofsymboldefinitionsaffected.

Changing All Record Format Fields


Thiscommandchangesseveraloralldefaultfieldvaluesforaselectedrecordformatattachedtosymboldefinitions. Symbolsalreadyplacedonthedrawingareunaffected. Tochangeseveralorallrecordformatfields: 1. SelectTools>Records>ChangeAllFields. TheChangeAllFieldsdialogboxopens.

202

| Chapter 5: Using Vectorworks Resources

2. FromtheSymbolFolderlist,selectNone,All,orasymbolfolder,ifany. SelectNonetochangetherecordofthesymboldefinition(s)attherootofthesymbollibrary(symboldefinitions notinanyfolder).SelectAlltochangetherecordformatofallofthesymboldefinition(s)inthefilessymbol library.Selectingasymbolfolderchangesallofthesymboldefinitionsonlyinthatfolderandanysubfolders. 3. FromtheRecordFormatlist,selecttherecordformat. 4. ClickOK. TheChangeFieldsdialogboxopens.Thetitlebardisplaysthenameoftherecordbeingedited.

5. Selectthefieldname(s)tochangeandenterthenewinformation. Allofthefieldnamesoftherecordformatarelisted.Iftherecordfilehasmorethan16fields,clickNextto continueviewingtheremainingfieldsintherecord. 6. Aftermakingthedesiredchanges,clickOK. Confirmtheoperationandthenumberofsymboldefinition(s)affected.

Changing Symbol Attributes


Thiscommandassignsalloftheobjectswithintheselectedsymboldefinitionstothespecifiedclass,anddesignates theobjectstouseanyoralloftheclassattributes. Tochangesymbolattributes: 1. SelectTools>Utilities>ChangeSymbolAttrs. TheChangeSymbolAttributesdialogboxopens.

Global Symbol Commands |

203

2. FromtheSymbolFolderlist,selectNone,All,orasymbolfolder,ifany. SelectNonetochangethesymbolattributesattherootofthesymbollibrary(symboldefinitionsnotinany folder).SelectAlltochangethesymbolattributesofallofthesymboldefinition(s)inthefilessymbollibrary. Selectingasymbolfolderchangesallofthesymboldefinitionsonlyinthatfolderandanysubfolders. 3. SelecttheClasstoassignthesymboldefinition. 4. Selecttheclassattributestouse,andindicatehowtotreatclassattributesthatarenotused. Eitherkeeptheobjectsexistingattributes,orusethecurrentdefaultsifaclassattributeisnotspecified. 5. ClickOK. Confirmtheoperationandthenumberofsymboldefinition(s)affected.

Listing Symbols and Folders


Thiscommandcreatesatextfilelistallofthesymboldefinitionsandsymbolfolderswithintheactivedrawing. Tolistsymbolsandfolders: 1. SelectTools>Utilities>ListSymbols. TheListSymboldialogboxopens.

2. SelecteitherListSymbolsandFoldersorListFoldersOnly. 3. ClickOK.

204

| Chapter 5: Using Vectorworks Resources


TheSaveFiledialogboxopens.

4. Enteranewfilenameorusethedefaultname,andthenclickSave. Atextfileiscreatedlistingthenamesofallthefoldersand,ifchosen,symbolswithinthecurrentfile.

Global Symbol Commands |

205

206

| Chapter 5: Using Vectorworks Resources

Creating Objects
Vectorworks Modeling Environment

Vectorworkssoftwareprovidesrobust2Dfunctionalitywithavarietyoftoolsandcommandsforthosewhodraftin Top/Plan.Forthosewhodesignin3Dinsteadof,orinadditionto,2D,theVectorworksprogramisatruemodeling environment.

Planar Modes of 2D Objects: Screen Plane and Layer Plane


2Dobjectscanbecreatedaseitherscreenplaneobjectsorlayerplane(planar)objects,dependingontheselected planesmode.Thescreenplaneiscoincidenttothecomputerscreen,andperpendiculartothedesignersview direction.2Dobjectsdrawninthescreenplanefloatin3Dviews.Planarobjects,however,existin3Dspace;aplanar objectisdrawnina3Dplaneeitherthelayerplaneora3Dworkingplane,maintainingitsgeometricrelationshipto the3Dmodelwhenin3Dviews.

2D object in Top/Plan view

2D planar object in isometric view

2D screen plane object in isometric view

Objectsarecreatedasplanarobjectsbydefault;theydisplayinwireframewiththeirgraphicattributesonthelayer planeinviewsotherthanTop/Plan,andbecomepartofthe3Dmodel.2Dobjectscanbecreatedandeditedonany planeandinanyview;theeditingoccurswithintheplanarcontextoftheobjectsplane.Whenperforming operationsonmultipleselectedplanarobjectsina3Dview,theobjectsmustbecoplanar. Doubleclickonaplanarobjecttosettheworkingplanetotheplaneonwhichtheobjectwascreated. TheSplittool,aswellastheModify>Rotate>Rotate,RotateLeft,andRotateRight,andFlipcommands, operatewithinthescreenplaneonly. Whilemost2Dobjectsshouldnormallybeplanar,someobjectsfunctionbestasscreenplaneobjects.Forexample,all elementsonsheetlayersare,bydefinition,onthescreenplane.Objectscreatedascropobjectsforviewportsare automaticallyplacedinthescreenplane.Inaddition,whencreatingspecialhybridsymbols,the2Dcomponentofthe symbolshouldbecreatedinthescreenplane,sothatthesymbolhasarepresentationwhenviewedinTop/Plan. 2Dobjectscreatedinversion2010retaintheirplanardesignationuponconversion.2Dobjectscreatedinversionsof Vectorworkssoftwarepriorto2010becomescreenplaneobjectsuponconversion. TheActivePlaneslistlocatedontheViewbarsetsthecurrentlyactiveplane,anddetermineswhether2Dobjectsare createdasplanarorscreenplaneobjects.Tocreateplanarobjects,selectLayerPlanefromtheViewbar.Tocreate screenplaneobjects,selectScreenPlane.(Tocreateplanarobjectsontheautomaticworkingplane,selectAutomatic asdescribedinthenextsection.)Theselectedplanarmoderemainsineffectuntilthenexttimeitischanged.

208

| Chapter 6: Creating Objects

TheActivePlaneslistontheShapetaboftheObjectInfopaletteswitchestheplanarpropertyofselectedexisting2D objects.Aselected2Dobjectdrawninscreenplanemodecanbeswitchedtolayer(planar),andviceversa.

The Automatic Working Plane


Ina3Dview,andwhenatypicaldrawingtoolisselected,theautomaticworkingplaneisineffect.Asthecursor movesoversuitabledrawingsurfaces,theautomaticworkingplaneishighlightedonthesurfacetoindicatethatthe drawingobjectcanbeplacedthereandwillbedrawnplanartothesurface.AutomaticdisplaysintheActivePlanes list.

With the Hemisphere tool selected, the automatic working plane displays on an applicable surface as the cursor moves over it. The axes display the working plane origin.

The hemisphere is created on the automatic working plane, and it is automatically made planar to the surface

Rendered view

Whenthecursorisnotoverasuitablesurfacewhileina3Dview,thedefaultautomaticplaneisineffect.Thedefault automaticworkingplanealignstothelayerplane,andanobjectdrawnisplacedonthelayerplane.See UnderstandingtheWorkingPlaneonpage 593formoreinformation. Insomecases,itmaybedesirabletoturnofftheautomaticworkingplane,aswhendrawingonthelayerplaneor screenplane,whendrawingonahiddensurfacewheretheautomaticplanedoesnotappear,orwhendrawingona specificworkingplanethatwasestablishedbytheSetWorkingPlanetool.The \ key(backslash)togglesthe automaticworkingplaneonandoff.(ThiskeycanbecustomizedintheWorkspaceEditor;seeModifyingSnapping andModeShortcutsonpage 887.)Thecolorandopacityoftheautomaticworkingplanecanalsobecustomized;see ConfiguringInteractiveDisplayonpage 65.

Push/Pull Mode of Planar Tools


Ina3Dview,andwhenthescreenplaneisnottheactiveplane,planarobjectssuchascircles,rectangles,rounded rectangles,ovals,arcs,polylines,andpolygonscanbeextrudedimmediatelyaftercreationwhenthePush/Pullmode ontheToolbarisenabledforthetool.Themodestogglestatusappliestoalltheseplanartools;ifthemodeisenabled foroneofthetools,itisenabledforallofthem.Thisinstantlyandeasilyallows3Dobjectstobecreatedfromplanar objects,bymovingthecursororenteringadistanceinthedatabar.

Using the Data Bar |

209

Use the Circle tool to create a circle on the side face of an object. The automatic working plane indicates a suitable planar surface.

The circle that was just created is still selected, and can immediately be extruded when the Push/Pull mode is enabled.

The extruded cylinder is created.

WhentheautomaticworkingplanemodeisenabledandthePush/Pullmodeisusedoveranobjectthatsupportssolid operations,presstheOptionkey(Macintosh)orAltkey(Windows)andpullouttocreateasolidadditionorpush intocreateasolidsubtraction. ThePush/Pullmodeofplanarobjectsoperatesdirectlyaftercreationoftheobject.Iftheobjectisdeselected,itcanbe extrudedlaterwiththePush/Pulltool;seeDirectModelingonpage 434.Insomecases,thePush/Pullmodemay needtobetoggledoff,suchaswhencreatingseveralplanarobjectsoneafteranother.

Using the Data Bar


UsetheDatabarwhenyoudrawtolockcertainvaluesforanobject,suchasthelengthofacircleradius,theangleofa wall,thelengthofahemisphereradius,ortheheightofanextrudedrectangle.ThefieldsthatareavailableontheData bardependontheactivetoolandontheactionbeingperformed.
Floating 2D Data bar (follows the cursor) Horizontal location of the cursor in the drawing window Fixed 2D Data bar (on the Tool bar) 2D Data bar Vertical location of the cursor in the drawing window

Floating 3D Data bar (follows the cursor) Offset of the cursor relative to the working plane Fixed 3D Data bar (on the Tool bar) 3D Data bar Location of the cursor relative to the working plane

Thedatadisplayedinthebarisgatheredfromthefeedbacksegmentoftheobjectbeingcreated.Thecoordinatesare relativetoafloatingdatum,ifoneexists;otherwisethecoordinatesareabsolute.ThemorecommonDatabarfieldsare describedinthefollowingtable;otherfieldsthatcandisplayaredescribedwheretheiruseisrelevant.

210

| Chapter 6: Creating Objects


Parameter
2DParameters DeltaX DeltaY L A X Y 3DParameters WPA X Y Z L Z CtrX CtrY CtrZ DeltaX DeltaY DeltaZ DeltaX DeltaY DeltaZ Radius Height TheangleorrotationoftheobjectthatisbeingdrawnrelativetotheworkingplaneXaxis TheabsolutelocationofXinworkingplanecoordinates TheabsolutelocationofYinworkingplanecoordinates TheabsolutelocationofZinworkingplanecoordinates(appliesto3Dobjectsonly) Thelengthordistanceoftheobjectthatisbeingdrawn TheZ(depth)oftheobjectbeingdrawn ThecenteroftheobjectalongtheXaxis ThecenteroftheobjectalongtheYaxis ThecenteroftheobjectalongtheZaxis TheoffsetdistancefromthepreviousclickorpositionofXinworkingplanespace TheoffsetdistancefromthepreviousclickorpositionofYinworkingplanespace TheoffsetdistancefromthepreviousclickorpositionofZinworkingplanespace TheoffsetdistancefromthepreviousclickorpositionofX TheoffsetdistancefromthepreviousclickorpositionofY TheoffsetdistancefromthepreviousclickorpositionofZ Theradiusoftheobjectbeingdrawn Theheightoftheobjectbeingdrawn TheoffsetdistancefromthepreviousclickorpositionalongtheXaxis TheoffsetdistancefromthepreviousclickorpositionalongtheYaxis Thelengthordistancefrom0,0,ortheradiusoftheobjectthatisbeingdrawn Theangleorrotationoftheobjectthatisbeingdrawn TheX(horizontal)locationofthecursorinthedrawingwindow TheY(vertical)locationofthecursorinthedrawingwindow

Description

ThelocationandbehavioroftheDatabarfieldscanbeadjustedbyoptionslistedunderWindows>DataBarOptions orfromtheDataBarandEditGroupOptionslist(seeDataBarandEditGroupOptionsonpage 211fordetails).

Drawing with the Data Bar


TodrawanobjectwiththeDatabar: 1. Selectadrawingtoolandclickoncetobegintodrawtheobject. 2. PresstheTabkeytoactivatethefirstfieldintheDatabar,orpressShift+Tabtoactivatethelastfield. Alternatively,iftheDatabaroptionsaresetsothatinstantactivationisenabled,typethevalueforthefirstfield intheDatabartoactivateit.

Using the Data Bar |


Inclickdragmode,pressandholdthemousebuttonwhenyoupressTaborShift+Tab. 3. Entervaluesintheappropriatefield(s),usingthekeysasfollows.

211

Key
Enter(Windows)or Return(Macintosh)

Action
WhenthefocusisinaDatabarfield,setsthevaluethatiscurrentlydisplayed,andmoves thefocustothedrawingarea Whenthefocusisinthedrawingarea,completestheobject(orcompletesthecurrent segmentoftheobject,forpathobjectssuchaspolygons,walls,anddimensions)

Tab

WhenthefocusisinaDatabarfield,setstheenteredvalueandmovestothenextfield(if novaluewasentered,thefieldisnotset) Whenthefocusisinthedrawingarea,movesthefocustothefirstfieldintheDatabar

Shift+Tab

WhenthefocusisinaDatabarfield,setstheenteredvalueandmovestotheprevious field(ifnovaluewasentered,thefieldisnotset) Whenthefocusisinthedrawingarea,movesthefocustothelastfieldintheDatabar

Toclearanentrybeforeitisset,presstheBackspacekey.Thepreviousvalueinthatfieldredisplays. IftheSmartCursoroptionisenabledinVectorworkspreferences,adottedlinedisplaystorepresentthelocation ofthevaluesenteredfortheX,Y,andZaxes. 4. Avectorlock(reddashedline)displaystorepresentthelocationofthevaluesenteredintheDatabar. SeeCreatingVectorLocksonpage 151formoreinformation.

5. Tocompletetheobjectaccordingtothevaluesyouentered,clickthemousebutton.Fornonpathobjects,youcan alsopressEnterorReturntocompletetheobject,ifthefocusisinthedrawingarea.Forpathobjects,suchas polygons,walls,anddimensions,youmayneedtoclicktocompletetheobject.

Data Bar and Edit Group Options


TheDatabariscontrolledbyoptionsonadropdownlistontherightsideoftheToolbar.Optionsforeditinggroups arealsoprovidedinthislist.TheDataBarandEditGroupOptionslistisenabledbydefaultontheQuickPreferences menuontheToolbar;therefore,itdisplaysasabuttontotheleftoftheQuickPreferencesmenu.TheDataBar OptionsandEditGroupOptionscanalsobeselectedfromtheWindowmenu.

212

| Chapter 6: Creating Objects


Data Bar and Edit Group Options list Quick Preferences menu

Data Bar Options

Edit Group Options

Menu Command Location of the Data bar fields


UsefloatingDatabar UsefloatingDatabaronlywhentab keyispressed Donotusefloatingdatabarshow databarfieldsonfixeddatabar

Description
TheDatabarfloatswiththecursorinthedrawingarea TheDatabarfloatswiththecursoronlywhentheTabkeyispressed; otherwisethebardoesnotdisplay TheDatabardisplaysonthetopleftsideofthewindow,atthetopof theToolbar

Activation of the Data bar


Allownumerickeypadentryfor instantDatabaractivation Donotallownumerickeypadentryfor instantDatabaractivation DonotallowinstantDatabar activation WhenthefloatingDatabarisdisplayed,enternumbersonthe keyboardornumerickeypadtoactivatethefirstfield WhenthefloatingDatabarisdisplayed,enternumbersonthe keyboardonlytoactivatethefirstfield WhenthefloatingDatabarisdisplayed,presstheTabkeytoactivate thefirstfield

Field display on the Data bar


ShowonlyprimaryfieldsonDatabar Showprimaryandsecondaryfieldson databar Showonlytheprimarydatafields(forexample,LandAforcircles) Showallfieldsexceptthecursorlocationfields(XandY)

Creating Lines | Menu Command


Showprimarysecondary,andcursor locationfieldsondatabar

213

Description
Showallfields

Field cycling options


Autocycletonondisplayedfields whentabbingpastlastfield Donotautocycletonondisplayed fieldswhentabbingpastlastfield Whensomeofthedatafieldsarehidden,presstheTabkeyinthelast visiblefieldtomakethenondisplayedfieldsbecomevisible Whensomeofthedatafieldsarehidden,presstheTabkeyinthelast visiblefieldtoreturntothefirstfield

Location of the floating Data bar


ShowfloatingDatabarbelow SmartCursorcues ShowfloatingDatabarabove SmartCursorcues WhenthefloatingDatabarisenabled,displaystheDatabarbelowthe SmartCursorcues(belowthecursor) WhenthefloatingDatabarisenabled,displaystheDatabarabovethe SmartCursorcues(abovethecursor)

Display of the Exit Group button


Uselargeexitgroupbutton Usesmallexitgroupbutton Whenagroupisbeingedited,showalargebuttonwiththelabelExit Groupintheupperrightcornerofthedrawingarea Whenagroupisbeingedited,showasmallbuttonwithanarrowicon intheupperrightcornerofthedrawingarea

Exit group options


<Esc><Esc>exitsgroup <Esc><Esc>doesnotexitgroup Whenagroupisbeingedited,pressingtheEscapekeytwiceexitsthe editingwindow Whenagroupisbeingedited,pressingtheEscapekeytwicedoesnot exittheeditingwindow

Creating Lines
Creating Single Lines
UsetheLinetooltocreatesinglelines.
Unconstrained Line from Center

Length Factor Preferences Constrained Line

214
Mode

| Chapter 6: Creating Objects


Description
Constrainsthelinetobevertical,horizontal,and30or45fromverticalorhorizontal inanydirection Drawsthelineatanyangle PressandholdtheShiftkeytosnapthelinetopredeterminedangles

Constrained Unconstrained

Line LinefromCenter LengthFactorPreference

Thefirstclickisthestartpointoftheline Thefirstclickisthecenterpointoftheline;thelineisdrawnoutwardinbothdirections fromthecenterpoint Scalesthelengthofthelinebyaspecificamountasitisdrawn

Creating a Line from Start Point to End Point


Tocreateasinglelinefromitsstartpointtoitsendpoint: 1. ClicktheLinetoolfromtheBasicpalette. 2. ClickeithertheConstrainedLineortheUnconstrainedLinemodebutton. 3. Toscalethelineasyoudrawit,clickLengthFactorPreferencesfromtheToolbar,andenterthescalefactor (mustbelargerthanzero).Thecreatedlinewillbethelengthofthelineyoudrawmultipliedbythisnumber.For example,enter2tocreatealinetwiceaslongasthedrawnline,orenter .5tocreatealinehalfaslongasthe drawnline.Bydefault,thevalueis1,whichdoesnotaffectthelinelength. 4. ClicktheLinemodebutton. 5. Clickatthelinesstartpoint. 6. Clickagaintosettheendpointoftheline.Ifyouenteredascalefactorotherthan1,thelengthofthefinishedline isadjustedaccordingly.

2nd click

1st click With the Length Scale Factor set to 1.5, click the center of the filled arc to start the line, and then click a point on the edge of the filled arc The finished line is 1.5 times longer than the radius of the filled arc

Creating a Line from the Center Point


Tocreateasinglelinefromitscenterpoint: 1. ClicktheLinetoolfromtheBasicpalette. 2. ClickeithertheConstrainedLineortheUnconstrainedLinemodebutton.

Creating Lines |

215

3. Toscalethelineasyoudrawit,clickLengthFactorPreferencesfromtheToolbar,andenterthescalefactor (mustbelargerthanzero).Thecreatedlinewillbethelengthofthelineyoudrawmultipliedbythisnumber.For example,enter2tocreatealinetwiceaslongasthedrawnline,orenter .5tocreatealinehalfaslongasthe drawnline.Bydefault,thevalueis1,whichdoesnotaffectthelinelength. 4. ClicktheLineFromCentermodebutton. 5. Clickatthelinescenterpoint. 6. Clickagaintosetoneofthelinesendpoints.Ifyouenteredascalefactorotherthan1,thelengthofthefinished lineisadjustedaccordingly.


2nd click 1st click

Using snapping points, locate the center of the circle and a point on the circle; click midway between them to start the line

Click a point on the circle to finish the line

Creating Double Lines


TheDoubleLinetoolcreatesawidevarietyofconstrainedandunconstraineddoublelines.Setthewidthbetweenthe doublelines,theoffsetfromthecursor,andwhethertocreatecomponentsbetweenthedoublelines.
Unconstrained Center Control Line Custom Control Line Separation Preference

Constrained

Top Control Line

Bottom Control Line

Double Line Preferences

Tocreatedoublelines: 1. ClicktheDoubleLinetoolfromtheBasicpalette. 2. ClickeithertheConstrainedDoubleLineortheUnconstrainedDoubleLinemodebutton. Constrainedlinesaredrawnat30,45,and90angles,andtheircomplementsaredrawninincrementsof30, and45. Unconstrainedlinescanbedrawnatanyangle. PressandholdtheShiftkeywhiledrawingalineinUnconstrainedmodetosnapthelinetopredetermined angles. 3. ClickthedesiredOffsetmodebuttontospecifytheoffsetmethod.

216

| Chapter 6: Creating Objects


Offset Mode
TopControlLine CenterControlLine BottomControlLine CustomControlLine

Description
Cursorcreatestherightline Linesareequidistantfromthelinedrawnbythecursor Cursorcreatestheleftline Specifyanoffsetvaluefromthelinedrawnbythecursor

4. EnterthedistancebetweenthedoublelinesintheSeparationfieldontheToolbar. 5. ClicktheDoubleLinePreferencesbuttontoenterothercriteria,asneeded.

Parameter
Separation ControlOffset Options CreateLines CreatePolygons CreateLinesand Polygons Components

Description
Enterthedistancebetweenthedoublelines;sameastheSeparationfieldontheToolbar ForCustomControllinemode,enterthedistancefromthetop/rightlineofthecursor

Createsparallellines Createsadoublelinepolygonwithclosedends Createsparallellineswithapolygonbetweenthem;thepolygonhasalineweightofzero Clicktodefinecomponentsbetweenthedoublelines(seeApplyingComponentsBetween DoubleLinesonpage 217)

6. ClickOKtoacceptthechanges. 7. Clickatthedoublelinesstartpoint. 8. Clickatthedoublelinesendpoint.

Creating Lines |

217

Applying Components Between Double Lines


Toapplyacomponentbetweenthedoublelines: 1. IntheDoubleLinePreferencesdialogbox,clickComponents. TheComponentsdialogboxopens.

Parameter
Preview

Description
Displaysapreviewofthecomponentsbetweenthedoublelines,includingthedefined components;thepreviewisdrawnfromlefttoright,sothetopofthepreview,by default,indicatestheleftpartofthedoublelinesastheywillbedrawn.Thearrowshows thedrawingdirection. Thethicknessofthedoublelinewithcomponentsisdefinedbythesumofthecomponent thicknesses Liststhecomponentsthatformthestructureofthedoubleline,inorderfromlefttoright asdisplayedinthepreview.Tochangetheorderofacomponent,clickanddragwithinthe #column. TheCoredesignationappliestowalls,butnottodoublelines.

OverallThickness Components

New Edit

Clicktodefinethecomponentsbetweenthedoublelines;seeCreatingWall Componentsonpage 455 OpenstheComponentAttributesdialogboxtoedittheselectedcomponentsthickness andattributes(youcanalsodoubleclickonacomponenttoopentheComponent Attributesdialogbox) Deletestheselectedcomponent;thedoublelinethicknessisadjustedaccordingly

Delete

218

| Chapter 6: Creating Objects

2. Whenthecomponentshavebeendefined,clickOK.

Creating a Break Line


TheBreakLinetoolcreatesoneofthreetypesofbreaklines:straight,curved,orarc. Todrawabreakline: 1. ClicktheBreakLinetoolfromtheDims/Notestoolset. 2. Clickinthedrawingtoplacethebreaklineandmovethemousetoindicatethelinelength.Clickagaintosetthe endofthebreakline. Ifthisisthefirstbreaklineplacedinthissession,theBreakLineObjectPropertiesdialogboxopens.Thesettings displayedapplytoallbreaklinescreatedduringthissessionandcanbeeditedintheObjectInfopaletteafter placement. 3. ClickOK.

4. ThebreaklineparameterscanbeeditedintheObjectInfopalette.

Parameter
BreakStyle BreakWidth BreakHeight BreakRadius NumberofBreaks

Description
Selectsthestyleofthebreakline(Straight,Curved,orArc) Indicatesthewidthofthebreakonly Indicatestheheightofthebreakonly Setstheradiusofthebreakonly Indicateswhetherasingleormultiplebreakshouldbedrawn

Creating Rectangles
TheRectangletoolcanbeusedtocreatearectangularorrotatedrectangularshape. Fourmodesareavailable.ThePush/Pulltogglemodeisavailablein3Dviewsforinstantlyextrudingtherectangle aftercreation.
Center and Corner Rectangle Rotated Rectangle

Rectangle

Push/Pull

Side Center and Opposite Corner Rectangle

Creating Rectangles | Mode


Rectangle CenterandCornerRectangle SideCenterandOpposite CornerRectangle RotatedRectangle Push/Pull(3Dviewsonly)

219

Description
Definestherectanglebyclickingtwodiagonalpoints Definestherectanglebythedistancefromthecentertoonecorner Definestherectanglebythedistancefromthecenterofonesidetotheopposite corner Createsarectanglethatisrotatedbyaspecifiedangle Instantlyextrudestherectangleaftercreation;availablein3Dviews

Creating a Rectangle
Tocreatearectangle: 1. ClicktheRectangletoolfromtheBasicpalette,andclickRectanglefromtheToolbar. 2. Clickattherectanglesstartpoint.Movethemouseuntilthedesiredsizeispreviewed. 3. Clickattherectanglesendpoint.
2nd click

1st click

Tocreateasquare,pressandholdtheShiftkeywhiledrawingwiththeRectangletool.

Creating a Rectangle by Center and Corner


Tocreatearectanglebycenterandcorner: 1. ClicktheRectangletoolfromtheBasicpalette,andclickCenterandCornerRectanglefromtheToolbar. 2. Clickattherectanglesstartpoint;thispointbecomesthecenteroftherectangle.Movethemouseuntilthe desiredrectanglesizeispreviewed. 3. Clicktosetacornerpointontherectangle.
2nd click 1st click

220

| Chapter 6: Creating Objects

Creating a Rectangle by Side Center and Opposite Corner


Tocreatearectanglebysidecenterandoppositecorner: 1. ClicktheRectangletoolfromtheBasicpalette,andclickSideCenterandOppositeCornerRectanglefromthe Toolbar. 2. Clickattherectanglesstartpoint;thispointbecomesthecenterofoneoftherectanglessides.Movethemouse toanoppositecorneruntilthedesiredrectanglesizeispreviewed. PresstheAltkey(Windows)orOptionkey(Macintosh)toorienttherectanglevertically. 3. Clicktosetacornerpointontherectangle.
2nd click

1st click

Creating Rotated Rectangles


Rotatedrectanglesarerectanglesthatarerotatedataspecifiedangle. Tocreatearectanglebycenterandcorner: 1. ClicktheRectangletoolfromtheBasicpalette,andclickRotatedRectanglefromtheToolbar. 2. Clicktosetthestartoftherectangle.Movethemousetosettherotatedrectangleangle. 3. Clicktosettherectanglerotationangle.Movethemouseuntilthedesiredrotatedrectanglesizeispreviewed. 4. Clicktocreatetherotatedrectangle;theboundingboxpositionindicatorintheObjectInfopalettematchesthe rotationoftherotatedrectangle(ifmultiplerotatedrectanglesareselected,theboxpositionindicatormatches therotationofonerectangle).

1st click 3rd click

2nd click Box position indicator

Creating Rounded Rectangles |

221

Creating Extruded Rectangles


Aplanarrectanglethathasbeencreatedina3Dviewcanbeextrudedimmediatelyaftercreation. Toextrudeacreatedrectangle: 1. EnablethePush/PulltogglemodeintheToolbarfortheRectangletool. 2. Createarectangleusinganyofthemodesdescribedintheprevioussections. 3. Withtherectanglestillselected,click,movethecursor,andthenclicktocreatetheextrude.
1st click 2nd click

AplanarrectanglecanbeextrudedatanytimewiththePush/Pulltool.SeeDirectModelingonpage 434. TheextrudeheightcanbechangedwiththeReshapetool(seeReshapingExtrudedObjectsandSolid Primitivesonpage 310),ormodifiedintheObjectInfopalette.

Creating Rounded Rectangles


Roundedrectanglescanbecreatedwithsymmetricaland/orproportionalcorners.Theprogramdefaultissetfor proportionalcorners.ThiscreatesrectangleswithcornersthatalwaysroundtobeonethirdofboththeXandtheY lengths.SymmetricalcornershavethesameXandYmeasurementsfortheroundedcorners.Roundedrectangleswith bothsymmetricalandproportionalcornershavethesamehorizontalandverticalarclengths.Roundedrectanglescan alsobecreatedusingexactXandYmeasurements. Twomodesareavailable.ThePush/Pulltogglemodeisavailablein3Dviewsforinstantlyextrudingtherectangle aftercreation.
Rounded Rectangle by Width and Height Rounded Rectangle by Box Push/Pull Rounded Rectangle Preferences

Mode
RoundedRectanglebyBox RoundedRectanglebyWidth andHeight Push/Pull(3Dviewsonly)

Description
Definesthedimensionsoftheboxcontainingtheroundedrectangle Definestheheightandwidthlengthstocreatetheroundedrectangle,whichcan berotatedifdesired Instantlyextrudestheroundedrectangleaftercreation;availablein3Dviews

222

| Chapter 6: Creating Objects

Rounded Rectangle by Box


Tocreateroundedrectanglesbybox: 1. ClicktheRoundedRectangletoolfromtheBasicpalette,andclickRoundedRectanglebyBoxfromtheToolbar. 2. ClickthePreferencesbutton. TheRoundRectPreferencesdialogboxopens.

Parameter
CornerStyles

Description
Selecttouseeithersymmetricaland/orproportionalcorners

Symmetrical corners

Proportional corners

CornerDiameters 3. ClickOK. 4. Clicktosetthestartpoint.

Alternatively,typeintheprecisecornerXandcornerYmeasurements

5. Clicktosettheendpointoftherectangle.
2nd click

1st click

Creating Circles |

223

Rounded Rectangle by Width and Height


Tocreateroundedrectanglesbywidthandheight: 1. ClicktheRoundedRectangletoolfromtheBasicpalette,andclickRoundedRectanglebyWidthandHeight fromtheToolbar. 2. SettheroundedrectanglepreferencesasdescribedinRoundedRectanglebyBoxonpage 222. 3. Clicktosetthestartpoint. 4. Clicktodefinetheroundedrectanglerotationangleandwidth. 5. Clicktodefinetheroundedrectangleheight.
1st click

3rd click 2nd click

Creating Extruded Rounded Rectangles


Aplanarroundedrectanglethathasbeencreatedina3Dviewcanbeextrudedimmediatelyaftercreation. Toextrudeacreatedroundedrectangle: 1. EnablethePush/PulltogglemodeintheToolbarfortheRoundedRectangletool. 2. Createaroundedrectangleusinganyofthemodesdescribedintheprevioussections. 3. Withtherectanglestillselected,click,movethecursor,andthenclicktocreatetheextrude.
1st click 2nd click

AplanarrectanglecanbeextrudedatanytimewiththePush/Pulltool.SeeDirectModelingonpage 434. TheextrudeheightcanbechangedwiththeReshapetool(seeReshapingExtrudedObjectsandSolid Primitivesonpage 310),ormodifiedintheObjectInfopalette.

Creating Circles
TheCircletoolhassixmodesandthePush/Pulltogglemode.

224

| Chapter 6: Creating Objects


Circle by Diameter Circle by Radius Circle by Three Points Circle by Point and Center Circle by Three Lines Circle by Tangent and Center Push/Pull

Mode
CirclebyRadius CirclebyDiameter CirclebyThreePoints CirclefromThreeLines CirclebyPointandCenter CirclebyTangentandCenter Push/Pull(3Dviewsonly)

Description
Definesthecirclebyitsradius Definesthecirclebyitsdiameter Definesthecirclebyitscircumference Definesthecirclebymakingittangenttotwoorthreeselectedlines Definesthecirclebyapointonitscircumferenceandthenitscenter Definesthecirclebydefiningatangenttothecircleandthenitscenter Instantlyextrudesthecircleaftercreation;availablein3Dviews

TocreateaNURBScurve,drawacircleandthenselectModify>Convert>ConverttoNURBS.

Circle by Radius
Tocreateacirclebyradius: 1. SelecttheCircletoolfromtheBasicpalette,andselectCirclebyRadiusmode. 2. Clicktosetthecenterofthecircle. 3. Movethemousetothedesiredradiusandclicktosettheradiusofthecircle.
2nd click 1st click

Circle by Diameter
Tocreateacirclebydiameter: 1. ClicktheCircletoolfromtheBasicpalette,andselecttheCirclebyDiametermode. 2. Clicktosetthefirstpointonthecirclediameter. 3. Movethemousetothedesireddiameterandclicktosetthediameterofthecircle.

Creating Circles |

225

2nd click

1st click

Circle by Three Points


Tocreateacirclebythreepoints: 1. ClicktheCircletoolfromtheBasicpalette,andselecttheCirclebyThreePointsmode. 2. Clicktosetthefirstpointonthecirclediameter. 3. Movethemouseandclicktosetthesecondpointonthecircleandclickagaintosetthethirdpointonthecircle.
3rd click 2nd click

1st click

Circle from Three Lines


Tocreateacircletangenttothreelines: 1. ClicktheCircletoolfromtheBasicpalette,andselecttheCirclefromThreeLinesmode. 2. Clicktoselectthethreelinesorlinearsegmentstowhichthecirclewillbetangent.Eachlineishighlightedasitis selected.Thelines(ortheirextensions)mustintersectinatleasttwoplaces. 3. Whenthethirdlineisselected,apreviewofatangentcircledisplayswherethecursoriscurrentlylocated.You cancreatecirclestangenttotwoorthreelines.Inplaceswhereonlytwolinesintersect,thesizeofthecircleis controlledbythecursorlocation.Movethecursoruntilthedesiredtangentcircledisplays,andthenclicktoset thecircle.

226

| Chapter 6: Creating Objects


1st click

2nd click

3rd click A preview of the circle tangent to the selected lines (or their extensions) displays beneath the hand cursor

Move the cursor to preview other tangent circles

Click to place the tangent circle

Circle by Point and Center


Tocreateacirclebypointandcenter: 1. ClicktheCircletoolfromtheBasicpalette,andselecttheCirclebyPointandCentermode. 2. Clicktosetthefirstpointonthecircumferenceofthecircle. 3. Movethemousetothecenterofthecircleandclicktosettheradiusofthecircle.

1st click

2nd click

Circle by Tangent and Center


Tocreateacirclebytangentandcenter: 1. ClicktheCircletoolfromtheBasicpalette,andselecttheCirclebyTangentandCentermode. 2. Clicktosetthefirstpointonthelinetangenttothecircle. 3. Clicktosetthesecondpointonthelinetangenttothecircle,definingthetangentline. 4. Movethemousetodefinetheradiusperpendiculartothetangent.Clicktosettheradiusofthecircle.Itisnot necessarytoclickonthecenterpoint;clickanywherealonganaxisparalleltothetangent.Thisallowsyoutoset theradiusbasedonothergeometry,ifdesired.

Creating Ovals |
3rd click: defines the radius perpendicular to the tangent 1st click

227

2nd click

Creating Extruded Circles


Aplanarcirclethathasbeencreatedina3Dviewcanbeextrudedimmediatelyaftercreation,creatingacylinder. Toextrudeacreatedcircle: 1. EnablethePush/PulltogglemodeintheToolbarfortheCircletool. 2. CreateacircleusinganyofthemodesintheToolbar. 3. Withthecirclestillselected,click,movethecursor,andthenclicktocreatetheextrude.
1st click 2nd click

AcirclecanbeextrudedatanytimewiththePush/Pulltool.SeeDirectModelingonpage 434. CylinderheightandradiuscanbechangedwiththeReshapetool(seeReshapingExtrudedObjectsandSolid Primitivesonpage 310),theradiuscanbemodifiedintheObjectInfopalette,andtheresolutioncanbeadjusted throughthe3DConversionRessetting(seeSettingVectorworksPreferencesonpage 17).

Creating Ovals
TheOvaltoolhastwomodesandthePush/Pulltogglemode.
Oval by Width and Height

Oval by Box

Push/Pull

Mode
OvalbyBox OvalbyWidthandHeight Push/Pull(3Dviewsonly)

Description
Definesthedimensionsoftheboxcontainingtheoval Definestheheightandwidthlengthstocreatetheoval Instantlyextrudestheovalaftercreation;availablein3Dviews

228

| Chapter 6: Creating Objects

Oval by Box
Tocreateanovalbybox: 1. ClicktheOvaltoolfromtheBasicpaletteandselectOvalbyBoxmode. 2. Clicktosetthefirstpointoftheboxcontainingtheovalandthenclickagaintoset. Tocreateatruecircle,presstheShiftkeywhilecreatingtheoval.
2nd click

1st click

Oval by Width and Height


Tocreateanovalbywidthandheight: 1. ClicktheOvaltoolfromtheBasicpaletteandselectOvalbyWidthandHeightmode. 2. Clicktosetthefirstpointoftheovalheight,andthenmovethemousetodefinetheheight. 3. Movethemouse,andthenclicktodefinetheovalwidth.
2nd click 3rd click

1st click

Creating Extruded Ovals


Aplanarovalthathasbeencreatedina3Dviewcanbeextrudedimmediatelyaftercreation. Toextrudeacreatedoval: 1. EnablethePush/PulltogglemodeintheToolbarfortheOvaltool. 2. CreateanovalusinganyofthemodesintheToolbar. 3. Withtheovalstillselected,click,movethecursor,andthenclicktocreatetheextrude.
1st click 2nd click

Creating Arcs |
AnovalcanbeextrudedatanytimewiththePush/Pulltool.SeeDirectModelingonpage 434. TheextrudeheightcanbechangedwiththeReshapetool(seeReshapingExtrudedObjectsandSolid Primitivesonpage 310),ormodifiedintheObjectInfopalette.

229

Creating Arcs
TheArctool,whichcreatescirculararcsofanyangle,hassevenmodes.Createanarcbyradius,threepoints,tangent, twopointsandcenter,twopointsandradius,twoendpointsandanotherpointonthearc,orbyarclengthand optionally,chordlength.ThePush/Pulltogglemodeisavailablein3Dviewsforinstantlyextrudingthearcafter creation.
Arc by 2 Points and Center Arc by 3 Points Arc by 2 Points and a Point on Arc

Arc by Radius Arc by 2 Points and a Specified Radius

Push/Pull (3D views only) Arc by Arc Length and Chord Length Arc Tangent to a Line

EithermovethemousetodrawthearcorusetheDatabartoenteranangle.DegreesstartonthepositiveXaxis(the Eastdirection),andincreasegoingcounterclockwise.(Eastis0degrees;Northis90degrees;andWestis180 degrees.)Todrawaquartercirclewallbeginningat0degreesandendingatthe6oclockposition,enter90(minus90) degrees.Enter270todrawanarcthreequartersofacirclearound. TocreateaNURBScurve,drawanarcandthenselectModify>Convert>ConverttoNURBS. Toeditanarc,clickthemiddlehandlewiththeSelectiontoolanddragtochangethearcradius.PresstheOptionkey (Macintosh)orAltkey(Windows)tochangethearcssize.

Arc by Radius
Tocreateanarcbyradius: 1. ClicktheArctoolfromtheBasicpalette,andselectArcbyRadiusmode. 2. Clicktosetthecenterofthearc. 3. Clickthestartpointofthearc.Movethemouseuntilthedesiredarcorientationandsizeispreviewed. 4. Clicktosettheendpointofthearc.
1st click 3rd click

2nd click

230

| Chapter 6: Creating Objects

Arc by 3 Points
Tocreateanarcbythreepoints: 1. ClicktheArctoolfromtheBasicpalette,andselectArcby3Pointsmode. 2. Clicktosetthestartpointofthearc. 3. Clicktosetthepointforthearctopassthrough.Movethemouseuntilthedesiredarcorientationandsizeis previewed. 4. Clicktosettheendpointofthearc.
1st click

2nd click

3rd click

Arc Tangent to a Line


Tocreateanarcbytangent: 1. ClicktheArctoolfromtheBasicpalette,andselectArcTangenttoaLinemode. 2. Clicktosetthestartpointofthearc. 3. Clicktodefinethelinetowhichthearcwillbetangent.Movethemouseuntilthedesiredarcorientationandsize ispreviewed. 4. Clicktosettheendpointofthearc.
3rd click

2nd click

1st click

Existing line to which arc will be tangent

Usetangentsnappingtoassistwithdrawingthearctangenttogeometry;seeSnaptoTangent(2DOnly)on page 146.

Tangent

Creating Arcs |

231

Arc by 2 Points and Center


Tocreateanarcby2pointsandcenter: 1. ClicktheArctoolfromtheBasicpalette,andselectArcby2PointsandCentermode. 2. Clicktosetthestartpointofthearc. 3. Clicktosettheendpointofthearc. Asthecursormoves,thecenterofthearcismanipulated. 4. Clickoutsidethearctosetthecenter.
1st click

2nd click 3rd click Completed arc

Arc by 2 Points and a Specified Radius


Tocreateanarcby2pointsandaspecifiedradius: 1. ClicktheArctoolfromtheBasicpalette,andselectArcby2PointsandaSpecifiedRadiusmode. 2. Clicktosetthestartpointofthearc. 3. Clicktosettheendpointofthearc. TheArcRadiusdialogboxopens.

4. Enterthelengthoftheradius. 5. ClickOK. Thearciscreated.

232

| Chapter 6: Creating Objects

Arc by 2 Points and a Point on the Arc


Tocreateanarcbytwoendpointsandanotherpointonthearc: 1. ClicktheArctoolfromtheBasicpalette,andselectArcby2PointsandPointonArcmode. 2. Clicktosetthestartpointofthearc. 3. Clicktosettheendpointofthearc. 4. Movethemouseuntilthedesiredarcshapeandsizeispreviewed,andthenclicktosetthearc.Toconstrainthe angleofthelinebetweenthearcendpoints,presstheShiftkeywhendrawingthearc.
3rd click

1st click

2nd click

Without the Shift key, the angle of the line between the arc endpoints (1st and 2nd clicks) is unconstrained, and the chord defining the arc height is an unconstrained line drawn from the second endpoint

1st click

3rd click

2nd click When the Shift key is pressed, the angle of the line between the arc endpoints (1st and 2nd clicks) is constrained, and the chord defining the arc height is perpendicular to the center of that line

Arc by Arc Length and Chord Length


Tocreateanarcbyarclengthandchordlength: 1. ClicktheArctoolfromtheBasicpalette,andselectArcbyArcLengthandChordLengthmode. 2. Clicktosetthestartpointofthearc. 3. Clicktosettheendpointofthearc.

Creating Arcs |
TheArcLengthdialogboxopens.

233

Parameter
ArcLength SpecifyChordLength ChordLength

Description
Thedrawnarclengthisdisplayed,andcanbechanged;thisallowsyoutocreate severalarcswiththesamechordlengthandvaryingarclengths Selecttomanuallyspecifythechordlength,changingthearcendpoint Thechordlengthisthedistancebetweenthetwoendpointsofthearc;thearclength mustbegreaterthanthechordlength

4. ClickOKtocreatethearc.

1st click

2nd click

Completed arc

Creating Extruded Arcs


Aplanararcthathasbeencreatedina3Dviewcanbeextrudedimmediatelyaftercreation. Toextrudeacreatedarc: 1. EnablethePush/PulltogglemodeintheToolbarfortheArcorQuarterArctool. 2. CreateanarcusinganyofthemodesintheToolbar. 3. Withthearcstillselected,click,movethecursor,andthenclicktocreatetheextrude.
1st click 2nd click

AnarccanbeextrudedatanytimewiththePush/Pulltool.SeeDirectModelingonpage 434.

234

| Chapter 6: Creating Objects


TheextrudeheightandradiuscanbechangedwiththeReshapetool(seeReshapingExtrudedObjectsand SolidPrimitivesonpage 310),theradiuscanbemodifiedintheObjectInfopalette,andtheresolutioncanbe adjustedthroughthe3DConversionRessetting(seeSettingVectorworksPreferencesonpage 17).

Creating Quarter Arcs


TheQuarterArctoolcreatescircular90arcsor90ellipticalarcpolylineobjects.ThePush/Pulltogglemodeis availablein3Dviewsforinstantlyextrudingthearcaftercreation. QuarterarcsarelistedaspolylinesintheObjectInfopalette. Tocreatequarterarcs: 1. ClicktheQuarterArctoolfromtheBasicpalette. 2. Clickatthestartpointforthearc. 3. Clickattheendpointforthearc. TheratioofthearcsheighttoitswidthdisplaysintheDatabar(aquarterarcforacirclehasaratioof1.000).Use theDatabartoverifyormodifyanarcsangle,length,andlocationinadrawing.
2nd click 1st click

Creating Polylines
Polyline Tool
ThePolylinetoolcreatesopenandclosedpolylinesobjectsmadeofaseriesofconnectedarcs,curves,orlines. Whiledrawingapolyline,setthetypeofcontrolpointforeachsegmenteitherbyclickingonthedesiredmodewhile drawingorbyusingthekeyboardshortcuts(seeCreatingorEditingaWorkspaceonpage 879)toselectthedesired mode.Apolylinecanhavedifferentcombinationsofvertices.Useapolylinetocreateplanarshapeswithinternal holes. ThecornersofthepolylinecanbesmoothedwiththePolySmoothingcommands(seeSmoothingObjectson page 279).MarkerscanbeaddedwiththeAttributespalette(seeMarkerAttributesonpage 538).ThePush/Pull togglemodeisavailablein3Dviewsforinstantlyextrudingthepolylineaftercreation.
Bzier Vertex Tangent Arc Arc Vertex Fillet

Corner Vertex Cubic Vertex Point on Arc Push/Pull

Polyline Preferences

Mode
CornerVertex

Description
Createspolylinesegmentswithstraightlinesandangledverticesatthecontrolpoints.The typeofvertexcreatedisacornervertex.

Creating Polylines | Mode


BzierVertex CubicVertex TangentArc

235

Description
Createspolylinesegmentswithcurvespulledtoward,butnottouchingthecontrolpoints. ThetypeofvertexcreatedisaBziervertex. Createspolylinesegmentswithcurvesthatpassthroughthecontrolpoints.Thetypeof vertexcreatedisacubicvertex. Createspolylinearcsegmentsthataretangenttotheprevioussegment(usetangent snappingtoassistwithdrawingthetangentpolyline;seeSnaptoTangent(2DOnly)on page 146).Thetypeofvertexcreatedisaradiusvertex. Createspolylinearcsegmentsthataredrawnbyclickingthreepoints:thestartpoint,apoint thearcpassesthrough,andtheendpoint;usefulfortracingexistingarcs.Thetypeofvertex createdisaradiusvertex. Createspolylinesegmentswithcurvesthatlooklikeafilletplacedatthecontrolpoints;click PolylinePreferencestosettheradiusofthefillet.Thetypeofvertexcreatedisanarcvertex. Instantlyextrudesthepolylineaftercreation;availablein3Dviews

PointonArc

ArcVertexFillet Push/Pull(3Dviews only)

Tocreateapolyline: 1. ClickthePolylinetoolfromtheBasicpalette. 2. Clicktosetthepolylinesstartpoint.InPointonArcmode,clickagaintosetapointthatthearcwillpass through. 3. Clicktosettheendofthesegmentandthebeginningofthenext.

While drawing a polyline, press the U key to switch the mode used to create the polyline

InCornerVertexmode,pressandholdinsteadofclickingtocreateaBziervertexinsteadofaCornervertex. 4. Continuedrawingsegmentsinthismanneruntilthepolylineiscomplete. 5. Clickthemouseatthestartpointtocompleteaclosedpolylineobject(endpointofthelastsegmentisattheexact startpointofthefirstsegment),ordoubleclickthemousetocompleteanopenpolylineobject(endpointofthe lastsegmentisatadifferentlocationthanthestartpointofthefirstsegment). Theresultingpolylineobject,whetheropenorclosed,isafilledobject.Ifdesired,removethefillthroughthe Attributespalettetoseeobjectsbehindthepolyline.

236

| Chapter 6: Creating Objects

Closed polyline created using Corner Vertex and Tangent Arc modes

Tracing of existing arcs created using Point on Arc mode

Editpolylines,changingtheirshapeortheirvertices,withtheReshapetoolortheObjectInfopalette.Thecornersof thepolylinecanbesmoothedwiththePolySmoothingcommands(seeSmoothingObjectsonpage 279).Markers canbeaddedwiththeAttributespalette(seeMarkerAttributesonpage 538). Aclosedpolyline,whenextrudedwiththeModel>Extrudecommand,acceptsafillortextureanddisplaysasa solidobject.Anopenpolyline,whenextruded,doesnotrenderasasolid.Tocloseapolylinebeforeextrudingit, selectthepolyline.IntheObjectInfopalette,selecttheClosedoptiontoclosethepolyline.

Creating Extruded Polylines


Aplanarpolylinethathasbeencreatedina3Dviewcanbeextrudedimmediatelyaftercreation. Toextrudeacreatedpolyline: 1. EnablethePush/PulltogglemodeintheToolbarforthePolylinetool. 2. CreateapolylineusinganyofthemodesintheToolbar. 3. Withthepolylinestillselected,click,movethecursor,andthenclicktocreatetheextrude.
1st click 2nd click

ApolylinecanbeextrudedatanytimewiththePush/Pulltool.SeeDirectModelingonpage 434. TheextrudeheightcanbechangedwiththeReshapetool(seeReshapingExtrudedObjectsandSolid Primitivesonpage 310),ormodifiedintheObjectInfopalette.

Drawing Freehand Polylines


UsetheFreehandtooltodrawafreehandpolylineinamannersimilartodrawingwithapen.Oncetheobjectis drawn,itcanbereshaped(seeReshapingObjectswiththeFreehandToolonpage 237).

Creating Polylines |
Freehand Edit Freehand Preferences

237

Mode
FreehandEdit FreehandPreferences

Description
Reshapesthesingularlyselectedpolyline,polygon,rectangle,circle,orarc;formore information,seeReshapingObjectswiththeFreehandToolonpage 237 Setsthesmoothinglevelwhendrawingacurve.Increasingthedegreeofsmoothing decreasesthevertices,andthereforeitiseasiertoreshapethecurve.Decreasingthe degreeofsmoothingincreasestheverticeswhichproducesamoreaccurate representationofthecurve.SelectOfftodrawthecurvewithoutusingthesmoothing feature.

Todrawafreehandpolyline: 1. ClicktheFreehandtoolfromtheBasicpalette. 2. ClicktheFreehandPreferencesmodebutton. TheFreehandToolPreferencesdialogboxopens.

3. Selectthesmoothinglevelwhendrawingacurve. 4. ClickOK. 5. Clickinthedrawingtosetthepolylinestartpoint.Movethemousetocreatethedesiredfreehandpolyline shape. 6. Clickagainwhentheobjectiscomplete. Thenumberandplacementofpolylineverticesisdeterminedbytheobjectshapeandspecifieddegreeofcurve smoothing.Forexample,anobjectconsistingofaseriesofarcsandcurvescreatedwithalowdegreeofcurve smoothingcontainsmoreverticesthanaseriesoflinescreatedwithahighdegreeofcurvesmoothing. MarkerscanbeaddedwiththeAttributespalette(seeMarkerAttributesonpage 538). Bydefault,theFreehandtoolappliesafillofNone.Changethefilltypebeforesweepingafreehandpolyline,if renderingofthesweepvolumeisdesired.

Reshaping Objects with the Freehand Tool


Apolyline,polygon,rectangle,circle,orarccanbereshapedusingtheFreehandEditmodeoftheFreehandtool.The directionofthecurvedrawndeterminesthenewobjectshape.Aneditedobjectisconvertedtoapolylineafterediting iscomplete.

238

| Chapter 6: Creating Objects


ToreshapeobjectsusingtheFreehandtool:

1. Selectavalidobject. 2. ClicktheFreehandtoolfromtheBasicpalette. 3. ClickFreehandEditmodefromtheToolbar. 4. Clicktodrawthenewcurve,editingthevalidobjectusingthefollowingcurvedirectionguidelines:

Action
Changeexistingcurve

Guidelines
New Curve Direction Appended Curve

Original Curve Direction

Discarded Curve Retained Curve

New Curve

Connecttwopointswith newcurve

New Curve Direction

Appended Curve

Original Curve Direction

Discarded Curve Retained Curve

New Curve

Createclosurewithnew curve

New Curve Direction

Appended Curve

Original Curve Direction

Discarded Curve New Curve Retained Curve

Creating Polylines | Action


Addanewcurvetoan existingcurve

239

Guidelines
New Curve Appended Curve

Original Curve

New Curve Retained Curve Appended Curve

Extendexistingcurve

New Curve Direction

Original Curve Direction

Discarded Curve

New Curve

Retained Curve

Retainpartialcurve

New Curve Direction

Appended Curve

Original Curve Direction

Discarded Curve

New Curve

Retained Curve

5. Clickagaintofinishdrawingthefreehandpolylineedit.Thevalidobjectiseditedandconvertedtoapolyline.

Creating Spirals
TheSpiraltooldrawsanArchimedesspiral.Thenumberofturns,distanceperturn,startradiusandthicknesscanbe specified,aswellasthenumberofpointsusedtodefinethecurve.UsethealignmentmodesontheToolbarto temporarilyoverridetheinsertionpoint.ThesemodeschangethealignmentoftheinsertionpointalongtheXaxisof theboundingboxsurroundingthespiral.
Wall Insertion Mode Standard Insertion Offset Insertion Spiral Preferences Spiral Alignment Modes

240

| Chapter 6: Creating Objects


Description
Movestheinsertionpointtotheleftedgeofthespiralssboundingbox,alongthe originalXaxis Movestheinsertionpointtothecenterofthespiralsboundingbox,alongtheoriginal Xaxis Movestheinsertionpointtotherightedgeofthespiralsboundingbox,alongthe originalXaxis Leavestheinsertionpointattheactualororiginalposition

Spiral Alignment Mode


AlignObjectLeft AlignObjectCenter AlignObjectRight AlignObjectOrigin

ForinformationonusingtheOffsetInsertionandWallInsertionmodes,seeOffsetSymbolInsertionModeon page 181andWallInsertionModeonpage 183. Todrawaspiral: 1. ClicktheSpiraltoolfromtheBasicpalette. 2. SelecttheinsertiontypeandalignmentfromtheToolbar. 3. Clicktodefinethecenterofthespiral. Ifthisisthefirsttimeaspiralisplacedinthissession,theSpiralPropertiesdialogboxopens.Theseparameters applytosubsequentlycreatedspirals;theycanbechangedlaterbyaccessingthemfromtheObjectInfopalette. 4. Specifythespiralproperties.
Distance per turn Thickness

Start radius

Parameter
DistanceperTurn NumberofTurns StartRadius Increment(deg)

Description
Enterthedistancebetweentheouteredgesofeachturninthespiral Specifythenumberofturnswhichdeterminethetotalsweepangleofthespiral;oneturn equals360degrees Enterthedistancefromthecentertothebeginningofthespiral Specifythenumberofpointsusedtodefinethecurve;thehighertheincrement,the fewerthenumberofpoints(forexample,anincrementoffivedegreesmeans360/5=72 pointsperturn) Specifythethicknessvalueoftheareabetweentheouterandinneredgeoftheturn

Thickness

Creating Triangles |
5. ClickOK. Aspiralwiththespecifiedparametersisplacedonthedrawing. Tocreatea3Dspiral,seeCreatingHelixSpiralsonpage 432.

241

Creating Triangles
TheTriangletoolhasthreemodes.Thestepsfordrawingthetrianglearethesameforeachmode;theonlydifference isthefieldsthatdisplayinthedialogboxthatopens.
Triangle by Two Sides and Included Angle

Triangle by Three Sides

Triangle by Two Angles and Common Side

Tocreateatriangle: 1. ClicktheTriangletoolfromtheBasicpaletteandselectthedesiredmode. 2. Clicktosetthefirstandsecondpointsofthefirstside. TheTriangleSettingsdialogboxopens;thefieldsavailabledependonthemodethatwasselected.

Triangle by Three Sides mode

Triangle by Two Sides and Included Angle mode

Triangle by Two Angles and Common Side mode

3. Thelengthofthefirstsideofthetriangledisplays.Entertheremainingfieldsasrequiredfortheselectedmode andclickOK.Thefollowingrestrictionsapply.

Mode
TrianglebyThreeSides TrianglebyTwoSidesand IncludedAngle

Restriction
Thesumofthelengthsofanytwosidesofthetrianglemustbegreaterthanthe remainingside Theanglemustbelessthan180degrees

242
Mode

| Chapter 6: Creating Objects


Restriction
Thesumofthetwoanglesmustbelessthan180degrees

TrianglebyTwoAngles andCommonSide

4. Twopossibletrianglesdisplay;clickthetriangletokeep.
2nd click

1st click Click two points to define the first side of the triangle After you enter the required side lengths and angles, two possible triangles display; click the triangle to keep

Creating 2D Polygons
Thereareseveralwaystocreate2Dpolygons.Singlelinepolygons,doublelinepolygons,andregularpolygonscan becreated;apolygonalwayshassquareverticesandiscomposedofaseriesofstraightlinesegments.Apolygonthat representsacurvewillrequiremorevertices(andmorecomplexity)thanapolyline. Polygonscanbecreatedautomaticallyfromexistinggeometry,whichisespeciallyusefulforillustratingtheelements ofahiddenlinerenderedviewport.

2D Polygon Tool
The2DPolygontoolcreatesopenandclosedpolygonswithsinglelines.Polygonscanhaveasfewasthreeverticesor asmanyas32,767vertices.The2DPolygontoolcanalsoautomaticallycreatepolygonsbyfillingoroutliningexisting geometry,toeasilyannotateadrawinggraphicallybyoutlining,filling,ortexturing(withanimageorgradientfill)the newpolygons. Threemodesareavailable.ThePush/Pulltogglemodeisavailablein3Dviewsforinstantlyextrudingthepolygon aftercreation.
Polygon from Inner Boundary Polygon from Outer Boundary

Polygon from Vertices

Push/Pull

Mode
PolygonfromVertices PolygonfromInner Boundary PolygonfromOuter Boundary

Description
Createsapolygonbyclickingtoseteachvertex Createsapolygonoutofexistinggeometrybyclickingwithintheboundaryofanobject Createsapolygonoutoftheouterboundaryofexistinggeometrybydefininggeometry withalassomarquee

Creating 2D Polygons | Mode


Push/Pull(3Dviews only)

243

Description
Instantlyextrudesthepolylineaftercreation;availablein3Dviews

Creating Single-line 2D Polygons


Tocreateasingleline2Dpolygon: 1. Clickthe2DPolygontoolfromtheBasicpalette,andselectPolygonfromVerticesfromtheToolbar. 2. Clicktosetthepolylinesstartpoint(firstvertex). 3. Clickateachvertex. 4. Doubleclickatthefinalvertextoendanopenpolygon,orclickatthestartingvertex(apointcuedisplays)toend aclosedpolygon(thefirstandlastvertexareautomaticallyjoined).
3rd 2nd 5th click 4th

1st click

6th click

Creating a Polygon from an Inner Boundary


The2DPolygontoolcancreateanewpolygonbasedontheinnerboundaryofexistinggeometry.Existinggeometry referstovisibleobjectsandsolidsintheactivelayer(withintheactiveworkingplane)ortheviewportcacheofa hiddenlinerenderedviewportinEditAnnotationmode.Thestackingorderofthe2Dobjectsdoesnotapply;objects thatareoverlappedbyotherobjectscanstillhavetheirboundariesconsidered.Iftheobjectisapolyline(openor closed),apolygonwithholes,oriscurved,apolylineiscreatedinsteadofapolygon. Polygonscannotbecreatedfromsymbols.Convertthesymboltoagroup,andthenungroup. Tocreatea2Dpolygonfromtheinnerboundaryofexistinggeometry: 1. Clickthe2DPolygontoolfromtheBasicpalette,andselectPolygonfromInnerBoundaryfromtheToolbar. Ifdesired,settheattributesintheAttributespalette(fillstyle,penstyle,lineandlineendpointstyle).The attributesofthepolygoncanalsobespecifiedaftercreation. 2. Clickonanobjectintheactiveplanetocreateapolygonbasedontheinnerboundaryofthe2Dobjectsand/or solidsfacesintheactiveplane.Alternatively,presstheOptionkey(Macintosh)ortheAltkey(Windows)while clickingtocreateapolygonbasedonthe2Dobjectorsolidsfaceandanyotheradditional,selected,coplanar objects.

244

| Chapter 6: Creating Objects

First polygon selected, and Alt/Option key pressed while clicking in second area

WhencreatingapolygonfromaselectionwiththeOption/Altkeypressed,theattributesofthebottomselectedobject areappliedtothenewpolygon,andtheoriginalselectedobjectsarecombinedtoformthenewpolygon.Thisis similartotheAddSurfacecommanddescribedinAddSurfaceonpage 340. Tospeedupthepolygonfillforcompleximages,zoominontheareafirst. AnotherwaytocreateplanarobjectsfromfacesiswiththeExtractSurfacemodeoftheExtracttool.SeeExtracting Geometryonpage 420.

Creating a Polygon from an Outer Boundary


The2DPolygontoolcancreateapolygonbasedontheouterboundaryofexistinggeometry.Existinggeometryrefers tovisibleobjectsintheactivelayer(withintheactiveworkingplane)ortheviewportcacheofahiddenlinerendered viewportinEditAnnotationmode.Thestackingorderof2Dobjectsdoesnotapply;objectsthatareoverlappedby otherobjectscanstillhavetheirboundariesconsidered.Iftheobjectisapolyline(openorclosed),apolygonwith holes,oriscurved,apolylineiscreatedinsteadofapolygon. Polygonscannotbecreatedfromsymbols.Convertthesymboltoagroup,andthenungroup. Tocreatea2Dpolygonfromtheouterboundaryofexistinggeometry: 1. Clickthe2DPolygontoolfromtheBasicpalette,andselectPolygonfromOuterBoundaryfromtheToolbar. Ifdesired,settheattributesintheAttributespalette(fillstyle,penstyle,lineandlineendpointstyle).The attributesofthepolygoncanalsobespecifiedaftercreation. 2. Clickinthedrawinganddragtocreatethelassomarquee.Apolygoniscreatedbasedontheouterboundaryof any2Dobjectsontheactiveplanecompletelyenclosedwithinthemarquee.Alternatively,presstheOptionkey (Macintosh)orAltkey(Windows)whilecreatingthemarquee,andthepolygonisbasedontheouterboundary ofanycoplanar2Dobjectsthatareencounteredbythemarquee.

Creating 2D Polygons |

245

Creating Boundary Polygons in a Hidden Line Rendered Viewport


Thecreationofpolygonsbasedontheinnerandouterboundariesofexistinggeometryisveryusefulforgraphically annotatingtheelementsofasheetlayerviewportthatisrenderedwithhiddenlinerendering.(Sheetlayerviewports aredescribedinPresentingDrawingswithSheetLayerViewportsonpage 762.) Tocreatea2Dpolygonfromtheinner/outerboundaryofexistinggeometryinaviewport: 1. CreateasheetlayerviewportfromadesignlayerasdescribedinCreatingaSheetLayerViewportfroma DesignLayeronpage 762. 2. FortheRenderingmodeoftheviewport,selectHiddenLine.UpdatetheviewportrenderingbyclickingUpdate fromtheObjectInfopalette. 3. EdittheviewportinannotationmodebyselectingModify>EditViewport. TheEditViewportdialogboxopens.SelectAnnotationsandDisplayViewportCache.

4. ClickOKtoenterviewportannotationmode. 5. Clickthe2DPolygontoolfromtheBasicpalette,andselectPolygonfromInnerBoundaryorPolygonfrom OuterBoundaryfromtheToolbar.

246

| Chapter 6: Creating Objects


Ifdesired,settheattributesintheAttributespalettetothedesiredfillsettings(FillStyle,PenStyle,LineandLine EndpointStyle).Theattributesofthepolygoncanalsobespecifiedaftercreation. Applyanimagefilltothepolygontosimulateatexture(seeUsingImageFillsonpage 557).

6. Becausetheviewportisrenderedwithhiddenlineandtheviewportcacheisusedforannotations,anyofthe objectsinthedrawingcanbeusedasthebasisfornewpolygons.IfinPolygonfromInnerBoundarymode,click thepaintbucketcursoronthedesireddrawingobjects.IfinPolygonfromOuterBoundarymode,createalasso marqueetoincludethedesiredobjects.A2Dpolygoniscreatedbasedontheinnerorouterboundaryofthe geometry.

The2DPolygontoolworkson2Dobjectsinthedesignlayer.Itdoesnotapplyto2Dobjectsorannotationsthat havebeenaddedtothesheetlayer. 7. ClickExitViewportAnnotationatthetoprightcornerofthedrawingwindowtoreturntothesheetlayer. Analertdialogboxmayaskifkeepingtheviewportcacheisnecessary.Theviewportcachecanberemoved,if desired,asitisnolongernecessaryforcreatingthepolygons.

Creating Extruded Polygons


Aplanarpolygonthathasbeencreatedina3Dviewcanbeextrudedimmediatelyaftercreation. Toextrudeacreatedpolygon: 1. EnablethePush/PulltogglemodeintheToolbarforthePolygonorRegularPolygontool. 2. CreateapolygonusinganyofthemodesintheToolbar. 3. Withthepolygonstillselected,click,movethecursor,andthenclicktocreatetheextrude.
1st click 2nd click

ApolygoncanbeextrudedatanytimewiththePush/Pulltool.SeeDirectModelingonpage 434. TheextrudeheightcanbechangedwiththeReshapetool(seeReshapingExtrudedObjectsandSolid Primitivesonpage 310),ormodifiedintheObjectInfopalette.

Creating 2D Polygons |

247

Double-Line Polygon Tool


UsetheDoubleLinePolygontooltocreateawidevarietyofopenorclosedpolygonsthathavetwoparallellines,a doublelinedpolygonwithawidth,ortwoparallellineswithapolygonfill.Doublelinepolygonscanhaveasmany as32,767vertices.
Top Control Line Bottom Control Line Double-Line Polygon Preferences

Center Control Line

Custom Control Line

Separation Preference

Mode
TopControlLine CenterControlLine BottomControlLine CustomControlLine

Description
Thecursorcreatestherightline Createslinesequidistantfromthecursor Thecursorcreatestheleftline Specifyanoffsetvalue

Tocreateadoublelinepolygon: 1. ClicktheDoubleLinePolygontoolfromtheBasicpalette. 2. Selecttheoffsetmethod. 3. EnterthedistancebetweenthedoublelinesintheSeparationfieldontheToolbar. 4. ClicktheDoubleLinePolygonPreferencesbuttontoenterothercriteria,asneeded.

Parameter
Separation ControlOffset

Description
Enterthedistancebetweenthedoublelines;sameastheSeparationfieldontheToolbar FortheCustomControlLinemode,enterthedistancefromthetop/rightlineofthecursor

248

| Chapter 6: Creating Objects


Description
Createsaseriesoflines Createsadoublelinepolygon Createsparallellineswithapolygonbetweenthem;thepolygonhasalineweightof0 Clicktodefinecomponentsbetweenthedoublelines(seeApplyingComponentsBetween DoubleLinesonpage 217)

Parameter
Options CreateLines CreatePolygons CreateLines andPolygons Components

5. ClickOK. 6. Clicktosetthepolygonsstartpoint(firstvertex). 7. Clickateachvertex. 8. Doubleclicktomarkthepolygonsendpoint(finalvertex).


1st click 3rd 4th

6th 5th 2nd

Regular (Equal-sided) Polygon


UsetheRegularPolygontooltocreatesinglelineclosedpolygonsinwhichallsidesofthepolygonarethesame length.ThePush/Pulltogglemodeisavailablein3Dviewsforinstantlyextrudingthepolygonaftercreation.
Circumscribed Polygon Inscribed Polygon Push/Pull

Edge-Drawn Polygon

Number of Sides Preference

Mode
InscribedPolygon CircumscribedPolygon EdgedrawnPolygon Push/Pull(3Dviews only)

Description
Createsapolygonbydrawingitsradius Createsapolygonwitharadiusequidistantfromthecenterofthepolygonandthe midpointofanyofitssides Createsapolygonbydrawingoneofitssides Afterthepolygoniscreated,clicktheselectedpolygonanddragtoextrudeit

Creating 3D Polygons |

249

PressandholdtheOption(Macintosh)orCtrl(Windows)keywhiledrawingtotogglebetweencircumscribedand inscribedmodes. Tocreatearegularpolygon: 1. ClicktheRegularPolygontoolfromtheBasicpalette. 2. Selectamodebuttontospecifythemethodforcreatingthepolygon:Inscribed,Circumscribed,orEdgeDrawn. 3. EntertheNumberofSidesforthepolygon(anumberfrom3to4000). 4. Clicktosetthestartofthepolygon. 5. Clicktosettheendpointofthepolygon.

1st click

2nd click

Creating 3D Polygons
The3DPolygontoolcreatespolygonsthathavealocationin3Dspace,butnoheight.Thepolygoncanbecreated throughany3Dpoint,notnecessarilyconstrainedtotheworkingplane. Tocreateaplanar3Dpolygon: 1. Clickthe3DPolygontoolfromthe3DModelingtoolset. 2. Clicktosetthepolygonsstartpoint(firstvertex). 3. Clickateachvertex. 4. Doubleclickatthefinalvertextoendanopenpolygon;clickatthestartingvertex(apointcuedisplays)toenda closedpolygon(thefirstandlastvertexareautomaticallyjoined).
2nd 3rd 4th

7th 1st click 8th click

6th

5th 9th click

Closing and Opening Polygons and Polylines


Whencreated,2Dand3Dpolygonandpolylineobjectscanbeeitheropenorclosed.Forpolylines,youcanalsouse theHideNextEdgebuttonontheObjectInfopalette,orusetheHideorShowEdgesmodeoftheReshapetoolto hidespecificedgesoftheobjectaftercreation,whichopensaclosedobject. UsetheClosedsettingontheObjectInfopalettetochangethecurrentstateoftheobject.

250

| Chapter 6: Creating Objects

Click here to close the open polyline object

TheClosedsettingisavailableforobjectscreatedwiththefollowingtools: Freehand Polyline 2DPolygon Triangle DoubleLinePolygon RegularPolygon 3DPolygon

Ifapolygonorpolylineisopen,selecttheClosedsettingtocloseit;anyedgesthatwerehiddenarealsoclosed.
Open edge

Hidden edge

When the Closed setting is selected, the open and hidden edges of the polygon are closed

Ifapolygonorpolylineisclosed,deselecttheClosedsettingtoopenit.Thelastsegmentoftheobjecttobedrawnis removed(forpolygons)orhidden(forpolylines).

Creating Spheres |

251

Forpolylines,thelastsegmentoftheobjectmustbebetweenverticescreatedwithCornerVertex,TangentArc,or PointonArcmodes;otherwise,thepolylinecannotbeopenedbydeselectingtheClosedsetting.Toopenasegment otherthanthelastsegment,usetheHideorShowEdgesmodeoftheReshapetool.

When the Closed setting is deselected, the last segment to be drawn is opened

To hide a different segment, use the Reshape tool in Hide or Show Edges mode

Creating Spheres
TheSpheretoolcreatesspheresusingoneofthethreemodes.
Sphere By Diameter

Sphere By Radius

Sphere By Center and Radius

Mode
SpherebyRadius SpherebyDiameter SpherebyCenterandRadius

Description
Definesthebaseofthespherebyradius Definesthebaseofthespherebydiameter Definesthebaseofthespherebycenter(accordingtotheheightabovetheworking plane)andradius

ThesphereradiuscanbechangedwiththeReshapetool(seeReshapingExtrudedObjectsandSolidPrimitiveson page 310),theradiuscanbemodifiedintheObjectInfopalette,andtheresolutioncanbeadjustedthroughthe3D ConversionRessetting(seeSettingVectorworksPreferencesonpage 17).

Sphere by Radius
Tocreateaspherebyradius: 1. ClicktheSpheretoolfromthe3DModelingtoolset,andselectSpherebyRadiusmode. 2. Clicktosetthecenterofspherebase. 3. Movethemousetothedesiredradiusandclicktosettheradiusofthespherebase.Theradiuscanalsobesetin theDatabar.

252

| Chapter 6: Creating Objects

Sphere by Diameter
Tocreateaspherebydiameter: 1. ClicktheSpheretoolfromthe3DModelingtoolset,andselectSpherebyDiametermode. 2. Clicktosetthefirstpointonthespherebasediameter. 3. Movethemousetothedesireddiameterandclicktosetthediameterofthespherebase.

Sphere by Center and Radius


Tocreateaspherebycenterandradius: 1. ClicktheSpheretoolfromthe3DModelingtoolset,andselectSpherebyCenterandRadiusmode. 2. Clicktosetthecenterofthespherebaseontheworkingplane. 3. Movethemouseverticallyandclicktosettheheightofthesphereabovetheworkingplane. 4. Movethemousetothedesiredradiusandclicktosettheradiusofthespherebase.Theradiuscanalsobesetin theDatabar. Thecenterandheight,relativetotheworkingplane,ofthesphereisautomaticallyestablishedifthefirstclickisona snappoint,forexamplea3Dlocusorvertexonanother3Dobject. Wheninanonisometricview,thesphereiscreatedcenteredontheworkingplane.

Creating Hemispheres
TheHemispheretoolcreateshemispheresusingoneofthreemodes.
Hemisphere by Diameter

Hemisphere by Radius

Hemisphere by Up Radius

Mode
HemispherebyRadius HemispherebyDiameter HemispherebyUpRadius

Description
Definesthebaseofthehemispherebyradius Definesthebaseofthehemispherebydiameter Definesthebaseofthehemispherebycenterandrotation

ThehemisphereradiuscanbechangedwiththeReshapetool(seeReshapingExtrudedObjectsandSolidPrimitives onpage 310),theradiuscanbemodifiedintheObjectInfopalette,andtheresolutioncanbeadjustedthroughthe3D ConversionRessetting(seeSettingVectorworksPreferencesonpage 17).

Creating Cones |

253

Hemisphere by Radius
Tocreateahemispherebyradius: 1. ClicktheHemispheretoolfromthe3DModelingtoolset,andselectHemispherebyRadiusmode. 2. Clicktosetthecenterofthehemispherebase. 3. Movethemousetothedesiredradiusandclicktosettheradiusofthehemispherebase.Theradiuscanalsobe setintheDatabar.

Hemisphere by Diameter
Tocreateahemispherebydiameter: 1. ClicktheHemispheretoolfromthe3DModelingtoolset,andselectHemispherebyDiametermode. 2. Clicktosetthefirstpointonthehemispherebasediameter. 3. Movethemousetothedesireddiameterandclicktosetthediameterofthehemispherebase.

Hemisphere by Up Radius
Tocreateahemispherebyupradius: 1. ClicktheHemispheretoolfromthe3DModelingtoolset,andselectHemispherebyUpRadiusmode. 2. Clicktosetthecenterofthehemispherebase. 3. Movethemouseandclicktosettherotationandtopofthehemisphere.

Creating Cones
TheConetoolcreatesconesusingoneoftwomodes.
Cone By Radius and Height Cone By Radius and Tip

Mode
ConebyRadiusandHeight ConebyRadiusandTip

Description
Definesthebaseoftheconebyradiusandtipoftheconebyheight Definesthebaseoftheconebyradiusand,ifdesired,snapsthetipoftheconetoa point

Wheninanonisometricview,theheightoftheconeissetintheSetExtrusionHeightdialogbox.Inanisometric view,theconeheightcanbesetbydraggingwiththemouseorenteringtheheightintheDatabar.Formore informationonthedifferentviews,seeUsingStandardViewsonpage 575. TheconeheightcanbechangedwiththeReshapetool(seeReshapingExtrudedObjectsandSolidPrimitiveson page 310),theradiuscanbemodifiedintheObjectInfopalette,andtheresolutioncanbeadjustedthroughthe3D ConversionRessetting(seeSettingVectorworksPreferencesonpage 17).

254

| Chapter 6: Creating Objects

Cone by Radius and Height


Tocreateaconeusingradiusandheight: 1. Ina3Disometricview,clicktheConetoolfromthe3DModelingtoolset,andselectConebyRadiusandHeight mode. 2. Clicktosetthecenteroftheconebase. 3. Movethemousetothedesiredradiusandclicktosettheradiusoftheconebase.Theradiuscanalsobesetinthe Databar. 4. Movethemouseverticallyandclicktosettheconeheight.
3rd click

1st click 2nd click

Cone by Radius and Tip


Tocreateaconeusingradiusandtip: 1. EnsurethatSnaptoObjectandSmartPointssnappingisenabled(seeSettingSnappingParameterson page 133). 2. Ina3Disometricview,clicktheConetoolfromthe3DModelingtoolsetandselectConebyRadiusandTip mode. 3. Clicktosetcenterofthecone. 4. Movethemousetothedesiredradiusandclicktosettheradiusoftheconebase.Theradiuscanalsobesetinthe Databar. 5. Usingsnapping,snapthetopoftheconetoasnappointonanother3Dobject.Apreviewobjectdisplays.Clickto createthecone.
3rd click 1st click 2nd click

Creating Loci |

255

Creating Loci
Alocusisareferencepointthatisusedtodrawandmeasureobjects.Locidonotprint. TurnonSnaptoObjectsfromtheSnappingpalettetosnaptoloci(seeObjectSnappingonpage 137).

2D Locus Tool
The2DLocustoolplacesa2Dlocusinadrawing.Becausetheyaremerelymovablereferencepoints,locicannotbe reshapedorresized. Toplacea2Dlocus: 1. Clickthe2DLocustoolfromtheBasicpalette. 2. Clicktoplacethelocus. 3. Clicktoplaceadditionallociifnecessary.

3D Locus Tool
The3DLocustoolplacesasnappable3Dlocusorreferencepointontothedrawing.Like2Dloci,theyarereference points.Theycanbemoved,buttheycannotbereshapedandtheydonotprint. Tomanuallyinserta3Dlocus: 1. Clickthe3DLocustoolfromthe3DModelingtoolset. 2. Clicktoplacethelocus. Thelocusisplacedontheworkingplaneunlessitissnappedtoanobject. 3. Clicktoplaceeachadditionallocus. Toinserta3Dlocusbydialogbox: 1. Doubleclickthe3DLocustoolfromthe3DModelingtoolset. TheCreateObjectdialogboxopens.

2. Selectthe3DlocusClassandLayer.EntertheX,Y,andZpositionwherethe3Dlocusistobelocated.

256

| Chapter 6: Creating Objects

3. ClickOK.

Editing Objects
TheObjectInfopalettenotonlyprovidesinformationaboutanobject,italsoallowstheobjecttobeedited.

Onceanobjectiscreated,itmayrequireediting,whichcouldinvolvechangingthesize,shape,ornumberofobjectsin adrawing;rotating,mirroring,orgroupingobjects;orconverting,moving,andremovingobjects.

Planarobjectscanbeeditedfroma3Dview.TheobjectsparameterscanbechangedfromtheObjectInfopalette,its attributescanbechangedfromtheAttributespalette,itcanbereshapedandverticescanbeadded,andsurface operations(suchastheAddSurfacecommand)canbeperformedwhileina3Dview.

Editing Object Information


TheObjectInfopaletteprovidesinformationabouttheselectedobject(s)inaVectorworksdrawing.Theinformation displayeddependsonthetypeofobjectsselected.Inaddition,thepalettecanbeusedtochangeobjectparameters.
Coordinates menu (Vectorworks Design Series required)

TheObjectInfopaletteorganizesdataintothreetabbedpanes:

Tab
Shape Data Render

Description
Displaysinformationaboutaselectedobjectsgeometry,class,layer,andlocation(seeShapeTab onpage 258) Listsanydatabaserecordsattachedtoaselectedobject(seeDataTabonpage 262) WhentheRenderworksproductisinstalled,thistabisaddedfortheassigningandmappingof texturesto3Dobjects(seeApplyingaTexturetoanObjectonpage 639).Ifsketchrenderingis activeinaVectorworksDesignSeriesproduct,theSketchparameterisavailableontheRendertab, eveniftheRenderworksproductisnotinstalled. Specifiesoptionsforthedisplayofcoordinatesinrotatedplanviews(VectorworksDesignSeries required).SeeRotatingthePlanonpage 686intheVectorworksDesignSeriesUsersGuide.

Coordinates menu

ObjectInfopalettedropdownlistitemscanbeselectedbyusingthemouseorbytypingthefirstletter(s)ofthe desireditemtohighlighttheclosestmatchinthelist(excludingclassandlayerlists). SettheObjectInfopaletteposition,activepaneuponopening,andDatapaneseparatorposition,asdescribedin ModifyingPalettePositionsandSettingsonpage 888.SavepalettepositionsandsettingsbyselectingWindow>

258

| Chapter 7: Editing Objects

Palettes>SavePalettePositions.Torevertthepalettepositionandsettingsbacktothesettingsestablishedwhenthe customworkspacewascreated(intheUserDataandPreferencesfolder),clickResetSavedSettingsfromtheSession tabofVectorworkspreferences(seeSessionPreferencesonpage 21).

Activate Object Info Palette Command


TheActivateObjectInfoPalettecommandallowsyoutoquicklyswitchthefocusfromthedrawingareatothefirst editablefieldontheactivepaneoftheObjectInfopalette.IftheObjectInfopaletteisnotopen,orisminimized (unpinned),theObjectInfopaletteisopened,andthenthefirsteditablefieldishighlighted. ToactivatetheObjectInfopalette,selectWindow>Palettes>ActivateObjectInfoPalette,or pressCtrl + (backquote)onWindowsorCmd + Option + (backquote)ontheMacintosh.

Copying and Pasting Object Info Palette Data


DatacontainedincertainObjectInfopalettefieldscanbecopiedandpastedintothedrawingorotherlocations,such asyourcomputerscalculator. TocopyandpasteObjectInfopalettedata: 1. Selecttheobjectwithdatatocopy. 2. SelectWindow>Palettes>ObjectInfo. TheObjectInfopaletteopens. 3. Clickthetabcontainingthedesiredinformation.Movethemouseoverthefieldcontainingthedataforcopying. ThecursorchangestoanIbarinafieldwhichpermitscopying. 4. Clickdragoverthedatatoselectit. 5. SelectEdit>Copy. 6. SelectEdit>Pastetopastethedataintothedesiredlocation.

Shape Tab
ObjectpropertiescanbedirectlyeditedthroughtheObjectInfopalettefromtheShapetab.Objectscanalsobeedited withthetoolsontheBasicpalettethroughoutthischapter. TheShapetabalwaysdisplaysclassandlayerinformation.Thedetailedobjectinformationthatisalsodisplayed dependsonthetypeofobjectselected,andcanbesimpleorveryextensivedependingontheobject.

Object Coordinates and Bounding Box Indicator


TheShapetabcandisplayaselectedobjectsplane,coordinate,andboundingboxinformation.Theinformation displayeddependsonthetypeofobject,theactiveplane,andwhetheritisinarotatedplanview(DesignSeries required)orpositionedrelativetoaworkingplane. For2Dobjects,theplanetowhichtheobjectbelongsisindicatedbythePlanelist,andcanbechangedbyselecting anotherplanefromthelist.Forexample,ascreenplaneobjectcanbesettoalayerplaneobjectbyselectingLayer. Whenaworkingplaneisactive,theobjectcanbemovedtoit.(Ifacombinationof2Dand3Dobjectsareselected,the Planelistselectionappliesonlytothe2Dobjects.) Symbolsdisplaythesymbolsnameandunits(whetherworldorpagebased).Symbolsandsolidscanbescaledfrom theObjectInfopalette(seeScalingSymbolsfromtheObjectInfoPaletteonpage 323andScalingSolids Asymmetricallyonpage 322.)

Editing Object Information |

259

TheBoxPositionindicatordisplaysforcertain2Dobjectssuchaslines,walls,rectangles,andovals.Itrepresentsthe boundingboxoftheobject,indicateswhichsideisthewidthandheightforobjectswithwidthandheight,andusesa handletoindicatethefixedpointaboutwhichtheobjectcanberesized.Thehandleisalsothelocationfromwhichthe objectcoordinatesaredetermined.Whenanobjectisrotated,theboxpositionindicatorrotatesalso,indicatingthe approximatepositionoftheobjectand,ifapplicable,thewidthandheightsides. Differentobjectcoordinatesdisplayforanobjectdependingonitsplane,position,andplanrotation. WhenaDesignSeriesproductisinstalled,thecoordinatesmenupreferencealsoaffectsthedisplayof coordinatesinrotatedplanview(seeRotatingthePlanonpage 686).

View
Top/Plan

Coordinate Display
Coordinatesarerelativetothescreenplane(XandY)

3Dviewwithworking planeactive

Coordinatesarerelativetothelayerplane(XandY)andtotheactiveworkingplane (X,Y).Theworkingplanecoordinatesdisplayinthesamecolorsetfortheworking planeitselfintheinteractivepreferences.

Rotatedplan(Design Seriesrequired)

Coordinatesarerelativetothelayerplane(XandY)andtotherotatedplan(ScreenX andScreenY).Therotatedplancoordinatesdisplayinblue,asdotherulers.

Some3Dobjects,suchas3Dpolygons,NURBScurves,meshes,3Dsymbols,spheres,cones,hemispheres,and3Dloci, candisplaycoordinatesrelativetothelayerplane(X,Y,Z)alsocalledtheusercoordinatesystemortheactive workingplane(X,Y,Z),whenaworkingplaneisselected.Clicktheplanesbuttontochangetherelativecoordinate display.


Coordinates relative to layer plane

Coordinates relative to active working plane

Somesymbolsarepagebasedatcreationoruponimport.ThesedonotdisplayaBoxPositionindicatorintheObject Infopalette.(Theobjectcanonlyberesizedsymmetrically.)Thecoordinatesarerelativetothescreenplane(XandY).

260

| Chapter 7: Editing Objects

Viewing and Editing Single and Multiple Objects


TheShapetaballowseithersingleormultipleobjectstobeedited. Toviewandeditobjectinformationforasingleobject: 1. SelectWindow>Palettes>ObjectInfo. TheObjectInfopaletteopens. 2. ClicktheShapetab. 3. Selectthedesiredobject. Editableinformationforthatobjectisdisplayed. 4. Changethedesiredinformation,usingthekeysasfollows:

Key
Enter Tab Shift+Enter

Function
Savetheentryandreturnthefocustothedrawingarea Savetheentryandmovethefocustothenexteditablefield Savetheentryandkeepthefocusinthesamefield,sothatyoucanenteradifferentvalueif necessary

Toviewandeditobjectinformationformultipleobjects: 1. SelectWindow>Palettes>ObjectInfo. TheObjectInfopaletteopens. 2. ClicktheShapetab. 3. Selectthedesiredobjects.


Number of objects selected Multiple Edit mode

Multiple objects selected

4. Toediteachobjectinaselectionseparately,clicktheMultipleEditmodebutton.ThisswitchestoIndividualEdit mode.OnceinIndividualEditmode,usetheNextarrowbuttontomoveforwardthroughtheselectedobjects andthePreviousarrowbuttontomovebackwardthroughtheselections.Eachobjecthighlightsbrieflyasitis selected.Tobesurewhichobjectiscurrentlyselected,clickthecentercircularbuttontohighlightitagain.If eitherarrowappearsdimmed,theendoftheselectedobjectsinthatorderhasbeenreached.

Editing Object Information |


Individual Edit mode Currently selected object type Previous object Highlights currently selected object Next object

261

Editing single object within multiple selection

Alternatively,selectmultipleobjectsofthesametype,andthenmodifythematonetimeinMultipleEditmode. Whenseveralobjectsofthesametypehavebeenselected,thepaletteoperatesinbatcheditingmode.Ifthe parametersettingsoftheobjectsaredifferent,thefielddisplaysasblank,oracheckboxdisplayswithan indeterminatestate.Anyparametereditsaffectalltheselectedobjectsinmultipleeditmode. Someobjectshavemoreeditablefieldsthanothers.IftheObjectInfopaletteisnotfullyextendedwhenanobjectof thistypeisselected,scrolloptionsareprovided.Toscrollupanddown,clickthescrollarrows,anyareaofthescroll bar,orclickdragthescrollbox(Windows)orscroller(Macintosh).


Macintosh Windows

Scroll box Scroller

Scroll bar Scroll bar Scroll arrow

Scroll arrow

Polyline Parameters
Forpolylinesandobjectsbasedonpolylines,functionalitysimilartotheReshapetoolisavailablefromtheObjectInfo paletteShapetab,wherevaluescanbeenteredtomovevertices(ortheentireobject)ratherthanmanipulating

262

| Chapter 7: Editing Objects

graphicallywiththetool.Similarly,clickthebuttonstoadd,delete,changethevertextype,orhidethenextedge;the selectedvertexisaffected.
Scrolls through the vertices, highlighting the selected one; press the center button to highlight the selected vertex Select whether to affect the entire object or the selected vertex only Displays the location of the selected vertex; edits the location of the entire object or selected vertex

Data Tab
TheDatatablistsallrecordsinthedrawing,alongwithcheckboxesshowingwhichrecordsareattached.TheObject Infopalettecanbeusedtomakechangestorecordsettingsforindividualobjects. Toviewandeditrecordinformation: 1. SelectWindow>Palettes>ObjectInfo. 2. ClicktheDatatab.

ODBC functionality (Design Series required)

3. Selectthedesiredobjectinthedrawingarea. Thefollowinginformationisdisplayed.

Parameter
Name RecordFormatDatabase Connection (VectorworksDesignSeries required,database connectionrequired)

Description
Displaysthename,ifany,giventoanobject IntheVectorworksDesignSeriesproducts,linksrecordformatstoanexternal databaseforautomated,twowaycommunication;seeDatabaseConnectivityon page 1009intheVectorworksDesignSeriesUsersGuide.

Moving Objects | Parameter


ObjectDatabaseConnection (VectorworksDesignSeries required,database connectionrequired) RecordFormats

263

Description
Linkstheobjectinstancetotheexternaldatabasestablerows

Displaysalltherecordsthatareactiveinthedrawing;ifanyoftheserecordsare attachedtotheselectedobject,theboxtotheleftoftherecordnamedisplaysanX. Ifmorethanoneobjectisselected,onlytherecordsattachedtoallobjectsdisplay anX. Providesalistofalltherecordfieldsifarecordisattachedtotheselectedobject;if anyfieldhasadefaultvalueassigned,itdisplaysafterthefieldname.Ifnoitemis currentlyselectedinthedrawing,thelabeldisplaysRecordFieldDefaults insteadofRecordFields. Editsthefieldvaluesfortheselectedrecord;allenteredvaluesoverrideany defaultvaluesfortheobject

RecordFields

RecordInfo

Resizethelistboxesbyselectinganddraggingtheresizebarsbetweenthem. SeeRecordFormatsonpage 191formoreinformationonattaching,editing,anddeletingrecordformats.

Moving Objects
Objectscanbemovedinseveralways. UsetheMovecommand(operatesinthescreenplane)orMove3Dcommandtomoveanobjectanexact distance. UsetheMovebyPointstooltomove,duplicate,anddistributeobjectsbyclicking. Usetheselectiontoolstoselectanddragobjectstoanewlocation. Nudgeselectedobjectsonepixelatatime,orbythesnapgrid(seeSettingVectorworksPreferencesonpage 17 andNudgingSymbolsinWallsonpage 513).

Moving Objects in the Screen Plane


Forinformationaboutmovingsymbolsinwalls,seeMovingSymbolsinWallswiththeMoveCommandon page 513. TomoveanobjectinscreenplanespacewiththeMovecommand: 1. Selecttheobject(s)tomove. 2. SelectModify>Move>Move. TheMoveSelectiondialogboxopens.MovetheobjectsaccordingtoCartesianorPolarcoordinates.

264

| Chapter 7: Editing Objects

Parameter
Cartesian Polar

Description
Specifythedistancetomovetheobject;forCartesiancoordinates,selectCartesianandenter theXandYOffsetdistances Specifythedistancetomovetheobject;forPolarcoordinates,selectPolarandenterthe DistanceandAngle

3. ClickOK. Theobjectismovedinthescreenplaneaccordingtothecriteriaspecified.

Moving Objects in 3D Space


TomoveanobjectwiththeMove3Dcommand: 1. Selecttheobject(s)tomove. 2. SelectModify>Move>Move3D. TheMove3DSelectiondialogboxopens.

Parameter
Cartesian X,Y,ZOffset WorkingPlane X,Y,ZOffset

Description
SelecttheX,Y,Z(Cartesian)coordinatesystem ForCartesiancoordinates,specifythedistancetomovetheobject SelecttheX,Y,Z(workingplane)coordinatesystem Forworkingplanecoordinates,specifythedistancetomovetheobject

3. ClickOK.Theobjectismovedin3Dspaceaccordingtothecriteriaspecified.

Moving Objects |

265

Moving Objects by Clicking


Objectscanbemoved,duplicated,anddistributedalongaspecifieddistancebyclickingwiththeMovebyPointstool. Thistoolalsomovessymbolswithinwalls(seeMovingSymbolsinWallswiththeMovebyPointsToolonpage 514).
Distribute Object Retention Number of Duplicates Preference

Move

Reference Point

Preferences

Mode
Move Distribute ReferencePoint ObjectRetention

Description
Movesandduplicatesselectedobjectsaccordingtothedistanceanddirectionspecifiedby twomouseclicks Movesanddistributesduplicateobjectsbetweenthepointsspecifiedbytwomouseclicks Movesselectedobjectsaccordingtoaclickedreferencepointandaspecifiedoffsetdistance fromthatpoint;thePreferencessettingsarenotapplicablewhenthismodeisselected Keepstheoriginalobjects;thisisthesameasselectingtheRetainoptioninthetool preferences

Moving Objects with the Move or Distribute Mode


Tomove,duplicate,anddistributeselectedobjects: 1. Selecttheobject(s)tomoveand/orduplicate. 2. ClicktheMovebyPointstoolfromtheBasicpaletteandclickPreferencesfromtheToolbar. TheMovebyPointsSettingsdialogboxopens.SelectthesettingsandclickOK.

Parameter
NumberofDuplicates

Description
Specifiesthenumberofcopiesoftheoriginalobject(s)tocreate;sameastheNumberof DuplicatesfieldontheToolbar. Avalueof0(zero)meansthattheoriginalobjectwillbemoved;inthiscase,theRetain optionbelow(andtheObjectRetentionbuttonontheToolbar)havenoeffect.

OriginalObject

266

| Chapter 7: Editing Objects


Description
Keepstheoriginalobject(s);thisoptionperformsthesamefunctionastheObject RetentionbuttonontheToolbar Keepstheoriginalobject(s)selectedforfurtheraction

Parameter
Retain LeaveSelected

Toselectadditionalobjectsortochangethecurrentlyselectedobjectstomove,duplicate,ordistribute,pressand holdtheAltkey(Windows)orCmdkey(Macintosh)whileshiftclickingorclickdraggingthemousearound themtomarqueeselectthem;theSelectiontoolisactivatedinboomerangmodewhiletheAltorCmdkeyis beingpressed. 3. SelecteithertheMoveorDistributemode,dependingonthedesiredoutcome.

Mode
Moveor Distribute Moveor Distribute Moveor Distribute Move

Number of Duplicates
0 1 1 >1

Original Object Retained


notapplicable No Yes No

Result
Movestheoriginalobject(s)tothelocationspecifiedbyclicking Movestheoriginalobject(s)tothelocationspecifiedbyclicking Createsoneduplicateoftheoriginalobject(s),placedatthelocation indicatedbyclicking Movestheoriginalobject(s),placingtheoriginalatthelocation specifiedbythefirstclick,andplacingtheduplicatesthesamedistance apartfromeachotheralongthevectorcreatedbythetwoclickpoints Createsduplicatesoftheoriginalobject(s),placingthefirstduplicateat thelocationspecifiedbythesecondclick,andplacingadditional duplicatesthesamedistanceapartfromeachotheralongthevector createdbythetwoclickpoints Movestheoriginalobject(s),placingtheoriginalatthelocation specifiedbythefirstclick,anddistributingtheduplicatesbetweenthe twoclickpoints,andalongthevectorcreatedbythetwopoints Createsduplicatesoftheoriginalobject(s),distributingtheduplicates betweenthetwoclickpoints,andalongthevectorcreatedbythetwo points

Move

>1

Yes

Distribute

>1

No

Distribute

>1

Yes

4. Clickonce(anywhereonthedrawing)toindicatethevectorstartpoint,andclickagaintoindicatethevectorend point.Duplicatesareplacedinthevectordirection,atthedistancespecifiedbytheclickpoints,alongtheline definedbytheclickpoints.

Moving Objects |
Move mode, two duplicates, retain original 1st click 2nd click

267

Distribute mode, two duplicates, retain original

1st click 2nd click

Moving Objects with the Reference Point Mode


ReferencePointmodecanworktwoways;thefirstclickcaneitherindicatetheobjecttobemovedorthereference pointfromwhichtheobjectwillbeoffset. Tomoveselectedobjectsusingareferencepoint: 1. Selecttheobject(s)tomove. 2. ClicktheMovebyPointstoolfromtheBasicpalette. Toselectadditionalobjectsortochangethecurrentlyselectedobjectstomove,duplicate,ordistribute,pressand holdtheAltkey(Windows)orCmdkey(Macintosh)whileshiftclickingorclickdraggingthemousearound themtomarqueeselectthem;theSelectiontoolisactivatedinboomerangmodewhiletheAltorCmdisbeing pressed. 3. SelecttheReferencePointmodefromtheToolbar. 4. Clicktoindicateeitherthereferencepoint,orapointontheselectedobject. TheEnterOffsetdialogboxopens.

5. ThecurrentOffsetdistancebetweenthetwoclickpointsdisplays.Enterthedesireddistance. 6. Selectwhetherthefirstclickmadewasthereferencepointorapointontheobjecttobemoved. 7. ClickOK.Theselectedobjectismovedasspecified,alongthelinedefinedbytheclickpoints. 8. Thesettingforhowthefirstclickisinterpretedremainssetuntilitischanged.

268

| Chapter 7: Editing Objects

Click the point from which to offset the selected object, click the object, and then enter the offset distance

2nd click

1st click

Cutting, Copying, and Pasting Objects


Cutting Objects
TheCutcommandremovesanobjectfromthedrawing,temporarilystoringtheobjectintheclipboard. Tocutanobject: 1. Selecttheobject(s)toremove. 2. SelectEdit>Cut. Alternatively,rightclick(Windows)orCtrlclick(Macintosh)ontheobject,andselectCutfromtheobjectcontext menu. Theobjectismovedfromthedrawingtotheclipboard.

Copying Objects
TheCopycommandcopiesanobjecttotheclipboard,whereitistemporarilystored.Theoriginalobjectremainson thedrawing. Tocopyanobject: 1. Selecttheobject(s)tocopy. 2. SelectEdit>Copy. Alternatively,rightclick(Windows)orCtrlclick(Macintosh)ontheobject,andselectCopyfromtheobject contextmenu. Theprogramplacesacopyoftheobjectintheclipboard.

Pasting Objects
ThePastecommandplacestheclipboardobjectintothesamedrawingfile,intoanotherVectorworksfile,orinto anothersoftwareprogramsfile(ifthatprogramalsohascopy,cut,andpastecommands).AslongastheVectorworks programremainsopenwhiletheobjectisintheclipboard,theobjectretainsallitsobjectinformationforpastinginto Vectorworksdocuments. Someimagequalitycanbelostwhenobjectsarepastedintootherprograms. Topasteanobject: 1. Openthefileandlayerwheretheobjectistobeadded.

Cutting, Copying, and Pasting Objects |


2. SelectEdit>Paste. Alternatively,rightclick(Windows)orCtrlclick(Macintosh)ontheobject,andselectPastefromtheobject contextmenu.

269

Theprogrampastestheobjectcenteredonthelocationofthelastmouseclick,unlessthelastmouseclickis outsidethecurrentview.Inthatcase,theobjectispastedatthecenterofthedrawing.Whenpastingaclipboard objectintoadifferentVectorworksfile,theprogramautomaticallycenterstheobjectinthedrawingarea. WhenarasterimageispastedintoaVectorworksfile,itisautomaticallycompressedtoPNGformattoreduce theVectorworksfilesize.

Paste as Picture
LikethePastecommand,thePasteasPicturecommandplacesacopyoftheclipboardcontentsintheactive Vectorworksdrawingfile.However,PasteasPictureplacestheentireclipboardcontentsasasingleobject/picture. Becausethecontentsarenowoneitem,individualobjects(includingsymbolsandtext)cannolongerbeedited. TherearetwoadvantagestousingthePasteasPicturecommand.First,asasingleitem,theclipboardobjectsaremore quicklyplacedintothedrawingfile.Inaddition,thepastedobjectsretainanyPostScriptcomments,aswellasallother embeddedinformation. Topasteasapicture: 1. Openthefileandlayerwheretheobjectistobeadded. 2. SelectEdit>PasteasPicture.

Paste in Place
ThePasteinPlacecommandworksexactlylikethePastecommand,exceptthattheclipboardcontentsarepastedinto theactivedrawingatthesamecoordinates(relativetothelayerorigin)fromwhichtheywerecopied.Whenyoupaste toasheetlayer,rememberthateachsheetlayerhasitsownorigin,whichmaybedifferentfromtheoriginofthelayer wheretheobjectwascopied(seeSetOriginonpage 78fordetails). Topasteinplace: 1. Openthefileandlayerwheretheobjectistobeadded. 2. SelectEdit>PasteinPlace.

Changing Object Stacking Order


Asobjectsaredrawn,theprogramkeepstrackoftheirstackingorderwithinthedesignlayer.Thefirstobjectcreatedis atthebackofthestack,andthemostrecentobjectcreatedisatthefrontofthestack. Thesendcommandschangethestackingorderofobjectswithinalayer.Objectscanbesentforwardtobeinfrontofan overlappingobjectorsentbackwardtobebehindanoverlappingobject.Also,objectscanbesentallthewaytothe frontorbackofthestackinonestep. Tochangethestackingorderofanobject: 1. Selecttheobjecttorestack. 2. SelectModify>Send.Fromthesubmenu,selectthesendmethodtouse. Alternatively,rightclick(Windows)orCtrlclick(Macintosh)ontheobject,andselectSendfromtheobject contextmenu.

270

| Chapter 7: Editing Objects


Description
Sendstheselectedobjecttowardthefrontofthestack,infrontofthenextobjectinthestackthat overlapsit;ifnootherobjectoverlapstheselectedobject,thestackingorderisnotchanged Sendstheselectedobjecttowardthebackofthestack,behindthenextobjectinthestackthat overlapsit;ifnootherobjectoverlapstheselectedobject,thestackingorderisnotchanged Sendstheselectedobjecttothefrontofstack Sendstheselectedobjecttothebackofthestack

Method
SendForward SendBackward SendtoFront SendtoBack

Theobjectsstackingorderischanged.

Removing Objects
Clearing Objects
TheClearcommanddeletesanyselectedobjectorobjects.IthasthesameeffectaspressingtheDeletekey,meaning thattheobject(s)arenotstoredontheclipboard.TheonlywaytoretrieveaclearedobjectistoselectUndo.This commandprovidesanadditionalwayofremovinganobjectfromthedrawingwithoutdeletingthecurrentcontents oftheclipboard. Toclearanobjectfromthedrawing: 1. Selecttheobjectorobjectstoremovefromthedrawing. 2. SelectEdit>Clear.

Purging Items from a File


ThePurgecommandremovesspecifieditemsfromthedrawingandreducesthefilesize.Unusedlayers,classes,and resources,aswellasobjectsoutsideofthepageboundariescanberemovedfromthefile. Topurgeitemsfromafile: 1. SelectTools>Purge. ThePurgedialogboxopens.Eachtypeofitemthatcanbepurgedislisted,alongwiththenumberofitemsthat werefound.Selecttheitemstoremovefromthedrawingfile.

Removing Objects |

271

Element
UnusedResources Gradients Hatches Images RecordFormats

Description
Deletesanyunusedgradientresources Deletesanyunusedhatchresource Deletesanyunusedimageresources Deletesanyunusedrecordformatresources. AlsoselectSpecialRecordFormatstodeleteunusedrecordformats thatstorepluginobjectdefaultvalues.Analertpromptsyouto confirmthatthedefaultvaluesshouldbedeleted.

RenderworksBackgrounds (Renderworksrequired) RenderworksStyles (Renderworksrequired) RenderworksTextures (Renderworksrequired) SketchStyles (VectorworksDesignSeriesrequired) SlabStyles (VectorworksArchitectrequired) Symbols

DeletesanyunusedRenderworksbackgroundresources DeletesanyunusedRenderworksstyles Deletesanyunusedtextureresources Deletesanyunusedsketchstyleresources Deletesanyunusedslabstyleresources Deletesanyunusedsymbolresources. AlsoselectSpecialSymbolstodeletetheresourcesforpluginobject symbolsandgroupsymbols(thoselistedinredandblueinthe ResourceBrowser).Thiswillnotdeleteanyassociatedpluginorgroup objectsthathavealreadybeenplacedinthedrawing.Analertprompts youtoconfirmthatthespecialsymbolresourcesshouldbedeleted.

272

| Chapter 7: Editing Objects


Description
Deletesanyunusedtextstyleresources Deletesanyunusedtileresources Deletesanyunusedwallstyleresources

Element
TextStyles Tiles WallStyles (VectorworksArchitectorLandmark required) All

Checkedbox:AllattributesintheUnusedResourcesgroupare selected;clicktodeselectallattributesinthegroup. Emptybox:NoattributesintheUnusedResourcesgroupare selected;clicktoselectallattributesinthegroup. Boxdisplays (Windows)or (Macintosh):Oneormore attributesintheUnusedResourcesgrouparenotselected;clickto selectallattributesinthegroup. TheSpecialRecordFormatsandSpecialSymbolsoptionsarenot automaticallyselectedalongwiththeotherunusedresources; theymustbeselectedindividually.

OtherItems EmptyLayers EmptyStoryLayers (VectorworksArchitectrequired) EmptySymbolFolders UnusedClasses UnusedDashStyles ObjectsOutsideofPageBoundaries for Deletesanylayersthatdonotcontainanyobjects Deletesanystoriesthatdonotcontainanylayers Deletesanyunusedsymbolfolders Deletesanyunusedclasses Deletesanyunuseddashstyles Deletesanyobjectsthataretotallyoutsidethepageboundaries;ifan objectispartiallywithintheboundary,itwillnotbedeleted.Objects canbedeletedfromtheactivelayeronly,fromalldesignlayers,and fromallsheetlayers. Checkedbox:AllattributesintheOtherItemsgroupareselected; clicktodeselectallattributesinthegroup. Emptybox:NoattributesintheOtherItemsgroupareselected;click toselectallattributesinthegroup. Boxdisplays (Windows)or (Macintosh):Oneormore attributesintheOtherItemsgrouparenotselected;clicktoselectall attributesinthegroup. Previewitemsthatwillbepurged OpensthePurgePreviewdialogboxafteryouclickOKonthePurge dialogbox;ifneeded,itemscanberemovedfromthepurgelist

All

2. ClickOK. IfPreviewitemsthatwillbepurgedwasselected,thePurgePreviewdialogboxopens.TheNameandTypeof eachitemthatwillbepurgeddisplays.Redandbluenamesindicatesymbolsthataredefinedtobeinsertedas pluginobjectsandgroups,respectively(seeSymbolTypesonpage 173).Forsymboldefinitionsandempty

Duplicating Objects |

273

symbolfolders,theLocationcolumnindicateswhichresourcefoldercurrentlycontainstheitem.Forobjectsthat areoutsideofthepageboundaries,theLocationcolumnindicateswhichsheetlayerordesignlayercurrently containstheitem. Topreventanitemfrombeingpurged,clickthecolumntotheleftoftheitemsnametoremovethecheckmark.

3. ClickOKtocompletethepurge. 4. Ifnecessary,usetheUndocommandtoundothepurge.

Duplicating Objects
Duplicating Single
TheDuplicatecommandmakesacopyofanobjectorgroupofobjectsandplacesitonthedrawing.Dependingonthe settinginVectorworkspreferences,theduplicatedobjectorobjectswilleitherbeoffsetorplaceddirectlyontopofthe original. Toduplicateanyobject: 1. Selecttheobject(s)tocopy. 2. SelectEdit>Duplicate. Theprogramplacesacopyoftheselectedobject(s)inthedrawingaccordingtothesettingsintheVectorworks preferencesdialogbox. Whenobjectswithanoffsetareduplicated,theoffsetismaintainedwiththeduplicate.

Duplicate Array
TheDuplicateArraycommandcontrolshowmanycopiesofselectedobjectsaremadeandhowthesecopiesare arrayed,orplaced,inthedrawing. Forinformationaboutplacingsymbolsinwallsinaduplicatearray,seeInsertingSymbolsinaDuplicateArrayon page 511.

274

| Chapter 7: Editing Objects

Tocreateaduplicatearray: 1. Selecttheobjectorobjectstocopy. 2. SelectEdit>DuplicateArray. TheDuplicateArraydialogboxopens.SelectthedesiredduplicationarrayShape.Thedialogboxdynamically displaystheappropriatefieldsbasedontheselectedlinear,rectangular,orcirculararrayshape.

Linear Array

Rectangular Array

Circular Array

Linear Array Parameter


NumberofDuplicates FirstDuplicatesPosition DeterminedBy CartesianOffset

Description
Specifythenumberofcopiesoftheoriginalobjecttocreate Specifythestartpointforthefirstcopiedobject,byeitherspecifyingcoordinatesor placingtheobjectwiththemouse TouseCartesiancoordinates,clickthisoptionandspecifythedistanceofthecenter ofthecopyfromthecenteroftheoriginalobjectbyenteringX,Y,andZ coordinates.IftheviewissomethingotherthanTop/Plan,andthefieldValuesAre WithRespecttotheissettoWorkingPlane,thelabelsonthecoordinatefieldsare X,Y,andZinsteadofX,Y,andZ.Z(orZ)mustbezerowhenonly2Dscreen objectsarebeingduplicated. Thisoptionisalwaysenabledif2Dobjectsareselected;if3Dorhybridobjectsare selected,orifboth2Dand3Dobjectsareselected,thisoptionisenabledonlyin Top/Planview.Tousepolarcoordinates,clickthisoptionandspecifythedistance ofthecenterofthecopyfromthecenteroftheoriginalobjectbyenteringr(radius), theta(angle),andZcoordinates;Zmustbezerowhenonly2Dscreenobjectsare beingduplicated.

PolarOffset

Duplicating Objects | Linear Array Parameter


NextMouseClickandZ (orZ)

275

Description
Thisoptionisalwaysenabledif2Dobjectsareselected;if3Dorhybridobjectsare selected,orifboth2Dand3Dobjectsareselected,thisoptionisenabledonlyin Top/Planview.Toplacethecopywiththemouse,selectNextMouseClick.To offsetthefirstcopyfromtheoriginalobjectsplane,enteraZ(orZ)value;Z(orZ) mustbezerowhenonly2Dscreenobjectsarebeingduplicated. Specifywhetherthearrayshouldbebuiltrelativetotheactivelayerplaneor workingplane SelectResizeDuplicatestoresizeeachsuccessivecopywiththespecifiedXScale, YScale,andZScalevalues;toleavethecopiesatthesamescaleastheoriginal object,ensurethatResizeDuplicatesisdeselected SelectRotateDuplicatestorotateeachsuccessivecopyatthespecifiedAngle;to leavethecopiesatthesamerotationastheoriginalobject,ensurethatRotate Duplicatesisdeselected Toincludetheoriginalobjectinthearray,selectRetain;otherwise,theoriginal objectisdeleted.Toleavetheoriginalobjectselectedafterduplication,alsoclick LeaveSelected.

ValuesAreWithRespectto the ResizeDuplicates

RotateDuplicates

OriginalObject

Rectangular Array Parameter


NumberofColumns NumberofRows NumberofStacks DistanceBetweenColumns

Description
SpecifythenumberofcopiesoftheoriginalobjecttocreateinthearraysXdirection (activelayerplaneduplication)orXdirection(workingplaneduplication) SpecifythenumberofcopiesoftheoriginalobjecttocreateinthearraysYdirection (activelayerplaneduplication)orYdirection(workingplaneduplication) SpecifythenumberofcopiesoftheoriginalobjecttocreateinthearraysZdirection (activelayerplaneduplication)orZdirection(workingplaneduplication) Specifythedistancebetweeneachcolumninthearray(measuredfromthecopied objectscenters)

276

| Chapter 7: Editing Objects


Description
Specifythedistancebetweeneachrowinthearray(measuredfromthecopied objectscenters) Specifythedistancebetweeneachstackinthearray(measuredfromthecopied objectscenters);thisvaluemustbezerowhenonly2Dscreenobjectsarebeing duplicated Specifywhetherthearrayshouldbebuiltrelativetotheactivelayerplaneor workingplane SelectResizeDuplicatestoresizeeachsuccessivecopywiththespecifiedXScale, YScale,andZScalevalues;toleavethecopiesatthesamescaleastheoriginal objectensurethatResizeDuplicatesisdeselected SelectRotateDuplicatestorotateeachsuccessivecopyatthespecifiedAngle;to leavethecopiesatthesamerotationastheoriginalobject,ensurethatRotate Duplicatesisdeselected Toincludetheoriginalobjectinthearray,selectRetain;otherwise,theoriginal objectisdeleted.Toleavetheoriginalobjectselectedafterduplication,alsoclick LeaveSelected.

Rectangular Array Parameter


DistanceBetweenRows DistanceBetweenStacks

ValuesAreWithRespectto the ResizeDuplicates

RotateDuplicates

OriginalObject

Circular Array Parameter


NumberofDuplicates AngleBetweenDuplicates Z(orZ)OffsetofSuccessive Duplicates

Description
Specifythenumberofcopiesoftheoriginalobjecttocreate Specifytheangleofseparationbetweenthecentersofeachobjectinthearray Tooffsetcopiesfromtheoriginalobjectsplane,specifythedistancebetweeneach successivecopy.IftheviewissomethingotherthanTop/Plan,andValuesAreWith RespecttotheissettoWorkingPlane,thelabelisZinsteadofZ.ZandZmustbe zerowhenonly2Dscreenobjectsarebeingduplicated. Specifythecenterpointforthecirculararray,byeitherspecifyingcoordinatesor placingthearraywiththemouse

CircleCenterPoint

Duplicating Objects | Circular Array Parameter


XandY(orXandY)

277

Description
Toplacethearrayusingcoordinates,entertheXandYcoordinatesofitscenter point.IftheviewissomethingotherthanTop/Plan,andValuesAreWithRespect totheissettoWorkingPlane,thelabelsonthecoordinatefieldsareXandY insteadofXandY. Thisoptionisalwaysenabledif2Dobjectsareselected;if3Dorhybridobjectsare selected,orifboth2Dand3Dobjectsareselected,thisoptionisenabledonlyin Top/Planview.SelectNextMouseClicktoplacethearraysothatitscenterisatthe nextclickedpoint. Specifywhetherthearrayshouldbebuiltrelativetotheactivelayerplaneor workingpane SelectResizeDuplicatestoresizeeachsuccessivecopywiththespecifiedXScale, YScale,andZScalevalues;toleavethecopiesatthesamescaleastheoriginal object,ensurethatResizeDuplicatesisdeselected SelectRotateDuplicatestorotateeachsuccessivecopyateithertheAngleBetween DuplicatesorthespecifiedCustomAngle;toleavethecopiesatthesamerotation astheoriginalobject,ensurethatRotateDuplicatesisdeselected Toincludetheoriginalobjectinthearray,selectRetain;otherwise,theoriginal objectisdeleted.Toleavetheoriginalobjectselectedafterduplication,alsoclick LeaveSelected.

NextMouseClick

ValuesAreWithRespectto the ResizeDuplicates

RotateDuplicates

OriginalObject

3. ClickOK. Ifthearraylocationisalreadyspecified,theprogramautomaticallyplacestheduplicatearray. IfNextMouseClickwasselected,movethemousewherethecopiesaretobeplaced,andclick.Forcircularand rectangulararrays,clickthemouseatthecenterofthearray.

3D linear array with Z offset and resized duplicates

3D circular array with Z offset and rotated duplicates

Duplicating Objects Along a Path


TheDuplicateAlongPathcommandcreatesandplacesseveralcopiesofanobjectorobjectsalonganexistingpath.

278

| Chapter 7: Editing Objects


Ifa2Dobjectand3Dpathareselected,the2Dobjectisprojectedontothepath.

Toduplicateobjectsalongapath: 1. Selecttheobjectorobjectstoduplicate,andselectthepathobject.

Grouped 2D objects and polyline path

3D object (in 3D view) and NURBS curve

2. SelectEdit>DuplicateAlongPath. TheDuplicateAlongPathdialogboxopens.

Parameter
Selectapathobject DuplicatePlacement NumberofDuplicates FixedDistance StartOffset CurveLength

Description
ClickPrevorNexttoselecttheobjectthatrepresentsthepath;theselectedpathobject ishighlighted Specifiestheduplicateobjectplacementparameters CreatesthespecifiedNumberofduplicateobjects,equallyspacedalongthepath DuplicatesobjectsatthefixedintervalsspecifiedinDistance Specifiesthedistancefromtheendofthepathtothefirstduplicatedobject;enterzero toplacethefirstobjectatthestartofthepath Displaysthelengthofthepathobject,forreference

Smoothing Objects | Parameter


Tangenttopath

279

Description
Rotatestheduplicatessotheyarealwaystangenttothepath

Tangent to Path deselected

Tangent to Path selected

Keeporiginal orientation

Theobjecttoduplicateremainsinitsoriginalorientation.Theremainingduplicates arerotatedtangenttothepath,relativetotheoriginalobjectstangencyangle.

Keep original orientation selected

Keep original orientation deselected

Preview 3. ClickOK.

ClicktopreviewtheeffectofparameterchangesbeforeclickingOK

Theduplicatesarearrayedwiththeircentersalongtheselectedpathobject.

Smoothing Objects
Thesmoothingcommandssmoothallselectedpolygonandpolylineverticesinonestep,changingallverticesofthe objectintotheselectedvertextype.ThecommandsalsoworkonNURBScurves.TheNoSmoothingcommand changessmoothedverticesintocorneredvertices. Tosmoothanobject: 1. Selecttheobject(s)tosmooth. 2. SelectModify>PolySmoothing.Fromthesubmenu,selectthesmoothingmethodtouse.

Option
NoSmoothing BzierSplineSmoothing

Description
Createsstraightlinesandcornervertices Createscurvespulledtowardsbutnottouchingthevertices

280

| Chapter 7: Editing Objects


Description
Createscurvesthatpassthroughthecontrolpoints Createsfilletlikecurvesatthecontrolpoints.Thearcradiusisbasedonthe currentfilletradiusoftheFillettool(seeFilletToolonpage 335).Ifnoradius isset,thelargestradiusthatcanfitbetweeneachvertexisused. Createscurvedradiusvertices,whichareeasiertoreshapethanarcvertices

Option
CubicSplineSmoothing ArcSmoothing

RadiusSmoothing Theobjectissmoothed.

Smoothed using Arc Smoothing

Composing and Decomposing Objects and Surfaces


Composing Objects and Surfaces
TheComposecommandcancombineNURBSsurfaces,lines,arcs,openpolygons,NURBScurves,NURBSarcs,and open3Dpolygonsintoasingleobject.Theendpointsofeachobjectmustbetouchingtousethiscommand.Objects thatarenottouchingareignored. AdjacentNURBSsurfaces,whichmayhavebeensplitbytheSplittool(seeSplittingObjectsandNURBSSurfaces onpage 332),canbecomposedintoasingleNURBSsurfacewiththiscommand. TocomposeadjacentobjectsorNURBSsurfaces: 1. SelecttheobjectsorNURBSsurfacestobecomposed. Ifalargenumberofobjectsareconnectedendtoend,usetheEdit>SelectConnectedObjectscommandto selectthem. 2. SelectModify>Compose.TheobjectsarecombinedtocreateasingleobjectorNURBSsurface.

Iftherearemultipleobjectstouchingatthesameendpoint,thetwoobjectsclosestinstackingorderare combined.

Selecting Connected Objects |

281

Decomposing Objects and Surfaces


TheDecomposecommandcandecomposeNURBSsurfaces,2Dpolygons,2Dpolylines,3DNURBScurvescreated withtheComposecommand,andopen3Dpolygons. Occasionally,surfacecreationmethodsliketheCreateSurfacefromCurvescommandcancreateasurfacewith internaldiscontinuities.Manyofthe3DPowerPacktoolsandcommandsarenotdesignedtoworkwiththesetypesof surfaces.TheDecomposecommandcanseparatethesurfaceintoNURBSsurfaceswithoutdiscontinuities. TodecomposeaNURBSsurfaceorobjectintoindividualsegments: 1. SelecttheNURBSsurfaceorobjecttobedecomposed. 2. SelectModify>Decompose. TheNURBSsurfaceisseparatedintoindividualsurfaces,ortheobjectisseparatedintoindividualsegments.

Selecting Connected Objects


TheSelectConnectedObjectscommandcanselectobjectsthatareconnectedendtoendwithoneormoreselected objects.Anycombinationofconnectedlines,arcs,openpolygons,openpolylines,openNURBScurves,open3D polygons,walls,andopenroundwallscanbeselected.Theendpointsofeachobjectmustbetouchingeitherdirectly orindirectlytousethiscommand.Objectsthatarenottouchingareignored. ThiscommandcanbeusefulwhenanimportedDXF/DWGfilecontainsalargenumberofsmalllinesthatare connectedendtoendandyouwanttocomposethemintoasingleobject. Toselectconnectedobjects: 1. Selectoneormoreobjectstowhichtheotherobjectstobeselectedareconnectedendtoend. 2. SelectEdit>SelectConnectedObjects. Theselectedobjectsarehighlighted;theObjectInfopaletteindicateshowmanyobjectswereselected.

282

| Chapter 7: Editing Objects

Locking and Unlocking Objects


Locking Objects
ObjectsinadrawingcanbeprotectedwiththeLockcommandsothattheycannotbeaccidentallymoved,deleted,or edited.Alockedobjectmustbeunlockedbeforeanychangescanbemadetoit. Tolockanobject: 1. Selecttheobjectorobjectstolock. 2. SelectModify>Lock. Alternatively,rightclick(Windows)orCtrlclick(Macintosh)ontheobject,andselectLockfromtheobject contextmenu. TheObjectInfopaletteindicatesthattheobjectislocked.Dependingontheselectionhighlightingsettingin Vectorworkspreferences,thehandlesand/orhighlightingalsochangetoindicatethattheobjectisnowlocked (seeSelectionandPreselectionIndicatorsonpage 63).

Unlocking Objects
UnlockanobjectorgroupofobjectsthatwaspreviouslylockedwiththeUnlockcommand.Unlockedobjectscanbe copied,moved,deleted,oredited. Tounlockobjects: 1. Selecttheobjectorobjectstobeunlocked. 2. SelectModify>Unlock Alternatively,rightclick(Windows)orCtrlclick(Macintosh)ontheobject,andselectUnlockfromtheobject contextmenu. TheObjectInfopalettenolongerindicatesthattheobjectislocked.Dependingontheselectionhighlighting settinginVectorworkspreferences,thehandlesand/orhighlightingalsochangetoindicatethattheobjectisnow unlocked(seeSelectionandPreselectionIndicatorsonpage 63).

Rotating Objects
Thereareseveralwaystorotateobjects.UsetheRotatetooltorotateanobject,oraduplicateofanobject,directlywith themouse.UsethevariousRotatecommandstorotatetheobjectbychoosingapresetrotation,orbyenteringcustom rotationinformationinadialogbox. Certainobjects,suchasrectangles,roundedrectangles,ovals,bitmaps,PICTimages,andtextobjects,canbe rotatedwiththeInteractiveScalingmodeoftheSelectiontool.PresstheAltkey(Windows)orOptionkey (Macintosh)whiledraggingareshapehandle.

Rotate Tool
TheRotatetoolcanrotateobjectsinthedrawing.DoubleclickingthetoolwhenanobjectisselectedopenstheRotate ObjectdialogboxasdescribedinCustomRotationonpage 285. TheRotatetoolcanrotateorrotateandduplicatetheselectedobject(s)aboutanaxisoralignedrelativetoanother object.

Rotating Objects |
Duplicate and Rotate Rotate Standard Rotation Alignment Rotation

283

Mode
Rotate DuplicateandRotate StandardRotation AlignmentRotation

Description
Rotatestheselectedobject Createsaduplicateobjectandrotatesit Rotatestheobjectaboutadefinedaxis Rotatestheobjectbyaligningitwithanotherobject

Standard Rotation
Torotateanobjectaroundaspecifiedaxis: 1. Selecttheobjecttorotate. 2. ClicktheRotatetoolfromtheBasicpalette. Toselectadditionalobjectsortochangethecurrentlyselectedobjectstorotate,pressandholdtheAltkey (Windows)orCmdkey(Macintosh)whileshiftclickingorclickdraggingthemousearoundthemtomarquee selectthem;theSelectiontoolisactivatedinboomerangmodewhiletheAltorCmdkeyisbeingpressed. 3. SelectRotateorDuplicateandRotatefromtheToolbar,dependingonwhethertheoriginaloraduplicateobject istoberotated. 4. SelectStandardRotationfromtheToolbar. Bydefault,therotationplaneisthatoftheactiveworkingplane;theworkingplaneorientationcanbechanged.If desired,selectScreenPlanefromtheActivePlanelistontheToolbartorotateinaplaneparalleltothescreen plane. 5. Clicktocreateafulcrumline(atemporaryhandletorotatetheobject).Therotationplaneisparalleltothe workingplane. 6. Clicktoendthefulcrumline. 7. Movethecursortorotatetheobjecttothedesirednewposition. Apreviewobjectdisplays. 8. Clicktosettherotation. Theoriginalobjectoritsduplicateisrotatedtothenewposition.

284

| Chapter 7: Editing Objects


3rd click

1st click

2nd click

Rotating an object using the Rotate and Standard Rotation options

Rotation by Alignment
Torotateanobjectbyaligningitwithanotherobject: 1. Selecttheobjecttorotate. 2. SelecttheRotatetoolfromtheBasicpalette. Toselectadditionalobjectsortochangethecurrentlyselectedobjectstorotate,pressandholdtheAltkey (Windows)orCmdkey(Macintosh)whileshiftclickingorclickdraggingthemousearoundthemtomarquee selectthem;theSelectiontoolisactivatedinboomerangmodewhiletheAltorCmdisbeingpressed. 3. SelectRotateorDuplicateandRotatefromtheToolbar,dependingonwhethertheoriginaloraduplicateobject istoberotated. 4. SelectAlignmentRotationfromtheToolbar.Thismodeisonlyavailableina3Dview. 5. Clicktosetthefirstpointontheselectedobject. 6. Clicktosetthesecondpointontheselectedobject. Thisdefinestheedgeoftheobjectthatwillberotatedbyalignmentandcreatesafulcrumline. 7. Clickthedesiredpointtoaligntheobject. Theoriginalobjectoritsduplicateisrotatedtothenewposition.
3rd click

2nd click 1st click

Preset Rotation Angles


Therotatecommandsprovideanumberofwaystorotateobjectsinthescreenplanewithoutchangingtheirbase locationinthedrawing.Selectoneofthepresetrotationangles,orspecifyacustomrotationangle.

Rotating Objects |
Torotateataspecifiedangle: 1. Selecttheobject(s)torotate. 2. SelectModify>Rotate,andthenthepresetrotation.

285

Alternatively,rightclick(Windows)orCtrlclick(Macintosh)ontheobject(s),andselectRotatefromtheobject contextmenu.

Parameter
RotateLeft90 RotateRight90 FlipHorizontal FlipVertical

Description
Rotatestheselectedobjectcounterclockwise90 Rotatestheselectedobjectclockwise90 Flipstheselectedobjectaboutitscenter Flipstheselectedobjectverticallyaboutitscenter

Custom Rotation
Thecenterofrotationforthiscommandislimitedtothecenteroftheobjectsboundingbox.Therotationisperformed withinthescreenplane. Torotatebyacustomangle: 1. Selecttheobjectorobjectstorotate. 2. SelectModify>Rotate>Rotate.Alternatively,doubleclicktheRotatetool. TheRotateObjectdialogboxopens.

3. Entertherotationangle. Theprecisionofthevaluesthatcanbeentered(degrees,minutes,and/orseconds)dependsontheUnitssetting. 4. ClickOK.

3D Custom Rotation
Theprecisionoftherotationvaluesthatcanbeentered(degrees,minutes,and/orseconds)dependsontheUnits setting. Torotateatcustomanglesin3D: 1. Selectthe3Dobjectorobjectstorotate. 2. SelectModify>Rotate>Rotate3D. TheRotateObjectin3Ddialogboxopens.Specifytherotationparameters.

286

| Chapter 7: Editing Objects

Parameter
RotationAngle CenterofRotation WorkingPlaneCenter ObjectCenter NextMouseClick RotationAxis

Description
Entertheangleofrotation Specifythedesiredcenterofrotation Rotatesusingthecenteroftheworkingplane Rotatesaboutthecenteroftheselectedobject Rotatesaroundthenextmouseclickinthedrawingwindow SelectwhethertherotationaxiswillbebasedontheActiveLayerPlaneorthe WorkingPlane,andaboutwhichaxis

3. ClickOK.

Unrotating 3D Objects
TheUnrotate3DObjectscommandreturnsany3Dobjectthathasitsowncoordinatesystemtoitsuprightposition. Usethecommandtorotatesymbols,extrudes,multipleextrudes,andsweepssothattheyalignwiththeworld coordinatesystem. Tounrotatea3Dobject: 1. Selectthe3Dobjectorobjectstounrotate. 2. SelectModify>Unrotate3DObjects.

Mirroring Objects
TheMirrortoolcanmirror,ormirrorandduplicate,objectsaboutanaxislineoracrosstheworkingplane.
Mirror Mirror Across Working Plane

Duplicate and Mirror

Mode
Mirror

Description
Mirrorstheselectedobject.Themirroredobjectisonthesameplaneasthe originalobject.

Mirroring Objects | Mode


DuplicateandMirror MirrorAcrossWorkingPlane

287

Description
Createsaduplicateoftheselectedobjectandthenmirrorstheduplicate.The mirroredobjectisonthesameplaneastheoriginalobject. Mirrorstheselectedobjecttotheothersideoftheworkingplane.

Mirroring Objects Across an Axis


Tomirrorobjectsacrossanaxis: 1. Selecttheobject(s)tomirror. 2. ClicktheMirrortoolfromtheBasicpalette. Toselectadditionalobjectsortochangethecurrentlyselectedobjectstomirror,pressandholdtheAltkey (Windows)orCmdkey(Macintosh)whileshiftclickingorclickdraggingthemousearoundthemtomarquee selectthem;theSelectiontoolisactivatedinboomerangmodewhiletheAltorCmdkeyisbeingpressed. 3. SelectMirrororDuplicateandMirrorfromtheToolbar,dependingonwhethertheoriginalobjectistoremain inplace. 4. Clicktosetthebeginningoftheaxisline,andthenclickagaintosettheendoftheline.Forobjectsinwalls(such asdoorsorcolumns),theaxislineisconstrainedtobeperpendiculartothewall. Theobjectoritsduplicateismirroredontheoppositesideoftheplanecreatedbyprojectingtheaxislineontothe workingplane.

Mirror axis line Mirror mode mirrors the object to the other side of the axis line

Mirror axis line

Duplicate and Mirror mode creates a mirror duplicate of the object Mirror axis line

288

| Chapter 7: Editing Objects

Forobjectsinwalls,themirroredobjectisplacedinthewall,ifthereisroomforit.
Mirror axis line

Duplicate and Mirror mode creates a mirror duplicate of the door inserted into the wall

Mirroring Objects Across the Working Plane


Tomirrorobjectsacrosstheworkingplane: 1. Selecttheobject(s)tomirror. 2. Hybridobjectssuchaswallsorcolumnsmustremainperpendiculartotheactivelayerplane.Ifyouare mirroringahybridobject,settheworkingplanesothatitintersectstheactivelayerplaneat90degrees. 3. ClicktheMirrortoolfromtheBasicpalette. Toselectadditionalobjectsortochangethecurrentlyselectedobjectstomirror,pressandholdtheAltkey (Windows)orCmdkey(Macintosh)whileshiftclickingorclickdraggingthemousearoundthemtomarquee selectthem;theSelectiontoolisactivatedinboomerangmodewhiletheAltorCmdkeyisbeingpressed. 4. SelectMirrororDuplicateandMirrorfromtheToolbar,dependingonwhethertheoriginalobjectistoremain inplace. 5. ClickMirrorAcrossWorkingPlanemode. Theobjectoritsduplicateismirroredtotheoppositesideoftheworkingplane.Thereisnoneedtocreateanaxis line.

The working plane is perpendicular to the active layer plane

Duplicate and Mirror mode creates a mirror duplicate of the column across the working plane

Converting Objects |

289

Converting Objects
Objectscanbeconvertedinseveralways.

Convert to Lines
TheConverttoLinescommandchangesasingleobjectintotheseriesoflinesneededtocreateit.Forexample,a rectangleisconvertedintofourlines. Circlesandovalscanalsobeconvertedintonumerouslinesegments.However,especiallywhenconvertingcircles,the accuracyofthelinesegmentsdependsonthe2Dconversionres(resolution)settingchosenintheVectorworks Preferencesdialogbox. Toconvertanobjecttolines: 1. Selecttheobjecttoconvert. 2. SelectModify>Convert>ConverttoLines. 3. Iftheobjectcanberendered,selectthewireframe,hiddenline,ordashedhiddenlinerenderingconversion option. 4. ClickOK. Theobjectisconvertedintolinesandeachsegmentcanbemanipulated.

Convert Copy to Lines


TheConvertCopytoLinescommandworksliketheConverttoLinescommandexceptthatitfirstmakesacopyof theobjectandthenconvertsthecopyintolinesegments.Theoriginalobjectremainsintact. Toconvertacopyofanobjecttolines: 1. Selecttheobjecttoconvert. 2. SelectModify>Convert>ConvertCopytoLines. 3. Iftheobjectcanberendered,selectthewireframe,hiddenline,ordashedhiddenlinerenderingconversion option. 4. ClickOK. Acopyoftheobjectisconvertedintolinesandeachsegmentcanbemanipulated.

Convert to Polygons
TheConverttoPolygonscommandchangesanyobjectwithasurfaceintothe2Dpolygonorseriesofpolygons neededtocreateit. Circlesandovalscanalsobeconverted.However,especiallywhenconvertingcircles,theaccuracyofthepolygons dependsonthe2Dconversionres(resolution)settingchosenintheVectorworksPreferencesdialogbox.

290

| Chapter 7: Editing Objects

Whenmostclosed3Dgeometryisconvertedto2Dpolygonswiththehiddenlinerenderingoption,backfacing polygonsarediscarded. Toconvertanobjecttopolygons: 1. Selecttheobjecttoconvert. 2. SelectModify>Convert>ConverttoPolygons. 3. Iftheobjectcanberendered,selecteitherthewireframeorhiddenlinerenderingconversionoption. 4. ClickOK. Theobjectisconvertedtoagroupofpolygons.Toselectanindividualpolygon,firstselectModify>Ungroup.

Convert Copy to Polygons


TheConvertCopytoPolygonscommandworksliketheConverttoPolygonscommand,exceptthatitfirstmakesa copyoftheobjectandthenconvertsthecopyinto2Dpolygons.Theoriginalobjectremainsintact. Toconvertacopyofanobjecttopolygons: 1. Selecttheobjecttoconvert. 2. SelectModify>Convert>ConvertCopytoPolygons. 3. Iftheobjectcanberendered,selecteitherthewireframeorhiddenlinerenderingconversionoption. 4. ClickOK. Acopyoftheobjectisconvertedtoagroupofpolygons.Toselectanindividualpolygon,firstselectModify> Ungroup.

Convert to 3D Polygons
TheConvertto3DPolyscommandconvertsany2Dlineorsurfaceobject,includingpolylines,polygons,circles,ovals, andrectangles,intoa3Dpolygon.Onceconverted,thenewpolygoncontainsaZdimension,assigningitaplacein3D space.Itcanberotatedandmanipulatedwith3Dtools.Thenewpolygonwillnot,however,haveathickness. Whenyouconverttwoormoreobjectssimultaneously,theconvertedobjectsareplacedinagroup. Toconverta2Dobjectto3Dpolygons: 1. Selectthe2Dobjectorobjectstoconvert. 2. SelectModify>Convert>Convertto3DPolys.

Convert to Mesh
TheConverttoMeshcommandconvertsanyextrude,multipleextrude,sweep,orwireframeobjectintoamesh object.UsetheObjectInfopalettetoeditthemeshobjectvertice(s).Thecommandcanalsocollectanumberofseparate 3Dpolygonsintoasinglemeshobject. Toconverttomesh: 1. Selectthe3Dobjecttoconvert. 2. SelectModify>Convert>ConverttoMesh. Theobjectchangestoameshobject.Toeditthemesh,selectModify>EditGroupandeditthe3Dpolygonsthat makeupthemesh.

Grouping Objects |

291

Grouping Objects
TheGroupcommandgroupstwoormoreindividualobjects(includingtextandsymbols)together.Thegroupof objectsisthentreatedasasingleobject.Forexample,groupedobjectscanbemovedtoadifferentlayerinonemove.In addition,thiscommandcangrouptwoormoregroupsofobjectsintoasinglegroup.

Individual objects

Grouped objects

Togroupobjects: 1. Selecttheobjects(orgroups)tobegrouped. 2. SelectModify>Group. Theobjectsaregroupedintooneobject,andthegroupisplacedintheactiveclass.

Editing a Group
UsetheModify>EditGroupcommandtoeditindividualobjectsinagroupwithoutungroupingthem.This commandalsoeditsagroupofobjectsthatisnestedinsideanothergroup;eachtimethecommandisselected,the programmovesoneleveldeeperintothegroup.SeeObjectEditingModeonpage 16fordetails.

Ungrouping
TheUngroupcommandungroupsobjectsorgroupsthatwerepreviouslycombinedwiththeGroupcommand. Nestedgroupsmustbeungroupedoneatatime.

Grouped objects

Ungrouped objects

Toungroupagroupofobjects: 1. Selectthegrouptoungroup.

292

| Chapter 7: Editing Objects

2. SelectModify>Ungroup. Alternatively,rightclick(Windows)orCtrlclick(Macintosh)onthegroup,andselectUngroupfromtheobject contextmenu. 3. Apluginobjectwillloseitspluginfunctionalityifitisungrouped.Confirmthatthehighlevelobjectsshouldbe ungrouped. Also,ifthegrouphasattachedrecords,youarepromptedtoattachtherecordstotheungroupedobjects.Click Yestotransfertherecordstoeachungroupeditem;clickNotodiscardtherecordinformation. Ifyoutransferrecordstomultipleungroupedobjects,youwillhaveduplicates.Thismaybeaproblemifthe originalgroupedobjectwasbeingtrackedonaworksheet,forexample.

Returning to Top Level


UsetheTopLevelcommandwheneditingnestedgroups,toreturntothemaindrawingareainasinglestep. SelectModify>TopLevel. Theprogramautomaticallyexitsallgroupsbeingeditedandreturnstothemaindrawingarea.

Aligning and Distributing Objects


Aligning and Distributing Objects in the Screen Plane
TheAlign/Distributecommandalignsanddistributesmultipleobjectsinthescreenplane.Alignmentand distributionisbasedupontheverticalandhorizontalaxes,relativetothescreen. Toalign/distributeobjects: 1. Selecttheobjectstobealigned/distributed. 2. SelectModify>Align>Align/Distribute.TheAlign/DistributeObjectsdialogboxopens.

Vertical Align/Distribute

Horizontal Align/Distribute

3. Selecttheobjectalignment/distributioncriteria.Objectsareonlymovedalongthehorizontalandverticalaxes.

Parameter
Align Distribute

Description
Selecttoalignitemsalongthehorizontalorverticalaxis Selecttodistributeitemsalongthehorizontalorverticalaxis

Aligning and Distributing Objects | Parameter


Horizontal Left Center Right Spacing Vertical Top Center Bottom Spacing 4. ClickOK. Theprogramaligns/distributestheselectedobjects. Align/distributebythetopoftheselectedobjects Align/distributebythecentersoftheselectedobjects Align/distributebythebottomoftheselectedobjects Distributethespacingequallybetweentopsandbottomsofadjacentobjects Align/distributebytheleftsideoftheselectedobjects Align/distributebythecentersoftheselectedobjects Align/distributebytherightsideoftheselectedobjects Distributethespacingequallybetweentheleftandrightsidesofadjacentobjects

293

Description

Lociandlockedobjectsarespecialobjectsandbehavedifferentlywhenpresentduringanalignment/distribution operation. Ifalocuspointisoneoftheselectedobjects,allobjectsarealignedrelativetothatlocus.Iftherearemultiplelociinthe selection,thenthelociarealigned/distributedlikeanyotherobject. Lockedobjectsinaselectiondonotmove.Otherobjectsarealigned/distributedrelativetothelockedobjects.

Aligning and Distributing Objects in 3D


Objectscanbealignedand/ordistributedinrelationtoeachotherin3Dspace.3Dobjectalignment/distributionis basedoneitherthegroundorworkingplane. TheAlign/Distribute3Dcommandalignsanddistributesmultipleobjects.Alignmentanddistributionisbasedupon theX,Y,andZaxesoftheactivelayerplaneortheX,Y,andZaxesoftheworkingplane. Toalign/distributeobjectsin3D: 1. Selecttheobjectstobealigned/distributed. 2. SelectModify>Align>Align/Distribute3D. The3DObjectAlignandDistributedialogboxopens.

294

| Chapter 7: Editing Objects

3. Selectthealignment/distributioncriteria.

Parameter
Alignment/ DistributionAxes Align/Distribute Minimum Center Maximum Spacing

Description
Selectwhethertoalign/distributeabouttheactivelayerplaneortheworkingplane SelectAlignandspecifythecoordinatevaluetousewhenaligningobjects,orselect Distributetodistributeobjects Align/distributeobjectsalongthespecifiedaxisbytheminimumcoordinatevalueof eachobject Align/distributeobjectsalongthespecifiedaxisbythecentercoordinatevalueofeach object Align/distributeobjectsalongthespecifiedaxisbythemaximumcoordinatevalueof eachobject Distributespacingbetweenobjectsalongthespecifiedaxis,ensuringthatthespace betweentheobjectsisequalalongtheaxis

4. ClickOK. Theprogramaligns/distributestheselectedobjects. 3Dlociandlockedobjectsarespecialobjectsandbehavedifferentlywhenpresentduringanalignment/ distributionoperation. Ifa3Dlocuspointisoneoftheselectedobjects,allobjectsarealignedrelativetothatlocus.Iftherearemultiple lociintheselection,thenthelociarealigned/distributedlikeanyotherobject. Lockedobjectsinaselectiondonotmove.Otherobjectsarealigned/distributedrelativetothelockedobjects. 2DscreenobjectsareignoredbytheAlign/Distribute3Dcommand.

Aligning Objects to Grid


TheAligntoGridcommandalignsobjectstothesnapgrid,placingtheupperleftcornerofeachobjectatitsclosest gridpoint.TheAligntoGridcommandcanbeusedtorealignobjectstothesnapgridwhenthegridssettingshave changed.ItalsoalignsobjectstothegridiftheywereeithercreatedwithSnaptoGridsnappingturnedofforwere movedoffthegridaftertheywerecreated.

Compressing Images |
Toalignanobjecttoagrid: 1. Selecttheobjectorobjectstoalign. 2. SelectModify>Align>AligntoGrid. Theprogramalignstheobject(s),placingtheupperleftcornerofeachobjectatitsclosestgridpoint.

295

Compressing Images
ThebitmapimagesandimageresourcesinaVectorworksfilecanbecompressedwiththeJPEGcompressionmethod, tosavefilespace.JPEGcompressioncansignificantlyreducebitmapimagefilesize,butcanresultinthelossoffine detailforsomeimages. ThecompressionmethodandfilesizeforaselectedimagedisplayintheObjectInfopalette.Imagesthatarealready compressedbytheJPEGcompressionmethodremainunchanged. AselectedbitmapfiledisplaysBitmapastheobjecttypeatthetopoftheObjectInfopalette.Abitmapfilemay alreadyhavehadPNGcompressionappliedatimport;theCompressImagescommandchangesitscompression formattoJPEG.

Compressing Selected Bitmap Images


Tocompressselectedbitmapimages: 1. Selectthebitmapstobecompressed. 2. SelectTools>CompressImages. TheCompressImagesdialogboxopens.

3. SelectApplyJPEGCompressiontoSelectedBitmapObjects.ClickOKtocompresstheselectedimages.

Compressing All Bitmap Images and/or Image Resources


TheJPEGcompressionmethodcanbeappliedtoallbitmapimagesinthefile.Forthebestpossiblereductioninfile size,imagesthathavebeenimportedasresources(shownasimageresourcesintheResourceBrowser)canalsobe compressedbytheJPEGcompressionmethod. Tocompressallbitmapimagesand/orimageresources: 1. SelectTools>CompressImages. TheCompressImagesdialogboxopens.

296

| Chapter 7: Editing Objects

2. SelectApplyJPEGCompressiontoAll.ChoosewhethertoapplytheJPEGcompressiontoallbitmapimagesin thedrawing,imageresources,orboth.ClickOKtocompresstheimages.

Tracing Bitmaps
TheTraceBitmapcommandtracesbitmapobjectsandpictureobjects(imageswhichhavebeenimportedwiththe PICTasPicturecommand).Itcreatesagroupofvectorlinesfromtheimage. Totraceabitmaporpictureobject: 1. Selecttheimagetotrace. 2. SelectModify>TraceBitmap. 3. EnterthedesiredcriteriaintheTraceBitmapdialogbox.

Parameter
Maximumwidthinpixels CollinearitySensitivity 4. ClickOK.

Description
Specifythemaximumnumberofpixelstoberecognizedasasingleline; pixelcountsabovetheselectedvaluearetraced Selectavaluetodefinethesegmentsizeandaccuracyofthetrace

Thetimeittakestotracetheimagecanvaryfromsecondstohours.Thetracingtimerequiredisdeterminedby theimagesize,aswellasthelinethresholdandcollinearitysensitivitysettingsselected.

Object Operations

InadditiontotheobjecteditingtoolsandcommandsdescribedinEditingObjectsonpage 257,objectscanbe modifiedbyoperationssuchasextruding,sweeping,reshaping,combining,trimming,andperformingsurface operationsononeormultipleobjects.Surfaceoperations(suchastheAddSurfacecommand)canbeperformedon planarobjectswhileina3Dview.

Extruding Objects
Single Extrude
TheExtrudecommandchanges2Dobjectsinto3Dobjectswithaheight.Thetypeofobjectanditsattributes determinesthetypeofextrudethatisproduced.Linesareextrudedasflatplanes,whileallotherobjectsareextruded aswireframe3Dobjects.Whilemorethanoneobjectcanbeextrudedatatime,groupedobjectsmustfirstbe ungroupedinordertobeextruded.Objectsthatarelockedmustfirstbeunlockedinordertobeextruded. Objectsareextrudedintothecurrentviewingprojection,sotheextrusiondirectionisdependentonthecurrentview. Theycanberotatedafterwardsifdesired.SeeRotateToolonpage 282orPresetRotationAnglesonpage 284.The extrudedobjectheightcanbeeditedinteractivelywiththeReshapetool;seeReshapingExtrudedObjectsandSolid Primitivesonpage 310formoreinformation. Whenyouextrudemultipleobjectsatthesametime,theyareturnedintoasingle3Dgroupofobjects.Toeditan individualobject,eitherungroupthesetorusetheEditExtrudecommandtoaccesstheindividualobjects. ThePush/Pulltoolcanalsobeusedtocreateextrudedobjectsfromplanarobjects;seeDirectModelingon page 434. Toextrudeanobject: 1. Selectthe2Dobject(s)toextrude. 2. SelectModel>Extrude. TheCreateExtrudedialogboxopens.

3. EntertheExtrusionheightandspecifyanychangeinsizealongtheXandYaxes,andthenclickOK.

298

| Chapter 8: Object Operations

Multiple Extrude
Apyramid,sphere,orother3Dobjectcanbecreatedfromaseriesof2DobjectsusingtheMultipleExtrudecommand. Includea2Dlocus,orseveralloci,intheselectiontoprovideanextrusionreferencepointorpoints. Theprocessmatchessegmentsoneachobjecttocreatetheextrude.Thesegmentordermaybereversedforone ormoreoftheobjects,producingunexpectedresults(suchasatwistedextrusion).Ifthisoccurs,convertthe objectstoopenpolygonspriortoselectingtheMultipleExtrudecommand. Tocreateamultipleextrude: 1. Selectthe2Dobjectstoextrude. 2. SelectModel>MultipleExtrude. TheCreateExtrudedialogboxopens. 3. EntertheExtrusionheightandspecifythechangeinsizealongtheXandYaxes. 4. ClickOK. Theprogramextrudesthesetofobjects/locuspointsbyconnectingonetoanotherintheirstackingorder,turning theobjectsintoasingle3Dobject.

2D locus

Extrude Along Path


TheExtrudeAlongPathcommandextrudesprofileobjectsalongagivenpath.Profileobjectscanbe2Dobjects,3D polygons,andNURBScurves.Profileobjectscannotbenonplanar,selfintersecting,oramixtureof2Dand3D profiles.IfthepathisnotaNURBScurve,itisconvertedintoaNURBScurveduringthisoperation. WhenyouusetheEditExtrudeAlongPathcommandona3DobjectcreatedusingtheExtrudeAlongPath command,adialogboxopenswiththechoicetoeitheredittheoriginalpathorprofileobject. Toextrudealongapath: 1. Selecttheobjecttobeextruded,andtheobjecttouseasthepath.

Extruding Objects |

299

2. SelectModel>ExtrudeAlongPath. TheExtrudeAlongPathdialogboxopens.Specifytheextrusionparameters.

Parameter
Selectapathobject UniformScale ExponentialScale LockProfilePlane FixProfile

Description
ClicktheNextorPrevbuttontoselecttheobjectthatrepresentsthepath Scalestheobjectlinearlyalongthedesignatedpath;enteraScaleFactorof1toperformno scaling,orenterapositivescalefactorotherthan1foruniformscaling Scalestheobjectexponentiallyalongthedesignatedpath;enteraShapeFactorof0to performnoscaling,orenterashapefactorotherthan0forexponentialscaling LockstheorientationoftheprofileplanetotheglobalZaxis,constrainingtheextrusionto beperpendiculartotheXYplane Maintainstheoriginalrelativepositionandorientationoftheprofileobjectwithrespectto thepath.Normally,thisshouldbedeselected,sothattheprofileismovedandrotatedwith respecttothepath.

Scalingoptionsareavailablewhenthepathobjectisasinglecontinuouscurvewithoutsharpcornersor discontinuities. 3. ClickOKtoextrudetheobjectalongtheselectedpath.

300

| Chapter 8: Object Operations

No scaling (scale factor 1)

Uniform scaling

Exponential scaling

4. ThetypeofScale,Shape/ScaleFactor,LockProfilePlane,andFixProfilestatusofanextrudealongpathobject canbeeditedintheObjectInfopalette.

Creating a Tapered Extrude


Ataperedextrudecanbecreatedfrom2Dobjects,3Dpolygons,andNURBScurves,circles,andarcs.(2Dobjects cannotbescreenplaneobjects;changethemtoplanarobjectsfirst.SeePlanarModesof2DObjects:ScreenPlaneand LayerPlaneonpage 207.) Thiscommandeasilycreateswavyextrusionsbyenteringatapervalueofzero.Thecommandalsoextrudes2Dobjects into3Dobjectswithadefinedtaper.Useittoconvertasingleobjectorseveralobjectsatthesametime.Oncecreated, theheightandtapercanbeeditedintheObjectInfopalette. ThetaperedextrudeobjectheightcanbeeditedinteractivelywiththeReshapetool;seeReshapingExtrudedObjects andSolidPrimitivesonpage 310formoreinformation. Tocreateataperedextrude: 1. Selecttheobject(s)toturnintoataperedextrude. 2. SelectModel>TaperedExtrude. TheTaperedAngleandExtrudeHeightdialogboxopens.

3. EntertheHeight(Z)oftheextrudeandtheTaperAngle.Apositivetaperdegreeshrinkstheobjectasitextrudes, whileanegativetaperdegreewidenstheobject. SetaTaperAngleof0tocreateanextrusionwithnotaper. 4. ClickOKtocreatethetaperedextrude.

Sweeping Objects |

301

NURBS curve extruded with zero Taper Angle

Ifataperedextrudefails,theobjectrevertstothelastknowngoodvalue.

Sweeping Objects
TheSweepcommandconverts2Dobjectsinto3Dcylindricalobjects.Useittoconvertasingleobjectatatime,orto convertseveralselectedobjects.Whilemorethanoneobjectcanbesweptatatime,groupedobjectsmustfirstbe ungrouped.Lockedobjectsmustfirstbeunlockedinordertocreateasweep. Asweephasfourbasicelements:acentroid(locus),anarcangle,asegmentangle,andapitch.Thelocusactsasthe sweepscenterofrotation.Ifalocusisnotselected,theprogramsweepstheobjectarounditsleftedgeorpointfarthest ontheleftifmorethanoneobjectisselected.AlocuscanberelocatedoraddedaftercreationusingtheEditSweep command.Theotherthreeelements(arcangle,segmentangle,pitch)canbeeditedafterthesweephasbeencreated throughtheObjectInfopalette. Ifmorethanoneobjectisselectedwhencreatingasweep,theobjectsareautomaticallygrouped.Toeditanobject withinthesweep,usetheEditSweepcommand. Tocreateasweep: 1. Selectthe2Dobject(s)tosweepand,ifcreated,thelocus. 2. SelectModel>Sweep. TheCreateSweepdialogboxopens.EnterthesweepcriteriaandclickOK.

302

| Chapter 8: Object Operations

Parameter
Size Height Radius Angles StartAngle ArcAngle SegmentAngle

Description
Indicatesthesweepheight Indicatesthesweepradius

Specifiestheangletobeginthesweep;normallystartat0 Specifiesthedegreeofthesweep.Bydefault,objectsaresweptafull360. Indicatesthenumberofsegmentsthatmakeupthesweep.Thedefaultis36segments,each one10fromthenextonthearc.Theanglesettingmustbeapositivenumber.Alargenumber ofsegmentscanslowdownperformance. Setsthedegreetowhichthesweepspirals.Asweepspitchisrepresentedintheplusor minusheightperrevolution.Forexample,ifthepitchis1,everyrevolutionraisestheobject asingleinch.Thedefaultis0.


Locus point selected

Pitch

Create object

Place locus to act as sweep centroid; select both Object swept, rotated, and rendered

Reshaping Objects
TheReshapetoolreshapesanobjectafterithasbeencreated,bymoving,removing,changing,oraddingtoits vertices.Changethelengthofobjects(includingdimensions),reshapesingleobjects,orreshapemultipleobjectsat once.Reshapepolygonsandpolylines,includinglinesdrawnwiththeFreehandtool(whichareconsidered polylines).Inaddition,specifyexactradiusmeasurementsforcirculararccontrolpoints.TheReshapetoolcanalsobe usedtoreshape3Dsolids,walls,roofs,NURBScurvesandsurfaces,andotherobjects. ThemodesandfunctionalityavailablefortheReshapetooldependonthecurrentlyselectedobjectorobjects,andthe currentview.

Functionality Enabled
2Dreshape 2Dreshape 3Dreshape 3Dreshape 2Dreshape

Selection or view
2Dplanarorscreenobject(s),inanyview Multipleobjectsselected,inanyview,orareshapemarqueeexists Single3Dpolygon,3Dsolid,NURBScurve,NURBSsurface,sectionline(Design Seriesrequired),inanyview Singlewall,roofobject,pluginobjectwithcustomreshapebehavior(suchasthe retainingwallsitemodifier,DesignSeriesrequired),ina3Dview Wall,roofobject,pluginobjectinTop/Planview

Reshaping Objects | Functionality Enabled


Marquee

303

Selection or view
Noselection

2D Reshape Modes
TheReshapetoolhasfivedifferentreshapemodeswhen2Dfunctionalityisenabled.Italsohasfourcontrolpoint modesforchangingtheexistingvertex.Inaddition,thetoolcanoperateinthreemarqueeselectionmodes.
Change Vertex Delete Vertex Corner Point Cubic Spline Point Fillet (Circular Arc) Point Enable Rectangular Marquee Enable Polygonal Marquee

Move Polygon Handles

Add Vertex

Hide or Show Edges

Bzier Control Point

Radius (Point on Arc) Point

Enable Lasso Marquee

Fillet Preferences

Mode
MovePolygonHandles ChangeVertex AddVertex DeleteVertex HideorShowEdges CornerPoint BzierControlPoint CubicSplinePoint Radius(PointonArc) Point Fillet(CircularArc) Point

Description
Dragavertexbyclickingit,ordragasegmentbyclickingonthemidpoint Changesanexistingvertexintoacorner,Bzier,cubic,radius,orarcvertex Addsavertexasacorner,Bzier,cubic,radius,orarcvertex Removestheselectedvertex Clickingonthemidpointhidesthepolylineorpolygonsegment;clickingonavertex hidesthesegmentthatfollowsthevertex InChangeVertexmode,changesthevertextoacornervertex;inAddVertexmode,adds acornervertex InChangeVertexmode,changesthevertextoaBziervertex;inAddVertexmode,adds aBziervertex InChangeVertexmode,changesthevertextoacubicvertex;inAddVertexmode,addsa cubicvertex InChangeVertexmode,changesthevertextoaradiusvertex;inAddVertexmode,adds aradiusvertex InChangeVertexmode,changesthevertextoanarcvertex;inAddVertexmode,adds anarcvertex.ClicktheFilletPreferencesmodebutton,enteraFilletRadiusintheFillet Settingsdialogbox,andclickOK(forthelargestpossiblefillet,settheFilletRadiusto zero). Createsarectangularmarqueeboxaroundseveralvertices.Clicktosetthestartpoint, dragthemouseinthedesireddirection,andreleasetosettheendpoint.Allvertices withinthemarqueeareselectedforperformingasubsequentreshapeoperation.

EnableRectangular Marquee

304
Mode

| Chapter 8: Object Operations


Description
Createsafreeformmarqueearoundseveralvertices,allowingamoreexactselectionof verticesofirregular2Dshapes.Clicktosetthestartpoint,dragthemouseinthedesired direction,andreleasetosettheendpoint.Allverticeswithinthemarqueeareselected forperformingasubsequentreshapeoperation. Createsamarqueewithanirregularpolygonalshapearoundseveralvertices.Clicktoset thestartpoint,andthencontinueclickingtodefinetheshape.Doubleclicktofinishthe marquee.Allverticeswithinthemarqueeareselectedforperformingasubsequent reshapeoperation.

EnableLassoMarquee

EnablePolygonal Marquee

2DobjectsandsymbolscanberesizedwiththeSingleObjectInteractiveScalingModeoftheSelectiontool;see TheSelectionToolonpage 58.Certainobjects(polylines,polygons,rectangles,roundedrectangles,circles, ovals,andarcs)canalsobereshapedwiththeFreehandtool.SeeReshapingObjectswiththeFreehandToolon page 237. FunctionalitysimilartotheReshapetoolisavailablefromtheObjectInfopaletteShapetab;seePolylineParameters onpage 261.

3D Reshape Modes
TheReshapetoolchangestheheightandradiusofanextrudedobject,taperedextrude,ora3Dobjectthatisnota meshobject.Inaddition,useittoreshapewalls(seeEditingWallsonpage 464),3Dpolygons,andsolidprimitives (suchascylinders,hemispheres,cones,andspheres),reshaperetainingwalls(DesignSeriesrequired),changethe angle(rise/run)ofroofscreatedwiththeRoofFacecommand,andreshaperoofobjectscreatedwiththeCreateRoof command(seeReshapingRoofObjectsonpage 484). TheReshapetoolgenerallyhasthreemodeswhen3Dfunctionalityisenabled.Dependingontheselectedobject, additionalmodesareavailable,asdescribedintheassociatedsections. Forsomeobjects,suchas3Dsolids,thereshapingfunctionalityisaccesseddirectlyfromthedrawing,andthe marqueemodesdisplayinthetoolbar.
Add Vertex

Move Vertex

Remove Vertex

Mode
MoveVertex AddVertex RemoveVertex

Description
Changesthelocationofaselectedvertexorseveralvertices Addsavertextotheobject Removesavertexfromtheobject

Marquee Modes
Whennoobjectsareselected,theReshapetoolhasthreemarqueemodestodrawaplanarmarqueeinanyview.

Reshaping Objects |
Enable Lasso Marquee Enable Rectangular Marquee Enable Polygonal Marquee

305

Mode
EnableRectangular Marquee EnableLassoMarquee

Description
Createsarectangularmarqueeboxaroundseveralvertices.Clicktosetthestartpoint, dragthemouseinthedesireddirection,andreleasetosettheendpoint.Allvertices withinthemarqueeareselectedforperformingasubsequentreshapeoperation. Createsafreeformmarqueearoundseveralvertices,allowingamoreexactselection ofverticesofirregular2Dshapes.Clicktosetthestartpoint,dragthemouseinthe desireddirection,andreleasetosettheendpoint.Allverticeswithinthemarqueeare selectedforperformingasubsequentreshapeoperation. Createsamarqueewithanirregularpolygonalshapearoundseveralvertices.Clickto setthestartpoint,andthencontinueclickingtodefinetheshape.Doubleclickto finishthemarquee.Allverticeswithinthemarqueeareselectedforperforminga subsequentreshapeoperation.

EnablePolygonal Marquee

Clickdraginthedrawingtobegindrawingamarqueearoundverticesforreshaping;thecurrentlyactivemarquee modedeterminesthemarqueetypethatwillbedrawn.Regardlessofwhatmarqueemodeiscurrentlyactive,youcan alternativelypressandholdtheAlt(Windows)orOption(Macintosh)keytodrawalassomarqueeorpressandhold theShift+Alt(Windows)orShift+Option(Macintosh)keytodrawapolygonalmarquee. Assoonasareshapemarqueeexistsandanobjectisselected,theavailablemodesswitchtothe2Dreshapemodes, and2Dreshapefunctionalityisenabled(see2DReshapeModesonpage 303).Thisallows2Dreshapebehaviortobe performed,evenona3Dobjectandina3Dview,whenthevertexisenclosedinthereshapemarquee.Forexample, walllengthcanbechangedwiththeReshapetoolina3Dview,ifthewallendvertexisenclosedwithinareshape marqueethatiscoplanarwiththebottomelevationofthewall. 3DobjectscanbemovediffullyinsidethemarqueeandinToporTop/Planview. Whileusinganymarqueeselectionmode,iftheverticestobeselectedaresurroundedbyafilledobject,firstselectthe object(s)usingtheSelectiontool.PressandholdtheShiftkeywhiledrawingthemarqueearoundthevertices;the currentlyactivemarqueemodedeterminesthemarqueetypethatwillbedrawn.Thedesiredverticesareselected withouttheboundaryobjectbeingselected. Performthedesiredreshapeoperationontheselectedvertices.

Move Polygon Handles Mode


Selectthismodetoreshapea2Dpolylineorpolygonbymovingoneofitsvertices. Toreshapea2Dpolylineorpolygonbymovingavertex: 1. ClicktheReshapetoolfromtheBasicpalette. 2. ClicktheMovePolygonHandlesmodefromtheToolbar. 3. Selectthepolylineorpolygontochange.

306

| Chapter 8: Object Operations

4. Clickthevertextomoveanddragittoitsnewlocation.
Bzier

Click on the desired vertex; when the Resize cursor displays, drag it to the new location

Ifanobjectcannotbereshapedwiththistool,itsverticesdonotdisplay.

Change Vertex Mode


Selectthismodetochangeanexistingvertextoadifferenttypeofcontrolpoint:corner,Bzier,cubic,radius,orfillet (circulararc)point. Toreshapea2Dpolylineorpolygonbychangingavertex: 1. ClicktheReshapetoolfromtheBasicpalette. 2. ClicktheChangeVertexmodefromtheToolbar. 3. Selectthepolylineorpolygontochange. 4. FromtheToolbar,selectthenewtypeofcontrolpointforthevertex. Changevertexdoesnotworkonamidpointhandle.Selectonlyavertexpoint. 5. Clickonavertextochangeittothenewtype.

Click on the vertex when the Change Vertex cursor displays

Add Vertex Mode


Selectthismodebuttontoaddavertextothepolygon/polyline.Thevertexcanbeanyofthefollowing:corner,Bzier, cubic,radius,orfillet(circulararc).

Reshaping Objects |
Toreshapea2Dpolylineorpolygonbyaddingavertex: 1. ClicktheReshapetoolfromtheBasicpalette. 2. ClicktheAddVertexmodefromtheToolbar. 3. Selectthepolylineorpolygontochange. 4. FromtheToolbar,selectthetypeofcontrolpointforthenewvertex.

307

5. Movethecursortoanexistingvertexnearthelocationwherethenewvertexistobeadded.Thecursorbecomes anarrowwithtwoblackdiamondswhenavertexcanbeadded. Clickingonthehandleatacenterpointalonganedgeaddsanewvertexexactlyatthatcenterpoint. 6. Dragthecursortothedesiredlocationforthenewvertex. 7. Clickatthenewlocation.

With the Add Vertex cursor, click-drag to the new location

Delete Vertex Mode


Anexistingvertexonthepolygon/polylinecanbedeleted. Toreshapea2Dpolylineorpolygonbydeletingavertex: 1. ClicktheReshapetoolfromtheBasicpalette. 2. ClicktheDeleteVertexmodefromtheToolbar. 3. Selectthepolylineorpolygontochange. 4. Clickonanexistingvertextodeleteit.

308

| Chapter 8: Object Operations

With the Delete Vertex cursor, click the vertex to remove it

Hide or Show Edges Mode


Selectthismodebuttontohide,butnotdelete,aportionoftheobjectsboundary. Tohideorshowtheedgeofa2Dpolylineorpolygon: 1. ClicktheReshapetoolfromtheBasicpalette. 2. ClicktheHideorShowEdgesmodefromtheToolbar. 3. Selectthepolylineorpolygontochange. 4. Clickavertexneartheedgetobehidden.

With the Hide/Show Edges cursor, click a vertex near an edge to show or hide the edge

Clickagaintoshowthehiddenedge.

Performing Multiple Reshapes


Insteadofindividuallyreshapingtheverticesofobjects,oneatatime,severalverticesandevenseveralobjectscanbe reshapedatonetime.Inaddition,verticesandholescanbedeletedfromobjects.Multiplereshapingcanbeperformed onlines,polylines,walls,dimensions,andpolygons.Polygonsincludeallregularandirregularpolygons,aswellas objectsdrawnwiththeFreehandtool.Forexample,usethisfunctiontoresizewallswithoutmovinganyofthedoors orwindowsplacedinsidethem,oraffectingintersectionswithotherwalls. 2Dplanarobjectsmustbecoplanarandintheactiveplanetobereshaped;theselectionmarqueeisdrawninthe activeplane.Multiple3Dobjectscannotbereshapedatonetime,butmustbeselectedindividually. ThisfunctiondoesnotworkonobjectsdrawnwiththeCircle,Oval,orArctools.

Reshaping Objects |
Toresizeobjectswithmultiplereshape: 1. Selecttheobjectstoresize. 2. ClicktheReshapetoolfromtheBasicpalette,andselectMovePolygonHandlesfromtheToolbar. Thecursorchangestoacrosshair.

309

3. Clickanddragtocreatearectangularmarqueearoundmultipleverticesoftheobjectstoberesizedordeleted. Tocreatealassomarquee,presstheOption(Macintosh)orAlt(Windows)keywhencreatingthemarquee.Press theCommandandOption(Macintosh)orCtrlandAlt(Windows)keysforpolygonalmarqueeselectionmode. 4. ChangethelocationoftheverticesbyeitherclickinganddraggingwiththemouseorbyusingtheMove command(seeEditingObjectSurfacesonpage 339).Alternatively,nudgetheselectedverticesbypressingthe Shiftandarrowkeys. Tousethemouse,clickdragontheverticesandmovethemtothedesiredlocation.Apreviewdisplaysthe currentandfuturelocationoftheobjectvertices.

Create marquee to select multiple vertices, and then drag selected vertices to new location

PresstheDeletekey(Macintosh)orDeleteorBackspacekeys(Windows)todeletetheverticesorholes. Alternatively,enteranexactlengthintheDatabar.PresstheTabkeywhilestillpressingthemousebuttonuntil theLfieldishighlighted,enteravalueforthelength,andreleasethemousebutton. Wallsareresizedwiththewallintersections,doors,orothersymbolsmaintainedinplace.Themarqueeremains visibleuntilanothertoolorcommandisselected.

Converting Polyline Vertices from Arc to Radius


AsofVectorworksversion2012,anewtypeofpolylinevertex,theradiusvertex,simplifiesthereshapingofpolylines. Polylinesfromolderversionsmayincludearcvertices,whicharehardertoedit.Eachvertexofapolylinecanbe changedtoradiustypewiththeChangeVertexmodeoftheReshapetool,orbyeditingthevertextypeintheObject Infopalette.However,thisistediousiftheobjectincludesseveralarcvertices.TheConvertArctoRadiusPolyline commandisavailabletoconvertallofthearcverticestoradiusvertices.Objectslikehardscapesorslabs(Vectorworks DesignSeriesrequired),whicharebasedonpathpolylines,canbenefitbyconvertingtheirpathpolylinetocontain radiusvertices,becausetheybecomeeasiertoreshape. Toconvertarcverticestoradiusvertices: 1. Selectthepolyline;forpathbasedobjects,doubleclickontheobjectorselectModify>Edit[Object]toaccess thepathineditingmode.SeeObjectEditingModeonpage 16. 2. Rightclick(Windows)orCtrlclick(Macintosh)onapolylinewhichcontainsatleastonearcvertex,andselect ConvertArctoRadiusPolylinefromthecontextmenu. 3. Thearcverticesofthepolylineorpathobjectareconvertedtoradiusvertices.

310

| Chapter 8: Object Operations

Radius vertices are easier to edit with the Reshape tool

Reshaping Polylines
PolylinescanbereshapedinamannerthatissimilartoanEditGroupoperation.Thepolylineitselfislockedinthis process,butholescanbeaddedtoit,filleted,chamfered,offset,duplicated,extracted,anddeletedfromit. Toreshapeapolyline: 1. Selectthepolylinetochange. 2. SelectModify>EditPolyline. 3. Selectpolylineholesandmove,delete,orreshapethem.Addnewholestothepolyline,ormoveaholeoutofthe polylinetoextractit,creatingindividualpolylines. Theoriginalpolylineislockedandcannotbeedited. 4. ClickExitPolylinetoreturntothedrawing.

Original polyline

In Edit Polyline mode, a hole is added

The polyline has been edited

Reshaping Extruded Objects and Solid Primitives


TheReshapetoolchangestheheight,andwhenapplicable,theradiusofextrudes,cylinders,spheres,hemispheres, andcones,andtheheightandangleoftaperedextrudes. Toreshapeanextrude,cylinder,sphere,hemisphere,cone,ortaperedextrude: 1. Selecttheobjecttoreshape. 2. ClicktheReshapetoolfromthe3DModelingtoolset.

Reshaping Objects |

311

Aresizehandleisaddedtobothtopandbottomofanextrudedobject.Multipleresizehandlesareaddedaround cylinder,sphere,hemisphere,andconeobjects.Forataperedextrudeobject,oneresizehandleisaddedtoitstop forchangingitsheight,andonetothesideforchangingitstaperangle. Taperedextrudeswithataperangleofzerohaveanadditionalresizeangleatthebottom. 3. Clickanddragtheresizehandletochangetheobjectsheight,radius,ortaperangle. Whenthecursorisoveraradiusresizehandle,thestandardarrowcursorchangesintoadoubleheadedarrow.It changestoanunfilleddoubleheadedarrowoveraheightresizehandle. 4. Clickagainwhentheobjectisatthedesiredheight,radius,orangle. Alternatively,presstheTabkeyandenteranumericvaluefortheheight,radius,orangleintheDatabar.

With the Reshape cursor, drag the resize handle up (or down) to the desired extrude height

Change the radius of a cylinder, sphere, hemisphere, or cone by dragging the resize handle to the desired radius

Change the angle of a tapered extrude by dragging the side resize handle to the desired angle

Alternatively,usethePush/Pulltoolfortheseoperations.Changingthetoporbottomfaceofanextrudedoesnot changetheobjecttype;itremainsanextrude.

Reshaping 3D Polygons
TheReshapetool,locatedintheBasicpalette,canmanipulateandreshape3Dpolygons. Toreshape3Dpolygons: 1. Selectthe3Dpolygontoreshape.Onlyone3Dpolygoncanbeselectedforreshapingatatime. 2. ClicktheReshapetoolfromtheBasicpalette. SelectthemodefromtheToolbar.
Add Vertex

Move Vertex

Remove Vertex

Mode
MoveVertex AddVertex RemoveVertex

Description
Changesthelocationofaselectedvertexorseveralvertices Addsavertextotheobject Removesavertexfromtheobject

312

| Chapter 8: Object Operations

3. Selectavertex.Whenthecursorisoveravertex,thestandardarrowcursorchangestoanunfilled,fourway arrow.

4. Reshapethe3Dpolygon. InMoveVertexmode,clickdragthemousetomovethevertexorvertices.Theselectedconstraintmoderestricts themovementtotheworkingplaneortooneoftheaxes.Releasethemouseatthedesiredlocation. Alternatively,entertheexactcoordinatesintheDatabar.PresstheTabkey,enterthecoordinates,andthenpress Enter. ToaddavertexinAddVertexmode,movethecursortoanexistingvertexnearthelocationwherethenew vertexistobeadded.Thecursorbecomesanarrowwithtwoblackdiamondswhenavertexcanbeadded.Drag thecursortothedesiredlocationforthenewvertex.Clickatthenewlocation. TodeleteavertexinRemoveVertexmode,clickonthevertextodelete.

Reshaping NURBS Curves


TheReshapetool,locatedintheBasicpalette,canmanipulateandreshapeNURBScurves. ToreshapeNURBScurves: 1. SelecttheNURBScurvetoreshape.Toreshapemultiplevertices,thecurvemustbeasingle,smoothcontinuous NURBScurve. 2. ClicktheReshapetoolfromtheBasicpalette. SelectthemodefromtheToolbar.
Remove Vertex Working Plane Constrain Y-axis Constrain

Move Vertex

Z-axis Constrain

Add Vertex

Change Vertex

X-axis Constrain

Mode
MoveVertex AddVertex DeleteVertex ChangeVertex WorkingPlaneConstrain

Description
Changesthelocationofavertexorseveralvertices AddsavertextotheNURBScurve RemovesavertexfromtheNURBScurve Togglesanexistingvertexbetweenacornervertexandsmoothvertex Movestheselectedvertexorverticesonaworkingplane

Reshaping Objects | Mode


Xaxisconstrain Yaxisconstrain Zaxisconstrain

313

Description
MovestheselectedvertexorverticesalongtheXaxis MovestheselectedvertexorverticesalongtheYaxis MovestheselectedvertexorverticesalongtheZaxis

3. Selectavertex.Whenthecursorisoveravertex,thestandardarrowcursorchangestoanunfilled,fourway arrow. Alternatively,toselectseveralverticesatonetimeinMoveVertexmode,clickwiththeShiftkeypressedorclick anddragtocreateamarqueearoundthedesiredvertices.Positionthecursoroveroneofthevertices.

4. ReshapetheNURBScurve. InMoveVertexmode,clickdragthemousetomovethevertexorvertices.Theselectedconstraintmoderestricts themovementtotheworkingplaneortooneoftheaxes.Releasethemouseatthedesiredlocation. Alternatively,entertheexactcoordinatesintheDatabar.PresstheTabkey,enterthecoordinates,andthenpress Enter. ToaddavertexinAddVertexmode,movethecursortoanexistingvertexnearthelocationwherethenew vertexistobeadded.Thecursorbecomesanarrowwithtwoblackdiamondswhenavertexcanbeadded.Drag thecursortothedesiredlocationforthenewvertex.Clickatthenewlocation. TodeleteavertexinRemoveVertexmode,clickonthevertextodelete. TogglethevertexbetweenacornervertexandasmoothvertexbyclickingonthevertexinChangeVertexmode.

Reshaping NURBS Surfaces


TheReshapetool,locatedintheBasicpalette,canmanipulateNURBSsurfacecontrolpointsandtoreshapeNURBS surfaces.Forexample,adomeorbellcurveeffectcanbecreatedbymanipulatingthevertices. Thistoolcanpotentiallycreatesurfaceswhichcannotbefurthermanipulatedinthe3DPowerPack.SeeSurface GeometryRequirementsonpage 400. ToreshapeaNURBSsurface: 1. SelecttheNURBSsurfacetoreshape. 2. ClicktheReshapetoolfromthe3DModelingtoolset. SelectthemodefromtheToolbar.

314

| Chapter 8: Object Operations


Move NURBS Surface U Vertices Move NURBS Surface Vertex Working Plane Y Axis Constrain Constrain

Z Axis Constrain

Move NURBS Surface V Vertices

X Axis Constrain

Mode
MoveNURBSSurfaceVertex MoveNURBSSurfaceUVertices MoveNURBSSurfaceVVertices Workingplaneconstrain Xaxisconstrain Yaxisconstrain Zaxisconstrain

Description
Changesthepositionoftheselectedvertexorverticesonly ChangesthepositionofallverticesinarowintheUdirection ChangesthepositionofallverticesinarowintheVdirection Movestheselectedvertexorverticesonaworkingplane MovestheselectedvertexorverticesalongtheXaxis MovestheselectedvertexorverticesalongtheYaxis MovestheselectedvertexorverticesalongtheZaxis

Toselectonevertexorrowofvertices,positionthecursoroveroneoftheNURBSsurfacevertices.Whenthe cursorisoveravertex,thestandardarrowcursorchangestoanunfilled,fourwayarrow.

Toselectseveralverticesatonetime,clickwiththeShiftkeypressedorclickanddragtocreateamarquee aroundthedesiredvertices. Ifseveralverticesareselected,positionthecursoroveroneofthem. 3. Clickdragthemousetomovethevertexorvertices. 4. Releasethemouseatthedesiredlocation.

Offsetting Objects |

315

Offsetting Objects
TheOffsettooleithercreatesaduplicateobjectoffsetfromtheoriginal,oroffsetstheselectedobjectfromitsoriginal location.Usethistooltoeasilycreateparallelobjects,suchaslinesandwalls.Alsouseittoproducealargerorsmaller versionofclosedobjects,suchasovalsandconnectedwalls.NURBSsurfacesareoffsetbytheoffsetdistancealongthe surfacenormaldirection. TheOffsettoolcanbeusedwiththefollowingobjects(seetheVectorworksDesignSeriesUsersGuideforinformation abouttheVectorworksDesignSeriesobjects).

Vectorworks Fundamentals Objects


NURBScurves Walls Open2Dobjects(arcs, lines,polylines) NURBSsurfaces Revisionclouds Closed2Dobjects(circles,ovals,rectangles,rounded rectangles,polylines,polygons)

Vectorworks Design Series Objects


Hardscapes Seatinglayouts Stipples Massingmodels Sitemodifiers Plants Propertylines Spaces Redlines

TheOffsettoolhasfourmodes,whicharealsooptionsintheOffsetToolPreferencesdialogbox.
Offset by Point Offset Original Object

Offset by Distance

Distance (for Offset by Distance mode only) Duplicate and Offset Offset Preferences

The2Dconversionresfield,ontheEdittaboftheVectorworksPreferencesdialogbox,adjuststhedegreeof smoothing.Thehighertheconversionresolution,thehigherthedegreeofsmoothing,whichproducesamore accurateoffsetofobjects.Formoreinformationon2Dconversionresolution,refertoSettingVectorworks Preferencesonpage 17. Tooffsetoneormoreobjects: 1. Selecttheobject(s)tobeoffset,ifdesired. 2. ClicktheOffsettoolfromtheBasicpalette. 3. ClickOffsetPreferencesfromtheToolbar. TheOffsetToolPreferencesdialogboxopens.

316

| Chapter 8: Object Operations

Parameter
Method OffsetbyDistance OffsetbyPoint Duplication DuplicateandOffset OffsetOriginalObject WallOffset OffsetfromCenterLine OffsetfromNearestEdge SmoothCorners CloseOpenCurves

Description
PlacestheoffsetobjectatthespecifiedDistancefromtheoriginallocation(same asselectingtheToolbarbuttonandenteringthedistanceontheToolbar) Placestheoffsetobjectatadistancespecifiedbyamouseclick(sameasselecting theToolbarbutton)

Createsaduplicateoftheobjectattheoffsetlocation(sameasselectingtheTool barbutton) Movestheoriginalobjecttotheoffsetlocation(sameasselectingtheToolbar button)

Offsetswallsfromthecenterlineofthewallsoriginallocation Offsetswallsfromthenearestedgeofthewallsoriginallocation Roundssharpcornersintheoffsetobject Drawslinesatbothendsoftheoffsetandoriginalobjects,tocreateaclosedshape fromtheopencurves

4. SpecifythedesiredpreferencesandclickOK.

Offsetting Objects |

317

Toselectadditionalobjectsortochangethecurrentlyselectedobjectstooffset(orduplicateandoffset),pressand holdtheAltkey(Windows)orCmdkey(Macintosh)whileshiftclickingorclickdraggingthemousearound themtomarqueeselectthem;theSelectiontoolisactivatedinboomerangmodewhiletheAltorCmdkeyis beingpressed. 5. Dependingontheoffsetpreferences,dooneofthefollowing:

Offset Method
OffsetbyDistance Clickonobjectstooffset

Description
Selecttheobjecttobeoffset;theobjectishighlighted.Clicktospecifytheoffset locationrelativetotheselectedobject,andtoplacetheoffsetobject.Tocontinue offsettingobjects,clickanotherobjecttohighlightit,andthenclickagainto indicatetheoffsetlocation. Clickinthedrawingtospecifytheoffsetlocationrelativetotheoriginallyselected object,andtoplacetheoffsetobject.Theoffsetobjectisnowselected;tooffset fromthatobject,clickagaintoindicatetheoffsetlocation.

Offsetselectedobjects

OffsetbyPoint Clickonobjectstooffset Selecttheobjecttobeoffset;theobjectishighlighted.Movethemousetoadjust theoffsetpreviewifnecessary,andthenclicktoplacetheoffsetobject.Tocontinue offsettingobjects,clickanotherobjecttohighlightit,andthenclickagainto indicatetheoffsetlocation. Clicktosettheoffsetpoint(movethemousetoadjusttheoffsetpreviewif necessary),andthenclickagaintoplacetheoffsetobject.Theoffsetobjectisnow selected;tooffsetfromthatobject,clickagaintoindicatetheoffsetlocation.

Offsetselectedobjects

Dependingontheoffsetpreferences,eitheraduplicateobjectortheoriginalobjectisplacedattheoffsetlocation.

Select the walls with the Selection tool, and then select the Offset tool. Select Offset by Distance mode, and set the offset Distance to 2. Click outside the walls to offset them 2 beyond the original location.

318

| Chapter 8: Object Operations

In Offset by Point mode, click the object to be copied and offset; the object is highlighted

Click the point where the offset is to be placed; a preview displays

Click again to place the offset object

Click on an open area of the group

Click on an enclosed area of the group

For grouped objects, the offset result depends on where you click

Trimming and Clipping Objects


Trim Command
UsetheTrimcommandtotrimlinesorwallswheretheyintersectwithanotherobject. Totrimobjects: 1. Positionthetrimmingobjectwithovertheobject(s)tobetrimmed. 2. Selectthecuttingobject. 3. SelectModify>Trim. 4. Clickontheobjecttobetrimmed. Thetrimcommandisexecutedandthepiecescanbemovedindependently.

Trimming and Clipping Objects |

319

Trim Tool
TheTrimtooltrimsaportionoftheselectedobject.Objectsthatcanbeeditedinthismannerincludelines,arcs, rectangles,roundedrectangles,circles,ovals,polylines,andpolygons. Totrimaportionofanobject: 1. Positionthetrimmingobjectovertheobject(s)tobetrimmed. 2. ClicktheTrimtoolfromtheBasicpalette. Thestandardarrowcursorchangesintoahand. 3. Clicktheportionoftheobjecttobetrimmed. Thatportionoftheobjectistrimmedbacktotheclosestintersectionwithanotherobject. Totrimanotherportionofthesameobject,movethehandtothatsectionandclick.

Clip Tool
TheCliptoolcutsoutpiecesfrom2Dobjects,suchaslines,arcs,rectangles,roundedrectangles,circles,ovals, polygons,andpolylines.Inaddition,thistoolcanbeusedtosplitanobject.TheCliptooloperatesonallselected objectsintheactiveplane.
Removes Outside Rectangular clipping object

Removes Inside

Circular clipping object

Splits at Boundaries

Polygonal clipping object

Mode
RemovesInside RemovesOutside SplitsatBoundaries Clippingobjectshape

Description
Cutsaholeintheobject(s)accordingtotheclippingobjectshape Trimseverythingawayfromtheoutsideoftheclippingobjectshape Splitstheobject(s)andtheclippingareaintoseparateobjects Eachmodecanuseoneoftheclippingshapes;selectrectangular,polygonal,orcircular

320

| Chapter 8: Object Operations


Toclipobjects:

1. Selecttheobjectorobjectstocut. 2. ClicktheCliptoolfromtheBasicpalette. 3. Selecttheclippingmodeandtheclippingobjectshape. 4. Clickanddragtocreateamarqueebox.Themarqueeisdefinedontheactiveplane. Theobjectisclippedasdefinedbytheclippingobjectshape.


1st click

2nd click

Resizing Objects
Fixed Point Resize Tool
TheFixedPointResizetoolresizesrectangles,roundedrectangles,polygons,circles,andovalsusingafixedpointon thedrawingasthepointofreference.Itisbestusedtoscaleanobjectrelativetoaparticularlocationinthedrawing.To rescaleanobjectsymmetricallyorasymmetricallybyaspecificfactor,usetheScaleObjectscommand.SeeScaling Objectsonpage 321. Toresizeanobject: 1. Selecttheobjectorobjectstochange. 2. ClicktheFixedPointResizetoolfromtheBasicpalette. 3. Clickonthepointinthedrawingtoserveasthefulcrum. Toscaletheresizedobjectsymmetrically,selectafulcrumpointthatisattheexactcenteroftheobject. Ifthefixedpointisnotatthecenteroftheobject,theresizedobjectchangesproportions. 4. Clickonanobjectedgeanddragtheobjectintoitsnewsize,shape,and/orlocation.

Resizing Objects |

321

Click fulcrum point

Click and drag to resize

Ifthedragpointismovedpasttheselectedfulcrum,theobjectisreversed. Thestartingpointfordraggingcannotbethesameasthefulcrumpointorexactlyhorizontalorverticaltoit.

Scaling Objects
TheScaleObjectscommandrescalestheXand/orYdimensionofanyselectedsolid,object,orgroup,orrescalesthe selecteditemsuniformlyintheX,Y,andZdimensions.Theselecteditemisrescaledusingitscenterpoint.Theobject canberescaledbyindicatingasegmentonthedrawingandenteringanewdistanceforthesegment.Ifnoobjectsare selected,theentiredrawingcanbescaled. Spheres,hemispheres,andconescannotbescaledasymmetrically.Symbolsandlayerlinkscannotbescaledwith thiscommand.UsetheObjectInfopaletteortheSelectiontooltoscalesymbols.

Toscaleobjects: 1. Selecttheobject(s)toscale. Ifnoobjectsareselected,allobjectsonalllayersofthedrawingarescaled. 2. SelectModify>ScaleObjects. TheScaleObjectsdialogboxopens.Specifythescalingmethodandparameters.

322

| Chapter 8: Object Operations

Parameter
Symmetric X,Y,ZFactor SymmetricByDistance CurrentDistance NewDistance Asymmetric X/YScalingFactor Scaletext Entiredrawing

Description
ScalesuniformlyalongX,Y,andZaxes Enterthescalingfactor(forexample,enter2todoubleor .5tohalvethescale) Scalessymmetricallyusingtheratioofthecurrentandnewdistancevaluesasascale factor Enterthecurrentdistancetobescaled,orclickthebuttontouseatemporarytoolto indicatethedistanceonthedrawing Enterthenewvalueforthedistance ScalesalongonlythespecifiedXandYaxes;whenasymmetricallyscalingasolid,the currentviewmustbealignedwiththesolidsmatrixforscalingtooccur Enterthescalingfactor(forexample,enter2todoubleor .5tohalvethescale) Scalesselectedtexttothenewscalingfactor Scalesallobjectsonalllayers,includingtext,symbols,andhatches

3. IfspecifyingthescalefactorwiththeSymmetricbyDistanceoption,clickthebuttontoswitchtemporarilytothe drawing.Clicktoindicatethestartofthesegment,movethemouse,andclicktoindicatetheendofthesegment. YouarereturnedtotheScaleObjectsdialogbox,andtheCurrentDistancevaluehasbeenspecified.Enterthe NewDistanceforthesegment. 4. ClickOK.

Scaling Solids Asymmetrically


Solidscanbescaledasymmetrically,throughboththeScaleObjectscommand(seeScalingObjectsonpage 321)and theObjectInfopalette.Theinternalcomponentsofthesoliddonotchange,andthesolidcanstillbeeditedafterthe scalingoperation.

Resizing Objects |

323

IntheObjectInfopalette,enterascalefactorintheXScale,YScale,orZScalefieldtoscaletheselectedsolidalongthe specifiedaxis.

X axis

Y axis

Select a solid object

Change the Object Info palette settings to scale the solid

AselectedsolidcanalsobescaledasymmetricallybyselectingtheModify>ScaleObjectscommandandenteringan Asymmetricscalefactor.However,thecurrentviewmustbealignedwiththesolidsmatrixforscalingtooccur.

Scaling Symbols from the Object Info Palette


SymbolinstancesplacedinthedrawingcanbescaledfromtheObjectInfopalette;thisisanadvantagebecause differentsizesofthesamesymboldonotrequireanewsymbolforeachsize. SymbolscanalsobescaledinteractivelywiththeinteractivescalingmodeoftheSelectiontool.SeeThe SelectionToolonpage 58. Toscaleasymbolinstance: 1. Selectthesymbolinstanceinthedrawingarea. 2. FromtheObjectInfopalette,selectSymmetricorAsymmetricScaling. 3. ForSymmetricscaling,enterthescaleFactor.ForAsymmetricscaling,enterthescalingfactoralongthespecified axis. Pagebasedsymbolscanonlybescaledsymmetrically. 4. Thesymbolisresized.TheObjectInfopalettedisplaysScaledatthetopoftheShapepaneforsymbolsthathave beenscaled.Otherinstancesofthesamesymbolinthedrawingremainunscaled.

Table is too long and too close to chair

Table scaled along X axis

324

| Chapter 8: Object Operations

Shearing Objects
TheSheartoolsimultaneouslyskewsalloftheverticesofarectangle,roundedrectangle,polygon,circle,oval,or polyline,usingafixedpointonthedrawingasapointofreference.Itislikeplacingathumbtackononepointofan object,orthedrawing,andreshapingeveryotherobjectpointexcepttheonetackeddown.TheSheartoolcanbeused tofakea3Dperspective. Toshearanobject: 1. Selecttheobjectorobjectstochange. 2. ClicktheSheartoolfromtheBasicpalette. 3. Clickonthepointinthedrawingtotackdown. 4. Clickontheobjectanddragtheresizecursortosheartheobject.Apreviewobjectdisplays. 5. Clicktosettheshearposition.

Click to tack down a point then drag the resize cursor to shear the object

Joining Objects
Join Command
TheJoincommandcanbeusedtojointwosinglelines,twodoublelines,ortwowallstogether.Joinedlinesintersect butremainasindividualobjects.

Object
IndividualLines DoubleLines

Specifications
Anindividuallinecanbejoinedtoanotherindividualline Doublelinescanbejoinedtoanothersetofdoublelinesortoawall.Doublelinesdrawnwith theCreatePolygonsoption(setinDoubleLinepreferences)cannotbejoined.Onlytheline elementsofdoublelinesdrawnwiththeCreateLinesandPolygonsoptioncanbejoined. AwallcanbejoinedtoanotherwallortodoublelinescreatedwiththeCreateLinesoption (setinDoubleLinepreferences).Wallswilljointothelineelementsofdoublelinesdrawn withtheCreateLinesandPolygonsoption.

Walls

Join
Tojoinwalls,singlelines,ordoublelines: 1. Selectthetwononparallelwalls,lines,ordoublelinestojoin.

Joining Objects |
2. SelectModify>Join>Join. Theselectedwalls/linesarejoinedtogetherwithanyexcesstrimmedaway.

325

Join and Fillet


Tojoinandfilletdoublelines: 1. Selectthetwosetsofnonparalleldoublelinestojoin. 2. SelectModify>Join>JoinandFillet. Ifafilletmeasurementhasalreadybeenspecifiedforthisdrawing,thetwodoublelinesareconnectedand filletedusingthedefaultvalue. Ifafilletmeasurementhasnotbeenspecifiedforthisdrawing,theFilletSettingsdialogboxopens.Enterthe desiredfilletradiusandclickOKtoconnectandfilletthelines.

Join (No Trim)


Tojointwooverlappingwallsorindividuallines,withouttrimmingawaytheexcess: 1. Selectthetwononparallelwallsorlinestojoin. 2. SelectModify>Join>Join(notrim). Theselectedwalls/linesarejoinedwithouttrimminganyexcess.

326

| Chapter 8: Object Operations

Combining and Connecting Objects


Connect/Combine Tool
TheConnect/Combinetooljoinsobjectsbytheirendpointsorattheirintersectionsusingoneoffourmodes.
Dual Object Connect Dual Object Combine Use Vertical Thickness of Subject Roof Face Multiple Object Connect

Single Object Connect

Mode
SingleObjectConnect

Description
Trimsorextendsthefirstselectedobjecttojoinasecondorboundaryobject Thismodecanbeusedtoconnectrooffaces;seeConnectingRoofFaceson page 475.

DualObjectConnect

Trimsorextendstojointwoobjectsattheirendpointsorintersections Thismodecanbeusedtoconnectrooffaces;seeConnectingRoofFaceson page 475.

DualObjectCombine MultipleObjectConnect UseVerticalThicknessof SubjectRoofFace

Trimsorextendstojointwoobjectsintooneobjectattheirendpointsorintersections Designatesthefirstselectedobjectasaboundary,andthentrimsorextendsmultiple consecutivelyselectedobjectstojointheboundary Ifthetoolisbeingusedtoconnecttworooffacesthathavedifferentthicknesses,this optionautomaticallyadjuststherooffacethicknessofthesecondclickedrooffaceto matchtheverticalthicknessofthefirstclickedroofface;seeConnectingRoofFaces onpage 475

WhenconnectingorcombiningapairofNURBS,polylines,oropenpolygonsbytheirendpoints,youmayneedto supplyadditionalinformationtocompletetheprocess.Inthissituation,theConnect/CombineOptionsdialogbox opens.

Combining and Connecting Objects |

327

Option
MidPoint

Description
Connects/combinesthetwoobjectsbyjoiningthetwoendpointsmidwaybetweenthem

Blend

Connects/combinesthetwoobjectsbycreatinganotherobjectbetweenthem

PositionMatching (NURBScurvesand surfacesonly)

Connects/combinestwoNURBScurvesorsurfacesbymovingthefirstobjectsselectedend pointtotheselectedendpointoftheboundaryobject(notavailableiftheendpointsare coincident)

TangencyMatching (NURBScurvesand surfacesonly)

Connects/combinestwoNURBScurvesorsurfacesbymakingthefirstobjectsselectedend pointtangenttotheselectedendpointoftheboundaryobject

328

| Chapter 8: Object Operations


Description
Connects/combinestwoNURBScurvesorsurfacesbymakingthefirstobjectsselectedend pointmatchthecurvatureoftheselectedendpointoftheboundaryobject

Option
Curvature Matching(NURBS curvesandsurfaces only)

Single Object Connect


TheSingleObjectConnectmodetrimsorextendsoneormoreselectedobjectstojoinaboundaryobject.Onlyopen objects,suchaslines,arcs,openpolygons,andNURBScurvesandlines,canbeconnected.Closedobjects,suchas circles,rectangles,andclosedpolygonscannotbeconnected;theyaretreatedasboundaryobjects. Thismodecanalsobeusedtoconnectrooffaces;seeConnectingRoofFacesonpage 475.

Connecting Single Objects


Toconnectasingleobjecttoaboundaryobject: 1. ClicktheConnect/CombinetoolfromtheBasicpalette,andselectSingleObjectConnectfromtheToolbar. 2. Clickontheobjecttoconnect,andthenclickontheboundaryobject.Thefirstobjectisresizedtojointhe boundaryobject.

Connecting Multiple Objects


Toconnectmultipleselectedobjectstoaboundaryobject: 1. Selecttheobjectstobeconnectedtoaboundaryobject. 2. ClicktheConnect/CombinetoolfromtheBasicpalette,andselectSingleObjectConnectfromtheToolbar. 3. WhilepressingandholdingAlt(Windows)orOption(Macintosh),clickononeoftheobjectstoconnect,and thenclickontheboundaryobject.Theselectedobjectsareresizedtojointheboundaryobject. Alternatively,useMultipleObjectConnectmodetoconnectmultipleobjectstoaboundaryobject(seeMultiple ObjectConnectonpage 331).

Connection Type
2Dobjectextendedtoboundaryobject

Example
1st click 2nd click

Combining and Connecting Objects | Connection Type


2Dobjecttrimmedatboundaryobject

329

Example

NURBSsurfacetoNURBSsurface

Multipleselectionconnecting2D objectstoboundaryobject

Dual Object Connect


TheDualObjectConnectmodetrimsorextendstwoobjectstoconnectthemattheirendpointsorintersections.Only openobjects,suchaslinesandpolylines,canbeconnected.Closedobjects,exceptforNURBSsurfaces,cannotbe connected. Thismodecanalsobeusedtoconnectrooffaces;seeConnectingRoofFacesonpage 475. Toconnecttwoobjects: 1. ClicktheConnect/CombinetoolfromtheBasicpalette,andselectDualObjectConnectfromtheToolbar. 2. Clickthefirst,andthenthesecond,objecttoconnect. TheConnect/CombineOptionsdialogboxopens.Selectamethodforresizingandconnectingthetwoobjects (seeConnect/CombineToolonpage 326). Thetwoobjectsareresizedtoconnecttoeachother.

330

| Chapter 8: Object Operations

1st click 2nd click

NURBS surface being connected to NURBS surface

Connection Type
MidPoint

Example

Blend

PositionMatching

TangencyMatching

CurvatureMatching

Combining and Connecting Objects |

331

Dual Object Combine


TheDualObjectCombinemodetrimsorextendstocombinetwoobjectsintoasingleobjectattheirendpointsor intersections.Onlyopenobjects,suchaslinesandNURBScurvesandsurfaces,canbeconnected. Tocombinetwoobjects: 1. ClicktheConnect/CombinetoolfromtheBasicpalette,andselectDualObjectCombinefromtheToolbar. 2. Clickonthefirst,andthenthesecond,objecttocombine. Thetwoobjectsaretrimmedorextendedifnecessaryandcombinedintooneobject.
1st click 2nd click The line and the arc are combined to form a single polyline object

Tangent or curvature matching between two NURBS surfaces creates a single surface

Multiple Object Connect


TheMultipleObjectConnectmodetrimsorextendsmultipleobjectstojoinaselectedboundaryobject.Onlyopen objects,suchaslines,arcs,openpolygons,andNURBScurvesandlines,canbeconnected.Closedobjects,suchas circles,rectangles,andclosedpolygonscanonlybeusedasboundaryobjects. Alternatively,usetheAlt(Windows)orOption(Macintosh)keyinSingleObjectConnectmodetoconnect multipleobjectstoaboundaryobject(seeSingleObjectConnectonpage 328). Toconnectmultipleobjectstoaboundaryobject: 1. ClicktheConnect/CombinetoolfromtheBasicpalette,andselectMultipleObjectConnectfromtheToolbar. 2. Clickontheboundaryobject,whichbecomeshighlightedinred. 3. Positionthecursoroverthefirstobjecttotrimorextendtotheboundary;itbecomeshighlightedinred.Clickto resizetheobjecttojointheboundaryobject. 4. Continuetoclickonobjectstoconnecttotheboundary.Eachconsecutivelyclickedobjectisconnected,untilyou clickinanemptyspacetodeselecttheboundaryobject.

The first click selects the boundary object

As each line is clicked, it is connected to the boundary object

332

| Chapter 8: Object Operations

Splitting Objects and NURBS Surfaces


TheSplittoolsplitsthefollowingobjects(seetheVectorworksDesignSeriesUsersGuideforinformationaboutthe VectorworksDesignSeriesobjects). Notethatsplittinganobjectmaychangeitstype;forexample,trimmingarooffacecreatesasolidsection,whichcan nolongerbeeditedasaroofface.

Vectorworks Fundamentals Objects


3Dsolidobjects(extrudes,cones, cylinders,spheres,hemispheres) Revisionclouds NURBScurves NURBSsurfaces Viewports 2Dobjects(ovals,circles,rectangles,rounded rectangles,arcs,lines,polylines,polygons) Pillars Walls Floors Rooffaces

Vectorworks Design Series Objects


Propertylines Massingmodels Sitemodifiers Seatinglayouts Redlines Stipples Spaces Hardscapes

ThefollowingmodesareavailablefortheSplittool.
Point Split Line Trim

Line Split

Mode
PointSplit LineSplit LineTrim

Description
CutsanobjectorNURBSsurfaceataspecifiedpoint SplitsanobjectorNURBSsurfacealongacuttingline SplitsanobjectorNURBSsurfacealongacuttingline,andthenkeepsadesignatedside

SurfacesgeneratedbysuccessivesplittingcanbejoinedtogetherwiththeComposecommand(seeComposing andDecomposingObjectsandSurfacesonpage 280). Thistoolmaynotbeabletomanipulatecertaintypesofsurfacegeometry(seeSurfaceGeometryRequirements onpage 400).

Point Split Mode


ThePointSplitmodecutsanobjectataspecifiedlocation.

Splitting Objects and NURBS Surfaces |

333

Splitting Objects by Point


Tosplitanobjectataspecificpoint: 1. ClicktheSplittoolfromtheBasicpalette. 2. ClickthePointSplitmodefromtheToolbar. 3. Clickontheobjectatthepointtobesplit. Ifmultipleobjectsarewithinrangeofthespecifiedpoint,theSelectSplitCandidatedialogboxopens.

HighlighttheobjecttosplitbyusingtheNextandPrevbuttons. 4. Theobjectissplitintotwopieces.

Click

The wall is split into two separate pieces at the click location

Iftheobjectisclosed,asinacircleorrectangle,theobjectisconvertedsothatitsendpointsmeetunjoinedatthe split.Someobjectsarenottrulyclosed,andinsteadbreakintotwosegments.

Splitting NURBS Surfaces by Point


TosplitaNURBSsurfaceinpointsplitmode: 1. ClicktheSplittoolfromtheBasicpalette. 2. ClickthePointSplitmodefromtheToolbar. 3. InWireframeview,clickontheNURBSsurfacetosplit. SeeSelectingtheEdgesandFacesofaSolidonpage 396forinformationonselectingsurfaces.

334

| Chapter 8: Object Operations


Click to split the NURBS surface The surface is split at that point

The smaller surface has been moved for clarity

ThesurfaceissplitbyisoparametriccurvespassingthroughtheclickpointalongUandVparametricdirections. Ifthesplitpointisonanexistingisoparametriccurve,thesurfaceissplitinbothdirections(UandV).

Clicking once on the iso-parametric curve (shown in light gray) with the Split tool creates four split surfaces (in black)

Line Split Mode


TheLineSplitmodesplits2Dobjects,NURBScurves/surfaces,solids,andviewportsalongascreenplanecuttingline. Afterthesplit,alltheobjectsremainonthedrawing. Tosplitonlytheselectedobject,presstheAlt(Windows)orOption(Macintosh)keywhiledrawingthesplitline. Tosplitanobjectalongacuttingline: 1. ClicktheSplittoolfromtheBasicpalette. 2. ClicktheLineSplitmodefromtheToolbar. 3. Drawalinethroughtheobjecttosplit. Theobjectissplitbytheline.

One split surface has been moved for clarity

SolidscanalsobesplitinLineSplitmode.Twosectionsolidobjectswillresult.

Creating Fillets and Chamfers |

335

One solid section has been moved for clarity

Line Trim Mode


TheLineTrimmodesplits2Dobjects,NURBScurves/surfaces,solids,andviewportsalongascreenplanecuttingline; itkeepsaspecifiedside,andtrimsawaytheotherside. Totrimonlytheselectedobject,presstheAlt(Windows)orOption(Macintosh)keywhiledrawingthetrimline. Tosplitandtrimanobjectalongacuttingline: 1. ClicktheSplittoolfromtheBasicpalette. 2. ClicktheLineTrimmodefromtheToolbar. 3. Drawalinethroughtheobjecttosplit. 4. Anarrowpointstothesidetobekept.Clicktoindicatewhichsideofthesplitlineshouldbekept;theotherside istrimmedaway. Theobjectissplitbytheline,andtheindicatedsideremains.

Creating Fillets and Chamfers


Fillet Tool
TheFillettooladdsahighlyspecificfillet(arc)betweentwoobjectsinthedrawing,makingeachofthefilletsend pointstangenttooneoftheobjects.Applyfilletstolines,rectangles,polygons,polylines,circles,circulararcs,NURBS curves,3Dpolygons,andwalls.Withrectangles,polygons,orpolylines,thetoolplacesafilletbetweenadjacentsides

336

| Chapter 8: Object Operations

oftheobject.Holesinpolylinescanbefilleted.Inaddition,thistooltrimsorsplitsobjectsatthefilletsendpointsby selectingvariousfilletmodes. Afilletcannotbeplacedbetweenparallelorconcentricobjects.Ifsplitortrimfilletsareplacedbetweenamixture ofobjectsthatcanandcannotbesplit/trimmed,thefilletworksonlyontheobjectsthatcanbesplit/trimmed,and ignorestheothers. Toplaceafillet: 1. ClicktheFillettoolfromtheBasicpalette. 2. ClickthedesiredmodefromtheToolbar.


Fillet and Split Fillet Fillet Radius Preference

Fillet and Trim

Mode
Fillet

Description
Placesafilletwithoutaffectingtheoriginalobject;thefilletandtheobjectmustbegroupedto formasingleobject

FilletandSplit

Placesafilletandsplitsthefilletedobject.Ifthefilletisbetweentwoobjects,thefilletandthe objectsmustbegroupedtomakeasingleobject.Iffilletingthecornersofapolygon,thefillet takestheplaceofthecornerandbecomesapartoftheobject.

FilletandTrim

Placesafilletandtrimsthefilletedobject.Ifthefilletisbetweentwoobjects,thefilletandthe objectsmustbegroupedtomakeasingleobject.Iffilletingthecornersofapolygon,thefillet takestheplaceofthecornerandbecomesapartoftheobject.

3. EntertheFilletRadiustouseintheToolbar.

Creating Fillets and Chamfers |


4. Clicktheobjectwherethefilletwillbegin. 5. Clicktheobjectwherethefilletwillend. Toapplythefillettoalladjacentsidesofanobject,doubleclick. Ifanobjectistooshort,itextendstomatchtheselectedfilletradius.

337

Chamfer Tool
TheChamfertoolplacesachamfer,orline,betweentwoobjectsoradjacentsidesofanobject,includingrectangles, NURBScurves,polygons,3Dpolygons,polylines,orlinesegments.Achamfercannotbeplacedbetweenparallellines orNURBScurves. Thetoolhasthreemodes:chamferscanbeplacedwithoutaffectingexistingobjects,theycansplittheexistingobjects atthechamferendpoints,ortheycantrim(orextend)theexistinglinestothechamferendpoints.
Chamfer Preference Fields (the available fields vary based on the entry option selected in the Chamfer Settings dialog box)

Chamfer and Trim

Chamfer

Chamfer and Split

Chamfer Preferences

Tocreateachamfer: 1. ClicktheChamfertoolfromtheBasicpalette. 2. SelectthemodefromtheToolbar.

Mode
Chamfer

Description
Placesachamferwithoutaffectingtheoriginalobject;tocreateasingleobject,groupthe chamferandthechamferedobjecttogether

ChamferandSplit

Placesachamferandsplitsthechamferedobjects.Thismodeextendslines,ifneeded,for thechamfertoconnect.Tocreateasingleobject,groupthechamferandthechamfered objecttogether.Ifthecornerofapolygonischamfered,thechamfertakestheplaceofthe corner.

338

| Chapter 8: Object Operations


Description
Placesachamferandtrimsthechamferedobjects.Ifthecornerofapolygonischamfered, thechamfertakestheplaceofthecorner.Thismodeextendslines,ifneeded,forthe chamfertoconnect.

Mode
ChamferandTrim

3. Tospecifythechamfersizewithadifferentmethod(forexample,byasetchamferlength),clickChamfer PreferencesfromtheToolbar.TheChamferSettingsdialogboxopens.Entertheappropriatevaluesandclick OK.

Parameter
EntryOptions FirstandSecondLines

Description
Selectamethodforspecifyingthechamfersize;onceselected,therequiredentry fieldsalsodisplayontheToolbarforeasyentry EnterthedistancesfromtheendoftheFirstLineandSecondLineatwhichtoplace theendsofthechamferline

Editing Object Surfaces | Parameter


FirstLineandAngle

339

Description
EnterthedistancefromtheendoftheFirstLineatwhichtoplaceoneendofthe chamferline,andentertheAnglebetweentheFirstLineandthechamferline

ChamferLineLength

EntertheChamferLineLength

4. FieldsontheToolbarindicatewherethechamferwillbeplaced,accordingtothecurrentsettingsinthechamfer preferences.Changethedefaultvaluesifnecessary. 5. Clicktheobjectwherethechamferwillbegin. 6. Clicktheobjectwherethechamferwillend. Thechamferisdrawnaccordingtothemodeselection.

Editing Object Surfaces


Editing 2D Object Surfaces
Therearefourcommandsforediting2Dand2D/3Dhybridobjectsurfaces:IntersectSurface,AddSurface,Combine intoSurface,andClipSurface.Usethesecommandswiththefollowingobjects(seetheVectorworksDesignSeries UsersGuideforinformationaboutobjectsfromtheVectorworksDesignSeriesproducts).

Vectorworks Fundamentals Objects


2Dprimitiveobjectsthatcanbefilledandarenotgrouped(arcs,polygons, polylines,ovals,circles,rectangles,roundedrectangles) Revisionclouds Floors Rooffaces Pillars

Vectorworks Design Series Objects


Ceilinggrids Plants

340

| Chapter 8: Object Operations


Stipples Redlines Seatinglayouts Hardscapes Stages

Massingmodels Propertylines Sitemodifiers Spaces ParkingAreas Slabs

Thesecommandsworkinanyview,aslongastheobjectsinvolvedareinthesameplane.Ifacombinationof2Dand 2D/3Dhybridobjects(suchasfloorsorpillars)willbeusedinanoperation,theviewmustbesettoTop/Plan. Theequivalent3DcommandsoperateonsolidsandcanbeusedinaviewotherthanTop/Plan;seeEditing3DObject Surfacesonpage 342.

Intersect Surface
TheIntersectSurfacecommandprovidesaneasywaytocreateanewobjectthatistheexactsizeandshapeofthe overlappingareaoftwocoplanarobjects. Tointersectsurfaces: 1. Selectthetwooverlappingobjectstousetocreateathirdobject. Thenewobjectspropertiesarebasedontheobjectonthebottomofthestackofobjects.Ifthebottomobjectisa 2Dprimitive(suchasarectangleorcircle),thenewobjectwillhaveitsattributes.Ifthebottomobjectis somethingotherthana2Dprimitive(suchasafloororpillar),thenewobjectwillbethesametype,withthe sameproperties.Ifnecessary,usetheSendcommandtostacktheobjectstoproducethedesiredattributesor objecttype. 2. SelectModify>IntersectSurface. Thenewobjectisplaceddirectlyontopofthetwooriginalintersectingobjects.Toseethenewobject,selectit anddragittotheside.

Add Surface
TheAddSurfacecommandcreatesasingleobjectfromtwoormorecoplanarobjects,aslongasallofthefollowing aretrue: Theobjectsarenotsymbols. Theobjectstouchoroverlapeachother. Theobjectsarenotlockedorgrouped. Notethatanyopenpolygonswillbeconvertedtoclosedpolygons. Toaddsurfaces: 1. Selectthetwoormoreobjectstobecombined.

Editing Object Surfaces |

341

Thenewobjectspropertiesarebasedontheobjectonthebottomofthestackofobjects.Ifthebottomobjectisa 2Dprimitive(suchasarectangleorcircle),thenewobjectwillhaveitsattributes.Ifthebottomobjectis somethingotherthana2Dprimitive(suchasafloororpillar),thenewobjectwillbethesametype,withthe sameproperties.Ifnecessary,usetheSendcommandtostacktheobjectstoproducethedesiredattributesor objecttype. 2. SelectModify>AddSurface.

In Top/Plan view, select the pillar (gray object on bottom) and the rectangle (white object on top)

Select Add Surface to combine the two surfaces into a single pillar object

Combine into Surface


TheCombineintoSurfacecommandcreatesanewobjectthatisformedfromagroupofobjects.Theobjectsmust currentlyintersectandformaclosedpolygonorpolylineshape.Dependingonthetypesofobjectsselectedandthe locationofthemouseclick,youcancreateseveraldifferentpolygonsorpolylinesfromthesameselectionofobjects. Forexample,withthissetofthreeobjects,thefollowingpolygoncanbecreated:

Click here

Tocombinesurfaces: 1. Selectthetwoormoreclosedobjectstousetocreateanewpolygonorpolyline. 2. SelectModify>CombineintoSurface. Thecursorchangesintoapaintbucket. 3. Placethepaintbucketinsidetheareatobecombinedandclick. Asinglepolygonorpolylineobjectiscreatedfromtheselectedobjects.Thenewobjectusesthecurrent attributes.

Clip Surface
TheClipSurfacecommandtrimsthebottomobjectinaselectionsothatanyareasoverlappedbythetopobjectarecut outofit.Objectsmustbecoplanar.Multipleobjectscanbeusedasclippingobjectsinoneoperation.Symbolsand groupedobjectscannotbeclippedorbeusedasclippingobjects.

342

| Chapter 8: Object Operations

Ifthereisastackofmorethantwooverlappingobjects,theneachobjectundertheclippingobject(thetopobjectinthe stack)willbeclipped. Therearetwoimportantthingstorememberaboutthiscommand: Iftheobjecttobeclippedisanopenpolygon,itisautomaticallyconvertedtoaclosedpolygonbeforeitis clipped. Dependingontheobjectsselected,thecommandmaychangethebottomobjectstype;forexample,ifaholeis clippedintoarectangle,theclippedrectangleisautomaticallychangedintoapolyline. Toclipasurface: 1. Ensurethattheobjecttoclipisthebottomobject. Ifnecessary,changetheobjectsorderwiththeSendcommand(seeChangingObjectStackingOrderon page 269). 2. Selecttheobjectstoclip. 3. SelectModify>ClipSurface. Thebottomobjectisclipped;theclippingobjectcanbedeletedifitisnolongerneeded.

In Top/Plan view, select the roof face (gray object on bottom) and the rectangle (white object on top)

Select Clip Surface, and then move the rectangle clipping object to reveal the modified roof face

Editing 3D Object Surfaces


The3Deditingcommandsaresimilartothe2DAddorClipSurfacecommands,butfor3Dobjects.For3Dobjects,the editingcommandsare:IntersectSolids,AddSolids,SubtractSolids,andSectionSolids. IntersectSolidscreatesasinglemodelfromthevolumecreatedwheretwoormore3Dobjectsintersect.AddSolids joinstwoormore3Dobjectsintoasinglemodel.SubtractSolidscuts(subtracts)a3Dobject(s)fromanother3Dobject, creatinganewmodel.SectionSolidsdiscardsaportionofsolidsorNURBSsurfaces,allowingthecreationofplanar orsteppedsectionsthroughasolidorsurface. Thesecommandsworkwiththefollowingsolidobjects:extrudes,multipleextrudes,straightwalls,sweeps,meshes, solidprimitives(cylinders,hemispheres,spheres,andcones),andobjectscreatedusingthe3DPolygon,Extruded Polygon,andExtrudedRectangletool,providedthefollowingapplicableconditionsaremet.

Object
Sweeps

Criteria
Cannotcontainlines,orbesweptaroundalocuswhichisbetweentheleftandright boundsoftheswept2Dprimitive;ifnotsweptaroundalocus,shouldhaveavertical segmentontheleftedge

Editing Object Surfaces | Object


HelicalSweep MultipleExtrude Meshes Walls

343

Criteria
Mustbesweptaroundalocusoutsidetheleftandrightboundsoftheobject Musthaveplanarpolygons Cannothaveinterpenetratingpolygons;everyedgeofeverypolygoninthemeshmustbe sharedwithoneotherpolygon Mustnothavesymbolsthatextendabovethetoporbelowthebottomofthewall

2Dobjectsmusthaveafillappliedpriortobeingconvertedto3Dtobeconsideredasolidobject.Iftheconverted 3Dobjectdidnothaveafillappliedpriortoconversion,itcanbeaddedusingtheEnterGroupcommandto returntotheoriginal2Dobject.

Adding Solids
TheAddSolidscommandjoinstwoormore3Dobjectsintoasinglemodel. Toaddsolidsin3D: 1. Selecttwoormore3Dobjectstocombine. 2. SelectModel>AddSolids. Asinglesolidmodeliscreatedfromtheobjects.

Intersecting Solids
TheIntersectSolidscommandcreatesasinglemodelfromthevolumecreatedwheretwoormore3Dobjects intersect. Tointersectsolids: 1. Selectthetwoormore3Dobjectstocombine. 2. SelectModel>IntersectSolids. Asinglesolidmodeliscreatedfromtheobjects;itisthesizeandshapeoftheoverlappingvolumeoftheselected objects.

344

| Chapter 8: Object Operations

Subtracting Solids
TheSubtractSolidscommandcuts(subtracts)oneormore3Dobjectsfromanother3Dobject,creatinganewmodel. Thesubtractingobjectshouldextendbeyondthesurfaceoftheoriginalobject. Tosubtractsolids: 1. Selectboththeobject(s)tosubtractandtheobjecttosubtractfrom(thebaseobject). 2. SelectModel>SubtractSolids. Adialogboxopens. 3. Selectthedesiredobjecttosubtract. Usetheforwardandbackarrowstoselectthebaseobject,whichisshownwithathickoutline. 4. ClickOK. Asinglesolidmodeliscreated,withtheselectedobjectsubtracted.

Sectioning Solids
TheSectionSolidscommanddiscardsaportionofsolidsorNURBSsurfaces,allowingthecreationofplanaror steppedsectionsthroughasolidorsurface.Thesectionedsurfacecanbemarkedbythesectioningsurfacecolor. Tosectionasolid: 1. Selectthesolidorsurfacetobesectioned,alongwiththesectioningsurface.Thesectionedsurfaceselection dependsonthenormaloftheNURBSsurfaces;selectShowNormalintheObjectInfopalettetodisplaythe surfacenormals(seeDisplayingSurfaceNormalsonpage 398).

Obtaining Engineering Properties |

345

2. SelectModel>SectionSolids.IntheSelectObjectdialogbox,specifywhichobjectistobeusedasthesectioning surface.Bydefault,themostrecentlycreatedobjectishighlighted,butadifferentobjectcanbeselectedby clickingthearrows.

The sectioning surface is highlighted (select it with the arrows in the dialog box)

Thesectioningsurfacemustbelargerthanthesolidbeingsectioned. 3. Whenthedesiredsectioningsurfaceisselected,clickOK. Thesolidissectionedbythesectioningsurface.Theremainingobjectbecomesasolidsection.

ThesolidsectionparameterscanbeeditedintheObjectInfopalette.

Parameter
Width/Depth/Height(displayonly) ReverseSectionSide UseSectionColor

Description
Displaystheparametersofthesolidsectionsurface Switchestheremainingsideofthesolidbeingsectioned Appliesthecolorofthesectioningsurfacetothesectionedsurface

Obtaining Engineering Properties


TheEngineeringPropertiescommandautomaticallycalculatestheengineeringpropertiesofa2Dobject. Todeterminetheengineeringpropertiesofanobject: 1. Selectasingleobject,orselectasingleobjectandalocuspoint. 2. SelectModel>EngineeringProperties. TheEngineeringPropertiesdialogboxopens.Thedatathatdisplaysisselectiondependent. Forasingleclosedsurface,thefollowingdisplays:

346

| Chapter 8: Object Operations


Planeproperties(area,perimeter,andabsolutecoordinatesofthecentroidoftheobject) Momentsofinertia,sectionmodulus,andradiiofgyrationabouttheobjectscentroidalaxes Forasingleclosedsurfaceandalocuspoint,themomentsofinertiaandradiiofgyrationabouttheaxesthatpass throughthelocusarealsodisplayed,aswellasthehorizontalandverticaldistancesfromthelocustothe centroidoftheobject.

3. Selectthedesiredoptionsandunits.

Parameter
Units Placelocusatcentroid Placepropertiesondrawing Writepropertiestoafile

Description
Updatethedisplayedinformationtoreflecttheselectedunitofmeasurement Selecttoaddalocusatthecentroidoftheselectedobjectafterclosingthe EngineeringPropertiesdialogbox Selecttoplacealistofthepropertiesatthenextmouseclickafterclosingthe EngineeringPropertiesdialogbox Selecttosendthepropertiestoatextfile;specifythefilenameandlocationafter closingtheEngineeringPropertiesdialogbox

4. ClickOK.

Obtaining Volumetric Properties


Thevolumetricpropertiesofa3DobjectcanbeobtainedwiththeVolumetricPropertiescommand. Toobtainthevolumetricpropertiesofa3Dobject: 1. Selectthe3Dobject. 2. SelectModel>VolumetricProperties.

Drafting Aids |
TheVolumetricPropertiesdialogboxopens,displayingthesurfacearea,volume,andcenterofmassofthe object.

347

Parameter
Placelocusatcenterofmass Placepropertiesondrawing

Description
Placesa3Dlocusatthecenterofmassoftheobject Placesthevolumetricpropertiesastextonthedrawingataspecifiedlocation

3. ClickOK.IfPlacelocusatcenterofmasswasselected,the3Dlocusisplacedautomaticallyontheobject.If Placepropertiesondrawingwasselected,clickinthedrawingfiletospecifythelocationofthetext.

Drafting Aids
TheDraftingAidsmenucontainsseveralcommandsthatcreatenewarcs,lines,orrectanglesthatarebasedon existingobjects,tomakedraftingfasterandeasier.

Arc into Segments


TheArcintoSegmentscommandconvertsaselectedarcorcircleintoanequalnumberofsegments,ordividesthearc orcircleintosegmentsofagivenlength.Thesegmentscanbedrawnaslinesorpolygons;theoriginalobjectremains unchanged. Toconvertacircleorarcintosegments: 1. Selectthearcorcircletobeconverted. 2. SelectModify>DraftingAids>ArcintoSegments.TheArcintoSegmentsdialogboxopens.

348

| Chapter 8: Object Operations

Parameter
Method NumberofSegments SegmentLength Options DrawPolygon DrawLines

Description
Drawsthespecifiednumberofequalsegmentsalongthearc Drawssegmentsofthespecifiedlengthalongthearc

Drawsthesegmentsaspolygons Drawsthesegmentsaslines

3. ClickOKtocreatethesegments.

Line into Segments


TheLineintoSegmentscommandconvertsaselectedlineintotheindicatednumberofequallengthsegments.The originallinecanbeconverted,oranidenticallineplacedontopoftheoriginalandconverted. Toconvertalineintosegments: 1. Selectthelinetobeconverted. 2. SelectModify>DraftingAids>LineintoSegments. TheLineintoSegmentsdialogboxopens.

Drafting Aids |

349

Parameter
Placeloci BreakLineIntoSegments LeaveOriginalLineIntact NumberofSegments

Description
Placeslociatthesegmentdivisions Createssegmentsfromtheoriginalline,convertingit;deselecttoplacelocionly Retainstheoriginalline,andcreatessegmentsfromacopyoftheline Specifiesthenumberofsegmentstocreate

3. ClickOKtodraweitheranewsegmentedlineorconverttheselectedone.

Create Dividing Lines


TheCreateDividingLinescommandcreateslinesthatevenlydividethespacebetweentwoexistinglines.The existinglinescanbeangledorparalleltoeachother. Tocreatedividinglines: 1. SelectModify>DraftingAids>CreateDividingLines. 2. Selectthetwolinestocreatelinesbetween. 3. Clicktodefinefirstthestartingpointandthentheendingpointofthedividinglines.Aperpendicularline(for parallellines)orcircle(forangledlines)indicatestheedgealongwhichthelineswillstartandend.Ifthestarting pointandendingpointareonthesamelineorcircle,lociwillbecreatedinsteadoflines. 4. WhentheDividingLinesSettingsdialogboxopens,enterthenumberofequaldivisionstocreatebetweenthe existinglines. 5. ClickOKtocreateevenlyspacedlines(orloci)betweentheexistinglines.

350

| Chapter 8: Object Operations


Creating divisions between parallel lines

After you select the two lines, the next click indicates the starting edge for the dividing lines

Click another point to indicate the ending edge for the dividing lines

The specified number of divisions are created; in this case, two lines are added to create three divisions

Creating divisions between angled lines

After you select the two lines, click two points anywhere on the same indicator circle to create loci instead of lines

The specified number of divisions are created; in this case, three loci are added to create four divisions

Even Divide
TheEvenDividecommanddivideslines,arcs,circles,andrectanglesintothespecifiednumberofsubdivisions.You canchoosewhetherornottoretaintheoriginalobject. Toevenlydividelines,arcs,circles,andrectangles: 1. Selectoneormoreobjectstodivide. 2. SelectModify>DraftingAids>EvenDivide. TheEvenDividedialogboxopens.

Drafting Aids |

351

Parameter
NumberofDivisionsfor Line,CircleandArc NumberofDivisions NumberofDivisionsfor Rectangle NumberofDivisions inWidth NumberofDivisions inHeight OriginalObject Retain LeaveSelected

Description

Specifiesthenumberofevensubdivisionstocreatefromeachselectedline,circle,orarc (mustbegreaterthan1)

Specifiesthenumberofevensubdivisionstocreatealongthewidthofeachselected rectangle;enter1tocreaterectanglesofthesamewidthastheoriginalrectangle Specifiesthenumberofevensubdivisionstocreatealongtheheightofeachselected rectangle;enter1tocreaterectanglesofthesameheightastheoriginalrectangle

Selecttoretaintheoriginalobjectfromwhichthesubdivisionsarecreated;deselectto deletetheoriginalobject Iftheoriginalobjectisretained,selectthisoptiontoleaveboththeoriginalobjectand thenewlycreatedobjectsselectedafterthedivisionoperation.Deselectthisoptionto leaveonlythenewlycreatedobjectsselectedaftertheoperation.

3. ClickOKtocreatenewobjectsthatareevensubdivisionsoftheselectedobject(s).

In this example, four rectangles were created from the original rectangle; the width was divided into four even sections, and the height remained in one section (one rectangle moved for clarity)

352

| Chapter 8: Object Operations

Adding Text and Annotation

TheVectorworksprogramhasseveralfeaturestoaddtextandannotationtodrawings,includingtextobjects,callouts, sheetborders,andothernotationobjects.Therearemanyoptionstocreate,format,andcustomizetheappearanceof textobjects.Textstylesmakeiteasytoapplyaconsistentlooktoalltextthroughoutthefile,andtochangeitquickly whennecessary. Tocreatespecialeffects,youcanconverttextobjectstopolylinesandextrudethem,orcreate3Dpathobjectsfromtext objects. Commandsarealsoprovidedtocheckspellingandtofindandreplacetext. IfQuartzimaging(Macintosh)orGDI+imaging(Windows)isdisabled,textdisplaysonlyifthecurrentviewis Top/Plan,orifthetextisonthescreenplane.InanyviewotherthanTop/Plan,emptyrectanglesdisplayasplace holdersforthetextboxes,butthetextcanbeeditedasdescribedinModifyingTextonpage 357.

Imaging enabled

Imaging disabled

Inserting Text
UsetheTexttooltocreatebothsinglelinesandblocksoftextinyourdrawings.Oncecreated,textobjectscanbe moved,duplicated,duplicatedinanarray,androtated.Thetextboundingboxcanberesizedtoadjustablocksheight orwidth.Textisplacedrelativetothespecifiedalignmentpoint,nottheboundingbox.
Horizontal Text Text Style list

Rotated Text

Tight Fill

Mode
HorizontalText RotatedText TightFill TextStylelist

Description
Createshorizontaltextlinesandtextblocks Createstextblocksatanangle Ifafillisappliedtothetextobject,thefilldisplaysonlybehindthetextonanygiven line;blanklineshavenofill Appliesastoredsetofattributestotextasitiscreated,includingthefont,size, spacing,fontstyle,alignment,andcolor

354

| Chapter 9: Adding Text and Annotation

Setting the Default Text Attributes


Thedefaulttextattributesareappliedtoalltextasitisaddedinthecurrentdrawingoranyother.Atextstyleapplies asavedgroupofattributesettings.Selectatextstyleasthedefault,orleavethetextunstyledandsetthedefaulttext attributesindividually. Tosetthedefaulttextattributes: 1. Ensurethatnoobjectsortextareselectedinthedrawing. Ifneeded,clicktheselectionarrowonanemptyportionofthedrawing. 2. ClicktheTexttoolfromtheBasicpalette. 3. FromtheToolbar,settheTightFillmodeasdesired. 4. Tosetthedefaultappearanceoftext,dooneofthefollowing: FromtheToolbar,selectanyTextStyleotherthan<UnStyled>. FromtheToolbar,selectthe<UnStyled>TextStyle.ThenfromtheTextmenu,eitherselectFormatTextto setseveralattributesfromonedialogbox,orselectindividualoptionsasdesired.SeeFormattingTexton page 359fordescriptionsoftheavailableoptions.

Creating a Line of Text


UsetheTexttooltocreateasinglelineoftext,suchasapageheader. Totypeasinglelineoftext: 1. ClicktheTexttoolfromtheBasicpalette,andselectHorizontalTextfromtheToolbar. 2. FromtheToolbar,settheTightFillmodeandTextStyleasdesired. 3. Clicktodesignatethetextinsertionpoint;atexteditingboxwithablinkingcursordisplays. 4. Enterthetext.Textwrappingisoffbydefault,sothetextboxautomaticallyexpandsasyoutype. 5. Whenthetextlineiscomplete,presstheEsckey.

Creating Text Blocks


UsetheTexttooltocreateablockoftext,whenmorethanalineoftextisnecessary.

Inserting Text |
Tocreateablockoftext: 1. ClicktheTexttoolfromtheBasicpalette,andselectHorizontalTextfromtheToolbar. 2. FromtheToolbar,settheTightFillmodeandTextStyleasdesired. 3. Clickanddragtocreateatextboxoftheapproximatewidthneeded. Atexteditingboxwithablinkingcursordisplays.Thepositionofthetextcursorindicatesthehorizontal alignmentofthetexttobeplaced.

355

4. Enterthetext.Textwrappingisonbydefault,sothetextautomaticallywrapstothenextlinewhenitreachesthe edgeofthetextbox.Toendthecurrentparagraphandstartanewoneinthecurrenttextblock,presstheEnter key(Windows)orReturnkey(Macintosh). 5. Whenthetextblockiscomplete,presstheEsckey.

Creating Rotated Text


TheRotatedTextmodeoftheTexttoolcreatestextatanangle.Textobjectscanalsoberotatedaftertheyarecreated; seeRotatingObjectsonpage 282fordetails. Tocreaterotatedtext: 1. ClicktheTexttoolfromtheBasicpalette,andselectRotatedTextfromtheToolbar. 2. FromtheToolbar,settheTightFillmodeandTextStyleasdesired. 3. Clickanddragthemousetospecifytheangleandwidthofthetextbox,andreleasethemousebuttontoset.If needed,movethemousetoadjustthetextboxpositionalongalineperpendiculartothetextbox.Clickagainto settheposition. Whendrawinginrotatedplanview(VectorworksDesignSeriesrequired),setanglesnappingtosnaptotheplan rotationangle(seeAngleSnappingonpage 139)anddisplaytheRotatedPlancue.Ifthetextiscreatedtothe sameangleastheplan,whentheplanisunrotated,thetextwillalignwiththeworldcoordinatesystem. 4. Atexteditingboxwithablinkingcursordisplays. Toalwayscreateandeditrotatedtextinahorizontaltextbox,selectEdittexthorizontallybydefaultontheEdit taboftheVectorworkspreferences(seeEditPreferencesonpage 17). 5. Enterthetext.Thetextautomaticallywrapstothenextlinewhenitreachestheedgeofatextbox.Toendthe currentparagraphandstartanewoneinthecurrenttextblock,presstheEnterkey(Windows)orReturnkey (Macintosh). 6. Whenthetextblockiscomplete,presstheEsckey.

356

| Chapter 9: Adding Text and Annotation


Click to make the box horizontal temporarily Release 2nd click

1st click

Click and drag; release the mouse button to set the box width and angle

Move the mouse to adjust the box position along the red perpendicular line; click again to set the position

Enter the text

Creating Text with a Tight Fill


TheTightFillmodeoftheTexttoolmodifiesthefillappliedtoatextobjectsothatthefilldisplaysonlybehindthetext onanygivenline.Blanklineshavenofill. Tocreatetextwithatightfill: 1. ClicktheTexttoolfromtheBasicpalette,andselectTightFillfromtheToolbar. 2. FromtheToolbar,selecteitherHorizontalTextorRotatedTextmode,andsettheTextStyleasdesired. 3. FromtheAttributespalette,selectthefillforthetextobject(unlesstheselectedtextstylehasabackgroundfill). 4. Clickanddragtocreateatextboxoftheapproximatewidthneeded. Atexteditingboxwithablinkingcursordisplays.Thepositionofthetextcursorindicatesthehorizontal alignmentofthetexttobeplaced. 5. Enterthetext.Thetextautomaticallywrapstothenextlinewhenitreachestheedgeofatextbox.Toendthe currentparagraphandstartanewoneinthecurrenttextblock,presstheEnterkey(Windows)orReturnkey (Macintosh). 6. Whenthetextblockiscomplete,presstheEsckey.

Text with a yellow tight fill on top of an oval with a pattern fill

Adding Tabs to Text


Leftalignedtabscanbeinsertedintotextduringcreationandediting. Toaddtabstotext:

Modifying Text |
1. ClicktheTexttoolfromtheBasicpalette. 2. Enteroreditthedesiredtext;presstheTabkeytoplacetabswithinthetextwhereneeded. 3. Onthetextboxruler,clickonatabstopanddragittoadjustthespacing.Tabstopsarerepeatedatequal intervalsthroughoutthetext,andtheyallmovewhenonetabstopismoved.Tabstopscannotbeaddedor removed.

357

Inisometricviews,textboxeshavenorulers.SwitchtoanonisometricviewsuchasTop/PlanorFronttoadjust thetabstops. Also,onMacintosh,ifQuartzimaging(ontheDisplaytaboftheVectorworkspreferences)isdisabled,norulers displayatall.Tabscanbeenteredinthetext,butthetabstopscannotbeadjusted.


Click-drag a tab stop to adjust spacing

Pasting Text
TomovetextbetweenVectorworksfiles,selectEdit>Copy,andthenEdit>Paste.Textisaddedexactlyascopied, includinganyformatting.Ifyoudefineatextblockbeforepasting,thetextpastedintotheblockiswrappedtofit withinthetextblock.Ifthescaleoftheoriginallayerandthenewlayeraredifferent,thetextsizechangesaccordingly; forexample,ifyoucopy16pointtextfroma1:1layerandpasteittoa4:1layer,thetextchangesto4points.Thisalso meansthatanystyledtextyoupastetoadifferentlayerscalebecomesunstyled;reapplythetextstyletorestorethe propertextsize. Whenyoupastetextfromadifferentprogram,clickonthedrawingusingtheTexttoolfirst.Ifyoupastetextwithout firstestablishinganinsertionpoint,eachlineoftextisbroughtinasanindividualtextblock.Embeddedgraphicsare notsupportedandareremovedwhenthetextblockispastedintotheVectorworksfile.Inaddition,multialignedtext isconvertedtothecurrentdefaultalignment.

Modifying Text
Onceatextobjectiscreated,youmayneedtomakechanges,suchasaddwords,changethefontcolor,orchangethe margins.Changescanbeappliedtoaportionofthetextortothewholeobject.Atextobjectcanevenbeconvertedinto polylinesandextruded,orconvertedtoa3Dpathobject.Dependingonwhatchangesarerequired,eitherselectthe textobjectwiththeSelectiontooloractivatethetexteditingmode.

Text Editing Mode


Toadd,edit,ordeletetextinatextbox,ortochangetheattributesofaportionofthetext,thetexteditingmodemust beactive.Toactivateeditingmode,doubleclickonthetextobjectwiththeSelectiontool,orclickonitwiththeText tool.Alternatively,rightclick(Windows)orCtrlclick(Macintosh)thetext,andselectEditfromthecontextmenu. Editingmodeisindicatedbyapurplehighlightedboxwitharuleratthetop.Theunitsontherulerreflectthecurrent documentunitsandlayerscale.Ifthetextboxisplacedsothatitisskewedinthecurrentview,arulerdoesnot display.

358

| Chapter 9: Adding Text and Annotation

ThestandardkeyboardshortcutsforMacintoshandWindowsapplyinthetexteditingbox.Forexample,use Command+B(Macintosh)orCtrl+B(Windows)toapplyboldformatting. Textthatisrotatedorskewedcanbeeditedinplace.Arotationbuttonisprovidedontherightsideofthetextediting boxtodisplaythetextboxhorizontallyforeasierediting,ortoaccesstherulerifitisnotdisplayed.Whentheeditsare complete,presstheEsckey;thetextboxreturnstotheoriginalposition. OnMacintosh,ifQuartzimagingisdisabled,textcannotbeeditedinarotatedposition.Thetextbox automaticallyswitchestoahorizontalpositionineditingmode.

Click the rotation button to unrotate or re-rotate the text box

Editing Text Objects


Toeditthepropertiesofatextobject(suchasfontorspacing),selectitwiththeSelectiontool.AnXdisplaysatthetext alignmentpoint.IftheWrapTextoptionisenabled,atriangularmarginmarkerdisplaysalongtheright,left,orboth margins,dependinguponthealignmentsetting. Oncethetextobjectisselected,youcanmoveit,orchangetheobjectsproperties,suchasalignmentortextstyle.
Alignment Point Margin Marker

Modifying Text |
Thetextobjectcanalsoberesizedandrotatedsimilartoother2Dobjects,usingthereshapehandles.
Drag the middle handle left to widen the text box; the height adjusts automatically

359

Press the Alt (Windows) or Option key (Macintosh) while dragging a handle to rotate the text box

Formatting Text
TheFormatTextcommandmodifiesmultipletextattributesfromasingledialogbox.Individualattributesalsocanbe changedwithvariouscommandsontheTextmenu,includingfont,size,fontstyle,alignment,spacing,and capitalization(lowercase,UPPERCASE,andTitleCaps).AllattributesareavailableontheObjectInfopalette,aswell. Someobjectshavetheabilitytoselectthefontformattingwhilesettingtheobjectattributes. Formattingcanbeappliedtoanentiretextblockortoselectedcharactersandwords.Ifnotextisselected,thesettings becomethedefaultsfortheTexttool. Toformattext: 1. Toselectthetexttochange,dooneofthefollowing: Toformattheentiretextbox,selectthetextobjectwiththeSelectiontool. Toformataword,doubleclickthetextobjecttoactivatetheeditingmode;thendoubleclickanywhere withinthewordtohighlightit. Toformataline,doubleclickthetextobjecttoactivatetheeditingmode;thentripleclickanywherewithin thelinetohighlightit. Toformatasectionofthetext,doubleclickthetextobjecttoactivatetheeditingmode;thenhighlightthe desiredtextbydraggingoverit. Toexitthetexteditingmodewhentextishighlighted,presstheEsckey. 2. Oncethetextisselected,dooneofthefollowing: FromtheTextmenu,selectthetextoptiontochange. SelecttheoptiontochangefromtheObjectInfopalette. SelectText>FormatText.Alternatively,rightclick(Windows)orCtrlclick(Macintosh)thetext,andselect FormatTextfromthecontextmenu.TheFormatTextdialogboxopens.

360

| Chapter 9: Adding Text and Annotation

Parameter
Style

Description
Displaysthestyleofthecurrentlyselecteditem(s).Ifmultipleitemswithdifferentstylesare selected,<UnStyled>isselected. Selectastylefromthelist;theremainingparameterschangetomatchthesettingsforthatstyle.If youchangeanyoftheotherparametersafterselectingastyle,thestylerevertsto<UnStyled>.

Save

OpenstheAssignNamedialogboxtosavethecurrentsettingsasanewstyle.Enteranameforthe styleandclickOK. Thenewstyleisautomaticallyassignedthecurrentsolidpenandfillcolorthataresetasthe defaultfornewobjectsintheAttributespalette.

Font

Displaysthefontofthecurrentlyselecteditem(s)andlistsallavailable,installedfonts.Thisfieldis blankwhenmultipleitemswithdifferentfontsareselected. Selectafontfromthelist,ortypethefirstletter(s)ofthedesiredfonttohighlighttheclosestmatch inthelist.

Size

Displaysthesizeandunitmeasurement(points,millimeters,orinches)ofthecurrentlyselected item(s).Thisfieldisblankwhenmultipleitemswithdifferentsize/unitmeasurementareselected. Selectastandardtextsize,orenteryourown.

Spacing

Displaysthelinespacingofthecurrentlyselecteditem(s).Ifmultipleitemswithdifferentspacing areselected,Otherisselected. Selectoneofthestandardspacingoptions,orselectOtherandspecifyasizeandunitmeasurement (points,millimeters,orinches)ofyourown.

Modifying Text | Parameter


FontStyle

361

Description
Displaysthefontstyleofthecurrentlyselecteditem(s).Ifmultipleitemsareselectedandtheyhave differentsettingsforaparticularstyle,theselectionboxdisplaysanindeterminatestate: (Windows)or (Macintosh). Specifythedesiredoptions.OutlineandShadowoptionsareavailableforMacintoshonly. SuperscriptandSubscriptaredisabledwhentheentiretextblockisselected.

Alignment

Displaysthealignmentofthecurrentlyselecteditem(s).Ifmultipleitemswithdifferentalignments areselected,theAlignmentfieldsareblank. Specifythehorizontalandverticalalignment.

Recent Font List


Recentlyusedfontsarestoredforquickaccess.WhenyouselectText>Font,theeightmostrecentlyusedfontsdisplay atthetopofthefontlist(withthemostrecentfontlistedfirst),followedbyanalphabeticallistofallavailablefonts.In addition,whentheObjectInfopalettecontainsaFontfield,thetopofthedropdownlistispopulatedwiththeeight mostrecentlyusedfonts,followedbyanalphabeticallistoftheavailablefonts.FontschangesmadewithintheFormat TextdialogboxorObjectInfopalettealsoupdatetherecentfontlist.

Changing Other Text Features


Inadditiontotextformat,othertextfeaturescanbemodifiedasneeded. UsetheCapitalizationcommandtosetallletterstolowercase,uppercase,ortitlecase.Selectthetextandthen selectText>Capitalization. UsetheAttributespalettetoapplycolortotext.Selectthetextandthenchooseasolidpencolor(seePen Attributesonpage 532). UsetheAttributespalettetoapplyafilltoatextbox.Selectthetextboxandthenchooseafillstyleand/orsolid fillcolor(seeFillAttributesonpage 530).Addlinesorspacesbeforeandafterthetexttoextendthebox. UsetheAttributespalettetoapplyopacitytoboththetextandfillofatextobject.Selectthetextboxandthen chooseanopacitysetting(seeOpacityAttributesonpage 532). UsetheObjectInfopalettetochangethefollowingtextfeatures.

Object Info Palette Field


XandY Width Rotation WrapText TightFill

Change
MovesthetextboxalongtheXandYaxis Adjuststhetextboxwidth Rotatesthetextbox Enablesordisablestextwrapping Forfilledtextobjects,enablesordisablesthetightfilloption

Useoneofvariousmethodstorotateatextbox.SelectthetextboxandthenusetheRotatecommand,Rotate tool,orSelectiontool.SeeRotatingObjectsonpage 282fordetails.

362

| Chapter 9: Adding Text and Annotation

Setting Special Text Sizes


Tochangetexttoadifferentstandardsize,youcanselectasizefromeithertheTextmenuortheObjectInfopalette.To setanonstandardtextsize,suchas60pt,or1pageinch,usetheSetSizecommand. Tospecifythetextsize: 1. SelectText>Size>SetSize.Alternatively,selectSetSizefromtheSizelistontheObjectInfopalette. TheSetTextSizedialogboxopens.

2. Selectthedesiredunitofmeasure,enterthefontSize,andthenclickOK.

Converting TrueType Text to Polylines


TheTrueTypetoPolylinecommandconvertstextcreatedwithanyTrueTypefontintopolylines.Afteritisconverted, thetextisnolongerafontandcanbeeditedjustlikeanyotherpolyline.Thisisusefulforcreating3Dtextobjects.By theirnature,TrueTypefontsaredefinedbyBziercurvesandarcpoints.Thesesamedefinitionsareusedtoconvert thetextobjects. ThetextconversionisnotaffectedbytheconversionresolutionsettingintheVectorworksPreferencesdialog box.However,iftheconvertedpolylineisextruded,the3Dresolutionsettinginthissamedialogboxaffectshow thepolylineisextruded.

ToconvertTrueTypetexttopolylines: 1. Selectthetext(linesorblocks)toconvert. 2. SelectText>TrueTypetoPolyline. Thetextisconvertedintoagroupofpolylines. 3. Toextrudethepolylines,creating3Dtext,selectthegroupofpolylines.UngroupthembyselectingModify> Ungroup. 4. SelectalloftheindividualpolylinesandselectModel>Extrude. TheCreateExtrudedialogboxopens. 5. SpecifytheextrusionlengthandclickOK.

Creating Text Along a Path


Selectedtextcanbeplacedalongapathandthetextappearancecanbeadjustedafterplacement.

Modifying Text |
Tocreate3Dtextalongapath:

363

1. Selectthetextandapathobject.Thetextmustbeasingleline,andthepathmustbelongenoughforthetext,or textalongpathconversionwillnotoccur. 2. SelectText>TextAlongPath. TheTextAlongPathdialogboxopens.Specifytheoptionsforcreatingthetextalongthepath.

Parameter
TextSize PreserveHeightand Width ScaleWidthOnly ScaleHeightandWidth CreateTextAs Curves

Description
Specifiestextsizeoptions Maintainstheaspectratioofthetext,keepingwidthandheightparametersthe sameastheywereintheoriginaltext Changesthewidthofthetexttofitthepath,butdoesnotchangetheheight accordingly(resultinginwider,shortertext,dependingonthepath) Changesthewidthofthetexttofitthepath,andthenchangesthetextheightto match(resultinginwider,talltext,dependingonthepath) Specifiestheformatforconvertingthetext Convertsthetextintoagroupofpolylines(ifthepathisdrawnontheactivelayer plane)orNURBScurves(ifthepathhasaZheightoraRotaboutPathgreater than0) ConvertsthetextintoagroupofNURBSsurfaces Convertsthetextintoagroupofextrudeobjects;specifytheHeightofthe extrudedletters

Surfaces Extrusions

3. ClickOK.Theselectedtextfollowsthepathobject,andtheoriginalpathobjectisdeleted.

364

| Chapter 9: Adding Text and Annotation


TheTextAlongPathparameterscanbeeditedintheObjectInfopalette.Theparametersareidenticaltothosein theTextAlongPathdialogbox,withtwoadditionalparameters.

Parameter
AbovePath

Description
Placestheboundingboxofthelettersdirectlyabovethepath;abovedependsonthedirection thatthepathwasdrawn.Deselectthisoptiontoplacethelettersbelowthepath.Depending onthepathandletters,theappearanceofthetextmaybeimprovedbyswitchingitaboveor belowthepath. Indicatestheangleofrotationaboutthepath,usingthepathasarotationaxis

RotaboutPath

Toeditthepathobject,selectModify>EditTextAlongPath,andthenselectPath.Thepathobjectcanbeedited withtheReshapetool.Toreversethedirectionofthepathobject,clickReverseDirection;thisaffectsthetext placementaboveorbelowthepath.

Using Text Styles


Atextstyleisaresourcethatspecifiestextattributes,includingthefont,size,linespacing,fontstyle,textalignment, andtextandbackgroundcolors.Textstylesmakeiteasytoapplyaconsistentlooktoalltextthroughoutafile;ifyou changeatextstyle,allobjectsthatusethestyleareupdatedatonce.Atextstylecanbeappliedtoobjectscreatedwith theTexttool,aswellastothetextportionsofotherobjects,suchastitleblocks,dimensions,andcallouts. Notallfeaturesorpluginobjectscanmakeuseofatextstyle.Forexample,worksheetsandspaceobjectshave textcomponents,buttheycannotusetextstyles. SomebasictextstylesareprovidedwiththeVectorworksprogramasdefaultcontent;thesedisplayontheTextStyle listontheToolbarwhentheTexttoolisactive.Inaddition,youcancreatecustomtextstylesforyourownuse,orto sharewithcoworkers.Becausetheyareresources,textstylescanbeexportedandimportedintoanotherfile,copied amongfiles,andsharedviaworkgroupreferencing.Formoreinformationaboutdefaultcontent,seeDefaultContent inVectorworksFundamentalsandRenderworksonpage 157.Formoreinformationaboutusingcustomresources, seeAccessingExistingResourcesonpage 164andCreatingResourceLibrariesonpage 172.

Creating Text Styles


Createcustomtextstylesasneeded.Thesearesavedwiththecurrentfile,andtheycanalsobeexportedintootherfiles oraddedtoresourcelibraries. Tocreateanewtextstyle: 1. Dooneofthefollowing: IntheResourceBrowser,selectNewResourcefromtheResourcesmenu;selectTextStylefromthelistof resourcetypes. ClicktheTexttoolfromtheBasicpalette,andselectNewfromtheTextStylelistontheToolbar. TheCreateTextStyledialogboxopens. Alternatively,selectText>FormatTexttoopentheFormatTextdialogbox.Settheparametersasneeded,click Save,andenteranameforthenewstyle.SeeFormattingTextonpage 359.

Using Text Styles |

365

Parameter
StyleName Font Size Spacing FontStyle Alignment Color

Description
Enteranameforthistextstyle. Selectafontfromthelist;typethefirstletter(s)ofthedesiredfonttoautomaticallyscrolland highlighttheclosestmatchinthelist Enterasizeandselectaunitmeasurement(points,millimeters,orinches) Selectoneofthestandardspacingoptions,orselectOtherandspecifyasizeandunitmeasurement (points,millimeters,orinches)ofyourown Specifythedesiredoptions.OutlineandShadowoptionsareavailableforMacintoshonly Specifythehorizontalandverticalalignment SelectacolorfortheTextfromthecolormenus(seeSelectingaColorfromaColorPaletteon page 570). Tohaveabackgroundfillbehindthetext,selecttheBackgroundoptionandalsospecifyacolor.To havenobackgroundfill,deselecttheBackgroundoption.

2. ClickOKtocreatetheresource. ThenewtextstyleissavedwiththefileanddisplaysintheResourceBrowserunderTextStyles.Textstylesalso displayontheToolbarwhentheTexttoolisactive,andontheObjectInfopalettewhenatextobjectisselected.

Applying Text Styles


TextstylescanbeappliedfromdifferentplacesintheVectorworksprogram,dependingonthetypeofobject.

366

| Chapter 9: Adding Text and Annotation


Method
ClicktheTexttool,andselectaTextStylefromtheToolbar. FromtheResourceBrowser,draganddropthetextstyleontotheobject. Selectallorpartofatextobject,andselectaTextStylefromtheObjectInfo palette. Selectallorpartofatextobject,selectText>FormatText,andselectaStylefrom theFormatTextdialogbox.

Object Type
Newtextobject Existingtextorpluginobject Existingtextobject Existingtextobject

Ifyouchangeanyoftheattributesofstyledtext(forexample,ifyouchangethesizefrom16pointsto18points),the textstyleautomaticallybecomes<UnStyled>.Textalsobecomesunstyledifyouapplythe<UnStyled>optiontoit, butthetextattributesremainthesame. Ifyoumovestyledtexttoalayerthathasadifferentscalefromtheoriginallayer,thetextwillbescaledaccordingly, anditautomaticallybecomes<UnStyled>;reapplythetextstyletorestorethepropertextsize. Thealignment,spacing,andbackgroundcolorattributesofatextstyleareonlyappliedifanentiretextobjectis selected;theseattributesareignoredifyouapplyastyletoaportionofatextobject. Ifatextobjectcontainstextwithmultiplestyles,thetextobjectitselfdoesnotdisplayatextstyleintheObjectInfo palette.Thestyledportionsoftextwithintheobjectarestillupdatedifthereferencedtextstyleresourceischanged.

Green text is style 1 and blue text is style 2

Because it contains two text styles, the text object itself has no Text Style

Editing Text Styles


Ifyouchangeatextstyleresource,allobjectsinthefilethatusethestyleareupdatedatonce. Toeditatextstyle: 1. FromtheResourceBrowser,selectthetextstyle,andthenselectEditfromtheResourcesmenu. TheEditTextStyledialogboxopens. 2. EdittheparametersasdescribedinCreatingTextStylesonpage 364andclickOK. Thetextstyledefinitionandallobjectsinthefilethatusethetextstyleareupdated.

Checking Spelling |

367

Checking Spelling
CheckthespellingofeitherselectedtextorallthetextinafilewiththeCheckSpellingcommand.Spellingintext blocks,symbols,records,worksheets,andviewportscanbechecked.Availabledictionariesinclude: Danish Finnish Norwegian Swedish Dutch French Portuguese(Brazilian) English(American) German Portuguese(Iberian) English(British) Italian Spanish

Dictionariescanbeeditedandadded.SeeAddingandEditingDictionariesonpage 369.

Checking the Spelling


Tocheckthespellingofaselectedobject: 1. Selecttheobject. 2. SelectText>CheckSpelling. Alternatively,rightclick(Windows)orCtrlclick(Macintosh)thetext,andselectCheckSpellingfromthe contextmenu. 3. Ifaspellingerrorisdetected,theSelectionSpellingCheckdialogboxopenssothatcorrectionscanbemade. Tocheckthespellingofalltextinthefile: 1. Ensurethatnoobjectsareselected. 2. SelectText>CheckSpelling. TheSpellingCheckFilterdialogboxopens.

Parameter
TextBlocks Symbols Records Worksheets Viewports

Description
Checkstextcontainedintextblocks Checkstextcontainedinsymboldefinitions Checkstextcontainedinrecords Checkstextcontainedinworksheets Checkstextannotationscontainedinviewports

3. Selecttheitemstohavespellingchecked,andthenclickOK.Ifaspellingerrorisdetected,theDocument SpellingCheckdialogboxopenssothatcorrectionscanbemade.

368

| Chapter 9: Adding Text and Annotation


Ifnospellingerrorsaredetected,amessagedisplaystoindicatethatthespellingcheckiscomplete.

Correcting Spelling Errors


Ifaspellingerrorisfound,eithertheSelectionSpellingCheck(whencheckingaselection)ortheDocumentSpelling Check(whencheckingalltext)dialogboxopens.Bothdialogboxescontainthesameoptions.

Parameter
Spellingerrorin NotinDictionary

Description
Identifiesthelocationoftheobjectcontainingthepotentialspellingerror Liststhepotentiallymisspelledword;ifnoneofthesuggestedcorrectionsinthe Suggestionslistisanacceptablereplacement,typethecorrectionintotheNotin Dictionaryfield(ordeletethewordbyleavingthefieldblank).ThenclickChangeor ChangeAlltoreplacetheerrorwiththetypedword.Thewordisreplacedandthe spellingcheckresumes. Suggeststheclosestmatchingword(s)fromthedictionary SelectoneofthesuggestedwordsfromthelistofSuggestionstoreplacethemisspelled wordandclickChange.Themisspelledwordisreplacedwiththesuggestedword. Alternatively,pressEnterwiththesuggestionselected.Toreplacealloccurrencesofthe sameerrorinthefile,clickChangeAll.Thewordisreplacedandthespellingcheck resumes. Ifthewordisspelledcorrectly,butitisnotpresentinthedictionary,clickIgnoreto leavethewordasisandcontinuethespellingcheck.ClickIgnoreAlltoignoreall occurrencesofthewordinthefile.Thewordisignoredandthespellingcheckresumes. Clicktoaddthewordtothedictionary;thisallowsthespellingcheckertorecognizeall futureoccurrencesoftheword Clicktocustomizethespellingcheckoptions;seeSpellingCheckOptionson page 369 Clicktodiscontinuethespellingcheck;allchangesuptothatpointaresaved,butcan beundonebyselectingEdit>Undo

Suggestions Change / ChangeAll

Ignore / IgnoreAll

Learn Options Done

Finding and Replacing Text |

369

Thespellingoflayers,classes,symbolnames,objectnames,scriptpalettenames,dimensiontext,lockedobjects, orrecordsattachedtolockedobjectsisnotchecked.

Spelling Check Options


ClicktheOptionsbuttonintheSpellingCheckdialogboxtocustomizethespellingcheckfunction.TheSpelling CheckOptionsdialogboxopens.

Specifythetypesofmisspelledwordsforthespellingcheckertofind.Ifacheckboxisnotselected,thespelling checkerignoreserrorsforthatcategoryofwords.Examplesinclude: Capitalizedwords:Canada Wordswithmixedcase:VectorScript Wordsinallcaps:ANGLE Wordswithnumbers:Q4

Customizethespellingcheckertoreduceunnecessaryspellingchecksinyourtypicalfiles.ClickOKtoreturntothe SelectionSpellingCheckorDocumentSpellingCheckdialogbox.

Adding and Editing Dictionaries


Theuserdictionary,UserDictionary.txt,isatextfilelocatedin[Vectorworks]\PlugIns\Dictionaries.Itcanbeedited,if desired.Whenmanuallyeditingadictionary,typethewordfollowedbyatabandtheletteritoindicatethatthe spellingcheckershouldignoretheword. Additionaldictionaries,suchasaforeignlanguagedictionary,canbeaddedbyplacingthedictionaryfileintothe [Vectorworks]\PlugIns\Dictionariesfolder.Thespellingcheckerautomaticallyusesallthedictionarieswiththe .clx extensioninthefoldertocheckthespelling.However,theadditionofmultipledictionariescanslowdownthe spellingcheckprocess.

Finding and Replacing Text


TheFindReplaceTextcommandsearchesforandoptionallyreplacestextstringswithinaVectorworksfile.Itcan searchforandreplacetextstringswithintextobjects,recordfields,andworksheetcells. Usethiscommandtofindatextitem,replaceit,searchformoreoccurrences,orreplacealloccurrences.Allsettings areretainedfromoneusetothenext,includingfindandreplacetextstrings. Tofindreplacetext: 1. SelectText>FindReplaceText. TheFindorReplaceTextdialogboxopens.

370

| Chapter 9: Adding Text and Annotation

Parameter
Action FindNext ReplaceNext ReplaceAllSelected ReplaceAll Lookin TextObjects RecordFields Worksheets FindString ReplaceWith Options ActiveLayerOnly AllLayers VisibleLayersOnly Casesensitive

Description
Locatesand,ifselected,replacesagiventextstringwithanewtextstring Findsthenextoccurrenceofthetextstring Replacesthenextoccurrenceofthetextstring Replacesallselectedoccurrencesofthetextstring Replacesalloccurrencesofthetextstring Searchesforoccurrencesinthespecifiedpartsofthedocument Searchesinalltextobjects Searchesinallrecordfields,includingCalloutobjects Searchesinallworksheets;appearsdimmedifReplaceAllSelectedischosen,since thereisnoselectionattributeforaworksheet Entertextstringtosearchfor Enterreplacementtextstring;dimmedifFindNextisselected Specifiesthedepthofthesearch Searchesintheactivelayeronly Searchesonalllayerswithinthedocument,regardlessofvisibility Searchesinallcurrentlyvisiblelayers Searchesfortextthatexactlymatchesthecriteria,includingcapitalization

2. Enterthedesiredsearchand,ifusing,replacecriteria. 3. ClickFind/Replace.

Inserting Callouts
TheCallouttoolplacescalloutobjectsonadrawing.Acalloutobjectisablockoftextattachedtoaleaderlinewithan optionalbubblesurroundingthetext.Usecalloutobjectstoannotateitemsinafile.

Inserting Callouts |

371

IntheVectorworksDesignSeriesproducts,theCallouttoolincludesextendedcapabilitieswhichallowittobe usedforkeynotes,andinconjunctionwithanexternalnotesdatabase(seeNotesManagementonpage 602in theVectorworksDesignSeriesUsersGuide).


Arrow-to-Shoulder 3 Point

Shoulder-to-Arrow

2 Point

Callout Preferences

Mode
ShouldertoArrow ArrowtoShoulder 2Point 3Point Preferences

Description
Clickfirstwherethecallouttextistobeplaced,andthenneartheobjecttobeannotated Clickfirstneartheobjecttobeannotated,andthenwherethecallouttextistobeplaced Twoclicksarerequiredtoplacethecalloutobject;in2Pointmode,thelengthofthe shoulderisdeterminedinthecalloutpreferencesorObjectInfopalette Threeclicksarerequiredtoplacethecalloutobject;in3Pointmode,thethirdclick determinesthelengthoftheshoulder OpensthePreferencesdialogbox

Creating a Callout Object


Tocreateacalloutobject: 1. ClicktheCallouttoolfromtheBasicpalette. 2. ClickthePreferencesbuttonontheToolbar.Specifythecalloutobjectpreferences,whichapplytonewcallouts createdeitherinthisfileorallfiles.Theseparameterscanbechangedlaterforaselectedcalloutobjectinthe ObjectInfopalette.IfamarkertypeisselectedinthePreferences,themarkercanbechangedlaterfromthe Attributespalette. DatabasecontrolsarenotavailableintheVectorworksFundamentalsproduct.IntheVectorworksDesignSeries products,theCallouttoolcanbeusedinconjunctionwithanexternalnotesdatabase(seeNotesManagement onpage 602intheVectorworksDesignSeriesUsersGuide).

372

| Chapter 9: Adding Text and Annotation

Parameter
TextOptions RotateText TextAngle Max.TextWidth

Description
Whenselected,rotatesthecallouttexttothespecifiedTextAngle Specifiestheangleoftextrotation;certainanglesmaynotbeavailable,dependingon thetextsHorizontalPositionsettings Indicatesthemaximumtextwidthbeforetextwraps;ifthetextstringisshorterthan maximumwidth,thebubblesizestofitthetext.Rotatedtextcannotrestrictthe maximumtextwidth. Setstheverticalpositionofthetextrelativetotheshoulder;selectAutotoalignthetop textlinetotheshoulderiftheleaderisontheleft,ortoalignthebottomtextlinetothe shoulderiftheleaderisontheright Setsthehorizontalpositionofthetextrelativetotheshoulder;selectAutotoposition thetexttotherightiftheleaderisontheleft,ortotheleftiftheleaderisontheright Forcesthetexttobeleftjustified,evenwhenthetextistotheleftoftheleader OpenstheFormatTextdialogbox,tosettextattributesorselectatextstyle

VerticalPosition

HorizontalPosition AlwaysLeftJustify Text FormatText

Inserting Callouts | Parameter


BubbleOptions BubbleStyle Selectthetypeofbubbletodrawaroundthetext
None Box Round Rect Cloud Bracket ISO

373

Description

Vertical Accent Bar

Hexagonal

RRCornerRadius TextMargin BubbleShadow LeaderOptions ShoulderLength

ForRoundRectbubblestyles,setsthecornerradius Setsthedistancebetweenthebubbleandthetext Selecttodrawthebubblewithadropshadow(doesnotapplytoNone,Bracket,orISO styles)

Setsthelengthofthelinebetweenthetextandthestartoftheleader;canbechanged bymovingacontrolpointorintheObjectInfopalette.In3Pointmode,thislengthis setbythethirdmouseclick. SelectLine,Arc,Bzier,orNone;curvedleaderlinescontainadditionalcontrolpoints forcontrollingthecurveshape Forarcleadertypes,specifiesthearcradius Selectamarkerstylefromthemarkerstylelist,orselectCustomtocreateacustom marker.SelectEditMarkerListtoopentheEditMarkerListdialogbox;seeEditing theMarkerListonpage 539.

LeaderType LeaderRadius UseMarker

OtherOptions ApplySettingsto NewCalloutsin Selectwhetherthesecalloutpreferencesshouldapplytonewcalloutsinthisfileonly orglobally,toallfuturefiles

3. ClickOKtosetthecalloutpreferences. 4. ClickthedesiredinsertionmodesfromtheToolbar,andthenclickinthedrawingtoselecttheinsertionpointof thecalloutobject. Dependingonthemode,thefirstclickdefinestheleadershoulderortheleaderendpoint.


Leader shoulder example

Leader endpoint

374

| Chapter 9: Adding Text and Annotation

5. Clickagaintodetermineeithertheleaderendpointorleadershoulder,dependingonthemode.

2nd click defines the leader endpoint

1st click defines the leader shoulder

1st click defines the leader endpoint

2nd click defines the leader shoulder

Shoulder-to-Arrow mode

Arrow-to-Shoulder mode

6. Ifin3Pointmode,clickathirdtimetodefinetheshoulderlength. TheNotesManager:Calloutdialogboxopens.Enterthecalloutobjecttext;textwrapsiflongerthanthespecified maximumtextwidth.PressEntertoaddacarriagereturn.

7. ClickOKtocreatethecalloutobjectinthedrawing.

New dishwasher

Inserting a Leader Line |

375

Editing a Callout Object


Editing Callout Text
Toeditthetextofanexistingcalloutobject: 1. Selectthecalloutobjecttoedit. 2. EitherdoubleclickonthecalloutobjectwiththeSelectiontool,orclickEditNotefromtheObjectInfopalette. TheEntertheTextoftheNotedialogboxopens. 3. Enterthedesiredtextchanges. 4. ClickOK. 5. SetthetextattributesasneededusingtheText>FormatTextcommand.Youcanalsodraganddropatextstyle fromtheResourceBrowserontothecalloutobject.

Editing Callout Parameters


Toeditthecalloutproperties: 1. Selectthecalloutobject. 2. IntheObjectInfopalette,changetheparametersasdesired.TheparametersaredescribedinCreatingaCallout Objectonpage 371.AnadditionalparameterthatisavailableintheObjectInfopaletteisLeaderLength,which allowsthelengthoftheleaderlinetobespecifiedpreciselywithnumericvaluesratherthanwiththemouse. Finally,themarkertypecanbechangedfromtheAttributespalette. 3. Onthedrawing,acalloutobjectcontainscontrolpointswhichcanbemovedwiththemousetochangethe callouttextwidth,shoulderlength,andendpointposition.Acurvedcalloutleaderincludesadditionalcontrol pointsforadjustingtheleadercurvature.
Adjusts shoulder length Adjusts endpoint location

R19facedbattinsulation
Adjusts text width

Adjusts leader length Adjusts leader curvature

Re-scaling Callout Objects


Calloutobjectsarespecifiedanddrawninpagescale;theydrawtothesameapparentsize,regardlessofthelayer scale.Ifthelayerthecalloutobjectisonisrescaled,orthecalloutobjectiscutandpastedbetweenlayersofdifferent scales,thecalloutobjectautomaticallyrescales.

Inserting a Leader Line


Toinsertaleaderlinesymbol: ClicktheLeaderLineobjectfromtheBasictoolset. Ifthisisthefirsttimetheobjecthasbeeninsertedinthissession,theObjectPropertiesdialogboxopens.Setthedefault propertiesfortheobjectandclickOK.ThepropertiescanbeeditedafterplacementfromtheObjectInfopalette.

376

| Chapter 9: Adding Text and Annotation

Parameter
ShoulderLength

Description
Setsthelengthoftheleaderlinesshoulder
Shoulder Length

Arrows MarkerStyle MarkerSize/MarkerAngle

Setswhethertohaveanarrowontheleaderlineandifso,thesidefromwhich itextends Selectamarkerstylefromthelist Setsthesizeofthemarkerandtheangleoftheleaderline

Oncetheleaderlinehasbeenplaced,itsmarkercanbeselectedfromtheAttributespalette(seeMarkerAttributes onpage 538).

Adding a Sheet Border


TheSheetBordertoolplacesapreformattedborderalongtheedgesofthedrawingarea,settothedrawingsize. Standardsizepageshaveamatchingstandardsheetborder.Acustomsizebordercaneasilybespecified,andsheet bordersandtitleblockscanbecustomizedtomeetofficerequirements. TheUpdatePluginObjectscommandmayneedtoberunonfilesthatcontainsheetborders(formerlyknown asdrawingborders)thatwerecreatedinanearlierversionoftheVectorworksprogram.Thiscommand convertsthedrawingborderstothelatestformat;seeMigratingfromPreviousVersionsonpage 45. AdditionalsheetbordercapabilitiesareavailableintheVectorworksDesignSeriesproducts.SeeCreatingSheet Bordersonpage 521intheVectorworksDesignSeriesUsersGuide. Toplaceasheetborder: 1. Makethedesignorsheetlayeractive. 2. ClicktheSheetBordertoolfromtheDims/Notestoolset. 3. ClickPreferencesfromtheToolbartosetthedefaultsheetborderparameters. TheSheetBorderPreferencesdialogboxopens.

Adding a Sheet Border |

377

Parameter
SheetSize

Description
Selectastandardsizeandformatforthesheetborder,orselectFittoPagetosetthesheet bordertothepagedimensions(seePageSetuponpage 81).SelectCustomtouse customsheetborderdimensions,andspecifytheWidthandHeightdimensions. OpenstheImportTitleBlockdialogbox,forselectingatitleblocksymboltoinsert(see AddingaTitleBlockonpage 381),orselectNonefornotitleblock Locksthesheetbordercenterpositiontothepagecenter;deselecttopositionthesheet bordermanually.Iftheplanhasbeenrotated(VectorworksDesignSeriesrequired), selectLocktoPageCentertopositionthesheetbordercorrectlywheninanonrotated view. Whenatitleblockhasbeenselected,displaysonlythetitleblockandhidesallother sheetborderelements

TitleBlock LocktoPageCenter

UseAsTitleBlockOnly

4. Clickonceinthedrawingtosetthesheetborderinsertionpoint,andthenclickagaintosetthesheetborder orientation. 5. Thesheetborderisplacedonthedrawing.Sheetbordersshouldbeplacedas2Dscreenobjects(SeePlanar Modesof2DObjects:ScreenPlaneandLayerPlaneonpage 207). 6. SetthetextattributesasneededusingtheText>FormatTextcommand.Youcanalsodraganddropatextstyle fromtheResourceBrowserontothesheetborderobject. 7. SetthelineattributesasneededusingtheAttributespalette. 8. Thesheetbordercanberesizedandrescaledafterplacement,andtitleblocksandrevisionhistoriescanbe added.

378

| Chapter 9: Adding Text and Annotation

Sheet Border Properties


ThesheetborderpropertiescanbeeditedintheObjectInfopalette.

Parameter
Plane LocktoPageCenter

Description
Generally,forsheetborders,selectScreentoplacetheborderonthescreenplane.See PlanarModesof2DObjects:ScreenPlaneandLayerPlaneonpage 207. Locksthesheetbordercenterpositiontothepagecenter;deselecttopositionthe sheetbordermanually.Iftheplanhasbeenrotated(VectorworksDesignSeries required),selectLocktoPageCentertopositionthesheetbordercorrectlywhenina nonrotatedview. Selectastandardsizeandformatforthesheetborder,orselectFittoPagetosetthe sheetbordertothepagedimensions.SelectCustomtousecustomsheetborder dimensions,andclickBorderSettingstospecifythedimensions. SelectPortraitorLandscapeorientation Displaysthesheetborderhorizontaldimensions Displaysthesheetborderverticaldimensions OpenstheSheetBorderSettingsdialogbox,forspecifyingfurtherproperties(see SpecifyingAdditionalSheetBorderSettingsonpage 380) OpenstheImportTitleBlockdialogbox,toselectatitleblocksymboltoinsert(see AddingaTitleBlockonpage 381).Thisdialogboxcanalsobeaccessedfromthe sheetbordercontextmenu;rightclick(Windows)orCtrlclick(Macintosh)onthe sheetborder,andselectTitleBlock. Toremoveatitleblock,selecttheDefaultssymbolfolder,andthenselectNonefrom theSymbolslist.

Size

Orientation HorizontalDimension VerticalDimension BorderSettings TitleBlock

CurrentTitleBlock UseAsTitleBlockOnly TitleBlockPosition

Whenatitleblockhasbeeninserted,displaysthetitleblocksymbolname Whenatitleblockhasbeenselected,displaysonlythetitleblockandhidesallother sheetborderelements Specifiesthetitleblocklocationrelativetothesheetborder

Adding a Sheet Border | Parameter


TitleBlkScaleFactor

379

Description
Ifthetitleblockistoolargeorsmallatnormalscale(scalefactor1),scalesthetitle blocksize,includingtext.Avaluebelow1makesthetitleblocksmaller,whileavalue above1makesthetitleblocklarger;textisautomaticallyscaledalongwiththetitle blockgeometry. Addsahorizontal,vertical,orblockmargintothetitleblock Addsarevisionhistoryblocktothesheetborder

TitleBlkMargin UseRevisionBlock (VectorworksDesign Seriesrequired) ShowRevisionZone (VectorworksDesign Seriesrequired) UseToleranceBlock (VectorworksDesign Seriesrequired) UseProjectionBlock (VectorworksDesign Seriesrequired) ShowGrids

Addsarevisionzonecolumntotherevisionblock,forspecifyingthelocationofthe revision ForASMEtitleblocks,addsatoleranceblockareatothetitleblock

ForASMEtitleblocks,addsaprojectionblockareatothetitleblock;specifyFirst AngleorThirdAngleinProjection Displaysgridtextandlinesinthesheetbordermargin.Thissettingcanalsobe accessedfromthesheetbordercontextmenu:rightclick(Windows)orCtrlclick (Macintosh)onthesheetborder,andselectShowGrids. Displaysgridlinesonthedrawing Selectthefoldmarkmeasurementswhenaddingfoldmarkstothesheetborder.The firstmeasurementspecifiesthedrawingfoldwidthandthesecondmeasurement indicatesthemarginfoldwidth.SelectCustomtospecifycustomfoldmarkdistances. FoldmarksaredesignedforusewithISOdrawings.

ShowGridLines FoldMarks

MarginWidth FoldedWidth FoldedHeight HideBorder

Whencustomfoldmarksareselected,enterthemarginfoldwidth Whencustomfoldmarksareselected,enterthedrawingfoldwidth Whencustomfoldmarksareselected,enterthedrawingfoldheight Whenthesheetborderincludesatitleblock,hidesthesheetborderanddisplaysonly thetitleblock(thisallowsadifferentsheetbordertobeusedwiththattitleblock,if desired) Fillstheareabetweentheouterandinnerborderlineswithafillselectedfromthe Attributespalette AddsapartslisttoanASMEtitleblock,whenapartslistworksheethasbeencreated

FillBorder AddPartsList (VectorworksDesign Seriesrequired)

380

| Chapter 9: Adding Text and Annotation


Description
OpenstheEditTitleBlockdialogbox,forspecifyingthetitleblockinformation. Dependingontheselectedtitleblock,differentfieldsandtabsareavailable. InVectorworksDesignSeriesproducts,ASMEtitleblocksincludeatolerancetab,for editingthetoleranceblockinformation(seeEditingaToleranceBlockonpage 525 intheVectorworksDesignSeriesUsersGuide).USArchtitleblocksincludeProject andSheettabs;informationisenteredfromtheIssueManagerbutcanbeedited manually(seeTheIssueManageronpage 630intheVectorworksDesignSeries UsersGuide).

Parameter
EditTitleBlock

EditRevisionData (VectorworksDesign Seriesrequired) EditIssueData (VectorworksDesign Seriesrequired)

OpenstheEditRevisionDatadialogbox,forspecifyingrevisioninformationand format(seeEditingRevisionBlockDataonpage 523intheVectorworksDesign SeriesUsersGuide) OpenstheEditIssueDatadialogbox,forspecifyingissuedataonUSArchtitleblocks (seeEditingIssueDataonpage 526intheVectorworksDesignSeriesUsersGuide)

Specifying Additional Sheet Border Settings


AdditionalsheetbordersettingsareavailablefromtheObjectInfopalette. Tospecifyadditionalsheetbordersettings: 1. Selectthesheetborder. 2. IntheObjectInfopalette,clickBorderSettings.Alternatively,doubleclickonthesheetborder. TheSheetBorderSettingsdialogboxopens.

Adding a Sheet Border |

381

Parameter
DrawingSize Vertical/Horizontal Dimension DimensionsShown Are Margins Zones/Grids VerticalZones GridTextOrder HorizontalZones GridNumberOrder GridLabelSize ResettoDefaultValues

Description
Specifiesthesheetbordersize Specifiesthesheetbordervertical/horizontaldimensions;initially,thesearebasedon theSizeselectedintheObjectInfopalette,butthedimensionscanbeedited.This parameterisnotavailablewhentheSizeisFittoPage. Appliesthedimensionstoeithertheouterorinnerborderdimensions Specifiesthesheetbordermarginwidths

Specifiesthenumberofverticalzonestoinclude Indicateswhetherverticalgridtextstartsatthetoporbottomoftheborder Specifiesthenumberofhorizontalzonestoinclude Indicateswhetherhorizontalgridnumbersstartattheleftorrightoftheborder Specifiesthetextsizeforbothgridtextandnumbers IfthesheetborderSizeissettooneofthestandardsizes(suchasUSArchBorISO AS),selectthisbuttontorestorethedefaultsheetbordersettings

3. ClickOKtosetthesheetborderparameters.

Adding a Title Block


Atitleblockcontainingdrawinginformationcanbeaddedtothesheetborder.Titleblocksaresavedassymbolswith textlinkedtoarecord.

382

| Chapter 9: Adding Text and Annotation

Atitleblockcanbetheonlypartofthesheetborderthatdisplays,byselectingUseAsTitleBlockOnlyinthesheet borderpreferencesortheObjectInfopalette. AdditionaltitleblockcapabilitiesaredescribedinCreatingSheetBordersonpage 521intheVectorworks DesignSeriesUsersGuide. Toaddatitleblocktothesheetborder: 1. Selectthesheetborder. 2. IntheObjectInfopalette,clickTitleBlock. Alternatively,rightclick(Windows)orCtrlclick(Macintosh)onthesheetborderandselectTitleBlockfromthe contextmenu. TheImportTitleBlockdialogboxopens.

Parameter
SymbolFolders Symbols

Description
Specifiesthelocationofthesheetbordersymbols Providesagraphicallistofavailablesheetbordersymbols

3. Selectatitleblocksymbolfromtheselectedsymbolfolder.TheDefaultsfoldercontainsthedefaulttitleblock resources;seeDefaultContentinVectorworksFundamentalsandRenderworksonpage 157.Thetitleblocks listedunderTopLevelaretitleblocksymbolsthatexistinthecurrentfile. Toremoveanexistingtitleblock,selectNone. 4. ClickOKtoaddtheselectedtitleblocksymboltothesheetborder.Thetitleblockisscaledtomatchthecurrent layerscaleifnecessary. Whenasheetborderwithatitleblockisinsertedintoadrawing,theSheetBorderComponentssymbolfolderis automaticallycreatedanddisplaysintheResourceBrowser.Titleblocksymbolsaddedtothesheetborderare automaticallyplacedinthatfolder.

Creating a Custom Title Block in Vectorworks Fundamentals


Acustomtitleblock,containingcompanyspecificgraphics,information,anddatafields,canbecreatedandthen insertedintoasheetborder. Threestepsarerequired:createatitleblocksymbol,createacustomrecordformat,andlinktherecordformatfieldsto thetitleblocksymboltextfields. CreatingacustomtitleblockintheVectorworksDesignSeriesproductsrequiresadditionalsteps,ifthecustomtitle blockistobeusedwiththeIssueManager.SeeCreatingaCustomTitleBlockinVectorworksDesignSerieson page 953intheVectorworksDesignSeriesUsersGuide.

Adding a Sheet Border |


TocreateacustomtitleblockforuseintheVectorworksFundamentalsproduct:

383

1. Inanewfilewithascaleof1:1,createtheelementsofthetitleblock,includinglines,rectangles,graphics,and text.Creatingthetitleblockatascaleof1:1ensuresthatitisinsertedatthecorrectscalewhenitisplacedona sheetlayeroradesignlayerofanyscale.Thetitleblockshouldbea2Dscreenobject(SeePlanarModesof2D Objects:ScreenPlaneandLayerPlaneonpage 207).

Donotuseany3Delements. Companylogoscanbeimportedasbitmaps. Thetitleblockgeometry(pencolor,linestyle,andlinethickness)andtext(font,style,andcolor)caneither inheritthesheetborderattributes,orretainthoseattributesascreated.TheByClasssettinginthe Attributespaletteindicatesthattheattributesshouldbeinheritedfromthesheetborder.Ifanattributeisnot settoByClass,thenitsoriginalsettingisretained.

Description
Theattributesofthetitleblockelements areinheritedfromthesheetborder

Method
SpecifyByClassintheAttributespaletteforthese elements.Fortextfontandstyleattributes,setthePen Stylebyclasstousethesamefontandstyleasthe sheetborder.Fortextcolor,setthePenColorto ColorByClass. Settheattributesofthegeometryandtextfromthe Attributespalettewhenthetitleblockiscreated.For textfontandstyleattributes,setthePenStyletoSolid tousethetextattributessetwhenthetitleblockwas created.Fortextcolor,selectthedesiredPenColor.

Thetitleblockelementsretainthe attributesascreated

Differentsettingscanbecombinedsothatsomeattributesareinheritedfromthesheetborder,whileothers remainascreated.Forexample,ifalineshouldusethesamecolorasthesheetborder,buthaveadashedline stylewithathicknessof1mm,whencreatingtheline,setthelinesPenColortoColorByClass,itsLine Thicknessto1mm,itsPenStyletodashed,anditsLineStyletothedesireddashstyle. 2. Selectallthetitleblockelements,andthenselectModify>CreateSymbol. Theinsertionpointofthesymbolshouldbeatlowerrightcornerofthetitleblock.SeeCreatingNewSymbols onpage 175. 3. CreateanewrecordformatasdescribedinCreatingRecordFormatsonpage 191. ThefieldnamesoftherecordformatareusedasthetitlesfortheassociatededitablefieldsintheEditTitleBlock dialogbox.

384

| Chapter 9: Adding Text and Annotation

Tocreateamultilinefield,appendapoundsign(#)tothefieldname,asinDrawingTitle#. UseaP_prefixtoindicateprojectfields(fieldswiththesamevalueonalltitleblocksinthefile).AnS_prefix indicatessheetfields(fieldswithadifferentvalueonanytitleblocks).TheprefixescausetheEditTitleBlock dialogbox,accessedfromtheObjectInfopalette,tobeseparatedintoprojectandsheettabs.Fieldswithouta prefixareplacedontheGeneraltab. Usean_SNsuffixtoindicatethatafieldshouldgetsitsvaluefromtheSheetNumberofitssheetlayer.IfUse AutomaticDrawingCoordinationisenabledindocumentpreferences(VectorworksDesignSeriesrequired), the_SNsuffixalsomeansthatwhenthistitleblockfieldisupdated,theSheetNumberofthesheetlayerandof annotationobjectsonthelayerareupdated. Usean_SDsuffixtoindicatethatthefieldshouldgetitsvaluefromtheSheetTitleofitssheetlayer.IfUse AutomaticDrawingCoordinationisenabledindocumentpreferences(VectorworksDesignSeriesrequired), the_SDsuffixalsomeansthatwhenthistitleblockfieldisupdated,theSheetTitleofthesheetlayerisupdated. Ifthefieldshouldalsobemultiline,usean_SD#suffix.

ToworkwiththeIssueManager(VectorworksDesignSeriesrequired),specialconsiderationsapplywhenthe titleblockfieldsareformatted.SeeCreatingaCustomTitleBlockinVectorworksDesignSeriesonpage 953in theVectorworksDesignSeriesUsersGuide. 4. AttachthecustomrecordformattothetitleblocksymbolthroughtheResourceBrowserasdescribedin AttachingRecordFormatstoaSingleSymbolInstanceorObjectonpage 193.

Using Notation Objects |

385

5. Editthetitleblocksymbolandattachtherecordfieldstotheassociatedsymboltext;seeLinkingTexttoRecord Formatsonpage 197formoreinformation. 6. TobeavailabletotheSheetBordertool,eitherthefilemustbesavedintheLibraries\Defaults\SheetBorder TitleBlocksfolder,orthecustomsymbolanditsassociatedrecordformatmustbeimportedintotheCustom TitleBlocks.vwxfile,locatedinthesamedefaultcontentfolder. Alternatively,importthetitleblocksymbolfromanotherfile. 7. Toplacethecustomtitleblock,clickTitleBlockfromtheObjectInfopaletteofaselectedsheetborder,andselect thecustomtitleblocksymbol.

Using Notation Objects


Thenotationobjectsaddinformationtoadrawingwithpreformattedobjectsthatmaintainaconstantsizeregardless ofthedrawingscale.

Creating Revision Clouds


UsetheRevisionCloudtooltoidentifyasectionofadrawingthathaschanged.Insertarevisioncloudinanareaof thedrawing,oraroundanentireportionofthedrawing,ifappropriate. FortheVectorworksDesignSeriesproducts,revisioncloudscanalsobecreatedbyfirstdrawingapolylineandthen selectingtheObjectsfromPolylinecommand(seeCreatingObjectsfromPolylinesonpage 667intheVectorworks DesignSeriesUsersGuide).

386

| Chapter 9: Adding Text and Annotation


Rectangle Freehand Polygon Concave Shape

Oval

Preferences

Regular Polygon

Convex Shape

Tocreatearevisioncloud: 1. ClicktheRevisionCloudtoolfromtheDims/Notestoolset. 2. ClicktheRevisionCloudPropertiesToolbarbuttontodefinetherevisioncloudproperties.Thepropertiescan alsobesetafterplacement,fromtheObjectInfopalette.ClickOK. 3. Selecttherevisioncloudmodeandselecttodrawthecloudwitheitheraconvexorconcaveshape.Theconvex shapedrawsbillowsoutwardfromthepreviewimageorfromthespecifiedvertices.Theconcaveshapedraws billowsinwardfromthepreviewimageorfromthespecifiedvertices.

Mode
Oval

Description
Insertstherevisioncloudaroundtheperimeterofapreviewoval.Clicktosetthestartpoint, movethecursorinthedesireddirection,andclicktosettheendpoint.Constraintheovalto 45degreestodrawacircle.
1st click

2nd click

Convex Shape

Concave Shape

Rectangle

Insertstherevisioncloudaroundtheperimeterofthepreviewrectangle.Clicktosetthestart point,movethecursorinthedesireddirection,andclicktosettheendpoint.Constrainthe rectangleto45degreestodrawasquare.


1st click

2nd click Convex Shape Concave Shape

Using Notation Objects | Mode


RegularPolygon

387

Description
Insertstherevisioncloudaroundtheperimeterofthespecifiedvertices.Clicktosetthestart point(firstvertex),clickatthedesiredlocationforeachsubsequentvertex,andeitherclickat thestartingvertextoclosethepolygonordoubleclickatthefinalvertextocreateanopen polygon.Ifthepolygonisopen,thecloudiscompletedbasedontheoutline.
2nd click

Start and end click

3rd click Convex Shape Concave Shape

FreehandPolygon

Insertstherevisioncloudaroundtheperimeterofthespecifiedvertices.Clicktosetthestart pointandclickdragtodrawthefreehandpolygon.Ifthepolygonisopen,thecloudis completedbasedontheoutline.


Start and end click

Convex Shape

Concave Shape

4. Clicktodrawtherevisioncloudaccordingtothespecifiedmode. TherevisioncloudpropertiescanbeeditedfromtheObjectInfopalette.

Parameter
BillowSize BillowRadius BillowVariability BillowHeight BillowType PolylineParameters

Description
Selecttherelativebillowsizefromextrasmalltoextralarge,orselectCustomtospecifya billowsize Foracustombillowsize,setsthebillowsize Selectthevariability(thevariationbetweenthesmallestandlargestbillows) Selecttherelativebillowheight(small,medium,orlarge) Selectaconvexorconcavebillowtype Editstherevisioncloudpolyline;seePolylineParametersonpage 261

Thefollowingillustrationdemonstratestheeffectsofvaryingthebillowsizeandbillowvariabilityparameters.

388

| Chapter 9: Adding Text and Annotation


Billow Height = Medium

None

Billow Variability

Low

Medium

High Extra Small Small Medium Billow Size Large Extra Large

Creating Drawing Labels


TheDrawingLabeltoolisapointobjectthatprovidesdescriptiveinformationforthedrawing. Bydefault,alabelobjectincludesatitle,thescaleofthedrawing,andanautomaticallyassigneddrawingnumber.The numberofthesheetthatcontainsthedrawingcanalsobeincludedinthelabel. Manyofthesevaluesdefault,dependingonwherethelabelwascreated:onadesignlayer,orinaviewport annotation,forexample. Tocreateadrawinglabel: 1. Ensurethattheappropriatelayerisactive. 2. ClicktheDrawingLabeltoolfromtheDims/Notestoolset. 3. Clickonthedrawingatthedesiredlocationtoplaceadrawinglabelobject. 4. Clickagaintosettherotation. Ifthisisthefirsttimetheobjectisinsertedinthissession,theObjectPropertiesdialogboxopens.These parametersapplytosubsequentplacementsoftheobjectandcanbechangedintheObjectInfopalette.ClickOK. Drawinglabelobjectsshouldbeplacedas2Dscreenobjects(SeePlanarModesof2DObjects:ScreenPlaneand LayerPlaneonpage 207).

Using Notation Objects |

389

Parameter
Rotation DrawingTitle

Description
Specifiesthenumberofdegreestorotatethelabel(0.00ishorizontal) Specifiesthetitletextthatdisplaysabovethelabelshorizontalrulingline;defaultsto thefilename(onadesignlayer),tonothing(onasheetlayer),ortotheDrawingTitle (inaviewport),butitcanbeedited. IfUseAutomaticDrawingCoordinationisenabledindocumentpreferences (VectorworksDesignSeriesrequired),andthelabelisinaviewport,changingthis fieldwillupdatetheviewportsdrawingtitle,andviceversa.

DrawingNumber

Identifiesthisdrawingonthecurrentsheet.Thisvaluedisplaysinthetophalfofthe labelbubble,unlessNumberStyleissettoNone.Ifthelabelisinaviewportorsheet layer,theprogramautomaticallynumbersitemsandupdatesthisfield;thisnumber mustbeuniqueonthislayer.Ifthelabelisonadesignlayer,enteranidentifier manually. Identifiesthesheetthatcontainsthedrawing.Thisvaluedisplaysinthebottomhalf ofthelabelbubble,ifNumberStyleissettoDrawingandSheet.Ifthelabelisona sheetlayer,thisfielddefaultstotheSheetNumber. IfUseAutomaticDrawingCoordinationisenabledindocumentpreferences (VectorworksDesignSeriesrequired),andthelabelisonasheetlayer,thisfield cannotbeeditedandalwayscontainstheSheetNumber.

SheetNumber

NumberStyle

Specifieswhichdrawingidentifiernumbers(fromtheDrawingNumberandSheet Numberfields)displayinthelabel

None (Bubble Style=None)

Drawing only

Drawing and sheet

ScaleDisplayStyle

Specifieswhichscaleinformationdisplaysbeneaththelabelshorizontalrulingline

None

Numbers only

Scale label

Custom

CustomScale UseArchitecturalScale

IfScaleDisplayStyleissettoCustom,enterinformationtodisplayinthescalearea SelectthisoptiontousetheUSArchitectscalestyle(asin1/4=10);deselectthe optiontousetheEngineeringstyle(asin1:48)

390

| Chapter 9: Adding Text and Annotation


Description
Selectthestyleofthelabelbubblegraphic,whichcancontaintheDrawingNumber andSheetNumberthatidentifythedrawing

Parameter
BubbleStyle

None

Round rect

Circle

Rectangle

DrawFullwidthBubble Title/Scale/Drawing#/ Sheet#TextSize BubbleScaleFactor LineLengthMode

Selectthisoptiontoextendthebubblegraphictothefulllengthoftherulingline;not availableifBubbleStyleissettoNone Selectthefontsizesforthevariouselementsofthedrawinglabel Specifiesthelabelsbubblesize;enteralargervaluetoincreasethesize(thenumber mustbegreaterthanzero) Setsthelengthofthedrawinglabelshorizontalrulingline.Afixedlengthrulingline issetbythePrintedLengthvalue.Anautofitrulinglineissettothelengthofthe longesttextboundingbox,eitheraboveorbelowtherulingline.Acontrolpoint rulinglineissetbythelocationofitscontrolpoint;clickthecontrolpointtoselectit andclickinthedesiredlocationinthedrawingtoadjusttherulinglinelengthorto fliptherulinglinetotheoppositeside.

Fixed

control

Control Point Auto-Fit

PrintedLength Flip

Foradrawinglabelusingafixedlengthrulingline,setsthelengthofthedrawing labelontheprintedpage Selectthisoptiontomovethebubble(includingtheDrawingNumberandSheet Number)totherightsideofthelabel:

Default label

Flipped label

Using Notation Objects | Parameter


RuleOffset

391

Description
Specifiestheverticaloffsetbetweenthelabelsbubbleandhorizontalrulinglineon theprintedpage(0iscentered);enteranegativenumbertomovetheline,title,and scalebelowthecenterlineofthebubble Specifiestheverticaldistancebetweenthelabelshorizontalrulinglineandthetext aboveit.Enterapositivevaluetomovethetextfurtherabovetherulingline,ora negativevaluetomovethetextclosertotherulingline. Specifiestheverticaldistancebetweenthelabellineandthetextbelowit.Entera positivevaluetomovethetextfurtherabovetherulingline,oranegativevalueto movethetextclosertotherulingline.

TitleMargin

ScaleMargin

5. SetthetextattributesasneededusingtheText>FormatTextcommand.Youcanalsodraganddropatextstyle fromtheResourceBrowserontothedrawinglabelobject. 6. SetthelineattributesasneededusingtheAttributespalette.

Creating Reference Markers


TheReferenceMarkertooldisplaysthedrawingnumberandsheetnumberofthereferenceddrawing.Selectfroma varietyofconfigurations. Tocreateareferencemarker: 1. Ensurethattheappropriatelayerisactive. 2. ClicktheReferenceMarkertoolfromtheDims/Notestoolset. 3. Clickonthedrawingatthedesiredlocationtoplaceareferencemarkerobject. 4. Clickagaintosettherotation. Ifthisisthefirsttimetheobjectisinsertedinthissession,theObjectPropertiesdialogboxopens.These parametersapplytosubsequentplacementsoftheobjectandcanbechangedintheObjectInfopalette.ClickOK. Referencemarkerobjectsshouldbeplacedas2Dscreenobjects(SeePlanarModesof2DObjects:ScreenPlane andLayerPlaneonpage 207).

392

| Chapter 9: Adding Text and Annotation


Description
Specifiesthenumberofdegreestorotatethemarker(0.00ishorizontal) Specifiesthemarkersize;increasethescalevaluetoobtainalargermarker Selectoneofthetypesandconfigurationsfromthelist
Elevation Config 1 Config 2 Config 3

Parameter
Rotation 2DScaleFactor Type/Config

Detail Config 1 Config 2 Config 3

Section

Config 1

Config 2

Config 3

DrawingNumber SheetNumber Separator ArrowAngle ArrowFill

Specifiesthedrawingnumberoftheitemthemarkerreferences Specifiesthesheetnumberoftheitemthemarkerreferences ForConfig1configurations,specifiestheseparatorbetweentheDrawingNumber andSheetNumberinformation Forsomeconfigurations,specifiestheangleofthemarkerarrow Selectafilledorunfilledarrowstylefromthelist

5. SetthetextattributesasneededusingtheText>FormatTextcommand.Youcanalsodraganddropatextstyle fromtheResourceBrowserontothereferencemarkerobject. 6. SetthelineattributesasneededusingtheAttributespalette.

Advanced 3D Modeling
The3DPowerPackprovidesthefollowingfeaturesandbenefits: Advancedsolidmodelingoperations Advancedsurfacemodelingoperations Solidsurfaceinteractions ParticipationofsurfacesinBooleanoperations Easymanipulationofsurfacegeometry Simple3Duserinterface

10

The3DPowerPacktechnologyisfullyintegratedwiththeVectorworksprogramtoprovidecomprehensiveNURBS (NonUniformRationalBsplines)functionality.

3D Power Pack Fundamentals


NURBS Curves and Surfaces
NonUniformRationalBasisSpline(NURBS)isamathematicalformulationthatrepresentsthegeometryofcurves, circles,arcs,andsurfacesin3Dspace.Freeformcurvesandsurfacescanbecreatedandeditedwithahighlevelof bothflexibilityandprecision. ANURBScurvegenerallyconsistsofadegreevalueandweightedcontrolpoints,orvertices.Thecurvepasses betweenthevertexpoints;thedegreedetermineshowmanypointsaffectthecurve.Thedirectionindicatesthe startingandendingpointsofthecurveasitwasdrawn,whichcanaffecttheoutcomeofcertainoperations.
NURBS curve Degree = 3 Vertices = 6 Weight of each vertex = 1

Increasingtherelativeweightofoneoftheverticesmeansthevertexhasmoreofaninfluenceonthecurveandpulls thecurvetowardsthatvertex.

NURBS curve Degree = 3 Vertices = 6 Weight of selected vertex = 8 Weight of remaining vertices = 1

TheReshapetoolcanbeusedtomoveavertexorseveralvertices,changingtheshapeofthecurve(seeReshaping NURBSCurvesonpage 312).

394

| Chapter 10: Advanced 3D Modeling

IncreasingthedegreeofaNURBScurveproportionallyincreasesthenumberofvertices,allowingformoreflexibility indrawingthecurve,butalsomorecomplexityduetothenumerousweightsaffectingthecurve.
NURBS curve Degree = 10 Vertices = 27 Weight of each vertex = 1

ThesameprinciplesthatapplytoaNURBScurveapplytoasurface.ANURBSsurfaceisagrid,ormesh,ofweighted controlpointsintheuandvdirections.

V direction NURBS surface U Degree = 2 V Degree = 2 Vertices = 9 Weight of each vertex = 1

U direction

IncreasingthedegreeofaNURBSsurfaceintheUand/orVdirectionincreasesthenumberofvertices,adding flexibilityaswellascomplexity.

NURBS surface U Degree = 6 V Degree = 6 Vertices = 49 Weight of all each vertex = 1

ANURBSsurfacealsohasadirection,ornormal,whichaffectstheoutcomeofcertainoperations,suchasfilletsurface creation.IsoparametriccurvesindicatetheUandVdirection,andedgecurvesaredrawnalongtheedges,helpingto visualizetheNURBSsurface.

3D Power Pack Fundamentals |

395

Edge

Iso-parametric curve

Eachvertexonthesurfacecanhaveaweightwhichpullsthesurfacetowardstheweightedvertices.

NURBS surface U Degree = 6 V Degree = 6 Vertices = 49 Weight of selected vertex = 100 Weight of remaining vertices = 1

TheReshapetoolcanmoveasinglevertexorarowofvertices,deformingthesurface(seeReshapingNURBS Surfacesonpage 313).

Surface V vertices moved with Reshape tool

BothNURBScurvesandsurfacescanbedefinedbycontrolpointsorbyinterpolationpoints.Thecurveorsurface passesbetweencontrolpointsorthroughinterpolationpoints.
Control point Interpolation point

396

| Chapter 10: Advanced 3D Modeling

Interpolatedcurvesandsurfacesmaybeeasiertomodify.SeeCreatingNURBSCurvesonpage 400and InterpolatedNURBSSurfacesonpage 402. Complex,freeformshapescanbecreatedwithNURBScurvesandNURBSsurfaces.Theshapescanthenbe combined,clipped,addedto,trimmed,extended,analyzed,andotherwisemodifiedasdescribedinthesesections.

3D Power Pack Cursors


Specialcursorsdisplayduringcertainoperationstohelpdeterminethecurrentmousefunction;theydonotdisplay whenanactiveselectionisabouttooccur.

Cursor/Operation
EdgeSelection

Where Used
ExtracttoolsPointandCurvemodes,ChamferEdgetool,andtheFilletEdgetool

FaceSelection

ExtracttoolsSurfacemodes,ShellSolidtool,Push/Pulltool,aswellastheChamferEdge andFilletEdgetoolswiththeSelectFacesoptionturnedon PresstheAltkey(Windows)orOptionkey(Macintosh)toselectthebackfacesofsolid objects.

CurveSelection

LoftSurfacetool,Projecttool,andPush/Pulltool

SurfaceSelection

Projecttool

Selecting the Edges and Faces of a Solid


Several3DPowerPacktoolsrequiretheselectionofedgesorfacesofasolid.Forexample,theExtracttoolsSurface mode,thePush/Pulltool,andtheShellSolidtoolrequirefaceselection.TheChamferEdgeandFilletEdgetoolscan requirebothfaceandedgeselection. ThecolorandopacityusedforpreselectionhighlightingissetbytheObjectHighlightingToolHighlighting preferenceintheinteractivesettings.SeeSelectionandPreselectionIndicatorsonpage 63andConfiguring InteractiveDisplayonpage 65.

Selecting Edges
Thecursorchangestoanarrowheadwhenonornearanedge,andtheedgeishighlightedforselection.Ifmorethan oneedgeisnearthecursor,thenearestedgeishighlighted.Clicktheedgetoselectit. ThecursoralsochangestoanarrowheadwhenonornearanisoparametriccurvefortheExtracttoolin IsoparametricCurvesmode.

Action
Selectmorethanoneedge Deselectaselectededge

Description
PresstheShiftkeyandselecttheedges ClickontheedgeagainwiththeShiftkeypressed

3D Power Pack Fundamentals | Action


Deselectedgesthathave beenselected Deselectthelastselection

397

Description
Clickonanemptyarea PresstheBackspace(Windows)orDelete(Macintosh)key,ordoubleclickontheedge

Arrow cursor (away from edge)

Arrowhead cursor (on or near edge)

Multiple edges selected

Iso-parametric curve

Selecting Faces
Whenthecursorisoveraface,thefacegeometryishighlighted,makingitveryeasytodeterminewhichfacewillbe selected.Clickonafacetoselectit.

2D face selection

Wireframe 3D face selection

Rendered 3D face selection

MultiplefacescanbeselectedwhilepressingtheShiftkey,muchliketheedgeselectiondescribedearlier.Deselecting facesisalsosimilartodeselectingedges.

398

| Chapter 10: Advanced 3D Modeling

Face will be selected

Face already selected

Faceselectioncanalsobeanedgebasedselection.Whenthecursorisonornearanedgeornearanisoparametric curve,youcanselectthefaceoneithersideoftheedgedependingonthecursorposition.Facehighlightinghelps determinewhichfacewillbeselected. Ifthecursorispositionedovermorethanonefaceandthedesiredfacetoselectisdifficulttodetermine,theSelect Facedialogboxopenstospecifytheface.ClickNextorPrevuntilthedesiredfaceishighlighted.ClickOKtoselectthe face.

Cursor positioned over several potential faces

Normally,onlythefrontsurfacesofasolidobjectcanbeselecteddirectly.Toselectthebackfaceofasolid,pressthe Optionkey(Macintosh)ortheAltkey(Windows)duringfaceselection.

Press Option (Macintosh)/ Alt (Windows) to select the back face

Displaying Surface Normals


ThesurfacenormalofNURBSsurfacescanbedisplayedinordertoclarifythesurfacedirectionandfacilitatethe creationoffilletsurfaces(seeCreatingaFilletSurfaceonpage 412),andthesectioningofsolids(seeSectioning Solidsonpage 344). TodisplaythesurfacenormalofaNURBSsurface: 1. SelectoneormoreNURBSsurfaces. 2. IntheObjectInfopalette,selectShowNormal.TheNURBSsurfacenormaldisplaysasaredarrow.

3D Power Pack Fundamentals |

399

Ifdesired,clickReverseNormalwhenasingleNURBSsurfaceisselectedtoreversethedirectionofthesurface normal.Thearrowchangesdirectionaccordinglytoindicatethenewdirection.

Displaying Curve Direction


ThedirectionofNURBScurvescanbedisplayedtohelpperform3Doperations. TodisplaythedirectionofaNURBScurve: 1. SelectoneormoreNURBScurves. 2. IntheObjectInfopalette,selectShowDirection.TheNURBScurvedirectiondisplaysasaredarrow.

Ifdesired,clickReverseDirectionwhenasingleNURBScurveisselectedtoreversethedirectionofthecurve. Thearrowchangesdirectionaccordinglytoindicatethenewdirection.

Editing a Fillet/Chamfer or Shell Object


Afillet,chamfer,orshellobjectfollowscertaineditingconventions. Thesetofedgesorfacesusedtocreatethefillet/chamferorshellcannotbechangedoncetheoperationisperformed; edgesorfacescannotbedeletedfromoraddedtotheexistingset.Toaddordeleteedgesorfaces,firstungroupthe object,andthenperformtheoperationagain.

Fillet operation performed

Ungroup to change existing set of edges

Fillet operation performed with new set of edges

400

| Chapter 10: Advanced 3D Modeling

ThepropertiesthatcanbechangedfromtheObjectInfopaletteincludethethicknessofashell,directionofshelling (inside/outside),theradiusofafilletorsetbackdistanceofachamfer.Inthecaseofvariableradiusfillets,the percentageoflengthandradiusvalueateachpointcanbeedited.However,onlytheparametersofthetopmostobject canbechanged. Forexample,ifashelliscreated,andthensomeoftheshelledgesarefilleted,onlythefilletparameterscanbe changeddirectlyfromtheObjectInfopalette.Tochangetheshellthickness,thefilletobjectmustfirstbeungrouped. Tochangetheoriginalextrusion,boththefilletandtheshellmustbeungrouped.Oncechangeshavebeenmade, reapplytheshellandfillet. TheModify>EditGroupcommandcannotbeusedfortheseobjects.

Surface Geometry Requirements


Somesurfacegeometrycancontaindegeneratepatches,singularities,orselfintersections.Thesetypesofsurfaces couldpotentiallybeproducedwiththeReshapetool,LoftSurfacetool,orCreateSurfacefromCurvescommand, andcanproduceundesirableresultsinthefinishedmodel.Surfaceoperations,suchastrimandstitchsurfaces,split, andotheroperations,likecreatingcontoursandsolidoperations,maynotbeabletomanipulatethesetypesof surfaces. DecomposingsuchsurfacesmayhelpbyseparatingthesurfacesintoNURBSsurfaceswithoutdiscontinuities. SeeDecomposingObjectsandSurfacesonpage 281.

Converting to NURBS
TheConverttoNURBScommandconvertsplanarobjectsand3DpolygonsintoNURBScurves,andconvertsthe facesofsolidstoNURBSsurfaces.ThisisaquickwayofcreatingNURBScurvesfromcirclesandarcs,orNURBS surfacesfromanextrusion,sweep,orothersolids. ToconverttoNURBScurvesorsurfaces: 1. SelecttheobjectorsolidtoconverttoNURBSsurfaces. 2. SelectModify>Convert>ConverttoNURBS. TheselectionisconvertedtoNURBSsurface(s)oraNURBScurve,asreflectedintheObjectInfopalette. Ifthesolidconsistedofseveralfaces,theconversionresultsinagroupofNURBSsurfaces.SelectModify>Ungroup toaccesstheindividualNURBSsurfacesthatmakeupthesolid.

Creating NURBS Curves


NURBS(NonUniformRationalBSplines)areusedtocreatecurvesin3Dspace.Theycanalsobeusedasdefining objectsforextrusionsalongapath. NURBScurvescanbecreatedusingoneoftwomodes.SpecifytheNURBScurvedegreepriortoselectingamode.
NURBS Curve by Interpolation Point

NURBS Curve by Control Point

NURBS Curve Degree Setting

Creating NURBS Curves |


NURBScurvescanalsobecreatedfromplanarobjectsbyconvertingthemtoNURBS;seeConvertingto NURBSonpage 400.

401

Setting the NURBS Curve Degree


Thecurvedegreeaffectsthenumberofverticescreated;thehigherthedegreevalue,thegreaterthenumberof vertices. TospecifytheNURBScurvedegree: 1. ClicktheNURBSCurvetoolfromthe3DModelingtoolset,andclickNURBSCurveDegreeSettingfromthe Toolbar. 2. TheCurveDegreedialogboxopens.SpecifythecurvedegreefortheNURBSCurvetooltouse.ClickOK. Setthedegreevalueto1tocreateaNURBScurvewithlinearsegments(similartoa3Dpolygon).Alinear NURBScurvecanbeusedtomeasureanobjectfrompointtopointina3Dview.

NURBS Curve by Interpolation Point


TocreateaNURBScurvebyinterpolationpoint: 1. ClicktheNURBSCurvetoolfromthe3DModelingtoolset,andselectNURBSCurvebyInterpolationPoint mode. 2. Clicktosetthefirstpointonthecurve. 3. Clicktosetthepointthroughwhichthecurvepasses. Continueclickingtoaddmoreinterpolationpoints,extendingthecurve.
Interpolation point

4. Doubleclicktosettheendpointofthecurve.

NURBS Curve by Control Point


TocreateaNURBScurvebycontrolpoint: 1. ClicktheNURBSCurvetoolfromthe3DModelingtoolset,andselectNURBSCurvebyControlPointmode. 2. Clicktosetthefirstpointonthecurve. 3. Clicktosetthepointthatthecurvepullstowardbutdoesnottouch. Continueclickingtoaddmorecontrolpoints,extendingthecurve.

402

| Chapter 10: Advanced 3D Modeling


Control point

4. Doubleclicktosettheendpointofthecurve.

NURBS Surfaces
Interpolated NURBS Surfaces
AsdescribedinCreatingNURBSCurvesonpage 400,NURBScurvescanbecreatedbyinterpolationpointsor controlpoints.Similarly,aNURBSsurfacecanbecreatedbyinterpolationpoints.AninterpolatedsurfaceisaNURBS surfacethatpassesthroughatwodimensionalarrayof3Dinterpolationpoints.RegularNURBSsurfacesaredefined bytheircontrolpoints,whichmaynotlieonthesurfaceandcanbedifficulttouseforreshapingthesurface(itis difficulttoknowhowmuchthecontrolpointshouldbemovedinordertoreshapethesurfacebyaspecificdistance). Becauseinterpolationpointslieonthesurface,itismucheasiertomodifythesepointswiththeReshapetoolorthe ObjectInfopalette,andhavethesurfacepassthroughthepoints. Aninterpolatedsurfacecanbecreated,oranexistinguntrimmedNURBSsurfacecanbeconvertedtoaninterpolated surface,foreasierreshaping. Whenaninterpolatedsurfaceisusedinanotheroperation,suchasaBooleanoperationortrimming,thesurface becomesacontrolpointsurface.

Creating an Interpolated Surface


AnewinterpolatedNURBSsurfacecanbecreatedwiththeCreateInterpolatedSurfacecommand. Tocreateaninterpolatedsurface: 1. SelectModel>3DPowerPack>CreateInterpolatedSurface. 2. Clicktodefinethestartoftheinterpolationpointrow,andthenclickagaintodefinetheendoftherow.Clicka thirdtimetodefinethecolumnofinterpolationpoints.

TheCreateInterpolatedSurfacedialogboxopens. 3. SpecifythenumberofinterpolationpointsanddegreeofflexibilitytocreateforboththeUandVdirection.

NURBS Surfaces |

403

Parameter
UDirection NumberofPoints Degree VDirection NumberofPoints Degree

Description
Specifiesthenumberofinterpolationpoints(upto1000)tocreateintheUdirection; thisnumbermustbegreaterthantheUdegreenumber IndicatestheflexibilityofthesurfaceintheUdirection,from1to28;alargernumber resultsinamorevariablesurface

Specifiesthenumberofinterpolationpoints(upto1000)tocreateintheVdirection; thisnumbermustbegreaterthantheVdegreenumber IndicatestheflexibilityofthesurfaceintheVdirection,from1to28;alargernumber resultsinamorevariablesurface

4. ClickOKtocreatetheinterpolatedsurface.SelectShowVerticesintheObjectInfopalettetodisplaythe interpolationpoints.UsetheReshapetooltoreshapetheinterpolatedNURBSsurface.

Converting to an Interpolated Surface


AnexistinguntrimmedNURBSsurfacecanbeconvertedtoaninterpolatedNURBSsurfaceforeasierreshaping.

404

| Chapter 10: Advanced 3D Modeling

ToconvertanuntrimmedNURBSsurfacetoaninterpolatedsurface: 1. SelectanuntrimmedNURBSsurface. 2. SelectModel>3DPowerPack>CreateInterpolatedSurface. TheCreateInterpolatedSurfacedialogboxopens,withasuggestednumberofinterpolationpointsanddegree valuesfortheconversion.Theseparameterscanbechanged(seeCreatinganInterpolatedSurfaceon page 402).

3. ClickOKtocreatetheinterpolatedsurface.SelectShowVerticesintheObjectInfopalettetodisplay interpolationpoints.UsetheReshapetooltoreshapetheinterpolatedNURBSsurface.

Creating a Loft Surface


TheLoftSurfacetoolcreatescomplexshapesfromtwoormoreNURBScurvecrosssectionswithnorail,witharail andoneormorecrosssections,orwithtworailsandonecrosssection.ArailisaguideNURBScurvewhich determinestheresultingshape,intheonerailmode.InBirailSweepmode,therailsdonotneedtointersectthecross sections. Threemodesareavailable.

NURBS Surfaces |
Loft With One Rail

405

Loft With No Rail

Birail Sweep

Mode
LoftWithNoRail LoftWithOneRail BirailSweep

Description
CreatesaloftsurfaceusingtwoormoreNURBScurvecrosssections CreatesaloftsurfaceusingaNURBScurverailandoneormoreNURBScurvecrosssections CreatesaloftsurfaceusingtwoNURBScurverailsandoneNURBScurvecrosssection

SimilartotheMultipleExtrudecommand,theLoftSurfacetoolnormallycreatesa3Dobject(agenericsolid)froma seriesofotherobjects(inthiscase,NURBScurves).UnlikeMultipleExtrude,thecrosssectionsdonotneedtobe equallyspaced,andtheresultingprofilecanbemanipulatedtoavoidselfintersectionandtocontroltwist. Thistoolcanpotentiallycreatesurfaceswhichcannotbefurthermanipulatedinthe3DPowerPack.SeeSurface GeometryRequirementsonpage 400.

Loft Surface Using No Rails


TocreatealoftsurfacefromtwoormoreNURBScurvecrosssections: 1. ClicktheLoftSurfacetoolfromthe3DModelingtoolset,andthenselectLoftWithNoRailfromtheToolbar. 2. Clickoneachcrosssection.Thecursorchangesintoanarrowheadwhenoveravalidcrosssection.Thepoint nearesttotheclickisselected.

Theproposedcurvealignmentdisplaysinredaseachsectionisselected. CrosssectionsarecreatedusingNURBScurveswhichdonotneedtobethesameshapeorplanar.AllNURBS curvesmustbeeitherclosedoropenobjects,notamixtureofthetwo.3Dlocicanbeusedinaloft,butmust displayattheendsoftheloft. 3. Onceallcurvesareselected,pressEnter(Windows)orReturn(Macintosh)orclickthecheckmarkbuttononthe Toolbar. TheLoftCreationdialogboxopens.

406

| Chapter 10: Advanced 3D Modeling

4. Specifythedesiredloftcreationsettings.

Parameter
SelectCurve Reverse SelectAlignmentbyPoint SelectAlignmentby Percentage Ruled

Description
Selectsthepreviousornextcrosssectioncurve.Reversechangesthedirectionof thecurvetotwistoruntwisttheloftsurface. Clicktoreversethecurvedirection Selectsthepreviousornextpointontheselectedcrosssectioncurve.Ifthecross sectiondoesnothaveanycorners,thisoptionisdisabled. Selectspointsalongageometricallycontinuouscrosssection(suchasacircle)by aspecifiedpercentage,orbyadjustingtheslider Createsalinearlyinterpolatedobject

NURBS Surfaces | Parameter


Closed

407

Description
Createsaloftsurfacethatclosesinonitself.Becausethestartpointcannotbe selectedastheendpointofaloft,theClosedoptionautomaticallycompletesthe connection.

Cross section

Loft surface without Closed option

Loft surface with Closed option

CreateSolid

Createsasolidloftsurfacewithcappedends;deselecttocreateagroupofNURBS surfacesinsteadofagenericsolid

KeepCurves Preview

Retainsthecrosssectionsaftertheloftiscreated Displaystheproposedloftsurfacesbasedonthecurrentsettings

5. ClickOKtoclosethedialogboxandcreatetheloftsurface(s).

Loft Surface Using One Rail


TocreatealoftsurfaceusingoneNURBScurverail: 1. ClicktheLoftSurfacetoolfromthe3DModelingtoolset,andthenselectLoftWithOneRailfromtheToolbar. 2. Clickontherail,andthenclickoneachcrosssection.

408

| Chapter 10: Advanced 3D Modeling


Rail

3. Onceallcurvesareselected,pressEnter(Windows)orReturn(Macintosh)orclickthecheckmarkbuttononthe Toolbar. TheLoftCreationdialogboxopens. 4. Specifythedesiredloftcreationsettings(seeLoftSurfaceUsingNoRailsonpage 405). 5. ClickOKtoclosethedialogboxandcreatetheloftsurface(s).

TherailNURBScurveshouldintersectallcrosssectioncurvesifthereismorethanonecurve. Whenasinglecrosssectionisused,thecurveissweptalongtherailandthecrosssectiondoesnotneedto intersecttherail.

NURBS Surfaces |

409

Loft Surface Using Two Rails


TocreatealoftsurfaceusingtwoNURBScurverails: 1. ClicktheLoftSurfacetoolfromthe3DModelingtoolset,andthenselectBirailSweepfromtheToolbar. 2. Clickoneachrail,andthenclickonthecrosssection.Thecrosssectionprofilecurvedoesnotneedtointersect therailcurves. Inthismode,onlyonecrosssectioncanbeselected.

Rails

3. Oncetheprofilecurveisselected,pressEnter(Windows)orReturn(Macintosh)orclickthecheckmarkbutton ontheToolbar. TheLoftCreationdialogboxopens. 4. Specifythedesiredloftcreationsettings(seeLoftSurfaceUsingNoRailsonpage 405). 5. ClickOKtoclosethedialogboxandcreatetheloftsurface(s).

Theloftsurfaceiscreateddifferentlydependingonwhethertheprofilecurveisopenorclosed,andhowthestart/end oftherailstouchtheprofilecurve.Incertaininstances,theclickorder(whichrailisclickedfirst)andlocation(partof theprofilecurvethatisclicked)willproduceadifferentloftsurface.

410

| Chapter 10: Advanced 3D Modeling


Effect of Rail Click Order/Profile Click Location
Therailclickorderandprofileclicklocationdonotaffecttheloft surfacecreation Boththerailclickorderandthelocationwheretheprofileisclicked affecthowtheloftsurfaceiscreated

Status of Profile Curve and Rails Open Profile Curve


Start/endofoneoftherailstouchesthe start/endoftheopenprofile Start/endoftherailsdonottouchthe start/endoftheopenprofile,ordonot touchtheopenprofileatall

Rails

Rails do not touch the open profile curve

Top rail clicked first, then bottom rail, Top rail clicked first, then bottom rail, and then the top of the profile curve and then the bottom of the profile curve OR OR Bottom rail clicked first, then top rail, Bottom rail clicked first, then top rail, and then the bottom of the profile curve and then the top of the profile curve

Closed Profile Curve


Start/endofoneoftherailstouchesthe closedprofilecurve Start/endoftherailsdonottouchthe closedprofileatall
Rails

Theclickorderandlocationdonotaffecttheloftsurfacecreation Theclickorderaffectshowtheloftsurfaceiscreated

Rails do not touch the closed profile curve

Top rail clicked first, then bottom rail, and then the profile curve

Bottom rail clicked first, then top rail, and then the profile curve

Creating Surfaces from Curves


TheCreateSurfacefromCurvescommandcreatesaNURBSsurfacefromanetworkofsingleclosedcurves(including closed2Dobjects)ortwoormoreopenNURBScurves.TheseNURBScurvescanbeplanarornonplanar,butNURBS intheUdirectionmustintersectNURBSintheVdirectionatonlyonepoint. Thiscommandcanpotentiallycreatesurfaceswhichcannotbefurthermanipulatedinthe3DPowerPack.See SurfaceGeometryRequirementsonpage 400. TocreateaNURBSsurfacefromcurves: 1. DrawtwoormoreopenNURBScurvestocreateanenclosedregion. 2. SelecttheNURBSobjectsbeingusedtocreatetheNURBSsurface.

NURBS Surfaces |
3. SelectModel>3DPowerPack>CreateSurfacefromCurves. ANURBSsurfaceiscreated.

411

MultipleopenNURBSthatformbothboundaryandinteriorcurvescanbeusedtocreateaNURBSsurface,but musthaveanequalnumberofintersections. ANURBSsurfaceisnotcreatedifthereismorethanoneintersectioncreatedbytheselectedcurves,creatingmultiple enclosedregions.Itisalsonotcreatedifthereisanintersectionbetweenselectedcurvesinthesameparametric directionorifthereareanunequalnumberofintersections.

Only one enclosed region allowed

Intersection between curves in the same parametric direction

Unequal number of intersections

Creating a Drape Surface


Youcanautomaticallycreatearectangular,drapedNURBSsurfaceoveranobject,uptoaspecificZplanevalue.This isusefulforrepresentingsurfacesincludingcurtains,tablecloths,productpackaging,andsitemodels(DesignSeries required). Tocreateadrapesurface: 1. Selectoneormoreobjectstobedraped.

412

| Chapter 10: Advanced 3D Modeling

2. SelectModel>3DPowerPack>CreateDrapeSurface. TheCreateDrapeSurfacedialogboxopens.

Parameter
Numberof Points UDirection VDirection PlaneZValue

Description
Specifiesthenumberofcontrolpointsonthedrapesurface;thegreaterthenumberof points,thecloserthedrapesurfaceistotheobject EnterthenumberofpointstocreateintheUdirection;thisnumbermustbegreaterthan3 EnterthenumberofpointstocreateintheVdirection;thisnumbermustbegreaterthan3 Specifythebaselevelofthedrapesurface(howfardownthebottomofthedrapegoes), whichmustbelessthanthehighestZcoordinateoftheobject

3. ClickOKtocreatethedrapesurface.

Creating a Fillet Surface


TheCreateFilletSurfacecommandcreatesasurfacebetweentwoselectedsurfaces,trimmingtheoriginalsurfacesby default. Thiscommandisusefulforsheetmetaldesign(forexample,forcarbodies)toprovideasmoothtransitionbetween twoadjacentsurfacesperhapsforaestheticqualityorbecauseofamanufacturingrequirement.

NURBS Surfaces |
TocreateafilletsurfaceattheintersectionoftwoselectedNURBSsurfaces:

413

1. SelecttwoNURBSsurfaces.ThepositionofthefilletsurfacedependsonthenormaloftheNURBSsurfaces; selectShowNormalintheObjectInfopalettetodisplaythesurfacenormals(seeDisplayingSurfaceNormals onpage 398).

2. SelectModel>3DPowerPack>CreateFilletSurface. TheFilletSurfacePreferencesdialogboxopens.EnterthedesiredFilletRadius,andthenselectthetrimand crosssectiontypeforthefillet. Thefollowingtrimtypeexamplesuseacircularcrosssectiontype,andthecrosssectionexamplesuseanedge tangencytrimtype.Theoriginalsurfacesaretrimmed.

Parameter
FilletRadius TrimType

Description
Specifiestheradiusofthefilletsurface

414

| Chapter 10: Advanced 3D Modeling


Description
Createsablendbetweentheminimalandmaximalintersectionsoneachendofthefillet

Parameter
EdgeTangency

Minimal

Trimsthefilletsurfacetotheminimalintersectingareasonthefaceboundaries

Maximal

Trimsthefilletsurfacetothemaximalintersectingareasonthefaceboundaries

NURBS Surfaces | Parameter


None

415

Description
Generatestheentirefilletwithouttrimmingthefilletsurface

CrossSectionType Circular Createsafilletsurfacewithacircularcrosssection

Linear

Createsafilletsurfacewithalinearcrosssection

416

| Chapter 10: Advanced 3D Modeling


Description
CreatesafilletsurfacewithatangentcontinuousG1crosssection

Parameter
Tangent Continuous Blend

Curvature Continuous Blend

CreatesafilletsurfacewithacurvaturecontinuousG2crosssection

TrimOriginal Surfaces

Createsafilletsurfaceandtrimstheoriginalsurfaceswheretheyconnecttothefilletsurface

Trim Original Surfaces selected

Trim Original Surfaces deselected

3. ClickOK. ANURBSfilletsurfaceiscreatedbetweenthetwoobjects. Thepositionofthefilletsurfacedependsonthesurfacenormals.ThefilletiscreateddifferentlyiftheReverse NormalbuttonisclickedforoneorbothofthesurfacesintheObjectInfopalette.

NURBS Surfaces |

417

Fillet surface after reversing the normal of the vertical surface

Creating Planar Caps


TheCreatePlanarCapscommandclosesofftheendsofopenendedsolidsbycreatingplanarNURBSsurfaces.These surfacescanthenbeaddedtotherestofthesurfaceswiththeAddSolidscommand. Tocreateplanarcaps: 1. Selecttheopenendedsolid.

2. SelectModel>3DPowerPack>CreatePlanarCaps. PlanarNURBSsurfacesarecreatedtocloseofftheendsofthesolid.

Planar caps moved for clarity

3. AddthesolidandtheplanarcapsurfacesbyselectingthemallandchoosingModel>AddSolids.

Creating a NURBS Surface by Revolving a Profile Along a Rail


ComplexNURBSsurfacescanbecreatedbyrevolvingaprofilealongaguidecurve(rail).Thisisanalternate,and sometimeseasier,methodofcreatingNURBSsurfacesthanusingtheLoftSurfacetool,especiallywhencreating tentlikestructures. TheRevolvewithRailcommandcreatestheNURBSsurfacebyrevolvingaplanarNURBScurveaboutanaxis.The revolutionisguidedbyarailcurveonaplaneperpendiculartotheplanecontainingtheprofilecurveandaxis.

418

| Chapter 10: Advanced 3D Modeling

axis

profile

rail

TocreateaNURBSsurfacewithprofileandrail: 1. Createtheaxis,railandprofileoutofNURBScurves. Conditionsmustmeetthefollowingrequirements: TheaxismustbealinearNURBScurve TheprofilemustbeaplanarNURBScurve Theprofilecannotintersecttheaxis,thoughitcantouch Theaxismustlieonthesameplaneastheprofile TherailmustbeaplanarNURBScurvethatliesonaplaneperpendiculartotheplanecontainingtheaxisand profile

2. SelectModel>3DPowerPack>RevolvewithRail.Select,inorder,theaxis,profile,andrail.

Click 3 Click 1 Click 2

3. TheNURBSsurfacesareautomaticallycreated.

Theraildefinestheextentoftherevolution.Anopenrailcurvegeneratessurfacesuntiltherailends.

NURBS Surfaces |

419

NURBS Surface Properties


ThepropertiesofaNURBSsurfacearedisplayedintheObjectInfopalette,wheretheycanalsobeedited.NURBS surfacescanalsobereshapedwiththeReshapetool;seeReshapingObjectsonpage 302formoreinformation.

Parameter
Move

Description
SelectEntireObjecttoeditalltheverticesofthesurface,VertexOnlytoedit onlytheselectedvertex,UVerticestoeditalloftheverticesinarowintheU direction,andVVerticestoeditalloftheverticesinarowintheVdirection ScrollsthroughtheverticesoftheselectedNURBSsurfaceineithertheU parametricdirectionorVparametricdirection DependingontheselectionintheMovelist,displaysthepositionofthecurrent surfaceorvertex;editthevaluestochangethesurface/vertexposition ANURBSsurfaceisdefinedmathematicallybytwoparameters,UandV,which increaseordecreasealongcertaindirectionscalledtheUandVparametric directions.Thetwodirectionsareperpendiculartoeachother. IncreasingtheUorVDegreevalueaddsverticesinthatparametricdirection;the verticescanthenbemanipulated

EditU/V X,Y,Z/X,Y,Z UDegree/VDegree

VDegree Weight

DegreeintheVparametricdirection;increasingthisvalueaddsverticesthatcan thenbemanipulated NURBScurvesandsurfacesarerepresentedmathematicallybyweightedcontrol points.Theweightvaluecanbeanywherebetween .01and100.Aweightabove 1pullsthecurveorsurfacetowardthecontrolpoint;aweightbelow1hasthe reverseeffect. Flipsthesurfacenormaldirection CreatesaNURBSsurface,ifthesurfacehasbeentrimmed DisplaystheNURBSsurfaceparameters Selecttodisplaythesurfacesvertices DisplaysthesurfacenormalasaredarrowfortheselectedNURBSsurface

ReverseNormal Untrim NURBSSurfaceparameters (displayonly) ShowVertices ShowNormal

420

| Chapter 10: Advanced 3D Modeling

Extracting Geometry
TheExtracttoolcanbeusedtoextractgeometryfromtheedgeorsurfaceofaNURBSsurfaceorsolidobject,leaving theoriginalunmodified.Theextractedgeometrycanthenbeusedforsnappingorforothersurfaceoperations.
Extract Curve Extract Surface Extract Preferences

Extract Point

Extract Iso-parametric Curve

Mode
ExtractPoint

Description
Extracts3DlocifromtheedgesofaNURBSsurfaceorsolidobject.3Dlociare placedatthestart,end,andmidpointsoftheselectededges.Forcircular edges,a3Dlocusiscreatedatthecirclecenteraswell. ExtractsaNURBScurvefromtheedgeofasolidobject Extractsanisoparametriccurvefromthesurfaceofasolidobject ExtractsaNURBSsurfacefromthefaceofasolid Providesoptionsforextractingtangententities,faces,orallentities;the specificitemsextracteddependsonwhichmodeisselected.Theseoptions havenoeffectinExtractIsoparametricCurvemode.

ExtractCurve ExtractIsoparametricCurve ExtractSurface ExtractPreferences

ToextractgeometryfromtheedgeorsurfaceofaNURBSsurfaceorsolidobject: 1. Inthedesiredview,clicktheExtracttoolfromthe3DModelingtoolset,andthenselectthedesiredmodefrom theToolbar. 2. IfExtractIsoparametricCurvemodewasselected,skiptostep4.Forallothermodes,clickExtractPreferences fromtheToolbar. TheExtractPreferencesdialogboxopens.

Extracting Geometry | Parameter


SelectTangentEntities

421

Description
InExtractPointorExtractCurvemode,extractslociorcurvesfrom tangentiallyconnectededgesoftheselectedobject;inExtractSurfacemode, extractssurfacesfromtangentiallyconnectedfacesoftheselectedobject InExtractPointorExtractCurvemode,extractslociorcurvesfromalledgesof theselectedface(s) InExtractPointorExtractCurvemode,extractslociorcurvesfromalledgesof theselectedobject;inExtractSurfacemode,extractssurfacesfromallfacesof theselectedobject InExtractSurfacemode,createsplanarobjectsfromfacesbyextractingthe geometryofaplanarface.Forexample,createapolylineextractedfromthe faceofawall.Thepolylinecouldthenhaveahatchappliedtosimulatethe appearanceofbrickin3Dviews.

SelectFaces SelectAllEntities

CreatePlanarObjects

AnotherwaytocreateplanarobjectsfromfacesiswiththePolygonfromInner Boundarymodeofthe2DPolygontool.SeeCreatingaPolygonfromanInner Boundaryonpage 243. 3. SpecifythedesiredpreferencesandclickOK. Selecttheedge(s)orsurface(s)fromwhichgeometrywillbeextracted.Toselectmultipleedgesorsurfaces,hold theShiftkeywhileselecting.Toselectthebackfacesofsolids,presstheAltkey(Windows)orOptionkey (Macintosh). SeeSelectingtheEdgesandFacesofaSolidonpage 396forinformationonselectingsurfaces. 4. PressEnter(Windows)orReturn(Macintosh)orclickthecheckmarkbuttonontheToolbartoextractthe3D loci,curves,orsurfaces. Toeditextractedgroups,selectModify>Ungroup.

422

| Chapter 10: Advanced 3D Modeling

In Extract Iso-parametric Curve mode, click the hemisphere surface to select curve(s)

Extracted curve moved for clarity

In Extract Surface mode, with the Select Tangent Entities preference selected, click an interior surface to select all tangent interior surfaces

Extracted surface moved for clarity

NURBS Surface-curve Interaction


Analyzing NURBS Curves and Surfaces
TheAnalysistoolprovidesproximity,intersection,andcurvatureinformationforNURBScurvesandsurfaces. Twomodesareavailable.
Proximity Interrogation

Mode
Proximity Interrogation

Description
DeterminestheminimumdistancebetweenNURBScurves/surfacesand3Dloci,orthe intersectionbetweenNURBScurves/surfaces InteractivelydeterminesthecurvatureofNURBScurvesandsurfacesanddisplayscurvature parameters

NURBS Surface-curve Interaction |

423

Determining NURBS Curve and Surface Proximity


InProximitymode,theAnalysistoolplacesa3DlocusattheminimumdistanceorintersectionbetweentwoNURBS curves,aNURBScurveandNURBSsurface,anda3DlocusandNURBScurveorsurface.ThetoolplacesaNURBS curveattheintersectionoftwoNURBSsurfaces. ToanalyzeNURBSproximityorintersection: 1. ClicktheAnalysistoolfromthe3DModelingtoolset,andthenselectProximityfromtheToolbar. 2. ClickonaNURBScurve,NURBSsurface,or3Dlocus,andthenclickonanotherNURBScurveorsurface.

A3DlocusisplacedoneachNURBScurveattheclosestminimumdistanceorintersectingpointsbetweenthe twoitems,oraNURBScurveisplacedattheintersectionoftwoNURBSsurfaces.

NURBS curve

Locus points placed at each intersection between a NURBS curve and NURBS surface

Locus points placed at the minimum distance from a 3D locus point to both a NURBS curve and a NURBS surface

NURBS curve placed at the intersection of two NURBS surfaces

Determining NURBS Curvature, Tangents, and Normals


InInterrogationmode,theAnalysistoolprovidescurvatureparametersforNURBScurvesandNURBSsurfaces.It alsoshowscurvaturecirclesandtangentandnormalcurvesinteractively,foranypointontheexistingcurveor surface.Optionally,youcanaddthesecurvestothedrawing;thetoolcanalsoplacetwo3Dlociforeachcurvature circle:onelocuswherethecirclemeetstheNURBScurveorsurface,andoneatthecenterofthecircle.

Analyzing NURBS Curves


TodeterminethecurvatureofaNURBScurve,orcreateatangentcurve: 1. ClicktheAnalysistoolfromthe3DModelingtoolset,andthenselectInterrogationfromtheToolbar. 2. ClickontheNURBScurveofinterest,andthenmovethecursoralongthecurvetodisplaythecurvaturecircle(in red)andtangentcurve(inblue)atthecursorposition.

424

| Chapter 10: Advanced 3D Modeling


Tangent curve Curvature circle Original NURBS curve

3. Clickthecurvetoobtaincurvepropertiesataspecificlocationalongthecurve.TheCurvePropertiesdialogbox opens,displayingcurvatureparametersforthatlocation.

Option
CreateCurvatureCircle Locusatcenterof curvature CreateTangentCurve Length

Description
AddstheNURBScurvedisplayinginredtothedrawing Addsa3DlocusatthepointwherethecurvaturecirclemeetstheNURBScurve,and anotherlocusatthecenterofthecircle AddtheNURBScurvedisplayinginbluetothedrawing Specifiesthelengthofthetangentcurve

4. Toaddacurvaturecircleortangentcurvetothedrawing,selecttheappropriateoptionsandclickOK.Ifyou selectmultipleitems,theyarecreatedasagroup.

Click a point on the existing NURBS curve and select Create Tangent Curve to place a curve at that point

NURBS Surface-curve Interaction | Analyzing NURBS Surfaces


TodeterminethecurvatureofaNURBSsurface,orcreateanormalcurve: 1. ClicktheAnalysistoolfromthe3DModelingtoolset,andthenselectInterrogationfromtheToolbar.

425

2. ClickontheNURBSsurfaceofinterestandmovethecursoralongthesurfacetodisplaythecurvaturecircles(in red)andnormalcurve(inblue)atthecursorposition.
Original NURBS surface

Curvature circles

Normal curve

3. Clickagaintoobtainsurfacepropertiesataspecificlocationalongthesurface.TheSurfacePropertiesdialogbox opens,displayingcurvatureparametersforthatlocation.

Option
CreateCurvatureCircles

Description
AddstheNURBScurve(s)displayinginredtothedrawing

426

| Chapter 10: Advanced 3D Modeling


Description
Addsa3Dlocusatthepointwherethecurvaturecircle(s)meettheNURBSsurface, andanotherlocusatthecenterofeachcircle AddtheNURBScurvedisplayinginbluetothedrawing Specifiesthelengthofthenormalcurve

Option
Lociatcentersof curvature CreateNormalCurve Length

4. Toaddcurvaturecircle(s)oranormalcurvetothedrawing,selecttheappropriateoptionsandclickOK.Ifyou selectmultipleitems,theyarecreatedasagroup.

Click a point on the existing NURBS surface and select Create Curvature Circles to place curves at that point

Rebuilding NURBS Curves and Surfaces


ThenumberofverticesinoneormoreselectedNURBScurvesoruntrimmedsurfacescanbechangedwiththe RebuildNURBScommand.Reducingverticessimplifiesthegeometry,makingiteasiertomanipulate,andincreases thespeedandeaseofuseforotherobjectsthatarebaseduponit. TorebuildNURBSacurveorsurface: 1. SelecttheNURBScurve(s)orsurface(s). 2. SelectModel>3DPowerPack>RebuildNURBS. TheRebuildNURBSdialogboxopens.Enterthenumberofpointstouse;specifyingfewerpointssimplifiesthe NURBScurveorsurface,butincreasesthedifferencebetweentheoriginalgeometryandtherebuiltgeometry.

NURBS Surface-curve Interaction | Parameter


NumberofPoints UDirection VDirection KeepOriginal MaximumDeviation Preview

427

Description
Specifiesthenumberofpointstouse;foraNURBScurve,enterthenumberofpoints, whichmustbeatleast3 ForaNURBSsurface,enterthenumberofpointstousealongtheUdirection;this numbermustbeatleast3 ForaNURBSsurface,enterthenumberofpointstousealongtheVdirection;this numbermustbeatleast3 Retainstheoriginalcurveorsurface,andaddsanew,rebuiltcurveorsurface AfterclickingPreview,displaysthemaximumdeviationbetweentheoriginaland rebuiltsurfaceorcurve Displaysapreviewofthenew,rebuiltcurveorsurface

3. ClickOKtorebuildtheNURBScurve(s)orsurface(s).

Splitting or Trimming NURBS Surfaces


TheProjecttoolprojectsa2DobjectorNURBScurveontoaNURBSsurface,andthensplitstheNURBSsurfaceor trimstheNURBSsurfaceaccordingtotheregionselected.Thisallowsnonlinearsplittingortrimmingofsurfacesto createdifferentshapesorcutaholeinanobject.
Project and Trim Project and Add Upward

Project and Split

Project and Add Both Directions

Project and Add

Project and Add Downward

Mode
ProjectandSplit ProjectandTrim ProjectandAdd ProjectandAddUpward

Description
SplitsaNURBSsurfacewithaprojection TrimsaNURBSsurfacewithaprojection AddsaprojectiontoaNURBSsurface InProjectandAddmode,addstheprojectionintheprofileplane normaldirection

428

| Chapter 10: Advanced 3D Modeling


Description
InProjectandAddmode,addstheprojectionintheoppositedirection fromtheprofileplanenormaldirection InProjectandAddmode,addstheprojectioninboththeprofileplane normaldirectionandtheoppositedirection

Mode
ProjectandAddDownward ProjectandAddBothDirections

Project and Split


TosplitaNURBSsurfacewithaprojection: 1. Inthedesiredview,drawa2DobjectorNURBScurveontopofaNURBSsurface.

IftheobjecttobeprojectedisanopenNURBScurveoropen2Dobject,bothendpointsmustbeoutsidethe NURBSsurface. 2. ClicktheProjecttoolfromthe3DModelingtoolset,andthenselectProjectandSplitfromtheToolbar. 3. Clickonthesplittingobject,andthenclickontheNURBSsurface.

Objects ungrouped and separated for clarity

ThesplittingobjectisprojectedontotheNURBSsurface,resultinginagroupofNURBSsurfaces.

Project and Trim


TotrimaNURBSsurfacewithaprojection: 1. Inthedesiredview,drawa2DobjectorNURBScurveontopofaNURBSsurface.

NURBS Surface-curve Interaction |

429

IftheobjecttobeprojectedisanopenNURBScurveoranopen2Dobject,bothendpointsmustbeoutsidethe NURBSsurface. 2. ClicktheProjecttoolfromthe3DModelingtoolset,andthenselectProjectandTrimfromtheToolbar. 3. Clickonthetrimmingobject,andthenclickontheNURBSsurface.Thecursorchangesintothepointinghand cursor.Clickonthesideoftheintersectiontobetrimmedaway.

Select the project and trimming object

Select the NURBS surface

Select the region to be trimmed

ThetrimmingobjectisprojectedontotheNURBSsurface,andtheregionselectedtobetrimmedawayis removedfromtheNURBSsurfaceatthepointofintersection,resultinginagroupofNURBSsurfaces.

Project and Add


ToaddaprojectiontoaNURBSsurface: 1. Inthedesiredview,drawa2DobjectorNURBScurveontopofaNURBSsurface.

The2DobjectorNURBScurvemustbeclosedandplanar. 2. ClicktheProjecttoolfromthe3DModelingtoolset.

430

| Chapter 10: Advanced 3D Modeling

3. SelectProjectandAddfromtheToolbar.Selecttheappropriatedirectionmodesothattheprojectiondirection intersectstheNURBSsurface(ProjectandAddUpward,ProjectandAddDownward,orProjectandAddBoth Directions). TheprojectiondirectionmustintersectwiththeNURBSsurface,ornoprojectioniscreated. 4. Clickontheobjecttoadd;theprojectiondirectionisindicatedbyaredarrow.ClickontheNURBSsurface.

TheobjectsprojectionisaddedtotheNURBSsurfaceatthepointofintersection,creatingagenericsolid.

Creating a Rib
TheProjectandAddmodeoftheProjecttoolcanbeusedtocreateribs. Tocreatearib: 1. Inthedesiredview,drawa2DobjectorNURBScurveontopofasolid.

The2DobjectorNURBScurvemustbeclosedandplanar. 2. ClicktheProjecttoolfromthe3DModelingtoolset,andthenselectProjectandAddfromtheToolbar. 3. Selecttheappropriateprojectiondirectionmode. 4. Clickontheobjecttoadd,andthenclickonthesolid.

NURBS Surface-curve Interaction |

431

Theribprofileisprojecteduntilitmeetsthenextsurfaceitencounters.Theprofileistrimmedattheextremities automatically.

Extending NURBS Curves and Surfaces


NURBScurvesandsurfacescanbeextendedbyaspecifieddistancewiththeExtendNURBScommand. ClosedNURBScurvesandtrimmedNURBSsurfacescannotbeextended.Inaddition,aNURBSsurfacecannot beextendedinthedirection(UorV)thatitisclosed. ToextendaNURBScurveorsurface: 1. SelecttheNURBScurveorsurfacetoextend. 2. SelectModel>3DPowerPack>ExtendNURBS. TheExtendNURBSdialogboxopens.Selecttheendpoint(forNURBScurves)oredge(forNURBSsurfaces)to extend.Onthedrawing,theselectededgeorendpointisdisplayedinred.Selectthetypeofextensiontomake andspecifytheextensiondistance.

432

| Chapter 10: Advanced 3D Modeling


Description
Clickthearrowstoselecttheendpointoredgetoextend.Theselectedendpointoredge isdisplayedinredonthedrawing.

Parameter
SelectEndPoint/Edge

LinearExtension SmoothExtension Distance Preview

Extendstheedgeorendpointtangentially Extendstheedgeorendpointbycontinuingthecurrentcurvature Specifiestheextensiondistance Clicktoseeapreviewoftheextensioninred

Linear Extension

Smooth Extension

3. ClickPreviewtochecktheextension,andthenclickOKtoextendtheNURBScurveorsurface.

Linear Extension

Smooth Extension

Creating Helix-Spirals
TheCreateHelixSpiralcommandcreatesahelixshapedorspiralshaped3Dobjectfromoneormorepathobjects. Thepathscanbe2DobjectsorNURBScurves. Tocreateahelixorspiral: 1. Selecttheobject(s)touseasthepath. 2. SelectModel>3DPowerPack>CreateHelixSpiral. TheHelixSpiralCreationdialogboxopens.

Creating Helix-Spirals |

433

Parameter
UseTurns Turns UsePitch Pitch StartRadius EndRadius StartAngle ReverseDirection Flatten

Description
Selecttocreateahelix/spiralbyaspecifiednumberofturnsalongthepath Enterthetotalnumberofturnstobecreatedalongthepath Selecttocreateahelix/spiralbypitch Enterthepitchvalue(thedistancebetweensuccessiveturns) Entertheradiusoftheperpendicularstartingcircle Entertheradiusoftheperpendicularendingcircle.Tocreateahelix,enteravalue matchingthestartradius.Tocreateaspiral,enteradifferentvalue. Enterthestartingpointofthetwistonthestartingcircle Selecttochangetherotationdirectionofthehelix/spiralfromclockwiseto counterclockwiseorviceversa Selecttoflattenthehelix/spiralintoa2Dspiral.UsePitchisnotavailablewiththis option.

3. ClickOK. Ahelixorspiraliscreated.

434

| Chapter 10: Advanced 3D Modeling

Helix object

Spiral object

Ahelixorspiralobjectcanbeused,withoutfurtherconversion,asapathobjectfortheExtrudeAlongPath command. UngroupingahelixspiralobjectresultsinaNURBScurve.

Creating Contours
ContoursareintersectionsofasolidorsurfacewithaplanepassingthroughthelinespecifiedwiththeCreate Contourstool.Thistoolcreatescontoursatspecifiedintervals,whichcanthenbeusedtocreatealoftsurfaceinorder torecreateasolidshape. Tocreatecontours: 1. ClicktheCreateContourstoolfromthe3DModelingtoolset,andthenselectPreferencesontheToolbarto specifythecontourinterval.

Tocreateasinglecontour,specifyaContourIncrementofzero. 2. Clickanddragtoindicatethepositionoftheintersectingplane. Thecontours,agroupofNURBScurves,arecreated.

Solids Operations
Direct Modeling
ThePush/Pulltoolinteractivelyreshapesplanargeometry,creatingbosses(protrusions)orcutoutsonsolidsby addingorsubtractingvolumefromasolid.ThevolumeiscreatedorsubtractedbyextrudingafaceinExtrudeFace

Solids Operations |

435

mode,includingallthegeometrypresentonafaceinMoveFacemode,orextrudingaplanarNURBScurve(orgroup ofclosed,nonintersectingNURBScurves)inSubFacemode. Threemodesareavailable.


Extrude Face Sub-Face

Move Face

Mode
ExtrudeFace MoveFace SubFace

Description
Selectstheplanarfaceofasolid,a2Dplanarobject,orNURBScurve,toaddtoor subtractvolume,creatingperpendicularfaces Extendstheplanarfaceofasolid,addingorsubtractingthefacealongwithany geometrypresentontheface Selectsacurveorgroupofcurvestoaddtoorsubtractvolumefromasolid

Topreservetheprimitiveprofilegeometryofanextrude,rightclick(Windows)orCtrl+click(Macintosh)onthe extrudeandselectEditfromthecontextmenu.SeeObjectEditingModeonpage 16.

Face-based Addition or Subtraction


TheExtrudeFacemodecreatesperpendicularfacesasvolumeisaddedorsubtracted.Objectsthatcanbemodified include2Dplanarobjects,NURBScurves,andtheplanarfaceofanysolid. ToaddtoorsubtractfromasolidinExtrudeFacemode: 1. ClickthePush/Pulltoolfromthe3DModelingtoolset,andthenselectExtrudeFacefromtheToolbar. 2. Clickonthedesiredplanarface,planarobject,orNURBScurve. Ifneeded,theSelectFacedialogboxopenstohelpselectthecorrectface,asdescribedinSelectingtheEdgesand FacesofaSolidonpage 396.Toselectthebackfacesofsolids,presstheAltkey(Windows)orOptionkey (Macintosh)whileselecting.Whenthecorrectfaceisselected,clickOK. 3. Thecursorchangestoadoubleheadedarrow.Movethecursortoexpand(Addmode)ordecrease(Subtract mode)thesolidvolume,orcreateanextrusionfromthe2DplanarobjectorNURBScurve.Thecursordirection determineswhethervolumeisaddedorsubtracted.Thedistanceoftheprotrusionorcutoutcanalsobespecified byenteringavalueintheDistancefieldontheToolbarorfloatingdatabar.Thenewsolidispreviewedonthe drawing.

436

| Chapter 10: Advanced 3D Modeling

4. Clickatthedesiredlocationtoeditthesolid.

Moving the Face of a Solid


TheMoveFacemodeextendsthefaceofasolid,extrudingthesurroundingoradjacentgeometryasthefacemoves. TomovethefaceofasolidinMoveFacemode: 1. ClickthePush/Pulltoolfromthe3DModelingtoolset,andthenselectMoveFacefromtheToolbar. 2. Clickonthedesiredplanarface. Ifneeded,theSelectFacedialogboxopenstohelpselectthecorrectface,asdescribedinSelectingtheEdgesand FacesofaSolidonpage 396.Toselectthebackfacesofsolids,presstheAltkey(Windows)orOptionkey (Macintosh)whileselecting.Whenthecorrectfaceisselected,clickOK. 3. Thecursorchangestoadoubleheadedarrow.Movethecursortoextendthefaceanditsgeometry.Thedistance canalsobespecifiedbyenteringavalueintheDistancefieldontheToolbarorfloatingdatabar.Thenewsolid ispreviewedonthedrawing. 4. Clickatthedesiredlocationtoeditthesolid.

Solids Operations |

437

Curve-based Addition or Subtraction


ToaddorsubtractfromasolidinSubFacemode: 1. ClickthePush/Pulltoolfromthe3DModelingtoolset,andthenselectSubFacefromtheToolbar. 2. SelecttheNURBScurveorgroupofNURBScurvesthatwillbeusedtocreatetheprotrusionorcutout,andthen selectthesolid. 3. Thecursorchangestoadoubleheadedarrow.WhenanopenNURBScurveiscoplanarwiththesolidfaceand alsosplitsthefaceofthesolid,eachsplitsectioncanbemovedindividually.Movethecursortoexpand(Add mode)ordecrease(Subtractmode)thesolidvolume.Thecursordirectiondetermineswhethervolumeisadded orsubtracted.ThedistanceoftheprotrusionorcutoutcanalsobespecifiedbyenteringavalueintheDistance fieldontheToolbarorfloatingdatabar.Thenewsolidispreviewedonthedrawing. InSubtractmode,thedistancevaluecanexceedthesolidperimeter;thecutoutoperationisonlyperformedon theselectedsolid.

Each coplanar face can be moved individually

4. Clickatthedesiredlocationtoeditthesolid.

Modifying Edges
TheChamferEdgeandFilletEdgetoolsremovethesharpcornersofasolidbymodifyingtheshapeofitsedges.The ChamferEdgetoolmodifiesthesurfacewithalinearcrosssectionwhiletheFilletEdgetoolmodifiesthesurfacewith acircularcrosssection.

438

| Chapter 10: Advanced 3D Modeling

Edgesareusuallymodifiedduringthedetaileddesignphaseofaproject.Thismayreducetheheatand/orstress concentrationinmanufacturingandcanprovideamorerealisticoraestheticappearancetoamodel.

Modifying Edges by Chamfering


Tochamfertheedgesofasolid: 1. ClicktheChamferEdgetoolfromthe3DModelingtoolset,andthenselectPreferencesontheToolbarto specifychamferedgepreferences. TheChamferEdgePreferencesdialogboxopens.

Parameter
Setback

Description
Specifythedistancebywhichthefacesaresetback Alternatively,enteravalueintheSetbackfieldontheToolbar

SelectTangentEntities SelectFaces SelectAllEdges

Choosethisoptiontoselecttangentiallyconnectededgesandfacesforchamfering Choosethisoptiontoselectfacesforchamfering Selectsalltheedgesofthesolidforthechamferoperation

2. ClickOKtoclosetheChamferEdgePreferencesdialogbox. Fortangententityselections,selectthetangentiallyconnectededgesandfacestobemodified.Forfaceselections, selectthefacestobemodified.Toselectmultipleedgesorsurfaces,holdtheShiftkeywhileselecting.Toselect thebackfacesofsolids,presstheAltkey(Windows)orOptionkey(Macintosh). SeeSelectingtheEdgesandFacesofaSolidonpage 396forinformationonselectingsurfaces. WhenSelectAllEdgesisenabled,clickingononeofthehighlightededgesselectsalltheedgesforchamfering. 3. PressEnter(Windows)orReturn(Macintosh)orclickthecheckmarkbuttonontheToolbartoperformtheedge modification.

Solids Operations |

439

Before chamfering

After chamfering

Results rendered

TheSetbackvalueforthechamferededgecanbeeditedthroughtheObjectInfopalette. Oncethemodificationiscomplete,theedgesetusedtocreatethemodificationcannotbechanged.Themodified edgecanbeungrouped,andanewmodificationwithdifferentedgescanbecreated. Ifonemodificationhasbeencreatedoveranother,thefirstmodificationcannotbeeditedintheObjectInfo paletteunlessthelastoneisungrouped(seeEditingaFillet/ChamferorShellObjectonpage 399). Achamferedgeoperationmayfaildueto: complexsurfacegeometryadjacenttoanedgeorcornerinvolvedinthemodification; anattempttomodifyoneedgeinasequenceoftangentialedges(selectalltheedgesforabetterchanceof success);or anattempttomodifywithoutselectingalltheedgesatavertex.

Reshaping Edges by Fillet


Tofillettheedgesofasolid: 1. ClicktheFilletEdgetoolfromthe3DModelingtoolset,andthenselectPreferencesontheToolbartospecify filletedgepreferences. TheFilletEdgePreferencesdialogboxopens.

440

| Chapter 10: Advanced 3D Modeling

Parameter
SelectTangentEntities ConstantRadius Radius

Description
Choosethisoptiontoselecttangentiallyconnectededgesandfacesforfilleting Createafilletedsurfacebasedonaconstantradius Indicatetheradiusofthefilletedge Alternatively,enteravalueintheConstantRadiusfieldontheToolbar

SelectFaces SelectAllEdges VariableRadius Length(%) Radius Set Delete Reverse

Choosethisoptiontoselectfacesforfilleting Selectsalltheedgesofthesolidforthefilletoperation Createafilletedsurfacebasedonavariableradius Enterthelengthuptothepointasapercentageofthetotaledgelength(forexample,50) Entertheradiusvalueatthecorrespondingpercentageoflengthvalue(forexample,1) Clicktoaddalength/radiuspairormodifythecurrentlyselectedpair Clicktodeletetheselectedlength/radiusvalue Reversestheorderoftheradiusvalues;theradiusvaluesthatwereattheshortest percentagelengthareswitchedtothelongestpercentagelength,andviceversa

2. ClickOKtoclosetheFilletEdgePreferencesdialogbox. Fortangententityselections,selectthetangentiallyconnectededgesandfacestobemodified.Forfaceselections, selectthefacestobemodified.Toselectmultipleedgesorsurfaces,holdtheShiftkeywhileselecting.Toselect thebackfacesofsolids,presstheAltkey(Windows)orOptionkey(Macintosh). SeeSelectingtheEdgesandFacesofaSolidonpage 396forinformationonselectingsurfaces. WhenSelectAllEdgesisenabled,clickingononeofthehighlightededgesselectsalltheedgesforfilleting.

Solids Operations |

441

3. PressEnter(Windows)orReturn(Macintosh)orclickthecheckmarkbuttonontheToolbartoperformtheedge modification.

Before filleting

After filleting with a constant radius

Results rendered

Before filleting

After filleting with a variable radius

Results rendered

TheRadiusvalueforthefilletededgecanbeeditedthroughtheObjectInfopalette.Forthefilletbyvariableradius, presstheEditarrowbuttonstohighlighteachpointalongtheedgeforediting. Oncethemodificationiscomplete,theedgesetusedtocreatethemodificationcannotbechanged.Themodified edgecanbeungrouped,andanewmodificationwithdifferentedgescanbecreated. Ifonemodificationhasbeencreatedoveranother,thefirstmodificationcannotbeeditedintheObjectInfo paletteunlessbotharefirstungrouped(seeEditingaFillet/ChamferorShellObjectonpage 399). Afilletedgeoperationmayfaildueto: complexsurfacegeometryadjacenttoanedgeorcornerinvolvedinthemodification; aradiusvaluethatistoolarge; anattempttomodifyoneedgeinasequenceoftangentialedges(selectalltheedgesforabetterchanceof success);or anattempttomodifywithoutselectingalltheedgesinavertex.

Creating a Shell from Solids and NURBS Surfaces


TheShellSolidtoolcreatesahollowshellfromasolidobjectorNURBSsurface.Theshellcanbecreatedoutsideor insidethesolid;forNURBSsurfaces,itgivestheobjectathickness.Mostinjectionmoldedplasticpartshaveashell.

Shell from a Solid Object


Tocreateashellsolidfromasolidobject: 1. ClickShellSolidfromthe3DModelingtoolset,andthenselectPreferencesontheToolbartospecifytheshell solidpreferences. TheShellSolidPreferencesdialogboxopens.Specifyoredittheshellsettings.

442

| Chapter 10: Advanced 3D Modeling

Parameter
Shell Inside Outside Thickness

Description
Createsaninteriorshell Createsanexteriorshell Enterthethicknessoftheshellwall Alternatively,enteravalueintheThicknessfieldontheToolbar

SelectTangentFaces

Selectsatangentiallyconnectedchainoffaces

2. ClickOKtoclosetheShellSolidPreferencesdialogbox. Clickonthefaceoftheobjectwheretheshellwillbecreated.Toselectmultiplesurfaces,holdtheShiftkeywhile selecting.Toselectthebackfacesofsolids,presstheAltkey(Windows)orOptionkey(Macintosh). SeeSelectingtheEdgesandFacesofaSolidonpage 396forinformationonselectingsurfaces. 3. PressEnter(Windows)orReturn(Macintosh),orclickthecheckmarkbuttonontheToolbar,tocreatetheshell.

Shell from a NURBS Surface


TocreateashellsolidfromaNURBSsurface: 1. ClickShellSolidfromthe3DModelingtoolset,andthenselectPreferencesontheToolbartospecifytheshell solidpreferences. SpecifythedesiredshellsettingsasdescribedinShellfromaSolidObjectonpage 441. 2. ClickOK. ClickontheNURBSsurfacetothicken.Toselectmultiplesurfaces,holdtheShiftkeywhileselecting.

Converting to Generic Solids |


SeeSelectingtheEdgesandFacesofaSolidonpage 396forinformationonselectingsurfaces.

443

3. PressEnter(Windows)orReturn(Macintosh),orclickthecheckmarkbuttonontheToolbar,tocreatetheshell.

Stitching and Trimming Surfaces


TheStitchandTrimSurfacescommandcreatesagenericsolidfromseveralintersectingsurfaces(includingNURBS surfacesorsolidssuchasextrudesorsweeps). Thiscommandmaynotbeabletomanipulatecertaintypesofsurfacegeometry.SeeSurfaceGeometry Requirementsonpage 400. Tostitchandtrimintersectingsurfaces: 1. Selecttheintersectingsurfaces.

Thesurfacesmustencloseavolume. 2. SelectModel>3DPowerPack>StitchandTrimSurfaces. Thesurfacesenclosingthevolumearestitchedtogetherandthentrimmed,resultinginagenericsolid.

Converting to Generic Solids


SolidobjectscreatedusingsuchcommandsasAddSolid,SubtractSolid,andtoolssuchasFilletEdge,Chamfer Edge,andShellSolid,containahistorycomposedoftheoriginalelementsusedtomakethenewobject.Thisalso

444

| Chapter 10: Advanced 3D Modeling

includesanyeditingperformedwithothersolidsoperations.TheConverttoGenericSolidscommandremovesthis historyfromthesolidobjects,reducingthefilesize(thoughtheobjectisnolongereditable). Forexample,usethiscommandonacopyofthefinaldrawingtoreducefilesizewhensendingafiletoaprintbureau. Toconvertanobjectintoagenericsolid: 1. Selectthesolidobject(s)toconvert. 2. SelectModify>Convert>ConverttoGenericSolids. 3. Awarningdialogboxopens.ClickOKtoconverttheobject(s). Theobjectisconverted. Ifobjectsareselectedthatcannotbeconverted,adialogboxopensstatingthattheseobjectshavebeen deselected.

Creating Building Elements


Creating Floors

11

TheVectorworksprogramprovidesavarietyofspecializedtoolsandcommandsforcreatingbuildingandstructural elementssuchasfloors,walls,columns,androofs.

TheFloorcommandcanbeusedtocreatenotonlyfloors,butalsodecks,patios,stages,platforms,andlofts.The commandconvertsany2Ddrawingobjectintoahybrid(2D/3D)objectofanyshapeandthickness.Thesourceobject mustbeflatandmustalsobeparalleltotheactivelayerplane. IntheVectorworksDesignSeriesproducts,theFloorcommandislocatedunderadifferentmenu.

Product
VectorworksArchitect VectorworksLandmark VectorworksSpotlight Tocreateafloor:

Command
AEC>Floor Landmark>Architectural>Floor Spotlight>Architectural>Floor

1. Selectthe2Dorflathybridobject(s)toturnintoafloor. 2. SelectModel>AEC>Floor. TheCreateFloordialogboxopens.

Parameter
BottomZ Thickness 3. ClickOK.

Description
Specifiesthedistanceabovetheactivelayerplanethatthefloorwillbegin(theBottomZ height).Inmostcases,usethedefaultof0,whichstartsthefloorontheactivelayerplane. Setsthefloorthickness

Creating Walls
Usethewalltoolstodrawbothstraightandroundwallsandtojointhosewallstootherwalls.Eachwallsegmentis treatedasaseparateobject.Eitherautomaticallyjoinwallstogetherwhendrawingthem,orjointhemafterdrawingby usingoneofthejoiningoptions.Otherwalloptionsincludetheabilitytoaddcomponentlinesandfillstowalls,cap andtrimthem,andinsertsymbols(suchasdoorsandwindows)intothem.Youcanalsoaddanddeletepeaksina wall,iftheelevationchangesfromoneendofthewalltotheother.

446

| Chapter 11: Creating Building Elements


AdditionalwallcapabilitiesareavailableintheVectorworksArchitectproduct,andarecrossreferencedtothe appropriatesectionintheVectorworksDesignSeriesUsersGuidewhereapplicable.

Therearefourwaystopositionthewallinrelationtothecontrolline;thecontrollinecanbesetrelativetoeitherthe walloranoptionalcorecomponent.ThesemodesareactivatedbythebuttonsontheToolbar.
Right Control Line Wall Control Line Wall Preferences

Straight Walls

Left Control Line Custom Control Line Center Control Line Custom Wall Offset

Core Component Control Line

Round Wall Arc Creation Controls

Round Walls

Left Control Line Right Control Line Wall Control Line Wall Preferences

Mode
LeftControlLine CenterControlLine RightControlLine CustomControlLine/ CustomWallOffset WallControlLine CoreComponentControl Line WallPreferences ArcCreationControls

Description
Wallsaredrawnalongtheirleftsides Wallsaredrawnfromthecenter Wallsaredrawnalongtheirrightsides Wallsaredrawnfromanoffsetpointspecifiedinwallpreferences;mosteffective whendrawingwallscontainingcomponents Setsthecontrollinerelativetothewall Setsthecontrollinerelativetothewallcomponentthathasbeendesignatedasthe corecomponentinthewallpreferences Setsthephysicalparametersofthewall;seeDrawingStraightWallsonpage 446 Selectthearccreationmethodtousewhendrawingroundwalls;formoreinformation onarccreationmodes,seeCreatingArcsonpage 229

SeeWallDirectiononpage 454fordetailsonhowthestartingpointanddirectioninwhichthewallisdrawn determinesthewallsinteriorandexteriorsides.

Drawing Straight Walls


TheWalltoolcreatesahybridwallobject,simultaneouslyaddingbotha2Danda3Dversionofthewalltothe drawing.WallscanbedrawninTop/Planorina3Dview.

Creating Walls |
2D wall segment

447

3D walls

Createwallsbydrawingthemwiththemouse,orbyusingamouseDatabarcombination(seeUsingtheDataBar onpage 209).Thefollowingdirectionsassumethatthewallsaredrawnwiththemouse. Tocreatestraightwalls: 1. SelecttheWalltoolfromtheWallstoolset. 2. ClickthedesiredOffsetmodebutton(seeCreatingWallsonpage 445). 3. ClicktheWallPreferencesmodebutton. TheWallPreferencesdialogboxopens.Thisdialogboxcanbeaccessedanytimeafterwardtomodifywall settings.Wallscanalsobedrawnfirst,andthentheparameterscanbesetlaterfromtheObjectInfopalette. AdditionalwallcapabilitiesareavailableintheVectorworksArchitectproduct,andarecrossreferencedtothe appropriatesectionintheVectorworksDesignSeriesUsersGuidewhereapplicable.

448

| Chapter 11: Creating Building Elements

Parameter
WallStyle(Vectorworks Architect/Landmark required) SavePreferencesas WallStyle(Vectorworks Architect/Landmark required) Preview

Description
IntheVectorworksFundamentalsproduct,allwallsareunstyled. Forinformationonwallstyles,seeCreatingWallsinVectorworksArchitectand Landmarkonpage 109intheVectorworksDesignSeriesUsersGuide. SeeCreatingWallsinVectorworksArchitectandLandmarkonpage 109inthe VectorworksDesignSeriesUsersGuide

Displaysapreviewofthewallstructure,includinganydefinedcomponents;thepreview wallisdrawnfromlefttoright,sothetopofthepreview,bydefault,indicatestheleft partofthewallasitwillbedrawn(seeWallDirectiononpage 454).Thearrowshows thewalldirection. Displaysthethicknessofthewall.Ifawallcontainsnocomponents,enterthewall thickness. Thethicknessofawallwithcomponentsisdefinedbythesumofthecomponent thicknesses.Whencomponentshavebeendefined,thisparameterbecomesreadonly.

OverallThickness

EditWallAttributes

OpenstheWallAttributesdialogbox,tospecifythewallfillandpensettings

Creating Walls | Parameter


Components

449

Description
Liststhecomponentsthatformthestructureofthewall,inorderfromlefttorightas displayedinthepreview.Tochangetheorderofacomponent,clickanddragwithinthe #column. Oneofthewallcomponentscanoptionallybedesignatedasacorecomponentby clickingintheCorecolumn.Acheckmarkindicatesthatthecomponentisthecore component.WhentheAutojoinwallsVectorworkspreferenceisenabled,components alsoautomaticallyjoinbasedonthecorecomponentspecifiedforeachwall.See AutomaticallyJoiningWallsonpage 454. Theremainingcolumnsinthecomponentlistdisplaythecomponentthicknessandclass setting Clicktodefinethecomponentsofthewall;seeCreatingWallComponentsonpage 455 forinformationoncreatingcomponents OpenstheComponentAttributesdialogboxtoedittheselectedcomponentsthickness andattributes(alternatively,doubleclickonacomponenttoopentheComponent Attributesdialogbox) Deletestheselectedwallcomponent;thewallthicknessisadjustedaccordingly

Core

OtherComponent settings New Edit

Delete

4. ClickEditWallAttributestospecifythewallattributes. TheWallAttributesdialogboxopens.Thewallattributesofanunstyledwallareinitiallysettotheparameters displayedintheAttributespalette.Iftheyarechangedhere,theAttributespalettereflectsthechangedattributes oftheselectedwall(afterexitingtheWallPreferencesdialogbox). Fill,pen,andopacitycanbesetbyclassratherthanbytheattributesintheWallAttributesdialogbox.Ifthewall classischangedlater,thewallchangestousetheattributesofthenewclass.Wallattributescannotbeoverridden onaperinstancebasis;ifawallstyleusesclassattributes,allwallsofthatstylemustuseclassattributes. However,wallsofthesamewallstylecanbeplacedindifferentclasses.

450

| Chapter 11: Creating Building Elements


Description
SetswallfillattributesbyclassratherthanbytheparametersintheWallAttributesdialog box Specifythewallfillattributes,orselectNonefornofill.Selectedhatch,gradient,orimage fills,ifnotalreadypresentinthefile,areimportedandaddedtotheResourceBrowser (defaultcontentisautomaticallyimportedintothecurrentfileatthepointofuseand displaysintheResourceBrowser).SeeDefaultContentinVectorworksFundamentals andRenderworksonpage 157andFillAttributesonpage 530.

Parameter
Fill UseClass Attributes Style

Pen UseClass Attributes Style Line Opacity UseClassOpacity Opacity WallCaps UseWallLine Attributes UseComponent LineAttributes Usestheattributesofthewalllineforthewallcaps Usestheattributesofthecomponents(leftline)forthewallcaps SetswallopacitybyclassratherthanbytheparametersintheWallAttributesdialogbox Specifiesthetransparencyofthewall;dragtheslidertothelefttoincreasethe transparency,orenterapercentagedirectlyintheboxtotherightoftheslider SetspenattributesbyclassratherthanbytheparametersintheWallAttributesdialogbox Specifythewallpenattributes,orselectNonefornopen;seePenAttributesonpage 532 Whenapenstylehasbeenselected,specifythelinethicknessandstyle;seeLineStyle Attributesonpage 533

5. ClickOKtoreturntotheWallPreferencesdialogbox.Ifcomponentsaretobeaddedtothewall,clickNewto defineeachcomponent(seeCreatingWallComponentsonpage 455).TheOverallThicknessisthendefined bythethicknessofthewallcomponents. 6. ClicktheInsertionOptionstabtosetthewalloptionsandtoselecttexturesforthewallparts(Renderworks required).

Creating Walls |

451

Parameter
Height Height

Description
Directlysetsthedesiredheightofthewall.Whenthewallheightisdetermined manuallybythismethod,theTopBoundpropertyofthewallisautomaticallysetto LayerElevation,andtheTopOffsetvalueismodifiedaccordingly. Whenthetopofthewallisboundbythelayerwallheightvalue,thewallheight updatesautomatically.

TopBound

Setstheverticalreferencethatdeterminesthetopofthewall. TheLayerWallHeightvalueissetbythedesignlayer(seeSettingDesignLayer Propertiesonpage 97). AdditionaloptionsareavailablefortheVectorworksArchitectproduct;seeCreating WallsinVectorworksArchitectandLandmarkonpage 109intheVectorworksDesign SeriesUsersGuide.

TopOffset BottomBound BottomOffset

Setstheoffsetofthetopofthewallfromitsspecifiedtopboundheight. Setstheverticalreferencethatdeterminesthebottomofthewall;LayerElevationisthe onlyoptionavailableunlesstheVectorworksArchitectproductisinstalled Forthebottomofthewall,setstheoffsetfromthelayerelevation

452

| Chapter 11: Creating Building Elements


Description
Selectwhetherawallsegmentiscappedatthestartpoint,theendpoint,bothends,or hasnocapsatall Specifiesthedefaultclassforthewalls IfusingtheCustomControlLinewallmode,entertheoffsetvalueforthecontrolline (seeCreatingWallsonpage 445)

Parameter
Caps Class ControlOffset Textures(Renderworks required) UseComponent Textures

Usesthetexturesdefinedforthewallcomponentstotexturethewall ThisoptioncanalsobeselectedforanexistingwallfromtheRendertabofthe ObjectInfopalette Usesthetexturesdefinedbelowforthewallparts AppliesthetextureselectedinTexturetotheselectedpartsofthewall(seeApplyinga TexturetoanObjectonpage 639forinformationonapplyingtexturestoanobjectwith parts) IfapartwasassignedatexturebutitshouldinherititstexturefromOverallinstead, selectthepartandclickReverttoOverall.Thepartmovesbackbelowthedivider,and (fromOverall)displaysasitstexturename. AppliestheselectedtexturetotheselectedPart. TexturescanalsobesetfromtheRendertaboftheObjectInfopalette.Texturesapplied fromtheObjectInfopaletteoverridethetexturessethere.ApplyingaTexturetoan Objectonpage 639

UseObjectTextures Part

ReverttoOverall

Texture

NoTexture ClassTexture

DoesnotapplyatexturetotheselectedPart Usesthetexturedefinedbythewallsclass.Anywallswiththatwallstyleuseclass texturesforthatpartofthewall(unlessoverridden).ClassTexturecanalsobechosen foraselectedwallintheRendertaboftheObjectInfopalette. ChooseatexturefortheselectedPartfromthedefaultcontentorthecurrentfiles content(seeDefaultContentinVectorworksFundamentalsandRenderworkson page 157).Texturessethereoverridetheobjectclasstextures.

ChooseTexture

TheVectorworksArchitect/LandmarkproductisrequiredtodisplaytheDatatab.SeeCreatingWallsin VectorworksArchitectandLandmarkonpage 109intheVectorworksDesignSeriesUsersGuide. 7. ClickOKwhenthewallpreferenceshavebeenset. 8. Clickatthestartingpointofthefirstwallsection. 9. Clicktoendthefirstwallsection. Tocontinuecreatingwalls,clickattheendofeachadditionalwallsection. 10. Doubleclicktofinishthewallifthestartpointandendpointarenotatthesamelocation;otherwise,clickatthe startinglocation(aSmartCursorcuedisplays)tofinishthewall.

Creating Walls |

453

2nd

3rd 4th 5th

1st click Walls drawn in Top/Plan view

4th

1st click

3rd

5th

2nd Walls drawn in a 3D view

Drawing Round Walls


Round,hybridwallscanbecreatedandjoinedtostraightwalls.TheRoundWalltoolisessentiallyacombinationof theWalltoolandArctoolfunctions.Itcreatesaroundwallwiththesamefeaturesandelementsasstraightwalls. WallscanbedrawninTop/Planorina3Dview.

3D view

2D view

Roundwallspreferencesincludeallofthesameparametersasstraightwalls. Tocreateroundwalls: 1. ClicktheRoundWalltoolfromtheWallstoolset. 2. ClickthedesiredOffsetmodebutton(seeCreatingWallsonpage 445). 3. ClicktheWallPreferencesmodebutton(thepreferencesaredescribedinDrawingStraightWallsonpage 446).

454

| Chapter 11: Creating Building Elements

4. ClickOKwhentheroundwallpreferenceshavebeenset. 5. Clicktosetthecenterpointofthewallarc. 6. Clickthemousetobegindrawingthewall,orusetheDatabartoenteranangle.Formoreinformationonarc creationmodes,seeCreatingArcsonpage 229. 7. Clicktoendthewall.


1st click

2nd click 3rd click

Wall Direction
Thestartingpointandthedirectioninwhichthewallisdrawndetermineawallssides.Thinkofwalkingalongthe topofthewallthewallsideonyourleftcouldbetheexteriorofabuildingortheinterior,dependingonwhich directionyoutravel.Theleftsideandrightsidedesignationsareusedwhentexturesareappliedtothewalls.
In Top/Plan view, arrows indicate the current wall direction

Right (interior)

Left (exterior)

Left (interior)

Right (exterior)

For walls drawn in a clockwise direction, the left side is the exterior

For walls drawn in a counterclockwise direction, the right side is the exterior

Toreversethewalldirection,clickReverseSidesfromtheObjectInfopalette.

Automatically Joining Walls


TheVectorworkspreferencesitem,Autojoinwalls,automaticallyjoinswallsatcornersandintersections,and automaticallyhealsthemiteredendsofwallswhentheyareseparatedfromoneanother.ForTjoins,thebreakinthe sideofthewallishealed.Wallscanbeineither2Dor3Dview.

Creating Walls |

455

Original walls

Walls separated and ends auto-healed

Walls separated but ends not auto-healed

When drawing walls with auto join on, connected walls are highlighted to show which walls will join

Whenacorecomponenthasbeensetforwallswithcomponents,thecomponentsalsoautomaticallyjoin.Core components,aswellastheothercomponents,joinuncappediftheyhavethesamefill,andcappedotherwise. TosettheAutojoinwallspreference: 1. SelectTools>Options>VectorworksPreferences(seeEditPreferencesonpage 17). 2. OntheEdittab,selectAutojoinwalls. 3. ClickOK.

Creating Wall Components


Wallcomponentsdefinethesectionsthatmakeupawall.Forexample,toindicatethatawallismadeupofstuds, innerdrywall,outersheathing,andthenasidingmaterial,defineacomponentforeachoftheseitemstoillustratetheir location.Wallcomponentscanbeoffsetfromthetoporthebottomofthewall,andtextured(Renderworksrequired), creatingrealisticsectionviewsandrenderedviews,aswellasaccuratewallmaterialestimates.Theareaandvolume ofwallcomponentscanbecalculatedinworksheets;seeWorksheetFunctionsonpage 861).

Theoverallthicknessofawallisequaltothesumofitscomponents.Componentfillandlinestyleareonlydisplayed inTop/Planview(exceptforsectionviewportsintheVectorworksDesignSeriesproducts). UsetheEyedroppertooltocopywallcomponentsettingsfromonewalltoanother(seeTransferringAttributeson page 526). AdditionalwallcapabilitiesareavailableintheVectorworksArchitect/Landmarkproduct. WallcomponentscanbedefinedpriortodrawingthewallinWallPreferencesmode,orafterdrawingthewall,from theObjectInfopalette. WallcomponentscanalsobeeditedfromWallPreferencesmode.Editingacomponentfromwallpreferences doesnotaffectexistingwalls.

456

| Chapter 11: Creating Building Elements

Defining Components for New Walls


Todefineawallcomponentpriortodrawingthewall: 1. SelecttheWalltoolorRoundWalltoolfromtheWallstoolset,andthenclickWallPreferencesfromtheTool bar. TheWallPreferencesdialogboxopens. 2. OntheDefinitiontab,clickNew. TheComponentAttributesdialogboxopens.Specifythecomponentthickness,name,andparameters.

Parameter
Definition Name Class

Description
Provideanameforthecomponent,whichdisplaysintheComponentslistintheWall Preferencesdialogbox Displaysthecomponentclass;thissettingcanbechangedintheVectorworksArchitect/ Landmarkproduct(seeCreatingWallsinVectorworksArchitectandLandmarkon page 109intheVectorworksDesignSeriesUsersGuide).TheVectorworks FundamentalsproductcandisplayclassessetinaDesignSeriesproduct.<ObjectClass> indicatesthatthecomponentassumesthesameclasssettingasthatofthewall. Specifiesthecomponentsthickness;thethicknessofawallisthesumofits components.Acomponentmusthaveathicknessgreaterthan0. Setstheoffsetdistanceforthecomponentfromthetopofthewall

Thickness OffsetfromWallTop

Creating Walls | Parameter


OffsetfromWall Bottom FollowTopWall Peaks FollowBottomWall Peaks Fill UseClassAttributes

457

Description
Setstheoffsetdistanceforthecomponentfromthebottomofthewall Thecomponentfollowsthewallpeaksatthetopofthewall Thecomponentfollowsthewallpeaksatthebottomofthewall

SetscomponentfillattributesbyclassratherthanbytheparametersintheComponent Attributesdialogbox.Ifthecomponentclassischangedlater,thecomponentchangesto usetheattributesofthenewclass. Specifythewallfillattributes,orselectNonefornofill.Selectedfills,ifnotalready presentinthefile,areimportedandaddedtotheResourceBrowser(defaultcontentis automaticallyimportedintothecurrentfileatthepointofuseanddisplaysinthe ResourceBrowser).SeeDefaultContentinVectorworksFundamentalsand Renderworksonpage 157andFillAttributesonpage 530. UseatilefillwithFittoWallselected,torepresentinsulationfill.SeeDefining Tilesonpage 548.

Style

LeftPen/RightPen

Classattributescanbeusedfortheleftandrightpenparameters.Otherwise,selecta style,linethickness,anddashstylefortheleftandrightsidesofthecomponent;see LineStyleAttributesonpage 533

Texture(Renderworks required) NoTexture ClassTexture Doesnotapplyatexturetothecomponent Setsthecomponenttousethetexturespecifiedbythecomponentsclass.Theclass textureissetfromtheOthertabintheEditClassesdialogbox;seeSettingClass Propertiesonpage 108. Selectatextureforthecomponentfromthedefaultcontentorthecurrentfilescontent (seeDefaultContentinVectorworksFundamentalsandRenderworksonpage 157).

ChooseTexture

3. ClickOKtocreatethecomponentandreturntotheWallPreferencesdialogbox. ThewallsOverallThicknessvaluechangestobedeterminedbyitscomponents.Ascomponentsaredefined, theydisplayinthepreview.Clickanddragacomponentinthe#columntochangeitsorder.

458

| Chapter 11: Creating Building Elements

4. ClickOK.

Defining Components for Existing Walls


Todefineoreditwallcomponentsforanexisting,unstyledwall: 1. Selectthewall(s). 2. FromtheObjectInfopalette,clickComponents. TheComponentsdialogboxopens.

Creating Walls |

459

Parameter
Preview

Description
Displaysapreviewofthewallstructure,includingthedefinedcomponents;thepreviewwall isdrawnfromlefttoright,sothetopofthepreview,bydefault,indicatestheleftpartofthe wallasitwillbedrawn.Thearrowshowsthewalldirection. Thethicknessofawallwithcomponentsisdefinedbythesumofthecomponentthicknesses Liststhecomponentsthatformthestructureofthewall,inorderfromlefttorightas displayedinthepreview.Tochangetheorderofacomponent,clickanddragwithinthe# column. Oneofthewallcomponentscanoptionallybedesignatedasacorecomponentbyclickingin theCorecolumn.Acheckmarkindicatesthatthecomponentisthecorecomponent.Whenthe AutojoinwallsVectorworkspreferenceisenabled,componentsalsoautomaticallyjoinbased onthecorecomponentspecifiedforeachwall.SeeAutomaticallyJoiningWallsonpage 454. Clicktodefinethecomponentsofthewallasdescribedpreviouslyinthissection OpenstheComponentAttributesdialogboxtoedittheselectedcomponentsthicknessand attributes(youcanalsodoubleclickonacomponenttoopentheComponentAttributes dialogbox) Deletestheselectedwallcomponent;thewallthicknessisadjustedaccordingly

OverallThickness Components

Core

New Edit

Delete

3. ClickNeworEdit,anddefineoreditthecomponentsasdescribedpreviously. 4. ClickOKtoreturntotheComponentsdialogbox. 5. ClickOK.Thenewcomponentdefinitionisappliedtotheselectedwall(s).

Creating Walls from a Polygon


Anotherwayofobtainingwallsistocreatethemfromapolygon. Tocreatewallsfromapolygon: 1. Draworselectthepolygontobecomethebasisforthewalls.

460

| Chapter 11: Creating Building Elements

2. SelectModify>CreateWallsfromPolygon. TheCreateWallsfromPolydialogboxopens.Selectthedesiredwallparameters.

Parameter
Wallpositionrelativeto edgeofpoly Useexistingwallstyle Useexistingwallthickness Useexistingwallheight Assigntoclass DeleteSourcePoly 3. ClickOK.

Description
Specifieswhetherthewallpositionshouldbecenteredonthepolygon,insidethe polygon,oroutsidethepolygon Specifieswhethertocreatethewallsusingtheexistingwallstyle Specifieswhethertocreatethewallsusingtheexistingwallthicknessorspecifya newThicknessvalue Specifieswhethertocreatethewallsusingtheexistingwallheightorspecifyanew Heightvalue Selecttheclassintowhichthewallsshouldbeplaced Deletesthesourcepolygonafterthewallsarecreated

Thewall(s)arecreatedbasedontheoriginalpolygonandthespecifiedparameters.

Creating Walls |

461

Creating Pillars
ThePillarcommandconvertsanyclosed2Dshaperectangle,circle,oval,orpolygonintoapillar.Inaddition,useit onopen2Dshapes,suchaslinesandpolylines,tocreateaflat,screenlikeobject.Theseobjectsincludesuchthingsas moviescreens,roomdividers,andmovingwalls.Oncecreated,apillarcanbejoinedtoawall.

3D view

2D view

IntheVectorworksDesignSeriesproducts,thePillarcommandislocatedunderadifferentmenu.

Product
VectorworksArchitect VectorworksLandmark VectorworksSpotlight Tocreateapillar: 1. Clickontheobjecttoconvert. 2. SelectModel>AEC>Pillar. ThePillarPreferencesdialogboxopens.

Command
AEC>Pillar Landmark>Architectural>Pillar Spotlight>Architectural>Pillar

462

| Chapter 11: Creating Building Elements

3. Enterapillarheight. 4. ClickOK. Aftercreation,thepillarcanbeeditedbyselectingModify>EditPillar.SeeObjectEditingModeonpage 16.

Joining Pillars and Walls


Wallsandpillarscanbejoinedtogether.Anynumberofwallscanconnecttothepillaraslongasspaceexistsonthe pillar. Thepillarneedstobejoinedtotheendofawall;itcannotbeaddedtoanexistingwallintersectionsuchasthecorner ofLjoinedorTjoinedwalls.

3D view

2D view

Tojoinapillartoawall: 1. Clickonthepillar. 2. Drawthewalls. IftheAutojoinfeatureisenabled,thenthewallsautomaticallyconnecttothepillar. IftheAutojoinfeatureisdisabled,thenclicktheWallJointoolfromtheWallstoolsetandjointhewallstothe pillar.

Creating a Polygon or Polyline from Walls


Youcancreateapolygonorpolylinebasedoneitherthegrossareaornetareaofwalls.Thisisusefulforcalculating theareaofaroom,forexample,orforusingcolortodifferentiateamongrooms. IntheVectorworksDesignSeriesproducts,theCreatePolysfromWallscommandislocatedunderadifferent menu.

Creating Walls | Product


VectorworksArchitect VectorworksLandmark VectorworksSpotlight

463

Command
AEC>CreatePolysfromWalls Landmark>Architectural>CreatePolysfromWalls Spotlight>Architectural>CreatePolysfromWalls

Tocreateapolygonorpolylinebasedontheperimeterofthewalls: 1. Selectthewallstouseforthepolygonorpolyline.Multiplewallscanbeselectedtocreateseveralpolygonsor polylinesatthesametime.

2. SelectModify>CreatePolysfromWalls. TheCreatePolysfromWallsdialogboxopens.

Parameter
GrossAreaPolys NetArea(Room)Polys 3. ClickOK.

Description
Createsapolygonorpolylinefromtheexteriorperimeteroftheselectedwalls Createsapolygonorpolylinefromtheinteriorperimeteroftheselectedwalls

Thepolygonorpolylineiscreated,leavingtheoriginalwallsunchanged.

464

| Chapter 11: Creating Building Elements

Polygons and polylines shaded and moved for clarity

Editing Walls
WallparameterscanbeeditedfromtheObjectInfopalette.Verticescanbeadded,deleted,ormoved,andwallscanbe reshaped.Inaddition,wallbreakscanberemoved,wallscanbejoinedinavarietyofconformations,andsymbolscan beaddedtothewalls.

Wall Properties
ThepropertiesofselectedstraightorroundwallsandtheircomponentscanbeeditedintheObjectInfopalette. ChangethewallattributesfromtheAttributespalette.

Parameter
Shapetab Style

Description
IntheVectorworksFundamentalsproduct,allwallsareunstyled.TheVectorworks ArchitectorLandmarkproductisrequiredtoselectotherwallstyles;seeCreatingWalls inVectorworksArchitectandLandmarkonpage 109intheVectorworksDesignSeries UsersGuide.

Thickness Thickness Displaystheoverallthicknessofthewall;thethicknessofawallwithoutcomponentsis determinedbythewallattributes.Thethicknessofawallwithcomponentsisdefinedby thesumofthecomponentthicknesses. Displaysthevisiblewallthickness,whileaccountingforcomponentvisibilitysettings. Invisiblecomponentsontheinteriorandexteriorofthewallcausethewalltoappear thinnerthanitsactuallength,fordisplaypurposes.

VisThick

Height

Editing Walls | Parameter


Height

465

Description
Directlysetsthedesiredheightofthewall.Whenthewallheightisdeterminedmanually bythismethod,theTopBoundpropertyofthewallisautomaticallysettoLayer Elevation,andtheTopOffsetvalueismodifiedaccordingly. Whenthetopofthewallisboundbythelayerwallheightvalue,thewallheightdisplays automatically.

TopBound

Setstheverticalreferencethatdeterminesthetopofthewall. TheLayerWallHeightvalueissetbythedesignlayer(seeSettingDesignLayer Propertiesonpage 97). AdditionaloptionsareavailablefortheVectorworksArchitectproduct;seeCreating WallsinVectorworksArchitectandLandmarkonpage 109intheVectorworksDesign SeriesUsersGuide.

TopOffset BottomBound BottomOffset Caps Attr Components ReverseSides Rendertab (Renderworks required) Mode

SetstheoffsetofthetopofthewallfromitsspecifiedTopBoundheight. Setstheverticalreferencethatdeterminesthebottomofthewall;LayerElevationisthe onlyoptionavailableunlesstheVectorworksArchitectproductisinstalled Forthebottomofthewall,setstheoffsetfromthelayerelevation Selectwhetherawallsegmentiscappedatthestartpoint,theendpoint,bothends,orhas nocapsatall Whenthewalliscapped,specifieswhetherthewallcapattributescomesfromthewall lineattributesorthecomponentlineattributes Editsthewallcomponentsofunstyledwalls(seeCreatingWallComponentson page 455) Reversesthedirectionofthewallsections(seeWallDirectiononpage 454)

Selectwhethertotexturethewallaccordingtotexturesdefinedforthewall(ByObject)or accordingtotexturesdefinedforthecomponents(ByComponent).SeeApplyinga TexturetoanObjectonpage 639andCreatingWallComponentsonpage 455.

Reshaping Walls
UsetheReshapetoolinaviewotherthanTop/Plantoeditthewallheight,changetheelevationofwallpeaks,add verticestocreatepeaksinawall,anddeleteverticesthathavebeenadded.UsetheSelectiontooltochangethewall length.Symbolsremainwhereplacedwhenawallisreshaped. InTop/Planview,orwhenmultiplewallsareselected,orwhenawallandotherobjectsareselected,orwhena marqueehasbeendrawn,theReshapetooldisplays2DReshapemodes;theverticesateitherendofthewallcanbe moved,changingthewalllengthand/orlocation.See2DReshapeModesonpage 303. Inany3Dview,threemodesareavailablefortheReshapetoolwhenasinglewallisselected.

466

| Chapter 11: Creating Building Elements


Add 3D Wall Peaks

Reshape 3D Walls

Delete 3D Wall Peaks

Mode
Reshape3DWalls Add3DWallPeaks Delete3DWallPeaks

Description
Adjuststhepositionofaselectedwallvertex Addsavertextoawallforreshapingpurposes Deletesawallvertex

Changing Wall Length


Tochangeawallslength: 1. Selectthewalltoreshape. 2. ClicktheSelectiontoolfromtheBasicpalette. SingleObjectInteractiveScalingmodemustbeenabled. 3. Positionthecursoroveranendselectionhandle,andclick. Ina3Dview,thehandlesareatthebaseofthewall. 4. Movethemousetolengthenorshortenthewall. 5. Clickwhenthewallisatthedesiredlength.

With the Selection tool, drag the handle at the base of the wall to lengthen or shorten the wall

WalllengthcanalsobechangedwiththeReshapetoolinTop/Planview.Ina3Dview,drawamarqueewiththe Reshapetooltoenclosethewallvertexinamarqueethatiscoplanarwiththebottomwallelevation.Selectthewall withtheReshapetool.Theavailablemodesswitchtothe2Dreshapemodes,and2Dreshapefunctionalityisenabled (see2DReshapeModesonpage 303).Thisallowsthewalllengthtobeadjusted,evenwhenina3Dview.

Editing Walls |

467

Changing Wall Height


Tochangetheheightofthewall: 1. Ina3Dview,selectthewalltoreshape. 2. ClicktheReshapetoolfromtheBasicpalette,andselectReshape3DWallsmode. 3. Positionthecursoroveroneofthehandlesinthemiddleofthetoporbottomofthewall,andclick. Whenthecursorisoverareshapehandle,thestandardarrowcursorchangesintoadoubleheaded,unfilled arrow. 4. Movethemousetoadjustthewall. 5. Clickatthedesiredlocation.

With the 3D Reshape cursor, drag a handle in the middle to change the wall height

IntheObjectInfopalette,theheightchangedisplaysasatoporbottomoffsetvalue.

Changing Wall Peak Height


Tochangetheheightofapeakonthewall: 1. Ina3Dview,selectthewalltoreshape. 2. ClicktheReshapetoolfromtheBasicpalette,andselectReshape3DWallsmode. 3. Positionthecursoroveroneofthehandlesontheendsofthetoporbottomofthewall,andclick. Whenthecursorisoverareshapehandle,thestandardarrowcursorchangesintoadoubleheaded,unfilled arrow. 4. Movethemousetoadjustthewall. 5. Clickatthedesiredlocation.

468

| Chapter 11: Creating Building Elements

With the 3D Reshape cursor, drag a handle on the end of the top or bottom of the wall to reshape the wall

Changingtheheightofawallpeakdoesnotchangetheheightofthewall.

Adding a Vertex to Walls


Toaddavertextoawall: 1. Ina3Dview,selectthewallthatrequiresapeak(vertex). 2. ClicktheReshapetoolfromtheBasicpalette,andselectAdd3DWallPeaksmode. 3. Positionthecursoroveranendpointononeofthecornersoranexistingvertex,andclick. Whenthecursorisoveranendpoint,thestandardarrowcursorchangesintoasingleheaded,filledarrowwith shadedboxesoneithersideoftheshaft. 4. Movethemousetoaddavertextothetoporbottomofthewall. Avertexcanbemovedtoanylocationalongthesamewallaslongasthelocationdoesnotpassanotherexisting vertex. 5. Clickwhenthevertexisatthedesiredlocation.

With the Add Peak cursor, click-click an end point to add a peak (Front view depicted)

The top of the wall is now flush with the bottom of the roof

Toreshapeacurvedwalltomatchaplanarsurface,usetheSubtractSolidsorIntersectSolidscommandwithan objectthatmatchestheplaneoftheroof.

Editing Walls |

469

Deleting a Wall Vertex


Todeleteacontrolpoint: 1. Ina3Dview,selectthewallwiththepeak(vertex)tobedeleted. 2. ClicktheReshapetoolfromtheBasicpalette,andselectDelete3DWallPeaksmode. 3. Positionthecursoroverthevertextodelete. Whenthecursorisoveravertex,thestandardarrowcursorchangesintoasingleheaded,filledarrowwitha hollowdiamondintheshaft. 4. Clickonthevertex. Thevertexisremovedandthewallisreshapedtotheremainingvertices.

Wall with two unnecessary vertices (Front view depicted)

With the Delete Peak cursor, click a vertex to delete it

Wall with two vertices removed

Changing Round Wall Radius


Tochangetheradiusofaroundwall: 1. Selecttheroundwalltoedit. 2. ClicktheSelectiontoolfromtheBasicpalette. 3. Positionthecursoroverthecentercontrolpoint,andclick. 4. Movethemousetochangetheradius,andclicktosettheendpoint.

Move the control point to change the round wall radius

Fliptheroundwallarcbydraggingtoward,andthrough,thearccenter.

470

| Chapter 11: Creating Building Elements

Removing Wall Breaks


TheRemoveWallBreakstoolcleansupanywallbreaksorgapsthatwerecreatedduringediting.Forexample,when creatinganewwallthatjoinsanexistingwall,ifthenewwallislaterdeleted,abreakintheremainingwalldisplaysat thejoint.TheRemoveWallBreakstoolcanremovethebreakandanyendcaps. Toremovewallbreaks: 1. ClicktheRemoveWallBreakstoolfromtheWallstoolset. Alternatively,rightclick(Windows)orCtrlclick(Macintosh)onthewallandselectRemoveBreakfromthe contextmenu. 2. Clickanddragtocreateamarqueeboxaroundthewallbreakorendcaptoremove. Thewallbreakorendcapisautomaticallyremoved.
2nd click 1st click

Joining Walls
TheWallJointooljoinsstraightorcurvedwallsegments,notalreadyconnectedusingtheAutojoinwallspreference. (SeeAutomaticallyJoiningWallsonpage 454forinformationonAutojoinwalls.)Therearethreemodesforjoining wallsandtwoendcapmodes.
L Join Uncapped Join

T Join

X Join

Capped Join

Mode
TJoin LJoin XJoin UncappedJoin CappedJoin

Description
Extendsorshortensonewallsegmentuntilitintersectswithasecondwallsegment;creates YjoinsbyjoiningthefirstselectedwalltotwosectionsofanexistingLjoin Joinstheclosestendsoftwowallstocreateacorner Joinstwowallsegmentsatthepointwheretheyintersect Appliesanuncappedjointowalljoinoperations Appliesacappedjointowalljoinoperations

Totemporarilyactivatethistool,rightclick(Windows)orCtrlclick(Macintosh)onawall,andselectJoinfrom thecontextmenu.

T Wall Joins
TheTJoinmodeextendsorshortensthefirstwallsegmentuntilitintersectswithasecondwallsegment.Asonlythe firstwallisextended,thismodewillnotcreatecornertypejoins.(Forthose,usetheLwalljoinmode.SeeLWall

Editing Walls |
Joinsonpage 472formoreinformation.) TojoinwallswiththeTJoinmode: 1. ClicktheWallJointoolfromtheWallstoolset

471

Alternatively,rightclick(Windows)orCtrlclick(Macintosh)onthewallandselectJoinfromthecontextmenu. 2. ClickTJoinfromtheToolbar. 3. Selectthewallsegmenttojoin. 4. Selectthesecondwallsegmenttojoin.

TocreateaTjointoanexistingcorner,jointhewallsegmenttotheperpendicularcornersegment.Thiscreatesa cleanjoinbetweenthewalls.

A B C

A B C

In both cases, wall A and B are already corner joined; wall C is joined to wall A

Y Wall Joins
YwalljoinsarenotautomaticallycreatedwhenusingtheAutojoinwallspreference.(SeeSettingVectorworks Preferencesonpage 17forinformationonAutojoinwalls.)Instead,theTJoinmodeisusedtocreateYwalljoins. TocreateaYwalljoinbetweenthreewallsegments: 1. ClicktheWallJointoolfromtheWallstoolset. Alternatively,rightclick(Windows)orCtrlclick(Macintosh)onthewallandselectJoinfromthecontextmenu. 2. ClickTJoinfromtheToolbar. 3. Selectthewallsegmenttojoin. 4. Selectoneofthetwowallsegmentstojoin. Thewallsegmentsarejoined.

472

| Chapter 11: Creating Building Elements

L Wall Joins
TheLJoinmodejoinstheclosestendsoftwowallstocreateacorner,orjoinstwowallsendtoend.Bothwalllengths areextendedorshortened,asnecessary,untiltheymeetcleanly. TojoinwallswiththeLJoinmode: 1. ClicktheWallJointoolfromtheWallstoolset. Alternatively,rightclick(Windows)orCtrlclick(Macintosh)onthewallandselectJoinfromthecontextmenu. 2. ClickLJoinfromtheToolbar. 3. Selectthefirstwallsegmenttojoin. 4. Selectthesecondwallsegmenttojoin. Thewalllengthsareresized,asnecessary.

Joining walls end to end

X Wall Joins
TheXJoinmodejoinstwowallsegmentsatthepointwheretheyintersect. TojoinwallswiththeXJoinmode: 1. ClicktheWallJointoolfromtheWallstoolset. Alternatively,rightclick(Windows)orCtrlclick(Macintosh)onthewallandselectJoinfromthecontextmenu. 2. ClickXJoinfromtheToolbar. 3. Selectthefirstwallsegmenttojoin.

Creating Roof Faces |


4. Selectthesecondwallsegmenttojoin. Thefirstwallissplitaboutthesecondwalltocreatethejoin.

473

Thetwowallsegmentsmustalreadyintersectinordertousethismode,asneithersegmentslengthisaltered.

Joining Walls with the Fillet Tool


TheFillettool,locatedontheBasicpalette,joinstwowallsegmentsbycreatingaroundwallbetweenthem.See CreatingFilletsandChamfersonpage 335.

Creating Roof Faces


Therearetwowaystocreatearoofforastructure: TheRoofFacecommandconvertsanyclosed2Dobjectintoarooffaceobject. TheCreateRoofcommandcreatesaroofobjectbyselectingtheobject(s)thattheroofwillbebasedupon (includingwalls,polygonsandpolylines).SeeCreatingRoofObjectsonpage 478. UsetheRoofFacecommandtocreatehybrid(2D/3D)roofstructuresfromanyclosed2Dobject.Thisisaneasywayto createaslaborflatroof.Youcanalsousethiscommandtocreateauniquelyshapedroof,suchasagableroofovera roundstructure. Rooffacescreatedwiththiscommandcanbeconnectedtootherrooffaces,butwhilethiscommandcancreateahipor gableroof,itiseasiertocreatethesetypesofroofswiththeCreateRoofcommand. Theroofcanbecreatedinthesamedesignlayerasthewallstructure,orinadifferentlayer.Ifthewallsandroofareon differentlayers,createaviewporttoviewthewallsandrooftogether. IntheVectorworksDesignSeriesproducts,theRoofFacecommandislocatedunderadifferentmenu.

Product
VectorworksArchitect VectorworksLandmark VectorworksSpotlight

Command
AEC>RoofFace Landmark>Architectural>RoofFace Spotlight>Architectural>RoofFace

474

| Chapter 11: Creating Building Elements

Tocreatearoofface: 1. Drawthe2Dobjectthatisthebasisfortheroof.Anyenclosed2Dobjectcanbeused,suchasenclosedarcs, polylines,rectangles,circles,andovals. 2. Withtheobjectselected,selectModel>AEC>RoofFace. TheCreateRoofFacedialogboxopens.Specifytheroofslopecreationmethod,edgeandholemiteroptions,and roofparameters.

Parameter
RoofSlope Angle RiseoverRun

Description
Indicatestheroofslopecreationmethodandcriteria Createsaroofslopebasedonanangle;specifytheAngle Createsaroofslopebasedonriseoverrunvalues;specifytheRiseandRun.Theriseis thedistancealongtheYaxistheroofrisesabovetheZheight,andrunisthedistance alongtheXaxisfortherooftoreachthatheight. Createsaroofslopebasedonamouseclickposition(thisoptiononlyavailableinTop/ Planview).EntertheHeightforthesecondmouseclick. Indicatesthemitertypefortheroofedge Createstheroofedgeperpendiculartotheactivelayerplane Createstheroofedgeparalleltotheactivelayerplane Createstheroofedgewithahorizontalandverticalmiter;specifytheHorizontaland Verticallengths Createstheloweredgeoftherooffaceperpendiculartotheroofsurface,regardlessof theroofangle Specifiescutoutmiteroptions Cutoutedgesareperpendiculartotheactivelayerplane Cutoutedgesareperpendiculartotheroofsurface Setstheroofheight Forangledroofslopes,indicatestheroofslopeangle

2ndClickHeight EdgeMiter Vertical Horizontal Double Square HoleMiter Vertical Square AxisZ Angle

Creating Roof Faces | Parameter


Rise/Run Height Thickness Vertical/Horizontal 3. ClickOK.

475

Description
Forriseoverrunroofslopes,specifiestheriseandrunvalues Indicatestheheightofthesecondmouseclickwhentheroofslopeisspecifiedwiththat option Specifiestheroofthickness Fordoublemiters,specifiesthehorizontalandverticalmiterlengths

4. Clickdragthemouseacrossthe2Dobjecttodrawalinethatdefinestheroofaxis;clickagaintocompletethe line.Ablackarrowdisplaysononesideoftheline,indicatingwhichsideoftheobjectwillbethehighsideofthe roof. 5. Pointthemousetothesideoftheroofthatwillbehighest,andthenclickagain.Theroofaxislinedisplays selectionhandles,andthearrowpointingtothehighsideoftheroofturnsblue,indicatingthattherooffaceis complete.

2D view

3D view

Reshaping Roof Faces


Oncearooffacehasbeencreated,thereareseveralwaystoeditit: Edittherooffaceparameters(suchastheangleoreavetype)intheObjectInfopalette. Changetheroofsbasic2DobjectshapeusingtheEditRoofcommand.(BecarefulnottousetheUngroup command,asthispermanentlychangestherooffacebackintotheoriginal2Dobject.)UsetheExitRoof commandtocompletethechange. MovetherooffaceaxisusingtheSelectiontoolinTop/Planview. ChangetherooffaceangleusingtheReshapetool(bestinFrontorBackview). Theroofanglemustbebetween0and85tobechangedbytheReshapetool.

Connecting Roof Faces


UseeithertheSingleObjectConnectortheDualObjectConnectmodeoftheConnect/Combinetooltotrimrooffaces thatintersectortoextendonerooffacetoanother.Iftherooffaceshavedifferentthicknesses,thereisanoptionto adjustthethicknessestomatchautomatically.

476

| Chapter 11: Creating Building Elements


Dual Object Connect

Single Object Connect

Use Vertical Thickness of Subject Roof Face

Toconnecttworooffaces: 1. ClicktheConnect/CombinetoolfromtheBasicpalette,andselecteitherSingleObjectConnectorDualObject ConnectfromtheToolbar. 2. Iftherooffaceshavedifferentthicknesses,settheUseVerticalThicknessofSubjectRoofFaceoptiononthe Toolbarasappropriate. Toautomaticallyadjusttherooffacethicknessofthesecondclickedrooffacetomatchtheverticalthickness ofthefirstclickedroofface,selectUseVerticalThicknessofSubjectRoofFace. Toconnecttherooffaceswithoutadjustingthethickness,deselecttheoption. 3. Clickthefirst,andthenthesecond,rooffacetoconnect. Theresultoftheoperationdependsonthemodeselected,thepositionsoftherooffaces,andtheportionofthe rooffacesclickedupon.
Single Object Connect mode 2nd click

1st click 1st click

2nd click

For non-intersecting faces, the first clicked face is extended to meet the second clicked face

For intersecting faces, the first clicked face is trimmed to keep the clicked portion

Creating Roof Faces |


Dual Object Connect mode

477

2nd click 1st click 1st click 2nd click

For non-intersecting faces, both faces are extended or trimmed to join

For intersecting faces, both faces are trimmed and the clicked parts of the faces are kept

With Use Vertical Thickness of Subject Roof Face enabled, the thickness of the boundary face (clicked second) changes to match the vertical thickness of the subject face (clicked first) 2nd click 1st click

Creating Cut-outs in a Roof Face


UsetheClipSurfacecommandtoaddacutouttoaroofface.Acutout,forexample,canbeusedtoaddaholefora chimneythatoverlapstwoormorefacesoftheroof.

2D view

3D view

478

| Chapter 11: Creating Building Elements

TheedgesofthecutoutaremiteredaccordingtotheselectionsmadeintheCreateRoofdialogboxduringthecreation oftheroofface. Toaddacutouttoaroofface: 1. Selecttheroofface. 2. Createanobjectwiththedimensionsforthecutoutandplaceitwherethecutoutwillbelocated. 3. Selectbothobjects. 4. SelectModify>ClipSurface. Thiscreatesthecutoutintheroofface,leavingbehindtheobjectusedtomakethecutout. 5. Selecttheobjectusedtomakethecutoutanddeleteit.

Creating Roof Objects


Therearetwowaystocreatearoofforastructure: TheCreateRoofcommandcreatesaroofbyselectingtheobject(s)thattheroofwillbebasedupon(including walls,polygons,polylines,andarcs). TheRoofFacecommandconvertsanyclosed2Dobjectintoarooffaceobject.SeeCreatingRoofFaceson page 473. TheCreateRoofcommandcreatesaroofobjectwithmultiplefacesbasedonspecifiedparameters.Agreatvarietyof rooftypescanbecreatedbythismethod,andtheycanincluderoofelementssuchasgablesandskylights.Oncethe wallsofastructurearecomplete,selectthewallsthattheroofwillbebasedupon,andspecifytheroofparameters. Alternatively,selectapolygonorpolylineasthebasisfortheroof.

3D view

2D view

IntheVectorworksDesignSeriesproducts,theCreateRoofcommandislocatedunderadifferentmenu.

Creating Roof Objects | Product


VectorworksArchitect VectorworksLandmark VectorworksSpotlight Tocreatearoofobject: 1. Selectthewalls,polygon,orpolylinethattheroofwillbebasedupon.

479

Command
AEC>CreateRoof Landmark>Architectural>CreateRoof Spotlight>Architectural>CreateRoof

Shiftclicktoselectmultiplewalls.Ifthebuildinghasanattachment,suchasagarage,thatwillhaveadifferent roofstructure,thenselectonlythedesiredwalls. 2. SelectModel>AEC>CreateRoof. TheCreateRoofdialogboxopens.Enterthedesiredcriteriatocreatetheroofobject.Theparametersare illustratedintheroofdiagram.Certaindefaultparametersaresuggestedbasedontheselectedroofparameters.

Parameter
EaveProfile

Description
Selecttheroofedgeappearance Square:angledfascia,soffitedges Vertical:verticalfascia,angledsoffitedges Horizontal:nofascia,horizontalsoffitedges Double:verticalfascia,horizontalsoffitedges

(1)Vertical (2)Horizontal (3)Thickness (4)BearingInset

Specifiestheverticallengthforadoublemitereave Specifiesthehorizontallengthforadoublemitereave Specifiestheroofthickness Specifieshowfarthebearingwallcutsintotheroof

480

| Chapter 11: Creating Building Elements


Description
Specifiestheroofpitchasanangleorrise:runratio;clickCalculateforanautomatic calculationbasedonbearingheight,eaveheight,andeaveoverhang Specifiestheheightoftherafterplateortopplateabovethewalllayerelevationwhere theroofwillbesupported;clickCalculateforanautomaticcalculationbasedonroof pitch,eaveheight,andeaveoverhang Specifiestheheightofthelowestportionoftheroof;clickCalculateforanautomatic calculationbasedonroofpitch,bearingheight,andeaveoverhang Specifiesthedistancethattheroofextendsbeyondthebearingwall;clickCalculatefor anautomaticcalculationbasedonroofpitch,bearingheight,andeaveheight Assignstheroofobjecttoalayer.Bydefault,theroofiscreatedintheactivedesignlayer. Tocreatetheroofinadifferentlayer,selectanexistinglayerfromthelist,orselectNew Layertocreateanewlayer. Assignstheroofobjecttoaclass.Thestandardroofclass,RoofMain,isavailableasan optionandifitisselected,itiscreatedinthefileifitdidnotalreadyexist.Alternatively, selectNewClasstocreateanewclass. Retainsthesourceobject(s)thatformedthebasisoftheroof

Parameter
(5)RoofPitch (6)BearingHeight

(7)EaveHeight (8)EaveOverhang Layer

Class

RetainOriginalObjects 3. ClickOK.

Ahiproofiscreatedovertheselectedobject(s)usingthecriteriasetintheCreateRoofdialogbox.

Editing Roof Objects


Oncearoofobjecthasbeencreated,therearemultiplewaystoeditit: Edittheroofobjectparameters(suchasthethicknessoreavetype)intheObjectInfopalette. Changeroofedgeshapes(suchashiporgable)usingtheSelectiontool. ReshapetheroofobjectusingtheReshapetool.

Editing Basic Roof Object Parameters


ChangethebasicparametersthatweresetwhentheroofobjectwascreatedusingtheObjectInfopalette. Tochangeroofobjectsettings: 1. Selecttheroof. 2. FromtheObjectInfopalette,changebasicparametersasnecessary.

Parameter
BearingInset Thickness AppliesTo GableThickness

Description
Specifieshowfarthebearingwallcutsintotheroof Specifiestheroofthickness(normally,thisistheperpendicularthickness;whenaroof hasdifferentslopes,theverticalthicknesscanbespecified) Whenaroofhasdifferentslopes,theverticalthicknesscanbespecifiedtoavoid incorrectroofintersections.SelectVerticalThicknessandentertheThicknessvalue Whengablewallsexist,specifiesthegablewallthickness

Editing Roof Objects | Parameter


Eaves Vertical CreateGableEndWalls

481

Description
Specifytheeavetype ForDoubleMitertypes,entertheverticallengthoftheeave Selecttocreatewallsectionsatgableends

Changing the Roof Edge Shape


Bydefault,ahiproofiscreatedwitheaveedgesallaround.SpecificroofedgescanbechangedtoagableorDutchhip shape. Tochangetheroofedgeshape: 1. SelecttheroofwiththeSelectiontool. Selectionhandlesdisplayfortheroof. 2. Clickontheselectionhandleoftheedgetobeedited. TheEditRoofSettingsdialogboxopens. 3. ChangetheroofparametersandselectEntireRooftoapplytheeditstoallsectionsoftheroof.IfEntireRoofis notselected,theeditsapplytotheedgeoftheroofthatwasclicked.

Parameter
RoofEdgeShape

Description
Selectthebasicshapeofthisroofedge:Eave,Gable,orDutchHip.Thedefaultisahip roof,withanEaveedgeonallsides. Whenthissettingischanged,theavailableparametersandroofdiagramreflectthe selectedroofedgeshape.

GableOverhang (DutchHiponly) GableInset (DutchHiponly)

SpecifieshowthegablewallontopoftheDutchhipfacewillbecut;enterzerofora flatgablewall,orenterthenumberofinchesthegablewallwillbeinsetfromthe gableroofedge SpecifieshowfarthegablewallontopoftheDutchhipfacewillbefromtheedgeof thehipface

482

| Chapter 11: Creating Building Elements


Description
Specifiestheroofpitchasanangleorrise:runratio;clickthecalculatorforan automaticcalculationbasedonbearingheight,eaveheight,andeaveoverhang Specifiestheheightoftherafterplateortopplateabovethewalllayerelevation wheretheroofwillbesupported;clickthecalculatorforanautomaticcalculation basedonpitch,eaveheight,andeaveoverhang Specifiestheheightofthebottommostportionoftheroof;clickthecalculatorforan automaticcalculationbasedonpitch,bearingheight,andeaveoverhang Specifiesthedistancethattheroofextendsbeyondthebearingwall,clickthe calculatorforanautomaticcalculationbasedonpitch,bearingheight,andeaveheight Selectthisoptiontoapplytheeditedroofparameterstoallavailableroofsections

Parameter
Pitch (EaveandDutchHiponly) BearingHeight

EaveHeight EaveOverhang EntireRoof (EaveandDutchHiponly)

4. ClickOKtochangetheroofedgesettings.

Changing a Hip Roof to a Gable Roof


Tochangeahiproofintoagableroof: 1. SelecttheroofwiththeSelectiontool. Selectionhandlesdisplayfortheroof. 2. Clickontheselectionhandleofthefacetochangeintoagablewall. TheEditRoofSettingsdialogboxopens. 3. SelecttheGableoption. Adiagramandparametersforagableedgedisplay.

4. ChangetheparametersasdescribedinChangingtheRoofEdgeShapeonpage 481,andclickOK. Atriangularwallisplacedwhenthegableroofiscreated.

Editing Roof Objects |

483

Changing a Hip Roof to a Dutch Hip Roof


TochangeahiproofintoaDutchhiproof: 1. SelecttheroofwiththeSelectiontool. Selectionhandlesdisplayfortheroof. 2. ClickontheselectionhandleofthefacetochangeintoaDutchhipface. TheEditRoofSettingsdialogboxopens. 3. SelecttheDutchHipoption. AdiagramandparametersforaDutchhipedgedisplay.

4. SpecifyaGableInsetvaluetocreatetheDutchhipface,andchangeothersettingsasdescribedinChangingthe RoofEdgeShapeonpage 481. 5. ClickOK. 6. SelectEntireRooftoapplytheeditstoallappropriatesectionsoftheroof.

484

| Chapter 11: Creating Building Elements

Creating Cut-outs in a Roof Object


Cuttingaholeinaroofobjectiseasilyaccomplishedbyeditingtheroofobjectgroupanddrawingthecutoutshape. Tocreateacutoutinaroofobject: 1. Selecttheroofobject. 2. SelectModify>EditGroup. 3. IntheEditGroupwindow,drawa2Dobject(rectangle,circle,oval,polygon,polyline,orarc)overtheroof. 4. ClickExitGroupatthetoprightofthewindow. 5. Theshapeiscutoutoftheroof.

Reshaping Roof Objects


Aroofobjectcanbereshapedina2Dor3DviewwiththeReshapetool.Theroofedge,roofridge,androofslopecan bechanged. InTop/Planview,theReshapetoolcanbeusedforbasicroofshapeediting;see2DReshapeModeson page 303.However,theReshapetoolshouldbeusedina3Dviewtoedittheroofedgeandroofridgelocation. FivemodesareavailablewhenboththeReshapetoolandaroofobjectisselectedina3Dview.
Add Vertex Working Plane Constrain

3D Reshape

Z-Constrain

Remove Vertex

Mode
3DReshape AddVertex RemoveVertex WorkingPlane Constrain

Description
Adjuststhepositionofaselectedroofvertex,constrainedhorizontallyorverticallyin combinationwiththeZConstrainandWorkingPlaneConstrainmodes Addsapeak(vertex)toaroof Deletesaroofpeak(vertex) In3DReshapemode,reshapestheroofobjecthorizontally,constrainedalongtheXand/orY axes

Editing Roof Objects | Mode


ZConstrain

485

Description
In3DReshapemode,reshapestheroofobjectalongtheZaxistochangetheheightofaroof ridgeoreave

Reshaping the Roof Along the X and Y Axis


Toreshapetheroofhorizontally: 1. Ina3Dview,selecttheroofobject. 2. ClicktheReshapetoolfromtheBasicpalette,andselectWorkingPlaneConstrainmode. 3. Positionthecursoroveraroofhandle. Whenthecursorisoverahandle,thestandardarrowcursorchangesintoanunfilled,fourwayarrow. 4. Clickdragthehandletochangetheroofhandlelocation,orenterspecificXandYdistancevaluesintheData bar.

Theroofedge,ridge,oreavehandlelocationcanbechanged.ThehandlemovementisconstrainedalongtheXor Yaxis(theactivelayerplane);theheightoftheroofelementcannotbechangedinthismode. Changetheslopeofarooffacebymovingtheridgehandle.Ifthereshaperesultsinaroofslopethatapproaches orexceeds90degrees,youarepromptedtocreateagablewallifdesired.

Rendered View

5. Clickwhenthehandleisatthedesiredlocation.

486

| Chapter 11: Creating Building Elements

Reshaping the Roof Along the Z Axis


Tochangetheheightofaroofridgeoreave: 1. Ina3Dview,selecttheroofobject. 2. ClicktheReshapetoolfromtheBasicpalette,andselectZConstrainmode. 3. Positionthecursoroveraroofridgeoreavehandle. Whenthecursorisoverahandle,thestandardarrowcursorchangesintotwowayhollowarrow. 4. Clickdragthehandletochangetheroofhandlelocation,orenterthespecificZaxisdistanceintheDatabar.

Theroofridgeoreavehandlelocationcanbechanged.ThehandlemovementisconstrainedalongtheZaxis (vertically);onlytheheightoftheroofelementcanbechangedinthismode. 5. Clickwhenthehandleisatthedesiredlocation.

Adding a Roof Vertex


Toaddavertextoaroof: 1. Ina3Dview,selecttheroofforaddingthevertex. 2. ClicktheReshapetoolfromtheBasicpalette,andselectAddVertexmode. 3. Positionthecursoroveroneoftheedgeoreavehandles. Thestandardarrowcursorchangesintoasingleheaded,filledarrowwithshadedboxesoneithersideofthe shaft. 4. Clickdragthemousetoaddavertextotheroofedgeoreave. 5. Clickwhenthevertexisatthedesiredlocation. Theroofisautomaticallyreshapedtoaccommodatethenewvertex.

Editing Roof Objects |

487

Deleting a Roof Vertex


Todeleteavertexfromaroof: 1. Ina3Dview,selecttheroofwiththevertextobedeleted. 2. ClicktheReshapetoolfromtheBasicpalette,andselectRemoveVertexmode. 3. Positionthecursorovertheeavevertextodelete. Thestandardarrowcursorchangesintoasingleheaded,filledarrowwithahollowdiamondintheshaft. 4. Clickthevertex. Thevertexisremovedandtheroofisreshapedtotheremainingvertices.

Adding Roof Elements


Oncearoofobjecthasbeencreated,roofelements,suchasdormerwindowsandskylights,canbeadded.

Creating Dormer Windows

Youcancreateawidevarietyofdormerwindowsinroofs.Therearefivestylestoselectfrom:trapezium,gable,shed, hip,andbat;eachgabletypehasuniqueparameters.TheEditRoofElementdialogbox,usedtocreateandeditthe dormers,changesaccordingtothestyleofdormerchosen. Dormerwallsarealwaysdrawninaclockwisedirectionforeasytextureapplication. Tocreateagabledormerwindowinaroofobject: 1. SelectView>StandardViews>Top/Plan. 2. SelectWindow>Palettes>ResourceBrowser. 3. Selectawindowsymbol. Thewindowmustbeasymbol,notapluginobject.

488

| Chapter 11: Creating Building Elements

4. SelectMakeActivefromtheResourcesmenu.TheSymbolInsertiontoolisautomaticallyactivatedfromthe3D Modelingtoolset. 5. Clicktoplacethesymbolintheroofobject. Theroofmustbearoofobjectwithafill,andnotsimplyaroofface. TheEditRoofElementdialogboxopens.

Dormer styles

6. ClickEditDormer. 7. Selectthedormerstyle. Theparametersautomaticallychangeaccordingtotheselecteddormerstyle,withvaluesforplacingthedormer atthelocationspecifiedwiththemouseclick.

Parameter
Centervertically

Dormer Style
All

Description
Placesthecenterofthewindowsymbolinthecenteroftheavailable verticalspaceinthefrontfaceofthedormer;thenormalinsertion pointisnotused Locatesthetopofthewindowsymbolasetdistancefromthetopof thedormerface;thenormalinsertionpointisnotused Indicatestheverticaldistancefromthetopofthepointofengagement withtheroof,orwheretheroofandthedormermeet,tothebearing point,whichisusuallyalongthetopofthebearingwall Specifiesthedistancefromthebuildingoutlinetotheplancenterof thewindowsymbol Setsthedistancefromthecorneroftherooftothecenterofthe dormer;theroofcornerthatthemeasurementistakenfromisalways totheleftofthedormerwhenfacingit

Offsetfromtop Heightoffset

All All

Buildinglineoffset Offsetfromcorner

All All

Editing Roof Objects | Parameter


Topwidth Rightslope Leftslope

489

Dormer Style
Trapezium,Bat Trapezium,Gable, Hip Trapezium,Gable, Hip Trapezium,Gable, Bat Trapezium,Shed, Bat Gable,Shed,Hip Hip All Bat Bat

Description
Determinesthewidthofthetoproofandsetsthefrontfacestrapezoid shape;thefrontfaceisalwayssymmetricalwhenusingthisoption Determinestheangleoftherightedgeofthefrontface;thefrontface canbeasymmetricalwhenusingthisoption Specifiestheangleoftheleftedgeofthefrontface.Alongwiththe RightSlope,thisdimensiondeterminesthetopwidthofthefront face.RightSlopemustbeselectedforthisoptiontobeavailable. Setsthewidthofthebottomedgeofthefrontface;worksin conjunctionwitheithertheTopWidthortheLeftandRightSlope entriesandisrequired Indicatestheangleofthepitchofthetopdormerroofasmeasured fromahorizontalline Horizontaldistanceofthefrontfaceofthedormer Indicatestheangleofthepitchofthefrontfaceofthedormerroofas measuredfromaverticalline Specifiestheelevationheightofthefrontfaceofthedormer; determinestheplandepthofthedormer Indicatesthewidthofthetopoftheroofasmeasuredalongthefront faceofthedormer Distancefromthebottomofthedormertothebeginningofthe compoundcurvesoftheroofasmeasuredalongthefrontfaceofthe dormer Setstheplandistancefromthepointofengagementwiththeroofto thefrontfaceofthedormer;determinestheelevationheightofthe frontfaceofthedormer Amountofroofextensionpastthedormersfrontroofface Pointwherethetwocurvesoftheroofmeet.Thisoptioncontrolsthe locationofthatpointfromthesideedgeofthedormerasmeasured alongtheroof.Thelocationofthispointdeterminesthedepthofthe curvesthatmakeuptheroofline.

Bottomwidth

Slope Width FrontSlope Height Topwidth BottomHeight

Depth

All

Overhang ControlPoint

Gable,Shed,Hip Bat

8. ClickOK. Thegabledormerwithwindowiscreatedandplacedaccordingtotheparametersspecified.Aholeis automaticallycreatedintheroofwherethedormerwallsexist.

Editing Dormer Windows


Oncecreated,thedormerwindowparameterscanbeedited. Toeditadormerwindow: 1. Selectthedormer. Selectionhandlesdisplayaroundtheroofandatthelocationofeachdormer.

490

| Chapter 11: Creating Building Elements

2. Positionthecursorovertheselectionhandleforthedormerandclick. TheEditRoofElementdialogboxopens. 3. SelectEditDormerandchangethedesiredparametersasdescribedinCreatingDormerWindowson page 487. Toremovethedormercompletely,selectRemoveObject. 4. ClickOK. Thedrawingareadisplaysthespecifiedchangesfortheselecteddormer.

Creating Skylights

Asimilarprocesstocreatingdormerwindowsisusedtoplaceafullskylight,completewithawindowsymbol,inthe roof. A3Donlywindowsymbolisrequiredforcreatingaskylight.Anexistinghybridsymbolcanbeconvertedtoa 3Dsymbol;placethesymbolinthedrawingandsetitsparameters,andthenswitchtoa3Dview.Selectthe symbol,andthenselectModifyConvert>ConverttoGroup.SelecttheConvertallsubobjectsoptioninthe ConverttoGroupOptionsdialogbox.Withthegroupselected,chooseModify>CreateSymboltocreatea3D symbolfromthegroup,andselecttheOnEdgeoptionforInsertinWalls. Whencreatingyourownskylightsymbols,settheinsertionpointofthesymbolatthebackandcenterofthe symbol.


Insertion point

Top view

Left view

Front view

Theinsertionpointofthesymboldetermineswhetheraskylightwillbeflushorsurfacemounted.

Editing Roof Objects |

491

Square miter flush-mounted

Square miter surface-mounted

Inserting a Skylight
Toinsertaskylight: 1. SelectWindow>Palettes>ResourceBrowser. 2. Selecta3Dsymboltouseintheskylight.Hybridand2Dwindowsymbolswillnotworkforskylights,though hybridsymbolscanbeusedtocreateacutout. 3. SelectMakeActivefromtheResourcesmenu,ordoubleclickonthesymbol.TheSymbolInsertiontoolis automaticallyactivatedfromthe3DModelingtoolset. 4. SwitchtoTop/Planview. 5. Clicktoplacethesymbolinthedesiredlocationintheroof. Theroofmustbearoofobject,andnotaroofface. TheEditRoofElementdialogboxopens. 6. ClickEditSkylight. Theskylightparametersaredisplayed.

492

| Chapter 11: Creating Building Elements


Description
Specifiesthedistancefromtheedgeoftherooftothecenteroftheskylightsymbol Setsthedistancefromtheedgeofthebuildingtothecenteroftheskylightsymbol Selecttousecreateacutoutintheroofwithoutinsertingthewindowsymbol Deletestheskylightfromtheroof Accessesthedormerparametersinsteadoftheskylightparameters

Parameter
Offsetfromcorner Offsetfrombuildingline Donotinsertsymbol Removeobject Editdormer

7. ClickOKtocreatetheskylight(orcutout).

Editing Skylights
Skylightsandcutoutsareeditedanddeletedinthesamemannerasdormers. Toeditaskylight: 1. Selecttheskylight. Aselectionhandledisplaysattheskylightlocation.

2. Positionthecursorovertheselectionhandlefortheskylightandclick. TheEditRoofElementdialogboxopens,withtheskylightparametersdisplayed. 3. EdittheparametersasdescribedinInsertingaSkylightonpage 491. Toremovetheskylightcompletely,selectRemoveobject. 4. ClickOK. Thedrawingareadisplaysthespecifiedchangesfortheselectedskylight. TheskylightmiterparameterscanbechangedfromtheObjectInfopalette.

Skylight Miter
Vertical

Description
Cutstheroofverticallyatboththetopandbottomoftheskylight

Editing Roof Objects | Skylight Miter


Splayed

493

Description
Cutstheroofhorizontallyatthetopoftheskylight,andverticallyatthebottom

SquareCut

Cutstheroofperpendiculartotheroofatboththetopandbottomoftheskylight

494

| Chapter 11: Creating Building Elements

Adding Building Elements


Structural Shapes and Details

12

Eightcommonlyusedstructuralsteelshapesareavailableas2Dobjects.3Dequivalentsoftheseobjectsarealso availableintheVectorworksDesignSeriesproducts.Sincethe2Dand3Dparametersarenearlyidentical,all parametersaredocumentedwiththe2Dobjectsforconvenience.Twoadditional2D/3Dstructuralshapesarealso availableintheVectorworksDesignSeriesproducts:bulbflatandZsection,aswellasfouradditionalseries(ANZ, BSI,DIN,andJIS);forinformation,seeCreatingStructuralShapesinVectorworksDesignSeriesonpage 131inthe VectorworksDesignSeriesUsersGuide. TheUpdatePluginObjectscommandmayneedtoberunonfilescontainingstructuralshapesthatwere createdinanearlierversionofVectorworkssoftware.Thiscommandconvertsthestructuralshapestothelatest format;seeMigratingfromPreviousVersionsonpage 45.

Angle
Thickness Toe R. (Side A)

Length of Side A

Fillet Radius

Toe R. (Side B)

Insertion Point

Length of Side B

Tocreateanangleobject: 1. ClicktheAngletoolfromtheDetailingtoolset. 2. Clicktoplacetheobjectinthedrawing,andclickagaintosettheobjectsrotation.Ifthisisthefirsttimetheobject isplacedinthedrawing,anobjectpropertiesdialogboxopens.Theseparametersapplytosubsequentlycreated objects;theycanbechangedlaterbyaccessingthemfromtheObjectInfopalette. 3. SpecifytheanglepropertiesandclickOK.

Parameter
Series Size PlaceLocusatCentroid Length(Vectorworks DesignSeriesrequired)

Description
Selectthedesiredseriestodisplaytheappropriatenominalsizes Selecttheanglesize Selectwhethertodrawalocusatthecentroidofthe2Dangle Enterthelengthofthe3Dangle

496

| Chapter 12: Adding Building Elements


Description
Selectthisoptiontoenablefieldsforspecifyingacustomanglesize DisplaysthelengthofanglesidesAandB,orifCustomSizeisselected,allowsentryof acustomvalue Displaysthethicknessoftheanglesides,orifCustomSizeisselected,allowsentryofa customvalue DisplaysthetoeradiusvalueforsidesAandB,orifCustomSizeisselected,allows entryofacustomvalue Displaysthefilletradiusvalue,orifCustomSizeisselected,allowsentryofacustom value Sectionpropertiesareautomaticallycalculatedanddisplayedbasedoninchunitsfor imperialshapesandmillimeterunitsformetricshapes(regardlessoftheunitsselected andShowUnitMarksettingintheUnitsdialogbox) Displaystheanglearea

Parameter
CustomSize LengthofSideA/B Thickness ToeR.(SideA/B) FilletRadius SectionProperties

Area AboutAxisXX/YY MomentofInertia SectionModulus RadiusofGyration AboutAxisZZ RadiusofGyration Tan(Alpha)

Displaysthemomentofinertiaaboutboththehorizontal(XX)andvertical(YY) centroidalaxes Displaysthesectionmodulusaboutboththehorizontal(XX)andvertical(YY) centroidalaxes Displaystheradiusofgyrationaboutboththehorizontal(XX)andvertical(YY) centroidalaxes

Displaystheleastradiusofgyrationabouttheprincipal(ZZ)axis Displaysthetangentoftheangleoftheprincipalaxisfromthevertical

Structural Shapes and Details |

497

Channel
Insertion Point Flange Width Flange Angle Toe Radius Fillet Radius Web Thickness Free Height

Depth

Flange Thickness Flange Width/2

Tocreateachannelobject: 1. ClicktheChanneltoolfromtheDetailingtoolset. 2. Clicktoplacetheobjectinthedrawing,andclickagaintosettheobjectsrotation.Ifthisisthefirsttimetheobject isplacedinthedrawing,anobjectpropertiesdialogboxopens.Theseparametersapplytosubsequentlycreated objects;theycanbechangedlaterbyaccessingthemfromtheObjectInfopalette. 3. SpecifythechannelpropertiesandclickOK.

Parameter
Series Size DrawFreeHeightLines PlaceLocusatCentroid Length(Vectorworks DesignSeriesrequired) CustomSize Depth FlangeWidth FlangeThickness FlangeAngle(Deg.)

Description
Selectthedesiredseriestodisplaytheappropriatenominalsizes Selectthechannelsize Selectwhethertodrawthe2Dchannelwithfreeheightlines Selectwhethertodrawalocusatthecentroidofthe2Dchannel Enterthelengthofthe3Dchannel Selectthisoptiontoenablefieldsforspecifyingacustomchannelsize Displaysthedepthbetweenendpoints,orifCustomSizeisselected,allowsentryofa customvalue Displaystheflangewidth,orifCustomSizeisselected,allowsentryofacustomvalue Displaystheflangethickness,orifCustomSizeisselected,allowsentryofacustom value Displaystheflangeangledegrees,orifCustomSizeisselected,allowsentryofa customvalue

498

| Chapter 12: Adding Building Elements


Description
Displaysthewebthicknessofthechannel,orifCustomSizeisselected,allowsentryof acustomvalue Displaysthetoeradiusvalue,orifCustomSizeisselected,allowsentryofacustom value Displaysthefilletradiusvalue,orifCustomSizeisselected,allowsentryofacustom value Sectionpropertiesareautomaticallycalculatedanddisplayedbasedoninchunitsfor imperialshapesandmillimeterunitsformetricshapes(regardlessoftheunitsselected andShowUnitMarksettingintheUnitsdialogbox) Displaysthechannelarea

Parameter
WebThickness ToeRadius FilletRadius SectionProperties

Area AboutAxisXX/YY MomentofInertia SectionModulus RadiusofGyration

Displaysthemomentofinertiaaboutboththehorizontal(XX)andvertical(YY) centroidalaxes Displaysthesectionmodulusaboutboththehorizontal(XX)andvertical(YY) centroidalaxes Displaystheradiusofgyrationaboutboththehorizontal(XX)andvertical(YY) centroidalaxes

I-beam
Flange Width Insertion Point

Fillet Radius Web Thickness

Toe Radius

Depth

Free Height

Flange Angle

Flange Thickness Flange Width/4

TocreateanIbeamobject: 1. ClicktheIBeamtoolfromtheDetailingtoolset.

Structural Shapes and Details |

499

2. Clicktoplacetheobjectinthedrawing,andclickagaintosettheobjectsrotation.Ifthisisthefirsttimetheobject isplacedinthedrawing,anobjectpropertiesdialogboxopens.Theseparametersapplytosubsequentlycreated objects;theycanbechangedlaterbyaccessingthemfromtheObjectInfopalette. 3. SpecifytheIbeampropertiesandclickOK.

Parameter
Series Size Length(Vectorworks DesignSeriesrequired) DrawCenterLine DrawFreeHeight Lines PlaceLocusatCentroid CustomSize Depth FlangeWidth WebThickness FlangeThickness FlangeAngle(Deg.) FilletRadius ToeRadius SectionProperties

Description
Selectthedesiredseriestodisplaytheappropriatenominalsizes SelecttheIbeamsize Enterthelengthofthe3DIbeam Selectwhethertodrawthe2DIbeamwithcenterlines Selectwhethertodrawthe2DIbeamwithfreeheightlines Selectwhethertodrawalocusatthecentroidofthe2DIbeam SelectthisoptiontoenablefieldsforspecifyingacustomIbeamsize Displaysthedepthbetweenendpoints,orifCustomSizeisselected,allowsentryofa customvalue Displaystheflangewidth,orifCustomSizeisselected,allowsentryofacustomvalue Displaysthewebthicknessoftheflange,orifCustomSizeisselected,allowsentryofa customvalue Displaystheflangethickness,orifCustomSizeisselected,allowsentryofacustom value Displaystheflangeangleindegrees,orifCustomSizeisselected,allowsentryofa customvalue Displaysthefilletradiusvalue,orifCustomSizeisselected,allowsentryofacustom value Displaysthetoeradiusvalue,orifCustomSizeisselected,allowsentryofacustom value Sectionpropertiesareautomaticallycalculatedanddisplayedbasedoninchunitsfor imperialshapesandmillimeterunitsformetricshapes(regardlessoftheunitsselected andShowUnitMarksettingintheUnitsdialogbox) DisplaystheIbeamarea

Area AboutAxisXX/YY MomentofInertia SectionModulus RadiusofGyration

Displaysthemomentofinertiaaboutboththehorizontal(XX)andvertical(YY) centroidalaxes Displaysthesectionmodulusaboutboththehorizontal(XX)andvertical(YY) centroidalaxes Displaystheradiusofgyrationaboutboththehorizontal(XX)andvertical(YY) centroidalaxes

500

| Chapter 12: Adding Building Elements

Rectangular Tubing
Wall Thickness Height

Insertion Point Width Inside Fillet Radius

Tocreatearectangulartubingobject: 1. ClicktheRectangularTubingtoolfromtheDetailingtoolset. 2. Clicktoplacetheobjectinthedrawing,andclickagaintosettheobjectsrotation.Ifthisisthefirsttimetheobject isplacedinthedrawing,anobjectpropertiesdialogboxopens.Theseparametersapplytosubsequentlycreated objects;theycanbechangedlaterbyaccessingthemfromtheObjectInfopalette. 3. SpecifytherectangularpropertiesandclickOK.

Parameter
Series Size Length(Vectorworks DesignSeriesrequired) DrawCenterLines PlaceLocusatCentroid CustomSize Width Height WallThickness InsideFilletRadius SectionProperties

Description
Selectthedesiredseriestodisplaytheappropriatenominalsizes Selecttherectangulartubingsize Enterthelengthofthe3Drectangulartubing Selectwhethertodrawthe2Drectangulartubingwithcenterlines Selectwhethertodrawalocusatthecentroidofthe2Drectangulartubing Selectthisoptiontoenablefieldsforspecifyingacustomrectangulartubingsize Displaysthewidthofthetubing,orifCustomSizeisselected,allowsentryofacustom value Displaystheheightofthetubing,orifCustomSizeisselected,allowsentryofacustom value Displaysthewallthicknessofthetubing,orifCustomSizeisselected,allowsentryofa customvalue Displaystheinsidefilletradiusvalue,orifCustomSizeisselected,allowsentryofa customvalue Sectionpropertiesareautomaticallycalculatedanddisplayedbasedoninchunitsfor imperialshapesandmillimeterunitsformetricshapes(regardlessoftheunitsselected andShowUnitMarksettingintheUnitsdialogbox) Displaystherectangulartubingarea

Area

Structural Shapes and Details | Parameter


AboutAxisXX/YY MomentofInertia SectionModulus RadiusofGyration Displaysthemomentofinertiaaboutboththehorizontal(XX)andvertical(YY) centroidalaxes Displaysthesectionmodulusaboutboththehorizontal(XX)andvertical(YY) centroidalaxes Displaystheradiusofgyrationaboutboththehorizontal(XX)andvertical(YY) centroidalaxes

501

Description

Round Tubing
Outside Diameter Wall Thickness

Insertion Point

Tocreatearoundtubingobject: 1. ClicktheRoundTubingtoolfromtheDetailingtoolset. 2. Clicktoplacetheobjectinthedrawing,andclickagaintosettheobjectsrotation.Ifthisisthefirsttimetheobject isplacedinthedrawing,anobjectpropertiesdialogboxopens.Theseparametersapplytosubsequentlycreated objects;theycanbechangedlaterbyaccessingthemfromtheObjectInfopalette. 3. SpecifytheroundtubingpropertiesandclickOK.

Parameter
Series Size Length(Vectorworks DesignSeriesrequired) DrawCenterLines PlaceLocusatCentroid CustomSize OutsideDiameter

Description
Selectthedesiredseriestodisplaytheappropriatenominalsizes Selecttheroundtubingsize Enterthelengthofthe3Droundtubing Selectwhethertodrawthe2Droundtubingwithcenterlines Selectwhethertodrawalocusatthecentroidofthe2Droundtubing Selectthisoptiontoenablefieldsforspecifyingacustomroundtubingsize Displaystheoutsidediameterofthetubing,orifCustomSizeisselected,allowsentryof acustomvalue

502

| Chapter 12: Adding Building Elements


Description
Displaysthewallthicknessofthetubing,orifCustomSizeisselected,allowsentryofa customvalue Sectionpropertiesareautomaticallycalculatedanddisplayedbasedoninchunitsfor imperialshapesandmillimeterunitsformetricshapes(regardlessoftheunitsselected andShowUnitMarksettingintheUnitsdialogbox) Displaystheroundtubingarea

Parameter
WallThickness SectionProperties

Area AboutAxisXX/YY MomentofInertia SectionModulus RadiusofGyration

Displaysthemomentofinertiaaboutboththehorizontal(XX)andvertical(YY) centroidalaxes Displaysthesectionmodulusaboutboththehorizontal(XX)andvertical(YY) centroidalaxes Displaystheradiusofgyrationaboutboththehorizontal(XX)andvertical(YY) centroidalaxes

Square Tubing
Width Wall Thickness Insertion Point Width Inside Fillet R.

Tocreateasquaretubingobject: 1. ClicktheSquareTubingtoolfromtheDetailingtoolset. 2. Clicktoplacetheobjectinthedrawing,andclickagaintosettheobjectsrotation.Ifthisisthefirsttimetheobject isplacedinthedrawing,anobjectpropertiesdialogboxopens.Theseparametersapplytosubsequentlycreated objects;theycanbechangedlaterbyaccessingthemfromtheObjectInfopalette. 3. SpecifythesquaretubingpropertiesandclickOK.

Parameter
Series Size Length(Vectorworks DesignSeriesrequired) PlaceLocusatCentroid DrawCenterLines

Description
Selectthedesiredseriestodisplaytheappropriatenominalsizes Selectthesquaretubingsize Enterthelengthofthe3Dsquaretubing Selectwhethertodrawalocusatthecentroidofthe2Dsquaretubing Selectwhethertodrawthe2Dsquaretubingwithcenterlines

Structural Shapes and Details | Parameter


CustomSize Width WallThickness InsideFilletR. SectionProperties

503

Description
Selectthisoptiontoenablefieldsforspecifyingacustomsquaretubingsize Displaysthewidthofthetubing,orifCustomSizeisselected,allowsentryofacustom value Displaysthewallthicknessofthetubing,orifCustomSizeisselected,allowsentryofa customvalue Displaystheinsidefilletradiusvalueofthetubing,orifCustomSizeisselected,allows entryofacustomvalue Sectionpropertiesareautomaticallycalculatedanddisplayedbasedoninchunitsfor imperialshapesandmillimeterunitsformetricshapes(regardlessoftheunitsselected andShowUnitMarksettingintheUnitsdialogbox) Displaysthesquaretubingarea

Area AboutAxisXX/YY MomentofInertia SectionModulus RadiusofGyration

Displaysthemomentofinertiaaboutboththehorizontal(XX)andvertical(YY) centroidalaxes Displaysthesectionmodulusaboutboththehorizontal(XX)andvertical(YY) centroidalaxes Displaystheradiusofgyrationaboutboththehorizontal(XX)andvertical(YY) centroidalaxes

Tee
Flange Width Insertion Point Flange Width/4 Flange Thickness Flange Scope

Depth/2

Fillet Radius Web Thickness

Flange Radius

Depth

Toe Radius

Web Slope

504

| Chapter 12: Adding Building Elements


Tocreateateeobject:

1. ClicktheTeetoolfromtheDetailingtoolset. 2. Clicktoplacetheobjectinthedrawing,andclickagaintosettheobjectsrotation.Ifthisisthefirsttimetheobject isplacedinthedrawing,anobjectpropertiesdialogboxopens.Theseparametersapplytosubsequentlycreated objects;theycanbechangedlaterbyaccessingthemfromtheObjectInfopalette. 3. SpecifytheteepropertiesandclickOK.

Parameter
Series Size Length(Vectorworks DesignSeriesrequired) DrawCenterLine PlaceLocusatCentroid CustomSize Depth FlangeWidth WebThickness FlangeThickness WebSlope(Deg.) FlangeSlope(deg.) ToeRadius FlangeRadius FilletRadius SectionProperties

Description
Selectthedesiredseriestodisplaytheappropriatenominalsizes Selecttheteesize Enterthelengthofthe3Dtee Selectwhethertodrawthe2Dteewithcenterlines Selectwhethertodrawalocusatthecentroidofthe2Dtee Selectthisoptiontoenablefieldsforspecifyingacustomteesize Displaysthedepthbetweenendpoints,orifCustomSizeisselected,allowsentryofa customvalue Displaystheflangewidth,orifCustomSizeisselected,allowsentryofacustomvalue Displaysthewebthickness,orifCustomSizeisselected,allowsentryofacustomvalue Displaystheflangethickness,orifCustomSizeisselected,allowsentryofacustom value Displaysthewebslopeindegrees,orifCustomSizeisselected,allowsentryofacustom value Displaystheflangeslopeindegrees,orifCustomSizeisselected,allowsentryofa customvalue Displaysthetoeradiusvalue,orifCustomSizeisselected,allowsentryofacustom value Displaystheflangeradiusvalue,orifCustomSizeisselected,allowsentryofacustom value Displaysthefilletradiusvalue,orifCustomSizeisselected,allowsentryofacustom value Sectionpropertiesareautomaticallycalculatedanddisplayedbasedoninchunitsfor imperialshapesandmillimeterunitsformetricshapes(regardlessoftheunitsselected andShowUnitMarksettingintheUnitsdialogbox) Displaystheteearea

Area AboutAxisXX/YY MomentofInertia

Displaysthemomentofinertiaaboutboththehorizontal(XX)andvertical(YY) centroidalaxes

Structural Shapes and Details | Parameter


SectionModulus RadiusofGyration

505

Description
Displaysthesectionmodulusaboutboththehorizontal(XX)andvertical(YY) centroidalaxes Displaystheradiusofgyrationaboutboththehorizontal(XX)andvertical(YY) centroidalaxes

Wide Flange
Flange Width (Top) Insertion Point Flange Thickness Fillet Radius

Depth

Free Height

Web Thickness

Flange Thickness Flange Width (Bottom)

Tocreateawideflangeobject: 1. ClicktheWideFlangetoolfromtheDetailingtoolset. 2. Clicktoplacetheobjectinthedrawing,andclickagaintosettheobjectsrotation.Ifthisisthefirsttimetheobject isplacedinthedrawing,anobjectpropertiesdialogboxopens.Theseparametersapplytosubsequentlycreated objects;theycanbechangedlaterbyaccessingthemfromtheObjectInfopalette. 3. SpecifythewideflangepropertiesandclickOK.

Parameter
Series Size Length(Vectorworks DesignSeriesrequired) DrawCenterLine DrawFreeHeightLines PlaceLocusatCentroid CustomSize

Description
Selectthedesiredseriestodisplaytheappropriatenominalsizes Selectthewideflangesize Enterthelengthofthe3Dwideflange Selectwhethertodrawthe2Dwideflangewithcenterlines Selectwhethertodrawthe2Dwideflangewithfreeheightlines Selectwhethertodrawalocusatthecentroidofthe2Dwideflange Selectthisoptiontoenablefieldsforspecifyingacustomwideflangesize

506

| Chapter 12: Adding Building Elements


Description
Displaysthedepthbetweenendpoints,orifCustomSizeisselected,allowsentryofa customvalue Displaysthetopandbottomflangewidthofthewideflange,orifCustomSizeis selected,allowsentryofacustomvalue Displaysthewebthickness,orifCustomSizeisselected,allowsentryofacustom value Displaystheflangethickness,orifCustomSizeisselected,allowsentryofacustom value Displaysthefilletradiusvalue,orifCustomSizeisselected,allowsentryofacustom value Sectionpropertiesareautomaticallycalculatedanddisplayedbasedoninchunitsfor imperialshapesandmillimeterunitsformetricshapes(regardlessoftheunitsselected andShowUnitMarksettingintheUnitsdialogbox) Displaysthewideflangearea

Parameter
Depth FlangeWidth(Top)/ (Bottom) WebThickness FlangeThickness FilletRadius SectionProperties

Area AboutAxisXX/YY MomentofInertia SectionModulus RadiusofGyration

Displaysthemomentofinertiaaboutboththehorizontal(XX)andvertical(YY) centroidalaxes Displaysthesectionmodulusaboutboththehorizontal(XX)andvertical(YY) centroidalaxes Displaystheradiusofgyrationaboutboththehorizontal(XX)andvertical(YY) centroidalaxes

Shaft Break
ToinsertaShaftBreakobject: 1. ClicktheShaftBreakobjectfromtheDetailingtoolset. 2. Clicktodefinethestartpoint,clickagaintodefinetheendpointandrotation,anddragthecursorandclicktoset thewidth.

Shaft Diameter

Wall Thickness

Width of Break

Structural Shapes and Details | Parameter


ShaftDiameter WidthofBreak Configuration

507

Description
Specifythediameteroftheshaftbreakobject Specifythewidthoftheshaftbreakobject SelectSolidorHollow

Solid

Hollow

WallThickness

Forhollowshaftbreakconfigurations,indicatethethicknessoftheshaftwall

Slot
AllworkspacescontaintheSlotobject. Toinsertaslot: 1. ClicktheSlotlinearobjectfromtheDetailingtoolset. 2. Clicktodefinethestartpointoftheslot,clickagaintodefinetheendpointandrotation,anddragthecursorand clicktosettheslotwidth.

Parameter
Width Length ShowCenterLine

Description
Specifythewidthoftheslotobject Specifythewidthoftheslotobject Whenselected,drawstheslotwithcenterline(s)

Batt Insulation
TheBattInsulationtooldrawsaplanarinsulationfillalongaline.Thistoolisusefulforcreatingcustomdetails.The insulationcanbeplacedwithinawall,whereitautomaticallyadjuststothelengthofthewall. Abettermethodofcreatinginsulationfills,especiallyforwalls,istouseatilefill,whichscalesandrotateswithin wallsandslabandwallcomponents.SeeDefiningTilesonpage 548.

508

| Chapter 12: Adding Building Elements


Tocreatebattinsulation:

1. ClicktheBattInsulationtoolfromtheDetailingtoolset. 2. Clicktomarkthebeginningoftheinsulationfillandthenclickagaintomarktheendoftheobject.Ifthisisthe firsttimethetoolisusedinthissession,thePropertiesdialogboxopens.Specifythepreferencestouseforthis toolduringthissession,andthenclickOK.TheparameterscanbechangedlaterintheObjectInfopalette. 3. Thecreatedbattinsulationcanbedraggedintoanexistingwall.


Click

Click Set Position for a Batt Insulation in Wall object, to fit the insulation to the wall; Size to Wall Length must be enabled

Parameter
Insert Break Height Flip SetPosition

Description
Wheninsertedinwalls,alignstheinsertionpointofthebattinsulationwiththe containingwallscenterlineorleftorrightedge Wheninsertedinwalls,selectthetypeofwallbreakforthebattinsulation Wheninsertedinwalls,setstheheightoftheinsulationfromthebottomofthewall Wheninsertedinwalls,flipstheorientationofthebattinsulation WheninsertedinwallsandwithSizetoWallLengthselected,setstheinsulationtofit alongthelengthofthewall.TheMoveByPointstoolisactivatedautomatically;if SizetoWallLengthisdeselected,settheoffsetofthebattinsulationalongthewallas describedinMovingSymbolsinWallswiththeReferencePointModeonpage 516. Specifiesthelengthofthebattinsulation,whenSizetoWallLengthisdeselected Setsthewidthofthebattinsulation Setstheoffsetofthebattinsulationfromitsinsertionpoint Setsthethicknessoftheinsulationfolds Wheninsertedinwalls,automaticallysetsthelengthofthebattinsulationtomatch thewalllength Specifiesanoffsetfromthestartorendofthewall,whenthebattinsulationissizedto fitthewalllength Appliesasolidfilltothebackgroundofthebattinsulation;setthefillcolorfromthe Attributespalette

Length Thickness Offset Folds/UnitThk. SizetoWallLength AddtoStart/End SolidFill

Inserting and Editing Symbols Within a Wall |

509

Inserting and Editing Symbols Within a Wall


Oncethewallshavebeencreated,symbolsandpluginobjectssuchaswindowsanddoorscanbeaddedtothem. Aftertheyareinthewall,thesymbolsmaybemovedorduplicated.Whena3Dwallholecomponenthasbeenadded toasymbol,itcancutaholeofthedesiredshapeinawall. Forgeneralinformationaboutsymbols,seethefollowing: CreatingNewSymbolsonpage 175describeshowtosetsymbolinsertionoptions. EditingSymbolsonpage 183describeshowtochangesymbolproperties. InsertingSymbolsonpage 178describeshowtoinsertsinglesymbolsusingtheSymbolInsertiontoolandthe draganddropmethod. Inaddition,varioustoolsandcommandshavespecializedbehaviortoinsert,move,andeditsymbolsinbothstraight androundwalls.Seethefollowing: InsertingSymbolswiththeDuplicateSymbolinWallToolonpage 509 InsertingSymbolsinaDuplicateArrayonpage 511 DraggingandDroppingSymbolsintoWallsonpage 512 MovingSymbolsinWallswiththeSelectionToolonpage 512 NudgingSymbolsinWallsonpage 513 MovingSymbolsinWallswiththeMoveCommandonpage 513 MovingSymbolsinWallswiththeMovebyPointsToolonpage 514 EditingSymbolsinWallsonpage 517 Addinga3DWallHoleComponenttoaSymbolDefinitiononpage 518

Inserting Symbols with the Duplicate Symbol in Wall Tool


UsetheDuplicateSymbolinWalltooltoeasilyplacemultiplecopiesofasymbol(orpluginobject)inawall,suchas doorsorwindowsinanofficebuildingorelectricaloutletsalongawall. SymbolscanalsobeduplicatedwithinwallswiththeDuplicateArraycommand(seeInsertingSymbolsina DuplicateArrayonpage 511)andwiththeMovebyPointstool(seeMovingSymbolsinWallswiththeMove byPointsToolonpage 514). TheDuplicateSymbolinWalltoolhastwomodes.
Default Insertion

Flipped Insertion

Wall Preferences

Mode
FlippedInsertion DefaultInsertion WallPreferences

Description
Flipsthesymbolduringplacement(forexample,changesthedirectionthatadooropens) Placesthesymbolusingtheorientationatcreation Specifiessymbolplacementinformation

Toplaceduplicatesymbolsinawall: 1. SelectWindow>Palettes>ResourceBrowser.

510

| Chapter 12: Adding Building Elements


TheResourceBrowseropens.

2. Clickthedesiredsymbolfromthelist. ThesymbolmusthavetheInsertinWallsoptionenabled(seeCreatingNewSymbolsonpage 175). 3. SelectMakeActivefromtheResourcesmenu. ActivateasymbolalreadyplacedinthedrawingwiththeSymbolPickUpmodeoftheSymbolInsertiontool (seeSymbolPickUpModeonpage 182). 4. ClicktheDuplicateSymbolinWalltoolfromtheWallstoolset. 5. SelecttheplacementmodefromtheToolbar. Thissetsthesymbolorientation.Toplacethesymbolusingtheorientationinwhichiswascreated,clickthe DefaultInsertionmodebutton.Toflipthesymbolwhenitisplaced,clicktheFlippedInsertionmodebutton. 6. ClickWallPreferencesfromtheToolbar. TheDuplicateSymbolInWalldialogboxopens.Indicatehowtoplacethesymbols.

Parameter
StartOffset

Description
Tosetthefirstsymbolpositionwiththemouse,selectNextClick;tosetthefirstsymbolpositionby aspecifieddistancefromawallend,selectthebuttonnexttothetextboxandenteradistancefrom thewallend Toplacesuccessivesymbolsbymouseclick,selectNextClick;toplacesuccessivesymbolsa specifieddistanceapart,selectthebuttonnexttothetextboxandenteradistancebetweensymbols Ifselected,enterthespecificnumberofsymbolcopiestoinsertintothewall

Spacing Copies 7. ClickOK.

8. Clickonthewalltoindicatewherethefirstsymbolshouldbeinserted.Apreviewofthesymbolsareshown alongthewalltoaidinplacement.Ifinsertingthefirstsymbolbyanoffsetvalue,clickanywhereonthewalland thefirstsymbolpreviewdisplaysattheproperoffsetdistance. 9. Ifspacingsymbolsbythenextmouseclick,movethemousealongthewalltosetthespacingbetweensymbols, andclickagaintoinserttheduplicatesymbols.Ifspacingsymbolsbyaspecifieddistance,clickagaintoinsert theduplicatesymbols.Ifanumberofcopieswasspecified,thatnumberofsymbolsisautomaticallyinserted.

Inserting and Editing Symbols Within a Wall |


Movethemousetotheoppositesideofthewalltoflipthesymboldirection.

511

Inserting Symbols in a Duplicate Array


UsetheDuplicateArraycommandtoplacemultiplecopiesofaselectedsymbolintostraightorroundwalls. SymbolscanalsobeduplicatedwithinwallswiththeDuplicateSymbolinWalltool(seeInsertingSymbols withtheDuplicateSymbolinWallToolonpage 509)andwiththeMovebyPointstool(seeMovingSymbols inWallswiththeMovebyPointsToolonpage 514). Tocreateaduplicatearrayofsymbolsinawall: 1. Selectthesymbolinthewallthatistobeduplicated.Theduplicateswillbeplacedalongthewallfollowingthe wallsbluedirectionarrow. 2. SelectEdit>DuplicateArray. TheDuplicateArraydialogboxopens.Thefieldsavailabledependonwhetherthewallthatcontainstheselected symbolisstraightorround.

Duplicate Array dialog box for straight walls

Duplicate Array dialog box for round walls

512

| Chapter 12: Adding Building Elements


Description
Thepreviewwindowshowsthedirectiontheduplicatesymbolswillbeplacedin thewall.Toreversethedirectionoftheduplication,clickthebuttontotheleftofthe window. Specifythenumberofcopiesoftheoriginalobjecttocreate Specifyhowfaraparttoplacetheduplicatesymbols.Forstraightwalls,enterthe distancefromthecenterofeachsymboltothecenterofthenextsymbolinthewall. Forroundwalls,specifyeitherthedistanceortheanglebetweentheduplicates. Distanceismeasuredalongtheouterarcoftheroundwall.Angleistheangle betweenthecenterofeachsymboltothecenterofthenextsymbolinthewall. Optionally,specifyadifferenceinheightonthewallbetweeneachsymbol

Parameter
Direction

NumberofDuplicates OffsetBetweenDuplicates

ZOffsetBetweenDuplicates

3. ClickOK,andthearrayofduplicatesymbolsisplacedintothewall.

Dragging and Dropping Symbols into Walls


Toinserta2D,3D,orhybridsymbolinawallbydraggingitfromtheResourceBrowser: 1. ClickthesymbolintheResourceBrowseranddragittothedesiredlocationinthewall. ThesymbolmusthavetheInsertinWallsoptionenabled(seeCreatingNewSymbolsonpage 175). Thesymbolcannotberotatedduringinsertion,sincetheSymbolInsertiontoolisnotautomaticallyactivated. Whenyoudropasymbolontoawallorroundwall,thesymbolisinsertedusingthedefaultflipvalue. 2. Ifnecessary,editthesymbolparametersintheObjectInfopalette.

Moving Symbols in Walls with the Selection Tool


TheSelectiontoolmovessymbols(orpluginobjects)withinwalls.Severalsymbolscanbeselectedandmovedat once.Whenmultiplesymbolsareselected,theircommonparameterscanbechangedintheObjectInfopalette. Symbolswithinwallsandsymbolsoutsideofwallscannotbeselectedatthesametime. Tomoveoneormoresymbolswithinawall: 1. ClicktheSelectiontoolfromtheBasicpalette. ToggleWallInsertionmodeonoroff,dependingonthedesiredresult.

Inserting and Editing Symbols Within a Wall | Action


Selectoneormoresymbolsinsertedina wall,withWallInsertionmodeon Selectoneormoresymbolsnotinserted inawall,withWallInsertionmodeon Selectoneormoresymbolsinsertedina wall,withWallInsertionmodeoff

513

Description
Insertedsymbolscanbedraggedoutofthewall(andintoanotherwallif desired). Selectedsymbolscanbeinsertedintoawallbydraggingthemoverthe wall. Thesymbolsaremovedwithinthewall.Whenoneoftheobjectsinthe selectionreachestheendofthewall,noneoftheobjectscanbemoved fartherinthatdirection.

2. Selectthesymbolorsymbols. 3. Positionthecursornearthesymboltobemoved.Whentheresizecursordisplays,dragthesymbol(s).
Click

Nudging Symbols in Walls


ObjectswithinasinglewallcanbenudgedasmalldistancewithakeyboardshortcutdefinedintheEdittabofthe VectorworksPreferences(seeEditPreferencesonpage 17). Tonudgeoneormoresymbolsinawall: 1. SelectoneormoresymbolswiththeSelectiontool;ifmultiplesymbolsareselected,theymustbeinthesame wall. 2. Usethekeyboardshortcutfornudgingobjectstomovethesymbolsasneeded.Whenoneoftheobjectsinthe selectionreachestheendofthewall,noneoftheobjectscanbemovedfartherinthatdirection.

Moving Symbols in Walls with the Move Command


SymbolswithinasinglewallcanbemovedwiththeMovecommand. Tomoveoneormoresymbolsinawall: 1. Selectthesymbol(s)tomovewitheithertheSelectiontool;ifmultiplesymbolsareselected,theymustbeinthe samewall. 2. SelectModify>Move>Move. TheMoveSelectiondialogboxopens.Thefieldsavailabledependonwhetherthewallthatcontainstheselected symbol(s)isstraightorround.

514

| Chapter 12: Adding Building Elements

Move Selection dialog box for straight walls

Move Selection dialog box for round walls

Parameter
Direction Offset

Description
Thepreviewwindowshowsthedirectionthesymbol(s)willbemovedinthewall.Toreverse thedirectionofthemove,clickthebuttontotheleftofthewindow. Forstraightwalls,specifythedistancealongthewalltomovetheobject(s).Forroundwalls, specifyeithertheDistanceortheAnglebetweentheoldandnewlocations.Thedistanceis measuredalongtheouterarcoftheroundwall.

3. ClickOK,andthesymbolsaremovedasspecified.

Moving Symbols in Walls with the Move by Points Tool


Symbolswithinasinglewallcanbemoved,duplicated,anddistributedalongaspecifieddistancewiththeMoveby Pointstool.Thetoolworksinboth2Dand3Dviews. SymbolscanalsobeduplicatedwithinwallswiththeDuplicateSymbolinWalltool(seeInsertingSymbols withtheDuplicateSymbolinWallToolonpage 509)andwiththeDuplicateArraycommand(seeInserting SymbolsinaDuplicateArrayonpage 511). TheMovebyPointstoolhasthefollowingmodes.
Distribute Object Retention Number of Duplicates Preference

Move

Reference Point

Preferences

Inserting and Editing Symbols Within a Wall | Mode


Move Distribute ReferencePoint ObjectRetention

515

Description
Movesandduplicatesselectedsymbolsaccordingtothedistanceanddirectionspecifiedby twomouseclicks Movesanddistributesduplicatesymbolsbetweenthepointsspecifiedbytwomouseclicks Movesselectedsymbolsaccordingtoaclickedreferencepointandaspecifiedoffsetdistance fromthatpoint;thePreferencessettingsarenotapplicablewhenthismodeisselected Keepstheoriginalsymbols;thisisthesameasselectingtheRetainoptioninthetool preferences

Moving Symbols in Walls with the Move or Distribute Mode


TheMoveandDistributemodesworkthesamewayforsymbolsinwallsastheydoforotherobjects,exceptthevector thatisspecifiedbyclickingisassumedtobealongthewall.(SeeMovingObjectswiththeMoveorDistributeMode onpage 265fordetails.) Tomove,duplicate,anddistributeselectedsymbolsinawall: 1. Selectthesymbol(s)inawalltomoveand/orduplicate;ifmultiplesymbolsareselected,theymustbeinthe samewall. 2. ClicktheMovebyPointstoolfromtheBasicpaletteandclickPreferencesfromtheToolbar. TheMovebyPointsSettingsdialogboxopens.SelectthedesiredsettingsandclickOK.

Parameter
NumberofDuplicates OriginalObject Retain LeaveSelected

Description
Specifiesthenumberofcopiesoftheoriginalobject(s)tocreate(mustbeatleastone); sameastheNumberofDuplicatesfieldontheToolbar

Keepstheoriginalsymbol(s);thisoptionperformsthesamefunctionasselectingthe ObjectRetentionbuttonontheToolbar Keepstheoriginalsymbol(s)selectedforfurtheraction

516

| Chapter 12: Adding Building Elements


Toselectadditionalsymbolsortochangethecurrentlyselectedsymboltomove,duplicate,ordistribute,press andholdtheAltkey(Windows)orCmdkey(Macintosh)whileshiftclickingadditionalobjectsorclickdragging themousearoundthemtomarqueeselectthem;theSelectiontoolisactivatedinboomerangmodewhiletheAlt orCmdisbeingpressed.

3. SelecteithertheMoveorDistributemode,dependingonthedesiredoutcome. 4. Clickoncetoindicatethevectorstartpoint,andclickagaintoindicatethevectorendpoint. Symbolsareduplicatedormovedwithinthewall,inthedirectionanddistancespecified.Ifthewallisnotlong enoughtoaccommodatethespecifiedduplicatesandspacing,thenumberofsymbolsandthedistancebetween themisadjustedautomatically.

Moving Symbols in Walls with the Reference Point Mode


ReferencePointmodecanworktwoways;thefirstclickcaneitherindicatetheobjecttobemovedorthereference pointfromwhichtheobjectwillbeoffset. Tomoveselectedsymbolsinawallusingareferencepoint: 1. Selectthesymbol(s)tomove;ifmultiplesymbolsareselected,theymustbeinthesamewall. 2. ClicktheMovebyPointstoolfromtheBasicpalette. Toselectadditionalsymbolsortochangethecurrentlyselectedsymboltomove,pressandholdtheAltkey (Windows)orCmdkey(Macintosh)whileshiftclickingadditionalobjectsorclickdraggingthemousearound themtomarqueeselectthem;theSelectiontoolisactivatedinboomerangmodewhiletheAltorCmdisbeing pressed. 3. SelecttheReferencePointmodefromtheToolbar. 4. Clicktoindicateeitherthereferencepoint,orapointontheselectedsymbol. TheEnterOffsetdialogboxopens,displayingthedistancebetweentheclickedpoints.Thefieldsavailable dependonwhetherthewallisstraightorround.

Enter Offset dialog box for straight walls

Enter Offset dialog box for round walls

5. Forroundwalls,selectwhethertooffsetthesymbolbyDistanceorbytheAnglealongthearcofthewall. 6. Changetheoffsetdistanceorangle.

Inserting and Editing Symbols Within a Wall |


7. Selectwhetherthefirstclickmadewasthereferencepointorapointonthesymboltobemoved. 8. ClickOK.Theselectedsymbolismovedalongthewallasspecified. 9. Thesettingforhowthefirstclickisinterpretedremainssetuntilitischanged.

517

Editing Symbols in Walls


Onceasymbolhasbeenplacedinawall,youcanflipthesymbolinthewall,repositionit,orcompletelyreplaceit. Symbolscanalsobedraggedcompletelyoutofthewall. Tochangehowasymbolinteractswithawall: 1. SelectWindow>Palettes>ObjectInfo. TheObjectInfopaletteopens. 2. SelectthedesiredsymbolorsymbolswiththeSelectiontool. TheObjectInfopalettedisplaysthesymbolsinformation.Ifseveralsymbolsareselected,onlythecommon informationcanbechanged. 3. Changethesymbolssettingsasnecessary.

Parameter
Insert Break Height Flip

Description
Changestheinsertionpointlocationinrelationtothesymbolposition Changesthewallbreakstylewherethesymbolisinserted Changestheheightofthesymbolinthewall Clicktoflipthroughaseriesoffourrotationsuntilthedesiredorientationisreached

SetPosition

ActivatestheMovebyPointstoolinReferencePointmode;seeMovingSymbolsinWallswiththe ReferencePointModeonpage 516

518

| Chapter 12: Adding Building Elements


Description
OpenstheChooseaSymboldialogboxtoallowselectionofareplacementsymbol;seeReplacing ExistingSymbolsonpage 184

Parameter
Replace

Adding a 3D Wall Hole Component to a Symbol Definition


Byaddinga3Dwallholecomponenttoasymboldefinition,thesymbolhastheabilitytocutholesofanyshapeina wall.Thegeometrydrawntodefinetheshapeofthe3Dholecanconsistofanysolidshapeorshapes.Ifawallhole componentisincludedinasymboldefinition,anyexisting3Dlociinthe3Dcomponentofthesymbolareignored. Toadda3Dwallholecomponenttoasymboldefinition: 1. Selectablacksymbolinstancefromthedrawing.Rightclick(Windows)orCtrlclick(Macintosh)onthesymbol, andselectEdit3DWallHoleComponentfromthecontextmenutoenterwallholecomponenteditingmode. ItisalsopossibletoselectthesymboltoeditfromtheResourceBrowser,andselectEditfromtheResources menu,andthenselect3DWallHoleComponentfromtheEditSymboldialogbox.However,editingthesymbol instancefromthedrawingallowsyoutoseethedrawingcontextwhenaddingthewallholecomponent. Acoloredborderaroundthedrawingwindowindicatesthatyouareinaneditingmode.TheExitWallHole ComponentcommandbecomesavailablefromtheModifymenu,andtheExitWallHoleComponentbuttonis visibleinthetoprightcornerofthedrawingwindow. 2. Anysolidshape(s)canbedrawntodefinetheholeshape.Thegeometrymustintersectthewall. Selectthe2DPolygontoolorPolylinetoolfromtheBasicpaletteandtracethesymboloutlinetodefinethehole shape.SelectModel>Extrudetocreatea3Dwallholeshape.Alternatively,create3Dwallholegeometrydirectly using3Dmodelingtools.Thewallholegeometryhasaredpenstyle;thiscanbechangedfromtheAttributes paletteifdesired. Otherdrawingobjectsdisplay,andcanbesnappedto,whileintheeditingmode(theVectorworksdisplay preferenceShowotherobjectswhileineditingmodesmustbeenabled).Thesymbolbeingeditedisdisplayed withitspenstyleattributes,todistinguishitfromtherestofdrawing. 3. ClickExitWallHoleComponenttoreturntothedesignlayer. Sincethewallholecomponentwasaddedtothesymboldefinition,allinstancesofthesymbolwillcutholesin wallsaccordingtothegeometrydrawn.

Inserting and Editing Symbols Within a Wall |

519

Right-click (Windows) or Ctrl-click (Macintosh) and select Edit 3D Wall Hole Component from the context menu to enter wall hole component editing mode

In the editing mode, draw the geometry to create the 3D wall hole, and extrude it to create the wall hole shape

The 3D geometry creates the hole of the desired shape in the wall

Applying Renderworks Textures to Wall Hole Components


SpecialtexturepartsforwallholecomponentscanbeappliedfromtheObjectInfopalette(Renderworksproduct required).SeeApplyingaTexturetoanObjectonpage 639.Whileeditingthewallholecomponent,theAssignPart listontheRendertaboftheObjectInfopaletteliststhreeoptionsforthedifferenttexturesthatcanbeappliedtowall holefaces:Holes,WallLeft,andWallRight.

Texture Part
Holes WallLeft WallRight

Result
AppliesthetexturespecifiedforthewallsHolesparttothewallfacescreatedbythecutting object AppliesthetexturespecifiedforthewallsLeftparttothewallfacescreatedbythecuttingobject AppliesthetexturespecifiedforthewallsRightparttothewallfacescreatedbythecutting object

Eachwallholecomponentcanonlyhaveonetexturepartdefined.Therefore,uptothreedifferentcuttingobjects wouldbenecessarytoapplythreedifferenttexturepartstothewallholefaces.

520

| Chapter 12: Adding Building Elements

Creating Columns
UsetheColumntooltoplaceacolumninthedrawing.
Capital

Shaft

Base

AdditionalcolumncapabilitiesareavailableintheVectorworksArchitectproduct(seeCreatingColumnsand PilastersinVectorworksArchitectonpage 136intheVectorworksDesignSeriesUsersGuide).

Tocreateabasiccolumn: 1. ClicktheColumntoolfromtheWallstoolset. TheColumntoolontheBuildingShelltoolsetcreatesabasiccolumnfortheVectorworksLandmarkand Spotlightproducts(VectorworksDesignSeriesrequired). 2. Clicktoplacethecolumninthedrawing,andclickagaintosetthecolumnsrotation.Ifthisisthefirsttimea columnisplacedinthedrawing,thecolumnobjectpropertiesdialogboxopens.Theseparametersapplyto subsequentlycreatedcolumns;theycanbechangedlaterbyaccessingthemfromtheObjectInfopalette. 3. Specifythecolumnproperties. Tocreateacircularorsquareshaft,capital,orbase,enterthesamevalueforthewidthanddepth.

Parameter
UseCenterMarks Height

Description
SelectthisoptiontosizethecrossatthecolumninsertionpointandentertheCenter MarkSize Directlysetsthedesiredheightofthecolumn,includingbaseandcapital(ifany).When thecolumnheightisdeterminedmanuallybythismethod,theTopBoundpropertyof thecolumnisautomaticallysettoLayerElevation,andtheTopOffsetvalueis modifiedaccordingly. Whenthetopofthecolumnisboundbythelayerwallheightvalue,thewallheight updatesautomatically.

Creating Columns | Parameter


TopBound

521

Description
Setstheverticalreferencethatdeterminesthetopofthecolumn. TheLayerWallHeightvalueissetbythedesignlayer(seeSettingDesignLayer Propertiesonpage 97) AdditionaloptionsareavailablefortheVectorworksArchitectproduct;seeCreating ColumnsandPilastersinVectorworksArchitectonpage 136intheVectorworks DesignSeriesUsersGuide.

TopOffset

Setstheoffsetofthetopofthecolumnfromitsspecifiedtopboundheight.Ifsettingthe boundaryofthetopofthecolumntothelayerelevation,enterthecolumnsheightfor theTopOffset;ifsettingtheheightofthetopofthecolumntothedefaultwallheight, specifyanyoffsetaboveorbelowthelayersdefaultwallheight. Setstheverticalreferencethatdeterminesthebottomofthecolumn;LayerElevationis theonlyoptionavailableunlesstheVectorworksArchitectproductisinstalled Forthebottomofthecolumn,setstheoffsetfromthelayerelevation Selecttodrawthecolumnwithanovalorrectangularshafttype Entertheshaftwidth Entertheshaftdepth Forrectangularshafttype,enterthecornerradiusoftheshaft Selectwhethertodrawthecolumnwithaclassicorstraighttaper,ornotaper Forastraightorclassictaper,enterthetaperwidth Forastraightorclassictaper,enterthetaperdepth Selectwhethertoaddacapitaltothecolumn Selecttodrawthecolumnwithanoval,ovalmushroom,rectangular,orrectangular mushroomcapital Enterthecapitalwidth Enterthecapitaldepth Enterthecapitalheight Forrectangularcapitaltype,enterthecornerradiusofthecapital Selectwhethertoaddabasetothecolumn Selectanovalorrectangularbasetype Enterthebasewidth Enterthebasedepth Enterthebaseheight Forrectangularbasetype,enterthebasecornerradius Enterthenumberofdivisionsforthebase Formorethanonebasedivision,enterthedepthandheightforeachdivider

BotBound BotOffset ShaftType ShaftWidth ShaftDepth ShaftCornerRadius ShaftTaper TaperWidth TaperDepth UseCapital CapitalType CapitalWidth CapitalDepth CapitalHeight CapitalCornerRadius UseBase BaseType BaseWidth BaseDepth BaseHeight BaseCornerRadius BaseDivisions DividerDepth/Height

522

| Chapter 12: Adding Building Elements


Description
ClicktoopentheGetFinishes/Classesdialogboxtoselecttheclasstousefor renderingthe3Dshaft,capital,andbaseofthecolumn Displaystheclasstouseforrenderingthe3Dshaft(selectedintheGetFinishes/Classes dialogbox) IfUseCapitalisselected,displaystheclasstouseforrenderingthe3Dcapital(selected intheGetFinishes/Classesdialogbox) IfUseBaseisselected,displaystheclasstouseforrenderingthe3Dbase(selectedin theGetFinishes/Classesdialogbox)

Parameter
GetFinishes/Classes ShaftFinish CapitalFinish BaseFinish

4. ClickOK. Acolumnwiththespecifiedparametersisplacedonthedrawing.Theobjectparameterscanbemodifiedinthe ObjectInfopalette.

Creating Simple Stairs


Asimplestairobjectisavailabletoaddabasicstairrepresentationtothedrawing.VectorworksDesignSeries productscontaintwoadditionalstairtoolswhenthedesignrequirescomplex,detailedstairs.SeeInsertingStairson page 217intheVectorworksDesignSeriesUsersGuide. Toinsertasimplestair: 1. ClicktheSimpleStairtoolfromtheWallstoolset. 2. Clicktoplacethesimplestairinthedrawing,andclickagaintosetthestairsrotation.Ifthisisthefirsttimea stairisplacedinthedrawing,thestairobjectpropertiesdialogboxopens.Theseparametersapplyto subsequentlycreatedstairs. ThestairparameterscanbeeditedfromtheObjectInfopalette.

Parameter
Style Width FlrFlrHeight MaxRiser TreadDepth/Height NosingDepth Config LandingTread Separation

Description
Selectthestairstyle:standard,indented,openriser,ormasonry Specifiesthewidthofthestaircase Specifiestheheightofthestaircasefromfloortofloor Indicatesthehorizontalmaximumthicknessoftheriser Setsthetreaddepth(fronttoback)andthetreadheight Specifiesthenosingdepth Selectthestairconfiguration:straight,straightwithalanding,leftandrightlandings, andleftandrightdoublebackstairswithlandings(evenandirregular) Indicateshowmanystepsoccurbeforethelanding(doesnotapplytoevendouble backstairs) Fordoublebackstylestairs,setstheseparationdistancebetweentheflights

Creating Simple Stairs | Parameter


Offset1/2 CurvedLanding StringerWidth/Offset DrawLowerStairBreak ShowData DrawTopTread Create3D Left/RightRail RailHeight/Width Arrows Step/Rail/StringerFinish

523

Description
Forstairswithlandings,indicatesthedistancetooffsetthelandingfromthestairson eachsideofthelanding Createscurvedlandings;theradiusmatchesthestairwidth Setsthestringerwidth(thickness)oneachsideofthestair,andspecifiesthedistance betweentheoutsideofthestairtreadtotheoutsideofthestringers Hidesaportionofthestairwithastairbreak,sothatthelowerportionofthestaircan bedisplayedin2D Selecttodisplaythenumberofrisersandriserheightalongwiththepathoftravel arrow;anUporDownarrowmustbeselectedinArrowsforstairdatatobedisplayed Specifywhetherthestairshouldincludeatreadatthesamelevelastheupperfloorit serves Createsa3DversionofthestairtodisplayinviewsotherthanTop/Plan Addshandrailstotheleftandrightofthestaircase Setstheheightandwidthfortherailing(s) Selectwhethertodisplaythepathoftravelarrow,andinwhichdirection SelecttheClasstoassigntothesteps,railing(s),andstringers

524

| Chapter 12: Adding Building Elements

Applying Object Attributes

13

Attributesarecharacteristicsthatcanbeappliedto2Dplanarandscreenobjectsinadrawing,includingfillstyle,pen style,opacity,linestyleandthickness,andlineendmarkers.Fillstylesincludesolidcolors,patterns(whichinclude foregroundandbackgroundcolors),hatches,tiles,gradients,andimages.Penstylesincludesolidcolors,patterns (whichincludeforegroundandbackgroundcolors),anddashes. Therearevariouswaystoapplyattributestoobjects: UsetheAttributespalettetoapplyattributestoaselectedobject. UsetheAttributespalettetosetdefaultattributesthatwillbeappliedasobjectsarecreated. UsetheEyedroppertooltotransferattributesfromoneobjecttoanother. Setupaclasstousecertainattributeswhenobjectsarecreatedinthatclassorwhentheclassisassignedtoan existingobject.

TheattributesavailableontheAttributespalettecanbecustomized.Fillandlinepatterns,linethickness,dashstyle, andlineendmarkerstyleattributescanallbeadjustedasneeded;toreusethecustomattributesinotherfiles,save themtoatemplatefile.Attributesthatareresources(hatches,tiles,gradients,andimages)areevenmoreflexible;they caneasilybecreated,edited,reusedinotherfiles,andsharedwithcoworkers.Inaddition,hatches,tiles,gradients, andimagescanbemappedtosuitaspecificobject.

The Attributes Palette


TheAttributespaletteappliesattributestoobjects,anddisplaystheattributescurrentlyappliedtoaselectedobject. SelectWindow>Palettes>AttributestoopentheAttributespalette.
Fill Style Pen Style Opacity Line Style Marker controls Utility menu (Vectorworks Design Series required)

Attributescanbeappliedtomost2Dplanarandscreenobjects,withafewexceptions.Lineendmarkerscanonlybe appliedtoopenobjects,suchaslines,arcs,andpolylines.Onlypencolorandopacitycanbeappliedtotext;however, afillcanbeappliedtothetextbox(thebackgroundbehindthetext). Ifyouareusingthesameattributesettingsforseveralobjects,createaclassforthoseobjectsandapplytheclass attributesatcreation.Classattributescanalsobesetforselectedobjects;seeSettingClassAttributesonpage 111. Mostoftheattributetypes(fill,pen,opacity,linestyle,andmarker)arespecifieddirectlyfromtheAttributespalette. Someofthesettingsavailableonthepalettecanbecustomized;fillandlinepatterns,linethickness,dashstyle,and lineendmarkerstylescanallbeadjustedasneeded. Hatch,tile,gradient,andimagefillsareresources;theycanbeselectedfromthedefaultcontentintheAttributes palette(seeDefaultContentinVectorworksFundamentalsandRenderworksonpage 157),oryoucancreateor importcustomresourcesandapplythemfromtheResourceBrowser. InVectorworksDesignSeriesproducts,theAttributespalettehasautilitymenuthatsetsdefaultandglobalattributes. SeeSettingGlobalandDefaultAttributesonpage 567intheVectorworksDesignSeriesUsersGuide.

526

| Chapter 13: Applying Object Attributes

Setting Default Attributes


Thedefaultattributesforadocumentaretheattributesthatareautomaticallyappliedtoeachnewobjectwhenitis created,unlessaclassattributeisassigned(seeSettingClassPropertiesonpage 108andTheAttributesPaletteon page 525formoreinformation).ThesearethesettingsthatdisplayontheAttributespalettewhennoobjectsare selected. Whenyoufirstopenanewdocument,setthedefaultattributestothoseyouusemostoften.Forexample,youmight adjustthefillandlinecolors,dashstyle,andlinethickness. Thedefaultattributesapplytothecurrentdocumentonly.Inaddition,customdashstylesandpatternsthatyoucreate cannotbeusedinotherdocuments.Tosaveasetofdefaultattributesorcustomdashstylesandpatternsforfuture use,settheattributesasdesiredandsavethedocumentasatemplate. Tosetthedefaultattributesforadocument: 1. Ensurethatnoobjectsareselected. 2. SelectWindow>Palettes>Attributes. TheAttributespaletteopens. 3. Selectthedesiredattributes.Objectscreatedafterthatpointusethoseattributesbydefault. ThedefaultscanalsobesetwiththeEyedroppertool(seeTransferringAttributesonpage 526).

Applying Attributes to Existing Objects


Toapplyattributestoexistingobjects: 1. Selecttheobjectorobjects. 2. SelectWindow>Palettes>Attributes. TheAttributespaletteopens. 3. Setthedesiredattributesfortheobject(s)fromtheAttributespalette. Theobjectsattributesareupdated.

Transferring Attributes
TheEyedroppertooltransfersattributesfromoneobjecttoanotherinasinglestep,includingfill,pen,line,text,wall, andotherattributes.
Apply Attributes Pick Up Attributes Eyedropper Tool Preferences Settings menu

Mode
ApplyAttributes PickUpAttributes EyedropperToolPreferences

Description
Transfersselectedattributestoanotherobject Selectsanobjectsattributes Setsthedefaultparameterstobeusedforthetool

Transferring Attributes | Mode


Settingsmenu

527

Description
Setsthegroupofparameterstobeusedforthetooleitherthecurrentlyactive settings,oraselectionfromthelistofsavedsettings

PresstheOption(Macintosh)orCtrl(Windows)keytoswitchbetweenthePickUpandApplymodes. Totransferobjectattributes: 1. ClicktheEyedroppertoolfromtheBasicpalette. 2. SelectEyedropperToolPreferencesfromtheToolbartospecifythesetofattributestotransfer.TheEyedropper Preferencesdialogboxopens. Alternatively,selectasetofsavedattributesfromtheSettingsmenuontheToolbar.

Parameter
SavedSettingsOptions Settings Save Manage

Description
Select<ActiveSettings>tousetheattributescurrentlyselectedinthedialogbox;tousea setofsavedattributes,selectthemfromthepulldownlist Opensadialogboxtonameandsavethecurrentlyselectedattributessothattheycan quicklybeselectedasaset OpenstheSavedSettingsdialogboxtorenameordeletesetsofsavedtoolattributes(see ManagingSavedSettingsonpage 529)

528

| Chapter 13: Applying Object Attributes


Description
Checkedbox:Allattributesinthegroupareselected;clicktodeselectallattributesin thegroup. Emptybox:Noattributesinthegroupareselected;clicktoselectallattributesinthe groupfortransfer. Boxdisplays (Windows)or (Macintosh):Oneormoreattributesinthegroup arenotselected;clicktoselectallattributesinthegroupfortransfer.

Parameter
All

FillAttributes PenAttributes LineAttributes TextAttributes

Transfersfills,includingforegroundandbackgroundcolors,styles(pattern,hatch,tile, gradient,orimagefill),andtextures Transferspenforegroundandbackgroundcolorsandstyles(patternordash) Transferslineweight(thickness),presenceofmarkers,andmarkerattributes Transferstextattributestoanothertextobject,dimension,orpluginobject,including font,size,fontstyle,alignmentandspacing.Alignmentandspacingaretransferredto textobjectsonly. Transferswallthicknessandcomponentsettingsforwallsandroundwalls;components definewallthickness,socomponentscannotbetransferredwithoutalsotransferringthe thicknessparameter Transfersviewportattributestoanotherviewport,includingclassandlayervisibility settingsandattributeoverrides.OtherPropertiesreferstotheremainingviewport optionssuchasview,rendermode,projection,andadvancedproperties.Viewport attributescanbetransferredbetweenfiles;class,layer,andotherresourcesspecifiedinan attributeoverrideareresolvedbythenameoftheclass,layer,orresource,respectively.

WallAttributes

ViewportAttributes

OtherAttributes Record PluginParameters Class IFCData (Vectorworks Architectrequired) PickUpSetsDefaults UseClassAttributes ObjectOpacity Transfersthedatabaserecordattributes Transferspluginparametersbetweenpluginobjects,includingobjectsinsertedinwalls Selectstheclassfortransfer(makesthetargetobjectthesameclassasthesourceobject) TransfersIFCdatatoanotherobject,whilepreservinguniqueIFCidentifiers.Iftheobject receivingthedatadoesnotyethaveauniqueidentifier,itisautomaticallycreated. ChangesthedefaultAttributespalettesettingstomatchthoseofthesourceobject;objects createdfromthenonusetheattributesofthesourceobject Transfersthebyclasssettingsofthesourceobject,providedthetargetobjectisinthe sameclassasthesourceobject Transfersanobjectsopacitysetting

3. SpecifytheattributestobeselectedandappliedbytheEyedroppertool,andclickOK. 4. ClickPickUpAttributesfromtheToolbar. Thecursorchangestoaneyedropper. 5. Clicktheobjectthatisthesourceoftheattributes. 6. ClickApplyAttributesfromtheToolbar.

Transferring Attributes |
Thecursorchangesfromaneyedroppertoapaintbucket. 7. Clickthetargetobjectfortheattributes. Theattributesaretransferredtotheobject.

529

Click source object for attributes

Click target object for attributes

The attributes are transferred

Totransferattributesbetweenfiles,thetargetobjects,classes,records,dashpatterns,textures,andother attributesmustalreadybepresentinthetargetfile.TheEyedroppertooldoesnotcreateobjectsorattributes.

Managing Saved Settings


IfyouhavesavedattributestousewiththeEyedroppertool,usetheManagebuttonontheEyedropperPreferences dialogboxtorenameordeletethesesavedsettingswhenneeded. TomanagesavedsettingsfortheEyedroppertool: 1. SelecttheEyedroppertoolfromtheBasictoolpalette,andthenselectEyedropperToolPreferencesontheTool bar.TheEyedropperPreferencesdialogboxopens. 2. ClickManage. TheSavedSettingsdialogboxopens.Selectthesetofsavedattributestochange.

Parameter
Rename

Description
Selectandenteranewnameforthesetofattributes.Iftheenterednameisalreadyassignedto anothersetofattributes,youarepromptedtoconfirmthatyouwanttoreplacetheexistingset withthesetbeingsaved. Selecttodeletethesetofattributes.Youarepromptedtoconfirmthatyouwanttodeletethe savedsettings.

Delete

3. ClickOKtoclosetheSavedSettingsdialogbox.ClickOKagaintoclosetheEyedropperPreferencesdialogbox.

530

| Chapter 13: Applying Object Attributes

Fill Attributes
Objectscanbefilledwithasolidcolor,pattern(withforegroundandbackgroundcolors),hatch,tile,gradient,or image.Alternatively,settheobjectfilltoNonetocreatetransparentobjectswithnofill. Hatch,tile,gradient,andimagefillscanbecustomizedtosuittheobjecttowhichtheyareapplied.TheAttributes palettedisplaysabuttonforeachofthesefillstoopenasettingsdialogboxforcustomizingthefill.Inaddition,you canusetheAttributeMappingtooltoeditthesize,position,andangleofanassociativehatch,tile,gradient,orimage fillthathasbeenappliedtoanobject(seeMappingFillswiththeAttributeMappingToolonpage 561).

Fill Style
None Solid Pattern

Description
Nofillisapplied Appliesasolidfilltotheselectedobject(s);clickthecolorboxtoselectthefillcolor.Tosetthecolorby class,selecttheColorbyClassoptionfromthecolorpalette. Appliesapatternfilltotheselectedobject(s);clickthepatternboxtoselectthedesiredpattern,and thenselecttheforegroundcolorandbackgroundcolorfromthecolorboxesnexttothepattern.Toset thepatterncolorsbyclass,selecttheColorbyClassoptionfromthecolorpalette. Tocreatecustompatternsforthisfile,seeCreatingCustomPatternsforFillandPenStyleson page 531.

Hatch

Appliesahatchfilltotheselectedobject(s).Selectthedesiredhatchfromeitherthedefaultcontentor thecurrentfilescontent(seeDefaultContentinVectorworksFundamentalsandRenderworkson page 157).Iftherearenohatchesdefinedinthedocumentanddefaultcontentisnotenabled,youare promptedtoaddadefaulthatchdefinition. Tocustomizethehatchfillfortheselectedobject(s),clicktheFillHatchSettingsbutton). Ifthefilloftheselectedobjecthasbeenedited,thefillnameishighlightedinblueand(local map)isappendedtothename. Formoreinformationabouthowtocreate,edit,andcustomizehatches,seeUsingHatchFillson page 541.

Tile

Appliesatilefilltotheselectedobject(s).Selectthedesiredtilefillfromeitherthedefaultcontentor thecurrentfilescontent(seeDefaultContentinVectorworksFundamentalsandRenderworkson page 157).Iftherearenotilesdefinedinthedocumentanddefaultcontentisnotenabled,youare promptedtoaddadefaulttiledefinition. Tocustomizethetilefillfortheselectedobject(s),clicktheFillTileSettingsbutton. Ifthefilloftheselectedobjecthasbeenedited,thefillnameishighlightedinblueand(local map)isappendedtothename. Formoreinformationabouthowtocreate,edit,andcustomizetiles,seeUsingTileFillson page 548.

Gradient

Appliesagradientfilltotheselectedobject(s).Selectthedesiredgradientfromeitherthedefault contentorthecurrentfilescontent(seeDefaultContentinVectorworksFundamentalsand Renderworksonpage 157).Iftherearenogradientsdefinedinthedocumentanddefaultcontentis notenabled,youarepromptedtoaddadefaultgradientdefinition. Tocustomizethegradientfillfortheselectedobject(s),clicktheFillGradientSettingsbutton. Formoreinformationabouthowtocreate,edit,andcustomizegradients,seeUsingGradientFills onpage 552.

Fill Attributes | Fill Style


Image

531

Description
Appliesanimagefilltotheselectedobject(s).Selectthedesiredimagefromeitherthedefaultcontent orthecurrentfilescontent(seeDefaultContentinVectorworksFundamentalsandRenderworks onpage 157).Iftherearenoimagesdefinedinthedocumentanddefaultcontentisnotenabled,you arepromptedtoimportanimagedefinition. Tocustomizetheimagefillfortheselectedobject(s),clicktheFillImageSettingsbutton. Formoreinformationabouthowtocreate,edit,andcustomizeimages,seeUsingImageFillson page 557.

ClassStyle

Theselectedobject(s)takesonthefillattributesetbytheobjectsclass. IfUseatCreationisenabledfortheobjectsclass,theobjectsfillstyleisautomaticallysetbythe class. IfUseatCreationisdisabledfortheclass,theobjectonlytakesontheclassstylewhentheClass Styleoptionisselected. SeeSettingClassAttributesonpage 111.

Creating Custom Patterns for Fill and Pen Styles


Thereare71patternsavailabletouseasafillorpenstyleintheAttributespalette.Youcancustomizepatterns36 through72foracertaindocument;patterns1through35cannotbeedited. Toreusethecustompatternsinotherdocuments,savethedocumentasatemplatefile.SeeCreatingTemplateson page 80formoreinformation. Tocustomizethepatternsavailableinthecurrentdocument: 1. SelectFile>DocumentSettings>Patterns. TheEditPatternsdialogboxopens.Patterns36through72canbeselectedfromthelist;selectapatternandedit itasdesired.

Parameter
Pattern Revert

Description
SelectapatterntoeditfromthePatternlist,andthenclickintheeditingboxonthelefttoaddand deletepixels;theeditsdisplayinthepreviewwindowtotherightoftheeditingbox Restoresthepatterntoitsoriginalsettings(youmustclickthisbeforeyouselectanotherpatternor clickOK)

532

| Chapter 13: Applying Object Attributes

2. Whenalleditsarecomplete,clickOKtosavethecustomizedpatterns.Theeditedpatternsareavailablefromthe FillPatternandPenPatternboxesontheAttributesdialogbox,forthecurrentdocumentonly.

Pen Attributes
Thepensettingforobjectoutlinesandtextincludessolid,dashed,orapatternlineofanythicknessandcolor.For moreinformationaboutusingcolorboxesintheAttributespalette,seeApplyingColorsonpage 566.

Pen Style
None Solid

Description
Nopenisapplied Appliesasolidpenstyletotheselectedobject(s);clickthecolorboxtoselectthepencolor.Tosetthe colorbyclass,selecttheColorbyClassoptionfromthecolorpalette. SelectthelinethicknessforthepenfromtheLineStylelist.Tocreatecustomlinethicknessesforthis file,seeCreatingCustomThicknessesforLineStylesonpage 534.

Pattern

Appliesapatternedpenstyletotheselectedobject(s);clickthefillpatternboxtoselectthedesired pattern,andthenselecttheforegroundcolorandbackgroundcolorfromthecolorboxesnexttothe pattern.Tosetthepatterncolorsbyclass,selecttheColorbyClassoptionfromthecolorpalette. Tocreatecustompatternsforthisfile,seeCreatingCustomPatternsforFillandPenStyleson page 531.

Dash

Appliesadashedpenstyletotheselectedobject(s);clickthecolorboxtoselectthepencolor.Toset thecolorbyclass,selecttheColorbyClassoptionfromthecolorpalette.Selectthedesireddash styleandlinethicknessfromtheLineStylelist. Tocreatecustomdashstylesforthisfile,seeCreatingCustomDashStylesonpage 535.

ClassStyle

Theobject(s)takesonthepenattributesetbytheobjectsclass. IfUseatCreationisenabledfortheobjectsclass,theobjectspenstyleisautomaticallysetbythe class. IfUseatCreationisdisabledfortheclass,theobjectonlytakesontheclassstylewhentheClass Styleoptionisselected. SeeSettingClassAttributesonpage 111.

Opacity Attributes
InadditiontotheoveralllayeropacitysettingsdescribedinSettingtheDesignLayerOpacityonpage 100,an opacitysettingisavailableforindividualobjects.Opacitycanbeappliedtoanytypeof2Dobject,includingplanar objects,2Dwalls,text,worksheetbackgrounds,andpluginobjectsthatincludea2Dobject. Iflayeropacityissetinadditiontoobjectopacity,theresultsareadditive;forexample,alayeropacityof50%and anobjectopacityof50%willdisplaytheobjectat25%opacity.Similarly,theopacitysettingsofnestedand containerobjectsarecombined. TheQuartz(Macintosh)orGDI+(Windows)imagingVectorworkspreferencemustbeenabledtoapplyanddisplay theopacityattribute.SeeDisplayPreferencesonpage 19. FromtheAttributespalette,clicktheOpacitybuttontoopentheSetOpacitydialogbox.

Line Style Attributes |

533

DragtheOpacityslidertothelefttoincreasethetransparency,orenteranopacitypercentage(0100)intheboxtothe rightoftheslider.ClickSetOpacitytomakethesetting. SelectUseClassOpacitytousetheopacityvaluesetbytheobjectsclass. IfUseatCreationisenabledfortheobjectsclass,theobjectsopacityisautomaticallysetbytheclass. IfUseatCreationisdisabledfortheclass,theobjectonlytakesontheclassstylewhentheUseClassOpacity optionisselected. SeeSettingClassAttributesonpage 111.Classopacitycanbeoverriddeninviewports. Theopacitysettingappliesto2Dobjectsonly.Forasimilareffectin3D,atransparencyshadercanbeappliedwiththe Renderworksproduct(seeCreatingTexturesonpage 609).

Line Style Attributes


Linestyleattributesincludelinethicknessanddashstyleparameters,andapplytothepenstyleofanobject.Apply linethicknessattributesto2Dand3Dobjects;applydashstylesto2Dobjectsandwallsin2Dviews. FromtheAttributespalette,selectthelinethicknessanddashstylefromtheLineStylelist.Whenadashedlinestyleis selected,thePenattributeautomaticallychangestoDash. Toadd,remove,edit,orchangethedisplayorderoftheavailabledashstyles,selectEditDashStylesfromtheLine Stylelist.Alternatively,selectFile>DocumentSettings>DashStyles.SeeCreatingCustomDashStyleson page 535. Toadd,remove,oredittheavailablelinethicknessvalues,selectTools>Options>LineThickness.SeeCreating CustomThicknessesforLineStylesonpage 534formoreinformation.Totemporarilyadjustthecurrentline thicknesssetting,clickSetThicknessfromtheLineStylelist.TheSetThicknessdialogboxopens;selecttheThickness Units,entertheThicknessValue,andclickOK. SelectClassThicknesstousethelinestyleattributessetbytheobjectsclass(seeSettingClassAttributeson page 111). IfUseatCreationisenabledfortheobjectsclass,theobjectslinestyleisautomaticallysetbytheclass. IfUseatCreationisdisabledfortheclass,theobjectonlytakesontheclassstylewhentheClassThickness optionisselected.

534

| Chapter 13: Applying Object Attributes


Click to temporarily set the current line thickness

Click to apply a line style according to the objects class

Select a line thickness

Click to edit the available dash styles

Select a dash style

Creating Custom Thicknesses for Line Styles


YoucancustomizethesetoflinethicknessesavailablefromtheLineStylemenuontheAttributespalette.Theedited thicknessesaresavedwithyouruserpreferences,sotheyareavailablefromoneVectorworkssessiontothenext. TocreatecustomlinethicknessesfortheAttributespalette: 1. SelectTools>Options>LineThickness. ThePreferredLineThicknessdialogboxopens.Selectthepreferredlinethicknesscriteria.

Line Style Attributes |

535

Parameter
Units New

Description
SelecttheUnitstobeusedforthethicknessoftheeditedline Enterthenewthicknessvaluetoreplacethecurrentthicknessvaluelistedtoitsleft

2. Whenalleditsarecomplete,clickOKtosavethecustomizedsetoflinethicknesses.

Creating Custom Dash Styles


TheDashStylesdialogboxspecifieswhichdashstylesareavailableandcontrolstheorderinwhichtheydisplayfor selectioninvariousdialogboxes.Thereare14defaultdashstylesbasedonISOstandards.Foreachfile,upto114 customstylescanbeaddedtothedefaultstyles,foratotalof128styles. Toreusethecustomdashstylesinotherdocuments,savethedocumentasatemplatefile.SeeCreatingTemplateson page 80formoreinformation. Tocustomizethedashstylesinthecurrentdocument: 1. SelectFile>DocumentSettings>DashStyles.TheDashStyledialogboxopens. Alternatively,fromtheAttributespalette,clicktheLineStylesettingtoopentheLineStylelist.Fromthelist, selectEditDashStyles.

536

| Chapter 13: Applying Object Attributes

Parameter
#

Description
Indicatesthedashstyledisplayorderinthevariousdialogboxeswherethestyles display. Tochangethedashstyleorder:Ifthelistisnotcurrentlysortedbythe#column,click the#columnheadingtoselectit.Thenclickthe#columnofthestyle(s)tobemoved, anddragitupordownthelist.Ahorizontallineindicateswherethestyle(s)willbe insertedinthecurrentorder.

Name DashStyle New Edit Delete

Displaysthenameofthedashstyle Displaysagraphicalrepresentationofthedashstyle OpenstheEditDashStyledialogbox,tocreateanewdashstylebasedonthecurrently selectedstyle.Onceatthe128stylelimit,thisbuttonisdisabled. OpenstheEditDashStyledialogbox,toeditthecurrentlyselecteddashstyle Deletesthecurrentlyselecteddashstyle;ifthedeleteddashstylehasbeenappliedto objects,theMapDashStyledialogboxopenstoselectthereplacementdashstyle

2. Tocreateanewdashstyle,clickNew;toeditthecurrentlyselectedstyle,clickEdit. TheEditDashStyledialogboxopens.Tosetthedashstyle,eitherdragtheleversofthehighlightedsectionon thegraph,orhighlightthedesiredsectionwiththearrowbuttonsandspecifyLineLengthandGapLength values.

Line Style Attributes |

537

Parameter
Name Dashgraph

Description
Enterauniquenameforthedashstyle Leversindicatethedistance(inpageinchesorpagemillimeters)betweendashsections; asectionconsistsofalineandagap.Draganewleverfromtherightedgeofthedash graphtoaddadashsection,ordragalevertotherighttodeleteasection.Uptoten leverscandefineadashstyle. Definethesectionvisuallybydraggingtheleversofthehighlightedsectionuntilthe lineandgapareatthedesireddistance.Thedistancebetweenthefirsttwohighlighted leversindicatesthelinelength,andthedistancebetweenthelasttwohighlightedlevers indicatesthegaplength.

<<or>> LineLength GapLength Scalewithlinethickness

Selectsahighlightedsectionforediting;alternatively,clickonthesectiontohighlight Specifiesthelengthoftheline,inpageunits,forthehighlighteddashsection Specifiesthelengthofthegap,inpageunits,forthehighlighteddashsection Maintainstheproportionbetweenthedashstyleandthelinethickness

The2Dlinedashpatternisautomaticallyadjustedtopreventspacesateitherendoftheline.

3. ClickOKtoreturntotheDashStylesdialogbox. 4. ClickOKtosetthedefaultdashstylesanddisplayorderforthefile. WhenyouexportafiletoasoftwareversionpriortoVectorworks2010,thelistofdashstylesistruncatedtothe numbersupportedbythetargetversion.Whenthetruncatedlistiscreated,unuseddashstyleswillberemovedbefore thosethatareinuse.Dashstylenamesarelostduringtheexport.

538

| Chapter 13: Applying Object Attributes

Marker Attributes
Youcanapplylinestartandlineendmarkerstoopenobjects,includinglines,arcs,polylines,2Dpolygons,and freehandlines.Youcanalsoapplylineendmarkerstotheleaderlinesoncalloutanddimensionobjects.Dimensions haveotherdefaultmarkersassignedaspartofthedimensionstandardsetup,butthesecannotbeappliedorremoved throughtheAttributespalette. IntheAttributespalette,clicktheLineStartMarkerTogglebutton,theLineEndMarkerTogglebutton,orboth buttonstospecifytheend(s)toreceivethedisplayedmarker.Whenamarkerisappliedtoanobject,thetogglebutton ishighlighted.Toalwaysusethesamestyleforbothendsoftheobject,alsoclicktheMarkerLinkTogglebutton; wheneverthemarkerstyleofoneendischanged,theotherendsmarkerstyleautomaticallychangestomatch. Toswitchtoadifferentmarkerstyle,clickLineStartpointStyleorLineEndpointStyle.Selectamarkerstylefromthe list,orclickEditMarkerListtocreateanewstyle.SeeEditingtheMarkerListonpage 539formoreinformation. SelectClassStyletousethemarkerattributessetbytheobjectsclass. IfUseatCreationisenabledfortheobjectsclass,theobjectsmarkerstyleisautomaticallysetbytheclass. IfUseatCreationisdisabledfortheclass,theobjectonlytakesontheclassstylewhentheClassStyleoptionis selected. SeeSettingClassAttributesonpage 111.

A check mark indicates the active marker style Click to select the marker style for the objects startpoint (left button) and endpoint (right button)

Each marker type displays its style, length, width, angle, and thickness settings

Click to apply the active marker style to the objects startpoint (left button) and endpoint (right button) Click to link the startpoint and endpoint styles

Marker Attributes |

539

Editing the Marker List


YoucancustomizethesetofmarkersavailablefromtheLineStartpointStyleandLineEndpointStylesettingsonthe Attributespalette.Theeditedmarkersaresavedwithyouruserpreferences,sotheyareavailablefromone Vectorworkssessiontothenext. Toeditthemarkerlist: 1. SelectTools>Options>EditMarkerList. TheEditMarkerListdialogboxopens.

Parameter
CurrentMarker Types New Edit Delete

Description
Liststhemarkertypesthatareavailableforselectionwhendrawing;changethelistorderby clickinganddragginginthe#column Createsanewmarkertype;seeCreatingorEditingMarkerTypesonpage 539 Editsthecurrentlyselectedmarkertype;seeCreatingorEditingMarkerTypesonpage 539 Deletesthecurrentlyselectedmarker

2. ClickOKtosavethelistofavailablemarkertypes.

Creating or Editing Marker Types


Tocreateoreditmarkertypes: 1. FromtheEditMarkerListdialogbox,clickNewtocreateanewmarkertype,orclickEdittochangethe currentlyselectedmarkertype. TheEditMarkerdialogboxopens.

540

| Chapter 13: Applying Object Attributes

Parameter
Preview GeneralOptions RootType Fill Base Angle Length Width HalfTick Tail ThicknessOptions UseLineThickness UseDimensionSlash Thickness UseCustom Thickness

Description
Displaysapreviewofthemarkersappearance Specifiesthemarkersshapeandstyle Specifiesthegeneralshapeofthemarker Forclosedroottypes,specifiesthetypeoffill Fortriangularroottypes,specifiestheshapeofthebase Fortriangularandhexagonalroottypes,indicatestheangleoftheroot Indicatesthelengthofthemarker,frombasetotip Specifiesthemarkerwidth,formarkertypesthathaveawidth Formarkertypesexceptconeandlasso,displayshalfthemarkerontheindicatedside Formarkerswhichcanbereversed,flipsthemarkerdirectiontocreateatailmarker Specifiesthemarkerpenthickness Usesthesamethicknessasthatoftheassociatedline,adjustingautomaticallyalong withanylinethicknesschanges Usesthesamethicknessasthedimensionslash,setontheDimensionstabofthe documentpreferences(seeDimensionPreferencesonpage 30) Specifiesacustommarkerthicknessandunit(mils,points,ormillimeters)

Using Hatch Fills |


2. ClickOKtocreateoreditthemarker. Thenewmarkerislistedatthetopofthemarkertypeslist.

541

Using Hatch Fills


Hatchescanbeappliedto2Dplanarandscreenobjectsandwalls(wallhatchesareonlyvisibleinTop/Planview). Therearetwotypesofhatches:associativeandnonassociative.Theappearanceofbothtypesofhatchesare determinedbyhatchpatterndefinitions.

Associative Hatches
Associativehatchfillsareresources;theycanbeselectedfromthedefaultcontentintheAttributespalette(see DefaultContentinVectorworksFundamentalsandRenderworksonpage 157),oryoucancreateorimportcustom resourcesandapplythemfromtheResourceBrowser(seeAccessingExistingResourcesonpage 164). Therearetwowaystocustomizethehatchtosuittheobjecttowhichitisapplied;useeithertheFillHatchSettings buttonintheAttributespalette,orusetheAttributeMappingtooltomove,rotate,orscalethehatch(seeMapping HatchandTileFillsonpage 561). Associativehatchescanbespecifiedasadefaultclassattribute(seeSettingClassPropertiesonpage 108).

Non-associative Hatches
NonassociativehatchesareplacedonobjectsorareasofthedrawingwiththeHatchcommand.Theyobtainmostof theirattributesfromhatchpatterndefinitions,buttheydonotusethecolordefinitionsforthelinesthatmakeupthe hatch.Nonassociativehatchesobtainthecolordefinitionsfromthecurrentdefaultattributes.Theydonotuseany backgrounddefinitions,andthereforehavenobackgroundcolor.Anonassociativehatchissimilartoascreenthat displaysoverotherobjects;thespacesbetweenthelinesareempty,anddisplayportionsofanyobjectsbehindthe hatch. Nonassociativehatchesareplacedinsideanareathatisdefinedbyselectedobjectsorlines.Thestartpointofthe hatchissetwiththeHatchcommand.Unlikeassociativehatches,nonassociativehatchescanbemovedtoanother areaorobject.However,unlessthenewareaisthesameshapeandsizeasthepreviousone,thepatternwillnotfit. Nonassociativehatchesaregroupsthatarenotassociatedwithanobject.Theydonotrotatewiththeobjectoractlike afill.TheycanbebrokendownintotheirindividualelementswiththeUngroupcommand.Foranonassociative hatchtobecomepartofanobject,itmustbegroupedwiththeobject.

Defining Hatches
Bothassociativeandnonassociativehatchesmustbedefined.Ahatchdefinitionisarepetitionoftheelementsina seriesoflinesinalldirectionsfromthebeginningpoint.Specifywherethehatchlinebegins(theStartPoint),whereit stops(theDashFactor),whereitbeginstorepeat(theRepeat),andthedistanceseparatingthelinefromaneighboring line(theOffset);thepatternisrepeatedinalldirections. Ahatchcanconsistofseverallevels,orlayers,ofpatterndefinitions.Eachleveliseditedindividuallytocreatethe overallhatch.(Hatchlayersarenamedhatchlevelsinordertodistinguishthemfromthelayersinthedrawingarea.) Anewhatchcanbecreatedbyeditinganexistinghatch;seeEditingHatchDefinitionsonpage 547. Tocreateanewhatchpatterndefinition: 1. OpentheResourceBrowserbyselectingWindow>Palettes>ResourceBrowser.

542

| Chapter 13: Applying Object Attributes

2. FromtheResourcesmenu,selectNewResourcetodisplaytheNewResourcemenu. 3. SelectHatch. TheEditHatchdialogboxopens.

Parameter
Name Active

Description
Enteranameforthehatch;thisnameidentifiesthehatchintheResourceBrowserandinthe SelectHatchdialogbox(Modify>Hatch) Selecttheactivehatchlevelfromthelist.Alevelcanalsobeselectedbyclickingononeofits patternlines,orbyusingthekeyboardrightandleftarrowkeys.Levelsarenumberedinthe orderofcreation. Switchesbetweenthepointerandpanfunctions.Thepointeradjuststhefourcontrolhandles inthehatchwindow.Thepanmovestheelementsofthehatcharoundthepreviewwindow. Zoomsinandoutbyafactoroftwo.Thecenteroftheviewremainsatitscurrentcoordinates. Thecurrentzoomratioisalsodisplayed.Theinitialzoomsettingwhenthedialogboxopens correspondstothebestsettingforeditingLevel1. SelectwhethertoviewAllLevelsoronlytheActiveLevel;clickCentertocenterthestartpoint oftheactivelevel SwitchesbetweenPageandWorldsettingsforthehatch.Pageisabsoluteinscreencoordinates, whereoneinchinthehatchequalsoneinchonthescreen(at100%zoom).Worldsetsthehatch tousetheunitvaluesforthelayerwherethehatchwillbeplaced;forexample,oneinchinthe hatchequalsoneinchinthedrawingareaasdefinedbytherulers(thismaynotequaloneinch onthescreendependingontheunitsetting).WhenswitchingbetweenPageandWorld,the hatchsettingsareadjustedforalllevelstopreservethehatchappearance.

Cursor Zoom

View Units

Using Hatch Fills | Parameter


Rotate SnapRadius SketchStyle BackgroundFill StartPoint

543

Description
Selectwhethertorotatethehatchtomatchtheorientationofanysymbolsorwallswhereitwill beplaced Setthesnapradiusforsnappingtotheendpointsandmidpointsofpatternlineswhen movingalinebydragging ForVectorworksDesignSeriesproducts,specifiesahatchsketchstyle;seeApplyingSketch StylestoHatchesonpage 647intheVectorworksDesignSeriesUsersGuide Selecttouseabackgroundcolorandclickthecolorboxtoselectacolor;backgroundcolor appliesonlytoassociativehatches Controlsthelocationofthestartofthefirsthatchlineinrelationtothehatchoriginforthe activelevel.Thedefaultmodeusespolarcoordinates(L=distance,A=angle).Entervaluesor movetheStartPointhandleinthepreviewwindow. Setsthedistance,fortheactivelevel,betweenthebeginningofasegmentandthebeginningof thenextcolinearsegment.RepeatdirectlyrelatestotheDashFactor,withthetwodetermining ifthelineisdashedorsolid,aswellasthelengthofthedashesandlinesegments.Thedefault modeusespolarcoordinates(L=distance,A=angle).EntervaluesormovetheRepeathandle inthepreviewwindow. Represents,fortheactivelevel,thepercentageofthedistancebetweentheStartPointandthe Repeatthatisshownasaline.Setto1tocreateasolidline.EnteravalueormovetheDash Factorhandleinthepreviewwindow. Determinesthedistanceanddirectionbetweenlinesfortheactivelevel.Thevaluesenteredare relativetotheStartPoint.Thedefaultmodeusespolarcoordinates(L=distance,A=angle). EntervaluesormovetheOffsethandleinthepreviewwindow. Setsthecolorfortheactivelevelhatchlines;clickthecolorboxtoselectacolor.ClickUnique Colorstosetauniquecolorforeachlevel;clickSameColortoapplytheactivelevelcolor selectiontoalllevels. Setsthehatchlineweightforthecurrentlevel.Clickthelinetoselectaweightfromthelist. CreateacustomweightbyselectingSetThickness.TheSetThicknessdialogboxopens.Enter theThicknessValueandThicknessUnits.ClickSameThicknesstoapplytheactivelevelline thicknesstoalllevels. ClickAddLeveltocreateanoffsetduplicateoftheactivelevel.Alternatively,createaduplicate levelbyclickinganddraggingtheStartPointhandlewiththeOption(Macintosh)orAlt (Windows)key.ClickRemoveLeveltoremovetheactivelevel. OpenstheScaleHatchDefinitiondialogbox.EnteraScalingFactortochangethehatch definitionsfortheactivelevel(exceptfortheDashFactorvalue,whichremainsunchanged). SelectApplytoAllLevelstochangethescalefactorforalllevels. ThelastfiveactionscanbeundonebyclickingUndo Clicktoredothelastactionthatwasundone.Mustbeclickeddirectlyafteranactionwas undone.Appearsdimmedwhentherearenoactionstoundo. ReturnsthehatchdefinitiontoitsstatusatthetimetheEditHatchdialogboxwasopened

Repeat

DashFactor

Offset

PenColor

PenLineWeight

Add/Remove Level Scale

Undo Redo Revert

544

| Chapter 13: Applying Object Attributes


TheStartPoint,Repeat,DashFactor,andOffsetfunctionscorrespondtothefourcontrolhandlesinthepreview window.Whenahandleismoved,thecorrespondingfunctionsvalueschangetoreflectthemove.TheShiftkey constrainsthedragwhenusingthecontrolhandles,affectingeachofthefourfunctionsdifferently. FortheStartPoint,Repeat,andOffsetparameters,entervaluesaccordingtoeitherthepolarcoordinatesystem ortheCartesiansystem.Thetextboxlabelsforthesefourcontrolschangetocorrespondtotheselectionof Cartesianorpolar.

Coordinate System
Polar

Description
Definesthehatchlinesegmentsbylengthandanglevaluesenteredinrelationtotheorigin.In polarmode,anglesarerepresentedaspositiveornegativevaluesfrom0to180.Valuesfrom 180to359areautomaticallyconvertedtonegative.0isatthe3oclockposition. Cartesiancoordinatesarethesameasthoseusedinthedrawingarea,withpositiveand negativeXandYaxes

Cartesian

4. ClickOK.Thenewhatchdefinitionissavedunderthespecifiedname.

Example: Creating a Brick Hatch


ThefollowingEditHatchvaluesdemonstratehowtocreateabrickpattern.Thehatchrequirestwolevels.Thebricks willbe8x3andthefirstsetoflineswillbetheverticalcomponentsofthebricks.Thisprocedurecreatesahatchthat scalesappropriatelywhenitisplacedintoadrawing. AllvaluesareenteredinWorldunitsandCartesianmode.

Parameter
StartPoint Repeat DashFactor Offset

Level 1 Values
X=0,Y=0 X=0,Y=6 0.5 X=4,Y=3

Level 2 Values
X=0,Y=0 X=2,Y=0 1 X=0,Y=3

Applying Associative Hatches


ApplyhatchestospecificobjectsusingeithertheAttributespaletteortheResourceBrowser.Someobjectshavethe abilitytoapplyhatchsettingswhilesettingtheobjectattributes. Attributescanalsobeappliedbyclasssettings(seeSettingClassAttributesonpage 111)ortransferredwith theEyedroppertool(seeTransferringAttributesonpage 526).

Using Hatch Fills |

545

Applying a Hatch from the Attributes Palette


ToapplyanassociativehatchfromtheAttributespaletteandspecifythehatchsettings: 1. Selecttheobject(s),andthenselectHatchfromtheAttributespalettefilllist. Ifnohatchesaredefined,anddefaultcontentisnotenabledinVectorworkspreferences,youarepromptedto addadefaulthatchdefinition. 2. Tochangetoadifferenthatch,clickonthehatchlistandselectadifferenthatchfromthelistofdefaultcontentor thecurrentfilescontent(seeDefaultContentinVectorworksFundamentalsandRenderworksonpage 157).

Fill Hatch list

Fill Hatch settings

3. Tospecifythesettingsforthecurrenthatch,clicktheFillHatchSettingsbuttonnexttotheFillHatchlist. TheHatchSettingsdialogboxopens.

Hatch selector

I/J Length link

Parameter
Hatchselector UseLocalMapping

Description
Selectahatchresourcefromeitherthedefaultcontentorthecurrentfilescontent Selecttoenableentryinthemappingfields,tocustomizethefillforthisobject;deselectto returntothedefaultfillmapping. TheAttributeMappingtoolisanalternatewaytocreatealocalmapping;ifanobjectsfillis editedwiththeAttributeMappingtool,thechangesarereflectedonthisdialogbox. Conversely,editsmadeonthisdialogboxarereflectedintheposition,size,androtationof themappingtoolseditingobject. Bydefault,ahatchfilldoesnotrotatewiththefilledobject;selectUseLocalMappingto keepthefillsorientationrelativetotheobject.

X/YOffset

Indicatesthefillstartingpointcoordinatesrelativetothecenteroftheselectionbounding box(inthefilescurrentunits)

546

| Chapter 13: Applying Object Attributes


Description
SpecifiesthedistanceintheI/Jdirectionforasingleinstanceofthefill(inthefilescurrent units). Tomaintaintheaspectratioofthefillwhenonelengthischanged,clickthelinkbutton;the otherlengthvaluechangesautomatically. Rotation FlipHorizontally/ FlipVertically Specifiestheangleofthefill Selecttoflipthefillorientationhorizontally,vertically,orboth

Parameter
I/JLength

4. Ifdesired,clickPreviewtoviewtheresultsofthefillsettings. 5. ClickOKtoapplythefillsettings.

Applying a Hatch from the Resource Browser


ToapplyanassociativehatchfromtheResourceBrowser: 1. Selecttheobject(s). 2. FromtheResourceBrowser,selecttheresourcetobeapplied.Rightclick(Windows)orCtrlclick(Macintosh) andselectApplyfromthecontextmenu.(Alternatively,doubleclicktheresourcetoapplyittotheselectionor dragtheresourceontoanobject.) ThefillsettingscanbeeditedfromtheAttributespalette.

Applying Non-Associative Hatches


Toapplyanonassociativehatch: 1. Selecttheobject(s). 2. SelectModify>Hatch. TheHatchesdialogboxopens.

Parameter
Hatcheslist

Description
Liststheavailablehatchesfromthedefaultcontent,thecurrentfilescontent,orfroma referencedfile(referencedhatchesdisplayinitalics)

Using Hatch Fills | Parameter


Hatchpreview New Edit Duplicate Delete

547

Description
Displaysapreviewoftheselectedhatchat100%zoom OpenstheEditHatchdialogbox,forcreatinganewhatch(seeDefiningHatchesonpage 541) OpenstheEditHatchdialogbox,foreditingorrenaminganexistinghatch Createsacopyoftheselectedhatch(buttonisdisabledifreferencedhatchesarepresent) Deletestheselectedhatch

3. SelectthehatchtoapplyfromtheHatcheslist. Apreviewofthehatchisdisplayed. 4. ClickOKtoreturntothedrawingarea. Thecursorchangestoapaintbucket. 5. Positionthepaintbucketontheobjectwherethehatchshouldbegin.Clicktospecifythehatchorigin.Dragto specifythehatchorientationandclickagain. Thehatchfillsthespacefromthepaintbucketslocationtotheboundarycreatedbytheobject. Whenahatchisbeingappliedtoanobject,thetipofthepaintfromthepaintbucketmarksthehatchorigin.The hatchstartpointwithintheobjectcanbepreciselyspecified.

Select the object

After selecting the hatch, click the cursor at the desired insertion point. The hatch can be rotated during insertion.

Click again to place the hatch once it is oriented

Editing Hatch Definitions


Changestoahatchdefinitionaffectallassociativeinstancesofthathatchinthedrawingfile.Nonassociativehatches arenotaffected. Toeditahatchdefinition: 1. SelectWindow>Palettes>ResourceBrowser. TheResourceBrowseropens. 2. Selectthedesiredhatch.Rightclick(Windows)orCtrlclick(Macintosh),andselectEditfromthecontextmenu. Alternatively,selectadrawingobject,selectModify>Hatch,andclickEditfortheselectedhatchintheHatches dialogbox. TheEditHatchdialogboxopens.

548

| Chapter 13: Applying Object Attributes

3. EditthehatchasdescribedinDefiningHatchesonpage 541. 4. ClickOKtoreturntothedrawingarea. Anyassociativeinstanceoftheeditedfillinthedrawingfilechangesaccordingtothenewdefinition.

Using Tile Fills


Tilefillsareresources;theycanbeselectedfromthedefaultcontentintheAttributespalette(seeDefaultContentin VectorworksFundamentalsandRenderworksonpage 157),oryoucancreateorimportcustomresourcesandapply themfromtheResourceBrowser(seeAccessingExistingResourcesonpage 164). Therearetwowaystocustomizethefilltosuittheobjecttowhichitisapplied;useeithertheFillTileSettingsbutton intheAttributespalette,orusetheAttributeMappingtooltomove,rotate,orscalethetile(seeMappingHatchand TileFillsonpage 561). Tilefillscanbeappliedtoanytypeof2Dplanarorscreenobjectthatacceptsafill,includingwalls(walltilesonly displayinTop/Planview),textboxes,worksheetbackgrounds,andpluginobjectsthatincludea2Dobject.

Defining Tiles
Atileisasetof2Dgeometricelementsthatrepeatsinalldirectionsfromacenterpoint.Thegeometricelementscan havecolororfill(butnotatilefill),andthetilecanalsohaveabackgroundcolor. Tocreateatiledefinition: 1. OpentheResourceBrowserbyselectingWindow>Palettes>ResourceBrowser. 2. FromtheResourcesmenu,selectNewResourcetodisplaytheNewResourcemenu. 3. SelectTile. TheNewTiledialogboxopens.

Using Tile Fills | Parameter


Name Units

549

Description
Specifiesanameforthetileresource;thisnameisdisplayedintheResourceBrowserand Attributespalette Specifiestheunitsforthetilewhenitisusedinadrawing: Pagesetsthetilesizeaccordingtothepagedimensions.Whenapplied,thetile automaticallyscalesrelativetothepageenvironment.Thisisusefulforannotationobjects thatshouldalwaysremainthesamesizeonthepage,regardlessofthelayerscale. Worldsetsthetilesizeaccordingtoworlddimensions;itssizevariesdependingonthe layerscale.

Rotate InWall

Rotatesthetilefillaccordingtotheaxisofanywallorsymboltowhichitisapplied Matchesthetilerotationtothewallaxis;selectFittoWalltoscalethetilefilltomatchthe thicknessofawall,wallcomponent,orslabcomponent. EnabletheFittoWalloptionforinsulationfillsinwalls,andwallorslabcomponents.

InSymbol BackgroundFill

Matchesthetilerotationtothesymbolaxis Tohaveabackgroundfillbehindthetilegeometry,selecttheBackgroundFilloptionand alsospecifyacolor.

4. ClickOKtoopenatileeditingwindow.Drawthetilegeometrywiththedesiredcolorsandfills.Whenyou createanobject,eightpartiallytransparentrepetitionsoftheobjectdisplayaroundit.Youcanaddmultiple objectstothepattern. 5. Toadjustthetilepatternandspacing,clickoneoftherepetitionsanddragitasneeded;clickagaintosetthenew position.Tohidethetilerepetitionsduringediting,Ctrlclick(Macintosh)orrightclick(Windows)onanempty areaoftheeditingwindow,anddeselecttheDisplayTileRepetitionsoptiononthecontextmenu.

550

| Chapter 13: Applying Object Attributes

The objects you draw are opaque and are edited individually

Click and drag one of the semi-transparent editing groups (a red box indicates the selected group) to modify the tile pattern, and click again to set the position

6. Whenyouaredonedrawingthetile,clickExitTile.Thetileresourceissavedwiththespecifiedname. TilesaresavedinVectorworksdrawingfiles.Ifthefileisnotsavedandthetileisnotdefaultcontent,thetileis lostwhenyouexittheprogram.

Applying Tiles
ApplytilestospecificobjectsusingeithertheAttributespaletteortheResourceBrowser.Someobjectshavetheability toapplytilesettingswhilesettingtheobjectattributes. Attributescanalsobeappliedbyclasssettings(seeSettingClassAttributesonpage 111)ortransferredwith theEyedroppertool(seeTransferringAttributesonpage 526).

Applying a Tile from the Attributes Palette


ToapplyatilefromtheAttributespaletteandspecifythetilesettings: 1. Selecttheobject(s),andthenselectTilefromtheAttributespalettefilllist. Ifnotilesaredefined,anddefaultcontentisnotenabledinVectorworkspreferences,youarepromptedtoadda defaulttiledefinition. 2. Tochangetoadifferenttile,clickonthetilelistandselectadifferenttilefromthelistofdefaultcontentorthe currentfilescontent(seeDefaultContentinVectorworksFundamentalsandRenderworksonpage 157).

Using Tile Fills |

551

Fill Tile list

Fill Tile settings

3. Tospecifythesettingsforthecurrenttilefill,clicktheFillTileSettingsbuttonnexttotheFillTilelist. TheTileSettingsdialogboxopens.

Tile selector

I/J Length link

Parameter
Tileselector UseLocalMapping

Description
Selectatileresourcefromeitherthedefaultcontentorthecurrentfilescontent Selecttoenableentryinthemappingfields,tocustomizethefillforthisobject;deselectto returntothedefaultmapping. TheAttributeMappingtoolisanalternatewaytocreatealocalmapping;ifanobjectsfillis editedwiththeAttributeMappingtool,thechangesarereflectedonthisdialogbox. Conversely,editsmadeonthisdialogboxarereflectedintheposition,size,androtationof themappingtoolseditingobject. Bydefault,atilefilldoesnotrotatewiththefilledobject;selectUseLocalMappingtokeep thefillsorientationrelativetotheobject.

X/YOffset I/JLength

Indicatesthefillstartingpointcoordinatesrelativetothecenteroftheselectionbounding box(inthefilescurrentunits) SpecifiesthedistanceintheI/Jdirectionforasingleinstanceofthefill(inthefilescurrent units). Tomaintaintheaspectratioofthefillwhenonelengthischanged,clickthelinkbutton;the otherlengthvaluechangesautomatically.

Rotation FlipHorizontally/ FlipVertically

Specifiestheangleofthefill Selecttoflipthefillorientationhorizontally,vertically,orboth

552

| Chapter 13: Applying Object Attributes

4. Ifdesired,clickPreviewtoviewtheresultsofthefillsettings. 5. ClickOKtoapplythefillsettings.

Applying a Tile from the Resource Browser


ToapplyatilefromtheResourceBrowser: 1. Selecttheobject(s). 2. FromtheResourceBrowser,selecttheresourcetobeapplied.Rightclick(Windows)orCtrlclick(Macintosh) andselectApplyfromthecontextmenu.(Alternatively,doubleclicktheresourcetoapplyittotheselectionor dragtheresourceontoanobject.) ThefillsettingscanbeeditedfromtheAttributespalette.

Editing Tile Definitions


Changestoatiledefinitionaffectallinstancesofthattileinthedrawingfile. Toeditatiledefinition: 1. SelectWindow>Palettes>ResourceBrowser. TheResourceBrowseropens. 2. Selectthedesiredtile.Rightclick(Windows)orCtrlclick(Macintosh),andselectEditfromthecontextmenu. TheEditTiledialogboxopens;selectwhethertoedittheGeometryorSettings.Ifyoueditthegeometry,thetile editingwindowopensnexttoalloweditingofthetilecomponents.Ifyoueditthesettings,theEditTileSettings dialogboxopensnext. 3. AdjustthetiledefinitionasdescribedinDefiningTilesonpage 548. 4. ClickOKtoreturntothedrawingarea. Anyinstanceoftheeditedfillinthedrawingfilechangesaccordingtothenewdefinition.

Using Gradient Fills


Gradientfillsareresources;theycanbeselectedfromthedefaultcontentintheAttributespalette(seeDefault ContentinVectorworksFundamentalsandRenderworksonpage 157),oryoucancreateorimportcustomresources andapplythemfromtheResourceBrowser(seeAccessingExistingResourcesonpage 164). Gradientscanbeappliedtoanytypeof2Dplanarorscreenobjectthatacceptsafill,includingwalls(wallgradients onlydisplayinTop/Planview),textboxes,worksheetbackgrounds,andpluginobjectsthatincludea2Dobject.

Defining Gradients
Agradientisasetoftwoormorecolorsthatblendsmoothlyintooneanother.Gradientsaredefinedandstoredinthe ResourceBrowser.

Using Gradient Fills |


Gradient segment

553

Midpoint Color spot Color spot area

Gradient preview

Vectorworks Term
Gradient Midpoint Colorspot Gradientsegment

Definition
Onecolorlinearlyblendedtoanothercolor Pointbetweentwocolorswhereeachcolorisofequalintensity;amidpointisassociated withthecolorspottoitsleft Pointwheretheselectedcolorisatfullintensity Twoadjacentcolorspots

Tocreateagradientdefinition: 1. OpentheResourceBrowserbyselectingWindow>Palettes>ResourceBrowser. 2. FromtheResourcesmenu,selectNewResourcetodisplaytheNewResourcemenu. 3. SelectGradient. TheGradientEditordialogboxopens.Specifyanameforthegradientresource,andselectthesegmentstarting andendingcolors.Gradientscanconsistofseveralsegmentsandmorethantwocolors.Tocreateagradientwith morethantwocolors,clickinthecolorspotarea.Thisaddsacolorspotandmidpointtothegradient. Specifythelocationofaselectedcolorspotormidpointbydraggingitintoposition,orenteringitspositioninthe Positionfield.

Parameter
Name Midpoint GradientPreview

Description
Specifiesanameforthegradientresource;thisnameisdisplayedintheResourceBrowser andAttributespalette Pointbetweentwocolorswhereeachcolorisofequalintensity Displaysthegradientinapreviewbar

554

| Chapter 13: Applying Object Attributes


Description
Specifiesthestartingorendingcolorofeachgradientsegment.Tospecifythecolor, doubleclickonacolorspot,orselectacolorspotandclickColor.Toaddanewgradient segment,clickinanemptylocationinthecolorspotarea.Anewcolorspotandmidpointare created.Dragacolorspottoanewlocationinthecolorspotarea;itsassociatedcoloris retained.Removeacolorspotanditsassociatedmidpointbyselectingthecolorspot draggingitfromthecolorspotarea. Specifiesthecoloroftheselectedcolorspot;clicktoselectthecolor Indicatestheposition(0.01.0)oftheselectedcolorspotormidpoint;themidpointposition isrelativetoitslocationbetweentwoadjacentcolorspots

Parameter
ColorSpot

Color Position

4. ClickOKtosavethegradientresourcewiththespecifiedname. GradientsaresavedinVectorworksdrawingfiles.Ifthefileisnotsavedandthegradientisnotdefaultcontent,the gradientislostwhenyouexittheprogram.

Applying Gradients
GradientsettingsarespecifiedthroughtheAttributespaletteandappliedto2Dplanarandscreenobjectsthroughthe ResourceBrowserortheAttributespalette.Inaddition,agradientfillcanbespecifiedasadefaultclassattribute(see SettingClassPropertiesonpage 108).Someobjectshavetheabilitytoapplygradientsettingswhilesettingthe objectattributes.

Applying a Gradient from the Attributes Palette


ToapplyagradientresourcefromtheAttributespaletteandspecifythegradientsettings: 1. Selecttheobject(s),andthenselectGradientfromtheAttributespalettefilllist.Tochangetoadifferentgradient, clickonthegradientpreviewandselectadifferentgradientfromthelistofdefaultcontentorthecurrentfiles content(seeDefaultContentinVectorworksFundamentalsandRenderworksonpage 157).

Gradient preview

Fill gradient settings

2. SpecifythesettingsforthecurrentgradientbyclickingtheFillGradientSettingsbuttonnexttothegradient previewbox. TheGradientSettingsdialogboxopens.

Using Gradient Fills |

555

Gradient selector

Parameter
Gradientselector Repeat

Description
Selectagradientresourcefromeitherthedefaultcontentorthecurrentfilescontent Selecttorepeatthegradientsegment(s)overtheobject;deselecttoapplyasingleinstanceof thegradientsegment(s)totheobject

No repeat

Repeat

ApplyTo

SelectEachObjecttoapplythegradienttoeachselectedobjectindividually;chooseSelection toapplythegradientacrosstheselectedobjects,spanningtheobjects.

Each Object

Selection

Whenapplyingagradientacrossseveralselectedobjects,grouptheobjectstoretaintheeffect.

556

| Chapter 13: Applying Object Attributes


Description
Selectthegradienttypefromthelist Appliesthegradienttotheselectionwithlineargeometry

Parameter
Type Linear

Radial

Appliesthegradienttotheselectionwithcirculargeometry

Rectangular

Appliesthegradienttotheselectionwithrectangulargeometry

Angular

Appliesthegradienttotheselectioninacounterclockwisedirectionfromthespecifiedstarting point

X/YOffset Length Rotation Reverse

Indicatesthegradientstartingpointcoordinatesrelativetothecenteroftheselection boundingbox(inthefilescurrentunits) Specifiesthelengthofasinglegradientsegment(inthefilescurrentunits) Specifiestherotationofthegradientfill SelecttodrawthecolorsinreverseorderfromtheorderspecifiedintheGradientEditordialog box

3. Ifdesired,clickPreviewtoviewtheresultsofthegradientsettings. 4. ClickOKtoapplythegradientsettings.

Applying a Gradient from the Resource Browser


ToapplyagradientresourcefromtheResourceBrowser: 1. Selecttheobject(s).

Using Image Fills |

557

2. FromtheResourceBrowser,selectthegradienttobeapplied.Rightclick(Windows)orCtrlclick(Macintosh), andselectApplyfromthecontextmenu.(Alternatively,doubleclickthegradientresourcetoapplyittothe selectionordragthegradientresourceontoanobject.) ThefillsettingscanbeeditedfromtheAttributespalette.

Editing Gradient Definitions


Changestoagradientdefinitionaffectallinstancesofthatgradientinthedrawingfile. Toeditagradientdefinition: 1. SelectWindow>Palettes>ResourceBrowser. TheResourceBrowseropens. 2. Selectthedesiredgradient.Rightclick(Windows)orCtrlclick(Macintosh),andselectEditfromthecontext menu. 3. AdjustthegradientdefinitionasdescribedinDefiningGradientsonpage 552. 4. ClickOKtoreturntothedrawingarea. Anyinstanceoftheeditedfillinthedrawingfilechangesaccordingtothenewdefinition.

Using Image Fills


Imagefillattributesareresources;theycanbeselectedfromthedefaultcontentintheAttributespalette(seeDefault ContentinVectorworksFundamentalsandRenderworksonpage 157),oryoucancreateorimportcustomresources andapplythemfromtheResourceBrowser(seeAccessingExistingResourcesonpage 164). Imagescanbeappliedtoanytypeof2Dplanarorscreenobjectthatacceptsafill,includingwalls(wallimagesonly displayinTop/Planview),textboxes,worksheetbackgrounds,andpluginobjectsthatincludea2Dobject.

Creating Image Resources


ImagesareimportedandstoredintheResourceBrowser. Toimportanimageforuseasanimageresource: 1. OpentheResourceBrowserbyselectingWindow>Palettes>ResourceBrowser. 2. FromtheResourcesmenu,selectNewResourcetodisplaytheNewResourcemenu. 3. SelectImage. 4. Ifaresourcewithanimageisalreadypresentinthefile,theChooseImagedialogboxopens.

558

| Chapter 13: Applying Object Attributes


Parameter
ImportanImageFile ReuseanImagefrom AnotherResource

Description
Importsanewimage;clickOKandproceedtoStep5. Reusesapreviouslyimportedimage;selecttheresourcethatcontainsthe image.ClickOKandproceedtoStep6.

5. TheOpendialogboxisdisplayed.Selecttheimagefiletouseasanimageresource,andclickOpen. 6. IftheimageisinJPEGformat,itisimportedimmediately.ForimagesnotinJPEGformat,theImageImport Optionsdialogboxopens.Specifytheimportedimageoptions. Thecurrentimageinformationisdisplayedatthetop,alongwiththeimagesuncompressedsize.Two compressionmethodsareavailable;dependingonthegraphic,oneofthemethodsmaybemoresuitable.The compressionmethodwhichproducesthesmallestfilesizeisselectedbydefault.Selectthedesiredbalance betweencompressionanddetaildisplay.Theresultingfilesizeforeachtypeofcompressionisdisplayedtohelp withtheselection. Iftheselectedoptionresultsinafilesizelargerthantheuncompressedsize,theimageisimported uncompressed.

Compression Method
JPEG

Description
Providesahighamountofcompression,resultinginthesmallestVectorworksfilesize. However,finedetailmaybeobscured.JPEGcompressionismostsuitableforphotographic images. Providesamoderateamountofcompression,whilepreservingimagedetails;animage compressedasaPNGcanalsobeimportedasa1bitmonochromeimagebyselecting ImportasBlackandWhite

PNG

7. ClickOKtoimporttheimagewiththeselectedcompressiontype.Theimageresourceissaved,bydefault,with thenameoftheoriginalimagefile.

Using Image Fills |

559

ImageresourcesimportedintothefilethatarenotinJPEGformatcanbecompressedbyJPEGwiththeCompress Imagescommand.SeeCompressingImagesonpage 295.

Applying Image Resources


ImagesettingsarespecifiedthroughtheAttributespaletteandappliedtoa2DobjectthroughtheResourceBrowseror theAttributespalette.Inaddition,animagefillcanbespecifiedasadefaultclassattribute(seeSettingClass Propertiesonpage 108).Someobjectshavetheabilitytoapplyimagesettingswhilesettingtheobjectattributes.

Applying an Image from the Attributes Palette


ToapplyanimageresourcefromtheAttributespaletteandspecifytheimagesettings: 1. Selecttheobject(s),andthenselectImagefromtheAttributespalettefilllist.Tochangetoadifferentimage,click ontheimagepreviewbarandselectadifferentimagefromthelistofdefaultcontentorthecurrentfilescontent (seeDefaultContentinVectorworksFundamentalsandRenderworksonpage 157).
Image preview Fill image settings

2. SpecifythesettingsforthecurrentimagebyclickingtheFillImageSettingsbuttonnexttotheimagepreview box. TheImageSettingsdialogboxopens.

Image selector

I/J Length link

560

| Chapter 13: Applying Object Attributes


Description
Selectanimageresourcefromeitherthedefaultcontentorthecurrentfilescontent Selecttorepeattheimageovertheobject;deselecttoapplyasingleinstanceoftheimage totheobject

Parameter
Imageselector Repeat

No repeat

Repeat

ApplyTo

SelectEachObjecttoapplytheimagetoeachselectedobjectindividually;choose Selectiontoapplytheimageacrosstheselectedobjects,spanningtheobjects

Each Object

Selection

Whenapplyinganimageacrossseveralselectedobjects,grouptheobjectstomaintainthe image. X/YOffset I/JLength Indicatestheimagestartingpointcoordinatesrelativetothecenteroftheselection boundingbox(inthefilescurrentunits) SpecifiesthedistanceintheI/Jdirectionforasingleinstanceoftheimagefill(inthefiles currentunits) Tomaintaintheaspectratiooftheimagewhenonelengthischanged,clickthelink button;theotherlengthvaluechangesautomatically. Rotation FlipHorizontally/ FlipVertically Specifiestheangleoftheimagefill Selecttofliptheimageorientationhorizontally,vertically,orboth

3. Ifdesired,clickPreviewtoviewtheresultsoftheimagesettings. 4. ClickOKtoapplytheimagesettings. TheXandYaxesarefilebased,relativetothecenteroftheselectedobject(s).TheIandJaxesareimagebased.

Mapping Fills with the Attribute Mapping Tool |

561

Image

X/Y offset coordinates Center of selected object

Applying an Image from the Resource Browser


ToapplyanimageresourcefromtheResourceBrowser: 1. Selecttheobject(s). 2. FromtheResourceBrowser,selecttheimagetobeapplied.Rightclick(Windows)orCtrlclick(Macintosh),and selectApplyfromthecontextmenu.(Alternatively,doubleclicktheimageresourcetoapplyittotheselectionor dragtheimageresourceontoanobject.) TheimagesettingscanbeeditedfromtheAttributespalette.

Mapping Fills with the Attribute Mapping Tool


UsetheAttributeMappingtooltoeditthesize,position,andangleofanassociativehatch,tile,gradient,orimagefill thathasbeenappliedtoanobject. Ifyouareworkingin3DandhavetheRenderworksproductinstalled,youcanusetheAttributeMappingtool tomaptexturesdirectlyinthedrawingwindow.SeeDirectTextureMappingonpage 642.

Mapping Hatch and Tile Fills


Tomodifyanobjectstileorassociativehatchfill: 1. ClicktheAttributeMappingtoolfromtheBasicorVisualizationtoolset. 2. Clickonanobjectcontainingatileorassociativehatchfill.Onlyoneobjectatatimecanbeedited. 3. Aneditingobjectwitheighthandlesisplacedoverthefill.Thefilloriginisatthelowerleftcorneroftheediting object,wheretheredandgreenlinesmeet.

Hatch origin

4. Usetheeditingobjecttosetthefilllocation,scale,androtationangle.Thefillcanalsobenudged.

562

| Chapter 13: Applying Object Attributes


Description
Clickintheeditingobject(anywhereexceptonaselectionhandle)anddragittothedesired location.Clicktoset. Topreciselylocatetheorigin,clickclosetothelowerlefthandle,andmovetheeditingobjectas needed.

Action
Editthefill location

Editthefill scale

Clickononeofthecornerselectionhandles,anddragtosettheeditingobjecttoanewscale(or presstheTabkeyandenteraScalevalueintheDatabar).Clicktoset.

Scale: 1.073

Editthefill rotation

Clickononeofthemiddleselectionhandles,anddragtorotatetheeditingobjecttothedesired angle(orpresstheTabkeyandenteraRotationvalueintheDatabar);clicktosettherotation. Bydefault,theeditingobjectrotatesaboutthehandleoppositethehandlethatwasclickedon. Torotateaboutthefillorigin,presstheShiftkeywhilerotating. Torotateaboutthecenteroftheeditingobject,presstheCtrlkey(Windows)orCommandkey (Macintosh)whilerotating.

Rotation:-30.0

5. IntheAttributespalette,thenameofthefillishighlightedinblue,and(localmap)isappendedtothename.

Mapping Fills with the Attribute Mapping Tool |

563

Creating a New Resource from a Locally Mapped Hatch or Tile


AhatchortilethathasbeeneditedwiththeAttributeMappingtoolisconsideredtobelocallymapped.Theedited hatchortilecanbesavedasanewhatchortileresource,retainingthemappingeditsandallowingthemtobeapplied tootherobjects. Tocreateahatchortilefromalocallymappedassociativehatchortile: 1. Rightclick(Windows)orCtrlclick(Macintosh)onanobjectwithalocallymappedtileorassociativehatch,and selectNewTileFromLocallyMappedTileorNewHatchFromLocallyMappedHatchfromthecontextmenu. 2. Provideanameforthenewhatchortileresource. 3. ThenewresourceappearsintheResourceBrowser.Thenewhatchortiledefinitionhasalreadybeenappliedto theobject,whichisnolongerconsideredtobelocallymapped.

Mapping Gradient Fills


Tomodifyanobjectsgradientfill: 1. ClicktheAttributeMappingtoolfromtheBasicorVisualizationtoolset. 2. Clickonanobjectcontainingagradientfill.Onlyoneobjectatatimecanbeedited. 3. Aneditingobjectwithtwohandlesisplacedoverthegradient.

4. Usetheeditingobjecttosetthegradientoriginlocation,iaxislength,androtationangle.HolddowntheShift keytoconstraintheeditingobjectline;thefillcanalsobenudged.

Action
Editthelocationofthefill (gradientorigin)

Description
Clickanddragtheentireeditingobject,movingittothedesiredlocation.Clickto set.

564

| Chapter 13: Applying Object Attributes


Description
Clickonahandleattheendoftheeditingobject,anddragtosettheeditingobject toanewlength.Clicktoset.

Action
Editthegradientiaxis location

Editthegradientrotation

Clickonahandleattheendoftheeditingobject,andmovetocreateafulcrum line;clicktosettherotation.

Mapping Image Fills


Tomodifyanobjectsimagefill: 1. ClicktheAttributeMappingtoolfromtheBasicpaletteortheVisualizationtoolset. 2. Clickonanobjectcontaininganimagefill.Onlyoneobjectatatimecanbeedited. 3. Aneditingobjectwitheighthandlesisplacedovertheimage.

4. Usetheeditingobjecttosettheimageoriginlocation,iaxisandjaxislengths,androtationangle.Thefillcan alsobenudged.

Mapping Fills with the Attribute Mapping Tool | Action


Editthelocationofthefill (imageorigin)

565

Description
Clickanddragtheentireeditingobject,movingittothedesiredlocation.

Edittheimageiaxisand jaxislocation

Clickonacornerhandle(theresizecursordisplays)anddragthehandletothe newsize;holdingtheShiftkeyduringthisoperationconstrainstheimage aspectratio.Clicktoset.

Edittheimagerotation

Clickonasidehandle(therotatecursordisplays)anddragthehandletothe newrotationangle(orpresstheTabkeyandenteraRotationvalueintheData bar).Clicktoset.PresstheCtrlkey(Windows)orCommandkey(Macintosh) whilerotatingtorotateabouttheimagecenter.

566

| Chapter 13: Applying Object Attributes


Description
Clickanddragacorneroftheeditingobjectpastanothercorneroftheediting object;clickagaintoredrawtheimagewithinthenewdrawingarea.Drag horizontallyorverticallytofliptheimageinthatdirection;dragdiagonallyto fliptheimagebothhorizontallyandvertically.

Action
Fliptheimagehorizontally orvertically

Click here and drag lower left handle of editing object past upper right handle Click again to set the new orientation of the image fill

OptionsintheImageSettingsdialogbox(accessedfromtheAttributespalette)alsoaffectimageattribute mapping.WhenthelinkbuttonbetweentheILengthandJLengthfieldsisselected,theimagecannotbeflipped ormirroredbydraggingtheeditingobjectshandlesverticallyorhorizontally;onlydiagonaldraggingis allowed.UsetheFlipHorizontallyorFlipVerticallyoptionsinthisdialogboxtochangethefillimage orientationwithoutmovingorresizingtheimage.

Applying Colors
TheColorPalettesetprovidescolorsforselectionandspecifieswhichcolorsareavailableinaVectorworksfile.To accesstheColorPalettesetfromtheAttributespalette,clickononeoftheFillcolorboxes(selecteitheraSolidor Patternfillstyle)orononeofthePencolorboxes(selectanyPenstyle). Asimilarinterfaceisavailablefromotherareasintheapplicationwherecolorsarespecified,althoughtheColorBy ClassoptionisonlyavailablewhenaccessedfromtheAttributespalette. SeeSettingDefaultColorsandPalettesonpage 567forinformationonhowtosetupandactivatecolorpalettes.

Applying Colors |
Named color display area

567

Colors in selected active palette (Grid view)

Active palettes

Selectanactivecolorpalette,andthenselectthecolortoapply.Toeasilyfindanamedcolor,begintyping;theletters displayinthenamedcolordisplayareaandtheclosestcolormatchisselected.PresstheTabkeytocyclethroughthe closestmatches;pauseforseveralsecondstostartthesearchover. SelectColorByClasstousethecolorattributessetbytheobjectsclass. IfUseatCreationisenabledfortheobjectsclass,theobjectscolorisautomaticallysetbytheclass. IfUseatCreationisdisabledfortheclass,theobjectonlytakesontheclasscolorwhentheColorByClassoption isselected. SeeSettingClassAttributesonpage 111.

Setting Default Colors and Palettes


TheColorPalettesetopenswhentheFillcolororPencolorboxisclickedfromtheAttributespalette.TheColorPalette setprovidescolorsforselectionandspecifieswhichcolorsareavailableinaVectorworksfile.Anysetofunlimited colorscanbeincluded;colorsareorganizedinstandardand/orcustomcolorpalettes. Inanewfile,theactivedocumentcolorpaletteistheonlypalettedisplayedintheColorPaletteset,anditcontains onlythecolorsblackandwhite.Ascolorsareaddedtothefilefromcolorpalettesaswellasresources,theactive documentcolorpaletteexpandstodisplayallthecolorsusedinthefile. Todisplayandmanagethecolorsavailableforthefile: 1. FromtheAttributespalette,clickononeofthecolorboxesforFillcolor(eitheraSolidorPatternfillstylemustbe selected)orPencolor(anypenstylecanbeselected).Asimilarinterfaceisavailablefromotherareasinthe applicationwherecolorsarespecified,althoughtheColorByClassoptionisonlyavailablewhenaccessedfrom theAttributespalette. TheColorPalettesetopens,displayingthecolorsintheactivecolorpalette.

568

| Chapter 13: Applying Object Attributes


Standard Color Picker Pick Color Color Palette Manager

Named color display area

Colors in selected active palette (Grid view)

Active color palettes

Utility Menu Color Palette set in a new file, showing the default active color palettes Color Palette set in a file with active color palettes

Parameter
ColorbyClass StandardColorPicker PickColor ColorPaletteManager Namedcolordisplay area

Description
WhenusingtheColorPalettesettospecifyanobjectscolor,causestheobjecttotake onthecolorattributesetbytheobjectsclass;seeApplyingColorsonpage 566 Openstheoperatingsystemscolorpickerforselectingindividualcolors;see SelectingStandardOperatingSystemColorsonpage 569 OpensthePickColordialogbox,forselectingacolorfromavailablecolorpalettes;see SelectingaColorfromaColorPaletteonpage 570 OpenstheColorPaletteManagerdialogbox,formanagingavailablecolorpalettes andactivatingadditionalpalettes;seeManagingColorPalettesonpage 571 Displaysanycolornameinformationassociatedwiththeselectedcolor. Thisareaalsoservestofindanamedcolorintheactivecolorpalette.Toeasilyfinda namedcolor,begintyping;thelettersdisplayinthenamedcolordisplayareaandthe closestcolormatchisselected.PresstheTabkeytocyclethroughtheclosestmatches; pauseforseveralsecondstostartthesearchover. DisplaystheselectedactivepalettesavailablecolorsineitherGridorListview;these colorsareavailableforuseinthefile ListspaletteswhichhavebeenmadeactiveforthefilewiththeColorPaletteManager; clickonapalettenametodisplayitscolorsforuse Opensautilitymenutocontrolthecolorpalettesortinganddisplay

Colorsinactivepalette Activepalettes UtilityMenu

Applying Colors |
2. Eitherselectacolorfromoneofthefilescolorpalettes,orclickoffoftheColorPaletteset(inthedrawing window,forexample)toclosethecolorwindowandsetthefilesavailablecolors.

569

Utility Menu
TheoptionsselectedfromthecolorpaletteUtilityMenubuttonatthebottomofthemainColorPalettesetindicatethe colorsortinganddisplay. Tosetthedisplayandsortingofcolorsandpalettes: 1. FromtheColorPaletteset,clicktheUtilityMenubuttontoopentheutilitymenu.

Menu/Command
ViewColorPaletteas

Action
SelecttoviewthecolorsintheColorPalettesetasagridofcoloredsquares,oralistof colorsandassociatednames.(Ineitherview,colornamesarealwaysshowninthe displayareaabovethecolorsasthemousemovesoverthecolors.) Specifythesortingmethodfortheactivecolorpalette;selectColortosortbyhue (HSVvalues),ManualtosortaccordingtotheordersetintheColorPaletteManager, orAlphabeticaltosortinascendingordescendingorderbycolorname SelectwhethertodisplayactivecolorpalettesatthetoporbottomoftheColorPalette set InGridview,colorlistsoflessthan16rowscanbedisplayedwithaColorPaletteset optionthatshrinkstofittheavailablecolors

SortColorPaletteby

PlaceColorPalettesat ShrinkGridtoFit

2. Selectautilitycommandtochangethecolorpalettedisplayorsortingoption.

Selecting Standard Operating System Colors


Whenspecifyingorcreatingcolorpalettesisnotnecessary,theoperatingsystemscolorpickeraddsindividualcolors totheactivedocumentcolorpalette. Toselectastandardoperatingsystemcolor: 1. FromtheColorPaletteset,clicktheStandardColorPickerbutton. TheColors(Macintosh)orColor(Windows)dialogboxopens. 2. Selectacolorfromamongthestandardoperatingsystemcolors,andclickOK. 3. Thecolorisaddedtotheactivedocumentcolorpalette,andbecomesavailableforuseinthefile.

570

| Chapter 13: Applying Object Attributes

Selecting a Color from a Color Palette


Ifafilerequirescolorsbeyondthoseavailableforthestandardsystemcolorpicker,butyoudonotwishtoaddand managepalettesintheColorPaletteset,selectacolorfromaspecificcolorpalette. Toaddcolorsfromacolorpalette: 1. FromtheColorPaletteset,clickthePickColorbutton. ThePickColordialogboxopens,listingthecolorpalettesavailable.TheColorsinActiveDocumentpaletteis alwaysavailable.OtherpalettesinthelisteithershipwiththeVectorworkssoftware,orhavebeenaddedwith theColorPaletteManager.TheVectorworksFundamentalsproductshipswithClassicVectorworksColorsand StandardVectorworksColorspalettes;manyotherpalettesareavailablewithVectorworksDesignSeries products.

Parameter
ColorPalettelist

Description
Liststhecolorpalettesfromwhichcolorscanbeselected.Clickontheheadertosort thepalettesinascending/descendingalphabeticalorder.Selectapalettetodisplayits colorsontheright.

Applying Colors | Parameter


ColorList ColorGrid ColorInformation

571

Description
Liststhecolorsintheselectedpalette;clickontheheadertosortbycolororbycolor name.SelectacolortoaddittotheColorsintheActiveDocumentpalette. Displaysthecolorsintheselectedpaletteasagrid;selectacolortoaddittotheColors inActiveDocumentpalette Displaysthecolorinformationoftheselectedcolor,includingName;Red,Green,Blue (RGB);Cyan,Magenta,Yellow,andBlack(CMYK);andHue,Saturation,andValue (HSV).Thisinformationalsodisplaysonatooltipwhenthecursorhoversoveracolor.

2. Selectacolorpalettefromtheleft,andthenselectthecolorfromthelistorgridofcolorsontheright. 3. ClickOKtoaddthecolortotheactivedocumentpalette,andmakeitavailableforuseinthefile.

Managing Color Palettes


TheColorPaletteManagerdetermineswhichcolorpalettesareavailableinthemainColorPalettesetandthePick Colordialogbox.WiththeColorPaletteManager,createorimportcustomcolorpalettes,activatepalettesforusein thefile,addanddeletecolorsfromcustomcolorpalettes,andpurgeunusedcolors. Tomanagethefilescolorpalettes: 1. FromtheColorPaletteset,clicktheColorPaletteManagerbutton. TheColorPaletteManagerdialogboxopens.ThepalettesavailableherearelocatedintheColorPaletteslibrary ofthedefaultcontent;seeDefaultContentinVectorworksFundamentalsandRenderworksonpage 157.The VectorworksFundamentalsproductshipswithClassicVectorworksColorsandStandardVectorworksColors palettes;manyotherpalettesareavailablewithVectorworksDesignSeriesproducts.

572

| Chapter 13: Applying Object Attributes


Description
Liststhefilesavailablecolorpalettes.Clickonaheadertosortthepalettesbyactive statusorcolorpalettename.ClickintheActivecolumnofaselectedpalettetoactivate thepaletteandaddittotheavailablepalettesinthemainColorPaletteset. Liststhecolorsintheselectedpalette;clickontheheadertosortbycolororbycolor name Displaysthecolorsintheselectedpaletteasagrid OpenstheNewPalettedialogbox,forcreatingacustomcolorpaletteorimportinga colorpalettefile;seeCreatingorEditingCustomColorPalettesonpage 572 OpenstheEditPalettedialogbox,foreditingtheselectedcustompalette;see CreatingorEditingCustomColorPalettesonpage 572 Copiestheselectedcolorpaletteandappendsanincrementingnumbertothecopy name(changeorrenamethecopiedpalettebyclickingEdit) Deletesthecurrentlyselectedcolorpalette;onlycustompalettescanbedeleted,but nottheColorsinActiveDocumentorstandardcolorpalettes WhentheColorsinActiveDocumentpaletteisselected,removesanycolorsthatare notinuseinthefilefromtheColorsinActiveDocumentpalette Referencedcolorsremainintheactivedocumentcolorpalette,evenfroman objectthathasbeenremoved.Purgingallowsaccumulatedcolorstobetrimmed.

Parameter
Colorpalettelist

ColorList ColorGrid New Edit Duplicate Delete PurgeUnused

2. Whenthelistofcolorpalettesandactivecolorpalettesisset,clickOK.

Creating or Editing Custom Color Palettes


CustomcolorpalettescanbecreatedoreditedfromtheColorPaletteManager. Typethefirstfewlettersofapalette(orcolor,whenthecursorisinthecolorlist)toquicklyselectacolor. Tocreateoreditacustomcolorpalette: 1. OpentheColorPaletteManagerasdescribedinManagingColorPalettesonpage 571. 2. ClickNewtocreateanewpalette,orEdittomakechangestothecurrentlyselectedpalette. TheNewPaletteorEditPalettedialogboxopens.

Applying Colors |

573

Parameter
Name ColorList

Description
Specifiesanameforanewcolorpalette,oreditsthenameofacustomcolorpalette Liststhecolorsinthecustompalette;clickontheheadertosortbynumberinthelist, color,orcolorname.Tochangetheorderofthecolors,clickinthe#columnanddrag theselectedcolorupordowninthelist.(SelectManualfromthecolorpaletteutility menutosortthecolorsinthemainColorPalettesetinthisorder;seeUtilityMenu onpage 569) Displaysthecolorsinthecustompaletteasagrid OpenstheNewColordialogbox,foraddinganewcolorfromtheoperatingsystems colorpicker OpenstheEditColordialogbox,foreditingtheselectedcolorusingtheoperating systemscolorpicker Deletesthecurrentlyselectedcolor(s)fromthecustomcolorpalette OpensthePickColordialogbox,foraddingoneormorecolorsselectedfromthe availablecolorpalettes(seeSelectingaColorfromaColorPaletteonpage 570) Incrementallylightenstheselectedcolor Incrementallydarkenstheselectedcolor BlendstwoselectedcolorsaccordingtotheirRed,Green,Blue(RGB)values,tocreate thespecifiednumberofnewcolors(upto1000) BlendstwoselectedcolorsaccordingtotheirHue,Saturation,andLightness(HSV) values,tocreatethespecifiednumberofnewcolors(upto1000) ImportsallthecolorsfromtheColorsinActiveDocumentpaletteofanothercurrent versionVectorworksfile

ColorGrid New Edit Delete Get Lighten Darken RGBBlend HSVBlend Import

574

| Chapter 13: Applying Object Attributes

3. Whenthecolorshavebeeneditedoraddedtothecustomcolorpalette,clickOK. ThecustomcolorpaletteislistedintheColorPaletteManager.Bydefault,customcolorpalettesaresavedinthe userfolder(seeUserFoldersPreferencesonpage 26).

Creating a Color Chart


Thiscommandcreatesacolorchartintheactivelayerofthecurrentfilethatreflectsthecolorsinthecolorpaletteof thefile.Itcanbeusedasaprintcolorguide. Tocreateacolorchart: 1. SelectTools>Utilities>CreateColorChart. 2. Confirmthatacolorchartoftheactivelayerinthecurrentfileshouldbegenerated. Ifdesired,selectShowcolorpaletteindexnumberstoshowthecolorindexnumbersinthechart.

Theindexnumbersareinternaltothecolorpaletteandalwaysremaininthesameorder.

Viewing the Drawing

14

TheVectorworksprogramhasmanytoolsandfeaturesthatchangethedrawingview.Forexample,changethe orientationfromatopviewtoaleftisometricview,orinteractivelyflyoverorwalkthrougha3Dmodel.The workingplanepaletteandtoolsmanipulatetheorientationofthelayers3Dplane,facilitatingmodelingandworking in3D.

Using Standard Views


TheitemsundertheView>StandardViewssubmenuchangetherepresentationandtheorientationofthedrawing area.Thereare15viewoptions,whichcanbedividedintofourbasiccategories:

Category
2DView 3DElevations 3DRepresentationsAbove theActiveLayerPlane 3DRepresentationsBelow theActiveLayerPlane

Description
SelecttheTop/Plancommandtoviewthedrawingin2D;usethisforannotations, titleblocks,and2Dillustrations UsetheTop,Front,Right,Bottom,Back,andLeftcommandstoview3Delevations UsetheRightIsometric,LeftIsometric,RightRearIsometric,andLeftRear Isometriccommandstoview3Drepresentationsabovetheactivelayerplane UsetheLowerRightIsometric,LowerLeftIsometric,LowerRightRearIsometric, andLowerLeftRearIsometriccommandstoview3Drepresentationsbelowthe activelayerplane

576

| Chapter 14: Viewing the Drawing

Top/Plan

Top

Bottom

Front

Right

Back

Left

Right Isometric

Left Isometric

Right Rear Isometric

Left Rear Isometric

Lower Right Isometric

Lower Left Isometric

Lower Right Rear Isometric

Lower Left Rear Isometric

Tochangeamongthedifferentviews: SelectView>StandardViews,andthenselectaview. TheviewchangesandacheckmarkdisplaysinfrontoftheactiveviewintheCurrentView/StandardViewslist. Thereferencefortheview,whetherworkingplaneoractivelayerplane,maydependontheselectioninthe WorkingPlanespalette(seeWorkingPlaneViewandModesonpage 605). Toswitchviewsrapidly,useshortcutsonthenumerickeypad. Theseshortcutkeysalsoworktochangetheviewofaselectedviewportonasheetlayer.

Keypad Number
0 1 2 3

View
Top/Plan LeftIsometric Front RightIsometric

Projection | Keypad Number


4 5 6 7 8 9

577

View
Left Top Right LeftRearIsometric Rear RightRearIsometric

TheViewbaralsoprovidesquickaccesstothestandardviewcommands.ClicktheCurrentViewandselecta standardviewfromthelistthatdisplays.Iftheviewissomethingotherthanastandardview,CustomView displaysasthecurrentview.

Current View/Standard Views list

Projection
Theprojectioncommandsalterthewaytheprogramdisplaysthe3Dgeometryofthedrawingona2Dscreen.In additiontothestandard2DPlanprojection,therearesix3Dprojectionmodes. Toswitchprojectionmodes: SelectView>Projection,andthenselectaprojection.

Projection Mode
2DPlan Orthogonal Perspective

Description
Matchestheprojectionforanormal2Ddrawing;usethisviewtodraw2Dobjects Displaysanundistorted3Dprojectionofthedrawingobjectsdisplayattheirexact sizeregardlessoftheirdistancefromtheactivelayerplane Addsdistortiontothedrawingsothatobjectsthatarefartherawayappearsmaller thanobjectsthatarecloser,asifthedrawingwereprojectedonanimaginary croppedplane,setatacertaindistance.ThePerspectivemodecloselyapproximates howthe3Dmodelwilldisplayintherealworld. TheCavaliermodesshowanundistortedfrontviewalongwithdepth(alsoknown asfulldepthaxonometricprojections).ThelinesalongtheZaxis(whichshowthe depthofanobject)arerepresentedintruelength.Thisdistortstheoverallimageof theobjectandmakesitappeardeeper.Thesemodesmakeprecisemeasurements possible,eitherfromaprintoutofthedrawingorfromthescreenimage. TheObliqueCabinetmodes(alsoknownashalfdepthaxonometricprojections)are similartoObliqueCavalier.However,thedepthlinesareshortenedby50%.This distortstheactuallengthoftheselines,butrepresentsamorenaturalviewofthe object.Thesemodescanstillbeusedtotakemeasurementsofvectorsperpendicular totheprojectionplan(alongtheZaxis)fromaprinteddrawing,buttheresults mustbemultipliedbytwotoobtaintheactualdimension.

ObliqueCavalier(30or45)

ObliqueCabinet(30or45)

578

| Chapter 14: Viewing the Drawing


OpenGLandtheRenderworksproductdonotsupporttheObliqueprojections.TorenderObliqueprojections, useoneofthePolygonrendermodes,oruseHiddenLinemode.

Perspective
Theperspectivecommandschangetheamountofdistortionusedtodisplaythedrawing,whichgivestheimpression of3Dperspective.Selectfromnormal,narrow,orwideperspectives,orcreateacustomperspective.

Perspective
SetPerspective NarrowPerspective NormalPerspective WidePerspective Toselectaperspective:

Description
Setacustomperspectivenumerically Similartoatelephotolens Similartoaportraitlens Similartoawideangleorfisheyelens

SelectView>Perspective,andthenselecttheperspective. Tosetacustomperspectivevalue,selectSetPerspective.TheSetPerspectivedialogboxopens.Typethecustom perspectivevalueinthePerspectivefield,andthenclickOK.Thelowerthevalue,thewidertheangleof perspective.

Simulating Movement
Severaltoolssimulatemovementoverandthroughthedrawing. Whenyouusethesetools,themodelmaydisplayinwireframemodeevenifarendermodeisset.Whenthe movementstops,theprogramrendersthenewviewofthemodel.Additionally,forahighlycomplexdrawing,the programtemporarilyremovessomeofthedetailtospeedupthemovement.Whenthemovementstops,thedetail returns. ThesetoolshavecertainToolbarbuttonsthataretruemodes,andothersthatactascommandbuttons.Whensomeof thesetoolsareinuse,theDatabarprovidesdisplayonlyinformationtohelporienttheview.

Flyover
TheFlyovertoolsimulatesmovementoverandaroundarealworldmodel. TocontrolthemovementsoftheFlyovertool,dragthemousearoundaselectedcenterofrotation.TheToolbar buttonssetthecenterofrotation.
Object Center Interactive Origin Active Layer Plane Origin Working Plane Origin

Simulating Movement | Mode


InteractiveOrigin ObjectCenter ActiveLayerPlane Origin WorkingPlaneOrigin

579

Description
Setsthecenterofrotationwithamouseclick Setsthecenterofrotationtothecenteroftheselectedobjects;ifnoobjectsareselected,sets thecenterofrotationtothecenterofthevisibleobjects Setsthecenterofrotationtothecenteroftheactivelayerplane Setsthecenterofrotationtotheoriginofthecurrentworkingplane

Toflyoveradrawing: 1. ClicktheFlyovertoolfromtheBasicpalette,orfromthe3DModelingorVisualizationtoolset. 2. SelectthemodefromtheToolbar. 3. InInteractiveOriginmode,clicktospecifythecenterofrotationfortheflyovermovement. 4. Thecenterofrotationisindicatedbydashedaxislines.

Toflyoverthedrawing,clickonthedrawinganddraginthedirectionofmovementwhileyouholdthemouse button.Tostopthemovement,releasethemousebutton.Alternatively,useshortcutsonthekeyboardtoflyover thedrawing.

Mouse Movement
Moveleftorright Moveupordown Moveintowardcenter Moveoutwardfromcenter Movedowntowardactivelayer plane Moveupfromactivelayerplane

Shortcut Keys

Description
Turnsleftorrightabouttheselectedcenterof rotation Movesupordownabouttheselectedcenterof rotation

Alt+moveright(Win)or Option+moveright(Mac) Alt+moveleft(Win)or Option+moveleft(Mac) Alt+moveup(Win)or Option+moveup(Mac) Alt+movedown(Win)or Option+movedown(Mac)

Movestheviewtowardthecenterofrotation (inPerspectiveprojection) Movestheviewoutwardfromthecenterof rotation(inperspectiveprojection) Movesdowntowardtheactivelayerplane(in perspectiveororthogonalprojection) Movesupfromtheactivelayerplane(in perspectiveororthogonalprojection)

580

| Chapter 14: Viewing the Drawing


Shortcut Keys
Shiftkey

Mouse Movement

Description
ConstrainstherotationtotheglobalZaxis,or totheKaxisoftheactiveworkingplane(when WorkingPlaneModeisenabledinthe WorkingPlanespalette) Drawsselectedobjectsinfulldetail,andhides deselectedobjects(sothattheredrawsare faster)

Ctrlkey(Win)orCommand key(Mac)

Activating the Flyover Tool Temporarily


Whileanothertoolisactive,pressandholdthemousewheelbuttonandtheCtrlkey(Windows)orControlkey(Mac) simultaneouslytoactivatetheFlyovertool.Orienttheviewasdesired,andreleasethemouse.Theprevioustool becomesactiveagainautomatically. Thisfeaturewillnotworkproperlyifthewheelbuttonisassignedacustomfunctioninthemousesetup.Forexample, ifthewheelbuttonissettoperformadeletewhenclicked,awheelclickintheVectorworksprogramdeletesrather thanactivatestheflyovertool.(Thespecificsettingrequiredforthisfeaturedependsonthetypeofmousebeingused.)

Walkthrough
TheWalkthroughtoolsimulatesmovementthrougha3Dmodel. Thetooloperatesinperspectiveprojection.TocontrolthemovementsoftheWalkthroughtool,movethemouseor clickoneofthefirstfourmodebuttons.Thebuttonsperformprecise,incrementalwalkthroughmovementsinthe directionspecified. ClickResettoFrontViewmodetoreturntoafrontviewofthemodel,onthesamelevelastheactivelayerplane.
Lower Active Layer Plane Raise Active Layer Plane Viewer Looks Down Viewer Looks Up Reset to Front View

Toconductawalkthroughofamodel: 1. ClicktheWalkthroughtoolfromtheVisualizationtoolset. 2. Clickonthedrawinganddragwhileyouholdthemousebuttontoperformthewalkthrough.Imaginethe drawingareadividedintofourquadrants.Withthemousebuttonpressed,moveforward,backward,left,and rightbydraggingthemouseinthesedirections.Theplacewherethefourquadrantsmeetisthestillarea movethemousetheretosloworstopthewalkthroughmovement.Thefartherawayfromthestillareathemouse moves,thefasterthemovement.Tostopthemovement,releasethemousebutton. Alternatively,useshortcutsonthekeyboardtowalkthroughthedrawing.

Mode

Mouse Movement/Key
Moveleftorright Moveupordown

Description
TurnsleftorrightfromtheviewerslocationabouttheZaxis MovesforwardorbackwardintheworldXYplane

Simulating Movement | Mode


RaiseActiveLayer Plane LowerActiveLayer Plane ViewerLooksDown ViewerLooksUp ResettoFrontView Ctrlkey(Windows)or Commandkey(Macintosh)

581

Mouse Movement/Key
Alt+movedown(Win)or Option+movedown(Mac) Alt+moveup(Win)or Option+moveup(Mac) Alt+moveleft(Win)or Option+moveleft(Mac) Alt+moveright(Win)or Option+moveright(Mac)

Description
Raisestheviewpointheight Lowerstheviewpointheight Lowerstheviewpointangle Raisestheviewpointangle Setsthedrawingtoafrontviewofthemodel,onthesame levelastheactivelayerplane Drawsselectedobjectsinfulldetail,andhidesdeselected objects(sothattheredrawsarefaster)

WhentheWalkthroughtoolisinuse,theDatabardisplaysthefollowinginformationtohelporienttheview.

Data Bar
Yaw

Description
Displaystheangle(0360degrees)betweenthewalkingdirectionandthepositiveYaxis,to describethedirectionofmovementintheactivelayerplane.Ayawof90degreesindicates movementinthedirectionofthepositiveXaxis.Ayawof180degreesindicatesmovement inthedirectionofthenegativeYaxis. Displaystheviewpointsviewingangle.Avalueof0degreesindicatesthatthevieweris lookingstraightahead;avalueof45degreesindicatesthattheviewerislookingupatan angle45degreesfromhorizontal. Displaysthepositionoftheviewerrelativetotheactivelayerplane

Pitch

ViewerX/Y/Z

Translate View
TheTranslateViewtoolprovidesanotherwaytolookata3Dmodelinorthogonalorperspectiveprojections. TocontrolthemovementsoftheTranslateViewtool,movethemouseorclickoneofthemodebuttons.Thebuttons performprecise,incrementalmovementsinthedirectionspecified. Totranslateaview: 1. ClicktheTranslateViewtoolfromtheVisualizationtoolset. 2. Clickonthedrawinganddragwhileyouholdthemousebuttontotranslatethedrawingfromsidetosideorup anddown.Tostopthemovement,releasethemousebutton.Alternatively,clickthemodebuttonsoruse shortcutsonthekeyboardtotranslatetheview.
Move Picture Closer Move Picture Away

582
Mode

| Chapter 14: Viewing the Drawing


Mouse Movement/Key
Moveleftorright Moveupordown

Description
MovesalongscreenXaxis MovesalongscreenYaxis Movesthedrawingcloser(inperspectiveprojection) Movesthedrawingfartheraway(inperspectiveprojection) Drawsselectedobjectsinfulldetail,andhidesdeselected objects(sothattheredrawsarefaster)

MovePictureCloser MovePictureAway

Alt(Win)/Option(Mac)+ moverightordown Alt(Win)/Option(Mac)+ moveleftorup Ctrlkey(Windows)or Commandkey(Macintosh)

WhentheTranslateViewtoolisinuse,theDatabardisplaysthefollowinginformationtohelporienttheview.

Data Bar
ViewerX/Y/Z L/R U/D I/O

Description
Displaysthepositionoftheviewerrelativetotheactivelayerplane Displaysthemovementtotheleftandrightofanimaginaryaxisperpendiculartothescreen Displaysthemovementupanddownfromanimaginaryaxisperpendiculartothescreens Displaysthemovementinandoutofthedrawingalonganimaginaryaxisperpendicularto thescreen

Rotating the 3D View


Torotatethe3Dview,eitherusetheRotateViewtool,orspecifyrotationvalueswiththeRotate3DViewcommand.

Rotating with the Mouse


TheRotateViewtoolrotatestheviewclockwiseorcounterclockwisein3D. TocontrolthemovementsoftheRotateViewtool,dragthemouseorclickoneofthemodebuttons.Thefirstthree Toolbarbuttonssetthecenterofrotation.Thelasttwomodesperformprecise,incrementalrotationmovementsinthe directionspecified.
Rotate Around Active Layer Plane Center Rotate Around Object Center Rotate Around Working Plane Center Rotate Clockwise Rotate Counter-Clockwise

Torotatethe3Dview: 1. ClicktheRotateViewtoolfromtheVisualizationtoolset. 2. SelectthemodefromtheToolbar.

Simulating Movement |

583

Mode
RotateAroundObjectCenter RotateAroundActiveLayerPlaneCenter RotateAroundWorkingPlaneCenter

Description
Usesthecenterofselectedobjectsastherotationcenter Usesthecenteroftheactivelayerplaneastherotationcenter Usestheoriginofthecurrentworkingplaneastherotationcenter

3. Torotatetheview,clickonthedrawinganddragwhileholdingthemousebutton.Movethecursortorotatethe viewinthedirectionofthemousemovement.Releasethemousetostoptherotation.Alternatively,usethetwo Toolbarbuttons.

Mode

Mouse Movement/Key
Moveleftorright Moveupordown

Description
RotatesaboutthescreenYaxis(orthescreenZaxisifthemouseis attheperimeterofthedrawing) RotatesaboutthescreenYaxis(orthescreenZaxisifthemouseis attheperimeterofthedrawing) Eachclickrotatestheviewinaclockwisedirectionaboutthe selectedcenterofrotation Eachclickrotatestheviewinacounterclockwisedirectionabout theselectedcenterofrotation

RotateClockwise Rotate CounterClockwise Ctrlkey(Windows) orCommandkey (Macintosh)

Drawsselectedobjectsinfulldetail,andhidesdeselectedobjects(so thattheredrawsarefaster)

WhentheRotateViewtoolisinuse,theDatabardisplaysthefollowinginformationtohelporienttheview.

Data Bar
Azimuth Elevation Roll

Description
Displaystheactivelayerplaneangle(indegrees)betweenthepositiveXaxisandthe directionfromtheselectedcenterofrotationtotheviewer Displaystheangle(indegrees)betweentheselectedcenterofrotationandtheplanewhich isparalleltotheactivelayerplaneandpassesthroughthevieworigin Displays(indegrees)theamountofrotationabouttheselectedrotationcenter

Rotating Precisely
TheRotate3DViewcommandprovidesaprecisewaytorotatethe3Dview.Enterrotationvaluesdirectly,orrotate theviewinincrements.Apreviewdisplaystherotationmovementsbeforetheactualviewisrotated. Torotatethe3Dview: 1. SelectView>Rotate3DView. TheRotate3DViewdialogboxopens.

584

| Chapter 14: Viewing the Drawing

Parameter
Parametersareabsolute Parametersarerelative InteractiveRotation +,X/Y/Zbuttons AngleIncrement RotationbyValue RotationonX/Y/Z

Description
Startstheviewrotationfromatop(absolute)view Startstheviewrotationfromthecurrentview

Theplusandminusbuttonsforeachaxisrotatetheviewbytheincrementspecified Specifiestherotationincrement(indegrees)fortheinteractiverotationbuttons

Specifiestherotationvalue(indegrees,minutes,andseconds)fortheX,Y,and/orZaxes

2. Specifytherotationcriteria,andthenclickOKtorotatethe3Dviewasspecified.

Using a SpaceNavigator Mouse


TheVectorworksprogramsupportsboththestandardandpersonaleditionsofthe3DconnexionSpaceNavigator mouse.TheSpaceNavigatordrivermustbeinstalled;seewww.3dconnexion.com/support/ SpaceNavigatormovementaffectsthecurrentview;whenyoucyclethroughmovementmodeswiththe SpaceNavigatorsleftbutton,theVectorworksprogramsMessagebardisplaysanotice. TheeffectsoftheSpaceNavigatormouseontheviewdependonthecurrentviewandprojection,aswellasthe selectedmode. Forbestresultswhilenavigating,renderthedrawingwithOpenGLrendering. CyclethroughtheSpaceNavigatormodesforvarioustypesofnavigation.

SpaceNavigator Mode
UsingWalkthrough Navigation

Description
Movesforward,back,left,right,up,anddown;looks left,right,up,anddown

Vectorworks View or Projection


Perspective

Setting a 3D View | SpaceNavigator Mode


UsingUnconstrained Navigation

585

Description
Movesforward,back,left,right,up,anddown;looks left,right,up,anddown,androllsleftandright. Thismodeisthemostflexible,butcanbechallenging tocontrol;decreasingaxissensitivityfromthe SpaceNavigatorcontrolpanelisrecommended(press therightNavigatorbutton)

Vectorworks View or Projection


Perspective

UsingFlyover Navigation

FunctionsliketheFlyovertool,withspinningand tiltingmotions.Ifobjectsareselected,thefixedpoint ofrotationistheobjectscenter;otherwise,thefixed pointofrotationistheworldorigin Allowspanandzoom

Perspective,Isometric

Using2DNavigation

Top/Plan,Perspective, Isometric

Setting a 3D View
TheSet3DViewcommandsetsaprecise3Dviewataspecifiedviewingangle,height,andperspective.Normally,the commandisexecutedfrom2DTop/Planview;however,thecommandcanalsoseta3Dviewfromanyofthe3D views. Toseta3Dview: 1. SelectView>Set3DView. 2. Clickanddrawalinetoindicatetheviewdirection;thelinestartingpointindicatestheviewerpositionandthe lineendpointindicatesthepointtheviewerislookingtowards(looktowardpoint). TheSet3DViewdialogboxopens.

3. Specifythe3Dviewcriteria.

Parameter
ViewerHeight LookTowardHeight Perspective

Description
Specifiestheheightofthevieweratthestartpointofthedrawnline Specifiestheheightoftheviewdestinationattheendpointofthedrawnline Selectthedesiredperspective,orusethecurrentsettingtokeeptheperspective unchanged

4. ClickOK.The3Dviewisadjustedasspecified.

586

| Chapter 14: Viewing the Drawing

Setting a Camera View in Renderworks


TheRenderworksproductcontainsamethodofsettingacameraviewwiththeRenderworksCameratool.Specific attributes,suchascamerafocallength,fieldofview,height,andaspectratiocanbeset. ToinsertaRenderworkscamera: 1. SelecttheRenderworksCameratoolfromtheVisualizationtoolset(Renderworksrequired). 2. Clickinthedesignlayertospecifythecameralocation.Clickagaintoindicatethecameralooktopoint. Ifthisisthefirsttimeacameraobjecthasbeeninsertedinthissession,theRenderworksCameraObject Propertiesdialogboxopens.ClickOK.

3. ClickDisplayCameraViewintheObjectInfopalette,orsimplydoubleclickonthecamera,toswitchtothe3D cameraview.ToreturntoTop/Planview,clickTop/PlanViewintheObjectInfopalette.

4. ThecamerapropertiescanbeeditedintheObjectInfopalette.

Setting a Camera View in Renderworks | Parameter


CameraHeight

587

Description
Setsthecameraheight;atplacement,thecameraissettoadefaultheightof1500mmor 50.IfaZvalueisalsospecifiedforthecameraobject,thetotalcameraheightisthesum oftheZheightandtheCameraHeight. Setstheheightofthecameralooktopoint;atplacement,thelooktoheightissettoa defaultheightof1500mmor50.IfaZvalueisalsospecifiedforthecameraobject,the totallooktoheightisthesumoftheZheightandtheLookToHeight. SwitchestoaTop/Planviewofthecamera Switchestodisplaythe3Dcameraview(doubleclickingonthecameraina2Dviewalso switchestocameraview) OpensthePerspectiveViewControlsdialogbox,formakingfineadjustmentstothe cameraviewcontrols(seeAdjustingtheCameraViewonpage 588) SelectPerspectiveorOrthogonalprojectionforthecameraview;Perspectivecreatesan adjustableclippingframeforthecameraview,whileOrthogonalisusefulforanelevation view(forexample,askewedelevationviewofabuildingwhichisnotinastandardview). Availableparametersdependontheselectedprojection. Selectsarendermodeforthe3Dcameraview Setstheaspectratiooftheperspectiveclippingwindow;theclippingwindowcanalsobe settothepagesizeortoacustomaspectratio WhenacustomAspectRatioisselected,enterthecustomratio Specifiesthecamerafilmsize,anddeterminesthefocallengthofthecamera(hasnoeffect onthecameraview) Displaysthecamerafocallength,basedonfilmsize Specifiestheviewangle;settoadefaultangleof65degrees.Usethecontrolpointtoset theviewangleonthe2Dcamerawiththemouse. Calculatesthepixelsizewhenexportingthecameraview(hasnoeffectonthecamera view) DisplaysthepixelsizebasedontheDPIsetting Scalesthesizeoftheclippingwindowframe Tiltsthecameratotheleftorright,formoreaccurateperspectivematching Specifiesanameforthecamera,whichcanbedisplayedorhiddenin2Dview;movethe cameranametextcontrolpointtoadjustthepositionofthename

LookToHeight

Top/PlanView DisplayCameraView FineTuneCamera View Projection

RenderMode AspectRatio CustomAspect ForFilmSizeof FocalLengthis FieldofView ForDPIof PixelSizeis ClipFrameScale % Left/RightTiltAngle CameraName

588

| Chapter 14: Viewing the Drawing


Description
Selectacameradisplaymode;thecameranameonlydisplaysin2D None:Hidesthecamerain2Dand3Dviews,andhidesthecameraname 2D:Displaysthecamerain2Dview,buthidesthecameraname,andhidesthecamera ina3Dview 3D:Displaysthecamerasperspectiveclippingwindowboundingboxin2Dview, displaysthecamerain3Dview,andhidesthecameraname 2D+3D:Showsthecamerain2Dand3Dviews,buthidesthecameraname 2D+Name:Showsthecameraandcameranamein2Dview,buthidesthecamerain3D views 3D+Name:Showsthecamerain3Dview,showsthecameranamein2Dview,but hidesthecamerain2Dview(displaysalocusinstead) 2D+3D+Name:Showsthecameraandcameranamein2Dview,andshowsthe camerain3Dviews The3Dcameraviewdisplaystheboundingboxofthecameraview,theviewline,andthe looktoendpoint.Displayingacameraina3Dviewallowsittobeeasilyselectedduring designdevelopment,anditcanbehiddenlaterforfinalpresentation

Parameter
CameraDisplay

AutoUpdate3DView

Whenselected,automaticallyupdatesthe3Dcameraviewwitheveryparameterchange; forcomplexmodels,deselectwhenmakingseveralparameterchanges,andtheneither reselectAutoUpdate3DVieworclickDisplayCameraViewtoupdatethecameraview withanyparameterchanges AutomaticallycenterstheviewwhenDisplayCameraViewisclicked,orthecamerais doubleclicked

AutoCenter3DView

Adjusting the Camera View


Thecameraviewsettingscanbefinetunedinrealtime,andthedisplayattributesspecified. Toadjustthecameraview: 1. ClickFineTuneCameraViewfromtheObjectInfopaletteofaselectedcameraobject. ThePerspectiveViewControlsdialogboxopens.Eitherusetheslidersorentervaluestoadjustthecamera settings;changesarereflectedautomaticallyinthedrawing.Changesareeasiertoseeduringadjustmentwhen inwireframeorOpenGLrendermode. ForCameraHeight,LookToHeight,andCameraDistance,thesliderrangeisproportionaltothedisplayed value.Toexpandthesliderrange,enteralargervalue.

Setting a Camera View in Renderworks |

589

Parameter
CameraHeight CameraPan CameraMove Left/Right CameraDistance LookToHeight FocalLength (zoom) Perspective

Description
Movesthecameravertically Pansthecamera,rotatingitaboutitsaxiswithina+/20degreerange,asifitwereonatripod Rotatesthecameraaboutthelooktopoint,withina+/20degreerange Movesthecameratowardsorawayfromthelooktopoint Setstheheightofthelooktopoint,whicheffectivelytiltsthecameravertically Actslikeazoomlens;setsthelensfocallength,from10to200mmandchangesthefieldof viewangle Increasesordecreasestheperspectiveeffect,makingtheperspectivelinesvanishmoreorless steeplyaboutthelooktopoint;worksmosteffectivelywhenthelooktopointisatthecenter ofthesceneorobjectbeingviewed Setstheaspectoftheperspectiveclippingwindow;useinconjunctionwiththeClipFrame Sizetoobtainthedesiredwindowsize

ClipFrame AspectRatio

590

| Chapter 14: Viewing the Drawing


Description
Setsthescaleoftheperspectiveclippingwindow;useinconjunctionwiththeClipFrame AspectRatiotoobtainthedesiredwindowsize Selectsarendermodeforthe3Dcameraview

Parameter
ClipFrameSize RenderMode

2. Acameraobjectcanbecopiedtoinsertadditionalcameraviews.Inaddition,the2Dcameradisplayattributes canbesetbyfillandpenforegroundandbackgroundcolorsintheAttributespalette.Controlpointsadjustthe fieldofviewangle,thelooktopoint,andthecameranamelocation.


Apparent field of view

Field of view angle control point

Look-to point control point

Lens field of view Camera 1

Camera name text control point

Fill/Pen Color Attribute


Fillforeground Fillbackground Penforeground Penbackground

Parameter
Setsthefieldofviewanglecolorwhenthecameraheightishigherthanthelookto height Setsthetextcolorforthecameraname Setsthecoloroftheviewlineconnectingthecameratothelooktopoint,aswellas thecolorofthe3Dcamerarepresentation Setsthecoloroftheangleofviewlines

Thedivergencebetweentheapparentfieldofviewangleandthelensfieldofviewangleincreasesasthe differencebetweenthecameraandlooktoheightsincreases.Whenthecameraandlooktoheightsareequal,the lensfieldofviewangleline(dashedgraylinebydefault)isnotvisible.

Linking the Camera View to a Sheet Layer Viewport


TheviewofasheetlayerviewportcanbecontrolledbyaRenderworkscamera.Establishtheviewwiththe Renderworkscameraonthedesignlayer,andthencreateasheetlayerviewportlinkedtothecamera.Thecamera viewcanbeeditedfromtheviewport. Renderworkscamerascannotbelinkedtosectionviewports. TolinkaRenderworkscameratoasheetlayerviewport: 1. CreateandadjusttheRenderworkscameraasdescribedinSettingaCameraViewinRenderworkson page 586.Acameralinkedtoaviewportcanbeinperspectiveororthogonalprojection.

Fit to Objects |
2. SelecttheRenderworkscamera,andthenselectView>CreateViewport.

591

3. Analertdialogboxaskswhetherthecamerashouldbeusedfortheviewportsview.SelectYes(clickAlwaysdo theselectedactiontoalwaysuseaselectedRenderworkscamerafortheviewwhencreatingviewports). 4. TheCreateViewportdialogboxopens.Enteraviewportnameanddrawingtitle,andselectthesheetlayerto placeiton.Theviewandprojectionparametersaresetbythecamera,andthereforeappeardimmed;the camerasrendermodedoesnotaffecttheviewportsrendermode.Changeanyotherparametersasneeded(see CreatingaSheetLayerViewportfromaDesignLayeronpage 762). 5. ClickOK. Theviewportiscreatedonthespecifiedsheetlayer,withitsview,projection,andperspectivedistancesettothat oftheRenderworkscamera.IntheObjectInfopalette,theRWCamerastatuschangestoYes. Thecamerabecomespartoftheviewportandcanbeedited(ordeleted),changingtheviewportsview parameters,byeditingthecamerathroughtheviewport.Anexistingsheetlayerviewportcanalsobelinkedtoa Renderworkscamera.SeeEditingaLinkedRenderworksCameraonpage 776.

Fit to Objects
TheFittoObjectscommandprovidesaneasywaytozoominandoutofadrawing.Therearetwooptions:fitthe windowaroundalltheobjectsinthedrawing,orfitthewindowaroundaparticularobjectorsetofobjects. Tofitthedrawingwindowaroundallvisibleobjectsinthedrawing: 1. Ensurethatthecurrentlayercontainstheobject(s)toview,andthatnoobjectsareselected. 2. SelectView>Zoom>FittoObjects.Alternatively,clicktheFittoObjectsbuttonontheViewbar. Theprogramzoomsinoroutsothatalltheobjectsinthedrawingdisplayinthedrawingarea.

Tofittheviewtoaparticularobjectorsetofobjects: 1. Ensurethatthecurrentlayercontainstheobject(s)toview. 2. Selecttheobjectorobjectstoview. 3. SelectView>Zoom>FittoObjects.Alternatively,clicktheFittoObjectsbuttonontheViewbar. Theprogramzoomsintodisplayonlytheselectedobject(s)inthedrawingarea.

592

| Chapter 14: Viewing the Drawing

Fit to Page Area


TheFittoPageAreacommanddisplaystheentireprintareainthedrawingwindow.Forasinglepagedrawing,this commanddisplaystheentirepage.Foradrawingwithtwoormorepages,allofthepagesdisplayatonetime. Tofittheprintareainthewindow: SelectView>Zoom>FittoPageArea.Alternatively,clicktheFittoPageAreabuttonontheViewbar. Theprogramzoomsinorouttodisplayallpagesintheprintarea.

Viewing History
Theprogramautomaticallyrecordsahistoryofthelasttenchangesindrawingview,includingprojection,perspective andzoomchanges.ClickthePreviousViewandNextViewbuttonsontheViewbartomovethroughthechange historystack.

Previous View

Next View

OnaWindowssystemwithafivebuttonmouse,buttons4and5onthemouse(whichinvoketheBackandForward commandsinwebbrowsers)invokePreviousViewandNextView,respectively.

Using Working Planes |

593

Using Working Planes


Theworkingplaneisanimportantconceptforworkingin3D.Thissectioncoversallaspectsoftheworkingplane, includingsetting,manipulating,andsavingtheworkingplaneposition.

Understanding the Working Plane


EveryVectorworkslayerhasa3Dplaneassociatedwithit.Whenalayerisactive,this3Dplaneiscalledtheactive layerplane.Theactivelayerplaneprovidesaconstantvisualandlogicalreferenceandisfixedinrelationtotheobjects inthelayer.Inanarchitecturalsense,theactivelayerplaneislikethefloorofabuilding. EveryVectorworksdrawingalsohasaworkingplane.Thelocationoftheworkingplanedefaultstothatoftheactive layerplane,anditisnotseen.However,whenworkingandmodelingin3D,theorientationoftheworkingplanecan bechanged,anditspositionssaved.Theworkingplanecanbemoved,alignedtodifferentobjectsorsurfaces,and rotated,unliketheactivelayerplane,whichremainsconstantattheinternaldrawingcenter. Workingin3Drequiresthecursortosnaptoa3Dlocation.Whennoother3Dsnapisactive(thecursorisnotsnapping to3Dgeometry),thecursorstillneedstosnaptoa3Dlocation;thislocationisthe3Dplanecalledtheworkingplane.

Working plane

Active layer plane

Everyobjectcreatedinthedrawingisplacedinrelationtotheactivelayerplaneforthatlayer,whetheritisplaced directlyonthatplaneorplacedaboveorbelowit.Theworkingplanehelpstoeasilycreateandpositionobjectsin3D space.Itallowsyoutodrawwhileinanisometricviewandpositionobjectsexactlywheretheyareneeded.When changingthelocationoftheworkingplane,theactivelayerplaneremainsdisplayed,providingaconstantframeof referencewhileadjustingtheworkingplane.


Above the working plane

On the working plane

Below the working plane Above the active layer plane

594

| Chapter 14: Viewing the Drawing

Forexample,foradrawingofacomplexmachine,withnumerousgears,cams,rollers,andotherpartsthatintersecton multipleplanes,theworkingplanecanbechangedtodifferentlocationsandanglesinrelationtotheactivelayer plane.Creatingorlocatingobjectsaccordingtotheworkingplaneallowshighlyaccuratepositioningoftheobjectsin 3Dspace.

Cylinder created on working plane

Rectangle created on working plane

Hybridsymbolscanonlybeinsertedonaworkingplanethatisparalleltotheactivelayerplane.Wheninserting ahybridsymbol,iftheworkingplaneisnotparalleltotheactivelayerplane,theworkingplaneismovedto,and alignedwith,theactivelayerplane. Inaddition,sometoolsrequireavectororplane.The3Dviewingtoolscanusetheworkingplanetodefinetheircenter and/oraxisofrotation,whiletheMirrortoolcanmirrortheselected3Dobjectsacrosstheworkingplane.Thelocation of3Dtoolsin3Dspaceistakenfromthepointontheworkingplanedirectlybehindthecursor,orfromasnappointif theyaresnappedtoanobject. Toassistwithdrawingin3Dwithcertaindrawingtools,anautomaticworkingplaneappearsonsuitableobject surfacesasthecursormovesoverdrawingobjectswiththetoolselected.Theautomaticworkingplaneisatemporary workingplanethatdoesnotneedtobeexplicitlyset.Objectscreatedontheautomaticworkingplanearedrawn planartotheautomaticworkingplane,ratherthanonthelayerplane.Thisfacilitatesdrawingplanarobjectswithout theneedtocreateorsaveaworkingplane.Thecolorandopacityoftheautomaticworkingplanecanalsobe customized;seeConfiguringInteractiveDisplayonpage 65.

Automatic working plane

Ifthereisnosuitablesurfaceunderthecursor,theautomaticworkingplanealignstothelayerplane.

Using Working Planes |

595

Whentheautomaticworkingplaneisineffect,AutomaticdisplaysintheActivePlaneslistlocatedontheViewbar.

WhendrawingonaspecificworkingplanethatwasestablishedbytheSetWorkingPlanetool,theautomaticworking planeshouldbeturnedoff.Selectadifferentplanefromthelist,suchasasavedworkingplane,orpressthe \ key (backslash)totoggletheautomaticworkingplaneonandoff.(ThiskeycanbecustomizedintheWorkspaceEditor; seeModifyingSnappingandModeShortcutsonpage 887.)WhenusingaworkingplanetoolsuchastheSet WorkingPlanetool,theautomaticworkingplanedefaultstooff.

The Active Planes List


OntheViewbar,theActivePlaneslistdisplaysthecurrentlyactiveplane,andalsoallowsaplanetobeselected.

Plane
Automatic

Description
Theactiveworkingplanechangesasthecursormovesoverthedrawingareaina3D view.Theautomaticplaneisatemporaryworkingplanethatdoesnotneedtobeset; oversuitablesurfacesandwithcertaindrawingtools,theautomaticplaneisplanarto thesurface.Otherwise,theautomaticplanealignstothelayerplane. Theactiveworkingplaneisplanartothecurrentplaneoftheactivelayer Theactiveworkingplaneisplanartoasavedworkingplaneposition;selectinga workingplanecancelstheautomaticworkingplane. Theactiveworkingplaneisalignedtothescreenplane(planartothecomputer screen)

LayerPlane CustomPlane ScreenPlane

Appearance of the Planes


InanyviewotherthanTop/Plan,thelayerplaneisrepresentedinblue;whenactive,ithasredXandgreenYaxes(an optioninthedisplaypreferencesoftheVectorworkspreferencecanalsoshowtheaxesinTop/Plan).Whenthe

596

| Chapter 14: Viewing the Drawing

workingplaneandtheactivelayerplanearelocatedinthesameposition,onlytheactivelayerplaneisshown. However,oncethepositionoftheworkingplanehasbeenchangedordirectlyset,itisrepresentedonthescreenasa coloredframe.Thecoloroftheactivelayerplaneandappearanceoftheworkingplanecanbecustomizedinthe Vectorworkspreferences;seeInteractivePreferencesonpage 25fordetails. TheaxislinesofboththeworkingplaneandtheautomaticworkingplanearecoloredredforX,greenforY,andblue forZ;dashedaxesrepresentthenegativeaxes.Ina3Dview,theaxesarealwaysvisible.TheZaxisandallaxislabels areoptionallydisplayedbysettingsintheSmartCursorSettingsdialogbox;seeGridSnappingonpage 135.

SimplyclickonanaxiswiththeSetWorkingPlanetooltoselectanddisplaytheworkingplaneanditsgriphandles. Whentheworkingplaneisselected,itdisplayswithcoloredgripsaroundeachaxis,aswellasamovegrip,for manipulatingtheplane.

Theworkingplanecanbemoved,butnotrotated,wheninrotatedplanview(DesignSeriesrequired).SeeRotating thePlanonpage 686intheVectorworksDesignSeriesUsersGuide. Whengridsnappingisenabled,theworkingplanedisplayswithdots;whengridsnappingisoff,thedotsdonot display.Theworkingplanedisplaysslightlydarker,andwithadoublelineframe,whenitisviewedfrombelow. Whentheworkingplaneandtheactivelayerplanearecoincident,theactivelayerplanedisplayswithgridlines. Otherwise,whentheplanesarenotcoincident,thegridlinesdonotdisplayontheactivelayerplane. Dashedgraylinesrepresenttheintersectionofthegroundandworkingplanes.Theactivelayerplanedoesnotdisplay inarenderedview.

Using Working Planes |

597

Working plane with grid snapping enabled

Working plane seen from below

Active layer plane and working plane coincident, and working plane selected; Z axis display enabled

Iftheactivelayerplanegridlinesarenotvisible,selectShowGridintheSmartCursorSettingsdialogbox(see GridSnappingonpage 135).

Setting the Working Plane Location


TheSetWorkingPlanetoolcansetthelocationandangleoftheworkingplane.Settheworkingplanetoanylocation in3Dspace. Doubleclickonaplanarobjecttoreactivatetheworkingplaneonwhichitwascreated. TheSetWorkingPlanetoolhastwomodes:
Three Point Planar Face

Mode
ThreePoint PlanarFace

Description
Definestheworkingplanebythree,3Dpoints,oraccordingtothesurfaceofarenderedobject Alignstheworkingplanetoaplanarface;or,foraNURBScurve,alignstheworkingplane perpendiculartothatpointstangentonthecurve

Oncetheworkingplanelocationhasbeenset,CustomPlanedisplaysintheActivePlaneslistontheViewbar.The locationcanbesaved;seeWorkingPlaneCommandsonpage 601. Theworkingplanecanbequicklysetbasedontheautomaticworkingplanelocation.Rightclick(Windows)or Ctrlclick(Macintosh)ontheautomaticworkingplane,andselectSetWorkingPlanefromthecontextmenu(or selectModify>WorkingPlane>SetWorkingPlane).Theworkingplaneissettomatchtheautomaticworking plane,andtheworkingplaneisactive.

598

| Chapter 14: Viewing the Drawing

With the automatic working plane in the desired location, select Set Working Plane

The working plane is active, set to match the automatic plane

Setting the Working Plane with Three Points


TwomethodsareavailablefordefiningtheworkingplanelocationinThreePointmode.Thefirstmethodallowsthe positionandangleoftheworkingplanetobesetbydefiningtheoriginandaxesofthenewworkingplanelocation. Thesecondmethodsetsthepositionandangleoftheworkingplaneaccordingtoarenderedobjectssurface.

Setting the Working Plane


Tosettheworkingplanewiththreepoints: 1. Ina3Dview,clicktheSetWorkingPlanetoolfromthe3DModelingtoolset,andthenselectThreePointfrom theToolbar. 2. Clicktosetthefirstpoint. Thisbecomestheoriginoftheworkingplane. 3. Clicktosetthesecondpoint. ThissetstheworkingplaneXaxis. 4. Selectthethirdpoint. ThissetstheYaxisfortheworkingplane.Oncethethirdpointisdefined,theworkingplanelocationisset.
2nd click

3rd click 1st click

Using Working Planes | Setting the Working Plane to a Rendered Objects Surface
Theworkingplanecanbedefinedaccordingtothesurfaceofarenderedobject. Tosettheworkingplanetoarenderedobjectssurface:

599

1. Ina3Dview,selectarenderingmodeofUnshadedPolygon,ShadedPolygon,ShadedPolygonNoLines,orFinal ShadedPolygon. 2. ClicktheSetWorkingPlanetoolfromthe3DModelingtoolset,andthenselectThreePointfromtheToolbar. Thecursorchangestoapointinghandwhenoverthesurfaceofarenderedobject. 3. Clickonthesurfacethatdefinestheworkingplanelocation. Theworkingplanelocationissettotheselectedsurface.

Click the rendered surface to use for aligning the working plane

Setting the Working Plane to a Planar Face


PlanarFacemodeisparticularlyusefulwhenaligningtheworkingplanetothetopofanobjectwithoutsharpcorners (likeacylinder);insteadofclickinginthreeplaces,onlytheplanarfaceoftheobjectneedstobeselected. Inaddition,theworkingplanecanbepositionedonaNURBScurve,aligningtheworkingplanesZaxistothecurves tangentdirection.TheabilitytosettheworkingplanetoaNURBScurverequiresoneofthefollowingconditions:a smartpointmustbesetontheNURBScurve,SnaptoObjectmustbeenabled,ortheNearestPointonEdgeobject snappingmustbeenabled. Tosettheworkingplanetoaplanarface: 1. Ina3Dview,clicktheSetWorkingPlanetoolfromthe3DModelingtoolset,andthenselectPlanarFacefrom theToolbar. 2. Asthecursormovesovertheunderlyinggeometry,apreviewoftheworkingplanedisplays.Clicktosetthe workingplanelocation.Theclicklocationbecomestheoriginoftheworkingplane. Theworkingplaneisalignedtotheselectedfaceandremainsselectedformanipulation.Theworkingplaneis deselectedwhentheSetWorkingPlanetoolisnolongeractive.

600

| Chapter 14: Viewing the Drawing

Manipulating the Working Plane


Workingplaneoperationscanbeperformedeitherbyusingthegripsontheselectedplaneorbymenucommands.

Working Plane Grips


Manipulatetheworkingplanebyrotatingaboutanyofthethreeaxes(X,Y,andZ)ormovingtheworkingplane origin. Tomanipulatetheworkingplanedirectly: 1. ClicktheSelectiontoolfromtheBasicpalette. 2. Ina3Dview,selecttheworkingplanebyclickingonitsedgeoranyofitsaxes.Alternatively,doubleclickona planarobjecttoreactivatetheworkingplaneonwhichitwascreated. Theworkingplanemustbeselectedforthegripstobevisible.Anyotherobjectreshapehandlesaretemporarily hidden,toavoidconfusion. 3. Theworkingplanedisplayswithgrips. Eachaxishastwogripsforrotationabouttheothertwoaxes.RedgripsrotateabouttheXaxis,greengrips rotateabouttheYaxis,andbluegripsrotateabouttheZaxis.Movingthecursoroveranaxisdisplaysa previewshowingtherotationdirection.Thebluediamondgripattheworkingplaneoriginmovestheworking plane.

Action
Rotatetheworkingplane

Description
Clickononeoftheaxisgrips.Therotatecursordisplays.Movethecursorto rotatetheplaneabouttheselectedaxis,andclicktoset.

Using Working Planes | Action


Movetheworkingplane

601

Description
Clickonthecentergrip.Themovecursordisplays.Movethecursortomove theplane,andclicktoset.

4. Oncetheworkingplanehasbeenpositioned,presstheEsckey,orclickoffoftheworkingplane.Thepositioncan besavedwithworkingplanecommandsorintheWorkingPlanespalette. UsethegripsincombinationwithSmartCursorcuesforaccuratemanipulationinrelationtootherobjects.

Alignment indicators show that the direction of working plane movement is planar, in this case in the Z and X directions, as indicated by the blue and red planar shading

Y axis is perpendicular to the active layer plane, and the working plane is located above the active layer plane, as indicated by the dashed gray lines

Smart point with extension line

Theworkingplanecanbemoved,butnotrotated,wheninrotatedplanview(DesignSeriesrequired).SeeRotating thePlanonpage 686intheVectorworksDesignSeriesUsersGuide.

Working Plane Commands


Theworkingplanecommandscanselectandmanipulatetheworkingplane.Somecommandshaveequivalentsinthe WorkingPlanespaletteorwheneditingtheworkingplanedirectly. Toaccesstheworkingplanecommands: SelectModify>WorkingPlane. Thesamecommandsareavailablefromthecontextmenuoftheworkingplane.

Command
SelectWorkingPlane

Description
Selectstheworkingplane(alternatively,clickontheplanewiththeSelectiontool orselectEdit>SelectWorkingPlane)

602

| Chapter 14: Viewing the Drawing


Description
Changestheviewtobeperpendiculartotheworkingplane;similartotheTop viewundertheViewmenu,inthatyouarelookingstraightattheworkingplane. ThiscommandisalsoavailablefromtheViewmenu,theViewbar,andthe WorkingPlanespalette. OpenstheAssignNamedialogbox.Enteranametosavetheworkingplane position.ThiscommandisalsoavailablebyclickingAddfromtheWorkingPlanes palette.Onceaworkingplanepositionhasbeensaved,itcanbeaccessedthrough theWorkingPlanespaletteandtheActivePlaneslistontheViewbar. Cyclesthroughthenexttenunsavedpalettepositions Cyclesthroughthelasttenunsavedpalettepositions Ifselectedwhiletheautomaticworkingplaneishighlighted,setstheworking planetomatchtheautomaticworkingplane.Otherwise,setstheworkingplaneto thenextclickedplanarface,similartothePlanarFacemodeoftheSetWorking Planetool(seeSettingtheWorkingPlanetoaPlanarFaceonpage 599) RotatestheworkingplanecoordinatesabouttheZaxisuntiltheXaxisisparallelto theactivelayerplaneandtheYaxisispointingup.Theworkingplaneoriginis unchanged. Alignsallworkingplaneaxestothecorrespondingactivelayerplaneaxes.The workingplaneoriginisunchanged. AlignstheworkingplaneZaxistowardtheviewer;theXaxisisaligned horizontallyandtheYaxisvertically,onthescreen.Theworkingplaneoriginis unchanged. RotatestheworkingplanetotheleftaboutitsXaxisby90degrees RotatestheworkingplanetotherightaboutitsXaxisby90degrees RotatestheworkingplanetotheleftaboutitsYaxisby90degrees RotatestheworkingplanetotherightaboutitsYaxisby90degrees RotatestheworkingplanetotheleftaboutitsZaxisby90degrees RotatestheworkingplanetotherightaboutitsZaxisby90degrees FlipstheworkingplaneaboutitsXaxis FlipstheworkingplaneaboutitsYaxis FlipstheworkingplaneaboutitsZaxis

Command
LookatWorkingPlane

SaveWorkingPlane

NextWorkingPlane PreviousWorkingPlane SetWorkingPlane

AlignWorkingPlaneXAxis withLayerPlane AlignWorkingPlanewith LayerPlane AlignWorkingPlanewith CurrentView RotateAboutXLeft90 RotateAboutXRight90 RotateAboutYLeft90 RotateAboutYRight90 RotateAboutZLeft90 RotateAboutZRight90 FlipX FlipY FlipZ

Whenusingtherotatecommands,leftindicatescounterclockwisewhenviewingtheworkingplaneoriginfromthe positiveXaxis.

The Working Planes Palette


TheWorkingPlanespalette,aswellastheActivePlaneslistontheViewbar,displayworkingplanepositionsthat havebeensetorsavedwhileworkingonadrawing.TheActivePlaneslistallowsyoutoswitchamongdifferentsaved workingplanepositions.Thepaletteallowsyoutoswitchamongworkingplanepositions(savedandunsaved),name andsaveworkingplanepositions,andselecttheworkingplanedisplaymode.Combinethesefeatureswiththe

Using Working Planes |

603

workingplanecommands,theSetWorkingPlanetool,andtheAlignPlanetooltoaccuratelycontroltheplacement andalignmentofobjectsin3Dspace. SomeWorkingPlanespalettefunctionshaveequivalentcommandsontheModify>WorkingPlanemenu. Toopentheworkingplanespalette: SelectWindow>Palettes>WorkingPlanes. TheWorkingPlanespaletteopens.

Accessing Existing Working Plane Positions


Initially,whentheworkingplanepositionhasnotyetbeenchanged,theonlypositionsavedintheWorkingPlanes paletteisthatoftheactivelayerplanelocation,andonlytheactivelayerplaneortheautomaticworkingplaneare availablefromtheActivePlaneslistintheViewbar.Oncethepositionoftheworkingplanehasbeenchanged,there arethreewaystoaccessexistingworkingplanepositions.

Accessing Working Plane Positions from the View Bar


TheActivePlaneslistontheViewbardisplaysandswitchesamongworkingplanepositions.SeeTheViewBaron page 7andTheActivePlanesListonpage 595.Selectingaworkingplanecancelstheautomaticworkingplane. ToaccessworkingplanepositionsfromtheViewbar: WhileinaviewotherthanTop/Plan,selectaworkingplanepositionfromtheActivePlaneslist.

Thecurrentworkingplaneposition,ifithasnotyetbeensaved,displaysasCustomPlane.Thenameofthe currentlyselectedworkingplanepositiondisplaysinbold. Theselectedworkingplanepositiondisplays.

Accessing Working Plane Positions from the Current Drawing Session


Toaccessunsavedworkingplanepositions: 1. SelectWindow>Palettes>WorkingPlanes. TheWorkingPlanespaletteopens. 2. Clicktheleftandrightarrowbuttonstocyclethroughthelasttenunsavedpositionsfromthecurrentdrawing session.Thesepositionsarenotpermanentlysavedwiththedrawing.

604

| Chapter 14: Viewing the Drawing


Alternatively,selecttheNextWorkingPlaneandPreviousWorkingPlanecommandsfromtheModify> WorkingPlanemenu. Onceithasbeensaved,aworkingplanepositioncannolongerbeaccessedwiththeleftandrightarrows.

Saving and Accessing Working Plane Positions


TheworkingplanepositioncanbepermanentlysavedwiththedrawingandaccessedlaterfromtheWorkingPlanes palette.Oncenamed,theplanepositionisnolongerincludedinthelistoftheworkingplanesaccessedbytheleftand rightarrowsontheWorkingPlanespalette. Topermanentlysaveaworkingplaneposition: 1. SelectWindow>Palettes>WorkingPlanes. TheWorkingPlanespaletteopens. 2. Selecttheworkingplanepositiontosave. Theleftandrightarrowscyclethedrawingareathroughthemostrecentworkingplanepositions. 3. ClickAdd.(Alternatively,selectModify>WorkingPlane>SaveWorkingPlane.) TheAssignNamedialogboxopens. 4. Enteranamefortheworkingplaneposition. 5. ClickOK.Savedworkingplanepositionsaredisplayedinalphabeticalorderinthepalette.Toaccessasaved workingplaneposition,doubleclickitsnameintheWorkingPlanespaletteorselectitfromtheActivePlaneslist ontheViewbar.

Deleting and Renaming Working Plane Positions


Withtheexceptionoftheactivelayerplaneposition,anynamedworkingplanepositioninthedrawingcanbedeleted orrenamed.Theactivelayerplanepositionisthedefault,commontoalldrawings,anditcannotbedeletedor renamed.Planesarelistedinalphabeticalorderundertheactivelayerplane. Todeleteaworkingplaneposition: 1. SelectWindow>Palettes>WorkingPlanes. TheWorkingPlanespaletteopens. 2. Selectthedesiredworkingplanefromthelist. 3. ClickDelete.Theworkingplaneisremovedfromthelist. Torenameaworkingplaneposition: 1. SelectWindow>Palettes>WorkingPlanes. TheWorkingPlanespaletteopens.

Using Working Planes |


2. Selectthedesiredworkingplanefromthelist. 3. ClickRename. TheAssignNamedialogboxopens. 4. Enteranew,uniquenamefortheworkingplane. 5. ClickOK.Theworkingplaneisrenamed.

605

Working Plane View and Modes


Thethreebuttonsatthebottomoftheworkingplanespalettecontrolhowtheworkingplaneisviewedandhowit interactswithcertaintoolsandcommands.

Button
LookAtWorkingPlane

Description
Changestheviewtobeperpendiculartotheworkingplane;similar totheTopviewundertheViewmenuinthatyouarelooking straightattheworkingplane Setstheactivelayerplaneasthereferencefortoolssuchasthe Flyovertool,Walkthroughtool,andotherviewingtools;usedwith theFlyovertoolsrotationcentermode SetstheworkingplaneasthereferencefortoolssuchastheFlyover tool,Walkthroughtool,andotherviewingtools;usedwiththe Flyovertoolsrotationcentermode

ActiveLayerPlaneMode

WorkingPlaneMode

Aligning Objects to the Working Plane


Whentheworkingplanehasbeensettothedesiredlocation,itcanbeusedtoposition3Dobjects.Onewaytoalign objectspreciselyin3Dspaceistoalignthemtotheworkingplane.

Setting Objects to the Working Plane with Three Points


Toalignanobjecttotheworkingplanewiththreepoints: 1. Ina3Dview,settheworkingplanelocationasdesired. 2. Selecttheobjecttoaligntotheworkingplane. 3. ClicktheAlignPlanetoolfromthe3DModelingtoolset. 4. Clickalocationontheobjecttoalignwiththeoriginoftheworkingplane. 5. ClickasecondpointontheobjecttodefinetheXaxis. ThelinebetweenthefirstandsecondpointsdefinestheXaxisposition. 6. ClickathirdpointontheobjecttodefinetheYaxis. ThelinebetweenthesecondandthirdpointsdefinestheYaxisposition. Theobjectalignsitselftotheworkingplaneasdefinedbythesepoints.Ifthesurfacewasmistakenlyalignedto thewrongsideoftheworkingplane,usetheMirrortooltofliptheobjecttotheoppositesideoftheworking plane.

606

| Chapter 14: Viewing the Drawing


Third click

Second click First click Object aligned to working plane

Setting a Rendered Objects Surface to the Working Plane


Arenderedobjectcanbealignedtotheworkingplane. Toalignarenderedobjecttotheworkingplane: 1. Selecta3Dviewandarenderingmodeforthedrawing. Thedrawingprojectionmustbeotherthan2DPlan,witharenderingmodeofUnshadedPolygon,Shaded Polygon,ShadedPolygonNoLines,orFinalShadedPolygon. 2. ClicktheAlignPlanetoolfromthe3DModelingtoolset. Thecursorchangestoapointinghandwhenoverthesurfaceofarenderedobject. 3. Clickonthesurfacetoaligntotheworkingplane.

Click the rendered surface to align to the working plane

Theobjectsselectedsurfaceisalignedtotheworkingplane.

Creating and Mapping Textures


Renderworks Commands and Tools

15

WhentheRenderworksproductisinstalled,additionalrenderingcommands,lightsourceparameters,options,and toolsarepresentintheworkspace.Therenderingcommands,tools,andoptionsareintegratedthroughoutthe programinthefollowinglocations:

Item
RenderBitmaptool RenderWorksCameratool AttributeMappingtool VBvisualPlanttool ObjectInfopalette Visualizationpalette ResourceBrowser

Description
Rendersaselectedareawithaspecifiedrenderingmode,creatingabitmap object Createsacameraviewbasedonspecificparameters Addstheabilitytomove,rotate,andresizeatextureona3Dobjectsurface Placeshighquality3Dplantsinthedrawing MapstexturesontoobjectsurfacesusingtheoptionsontheRendertab,and allowstexturestobecreatedand/oredited Accesseslightsandcamerasforquickediting,selection,andmanagement Createsnewstyles,textures,andbackgroundresources,importsresources, andeditsstyles,textures,andbackgrounds;dragatexturetoanobjectto applyit FastRenderworks,FinalQualityRenderworks,CustomRenderworks,and ArtisticRenderworks Setsupbatchrenderingoptionsandexecutesbatchrendering Addsarealights,linelights,andcustomlights,andaddsaccuratelighting parameterstopoint,directionalandspotlights Specifiestextureinformationforclasses Specifiesthebackgroundresourcetoapplytoalayer AppliestheselectedRenderworksstyle Purgesunusedtexturesfromadrawingfile Createsimagepropsfromimagefiles Createsanarealight Createsalinearlight SpecifiestheRenderworksbackgroundresourcetoapplytothelayer

Renderingmodes BatchRendering Additionallightsourcesand parameters EditClass(es)dialogbox EditLayersdialogbox RenderworksStylecommand PurgeUnusedObjectscommand CreateImagePropcommand ConverttoAreaLightcommand ConverttoLineLightcommand SetRenderworksBackground command(VectorworksDesign Seriesrequired) ExportCINEMA4D(3Donly) command SendtoCINEMA4D(3Donly) command

Exportsthefile(3Dobjectsonly)tothe .c4dformat,foruseinCINEMA4D (seeExportingFilesonpage 791) WhenCINEMA4Disalreadyinstalled,exportsthefile(3Dobjectsonly)to .c4dformat,launchestheCINEMA4Dapplication(version12andlater), andopensthefile

608
Item

| Chapter 15: Creating and Mapping Textures


Description
CreatesanHDRfile CreatesaQuickTimeVirtualRealityObjectfile CreatesaQuickTimeVirtualRealityPanoramafile

ExportHighDynamicRange Image(HDRI)command ExportQuickTimeVRObject command ExportQuickTimeVRPanorama command

Migrating Rendered Files from Previous Versions of Renderworks


SignificantchangesandimprovementstorenderingoccurredaftertheRenderworks2010version.TheRenderworks programnowusestheCINEMA4Drenderingengine,whichprovidesmanybenefits,suchasincreasedrendering speed,highqualityrendering,additionalexportoptions,andasimplifiedinterface. Whenopeningpreviousversionfiles,pleasekeepthefollowingpointsinmind. Therenderedappearanceandqualityofconvertedfilesiskeptassimilaraspossible.However,someshaders cannotbematchedexactlyandwillrenderdifferently. Thefollowingshaderswillnotbematched: Corrugated,Spanish,andRomanrooftiles ThefollowingArtisticRenderworksoptionswillnolongerbeavailable: Contour,Mosaic,Stipple,ColorWash,andInkPrintstyles OtherArtisticRenderworksstyleswillnotrenderidenticallyinpreviousversionfiles;however,thenumberof ArtisticRenderworksoptionshasincreased. Arealightsnowemitlightinbothsurfacedirections,notjustinthesurfacenormaldirection.Therefore,some maskinggeometrymayberequiredbehindthearealighttoobtainasimilarrenderedeffecttopreviousversions. LightingandimagebrightnessfrompreviousversionscannowbeadjustedwiththeEmitterBrightness parameterinthelightingoptions(View>Lighting>SetLightingOptions).IfrenderingwithCustom Renderworks,adjustingtheImageExposureparametermayalsohelpmatchapreviouslook. Ifyouhavecreatedcustompluginobjectsinpreviousversions,theshaderrecordnumbershavechanged.

Textures and Shaders


IntheRenderworksproduct,texturesareappliedto3Dobjectstomakethemappearmorerealistic.Texturesare composedofcomponentscalledshaders.Therearefourshadertypes:color,reflectivity,transparency,andbump;each shadermakesanindependentcontributiontotheoveralltextureappearance.Whenyoucreateoredittextures,the shadercomponentsarecombinedorexcludedtoachievethedesiredtextureeffect. Inadditiontousingtextures,realisticmodelscanbeenhancedwiththeuseofbackgrounds,weathereffects,andthe useofimagefilesasprops. Fourshaderscontributetoatexturedefinition.Combiningandadjustingthesecomponentscausesatexturetoappear asanimage,colored,bumpy,shiny,and/ortransparent.Thefollowingtabledefinestheshadertypes:

Creating Textures | Shader


Color Reflectivity Transparency Bump

609

Function
Definessurfacecolor;thiscanbeaplain,uniformcolor,oracomplexpatternlikewoodor marble Definesamountoflightreflectedbysurface;itisdependentonsurfacetexturepropertiesand anylightsources Definessurfacetransparencyoropacity Definessurfaceirregularitieswhichgivethetextureabumpyappearance

Creating Textures
TexturesarecreatedanddisplayedintheResourceBrowserandaresavedwiththefile(defaultcontentis automaticallyimportedintothefileatthepointofuse,anddisplaysintheResourceBrowser);seeDefaultContentin VectorworksFundamentalsandRenderworksonpage 157andUsingtheResourceBrowseronpage 159.Textures arecreatedbydefiningtheshadersthatmakeupthetexture. Alibraryoftextureresourcesisalsoprovidedin[Vectorworks]\Libraries\Defaults\RenderworksTextures. ApplytexturestoanobjectfromtheResourceBrowserorfromtheRendertaboftheObjectInfopalette.SeeApplying andMappingTexturesonpage 635formoreinformation.

Creating a New Texture


Tocreateatextureresource: 1. SelectWindow>Palettes>ResourceBrowsertoopentheResourceBrowser. 2. FromtheResourceslist,selectNewResourcetodisplaytheNewResourcemenu. 3. SelectRenderworksTexture. TheEditTexturedialogboxopens.Specifytheshaderparameters.Shadertypesandpropertiesaredescribedin RenderworksShaderDefinitionsonpage 903.

610

| Chapter 15: Creating and Mapping Textures

Parameter
Name Shaders Color

Description
Specifiesthenameofthetextureresource Setsthetypeofshaderorcombinationofshaderstouse,andspecifiestheshader parameters. Colorshadersapplyacolororpatterntothesurfaceofanobject.Selectacolorshader fromthelist,orchooseObjectAttributetoapplytheobjectsfillcolorattribute. Imagebasedshadersrequiretheselectionofanimagefile(seeCreatingImagebased Shadersonpage 613).Afterselectingtheshader,clickEdittoedittheshaderproperties. Reflectivityshaderscontrolhowmuchlightisreflectedfromasurface.Selecta reflectivityshaderfromthelist(orselectNonetoexcludethistypeofshaderfromthe texture).Imagebasedshadersrequiretheselectionofanimagefile(seeCreating ImagebasedShadersonpage 613).Afterselectingtheshader,clickEdittoeditthe shaderproperties. Transparencyshaderscontrolsurfacetransparencyoropacity.Selectatransparency shaderfromthelist(orselectNonetoexcludethistypeofshaderfromthetexture). Imagebasedshadersrequiretheselectionofanimagefile(seeCreatingImagebased Shadersonpage 613).Maskbasedtransparencyshaderscreateatransparentmaskfrom animagebasedonspecifiedsettings.Afterselectingtheshader,clickEdittoeditthe shaderproperties. Bumpshadersapplyatexturewithbumpsordimplestoanobjectsurface.Selectabump shaderfromthelist(orselectNonetoexcludethistypeofshaderfromthetexture). Imagebasedshadersrequiretheselectionofanimagefile(seeCreatingImagebased Shadersonpage 613).Afterselectingtheshader,clickEdittoedittheshaderproperties.

Reflectivity

Transparency

Bump

Creating Textures | Parameter


Size

611

Description
Setstherealworldsizeforeachrepetitionofthetexture Ifapplyingabrickshader,specifywhethertoadjustthebrickdimensionsproportionally tomatchthechangetothetexturesize.

SetByImage Shadows Cast Receive PreviewOptions PreviewControls

Forimagebasedtextures,openstheSetImageSizedialogbox,tosetthetexturesize usingtheimage(seeSettingtheTextureSizebyImageonpage 611)

Allowsobjectswiththistexturetocastshadows Allowsobjectswiththistexturetoreceiveshadows ThePreviewwindowdisplaystheeffectsofshaderandsizeselectionsonapreview object Adjuststhepreviewpositionandmagnification.ClickPananddragthepreviewtothe desiredlocation.ClickZoomInorZoomOutandthenclickanddragtocreatea marquee;thiszoomsinoroutonaparticularsectionofthepreview.ClickFittofitthe previewtothewindow(accordingtoObjSize). Selectthetypeofpreviewobjectfromthelist;forprocedural(nonimagebased)shaders, theFlatobjecttypeisautomaticallyusedtocreateapreviewforOpenGLrenderingto approximatethelookofthesolidshader Specifiesthepreviewobjectsize Selecttopreviewtheassociatedshader;deselecttoexcludetheshadercomponentfrom thetexturepreview OpenstheIndirectLightingTextureOptionsdialogbox,tosetanyoverridesforthe texturewhenrenderingwithindirectlighting(seeSettingIndirectLightingOptionson page 612) Returnsthetextureparameterstotheoriginalsettings,undoinganychanges

ObjType

ObjSize Shadercheckboxes IndirectLighting Options Revert

4. ClickOKtocreateatexturewiththenameandpropertiesspecifiedintheEditTexturedialogbox.Thetexture displaysintheResourceBrowserandissavedwiththefile(thetexturepreviewintheResourceBrowserusesthe Flatpreviewobjectattwicethetexturesizeforeaseofidentification). Ifyouaremodelingaglassobject(glassreflectivityshader)witha3Dpolygonorothersheetlike3Dobject, duplicateandoffsetthe3Dpolygonbyasmallamountsothatraysaretracedthroughtheglasswithbothan enteringandexitingsurface.

Setting the Texture Size by Image


Forimagebasedshaders,therealworldsizeofeachtexturerepetitioncanbesetbasedonasegmentoftheimage. Tosetthesizeofanimagetexturebasedontheimage: 1. Selecttheimagetouseforthetexture,asdescribedinCreatingImagebasedShadersonpage 613. 2. IntheEditTexturedialogbox,clickSetByImage.Ifseveralimagebasedshadersareused,selecttheshaderwith thedesiredimageintheChooseImagedialogbox. TheSetImageSizedialogboxopens.Redhandlesflashbrieflytoindicatethelocationofthelinesegment.

612

| Chapter 15: Creating and Mapping Textures

3. Specifytheimagelengthtouseforsizingthetexturebydraggingthelinesegmentintoposition,andthen draggingtheendsofthelinesegment.Ifnecessary,usethemousescrollwheeltozoomintoandoutoftheimage, orclickandholdthemousewheelbuttontopan. Whenthelineisindicatingthedesiredrealworldlength,specifytherealworldsizeforthelinesegmentin FeatureSize. 4. ClickOKtoexittheSetImageSizedialogboxandupdatetheSizevalue.

Setting Indirect Lighting Options


Tosaverenderingtime,itispossibletooverridetheindirectlightingsettingsforindividualtextures(seeSetting LightingOptionsonpage 661). Tosetindirectlightingoverridesforatexture: 1. FromtheEditTexturedialogbox,clickIndirectLightingOptions. TheIndirectLightingTextureOptionsdialogboxopens.Specifywhether,andtowhatdegree,thetextureshould overridetheindirectlightingoptions.

Parameter
OverrideIndirectLighting EmitLight ReceiveLight 2. ClickOK.

Description
Setswhetherthetextureshouldparticipateinindirectlightingcalculations. Selectthisoptionifthetextureshouldbothreceiveandemitlight Selectthisoptionifthetextureshouldreceivelightbutnotemitit

Creating Textures |

613

Creating Image-based Shaders


ImagebasedshadersarecreatedfromimagefilesimportedintotheVectorworksfile.Likewrappedshaders,an imagebasedshaderisappliedtothesurfaceofanobject.SeeApplyingandMappingTexturesonpage 635formore information.Differentsettingsarethenrequireddependingonthetypeofshadertobeusedwiththeimage. Multipleimageshaderscanbecombinedtocreatearealistictexture.Forexample,importabrickimagewithmortar joins,andthenaddanimagebumptothebrick.Inaddition,imagebasedshaderscanbecombinedwithnon imagebasedshadertypesforavarietyofeffects. Mostimagebasedtexturesareautomaticallycompressedwhenimported.ImportedJPGfilesretaintheoriginal JPGdata;allotherimagefilesarecompressedusinglosslessPNGformat.

Selecting the Image for Import


Toimportanimageforuseasanimagebasedshader: 1. Createagraphicsfiletobeimportedasashader.Inagraphicsprogram,savetheimageinaformatthatthe Vectorworksprogramcanimport: BMP JPG PCT PNG PNT PSD QTI SGI TIF TGA

2. CreateanewtextureasdescribedinCreatingaNewTextureonpage 609.Fromanyofthefourshader componentlists,selectoneoftheimageshadertypes. 3. Ifaresourcewithanimageisalreadypresentinthefile,theChooseImagedialogboxopens.

Parameter
ImportanImageFile ReuseanImagefrom AnotherResource

Description
Importsanewimage;clickOKandproceedtoStep4. Reusesapreviouslyimportedimage;selecttheresourceorothershader typethatcontainstheimage.ClickOKandproceedtoStep5.

4. SelectthedesiredimagefileintheImportQuickTimeImageDocumentdialogbox.ClickOpen. 5. Thenextdialogboxthatopensdependsonthetypeofshader.Refertothesectionthatappliestotheshader.

614

| Chapter 15: Creating and Mapping Textures


Shader
Color Reflectivity Transparency Bump

Section
ImportingImagesforColorShadersonpage 614 ImportingImagesforReflectivityShadersonpage 615 ImportingImagesforTransparencyShadersonpage 617 ImportingImagesforBumpShadersonpage 621

Importing Images for Color Shaders


Colorshaderscanuseimagesforimagecolorandasafilteredimage.Theimagecolorshadercandisplaytheimage asis,orcantinttheimagewithaspecifiedcolor. Theprocessofselectingacolorimageshaderisillustratedbythefollowingflowchart.
Edit Texture dialog box Image already imported in file No image previously imported

Color shader image color Import new image

Choose Image dialog box

Open File dialog box

Reuse image

Edit Image Color dialog box

Image appears in Preview window

Toimportacolorimageshader: 1. SelectandimporttheimageasdescribedinSelectingtheImageforImportonpage 613. TheEditImageColordialogboxopens. 2. SpecifytheimagebasedshaderpropertiesandclickOKtoimporttheimageandpreviewthetexture.

Creating Textures |

615

Parameter
Imagepreview TileImage FilterColor Nofilter UseObjectFill UseChosenColor ChangeImage FlipH/V Rotate Invert

Description
Editstotheimagearedisplayedintheimagepreview Repeatstheimageinthehorizontal,vertical,orhorizontalandvertical directions;deselectfornotiling

Doesnotchangetheimagewithafiltercolor Filtersthecoloroftheimagebythefillcolorselectedfortheobject(canbe differentforeachobjectthatistexturedbythistexture) Tintstheimagewiththeselectedcolor;clickthecolorboxtochooseafiltercolor fortheimage Selectsadifferentimageforimport Flipstheimagehorizontallyorvertically Rotatestheimage90counterclockwise Producesanegativeoftheimage

Importing Images for Reflectivity Shaders


Theprocessofselectingareflectivityshaderisillustratedbythefollowingflowchart.

616

| Chapter 15: Creating and Mapping Textures


Edit Texture dialog box Image already imported in file No image previously imported

Reflectivity image-based shader Import new image

Choose Image dialog box

Open File dialog box

Reuse image

Edit Image Reflectivity dialog box

Image appears in Preview window

Toimportareflectivityimagebasedshader: 1. SelectandimporttheimageasdescribedinSelectingtheImageforImportonpage 613. TheEditImageReflectivitydialogboxopens. 2. SpecifytheimagebasedshaderpropertiesandclickOKtoimporttheimageandpreviewthetexture.

Parameter
Imagepreview ChangeImage FlipH/V Rotate

Description
Editstotheimagearedisplayedintheimagepreview Selectsadifferentimageforimport Flipstheimagehorizontallyorvertically Rotatestheimage90counterclockwise

Creating Textures | Parameter


Invert Reflection(%) Blurriness(%)

617

Description
Producesanegativeoftheimage Setstheamountofreflection.Generally,whitepixelsarethemostreflective,whilecolored pixelsreflectintheircolor. Setshowblurrythereflectionappears.Arangeof040%istypical.

Importing Images for Transparency Shaders


Transparencyshaderscanbecreatedfromimagesorimagemasks.

Image Transparency
Theprocessofselectinganimagetransparencyshaderisillustratedbythefollowingflowchart.
Edit Texture dialog box Image already imported in file No image previously imported

Image Transparency shader Import new image

Choose Image dialog box

Open File dialog box

Reuse image

Edit Image Transparency dialog box

Image appears in Preview window

Toimportanimagetransparencyshader: 1. SelectandimporttheimageasdescribedinSelectingtheImageforImportonpage 613. TheEditImageTransparencydialogboxopens. 2. SpecifytheimagebasedshaderpropertiesandclickOKtoimporttheimageandpreviewthetexture.

618

| Chapter 15: Creating and Mapping Textures

Parameter
Imagepreview IndexofRefraction

Description
Editstotheimagearedisplayedintheimagepreview Aslightmovesthroughamedium,theindexmeasuresthechangeinthe directionofthelightsrays.Anindexof1.0indicatesnone;atypicalvaluefor waterandiceis1.3,andforglassuse1.51.6. SetsimageblurringwhenrenderedinFinalQualityorCustomRenderworks (withBlurrinessselected) Clickthecolorboxtoselectacolorthattheobjectmayabsorbdifferently,making itappeartintedbythatcolor DefinesthedistanceraysoflighthavetotravelbeforeAbsorptionColorreplaces theimagecolor.Thelowerthevalue,themoreintensetheAbsorptionColoris. Selectsadifferentimageforimport Flipstheimagehorizontallyorvertically Rotatestheimage90counterclockwise Producesanegativeoftheimage

Blurriness(%) AbsorptionColor AbsorptionDistance ChangeImage FlipH/V Rotate Invert

SeeTransparencyShadersonpage 924formoredetailsabouttransparencyparameters.

Mask Transparency
Theprocessofselectingamasktransparencyshaderisillustratedbythefollowingflowchart.

Creating Textures |
Edit Texture dialog box Image already imported in file No image previously imported

619

Image Mask Transparency shader Import new image

Choose Image dialog box

Open File dialog box

Reuse image

Edit Image Mask dialog box

Create transparent color mask Create Transparent Color Mask dialog box

Image appears in Preview window

Tocreateamasktransparencyimagebasedshader: 1. SelectandimporttheimageasdescribedinSelectingtheImageforImportonpage 613. 2. TheEditImageMaskdialogboxopens.

Parameter
Horizontal/Vertical Repetitions Single Infinite Custom

Description
Specifiesthenumberofrepetitionsofthemaskshaderinthehorizontalandvertical direction Themaskshaderdoesnotrepeat;itisonlyshownonce(thisisthetypicalsetting,especially fordecals) Themaskshaderrepeatsinfinitelyinthehorizontaland/orverticaldirection Themaskshaderrepeatsthespecifiednumberoftimes

620

| Chapter 15: Creating and Mapping Textures


Description
Selecttosmooththeedgesoftheimagemask Selectsadifferentimageforimport Editsthetransparentcolormasksettings Flipstheimagehorizontallyorvertically Rotatestheimage90counterclockwise Producesanegativeoftheimage;usefulforswappingtheopaqueandtransparentareasof agrayscalemask

Parameter
AntiAliased ChangeImage TransparentColor Mask FlipH/V Rotate Invert

3. Tousetheimageasamask,clickTransparentColorMask;theCreateTransparentColorMaskdialogboxopens. SelectthemaskpropertiesandclickOK. Thesourceimagemustbemorethaneightbitcolortocreateatransparentcolormask.Imageswitha monochromebackgroundareeasiesttousewhencreatingamasktransparency.

White pixels are opaque Black pixels are transparent

Parameter
SourceImage

Description
Displaystheimportedimage.Selectthetransparentcolorbyclickingacolorintheimage; theresultingmaskisdisplayedintheTransparentColorMaskpreview.Ifnecessary,usethe mousescrollwheeltozoomintoandoutoftheimage,orclickandholdthemousewheel buttontopan. Displaysthecurrenttransparentcolor.Eitherclickonthesourceimagetodesignatethe transparentcolor,orselectthecolorbyclickingthecolorbox. Displaysapreviewofthemaskbasedonthecurrenttransparentcolorselectionand settings Adjuststhetransparencytolerance;dragtheslidertotherighttoincreasethetolerance level.Thisallowsawiderrangeofpixelssimilartothetransparentcolortobeconsidered transparent.

TransparentColor TransparentColor Mask ColorMatching Tolerance

Creating Textures | Parameter


MaskContrast

621

Description
Adjuststhemaskedgecontrast;increasetheedgecontrastsharpnessbydraggingtheslider totheright.Softenthecontrastbydraggingtheslidertotheleft.

4. ClickOK.ThemaskispreviewedintheEditImageMaskdialogbox. 5. ClickOKagain.TheimportedmasktransparencyispreviewedintheEditTexturedialogbox.

Importing Images for Bump Shaders


Theprocessofselectingabumpshaderisillustratedbythefollowingflowchart.
Edit Texture dialog box Image already imported in file No image previously imported

Bump image-based shader Import new image

Choose Image dialog box

Open File dialog box

Reuse image

Edit Image Bump dialog box

Image appears in Preview window

Toimportabumpimagebasedshader: 1. SelectandimporttheimageasdescribedinSelectingtheImageforImportonpage 613. TheEditImageBumpdialogboxopens. 2. SpecifytheimagebasedshaderpropertiesandclickOKtoimporttheimageandpreviewthetexture.

622

| Chapter 15: Creating and Mapping Textures

Parameter
Imagepreview ChangeImage FlipH/V Rotate Invert BumpStrength(%)

Description
Editstotheimagearedisplayedintheimagepreview Selectsadifferentimageforimport Flipstheimagehorizontallyorvertically Rotatestheimage90counterclockwise Producesanegativeoftheimage;usefulforreversingthehighandlowpixelsforabump image Setstheamplitudeofthebumpshader.Positiveandnegativevaluescanbeentered.Avalue of10%wouldresultinamildbumpyappearance.

WhenyouusethemonochromatictexturesprovidedwiththeVectorworksprogram,theBumpStrength parametermayrequirecarefuladjustmentdependingontheviewingdistancefromthemodel. Duetocompressionartifacts,JPGimagesgenerallydonotworkwellasbumpimages.PNGandTIF compressionworkswellforbumpimages;whenimportingimages,selectPNGratherthanJPGasthe compressionmethod.

Editing Textures and Shaders


Alltextures,whethercreatedbyyou,selectedfromdefaultcontent,orimportedfromtheresourcesincludedwiththe Vectorworksprogram,canbeeditedbychangingtheparametersoftheshadersthatmakeupthetexture.Thisediting canbedonefromtheObjectInfopalette,withthechangestothetexturereflectedimmediatelyintheselectedobject. Alternatively,thetexturecanbeeditedfromtheResourceBrowser. Alibraryoftextureresourcesisprovidedin[Vectorworks]\Libraries\Defaults\RenderworksTextures.

Editing Textures and Shaders of Selected Objects


ThetexturesandshadersofaselectedobjectcanbeediteddirectlythroughtheTexturemenuontheRendertabofthe ObjectInfopalette.TheTexturemenuallowsthetexturesandshadersthatmakeupthetexturestobeedited,with changesdisplayedimmediatelyinthedrawing.ThetexturemappingcanalsobeeditedfromtheObjectInfopalette; seeApplyingaTexturetoanObjectonpage 639.

Editing Textures and Shaders |

623

Toavoidmakingunwantedpermanentchangestoatextureresourcethatisusedbyseveralobjects,select Duplicate(TextureName)ResourceandEditandworkonacopyofthetextureresourceinsteadoftheoriginal. Changesmadetoacopyofthetextureonlyapplytothecurrentselection.

Editing the Texture Resource


Toeditthetextureresourceofaselection: 1. Selectthedesiredtexturedobject(s). 2. OntheRendertaboftheObjectInfopalette,clickthearrownexttothetexturenametoopentheTexturemenu. 3. SelectEdit(TextureName)Resourcetoeditthecurrenttexture,orselectDuplicate(TextureName)Resource andEdittomakeacopyoftheresourceforediting. TheEdit(TextureName)dialogboxopens,andapreviewwindowiscreatedaroundtheselectedobject. Theparametersarethesameasthoseusedtocreatethetexture;anychangesarereflecteddirectlyinthe drawing.

624

| Chapter 15: Creating and Mapping Textures


Description
Selectadifferentoradditionalshader,oredittheshaderparameters,asdescribed inCreatingTexturesonpage 609 Setstherealworldsizeforeachrepetitionofthetexture Forimagebasedshaders,clicktosettherealworldsizeinrelationtoasegmentof theimage(ifseveralimagebasedshadersareused,selecttheshaderinthe ChooseImagedialogboxfirst).IntheSetImageSizedialogbox,specifythe texturelengthtouseforsizingbydraggingtheendsofthelinesegment.Then, specifytherealworldsizeforthelinesegmentinFeatureSize.ClickOKtoexit theSetImageSizedialogboxandupdatetheSizevalue. Thesizeshouldreflectthefilesetup.Forexample,ifthelayerscaleis1/4andfeet andinchesarebeingused,thesizeshouldbeinfeet,notinches.

Parameter
Shaders Size SetByImage

Shadows Cast Receive IndirectLightingOptions Allowsobjectswiththistexturetocastshadows(forrenderingmodesthatdisplay shadows) Allowsobjectswiththistexturetoreceiveshadows(forrenderingmodesthat displayshadows) OpenstheIndirectLightingTextureOptionsdialogbox,tosetanyoverridesfor thetexturewhenrenderingwithindirectlighting(seeSettingIndirectLighting Optionsonpage 612).

PreviewOptions RenderMode UpdateWhenValues Change RenderSelectedObject Only (TextureName)isUsedby Selectarenderingmodeforthepreviewwindow;thisdoesnotchangethe drawingrenderingmode SelecttorenderthepreviewwiththeselectedRenderModeasparameters change;ifdeselected,thedrawingisnotupdateduntilthedialogboxisclosed Selecttorenderonlytheselectedobjectasparameterschange;deselecttorender objectswithinthepreviewwindowasparameterschange Indicatesthenumberofobjectsinthefilewiththecurrenttextureapplied

Editing the Shader


Ifonlytheshaderparametersrequireediting,theycanbeaccessedquicklyfromtheTexturemenuratherthanediting thetexturefirst. Toeditoneoftheshadersthatmakesupthetextureofaselection: 1. Selectthedesiredtexturedobject(s). 2. OntheRendertaboftheObjectInfopalette,clickthearrownexttothetexturenametoopentheTexturemenu. 3. SelectEdit(ShaderName)Shadertodirectlyeditoneoftheshadersthatmakesuptheappliedtexture. TheEdit(ShaderName)Shaderdialogboxopens,andapreviewwindowiscreatedaroundtheselectedobject. Theparametersarethesameasthoseusedtocreatetheshader;anychangesarereflecteddirectlyinthedrawing.

Editing Textures and Shaders |

625

Editing Textures and Shaders Through the Resource Browser


AtextureanditsshaderpropertiescanbeeditedfromtheResourceBrowser.Thetexturedoesnothavetobeapplied toanyobjectstobeeditedinthisway;changesaredisplayedinapreviewwindowratherthandirectlyinthedrawing. Toeditatextureresource,includingitsshaders,fromtheResourceBrowser: 1. FromtheResourceBrowser,selectthetexturetobechanged,andthenselectEditfromtheResourcesmenu. TheEditTexturedialogboxopens.

626

| Chapter 15: Creating and Mapping Textures

2. ClickEdittoeditoneoftheshadersthatmakeupthetexture.Thedialogboxthatopensdependsontheshader. DescriptionsofallthepossibleparametersarepresentedinalphabeticalorderinShaderTypesonpage 903. 3. ClickOKtoexittheshaderproperties. 4. EditthetexturepropertiesasdescribedinCreatingTexturesonpage 609.Thetexturecanalsoberenamed. Thechangesaredisplayedinthepreviewwindow. 5. ClickOKtoexittheEditTexturedialogbox.Texturesappliedtoanyobjectsareupdatedtoreflectthechanges.

Creating Image Prop Objects


TheRenderworksproductallowstheinsertionofpropobjectsmadefromimportedimages,suchastrees,people, signs,andcars,tomakeamodellookmorerealistic.AnimagepropmustbeinoneoftheformatslistedinSelecting theImageforImportonpage 613.Mostimagebasedtexturesareautomaticallycompressedwhenimportedintoa Vectorworksfile.ImportedJPGfilesretaintheoriginalJPGdata;allotherimagefilesarecompressedusinglossless PNGformat. Forproperdisplaywhenrendered,animagepropshouldhaveafillstyleotherthanNoneintheAttributes palette. Animageimportedforuseasapropissavedasatextureresource.Alibraryofimagepropresourcesisprovidedin [Vectorworks]\Libraries\Image Props. Toaddanimageprop: 1. SelectModel>CreateImageProp. 2. Ifaresourcewithanimageisalreadypresentinthefile,theChoosePropImagedialogboxopens.

Creating Image Prop Objects |

627

Parameter
ImportanImageFile ReuseanImagefromAnotherResource

Description
Importsanewimage;clickOKandproceedtoStep3. Reusesapreviouslyimportedimage;selecttheresourcethatcontains theimage.ClickOKandproceedtoStep4.

3. SelectthedesiredimagefileintheOpen(Windows)orImportQuickTimeImageDocument(Macintosh)dialog box.ClickOpen. 4. TheImagePropOptionsdialogboxopens.Specifytheparametersfortheimageprop.

Parameter
Name Dimensions LockAspectRatio MaskOptions NoMask

Description
Specifyanamefortheimageprop(usedforthetextureandsymbolname) Specifiestheimagepropsheightandwidthvalues Maintainstheimagesaspectratiowhenselected;editingonedimension automaticallychangestheother

Specifiesthatnoimagemaskingistobeusedfortheimportedimage

628

| Chapter 15: Creating and Mapping Textures


Description
Specifiesthatimagemaskingistobeused;clickCreateMasktospecifythe maskimageandpropertiesasdescribedinMaskTransparencyonpage 618 Createstheillusionofobjectfullnessbycreatingtwoimageplanesata90 degreeangletoeachother

Parameter
UseMask CrossedPlanes

Crossed planes deselected

Crossed planes selected

ConstantReflectivity CreatePlugInObject AutoRotatetoViewer CreateSymbol

Excludesthepropfromtheeffectsoflightobjectsplacedinthedrawing;thisis usefulforimagesthatalreadycontainshadowedareas Createsapluginobjectoutoftheprop;thisallowstheproptoberesizedand automaticallyrotated Adjuststhepluginobjectsothatitisalwaysrenderedfacingtheviewer Createsasymbolfromtheimageprop;theimagepropnameisautomatically assignedasthesymbolname.Generatingtheimagepropasasymbolallows theimageproptobeeasilyreinsertedinthedrawing.

SelectAutoRotatetoViewerforcrossedplaneimages,sothatthecrossedplanescannotbedetected. 5. ClickOKtocreatetheimageprop. TheimagepropsymbolparameterscanbeeditedintheObjectInfopalette.IntheResourceBrowser,theimage propislistedasasymbol/pluginobject,ifselectedatcreation.Inaddition,atextureiscreatedforusebythe imageprop.Boththetextureand,ifcreated,thesymbol/pluginobject,areassignedthenameprovidedinthe ImagePropOptionsdialogbox.

Adding 3D Plants
Manydesignshaveaneedforplantsthatrenderquicklyandappearmorerealisticthanimagepropobjects.The Renderworksproductincludesseveralhighquality3DplantsfromVBvisual,makersof3Dcontentforrendering packages.Theseplantslookauthenticinallviewsandcastrealisticshadows,withoutaddingexcessivelytorendering timesorfilesize.TheRenderworksproductincludesthreefreeplants;moreplantscanbepurchasedtoaddtothe libraryof3Dplants.

Creating Layer Backgrounds |

629

Toplacea3Dplant: 1. ClicktheVBvisualPlanttoolfromtheVisualizationtoolset. 2. SelecttheplanttoinsertfromtheVBvisualPlantlistontheToolbar. 3. Clicktoinserttheselectedplantintothedrawing. Whenapplicable,thelowresolution,summerversionoftheplantisinsertedbydefault.Theplantincludesa3D locussoitcanbeeasilymoved;inaddition,theplantcanbesenttothesurfaceofasitemodel(seeSending ObjectstotheModelSurfaceonpage 301intheVectorworksDesignSeriesUsersGuide).Inplanview,a2D versionoftheplantdisplays. TheobjectpropertiescanbeeditedfromtheObjectInfopalette.Theoptionsavailabledependontheselectedplant type.

Parameter
Name Height Resolution Season

Description
Selecttheplantspeciesfromthelistofincludedorpurchasedplants,orclickMore Plantstopurchaseadditionalplants Selecttheplantheightfromthelistofavailableheightsfortheselectedplant Certainplantsincludebothalowandhighresolutionversion.Selectingahigh resolutionprovidesthebestappearance,buttakeslongertorender. Selecttheseasonfortheplanttodisplay

MoreplantsareavailableforpurchaseinVectorworksfileformatfromVBvisual.Purchasedplantsmustbeplacedin thedefaultcontentlibraryfoldernamedVBvisualPlant(seeDefaultContentinVectorworksFundamentalsand Renderworksonpage 157).

Creating Layer Backgrounds


WiththeRenderworksproduct,backgroundscanbeaddedtocreateamorerealisticdrawing.Backgrounds,suchas clouds,acolororcolorgradient,oranimportedimageorpanorama,areappliedonaperlayerbasis.Inaddition,a speciallitfogeffectcanaddtheillusionofshaftsoflightinfogtopointorspotlightsources.

630

| Chapter 15: Creating and Mapping Textures

RenderworksbackgroundsareresourcesthatarecreatedanddisplayedintheResourceBrowserandaresavedwith thefile(defaultcontentisautomaticallyimportedintothefileatthepointofuse,anddisplaysintheResource Browser);seeDefaultContentinVectorworksFundamentalsandRenderworksonpage 157.

Creating a Background
Tocreateabackground: 1. SelectWindow>Palettes>ResourceBrowsertoopentheResourceBrowser. 2. FromtheResourcesmenu,selectNewResourcetodisplaytheNewResourcemenu. 3. SelectRenderworksBackground. TheEditRenderworksBackgrounddialogboxopens.

4. Enterthenameofthenewbackgroundandselectthetypeofbackgroundtocreate.ClickOptionstosetspecific backgroundparameters.

Parameter
None Clouds Scale

Description
Selectthisoptionwhencreatingalitfogeffectwithoutanadditionalbackground Specifiesaskybackgroundwithabackgroundcolorandclouds Specifiesthecloudscale(110);enteralargervalueforlargercloudsizes

Creating Layer Backgrounds | Parameter


BackgroundColor CloudColor Detail OneColor TwoColor TopColor BottomColor Image ImageEnvironment (HDRI) LitFog

631

Description
Selectabackgroundcolorforthesky Selectacloudcolor Specifiesthelevelofcloudresolution;dragtheslidertotherighttospecifya greaterlevelofdetail(requireslongerrenderingtimes) Specifiesabackgroundwithonecolor;clickOptionstoselectthecolor Specifiesabackgroundwithtwocolorswhichblendtoformagradient;click Optionstoselectthecolors Selectthecolorforthestartofthecolorgradientatthetopofthepage Selectthecolorfortheendofthecolorgradientatthebottomofthepage Usesaspecifiedimageforthebackground(seeCreatingImageBackgroundson page 631) UsesapanoramicHighDynamicRangeImage(HDRI)fileforthebackground(see CreatingHDRIBackgroundsonpage 632) Createsvolumetriclightingeffects,suchasashaftorconeofscatteredlightinfog, haze,orsmoke.Apointorspotlightobjectmustbeinsertedinthedrawing,and LitFogmustbeselectedintheObjectInfopaletteforthelightsourceobject. Litfogcannotbeappliedtodirectional,area,orlinelights.

FogDensity(%) FogConsistency ReceiveShadows

Specifiesthefogdensity;enteralargervaluetoincreasethedensityoftheeffect Createseitherasmoothorunevenfogeffect Allowstheeffecttobeblockedbysolidobjects,creatingshadows;forexample, whenblockingashaftoflightbyatable,sothatlightdoesnotdisplayunderthe table UseShadowsmustalsobeselectedintherenderingoptions.

OpenGLrendermodeonlydisplaysOneColor,TwoColor,andImagebackgrounds. 5. ClickOKfromtheCreateRenderworksBackgrounddialogboxtocreatethebackgroundresource. ThenewbackgroundresourceislistedintheResourceBrowser.ItisavailableintheEditDesignLayersdialog box(seeApplyingRenderworksBackgroundsonpage 656forinformation). ARenderworksbackgroundcanbequicklyeditedbypressingCtrl(Windows)orOption(Macintosh)and doubleclickingontheresourceintheResourceBrowser. Backgroundsandlitfogeffectscanbeusedtogether. Texturesandbackgroundsthatarenotusedinthedrawingfileshouldbepurgedtoreducefilesize.See PurgingItemsfromaFileonpage 270.

Creating Image Backgrounds


Tobeusedforabackground,animagemustbeinoneoftheformatslistedinSelectingtheImageforImporton page 613.

632

| Chapter 15: Creating and Mapping Textures

Tocreateanimagebackground: 1. CreatethebackgroundresourceasdescribedinCreatingLayerBackgroundsonpage 629. 2. SelectImagefromtheBackgroundlist. 3. Selectanewimageoranimagefromeitherthedefaultcontentorthecurrentfilescontent(seeDefaultContent inVectorworksFundamentalsandRenderworksonpage 157). TheEditImageBackgrounddialogboxopens;specifytheimageheightandwidth(centeredonthepage).An imageusedasabackgroundofthistype,asopposedtotheHDRIbackground,remainsfixedtothepageand doesnotchangeaccordingtothe3Dview. Animagecanalsobereusedfromanotherimagebasedresourceifoneexistsinthefile.IntheChooseImage dialogbox,selectReuseanImagefromAnotherResourceandspecifytheresource.TheEditImageBackground dialogboxopenstoalloweditingofimageparameters(seeSelectingtheImageforImportonpage 613for moreinformation).

Parameter
Width Height ChangeImage FlipH/V Rotate Invert

Description
Setsthewidthoftheimageinpageunits(inchesormillimeters);widtheditsalso automaticallychangetheheight,tomaintaintheimageaspectratio Setstheheightoftheimageinpageunits(inchesormillimeters);heighteditsalso automaticallychangethewidth,tomaintaintheimageaspectratio Selectsadifferentimageforimport Flipstheimagehorizontallyorvertically Rotatestheimage90counterclockwise Producesanegativeoftheimage

4. ClickOKtousetheimageinthebackground.

Creating HDRI Backgrounds


WhenanHDRIbackgroundisimported,itbehavesasifaninfinitelylarge,textured,sphereorcubewascenteredon themodel.Thevirtualsphereorcubeissolargethatviewpositionchangesdonotaffectitsdisplay.However,view orientationchangesdoaffectwhichpartoftheimageisshowninthebackground;thisprovidesatrue3Dsensetothe model.OnebounceofindirectlightingisgeneratedwithHDRIlighting.

Creating Layer Backgrounds |

633

Bydefault,animageenvironmentbackgroundrendersasbothabackgroundandalightsource.However,itis possibletouseoneHDRIbackgroundresourceasanenvironmentbackground,andanotherforenvironmentlighting; seeSettingLightingOptionsonpage 661.

Purpose of HDRI Background Resource


UseanHDRIbackgroundresourceasboth environmentbackgroundandenvironment lighting UseanHDRIbackgroundasenvironment backgroundonly UseanHDRIbackgroundresourceas environmentlightingonly UseoneHDRIbackgroundresourceasan environmentbackgroundandadifferent backgroundresourceforenvironment lighting

Creation Method
CreateanHDRIbackgroundresourceandapplyittothelayer.By default,theLayerLightingOptionsissettousethelightingfrom thecurrentbackground. CreateanHDRIbackgroundresourceandapplyittothelayer.In theLayerLightingOptionsdialogbox,specifyNonefor EnvironmentLighting. CreateanHDRIbackgroundresource,butdonotapplyittothe layer.IntheLayerLightingOptionsdialogbox,selectFrom SelectedBackgroundandspecifytheresource. CreatethefirstHDRIbackgroundresourceandapplyittothelayer (environmentbackground).Createthesecondbackgroundresource butdonotapplyittothelayer.Instead,intheLayerLighting Optionsdialogbox,selectFromSelectedBackgroundandspecify thesecondresource(environmentlighting).

HDRIbackgroundsrenderbestinPerspectiveprojection.InOrthogonalprojection,HDRIbackgroundsare suitableforlightingandreflections,butappearasasinglebackgroundcolorbecauseofthenarrowfieldofview. IftheHDRIbackgroundincludesasuninitsimage,andthedrawingalsocontainsdirectionallights,thelight directionsmaynotmatch,creatingmultipleshadows. TocreateanHDRIbackground: 1. CreatethebackgroundresourceasdescribedinCreatingLayerBackgroundsonpage 629. 2. SelectImageEnvironment(HDRI)fromtheBackgroundlist. 3. Selectthe .hdrimagefiletouse.TheimageisautomaticallyconvertedtoLat/Longformat.AnOpenEXRfilecan alsobeused;itmustbeinLat/Longformat. TheEditImageEnvironment(HDRI)Backgrounddialogboxopens.

634

| Chapter 15: Creating and Mapping Textures

Parameter
Preview Rotation

Description
Displaysapreviewoftheselectedimage RotatestheimageclockwiseabouttheZaxis,changingthelightorientationand visibleportionoftheimage(range:180to180degrees;positiveanglesarerotated clockwise) ImportsadifferentimagetouseastheHDRIbackground Specifiesthebrightnessforenvironmentlighting;enterapercentageordragtheslider tochangethebrightness.Avalueover100%canbeentered. Specifiesthecolorsaturationforenvironmentlighting;enterapercentageordragthe slidertochangethesaturation.Avalueover100%canbeentered. Specifiesthesamplingvalueoftherenderedimage;higherqualitysamplingresultsin betterimageresolution,butlongerrenderingtimes.SelectFromRenderModetouse theSoftShadowsqualityspecifiedintherenderoptions(seeCustomRenderworks Optionsonpage 694).

ChangeImage Brightness(%) Saturation(%) Quality

4. ClickOKtousetheimageasanenvironmentbackgroundresource.

Applying and Mapping Textures |

635

Applying and Mapping Textures


Onceatextureresourcehasbeencreated,itcanbeappliedeithertoaselectedobjectortoobjectsassignedtoaclass. Mappingspecifieshowatextureisappliedtoanobject;differenttypesofobjectsrequiredifferentmappingtypes. 2Dobjectscannothaveatextureapplied;inthiscase,theRendertaboftheObjectInfopalettedisplaysthe messageCannotapplytexturetoobject. Whenyouselectatextureableobject,theRendertaboftheObjectInfopalettedisplayscontrolstoassignatextureand adjustthetexturemappingtoachievevariousvisualeffects.Theresultoftheseparameterchangesisvisible immediatelyinthedrawing,astheselectedobjectisrerendered.Someobjectshavespecificparts,whichcanhave differenttexturesandmappingtypes;forexample,thetextureandmappingtypeappliedtotheToppartmightbe differentfromthoseappliedtotheSides.Forsomemappingtypes,youcanthenusetheAttributeMappingtoolto adjustthetexturemappingdirectly. Decalsarespecialtexturesthatareappliedoverothertextures.Theyarecreatedfromimportedimagesorexisting textureresources. Finally,aRenderworksbackgroundcanbeappliedtoaddimpactandrealismtothedesign.

Texture Projection and Orientation


Map Types
Amaptypeisusedtocontrolhowatextureisprojectedontodifferenttypesofobjectsinageneralway.Plane, autoalignplane,sphere,cylinder,perimeter,androofmappingtypesareavailable.Tofurtheradjustthemapping,the projectedtexturecanberotated,moved,andscaledusingtheRendertaboftheObjectInfopalette.Forplane,sphere, andcylindermappingtypes,youcanusetheAttributeMappingtooltoadjustthemappingdirectlyontheobject. SelectthemaptypefromtheObjectInfopalette;seeApplyingaTexturetoanObjectonpage 639.

Map Type
Plane

Description
Projectsthetextureontoaplane
Texture frame (showing the first repetition of the texture)

Mapping surface (a plane parallel to a face of the object)

Editing a plane map with the Attribute Mapping tool

636

| Chapter 15: Creating and Mapping Textures


Description
Projectsthetextureperpendicularlytoeachfaceofapolygonalobject;mappingishandled automatically.Thistypeofmappingisusefulforwallsculpting,andforimported3ds (VectorworksDesignSeriesrequired)orDXF/DWGcontent.Donotusethismaptypefordecals. (AttributeMappingtoolnotsupported)

Map Type
AutoAlign Plane

Sphere

Projectsthetexturetothesurfaceofasphere
Mapping surface representation (a cross-section of the sphere) Texture projection line

Radius control

Texture frame (showing the first repetition of the texture)

Editing a sphere map with the Attribute Mapping tool

Applying and Mapping Textures | Map Type


Cylinder

637

Description
Projectsthetexturetothesurfaceofacylinder
Texture projection line Radius control

Mapping surface representation (a cross-section of the cylinder)

Texture frame (showing the first repetition of the texture) Editing a cylinder map with the Attribute Mapping tool

SphereandCylindermapshaveseamsthataremoreapparentwithwrappedandimagebasedshaders

Perimeter

Wrapsthetexturearoundtheperimeteroftheobject(AttributeMappingtoolnotsupported)

Roof

Wrapsthetextureacrosstheperimeteroftheroofobject(AttributeMappingtoolnotsupported)

638

| Chapter 15: Creating and Mapping Textures

Theavailablemaptypesvarybasedontheobjecttypebeingmapped.

Object Type
Extrudes Meshes Roofs Slabs(Floors) SolidPrimitives(Sphere, Hemisphere,Cone) CSGSolids,ExtrudeAlongPath, andTaperedExtrude Sweeps Walls

Map Types Available


Plane,AutoAlignPlane,Sphere,Cylinder,Perimeter Plane,AutoAlignPlane,Sphere,Cylinder Roof Plane,AutoAlignPlane,Sphere,Cylinder Plane,AutoAlignPlane,Sphere,Cylinder Plane,AutoAlignPlane,Sphere,Cylinder,Perimeter Plane,AutoAlignPlane,Sphere,Cylinder,Perimeter Plane,AutoAlignPlane,Sphere,Cylinder

Textures and Drawing Direction


Texturesareappliedto3Dpolygonsandwallsbasedonthedirectiontheobjectwasdrawn.For3Dpolygons,the textureisappliedparalleltothefirstsegment.

Original 3D Polygon

First segment drawn horizontally

First segment drawn at an angle

Wall Texture Orientation


Thestartingpointanddirectionthewallisdrawnaffectshowatextureisapplied.Texturesareappliedtoawallsleft side,rightside,andcenter(and,optionally,toitstop,bottom,holes,andstartandendcap).Thecenterofawallis alwaysthesame,buttheleftandrightsideschangebasedondrawingdirection.Whenyoudrawawallinaclockwise direction,theleftsideistheexteriorside;however,drawingthewallinacounterclockwisedirectionmakestheleft sidetheinteriorside. Atextureappliedtothecenterofthewallisvisibleattheendsofthewall.

Applying and Mapping Textures |

639

Left (exterior) Right

Left (exterior)

Right

Right

Left (interior) Right

Left (interior) In Top/Plan view, arrows indicate the current wall direction

Ifthetexture(s)isincorrectlyappliedtoawall,withthewallselected,clickReverseSidesontheShapetabofthe ObjectInfopalette.Thisflipsthedirectionofthewall,switchingthetexture(s)totheoppositeside(s).

Applying a Texture to an Object


Toapplyatexturetooneormoreobjects: 1. CreateorimportatextureresourceasdescribedinCreatingTexturesonpage 609. 2. Selecttheobject(s)totexture.Ifmorethanoneobjectisselected,thetextureresourceappliestoallobjectsinthe selection.Additionalmappingparametersareavailableformultipleselectedobjectssothetexturerenders seamlessly. 3. ClicktheRendertabontheObjectInfopalette. 4. Iftheobjecthasparts,specifytheOveralltexturetoapplytotheparts,orselectanindividualpartandapplya texture.Theselectedtextureappliestotheentireobjectifitdoesnotcontainparts. SelectthedesiredTexturefromeitherthedefaultcontentorthecurrentfilescontent(seeDefaultContentin VectorworksFundamentalsandRenderworksonpage 157),andthensetthetextureparameters,whichapply onlytotheselectedobject(s). ThetextureparametersandmappingcanbeeditedintheRendertaboftheObjectInfopalette.

640

| Chapter 15: Creating and Mapping Textures


Description
Someobjectscanhavedifferenttextures(includingdecals)appliedtodifferentparts. Forextrudes,sweeps,slabs,floors,androoffaces,applytexturestothetop,bottom, andsides. Forslabs(VectorworksArchitectrequired),theModeselectiondetermineswhetherto applytexturesfromtheslabcomponentsorfromtheslab.IfyouselectByComponent mode,thetexturessetfortheslabcomponentsalsodeterminetheslabtextures(see CreatingSlabComponentsonpage 103intheVectorworksDesignSeriesUsers Guide).IfyouselectByObjectmode,applytexturestothetop,bottom,andsides. Forwallsandroundwalls,theModeselectiondetermineswhethertoapplytextures fromthewallcomponentsorfromthewall.IfyouselectByComponentmode,the texturessetforthewallcomponentsalsodeterminethewalltextures(seeCreating WallComponentsonpage 455).IfyouselectByObjectmode,applytexturestothe left,right,top,bottom,startcap,endcap,andholes.Leftandrightwalltextureparts canonlybeappliedtowallholeswheneditingthewallholecomponent;seeAddinga 3DWallHoleComponenttoaSymbolDefinitiononpage 518. Forroofobjects,applytexturestothetop,bottom,sides,anddormerwalls,andif VectorworksDesignSeriesproductsareinstalled,fascia,attic,andsoffit.ThePart optionisnotavailableforobjectswithoutdistinctparts. Thetextureordecalappliedtoeachpartdisplaysinparenthesesnexttothepart.Toapply atexturetoOverallortoapart,selectitandthenselectatexturetoapplyfromthetexture list. Overallindicatesthatthesametextureappliestoallpartsoftheobject.Partsthathave beenassignedatexturedifferentfromOveralldisplayabovethedivider,andpartswith thesametextureasOveralldisplaybelowthedivider.

Parameter
Part

The Overall texture is Glass Clear, and the sides of the object are inheriting the Overall texture. The top and bottom of the object have unique textures different from the Overall texture.

Overallnolongerdisplayswhenallpartsusedistincttextures. Theadditionalpartsdonotdisplaywhensettingclasstextures(seeApplying TexturestoSymbols,Walls,andRoofsonpage 651).Awallsstartcap,ifsetto obtainitstexturebyclass,usestheclasstextureassignedtothewallcenter. ReverttoOverall IfapartwasassignedatexturebutitshouldinherititstexturefromOverallinstead,select thepartandclickReverttoOverall.Thepartmovesbackbelowthedivider,and(from Overall)displaysasitstexturename.Anydecalsappliedtothepartareremoved. Addsadecaltexturetotheselectedpart;seeCreatingDecalTexturesonpage 645 Selectthetexturetoapplyfromeitherthedefaultcontentorthecurrentfilescontent

AddDecal Texturelist

Applying and Mapping Textures | Parameter


Texturemenu

641

Description
ClickthearrownexttothetexturelisttoopentheTexturemenu.Thetextureresourceor shaderusedtocreatetheresourcecanbeeditedfromhereasdescribedinEditing TexturesandShadersofSelectedObjectsonpage 622.Beforeediting,theresourcecanbe copiedtopreservetheoriginalresourceparameters. Displaysathumbnailviewoftheselectedtexture Selecthowthetextureisappliedtothe3Dobject;seeMapTypesonpage 635 RemovesanychangesmadebytheAttributeMappingtoolorintheObjectInfopalette, restoringthetexturetoitsoriginallocation,scale,androtation. Determinesthetexturesizewhenprojectedontotheobject.Forexample,avalueof2 doublesthesizeofthetextureprojection.Eitherenterascalevalueorusethesliderto changethescale.

Thumbnailview MapType ResettoDefault Mapping Scale

OffsetH

Setsthestartlocationofthetexturehorizontally

OffsetV

Setsthestartlocationofthetexturevertically

642

| Chapter 15: Creating and Mapping Textures


Description
Setstheangleoftexturerotation.Eitherenterarotationvaluefrom0to360degreesoruse theslidertochangetherotationangle.

Parameter
Rotation

RepeatHorizontally RepeatVertically FlipHorizontally FlipVertically Radius FollowLongestEdge

Repeatsthetextureinahorizontaldirection Repeatsthetextureinaverticaldirection Flipsthetexturehorizontally,alongtheverticalaxis Flipsthetexturevertically,alongthehorizontalaxis Forsphereandcylindermaptypes,setsthetextureradius;thedefaultradiusisthesame asthe3Dobjectradius.Increasingthisvaluereducesthesizeofthetextureontheobject. AlignsthetexturesUaxiswiththelongedgeofaface,forsimplermappingwhenthe autoalignplanemaptypeisselected.Whendeselected,thetexturealignshorizontallyin objectspace. SetsthetexturesZorigintoberelativetotheworldZorigin,ratherthantoobjectspace. Thisallowsseamlesstextureapplicationacrossmultiplelayersforallmappingtypes. MultipleobjectswiththisparameterenabledrenderseamlesslyalongtheZaxis. Forplane,cylinder,andspheremaptypes,alignsthetexturemappingofmultipleselected objects,givingthemtheappearanceofasharedtexture.Multipleobjectswiththis parameterenabledusethemappingparametersofthefirstselectedobject,andthetexture appearsseamlessacrossallselectedobjects.Thesharedmappingdependsontheobjects currentlyselectedandcanchangewithadifferentselectionofobjects. Thisparameterisnotavailableforautoalignplane,perimeter,orroofmaptypes.

UseWorldZFor Origin AlignSelected Mappings

Update

Updatesthedrawingdisplay

ThetexturecanalsobeappliedtoobjectsfromtheResourceBrowser.Clickthetextureanddragittothedesired object,orselectthedesiredobject(s),anddoubleclickonthetexturetoapply.Alternatively,selecttheobject(s), rightclick(Windows)orCtrlclick(Macintosh)onthetexture,andselectApplyfromthecontextmenu. However,whenatextureisappliedinthisway,mappingoptionscannotbeaccesseddirectly.Clickonthe RendertaboftheObjectInfopalettetoeditthetexturemapping. 5. Thetextureisappliedtotheselectedobject(s).

Direct Texture Mapping


TheAttributeMappingtooleditstexturemappingparametersdirectlyinthedrawingwindow.Thistoolappliesto texturescreatedwithwrappedcolorshadersormasktransparencyshaders.Thetexturemappingtypemustbe sphere,cylinder,orplaneforthistool(edittextureswithothertypesofmappingthroughtheObjectInfopalette).

Applying and Mapping Textures |


Thistoolalsomodifiesdecaltextures;seeEditingDecalTexturesonpage 649.
Original Repeat Scale/Rotate by Center

643

Non-Repeating

Part menu

Scale/Rotate by Corner

Mode
NonRepeating OriginalRepeat Scale/Rotateby Corner Scale/Rotateby Center Partmenu

Description
Forrepeatingtextures,displaysasinglerepetitionofthetextureforeasiertextureediting Forrepeatingtextures,restorestherepeatingpatternofthetexture Forresizingorrotatingtextureswiththehandlesonthetextureframe;thetextureframescales fromorrotatesaboutthehandleoppositetothehandlethatwasclickedon Forresizingorrotatingtextureswiththehandlesonthetextureframe;thetextureframescales fromorrotatesaboutitscenter Fortexturedobjectswithmorethanonetextureablepart,suchaswallsandroofs,allowsa differentpartoftheobjecttobeselectedfortextureediting;allowsdecalstobeselectedfor mappingadjustments

TheAttributeMappingtoolalsoeditshatch,tile,gradient,andimagefills.SeeMappingFillswiththeAttribute MappingToolonpage 561. Toedittexturemappingdirectlyinthedrawingwindow: 1. Selectatextured,3Dobject. 2. ClicktheAttributeMappingtoolfromtheVisualizationtoolset.Alternatively,selecttheAttributeMapping toolfirst,andthenclickontheobject. Iftheselectedobjecthasanunsupportedtexture(withanautoalignplane,perimeter,orroofmappingtype),an alertdisplays.SelectanothermaptypeandclickYestocontinue. 3. Forobjectswithparts,whichmayhavedifferenttexturesandmappingtypesappliedtodifferentportionsofthe object,selecttheparttoeditfromthePartlistontheToolbar.Toeditdecals,seeEditingDecalTextureson page 649. Iftheselectedparthasanunsupportedtexture(withanautoalignplane,perimeter,orroofmappingtype),an alertdisplays.SelectanothermaptypeandclickYestocontinue. 4. Foreasierdirectmappingofarepeatingtexture,clickNonRepeatingmodeontheToolbartoseeasingle repetitionofthetexture.(Afteryoueditthetexturemapping,clickOriginalRepeatmodetoreturntothe originalpatternandseetheeffect.) 5. Ifapplicable,selecthowtoscaleorrotatethetexturefromtheToolbar.Toadjustthetextureaboutacornerofthe editingframe,clickScale/RotatebyCornermode;toadjustthetextureaboutthecenteroftheeditingframe, clickScale/RotatebyCentermode.

644

| Chapter 15: Creating and Mapping Textures

6. Acoloredtextureplanewithaneditingframeisplacedoverthefirstrepetitionofthetexturein2Dmapping mode.Thetextureoriginispositionedattheoriginoftheaxes.TheObjectInfopaletteonlydisplaysthe parametersthatcanbeeditedwhiletheAttributeMappingtoolisactive. Toswitchto3Dmappingmode,clickoneofthethreetexturespaceaxes(thered,blue,andgreenlines). Toswitchbackto2Dmappingmode,clickwithinthetextureframeoranywhereoffthetexturedobject. Theeditingframeprovidesobjectsnapsforprecisetextureplacement.Eitherusetheeditingframehandlesto adjustthemapping,orusetheDatabartoenterprecisevalues(seeUsingtheDataBaronpage 209).

Action
Tomovethetexture

Description
2Dmappingmode:Clickinsidetheeditingframeanddragthetextureto thedesiredlocationontheobjectsurface 3Dmappingmode:Clickthecenterdiamondshapedhandleattheorigin, anddragthetexturetothedesiredlocationontheobjectsurface.The textureplanemoveswiththeimage,allowingyoutosnaptheimagetoa snappointontheobject.

Toresizethetexture(2Dmapping only) Torotatethetexture

Clickonacornerhandleoftheeditingframe(theresizecursordisplays),and dragtosettheeditingobjecttoanewscale.Clicktoset. 2Dmappingmode:Clickonasidehandleoftheeditingframe(therotate cursordisplays)anddragthehandletothenewrotationangle.Clickto set. 3Dmappingmode:Clickononeofthehandlesalongtheaxistorotate about.Therotatecursordisplays,andadashedpreviewindicatesthe rotationspace.Movethecursortorotatethetexture,andclicktosetit.

Tosetthetexturetoaface(plane maptypeonly) Tochangetheradiusofthetexture projection(sphereandcylinder maptypes,2Dmappingonly)

Clickthehandcursortosetthetexturemappingtothesurfaceofthe indicatedface.Thetextureplaneispositionedtangenttothesurfaceatthe clickpoint,withtheoriginofthetextureplaneattheclickpoint. Clickononeofthefourradiuscontrolhandlesaroundtheedgeofthecircle thatrepresentsthemappingsurface,anddragthehandletothenewradius length.Clicktoset.

7. Toeditthemappingofanotherpartofatexturedobject,selectthenextparttoeditfromthePartlistandrepeat theprocess.

Applying and Mapping Textures |

645

Click a red, blue, or green axis to activate 3D mode

Click a corner handle to resize the texture

Click a radius handle to change the radius of the texture projection (sphere or cylinder map only)

Click a side handle to rotate the texture

2D mapping mode

Click a red, green, or blue axis handle to rotate the texture on a 3D axis

Click-drag the center handle to snap the texture to other objects Click within the texture frame or anywhere off the textured object to activate 2D mode

3D mapping mode

Creating Decal Textures


Decalsallowmultipletexturestobeappliedtoasingleobjectorpartofanobject,overabasetexturethatisalready appliedtotheobject.Thedecalcanoriginatefromanimportedimagefileoratextureresourcepresentinthefile. Decalscanbeusedtosimulatesignsonatexturedwall,orlayeredtexturesforportrayingwainscotingonawallor patternsonfabric.

646

| Chapter 15: Creating and Mapping Textures

DecalsmustberenderedinaRenderworksmode.TheCartoonArtisticRenderworksmodecannotdisplay decals. Tocreateadecaltexture: 1. Selectatextured,3Dobject.Adecalcanonlybeappliedtoanobjectwithanunderlyingtexture;themaptypeof thetexturedeterminesthedecalmaptype. Theunderlyingtexturemusthaveplanar,spherical,orcylindricalmappingforthedecaltobeeditedwiththe AttributeMappingtool.TextureswithanytypeofmappingcanbeeditedwiththeObjectInfopalette. 2. Iftheobjecthastextureableparts,selectthepartwherethedecalwillbeplacedfromthePartlistontheRender taboftheObjectInfopalette. 3. ClickAddDecal. TheAddDecaldialogboxopens.

Parameter
ImportanImageFile ReuseanExistingImage SelectaTexture

Description
Importsanewimage;selectthedesiredimagefileintheOpen(Windows)orImport QuickTimeImageDocument(Macintosh)dialogbox.ClickOpen. Reusesapreviouslyimportedimage;selecttheresourcethatcontainstheimage Appliesthetextureovertheobjectsbasetexture;nofurthersettingsarerequired

4. Ifthedecalconsistsofanimportedorreusedimage,theDecalOptionsdialogboxopens.

Applying and Mapping Textures |

647

Parameter
Name Size MaskOptions RectangularMask ImageMask ChooseImage

Description
Provideanameforthedecaltexture Setstherealworldsizeforeachrepetitionofthetexture;bydefault,decaltextures showonlyonerepetitionhorizontallyandvertically Indicatesthetypeofmaskingfortheimagedecal Createsarectangularmaskaroundthedecal;nofurthersettingsarerequired Masksthedecalimageperpixelusinganimagemasktodeterminewhichareasofthe imagearetransparentoropaque OpenstheChooseDecalMaskImagedialogbox,forselectingtheimagemask

5. Ifcreatingarectangularmaskdecal,proceedtostep9.Otherwise,ifcreatinganimagemask,clickChoose Image. TheChooseDecalMaskImagedialogboxopens;selecttheimagemasktouse.Anewimagecanbeimportedfor masking,oranexistingimageresourcefromthecurrentfilecanbeselected(includingthecurrentimage).

6. ClickOK. TheCreateMaskdialogboxopens.

648

| Chapter 15: Creating and Mapping Textures


Description
Createsamaskfromtheimagespixelbrightnessvalues;brighterpixelsaremoreopaque Createsamaskwithaselectedtransparentcolorandmaskparameters Usesthealphachannelofasourceimageasthemask(imagemustcontainvalidalpha channelinformation)

Parameter
GrayscalePixels TransparentColor AlphaChannel

ForGrayscalePixelandAlphaChannelmasks,clickOK.ProceedtoStep9. 7. IfTransparentColorwasselected,theCreateTransparentColorMaskdialogboxopens.Selectthemask propertiesandclickOK. Thesourceimagemustbemorethaneightbitcolortocreateatransparentcolormask.Imageswitha monochromebackgroundareeasiesttousewhencreatingamasktransparency.

Black pixels are transparent White pixels are opaque

Parameter
SourceImage

Description
Displaystheimportedimage.Selectthetransparentcolorbyclickingacolorintheimage;the resultingmaskisdisplayedintheTransparentColorMaskpreview.Ifnecessary,usethemouse scrollwheeltozoomintoandoutoftheimage,orclickandholdthemousewheelbuttontopan. Displaysthecurrenttransparentcolor.Insteadofclickingonthesourceimagetodesignatethe transparentcolor,thecolorcanbeselectedbyclickingthecolorbox. Displaysapreviewofthemaskbasedonthecurrenttransparentcolorselectionandsettings Adjuststhetransparencytolerance;dragtheslidertotherighttoincreasethetolerancelevel. Thisallowsawiderrangeofpixelssimilartothetransparentcolortobeconsideredtransparent. Adjuststhemaskedgecontrast;increasethecontrastsharpnessbydraggingtheslidertothe right.Softenthecontrastbydraggingtheslidertotheleft.

Transparent Color Transparent ColorMask ColorMatching Tolerance MaskContrast

8. ClickOKtoreturntotheDecalOptionsdialogbox. 9. ClickOKtocreatethedecaltextureandapplyittotheselectedobject.

Applying and Mapping Textures |

649

Thedecalisplacedontheobject;adjustitsposition,scale,androtationwiththeAttributeMappingtoolor ObjectInfopaletteasdescribedinEditingDecalTexturesonpage 649.Bydefault,decaltexturesonlyrepeat oncehorizontallyandvertically,withmattereflectivityandnobumporothermaterialoptions.Thiscanbe modifiedbyeditingthetexturefromtheResourceBrowser.

Editing Decal Textures


Similartoothertextures,decaltexturescanbeeditedfromtheObjectInfopalette.Dependingonmaptype,decal texturescanalsobepositionedandadjustedwiththeAttributeMappingtool.Becausedecalsaretextureresources, thetexturedefinitioncanbeeditedfromtheResourceBrowser. Multipledecalscanbeappliedtooneobject;thedecalsareappliedinastackingorder,whichcanbechangedtoadjust theoveralleffectofthetextures. MultilayeredtexturesandmappingparameterscanbetransferredbetweenobjectswiththeEyedroppertoolfill attributes(Texture).SeeTransferringAttributesonpage 526. DecalsmustberenderedinaRenderworksmode.

Direct Decal Texture Mapping


Decalscanbemoved,scaled,androtatedwiththeAttributeMappingtool.Decalmappingisperformedononedecal atatime,separatelyfromthebasetexturemappingdescribedinDirectTextureMappingonpage 642. Themaptypeoftheunderlyingtexturedeterminesthedecalmaptype.Theunderlyingtexturemusthave planar,spherical,orcylindricalmappingforthedecaltobeeditedwiththeAttributeMappingtool. ToadjustthemappingofthedecaltexturewiththeAttributeMappingtool: 1. Selectatextured,3Dobjectwithoneormoredecals. 2. ClicktheAttributeMappingtoolfromtheVisualizationtoolset. Alternatively,selecttheAttributeMappingtoolandthenclickontheobjectwithapplieddecal(s). 3. SelectthedecaltoadjustfromthePartlistontheToolbar.ThePartlistshowsthetexturesmappedtotheobject, includingthebasetexture.

Iftheselectedparthasanunsupportedtextureunderlyingthedecal(withanautoalignplane,perimeter,orroof mappingtype),analertdisplays.SelectanothermaptypeandclickYestocontinue. 4. Ifapplicable,selecthowtoscaleorrotatethetexturefromtheToolbar.Toadjustthetextureaboutacornerofthe editingframe,clickScale/RotatebyCornermode;toadjustthetextureaboutthecenteroftheeditingframe, clickScale/RotatebyCentermode. 5. Aneditingframein2Dmappingmodeisplacedoverthedecaltexture.Setthedecalpositionandrotateorresize thedecalasneeded.

650

| Chapter 15: Creating and Mapping Textures


Click a corner handle to resize the texture Click a side handle to rotate the texture

Action
Tomovethedecal Toresizethedecal Torotatethedecal

Description
Clickinsideoftheeditingframeanddragthetexturetothedesiredlocationonthebase texture Clickonacornerhandleoftheeditingframe;theresizecursordisplays.Dragtosetthe editingobjecttoanewscale.Clicktoset. Clickonasidehandleoftheeditingframe(therotatecursordisplays)anddragthehandleto thenewrotationangle.Clicktoset.

Editing the Decal Texture Parameters


Whendecalhasbeenappliedtoanobjectsoverallpartortoitsparts,itsparameterscanbeadjustedoncethedecal parthasbeenselectedfromthePartlistontheObjectInfopaletteRendertab.Fewerparametersareavailablefordecal texturesthanforthebasetexture,becausethebasetexturedeterminesthemappingtypefortheobject. MultipledecalsappliedtoanobjectaddtothePartlistandalsoaddbuttonsthatallowthedecalstackingorderto change.

Parameter
Part

Description
Someobjectscanhavedifferenttextures(includingdecals)appliedtodifferentparts;Overall indicatesthatthesametextureappliestoalldifferentpartsoftheobject. Thetextureordecalappliedtoeachpartdisplaysinparenthesesnexttothepart.Toapplya decaltoOverallortoapart,selectitandthenselectAddDecal. Formoreinformation,seeApplyingaTexturetoanObjectonpage 639.

RemoveDecal AddDecal MoveUp/Down Texture Thumbnailview ResetMapping

RemovesthedecalfromthecurrentlyselectedPart;clickingReverttoOverallalsoremoves alldecalsalongwiththebasetexture AddsadecaltothecurrentlyselectedPart Decalsarestackedinorderastheyareapplied.Whenmorethanonedecalhasbeenapplied toaselectedPart,clicktomovetheselecteddecalupordowninthestackingorder. Selectthetexturetoapplyfromeitherthedefaultcontentorthecurrentfilescontent Displaysathumbnailviewoftheselecteddecal RemovesanychangesmadebytheAttributeMappingtoolorintheObjectInfopalette, restoringthedecaltoitsoriginallocation,scale,androtation

Applying Textures to Symbols, Walls, and Roofs | Parameter


Scale

651

Description
Determinesthetexturesizewhenprojectedontotheobject.Forexample,enteringascale factoroftwodoublesthesizeofthetextureprojection. Eitherenterascalevalueorusetheslidertochangethescale.

OffsetH/V Rotation Update

Setsthestartlocationofthetexturehorizontallyandvertically Setstheangleoftexturerotation.Eitherenterarotationvaluefrom0to360degreesoruse theslidertochangetherotationangle. Updatesthedrawingdisplay

Editing the Decal Texture Definition


Decals,likeothertextures,aresavedasresourcesandcanbeeditedfromtheObjectInfopaletteortheResource Browser.Decalsaremaskedimagebasedtextureswithtransparency,butshaderscanbeaddedandshaderparameters canbechanged.Forexample,youmaywishtoapplyabumpshader(basedonthecolorimageshader)tolettersina signtogivethema3Dappearance.Bydefault,thereflectivityofadecalismatte,butthiscanalsobechanged.Adjust maskingparametersandaddverticaland/orhorizontalrepetitionsofthetextureifthedefaultsinglerepetitionneeds tobechanged. SeeEditingTexturesandShadersofSelectedObjectsonpage 622andEditingTexturesandShadersThroughthe ResourceBrowseronpage 625forinformationoneditingthedecaltextureanditsshaders.

Applying Textures to Symbols, Walls, and Roofs


Whiletexturescanbeappliedtoindividualpartsofmanyobjects,asdescribedinApplyingaTexturetoanObjecton page 639,applyingtexturestoanobjectsclassorclassesmaybemoreefficient.Textureresourcescanbeassignedtoa class,whichinturncanbeappliedtoobjectsduringcreation. Wallsandroofobjectshavetheirownclasstextureassignmenttabsforthemaintextureablepartsoftheseobjects. (AdditionalpartscanbetexturedindividuallyfromtheObjectInfopalette,butnotbyclass;seeApplyingaTextureto anObjectonpage 639.) Rooffaces,extrudes,sweeps,andfloorscontainadditionaltextureableparts,buttheEditClass(es)dialogbox doesnotmakethisdistinction.Texturesareappliedbyclasslikeanyother3Dobject;seeApplyingObject TexturesbyClassonpage 651.ApplytexturestotheindividualpartsoftheseobjectswiththeObjectInfo paletteandnotbyclass;seeApplyingaTexturetoanObjectonpage 639. TexturescannotbeassignedtoindividualsymbolsdirectlythroughtheObjectInfopalette.Texturesmustbeapplied totheseparatecomponentsofthesymbol.ThiscanbedoneusingtheEditSymbolcommandorbyassigningtextures totheclassesthatmakeupthesymbol;complexobjectscancontainmorethanoneclass.Texturechangesaffectall instancesofthatsymbol.

Applying Object Textures by Class


Objecttexturescanbesetbyclass. Toapplyatexturebyclass: 1. SelectTools>OrganizationtoopentheOrganizationdialogbox. 2. SelecttheDetailsviewoption,andthenselecttheClassestab. 3. Selectanexistingclassorcreateanewclass(seeCreatingClassesonpage 106).

652

| Chapter 15: Creating and Mapping Textures

4. Withtheclassselected,clickEdittoopentheEditClass(es)dialogbox. 5. Thetexturepropertiesoftheclassaresetbythetabsontheright.ClicktheOthertab.

Displays when Quartz (Macintosh) or GDI+ (Windows) imaging Vectorworks preference is enabled

6. SelectthedesiredTexturefromeitherthedefaultcontentorthecurrentfilescontent(seeDefaultContentin VectorworksFundamentalsandRenderworksonpage 157).SelectUseTexturesAtCreationtoapplythe texturetoobjectsastheyarecreated. 7. ClickOKtoexittheEditClass(es)dialogbox. TheclassdisplaysontheClassestaboftheOrganizationdialogbox. 8. Iftheobjecthasnotyetbeendrawn,clicktheblankareatotheleftoftheClassNametomaketheclassactive. Iftheobjectalreadyexists,applytheclasstoit.Forsomeobjecttypes,theclassnameisspecifiedinitssettingsor intheObjectInfopalette. 9. ClickOKtoexittheOrganizationdialogbox. 10. Createthedesiredobject(s).Objectsarecreatedwiththespecifiedtextureforthatclass.

Applying Textures to Symbols


Texturescanbeappliedtothecomponentsthatmakeupthesymbol,ortotheclassesusedbythesymbolcomponents.

Applying Textures to Symbols, Walls, and Roofs |

653

Applying Textures to Symbol Components


Toapplytexture(s)tothesymbolcomponents: 1. Selectthesymboltoedit. 2. SelectModify>EditSymbol. TheEditSymbolwindowopens;seeEditingSymbolDefinitionsonpage 185formoreinformationontheEdit Symbolwindow. 3. Selectthefirstcomponentthatrequiresatexture. 4. ClicktheRendertabontheObjectInfopalette. 5. SelectthedesiredTexturefromeitherthedefaultcontentorthecurrentfilescontent(seeDefaultContentin VectorworksFundamentalsandRenderworksonpage 157),andtheneditthemappingparametersasdescribed inApplyingandMappingTexturesonpage 635. 6. Repeatforeachcomponentofthesymbol. 7. SelectModify>ExitSymbolonceallchangeshavebeenapplied. Thenewsettingsareappliedtoallinstancesofthesymbol.

Applying Textures to Symbol Component Classes


Toapplytexturestothesymbolcomponentclasses: 1. SelectTools>OrganizationtoopentheOrganizationdialogbox. 2. FromtheClassestab,selectoneofthesymbolclassestoedit. 3. ClickEdittoopentheEditClass(es)dialogbox. 4. FromtheOthertab,selectthedesiredTexturefromeitherthedefaultcontentorthecurrentfilescontent(see DefaultContentinVectorworksFundamentalsandRenderworksonpage 157).SelectUseTexturesAt Creationtoapplythetextureatcreation. 5. ClickOKtoreturntotheOrganizationdialogbox. 6. Repeatsteps25untilallclasseshaveanassignedtexture. 7. ClickOKtoexittheOrganizationdialogbox.Thenewsettingsareapplied.

Applying Wall Textures


WallscanbeassignedatextureindividuallywiththeObjectInfopalette,or,moreefficiently,throughanassigned class.

654

| Chapter 15: Creating and Mapping Textures

Toapplyatexturetoawall(s)byclass: 1. SelectTools>OrganizationtoopentheOrganizationdialogbox. 2. SelecttheDetailsviewoption,andthenselecttheClassestab. 3. Createaclassforwallobjects(seeCreatingClassesonpage 106). 4. Withthenewclassselected,clickEdittoopentheEditClass(es)dialogbox. 5. ClicktheWallstab.

Displays when Quartz (Macintosh) or GDI+ (Windows) imaging Vectorworks preference is enabled

6. SelectthedesiredRight,Center,andLeftwallsurfacetexturefromeitherthedefaultcontentorthecurrentfiles content(seeDefaultContentinVectorworksFundamentalsandRenderworksonpage 157).SelectUse TexturesAtCreationtoapplythetextureatwallcreation.SeeTextureProjectionandOrientationonpage 635 tounderstandhowtexturesareappliedtowallfaces. 7. ClickOKtoexittheEditClass(es)dialogbox. ThenewwallsclassdisplaysontheClassestaboftheOrganizationdialogbox. 8. ClicktheblankareatotheleftoftheClassNametomakethenewclassactive. 9. ClickOKtoexittheOrganizationdialogbox. 10. Createthewall(s);seeCreatingWallsonpage 445. Thewallsarecreatedwiththespecifiedtextureforthatclass.Existingwall(s)canbeassignedthetexturethrough theObjectInfopalette.SelectthepartofthewalltotexturefromthePartlistandthenClassTexturefromthe texturelistontheRendertab.

Applying Textures to Symbols, Walls, and Roofs |

655

Applying Roof Textures


Texturescanbeaddedtoroofobjects,dormers,andgableends,eitherthroughtheRendertabObjectInfopalette,or throughanassignedclass. UsetheRoofmaptypetomaptexturestoroofs.Thetextureisautomaticallyrotatedforeachindividualrooffacein theroofobject. Toapplyatexturetoaroofobjectbyclass: 1. SelectTools>OrganizationtoopentheOrganizationdialogbox. 2. SelecttheDetailsviewoption,andthenselecttheClassestab. 3. Createanewclassforroofobjects(seeCreatingClassesonpage 106). 4. Withthenewclassselected,clickEdittoopentheEditClass(es)dialogbox. 5. ClicktheRoofstab.

Displays when Quartz (Macintosh) or GDI+ (Windows) imaging Vectorworks preference is enabled

6. AssignaTopTexture,andifbeingused,aDormerTexturefromeitherthedefaultcontentorthecurrentfiles content(seeDefaultContentinVectorworksFundamentalsandRenderworksonpage 157).SelectUse TexturesAtCreationtoapplythetextureatcreation. 7. ClickOKtoexittheEditClass(es)dialogbox.TheclassdisplaysontheClassestaboftheOrganizationdialog box. 8. ClicktheblankareatotheleftoftheClassNametomakethenewclassactive. 9. ClickOKtoexittheOrganizationdialogbox.

656

| Chapter 15: Creating and Mapping Textures

10. CreatearoofwiththeAEC>CreateRoofcommand(seeCreatingRoofObjectsonpage 478). Theroofiscreatedwiththespecifiedtextureforthatclass.Existingroofscanbeassignedthetexturethroughthe ObjectInfopalette.SelectthepartoftherooftotexturefromthePartlistandthenClassTexturefromthetexture listontheRendertab.

Applying Renderworks Backgrounds


Renderworksbackgrounds,whichincludeclouds,colors,images,andHDRIfiles,aswellasalitfogspecialeffect,are resourcessavedwiththefile.Theyareappliedtodesignlayersonaperlayerbasis.Backgroundscanalsobeapplied toviewportsbyselectingtheRWBackgroundfromtheObjectInfopaletteofaselectedviewport. ARenderworksbackgroundcanbequicklyappliedtothecurrentdesignlayerbydoubleclickingonthe resourceintheResourceBrowserorbydraggingitfromtheResourceBrowseranddroppingitintothecurrent designlayer. TheLitFogweathereffectrequiresalightsource(pointorspotlight)inthedrawingwithLitFogselectedinthe ObjectInfopalette. ToapplyaRenderworksbackgroundtothelayerproperties: 1. Createthebackgroundwiththedesiredparameters(seeCreatingLayerBackgroundsonpage 629for informationoncreatingRenderworksbackgrounds). 2. SelectTools>OrganizationtoopentheOrganizationdialogbox. 3. FromtheDesignLayerstab,selectthedesignlayertoreceivethebackground. 4. ClickEdittoopentheEditDesignLayersdialogbox.

Displays when Quartz (Macintosh) or GDI+ (Windows) imaging Vectorworks preference is enabled

5. SelecttheRenderworksBackgroundforthelayerfromeitherthedefaultcontentorthecurrentfilescontent(see DefaultContentinVectorworksFundamentalsandRenderworksonpage 157). IftheRenderworksBackgroundchoicesarenotavailable,thebackgroundselectioniscontrolledbythe Renderworksstyleineffect.SetthebackgroundintheRenderworksstyleinstead;seeRenderworksStyleson page 690. 6. ClickOKtoexittheEditDesignLayersdialogbox.

Applying Renderworks Backgrounds |


7. ClickOKtoexittheOrganizationdialogbox. WhenthedrawingisrenderedinaRenderworksmode,thebackgrounddisplays.OpenGLcandisplayOne Color,TwoColor,andImagebackgrounds.

657

Lit fog effect

Applying a Renderworks Background in Vectorworks Design Series


ToapplyaRenderworksbackgroundtothecurrentlayer: 1. Createthebackgroundwiththedesiredparameters(seeCreatingLayerBackgroundsonpage 629for informationoncreatingRenderworksbackgrounds). 2. SelectView>SetRenderworksBackground(VectorworksDesignSeriesrequired). TheSetRenderworksbackgrounddialogboxopens.

3. SelecttheRenderworksbackgroundforthecurrentlayerfromeitherthedefaultcontentorthecurrentfiles content(seeDefaultContentinVectorworksFundamentalsandRenderworksonpage 157). 4. ClickOK. WhenthedrawingisrenderedinaRenderworksmode,thebackgrounddisplays.OpenGLcandisplayOne Color,TwoColor,andImagebackgrounds. Wheninunifiedviewmode(VectorworksDesignSeriesrequired),thebackgroundselectedheredisplaysforall layers,overridinganybackgroundselectedforindividuallayersinthelayerproperties.Toretainthelayer backgrounduponexitingunifiedview,selectRestoreOriginalViewswhenexitingUnifiedViewmodeinthe UnifiedViewOptionsdialogbox.SeeUnifiedLayerViewonpage 730intheVectorworksDesignSeriesUsers Guide.

658

| Chapter 15: Creating and Mapping Textures

Rendering the Drawing

16

TheVectorworksFundamentalsproductprovidesaquick,simplerenderingsolutionusingOpenGL(seeRendering withVectorworksonpage 681).OpenGLperformsvertexbyvertexlightingcalculationsandisgoodforfast, interactiverenderingandmediumqualityrenderpreviews,butitcannotcreatereflections.Forfinalqualityoutput, usetheRenderworksproduct;itprovidesadditionallightsources,anditcancastshadows,createreflections,add indirectlightingeffects,andproducemuchbetterrenderingresultsthroughintensivepixelbypixellighting calculations.RendersettingscanbesavedasaRenderworksstyleforreuse,andstylescanbesharedamongfiles.The RenderworksproductincludestheVisualizationpaletteforeasilyaccessingalllightsandcamerasinthefile.Another benefitofusingtheRenderworksproductisthatanimagecanberenderedinanymodefromaspecifiedportionofthe drawing.

Optimizing Rendering Performance


Renderingisoftenamemoryintensiveandtimeconsumingprocess.Modifyyourmodelandchangerendering optionsinthesewaystoincreaserenderingperformanceandspeed: Usethehighestlevelgeometrypossibletomodelyourobjects.Itismuchbettertomodelanobjectasanextrude, sweep,Booleansolid,oraNURBSsurfacethanasameshorasetof3Dpolygons.Forextrudeandsweep profiles,usepolylines,anddonotuseasweepsegmentanglesmallerthanfivedegrees.Examineimported geometryforexcessiveverticesandpolygons.Theslowestwaytomodelforrenderingistocreateadetailed objectasasetofsmall,individual3Dpolygons. Eliminate3Ddetailsthatarenotsignificanttotherenderedimageortheindirectlighting.Forexample,ifyou modelastaircasesindividualboltsandthreadedscrews,eachofthesewillbecontributingunnecessarilytothe renderingtime.Useclassestohidegeometrythatisnotgoingtobevisibleintherenderedview. Testrenderingsettingsonsheetlayerswithlowersheetlayerresolutionvalues.Sheetlayersaresetto72dpiby default,butfortesting,setthedpivalueevenlower(suchas40).Zoomoutofadrawingtoreducetherendered area,orusetheRenderBitmaptool(Renderworksrequired)withalowdpisetting. Considerturningoffambientlighting(AmbientInfooffintheLightingOptionsorsetAmbientLightdialog box)toevaluatethecontributionofindividuallightsourcesmoreclearly. Changerenderingoptionstemporarilytotestarenderedlook.ForOpenGLoptions,disableUseAntiAliasing (Macintoshonly).IntheCustomRenderworksoptions(Renderworksrequired),settheQualitylevelstolowand turnAntiAliasing,andevenShadows,off.RenderwithFastRenderworkstoevaluatebeforeswitchingtoFinal QualityorCustomRenderworks.

660

| Chapter 16: Rendering the Drawing

Shadowsaddtorenderingtime.Shadowscanalsobeturnedoffforlightobjectsthatdonotcastobvious shadows.InRenderworks,individualtexturescanbesetnottocastorreceiveshadows(Shadowsoptionsinthe EditTexturedialogbox).Aclearglasstexture,forexample,hasveryslightshadowsanddoesnotcastshadows onotherobjects.Inaddition,enablesoftshadowsonlyforlightsourcesthatcreateprominentshadowsinan image(forexample,adirectionallightthatrepresentsthesun). Whenusingindirectlighting(Renderworksrequired),usethefewestnumberofbouncesneeded(asspecifiedin theLightingOptionsdialogbox)andadjustthequalityintheFinalQualityorCustomRenderworkssettings. Individualtexturescanhavetheirownindirectlightingsettingoverridestoreducetherenderingtimerequired; disableindirectlightingforthesetextures. Areaandlinelights(Renderworksrequired)contributesignificantlytorenderingtime.Usetheselightsources sparingly,andadjusttheQualityofeachintheObjectInfopalette.OnlyenableSoftShadowsfortheselightsif theirshadowsareprominentintheimage. Reflective,blurryreflective,blurrytransparent,andglowshadersaddtorenderingtime(Renderworks required).Usetheseeffectssparingly.Blurrinessisfasteratlessthan15%andshouldnotbesettomorethan40% (forwide,shinyhighlights,considerusingaplasticormetallicreflectivityshaderratherthanablurryreflection). Glowingobjectsneedtobesampledmoreaccuratelyandtherefore,theytakemoretime.Usetheglowshaderfor afew,largeobjects;usethebacklitshaderforseveralsmallfixtureswithsimplelightsources. InRenderworks,glassaddstorendertimesbecauseithasreflective,refractive,andtransparentshadow components. VeryclearglasscanbesettonotcastshadowsintheEditTexturedialogboxtosaverendertime.Indirect lightingcanbedisabledforglasstexturesintheEditTexturedialogbox,aswell,tosavetimewhen calculatingindirectlighting. Forthinpanes,likewindows,therefractivequalitiesofglassarenotsignificant,sotheindexofrefraction parameterfortheglasscanbesettoalowvalue(justabove1). Often,buildingsuseglasswithametallic/mirroredenergyefficientcoating;inthatcase,acombinationof mirrorreflectivityandplaintransparencycanproduceaglasseffectthatrendersfaster. Glassabsorptioncolorcanbeusedforveryaccuratecloseupsofitemslikeglassware,butthiseffecttakes longertorender. Blurry(frosted)glass,inparticular,canbeslow;useblurryglassinastrictlycontrolledway.Lowerblur valuesrenderfaster.

Adding Light
Onceoneormorelightsourceshavebeenaddedtothedrawing,itcanberenderedtomimictheeffectoflightonthe drawingsurfaces. Defaultlightingisautomaticallyaddedtoadrawingforbasicvisibilityofrenderedobjects.Thedefaultlightingis fixedtothecamerasothatitalwayslightsanobjectappropriately.However,renderingacomplexsceneusually requirestheadditionoflightsources;theadditionofavisiblelightautomaticallyhidesthedefaultlighting. LightaddedtoaVectorworksdrawingcanbeambientordiffused.Ambientlightaffectsallsurfacesequally.Diffused lightingaffectssurfacesdifferentlydependingontheangleofthelightsourceandpositionofthesurfaces.

Adding Light |

661

Ambient Light and Sunlight


Setting Lighting Options
TheSetLightingOptionscommandspecifiestheambientlightbrightnessanddefaultcolorforthecurrentlayer,or, whenUnifiedViewisselected,theview(VectorworksDesignSeriesrequired).Bydefault,theambientlight parametersaresettoOn,withaColorofwhite,andaBrightnessof35%.WhentheRenderworksproductisinstalled, thiscommandalsosetsthewhitebalanceforanylightsourceswithacolortemperature,andspecifiesenvironment backgroundlightingparameterswhenaRenderworksHDRIbackgroundresourcehasbeenaddedtothedrawing(see CreatingHDRIBackgroundsonpage 632). TheambientlightofaselectedviewportcanbeeditedbyclickingLightingOptionsfromtheObjectInfopalette(see SheetLayerViewportParametersonpage 766). Tosetambientlight: 1. Switchtothelayerwherethedesiredambientlightsettingsaretobeset. 2. SelectView>Lighting>SetLightingOptions. TheLightingOptions(Renderworksrequired)orSetAmbientLightdialogboxopens.Settheambientlightfor thelayer.Thewhitebalancesettingcanbeadjustedforlightsourcesinthelayerwithacolortemperature specified(Renderworksrequired).Forachartofcommoncolortemperatureranges,seeCorrelatedColor Temperatureonpage 900. IfthelightingoptionsarecontrolledbyaRenderworksstylethatiscurrentlyineffect,theEditRenderworks Styledialogboxopensinstead;seeRenderworksStylesonpage 690.

662

| Chapter 16: Rendering the Drawing


Description
Indirectlightingmodelsthetransferoflightenergyamongdrawingobjectsand materials,asthelightbouncesaroundandaffectsthesurroundings.Themore bouncesspecified,themorerealistictherendering,butalsothemoretime requiredtorender. Selectthelevelofindirectlightingtouseforrendering: None:Directlightingonly,forquickrendering Exterior,1Bounce:Onebounceoflightingisoftenenoughtoenhance exteriorviews Normal,2Bounces:Twobouncesofindirectlightingisappropriatefor exteriorscenesandwelllitinteriors Interior,4Bounces:Usingfourbouncesofindirectlightingissuitedfor darkenedorpartiallylitinteriorscenes,orverydetailedandcomplete indirectlighting Individualtexturescanhavetheirownindirectlightingsettingoverridesto enhanceascenewhilereducingtherenderingtimerequired. WhenrenderingwithFastRenderworks,indirectlightingisrenderedata Lowquality;FinalQualityRenderworksusesaHighqualitysettingfor indirectlighting,andCustomRenderworksallowsthequalitysettingtobe selected.

Parameter
IndirectLighting (Renderworksrequired)

AmbientInfo On/Off Brightness Color EmitterOptions (Renderworksrequired) EmitterBrightness(%) WhiteColorTemperature AdjuststhebrightnessofalllightobjectswithUseEmitterselected Selectacolortemperaturethatwillbebalancedtoappearwhite.Lower temperatures,whichmightotherwisehaveanorangecast,orhigher temperatures,whichmightotherwiseappearwithabluetint,areadjustedto appearwhite.SelectCustomtospecifyatemperaturetobewhitebalanced. IfaCustomColorTemperatureisspecified,enterthetemperatureinKelvin WhenanHDRIlayerbackgroundhasbeenselectedforthelayerorviewport, specifieshowtocontrolitslightingcontributiontotherendering(seeCreating HDRIBackgroundsonpage 632) Usestheimageenvironmentbackgroundsetforthelayerasbothabackground andalightsource LightsthemodelwiththecolorsfromtheHDRIbackgroundselectedhere Usestheimageenvironmentbackgroundsetforthelayerorviewportasa backgroundonly.Thebackgrounddoesnotcontributetolighting. Activatesordeactivatestheambientlightsettingsforthelayer Specifiestheambientlightbrightness;enterapercentageordragthesliderbar Specifiesadefaultcolorassociatedwiththeambientlight;clickthecolorboxto selectthecolor

Custom(K) EnvironmentLighting(HDRI) (Renderworksrequired) FromCurrentBackground FromSelectedBackground None

Adding Light |
3. ClickOK.

663

Adding Sunlight
SunlightinaVectorworksdrawingiscreatedbyprojectingparallelraysfromadirectionallight. TheDesignSeriesproductshaveexpandedcapabilitieswiththeHeliodontool. Tosetthesunposition: 1. SelectView>Lighting>SetSunPosition. TheSetSunPositiondialogboxopens.Enterthesunpositioninformation.

Parameter
Site TimeZoneMeridian PageNorth

Description
Specifiesthesiteslatitudeandlongitude Specifiesthesitestimezone;onehourofdifferenceisequalto15oflongitude Normally,thedrawingisorientedtopagenorth(truenorth,notmagneticnorth),and truenorthmatchesthetopofthepage,withnocompensationrequiredforpropersun position.Ifthedrawingwasnotcreatedwiththisorientation,specifyanangularoffsetin degreesfrompagenorth.TheNorthindicatorshouldmatchtruenorthinthedrawing. Specifiesthetimeofyear Specifiesthetimeofday SelectifDaylightSavingtimeisineffect Basedonthesettingsmade,displaystheAzimuth(Southatzerodegrees,withoutPage Northrotation),AzimuthN.Relative(Northatzerodegrees,withoutPageNorth rotation),Elevation(degreesabovethehorizon),andTrueSolarTime(takesinto accountdaylightsavingstime,sitelongitudeandtimezone,andtheearthsorbitandtilt)

Date Time DaylightSavings Results

664

| Chapter 16: Rendering the Drawing

2. ClickOKandverifytheresults.IfadirectionallightwasselectedbeforechoosingtheSetSunPosition command,thecommandmodifiestheanglesoflighttothenewazimuthandelevation.Ifnolightwasselected, thetoolinsertsanewdirectionallightatthespecifiedsunposition. Ashadowanalysiscanbeperformedforasitebyinsertingseverallightsourceswithidenticalparametersexcept fortimeofday.TheRenderworksproductmustbeinstalledtoconductashadowanalysis.SeeShadow Analysisonpage 664.

Shadow Analysis
Ashadowanalysiscanhelpdeterminetheareasofthedrawingthatwillreceivelesssunlightorremaininashadow duringaparticulartimeoftheyear.Byinsertingseveraldirectionallightsources,eachrepresentingadifferenttimeof day,anoverlappingrangeofshadowsiscreatedwhichindicatestheamountoftimeaparticularareaisintheshade overthecourseoftheday. TheRenderworksproductisrequiredtoconductashadowanalysis. Toperformashadowanalysis: 1. Addtheobjectstothedrawingthatwillcastashadowonthesite(ahouse,forexample). 2. Orientthedrawingtopagenorth.Ifthedrawingwasnotcreatedwiththisorientation,thiscanbecompensated throughtheSetSunPositiondialogboxdescribedinthenextstep. 3. InserteachdirectionallightsourcebyselectingView>Lighting>SetSunPosition.Insertingonelightsource providesshadowinformationforthattimeofdayonly;severallightsourcessettodifferenttimesofdayyieldan actualshadowanalysiswithoverlappingshadows. TheSetSunPositiondialogboxopens.SeeAddingSunlightonpage 663 Foreachlightsourceinsertedwiththiscommand,specifythesameparametersexceptfortimeofday.Ata minimum,alightsourceformorning,noon,afternoon,andeveningshouldbeinserted. 4. VerifytheparametersofeachdirectionallightsourceintheObjectInfopalette.EnsurethatCastShadowsis selected,anddecreasetheBrightnesssothatthecombinationoflightsisnottooharsh. 5. RenderthedrawingwiththeFastRenderworks,CustomRenderworks,orFinalQualityRenderworksoption. UsetheRenderBitmaptooltorenderaportionoftheimageforpresentations. SeeRenderingaSelectedAreaonpage 701formoreinformationontheRenderBitmaptool.

Adding Light |

665

The darkest areas are in shade for the longest portion of the day

June 21st 5 PM Top view Shadow analysis 3 PM 12 PM

9 AM

Adding Light Sources


TheLighttoolplaceslightsourcesinthedrawing.Selectthetypeoflightandspecifythelightpreferencesfromthe Toolbar.
Spot Light Set Direction Light Preferences

Directional Light Point Light Default Direction

WhentheRenderworksproductisinstalled,additionalparametersandlightsourcetypesareavailable.These additionsaredescribedinthissectionandinAdvancedRenderworksLightingonpage 674.

Mode
DirectionalLight

Description
Projectslightwithparallelrays,likethesun

PointLight

Radiateslightinalldirections,likeabarelightbulb

666
Mode

| Chapter 16: Rendering the Drawing


Description
Projectslightinaspecificdirection,aimedataspecificobject,likeaflashlightorconventional spotlight

SpotLight

DefaultDirection SetDirection LightPreferences

Fordirectionallights,clicktospecifythelightposition Fordirectionallights,clicktosetthelightdirection,andthenclicktospecifythelightposition Setsthepreferredlightparameters

Adding a Light Source


Addingavisiblelightsourcetoadrawinghidesthedefaultlightingschemethatisautomaticallypresentforbasic renderingpurposes. Toaddalightsource: 1. ClicktheLighttoolfromtheVisualizationtoolset. FromtheToolbar,selectthetypeoflightsourcetoinsert(directionallight,pointlight,orspotlight).Ifinserting adirectionallight,selectthelightplacementmethod(DefaultDirectionorSetDirection). 2. ClicktheLightPreferencesToolbarbuttontospecifythelightsourcepreferencesforthissession.Dependingon thelightsourceselected,differentparametersareavailable.Inaddition,certainparametersareonlyavailable whentheRenderworksproductisinstalled. TheLightPreferencesdialogboxopens.

Parameter
On/Off

Description
Showsorhidesthelightproducedbythelightsource

Adding Light | Parameter


Color

667

Description
Specifiesacolorassociatedwiththelightsource;clickthecolorboxtoselectthe color.ThisparameterisnotavailableifUseEmitterisselectedandaColor Temperatureisspecified(Renderworksrequired). Selecttocreateshadows Createsmorerealisticshadowsbydecreasinghardedges;shadowsappearsofterthe farthertheytravel,asinreality.Renderingisslowerwhenthisoptionisenabled. Specifiesthelightsourcebrightness;enterapercentageordragthesliderbar.A valueover100%canbeentered.ThisparameterisnotavailableifUseEmitteris selected(Renderworksrequired). Foraccuracy,specifiesthelightsactualbrightnessandcolortemperature;leave deselectedtousethelightasasimplelightsource Specifiestheluminousquantityofalight SpecifiesthebrightnessasanaccuratenumberinLux,Lumens,Footcandles,or Candelas;theunitsvarydependingonthelightsource Doesnotapplytodirectional,point,orspotlights(seeAdvancedRenderworks Lightingonpage 674) SpecifiesthelightcolortemperatureinKelvin.Thisreferstoanidealblackbody emitter,glowingredhotorwhitehot.Alowertemperaturegeneratesanorange color;thehotterthetemperature,theclosertowhitethecolorofthelightis. Specifyingthisparameterisoptional.Ifnotspecified,thedefaulttemperatureis0, meaningthatthefinalemissioncolorforthelightisentirelycontrolledbythe selectioninColor. Whenthetemperatureisspecified,Colorcannotbechanged.Thefinalemission colorissetbytheColorTemperature. Colortemperaturesettingscanbewhitebalancedonaperlayerbasis;seeSetting LightingOptionsonpage 661.

CastShadows (Renderworksrequired) SoftShadows (Renderworksrequired) Brightness

UseEmitter (Renderworksrequired) GetBrightnessFrom (Renderworksrequired) UserInput (Renderworksrequired) DistributionFile (Renderworksrequired) ColorTemperature (Renderworksrequired)

Directional,Spot,orPoint LightSpecs

Clicktosetadditionalspecificationsforthelightsource

3. ClickDirectionalLightSpecs,SpotLightSpecs,orPointLightSpecs,fortheselectedlightsourcetype,to specifyadditionalparameters.

668

| Chapter 16: Rendering the Drawing

Parameter
DirectionalLight Direction Angle

Description
Specifiesthelightsdirectionbyeitherspecifyingthelightangleorvector Setsthelightsanglebyazimuthandelevation.Theazimuthangleissetbasedonan angleof0degreesatthenegativeYaxis,andispositiveinacounterclockwise direction;theelevationangleistheangleabove(positive)orbelow(negative)the horizon. IndicatesthedirectionofthelightbyspecifyingthecoordinatesofitsX,Y,andZvectors

Vector PointLight DistFalloff

Selectthedistancefallofffunction(rateofintensitychangewhilemovingalongthe beamawayfromthelightsource): None:Brightnessdoesnotchange Smooth:Brightnessdecreasesaccordingtoalinearfalloff Realistic:Lightisbrightestnearthelightsource,andfallsawayaccordingtothe squareofthedistance,asinreality.Thisfalloffselectionisthemostnaturalin appearance.

SpotLights Spread/Beamdiagram DragthehandlesonthediagramtosetthespotlightSpreadandBeamangles,orenter thevaluesinthefieldsbelowthediagram

Spread Beam

Adding Light | Parameter


Spread Beam Falloffs DistFalloff

669

Description
Specifiesthespreadangleofthespotlight(lightconesmaximumangle) Specifiesthebeamangleofthespotlight(coneoflightthatdoesnotchangeintensityup tothespreadangle,afterwhichtheanglefalloffdeterminesitsintensity) Specifythedistanceandanglefallofffunction Selectthedistancefallofffunction(rateofintensitychangewhilemovingalongthe beamawayfromthelightsource): None:Brightnessdoesnotchange Smooth:Brightnessdecreasesaccordingtoalinearfalloff Realistic:Lightisbrightestnearthelightsource,andfallsawayaccordingtothe squareofthedistance,asinreality.Thisfalloffselectionisthemostnaturalin appearance.

AngFalloff

Selecttheanglefallofffunction(specifiestherateofintensitychangebetweenthebeam andthespread)

4. ClickOKtoreturntotheLightPreferencesdialogbox.ClickOKtoreturntothedrawing. 5. ClicktoplacealightobjectwiththeparametersspecifiedintheLightPreferencesdialogbox. Ifplacingadirectionallight,clicktospecifythelightpositioninDefaultDirectionmode.InSetDirectionmode, clickoncetospecifythelighttargetordirection,andthenclickasecondtimetospecifythelightposition.


2nd click

1st click

Set Direction mode of directional light placement depicted

Ifplacingaspotlight,clicktoplacethelight,andthendragtospecifythelightdirectionandtarget.Thespot lightcanbeaimedatanyobject.Clickagaintosetthespotlight.ThetargetZheightcanbeadjustedprecisely withtheLookToHeightparameteroftheObjectInfopalette. Thespotlighttargethandleandprojectionlineonlydisplaywhenthespotlightisselected.UsetheSelection tooltomovethelight.ThetargethandleaimsthespotlightandcanbeadjustedwiththeSelectiontooloncethe spotlighthasbeencreated.UsetheReshapetooltomovethetargethandleconstrainedaboutanaxisselectedin theToolbar.

670

| Chapter 16: Rendering the Drawing


1st click

2nd click

Light Source Properties


LightsourceparametersaredisplayedandcanbemodifiedintheObjectInfopalette.Theparametersavailable dependonthetypeoflightsource. SomeoftheparametersareonlyavailablewhentheRenderworksproductisinstalled;seeAdvancedRenderworks Lightingonpage 674forinformationontheRenderworkslighttypes.

Parameter
Kind

Description
Indicatesthetypeoflightsource;changetoadifferenttypebyselectingadifferentkind fromthedisplayedlist Acustom,area,orlinelightrequiresthattheRenderworksproductbeinstalled.

On/Off

Showsorhidesthelightproducedbythelightsource.Thissettingcanalsobeaccessed fromthelightcontextmenu:rightclick(Windows)orCtrlclick(Macintosh)onthelight, andselectTurnOnorTurnOff. Automaticallyrendersthedrawingwhenrenderingrelatedparameterschange WhenAutoUpdateisdeselected,clicktorenderthedrawingwhenrenderingrelated parameterschange Selecttocreateshadows Createsmorerealisticshadowsbydecreasinghardedges;renderingisslowerwhenthis optionisenabled Createsaspecialvolumetriclightingeffectforpointlightsandspotlightswhenusedin combinationwiththeLitFogRenderworksbackgroundweathereffect(seeCreatinga Backgroundonpage 630) Foraccuracy,specifiesthelightsactualbrightnessandcolortemperature;leave deselectedtousethelightasasimplelightsource.Requiredforacustom,area,orline light.TheemitterbrightnessofalllightobjectsinascenewithUseEmitterselectedcan becontrolledinLightingOptions;seeSettingLightingOptionsonpage 661.

AutoUpdate Update CastShadows (Renderworksrequired) SoftShadows (Renderworks required) LitFog (Renderworksrequired) UseEmitter (Renderworksrequired)

Adding Light | Parameter


Brightness

671

Description
Specifiesthelightsourcebrightness;enterapercentageordragthesliderbar.Avalue over100%canbeentered.Thisparameterisnotavailableforcustom,area,andline lights,orifUseEmitterisselected(Renderworksrequired). Specifiesthelocationofthelightintensitydataforacustomlight(eitheruserinputor distributionfile);thedistributionfilecanbespecifiedbyclickingLoadDistribution Specifiesthebrightnessasanaccuratenumber SelectLux,Lumens,Footcandles,orCandelasfortheunitofBrightness;theavailable unitsdependonthelighttype Dimsthelightsourcebrightness(intensity);enterapercentageordragthesliderbar. Onlythebrightnessofthelightsourceisaffected;thecolortemperatureisnotchanged. Specifiestherotationangleofacustomlightsourcearoundanaxisconnectingthelight locationtothelighttarget;thisangledefinestheplanefortheintensitydistribution curve,andisdisplayedinredonthecustomlightobject Specifieswhethertousetheattachedemissionprofiledatafileforthecustomlight Foracustomlight,displaysthedistributionfilenamewhenavaliddistributionfilehas beenselected,orNoneifavaliddistributionfilehasnotbeendesignated(clickLoad Distributiontospecifyafile) Foracustomlight,loadslightemissionprofiledatafromastandardfile.Thebrightness valueisobtainedusingtheintegraloftherawemissiondataprovidedwiththefile.The filemustbeatextfilewithindustrystandardintensitydistributiondatain .iesformat. SpecifiesthelightcolortemperatureinKelvin.Thisreferstoanidealblackbodyemitter, glowingredhotorwhitehot.Alowertemperaturegeneratesanorangecolor;the hotterthetemperature,theclosertowhitethecolorofthelightis(seeCorrelatedColor Temperatureonpage 900fortypicallightsourcecolortemperatureranges). Specifyingthisparameterisoptional.Ifnotspecified,thedefaulttemperatureis0, meaningthatthefinalemissioncolorforthelightisentirelycontrolledbytheselection inColor. Whenthetemperatureisspecified,Colorcannotbechanged.Thefinalemissioncoloris setbytheColorTemperature. Colortemperaturesettingscanbewhitebalancedonaperlayerbasis;seeSetting LightingOptionsonpage 661.

BrightnessFrom (Renderworksrequired) BrightnessValue (Renderworksrequired) BrightnessUnit (Renderworksrequired) Dimmer (Renderworksrequired) LightRotationAngle (Renderworksrequired) UseDistributionFile (Renderworksrequired) DistributionFile (Renderworksrequired) LoadDistribution (Renderworksrequired) ColorTemperature (Renderworksrequired)

Color

Specifiesacolorassociatedwiththelightsource;clickthecolorboxtoselectthecolor. ThisparameterisnotavailableifUseEmitterisselectedandaColorTemperatureis specified(Renderworksrequired). Indicatesthedistancefallofffunctionforapoint,spot,custom,area,orlinelight (specifiestherateofintensitychangewhilemovingalongthebeamawayfromthelight source) Forareaandlinelights,specifiesthesamplingqualityofthelight;selectFromRender ModetousethesettingsspecifiedforSoftShadowsqualityintherenderingoptions

DistFall

Quality (Renderworksrequired)

672

| Chapter 16: Rendering the Drawing


Description
Forareaandlinelights,rendersthelightobjectgeometry Selecttheanglefallofffunction(rateofintensitychangebetweenthebeamandthe spread) DragthehandlesonthediagramtosetthespotlightSpreadandBeamangles,orenter thevaluesinthefieldsbelowthediagram

Parameter
RenderGeometry (Renderworksrequired) AngFall Spread/Beamdiagram

Spread Beam

Spread Beam X/Y/ZorX/Y/Z LookToHeight Azimuth Elevation Pan/Tilt

Specifiesthespreadangleofthespotlight(lightconesmaximumangle) Specifiesthebeamangleofthespotlight(coneoflightthatdoesnotchangeintensityup tothespreadangle,afterwhichtheanglefalloffdeterminesitsintensity) Specifiesthelocationofthelightsourceinrelationtotheactivelayerplaneorworking plane Forspotlights,setstheZheightabovetheactivelayerplaneofthespotlighttarget handle Indicatestheazimuthforadirectionallight(Southatzerodegrees);enternewvaluesor dragthesliderbartoset Indicatestheelevation(degreesabovethehorizon)foradirectionallight;enternew valuesordragthesliderbartoset Clickthetopbuttontodisplaythespotlightorcustomlightbeampanandtiltangles; enternewvaluesordragthesliderbartoset

X/Y/Z

ClickthebottombuttontodisplaythelightbeamdirectionintermsofitsX,Y,andZ components Setstheorientationofthedirectional,spot,orcustomlighttothatofthecurrentview. Thissettingcanalsobeaccessedfromthelightcontextmenu:rightclick(Windows)or Ctrlclick(Macintosh)onthelight,andselectSetLighttoView.

SetLighttoView

Adding Light | Parameter


SetViewtoLight

673

Description
Setstheorientationofthecurrentviewtothatofthedirectional,spot,orcustomlight. Thissettingcanalsobeaccessedfromthelightcontextmenu:rightclick(Windows)or Ctrlclick(Macintosh)onthelight,andselectSetViewtoLight.

Asymbolthatcontainsalightobjectcanbecopiedtoreproduceidenticallights.Changethelightintensityfor eachsymbolintheObjectInfopalette. Oncealighthasbeenplacedonthedrawing,theSelectiontoolcanbeusedtochangeitslocation,and,dependingon thelighttype,beamparameters.

Light Type
Point,Spot,Directional

Beam Parameter
Lightlocation

Description
Clickonthelightwiththemovecursoranddragittoitsnew location

Thespotlighttargethandleisnotlockedtoitstarget.The targethandlelocationmayneedreadjustingaftermovingthe spotlight. Spot,Directional Orientationandview Selectthelight;intheObjectInfopalette,clickSetLightto Viewtosetthelightorientationtothecurrentview orientation,orclickSetViewtoLighttosettheorientationof theviewtothatofthelight Clickontheazimuthorelevationcontrolpointstochangethe directionallightparameters.Movethehandleswiththe mouse,orentertheazimuthandelevationvaluesintheData bar.
Elevation control point Light location control point Azimuth control point

Directional

Azimuthand elevationdirection

674

| Chapter 16: Rendering the Drawing


Beam Parameter
Targetdirection

Light Type
Spot

Description
ClickonthehandlewiththeSelectiontooltochangethespot lighttargetdirection;dragtothenewtargetandclicktoset

Click

Directional

Beamdirection

Clickanddragwiththehandcursortochangethebeam direction

Click

Advanced Renderworks Lighting


DefaultlightingisaddedbytheVectorworksprogramforthebasicvisibilityofrenderedobjects.Foramorerealistic rendering,oneormorelightsourcescanbeaddedtothedrawing.Theadditionofalightsourceautomaticallyhides thedefaultlightingscheme,sothatthesceneisnotoverlybright. Thebrightnessandcolorofobjectsinshadowareaffectedbythelayersambientlightsetting.

Scene rendered with light sources as well as ambient light

TheVectorworksFundamentalsproductprovidesthreelighttypes:directional,point,andspot.Withthe Renderworksproduct,additionalparametersareprovidedfortheselighttypes,andadditionallightsourcetypesare included. RenderworksproductrenderingmodesmustbeusedfortheRenderworkslightingoptions. ForinformationonthelightingtypesandparametersintheVectorworksFundamentalsproduct,seeAddingLight onpage 660.

Advanced Renderworks Lighting | Light Type


Directional Point Spot Line Area Custom

675

Description
Projectslightwithparallelrays Radiateslightinalldirections Projectslightinaspecificdirection Emitslightfromaline Emitslightfromthesurfacesofobjects Emitslightbasedonadefinedcomplexspatialdistribution

Product
VectorworksandRenderworks VectorworksandRenderworks VectorworksandRenderworks Renderworksonly Renderworksonly Renderworksonly

Inserting an Area or Linear Light


Anareaorlinearlightcanbecreatedfromanexistingobjectorline.Unliketheotherlightsourcetypes,whichare emittedfromaspecific,concentratedsource,areaandlinearlightsemanatefromanextendedobject.Thisisusefulfor creatingdiffusedlightsourceswithsofterlighting,suchasfluorescentlights,neonlights,windows,andskylights. Anarealightcannotbetextured.Useaglowreflectivityshadertocreatetexturedobjectsthatemitlightonlywhen indirectlightingisenabledintheLightingOptionsdialogbox. Theadditionofmultiplediffusedlightsourcescanaddsignificantlytorenderingtime.Forefficiency,replacea smallareaorlinelightwithapoint,spot,ordirectionallight.Inaddition,sincearealightscanbeslowtorender, itmaybebettertouseanHDRIbackgroundtosupplythebackground(sky)lighting. Tocreateanareaorlinearlightfromanexistingobjectorobjects: 1. Ifcreatinganarealight,selecttheobjecttoconverttoalightsource;arealightgeometryshouldencloseasurface (alineoropenpolylinecannotbeused,forexample).Selecta2Dline,closed2Dsurface,orNURBScurveif creatingalinearlight. Selectmorethanoneobjecttocreateseverallineorarealightsatthesametime. Curvedsurfacesusedforanarealightrequiremorerenderingtimethanplanarsurfaces. 2. SelectModify>Convert>ConverttoAreaLightorModify>Convert>ConverttoLineLight. TheLightPreferencesdialogboxopens;indicatetheareaorlinelightparameters.Specifylightintensityby enteringaGetBrightnessFromvalue.

676

| Chapter 16: Rendering the Drawing

Parameter
On/Off Color CastShadows SoftShadows Dimmer(%) UseEmitter GetBrightnessFrom UserInput DistributionFile

Description
Showsorhidesthelightproducedbythelightsource Specifiesacolorassociatedwiththelightsource;clickthecolorboxtoselectthecolor. ThisparameterisnotavailableifaColorTemperatureisspecified. Createsshadows Createsmorerealisticshadowsbydecreasinghardedges;renderingisslowerwhenthis optionisenabled Dimsthelightsourcebrightness(intensity);enterapercentageordragthesliderbar. Onlythebrightnessofthelightsourceisaffected;thecolortemperatureisnotchanged. Anareaorlinelightsactualbrightnessandcolortemperaturemustbespecified,sothis settingisnotoptional Specifiestheluminousquantityoftheareaorlinelight Manuallyspecifiestheluminousquantityofanarealightasanaccuratenumber;the unitsofalinelightarealwaysLumens Forcustomlightsonly;doesnotapplytoareaorlinelights

Advanced Renderworks Lighting | Parameter


ColorTemperature

677

Description
SpecifiesthelightcolortemperatureinKelvin.Thisreferstoanidealblackbody emitter,glowingredhotorwhitehot.Alowertemperaturegeneratesanorange color;thehotterthetemperature,theclosertowhitethecolorofthelightis(see CorrelatedColorTemperatureonpage 900fortypicallightsourcecolortemperature ranges). Specifyingthisparameterisoptional.Ifnotspecified,thedefaulttemperatureis0, meaningthatthefinalemissioncolorforthelightisentirelycontrolledbytheselection inColor. Whenthetemperatureisspecified,Colorcannotbechanged.Thefinalemissioncoloris setbytheColorTemperature. Colortemperaturesettingscanbewhitebalancedonaperlayerbasis;seeSetting LightingOptionsonpage 661.

AreaorLineLight Specs

Setsspecificareaorlinelightoptions

3. ClickAreaLightSpecsorLineLightSpecstosetadditionalparameters. TheAreaLightDataorLineLightDatadialogboxopens.

Parameter
DistFalloff Quality RenderGeometry

Description
Selectthedistancefallofffunction(rateofintensitychangewhilemovingalongthebeam awayfromthelightsource) Forareaandlinelights,specifiesthesamplingqualityofthelight;selectFromRender ModetousethesettingsspecifiedforSoftShadowsqualityintherenderingoptions Rendersthelightobjectgeometry;deselecttohidetheoriginalgeometrywhenrendering

4. ClickOKtoreturntotheLightPreferencesdialogbox. 5. ClickOK.Theobjectorlineisconvertedintoalight.Ifmorethanoneobjectwasselectedforconversion,the convertedobjectsaregrouped.Thearealightemitslightinbothsurfacedirections. ThelightmustberenderedwithaRenderworksproductrenderingmode.Whenanarealightisonand rendered,ithasconstantreflectivityanddoesnotreceiveshadows;whenitisoff,itdisplaysasanormalobject.

678

| Chapter 16: Rendering the Drawing

Editing an Area or Linear Light


ThelightparameterscanbeeditedintheObjectInfopalette;seeLightSourcePropertiesonpage 670. Theareaorlinearlightoriginalgeometrycanbeedited. Toedittheoriginallightgeometry: 1. SelecttheareaorlinelightandthenselectModify>EditLight. TheEditLightwindowopens,andtheoriginal3DobjectoraNURBSrepresentationofa2Dobjectisdisplayed. 2. TheobjectgeometrycanbeeditedwiththeReshapetool. 3. ClickExitLightatthetoprightofthedrawingwindowtoreturntothedrawing.

Inserting a Custom Light


Acustomlightsourcesemissiondistributioncanbedefinedbyastandardintensitydistributionprofileforaccurate physicallighting. Tocreateacustomlight: 1. SelecttheLighttoolfromtheVisualizationtoolset,andthenselectCustomLightfromtheToolbar. 2. SpecifythecustomlightparametersbyselectingLightPreferencesfromtheToolbar. TheCustomLightDatadialogboxopens.ClickLoadDistributionandspecifythelocationofthecustomlight distributionfile,andthenspecifyanyadditionalcustomlightparameters.

Advanced Renderworks Lighting | Parameter


LightRotationAngle DistributionFile

679

Description
Specifiestherotationangleofthelightsourcearoundanaxisconnectingthelightlocation tothelighttarget;thisangledefinesthereferenceplanefortheintensitydistributioncurve Displaysthedistributionfilenamewhenavaliddistributionfilehasbeenselected,or Noneifavaliddistributionfilehasnotbeendesignated(clickLoadDistributionto specifyafile) Loadslightemissionprofiledatafromastandardfile.Thebrightnessvalueisobtained usingtheintegraloftherawemissiondataprovidedwiththefile.Thefilemustbeatext filewithindustrystandardintensitydistributiondatain .iesformat. Selectthedistancefallofffunction(rateofintensitychangewhilemovingalongthebeam awayfromthelightsource) Specifiesthelightsdirectionbyeitherspecifyingthelightangleorvector Setsthelightsanglebypanandtilt.Thepanangleisbasedonanangleof0degreesatthe positiveYaxis,andispositiveinacounterclockwisedirection;thetiltangleisequalto0at thehorizontalplane,positivewhenpointingbelowtheplane,andnegativewhenpointing abovetheplane. IndicatesthedirectionofthelightbyspecifyingthecoordinatesofitsX,Y,andZvectors

LoadDistribution

DistFalloff Direction Angle

Vector 3. ClickOK.

TheLightPreferencesCustomLightdialogboxopens.Specifyadditionalcustomlightparameters.Emitter parametersarespecifiedbythedistributionfile,andcannotbechanged.

Parameter
On/Off

Description
Showsorhidesthelightproducedbythelightsource

680

| Chapter 16: Rendering the Drawing


Description
Specifiesacolorassociatedwiththelightsource;clickthecolorboxtoselectthecolor.This parameterisnotavailableifaColorTemperatureisspecified. Createsshadows Dimsthelightsourcebrightness(intensity);enterapercentageordragthesliderbar.Only thebrightnessofthelightsourceisaffected;thecolortemperatureisnotchanged. Acustomlightsactualbrightnessandcolortemperaturemustbespecified,sothissettingis notoptional Specifiestheluminousquantityoftheareaorlinelightasamanuallyenteredvalueorfrom aloadeddistributionfile ManuallyspecifiesthebrightnessinLuxorLumens SetsintensitydistributiondatawithastandardfilespecifiedinCustomLightSpecs.The brightnessvalueisobtainedusingtheintegraloftherawemissiondataprovidedwiththe file. SpecifiesthelightcolortemperatureinKelvin.Thisreferstoanidealblackbodyemitter, glowingredhotorwhitehot.Alowertemperaturegeneratesanorangecolor;thehotter thetemperature,theclosertowhitethecolorofthelightis(seeCorrelatedColor Temperatureonpage 900fortypicallightsourcecolortemperatureranges). Specifyingthisparameterisoptional.Ifnotspecified,thedefaulttemperatureis0,meaning thatthefinalemissioncolorforthelightisentirelycontrolledbytheselectioninColor. Whenthetemperatureisspecified,Colorcannotbechanged.Thefinalemissioncolorisset bytheColorTemperature. Colortemperaturesettingscanbewhitebalancedonaperlayerbasis;seeSetting LightingOptionsonpage 661.

Parameter
Color CastShadows Dimmer UseEmitter GetBrightnessFrom UserInput DistributionFile

ColorTemperature

CustomLightSpecs

Specifiesadditionalcustomlightoptionsandloadsadistributionfile

4. ClickOKtoreturntothedrawing. 5. Clickinthedrawingtoinsertthecustomlight.

Thecustomlightobjectisrepresentedbyapairofperpendiculararrowheadvectorsandtwoperpendicular circles.Theblackvectorpointstothetargetlocation;itsaxisline(thelightaxis)connectsthelightsourcelocation tothetarget.Theredvectorstartsatthelightsourcelocation,pointingtoareferencepointontheequatorof thepolarintensitydistribution.Alsoknownasthezeroangleline,itrepresentstheoriginformeasuringthe intensityonthelightcurve. Thetwovectorsformtheblackcircle,andtheredcircleisperpendiculartoit.Theblackcirclerepresentsthe originalplanewherethelightcurvesarelocated.Theredcircleconstrainsthemovementofthezeroangleline.

Preparing to Render |

681

Afteracustomlighthasbeenplaced,thelightparameterscanbeeditedintheObjectInfopalette;seeLightSource Propertiesonpage 670.

Preparing to Render
Oncethedrawingiscompleteornearcompletion,anytextureshavebeenapplied,andthedesiredlightinghasbeen added,selectoneofthestandardviews(seeUsingStandardViewsonpage 575),andusetheFlyover,Walkthrough, TranslateView,orRotateViewtoolstoorientthedrawing.Thoughtheviewcanbeadjustedafterthedrawingis rendered,itisfastertosettheviewwhileinwireframemode.

Rendering with Vectorworks


TherendermodesintheVectorworksprogramtranslatethedrawinginvariouswaystocreateanimagewith additionalrealisticdetails.Forexample,aHiddenLinerenderingissimilartothenonrendered(Wireframe)image, butithidestheportionoftheobjectsthatwouldnotnormallybevisible.AnOpenGLrenderingalsohashiddenlines, andcolorsandshading;italsoshowshowthelightsourcesinteractwiththeobjectsurfaces,anditcanshowany texturesthatwereapplied. TheViewbardisplaystheRenderModesforquickaccesstotherenderingcommands.TheViewbaroptions displaytheRenderModeShort(displayingashortenedversion)ortheRenderModeLong(displayingthe currentrendermodeoptionsandthecurrentrendermode).TheCurrentRenderModeOptionsbuttonopens thesettingsdialogboxforthecurrentrendermode,ifapplicable.

Current Render Mode Options

Render Modes list

Toselectarendermode: SelectView>Rendering,andthenselectthedesiredrendermode. Tocancelarenderprocessbeforeitiscomplete,pressEsc.

682

| Chapter 16: Rendering the Drawing


Rendering Command
Wireframe

Description
Avisualrepresentationofthemodeliscreatedusinglinestorepresent objectedges;seeWireframeOptionsonpage 683toadjustsettingsfor planarobjects

OpenGL

Createsagoodquality,detailedrendering,withcolors,shading,and textures(optional);seeOpenGLonpage 684fordetails

HiddenLine

Hidestheedgelinesofobjectsthatarebehindotherobjects,whichgivesa solidappearance

DashedHiddenLine

Edgelinesofobjectsthatarebehindotherobjectsdisplayasdashedlines

UnshadedPolygon

Displaysobjectsassolids,anddisplaysattributessuchascolors

Rendering with Vectorworks | Rendering Command


ShadedPolygon

683

Description
AnUnshadedPolygonrenderingwithshadingadded

ShadedPolygonNoLines

AShadedPolygonrenderingwithnoedgelines

FinalShadedPolygon

AHiddenLinerenderingontopofaShadedPolygonNoLines rendering;edgesandcurvedsurfacesarecleanerthanthoseinaShaded Polygonrendering

Wireframe Options
Planarobjectswithsolidfillsaredrawninstackingorder.Ina3Dwireframeview,objectsmayoverlap,obscuring objectslowerinthestackingorder.Thewireframeoptionscontrolwhetherfillsshouldbevisibleforplanarobjectsin 3Dviews,andiftheyarevisible,setsthefillopacityoffilledplanarobjects. Tosetwireframeoptions: 1. SelectView>Rendering>WireframeOptions. TheWireframeOptionsdialogboxopens.

684

| Chapter 16: Rendering the Drawing

Parameter
Showfillsinplanar objectsin3Dviews Fillopacity Ignoreperspective

Description
Displaysfillsfor2Dplanarobjectsin3Dviews Setstheopacityoffilled2Dplanarobjectsforsituationswhereobjectsoverlap Whenselected,drawsquickorthographicrepresentationsofPDFs,images,andimage fills(includingtiledefinitionswhichcontainimagesorimagefills);deselecttodraw moreaccurateperspectiveprojectedrepresentationsofPDFs,images,andimagefills, whichmaytakemoretime Whenselected,drawsquickorthographicrepresentationsoftextin3Dviews;deselect todrawaccurateperspectiveprojectedtext,whichmaytakemoretimetorepresent

Ignoreperspectiveintext

2. ClickOKtosetthewireframeoptions.

OpenGL
UsetheOpenGLrendermodetocreategoodqualityrenderingpreviewsthatarefastandinteractive.(For finalqualityoutput,usetheRenderworksproduct;seeRenderworksRenderingModesonpage 689.) TheOpenGLmodeperformslightingcalculationsbasedonpolygons;thismeansthatdrawingswithmorepolygons rendermorerealistically.Moreadvancedrenderers,suchastheRenderworksrenderingmodes,calculatethelighting effectsforeachpixel.Thismethodtakesmoretime,butitproduceshigherqualityrenderings. TheVectorworksprogramhasadefaultlightingscheme,sothatabasicrenderingdoesnotrequireanaddedlight source.However,theadditionofalightsourceisusuallynecessaryforamorerealisticrendering(seeAddingLight Sourcesonpage 665).Theadditionofalightsourceautomaticallyhidesthedefaultlightingscheme,sothatthescene isnottoobright. OpenGLrendersuptoeightlightsinadrawing;additionallightshavenoeffect. TogetthebestperformancefromOpenGL,useavideocardthatsupportshardwareacceleratedOpenGL.Thereare significantcompatibilityissueswithsomecards;seewww.vectorworks.netforalistofvideocardsthatarecompatible withtheVectorworksprogram. Vectorworks8filesthatwererenderedinQuickDraw3DautomaticallyrenderinOpenGLwhentheyareconvertedto versionslaterthanVectorworks8.

Rendering with Vectorworks |

685

OpenGL Render Options


UsetheOpenGLoptionstocontrolthelevelofdetailinrenderedimages,whichinturnaffectstherenderspeed(less detailrendersfaster).Thesesettingsapplyonlytothecurrentdrawing;theyremainineffectinthecurrentdrawing untilthesettingsarechanged.ThecurrentOpenGLsettingsaresavedwhenyoucreateatemplate(seeCreating Templatesonpage 80). Forsmootherrenderingofmeshobjects,enablemeshsmoothinginthedocumentpreferences(seeDisplay Preferencesonpage 29). TosettheOpenGLoptions: 1. SelectView>Rendering>OpenGLOptions. TheOpenGLRenderSettingsdialogboxopens.

Parameter
Detail UseTextures (Renderworksrequired) UseAntiAliasing DrawEdges (Renderworksrequired) UseShadows (Renderworksrequired) OnGroundOnly (Renderworks required)

Description
Specifiesthelevelofdetailforrenderings;alowsettingrendersfaster Rendersobjecttextures;thisprovidesbetterdetailandisusuallyenabled,butittakes longertorender Filterstherenderingandreducespixellatededges;thisoptionisonlyavailableifthe graphicscardsupportsthefeature Rendersobjectswithlinesdrawnaroundtheedges,similartothelinesintheHidden Linerendermode Objectsinthedrawingcastshadowsonotherobjects(butnotontheactivelayerplane). ForbestresultswithOpenGLshadows,switchtoanorthographicview,andlimitthe useofpointlights(turnoffshadowsforpointlights,ataminimum). IfUseShadowsisselected,selectthisoptionfordrawingobjectstocastshadowsona planeatthelowestpointinthedrawingwhichisusuallytheactivelayerplane butnotonotherobjects

686

| Chapter 16: Rendering the Drawing


Description
IfUseShadowsisselected,selectthelevelofqualityfortheshadowedges(alow settinguseslessmemoryandrendersfaster) InOpenGLrenderedviews,displays2Dplanarobjectswiththeirobjectattributes; deselecttohidetheattributes

Parameter
Quality (Renderworks required) UsePlanarAttributes

2. SelecttheOpenGLrenderoptions,andclickOKtochangethesettingsforthefile.

Renderworks Features for OpenGL


IftheRenderworksproductisinstalled,theOpenGLrendermodehasadditionalfeaturesthathelpyoutopreview andadjustascenebeforeitisrenderedwithRenderworksproductrendermodes. TurnontheDrawEdgesfeaturetooutlineobjectsmoreclearlyintherendereddrawing;theseedgesaresimilar tothoseintheHiddenLinerendermode. TurnontheinteractiveUseShadowsfeaturetoseehowtheshadowsfallwithdifferenttypesoflighting.The shadowsrendermuchfasterwiththeRenderworksproduct,whichmakesiteasiertoadjustthelightsquickly. OpenGLcandisplaythreetypesofRenderworksbackgrounds:OneColor,TwoColor,andImage.Itcannot displayCloudandHDRIbackgrounds.(SeeCreatingLayerBackgroundsonpage 629fordetails.)

Line Render Options


UsethelinerenderoptionstocontroltheappearanceoflinesinHiddenLine,DashedHiddenLine,andFinalShaded Polygonmodes.Thesesettingsapplyonlytothecurrentdrawing;theyremainineffectinthecurrentdrawinguntil thesettingsarechanged.Thecurrentlinerendersettingsaresavedwhenyoucreateatemplate(seeCreating Templatesonpage 80). Tosetlinerenderingoptions: 1. SelectView>Rendering>LineRenderOptions. TheLineRenderOptionsdialogboxopens.

Rendering with Vectorworks |

687

Parameter
DashStyle

Description
SelectthedashstyleforhiddenlineswhentheDashedHiddenLinemodeis selected. Thenamesanddisplayorderoftheavailabledashstylescanbechanged;see CreatingCustomDashStylesonpage 535.

DashShade Preview

AdjusttheslidertoselecthowhiddenlinesareshadedwhentheDashedHidden Linemodeisselected Displaysapreviewoftheselectedparameters

688

| Chapter 16: Rendering the Drawing


Description
SetstheangletoreducefacetlineswhentheHiddenLine,DashedHiddenLine, orFinalShadedPolygonmodeisselected;ifthevalueisgreaterthanzero,facet lineswillberemovedbetweenanytwofacesofanobjectthatarewithinthat angleofeachother

Parameter
SmoothingAngle

A Dashed Hidden Line rendering with the Smoothing Angle set to 0

A Dashed Hidden Line rendering with the Smoothing Angle set to 15

GenerateIntersectingLines

Generateslineswheresurfacesinthedrawingintersecteachotherwhenthe HiddenLine,DashedHiddenLine,orFinalShadedPolygonmodeisselected;for largefileswithalotofcurvedsurfaces,thisoptioncanmakerenderingslower

A Hidden Line rendering with Generate Intersecting Lines disabled

A Hidden Line rendering with Generate Intersecting Lines enabled

SketchHiddenLineResults (VectorworksDesignSeries required) DocumentDefaultSketchStyle (VectorworksDesignSeries required)

SpecifieswhethertoapplysketcheffectstolineswhentheHiddenLine,Dashed HiddenLine,orFinalShadedPolygonmodeisselected;seeSketchRendering onpage 641intheVectorworksDesignSeriesUsersGuide SetsthedefaultsketchstyleforlineswhentheHiddenLine,DashedHidden Line,orFinalShadedPolygonmodeisselected;seeSettingtheDefaultSketch Styleonpage 641intheVectorworksDesignSeriesUsersGuide.ClickEditto opentheSketchStyleEditordialogboxforadditionalsketchstylemodification.

2. Selectthelinerenderoptions,andclickOKtochangethesettingsforthefile.

Rendering with Renderworks |

689

Rendering with Renderworks


Renderworks Rendering Modes
TheRenderworksproductoffersseveralrenderingmodes,includingcustomrenderingoptionsandanartistic renderingoption. Torenderadrawing,selectView>Renderingandthedesiredrenderingmode.Therenderingspeeddependsonthe renderingoptionselectedandthenumberandcomplexityofobjectsinthefile. Tocancelarenderingbeforeitiscomplete,presstheEsckey. TheViewbardisplaystheRenderModesforquickaccesstotherenderingcommands.TheViewbaroptions displaytheRenderModeShort(displayingashortenedversion)ortheRenderModeLong(displayingthe currentrendermodeoptionsandthecurrentrendermode).TheCurrentRenderModeOptionsbuttonopens thesettingsdialogboxforthecurrentrendermode,ifapplicable.

Current Render Mode Options

Render Modes list

Savefilesinwireframemoderatherthaninarenderedmode,sothatfilesdrawmorequicklywhenopened. RenderedviewportsaresavedinarenderedstatewhenSaveviewportcacheisselectedintheDisplaytabof documentpreferences.

Rendering Mode
FastRenderworks

Description
Renderswithoutantialiasingorraytracing;lowdetaillevel

FinalQualityRenderworks

Renderswithreflections,shadows,antialiasing,transparency, andahighlevelofdetail

RenderworksStyle

Renderswithparametersthathavebeensavedasa RenderworksStyle(seeRenderworksStylesonpage 690)

690

| Chapter 16: Rendering the Drawing


Description
Renderswithparameterssetbytheuser(seeCustom RenderworksOptionsonpage 694) Renderswithmultiplesketchstylesforahanddrawnlook (seeArtisticRenderworksOptionsonpage 695)

Rendering Mode
CustomRenderworks ArtisticRenderworks

Renderworks Styles
Severalelementscombinetocreateasatisfactoryrendering:theselectedrendermode,therendermodeoptions,the lightingoptions,andtheselectedRenderworksbackground.ARenderworksstylesavesthesettingsforthese parametersasaresourcethatcanbereappliedlaterandsharedbetweenfiles. TheRenderworksproductincludesseveraldefaultstylestoquicklyobtainavarietyoflooks,withnoparameter adjustmentorrenderingknowledgerequired.

Realistic Exterior Night Final

Realistic Colors White

Artistic Taper Thick Black

Creating Renderworks Styles


RenderworksstylesthatincorporateeitherrealisticorartisticRenderworksparameterscanbesavedasresources.For moreinformationoncreatingresources,seeCreatingNewResourcesonpage 163. IfyoucreateaRenderworksstylewhilethelayerorviewportisrenderedinanyRenderworksmodeora Renderworksstyle,thecurrentsettingsareusedasthebasisforthenewstyle.Thisisaconvenientwayofsaving rendersettings. TocreateaRenderworksStyleresource: 1. SelectWindow>Palettes>ResourceBrowsertoopentheResourceBrowser. 2. FromtheResourceslist,selectNewResourcetodisplaytheNewResourcemenu. 3. SelectRenderworksStyle. TheEditRenderworksStyledialogboxopens.Provideanameforthestyleresourceandselectarealisticor artistictypeofstyle,andthenspecifytherenderparameters.

Rendering with Renderworks |

691

Parameter
Name Type Realistic Options AntiAliasing Shadows Blurriness Textures Colors

Description
SpecifythenameoftheRenderworksStyleresource SelecteitherRealisticorArtistic;differentoptionsareavailabledependingonthe desiredlook CreatesaRenderworksstylebasedonCustomRenderworksoptions

Selectforsmootheredgesonobjectsandtextures;deselectforfasterrenderingwith rougheredges Rendershadowsforahigherdegreeofrealism Selecttorendertextureswithblurredreflectivityand/orblurredtransparency(this canaddsignificantrenderingtime) Rendersthetexturesassignedtoobjects;deselectforfasterrendering Whenselected,renderscolors,andtextureswithcolors;deselecttorendercolorsas white

692

| Chapter 16: Rendering the Drawing


Description
Adjuststheexposurebrightnessoftherenderedimage;enteravaluetoincreasethe brightness(above100%)ortodecreasethebrightness(below100%) Foreachparameter,selectthequalitylevel.Higherqualityresultsinbetterresolution ofrenderedimages,withbettertexturedetailandsoftershadows,buttakesmore time. Convenientlysetsthequalitylevelofalltheoptionsatonetime.Customindicatesthat someoptionshavedifferentqualitylevelsset. Selectthequalitylevelforfacetingofcurvedgeometry(suchasNURBSsurfaces) Selectthequalitylevelforantialiasing(smoothing)ofedgesonobjectsandtextures Selectthequalitylevelforindirectlightingeffects(seeSettingLightingOptionson page 661) SetsthequalitylevelofshadowsforlightobjectsthathaveSoftShadowsenabled.For areaandlinelights,specifiesthesamplingqualityofthelight. Selectthequalityleveloftextureswithblurryreflectivityand/ortransparency Selectthesamplingqualitylevelforenvironment(HDRI)backgroundlighting.This optionhasnoeffectwhenindirectlightingisenabledforthelightingoptions. Enterthenumberoflevelsofreflectionamongshinysurfaces;ahighervalueslows rendering,butcanyieldamorerealisticimageforsceneswithmanyinterreflecting objects

Parameter
ImageExposure(%) Quality

QualityLevels CurvedGeometry AntiAliasing IndirectLighting SoftShadows Blurriness Environment Lighting MaxReflections

Lighting ApplyLighting Options ControlswhethertheRenderworksstylechangesthecurrentlightingoptionswhenit isapplied.Selecttheoptiontoapplythestyleslightingoptionstothelayeror viewportwhentheRenderworksstyleisapplied.Deselecttheoptiontoleavethe currentlightingoptionsunchangedwhentheRenderworksstyleisapplied. Setsthelightingoptions;seeSettingLightingOptionsonpage 661 OpenstheEditRenderworksBackgrounddialogbox,toconvenientlychange backgroundandenvironmentlightingoptionsthataffecttherendering

LightingOptions EditResource Background

ApplyRenderworks ControlswhethertheRenderworksBackgroundchangesthecurrentbackground Background optionswhenitisapplied.Selecttheoptiontoapplythestylesbackgroundtothe layerorviewportwhentheRenderworksstyleisapplied.Deselecttheoptiontoleave thecurrentbackgroundunchangedwhentheRenderworksstyleisapplied. Renderworks Background Artistic ArtisticStyle Background SetstheRenderworksBackgroundoptions;seeCreatingaBackgroundonpage 630 CreatesaRenderworksstylebasedonArtisticRenderworksoptions SelectanArtisticRenderworksstyleandsetanyoptions;seeArtisticRenderworks Optionsonpage 695

Rendering with Renderworks | Parameter Description

693

ApplyRenderworks ControlswhethertheRenderworksBackgroundchangesthecurrentbackground Background optionswhenitisapplied.Selecttheoptiontoapplythestylesbackgroundtothe layerorviewportwhentheRenderworksstyleisapplied.Deselecttheoptiontoleave thecurrentbackgroundunchangedwhentheRenderworksstyleisapplied. Renderworks Background SetstheRenderworksBackgroundoptions;seeCreatingaBackgroundonpage 630

4. ClickOKtocreateaRenderworksStyleresourcewiththenameandpropertiesspecifiedintheEdit RenderworksStyledialogbox.TheRenderworksstyledisplaysintheResourceBrowserandissavedwiththe file.ItisaddedtothelistofavailableRenderworksstylesintheView>RenderworksStylemenu. ToeditaRenderworksStyleresourceafterithasbeencreated,selecttheRenderworksstylefromtheResource BrowserandselectEditfromtheResourcesmenu.SeeWorkingwithResourcesonpage 170.

Applying Renderworks Styles


RenderworksstylesareresourcesthataresavedwiththefileandcanbefoundintheResourceBrowser.The VectorworksprogramcomeswithseveralRenderworksstylesthatareprovidedasdefaultcontent(defaultcontentis automaticallyimportedintothecurrentfileatthepointofuseanddisplaysintheResourceBrowser;seeDefault ContentinVectorworksFundamentalsandRenderworksonpage 157). TorenderadrawingwithaRenderworksstyle: SelectView>Rendering>RenderworksStyle,andthenthedesiredstylefromeitherthedefaultcontentorthe currentfilescontent.ThecurrentRenderworksstyleineffectdisplayswithacheckmarkontheRenderworks Stylemenu.Therenderingspeeddependsontherenderingoptionselectedandthenumberandcomplexityof objectsinthefile.Tocancelarenderingbeforeitiscomplete,presstheEsckey. ARenderworksStyleresourcecanalsobeappliedbydraggingitfromtheResourceBrowserintoadesignlayer ofthedrawing. RenderworksstylesarealsoavailablefromtheRenderModemenuontheViewbar,asdescribedinRendering withRenderworksonpage 689.Whencreatingaviewport,RenderworksstylesareavailablefromtheRender listintheCreateViewportdialogbox,orfromtheObjectInfopaletteofanexistingviewport.TheRender BitmaptoolandbatchrenderingfunctionalitycanalsotakeadvantageofRenderworksstyles. WhenaRenderworksbackgroundissetfromtheRenderworksstyle,theoptiontoselectabackgroundmaynotbe availablewhenthestyleisineffect,suchasforviewports.TheRenderworksstylesbackgroundsettingsoverridethe RenderworksbackgroundsettingswhenApplyRenderworksBackgroundwasselectedforthestyle.Similarly,when lightingoptionshavebeensetfromtheRenderworksstyle,anyattempttoeditlightingoptionsautomaticallyopens theEditRenderworksStyledialogbox,sincethesearethesettingsineffectwhenApplyLightingOptionsisselected forthestyle. UseRenderworksstylesandtheHeliodontool(DesignSeriesrequired)toobtaingoodresultsfromexistingfiles. Openanexistingmodel,andeitherdeleteorturnoffexistinglightsinthedrawing(throughtheVisualization palette).IntheOpenGLOptions,selectUseShadows.RenderwiththeOpenGLrendermodeandselecta3D view.(ARenderworksCameraobjectcanhelptosetandadjustthe3Dview.) PlaceaheliodonobjectinthedrawingwiththeHeliodontool.ClickSolarAnimationtointeractivelyadjustthe dateandtime(seeConductingSolarStudieswiththeHeliodonObjectonpage 651intheVectorworksDesign SeriesUsersGuide).

694

| Chapter 16: Rendering the Drawing


Forexteriors,selecttheRealisticExteriorFastorRealisticExteriorFinalRenderworksstyle;forinteriors,select eitherRealisticInteriorFastorRealisticInteriorFinal.Theheliodoncreatesastrongsunlightwithsoftedged shadows,whiletheRenderworksstyleprovidessoftskylightingfromtheincludedHDRIbackgrounds.

Custom Renderworks Options


u

Customrendersettingsprovidegreatercontroloverfinequalityrendering.Thesesettingsareusedexclusivelybythe CustomRenderworksrenderingmode.Customgeometrysettingsoverridethe3Dconversionressettingonthe3D tabinVectorworkspreferences.Thesesettingsapplyonlytothecurrentdrawingandremainineffectinthecurrent drawinguntilthesettingsarechanged.Inaddition,thesettingsaresavedwhencreatingtemplates(seeCreating Templatesonpage 80). TosetCustomRenderworksrenderingoptions: 1. SelectView>Rendering>CustomRenderworksOptions. TheCustomRenderworksOptionsdialogboxopens.ThedefaultoptionsmatchFastRenderworksrendering mode.

Parameter
Options AntiAliasing

Description
Enablingtheoptionsallowsforbetterquality,higherdetailedrendering,buttakes longertorender Selectforsmootheredgesonobjectsandtextures;deselectforfasterrenderingwith rougheredges

Rendering with Renderworks | Parameter


Shadows Blurriness Textures Colors LightingOptions

695

Description
Rendershadowsforahigherdegreeofrealism Selecttorendertextureswithblurredreflectivityand/orblurredtransparency(this canaddsignificantrenderingtime) Rendersthetexturesassignedtoobjects;deselectforfasterrendering Whenselected,renderscolors,andtextureswithcolors;deselecttorendercolorsas white ClickLayerLightingOptions(fromadesignlayer)orViewportLightingOptions (fromaviewport)toquicklyaccesstheassociatedlightingoptionsdialogbox.See SettingLightingOptionsonpage 661formoreinformation. Adjuststheexposurebrightnessoftherenderedimage;enteravaluetoincreasethe brightness(above100%)ortodecreasethebrightness(below100%) Foreachparameter,selectthequalitylevel.Higherqualityresultsinbetterresolution ofrenderedimages,withbettertexturedetailandsoftershadows,buttakesmore time. Convenientlysetsthequalitylevelofalltheoptionsatonetime.Customindicates thatsomeoptionshavedifferentqualitylevelsset. Selectthequalitylevelforfacetingofcurvedgeometry(suchasNURBSsurfaces) Selectthequalitylevelforantialiasing(smoothing)ofedgesonobjectsandtextures Selectthequalitylevelforindirectlightingeffects(seeSettingLightingOptionson page 661) SetsthequalitylevelofshadowsforlightobjectsthathaveSoftShadowsenabled. Forareaandlinelights,specifiesthesamplingqualityofthelight. Selectthequalityleveloftextureswithblurryreflectivityand/ortransparency Selectthesamplingqualitylevelforenvironment(HDRI)backgroundlighting.This optionhasnoeffectwhenindirectlightingisenabledforthelightingoptions. Enterthenumberoflevelsofreflectionamongshinysurfaces;ahighervalueslows rendering,butcanyieldamorerealisticimageforsceneswithmanyinterreflecting objects

ImageExposure(%) Quality

QualityLevels CurvedGeometry AntiAliasing IndirectLighting SoftShadows Blurriness EnvironmentLighting MaxReflections

Whentestingarendering,settheQualitylevelstolowandturnAntiAliasingandevenShadowsoff.Lower renderingqualityisoffsetbyfasterrenderingtimes. Tocreateawhitecardorwhitemodelrendering,turnofftexturesandcolors. 2. ClickOKtosettheCustomRenderoptions.

Artistic Renderworks Options


WhenyouselecttheArtisticRenderworksmode,avarietyofstylesandoptionsareavailabletocreateahanddrawn orartisticlookfora3Ddrawing.Thesesettingsapplyonlytothecurrentdrawingandremainineffectinthecurrent drawinguntilthesettingsarechanged.Inaddition,thesettingsaresavedwhencreatingtemplates(seeCreating Templatesonpage 80).

696

| Chapter 16: Rendering the Drawing

ArtisticRenderworksoptionsareavailableaspartofaRenderworksstyle;seeRenderworksStylesonpage 690.A Renderworksstyleallowsartisticparameterstobesavedasaresourcetobereappliedlaterandsharedbetweenfiles. ArtisticRenderworksdoesnotproducesketchrenderingof2Dobjects. TosetArtisticRenderworksoptions: 1. SelectView>Rendering>ArtisticRenderworksOptions. 2. TheArtisticRenderworksOptionsdialogboxopens.Apreviewsceneisshowninordertoevaluatetheeffectsof thedifferentoptions.

3. SelecttheStylefromthelist,andthenclickOptionstosetspecificstyleparameters.Thepreviewimagedisplays theresultingeffect. MostArtisticRenderworksstylesusehiddenlinerendering(exceptforArtandHatch).Thesestylesmayrequire longerrenderingtimesfordrawingswithmanyfacets(polygons).Astylethatdoesnotusehiddenline renderingisrecommendedforextremelycomplexdrawings. TheArtisticRenderworksstylesallowthelayersRenderworksbackgroundtoshowthrough,ifonehasbeen definedandapplied(seeApplyingRenderworksBackgroundsonpage 656). Manyoftheartisticstylessharetheparametersofedgecolorandedgethickness.Someparametersareuniquely availabletocertainstyles.

Parameter
EdgeThickness

Description
Specifiesthethicknessoflinesusedinthestyle;forlinesthat varyinthickness,thissetsthethickestportionoftheline

Style Where Applied


AllstylesexceptArtand Hatch

Rendering with Renderworks | Parameter


EdgeColor ShadowColor ChangeImage

697

Description
Clickthecolorboxtoselectthecolorofthelines Clickthecolorboxtoselectthecolorofshadows SelectsadifferentimagetoapplytoArtmode;theimage selectedmustbesquare,andcontainacolormappedsphere. Thecolorofthesphereisusedtocolortheimage.

Style Where Applied


AllstylesexceptArtand Hatch LinesandShadow Art

Artistic Renderworks Option


None

Description
Forcomparison,theimagebelowisrenderedwithFinal QualityRenderworks

Art

Transformstheimageintoasinglecolorwithshadows

Cartoon

Tracesaborderaroundedgesofobjectsandcombines simplifiedshadingwithdrawnedges

698

| Chapter 16: Rendering the Drawing


Artistic Renderworks Option
Hatch

Description
Shadestheimagewithstrokedhatchlines

LinesandShadow

Tracesaborderaroundtheedgesofobjectsanddisplays shadows

Pencil(soft)

Simulatesahanddrawnpencildrawingwithsoft, smudgedpencilline(s)attheedgesofobjects

Pencil(SketchConcept)

Simulatesahanddrawnpencildrawingwiththinlines thatextendslightlypasttheirintendedpoint

Rendering with Renderworks | Artistic Renderworks Option


Pencil(RoughSketch)

699

Description
Simulatesahanddrawnpencildrawingwithmany overlappinglines

Pencil(Loose)

Simulatesahanddrawnpencildrawingwithcurvy, carelessstraightlines

Pen(ThickandThin)

Simulatesahanddrawnpendrawingwithuneven pressureonthepennib

Pen(ThinDistance)

Simulatesahanddrawnpendrawingwithlinesthatget thinnerasthelineretreats

700

| Chapter 16: Rendering the Drawing


Artistic Renderworks Option
Crayon

Description
Drawsedgeswithathick,monochromecrayon

ChunkyLines

Drawslineswithahesitantstrokethatsimulatestheink sinkingintothepaperatthosepoints

ClonedLines

Drawsoverlapping,taperinglines

Brush(Watercolor)

Drawsaswithathinwatercolorbrush,withinkthatsoaks intothepaper

Rendering a Selected Area | Artistic Renderworks Option


Brush(WatercolorLight)

701

Description
SimilartoBrush(Watercolor),butwithlesspressure applied

Brush(Chinese)

Drawsaswithinkandawatercolorbrush,withthicker linesatthecorners

Brush(ChineseFade)

Drawsaswithinkandawatercolorbrush,withlinesthat startthickandbecomethinneralongthestroke

4. ClickOKtosettheArtisticRenderworksoptions. 5. SelectView>Rendering>ArtisticRenderworkstorenderwiththespecifiedoption.

Rendering a Selected Area


TheRenderBitmaptoolcreatesarenderedbitmapimageofaselectedareaandplacesitontopofthedrawing. Manipulatethisimagesimilartoimportedimages. Usethistooltopreviewasectionofadrawing,orcreatealayoutofseveralrenderedviews.Itisalsopossibletorender theentiredrawing,creatinganimagethatcanbesenttoaprinterforprevieworfinalqualityoutput,orexportedinto adifferentimagefileformatandsaved.

702

| Chapter 16: Rendering the Drawing

TheRenderBitmaptoolrenderstheimagewiththespecifiedresolutionandrenderingmode.Thebitmapcreatedby thetooldrawsusingtheoptionsselectedontheDisplaytabinthedocumentpreferences(seeSettingDocument Preferencesonpage 28).ChooseFullResolution,ReducedResolutionorBoundingBox.Theboundingboxoption displaysasagrayrectanglebitmapimage.UsingthisoptionsavesredrawingtimewhenusingthePantoolorscroll bars. TheimagecreatedbytheRenderBitmaptooliscompressedbyeithertheJPEGorPNGcompressionmethod,to reducefilesize.ThecompressionuseddependsontheDefaultcompressionselectedontheEdittabofVectorworks preferences(seeEditPreferencesonpage 17). Torenderaspecifiedarea: 1. SelecttheRenderBitmaptoolfromtheVisualizationtoolset. 2. ClicktheRenderBitmapPreferencesToolbarbutton. TheRenderBitmapSettingsdialogboxopens.Specifytherenderingmodeandanyoptions.

Parameter
RenderMode Resolution(DPI)

Description
Selecttherenderingmodefortheimage;ifthemodehasadditionalsettings,clickOptionsto makeanychanges(changesarealsomadetothedesignlayersettings) Specifytheresolutionforthebitmapindotsperinch,relativetothepage;lowerresolution valuesreducefilesize

3. ClickOK. 4. Clickanddragtocreateamarqueeboxaroundthedesiredarea. Theareaisrenderedandabitmapimageoftherenderedareaisplacedontopoftheoriginalarea. 5. Movethenewimagetothedesiredlocation.

Batch Rendering |

703

Afterrendering,therenderedbitmapimagecanbecutfromtheVectorworksdrawingandpastedintoanyimage editingprogramforfurthermanipulation.

Batch Rendering
Batchrenderingallowsseveralimagestoberenderedwhilethecomputerisunattended.Eachbatchjobretainsitsown view,renderingmode,resolution,andexportsettings.

Creating Batch Rendering Jobs


Thebatchrenderingjobspecifiesthejobname,renderingmodeandoptions,andimagedimensionsandformat,for thecurrentdrawingfile. Batchrenderingdoesnotretaingeometryorlightinginformation;itsavestheview,render,andexportsettings. Toexportdifferentlightingsituationsforascene,createsheetlayerviewportsandchangethelightingwiththe Visualizationpalette(seeManagingLightsandCameraswiththeVisualizationPaletteonpage 705). Viewportsallowlightingoverrideswithoutaffectingthelightingonthedesignlayer.Thismethodallowsbatch renderingofviewportsofthesamescenewithdifferentlightingconditions. Tocreateabatchrenderingjob: 1. Establishthedesiredfileviewandlevelofmagnification. TheExportImageFilesettingsdeterminethespecificdimensionsoftheexportedareaandthevisibilityofobjects (seeExportinganImageFileonpage 794). 2. SelectView>Rendering>CreateBatchRenderJob. TheCreateBatchRenderJobdialogboxopens.SpecifytherenderingjobparametersandclickOK.

Parameter
Name RenderMode Options

Description
Specifiestherenderingjobnameforcreatingthebatch Selecttherenderingmodefromthelist ForOpenGLandCustomRenderworksrenderingmodes,thedefaultfilesettingsarein effect;tochangethesettings,clickOptions.Thesechangesapplytothecurrentjobonly. FormoreinformationonOpenGLsettings,seeRenderingwithVectorworksonpage 681. ForCustomRenderworkssettings,seeCustomRenderworksOptionsonpage 694.

SetExportImage FileOptions

OpenstheExportImageFiledialogboxforspecifyingtherenderedimagefilesettings, includingexportareaandformat

704

| Chapter 16: Rendering the Drawing


TheMarqueeexportareaoptionintheExportImageFiledialogboxisnotavailableforbatchrenderingjobs.

3. Createadditionalbatchrenderingjobsasrequired. Batchjobscanberenamed,edited,ordeletedfromtheStartBatchRenderdialogbox.

Starting the Rendering Job Batch


Oncerenderingjobshavebeencreated,specifytheirorderandtherenderedfilelocation. Tospecifytherenderingjobbatch: 1. Whenitistimetobeginthebatchrenderingprocess,selectView>Rendering>StartBatchRender. TheStartBatchRenderdialogboxopens.Selectthejobstoberenderedandspecifythefilelocationforthe resultingrenderedimages.

Parameter
AvailableJobs ChosenJobs ChooseAll >>button <<button

Description
Liststhecurrentbatchrenderjobsinorderofjobcreation;thejobsaredisplayedwiththe imagefileextensiontobegeneratedaccordingtothejobsettings Liststhecurrentlyselectedrenderjobsinorderofexecution;themostrecentlyaddedjobis placedattheendofthelist MovesallAvailableJobstotheChosenJobslist MovestheselectedjobfromtheAvailableJobslisttotheendoftheChosenJobslist MovestheselectedjobfromtheChosenJobslisttotheendoftheAvailableJobslist

Managing Lights and Cameras with the Visualization Palette | Parameter


Duplicate Edit Delete Browse(Windows)/ Choose(Macintosh)

705

Description
CopiestheselectedavailablejobandaddsittotheendoftheAvailableJobslist;specifya newnameforthejobintheAssignNamedialogbox OpenstheEditBatchRenderJobdialogbox,forchangingtheparametersoftheselectedjob Removestheselectedjobfromthelistofavailablerenderjobs(noundo) SpecifiestheParentFolderlocation,whereallbatchrenderingresultingfileswillbelocated. Bydefault,thisistheapplicationfolder.Theresultsubfoldernameisalsodisplayed(this subfolderisnamedaccordingtothecurrentdateandtime).

2. ClickStarttobeginthebatchrendering. TheBatchRenderProgressdialogboxdisplaysthestatusofthebatchrendering.PresstheEsckeytocancelthe currentjobandproceedwiththeremainingbatchjobs.PressCanceltocancelallbatchrenderingjobs. 3. Aseachjobisrendered,theresultingfileisplacedintheResultsFolder.

Managing Lights and Cameras with the Visualization Palette


TheVisualizationpaletteprovidesfastandeasyaccesstoalllightsandcamerasinaVectorworksfile.Lightsand camerascanbeselected,edited,duplicated,created,anddeleted.Thepalettealsocontrolslightingoverridesfor selectedsheetlayerviewport(s),withoutmodifyingthelightingonthedesignlayerorinanotherviewport. TasksthatcanbeperformedfromtheVisualizationpaletteinclude: Quicklylocatinganylightinthefile; Turninglightsonandoff; Editingofanylightorlightsinthefile,evenlightsthatareinsideacontainerobjectoronadifferentlayer; Creatinglightingoverridesforsheetlayerviewports; Managinglightandcameraobjects,includingcreating,editing,deleting,duplicating,andsorting; Quicklyswitchingtoacamerasestablishedview; Turningheliodonobjectsonorofftoconductsunstudies(DesignSeriesrequired).

TousetheVisualizationpalette: 1. SelectWindows>Palettes>Visualization. TheVisualizationpaletteopens.TheVisualizationpalettecanremainopenwhileyouworkinthedrawing. 2. TheVisualizationpalettecontainstwotabs:theLightstabaccesseslights,andtheCamerastabaccessescameras. Thelightsandcamerascanbesortedbyclickingintheheaderofanycolumn. TheLightstabfunctionsintwodifferentmodesdependingonwhetheryouareonadesignlayerorsheetlayer. Onadesignlayer,thepalettelistseitherallthelightsinthefile,orjustthelightsthataffectthecurrentview.On asheetlayer,thepalettelistseitherallthelightsinthefile,orjustthelightsofselectedviewports;editstothe selectedviewport(s)affecttheviewportlighting,creatinganoverride,butthisdoesnotaffecttheassociated designlayerlighting. Dependingonwhatactionisbeingperformed,differentoptionsareavailableinboththeVisualizationpalette andtheVisualizationpalettemenu.ToopentheVisualizationpalettemenu,clickonthesmalltriangleatthetop rightofthepalette,orrightclick(Windows)orCtrlclick(Macintosh)inthepalettetoopenacontextmenu.

706

| Chapter 16: Rendering the Drawing

Design layer Visualization palette options

Sheet layer Visualization palette options

Visualization palette camera options

Parameter
Lightstab CurrentScene SelectedViewport(s)

Description
TheLightstabaccessestheparametersofsheetlayerviewportsoralllightsinthefile Displaysonlythelightswhichaffectthecurrentview(lightsfromthecurrentlayer andinvisibleclasses) Displaysonlythelightswhichaffectthecurrentlyselectedsheetlayerviewport(s);in thismode,lightscanbeeditedtooverridethelightingoftheselectedviewportsonly. (OtherVisualizationpalettelightmanagementcommandsarenotavailable.)Select RevertOverridetoreturntheviewporttoitsoriginallighting. Listsallthelightsinthefile Clicktotogglethelightonoroff;acheckmarkindicatesthatthelightison

All On (CastShadows) (OverrideState)

Clicktotoggletheabilityofthelightstocastshadowsonoroff;aredxindicates thatshadowsareoff Forlightsinselectedviewport(s),indicateswhetherthelighthasanoverride. Usesdesignlayerdefinition :thelightparametersarethesameinboththe designlayerandtheviewport(s). Usesviewportoverridedefinition :thelightparametershavebeeneditedfor theselectedviewport(s),creatingaviewportlightingoverride.

Name

Displaysthenameofthelight(asshownontheDatataboftheObjectInfopalette)

Managing Lights and Cameras with the Visualization Palette | Parameter


Type

707

Description
Indicatesthetypeoflight: Directional ,Point ,Spot ,Custom ,Area ,orLine

(LightParent)

Indicateswhetherthelightiswithinacontainerobject;ifblank,thelightisnotpartof anotherobject. Group :indicatesthatthelightiscontainedwithinagroup.

Symbol :indicatesthatthelightiscontainedwithinasymbol;eachinstanceis listedinthepalette.EditsmadedirectlyfromtheVisualizationpalette,suchas turninglightsonandoff,affectallsymbolinstances.(SelectingEditfromthe Visualizationpalettemenu,however,editsthesymbolinstanceproperties.) PluginObject :indicatesthatthelightiscontainedinapluginobject,suchas alightingdevice(VectorworksSpotlightrequired) LayerLink Class/Layer Menucommands New Edit RevertOverride Duplicate :indicatesthatthelightiscontainedwithinalayerlink

Displaysthelightsclassandlayer TheVisualizationpalettemenucommandsmanageandselectlightobjects OpenstheCreateLightdialogbox,tocreateadirectional,point,spot,orcustomlight onthecurrentdesignlayer;seeAddingLightSourcesonpage 665 OpensthePropertiesdialogbox,toedittheparametersofthecurrentlyselected light(s);whenmorethanonelightisselected,onlycommonpropertiescanbeedited Restorestheoriginallightparametersfortheviewport(s),whenthelightsinselected sheetlayerviewport(s)havebeenedited Copiesthecurrentlyselectedlight(s),placingthecopyorcopiesonthesamelayerand inthesameclassastheoriginal(s).Lightsinsymbolsorpluginobjectscannotbe duplicated. Deletesthecurrentlyselectedlight(s).Lightsinsymbolsorpluginobjectscannotbe deleted. Selectsthecurrentlight(s),andautomaticallycenterstheviewonthelight,orits container(alternatively,doubleclickonalightintheVisualizationpalette,ifthelight isintheactiveclassorlayer.)ThelightpropertiescanthenbeeditedintheObjectInfo paletteorbyclickingEditfromtheVisualizationpalettemenu.Theselectionand editingofmultiplelightsatonceissupported. Ifthelightisnotintheactiveclassorlayer,usetheForceSelectcommand instead. TheVectorworksDisplaypreferencemustbesettoshowlights.

Delete SelectOnDocument

ForceSelect

Ifthelightisinadifferentclassorlayer,activatesthelayerorclass,andautomatically centerstheviewonthelight,oritscontainergrouporsymbol.Thelightproperties canthenbeeditedintheObjectInfopaletteorbyclickingEditfromtheVisualization palettemenu.Multiplelightscannotbeselectedbythismethod. TheCamerastabaccessestheparametersofthecameraobjectsinthedrawing Displaysthenameofthecamera(asshownontheDatataboftheObjectInfopalette)

Camerastab Name

708

| Chapter 16: Rendering the Drawing


Description
Displaysthecamerasclassandlayer TheVisualizationpalettemenucommandsmanageandselectcameraobjects ActivatestheRenderWorksCameratool;clicktoplaceacameraobject OpensthePropertiesdialogbox,toedittheparametersofthecurrentlyselected camera(s) Copiesthecurrentlyselectedcamera(s),placingthecopyorcopiesonthesamelayer andinthesameclassastheoriginal(s) Deletesthecurrentlyselectedcamera(s) Selectsthecurrentcamera,andautomaticallychangestheviewtothatofthecamera (alternatively,doubleclickonacameraintheVisualizationpalette)

Parameter
Class/Layer Menucommands New Edit Duplicate Delete Activate

Dimensioning and Constraints


TheVectorworksprogramprovidesautomatedtoolsfordimensioningandconstrainingdrawingobjects.

17

Dimensioning
Usethevariousdimensioningtoolstomeasure2Dand3Dobjects,andtoadddimensioninglineswiththe measurementstothedrawing.Dimensionscanbecreatedonadesignlayer,orintheannotationspaceofasheetlayer viewport(seeCreatingAnnotationsforSheetLayerViewportsonpage 775). TherearealsoTapeMeasureandProtractortoolstomeasuredistancesandangles,andaCenterMarktooltomark thecenterofcircles,ovals,andrectangles. Whenyouaddanewdimension,thedimensionstandardsetinthedocumentpreferencesisusedbydefault(see DimensionPreferencesonpage 30).Inaddition,whenadimensiontoolisactive,thedefaultdimensionstandard canbesetfromtheToolbar.Selectanyofthebuiltindimensionstandards,orcreateacustomstandardspecificallyfor thedrawing.Ifthedefaultdimensionstandardforthedocumentischanged,anynewdimensionthatisaddedwilluse thenewstandard;noexistingdimensionsareaffected.

Using Custom Dimension Standards


Customdimensionstandardscanbecreatedinthecurrentfileorimportedfromanotherdrawingfile.Therearethree waystoaccesstheCustomDimensionsdialogboxformanagingcustomdimensions. SelectFile>DocumentSettings>DocumentPreferences.FromtheDocumentPreferencesdialogbox,clickthe Dimensionstab,andthenclickCustom. Alternatively,accesstheDocumentPreferencescommandfromthedocumentcontextmenu(rightclickon Windows,orCtrlclickonMacintosh),orfromtheQuickPreferencesmenuontheToolbar. WithanyoneofthedimensiontoolsintheDims/Notestoolsetselected,opentheDimStdmenuontheToolbar andselectCustomStandardsfromthelist. Withanexistingdimensionselected,opentheDimStdmenuontheObjectInfopaletteandselectCustom Standardsfromthelist. FromtheCustomDimensionsdialogbox,severalfunctionsareavailable.

710

| Chapter 17: Dimensioning and Constraints

Function
New Delete Edit Rename Import Replace

Description
OpenstheAssignNamedialogbox,tocreateanewcustomdimensionstandard;seeCreatinga CustomDimensionStandardonpage 710 Deletestheselectedcustomdimensionstandardandreplacesitwiththestandardyouspecify;see DeletingaCustomDimensionStandardonpage 712 OpenstheCustomDimensiondialogbox,toedittheselectedcustomdimensionstandard;see EditingaCustomDimensionStandardonpage 712 OpenstheAssignNamedialogbox,torenametheselectedcustomdimensionstandard;see RenamingaCustomDimensionStandardonpage 713 Opensafileandimportsthecustomdimensionstandardyouspecify;seeImportingaCustom DimensionStandardonpage 713 OpenstheReplaceDimensionStandardsdialogbox,tospecifywhichdimensionstandardto replace,andwhichstandardtoreplaceitwith;seeReplacingaDimensionStandardonpage 714

Creating a Custom Dimension Standard


Tocreateacustomdimensionstandard: 1. SelectFile>DocumentSettings>DocumentPreferences.FromtheDocumentPreferencesdialogbox,clickthe Dimensionstab,andthenclickCustom. Alternatively,withanyoneofthedimensiontoolsintheDims/Notestoolsetselected,opentheDimStdmenu ontheToolbarandselectCustomStandardsfromthelist.Or,withanexistingdimensionselected,opentheDim StdmenuontheObjectInfopaletteandselectCustomStandardsfromthelist. TheCustomDimensionsdialogboxopens. 2. ClickNew. TheAssignNamedialogboxopens. 3. EnteranameforthisdimensionstandardandclickOK. 4. SelectthenewdimensionfromtheStandardslistandclickEdit. TheEditCustomDimensionStandarddialogboxopens.

Dimensioning |

711

Parameter
Dimensionlinedistances Note:Distancesarein WitnessLines FixedWitnessLineLength

Description
Specifiesthedimensionlinedistancesforlinear,radial,andordinatedimensions Displaysthedrawingunitscurrentlyinuseforthefile Applieswitnesslinestodimensions;whendeselected,witnesslinesarehidden Selecttouseafixedlengthforthewitnesslinesratherthanafixedoffsetfromthe dimensionedobject(thedefault).Whenselected,thefieldforsettingthewitnessline lengthisenabledonthetoppartofthedialogbox. Tochangethelengthofaparticularwitnessline,usetheOverrideoptioninthe ObjectInfopalette;seeEditingDimensionPropertiesonpage 731

DimensionsAlwaysInside LinearMarkers OtherMarkers LeaderLineMarkers

Setsdimensionvaluestoalwaysdisplaybetweenthewitnesslines Selectthemarkerattributesforusewithlineardimensionmarkers(seeMarker Attributesonpage 538) Selectthemarkerattributesforusewithotherdimensionmarkers Selectthemarkerattributesforusewithdimensionleaderlines. ThemarkerisonlyvisibleifyoufirstusetheObjectInfopalettetoaddaleader linetothedimension(seeEditingDimensionPropertiesonpage 731),and thenusetheAttributespalettetoaddanendmarkertotheleaderline(see MarkerAttributesonpage 538).

SIAFormatNumbers ToleranceSize TextRotation AlignVerticalTextLeft

SetsallnumberstousetheSIAformat;notavailablewhenaduallayoutisselected Setsthesizeofthetoleranceinrelationtothedimensiontext Setshowtextishandledwhenadimensionisrotated;textcanbehorizontal,aligned, orhorizontal/vertical Whenadimensionisplacedvertically,keepsthetexttotheleftofthedimensionline

712

| Chapter 17: Dimensioning and Constraints


Description
Setswhetherdimensionsdisplayassinglevalues,dualsidebyside,ordualstacked Ifaduallayoutisselected,specifywhetherbothdimensionsareshown,primaryonly, orsecondaryonly Assignsatextstyletothedimensiontext;seeUsingTextStylesonpage 364

Parameter
Layout Dualview TextStyle

5. Enterthedesiredvaluesforthedisplayofdimensions,andthenclickOK.ClickOKagaintoclosetheCustom Dimensionsdialogbox. 6. Tosetthenewstandardasthedefaultforthedocument,selectthenewstandardfromtheDimensionStandard list,andthenclickOK.

Editing a Custom Dimension Standard


Toeditacustomdimensionstandard: 1. SelectFile>DocumentSettings>DocumentPreferences.FromtheDocumentPreferencesdialogbox,clickthe Dimensionstab,andthenclickCustom. Alternatively,withanyoneofthedimensiontoolsintheDims/Notestoolsetselected,opentheDimStdmenu ontheToolbarandselectCustomStandardsfromthelist.Or,withanexistingdimensionselected,opentheDim StdmenuontheObjectInfopaletteandselectCustomStandardsfromthelist. TheCustomDimensionsdialogboxopens. 2. Selectthecustomstandardtoedit,andclickEdit. TheCustomDimensiondialogboxopens. 3. Editthesettingsasneeded,andclickOK.

Deleting a Custom Dimension Standard


Todeleteacustomdimensionstandard: 1. SelectFile>DocumentSettings>DocumentPreferences.FromtheDocumentPreferencesdialogbox,clickthe Dimensionstab,andthenclickCustom. Alternatively,withanyoneofthedimensiontoolsintheDims/Notestoolsetselected,opentheDimStdmenu ontheToolbarandselectCustomStandardsfromthelist.Or,withanexistingdimensionselected,opentheDim StdmenuontheObjectInfopaletteandselectCustomStandardsfromthelist. TheCustomDimensionsdialogboxopens. 2. Selectthecustomstandardtodelete,andclickDelete. TheReplaceDimensiondialogboxopens.

3. Selectanewdimensionstandardtoreplacethestandardbeingdeleted,andthenclickOK.

Dimensioning |
Anyexistingdimensionsthatusedthedeletedstandardarechangedtothereplacementstandard.

713

Renaming a Custom Dimension Standard


Torenameacustomdimensionstandard: 1. SelectFile>DocumentSettings>DocumentPreferences.FromtheDocumentPreferencesdialogbox,clickthe Dimensionstab,andthenclickCustom. Alternatively,withanyoneofthedimensiontoolsintheDims/Notestoolsetselected,opentheDimStdmenu ontheToolbarandselectCustomStandardsfromthelist.Or,withanexistingdimensionselected,opentheDim StdmenuontheObjectInfopaletteandselectCustomStandardsfromthelist. TheCustomDimensionsdialogboxopens. 2. Selectthecustomstandardtorename,andclickRename. TheAssignNamedialogboxopens. 3. EnteranewnameforthisdimensionstandardandclickOK.

Importing a Custom Dimension Standard


Toimportacustomdimensionstandard: 1. SelectFile>DocumentSettings>DocumentPreferences.FromtheDocumentPreferencesdialogbox,clickthe Dimensionstab,andthenclickCustom. Alternatively,withanyoneofthedimensiontoolsintheDims/Notestoolsetselected,opentheDimStdmenu ontheToolbarandselectCustomStandardsfromthelist.Or,withanexistingdimensionselected,opentheDim StdmenuontheObjectInfopaletteandselectCustomStandardsfromthelist. TheCustomDimensionsdialogboxopens. 2. ClickImport. ThestandardOpendialogboxdisplays. 3. SelectthefilefromwhichthedimensionstandardwillbeimportedandclickOpen. TheSelectItemdialogboxopens.

4. SelectthedimensionstandardtoimportandclickOK. TheimporteddimensiondisplaysintheCustomDimensionsdialogboxforthecurrentdrawingfile.

714

| Chapter 17: Dimensioning and Constraints

Replacing a Dimension Standard


Replaceanydefaultorcustomdimensionstandardwithanotherdimensionstandard. Toreplaceadimensionstandard: 1. SelectFile>DocumentSettings>DocumentPreferences.FromtheDocumentPreferencesdialogbox,clickthe Dimensionstab,andthenclickCustom. Alternatively,withanyoneofthedimensiontoolsintheDims/Notestoolsetselected,opentheDimStdmenu ontheToolbarandselectCustomStandardsfromthelist.Or,withanexistingdimensionselected,opentheDim StdmenuontheObjectInfopaletteandselectCustomStandardsfromthelist. TheCustomDimensionsdialogboxopens. 2. ClickReplace. TheReplaceDimensionStandardsdialogboxopens.

3. SelectthedimensionstandardtobereplacedintheReplacelistandselectthestandardtoreplaceitwithinthe withlist.ClickOK. Anyexistingdimensionsthatusedthepreviousstandardarechangedtothereplacementstandard.

Associative Dimensioning
Indocumentpreferences,theAssociatedimensionsoptionisselectedbydefault.Thisautomaticallylinksdimensions to2Dobjects,aswellaswallsandwallcomponents.Forlineardimensionstobeassociated,thedimensionmustbe appliedbetweentwovertexpoints.

Green constraint markers show that the dimension is associated with the object

The dimension is not associated with the object

Adimensionislinkedtoitsassociatedobjectwithcoincidentconstraints.Thismeansthat,whenalinear,radial,or diametricaldimensionisassociatedwithanobject,ifthedimensionisresizedormoved,theassociatedobjectis resizedormovedalso,andviceversa. Theassociationofanydimensionwithanobjectcanberemovedmanually.Rightclick(Windows)orCtrlclick (Macintosh)onthedimension,andselectDisassociatefromthecontextmenu.Alternatively,selectModify>Edit ConstraintsandusetheEditConstraintsdialogboxtodeletetheconstraints. Ifanangularassociativedimensionisresizedormoved,theassociationwiththeobjectisbroken.Tomaintainthe association,movethedimensionedobjectinstead.

Dimensioning |

715

Associativedimensionscanexistacrosslayersofthesamescale.Toapplyanassociativedimensionacrosslayers, LayerOptionsmustbesettoShow/Snap/ModifyOthers.Associativedimensionscanbecreatedonviewportsin annotationeditmode(seeCreatingAnnotationsforSheetLayerViewportsonpage 775). Ifanassociativedimensionisusedacrosslayers,theassociationisbrokenifthescaleofoneofthelayerschanges. Associativedimensionscanonlybeplacedintheplanedefinedbytheobjectorobjectsbeingdimensioned;when multipleobjectsaredimensioned,theymustbecoplanartocreatetheassociation.Theassociateddimensionofan objectchangesplaneswiththeobject,iftheobjectchangesitsplane. Ifadrawinghasoverlappingobjects,itmaybeunclearwhichobjectshouldbeassociatedwithadimension.Whenyou dimensionobjectsthathaveasharedendpoint,theAutoassociatedocumentpreferencecontrolswhetherthe associationismadeautomaticallyormanually.(SeeDimensionPreferencesonpage 30.) Toalwaysautomaticallyassociateadimensionwiththetopmostobject,enabletheAutoassociateoption. Tomanuallyselecttheobjectwithwhichtoassociatethedimension,disabletheAutoassociateoption;whenyou dimensionanobjectthatsharesanendpointwithanotherobject,theSelectObjectdialogboxopens.

The triangle is being dimensioned, but the triangle overlaps with the purple rectangle and they share an endpoint

Because Auto associate is disabled, the Select Object dialog box opens to allow selection of the appropriate object

Unconstrained Linear Dimensioning


UsetheUnconstrainedLinearDimensiontooltodrawdimensionlinesatanyangle.Thisisdifferentfromthe ConstrainedLinearDimensiontool,whichconstrainsdimensionlinestotheXorYaxisoftheplaneonwhichthe dimensioniscreated.Inadditiontomeasuringanddimensioningobjects,youcanusethistooltocalculatethe distancebetweentwoormorepointsinthedrawingarea.
Unconstrained Chain Unconstrained Linear Unconstrained Baseline Chain Dimension Preferences

Chain Dimension Preferences

Dimension Standards

716
Mode

| Chapter 17: Dimensioning and Constraints


Description
Createsadimensionlinewithasinglemeasurement Createsacontinuouschainofdimensionlines Createsaseriesofconnecteddimensionlines,startingfromaninitialbasepoint ForUnconstrainedChainmode,specifieswhetherdimensionsarecreatedasasingle unconstrainedchainobject,orasindividualdimensionobjects;alsoenablescollision control,whichautomaticallyspacestextblockssothattheydonotoverlap Tochangethedimensionstandardfornewdimensionscreatedinthedocument,select astandardfromthelist;selectCustomStandardstocreateormanagecustom dimensions(seeUsingCustomDimensionStandardsonpage 709)

UnconstrainedLinear UnconstrainedChain UnconstrainedBaseline ChainDimension Preferences DimensionStandards

Thedimensiontextcanbemovedasneeded.SeeModifyingDimensionsonpage 731.

Unconstrained Linear Dimension


TheUnconstrainedLinearmodecreatesadimensionlinewithasinglemeasurement. Tocreateadimensionlinewithasinglemeasurement: 1. ClicktheUnconstrainedLinearDimensiontoolfromtheDims/Notestoolset,andselectUnconstrainedLinear mode. 2. Clicktosetthemeasurementstartpoint. 3. Clicktoendthemeasurement. 4. Movethecursorawayfromtheobjecttothedesiredoffsetlocation. Ina3Dview,thefirsttwoclicksdeterminetheXaxisoftheplanewherethedimensionwillbeplaced;movethe cursortorotatethedimensionplaneasdesired.Thedimensionplanecanbehorizontalorverticaltothelayer plane,oralignedtoadjacentfacesofa3Dobjectbeingdimensioned. 5. Clicktoplacethedimensionline.

Dimensioning |

717

2nd click 3rd click 1st click

The dimension can be horizontal or vertical to the layer plane, or aligned to a face adjacent to the dimension line

Unconstrained Chain Dimension


UnconstrainedChainmodecreatesaseriesofconnecteddimensionlines,witheachlinesegmentdisplayingits specificmeasurements. Whendimensionsarepartofachainobject,theycanallbemovedatonce,andtheirattributesandpropertiescanbe changedasagroup.Thepropertiesofdimensionsinachainobjectalsocanbeeditedindividually.Whendimensions inthechainaremodified,theotherdimensionsadjustautomatically.SeeModifyingDimensionsonpage 731for moreinformationabouteditingchainobjects. Tocreateachainofconnecteddimensionlines: 1. ClicktheUnconstrainedLinearDimensiontoolfromtheDims/Notestoolset,andselectUnconstrainedChain mode. 2. SelectChainDimensionPreferencesfromtheToolbar. 3. SelectwhethertoUseChainDimensionObjectsortoUseIndividualDimensions.Alsoselectwhethertouse collisioncontroltoautomaticallyspacetextblockssothattheydonotoverlap.ClickOK. 4. Clicktosetthemeasurementstartpoint. 5. Clicktoendthemeasurementofthefirstsegment. 6. Movethecursorawayfromtheobjecttothedesiredoffsetlocation. Ina3Dview,thefirsttwoclicksdeterminetheXaxisoftheplanewherethedimensionwillbeplaced;movethe cursortorotatethedimensionplaneasdesired.Thedimensionplanecanbehorizontalorverticaltothelayer plane,oralignedtoadjacentfacesofa3Dobjectbeingdimensioned. 7. Clicktoplacethefirstdimensionline. 8. Movethecursortotheendofthenextsegmentandclicktosetitsendpoint.

718

| Chapter 17: Dimensioning and Constraints

9. Continuesettingsegments. 10. Doubleclicktoendthechain.


2nd click 3rd click Double-click

1st click

Unconstrained Baseline Dimension


UnconstrainedBaselinemodecreatesaseriesofconnecteddimensionlines,witheachlinesegmentmeasuringthe distancefromtheinitialstartingpoint(thebasepoint). Tocreateaseriesofbaselinedimensionlines: 1. ClicktheUnconstrainedLinearDimensiontoolfromtheDims/Notestoolset,andselectUnconstrained Baselinemode. 2. Clicktosetthemeasurementstartpoint. 3. Clicktoendthemeasurementofthefirstsegment. 4. Movethecursorawayfromtheobjecttothedesiredoffsetlocation. Ina3Dview,thefirsttwoclicksdeterminetheXaxisoftheplanewherethedimensionwillbeplaced;movethe cursortorotatethedimensionplaneasdesired.Thedimensionplanecanbehorizontalorverticaltothelayer plane,oralignedtoadjacentfacesofa3Dobjectbeingdimensioned. 5. Clicktoplacethedimensionline. 6. Movethecursortotheendofthenextsegmentandclicktosetitsendpoint. 7. Continuesettingsegments. 8. Doubleclicktoendthebaseline.
2nd click 3rd click Double-click

1st click

Constrained Linear Dimensioning


UsetheConstrainedLinearDimensiontooltodrawdimensionlinesthatareconstrainedtotheXorYaxisofthe planeonwhichthedimensioniscreated.ThisisdifferentfromtheUnconstrainedLinearDimensiontool,whichcan

Dimensioning |
drawdimensionlinesatanyangle.Inadditiontomeasuringanddimensioningobjects,youcanusethistoolto calculatethehorizontalorverticaldistancebetweentwoormorepointsinthedrawing.

719

Ina2Dview,thedimensionlineisconstrainedtobeparalleltoeithertheXorYaxisoftheactiveplane.Ina3Dview, thedimensionlineisconstrainedtotheXaxisoftheplanethatitiscreatedon,buttheplanecanhaveanyrotation (sameastheUnconstrainedLinearDimensiontool). IftheSnaptoWorkingPlaneoptionontheSnappingpaletteisenabled,thedimensionlineisprojectedtothe currentworkingplane,inboth2Dand3Dviews.


Constrained Chain Constrained Linear Ordinate Chain Dimension Preferences

Constrained Baseline

Selected Objects

Dimension Standards

Mode
ConstrainedLinear ConstrainedChain Constrained Baseline Ordinate SelectedObjects ChainDimension Preferences Dimension Standards

Description
Createsaconstraineddimensionlinewithasinglemeasurement Createsacontinuouschainofconstraineddimensionlines Createsaseriesofconnectedconstraineddimensionlines,startingfromaninitialbasepoint Createsaseriesofconstrainedordinatedimensions,startingfromaninitialbasepoint Createsaconstraineddimensionlineforthegreatestspanofaselectedobjectorgroupof objects ForConstrainedChainmode,specifieswhetherdimensionsarecreatedasasinglechain object,orasindividualdimensionobjects;alsoenablescollisioncontrol,whichautomatically spacestextblockssothattheydonotoverlap Tochangethedimensionstandardfornewdimensionscreatedinthedocument,selecta standardfromthelist;selectCustomStandardstocreateormanagecustomdimensions(see UsingCustomDimensionStandardsonpage 709)

Thedimensiontextcanbemovedasneeded.SeeModifyingDimensionsonpage 731.

Constrained Linear Dimension


TheConstrainedLinearmodecreatesadimensionlinewithasinglemeasurement. Tocreateaconstraineddimensionlinewithasinglemeasurement: 1. ClicktheConstrainedLinearDimensiontoolfromtheDims/Notestoolset,andselectConstrainedLinear mode. 2. Clicktosetthemeasurementstartpoint. 3. Clicktosettheendofthemeasurement. 4. Movethecursorawayfromtheobjecttothedesiredoffsetlocation.

720

| Chapter 17: Dimensioning and Constraints


Ina2Dview,thedimensionlinepreviewisconstrainedtobeparalleltoeithertheXorYaxisofthelayerplane. Ina3Dview,thefirsttwoclicksdeterminetheXaxisoftheplanewherethedimensionwillbeplaced;movethe cursortorotatethedimensionplaneasdesired.Thedimensionplanecanbehorizontalorverticaltothelayer plane,oralignedtoadjacentfacesofa3Dobjectbeingdimensioned.

5. Clicktoplacethedimensionline.
2nd click 3rd click

1st click

Constrained Chain Dimension


TheConstrainedChainmodecreatesaseriesofconstrained,connecteddimensionlines,witheachlinesegment displayingitsspecificmeasurements. Whendimensionsarepartofachainobject,theycanallbemovedatonce,andtheirattributesandpropertiescanbe changedasagroup.Thepropertiesofdimensionsinachainobjectalsocanbeeditedindividually.Whendimensions inthechainaremodified,theotherdimensionsadjustautomatically.SeeModifyingDimensionsonpage 731for moreinformationabouteditingchainobjects. Tocreateachainofconstrainedconnecteddimensionlines: 1. ClicktheConstrainedLinearDimensiontoolfromtheDims/Notestoolset,andselectConstrainedChain mode. 2. SelectChainDimensionPreferencesfromtheToolbar. 3. SelectwhethertoUseChainDimensionObjectsortoUseIndividualDimensions.Alsoselectwhethertouse collisioncontroltoautomaticallyspacetextblockssothattheydonotoverlap.ClickOK. 4. Clicktosetthemeasurementstartpoint. 5. Clicktosettheendofthefirstmeasurement. 6. Movethecursorawayfromtheobjecttothedesiredoffsetlocation. Ina2Dview,thedimensionlinepreviewisconstrainedtobeparalleltoeithertheXorYaxisofthelayerplane. Ina3Dview,thefirsttwoclicksdeterminetheXaxisoftheplanewherethedimensionwillbeplaced;movethe cursortorotatethedimensionplaneasdesired.Thedimensionplanecanbehorizontalorverticaltothelayer plane,oralignedtoadjacentfacesofa3Dobjectbeingdimensioned. 7. Clicktoplacethefirstdimensionline. 8. Movethecursortotheendofthenextsegmentandclicktosetitsendpoint. 9. Continuesettingsegments. 10. Doubleclicktoendthechain.

Dimensioning |

721

3rd click 2nd click 1st click 4th click

5th click

Double-click

Constrained chain dimension with collision control preference enabled

Constrained Baseline Dimension


ConstrainedBaselinemodescreateaseriesofconstrained,connecteddimensionlines,witheachlinesegment measuringthedistancefromtheinitialstartingpoint(thebasepoint). Tocreateaseriesofconstrainedbaselinedimensionlines: 1. ClicktheConstrainedLinearDimensiontoolfromtheDims/Notestoolset,andselectConstrainedBaseline mode. 2. Clicktosetthemeasurementstartpoint. 3. Clicktosettheendofthefirstmeasurement. 4. Movethecursorawayfromtheobjecttothedesiredoffsetlocation. Ina2Dview,thedimensionlinepreviewisconstrainedtobeparalleltoeithertheXorYaxisofthelayerplane. Ina3Dview,thefirsttwoclicksdeterminetheXaxisoftheplanewherethedimensionwillbeplaced;movethe cursortorotatethedimensionplaneasdesired.Thedimensionplanecanbehorizontalorverticaltothelayer plane,oralignedtoadjacentfacesofa3Dobjectbeingdimensioned. 5. Clicktoplacethefirstdimensionline. 6. Movethecursortotheendofthenextsegmentandclicktosetitsendpoint. 7. Continuesettingsegments. 8. Doubleclicktoendthebaseline.

Ordinate Dimensions
TheOrdinatemodemeasuresanddimensionsaseriesofeitherhorizontalorverticaldistancesfromonefixedpoint. ThismodeoftheConstrainedLinearDimensiontoolalwayscreatesdimensionsontheactiveplane. Todrawordinatedimensions: 1. ClicktheConstrainedLinearDimensiontoolfromtheDims/Notestoolset,andselectOrdinatemode.

722

| Chapter 17: Dimensioning and Constraints

2. Clicktosetthemeasurementstartpoint;thefirstsegmentisalwaysconsideredthefixedpointandislabeled0. 3. Clicktosetthelengthofthefirstsegment. 4. Movethecursorhorizontallyorverticallytothefirstlocationtobemeasuredfromtheinitialsegment;clicktoset thesegment. 5. Continuecreatingsegments. 6. Doubleclicktocompletethedimension.


2nd click

1st click Double-click 3rd click

Selected Object Dimensions


TheSelectedObjectsmodemeasuresanddimensionsthehorizontalorverticalspanofany2Dor3Dobject,orthe edgetoedgespanofseveralobjectsoragroupofobjects.Inallcases,thetoolmeasuresthegreatestspan.Horizontal dimensionlinescanbedrawninside,above,orbelowanobjectorgroupofobjects.Verticaldimensionlinescanbe drawninside,totheright,ortotheleftofanobjectorgroupofobjects.ThismodeoftheConstrainedLinear Dimensiontoolalwayscreatesdimensionsontheactiveplane. 1. Selecttheobjectorobjectstodimension. 2. ClicktheConstrainedLinearDimensiontoolfromtheDims/Notestoolset,andselectSelectedObjectsmode. 3. Clickneartheobjectorgroupofobjectstobedimensioned. 4. Movethecursorinthedesireddirectionwherethedimensionshouldbecreated.Apreviewdimensiondisplays, constrainedineitherthehorizontalorverticaldirection. 5. Clicktosetthepositionofthedimensionline.
2nd click

1st click

Dual Dimensioning
Dualdimensioningdisplaystwosetsofvalues,suchasinchesandmillimeters,withinasingledimension.These valueshaveindependentunitsettingsandattributes.Dualdimensionscanbedisplayedsidebysideorstacked.

Dimensioning |

723

Side-by-side dual dimension

Stacked dual dimension

ControltheunitsforeachdimensionthroughFile>DocumentSettings>Units.Theprimarydimensionusesthe UnitssetontheGeneralDisplayandDimensionstaboftheUnitsdialogbox(seeUnitsonpage 73).Thesettingson theDualDimensionstabprovidefullcontroloftheunitofmeasurement,unitmarks,rounding,andformattingused forthesecondarydimension. Onceadualdimensionisplacedonthedrawing,adjusttheindividualattributesforboththeprimaryandsecondary dimensionfromtheObjectInfopalette.TheDualViewandPrim/Secattributesapplytodualdimensions(see ModifyingDimensionsonpage 731).

Radial Dimensioning
TheRadialDimensiontoolmeasuresandmarkseitherradiusordiameterdimensionsforarcsandcircles.Thistool doesnotworkonovalsorobjectswithroundedcorners. TheRadialDimensiontoolcanplacethedimensionlinesandmeasurementseitherinsideoroutsideofthecircle/arc. Thistoolalwayscreatesthedimensiononthesameplanewiththearcorcirclethatisbeingdimensioned.
External Diametrical Exterior Radial Right-Hand Shoulder

Internal Diametrical

Interior Radial

Left-Hand Shoulder

Dimension Standards

Mode
InternalDiametrical ExternalDiametrical InteriorRadial ExteriorRadial LeftHandShoulder RightHandShoulder DimensionStandards

Description
Measuresanddimensionsthediameterofacircleorarc,placingthedimensioninside theobject Measuresanddimensionsthediameterofacircleorarc,placingthedimensionoutside theobject Measuresanddimensionstheradiusofacircleorarc,placingthedimensioninsidethe object Measuresanddimensionstheradiusofacircleorarc,placingthedimensionoutside theobject Placesanexteriormeasurementwiththedimensiontexttotheleftofthedimension leadershoulder Placesanexteriormeasurementwiththedimensiontexttotherightofthedimension leadershoulder Tochangethedimensionstandardfornewdimensionscreatedinthedocument,select astandardfromthelist;selectCustomStandardstocreateormanagecustom dimensions(seeUsingCustomDimensionStandardsonpage 709)

724

| Chapter 17: Dimensioning and Constraints

Diametrical Dimensioning Inside Circle/Arc


TheInternalDiametricalDimensionmodemeasuresanddimensionsthediameterofacircleorarc,andplacesthe dimensioninsidetheobject. Todimensionthediameterofacircleorarc: 1. ClicktheRadialDimensiontoolfromtheDims/Notestoolset,andselectInternalDiametricalDimension mode. 2. Clickonorwithinthearcorcircletodimension. 3. Movethecursortopreviewthedimensionlinelocation. 4. Clicktoplacethedimension.

Diametrical Dimensioning Outside Circle/Arc


TheExternalDiametricalDimensionmodemeasuresanddimensionsthediameterofacircleorarc,andplacesthe dimensionoutsidetheobject. Todimensionthediameterofacircleorarc: 1. ClicktheRadialDimensiontoolfromtheDims/Notestoolset,andselectExternalDiametricalDimension mode. 2. Specifythesideofthedimensionlinetoplacethemeasurement. Toplaceittotherightoftheline,clickRightHandShouldermodebutton.Toplaceittotheleftoftheline,click theLeftHandShouldermodebutton. 3. Clickonorwithinthearcorcircletodimension. 4. Movethecursortopreviewthedimensionlinelocation. 5. Clicktoplacethedimension.

Dimensioning |

725

Radial Dimensioning Inside Circle/Arc


TheInteriorRadialDimensionmodemeasuresanddimensionstheradiusofacircleorarc,andplacesthedimension insidetheobject. Todimensiontheradiusofacircleorarc: 1. ClicktheRadialDimensiontoolfromtheDims/Notestoolset,andselectInteriorRadialDimensionmode. 2. Clickonorwithinthearcorcircletodimension. 3. Movethecursortopreviewthedimensionlinelocation. 4. Clicktoplacethedimension.

Radial Dimensioning Outside Circle/Arc


TheExteriorRadialDimensionmodemeasuresanddimensionstheradiusofacircleorarc,andplacesthedimension outsidetheobject. Todimensiontheradiusofacircleorarc: 1. ClicktheRadialDimensiontoolfromtheDims/Notestoolset,andselectExteriorRadialDimensionmode. 2. Specifythesideofthedimensionlinetoplacethemeasurement. Toplaceittotherightoftheline,clicktheRightHandShouldermodebutton.Toplaceittotheleftoftheline, clicktheLeftHandShouldermodebutton. 3. Clickonorwithinthearcorcircletodimension. 4. Movethecursortopreviewthedimensionlinelocation. 5. Clicktoplacethedimension.

726

| Chapter 17: Dimensioning and Constraints

Marking Object Centers


TheCenterMarktooldividesanobjectorobjectfaceintoquarters,markingtheexactcenteroftheobject.Thistool worksforcircles,ovals,rectangles,roundedrectangles,andfacesof3Dobjectsthatwerecreatedbyacircularedge.In addition,itcanplacecentermarksonthecornersofaroundedrectangle. WhentheCenterMarktoolisactive,youcanchangethedimensionstandardfornewdimensionscreatedinthe documentfromtheToolbar.Todoso,selectastandardfromtheDimStdlist,orselectCustomStandardstocreateor managecustomdimensions(seeUsingCustomDimensionStandardsonpage 709).

Marking the Center of an Object


Tomarkthecenterofanobject: 1. ClicktheCenterMarktoolfromtheDims/Notestoolset. 2. Clickontheobjecttomark. Thecenterismarkedbytheintersectionoftwolines.

Click anywhere on the object

Marking the Center of a Rounded Rectangle Corner


Toplaceacentermarkinthecornersofaroundedrectangle: 1. ClicktheCenterMarktoolfromtheDims/Notestoolset. 2. WhilepressingOption(Macintosh)orAlt(Windows),movethecursorovertheroundedrectanglecornerto mark. 3. Clicktoplacethecentermark. Thecenterismarkedbytheintersectionoftwolines.

Angular Dimensioning |

727

Angular Dimensioning
TheAngularDimensiontoolmeasuresanddimensionsangles.Dimensiontheanglebetweentwoobjects,between twosidesofasingleobject,betweenasingleobjectandareferenceline,orbetweentworeferencelines. Thistoolworkswithallobjectswithlinearorplanarsides,includingroundedandrotatedrectangles,lines,polylines, polygons,andsolids.Itdoesnot,however,workwithcircles,ovals,orarcs.Inaddition,itcannotdimensionbetween parallellinesorlinesondifferentplanes.
Angular Dimension from Two Objects Angular Dimension from Object and Reference Line Angular Dimension from Two Reference Lines Dimension Standards

IftheSnaptoWorkingPlaneoptionontheSnappingpaletteisenabled,thefaceoftheobjectbeingdimensioned mustbeparalleltotheworkingplane.Inaddition,agroupedobjectmustbeungroupedbeforeangular dimensionscanbeobtained.

Mode
AngularDimensionfromTwoObjects AngularDimensionfromObjectandReferenceLine AngularDimensionfromTwoReferenceLines DimensionStandards

Description
Dimensionstheanglebetweentwoobjectsidesorfaces Dimensionstheanglebetweenanobjectandareferenceline Dimensionstheanglebetweentworeferencelines Tochangethedimensionstandardfornewdimensions createdinthedocument,selectastandardfromthelist; selectCustomStandardstocreateormanagecustom dimensions(seeUsingCustomDimensionStandardson page 709)

Angle Between Two Object Sides or Faces


Todimensiontheanglebetweenthesidesorfacesoftwoobjects: 1. ClicktheAngularDimensiontoolfromtheDims/Notestoolset,andselectAngularDimensionfromTwo Objectsmode. 2. Clickthesideorfaceofthefirstobject. Apreviewlinedisplays. 3. Clickthesideorfaceofthesecondobject. Anangulardimensionpreviewdisplays. Toselectadifferentangleforexample,spanningtheoppositedirectionmovethecursoruntilthepreview displaysthedesiredangle. 4. Clickathirdtimetodefinetheradiusofthedimension.

728

| Chapter 17: Dimensioning and Constraints

1st click

2nd click

3rd click

Angle Between One Reference Line and an Object


Todimensionananglebetweenonereferencelineandanobject: 1. ClicktheAngularDimensiontoolfromtheDims/Notestoolset,andselectAngularDimensionfromObject andReferenceLinemode. 2. Clicktosetthestartofthereferenceline. Areferencelinepreviewdisplays. 3. Clickagaintosettheendofthereferenceline. Thecursorchangestoapointinghand. 4. Clickonthesideoftheobject(and,therefore,angle)todimension. Anangulardimensionpreviewdisplays. Toselectadifferentangleforexample,spanningtheoppositedirectionmovethecursoruntilthepreview displaysthedesiredangle. 5. Whenthepreviewdisplaysthedesiredangle,clickagaintodrawthereferencelineandtodefinetheangleofthe dimension.
1st click 3rd click

4th click 2nd click

Angle Between Two Reference Lines


Todimensionananglebetweentworeferenceslines: 1. ClicktheAngularDimensiontoolfromtheDims/Notestoolset,andselectAngularDimensionfromTwo ReferenceLinesmode. 2. Clicktosetthestartofthefirstreferenceline. Areferencepreviewlinedisplays.

Arc Length Dimensioning |


3. Clickagaintosettheendofthefirstreferenceline. 4. Asecondreferencelinepreviewdisplays. 5. Clickathirdtimetosettheendofthesecondreferenceline. Anangulardimensionpreviewdisplays.

729

Toselectadifferentangleforexample,spanningtheoppositedirectionmovethecursoruntilthepreview displaysthedesiredangle. 6. Whenthepreviewdisplaysthedesiredangle,clickagaintodefinetheangleofthedimension.


1st click 2nd click 4th click 3rd click

Arc Length Dimensioning


TheArcLengthDimensiontoolmeasuresanddimensionsthelengthofanarcanywherealongitscircumference.The dimensioncanbeshownwithitswitnesslinesperpendiculartoachordonthearc,orperpendiculartoalinetangent tothearc.Therearealsomodestohideorshowagraphicofanarcoverthedimensionmeasurement. Thistoolworkswitharcs,polylinesthatincludearcsegments,arcbased3Dobjects,androundwalls.Italwayscreates thedimensiononthesameplanewiththearcthatisbeingdimensioned.
Witness Lines Perpendicular to Chord Arc Indicator Visible

Witness Lines Perpendicular to Tangent

Arc Indicator Invisible

Dimension Standards

Mode
WitnessLinesPerpendiculartoChord WitnessLinesPerpendiculartoTangent ArcIndicatorVisible ArcIndicatorInvisible DimensionStandards

Description
Dimensionsthearcwithwitnesslinesthatwouldbeperpendiculartoa chorddrawnacrossthearc Dimensionsthearcwithwitnesslinesthatwouldbeperpendiculartoa linedrawntangenttothearc Displaysanarcgraphicoverthedimensionmeasurement Usesadimensionmeasurementwithnoarcgraphic Tochangethedimensionstandardfornewdimensionscreatedinthe document,selectastandardfromthelist;selectCustomStandardsto createormanagecustomdimensions(seeUsingCustomDimension Standardsonpage 709)

730

| Chapter 17: Dimensioning and Constraints


Tocreateanarclengthdimension:

1. ClicktheArcLengthDimensiontoolfromtheDims/Notestoolset. 2. Selectthedesiredmodeforthedisplayofthewitnesslinesandwhethertousethearcindicatoroverthe dimensionmeasurement. 3. Clicktosetthemeasurementstartpoint. 4. Clicktosettheendofthemeasurement. 5. Movethecursorawayfromtheobject. Thisspecifieshowfarthedimensionlineisoffsetfromthemeasuredobject. 6. Clicktoplacethedimensionline.

3rd click 1st click

2nd click

3rd click

1st click

2nd click

Converting Objects to Dimensions


Toconvertaline,doubleline,arc,orcircletoadimension: 1. Selecttheobjecttoconvert. 2. SelecteitherModify>Convert>ConvertLinetoDimension,orTools>Utilities>ConvertLinetoDimension. 3. Theobjectisconvertedtoadimension.Lineschangetolineardimensions,arcstoangulardimensions,and circlestoradialdimensions.

Modifying Dimensions |

731

Modifying Dimensions
ModifydimensionsbyadjustingparametersintheObjectInfopaletteorthePropertiesdialogbox.Forchain dimensionobjects,usecommandsontheobjectcontextmenutoadd,delete,andeditindividualdimensionswithin thechain.YoucanalsomakemanycommonadjustmentsbymanipulatingdimensionsdirectlywiththeSelection tool;seeEditingDimensionswiththeMouseonpage 733. Tochangeadjoiningdimensionsintoasinglechaindimensionobject,selectthem,andthenselectModify> Compose.Similarly,tochangeachainobjectintomultipledimensions,selectthechain,andthenselectModify> Decompose.

Editing Dimension Properties


EditthepropertiesofoneormoreselecteddimensionsintheObjectInfopalette.Alternatively,rightclick(Windows) orCtrlclick(Macintosh)onthedimension,andselectPropertiesfromthecontextmenu. Toformatthedimensiontext,rightclick(Windows)orCtrlclick(Macintosh)onthedimension,andselect FormatTextfromthecontextmenu. Forchaindimensionobjects,theeditsareappliedtoalldimensionswithinthechain.Toeditthepropertiesof individualdimensionswithinachain,rightclick(Windows)orCtrlclick(Macintosh)onthedimension,and selectEditDimensionfromthecontextmenuinstead. Differentparametersareavailabledependingonwhattypeofdimensionisbeingedited.

Parameter
Length

Description
Forlinearandbaselinedimensions,andforindividualdimensionswithinachain,this setsthelengthofthedimension.Forassociativedimensions,thisalsochangesthelength oftheassociatedobject. Usethesegmentpositionselectortotheleftofthefieldlabeltospecifywhichsegmentof thedimension(eitherendpoint,orthecenterpoint)willremainfixedwhenthe dimensionisresized.Thisfixedpointisaglobalsettingforalleditingoflinearand baselinedimensionlengths.

Radius

Forradialanddiametricaldimensions,thissetsthelengthofthedimension(without movingthecenterpointofthedimension).Forassociativedimensions,thisalsochanges theradiusoftheassociatedobject.

732

| Chapter 17: Dimensioning and Constraints


Description
Selectsthedimensionstandardtype;thisselectiondetermineswhichfieldsdisplayinthe ObjectInfopaletteorPropertiesdialogbox. Setsthedistancethatthedimensionlineisoffsetfromthedimensionedobject Setswhetherarrowsdisplayinsidewitnesslinesorareflippedoutside Setstheangulardimensioninsidethewitnesslines;deselecttomovethedimension outsideofthewitnesslinesattheoppositeangle Switchestheradialdimensionleaderfromtherighttotheleftsideoftheobject

Parameter
DimStd DimOff ArrowsInside InteriorArc LeadertoLeft WitnessLines Visible

Forlinearandarcdimensions,thissetswhetherthewitnesslinedisplaysonbothendsof thedimensionline,onlythestart,onlytheend,ornotatall.Forchaindimensionobjects, thissetswhetherallornoneofthewitnesslinesdisplay. Forarcdimensions,setswhetherthewitnesslinesareperpendiculartoachordonthearc ortoatangenttothearc Forlinearandarcdimensions,thisdisplaysadditionalfieldsforyoutoenteroverride valuesforthelengthofoneorbothwitnesslines,orforthedistancethatoneorboth witnesslinesareoffsetfromthedimensionedobject. Forchaindimensionobjects,bydefaultthereisonlyasingleoverridevalueforthelength oroffsetdistanceforallwitnesslines.Tosetanoverrideforaparticulardimension, rightclick(Windows)orCtrlclick(Macintosh)onthedimension,andselectEdit Dimensionfromthecontextmenu.

WitAng Override

Text TextOff TextRot AutoPositionText FlipText BoxText ArcIndicator LeaderLine Setsthedistancethatthedimensiontextisoffsetfromthedimensionline Setstheorientationofthedimensiontexttothedimensionline Automaticallyalignsthedimensiontexttothecenterofthedimensionline;deselectto allowmanualcontrolofthetextlocation Mirrorsthedimensiontexttotheoppositesideofthedimensionline.Thisparameteris notavailableforchaindimensionobjectsorindividualdimensionswithinachain. Placesaboxaroundthedimensiontext Displaysanarcgraphicoverthedimensionmeasurement Forlinear,chain,andarcdimensions,drawsaleaderlinefromthedimensiontexttothe dimensionline.Ifdesired,usetheAttributespalettetoaddanendmarkertotheleader line(seeMarkerAttributesonpage 538);theendmarkerdefaultstothestylespecified forthecurrentdimensionstandard,butitcanbechanged. Selectswhichdimensionstodisplay,whenadualdimensionstandardisselected.This parameterisnotavailableforchaindimensionobjects. Togglesbetweensettingsforprimaryandsecondarydimensions,whenadualdimension standardisselected.Thisparameterisnotavailableforchaindimensionobjects. Setsthedimensionprecisionwithuptoeightdigitsofaccuracy Showsorhidesthedimensiontext

DualView Prim/Sec Prec ShowDimValue

Modifying Dimensions | Parameter


Leader Trailer Tol Top/Bottom/ DisplayasTyped

733

Description
Entertexttodisplaybeforethedimensiontext Entertexttodisplayafterthedimensiontext Whenasingledimensionstandardisselected,setswhetheradimensiondisplaysa single,double,limited,ornotolerancevalue Whenatolerancedisplayisselected,setsthetolerancevaluesandhowtheydisplay

Editing Chain Dimensions


Ifawitnesslinewithinachaindimensionobjectisadded,moved,ordeleted,thedimensionmeasurementsinthe chainadjustautomatically.

Action
Addadimension

Description
Rightclick(Windows)orCtrlclick(Macintosh)anywhereonthedimensionobject,and selectAddDimensionfromthecontextmenu.Clickwiththebullseyecursortosetthe endpointofthenewwitnessline.Alternatively,createanewindividualdimension withinthelinesofadimensioninanexistingchainobject,andthenewdimensionis addedtothechainautomatically. Rightclick(Windows)orCtrlclick(Macintosh)onthedimensionlineofthedimension tobedeleted,andselectDeleteDimensionfromthecontextmenu. Rightclick(Windows)orCtrlclick(Macintosh)onthewitnesslinetobedeleted,and selectDeleteWitnessLinefromthecontextmenu. Rightclick(Windows)orCtrlclick(Macintosh)onthedimensiontobeedited,andselect EditDimensionfromthecontextmenu.EditparametersintheObjectPropertiesdialog boxasdesiredandclickOK(seeEditingDimensionPropertiesonpage 731).Toapply propertieseditstoalldimensionsinthechain,usethePropertiescommandortheObject Infopaletteinstead. Rightclick(Windows)orCtrlclick(Macintosh)onthedimensiontobeedited,andselect FormatTextfromthecontextmenu

Deleteadimension Deleteawitnessline Editanindividual dimensionsproperties

FormatText

Editing Dimensions with the Mouse


AlldimensionparametersareavailableintheObjectInfopaletteandthePropertiesdialogbox.Dimensionsalsohave severalcontrolsthatallowyoutomakecommonadjustmentsquicklyanddirectlywiththemouse.

734

| Chapter 17: Dimensioning and Constraints


Description
Forlineardimensions,clickontheendpointofawitnesslinewiththeSelection toolanddragitparalleltothedimensionline;inchaindimensionobjects,the sizeofanyadjoiningdimensionisadjustedautomatically. Forangular,arclength,radial,ordiametricaldimensions,clickontheendpoint ofawitnesslinewiththeSelectiontoolanddragitinthedesireddirection. Forassociativedimensions,achangetothelengthofaradialordiametrical dimensionalsochangesthesizeoftheassociatedobject. Toenteraspecificvalue,usetheLengthfieldontheObjectInfopalette(see EditingDimensionPropertiesonpage 731).

Action
Changethelengthofa dimensiongraphically

The dimension has a constraint marker, so it is associative

Click the right endpoint of the dimension and drag it to the left

The circles diameter is reduced from the right; the left endpoint remains fixed

Enterthelengthofa dimensiononthedrawing (linearandchain dimensions)

Doubleclickanywhereonthedimensiontoenteratexteditingmode.Enterthe desiredlength,andthenusethesegmentpositionselectortospecifywhich segmentwillremainfixedwhenthedimensionisresized. Alternatively,selecttheTexttool,andthenclickthedimensiontexttoenter thetexteditingmode. Forassociativedimensions,achangetothelengthofalineardimensionalso changesthesizeoftheassociatedobject.


Segment selector

The dimension has constraint markers, so it is associative

Double-click the dimension to edit it; enter the new length, and click the left segment selector

The triangles top side is expanded from the right; the dimensions left endpoint remains fixed

Modifying Dimensions | Action


Changetherotationofa radialordiametrical dimension

735

Description
ClickanywhereonthewitnesslinewiththeSelectiontoolanddragitinthe desireddirection

Changethepositionofthe dimensiontext

ClickonthetextwiththeSelectiontoolanddragittothedesiredlocation.Thetext foranangulardimensioncanonlybemovedalongthecurveofthedimension itself;thetextforotherdimensionscanbemovedinanydirection. Forlinearandarclengthdimensions,pressandholdtheShiftkeywhiledragging thetexttomaintainthesameoffsetdistancefromthedimensionline. Toenteraspecificvalueforthetextoffsetfromthedimensionline,usetheTextOff fieldontheObjectInfopalette.Forlinear,arclength,andchaindimensions,you canaddaleaderlinefromthetexttothedimensionlineifnecessary.SeeEditing DimensionPropertiesonpage 731.

The dimension obscures part of the drawing

Click the dimension text and drag it to the other side of the line

Moveadimension

WiththeSelectiontool,clickonawitnessline(butnotonanendpoint)orononeof thetwocontrolpointsateachendofadimensionline,anddragtheentire dimensiontoanewlocation.Forassociativedimensions,thisalsomovesthe associatedobject.

736

| Chapter 17: Dimensioning and Constraints


Description
ClickonthedimensionlinewiththeSelectiontoolanddragittothedesired location. Ifthedimensionstandarddoesnothaveafixedwitnesslinelength,thewitness lineendpointsremainstationary,andthewitnesslinelengthisadjusted accordingly. Ifthedimensionstandardhasafixedwitnesslinelength,thewitnesslinesare notadjustedbydefault;tooverridethefixedlength,presstheShiftkeywhile draggingthedimensionline.Toenteraspecificvalueforthewitnesslinelength, usetheObjectInfopalette(seeEditingDimensionPropertiesonpage 731). Toenteraspecificvaluefortheoffset,usetheDimOfffieldontheObjectInfo palette(seeEditingDimensionPropertiesonpage 731).

Action
Changetheoffsetofthe dimensionlinefromthe dimensionedobject(linear, chain,andarcdimensions)

Modifying Dimensions | Action


Changetheoffsetofthe witnesslinesfromthe dimensionedobject(linear, chain,andarcdimensions)

737

Description
WiththeSelectiontool,clickonthegraydashedlineattheendpointsofthe witnesslinesanddragittothedesiredlocation.Thedimensionlineremains stationary,andthewitnesslinelengthisadjustedaccordingly. Ifthedimensionstandarddoesnothaveafixedwitnesslinelength,theObject Infopaletteshowsthatthewitnesslineshaveanoffsetoverride. Ifthedimensionstandardhasafixedwitnesslinelength,theObjectInfopalette showsthatthewitnesslineshavealengthoverride. Toenterspecificvaluesfortheoffsetorlengthofthewitnesslines,usetheOverride settingontheObjectInfopalette(seeEditingDimensionPropertiesonpage 731).

Ifthedimensionhasmultipleoverridevaluesforoffsetorlength,eachwitnessline hasitsowndashedlineforediting.

738

| Chapter 17: Dimensioning and Constraints


Description
WiththeSelectiontool,selectthedimensionstomodify.Dragoneofthedimension linestothedesiredlocation;allselecteddimensionlinesmovethesamedistance. Dragoneofthedashedgraylinesthatindicatethewitnesslineoffsettothedesired location;theendpointsofallselectedwitnesslinesmovethesamedistance.

Action
Modifytheoffsetsofseveral dimensionlinesorwitness linesatonce(linearand chaindimensions)

Measuring Distance
Distancecanbemeasuredwithoutactuallybeingrecorded.Thiscanbeusefulforplacingobjectsorforreference.

Measuring in Units
TheTapeMeasuretoolmeasuresthedistancebetweentwoormorepointsinthedrawingarea,andtemporarily displaysthelengthintheDatabar.Thetoolshowsthemeasurementbetweenoneclickandthenext,anditalsokeeps trackofthecumulativelengthfromtheveryfirstclick. MeasurementsdisplayintheDatabaruntilthemouseisdoubleclicked.Notethemeasurementsbeforethedisplay clears. Tomeasureadistance: 1. ClicktheTapeMeasuretoolfromtheDims/Notestoolset. 2. Clickwherethefirstmeasurementistostart. 3. Movethecursoralongthedistancetomeasure. TheDatabardisplaystwomeasurements:

Data Bar
L TL

Measurement
Length(distance)fromthepreviouspoint Totallength(cumulativemeasure)fromthestartingpoint

4. Tocontinuemeasuringinadifferentdirectionorarea,clicktosetthenextstartingpoint.

Measuring Distance |
TheLmeasurementchangestozero. 5. Movethecursortomeasurethenextdistance. TheDatabarreflectsthelengthfromthepreviouspointandthetotalcumulativelength.
Second click to start the measurement of the next edge

739

First click to start the measurement

The measurement from the second click to this corner is 2-10

6. Whenthemeasurementsarecomplete,notethetotallength. 7. Doubleclicktoendthemeasurements.

Measuring in Degrees
TheProtractortoolmeasuresanglesinthedrawing,andtemporarilydisplaysthedegreesmeasurementintheData bar.Therearetwomodesforthetool.
Angle from Two Segments Angle from Three Points

Mode
AnglefromTwoSegments

Description
Calculatestheanglebetweentwoobjectsorobjectsidesthatarelinearrectangles (includingroundedandrotated),lines,polylines,andpolygons.Thismodecannot, however,measurecircles,ovals,orarcs.Inaddition,itcannotmeasurebetween parallellines Measuresananglebetweenthreepointsinthedrawingarea

AnglefromThreePoints

Angles Between Objects or Object Sides


Tomeasuretheanglesbetweenobjectsorobjectsides: 1. ClicktheProtractortoolfromtheDims/Notestoolset,andselectAnglefromTwoSegmentsmode. 2. Movetheselectionarrowoverthefirstsideoftheangletomeasure. 3. Clicktoselecttheside,andthenmovethecursortotheotherangleside. TheangledisplaysintheDatabar. 4. Notetheangle,andthenclicktoendthemeasurement.

740

| Chapter 17: Dimensioning and Constraints

Angles Between Three Points


Tomeasureanglesbetweenthreepoints: 1. ClicktheProtractortoolfromtheDims/Notestoolset,andselectAngleFromThreePointsmode. 2. Clicktosetthefirstpoint. 3. Clicktosetthesecondpoint. 4. Movethecursortothethirdanglepoint. TheangledisplaysintheDatabar. 5. Notetheangle,andthenclicktoendthemeasurement.

Parametric Constraints
Parametricconstraintsensurethatadrawingmaintainsitsoriginalprecision.Parametricconstraintsmaintain relationshipsbetweenanobjectandworldspace,betweentwoobjects,orwithintheobjectitself.Therearetwotypes ofparametricconstraints:dimensionalandgeometric.Dimensionalconstraintsmaintainameasurablerelationshipby limitingtheobjectsgeometrytoaparticularvalue.Geometricconstraintsmaintainaphysicalrelationshipbylimiting theallowedorientationofobjects.

Dimensional constraint maintaining the horizontal distance between two objects

Geometric constraint maintaining tangency between a line and a circle

Parametricconstraintscanbeplacedonall2Dobjects.Theycannotbeplacedon3Dobjectsexceptforwalls,symbols, andpluginobjectsthathave2Dcomponents.Multipleconstraintscanbeappliedtoanobject.Parametricconstraints canbeplacedacrosslayersaslongasbothlayersareofthesamescale,andLayerOptionsaresettoShow/Snap/ ModifyOthers. Constraintsmustalwaysbeplacedintheplanedefinedbytheobjectorobjectsbeingconstrained;whenmultiple objectsareconstrained,theymustbecoplanartocreatetheconstraint.Theconstraintonanobjectorobjectschanges planeswiththeobject,iftheobjectchangesitsplane. Constraintsattachedtoasingleobjectmovealongwiththeobjecteveniftheobjectiscopiedorcutandpasted.When onlyoneofapairofconstrainedobjectsisduplicatedorcopiedorcutandpasted,theconstraintisremoved. Whenaparametricconstraintisplaced,greenconstraintindicatorsaredrawnfortheobject(s)involved.Tohide indicators,deselectShowparametricconstraintsintheDisplaytaboftheVectorworkspreferences.Alternatively, selectView>Show>ShoworHideConstraints;thecommandtogglesbetweendisplayingorhidingconstraints,as appropriate.

Parametric Constraints |

741

Dimensional Constraints
Dimensionalconstraintsmaintainameasurablerelationship.Theyresemblestandarddimensionswhenplaced.

Constrain Angle
Constraintheangularrelationshipbetweenseparateobjectsorlinesegmentsofasingleobject.Ifoneobjectorsegment isrotated,theobjectorsegmentitisconstrainedtoadjuststomaintaintheangle. Toconstraintheanglebetweenobjectsorlinesegmentsofasingleobject: 1. ClicktheConstrainAngletoolfromtheDims/Notestoolset. 2. Clickononeofthetwoobjectsorlinesegmentstobeconstrained. Thecursorswitchestothebullseyecursor. 3. Clickonthesecondobjectorlinesegmenttobeconstrained. Agreenangleconstraintisdrawnbetweenthetwoobjectsorlinesegments.

1st click Object 2nd click

Constrain Radius
Constraintheradiusofasinglearcorcircle.Ifthearcorcircleisaccidentallyresized,theconstraintpreventsthe operation,preservingtheradius. Toconstraintheradiusofanarcorcircle: 1. ClicktheConstrainRadiustoolfromtheDims/Notestoolset. 2. Clickonthearcorcircletobeconstrained. Agreenradiusconstraintisdrawnontheobject.

Click on the object

742

| Chapter 17: Dimensioning and Constraints


TheConstrainRadiustooldoesnotworkonquarterarcs.

Constrain Horizontal Distance


Constrainthehorizontaldistanceofanedgeofanobject,alinesegment,orbetweentwopoints.Ifanobjectresizeis attempted,theconstraintpreventstheoperation,preservingtheoriginalhorizontaldistance.Whentheconstraintison twodifferentobjects,ifoneobjectismodified,theobjectitisconstrainedtomovestoremainatthesameconstrained horizontaldistance. Toconstrainthehorizontaldistanceofanedgeofanobjectoralinesegment: 1. ClicktheConstrainHorizDistancetoolfromtheDims/Notestoolset. 2. Clickontheobjecttobeconstrained. Agreenhorizontaldistanceconstraintisdrawnontheobject.

Click on the object

Toconstrainthehorizontaldistancebetweentwopoints: 1. ClicktheConstrainHorizDistancetoolfromtheDims/Notestoolset. 2. Clickonthefirstpointtobeconstrained. Thecursorswitchestothebullseyecursor. 3. Clickonthesecondpointtobeconstrained. Agreenhorizontaldistanceconstraintisdrawnbetweenthetwopoints.


1st click 2nd click

Constrain Vertical Distance


Constraintheverticaldistanceofanedgeofanobject,linesegment,orbetweentwopoints.Ifanobjectresizeis attempted,theconstraintpreventstheoperation,preservingtheoriginalverticaldistance.Whentheconstraintison twodifferentobjects,ifoneobjectismodified,theobjecttowhichitisconstrainedmovestoremainatthesame constrainedverticaldistance.

Parametric Constraints |
Toconstraintheverticaldistanceofanedgeofanobjectorlinesegment: 1. ClicktheConstrainVerticalDistancetoolfromtheDims/Notestoolset. 2. Clickontheobjecttobeconstrained. Agreenverticaldistanceconstraintisdrawnontheobject.

743

Click on the object

Toconstraintheverticaldistancebetweentwopoints: 1. ClicktheConstrainVerticalDistancetoolfromtheDims/Notestoolset. 2. Clickonthefirstpointtobeconstrained. Thecursorswitchestothebullseyecursor. 3. Clickonthesecondpointtobeconstrained. Agreenverticaldistanceconstraintisdrawnbetweenthetwopoints.

1st click

2nd click

Constrain Distance
Constrainthedistanceofanedgeofanobject,linesegment,orbetweentwopointsregardlessoftheangle.Ifanobject isaccidentallyresized,theconstraintpreventstheoperation,preservingtheoriginaldistance.Whentheconstraintis ontwodifferentobjects,ifoneobjectismodified,theobjecttowhichitisconstrainedmovestoremainatthesame constraineddistance.

744

| Chapter 17: Dimensioning and Constraints


Toconstrainthedistanceofanedgeofanobjectorlinesegment:

1. ClicktheConstrainDistancetoolfromtheDims/Notestoolset. 2. Clickontheobjecttobeconstrained. Agreenhorizontaldistanceconstraintisdrawnontheobject.

Object

Click on the object

Toconstrainthedistancebetweentwopoints: 1. ClicktheConstrainDistancetoolfromtheDims/Notestoolset. 2. Clickonthefirstpointtobeconstrained. Thecursorswitchestothebullseyecursor. 3. Clickonthesecondpointtobeconstrained. Agreendistanceconstraintisdrawnbetweenthetwopoints.

1st click

Point

2nd click

Geometric Constraints
Geometricconstraintspreservethegeometricpropertiesofobjects.

Constrain Horizontal-Vertical
Constrainalinearobjecttoremainhorizontalorvertical.Onceconstrained,theobjectcannotberotatedtoanyother position.Theobjectcanberesizedinlength,butitalwaysremainshorizontalorvertical. Toconstrainanobjecttoremainhorizontalvertical:

Parametric Constraints |
1. ClicktheConstrainHorizVerticaltoolfromtheDims/Notestoolset. 2. Clickonthelinearobjecttobeconstrained. Agreenhorizontalverticalconstraintisdrawnontheobject.

745

Click on the object

Iftheobjectisdiagonalwhentheconstraintisplaced,itrotatestobecomeverticalorhorizontal,dependingon whichangleitisclosestto.

Constrain Parallel
Constrainlinearobjectsorlinesegmentstobeparalleltooneanother.Ifoneobjectisrotated,theobjectconstrainedto itrotatestoremainparalleltothefirstobject.Linesdonotneedtobeparallelwhenplacingtheconstraints;thefirst linerotatestomatchtheangleofthesecondline. Toconstrainlinearobjectsorlinesegmentstobeparallel:

1. ClicktheConstrainParalleltoolfromtheDims/Notestoolset. 2. Clickonthelinetoconstrain. Thecursorswitchestothebullseyecursor. 3. Clickonthelinetobeconstrained. Greenparallelconstraintindicatorsaredrawnaroundthetwolines.


1st click

Object 2nd click

Constrain Perpendicular
Constrainlinearobjectsorlinesegmentstobeperpendiculartooneanother.Ifonelineisrotated,thelineitis constrainedtoadjuststoremainperpendiculartothefirstline.Linesdonotneedtobeperpendicularwhenplacing theconstraints;thefirstlinerotatestobecomeperpendiculartothesecondline.

746

| Chapter 17: Dimensioning and Constraints


Toconstrainlinestobeperpendicular:

1. ClicktheConstrainPerpendiculartoolfromtheDims/Notestoolset. 2. Clickonthelinetoconstrain. Thecursorswitchestothebullseyecursor. 3. Clickonthelinetobeconstrained. Agreenperpendicularconstraintisdrawn,connectingthetwolines.

1st click

2nd click

Constrain Colinear
Constrainthecolinearitybetweentwolinearobjects.Ifonelineismoved,thelineitisconstrainedtoadjuststoremain aligned.Linesdonotneedtobealignedwhenplacingtheconstraints;thefirstlinemovestobecomecolineartothe secondline. Toconstrainthecolinearitybetweentwolines: 1. ClicktheConstrainColineartoolfromtheDims/Notestoolset. 2. Clickonthelinetoconstrain. Thecursorswitchestothebullseyecursor. 3. Clickonthelinetobeconstrained. Greencolinearconstraintindicatorsaredrawnonthetwolines.

2nd click

1st click

Parametric Constraints |

747

Constrain Coincident
Constraintwoselectedpointstoremainattached.Ifoneobjectismoved,theobjectitisconstrainedtoadjuststo maintaintheconnection.Thefirstpointstretchestoconnecttothesecondpoint,ifnecessary. Toconstraintheconnectionbetweentwopoints: 1. ClicktheConstrainCoincidenttoolfromtheDims/Notestoolset. 2. Clickonthepointtoconstrain. Thecursorswitchestothebullseyecursor. 3. Clickonthepointtobeconstrained. Agreencoincidentconstraintisdrawnwherethetwopointstouch.

1st click 2nd click

Constrain Concentric
Constraincirclesandarcsconcentrically.Ifacircleorarcismoved,thecircleorarcitisconstrainedtomovessothat theircentersremainaligned.Circlesandarcsdonotneedtobeconcentricwhenplacingtheconstraints;thefirstobject movessothatitscenteralignstothesecondobjectscenter. Toconstraintwocirclesorarcsconcentrically: 1. ClicktheConstrainConcentrictoolfromtheDims/Notestoolset. 2. Clickontheobjecttoconstrain. Thecursorswitchestothebullseyecursor. 3. Clickontheobjecttobeconstrained. Agreenconcentricconstraintisdrawnatthecenterofthetwoobjects.

2nd click 1st click

748

| Chapter 17: Dimensioning and Constraints

Constrain Tangent
Constrainacircle,arcorlinetobetangenttoanothercircleorarc.Ifoneobjectismoved,theotherobjectitis constrainedtoadjuststomaintainthetangency.Objectsdonotneedtobetangenttooneanotherwhenplacingthe constraints;thefirstobjectmovestobecometangenttothesecond. Toconstrainacircle,arcorlinetobetangenttoacircleorarc: 1. ClicktheConstrainTangenttoolfromtheDims/Notestoolset. 2. Clickonthecircleorarctoconstrain. Thecursorswitchestothebullseyecursor. 3. Clickonthecircle,arcorlinetobeconstrained. Agreentangentconstraintisdrawnatthetangentpointofthetwoobjects.

1st click

2nd click

Editing Parametric Constraints


Whenaconstrainedobjectisdeleted,theparametricconstraintattachedtoitisalsoremoved.Toremovetheconstraint withoutremovingtheattachedobject,usetheEditConstraintscommand. Asituationmayarisewherethevalueofadimensionalconstraintneedstobechanged.Awallwithahorizontal distanceconstraintvalueof26mayatalaterpointintheprojectneedtobechangedto56.Thistypeofeditisalso accomplishedusingtheEditConstraintscommand. Individualconstraintscanbeselectedfromalistofallconstraintscurrentlyappliedtoaselectedobject.Theselected constraintchangescolortoindicatewhichoneisabouttobeedited.Geometricconstraints,whereappropriate,along withchangingtheconstraintcolor,alsoshowtheconnectionbetweenthetwoconstrainedobjectsforclarity. Constrainterrorsrelatedtoeditingoperationsthatconflictwithcurrentconstraintsaresolvedbyeitherremovingthe constraint,orcancelingtheeditingoperation.

Deleting Parametric Constraints


Todeleteaparametricconstraintfromanobject: 1. Selecttheobjectwiththeconstraint. 2. SelectModify>EditConstraints. TheEditConstraintsdialogboxopens.

Parametric Constraints |

749

3. SelecttheconstrainttoberemovedfromtheConstraintslist. Theselectedconstraintchangescolor. 4. ClickDeletetoremovetheconstraint. Todeletealltheconstraintsattachedtoanobject,clickDeleteAll. 5. ClickOK.

Changing a Dimensional Constraint Value


Tochangeadimensionalconstraintvalue: 1. Selecttheobjectwiththeconstraint. 2. SelectModify>EditConstraints. TheEditConstraintsdialogboxopens.

750

| Chapter 17: Dimensioning and Constraints

3. IntheDimensionalConstraintValuefield,enterthenewdimension,andclickOK. Thedimensionalvalueisupdatedandtheobjectorobjectsareadjusted.

Parametric Constraint Errors


Occasionally,aneditingoperationcannotbeperformedduetoconflictingorunsolvableconstraintsplacedonthe objectsinvolved.Whenthisoccurs,analertdialogboxopenswhichallowstheunsolvableconstraintstobepreviewed and,ifneeded,removed. Tosolveconflictingconstrainterrors: 1. Whenanunsolvableconstraintoccurs,analertdialogboxopens.Decidehowtoresolvetheconflictingsituation.

Parameter
No Yes

Description
Continueswiththeeditingoperation,removingtheconflictingconstraints Cancelstheeditingoperation,preservingconstraints

Parametric Constraints | Parameter


Preview

751

Description
OpenstheUnsolvableConstraintsdialogbox,listingtheproblemconstraintsand allowingapreviewofeachconstraint

2. SelectPreviewconstraintsthatwillbeselected,andthenclickYestopreviewtheunsolvableconstraints. TheUnsolvableConstraintsdialogboxopens.

3. Doubleclickonanunsolvableconstrainttopreviewitinthedrawing.Theunsolvableconstraintdisplayswitha differentcolor. 4. ClickOKtoremovetheconstraintsandperformtheeditingoperation.ClickCanceltoretaintheconstraintsand canceltheeditingoperation.

752

| Chapter 17: Dimensioning and Constraints

Presenting Vectorworks Drawings

18

TheVectorworksprogramprovidesseveralwaystopresentacompleteddrawing.Guideyourcustomerthroughan animatedwalkthroughofyourdesignbycreatingaQuickTimemovie.Presentmanycroppableviewsofthedrawing onasinglelayerwithviewports.Finally,thelayerlinkfeaturecreateslinkedviewsofthedesignlayersinthedrawing.

Animating Drawings with QuickTime


WithQuickTime,animationscanbecreatedfroma3DVectorworksdrawing. QuickTimemustbeinstalledtovieworcreateQuickTimemovies.Itisaseparateprogramavailablewiththe Vectorworkssoftwareinstallation.QuickTimeincludesMoviePlayer,forviewingseveraldifferentfiletypes.

Animating Drawings
TwotypesofanimationscanbecreatedOrbitPointandMoveAlongPath.TheOrbitPointanimatorrotatesbya specifiednumberofdegreesarounda3Dobjectorselectedpointinthedrawing.TheMoveAlongPathanimator movesthroughthe3Ddrawing,followingaspecifiedpath. InPerspectiveview,onlytheportionofthemodelwithintheperspectiveframe(seePerspectiveonpage 578)is visibleintheanimation.

Creating Orbit Point Animations


TheOrbitPointanimatorcreatesananimationthatmovesinacircularpatharoundaspecific3Dobjectorpoint.

754

| Chapter 18: Presenting Vectorworks Drawings

Tocreateanorbitpointanimation: 1. Setupthedrawingview. SelectthedesiredviewsfromtheViewmenuStandardViews,Projection,Rendering,andPerspective.In addition,usetheZoomtooltosetthedrawingmagnificationlevel.Ensurethatonlythelayersandclassesthat shoulddisplayintheanimationarevisible. 2. Tospecifyanobjectorobjectsasthecenterofrotation,selecttheobjectorgroupofobjects. 3. SelectModel>CreateAnimation. TheCreateAnimationdialogboxopens.

4. SettheCameratoOrbitPoint. 5. ClickAnimationOptions. TheSimpleOrbitOptionsdialogboxopens.

Parameter
Activelayer plane

Description
Specifiesthecenteroftheactivelayerplane(0X,0Y,0Z)asthecenterofrotationforthe animation

Animating Drawings with QuickTime | Parameter


Workingplane Selection Rotationangle

755

Description
Specifiesthecenteroftheworkingplane(0I,0J,0K)asthecenterofrotationfortheanimation Specifiesthecenteroftheselectedobject(s)asthecenterofrotationfortheanimation Specifiestheamountofrotation(indegrees)fortheanimation;forexample,tocompletean orbitaroundtheselectedcenterofanimation,enter360

6. ClickOKtoreturntotheCreateAnimationdialogbox. TheQuickTimeframespersecond(fps)valueisdisplayed.TheVectorworksprogramusesdefaultcompression settingsforQuickTime;thesesettingsproduceagoodqualityanimationwithoutanexcessivefilesize.However, theparameterscanbemodifiedbyclickingontheQuickTimeOptionsbutton. QuickTimeisacomplexprogramwhichoffersgreatflexibilityinselectingsettings.Consulttheonline QuickTimePlayerhelp(availablefromtheQuickTimeHelpmenu)formoreinformationaboutQuickTime parametersandcompressionsettings. 7. SpecifytheremainingparametersettingsintheCreateAnimationdialogbox.

Parameter
Duration(Sec) TimeScale

Description
Setsthetotallengthoftimeoftheanimation Specifiestheanimationrate;avaluebetween0.1and0.99createsaslowmotioneffect,whilea valuebetween1.01and10.00speedsuptheanimation.Leavethedefaultvalueof1.00fora normaltimescale.

8. ClickPreviewtochecktheanimationbeforesavingit.Dependingontherenderingsetting,thepreviewmaybe showninwireframe. Topreviewonlyaselectedportionoftheanimation,pressCommand(Macintosh)orCtrl(Windows)when clickingPreview.ThePreviewDurationdialogboxopens.

Specifytheanimationstartingandendingtime(inseconds)andclickPreview. Tostopshowingapreview,simultaneouslypressCommand+Period(Macintosh)orEsc(Windows). 9. Whensatisfiedwiththepreview,clickSaveMovietosavetheanimation. TheSaveAsdialogboxopens. 10. EnterthenamefortheQuickTimeMoviefileandspecifyitslocation.ClickSave.Theprogressofmoviecreation isdisplayed. Toseethecompletedanimation,seeViewingQuickTimeAnimationsonpage 761.

756

| Chapter 18: Presenting Vectorworks Drawings

Creating Move Along Path Animations


TheMoveAlongPathtypeofanimationmovesthrougha3Ddrawingalongaspecifiedpath.Forexample,createa walkthroughpresentationofahouse.

Tocreateananimationmovingalongaspecifiedpath: 1. Setupthedrawingview. SelectthedesiredviewsfromtheViewmenuStandardViews,Rendering,andPerspective. ThedrawingProjectionmustbesettoPerspective. 2. Saveaviewforeachpointalongthepathtouseforcreatingtheanimation. UsetheWalkthroughand/orFlyovertoolstochangeviews.Tosaveaview,selectView>SaveView.IntheSave Viewdialogboxthatopens,entertheViewName,ensurethatSaveFactorsisselected,andthenclickOK(see CreatingSavedViewsonpage 114). 3. SelectModel>CreateAnimation. TheCreateAnimationdialogboxopens. 4. SettheCameratoMoveAlongPath.

Animating Drawings with QuickTime |

757

5. ClickAnimationOptions. TheSelectAnimationdialogboxopens.

6. ClickNew. TheNewAnimationNamedialogboxopens.

EnteranameforthisanimationandthenclickCreatetoreturntotheSelectAnimationdialogbox. 7. SelectthenameofthenewanimationandclickEdit. TheEditPathAnimationdialogboxopens.

758

| Chapter 18: Presenting Vectorworks Drawings

TheZoomInandZoomOutbuttonsunderthegraphchangethemagnificationleveloftheanimationgraph. AnewpathanimationusesthedefaultlengthfromthesettinginthemainQuickTimeoptionsdialogbox.To specifyadifferentanimationlength,doubleclickthearrowtothefarrightofthetimeline.


Double-click the arrow to access the Set Animation Length dialog box

8. Fromthelistofviewsontheleft,dragthestartingviewnametotheanimationgraph. Thefirstviewisplacedatthegraphsorigin0seconds,0drawingunits/second. 9. Selectthenextviewtouseanddragittotheanimationgraph. Abarwithabeadisaddedtothegraph.Dragthebarandbeadtochangetheanimationsettings(timeelapsed betweenviewchangesandvelocityofcameramovement). Thedistancebetweenbarsisthetimeinsecondsthatittakestomovefromoneviewtothenext. Movethebeadupanddowntodeterminetheslopeofthelinebetweenbars.Thisslopeindicatesthevelocityof themovementbetweenviews(thenumberofdrawingunits/secondthatthecameramoves).Ingeneral,theslope shouldformasteadycurve.Anunevencurvewillcauseachoppycameramovement,speedingupandslowing downinajoltingmanner.TheslopecannotdipbelowtheXaxisthiswouldcreateanegativevelocity.

Animating Drawings with QuickTime |

759

bar bead

10. Tosetaspecificcameratarget,doubleclickonabead. TheSetViewDirectiondialogboxopens.

Parameter
Looktowards Currentview Workingplaneorigin Centerofcurrently selectedobject Centeroffollowing namedobject Followingpoint

Description
Specifieswhatdirectiontheviewshouldlooktoward Setstheviewtothecurrentbeadssavedview Setstheviewtotheworkingplaneorigin SetstheviewtotheX,Y,Zcenterofthecurrentlyselectedobject(s)boundingbox Setstheviewtolookatthecenterofanamed3Dobject.ClickSelectadifferentnamed objecttoopentheLookAtNamedObjectdialogbox.Selecttheobjecttosettheview toward(namedobjectsinwallsorlayerlinkscannotbeselected). SetstheviewtothespecifiedX,Y,Zcoordinates

11. ClickOKtoexittheSetViewDirectiondialogbox. 12. Continueselectingviewsanddraggingthemontotheanimationgraphuntilthedesiredviewshavebeen includedwithinthetimeallotment.Toviewawireframeversionoftheanimation,clickPreview.

760

| Chapter 18: Presenting Vectorworks Drawings


Toaddapausetotheanimation,dragthesameviewtwiceintotheanimationgraphsothattheviewsarenextto eachotherinsequence.Thelinebetweentheviewsshouldbeflat(noupwardordownwardslope).Thiscreatesa velocityofzeroand,therefore,apauseintheanimation. SettingtheviewtodifferentspecifiedX,Y,Zcoordinatesforeachoftheseframes,makesthecameraappearto stopitsforwardmotionandpanfromonedirectiontoanother.

To create a pause, place the same view twice in the animation graph. Ensure that there is no slope between the repeated views.

13. ClickDonetoreturntotheCreateAnimationdialogbox. TheQuickTimeframespersecond(fps)valueisdisplayed.TheVectorworksprogramusesdefaultCompression SettingsforQuickTime;thesesettingsproduceagoodqualityanimationwithoutanexcessivefilesize.However, theparameterscanbemodifiedbyclickingontheQuickTimeOptionsbutton. QuickTimeisacomplexprogramwhichoffersgreatflexibilityinselectingsettings.Consulttheonline QuickTimePlayerhelp(availablefromtheQuickTimeHelpmenu)formoreinformationaboutQuickTime parametersandcompressionsettings. 14. SpecifytheremainingparametersettingsintheCreateAnimationdialogbox.

Parameter
Duration(Sec) TimeScale

Description
Setsthetotallengthoftimeoftheanimation Specifiestheanimationrate;avaluebetween0.1and0.99createsaslowmotioneffect,while avaluebetween1.01and10.00speedsuptheanimation.Leavethedefaultvalueof1.00fora normaltimescale.

15. ClickPreviewtochecktheanimationbeforesavingit.Dependingontherenderingsetting,thepreviewmaybe showninwireframe.Specifytheanimationstartingandendingtime(inseconds)andclickPreview. Topreviewonlyaselectedportionoftheanimation,pressCommand(Macintosh)orCtrl(Windows)when clickingPreview.ThePreviewDurationdialogboxopens.

Animating Drawings with QuickTime |


Tostopshowingapreview,simultaneouslypressCommand+Period(Macintosh)orEsc(Windows). 16. Whensatisfiedwiththepreview,clickSaveMovietosavetheanimation. TheSaveAsdialogboxopens.

761

17. EnterthenamefortheQuickTimemoviefileandspecifyitslocation.ClickSave.Themoviecreationprogress displays. Toseethecompletedanimation,seeViewingQuickTimeAnimationsonpage 761.

Adding Text or Title Screens to Animations


Unlesstextisspecificallyconvertedintoa3Dobject(usingtheTrueTypetoPolylinecommand),boththeVectorworks andQuickTimeprogramsviewtextas2D.ThismeanstextinadrawingexportedasaQuickTimemovieremains motionless,notmovingwiththeother3Dobjects.Thisprincipleisalsotrueforanygraphicimagesplacedinthe drawing. TheVectorworksprogramcanbeusedtocreateananimatedtitlescreenasaseparateQuickTimemovie,usingan OrbitPointanimationtomovethe2Dtext.(TheMoveAlongPathanimatorrequires3Dperspectiveprojection.)Then, withintheQuickTimeprogram,linkthetwofilestogethertocreateonemovie. Whencreatingatitlescreenanimation,ensurethatthetitlemovieusesthesameQuickTimeframeratesettingas thelinkedanimationmovie.

Viewing QuickTime Animations


MacintoshgeneratedorWindowsgeneratedmoviescanbeviewedoneitherplatform. Toviewexistingmovies: 1. DoubleclickthefilenameorQuickTimeMovieiconforthedesiredmovie.Alternatively,opentheQuickTime applicationandselectthefilefromtheOpenmenu. 2. ClickthePlaybuttontoplaythemovie.

Play Button

Pause Button

762

| Chapter 18: Presenting Vectorworks Drawings

Presenting Drawings with Sheet Layer Viewports


Viewportobjectsallowthecreationofviewsfromseveraldirections,completewithdetails,annotations, dimensions,andtitleblocks.Viewportscanshowotherpartsoftheactivedocument,orevenportionsofother documents. Viewportscandisplayentireaswellascroppedviewsofadrawing,withspecifiedlayerandclassvisibilitysettings, projection,rendermode,andorientationparameters.Ifthedrawingchanges,theviewportscanbeeasilyupdatedto reflectthechanges. WhenRenderworksisinstalled,aviewportcanbelinkedtoaRenderworkscamera. InboththeVectorworksFundamentalsandVectorworksDesignSeriesproducts,youcancreateoneormore viewportsonasheetlayer,andeachviewportcanshowoneormoredesignlayersfromthisdocument.Additionally, VectorworksDesignSeriesproductsallowyoutocreateoneormoreviewportsonadesignlayer,andthedesign layersshownintheviewportscanbeeitherfromthisdocument,orreferencedfromanotherdocument.Fordetails aboutdesignlayerviewports,seePresentingDrawingswithDesignLayerViewportsonpage 689intheVectorworks DesignSeriesUsersGuide. Asheetlayercancontainmanyviewports.Sheetlayersretaintheirownprintsettings,includingprintarea,resolution, andprintersetupparameters.Formoreinformationonsheetlayers,seeManagingLayersonpage 93.

Creating a Sheet Layer Viewport from a Design Layer


Asheetlayerviewportcanbecreatedfromanactivedesignlayer. Tocreateaviewportfromadesignlayer: 1. SelectView>CreateViewport. 2. TheCreateViewportdialogboxopens.Theviewportparametersareinitiallysettobethesameasthoseofthe designlayerthatiscurrentlyactive,buttheycanbechangedhere.Aftertheviewporthasbeencreated, additionalparametersbecomeavailable;seePropertiesofSheetLayerViewportsonpage 766. ForVectorworksDesignSeriesproducts,theCreateViewportdialogboxhasadditionalfunctionalityforcreating designlayerviewports;seeCreatingaDesignLayerViewportthatDisplaysanInternalDesignLayeron page 690intheVectorworksDesignSeriesUsersGuide.

Presenting Drawings with Sheet Layer Viewports |

763

Parameter
ViewportName DrawingTitle

Description
Specifiestheviewportname;thisnamemustbeuniqueinthedocument Specifiesadescriptivetitleforthesheetlayerviewport.Thisnamedisplaysasthedrawing titleforanyannotationobjects(drawinglabels,sectionmarkers,andsheetborders)thatare addedtotheviewport. Selectthesheetlayerwheretheviewportwillbecreated,orselectNewSheetLayerto createasheetlayer.Iftherearenosheetlayerspresentandanewoneisnotcreatednow, youwillbepromptedtocreateasheetlayerafterclickingOK. Specifieswhichdesignlayerswillbevisibleintheviewport Selecttodisplay2Dplanarobjectsassociatedwiththelayerplane,whentheviewports viewisotherthanTop/Plan Selecttodisplay2Dobjectsassociatedwiththescreenplane,whentheviewportsviewis otherthanTop/Plan Specifieswhichclasseswillbevisibleintheviewport Specifiestheviewportscalerelativetothepage;selectascaleorchooseCustomandenter thescalevalueinCustomScale Whenacustomscaleisselected,enterthescalevalue

CreateonLayer

Layers DisplayPlanar Objects ProjectScreen Objects Classes Scale CustomScale

764

| Chapter 18: Presenting Vectorworks Drawings


Description
Specifiestheorientationofthedesignlayersdisplayedintheviewport;selectacardinal vieworchooseCustomandthenclickSetViewtospecifytheview Whenacustomviewisselected,clickSetViewtoopenthe3DRotationdialogboxforthe entryofcustomviewparameters(seeRotatingPreciselyonpage 583formore information) Specifiestherendermodefortheviewport. ThefollowingmodesenabletheRenderSettingsbuttontospecifyrenderingparameters: RenderSettings Sketch(VectorworksDesignSeriesrequired) OpenGL CustomRenderworks(Renderworksrequired) ArtisticRenderworks(Renderworksrequired) HiddenLine DashedHiddenLine FinalShadedPolygon

Parameter
View SetView

Rendering

Certainrendermodesrequireparameterstobeset;clickthisbuttontospecifythem.Seethe following: HiddenLineRendersettings:LineRenderOptionsonpage 686 OpenGLandFinalShadedPolygonsettings:RenderingwithVectorworksonpage 681 ArtisticRenderworkssettings:ArtisticRenderworksOptionsonpage 695 CustomRenderworkssettings:CustomRenderworksOptionsonpage 694

RWBackground (Renderworks required) Projection PerspectiveType PerspectiveDist 3. ClickOK.

SelectaRenderworksbackgroundfromeitherthedefaultcontentorthecurrentfiles contenttouseasabackgroundfortheviewport;seeDefaultContentinVectorworks FundamentalsandRenderworksonpage 157 Selecttheprojectiontypefortheviewport(seeProjectiononpage 577) ForPerspectiveprojection,selectthetypeofperspective,orchooseCustomandspecifythe perspectivedistance Forcustomperspectives,entertheperspectivedistance

4. Ifasheetlayerdoesnotalreadyexistinthefile,theNewSheetLayerdialogboxopensautomaticallytocreate one.ClickOK. Theviewportiscreatedonthedesignatedsheetlayer,andthesheetlayerbecomesactive.

Presenting Drawings with Sheet Layer Viewports |

765

Creating a Sheet Layer Viewport by Cropping


Tocreateadetailviewporteitherfromadesignlayerorfromanexistinguncroppedviewportonasheetlayer: 1. Makeactivetheexistingdesignlayerorsheetlayerthatwilldisplayintheviewport. 2. Createa2Dobjectsuchasarectangle,circle,orpolyline.The2Dobjectmustdefineanarea;forexample,a2D linecannotbeused.Cropobjectsareautomaticallyplacedinthescreenplane(seePlanarModesof2DObjects: ScreenPlaneandLayerPlaneonpage 207).Positionthe2Dobjectonthedesignlayerorexistinguncropped viewporttodelimittheareatobeincludedinthenewviewport.Thefillofaviewportcroppingobjectisalways None;however,thepenstylecanbesetfromtheAttributespalette.

3. Ifthecroppedviewportisbeingcreatedfromadesignlayer,selectthe2Dobject.Ifthecroppedviewportisbeing createdfromasheetlayer,selectboththe2Dobjectandtheuncroppedviewport. 4. SelectView>CreateViewport. 5. Analertdialogboxaskswhethertheobjectshouldbeusedastheviewportscrop.SelectYes(clickAlwaysdo theselectedactiontoalwaysuseaselected2Dobjectasacropobjectwhencreatingviewports). 6. TheCreateViewportdialogboxopens.Enteraviewportnameanddrawingtitle,andselectthesheetlayerto placeiton.Theremainingviewportparametersareinitiallysettobethesameasthedesignlayerproperties(for designlayers)orselectedviewport(forsheetlayers).Changetheparametersasneeded(seeCreatingaSheet LayerViewportfromaDesignLayeronpage 762). 7. ClickOK. Theviewport,croppedbytheselected2Dobject,iscreatedonthespecifiedsheetlayer. 8. Bydefault,thecropobjectisnotvisible.Tochangethevisibilityofthecropobject,selecttheviewportandselect theCropVisiblesettingintheObjectInfopalette.

766

| Chapter 18: Presenting Vectorworks Drawings

Cropped viewport

Properties of Sheet Layer Viewports


Sheet Layer Viewport Parameters
Onceithasbeencreated,editthesheetlayerviewportintheObjectInfopalette,orselectPropertiesfromthe viewportscontextmenutoopenthePropertiesdialogbox. ViewportshaveafillandpenstyleofNone.

Parameter
Rotation

Description
Setstheviewportrotation;iftheviewportwascreatedfromarotatedplanview (VectorworksDesignSeriesrequired),thisparametercanbeusedtoresettheviewport totheworldcoordinatesystem Indicateswhethertheselectedviewporthasbeencropped(seeCroppingSheetLayer Viewportsonpage 774) Iftheviewporthasbeencropped,selecttodisplaythecropobject Clicktoupdatetheviewporttoreflectanychangesthathaveoccurredsincethe viewportwascreatedorlastupdated(seeStatusofaSheetLayerViewporton page 770) Specifiesadescriptivetitleforthesheetlayerviewport.Thisnamedisplaysasthe drawingtitleforanyannotationobjects(drawinglabelsandsheetborders)thatare addedtotheviewport. IfUseAutomaticDrawingCoordinationisselectedindocumentpreferences (VectorworksDesignSeriesrequired),achangetothisfieldfortheviewport automaticallychangesthefieldfortheviewportsdrawinglabel,andviceversa.

Crop CropVisible Update

DrawingTitle

Layers

Specifieswhichdesignlayersarevisibleintheviewportandallowschangestosome ofthelayerpropertiesintheviewport;seeChangingtheLayerPropertiesofSheet LayerViewportsonpage 777

Presenting Drawings with Sheet Layer Viewports | Parameter


DisplayPlanarObjects ProjectScreenObjects Classes

767

Description
Selecttodisplay2Dplanarobjectsassociatedwiththelayerplane,whenthe viewportsviewisotherthanTop/Plan Selecttodisplay2Dobjectsassociatedwiththescreenplane,whentheviewportsview isotherthanTop/Plan Specifieswhichclassesarevisibleintheviewportandallowschangestosomeofthe classpropertiesintheviewport,includingchangestothepropertiesforannotation objects.Classvisibilitiescanbeoverriddenforaselectedviewport;seeChangingthe ClassPropertiesofSheetLayerViewportsonpage 780. Specifiestheviewportscalerelativetothepage;selectascale,orchooseCustomand enteraCustomScalevalue WhenacustomScaleisselected,enterthescalevalue IndicateswhethertheviewportislinkedtoaRenderworkscamera(seeLinkingthe CameraViewtoaSheetLayerViewportonpage 590) Specifiestheorientationofthedesignlayersdisplayedintheviewport;selecta cardinalvieworchooseCustomandthenclickSetViewtospecifytheview Thestandardviewofaselectedviewportcanbechangedwiththenumeric keypadshortcutkeys(seeUsingStandardViewsonpage 575).

Scale CustomScale RWCamera (Renderworksrequired) View

SetView

Whenacustomviewisselected,clickSetViewtoopenthe3DRotationdialogboxfor theentryofcustomviewparameters(seeRotatingPreciselyonpage 583formore information) Specifiestherendermode(s)fortheviewport.Selectabackgroundmodeandspecify therendersettings,ifany.Foracompositeeffect,alsoselectanoptionalforeground modeandspecifyanysettings(Wireframe,Sketch,HiddenLine,orDashedHidden Linearetheonlyrendermodesavailableforforegroundrendering). Certainrendermodesrequireparameterstobeset;clicktheappropriateRender Settingsbuttontospecifythem.Seethefollowing: OpenGLandFinalShadedPolygonsettings:RenderingwithVectorworkson page 681 CustomRenderworkssettings(Renderworksrequired):CustomRenderworks Optionsonpage 694 ArtisticRenderworkssettings(Renderworksrequired):ArtisticRenderworks Optionsonpage 695 HiddenLineRendersettings:LineRenderOptionsonpage 686

Background/Foreground Render

Background/Foreground RenderSettings

RWBackground (Renderworksrequired)

SelectaRenderworksbackgroundfromeitherthedefaultcontentorthecurrentfiles contenttouseasabackgroundfortheviewport;seeDefaultContentinVectorworks FundamentalsandRenderworksonpage 157 IftheRenderworksBackgroundchoicesarenotavailable,thebackground selectioniscontrolledbytheRenderworksstyleineffect.Setthebackgroundin theRenderworksstyleinstead;seeRenderworksStylesonpage 690.

Projection

Selecttheprojectiontypefortheviewport(seeProjectiononpage 577)

768

| Chapter 18: Presenting Vectorworks Drawings


Description
ForPerspectiveprojection,selectthetypeofperspective,orchooseCustomand specifytheperspectivedistance Forcustomperspectives,entertheperspectivedistance ClicktochangetheambientlightparametersdescribedinSettingLightingOptions onpage 661. Bydefault,aviewportsambientlightissetaccordingtotheambientlightsettingsof thefirstvisibledesignlayerintheviewport.Iftherearenovisiblelayers,theambient lightissettoon,withacolorofwhiteandabrightnessof35%(similartothedefault ambientlightingforadesignlayer). IfthelightingoptionsarecontrolledbyaRenderworksstylethatiscurrentlyin effect(Renderworksrequired),theEditRenderworksStyledialogboxopens instead;seeRenderworksStylesonpage 690.

Parameter
PerspectiveType PerspectiveDist LightingOptions

AdvancedProperties

OpenstheAdvancedViewportPropertiesdialogbox;seeAdvancedSheetLayer ViewportPropertiesonpage 768

Advanced Sheet Layer Viewport Properties


Toaccessadditionalviewportparameters,clickAdvancedPropertiesfromtheObjectInfopaletteorPropertiesdialog boxofaselectedviewport. TheAdvancedViewportPropertiesdialogboxopens.Thesesettingsaffecttheviewportdisplayonly;theydonot changetheoriginaldesignlayer(s).

Presenting Drawings with Sheet Layer Viewports | Parameter


LineWeightScale MarkerScale DashedLineScale

769

Description
Enteravaluelargerthan1.0toincreasetheviewportlineweights,oravaluebelow1.0(but largerthan0)todecreasethelineweights Enteravaluelargerthan1.0toincreasetheviewportmarkersize,oravaluebelow1.0(but largerthan0)todecreasethemarkersize Enteravaluelargerthan1.0toincreasethelengthandspacingofviewportdashsegments, oravaluebelow1.0(butlargerthan0)todecreasethelengthandspacingofdashedline segments Enteravaluelargerthan1.0toincreasethespacingbetweenviewporthatchlines,ora valuebelow1.0(butlargerthan0)todecreasethespacingbetweenhatchlines Enteravaluelargerthan1.0toincreasethetextsizeinviewports,oravaluebelow1.0(but largerthan0)todecreasethetextsize;onlyassociatedviewporttextisaffected.Graphic objectsthatarepartofthetextitem,suchasareferencemarkercontainerorcalloutbubble, arescaledwiththetext. Dimensionalobjectsinsidepluginobjects,suchasdimensionswithinabubblegrid object,arenotscaled.Pluginobjects,suchasaNortharrowobject,arenotscaledif theyhavebeenplacedwhileeditingtheviewportinEditAnnotationmode.

HatchLineScale TextScale

PageSymbol Scaling SymbolScale

Thesesettingsaffectpagebasedsymbolsintheviewport(seeSymbolTypesonpage 173) Setsascalefactorforpagebasedsymbols;ascalefactoroflessthanonedecreasesthesize ofthesymbolrelativetoitsdefinitionata1:1scale,whileafactorofmorethanone increasesitssize Thesesettingsaffecttheattributes(suchaslineweight)ofpagebasedsymbolsinthe viewport UsestheSymbolScalefactortoscaletheattributes Usestheother,individualscalefactorsintheAdvancedPropertiesdialogbox,suchasthe LineWeightScale,toscalethepagebasedsymbolattributes DisplaysorhideswallandslabcomponentsinTop/Planview,regardlessofthedocument preferencesdetaildisplaysetting(seeDisplayPreferencesonpage 29) DesignlayerswithavisibilitysettoGrayarerenderedastransparent,similartothe transparenteffectachievedwiththeUnifiedViewcommandintheVectorworksDesign Seriesproducts(seeUnifiedLayerViewonpage 730intheVectorworksDesignSeries UsersGuide) Changesallcolorsintheviewporttoblackorwhite;thisisusefulfordisplayingtwo viewportcopiesonthesamesheetlayer,withoneincolorandtheotherinblackandwhite. However,ifthedocumentpreferencesdisplaysettingisblackandwhite,viewportswill alsodisplayasblackandwhite. Reorientsrotatedandflippedtextintheviewportsothatitisalwaysreadable(regardless oftheVectorworksflippedtextpreference;seeDisplayPreferencesonpage 19) Displaystheviewportwithapreviewoftheadvancedsettings

AttributeScaling UseSymbol Factor UseIndividual Factors ShowWall Components RenderGrayLayers Transparent

Blackandwhiteonly

AdjustFlippedText Preview

770

| Chapter 18: Presenting Vectorworks Drawings

Status of a Sheet Layer Viewport


Thestatusofasheetlayerviewportisindicatedvisually.

Viewport Status
Normal

Description
Anormal,uptodateviewportdisplayswithorangehighlightingwhenselected

Outofdate

Whentheobjectsinaviewporthavechangedsincetheviewportwascreatedorlast updated,theviewportbecomesoutofdate.Anoutofdateviewportdisplayswithared andwhiteoutline.

Empty

AviewportdisplaysasaredXwhentheassociateddesignlayercontainsnoobjectsorthe objectsarehidden,orwhentheassociateddesignlayerissettoinvisible

Modifying Sheet Layer Viewports


Thereareseveralwaystomodifysheetlayerviewports;theirappearancecanbecompletelydifferentfromtheoriginal designlayers,forpresentationpurposes. ModifythesettingsfortheviewportintheObjectInfopalette. Modifytheviewportwithvarious2Dand3Dtoolsandcommands. Croptheviewport. Editthedesignlayer(s)thatdisplayintheviewport. Addannotationsanddimensionstotheviewport. EditordeletealinkedRenderworkscamera(Renderworksrequired). Changethepropertiesoftheviewportslayersandclasses.

Moving and Editing Sheet Layer Viewports


Asheetlayerviewportcanbeeditedlikemost2Dobjects.Forinformationoneditingtoolsandcommands,see EditingObjectsonpage 257.3Dtoolscannotbeusedonsheetlayers.However,a3Dobjectcanbecopiedfroma

Presenting Drawings with Sheet Layer Viewports |

771

designlayerandpastedonasheetlayer.Adesignlayerviewport(VectorworksDesignSeriesrequired)cannotbe pastedonasheetlayer. UsetheCut,Copy,andPastecommandstocopyorpasteaviewportonitsoriginalsheetlayeroranothersheet layer.UsetheSelectiontooltodragaviewporttoanewposition(oredittheXandYaxispositionsintheObject Infopalette).PresstheDeletekeytodeleteaselectedviewport.

UsetheMoveandRotatecommandsandtheRotateandMirrortoolstomove,rotate,ormirroraviewport.The viewportcanbesplitbytheSplittool(inSplitbyLinemode),andclippedwiththeCliptool.

UsetheScaleObjectscommandtoscaleaviewport.Anycropobjectsintheviewportarealsoscaled,asare annotationsanddimensions.Viewporttext,however,isnotscaledunlessScaleTextisselectedintheScale Objectsdialogbox. UsetheModify>LockandModify>Unlockcommandstolockandunlockviewports. UsetheEyedroppertooltotransferattributesfromoneviewporttoanother;seeTransferringAttributeson page 526. Use2Ddrawingtoolsonsheetlayerstocreateborders,titleblocks,andsoon. Aviewportcanbecopiedandpastedintoanimageeditingapplication.Thedpisettingofthesheetlayeraffects theresolutionofthepastedimage.Dependingontheplatformandtheimageeditingapplication,theresolution ofthepastedimagemaystillnotbeoptimal;inthiscase,theFile>ExportImageFilecommandofferscontrol overtheexportedarea,dimensions,resolution,andfiletype.

Editing a Design Layer Displayed in a Sheet Layer Viewport


Toeditadesignlayerthatisdisplayedinasheetlayerviewport: 1. Selecttheviewport. 2. SelectModify>EditViewport.

772

| Chapter 18: Presenting Vectorworks Drawings


Alternatively,rightclick(Windows)orCtrlclick(Macintosh)onaviewport,andselectEditoroneofthe viewporteditcommandsfromthecontextmenu. TheEditViewportdialogboxopens.

Parameter
Annotations Crop DisplayViewport OutsideCrop GrayOutsideCrop DesignLayer Displayusing ViewportAttributes

Description
Createsoreditsviewportannotationsanddimensions(seeCreatingAnnotationsfor SheetLayerViewportsonpage 775) Createsoreditsacroppedviewport(seeCroppingSheetLayerViewportsonpage 774), andoptionallydisplaystheviewportoutsideofthecropareawheninEditCropmode Displaystheviewportoutsideofthecropwithwireframerendering;objectsoutsideof thecropcanbesnappedtowhencreatingoreditingacropshape Displaystheareaoutsideofthecropingray Navigatestotheselecteddesignlayertoeditobjectscontainedintheviewport Changesthefilesviewparametersandlayerandclassvisibilitiestomatchthoseofthe viewport. IftheNavigateBacktoViewportoptionisalsoselected,thefileslayerandclass visibilitiesreturntotheiroriginalstatuswhenyoureturntotheviewport;otherwise,the filesattributesremainthesameastheviewports. ThisoptionisonlyavailablewhentheDesignLayereditmodeisselected.

Presenting Drawings with Sheet Layer Viewports | Parameter


AddReference CropObject

773

Description
Whenaviewporthasbeencropped,thisoptiondisplaysthecroponthedesignlayerso thateditscanbemadetothedesignlayerwhileknowingthepositionofthecropobject. ThisoptionisonlyavailablewhentheDesignLayereditmodeisselected.

NavigateBackto Viewport

TemporarilyaddsaReturntoViewportbuttontothedesignlayerthatreturnsyoutothe viewportwhentheedittothedesignlayeriscomplete(similartoanEditGroup operation). ThisoptionisonlyavailablewhentheDesignLayereditmodeisselected. Toexittothedesignlayerinsteadofexitingtotheviewportfromdesignlayerediting mode,pressShift+Esc.Alternatively,rightclick(Windows)orCtrlclick(Macintosh)in thedrawingarea,andselectExitViewportfromthecontextmenu.

Camera(Renderworks required)

EditsaRenderworkscamerathatislinkedtotheviewportview.Thecameraviewcanbe changedorthecameracanbedeleted.SeeEditingaLinkedRenderworksCameraon page 776. IfnoRenderworkscameraislinkedtotheviewport,selectacameratobelinked. Alternatively,theviewcanbemanipulatedwiththestandardviewtools(suchasthe Flyovertool,zoomlevel,andViewmenucommands),changingtheviewportviewupon exit.

DisplayViewport Cache

IftheviewportiscurrentlyinarendermodeotherthanWireframe,selectDisplay ViewportCachetodisplayacacheimageoftherenderedviewportduringediting; deselecttodisplayaWireframeviewoftheviewport. ThisoptionisonlyavailablewhentheAnnotationsorCropeditmodeisselected.

KeeptheEditViewon Exit

Whenyoureturntotheviewportafteranedit,thissettingmaintainsanyviewchanges (zoomandviewlocation)madeduringeditstotheviewportannotationorthecrop object.Deselectthisoptiontoreturntotheoriginalviewportviewsettingsafterediting. ThisoptionisonlyavailablewhentheAnnotationsorCropeditmodeisselected.

DoubleClick

Setsthefuturebehaviorwhenaviewportisdoubleclicked,eliminatingthedisplayof thisdialogboxifdesired.IftheEditstheDesignLayeroptionisselected,adoubleclick activatesthedesignlayerofthedoubleclickedobject.Iftheobjectdoesnotbelongtoa designlayer,theEditViewportdialogboxopenstoselectadesignlayertoedit. IfDisplaysthisDialogisnotselected,youcanstillopenthedialogbox:select Modify>EditViewport,orrightclick(Windows)orCtrlclick(Macintosh)the viewportandselectEditfromthecontextmenu.

3. ClickDesignLayerandselectthedesignlayertoeditfromthelist.SelectDisplayusingViewportAttributesto viewthedesignlayerwiththeviewportattributes(orientation,projection,rendermode,andlayerandclass visibilities).Arenderedviewportdisplaystheoriginaldesignlayerwiththeviewportsrendermode;however, thedesignlayersrendermodeoptionsforthatmodeareused.Iftheoriginaldesignlayerhasadifferent elevationandDisplayusingViewportAttributesisselected,thelayeroptionsaresettoActiveOnly. Alternatively,rightclick(Windows)orCtrlclick(Macintosh)onaviewportandselectEditDesignLayerfrom thecontextmenutoactivatethedesignlayeroftherightclickedobject(iftherightclickedobjectdoesnotbelong toadesignlayer,theEditViewportdialogboxopens).

774

| Chapter 18: Presenting Vectorworks Drawings


SelectAddReferenceCropObjecttoviewthecropobjectonthedesignlayerduringediting.However,because thecropobjectisaddedtothedesignlayer,itcouldbecomevisibleinotherviewportsthatreferencethatareaof thedesignlayer. SelectNavigateBacktoViewporttoeasilyreturntotheviewportwhenyouarefinishedwiththedesignlayer edits.Acoloredborderaroundthedrawingwindowindicatesthatyouareinaneditingmode.TheReturnto Viewportbuttonisvisibleinthetoprightcornerofthedrawingwindow. Toexittothedesignlayerinsteadofexitingtotheviewportwhileindesignlayereditingmode,pressShift+Esc. Alternatively,rightclick(Windows)orCtrlclick(Macintosh)inthedrawingarea,andselectExitViewportfrom thecontextmenu.

4. ClickOKtomaketheselecteddesignlayertheactivelayer.

Cropping Sheet Layer Viewports


Aviewportcanbecroppedonitssheetlayer,todisplayonlyaportionoftheviewport. Tocropaviewport: 1. Selecttheviewport. 2. SelectModify>EditViewport.TheEditViewportdialogboxopens(seeEditingaDesignLayerDisplayedina SheetLayerViewportonpage 771foradescriptionofthedialogboxparameters). 3. ClickCrop. Choosewhethertodisplaytheviewportoutsideofthecroparea.SelectDisplayViewportOutsideCroptoview therestoftheviewport;selectGrayOutsideCroptoviewtheareaoutsideofthecropingray.Theseoptions makedrawingandeditingeasier,sinceobjectsoutsidethecropcanbesnappedto. ToviewothersheetlayerobjectswhileinEditCropmode,selectShowotherobjectswhileineditingmodeson theDisplaytaboftheVectorworkspreferences(seeDisplayPreferencesonpage 19). 4. ClickOKtoenterEditCropmode. Alternatively,rightclick(Windows)orCtrlclick(Macintosh)onaviewportandselectEditCropfromthe contextmenu. Acoloredborderaroundthedrawingwindowindicatesthatyouareinaneditingmode.TheExitViewport CropcommandbecomesavailablefromtheModifymenu,andtheExitViewportCropbuttonisvisibleinthe toprightcornerofthedrawingwindow. 5. Createa2Dobjectsuchasarectangle,circle,orpolyline.The2Dobjectmustdefineanarea;forexample,a2D linecannotbeused.Positionthe2Dobjecttodelimitthenewviewportdisplayarea.Thefillofaviewport croppingobjectisalwaysNone;however,thepenstylecanbesetfromtheAttributespalettewhileinEditCrop mode.Moveandresizethe2Dobjectasneeded. UsetheFlyovertooltoadjusttheviewasnecessary(seeFlyoveronpage 578). Theboundingboxofthecropobjectisalsotheperspectivecliprectangle,iftheviewportisinPerspective projection.Reshapingthecropobjectchangestheperspectivecliprectangleaswell.

Presenting Drawings with Sheet Layer Viewports |

775

6. ClickExitViewportCroptoreturntothesheetlayer.

7. Thecroppedviewportdisplays;intheObjectInfopalette,theCropstatuschangestoYes. 8. Tochange,replace,ordeletethecropobject,selecttheviewportandthenselectModify>EditViewportto reenterEditCropmode.Alternatively,rightclick(Windows)orCtrlclick(Macintosh)andselectEditfromthe contextmenu. Tochangethevisibilityofthecropobject,changetheCropVisiblesettingintheObjectInfopalette.

Creating Annotations for Sheet Layer Viewports


UsetheEditAnnotationmodetoaddannotationsanddimensionsinviewports,andtoeditthoseannotationsand dimensionslateron. Toaddannotations,includingdimensions,toaviewport: 1. Withtheviewportssheetlayeractive,selecttheviewportbyclickingonitwiththeSelectiontool. 2. SelectModify>EditViewport.TheEditViewportdialogboxopens(seeCroppingSheetLayerViewportson page 774foradescriptionofthedialogboxparameters). 3. ClickAnnotationsandthenclickOKtoenterEditAnnotationmode. Alternatively,rightclick(Windows)orCtrlclick(Macintosh)onaviewportandselectEditAnnotationsfrom thecontextmenu. Acoloredborderaroundthedrawingwindowindicatesthatyouareinaneditingmode.TheExitViewport commandbecomesavailablefromtheModifymenu,andtheExitViewportAnnotationbuttonisvisibleinthe toprightcornerofthedrawingwindow.

776

| Chapter 18: Presenting Vectorworks Drawings

4. UsethevariousdimensiontoolsfromtheDims/Notestoolsettoadddimensionstotheviewport(see Dimensioningonpage 709).Thedimensiontoolssnaptotheobjectsintheviewportasifyouwere dimensioningthedesignlayer.Thedimensionsareautomaticallyupdatedifthedesignlayerobjectchanges. Annotationsare2Dobjectsthatareplacedonthescreenplane.Therefore,a2Dobjectintheviewportmustbe dimensionedinTop/Planview.A3Dobjectcanbedimensionedinanyview,butyoumustalignthefacethatisto bedimensionedwiththescreenplanetogetanaccuratemeasurement. ToviewotherobjectsonthesheetlayerwhileinEditAnnotationmode,selectShowotherobjectswhilein editingmodesontheDisplaytaboftheVectorworkspreferences(seeDisplayPreferencesonpage 19). Text,callouts,andotherannotations,aswellas2Dobjects,canbeaddedtotheviewport.TheVectorworks DesignSeriesproductscontainadditionalannotationobjects. ThestackingorderofselectedannotationscanbechangedwiththeModify>Sendcommands.Toaddgraphical annotationstoaviewportrenderedwithHiddenLine,usethe2DPolygontoolPolygonfromBoundarymodes (see2DPolygonToolonpage 242). Annotationsareinviewportscale,notsheetlayerscale.

5. ClickExitViewportAnnotationtoexitEditAnnotationmodeandreturntothesheetlayer. 6. Tochange,replace,ordeletetheviewportannotations,selecttheviewportandthenselectModify>Edit ViewporttoreenterEditAnnotationmode. Tochangethevisibilityofthecropobject,changetheCropVisiblesettingintheObjectInfopalette.

Editing a Linked Renderworks Camera


AlinkedRenderworkscameracanbeedited,changingtheassociatedsheetlayerviewportsview. ToeditalinkedRenderworkscamera: 1. Selecttheviewport. 2. SelectModify>EditViewport.TheEditViewportdialogboxopens(seeEditingaDesignLayerDisplayedina SheetLayerViewportonpage 771foradescriptionofthedialogboxparameters). 3. ClickCamera.

Presenting Drawings with Sheet Layer Viewports |


4. Analertdialogboxopens.ClickOKtoenterEditRenderworksCameramode.

777

Alternatively,rightclick(Windows)orCtrlclick(Macintosh)onaviewportandselectEditCamerafromthe contextmenu. Acoloredborderaroundthedrawingwindowindicatesthatyouareinaneditingmode.TheExitRenderworks CameracommandbecomesavailablefromtheModifymenu,andtheReturntoViewportbuttonisvisibleinthe toprightcornerofthedrawingwindow. 5. Thedesignlayerthatwasactivewhentheviewportwascreatedisactive,andthelinkedRenderworkscamera objectisselected.EditthecameraviewasdescribedinAdjustingtheCameraViewonpage 588. Thecameracanbedeleted.Theviewandprojectionparametersarecontrolledbytheviewportifthecamerais deleted. IfnoRenderworkscameraislinkedtotheviewport,selectacameratobelinked.Alternatively,theviewcanbe manipulatedwiththestandardviewtools(suchastheFlyovertool,zoomlevel,andViewmenucommands), changingtheviewportviewuponexit. 6. ClickReturntoViewporttoreturntotheviewportoncetheRenderworkscamerahasbeeneditedordeleted. Theviewportsview,projection,andperspectivedistanceareupdated.

Changing the Layer Properties of Sheet Layer Viewports


Theviewportslayervisibility,opacity,stackingorder,andcolorscanbechangedfromthesheetlayer.Other viewports,aswellasthedesignlayerproperties,arenotaffected.Theviewportattributescanbetailoredasdesiredfor presentation;severalcopiesofthesameviewportcanappearcompletelydifferent. Tochangetheviewportlayerproperties: 1. Selecttheviewport. 2. FromtheObjectInfopalette,clickLayers. TheViewportLayerPropertiesdialogboxopens.

778

| Chapter 18: Presenting Vectorworks Drawings

Click here and drag up or down to change the layer stacking order in the viewport

Click the visible, invisible, or gray column to set the layer visibility in the viewport Indicates whether the layer definition has overrides in this viewport

After editing the colors in the layer properties, click here to apply the override to the viewport

Parameter
Layerlist

Description
Liststheviewportlayersandtheirvisibility,editedstatus,layercolorusestatus,and stackingorder.Clickthetriangleintheheadingofanactivecolumntotogglebetween ascendinganddescendingsortorderbasedonthatcolumnparameter. Clickinalayervisibilitycolumntochangethelayervisibilityforthisviewport. Column1:Visible(displaysobjectsinthislayer) Column2:Invisible(hidesobjectsinthislayer) Column3:Gray(displaysobjectsinthislayerasdimmed)

Visibility

(Source)

Column4indicateswhetherthelayerdefinitionisthesameasthesourcelayer,or thelayerdefinitionhasoverridesinthisviewport.Whenalayeriseditedwiththe Editbutton,theoverrideicondisplaysautomatically.ClicktheRevertbuttonto reverttotheoriginalsettings.


The layer definition is from the viewports source layer

Layer overrides exist in this viewport

(LayerColors)

ClicktoapplytheviewportlayercolorssetintheEditViewportDesignLayersdialog box(clickEdittosetthecolors,asdescribedinthenextstep),overridingthedesign layercolors.ThissettingisindependentoftheUselayercolorsdocumentpreference. Displaysthelayerstackingorder;dragalayerwithinthe#columntochangeits stackingorder.ThiscolumndisplaysonlywhentheviewportisinTop/Planview. OpenstheEditViewportDesignLayersdialogbox,tooverridethepropertiesofthe selectedlayer

#(StackingOrder) Edit

Presenting Drawings with Sheet Layer Viewports | Parameter


Revert StackingOverride

779

Description
ReturnsthesettingsintheEditViewportDesignLayersdialogboxtotheirdefault valuesandremovestheoverrideiconintheSourcecolumn Indicateswhetherthelayerstackingorderintheviewportisdifferentfromthedesign layerstackingorder.ClickRevertStackingOrdertoreturntotheoriginaldesign layerstackingorder. Layeroverrides:Ifthesheetlayerviewportcontainsanonreferenceddesignlayer viewportforwhichlayeroverrideshavebeenset,thisoptionusesthedesignlayer viewportoverrides,ignoringanylayeroverridesthatmaybesethereforthesheet layerviewport. Layervisibilities:Ifthesheetlayerviewportcontainsanonreferenceddesign layerviewportforwhichlayervisibilitieshavebeenset,thisoptionusesthedesign layerviewportvisibilities,ignoringanylayervisibilitiesthatmaybesethereforthe sheetlayerviewport. Referenceddesignlayerviewportsarenotaffectedbyeitherofthesesettings.

Useembeddeddesign layerviewportsettingsfor (VectorworksDesign Seriesrequired)

Preview

Clicktopreviewthelayerpropertysettingsintheselectedviewport

3. Tooverridethelayerproperties(forviewportdisplay),selectoneormoreviewportlayersandclickEdit. Alternatively,doubleclickonaviewportlayertoeditit. TheEditViewportDesignLayersdialogboxopens.

Displays when the Vectorworks preference for Quartz imaging (Macintosh) or GDI+ imaging (Windows) is enabled

4. Thesameparametersapplywhenyoucreateadesignlayer(seeSettingDesignLayerPropertiesonpage 97); forviewportlayers,onlythestackingorder,transfermodeoropacity,andcolorscanbeedited.Theseeditsapply tothecurrentviewportonly,thoughtheycanbetransferredtootherviewportswiththeEyedroppertool.

780

| Chapter 18: Presenting Vectorworks Drawings


Theviewportlayercolorscanbecontrolledseparatelyfromthedesignlayercolors,forflexiblepresentation output.ClickColorstooverridethefillandpencolorsfortheselectedviewportlayer.Toseetheeffectsofthe coloroverride,UseLayerColorsmustbeselectedintheViewportLayerPropertiesdialogboxfortheselected viewport.ThisissimilartothewaythatUseLayerColorsmustbeselectedinDocumentPropertiestoseethe layercolorsettingsforadesignlayer,asdescribedinSettingtheDesignLayerColoronpage 102.

5. ClickOKtoreturntotheViewportLayerPropertiesdialogbox. ClickPreviewtoevaluatetheresultsofthepropertychanges. 6. ClickOKtoreturntothesheetlayer.

Changing the Class Properties of Sheet Layer Viewports


Theclassvisibilitiesandattributesofaselectedviewportcanbechangedfromthesheetlayer.Thisdoesnotchange theclasspropertiesortheclassvisibilityfortheoriginaldesignlayersorforotherviewports.Theviewportattributes canbetailoredasdesiredforpresentation;severalcopiesofthesameviewportcanappearcompletelydifferent.

Tooverrideviewportclassproperties: 1. Selecttheviewport. 2. FromtheObjectInfopalette,clickClasses. TheViewportClassPropertiesdialogboxopens.Changeclassvisibilitiesand/ormakeclassattributeoverrides fortheselectedviewport.

Presenting Drawings with Sheet Layer Viewports |

781

Click the visible, invisible, or gray column to set the class visibility in the viewport

Indicates whether the class definition is specific to this viewport

Parameter
Classlist

Description
Liststheviewportclassesandtheirvisibilityandeditedstatus;clickinaclass visibilitycolumntochangetheclassvisibilityforthisviewport.Clickthetrianglein anactivecolumntotogglebetweenascendinganddescendingsortorderbasedon thatcolumnparameter. Clickinaclassvisibilitycolumntochangetheclassvisibilityforthisviewport. Column1:Visible(displaysobjectsinthisclass) Column2:Invisible(hidesobjectsinthisclass) Column3:Gray(displaysobjectsinthisclassasdimmed)

Visibility

(Source)

Column4indicateswhethertheclassdefinitionisthesameasthesourceclass,orthe classdefinitionhasoverridesspecifictothisviewport.Whenaclassiseditedwiththe Editbutton,theviewportspecificicondisplaysautomatically.ClicktheRevertbutton toreverttotheoriginalsettings.

The class definition is from the source class

The class definition is specific to this viewport

Edit

OpenstheEditClass(es)dialogbox,tomakeoverridestotheselectedclassthatonly applytothecurrentviewport(seeSettingClassPropertiesonpage 108)

782

| Chapter 18: Presenting Vectorworks Drawings


Description
OpenstheImportAttributesdialogbox,toimporttheclassattributesettingsfromthe file.TheattributescanbeimportedfortheclassesselectedintheViewportClass Propertiesdialogbox,fromcorrespondingclasses,orfromaspecifiedclassinthefile.

Parameter
Import

ClickOKtoimporttheclassattributesintotheselectedviewport.(TheEyedropper toolcanalsotransferclassoverrideattributesbetweenviewports.) Revert Useembeddeddesign layerviewportsettingsfor (VectorworksDesign Seriesrequired) Setstheselectedclassbacktoitsoriginaldocumentattributes,undoinganyclass overrides;alsoremovestheoverrideiconintheSourcecolumn Classoverrides:Ifthesheetlayerviewportcontainsanonreferenceddesignlayer viewportforwhichclassoverrideshavebeenset,thisoptionusesthedesignlayer viewportoverrides,ignoringanyclassoverridesthatmaybesethereforthesheet layerviewport. Classvisibilities:Ifthesheetlayerviewportcontainsanonreferenceddesignlayer viewportforwhichclassvisibilitieshavebeenset,thisoptionusesthedesignlayer viewportvisibilities,ignoringanyclassvisibilitiesthatmaybesethereforthesheet layerviewport Referenceddesignlayerviewportsarenotaffectedbyeitherofthesesettings. Preview Clicktopreviewtheclassvisibilityandattributesettingsintheselectedviewport

3. ClickOKtoapplytheclassvisibilityandattributechangestotheselectedviewport.

Updating Sheet Layer Viewports


Changesthataffecttheappearanceofaviewportareautomaticallyupdatedforawireframeviewport.However,if changesoccurthatrequiretheviewporttoberenderedagain,theviewportwillbedisplayedasanoutofdate viewportwitharedandwhitestripedborder(seeStatusofaSheetLayerViewportonpage 770). Ifasheetlayerwithanoutofdateviewportisprinted,amessagepromptsyoutoeitherprinttheviewportasan outofdateviewportorupdatetheviewport(s)onthesheetlayerbeforeprinting.

Cutting Sections |

783

Updating Selected Viewports


Toupdateselectedviewports: 1. Selecttheviewport(s). 2. OntheObjectInfopalette,clickUpdate.Alternatively,selectView>UpdateSelectedViewports. 3. Theselectedviewportsareupdated.

Updating All Viewports


Toupdatealltheviewportsinthefile: 1. SelectView>UpdateAllViewports. 2. Allviewportsonallsheetlayersareupdated. Anupdatetomultiplerenderedviewportsmayrequireasignificantamountoftime.

Cutting Sections
Thecuttingsectiontoolsdefineasectionlinethrougha3Dmodel,placingthecutsectiononanewlayerandleaving theoriginalmodelintact. TheCut2DSectioncommandcreatesacrosssection,or2Dcontour,onthecuttingplane.Thecontouriscreatedby theintersectionofthemodelwithaninfiniteplanepassingthoughthesectionline.Onlytheelementsthatactually intersectthesectionlineareshown. TheCut3DSectioncommandcreatesasectionwithallthe3Dgeometrythatremainsontheindicatedsideofthe infiniteplanepassingthroughthesectionline.Theelementsthatintersectthesectionline,aswellasthe3Dgeometry thatexistsbeyondtheline,areshown. Placea2Dsection,alongwithaboldline,ontopofa3Dsection,toshowthecuttingplanewiththesection behindit.

Cutting 3D Sections
TheCut3DSectioncommandcutsa3Dsection,orslice,througha3Dmodelwhileleavingthemodelintact.Theslice isplacedonanewdesignlayer. Tocuta3Dsectionfroma3Dmodel: 1. Selectthe3Dmodeltosection. 2. SelectModel>Cut3DSection. Thecursorchangestocrosshairs. 3. Clicktosetthestartofthesection.Drawalineacrosstheobjecttodefinethesection,andthenclicktosettheend ofthesection. WhencuttingasectionwhilethedrawingisinaPlanprojection,thecuttingplane(andthecutedgeoftheobject) isperpendiculartotheactivelayerplane. Whencuttingasectionwhileina3Dprojection,thecuttingplaneisperpendiculartotheworkingplane. 4. Clickononesideofthelinetoindicatetheportionofthemodeltokeep. TheVectorworksprogramautomaticallycreatesanewdesignlayerandplacesthecut3Dsectiononit.The originallayerremainsintact.Thenew3DsectionbehaveslikeanyotherVectorworks3Dobject.

784

| Chapter 18: Presenting Vectorworks Drawings

Select the object(s) and select Model > Cut 3D Section; set the section line and click on either side of it to specify the section to keep

The 3D section (rotated and rendered) is created on a new design layer; the original object(s) are left intact

Dimensionsandtextare2Dobjects;therefore,theydonotrotatewiththecut3Dsection.

Cutting 2D Sections
TheCut2DSectioncommandcutsa2Dsection,oraslice,froma3Dmodelwithoutaffectingthemodel.Thesliceis thenplacedonanewdesignlayer.Forexample,toshowtheprofileora2Dcutawaysectionofanobjectina mechanical3Ddrawing,usethiscommandtocreatethecutawaysectionin2Dquicklyandeasily,withoutaffecting theoriginalobject. Tocuta2Dsectionfroma3Dmodel: 1. Selectthe3Dmodeltosection. 2. SelectModel>Cut2DSection. Thecursorchangestocrosshairs. 3. Clicktosetthestartofthesection.Drawalineacrosstheobjecttodefinethesection,andthenclicktosettheend ofthesection. WhencuttingasectionwhilethedrawingisinaPlanprojection,thecuttingplane(andthecutedgeoftheobject) isperpendiculartotheactivelayerplane. Whencuttingasectionwhileina3Dprojection,thecuttingplaneisperpendiculartotheworkingplane. 4. Clickononesideofthelinetoindicatetheportionofthemodeltokeep. TheVectorworksprogramautomaticallycreatesanewdesignlayerandplacesthecut2Dsectiononit.The originallayerremainsintact.

Layer Linking
Creating Layer Links
Layersareindependentofeachother.Eachdesignlayerhasitsownscale,view,andrenderstatus.IntheVectorworks Fundamentalsproduct,however,alayerlinkcanbecreatedthatcombinesthegeometryofseveraldesignlayers, includingreferencedlayers,ontoasingledesignlayer.Thelinkedobjectsonthisdesignlayerdisplayinthesameview andscale,andsharethesamerenderstatus.Thiscanthenbeusedtogiveanaccuratedepictionofhowobjectsineach

Layer Linking |

785

layerworktogether.Forexample,thevariousfloorsofabuildingcanbedrawnonseparatelayersandthenlinked togetherintoanewlayertoformanentirebuilding. IntheVectorworksFundamentalsproduct,considerusingviewportsinsteadoflayerlinks,astheyprovidea betterandeasierwaytopresentdrawings. IntheVectorworksDesignSeriesproducts,layerlinksarebeingsupersededbydesignlayerviewports.For backwardcompatibility,theCreateLayerLinkcommandcanstillbeaddedtoanyoftheVectorworksDesign Seriesworkspaces,andexistinglayerlinkscanstillbeviewedandedited.Forinformationondesignlayer viewports,seePresentingDrawingswithDesignLayerViewportsonpage 689intheVectorworksDesign SeriesUsersGuide. Thelayerlinkiscreatedonanewdesignlayerthatcontainslinkstotheexistingdesignlayersofthedrawing.3D objectsonselectedlayersareautomaticallylinked;2Dplanarorscreenobjectscanbedisplayedinthelayerlink.Once thelayerlinkiscreated,updatestothedesignlayersareautomaticallyreflectedonthelinkedlayerwhenascreen redrawoccurs.However,thisupdatingoccursonlyinonedirection;anynewobjectsordetailsaddedtothelinked layerwillnotappearinanyotherlayers.Linkedobjectscannotbeeditedonthelinkedlayer;theymustbeeditedon theirsourcelayer. Tocreatealayerlink: 1. Createanewlayer,andthenmakeittheactivelayer. Thislayershowsobjectsonalllinkedlayersandanychangesmadetothem. 2. SelectView>CreateLayerLink. TheCreateLayerLinkdialogboxopens;thelayerbeinglinkedto(thecurrentlyactivelayer)isnotlisted.

Parameter
Layerslist DisplayPlanarObjects

Description
Liststheexistingdesignlayers;sheetlayersandtheactivedesignlayerarenot displayed.Referencedlayersdisplayinitalics. Selecttodisplay2Dplanarobjectsassociatedwiththelayerplane,whenthelayerlink isinaviewotherthanTop/Plan

786

| Chapter 18: Presenting Vectorworks Drawings


Description
Selecttodisplay2Dobjectsassociatedwiththescreenplane,whenthelayerlinkisin aviewotherthanTop/Plan

Parameter
ProjectScreenObjects

3. Selectthedesignlayerstobelinkedfromthelistofexistinglayers. 4. ClickOK. Linkedlayersarelockedobjects.Tounlockalinkedlayer,selectModify>Unlock.Doubleclickonaniteminthelayer linktoreturntoitssourcelayerandeditit. Toproject2Dplanarorscreenobjectsafteralayerlinkhasbeencreated,selectandthenunlockthelayerlink object.SelecttheoptionsintheObjectInfopalette.

Cropping Layer Links


Layerlinkobjectscanbecroppedinasimilarmannertoviewports(seeCroppingSheetLayerViewportson page 774),althoughtheareaoutsideofthecropcannotbedisplayedasitcanforasheetlayerordesignviewport. Whencropped,onlyaportionofthelayerlinkdisplays;increasethescaleofthelayertocreateadetailedview.Layer linkswithworkgroupreferencedlayerscanalsobecropped. Tocropalayerlink: 1. Selectanexistinglayerlink. 2. UnlockthelayerlinkbyselectingModify>Unlock. 3. ClickEditCropfromtheObjectInfopalettetoentertheLayerLinkCropmode. Alternatively,rightclick(Windows)orCtrlclick(Macintosh)onalayerlinkandselectEditCropfromthe contextmenu. Acoloredborderaroundthedrawingwindowindicatesthatyouareinaneditingmode.TheExitLayerLink commandbecomesavailablefromtheModifymenu,andtheExitLayerLinkCropbuttondisplaysinthetop rightcornerofthedrawingwindow. 4. Createa2Dobjectsuchasarectangle,circle,orpolyline.The2Dobjectmustdefineanarea;a2Dline,for example,cannotbeused.Positionthe2Dobjecttodelimitthenewcropdisplayarea.Thefillofacroppingobject isalwaysNone;however,thepenstylecanbesetfromtheAttributespalettewhileinEditCropmode.Setthe penstyletoNone(orthecropobjectclasstoinvisible)tomakethecropobjectinvisible.Moveandresizethe2D objectasneeded. ToviewotherobjectswhileinEditCropmode,selectShowotherobjectswhileineditingmodesontheDisplay taboftheVectorworkspreferences(seeDisplayPreferencesonpage 19). UsetheFlyovertooltoadjusttheviewasnecessary(seeFlyoveronpage 578).

Layer Linking |

787

5. ClickExitLayerLinkCrop,orselectModify>ExitLayerLinktoreturntothedrawing. Thecroppedlayerlinkisdisplayed.IntheObjectInfopalette,thecropstatushaschangedtoYes. Byincreasingthescaleofthelayerwiththelayerlink,andmakingotherlayersvisible,afloorplancanbe displayed(originaldesignlayer)alongwithadetailedviewofthefloorplan(zoomedin,croppedlayerlink).

6. Tochange,replace,ordeletethelayerlinkcrop,selectthecroppedlayerlinkandthenselectEditCropfromthe ObjectInfopalettetoreentercropmode.ClickExitLayerLinkCrop,orselectModify>ExitLayerLinkto returntothedrawing. Theentirelayerlinkisdisplayedifaviewportofacroppedlayerlinkiscreated.

Converting Layer Links


IntheVectorworksDesignSeriesproducts,layerlinksarebeingsupersededbydesignlayerviewports.Becauseusers oftheVectorworksFundamentalsproductcannotcreatedesignlayerviewports,andusersoftheVectorworksDesign Seriesproductscannotcreatelayerlinks,itoccasionallymaybenecessarytoconvertalayerlinkintoaviewport,orto convertadesignlayerviewportintoalayerlink. Toconvertalayerlinkintoadesignlayerviewport,firstunlockthelayerlink.Then,rightclick(Windows)or Ctrlclick(Macintosh)onthelayerlink,andselectConverttoViewportfromthecontextmenu.

788

| Chapter 18: Presenting Vectorworks Drawings

Toconvertadesignlayerviewportintoalayerlink,selecttheviewportandthenselectModify>Decompose. TheObjectInfopalettechangestoindicatethattheobjectisnowagroup.SelectModify>Ungrouptocreatea layerlink.

Aligning Layer Views


TheAlignLayerViewscommandprovidesaonestepmethodtochangealldesignlayersinthedrawingfilesothat theyhaveidenticalStandardViewandProjectionmodes.Theprogrammatchesalldesignlayers,regardlessof visibility,totheactivelayersStandardViewandProjectionmodes. Toaligndesignlayerviews: 1. SelectView,andthensettheStandardViewsandProjectionmodesfortheactivelayer. 2. SelectView>AlignLayerViews. TheprogramchangestheStandardViewsandProjectionmodesforallofthedesignlayersinthedrawingfile.

Active layer

Importing and Exporting Files

19

TheVectorworksprogramhastheabilitytoimportandexporttoavarietyoffileformats.Yourworkmayrequireyou toimportdrawingsfromcolleaguesthatusepreviousversionsofVectorworksorotherprograms.Youmayalsohave toexportyourdrawingsforthosecolleagues.Theimportandexportfunctionalityprovidesthemeanstoincorporate Vectorworksfileswithotherprogramsfiles,includingotherCADprograms,worksheet,andwordprocessing programs.

Importing Files
TheImportcommandimportsfilesfromanumberofdifferentfileformats.Thiscommandopensdrawingsproduced inothersoftwareprogramsintheVectorworksprogram,wherethedrawingobjectsanddatacanthenbe manipulated.Theoriginalfileremainsunchanged. AdditionalimportoptionsareavailableintheVectorworksDesignSeriesproducts.SeeImportingandExporting Filesonpage 733intheVectorworksDesignSeriesUsersGuide. Toimportafile: 1. SelectFile>Import. 2. Selecttheimportoptiontouse. 3. SelectafilefromtheOpendialogbox. 4. ClickOpen. SpecialconsiderationsapplyforDXF/DWGfiles.SeeDXF/DWGFileImportonpage 818.

Import Format
SingleDXF/DWGFile

Description
ImportsasingleDXF/DWGfile. DWGandDXFfilesareproducedbyotherCADprograms(suchasAutoCAD).To avoidunexpectedformattingproblemswithDXF/DWG,importintoablankdocument. TheVectorworksprogramcanimportDWG/DXFfilesfromversion2012formator lower. SeeDXF/DWGFileImportonpage 818formoreinformation.

DXF/DWG

Multiple,single,oranentirefolderofDXF/DWGfilescanbeimported.Theimported filescancreatenewVectorworksfiles,createnewsymbols,orbeimportedintothe currentfile.Whenafileisimportedasasymbol,theactivelayersscaleisused,and paperspaceobjectsareignored.Thesymbolsnameisautomaticallyassignedbasedon theoriginalfilename,withoutthe .dxfor .dwgextension. EncapsulatedPostScriptFiles(EPSF)areproducedbymanygraphicsand desktoppublishingprograms.EPSFsaretypicallyhighresolutionfiles,butwillonly displayapreviewimageifonewasselectedwhenthefilewascreated. Imagefiles,includingGIF,JPG,TIF,BMP,andothers,canbeimported.SeeImporting anImageFileonpage 790formoreinformation.

EPSF

ImageFile

790

| Chapter 19: Importing and Exporting Files


Description
PICTfileswerefirstproducedbyMacDrawandotherobjectorienteddrawing programs.PICTisalsothenativeformatoftheMacintoshclipboard.PICTfiles importedintoaVectorworksfilecanbemorethanasingleobject,allowingimage editing.ImagesimportedwiththiscommandautomaticallyhavePNGcompression applied. PICTasPicturefilesareimportedasasinglegraphicobject.Thefollowingoperations cannotbeperformedonthistypeofimport:Trimtool,Cliptool,andSheartool.Picture imagesretainpicturecommentswhenimportedintoaVectorworksfile. GraphicsfilesintheMetafileformatcanbeimportedfromvirtuallyanyprogram, includingAutoCADandwordprocessingprograms.Therearetwoversionsof Metafiles:standard(preWindows95)andenhanced.TheVectorworksprogram supportstheenhancedversion.Imagesimportedwiththiscommandautomatically havePNGcompressionapplied. MetafileasPicturefilesareimportedasasinglegraphicobject;thetrim,clip,andshear operationscannotbeusedonthistypeofimport TheVectorworksprogramcanimportavarietyofworksheetformats,includingtext, commadelimited,CSV,DIF,andSLK.Aworksheetmustbeopentoreceivetheimport. (ToimportaVectorworksworksheetintothecurrentdrawing,usetheResource Browser.) ImportsaseriesofVectorScriptcommandsintoaVectorworksfile Imports3DParasolidX_Tobjects,includingNURBScurves,NURBSsurfaces,and solids;solidsareimportedasgenericsolids DuringIGESimport,pointsareimportedasagroupof3Dloci,NURBScurvesare importedasagroupofNURBScurves,NURBSsurfacesareimportedasagroupof NURBSsurfaces,closedsolidsareimportedasagroupofimportedsolids,andopen solidsareimportedasagroupofNURBSsurfaces.Ifthereisonlyoneelementinthe IGESfile,itisimportedasasingleelementratherthangrouped.Importedsolidscannot beungroupedoreditedthroughtheEditGroupcommand;theycanbeusedinsolid operations. ImportsACIS/SAT3DsolidsasNURBSbasedVectorworkssolids

Import Format
PICT

PICTasPicture

Metafile

MetafileasPicture Worksheet

VectorScript ParasolidX_T(3Donly) IGES(3Donly)

SAT(3Donly)

Importing an Image File


ImagesarecompressedwhentheyareimportedintoaVectorworksfile,toreducethefilesize. Toimportanimagefile: 1. SelectFile>Import>ImportImageFile,andthenselecttheimagefiletoimport. 2. TheImageImportOptionsdialogboxopens.Specifytheoptionsfortheimportedimage. Informationabouttheimagefileisdisplayedatthetop.Thecompressionmethodthatproducesthesmallestfile sizeisselectedbydefault.Selectthemethodthatwillgivethebestbalancebetweencompressionanddetail display.Thefilesizeforeachtypeofcompressionisdisplayedtohelpwiththeselection. Iftheselectedoptionresultsinafilesizelargerthantheuncompressedsize,theimageisimported uncompressed.

Exporting Files |

791

IfVectorworksDesignSeriesproductsareinstalled,anoptiontoreferencetheimportedimagedisplaysonthe dialogbox.SeeReferencingImportedImagesonpage 775intheVectorworksDesignSeriesUsersGuidefor details.

Compression Method
JPEG

Description
Providesahighamountofcompression,resultinginthesmallestVectorworksfilesize. However,finedetailmaybeobscured.JPEGcompressionismostsuitableforphotographic images. Providesamoderateamountofcompression,whilepreservingimagedetails;selectImport asBlackandWhitetoimportasa1bitmonochromeimageinPNGformat

PNG

3. ClickOKtoimporttheimage.TheObjectInfopalettedisplaystheimageinformation. TheTrim,Clip,andSheartoolscannotbeusedonanimportedimage. ImagesimportedintothefilethatarenotalreadyinJPEGformatcanbecompressedbyJPEGwiththeCompress Imagescommand.SeeCompressingImagesonpage 295. IfVectorworksLandmarkisinstalled,andtheimagewasgeoreferenced,amessagedisplaysthattheimagehas beentranslatedaccordingtotheassociatedworldfile.SeeWorldFileSupportonpage 764intheVectorworks DesignSeriesUsersGuideformoreinformation.

Exporting Files
TheExportcommandexportsVectorworksfilesintoseveraldifferentfileformats,includingpreviousversionsofthe Vectorworksprogram.Theexportedfilescanthenbeimportedintoanothersoftwareprogram.TheVectorworks programexportstoanewfile,leavingtheoriginalfileintact. AdditionalexportoptionsareavailableintheVectorworksDesignSeriesproducts.SeeImportingandExporting Filesonpage 733intheVectorworksDesignSeriesUsersGuide. Toexportafile: 1. SelectFile>Export.

792

| Chapter 19: Importing and Exporting Files

2. Selecttheexportfileformat. Specifytheexportoptions,alongwiththefilenameanddestination. 3. ClickSave. SpecialconsiderationsapplyforexportstoDXF/DWGformat.SeeDXF/DWGFileExportonpage 806.

Export Format
DXF/DWG

Description
DWGandDXFfilescanbereadbyotherCADprograms(suchasAutoCAD).In addition,theycanbeprintedbyservicebureausandopenedinrenderingprograms. TheVectorworkstranslatorexportsDWG/DXFfilesforAutoCADversions2011/2012, 2010,2007/2008/2009,2004/2005/2006,2000/2000i/2002,14/LT98/LT97,13/LT95,and12. Usethelatestversionpossibleforbestresults.SeeDXF/DWGFileExporton page 806formoreinformation. Savesallrecordsofaparticularformatasafilethatcanbeusedinadatabaseprogram, suchasFileMakerProandMicrosoftAccess.TheVectorworksprogramprovidesa varietyofformatstoselectfromwhenexportingrecordsasadatabase,including commadelimited,tabdelimited,merge,DIF,andSYLK. EPSF(EncapsulatedPostScriptFormat)filescanbereadbymanygraphicsand desktoppublishingprograms.TheVectorworkstranslatorexportsEPSFfilesin Illustrator88format.EPSFscontainalldrawingelementsexceptcolorbitmaps.The Vectorworksprogramexportsthesefileswithhighresolutionandfullaccuracy.See ExportinganEPSF(EncapsulatedPostScriptFormat)Fileonpage 793. ExportsthefileasanimagefileinformatslikeJPG,Photoshop,BMP,andothers.The imagecanthenbeimportedintootherapplicationsorusedinwebpages.See ExportinganImageFileonpage 794. ThiscommandisavailableontheMacintoshwhenQuartzImagingisenabled(see DisplayPreferencesonpage 29).ItexportsthecurrentfiletoaPDFdocumentinthe specifiedlocation. ThereareadditionalPDFoptionsavailableforusersoftheVectorworksDesignSeries productsonbothMacintoshandWindows.SeePDFInteroperabilityonpage 734in theVectorworksDesignSeriesUsersGuide.

Database

EPSF

ImageFile

ExportPDF(Quartz Only)

ExportPICT

ThiscommandisavailableontheMacintoshwhenQuartzImagingisdisabled(see DisplayPreferencesonpage 29).Itexportsavectorimageofthecurrentfileinthe specifiedlocation. ExportsgraphicsfilesinMetafileformatforinclusioninvirtuallyanyWindows program,includingAutoCADandwordprocessingprograms.Therearetwoversions ofMetafiles:standard(preWindows95)andenhanced.TheVectorworksprogram supportstheenhancedversion. CreatesaQuickTimeVirtualRealityobjectfile;seeQuickTimeVRObjectExporton page 801formoreinformation CreatesaQuickTimeVirtualRealitypanoramafile;seeQuickTimeVRPanorama Exportonpage 803formoreinformation WritesoutthecurrentfileasaseriesofVectorScriptcommands.Thesecommandscan thenbeusedaspartofaVectorScriptscriptorasaguideforlearning.

Metafile

QuickTimeVRObject (Renderworksrequired) QuickTimeVRPanorama (Renderworksrequired) VectorScript

Exporting Files | Export Format


Worksheet

793

Description
Worksheetfilescanbereadbyspreadsheetprograms,suchasMicrosoftExcel,aswell asbysomewordprocessingprograms.Exportallrowsoronlyselectedrowsofa worksheet.Becausemanyoftheseprogramshavedifferentformatrequirements,there areavarietyofformatstoselectfromwhenexportingfilesasaworksheet,including commadelimited,tabdelimited,merge,DIF,andSYLK.SeeExportingWorksheets onpage 869. Exports3Dobjectsintheunifiedview(VectorworksDesignSeriesrequired)oractive layertothe .c4dformat,foruseinCINEMA4D.Vectorworkslayersareexportedas containerobjectsintheCINEMA4Dscenehierarchy.Vectorworksclassesbecome CINEMA4Dlayers,allowingvisibilitytobecontrolledacrossthescene.Layernames, objectnames,andobjecttypesarepreserved. Anadditionalcommand,SendtoCINEMA4D(3Donly)isavailablefromtheFile menu.WhenCINEMA4D(version12orlater)isalreadyinstalled,exportsthefile(3D objectsonly)to .c4dformat,launchestheCINEMA4Dapplication,andopensthefile. Duringexport,theSendtoCINEMA4Ddialogboxopens.Selectwhethertocreatea newsceneormergeintothecurrentscene.

CINEMA4D(3Donly) (Renderworksrequired)

ParasolidX_T(3Donly) IGES(3Donly) SAT(3Donly)

Exports3DobjectstotheParasolidX_Tformat(seeExportinginParasolidX_T Formatonpage 797) Exports3Dcurves,surfaces,andsolidstoIGESformat(seeExportinginIGES Formatonpage 797) CreatesanSATfileforexportingACIS3Dsolids.TheExportSolidsasTrimmed SurfacesoptionexportsasolidasseveraldifferentACISbodies(forexample,acube exportsassixACISbodies).Ifthisoptionisdeselected,asolidisexportedasasingle body. CreatesanexportedVectorScriptdesignedtobeeasytoimportintoprogramslike StrataSoftwareproducts Exportsallvisible3DsurfacesandsolidsinthecurrentlayerintoanSTLformattedfile (seeExportinginStereoLithographyFormatonpage 798) Savesacopyofthefileinaformatthatcanbeopenedandmanipulatedinanolder versionoftheVectorworksprogram

ExportSimple VectorScript(3Donly) ExportStereo Lithography(3Donly) Vectorworks12,2008, 2009,2010,2011

Exporting an EPSF (Encapsulated PostScript Format) File


TheExportEPSFcommandexportsadrawingtoan .EPSfileformat. ToexportanEPSFfile: 1. SelectFile>Export>ExportEPSF. 2. TheExportasEPSFFiledialogboxopens.Typeafilename,selectalocationtosavethefile,andthenclickSave. 3. TheEPSPreviewOptionsdialogboxopens.SpecifythepreviewoptionsandbyteorderfortheTIFpreview whensavingthefile,andthenclickOK.

794

| Chapter 19: Importing and Exporting Files

Parameter
PreviewOptions NoPreview MonochromePreview 8BitColorPreview PreviewFormat (Macintoshonly) PICTResource TIFF ByteOrder Macintosh PC

Description
Thefiledoesnotdisplayapreviewwhenopenedorimportedbyanapplicationthat supportsthe .epsfileformat Previewsthefileinmonochrome Previewsthefilein8bitcolor Whenapreviewisselected,specifiestheformatfortheMacintoshresourcefork AppendsaPICTformatpreview AppendsaTIFFformatpreview

SavesthefileintheMacintoshbyteorder SavesthefileinthePCbyteorder

4. Ifanyoftheobjectsinthedrawingareoutsideoftheprintarea,adialogboxopenstoaskiftheprintareashould beusedastheboundsoftheEPSFexport.IftheprintareaisusedastheboundsoftheEPSFexport,anyobjects outsideoftheprintareaarenotincludedintheexport.

Exporting an Image File


TheExportImageFilecommandexportsarendereddrawingtoavarietyoffileformats:BMP,JPG,PCT,PNG,PNT, PSD,QTI,SGI,TGA,orTIF.Differentportionsoftheimagecanbeselectedforexport. Toexportanimagefile: 1. SelectFile>Export>ExportImageFile. TheExportImageFiledialogboxopens.Selecttheexportoptions,andthenclickRenderorWireframeto displaytheexportedimagepreview.

Exporting Files |

795

Parameter
ExportArea AllVisibleObjects CurrentView AllPagesasSingle Image EachPageas SeparateImage Marquee

Description
Exportsanimagethatincludesallvisibleobjects(objectsdonothavetobecurrentlyon screentobeconsideredvisible) Exportsanimagethatisexactlyasitdisplaysonthecurrentscreen Savesallpagesintheprintareaasoneimage.Bydefault,theimagedimensionsareset tomatchtheprintareaspecificationsinthePageSetupdialogbox.Theimage dimensionscanbechanged,butmustremainproportionaltotheprintareaaspectratio. Saveseachpageintheprintareaasseparateimages.Bydefault,theimagedimensions aresettomatchthepagesizespecificationsinthePageSetupdialogbox.Theimage dimensionscanbechanged,butmustremainproportionaltothepagesizeaspectratio. Exportsanimagewithinausercreatedmarquee.SelectthisoptionandthenclickDraw Marqueetotemporarilyclosethedialogbox.Clickanddragtospecifytheareafor export;themarqueedimensionsaredisplayedontheDatabar.Clicktosettheexport areaandreturntotheExportImageFiledialogbox.ThePixelDimensionsoftheimage areautomaticallysettothemarqueedimensions.

Dimensions LockAspectRatio Resolution Selecttomaintaintheimageaspectratiowhenspecifyingdimensions Specifiestheprintedimageresolutioninpixelsoverinches

796

| Chapter 19: Importing and Exporting Files


Description
Specifiestheexportedimagedimensions;ifLockAspectRatioisselected,changesto onedimensionwillupdatetheothertomaintaintheaspectratio

Parameter
PixelDimensions Width/Height PrintSize Width/Height Units Preview Render Wireframe MemoryRequired/ EstimatedFileSize Update Format FileType Compression

SpecifiestheprintedimagedimensionsintheselectedUnit;ifLockAspectRatiois selected,changestoonedimensionwillupdatetheothertomaintaintheaspectratio SelectaunittoapplytothePrintSizeparameters Displaysarenderedorwireframepreviewaccordingtothecurrentsettings Updatesthepreviewwitharenderedviewusingthecurrentlysetrenderingoption Updatesthepreviewwithawireframeview Estimatestheamountofmemoryrequiredfortheexportandtheapproximatefilesize oftheexportedfile,basedonthecurrentsettings Updatestheestimatedmemoryandfilesizerequirements

Selectthefileformatfortheexportedimage,andindicatespecificcompressionsettings, ifany SpecifiescompressionsettingsaccordingtotheselectedFileType QuickTimeoffersgreatflexibilitywhenspecifyingcompressionsettingsforthe variousfiletypes.ConsultQuickTimedocumentationforinformationonthese settings.

Updatevisibleoutof dateviewportspriorto exporting Resetallpluginobjects thatrequireareset priortoexporting ExportGeoreferencing File (VectorworksArchitect orLandmarkrequired)

Automaticallyupdatesanyvisible,outofdateviewportsbeforeexporting

Automaticallyresetspluginobjectsthatrequireanupdate(suchasdatastamps)before exporting Availableonlyifthecurrentdesignlayerisgeoreferenced.Alongwiththeimagefile, exportsaworldfilethatdescribestheexportedimageslocation,scale,androtationin thegeographiccoordinatesystem.Ifmultiplegeoreferencedlayersarevisible,the worldfilewillbewrittenaccordingtothetopmostlayer.SeeGISandGeoreferencing onpage 580intheVectorworksDesignSeriesUsersGuideformoreinformation.

2. ClickSave. Inthedialogboxwhichopens,provideanameforthefile;theprogramaddsthefileextensionaccordingtothe fileformatselected.IftheEachPageasaSeparateImagewasselectedforexport,theprogramautomatically appendsanincrementalnumbertoeachfilename. 3. ClickSave. Anewfileiscreatedwithoutchangingtheoriginaldrawingfile.Thisnewfilecanthenbeopenedinother applicationsorimportedintoanothersoftwareprogram.

Exporting Files |

797

Exporting in Parasolid X_T Format


TheExportParasolidX_T(3Donly)commandexports3DobjectsfromthecurrentlayertoParasolid*.x_tformat. Only3Dobjectsareexported.Thisisaconvenientwayofexchangingfileswithotherapplicationsthatalsouse Parasolidastheirmodelingkernel,evenwhentheotherapplicationsParasolidversionisolder. ToexportaParasolidX_Tfile: 1. Switchtothelayerwhichcontainsthe3Dobjectsforexport.Ifonlyselectedobjectsshouldbeexported,selectthe objects. 2. SelectFile>Export>ExportParasolidX_T(3Donly). TheExportOptionsdialogboxopens.Selectwhethertoexportonlyselectedobjectsorallobjectsfromthe currentlayer.

Parameter
ExportSelectedObjectsOnly ExportAllObjectsinCurrentLayer ParasolidVersion

Description
Exportsonlyselected3Dobjectsfromthecurrentlayer;ifnoobjectsare selected,all3Dobjectsfromthecurrentlayerareexported Exportsall3Dobjectsfromthecurrentlayer SpecifytheParasolidversionforexport;iftheexportedfilecannotbe opened,tryexportingtoalowerversionofParasolid

3. ClickOK. 4. Specifythefilenameanddestination. 5. ClickSave.

Exporting in IGES Format


TheExportIGES(3Donly)commandexports3Dcurves,surfaces,andsolidsfromaVectorworksfileintoIGES format(version5.3).Closedsolidsareexportedassolids,whileopensolidsareexportedasacollectionofsurfaces. Objectsthatareexportedtoan .igsfileinclude: 3Dloci CSGsolids(add/subtract/intersect/section) Groups Shells Symbols 3Dpolygons Extrudesandmultipleextrudes NURBScurvesandsurfaces Solids(sphere/cone/hemisphere) Chamfers Fillets Parametricobjects Sweeps

798

| Chapter 19: Importing and Exporting Files

ToexportanIGESfile: 1. SelectFile>Export>ExportIGES(3Donly). TheExportOptionsdialogboxopens.

2. SelectExportSolidasTrimmedSurfacestoexportasolidasseveraldifferentbodies(forexample,acube exportsassixbodies);otherwise,asolidisexportedasasinglebody. 3. ClickOK. 4. Specifythefilenameanddestination. 5. ClickSave.

Export Item
NURBScurve NURBSsurface TrimmedNURBSsurface Closedsolid

Export Result
IGESEntityType126 IGESEntityType128 IGESEntityType144 IGESEntityType186

Exporting in Stereo Lithography Format


TheExportStereoLithography(3DOnly)commandexportsallvisible3Dsurfacesandsolidsinthecurrentlayerinto anSTLformattedfile.Onceexported,thisfilecanbeusedforrapidprototypingpurposesorimportedintootherCAD packages. ToexportaStereoLithographyfile: 1. SelectFile>Export>ExportStereoLithography(3DOnly). TheExportSTLOptionsdialogboxopens.

2. SelectASCIIorBinaryforthefiletype.Usingtheslidercontrol,adjustthecoarsenessofthepolygonal representationfortheexportquality. 3. ClickOK.

Exporting a Rendered Drawing |


4. Specifythefilenameanddestination,andthenclickSave.

799

Exporting a Rendered Drawing


AllfilesrenderedwiththeRenderworksproductcanbeexported.Itispossibletoexportallorpartofadrawing dependingontheselectedexportformat. Theimageisrerenderedautomaticallybeforeexport. TheExportImageFilecommandexportsarendereddrawingtoavarietyofimagefileformats.Thiscommandis describedindetailinExportinganImageFileonpage 794. ThefollowingadditionalexportoptionsareavailableonlyaspartoftheRenderworksproduct. HighDynamicRangeImage(HDRI)Exportonpage 799 QuickTimeVRObjectExportonpage 801 QuickTimeVRPanoramaExportonpage 803

High Dynamic Range Image (HDRI) Export


WhentheRenderworksproductisinstalled,theHDRIoptionisaddedtothelistofexportfilechoices.Thiscommand createsanHDRfile.Thisisagoodchoiceforexportwhentouchinguptheimageinanimagingprogram;theexported imageislosslessandwillnothavequantizationartifactswhencolororexposureisfurtheradjustedafterexport. ToexportafileinHDRIformat: 1. SelecttheRenderworksrenderingmodetousefortheexport,andrendertheimage. 2. SelectFile>Export>ExportHighDynamicRangeImage(HDRI). TheExportImageFiledialogboxopens.Specifythedimensionsandresolutionfortheexportedimage.

800

| Chapter 19: Importing and Exporting Files

Parameter
ExportArea AllVisibleObjects CurrentView AllPagesasSingleImage EachPageasSeparateImage Marquee

Description
Exportsanimagethatincludesallvisibleobjects(objectsdonothavetobe currentlyonscreentobeconsideredvisible) Exportsanimagethatisexactlyasitdisplaysonthecurrentscreen NotapplicableforHDRIexport NotapplicableforHDRIexport Exportstheportionoftheimagespecifiedwithamarqueebox.Selectthis optionandthenclickDrawMarqueetotemporarilyclosethedialogbox.Click, andthendragtospecifytheareaforexport;themarqueedimensionsare displayedontheDatabar.ClicktosettheexportareaandreturntotheExport ImageFiledialogbox.ThePixelDimensionsoftheimageareautomaticallyset tothemarqueedimensions.

Dimensions LockAspectRatio Resolution PixelDimensions Selecttomaintaintheimageaspectratiowhenspecifyingdimensions Specifiestheprintedimageresolutioninpixelsperinch

Exporting a Rendered Drawing | Parameter


Width/Height PrintSize Width/Height

801

Description
Specifiestheexportedimagedimensions;ifLockAspectRatioisselected, changestoonedimensionwillupdatetheothertomaintaintheaspectratio

SpecifiestheprintedimagedimensionsintheselectedUnit;ifLockAspect Ratioisselected,changestoonedimensionwillupdatetheothertomaintain theaspectratio SelectaunittoapplytothePrintSizeparameters Displaysarenderedorwireframepreviewaccordingtothecurrentsettings Updatesthepreviewwitharenderedviewusingthecurrentlysetrendering option Updatesthepreviewwithawireframeview NotapplicableforHDRIexport NotapplicableforHDRIexport

Units Preview Render Wireframe MemoryRequired/Estimated FileSize Update Format FileType Compression Updatevisibleoutofdate viewportspriortoexporting Resetallpluginobjectsthat requirearesetpriortoexporting ExportGeoreferencingFile (VectorworksArchitector Landmarkrequired)

NotapplicableforHDRIexport(alwaysHDRformat) NotapplicableforHDRIexport Automaticallyupdatesanyvisible,outofdateviewportsbeforeexporting Automaticallyresetspluginobjectsthatrequireanupdate(suchasdata stamps)beforeexporting Availableonlyifthecurrentdesignlayerisgeoreferenced.Alongwiththe imagefile,exportsaworldfilethatdescribestheexportedimageslocation, scale,androtationinthegeographiccoordinatesystem.Ifmultiple georeferencedlayersarevisible,theworldfilewillbewrittenaccordingtothe topmostlayer.SeeGISandGeoreferencingonpage 580intheVectorworks DesignSeriesUsersGuideformoreinformation.

3. ClickSave. TheExportOpenHDRFiledialogboxopens.EnterthenameandlocationforsavingtheHDRIformatfile.Click Savetoexportthefile.Thefileiscreatedandsavedinthelocationspecified.

QuickTime VR Object Export


WhentheRenderworksproductisinstalled,theQuickTimeVirtualRealityobjectoptionisaddedtothelistofexport filechoices.ThiscommandcreatesaQuickTimeVRobjectfileoftheselectedobject,whichcanthenbeopenedin QuickTime.MovieresolutionisfixedanddoesnotdependonthesizeofthewindowintheVectorworksfile;the currentselectiondeterminesthezoomandcenterforthemovie,setsothattheselectedobjectisentirelyvisibleand centered. Toobtainmorecontroloverthezoomandviewcenter,createaninvisible3Dobjectwithnofillorlinestyle. Selecttheobjectbeforeexportingthemovie.

802

| Chapter 19: Importing and Exporting Files

QuickTimeincludesMoviePlayer,forviewingseveraldifferentfiletypes. QuickTimemustbeinstalledtovieworcreateQuickTimemovies.Itisaseparateprogramavailablewiththe Vectorworkssoftwareinstallation. ToexportanobjectasaQuickTimeVRobject: 1. RenderthedrawingwithaRenderworksrenderingmode,whichisalsousedforthemovie. Duetoalimitation,Renderworksbackgroundscannotbeexported. 2. Selecttheobjecttoexport. 3. SelectFile>Export>ExportQuickTimeVRObject. TheQTVRObjectOptionsdialogboxopens. 4. SelectthenumberofframesandspinoptionsforcreatingtheVRobjectfile,andthenclickOK.

Parameter
Frames

Description
Specifyhowmanyframestocreateinthefile;moreframestakelonger,butincreasethe qualityoftheexportedfile.TotalFramesdisplayshowmanyframeswillbecreatedbased onthehorizontalandverticalframesspecified. Specifiesthenumberofhorizontalframestocreate Specifiesthenumberofverticalframestocreate Specifytheangularsweepdesired,relativetothefrontviewoftheobject Indicatestheleftpanangle(0to180degrees) Indicatestherightpanangle(0to180degrees) Indicatestheangleabovethehorizon(0to90degrees) Indicatestheanglebelowthehorizon(0to90degrees)

Horizontal Vertical Spin Left Right Above Below

5. Specifythe .movfilenameandlocation,andclickSavetogeneratetheQuickTimemovie.Forinformationon playingtheQuickTimemovie,seeViewingQuickTimeAnimationsonpage 761.

DXF and DWG File Formats |

803

QuickTime VR Panorama Export


WhentheRenderworksproductisinstalled,theQuickTimeVirtualRealityPanoramaoptionisaddedtothelistof exportfilechoices.ThiscommandcreatesaQuickTimeVRpanoramafileofthedrawing,whichcanthenbeopenedin QuickTime.MovieresolutionisfixedanddoesnotdependonthesizeofthewindowintheVectorworksfile;the currentVectorworksview(XYZcoordinatesofthevieworiginor,inotherwords,thecenterofprojection)becomesthe pivotpointfortheQTVRpanoramaview,asiftheviewwasrotatedtobeflat,andthenorientedtowardsthepositive Yaxis. QuickTimemustbeinstalledtovieworcreateQuickTimemovies.Itisaseparateprogramavailablewiththe Vectorworkssoftwareinstallation.QuickTimeincludesMoviePlayer,forviewingseveraldifferentfiletypes. ToexportadrawingasaQuickTimepanorama: 1. RenderthedrawinginPerspectiveprojectionwithaRenderworksrendermode,whichisalsousedforthe movie. Duetoalimitation,Renderworksbackgroundscannotbeexported. 2. SelectFile>Export>ExportQuickTimeVRPanorama. 3. Specifythe .movfilenameandlocation,andclickSavetogeneratetheQuickTimemovie.Forinformationon playingtheQuickTimemovie,seeViewingQuickTimeAnimationsonpage 761.

DXF and DWG File Formats


DXFandDWGaretwocommonfileformatsusedtoexchangeinformationbetweendifferentCADanddrawing programs.DXFisasemipublicstandardpromotedandcontrolledbyAutodesk,Inc.DWGisaproprietary,closed formatusedbyAutodeskforitsproducts.DXFandDWGfilescontainalmostidenticalinformation,andbothstoreall ofthesameobjects.RecentversionsofAutoCADhaveissueswhenreadingsomeDXFfiles,suchaslosinglinksto images,soDWGisusuallyasaferchoiceinthatcase.Asofthiswriting,themostrecentDXF/DWGversionisversion 2012.TheVectorworksprogramimportsversions2.5through2012,andexportsversions12through2012.

Vectorworks 2012 Improvements


ThefollowingchangestotheDXF/DWGtranslationprocedurehavebeenadded: VectorworkssupportsDXF/DWGversion2012forbothimportandexport. ImagefillscannowbeexportedasclippedDXF/DWGimages;previously,imagefillswereexportedassolidtype hatches.ClippedDXF/DWGimagesnowimportasclippedpolygonswithimagefills;previously,clippedimages wouldbecomeunclippeduponimport. GradientfillscannowbeexportedasgradienttypeDXF/DWGhatches;previously,gradientfillswereexported assolidtypehatches.SinceDXF/DWGgradienthatchescanonlyhavetwocolors,Vectorworksgradientswith multiplecolorsareexportedusingonlythefirstandlastcolors.GradienttypeDXF/DWGhatchescannowbe importedasobjectswithagradientfill;previously,theywereimportedasobjectswithasolidfill.AlthoughDXF/ DWGandVectorworksgradientsaredifferent,duringbothimportandexporttheyaremappedto similarlookinggradientswherepossible. Anewoptioncontrolstheexportofhatchfills;previously,hatcheswerealwaysexported. AnewoptionimportsaDXF/DWGclippedblockasanormalscaledorunscaledVectorworkssymbol.By default,theoptionisdeselected,andaclippedblockisimportedasacroppeddesignlayerviewport(ifDesign Seriesisinstalled)orasacroppedlayerlink.

804

| Chapter 19: Importing and Exporting Files

Duringimportandexport,transparencyofDXF/DWGandVectorworksentitiesisnowsupported.Previously, transparencywasignored.Invisibleobjectsarenotexportedorimported. Duringimport,ifyoumapDXF/DWGlinecolorstoVectorworkslineweightsusingtheMapColorstoLine Weightsdialogbox,andthenyousavetheimportoptions,thecolormappingsarenowsavedwiththeother savedsettings;previously,themappingswerenotsaved.IfyouimportaDXF/DWGfilethathasa .ctbfile,the mappingsinthatfileoverridethemappingsinthesavedsettings;tousethemappingsinthesavedsettings instead,removethe .ctbfilefromtheDXF/DWGfolder. Multiplesetsofexportoptionscannowbesavedandreusedwhennecessary. Anewoptionexportsonlytheobjectsthatareselectedatthetimeofexport;previouslytheVectorworks programexportedallobjectsthatwerevisibleintheselectedportionsofthedrawing.

Information Lost in Translation


ImportingfromandexportingtoDXF/DWGisnotthesameassavingoropeningaVectorworksfile.Itisatranslation fromonewayofdoingthingstoanother;consequently,informationcangetlostinthetranslation.Followingaresome itemsthatDXF/DWGhandlesdifferently.Thesecanintroduceunwantedeffectsinthetranslatedfile.

Item
Units

Description
Version2000DXF/DWGandlatersupportstheconceptofunits,sothefilesunitsettings canbeimported(ifitincludesunits).PreviousversionsofDXF/DWGdonotsupport units,andsomeversion2000andlaterfilesmaybeunitless.Thereisnowayforthe Vectorworksprogramtotellwhethertheseunitlessdrawingsweremadeinmeters,feet andinches,ormicrons.Communicatewiththepersonprovidingthefiletodeterminethis information.UnitlessDXF/DWGfilesdohavefiveunitssettings(suchas ArchitecturalandEngineering)whichareusedtoguesstheoriginalunits,butthe guessmayneedtobeadjusted. TheVectorworksprogramallowslineweightsandcolorstobespecifiedindependently. AutoCADhasrecentlygainedtheabilitytodoso,butmostAutoCADusersstillusecolors tomaptolineweights.Version14andearlierDXF/DWGfilesdonotsupporttrueline weightsatall.Ifyouchoosetoexportwithlineweightsmappedtocolors,thenoriginal objectcolorswillbelost.

LineWeights

DXF and DWG File Formats | Item


ColorsandFills

805

Description
TheVectorworksprogramismoregraphicallyrichthanDXF/DWGcancurrentlysupport. Inallcases,theVectorworksprogramchoosestheclosestpossibletranslationgiventhe limitationsinherentinDXF/DWG.Thedefaultversionintheexportdialogboxwill alwaysgivethebestresultspossible,assumingtherecipientssoftwarecanreadallofthe information. DXF/DWGversionspriorto2004haveafixedcolorpalette(whichchangesslightly dependingonwhetherthebackgroundisblackorwhite)andallobjectshavejustone solidcolorassociatedwiththem.ObjectssuchascirclesinDXFhavenofillcolor(justa linecolor).Afewobjectscanhaveafillcolor,buttheyhavenoseparatelinecolor. DXF/DWGversion14andabovesupportsasolidhatch,whichisaseparateobjectthat canbeassociatedwithobjectssuchascirclestomakethemlookliketheyhaveacolorfill. Thesehatchescannotbethesamecolorasthebackgroundcolor(suchasawhiterectangle onawhitebackgroundtomaskobjectsunderneath).Sincethesesolidhatchescanbe associative,theVectorworksprogramcanimportthemandsettheassociatedobjectsfill colorinsteadofhavingtwoseparateobjectsforframeandfill. DXF/DWGversion2000supportswipeoutentities,whichareessentiallypolygonal imagesfilledwiththebackgroundcolor.SomeAutoCADusersmaynotwanttoreceive fileswithwipeouts.DXF/DWGexportincludesanoptiontoexcludesolidfills(which includesbothwipeoutsandsolidhatches).Sincewipeoutscanonlybepolygonsandare notassociative,ifawhitecircleonawhitebackgroundisexportedandthenreimported intoaVectorworksfile,theresultisanunfilledcircleandapolygonwithawhitefilland nopeninsidethecircle.Thesmoothnessofthepolygon(numberoffacets)dependsonthe 2Dconversionresolutionpreferencewhenitwasexported. Objectswithpatternfillsexportasaplainsolidcolor.

LayersandClasses

EachVectorworksdesignlayerissimilartoaDXF/DWGmodelspace.AVectorworks drawingcanhavemanydesignlayersvisibleatthesametime,withdifferentscalesand viewsforeachdesignlayer,butonlyonemodelspaceisallowedinaDXF/DWGfile. Therefore,theVectorworksprogramhastomergethemultipledesignlayers,andsome informationcanbelost.Thedrawingshouldgenerallylookandprintthesameafterthe export,butindependentlayerscales,objectcoordinates,andinvisibleobjectscanbelost. TheVectorworksprogramusessymbols,whichareobjectsthatcanbeinsertedmultiple timeswithoutgreatlyincreasingthefilesize,andwhichneedonlyoneedittoupdateall copies.Italsohasgroups,whichareobjectsthataregroupedtogetherandactasone object.TheDXF/DWGequivalentofaVectorworkssymboliscalledablock.Theclosest DXF/DWGequivalenttoaVectorworksgroupisananonymousblock,whichislikea symbolwithoutaname.Unlikeanonymousblocks,namedblockscanbeeditedeasilyin AutoCAD,andnewinstancesoftheblockscanbeinsertedintothedrawing.However, namedblocksreimportintoVectorworksfilesassymbols,whichmaynotbedesirable. Therefore,theVectorworksprogramhasanoptiontoexportgroupsasanonymousblocks, ifnamedblockscauseaproblem.

GroupsandSymbols

806
Item

| Chapter 19: Importing and Exporting Files


Description
DXF/DWGdoesnothavedatabaserecordsthatcorrespondtoVectorworksrecord formats.Itdoeshaveobjectscalledattributedefinitions(attdefs)which,whenplacedin blocks/symbols,behavesomewhatlikelinkedtextinaVectorworksfile.The correspondenceisverylooseandasaresulttranslationoftheseobjectsisnotalways smooth.DXF/DWGblockattributesarecreatedforthingsexportingasblocks(symbols, groups,pluginobjects,orlayerlinks)thathaverecordformatsattached.Becauseonly DXF/DWGblockscanhaveattributesattached,therecordformatinformationisnot exportedforotherobjecttypes,suchaslinesorcircles. WhenexportingtoDXF/DWGversion2000andlater,thecharactersinlayerandblock nameswillnotchange.Accuratetranslationoflowercasetext,spacesandotherUnicode charactersissupported(exceptforthefollowingillegalcharacters,whichareconverted duringexport:<>`,/\:?*|=).Exporttopreviousversionsconvertsallnamecharacters touppercase;allspacesandspecialcharactersareconvertedtounderscores.DXF/DWG attributetagnamescannothavespacesinanyversion;anyspacesfoundinrecordfield namesareconvertedtoanunderscore. Multilineformattedtextincludesvarioussizedfontsthatarebold,underlined,or italicized,andthatwraptothenextline.ThistypeoftextissupportedforDXF/DWG versions13andup.Forearlierversions,wrappedtextissplitintoseparatelines. DXF/DWGdoesnotsupportlayertransfermodesortransparency,souseonlypaint transfermode(100percentopaqueunderQuartzandGDI+imaging) TheVectorworksandAutoCADprogramshandledimensions,units,anddimension standardsverydifferently.DimensionsexportedtoDXF/DWGlookexactlythesame whenopenedinAutoCAD,buttheymaychangeappearanceslightlyifedited.The Vectorworksprogramalsocreatesappropriatedimensionstylesforalldimension standardsthatareusedinthefile,soeveniftherecipientmodifiesthedimensionsor createsnewones,theyshouldnotlooksignificantlydifferent.Duringimport,the dimensionstylesfromtheDXF/DWGfilewillbecreatedascustomdimensionstandards intheVectorworksfile,topreservetheoriginallook.

AttributesandLinked Text

Names

StyledMultilinetext

LayerTransferMode/ Transparency Dimensions

DXF/DWG File Export


ConsiderthefollowingpointswhenexportingfromaVectorworksfiletoDXF/DWG.

Item
LinkedText Symbols,Plugins, LayerLinks,and Groups LineWeights

Export Notes
Linkedtextinsymbolsexportasblockattributes. Symbols,plugins,layerlinks,andgroupsexportasblocks.Blocksforsymbols,plugins, andlayerlinksaregivenagenericnamesuchasGroup2unlesstheywerenamedinthe DatataboftheObjectInfopalette.Bydefault,groupsalsoareexportedasnamedblocks, butthereisanoptiontoexportthemasanonymousblocks. Bydefault,lineweightsareconvertedtotheclosestDXFlineweight.Ifthecolormapping optionisused,mappinginformationisenteredduringexportandwrittentoa .ctbfile.

DXF/DWG File Export | Item


Fills,Patterns, Gradients,and Hatches

807

Export Notes
SolidfillsandpatternsexportasDXFobjectswithassociatedsolidhatchorunassociative wipeout.Wipeoutsareonlyavailableinversion2000andlater.Hatchesexportas associativehatchestoAutoCADversion14andhigher,orasanonymousblocksto AutoCADversion13andlower.Thereisanoptiontoexportallofthefills,patterns, gradients,andhatcheswithinaclassorlayertoaseparateDXFlayer. Rasterimagesexporttothesamefolderthatthedrawingandanyhatchpatternfilesare exportedto.TheyexportasJPEGfiles,withanimageobjectintheDXF/DWGfilethat storesthenameoftheJPEGfileandtheinsertionpoint.Imagesareonlysupportedin AutoCADversions14andhigher. SolidsandNURBSsurfacestypicallyexportasACISobjects.Thefollowingobjectscannot beexportedasACISobjects:meshes(whichexportasDXFmeshes),3Dpolygons(which exportas3Dpolygons,orastrianglesiffilled),NURBScurves(whichexportasDXF splines),andwalls(whichexportastriangulated3Dpolysin3Dviews,andaslinesand arcsin2Dviews). Pagebasedsymbolsaretypicallyusedforannotation,andexportasannotativeblocks withtheannotativepropertysettotrue.Worldbasedsymbolsexportasblockswiththe annotativepropertysettofalse.

RasterImages

SolidsandNURBS Surfaces

Pagebasedsymbols, worldbasedsymbols

808
Item

| Chapter 19: Importing and Exporting Files


Export Notes
VectorworksdesignlayersexportasDXFmodelspaceentities.Ifonlydesignlayers(no sheetlayers)areexported,individualdesignlayersscalesandviewsareexportedto modelspaceasonescaleandview.Thereisanoptiontoexportallofthedesignlayers inafileasseparateDXF/DWGfiles. Bydefault,eachdesignlayerviewport(VectorworksDesignSeriesrequired)is exportedtoareferencedDWGfile;croppedviewportsbecomeclippedreferencedfiles, andnestedviewportsbecomenestedreferencedfiles.Thispreservesthevisibility overridesfromtheoriginalviewport,becausethevisibilityofthelayersinthe referencedfilecanbecontrolledseparatelyfromthelayersinthemasterfile.Thereisan optiontoexportdesignlayerviewportsaspartofthemasterdocumentinstead. Bydefault,VectorworkssheetlayersexportasDXFpaperspacelayouts,withnormal viewportsexporteddirectly,andsectionviewportsexportedasblocks.Annotations becomepaperspaceobjectsontopoftheviewports.AutoCADrequiresallpaperspace objectstobeeitheraboveorbelowtheviewports,butnotboth,soanyobjectsor annotationsthatappearbelowtheviewportsintheVectorworksfilewillappearabove theviewportsintheAutoCADfile.Therefore,avoidputtinganythingunderneath viewportsinyourVectorworksfiles. Ifsheetlayersareexported,alldesignlayersreferencedfromviewportsonthesheet layersareexportedtomodelspaceintopviewwithoutscaling,andviewportsare createdinpaperspacelayoutstoshowthevariousviewsandscales.Sheetsshould generallylookandprintasexpected(thoughwithoutrenderingmodessetduetosome AutoCADbugs),butthesinglemodelspacemayhavemanyoverlappingobjectsand maynotbeasusable.Thereisanoptiontoexporttheselectedsheetlayersasseparate DXF/DWGfiles.Inaddition,thereisanoptiontoexportsheetlayerviewportsas2D graphicstomodelspace(eachlayerasaseparatefile). SinceAutoCADhasonlyonemodelspace,anditdoesnothavehybrid2D/3Dobjects,it issometimesnecessaryfortheVectorworksprogramtoexportthedesignlayersasone ormoreblockswithspecialDXFlayernamestocontroltheblockvisibility.For example,adesignlayercalledFoundationmightexportasblocksnamed Foundation(2D)andFoundation(3D),withassociatedDXFlayersnamed _Foundation(2D)and_Foundation(3D).Theblockswillbeinsertedinmodel spaceandassignedtothoseDXFlayers.Viewportsthatshouldhideeitherthe2Dor3D objectswillfreezeorthawtheappropriateDXFlayer. Whenyouexportsheetlayers,theVectorworksprogramoptimizesthetranslationto preservethelookofthesheets,atthecostofpossiblyaddingsomecomplexityand decreasingtheeaseofeditingitemsinmodelspace.Tominimizethecomplexity,export sheetswithunrelateddesignlayersasseparatefiles,orlimitthedrawingtoone Vectorworksdesignlayer.

DesignLayers,Sheet Layers,and Viewports

Preparing to Export
Thefollowingproceduresarerecommendedtohelpensureasatisfactorytranslation. 1. Exportbehavesdifferentlybasedonwhetherdesignlayersorsheetlayersareselectedforexport.

DXF/DWG File Export |

809

Ifoneormoresheetsareselectedforexport,apaperspacelayoutisexportedforeachsheetwiththesheet objects;anydesignlayersvisibleinsheetlayerviewportsareexportedtomodelspace.(Sheetsthatdonot sharedesignlayersshouldusuallybeexportedtoseparatefiles.)Othersheetlayersandunreferenceddesign layersareomittedfromexport. Ifonlydesignlayersareselectedforexport,thedesignlayersareexportedtomodelspaceandallsheetlayers areomitted.Ifthedesignlayersareexportedtoasinglefile,onlythevisiblelayersareexported;ifthelayers areexportedtoseparatefiles,alllayersareexported. 2. AutoCADdoesnothavemultiplemodelspaces.Ifthesheetlayerbeingexportedhasmultipleviewportsat differentscales,themodelspacemayhaveoverlappingobjectsfromthedesignlayers,andthescalewillbesetto 1:1insteadoftheexpecteddesignlayerscale(s).Toavoidthisproblem,setthescalethesameforalldesignlayers, andmakesurethatnoobjectsoverlap.Then,adjusttheviewportscalesasdesired. 3. Donotexportdesignlayersinperspective,astheywillnotbeinperspectiveintheDXF/DWGfile.Instead,create asheetlayerwithaviewportsettoperspectiveview. 4. ForDXF/DWGversionsearlierthan14,objectfillswillnotexport.Tobetterapproximatetheappearanceofthe exportedfilefortheseversions,removeallfillsinacopyofthefilebeforeexport.Thiswillhelpidentifylines undersolidfillsthatneedtobedeletedortrimmedwhenthesolidfillisremoved. DXF/DWGversions14andlatersupportassociativeboundaryhatches,orbhatches.Therefore,fills,solidfills, andhatchescanbeexportedasfollows.

Vectorworks Entity
Associativehatchdefinition

DXF/DWG Entity
SelectExportHatchestocreateabhatchdefinition;also selectExportHatchPatternFilestoexportahatchpattern file(.pat)alongwiththeDXF/DWGfile SelectExportHatchestocreatemultiplebhatchdefinitions; alsoselectExportHatchPatternFilestoexportmultiple hatchpatternfiles(.pat)alongwiththeDXF/DWGfile SelectExport2DFillstocreateasolidentity SelectExport2DFillstocreateanobjectwithassociated bhatch SelectExport2DFillstocreateoneofthefollowing: Wipeoutentity(AC2000andlater) Nofill(AC14andearlier) Lightgraybhatch(AC14) SelectExport2DFillsorExportHatches(dependingon theVectorworksfill)tocreatemultipleobjectsandan associatedbhatchdefinitionwithislanddetection

Hatchwithmultiplecolorsorwithbackgroundfill

Filledpolygonwiththreeorfoursides,withthefill colordifferentfromthebackgroundcolor Objectwithasolidfill(colordifferentfrom backgroundcolor)orhatch Objectwithasolidfill(colorsameasbackground color)

Filledpolylinewithoneormoreholes

5. Settheclassandlayervisibilityappropriately.IfinvisibleVectorworkslayersareexportedasDXF/DWGlayers, objectsininvisibleclasseswillnotbeexported,andviceversa.Topreviewwhatwillbeexported,setclassesto show/snap/modifyothersandlayerstoshowothers.

810

| Chapter 19: Importing and Exporting Files

6. DXF/DWGdoesnotsupporthybridobjects.Ifonlydesignlayersarebeingexported,settheviewforeachdesign layersotheappropriate2Dor3Dcomponentsareexported.FromPlanview,the2Dcomponentofahybrid symbolisexported;fromTopvieworany3Dview,the3Dcomponentisexported.Topreservethe3Dobject coordinates,useTopviewtoexportall3Ddesignlayers(oruseviewportstoshowotherviews,andexportthe sheetscontainingthoseviewports). 7. Symbols,pluginobjects,andlayerlinksexportasnamedblocksinDXF/DWG.Groupscanbeexportedaseither namedblocksoranonymousblocks. Thenamethattheseitemsreceivedependsontheviewthatisineffectuponexport.Asanexample,thesymbol Widgetwouldreceivethefollowingnames,dependingontheview:

Symbol Type and View


HybridsymbolinPlanview Hybridsymbolin3Dview Nonhybridsymbol

Exported Block Name


Widget(2D) Widget(3D) Widget

TheassignedlayerlinkdependsonwhetherProject2Dwasselectedforthelayerlink.

Layer Link Option


LayerlinkinplanviewwithProject2Doptionselected Allotherlayerlinks

Exported Block Name


Layer1(2D) Layer1(3D)

Tochecktheitemnames,reimportanexportedfileintoaVectorworksfile. 8. Checkthedrawingwithbothblackandwhitebackgrounds.IftheVectorworksfilehasawhitebackgroundand usesadark(butnotblack)colortodrawobjects,thenotherswholookattheexportedfilewithablack backgroundmaynotbeabletoseetheobjects. 9. Setthe2Dand3Dconversionresolutions(intheVectorworkspreferences)toalowvalueiffilesizeisaconcern. Higherresolutionsresultinlargerexportedfilesizes.Lowerresolutionsdecreasefilesizes,butcanresultin blockiness,especiallywhenexportingtoearlierversionsofDXF/DWG.

DXF/DWG Export Procedure


1. SelectFile>Export>ExportDXF/DWG. TheDXFDWGExportOptionsdialogboxopens. 2. Selecttheappropriateexportoptions,andclickOKtoexportthefile. TheDXF/DWGexportdialogboxoptionsaredescribedinDXF/DWGExportOptionsonpage 811.During export,aprogressbardisplays,alongwiththenumberofobjectsprocessed. 3. Itisfrequentlyhelpfultoviewthetranslatedfileinathirdpartysoftwareprogramtoensurethatthetranslation processdidnotintroduceunwantedeffects.Afterexport,leavethefileopenandimporttheexportedfileback intoaVectorworksfileorintoanothersoftwarepackage.Comparethetwoversions,notinganyproblems.For example,thelossofobjectfillsinearlierversionsofDXF/DWGcancauseunwantedlinestodisplay.Correct theseproblemsinacopyoftheVectorworksfileandexportthefileagain. Donotchangethe .dxfor .dwgfileextensionorothersoftwarepackageswillnotbeabletoreadthefile.Donot exportasbinaryDXFunlesscertainthattherecipientwillbeabletoreadthisformat.

DXF/DWG File Export |

811

AutoCADusersmayreportthatcirclesandotherobjectslooklikeblockypolygons.Theycanimprovethe appearanceofthedrawingbyzoominginandusingeithertheregenallorregencommand,orbyincreasing theVIEWRESvalue.

DXF/DWG Export Options


TheDXFDWGExportOptionsdialogboxcontainsavarietyofoptionstohelpretainthefileintegrityintheDXF/ DWGformat. Tomakecustomexportsfasterandeasier,savethesetsofoptionsthatyouusefrequently.

Parameter
SavedSettingsOptions Settings Save Manage

Description
Select<ActiveSettings>tousetheexportoptionscurrentlyselectedinthedialogbox;to useasetofsavedexportoptions,selectthemfromthepulldownlist Opensadialogboxtonameandsavethecurrentlyselectedexportoptionssothatthey canquicklybeselectedasaset OpenstheSavedSettingsdialogboxtorenameordeletesetsofsavedexportoptions (seeManagingSavedExportOptionsonpage 817)

812

| Chapter 19: Importing and Exporting Files


Description
Choosefromthreeexportedfileformats:DXFasplaintext,DXFasabinaryencoding, andDWG. Oneofthemaindifferencesbetweentheseformatsisfilesize.Althoughindividualfiles canvary,anuncompressedtextDXFfileisgenerallylargerthananuncompressed DWGfile.However,thefilesizecanbesignificantlyreducedbyusingacompression utility.AcompressedtextDXFfileisnormallysmallerthanacompressedDWGfile. BinaryDXFfilesizesgenerallyfallbetweenthetwoforbothcompressedand uncompressedfiles. Inadditiontofilesize,considertheformatsthatotherapplicationscansupport.Before exportingtobinaryDXFortoDWG,ensurethatthereceivingpartyssoftwarecanread thoseformats.SincebinaryandtextDXFbothusethesame .dxfextension,iftheDXF filecannotbeopened,itmaybemaybemistakenlyconsideredcorrupted.Whenin doubt,exportastextDXF,whichisuniversallysupported. RecentversionsofAutoCADhavebugswhenreadingsomeDXFfiles,suchaslosing linkstoimages,soDWGisusuallyasaferchoiceinthatsituation. DXBisasimplerfileformatusedbysomethirdpartyapplicationsthatdonotsupport thefullDXForDWGfileformat.ItisnotthesameasbinaryDXF;donotuse .dxbasthe extensionforbinaryDXFfiles.TheVectorworksprogramdoesnotsupportDXB. Version Forbestresults,exporttothehighestversionsupportedbytherecipientssoftware,or thedefaultexportversion,whicheverislower.ThelatestversionsofDXF/DWGhave featuresmoresimilartotheVectorworksprogramandmayprovideabettertranslation, butnotallsoftwarepackagescanreadthelatestversions.Whenindoubt,exportasDXF andversion12,whichhaswidespreadindustrysupport. Otheroptionsonthedialogboxcanchangeorbecomeunavailabledependingonthe versionselected.

Parameter
FileFormat Format

Class/LayerConversions ExportasDXFLayers ThisoptionisavailableiftheExportoptionissettoDesignLayersOnly. SinceVectorworksclassescorrespondmostcloselytoDXF/DWGlayers,normally,the Classesoptionisrecommended.ThereisnodirectequivalentforVectorworkslayersin DXF/DWG.AsingleVectorworksdesignlayerissimilartoDXFmodelspace. Thisismostimportantfortheimportofgroupsandsymbols.InaVectorworksfile,the objectsingroupsandsymbolscanbelongtodifferentclasses,buttheymustbeonthe samelayer.InaDXF/DWGfile,theentitiesequivalenttoVectorworkssymbolsand groups(knownasblocks)canbeondifferentDXF/DWGlayers. LayersnormallydonotexportrelativetotheElevationvalueshownintheDesign LayerstaboftheOrganizationdialogbox.

DXF/DWG File Export | Parameter


InvisibleClassesAre

813

Description
WhileaVectorworksfileorganizesdrawingsbyclassandbylayer,theDXF/DWGfile formatonlyhaslayers.Thefollowingdescriptionassumesthat,asrecommended, classesareselectedforexportaslayers.(IfinsteadVectorworkslayersareselectedfor exportasDXF/DWGlayers,equivalentoptionsarepresentedforthelayers.) Selectwhethertoexportinvisibleclasses.IfExportedAsInvisibleDXFLayersis selected,objectsthatareininvisibleclassesintheVectorworksfileareexported,andcan beseenbymakingtheDXF/DWGlayervisible.Thisistherecommendedoption. However,ifinvisibleclassescontainprivateinformationorifthesizeoftheexported fileneedstobereduced,selectNotExportedtodeletethese. IfinvisibleclassesareexportedasDXFlayers,objectsoninvisibleVectorworks layersarenotexported.Toexporttheseitems,firstmakethelayersvisible,and thenselecttheExportcommand.

ExportLayersAs SeparateFiles

SelectthisoptiontoexporttheselectedsheetlayersordesignlayerstoseparateDXF/ DWGfiles(namedaftertheoriginallayer);otherwise,theselectedlayersareexportedto onefile. ThisoptionisunavailableiftheExportoptionissettoDesignLayersOnly,andExport AsDXFLayersissettoLayers. Alldesignlayersareexported,includingthosethataresettobeinvisible.

LayerScale RescaleLayersTo WhentheExportoptionissettoDesignLayersOnly,paperspaceisnotused;allitems areplacedinmodelspace.Modelspacemustbeatonescale;DXF/DWGfilesdonot havedifferentlayerscales.Ifthelayerstobeexportedareatvariousscales,theoptionto rescalethemtoacommonscalebeforeexportbecomesavailable.Bydefault,themost frequentlyusedlayerscalewillbeused. Choosingthebestscaleforexportisimportant.SelectRescaleLayersToandclickthe commonscaletousefromthedisplayedlist. SymbolsonrescaledlayersareexportedasscaledblocksintheDXF/DWGfile. Whensheetsareselectedforexport,alldesignlayersexporttomodelspaceat effectivelya1:1scale,andviewportstakecareofshowingtheobjectsatotherscales. References ExportDesignLayer Viewportsas SeparateFiles (VectorworksDesign Seriesrequired) SelectthisoptiontoexporteachviewportasaseparateDXF/DWGfile,namedwiththe viewportname.Ifdeselected,designlayerviewportsareboundintothemasterDXF/ DWGfile;thismaycausetheviewportobjectstolookdifferent,becauseclassandlayer visibilityoverridesarenotretained.

814

| Chapter 19: Importing and Exporting Files


Description
Theoptionsonthislistchangedependingonthecontentsofthefilebeingexportedand onwhichexportVersionisselected. Selecttheitemstoexportfromthelist.Bydefault,theselectedlayersareexportedtoa singlefile(toexportmultiplefilesinstead,selectExportLayersAsSeparateFiles). IfDesignLayersOnlyisselected,youcanselecteitherclassesorlayerstoExportas DXFLayers.IfyouexportthedesignlayersasDXFlayers,youcannotselectExport LayersAsSeparateFiles. Ifoneofthesheetoptionsisselected,theselectedsheetlayersareexportedaspaper spacelayouts;also,designlayersusedinviewportsareexportedtomodelspace. Whilemultiplesheetscanbeexportedtothesamefile,notethatunrelatedsheets usuallyshouldbeexportedtodifferentfiles.Selectthesheetsfromthelistbelow. Ifoneofthesavedviewoptionsisselected,savedviewsareeachexportedas separatefiles.Selecttheviewsfromthelistbelow. ExportViewportsas 2DGraphicsin ModelSpace Selectthisoptiontoexportall2Dand3Dobjectsthatdisplayinsideaviewportas simple2D(flat)graphicsinmodelspace.Eachselectedsheetisexportedtoaseparate file.Onreimport,allexportedgraphicsareimportedintoadesignlayer. ViewportsinTop/Planviewareexportedwithoutconversionto2Dlines. RenderedviewportsinanyviewotherthanTop/Planviewareexportedasgroups. Nonrenderedviewportsinanorthogonalview(Top,Bottom,Front,Back,Left,and Right)aresettohiddenlinerenderingandthenexportedasgroups. Nonrenderedviewportsinanisometricview(includingcustomviews)are convertedtolinesbeforeexport. Sectionviewportsareexportedasgroups. Viewportannotationsareextractedfromtheviewportgroupsandexportedassingle entities. Allothersheetlayergraphics(suchastitleblocks)areexportedassingleentities. SheetsorViewName IfSelectedSheetsorSelectedSavedViewsisselectedastheExportoption,selectthe sheetsorsavedviewstoexportfromthedisplayedlist.

Parameter
SheetstoInclude Export

Objects ExportOnlySelected Objects 2DFillsandFiles Export2DFills Selectthisoptiontoexportsolidfillsaswipeouts(DXF/DWGversions2000andlater)or solidhatches(DXF/DWGversion14andlater).IfExportImagesandImageFilesis enabled,imagefillsexportasclippedimages;iftheoptionisdisabled,imagefillsexport assolidfills. SelectthisoptiontoexportVectorworkshatchesasbhatches;nohatchpatternfilesare createdunlessExportHatchPatternFilesisalsoselected Selectthisoptiontoexportonlytheobjectsthatarecurrentlyselectedinthedrawing; thisoptionisunavailableifnoobjectsareselected

ExportHatches

DXF/DWG File Export | Parameter


ExportHatchPattern Files

815

Description
IfExportHatchesisenabled,selectthisoptiontocreateadditionalhatchpattern(.pat) filesinaspecifiedfolder.AVectorworkshatchwithmultiplelevelsandcolorsgenerates multiplehatchpatterndefinitions.SeePreparingtoExportonpage 808formore informationontheconversion. Thehatchpatternfiles,andtheDXF/DWGexportedfileandanysupportfiles,such as .jpgimages,areplacedinthisfolder.AutoCADrequiresthehatchpatternfilesto retainthehatchassociativityandtoaddhatchestoadditionalobjectswiththesame hatchpattern.WhenExportHatchPatternFilesisdisabled,AutoCADdisplaysthe hatchbutcannoteditit.

ExportHatchesand 2DFillsintoSeparate DXFLayers

Selectthisoptiontoexportallofthefills,patterns,gradients,andhatcheswithinaclass (ordesignlayer,iflayersareexportedtoDXFlayers)toaseparateDXFlayer.TheDXF layersarenamedaftertheoriginalclassorlayerthatcontainstheobjecttowhichthefill, pattern,gradient,orhatchisapplied.Forexample,iftheVectorworksfilehasanobject ontheHardscapelayerwithahatchappliedtoit,theexportfilewillhavealayer calledHardscape_Hatch. Selectthisoptiontoexportimageobjectsandimagefiles.Ifthisoptionisdisabled, objectswithimagefillsexportasobjectswithsolidfills.Thisoptionisonlyenabledfor DXF/DWGversions2000orhigher.

ExportImagesand ImageFiles 3D ExportSolidsasACIS Solids

SelectthisoptiontoexportmostVectorworkssolidsandNURBSsurfacesasACIS objects.Deselectthisoptiontoexportsolidsaspolygonalfaces(ifthetargetsoftware packagecannotreadACISsolids,forexample). Walls,roundwalls,roofandfloorslabs,filled3Dpolygons,meshes,andNURBScurves cannotbeexportedasACISsolids.

Triangulateto PreserveFills

Somesoftwarepackages,suchasAutoCAD,arenotcapableofrenderingexported3D surfacesthathavemorethanthreeorfourverticesperface.Selectthisoptiontobreak upsuchfacesintoasetoftrianglesthatcanbeproperlyrendered.Thealgorithmused worksbestonplanarornearlyplanarsurfaces,suchasthetopofanextrudedcircle. EvenifExportSolidsasACISSolidsisselected,thisoptionmaybeusedtohandle3D objectsthatcannotbeexportedasACISsolids. Whenindoubt,selectthisoption(thisincreasestheexportedfilesizeandthetime necessarytoexportit,andmayresultinunwantedlinesinsomecases).

SymbolsandGroups Decompose3D SymbolsandGroups ExportGroupsas AnonymousBlocks Somesoftwarepackagescannothandleexportedgroupsandsymbols.Ifaproblem occurs,selectDecompose3DSymbolsandGroupstoconvertsymbolsandgroupsto ungroupedobjects.Donotselectthisoptionunlessitisabsolutelynecessary. Normally,Vectorworksgroupsareexportedasnamedblocks,whichcanbeopenedand editedinothersoftwarepackages.However,thenamedblocksareimportedbackinto Vectorworksfilesassymbols.Ifthiscreatesaproblem,selectExportGroupsas AnonymousBlocks,whichareimportedbackintoVectorworksfilesasgroups.

816

| Chapter 19: Importing and Exporting Files


Description
ThetraditionalmethodofspecifyinglineweightsinaDXF/DWGfileistouseaunique linecolorforeachlineweight.Thethicknesscorrespondingtoeachcoloristhen specifiedatplottingorprintingtime.NewerDXF/DWGversionssupporttrueline weights,butmostAutoCADusersarelikelytobeusingcolorsnevertheless. BecauseDXF/DWGversion2000andlatersupportslimitedtruelineweights,bydefault theMapLineWeightstoColorsoptionisdeselectedandVectorworkslineweightsare convertedtotheclosestpossibleweightvalueautomatically.Lineweightswithavalue ofzeroarenotexported.(SeeLineWeightConversionsonpage 817.) Selectthisoptiontoconvertlineweightstocolors.Thenduringtheexportprocess,alist oflineweightsinthefiledisplays.Specifythecolortomaptoeachoftheselineweights. Toselectadifferentcolorforaselectedlineweight,clickthecolorboxandselectacolor fromthedisplayedoptions. IfExportLayersAsSeparateFilesisalsoselected,themappingdialogboxdoes notdisplay;instead,theVectorworksprogramautomaticallymapslineweightsto colorsaccordingtoapredefinedstandard. Forversion2000andlater,thisoptioncreatesa .ctbfileforeachexportedDXF/DWGfile (namedaftertheoriginal .vwxfile)containingcolormappinginformation.The exportedDXF/DWGfilestoresthenameofthe .ctbfileinit.TheAutoCADusermust putthisinthesupportpath,asAutoCADdoesnotreadthe .ctbfilewhenitissimply includedinthesamefolderastheDXF/DWGfile. Toavoidhavingacolortablefileforeachexportedfile,useasingle .ctbfilefor eachuniquesetofmappings,anddeletetheothers.Whenanexportedfileis openedinAutoCAD,editthepagesetupandchooseanappropriatecolortable file. ForearlierDXF/DWGversions,convertinglineweightstocolorsisrecommended,and MapLineWeightstoColorsshouldbeselected.Whenreimportingthefile,usethe reverseprocesstoconvertthecolorsbacktolineweights.

Parameter
LineWeights MapLineWeightsto Colors

DXF/DWG File Export |

817

Line Weight Conversions


VW Line Weight (mm)
0 0.010.07 0.080.11 0.120.14 0.150.16 0.170.19 0.200.22 0.230.27 0.280.32 0.330.37 0.380.45 0.460.51

DXF Line Weight (mm)


Deleted 0.05 0.09 0.13 0.15 0.18 0.20 0.25 0.30 0.35 0.40 0.50

VW Line Weight (mm)


0.520.56 0.570.65 0.660.75 0.760.85 0.860.95 0.961.03 1.041.13 1.141.30 1.311.49 1.501.75 1.762.05 2.066.48

DXF Line Weight (mm)


0.53 0.60 0.70 0.80 0.90 1.00 1.06 1.20 1.40 1.58 2.00 2.11

Managing Saved Export Options


Ifyouhavesavedasetofexportoptions,usetheManagebuttonontheDXFDWGExportOptionsdialogboxto renameordeletethesesavedsettingswhenneeded. TomanagesavedDXF/DWGexportsettings: 1. SelectFile>Export>ExportDXF/DWG.TheDXFDWGExportOptionsdialogboxopens. 2. ClickManage. TheSavedSettingsdialogboxopens.Selectthesetofsavedexportoptionstochange.

818

| Chapter 19: Importing and Exporting Files


Description
Selectandenteranewnameforthesetofoptions.Iftheenterednameisalreadyassignedto anothersetofoptions,youarepromptedtoconfirmthatyouwanttoreplacetheexistingset withthesetbeingsaved. Selecttodeletethesetofoptions.Youarepromptedtoconfirmthatyouwanttodeletethe savedsettings.

Parameter
Rename

Delete

3. ClickOKtoclosetheSavedSettingsdialogbox.ClickOKagaintoclosetheDXFDWGExportOptionsdialog box.

Items Which Cannot Export to DXF/DWG


CertainVectorworksitemshavenoequivalentinDXF/DWGandthereforecannotbeexported.Otheritemscouldbe exported,butinadequatesupportinAutoCADmakesitinadvisabletodoso.Afewobjects(suchasworksheets)could intheorybeexportedtosomethinguseful,buttheVectorworksprogramcurrentlylackssupportfordoingso. ThefollowinglistincludesitemsthatdonotexporttoDXF/DWG,forvariousreasons. Textures Lights Imageprops Individuallayerscales EPSorvectorPICTsinsomecases Grayingoflayersandclasses Renderworksbackgroundimages Recordformatinformationattachedtoarbitraryobjects Designlayerswithperspectiveviews Obliquecavalierandobliquecabinetprojections Objectnamesattachedtoarbitraryobjects LayertransfermodesotherthanPaint Dependingontheexportoptions,eitherlayersorclasses

DXF/DWG File Import


ConsiderthefollowingpointswhenimportingfromDXF/DWGfileformattoVectorworksfileformat.

Item
LineWeights

Import Notes
Ifno .ctbfileispresentandtruelineweightsarepresent,thenthelineweightsimport exactly.Ifno .ctbfileispresentandnotruelineweightsarepresent,valueswillhavetobe enteredmanually.Thevaluesinthedialogcanbeinitializedbyfirstimportingafilethat doeshaveanassociated .ctbfile.Thiscreatesahiddenrecordthatstoresthemapping information.Atemplatefilecouldbecreatedafterdoingsuchanimport,tosavethe valuesforfutureuse. Textissometimesunlinkedfromsymbolswhenimportedtopreservetheoriginallook. Optionsareprovidedforpreservingthelinksinstead. Sometextstylesarenotsupported;whentheactiveplaneissettoLayer,textin3D symbolsisimported;whentheactiveplaneissettoScreenPlane,textin3Dsymbolsis notimported.

Text

ModelSpaceEntities

Modelspaceentitiesareimportedasdesignlayerobjects.

DXF/DWG File Import | Item


PaperSpaceand Viewports Points Multilines bhatches,Images,and Wipeouts

819

Import Notes
EachpaperspacelayoutcreatesaVectorworkssheetlayerwhenimported.DXF viewportsareimportedasVectorworksviewports,withthesamescale,view,and projection. Pointsareimportedassymbolsorasloci,dependingonthefileandtheimportoptions chosen. Multilinesareimportedasgroupedlines.Anoptionisprovidedtoimportthemaswalls. bhatchdefinitionsareimportedashatchdefinitions. Asingleobjectassociativebhatchwithnoislandsisimportedasanequivalentobject withasolidorhatchfill. Amultiobject,nonassociativebhatchorassociativebhatchisimportedasanobject withzerolineweightandsolidorhatchfill. Abhatchwithislandsisimportedasoneormorepolylineswithholes,withsolidor hatchfill. ImagesreferencedbytheDXF/DWGfileareimportedasVectorworksimages. Awipeoutisimportedasapolygonwithasolidfillthatisthesamecolorasthe background.

AECobjectscreated withAutoCADs ArchitecturalDesktop

AEC(architectural,engineering,andconstruction)objectssuchaswalls,doors,and windowsareimportedasgroupedlinesandpolygons(2Dconversion),orgrouped meshes(3Dconversion)

Preparing to Import
TheVectorworksprogramimportsversions2.5through2011ofDWGandtextandbinaryDXF.Beforeimport,the followingstepsarerecommendedtoenhancethelikelihoodofasatisfactorytranslation: 1. ReadInformationLostinTranslationonpage 804formoreinformationaboutthedifferencesbetweenthe DXF/DWGandVectorworksfileformats. 2. ItisnotnecessarytoexplodetheentiredrawinginAutoCADbeforeimporting.Ifafileisnotimportingcorrectly, tryexplodingindividualproblemobjectsbeforeimport. 3. Ifpossible,communicatewiththefileoriginator.Determinetheintendedunits,pagesize,andscaleofthefile, alongwiththeintendedcolortolineweightmapping,ifany.

DXF/DWG Import Procedure


Multiple,single,oranentirefolderofDXF/DWGfilescanbeimported.TheimportedfilescancreatenewVectorworks files,createnewsymbols,orbeimportedintothecurrentfile.Theresultsoftheimportprocessaresummarizedina logfile. WhenamasterfileisimportedwiththeImportSingleDXF/DWGFilecommand,theexternalreferencefiles(xrefs) areautomaticallybound.TheVectorworksprogramdisplaysanalertifanyxrefsaremissing,alongwiththenamesof themissingfiles.(Noalertappearswhenmultiplefilesareimported.) Verifythatthebestpossibleoptionswereselectedforimportbycheckingtheimportedfile.Iftheimportwasnot successful,tryagainwithdifferentoptions.Importoptionscanbesavedasaset.

820

| Chapter 19: Importing and Exporting Files


Sometimesfilesimportwithlargenumbersofsmalllinesthatareconnectedendtoend.Tocreateasingleobject, firstusetheEdit>SelectConnectedObjectscommandtoselectallconnectedlines.Thenusethe Modify > Composecommandtocomposethemintooneobject.SeeSelectingConnectedObjectsonpage 281, andComposingObjectsandSurfacesonpage 280.

Importing DXF/DWG Files


WhenyouhaveseveralDXF/DWGfilestoimport,usetheImportDXF/DWGcommandformaximumflexibility. ToimportDXF/DWGfiles: 1. Createablankfileandsetthedrawingsize,oropenanemptytemplatethatalreadyhasthecorrectdrawingsize. ImportintoanexistingVectorworksdrawingisnotrecommended,becauseitcanproduceunexpectedresults. Forthesamereason,ifyouimportmorethanonefilewiththeImportDXF/DWGcommand,ensurethatthefiles areverysimilar. 2. SelectFile>Import>ImportDXF/DWG. TheDXF/DWGImportdialogboxopens.

Parameter
Source OneorMoreFiles

Description
Importsonlyonefileoronlycertainfileswithinafolder.ClickChooseFilesand chooseoneormoreDXF/DWGfilestoimport.Thenumberoffilesselectedand theirlocationisdisplayed.

DXF/DWG File Import | Parameter


All___FilesinFolder IncludeSubfolders Destination CurrentFile SymbolsinCurrentFile

821

Description
Importsallfilesoftheselectedtype(DXFonly,DWGonly,orDXFandDWG) fromaspecifiedfolder.ClickChooseFolderandchoosethesourcefolder. IfAllFilesinFolderisselected,includesallfilesoftheselectedtypeinall subfolders.

Importstheselectedfile(s)intothecurrentfile.Ifseveralfilesareselected,anew layeriscreatedforeachimportedmodelspace. Importstheselectedfile(s)intothecurrentfile.Eachfilecreatesaseparatesymbol. Thisisconvenientwhenimportingpartcatalogs,forexample.Paperspaceisnot imported. Convertstheselectedfile(s)intonew,separateVectorworksfilesintheselected folder.ClickChooseFoldertochoosethelocation.Thisisthebestoptionwhen convertingmanyfiles. IfNewFilesinFolderisselected,selectatemplatetouseforeachnewfile,or selectBlankDocument.Thetemplatecanbeusefulforspecifyingthepagesizeto useformodelspaceobjects(whichcanalsoaffectdashscalesandconversionof polylinewidths).Italsoallowsspecificationofdefaultcolortolineweight mappings,andinsomecases,units.

NewFilesinFolder

UseDocumentTemplate

References BindExternalReferences IgnoreExternalReferences UseDesignLayer Viewports (VectorworksDesignSeries required) UseLayerImport ImportstheselectedmasterDXF/DWGfileandallitsexternalreferencesintothe currentfile ImportstheselectedmasterDXF/DWGfilewithoutitsexternalreferences IfNewFilesinFolderisselected,importstheselectedmasterDXF/DWGfileand allitsexternalreferencesintoseparateVectorworksdocuments;theexternal documentsarereferencedfromthemasterVectorworksdocumentusingdesign layerviewports IfNewFilesinFolderisselected,importstheselectedmasterDXF/DWGfileand allitsexternalreferencesintoseparateVectorworksdocuments;theexternal documentsarereferencedfromthemasterVectorworksdocumentusinglayer importing

ArchitecturalObjects 2DView 3DView ImportOptions ImportsAECobjectscreatedwithAutoCADsArchitecturalDesktop(suchas walls,doors,andwindows)in2Dview;only2Dgraphicsareimported ImportsAECobjectsin3Dview;only3Dgraphicsareimported

822

| Chapter 19: Importing and Exporting Files


Description
Selectasetofimportoptionstoapplytotheimportedfiles.Ifseveralfileswillbe imported,itisrecommendedthatUnitsSettingInFilebesettoDetermine Automatically. TheDefaultoptionsarethosethatshipwiththeVectorworkssoftware,and theycannotbechanged. Toselectcustomoptionsandsavethemasaset,select<ActiveSettings>oraset name,andthenclickSetCustomOptionstoopentheDXFDWGImport Optionsdialogbox(seeDXF/DWGImportOptionsonpage 823). Tousecustomimportoptionsthathavebeensaved,selectthesetnamefrom thelist.

Parameter
UseSettings

3. ClickOKtoimportthefile(s). Theprogressoftheimportisdisplayedforeachimportedfileduringimport.Thefinalresultsoftheimport processareshownintheDXF/DWGImportResultsdialogbox.

4. ClickDetailstoopentheresultslogfile.Thelogtextfile,namedDXF_DWFImportLog,isplacedinthespecified destinationfolderifitexists,orintheVectorworksapplicationfolder.Newloginformationisappendedtoany existinglogfile.

Importing a Single DXF/DWG File


ToimportasingleDXForDWGfile: 1. Createablankfileandsetthedrawingsize,oropenanemptytemplatethatalreadyhasthecorrectdrawingsize. ImportintoanexistingVectorworksdrawingisnotrecommended,becauseitcanproduceunexpectedresults. Forexample,theclassattributesforexistingobjectsinthedrawingmaybeoverwritten.Workgroupreferencing maygivebetterresultsinthesecases. 2. SelectFile>Import>ImportSingleDXF/DWGFile. TheImportDXF/DWGFilesdialogboxopens.Selectthefiletoimport;theprogressoftheinitialimportis displayed. 3. Duringtheimport,theDXFDWGImportOptionsdialogboxopens. SelectappropriateimportoptionsasdescribedinDXF/DWGImportOptionsonpage 823. 4. ClickOKtofinishimportingthefile.Aprogressbardisplays,alongwiththenumberofobjectsprocessedand freememoryavailable. 5. Checktheimportedfile.

DXF/DWG File Import |

823

DXF/DWG Import Options


TheDXFDWGImportOptionsdialogboxprovidesallthenecessaryoptionstoimportaDXF/DWGfilewiththe maximumfileintegrity. Thefirsttab,PrimarySettings,containsimportantbasicsettings.TheGraphicAttributesandObjectstabscontain settingsforadvanceduserstocustomizetheimportprocess. Optionsthatdonotapplytothecurrentfileimportappeardimmed,andanexplanationdisplaysnexttotheoption. Forexample,ifnopaperspaceobjectsarecontainedintheDXF/DWGfiletobeimported,thePaperSpaceUnits optionsaredimmed,andthemessageNopaperspaceobjectswerefounddisplays. Iftruelineweightsarenotpresentinthefile,youcanmaptheDXF/DWGlinecolorstoVectorworkslineweightsfor import(ontheMapColorstoLineWeightsdialogbox). Tomakecustomimportsfasterandeasier,savethesetsofoptionsthatyouusefrequently.

Saving Import Options


Tosaveasetofcustomimportoptionsforfutureuse: 1. SelectFile>Import>ImportDXF/DWG. 2. FromtheDXF/DWGImportdialogbox,select<ActiveSettings>orasetnamefromtheUseSettingslist. 3. ClickSetCustomOptionstoopentheDXFDWGImportOptionsdialogbox. 4. SettheoptionsonthePrimarySettings,GraphicAttributes,andObjectstabsasneeded. 5. ClickSave,enteranameforthesavedsettingsintheSaveSettingsdialogbox,andclickOK. 6. ThenewsetdisplaysontheUseSettingslistontheDXF/DWGImportdialogbox,andcanbeselectedwhen needed.

Managing Import Options


Tomanageexistingsetsofcustomimportoptions: 1. SelectFile>Import>ImportDXF/DWG. 2. FromtheDXF/DWGImportdialogbox,select<ActiveSettings>orasetnamefromtheUseSettingslist. 3. ClickSetCustomOptionstoopentheDXFDWGImportOptionsdialogbox. 4. ClickManage. TheSavedSettingsdialogboxopens.

5. Selectthesettorenameordeletefromthelist,andclickRenameorDelete.

824

| Chapter 19: Importing and Exporting Files


Ifrenamingaset,enterthenewNameandclickOK.Ifdeleting,confirmthatthesetshouldbedeleted.

6. ClickOK.

Primary Settings Tab


TheoptionsonthePrimarySettingstabestablishthebasicimportoptions.

Parameter
Settings

Description
Allowstheimportoptionstobesavedasaset;seeDXF/DWGImportOptionson page 823

DXF/DWG File Import | Parameter


ModelSpaceUnits

825

Description
Version2000andlaterDXF/DWGfilessupporttrueunits.Whenimportingafilewithtrue units,theVectorworksprogramdeterminesandsetstheunitsautomatically.IftheDXFor DWGfiledoesnotcontaintrueunitsinformation,theprogramtriestoguesstheunits setting;however,itmaystillrequireadjusting(seeSettingUnitsManuallyonpage 827). TheVectorworksprogramtriestodeterminetheimportedfilesunitsettings,anddisplays theinformationtotherightofUnitsSettinginFile,alongwiththeunitformat(suchas Architectural),andthescalingfactorthatwillbeassumed(suchas1DXFUnits=1). TousethedisplayedunitsettingsintheVectorworksfile,selectDetermine Automaticallyfromthelist,andalsoselectSetVectorworksUnitstoMatch. Touseanotherunittype(suchasCentimeters),selectitfromthelist,andalsoselectSet VectorworksUnitstoMatch. Touseacustomunittype,ortochangethedefaultedscalingfactor,selectCustomfrom thelist,andthenspecifytheunitsinthetextboxes.EntertheunitlessDXF/DWG numberinthefirstbox,andanumberwithunitsinthesecondbox.(Forexample,15 DXFUnits=1intheVectorworksdrawing.)Theunitsdisplayedinthesecondboxare thesameasthecurrentVectorworksdocumentsettings,butotherunitscanbeenteredas longastheappropriateunitssuffixisincluded,suchas3cm.AlsoselectSet VectorworksUnitstoMatch. TousetheunitscurrentlysetintheVectorworksfile,selectUseVectorworksDocument Units.TheVectorworksprogramassumesthat1DXFunit=1currentdocumentunit whenimportingobjects.

UnitsSettingIn File

SetVectorworks UnitstoMatch

ChangestheVectorworksdocumentunitsandunitsformattomatchtheDXF/DWGfile beingimported;thephysicalsizesofimportedobjectswillnotbeaffected.Thisoptionis disabledwhenUseVectorworksDocumentUnitsisselectedfromtheUnitsSettingInFile list. Selectthepaperspaceunitsforconvertingpaperspaceobjects.Version2000andlaterDXF/ DWGfilescanhavemultiplepaperspacelayouts,witheachlayouthavingitsownunits setting;ifthatisthecase,selectByLayout(thisoptionisnotavailableforearlierversionsof DXF/DWG). Oncetheunitshavebeendetermined,specifythescaletodisplaytheimportedfile. Choosingthemodelspacescaleisimportant.Thescaleaffectsthedashlengthscalingand theconversionofpolylineswithwidths(worldspacelineweights)toVectorworksline weights.Ifthescaleordrawingsizearesetincorrectly,somepolylinesmayseemtohave thewronglineweightandsomedashesmaybetoolongortooshort.

PaperSpaceUnits

ModelSpace

FittoPage

TheVectorworksprogramestimatesascalebasedontheboundsofalloftheobjectsin modelspace;thescalefitsthoseobjectsonthepage.Selectthisoptiontousetheestimated value. Toimportatadifferentscale,setthescalemanually.ClickScaletoopenthestandardLayer Scaledialogbox,andselectthedesiredscale.(AllLayersandScaleTextdonotapplyto DXF/DWGfiles.)ClickOKtoreturntothePrimarySettingstab,andtheselectedscale displays.

ThisScale

826

| Chapter 19: Importing and Exporting Files


Description
SelectthisoptiontocenterimportedobjectsonthepageintheVectorworksdocument.The originismovedsothatthemostrecentimporthascorrectcoordinates.Inotherwords,ifall theimportedobjectsareshiftedtobecenteredonthepage,thentheuseroriginshiftsby thesameamount.Onlyobjectsfromthecurrentimportaremovedthough,sopreviously importedobjectsdonotgetcenteredandthusarenolongeratthesamelocationrelativeto theuserorigin. Deselectthisoptiontopositionimportedobjectsaccordingtoeithertheuserorigin currentlysetintheVectorworksdocument,ortheinternalworldorigin(aconstant), dependingontheUseWorldOriginInsteadofUserOriginsetting.DeselectingCenter AfterImportkeepsoriginsalignedformultiplefileimports.Notethatsomeimported objectsmaydisplayoffofthepageifCenterAfterImportisnotselected.

Parameter
CenterAfter Import

UseWorldOrigin InsteadofUser Origin

IfCenterAfterImportisnotselected,selectthisoptiontopositionimportedobjectsinthe Vectorworksfileaccordingtotheworldorigin(aconstantvalueinallVectorworks documents). Deselectthisoptiontopositionimportedobjectsaccordingtotheuserorigincurrentlyset intheVectorworksdocument.

2D/3DConversion

FromtheConvertObjectsTolist,specifywhetherobjectsshouldbeimportedas3D,2D,or amixtureof2Dand3D.Generally,selectthe2Dand3Doption,whichconvertsobjectsthat appeartobe2D(planarobjectsparalleltoorintheactivelayerplane)toVectorworks2D objects.Theremainingobjectsareimportedas3D. Toimport3DversionsofArchitecturalDesktop(ADT)objectssuchaswallsanddoors, selectthe3DViewsettingforArchitecturalObjectsontheDXF/DWGImportdialogbox, andselecta3Dconversionoption.Toimportboth2Dand3Dversionsoftheobjects,import themtwicefromtheDXF/DWGfile:oncewith3DViewselected,andoncewith2DView selected. BecausetheVectorworksprogramdoesnothave3Dtext,selecting2Dand3Dcancause textin3Dsymbolstobedeleted.WhentheactiveplaneissettoLayer,textin3Dsymbolsis imported;whentheactiveplaneissettoScreenPlane,textin3Dsymbolsisnotimported. Inaddition,objectsparalleltotheactivelayerplanethathaveathicknessareimportedas 3Deventhoughtheoriginatorofthefilemaynothaveintendedforthemtobe3D.If problemsoccur,importallobjectsas2DbyselectingAll2D.Awarningdisplaysifselecting thisoptionwilldistortanyobjects,suchas3Dsymbolswith3Drotation. Ifthefilecontainsonlya3Dmodel,selecttheAll3Doption.Otherwise,partsofalarge objectcomposedofseveralentitiescouldbeconvertedto2D. Occasionally,noneofthechoicesisappropriateforalltheobjects.Inthiscase,selectthe optionthatbestconvertsmostoftheobjects.

SometimesDXF/DWGdrawingsaresplitupintopiecesandsavedasseparatefiles,suchasdifferentareasofalarge citymap.Whenmultiplefileslikethisareimportedintoonefile,theyneedtohavetheircoordinatesaligned,andtheir layerscalesetthesame.TherecommendedworkflowistoimportthefirstfilewiththedefaultFittoPagescale,and withCenterAfterImportturnedon.Forsubsequentfiles,manuallysetthescaletothesamescaledefaultedforthe firstfile,andturnoffthecenteringoption. ThePrimarySettingstabcoversthebasicrequirementsforimportingaDXF/DWGfile.Iftheresultsarenot satisfactory,exploretheoptionsontheGraphicAttributesandObjectstabs.

DXF/DWG File Import | Setting Units Manually

827

Ifobjectsseemtobethewrongphysicalsizeafterimport,ensurethattheunitschosenarecorrect.(ModelSpaceScale onlyaffectsthedisplay,butUnitsSettinginFileaffectstheactualmeasuredsizeoftheobjects.)DXF/DWGfilesdo notalwayshavethetrueunitsset,andsometimeshaveincorrectunitsset. TheVectorworksprogramguessestheunitsbasedontheinformationavailable,andindicateswhatitfoundinthe dynamictextatthetopofthepane.Iftheguessiswrong,settheunitsmanually. Ifyoudonotknowthecorrectunits,butyouknowthetruelengthofoneoftheobjectsinthedrawing,determine thetrueunitsasfollows. ImportthefileandchooseCustomunits,settingtheeditboxestosomethinglike1DXFUnits=1.Afterimport, measurethesizeoftheobjectthatyouknowthetruelengthof.Closethedocumentandredotheimport,butthis timesettheunitstoCustomwiththesevaluesintheeditboxes:(measuredlength)DXFUnits=(truelength).For example,ifthetruelengthis1,butthemeasuredlengthis2.54,enter2.54DXFUnits=1.(Donotincludeunits inthefirstbox,andifinfeetandinchesmode,justusethetotalmeasuredlengthininches.) IftheVectorworksprogramfindsanexactmatchforthatratio,itwillchangetheCustomchoicetothecorrect units.(Intheexampleabove,itchangesittoCentimeters.)Ifthemeasurementsandtheratioarenotexact(for example,2.539insteadof2.54),manuallyadjustittoastandardratio.Commonratioshavevaluessuchas1,12, 2.54,andpowersof10.Examples:1/12,12/10,2.54/0.01,etc. Ifyoudonotknowanytruelengths,butthedocumentcontainsdimensionobjectsthatshowlengths,followthe stepsjustdescribedwiththefollowingchange:SelectConvertDimensionstoGroups(seeObjectsTabon page 830),import,andusethevalueintheimporteddimensionobjectasthetruelength. NormallytheVectorworksprogramleavesthedocumentunitssettingunchangedafteranimport.IfaDXF/DWGfile issettometers,buttheVectorworksdocumentissettofeetandinches,thenadimensionobjectthatshows1meterin theoriginalfilewillshowas33.37intheimportedfile.Ifyouwanttheimporteddrawingtobethesameasthe original,selecttheSetVectorworksUnitstoMatchoption.Youcanalsoimportwiththeoptiontoconvertdimensions togroups(seeObjectsTabonpage 830)ifyouwantthedocumenttostayinthecurrentunits,butyouwantthe dimensionstolookthesameasintheoriginal.

Graphic Attributes Tab


TheGraphicAttributestabcontainssettingsforadvanceduserstocustomizetheimportprocess.

828

| Chapter 19: Importing and Exporting Files

Parameter
ColorandLine Weights

Description
MostDXF/DWGfilesdonotusetruelineweights,althoughthatisstartingtochange. Coloristraditionallyusedtoindicatelineweights.Therearesomestandardsthatspecify mappingsbetweencolorsandlineweights,butthosestandardsareoftenignored.The Vectorworksprogramautomaticallychoosesthestandardmappingswhenexporting,if thedocumentdoesnotalreadyhaveahiddenrecordleftoverfromapreviousexportor importthatspecifiesthemappings.Whenimporting,theVectorworksprogramdoesnot choosethestandardmappings,butratherdefaultstoareasonablelineweightforall colors,implicitlyalertingtheuserthattheyshoulddeterminethetruemappingsthatare desired. Ifdesired,specifymappingsbyselectingMapColorstoLineWeights.Selectthedesired colormappingduringtheimportprocess;ifnecessary,communicatewiththefile originatortodeterminethecorrectlineweights.

DXF/DWG File Import | Parameter Description

829

Thecoloredlinescanbechangedtoblack(orwhiteifthebackgroundisblack).SelectSet ColorstoBlackandWhite.NotethatmostDXF/DWGfilesarecreatedwithablack background,andthecolorsmaynotshowupwellonawhitebackground. Version2000andlateruses .ctbfilestostorecolormappinginformation,butitalso supportslineweights,sotheseoptionsmayormaynotbeneeded. Ifno .ctbfileisdetectedduringimport,andtruelineweightsarepresent,MapColorsto LineWeightsisdeselectedautomatically,andthelineweightsimportexactly. Ifno .ctbfileisdetected,andtruelineweightsarenotpresent,MapColorstoLine Weightsisselectedautomatically.TheMapColorstoLineWeightsdialogboxdisplays toallowmanualmapping(bydefault,allcolorsaremappedtothesamelineweight,or tothelastmappingusedduringthecurrentsession). Ifa .ctbfileisdetected,MapColorstoLineWeightsisselectedautomatically,andthe Vectorworksprogramreadsthefiletodeterminehowcolorsshouldmaptolineweights.A dialogboxdisplaystoallowmanualmapping(valuesarepresetbythemappingfile; duplicatemappingsareindicatedbyitalics). Ifyouusedasetofsavedimportoptions,the .ctbfileoverridesanycolormappings inyoursavedsettings.Removethe .ctbfilefromtheDXF/DWGfilefoldertousethe savedsettingsinstead. DashPatterns Insomefiles,dashlengthsmayimportataninappropriatescale.Changethedashlength scalebyselectingManuallyScaleAllDashLengthsbyandenteringascalevalue.A suggestedscalevalueisdisplayed.Thescalingdoesnotaffectlinethickness.The Vectorworksprogramconvertsanydashpatternsthatareextremelysmalltosolidlinesto avoidunacceptableslowdownsduringfiledisplayandprinting. DXF/DWGlayerscorrespondmorecloselytoVectorworksclassesthantheydoto Vectorworkslayers.Normally,importDXF/DWGlayersasVectorworksclasses. ThereisnoequivalenttoVectorworkslayersinaDXF/DWGfile.WhenDXF/DWGlayers aremappedtoVectorworkslayers,awarningdisplaysifsomeoftheobjectsinsymbolsor groupswouldleavetheiroriginallayersandtakeonthelayerofthesymbolorgroup.For simplefileswithoutblocks,orfileswithobjectsinsidetheblockthataresettobyblock attributes,importinglayersasVectorworkslayersshouldposenoproblems. TogroupimportedDXFlayersinVectorworksclassandlayerlistsforeasyidentification, selectAddPrefixtoImportedDXFLayers.Enterthecustomprefixtouseinthefieldto therightofthecheckbox.IfImportDXFLayersAsClassesisselected,theprefixanda hyphenisaddedtothebeginningoftheclassnamewhenimportedintoaVectorworksfile. Similarly,IfImportDXFLayersAsLayersisselected,theprefixandahyphenisaddedto thebeginningofthelayernamewhenimportedintoaVectorworksfile. RaysandXlines(orconstructionlines)areDXF/DWGobjectsthataresimilarto Vectorworksguides.Araystartsatapointandgoesofftoinfinity,whileaconstruction lineisanchoredatapointandgoesofftoinfinityinbothdirections.SelectRaysand XLinesuseGuidesClasstoconvertRaysandConstructionLinesintolinesintheGuides class,whichareoffinitelength.

Classes/Layers

830

| Chapter 19: Importing and Exporting Files

Objects Tab
TheObjectstabcontainssettingsforadvanceduserstocustomizetheimportprocess.Inparticular,decisionsabout preservingobjectvisibilityandrecordfieldlinksareavailable.

Parameter
Points

Description
DXF/DWGPointsacteitherlikealocusinaVectorworksfile(adrawingaidthatisnot printed),orlikeasymbolthatisvisibleandcanbeprinted.Selectwhethertoimportpoints asLociorasSymbols.Thedefaultbehavioristoimportassymbolsifthepointstylehas specifiedarealworldsize(thatis,itiszoominvariantandalwaysprintsthesame),oras lociifthepointstyleisspecifiedasapercentageofthepixelsizeofthedrawingwindow (thatis,itvarieswiththezoomlevel).SelectUseGuidesClasstoimportpointsas SymbolsintheVectorworksGuidesClass;thisallowsthemtobehidden.Inthe Vectorworksprogram,usetheShow/HideGuidescommandstotoggletheirdisplay. AttributesinaDXF/DWGfilearesimilartolinkedtextinaVectorworksfile.Selecthow tohandleattributeconversionintoVectorworkssymbollinkedtext.Regardlessofthe selection,recordformatswillbecreatedbasedontheattributesfoundduringimport,and importedblockswithattributeswillhaverecordformatsattached. ChooseaLinkedTextHandlingmethodfromthelist.Dependingonthefiletobe imported,notalloptionsareavailable.

BlockAttributes

PreserveLookand Links

Thisoptionshouldbeselectedwhenavailable.Theattributeswilldisplayastheydidin theDXF/DWGfile,andtheywillbeconvertedtosymbollinkedtext. Ifthefilecontainsinvisibleattributesorattributesthatoverridetheattributedefinitions, thisoptionisnotavailable.

DXF/DWG File Import | Parameter


PreserveLook

831

Description
Thisisthenextbestoption.TheattributeswilllookandprintastheydidintheDXF/DWG file,butsomesymboltextmaybecomeunlinked,ifnecessary,topreservethelook.Symbol recordfieldupdatesarenotreflectedinunlinkedtext.Withthisoption,anindividual symbolcouldhaveamixtureoflinkedandunlinkedtext. ThisoptionisavailablewhentheDXF/DWGfilecontainsattributesmarkedasinvisible. Thistypeofattributeisconvertedintoarecordformatattachedtoasymbol,butisnot convertedtolinkedtext.Thelookofthedrawingshouldbepreserved,butminorchanges tovisibilityarepossible.Theadvantageofthismethodisthatlinkedtextispreservedfor allvisibleattributes. Thelinkbetweenrecordfieldsandsymboltextispreservedwiththisoption.Anyinvisible attributeswillbecomevisible.ThelookoftheDXF/DWGfilemaynotbepreserved,butthe symboltextwillnotbeunlinked. Allattributetextishiddenuponimport.Theinformationisstillattachedtotheobjectin recordformat,butitisnotvisible. Eachblockattributeimportsasarecordformatfield.SelectGroupRecordFieldstogroup thosefieldsintoasinglerecordformat.TheVectorworksprogramgroupssetsofattributes intorecordformatsiftheyhavethesamesetoffieldnames.Forexample,iftwoblocks (symbols)haveattributeswithfieldnamesofcolorandpartnumber,bothblocksare convertedwiththesamerecordformat.Ifoneoftheblockshascolor,partnumber, andprice,whiletheotheronlyhastwoofthose,thentheblocksareconvertedwith differentrecordformats.Whengrouped,therecordformatnameiscreatedfromthe namesofthefirstfewfieldsintherecordformat. DeselectGroupRecordFieldstocreateonerecordformatperfield,withnogrouping. Withoutgrouping,therecordformatusesthesamenameastherecordfield.

PreserveVisible Links

PreserveAllLinks

HideAll GroupRecord Fields

MultiLines

Multilines(ormlines)aresimilarinsomewaystowallsinaVectorworksfile,inthatthey canhavebreaksthatarehealedandcanbeconnectedtoothermultilines.Thereare severalsignificantdifferencesbetweenmultilinesandwalls,butanoptionisprovidedto importmultilinesaswalls.DonotselectthisoptionunlessallmultilinesintheDXF/DWG fileareintendedtobewalls. Whenyouimportmultilinesaswalls,thewallheightsmayneedtobeadjusted.Todo so,selectTools>CustomSelection,selectallwalls,andchangetheirheightinthe ObjectInfopalette.

Blocks IgnoreBlock Clipping SelectIgnoreBlockClippingtoimportaclippedblockasacroppeddesignlayerviewport (ifVectorworksDesignSeriesisinstalled)orasacroppedlayerlink.Thiscancreatemany layersintheVectorworksfile,andthecreatedobjectscannotbemanipulatedeasily. DeselectIgnoreBlockClippingtoimportaclippedblockasanormalscaledorunscaled Vectorworkssymbol,whichmaylookverydifferentfromtheoriginalimage. Dimensions Bydefault,theimportprocessautomaticallycreatescustomdimensionstandardstomatch thedimensionstylesintheDXF/DWGfile.IfadimensionwascustomizedintheDXF/ DWGfileafterthestylewasapplied,theconverteddimensionsmaynotmatchthe originals;selectConvertDimensionstoGroupstoconvertthedimensionsintogroups instead.

832

| Chapter 19: Importing and Exporting Files

DXF/DWG Items Which Cannot Import to Vectorworks


CertainDXF/DWGitemshavenoequivalentinaVectorworksfileandcannotbeimported.Afewotherobjects theoreticallycouldbeimported,buttheVectorworksprogramdoesnotcurrentlysupportthem. Namedviews Textures Lights rtext SHXfonts Usercoordinatesystems(UCS) Customlinestylesandshapefiles DXFgroups(namedselectionsets,notthesameasVectorworksgroups) CertainobjectsfromindustryspecificvariationsofAutoCAD,ifthoseobjectsdonothave proxygraphicssavedinthefile.AECobjectsthatwerecreatedwithAutoCADs ArchitecturalDesktopcanbeimportedasgroupsof2Dor3Dobjects,dependingonhow youimport;forexample,adoorimportedfromaDWGfilewitha3Dviewisconvertedtoa groupof3DmeshobjectsinaVectorworksfile.

Worksheets

20

TheworksheetfunctionalityintheVectorworksprogramcomplementsitsdrawingfunctionality,makingitacomplete packageforyourworkprocess.Fromtheinformationpresentinthefile,worksheetscanbecreatedtotrackdata, createcostandmateriallists,performcalculations,andmore.Informationinworksheetscanbecreatedandedited withoutleavingtheVectorworksfile;thiseliminatestheneedforaseparateprogramandreducesthenumberoffiles perproject. Worksheetsincludebothdatabaseandspreadsheetfunctionality.Datacanbeobtainedfromthedrawing,andthen calculationscanbeperformedonthatdata. Worksheetscanbeimportedandexported,whichallowsdatatobesharedbetweenworksheets,files,andother spreadsheetprograms.Aworksheetcanalsobeaddedtoadrawingandprinted.

Creating Worksheets
Forcomplexdrawings,itisbesttocreateseparateworksheetsforeachtaskratherthanonelargeworksheet. Worksheetscanbelinkedtosharedata,formulas,andcalculations. Worksheetscanbecreatedinseveralways: UsetheCreateReportcommandtoselectworksheetdatafromtheinformationassociatedwiththeobjectsinthe drawing.SeeCreatingReportsonpage 833. UsetheResourceBrowsertocreateablankworksheet,andthenaddthedesiredinformationtoit.SeeCreating aBlankWorksheetonpage 836. ImportworksheetsfromotherVectorworksfilesorfromotherspreadsheetprograms.SeeImporting Worksheetsonpage 868. Oncecreated,aworksheetissavedwiththefileandislistedintheResourceBrowser.Itcanalsobeaccessedby selectingWindow>Worksheets. Ifthesamesetofobjectsaretypicallyusedinyourdrawings,youcancreateatemplatefilewithaworksheetthat servesasamasterpricelistlistingalltheobjectsandtheircosts.Then,tocreatematerialslistsandcostestimatesfor anewdesign,simplyimportorreferencetheworksheetinthenewdrawingfile.

Creating Reports
TheCreateReportcommandallowsyoutoselectdatathatisattachedtoobjectsinadrawing(suchasmanufacturer, size,andprice)andcreateaworksheetfromit.Thecommandcaneithercreateanewworksheetorappenddatabase rowstoanexistingworksheet.Formoreinformationabouthowtoattachdatatoobjects,seeRecordFormatson page 191. Tocreateareportfromobjectsinadrawing: 1. SelectTools>Reports>CreateReport. TheCreateReportdialogboxopens.Specifythereportcriteria.ItemsintheWorksheetColumnslistarelistedin theorderinwhichtheywillappearintheworksheet;tochangetheorder,clickinthe#columnanddragtheitem tothedesiredpositioninthelist.

834

| Chapter 20: Worksheets

Parameter
Title Listall Listobjectswithrecord PossibleColumns WorksheetColumns Add / AddAll Remove / RemoveAll Summarizeitemswith thesame Options

Description
Enteraworksheettitle;ifthereportdataisappendedtoanexistingworksheet,thistitleis addedtoaspreadsheetcellabovethedatabaserowsthatareappended Selectwhethertolistallsymbolsinthedrawing,ortolistalldrawingobjectsthathavea specificrecordattachedtothem Ifyouselectedtheoptiontolistallobjectswithaspecificrecord,selecttherecordformat touse Liststhecolumnsthatcanbeselectedforinclusionintheworksheet Liststhecolumnsthatarecurrentlyselectedforinclusionintheworksheet;initially,all possiblecolumnsareplacedintheWorksheetColumnslist Toaddacolumntotheworksheet,selectitinthePossibleColumnslistandclickAdd; clickAddAlltomoveallthecolumnstotheWorksheetColumnslist Toremoveanitemfromtheworksheet,selectitintheWorksheetColumnslistandclick Remove;clickRemoveAlltomoveallthecolumnstothePossibleColumnslist Summarizessymbolsorobjectsthatcontainidenticalfields,ratherthancreatinganew databasesubrowforeach;selectthefieldtosummarize OpenstheCreateReportOptionsdialogbox

2. ClickOptionstospecifyadditionalreportcriteria. TheCreateReportOptionsdialogboxopens.

Creating Worksheets |

835

Parameter
Newworksheet Appendtoexistingworksheet Searchinsymbols Searchinpluginobjects

Description
Selecttocreateanewworksheet Selecttoappendtheinformationtoaworksheet,andthenselectthetarget worksheet Selecttosearchinsidesymbolinstancesforembeddedobjectsorsymbolsand includethisinformationintheworksheet Selecttosearchinsidepluginobjectinstancesforembeddedobjectsorsymbols andincludethisinformationintheworksheet

3. ClickOKtoreturntotheCreateReportdialogbox. 4. ClickOKtocreatetheworksheet. Theworksheetopensautomatically.Thetoprowoftheworksheetcontainsatitleforeachcolumnselected.Next isadatabaseheaderrow(indicatedbyadiamondnexttotherownumber)thatcontainssubrowtotalsforeach column.Beneaththeheaderrowaresubrowsforeachobjectorsymbolinthedrawingthatmatchesthereport criteria.

5. Toaddmoredatatotheworksheet,repeatsteps1through4andselecttheAppendtoexistingworksheet option. 6. Onceallthedataisadded,edittheworksheetasneeded.Forexample,addrowsorcolumns,changethetext format,oraddcolor.Tohidethedatabaseheaderrows,toggletheDatabaseHeaderssettingontheWorksheet menu.Formoreinformationabouteditingtheworksheet,seeUsingWorksheetsonpage 837.

836

| Chapter 20: Worksheets

Creating a Blank Worksheet


InsteadofusingtheCreateReportcommand,youcancreateablankworksheetandadddatatoitmanually.Thisgives youmorecontroloverthecontentsandformatoftheworksheet. Tocreateablankworksheet: 1. SelectWindow>Palettes>ResourceBrowser. 2. FromtheResourcesmenu,selectNewResourcetodisplaytheNewResourcemenu. 3. SelectWorksheet. TheCreateWorksheetdialogboxopens.

Parameter
Name Rows/Columns

Description
Enteraworksheetname.Torenametheworksheetlateron,selecttheworksheetinthe ResourceBrowser,andclickRenamefromtheResourcesmenu. Enterthenumberofrowsandcolumnsfortheworksheet;thenumberofrowsandcolumns canbemodifiedlater

4. ClickOK. Anewworksheetwindowopens.

5. Atthispoint,allrowscontainspreadsheetcells,andtheyareallundefined.Definethecontentsofeachrowand cellasneeded: Toaddsimpletext,numbers,orformulastotheworksheet,seeEnteringDatainSpreadsheetCellson page 851.

Using Worksheets |

837

Tolistdatathatisassociatedwithobjectsinthedrawing,changeaspreadsheetrowintoadatabaserow,and specifywhichobjectstoincludeinthelist.Asubrowdisplaysforeachobjectthatmatchesthecriteria definedinthedatabaseheaderrow.Thenspecifywhichinformationtodisplayinthecolumnsforeachrow; thesecanbefieldsfromtheobjectsdatarecord,aswellastext,numbers,orformulas.SeeEnteringDatain DatabaseRowsonpage 857.

Using Worksheets
Worksheetscanobtaindatafromthedrawingbasedonspecifiedcriteria,andthenlistthedataandallowcalculations tobeperformedonthedata.
Worksheet name Current cell address Formula bar Worksheet menu Spreadsheet row Database header row Database sub-rows Increase the column width to view this number Current zoom level

Worksheetscanhavetwotypesofrows:spreadsheetanddatabase.Thecellsinaspreadsheetrowcontainconstants (textornumbers)orformulas.Databaserowsconsistofaheaderrowandsubrows,andtheyshowdatathatis associatedwithspecificdrawingobjects.Thedatabaseheaderrowismarkedwithadiamondshapenexttotherow number.Setselectioncriteriaforthisrow,andasubrowiscreatedforeachobjectthatmeetsthecriteria.Inthis example,thedatabaseheaderrow3issettolisteachobjectinthedrawingthathasanappliancerecordattachedto it.Thesubrows3.1through3.5representthefiveapplianceobjectsinthedrawing. Rowsarenumberedsequentiallystartingwith1,andcolumnsarelabeledalphabeticallystartingwithA.Database subrowsarenumberedwiththedatabaseheaderrowsnumber,followedbyadecimalandsequentialnumbers (headerrow3hassubrows3.1,3.2,3.3,andsoon).Thecellsrownumberandcolumnletterindicatethespreadsheet celladdress(databasesubrowsdisplayablankaddress). Whenworksheetsexistinanopenfile,theWindow>Worksheetscommandbecomesavailable.Alltheworksheets presentintheindicatedfilearelisted.Worksheetswithacheckmarkarecurrentlyopen.Toopenaworksheet,selectit fromthismenu,orselecttheworksheetfromtheResourceBrowserandthenselectOpenfromtheResourcesmenu.

838

| Chapter 20: Worksheets

Selecting a worksheet from the Window menu

Selecting a worksheet from the Resources menu

Aworksheetopensinaseparatewindow,whichcanberesized,moved,andclosed.Worksheetscontainaseparate menuandcontextmenus(seeWorksheetCommandsonpage 842). Becauseanopenworksheetisinaseparatewindow,itisnotprintedwiththedrawing.Toincludeaworksheetaspart ofadrawing,selecttheworksheetintheResourceBrowserandclickWorksheetonDrawingfromtheResources menu.Whentheworksheetisopen,theworksheetonthedrawingdisplaysasanX.Whentheworksheetisclosed, theupdatedworksheetdisplaysonthedrawing.Doubleclicktheworksheetfromthedrawingtoopenit.See WorksheetsasGraphicObjectsonpage 870. UsetheFormatCellscommandtoformatindividualrows,columns,andevencellsoftheworksheetasneeded(see FormattingWorksheetCellsonpage 846).Theformatisretainedwhentheworksheetisincludedonthedrawing. Alternatively,usetheAttributespalettetomodifythefill,pen,andlinethicknessattributesfortheentireworksheet object.

Moving Around in Worksheets


Thefollowingtabledescribesthekeysusedtomovearoundintheworksheet.

Keys
Arrow(Up,Down,Right,Left) Tab Enter

Description
Movesbyonecellinthedirectionindicated Movesrightbyonecell Movesdownbyonecell

Using Worksheets | Keys


Shift+Tab Shift+Enter

839

Description
Movesleftbyonecell Movesupbyonecell

Ifmorethanonecellisselected,movementisrestrictedtotheselectedcellsonly.

Selecting and Editing Worksheet Cells


Thecontentsofcellscanbeedited,andtherowsandcolumnscanberesized,moved,cut,copied,andpasted.

Selecting Cells
Whenasinglecellisselected,thecellborderishighlighted.Whenmultiplecellsareselected,theborderoftheentire selectionishighlighted,andtheselectedcellshaveabluefill.

Selection
Asinglecell Arangeofcells Anentirecolumnorrow Noncontiguouscells,rows,or columns Theentireworksheet

Action
Clickonthecell Clickdragacrossarangeofcellstoselectthem,orclickinonecornerand Shiftclickintheoppositecorner Clickthecolumnletterorrownumber;clickdragacrossthecolumnletters orrownumberstoselectmultiplerowsorcolumns PressandholdtheCtrl(Windows)orCommand(Macintosh)keyandthen clickoneachcell,row,orcolumntoselect Clicktheemptyboxdirectlyabovetherownumberboxes

Editing Cell Contents


Whenacellisselected,thedisplayoftheFormulabarindicateswhetherthecontentsofthecellcanbeedited.

Formula Bar Display

Explanation
Thecellisinaspreadsheetrowordatabaseheaderrow.Typedirectlyin theFormulabartoentertext,numbers,oraformula.Toaccepttheedits andchangethecellcontents,clickthegreencheckmark.Tocancelthe edits,clicktheredX. Indatabasesubrows,theresultsofcalculationscannotbeedited.In addition,objectattributeinformation,suchastheclasstheobjectbelongs to,cannotbeeditedintheworksheet.

Thecelladdressdisplays,andthered Xandgreencheckmarkareactive

Nocelladdressdisplays;thecurrent cellvalueisnoteditable

840

| Chapter 20: Worksheets


Explanation
Indatabasesubrows,ifVectorworksDesignSeriesproductsareinstalled, informationthatcomesfromtheobjectsdatarecordcanbeeditedinthe Formulabar,andtheobjectsrecordisupdatedautomatically.Forexample, thepricedataforasubrowobjectcouldbeupdated. Toaccepttheeditsandchangeboththeworksheetandrecord,pressEnter (Windows)orReturn(Macintosh). Indatabasesubrows,ifVectorworksDesignSeriesproductsareinstalled, somefieldsthatcomefromtheobjectsdatarecordcanbeedited,butthey onlyallowcertainpredefinedvalues.Forexample,thesillstylefora windowsubrowobjectcouldbechangedintheFormulabar. Selectthenewvaluefromthelisttochangeboththeworksheetandrecord.

Formula Bar Display

Nocelladdressdisplays;thecurrent cellvalueiseditable (VectorworksDesignSeriesrequired)

Nocelladdressdisplays;alistofthe valuesthatareavailableforthe currentcelldisplays (VectorworksDesignSeriesrequired) Indatabasesubrows,iftheVectorworksArchitectorVectorworks Landmarkproductisnotinstalled,informationthatcomesfromthe objectsdatarecordcannotbeeditedintheworksheet.Toeditavaluethat displaysinasubrow,selecttheitemthatisassociatedwiththatrowinthe drawing;thenusetheDatataboftheObjectInfopalettetoedittheobject dataasneeded.

Neitheracelladdressnoracellvalue displays

Resizing Rows and Columns


Toadjustcolumnwidthorrowheight,dragthedividerbarbetweenthecolumnlettersorrownumbers.Ifyouselect multiplerowsorcolumnsbeforeyoudragthebar,allrowsorcolumnsareadjustedtothesamesize.Alternatively, selecttheColumnWidthcommandfromtheWorksheetmenu(seeColumnWidthonpage 843).Adjusttherow heightwiththeRowHeightcommandfromtheWorksheetmenu(seeRowHeightonpage 843). Textthatislongerthanthewidthofacellfloatsoveremptyadjacentcells.Numbersthatexceedthecellwidth aredisplayedwith#characters.Alternatively,textcanbesettowrap(seeFormattingWorksheetCellson page 846).

Tohidearoworcolumn,settheColumnWidthorRowHeightto0.Todisplaythecolumn/rowagain,selectthe entireworksheetandresetthewidthorheight.

Using Worksheets |

841

Cutting, Copying, and Pasting Cell Contents


ThestandardshortcutkeysforCutandPastecanbeusedforworksheetediting.Thesamevalueorformulacanbe copiedtoarangeofcells. Tocopycellcontentstoacellorrangeofcells: 1. Selectthecellwiththeinformationtorepeat,andthenpressCtrl+C(Windows)orCommand+C(Macintosh)to copythecell. 2. Selectthedestinationcell(s)fortheinformation,andthenpressCtrl+V(Windows)orCommand+V(Macintosh) topaste.Theformulaorvalueisrepeatedineachoftheselectedcells.

Adding Rows and Columns


UsetheInsertcommandontheworksheetmenutoinsertrowsandcolumns(seeWorksheetCommandson page 842).Anemptyrowisaddedabovethecurrentrow,oranemptycolumnisaddedtotheleftofthecurrent column.Anotheroptionistohoverthecursoratthebottomrightcorneroftheworksheettoactivateaspecialresize cursor;dragasneededtoaddrowsandcolumnstothebottomandrightsideoftheworksheet.

Hover the cursor over the bottom right corner of the worksheet to obtain the resize cursor; drag to add columns and/or rows

Moving Rows and Columns


Usethedraganddropmethodtomovecontiguousrowsandcolumnsortomoveacopyofcontiguousrowsand columns. Tomoveacopyofrowsorcolumns: 1. Clickthecolumnletterorrownumbertoselectacolumnorrow(clickdragacrossthelettersornumbersto selectmultiplecolumnsorrows). 2. PressandholdCtrl(Windows)orOption(Macintosh)andmovethecursortotheedgeoftheselectedrowsor columns.Whenthecursorchangesshapetoindicatethatmovingacopyispermitted,dragtheselectiontothe desiredlocationintheworksheet. Tomoverowsorcolumns: 1. Clickthecolumnletterorrownumbertoselectacolumnorrow(clickdragacrossthelettersornumbersto selectmultiplecolumnsorrows). 2. Movethecursortotheedgeoftheselectedrowsorcolumns.Whenthecursorchangesshapetoindicatethat movingtherowsorcolumnsispermitted,dragtheselectiontothedesiredlocationintheworksheet.

842

| Chapter 20: Worksheets

Worksheet Commands
Variouscommandmenusareavailableintheworksheetwindow,aswellassortingfunctions.Toopenthemain worksheetmenu,clickthedisclosurearrowjustbelowtheFormulabar.Rightclick(Windows)orCtrlclick (Macintosh)aspecificworksheetroworcelltoopenacontextmenu.Tosortthesubrowsassociatedwithadatabase headerrow,applysortfunctionstothecolumnsasneeded.
Current cell Cancel Accept entry Current zoom level Formula bar

Descending sort icon

Summarize icon

Ascending sort icon

Worksheet menu

Worksheet row context menu Worksheet cell context menu

Worksheet Menu
Themainworksheetmenucommandsaredefinedinthefollowingtable.

Worksheet Command
Recalculate

Description
Recalculatesallformulasinallworksheets,whetheropenorclosed.Thisfunctioncan alsobeaccessedfromthecontextmenuoftheworksheetimage(onthedrawing): rightclick(Windows)orCtrlclick(Macintosh)ontheworksheet,andselect Recalculate. DisplaystheCriteriadialogbox;selectsearchcriteriatoinsertinaformula DisplaystheSelectFunctiondialogbox;selectafunctiontobeinsertedintheformula (seeEnteringFormulasinWorksheetCellsonpage 852) Togglesbetweendisplayingandhidingallworksheetdatabaseheaderrows OpenstheFormatCellsdialogbox,forsettingtheformatandappearanceofselected cells(seeFormattingWorksheetCellsonpage 846)

PasteCriteria PasteFunction DatabaseHeaders FormatCells

Using Worksheets | Worksheet Command


ColumnWidth

843

Description
DisplaystheColumnWidthdialogbox.Setthewidthvalueofselectedcellsinthe specifiedunits.ClickStandardWidthtousethedefaultwidth.Thewidthofmultiple selectedcolumnscanbeadjustedatonetime. OpenstheRowHeightdialogbox;settherowheighttoautomaticallyfittheselected cellcontents,orsetaspecificrowheightinthespecifiedunits.Theheightofmultiple selectedrowscanbeadjustedatonetime. DisplaystheWorksheetPreferencesdialogbox.HeaderandFootertextfieldsandthe Marginsettingsapplytoprintedworksheetsonly.SelectShowGridtodisplaythe worksheetgridlines.SelectShowTabstoprintworksheetcolumnandrowheaders. SelectAutorecalctorecalculateallworksheetarithmeticfunctionswhencellsare edited.ClickFonttospecifytheworksheetdefaultfontandsize. Increasesordecreasesthezoompercentagebypresetlevelsfrom50%to300%;the currentzoomleveldisplaysintheworksheettitlebar.Selectazoomlevelfromthe worksheetmenu,orrollthemousewheelwhileholdingCtrl(Windows)orOption (Macintosh)toincreaseordecreasethezoomlevelbyincrementsof10%(regardlessof thenumberoflinesyouassignedthemousetoscrollinthemousesetup). Thisfeaturewillnotworkproperlyifstandardscrollingisdisabledinthemouse setup.Forexample,ifthemousesscrollingsizeissettonone,mousezoomingin theVectorworksprogramisdisabled.(Thespecificsettingsrequiredforthis featuredependonthetypeofmousebeingused.)

RowHeight

Preferences

Zoom

ClearContents Insert

Deletesthecontentsoftheselectedcells Addsrowsorcolumnstotheworksheet.Thenumberinserteddependsonhowmany rowsorcolumnsintheworksheetarehighlightedatthetimethecommandisselected. SelectInsert>Rowstoaddrowsabovetheselectedrows.SelectInsert>Columnsto addcolumnstotheleftoftheselectedcolumns. Usecautionwheninsertingrowsorcolumns.Dependingonthetypeofcellreferences usedinformulas,insertingrowsorcolumnscouldchangethevaluesreturnedbya formula.

Delete

Deletesrowsorcolumnsfromtheworksheet.Selectoneormorerowsorcolumnsand selectDelete>RowsorDelete>Columns. Usecautionwhendeletingaroworcolumn.Deletingcellsthatarepartofaformula maychangethevaluesreturnedbytheformula.SelectEdit>Undotoundotheaction.

PrinterSetup Print

DisplaysthePrinterSetupdialogbox.ThisisthesameasthestandardPrinterSetup dialogbox;however,itonlyaffectstheprinterinformationfortheworksheet. DisplaysthePrintdialogbox,toprintthecurrentworksheet;thisistheonlywayto printaworksheetunlesstheworksheetisincludedasapartofthedrawing

Worksheet Cell Context Menu


Toaccessthecommandsavailableforaspecificworksheetcell,rightclick(Windows)orCtrlclick(Macintosh)thecell.

844

| Chapter 20: Worksheets


Description
Removesthecontentsofselectedcells,temporarilystoringthecontentsintheclipboard Copiesthecontentsofselectedcellstotheclipboard,wheretheyaretemporarilystored; theoriginalcontentsremainintheworksheet Placescellcontentsstoredintheclipboardintothecurrentcellorrangeofcells OpenstheFormatCellsdialogbox,forsettingtheformatandappearanceofselected cells(seeFormattingWorksheetCellsonpage 846) Addsrowsorcolumnstotheworksheet.Thenumberinserteddependsonhowmany rowsorcolumnsintheworksheetarehighlightedatthetimethecommandisselected. SelectInsert>Rowstoaddrowsabovetheselectedrows.SelectInsert>Columnsto addcolumnstotheleftoftheselectedcolumns. Usecautionwheninsertingrowsorcolumns.Dependingonthetypeofcellreferences usedinformulas,insertingrowsorcolumnscouldchangethevaluesreturnedbya formula.

Menu Item
Cut Copy Paste FormatCells Insert

Delete

Deletesrowsorcolumnsfromtheworksheet.Selectoneormorerowsorcolumnsand selectDelete>RowsorDelete>Columns. Usecautionwhendeletingaroworcolumn.Deletingcellsthatarepartofaformula maychangethevaluesreturnedbytheformula.SelectEdit>Undotoundotheaction.

ClearContents PickValuefromList (VectorworksDesign Seriesrequired)

Deletesthecontentsoftheselectedcells Ifthecellisinadatabasesubrow,andthecolumnlistsafieldthatonlyallowscertain predefinedvalues,usethisoptiontoedittheobjectsdata. Forexample,youmightwanttochangethesillstyleforseveralwindowobjectsfromthe windowschedule.SelecttheSillcellsfortheobjectstobechanged,andrightclick (Windows)orCtrlclick(Macintosh).Selectadifferentsilltypefromthelistofoptionsto changeboththeworksheetandtheobjectsdatarecords.

Worksheet Row Context Menu


Toaccessthecommandsavailableforaspecificworksheetspreadsheetordatabaseheaderrow,clickandholddown themousebuttonwhileontherownumber.Thesecommandsdonotapplytodatabasesubrows.

Menu Item
Spreadsheet

Description
Convertsadatabaseheaderrowintoarowofspreadsheetcells.Thisdeletesall subrowsandtheinformationcontainedwithinthem.Anyformulasthatweredefined inthecolumnsoftheheaderrowremainintact.Thiscommandhasnoeffecton spreadsheetcells. ConvertsarowofspreadsheetcellsintoadatabaseheaderrowandopenstheCriteria dialogbox.Thiscommandhasnoeffectondatabaserows. OpenstheCriteriadialogboxforsettingthecriteriathatisusedtogeneratethedatabase subrows.Availableonlywhenadatabaseheaderrowisclicked. OpenstheCriteriadialogboxforeditingthecriteriathatisusedtogeneratethe databasesubrows.Availableonlywhenadatabaseheaderrowisclicked.

Database SetCriteria EditCriteria

Using Worksheets | Menu Item


SelectDataItems

845

Description
Selectsallobjectsonthedrawingthatmeetthecriteriaforthedatabaserow.Available onlywhenadatabaseheaderrowisclicked.

Database Sub-Row Context Menu


Whileonadatabasesubrow,rightclick(Windows)orCtrlclick(Macintosh)andselecttheSelectItemcommand fromthecontextmenu.Usethiscommandtoselectanindividualdatabaseobjectinthedrawing;theviewchangesto displaytheselectedobject(seeImportingWorksheetsonpage 868).

Database Row Sort and Summary Functions


Thegroupofsubrowsassociatedwithaheaderrowcanbesortedandsummarizedindifferentways.Thesefunctions canbesetindependentlyforeachdatabaseheaderrowinaworksheet. Tosortorsummarizeagroupofdatabasesubrows: 1. Ifthedatabaseheaderrowsarenotdisplayed,selectDatabaseHeadersfromthemainworksheetmenu. 2. Selecttheheaderrowofthegroupofsubrowstosortorsummarize;theheaderrowhasadiamondnexttoits number. Thethreeiconsabovethecolumnheadercellsbecomeavailable.

Icon Item
DescendingSort

Description
Sortsthedatabasesubrowsindescendingorder,accordingtothecontentsofthiscolumn

AscendingSort

Sortsthedatabasesubrowsinascendingorder,accordingtothecontentsofthiscolumn

Summarize

Summarizesthedatabasesubrowsaccordingtothecontentsofthiscolumn.Subrowsthat haveidenticalitemsinthiscolumnaregroupedtogetherinasinglerow. Ifacolumncontainsdatafromanumericfield,thesummarizedcolumncontainsasumofthe valuesforallobjectsthataregroupedontherow.Thismaybeappropriateforsomecolumns, butnotothers.Forexample,youmighthaveawindowschedulethatsortsandsummarizes thedatabytheWindowIDcolumn.YouwouldwanttheQuantitycolumntoshowthesumof allwindowswithaparticularID,butyouwouldwanttheWindowHeightcolumntoshowthe heightofasinglewindowwiththatID(nottheheightofallwindowscombined).Adda summaryoperatortotheWindowHeightcolumntoshowthecorrectnumericdata.

3. Clickanddraganicontothecolumnheadercelltobeusedforthesortorsummary.Anewicondisplaysnextto thecolumnheadingletter.Foranascendingordescendingsort,anumberintheiconindicatesthesort precedenceforthatcolumn. 4. Applyadditionalsortorsummaryiconsasneeded.Ineachgroupofsubrows,upto20columnscanhaveeither anAscendingorDescendingSorticon,andanynumberofcolumnscanhaveaSummarizeicon.TheSummarize iconcanbeusedonacolumnbyitself,orinconjunctionwithoneofthesorticons. 5. Toremoveasortorsummary,clickanddragtheiconawayfromthecolumnheadercell.

846

| Chapter 20: Worksheets

Formatting Worksheet Cells


Theappearanceofworksheetcellscanbesetbyavarietyofformattingoptions. Formattingappliedtoadatabaseheaderrowappliestoalloftheassociateddatabasesubrows. Toformatworksheetcells: 1. Selectthecell(s)toformat. 2. FromtheWorksheetmenu,selectFormatCells. TheFormatCellsdialogboxopens. TheNumbertabsetsthenumberformatfortheselectedcells(seeCreatingRecordFormatsonpage 191).

Parameter
General Decimal Scientific Fractional Dimension DimensionArea Dimension Volume Angle

Description
Specifiesthedefaultgeneralformat Usesdecimalnumbers;enteravalueforthenumberofdecimalplaces,andifdesired,selectto usecommasasseparators Usesscientificnumbers;enteravalueforthenumberofdecimalplaces Usesfractionalnumbers;entertheroundingvalueforfractions Usesdimensionnumbers Usesthedimensionareaformat(precisionandunits)asspecifiedforthisdocument;also displaystheareaunitsafterthenumber Usesthedimensionvolumeformat(precisionandunits)asspecifiedforthisdocument;also displaysthevolumeunitsafterthenumber Determinestheaccuracyofanglesandthemeasurementsystemused;themeasurementsystem canbedegrees/minutes/seconds,ordecimalnumbersuptoeightdecimalplaces

Using Worksheets | Parameter


Date Boolean Text Leader Trailer

847

Description
Usesdateformats;selectthedesiredformatfromthelist SelecttouseadatavalueofeitherTrueorFalse Selecttoenterastringofcharacters;thecellcontentsaretreatedastext,evenifanumberisinthe string Displaysthespecifiedleadertextbeforethecellvalue(exceptforBooleanandTextformats) Displaysthespecifiedtrailertextafterthecellvalue(exceptforBooleanandTextformats)

3. ClicktheAlignmenttabtospecifytextalignmentoptions.

Parameter
Alignment Horizontal Vertical TextOrientation VerticalText HorizontalText WrapText

Description
Setsthealignmentoftextinrelationtothecellborder Specifieshorizontaltextalignment;selectGeneraltoaligntextstringsontheleftand numbersontheright Specifiesverticaltextalignment Setsthetextorientation Orientstextvertically Orientstexthorizontally Selecttowraptextthatexceedsthecellwidth(automaticallyadjustingrowheight);deselect toallowtextthatislongerthanthecellwidthtofloatoveremptyadjacentcells.Ifadjacent cellscontaincontent,unwrappedtextmayappeartruncated.Numbersthatexceedthecell widtharedisplayedwith#characters.

848

| Chapter 20: Worksheets


Description
Mergesarangeofselectedspreadsheetcellsintoonecell;cellandborderformattingandtext wrappingareappliedtothecellgroupratherthantotheindividualcells.Thecellcontents andformatofonlytheupperleftcellinthegroupapplytothemergedcells.Dataand formattingintheothercellswillbelostduringthemerge. Tosplitmergedcells,selectthemergedcellgroupandthendeselectMergeCells.

Parameter
MergeCells

4. ClicktheFonttabtospecifythefont,fontsize,style,andcoloroftextinselectedcells.SeeFormattingTexton page 359.

5. ClicktheBordertabtosetcellborderformattingoptions. SelecttheLineAttributes,andthenusethePresetsorPreviewbuttonstoaddorremoveborderelements.

Using Worksheets |

849

Parameter
LineAttributes Style Color Presets None Outline Inside Preview Top Horizontal Bottom Left Vertical Right

Description
Setsthelinestyleandthicknessfortheborderelement Setsthelinecolorfortheborderelement

Removesallborderformatting Addsorremovesaborderonlyontheoutsideedges(top,bottom,left,andright)ofthecell selection Addsorremovesaborderonlyontheinside(horizontalandvertical)edgesofthecellselection

Addsorremovesaborderatthetopofthecellselection Whenmorethanonecellisselected,addsorremovesahorizontalborderbetweencells Addsorremovesaborderatthebottomofthecellselection Addsorremovesaborderontheleftedgeofthecellselection Whenmorethanonecellisselected,addsorremovesaverticalborderbetweencells Addsorremovesaborderontherightedgeofthecellselection

6. ClickthePatternstabtospecifyfilloptionsfortheselectedcell(s).

850

| Chapter 20: Worksheets

Parameter
Style Color/Pattern

Description
SelectNonetoremovecurrentcellfilloptionsortospecifynofill;selectSolidorPatternto applyasolidfillcolororpatterntotheselectedcell(s) IfStyleissettoSolid,selectthefillColor;ifStyleissettoPattern,selectthePatternandthe foregroundandbackgroundcolors

7. ClickOKtosettheformattingfortheselectedcell(s).Theworksheetformattingalsoappliestoworksheets placedonadrawing.

Formatted worksheet in the worksheet window

Formatted worksheet placed on the drawing

Entering Data in Spreadsheet Cells |

851

Entering Data in Spreadsheet Cells


Twotypesofinformationcanbeenteredintothespreadsheetcellsofaworksheet:constantvalues(includingtextor numbers)andformulas.Inaddition,acellcanreferenceanothercellinthesameworksheetorinanotherworksheet. Texthelpstoidentifythepurposeofaworksheetandlabelsthecolumnsinaworksheet.Useformulastoperform calculationsbasedondrawingdata.Aformulacanbeasimplemathematicalequation,oritcanincludeoneormore builtinfunctions.TheVectorworksprogramprovidesmathematicalfunctions(forexample,asquarerootfunction),as wellasfunctionsthatpullinformationfromdrawingobjects(forexample,afunctionthatreturnsthevolumeof selectedobjects).SeeWorksheetFunctionsonpage 861foralistofthefunctionsavailable. Databaserecordfieldsthatareattachedtoobjectsinthedrawing(suchasModelNumberorPrice)cannotbe usedinaspreadsheetcell.Toincludethistypeofdataintheworksheet,seeEnteringDatainDatabaseRows onpage 857. Todefineaspreadsheetrow: 1. Rightclick(Windows)orCtrlclick(Macintosh)onthenumberoftherowtochange. 2. Fromtheworksheetrowmenu,selectSpreadsheet.

3. Thecellsintherowareemptyuntilyoudefinethecontents.Selectacell,andthenenterthedesiredinformation intheworksheetFormulabarlocatedatthetopoftheworksheet. Toentertextornumbers,seeEnteringConstantValuesinWorksheetCellsonpage 851. Toenteraformula,seeEnteringFormulasinWorksheetCellsonpage 852. Toreferenceothercellsinthiscell,seeReferencingOtherWorksheetCellsonpage 856.

Entering Constant Values in Worksheet Cells


Constantvaluesconsistofnumbers,spaces,nonnumericcharacters,oranycombinationofthese.Constantvaluesare notpartofaformulaortheresultofaformula. Theformulaphrase=1,oranynumberfollowinganequalsign,isalsoconsideredaconstantvalue. Selectthecell,andthenenterthetextornumbersneeded;yourentriesautomaticallydisplayintheworksheetFormula bar.WhenyouclickthegreencheckmarkontheFormulabar,thevaluedisplaysinthecell. Keepinmindthefollowing: MostconstantvaluesaretreatedastextanddefaulttotheGeneralformat.However,somecombinationsof numericandnonnumericcharactersareinterpretedasaparticularnumberformat.Forexample,anentryof07/ 19/2010automaticallychangestheformattothemonth/day/yeardateformat.(SeeFormattingWorksheetCells onpage 846.)

852

| Chapter 20: Worksheets

TextisleftalignedunlessthecellisformatteddifferentlyontheAlignmenttabintheFormatCellsdialogbox (selectFormatCellsfromtheWorksheetmenu). NumbersenteredincellsdefaulttotheGeneralformat.Tochangethemtoanotherformat(forexample, dimensionorfractional),selectFormatCellsfromtheWorksheetmenu,andselectthenewformatonthe NumbertabintheFormatCellsdialogbox.

Entering Formulas in Worksheet Cells


Useformulastoanalyzeandperformoperationsondrawingdata.Formulasalwaysbeginwithanequalsign(=)and consistofacombinationoffunctions,cellreferences,oroperatorsthatcombinevaluestoproduceanewvalue. Formulasmustbeenteredwithaspecificsyntax.Iftheformulaisnotenteredcorrectly,theformulaentryitself displaysinthecell,insteadoftheresultoftheformula.Twocommonmistakesinsyntaxincludeforgettingtousepairs ofparentheses,andomittingrequiredcommaswhennoargumentispresent.Formulasyntaxisdescribedinthe followingtable.

Symbol
General Syntax Equalsign= Parentheses( ) Squarebrackets[ ] Period. Colon: Commaorsemicolon ,or;

Explanation
Beginseachformula;also indicatesavalueforavariable Enclosesafunctionargument; alsousedinarithmeticequations Enclosesarecorddestination Separatesarecordidentifierand afieldidentifier Separatespathnamelevelsincell references Separatesmultiplevaluesina functionargument;usea semicolonwhencommasare usedasdecimalseparatorsbythe operatingsystem Enclosesastringconstant Designatesanabsolutereference Designatesarangeofcells Addition Subtraction Multiplication Division Exponentiation

Example
=CriteriaVolume(t=wall) =acos(0.6) =A6+(A6*.07) =R IN ['myformat'] =Furniture.Type =MyWorksheet:A1 =sum(A2,E3) =sum(A2;E3)

Singlequote' Dollarsign$ Doubleperiod.. Arithmetic Operators Plussign+ HyphenAsterisk* Forwardslash/ Caretordoubleasterisk ^or**

=Appliances.'Model #' =A4*$B$1 =sum(A10..A12) =A6+A8 =A6-A8 =A6*.06 =B3/12 =13^2

Entering Data in Spreadsheet Cells | Symbol


DIV

853

Explanation
Integerdivision(returnsthe quotientroundedtothenearest integer) Remainderdivision(returnsthe remainderofthedivision operationasaninteger) Equal Notequal

Example
j:= 36 DIV 5;

MOD

k:= 36 MOD 5;

Comparison Equalsign= Operators Lessthanandgreaterthan (usedwith signs(orOption+=on IFfunction) Macintosh) <>or Lessthansign< Lessthanandequalsigns (orOption+<on Macintosh) <=or

=if((L='L2'),Area,0) =if((S<>'Dryer'),B9,0)

Lessthan Lessthanorequalto

=if((C7<100),100,C7) =if((E2<=G2),0.05,G2)

Greaterthansign> Greaterthanandequal signs(orOption+>on Macintosh) >=or

Greaterthan Greaterthanorequalto

=if((C7>100),100,C7) =if((E2>=G2),0.05,G2)

Toforcetheprogramtotreatanumberastext,enclosethenumberinsinglequotationmarks,asin40;orformat thecellasTextontheNumbertaboftheFormatCellsdialogbox. Formulasfollowstandardalgebraicrulesofhierarchy.Inthefollowingexample,thevalueincellC28isfirst multipliedby12,andthen4.5issubtractedfromthatvalue.Theresultisthendividedby12. =((C28*12)-4.5)/12 Thereareseveralbuiltinfunctionsthatcanbeusedinformulas,includingmathematicalfunctionsandfunctionsthat pullinformationfromobjectsinthedrawing.Touseoneormoreworksheetfunctionsinaformula,eitherenterthe functionmanually,orusethePasteFunctionandPasteCriteriacommandstoselectafunctionandselectioncriteria(if required)fromdialogboxes.SeeWorksheetFunctionsonpage 861formoreinformationabouthowtouse functions. Ifthereisalogicproblemwithaformula,anerrorcodedisplaysinthecell.

Error Code
#NAME? #VALUE! #CVAL?

Explanation
Thefieldnameinadatabaseheaderrowdefinitiondoesnotexistinthefile;seeRetrieving RecordInformationinaWorksheetonpage 860 Theargumentisthewrongtypeofdatafortheformula;forexample,acellreferencedina mathematicalformulacontainstext Acyclicalreferencecannotberesolved

854

| Chapter 20: Worksheets


Explanation
Theresultvaluetypeisunrecognized Internalerror Divisionbyzeroerrorencountered Unrecognizedentry Theworksheetnameinanexternalreferencedoesnotexist,ortherecordnamedoesnotexist Functionsarenestedtoodeeply(morethantenlevelsdeep)

Error Code
?Result? #OPCODE? #DIV0! #FAC? #OBJ! #CSTATUS?

Tomanuallyenteraformula: 1. Selectthecell. 2. Enteranequalsign(=),andthenentertheformula.TheentriesautomaticallydisplayintheworksheetFormula bar.Aformulacanconsistoffunctions,operators,cellreferences,andconstantvalues. 3. Whentheformulaiscomplete,clickthegreencheckmarktovalidatetheentry.Tocancelanentry,clicktheredX. 4. Theformulaexecutesassoonasthecellentryhasbeenvalidated(Autorecalcmustbeselectedintheworksheet preferences;seePreferencesonpage 843). ToenteraformulawiththePasteFunctionandPasteCriteriacommands: 1. Selectthecell. 2. Enteranequalsign(=).TheentryautomaticallydisplaysintheworksheetFormulabar. 3. SelectPasteFunctionfromtheWorksheetmenu. TheSelectFunctiondialogboxopens.

4. SelectafunctionfromthelistandclickOK.

Entering Data in Spreadsheet Cells |

855

TheformulaisplacedintheworksheetFormulabarandthecursorisplacedbetweentheparentheses,awaiting anargument. 5. Dooneofthefollowing: Ifthefunctionrequiresnumbersortext,entertheargumentbetweentheparenthesesandproceedtostep8. Ifthefunctionrequiresselectioncriteria,selectPasteCriteriafromtheWorksheetmenu. 6. IfanobjectisselectedwhenthePasteCriteriacommandisselected,thePasteAttributesdialogboxopens. Otherwise,proceedtostep7.

Dooneofthefollowing: Touseattributesoftheselectedobjectastheonlyselectioncriteria,selecttheattributesandclickOK.Proceed tostep8. Tospecifyothercriteria,ortouseattributesofotherobjectsinthedrawing,clicktheCustombutton. 7. TheCriteriadialogboxopens.Seteachofthethreefieldstothedesiredselectioncriteria.ClickMoreChoicesto specifyadditionalcriteria.ClickFewerChoicestoremoveaddedcriteria.ClickOKtoaddthecriteriatothe functionargument.

For each list, click to browse for criteria options Design layer viewport functionality (Vectorworks Design Series required)

8. Whentheformulaiscomplete,clickthegreencheckmarktovalidatetheentry.Tocanceltheentry,clickthered X. 9. Theformulaexecutesassoonasthecellentryhasbeenvalidated(Autorecalcmustbeselectedintheworksheet preferences;seePreferencesonpage 843).

856

| Chapter 20: Worksheets

Referencing Other Worksheet Cells


Aformulacanreferencethecontentsofoneormoreothercells.Thecellscanbereferencedwithinthecurrent worksheet(internalreferences),orfromanotherworksheet(externalreferences)withinthesamedrawing. Externalreferencesmustincludethefullpathnametotheotherworksheet.Thefollowingtableshowsthesyntaxfor enteringanexternalreferenceintoaformula.

Syntax
worksheetname:celladdress worksheetname:rangeofaddresses

Example
=MyWorksheet:A1 =SUM(MyWorksheet:A1..A12)

Ifthenameoftheworksheetcontainsspaces,thenamemustbeenclosedwithsinglequotesasinthefollowing example:=ApplianceSchedule:A1 Toupdateanexternalreference,selectRecalculatefromtheWorksheetmenu.

Relative and Absolute Cell References


Cellreferencesinaworksheetcanbeeitherrelativeandabsolute.Whentheformulathatcontainsthereferenceis moved,anabsolutereferencealwaysreferstotheoriginalcelladdress,whilearelativereferencechangesdepending onthelocationofthecellthatcontainsthereference. Usethedollarsign($)charactertoindicateanabsolutereference.The$ characterlocksthepartofthecellreferenceit precedes,asdescribedinthefollowingtable.

Combination
$A1 $A$1 A$1

Description
Locksthespecifiedcolumnreferencebutleavestherowreferencerelative;thesamecolumnis alwaysreferredto,buttherowchangesiftheformulaisplacedinadifferentrow Locksboththespecifiedcolumnandrowreferences;regardlessofwheretheformulaiscopied,it alwaysreferstotheoriginalcell Locksthespecifiedrowreferencebutleavesthecolumnreferencerelative;thesamerowis alwaysreferredto,butthecolumnchangesiftheformulaisplacedinadifferentcolumn

Inthefollowingexampleworksheet,theformula=AVERAGE(B1..B3)isincellB4.IftheformulawerecopiedtocellE9, theformulawouldautomaticallybechangedto=AVERAGE(E6..E8).Becausethereferencesarerelative,boththe columnandrowwouldchangerelativetothecellwheretheformulaisplacedalwaysindicatingthethreecells directlyabovetheformula.

Entering Data in Database Rows |

857

Entering Data in Database Rows


Databaserowsdisplaydatafieldsassociatedwiththeobjectsinadrawing.Thedatabaseheaderrowisidentifiedbya diamondshapenexttotherownumber.Whenyoucreatethedatabaserow,setthecriteriatodeterminewhichobjects willbelistedintherelatedsubrows.Forexample,youmightsetaheaderrowtolistallsymbolsinthedrawing.A subrowwouldthenbegeneratedforeachsymbolinthedrawing.(Ifnoobjectmeetstheheaderrowcriteria,no subrowsarecreated.) Manycriteriacombinationscanbespecified,suchasclass,objecttype,recordinformation,orlineweight.For example,createalistofalltheroomsinaresort,orlistonlythegreenwingbackedchairsfromallthetworoomsuites thatarescatteredthroughouttheresort. Ineachcolumninthedatabaseheaderrow,specifywhichinformationabouttheobjectstodisplay.Acolumncanlista specificattributeofeachsubrowobject,suchasitsclassorlayer.Acolumncanalsolistadatafieldcontainedina recordattachedtoeachobject.Or,acolumncancontainaconstantoraformula,justasaspreadsheetcellcan. Inthefollowingexample,databaseheaderrow2hasitscriteriasettolistalltheobjectsinthedrawingthathavethe appliancerecordattachedtothem.ColumnsAthroughDlistthecontentsofthedatafieldsintheappliancerecord: theappliancetype,manufacturer,modelnumber,andprice.ColumnEcontainsaformula,whichusesthevaluein columnDtocalculatethepriceoftheappliancewithsalestax.ColumnFlistswhichlayerofthedrawingcontainsthe object.

Spreadsheet cells Database header row Database sub-rows

Tocreateadatabaserow: 1. Rightclick(Windows)orCtrlclick(Macintosh)onthenumberoftherowtochange.

858

| Chapter 20: Worksheets

2. Fromtheworksheetrowmenu,selectDatabase. TheCriteriadialogboxopens.

Design layer viewport functionality (Vectorworks Design Series required)

3. Specifytheselectioncriteriaforwhichobjectstodisplayinthesubrows.Thenumberofobjectsthatmeetthe criteriadisplays.Tospecifyadditionalcriteria,clickMoreChoices. 4. ClickOKtoenabledatabasefunctionalityfortherow.Beneaththeheaderrow,subrowsarecreatedforeach drawingobjectthatmeetsthecriteriaspecified.Thecolumnsareemptyuntilyoudefinewhichdatafromthe objectstodisplay.

5. Specifytheinformationtobeshownineachcolumnoftherow: Tolistattributesofeachobject(suchaslayerorclass),seeRetrievingObjectAttributesinaWorksheeton page 859.

Entering Data in Database Rows |

859

Tolistrecorddataassociatedwitheachobject(suchascolororprice),seeRetrievingRecordInformationin aWorksheetonpage 860. Toshowtheresultsofaformulaforeachobject,seeEnteringFormulasinWorksheetCellsonpage 852. 6. Eachsubrowcelldisplaystheinformationrequested.Eachcellintheheaderrowdisplaysthetotalnumberof objectsfound,or,ifthecolumnreturnsnumericaldata,theheadercelldisplaysthesumforallsubrows. Informationfoundineachcolumncanbesortedusingtheascending,descending,andsummarizebuttons;see DatabaseRowSortandSummaryFunctionsonpage 845.

Undefining a Database Row


Toundefineadatabaserow: 1. Rightclick(Windows)orCtrlclick(Macintosh)onthenumberofthedatabaseheaderrowtochange. 2. SelectSpreadsheet. Undefiningadatabaserowremovesthedatabaserowcriteriaandallsubrows.Anyformulasthatweredefined inthecolumnsoftheheaderrowremainintact.

Selecting Database Objects


Youcanusethedatabaserowsinaworksheettoselecttheobject(s)inthedrawingthatarerelatedtothatrow. Toselectdatabaseobjects: 1. Eitheralldatabaseobjectsorasingledatabaseobjectcanbeselected. Toselectalldatabaseobjectsthatmeetthedatabaserowcriteria,rightclick(Windows)orCtrlclick (Macintosh)therownumberofthedatabaseheaderrowtoopenthecontextmenu. Toselectanindividualdatabaseobject,rightclick(Windows)orCtrlclick(Macintosh)therownumberofthe rowthatcontainstheobjecttoopenthecontextmenu. 2. Fromthecontextmenu,selecteitherSelectDataItemsorSelectItem. Alldatabaseobjectsthatarerepresentedbytheheaderrow,ortheindividualrowobject,areselected.Ifan individualobjectwasselectedwithSelectItem,thedrawingviewchangestodisplaytheselectedobject.

Retrieving Object Attributes in a Worksheet


Adrawingobjectcanhaveseveralattributes,suchasthelayeritison,thetypeofobjectitis,thesymbolname(ifitisa symbol),andwhetheritiscurrentlyselected.Youcandisplaythisinformationinthedatabaserowsofaworksheet. Toretrieveobjectinformationinthedatabaserows: 1. Clickthecellinthedatabaseheaderrowwheretheformulawillbeentered. 2. Enteranequalsign(=),andthenenterthecriteriatodisplay.Forexample,enter=Ctodisplaythenameofthe classtowhicheachobjectbelongs.TheentriesdisplayintheworksheetFormulabar.

Code
ALL AR ASZ

Criteria Name
Everyobject Arrowhead Markersize

Code
PB PF PON

Criteria Name
Penbackground PenForeground Pluginobjectname

860

| Chapter 20: Worksheets


Code
C FB FF FOT FP FSZ GFI HFI IFI L LW N

Criteria Name
Classname Fillbackground Fillforeground Font Fillpattern Fontsize Gradientfill Hatchfill Imagefill Layername Lineweight Objectname

Code
PP R S SEL SLST SST ST T TFI TX V WST

Criteria Name
Penpattern/Linestyle Objectrecord Symbolname Selectedstatus Slabstyle Sketchstyle Objectsubtype Objecttype Tilefill Texture Visibility Wallstyle

3. Clickthegreencheckmarktovalidatetheentry.

Retrieving Record Information in a Worksheet


DatabaserecordsarecreatedintheRecordFormatsdialogbox.Theserecordsarethenassignedtoobjectsthroughthe DatataboftheObjectInfopalette.SeeViewingandEditingObjectRecordsonpage 196formoreinformation.This informationcanbedisplayedinthedatabaserowsofaworksheet. Toretrieverecordinformationinadatabaserow: 1. Clickthecellinthedatabaseheaderrowwheretheformulawillbeentered. 2. Enteranequalsign(=),andthenentertherecordinformationtodisplay.Theentriesdisplayintheworksheet Formulabar.Thesyntaxforretrievingrecordinformationis:

Syntax
=recordname.fieldname

Example
=Furniture.Type

Aperiod(.)mustseparatethetwonamesortheformulawillnotbeexecuted. Ifthenameoftherecordformatorfieldnamecontainsspaces,thenamemustbeenclosedwithsinglequotesas inthefollowingexample:=ApplianceRecord.ModelNumber 3. Clickthegreencheckmarktovalidatetheentry. Thedatabaseinformationattachedtoeachobjectdisplaysinthesubrows.

Worksheet Functions |

861

Worksheet Functions
Worksheetfunctionstakeanargument,performanaction,andreturnavalueorvalues.Therearetwobasictypesof functions:thosethatusethevalue(s)youenter,andthosethatuseinformationfromobjectsinthedrawing.The argumentsrequiredbythetwofunctiontypesaredifferent. Numberortextarguments:Functionsthatbeginwithalowercaselettertypicallyrequireanumbervalueora celladdressastheargument.Forexample,theacosfunctionreturnsthearccosineofthevaluethatisspecifiedin thefunctionargument.Theargumentyouentercanbeamathematicalexpression(suchas3/5),anaddressofa cellthatcontainsanumber(suchasA12),oranactualnumber.Theargumentforalltrigonometryfunctionsmust beinradians. Criteriaarguments:Functionsthatbeginwithacapitallettermustbeappliedtooneormorespecificobjectsin thedrawing.Inacellinadatabaseheaderrow,afunctionisautomaticallyappliedtotheobjectlistedineach subrow,sonocriteriaargumentisrequired. However,inaspreadsheetcell,youmustentercriteriatoselecttheobjectsthefunctionappliesto.Forexample, theWidthfunctionreturnsthewidthofanobject.Tospecifywhichobjecttoobtainthewidthof,eitherusethe PasteCriteriacommandontheWorksheetmenu,orenterthecriteriamanually.SeeSearchCriteriaonpage 129 intheVectorScriptLanguageGuidefordetailsabouthowtospecifycriteriasuchastheobjecttype,class,or visibility. Thefollowingtablelistsalloftheworksheetfunctionsavailable,aswellaswhatkindofargumentthefunctiontakes.

Function (argument)
acos(number)

Description
Thearccosineofanumber.The arccosineistheanglewhose cosineisnumber.Thereturned angleisgiveninradiansinthe range0topi. Numberisthecosineofthe angle,andmustbefrom1to1.

Example
=acos(3/5) (returnstheangleforwhichthe cosinevalueis3/5)

Related Functions
cos

Angle(criteria)

Thesumofallanglesthatmeet thespecifiedcriteria,in degrees. Usethisfunctiontoreturnthe anglesoflinesandwalls (measuredfromhorizontal), thespananglesofarcs,andthe slopeanglesofslabs.

=Angle(t=arc) (returnsthecombinedsweep anglesofallarcobjectsinthe drawing)

Area(criteria)

Thetotalareaof2Dobjectsthat meetthespecifiedcriteria, basedontheAreaunitsinthe Unitsdialogbox

=Area(t=rect) (returnsthecombinedareaofall rectangleobjectsinthedrawing)

Perim

862

| Chapter 20: Worksheets


Description
Thearcsineofanumber.The arcsineistheanglewhosesine isnumber.Thereturnedangle isgiveninradiansintherange pi/2topi/2.Toexpressthe arcsineindegrees,usethe rad2degfunction(ormultiply theresultby180/pi). Numberisthesineoftheangle andmustbefrom1to1.

Function (argument)
asin(number)

Example
=asin(A3) (returnstheangleforwhichthe sinevalueisgivenincellA3)

Related Functions
sin

atan(number)

Thearctangentofanumber. Thearctangentistheangle whosetangentisnumber.The returnedangleisgivenin radiansintherangepi/2topi/ 2.Toexpressthearctangentin degrees,usetherad2deg function(ormultiplytheresult by180/pi). Numberisthetangentofthe angleinquestion.

=atan(4/3) (returnstheangleforwhichthe tangentvalueis4/3)

tan

average(number1, number2...) BotBound(criteria)

Theaverage(mean)ofthe arguments Theminimumycoordinate (bottomboundary)ofthe objectsthatmeetthespecified criteria Theareaofonesideofthe specifiedwallorslab component,minusanyholes Thenameofthespecifiedwall orslabcomponent Thevolumeofthespecified component,minusanyholes

=average(85,70,95) (returnstheaverageofthethree numbers) =BotBound(t=locus) (returnstheycoordinateofthe locusthathasthelowesty coordinatevalueinthedrawing) =COMPONENTAREA(t=wall,1) (returnstheareaofthe componentspecified) =COMPONENTNAME(t=wall,1) (returnsthenameofthe componentspecified) =COMPONENTVOLUME(t=wall, 1) (returnsthevolumeofthe componentspecified

max,min,sum

LeftBound, RightBound, TopBound ComponentVol, Name ComponentVol, Area ComponentArea, Name

ComponentArea (criteria,index) ComponentName (criteria,index) ComponentVolume (criteria,index)

Worksheet Functions | Function (argument)


concat(text1,text2, text3)

863

Description
Joinsseveraltextstringsinto onetextstring

Example
=concat(B3,', ',B4) (returnsthecontentsofcellsB3 andB4asasinglestring, separatedbyacommaanda space) =cos(deg2rad(23)) (convertsa23degreeangletoits radianequivalent,andreturns thecosineoftheangle) =Count(S='door') (returnsthetotalnumberof symbolobjectsinthedrawing thatarenameddoor) =deg2rad(47) (convertsthe47degreeangle measurementtoitsradian equivalent) =exp(2) (returnsthenumericvalueofe raisedtothepowerof2)

Related Functions

cos(number)

Thecosineofagivenangle. Numberistheangleinradians forwhichthecosineis calculated.

acos

Count(criteria)

Thenumberofobjectsthat meetthespecifiedcriteria

deg2rad(number)

Convertsanumberfrom degreestoradians. Numberisthevalueindegrees tobeconvertedtoradians.

exp(number)

eraisedtothepowerof number.Theconstanteequals 2.71828182845904,thebaseof thenaturallogarithm. Numberistheexponent appliedtothebasee.

ln

Height(criteria)

Thecombineddeltay(height) ofobjectsthatmeetthe specifiedcriteria

=height(sel=true) (returnsthecombineddeltay valueoftheselectedobjects)

Width

864

| Chapter 20: Worksheets


Description
Usevalue_if_trueiflogical_test istrue,value_is_falseif logical_testisfalse. Usethisfunctiontoconduct conditionaltestsonvaluesand formulasandtobranchbased ontheresultsofthattest.The outcomeofthetestdetermines thevaluereturnedbytheIf function.Thelogical_testcan beanyvalueorexpressionthat canbeevaluatedtotrueor false.UptosevenIfstatements canbenestedasvalue_if_true, value_if_falsearguments. Booleanstatementswithinanif statementmustbein parentheses.Textwithinanif statementshouldbeenclosed withinquotationmarks.

Function (argument)
if(logical_test, value_if_true, value_if_false)

Example
=if((C7>100),100,C7) whencommasareusedas decimalseparatorsbythe operatingsystem,use semicolonsinstead: =if((C7>100);100;C7) (ifthevalueincellC7isgreater than100,thevalueinthiscellis 100;otherwise,thevalueinthis cellisthesameasthevaluein cellC7)

Related Functions

int(number)

Removesanyfractionalpartof anumber. Numberistherealnumberto bechangedtoaninteger.

=int(B9) (returnsthevalueincellB9 withoutitsfractional component) =IsFlipped(t=rect) (returnsthetotalnumberof rectanglesinthedrawingthat areflipped) =LeftBound(t=locus) (returnsthexcoordinateofthe leftmostlocusinthedrawing) =Length(t=line) (returnsthetotallengthofall lineobjectsinthedrawing) =ln(12) (returnsthenaturallogarithmof 12) =log(2) (returnsthebase10logarithmof 2)

round

IsFlipped(criteria)

Thetotalnumberofflipped objectsthatmeetthespecified criteria Theleftsideminimumx coordinate(leftboundary)of theobjectsthatmeetthe specifiedcriteria Thelengthoflinesorwallsthat meetthespecifiedcriteria Thenaturallogarithm(basee). Numberisthepositivereal numberforwhichthe logarithmiscalculated.

LeftBound(criteria)

BotBound, RightBound, TopBound

Length(criteria)

ln(number)

exp

log(number)

Thebase10logarithm. Numberisthepositivereal numberforwhichthe logarithmiscalculated.

ln

Worksheet Functions | Function (argument)


max(number1, number2,...)

865

Description
Thelargestnumberinthelistof arguments. Numberis114numbersfor whichthemaximumvalueisto befound.

Example
=max(C5,C7,C9) (returnsthelargestofthe numbersthatareincellsC5,C7, andC9) =min(C5,C7,C9) (returnsthesmallestofthe numbersthatareincellsC5,C7, andC9) =ObjectType(sel=true) (returnstheobjecttypevalueof theselectedobject;forexample, theobjecttypevalueforalightis 81)

Related Functions
min

min(number1, number2,...)

Thesmallestnumberinthelist ofarguments. Numberis114numbersfor whichtheminimumvalueisto befound.

max

ObjectType(criteria)

ThenumericobjecttypeIDof objectsthatmeetthespecified criteria SeeObjectTypeson page 141inthe VectorScriptLanguage Guideforalistofobject typeIDs.

Perim(criteria)

Thecombinedperimeterof objectsthatmeetthespecified criteria Convertsanumberfrom radianstodegrees. Numberisthevalueinradians tobeconvertedtodegrees.

=Perim(sel=true) (returnsthetotalperimeterofall selectedobjects) =rad2deg(0.5235987) (convertstheradianangle measurementtoitsdegree equivalent) =RightBound(sel=true) (returnsthexcoordinateofthe rightmostpointontheselected objects) =RoofArea_Heated (ST=ROOFFACE) (returnsthecombinedheated roofareaofallroofandroofface objectsinthedrawing) =RoofArea_Heatedproj (T=ROOF) (returnsthecombinedheated roofareaofallroofobjectsinthe drawing,asprojectedtothe activelayerplane) BotBound, TopBound, LeftBound

rad2deg(number)

RightBound(criteria)

Therightsidemaximumx coordinate(rightboundary)of theobjectsthatmeetthe specifiedcriteria Theheatedareaoftheroof (insidethewallline)alongthe slope,combinedforallobjects thatmeetthespecifiedcriteria Theheatedareaoftheroof (insidethewallline)projected totheactivelayerplane, combinedforallobjectsthat meetthespecifiedcriteria

RoofArea_Heated (criteria)

RoofArea_HeatedProj (criteria)

866

| Chapter 20: Worksheets


Description
Thetotalareaoftheroofalong theslope

Function (argument)
RoofArea_Total(criteria)

Example
=RoofArea_Total (ST=ROOFFACE) (returnsthecombinedtotalroof areaofallroofandroofface objectsinthedrawing)

Related Functions

RoofArea_TotalProj (criteria)

Thetotalareaoftheroof, projectedtotheactivelayer plane

=RoofArea_Totalproj (T=ROOF) (returnsthecombinedtotalroof areaofallroofobjectsinthe drawing,asprojectedtothe activelayerplane) =round(D11) (returnsthevalueincellD11 roundedtothenearestwhole number) =sin(deg2rad(32)) (convertsa32degreeangletoits radianequivalent,andreturns thesineoftheangle) =SlabStyleName (sel=true) (returnstheslabstyleofthe selectedslabobject) asin int

round(number)

Roundsthespecifiednumber tothenearestwholenumber

sin(number)

Thesineofagivenangle. Numberistheangleinradians forwhichthesineiscalculated.

SlabStyleName

Thenameofaslabstyle

SlabThickness(criteria)

Thecombinedthicknessofslab objects(floorsandrooffaces) thatmeetthespecifiedcriteria Apositivesquareroot. Numberisthenumberfor whichthesquarerootis calculated.

=SlabThickness(T=SLAB) (returnsthecombinedthickness ofallslabobjectsinthedrawing) =sqrt(D27) (returnsthesquarerootofthe numberincellD27) =sum(A2,A10..A12) (returnsthesumofthenumbers containedincellsA2,A10,A11, andA12) =SurfaceArea(st=sphere) (returnsthetotalsurfaceareaof allsphereobjectsinthedrawing) Average

sqrt(number)

sum(number1, number2,...)

Thesumofallnumbersinthe listofarguments. Numberis114numbersfor whichthesumiscalculated.

SurfaceArea(criteria)

Thetotalsurfaceareaofall objectsthatmeetthecriteria, basedontheAreaunitsinthe Unitsdialogbox

Worksheet Functions | Function (argument)


tan(number)

867

Description
Thetangentofthegivenangle. Numberistheangleinradians forwhichthetangentis calculated.

Example
=tan(deg2rad(32)) (convertsa32degreeangletoits radianequivalent,andreturns thetangentoftheangle) =TopBound(sel=true) (returnstheycoordinateofthe topmostpointontheselected objects) =value('2e3') (returnsthenumericvalueof2 times10raisedtothepowerof3) =Volume(t=xtrd) (returnsthetotalvolumeofall extrudeobjectsinthedrawing) =WallArea_Gross(t=wall) (returnsthecombinedsurface areaofonewallfaceforallwalls inthedrawing) =WallArea_Net(sel=true) (returnsthesurfaceareaofone wallfacefortheselectedwall object,minusdoorandwindow areas) =WallAverageHeight (sel=true) (returnstheaverageheightofthe selectedwallobject) =WallStyleName (sel=true) (returnsthewallstyleofthe selectedwallobject)

Related Functions
atan

TopBound(criteria)

Themaximumycoordinate (topboundary)oftheobjects thatmeetthespecifiedcriteria Convertsatextstringthat representsanumbertoa number Thetotalvolumeofallobjects thatmeetthecriteria,basedon theVolumeunitsintheUnits dialogbox. Thecombined2Dgrosssurface areaofonewallfaceforwalls thatmeetthespecifiedcriteria Thecombined2Dgrosssurface areaofonewallface,without doorandwindowareas,for wallsthatmeetthespecified criteria Theaverageheightofawall, includingwallpeaksand differentstartingandending heights Thenameofawallstyle

BotBound, LeftBound, RightBound

value(text)

Volume(criteria)

WallArea_Gross (criteria)

WallArea_Net

WallArea_Net(criteria)

WallArea_Gross

WallAverageHeight (criteria)

WallStyleName(criteria)

WallThickness(criteria)

Thecombinedthicknessofwall objectsthatmeetthespecified criteria Thecombineddeltax(width) ofobjectsthatmeetthe specifiedcriteria

=WallThickness (sel=true) (returnsthethicknessofthe selectedwallobject) =Width(sel=true) (returnsthedeltaxvalueofthe selectedobject) Height

Width(criteria)

868

| Chapter 20: Worksheets


Description
Thexcoordinateofthecenter pointofanobjectthatmeetsthe specifiedcriteria Thexcoordinateofthe insertionpointforsymbols, pointpluginobjects,andloci Theycoordinateofthecenter pointofanobjectthatmeetsthe specifiedcriteria Theycoordinateofthe insertionpointforsymbols, pointpluginobjects,andloci Thezcoordinateofthecenter pointofanobjectthatmeetsthe specifiedcriteria Thezcoordinateofthe insertionpointforsymbols, pointpluginobjects,andloci

Function (argument)
XCenter(criteria)

Example
=XCenter(sel=true) (returnsthexcoordinatevalueof thecenteroftheselectedobject) =XCoordinate(sel=true) (returnsthexcoordinatevalueof theobjectrelativetotheuser origin) =YCenter(sel=true) (returnstheycoordinatevalue ofthecenteroftheselected object) =YCoordinate(sel=true) (returnstheycoordinatevalue oftheobjectrelativetotheuser origin) =ZCenter(sel=true) (returnsthezcoordinatevalueof thecenteroftheselectedobject) =ZCoordinate(sel=true) (returnsthezcoordinatevalueof theobjectrelativetotheobjects layerplane)

Related Functions
YCenter, ZCenter, XCoordinate YCoordinate, ZCoordinate, XCenter XCenter, ZCenter, YCoordinate XCoordinate, ZCoordinate, YCenter XCenter, YCenter, ZCoordinate XCoordinate, YCoordinate, ZCenter

XCoordinate(critiera)

YCenter(criteria)

YCoordinate(criteria)

ZCenter(criteria)

ZCoordinate(criteria)

Importing Worksheets
Datafromawidevarietyofworksheetformatscanbeimportedintoafile,includingworksheetdatafromother programsandworksheetsfromotherVectorworksfiles.

Importing Worksheet Data from Another Program


Toimportaworksheetintothecurrentfile,boththeworksheetanditsoriginalfilemustbeopen.Inaddition,ablank worksheetmustexistintheactivedrawingasadestinationfortheimportedworksheet. Theworksheetformatsthatcanbeimportedincludecommadelimited,tabdelimited,merge,DIF,andSYLK.During import,thespreadsheetdataisimported,buttheformulas(logic)arenot. ToimportaworksheetintoaVectorworksfile: 1. FromtheResourceBrowser,opentheResourcesmenu. 2. SelectNewResource>Worksheet. TheCreateWorksheetdialogboxopens. 3. Specifythesamenumberofrowsandcolumnsthatarepresentintheworksheettobeimported. 4. SelectFile>Import>ImportWorksheet.

Exporting Worksheets |

869

5. Selecttheworksheetfiletobeimported.TheworksheetmustbeinoneoftheformatsavailableontheFilesof typelist. 6. ClickOpen.TheworksheetisimportedintotheopenworksheetintheVectorworksfile.

Importing Worksheets from Another Vectorworks File


ToimportaVectorworksworksheetfromanotherVectorworksfile: 1. FromtheResourceBrowser,locatethefilecontainingtheworksheetusingtheFindcommandintheResources menu,orfromaFavoritesfile.SeeAccessingExistingResourcesonpage 164formoreinformation. 2. Selecttheworksheettoimport,andclickImport.(Alternatively,dragtheworksheetresourceintothedesired Vectorworksfiletoinsertitasadrawingobject;seeWorksheetsasGraphicObjectsonpage 870.) Theselectedworksheetisimportedintothecurrentfile.

Importing a Table from Microsoft Word


ThefollowingprocedureisanexampleofhowtoimportatablefromMicrosoftWordintoaVectorworksworksheet. ToimportaWordtableintoaworksheet: 1. InWord,selecttheentiretabletobeimported. 2. InversionsofWordpriorto2007,selectTable>Convert>TabletoText.InWindows2007andlater,selectTable Tools>Layout>ConverttoText. TheConvertTabletoTextdialogboxopens. 3. Inthedialogbox,clickTabsfortheseparationidentifier. 4. ClickOK. 5. Savethetable. Ifthefileconsistsofonlythetable,selectFile>SaveAs.IntheSaveAsdialogboxthatopens,selectTextOnly fromtheSaveastypelist,andclickOK. Ifthetableispartofalargerfile,copythetabletotheClipboard.SelectFile>New,andpastethetabletextinto thenewdocument.Savethefileasatextfile. 6. ReturntotheVectorworksfileandimportthetableasdescribedinImportingWorksheetDatafromAnother Programonpage 868.

Exporting Worksheets
Vectorworksworksheetfilescanbeexportedandreadbyspreadsheetprograms,suchasExcel,aswellasbysome wordprocessingprograms.Becausemanyoftheseprogramshavedifferentformatrequirements,severalexport formatsareavailable.Theseincludecommadelimited,tabdelimited,merge,DIF,andSYLK.Usingthetabdelimited format,forexample,createsafilethatcanbeopenedasatableinMicrosoftWord. ToexportaworksheetfromaVectorworksfile: 1. SelectFile>Export>ExportWorksheet. 2. TheExportWorksheetdialogboxopens.

870

| Chapter 20: Worksheets

Selecttheformatfortheexport,andwhethertoexportallrowsoronlytheselectedrows.ClickOKandspecify thenameandlocationoftheexportedworksheet. 3. ClickSave.Thespecifiedworksheetrowsareexportedtothedesiredlocationinthesetformat.

Worksheets as Graphic Objects


Aworksheetcanbeincludedinadrawingasagraphicobject.Aswithanygraphicobject,theworksheetcanbemoved toanylocationonthedrawing.However,itcannotberesizedoreditedasanobject.Toeditthecontentsofthe worksheet,openitfromtheResourceBrowser,orfromthedrawingitself. Toincludeaworksheetasanobjectonadrawing: 1. FromtheResourceBrowser,selectthedesiredworksheet. Theworksheetmustbeapartofthecurrentdrawing.Iftheworksheetispartofanotherdrawing,firstimportit intothecurrentdrawing.SelecttheworksheetfromtheResourceBrowserandthenselectImportfromthe Resourcesmenu.(SeeImportingWorksheetsfromAnotherVectorworksFileonpage 869.) 2. SelectWorksheetOnDrawingfromtheResourcesmenu. Theworksheetisnowincludedinthedrawingasagraphicobject.Itcanbemovedlikeanyothergraphicobject andplacedwheredesired.Iftheworksheetiscurrentlyopen,thecontentsoftheworksheetinthedrawingare replacedwithanX. Alternatively,doubleclicktheworksheetintheResourceBrowsertoplaceitinthedrawingfile,orselectthe worksheetintheResourceBrowseranddragittothedesiredlocationinthedrawingfile.Bothmethods automaticallyselectWorksheetonDrawingandplacetheworksheetasagraphicobject.Ifyouusethedragand dropmethod,thetopleftcorneroftheworksheetisplacedatthepointwherethemouseisreleasedinthe drawingfile. Toeditaworksheetincludedasadrawingobject: 1. FromtheResourceBrowser,selectthedesiredworksheet. 2. SelectOpenfromtheResourcesmenu. Alternatively,doubleclicktheworksheetobjectinthedrawing. 3. Theworksheetisopenedandavailableforediting.Thecontentsoftheworksheetinthedrawingarereplaced withanX.Closetheworksheettodisplaytheworksheetcontentsinthedrawing.

Using Scripts

21

ThereareseveraloptionsforcustomizingtheVectorworksprogramtosuitawiderangeofindividualdesignneeds. OneofthemostimportantoptionsisVectorScript,alightweightPascallikeprogramminglanguage.UseVectorScript todoanythingfromcreatingsimpletoolsthatassistwiththemosttediousdraftingtaskstodevelopingsophisticated solutionsthataddressthemostdemandingdesignneeds. WhileVectorScriptprovidesarichsetofdevelopmenttoolsforcreatingscriptsfromscratch,therearealsoseveral commandsthatallowyoutocreatescriptswithoutdirectknowledgeoftheVectorScriptlanguage.TheCustom Selection,CustomTool/Attribute,andCustomModificationcommandsprovidetheabilitytocreateusefulscripts directly.(TheCustomModificationcommandrequiresthataVectorworksDesignSeriesproductbeinstalled;see CreatingCustomModificationScriptsonpage 567intheVectorworksDesignSeriesUsersGuide.) SeetheVectorScriptLanguageGuideforanintroductiontotheVectorScriptlanguage.TheVectorScriptLanguage Guideisavailableaspartofthehelpsystem,andalsoasaPDFfileinthehelpsystem. TheVectorScriptFunctionReferenceisacomprehensivecommandreferenceavailableonline.Itislocatedin: VWHelp/VectorScriptReference/VSFunctionReference.html.Anothersourceofdeveloperorienteddocumentation relatedtotheSDKandVectorScriptislocatedathttp://developer.vectorworks.net

Creating Custom Selection Scripts


Customselectionscriptsallowobjectsinthecurrentfiletobeselectedordeselectedaccordingtouserspecified criteria.Thewidearrayofoptionsinthecommandallowsforveryspecificfilteringandselectionaccordingtothe definedselectionrequirements. ThelayeroptionsmustbesettoShow/Snap/ModifyOtherstoselectobjectsonanotherlayer. Tocreateacustomselectionscript: 1. SelectTools>CustomSelection. TheCustomSelectiondialogboxopens.

Parameter
Select SelectOnly Deselect

Description
Selectstheobjectsmatchingthespecifiedcriteriawithoutaffectingtheexistingselection statusofotherobjects Deselectsallobjectspriortoperformingtheselectionoperation Deselectsanyobjectsmatchingthespecifiedcriteriawithoutaffectingtheselectionstatus ofotherobjectsinthefile

872

| Chapter 21: Using Scripts


Description
PerformsthespecifiedselectionoperationimmediatelyuponexitingtheCustomSelection dialogbox;theoperationcriteriaisnotsavedforfutureuse SavesthecriteriaandcommandoptionsasaVectorScriptthatcanbereusedasneeded

Parameter
ExecuteImmediately CreateScript

2. ClickCriteriatospecifytheselectioncriteriafortheoperation. TheCriteriadialogboxopens.
Criteria type Criteria comparison option Criteria selection parameter

Adds more selection criteria

Reduces selection criteria

3. Choosethedesiredcriteriaoptions.Thenumberofobjectsinthefilethatmeetthecriteriadisplays. SpecifyadditionaloptionsbyclickingMoreChoices.Toremovethemostrecentlyaddedoption,clickFewer Choices. Specifywhethertoalsoincludeobjectsthatarepartofsymbols,pluginobjects,orviewports. 4. ClickOK. IftheExecuteImmediatelyoptionwaschosen,theselectionoperationisnowperformed.IftheCreateScript optionwaschosen,whenprompted,nametheVectorScriptcontainingtheselectionoperationcommands.The scriptthendisplaysinascriptpalette,andcanbedoubleclickedtoperformtheselectionoperation.

Creating Custom Tool/Attribute Scripts


Customtool/attributescriptsrecordthecurrentattributeandfilesettingsinascriptformatforlateruse.Thesecustom settingscanbecombinedwiththeactivetooltoallowaspecificsetofattributes,suchaslinestyleorpencolor,tobe reactivatedforusewiththetool.Forexample,adashedlinestyleandredpenforegroundcolorcanbesavedwiththe linetoolinascriptfordrawingreddashedlines. Tocreateacustomtool/attributescript: 1. SelectTools>CustomTool/Attribute. TheCustomToolsdialogboxopens.

Creating Custom Tool/Attribute Scripts |

873

2. Selectwhichattributesshouldbesavedinthescript. Thesavedattributesareusedwhenthescriptisexecutedandcanbemodifiedorresetasdesired.

Parameter
All

Description
Checkedbox:Allattributesinthegroupareselected;clicktodeselectallattributesin thegrouptobesavedtothescript. Emptybox:Noattributesinthegroupareselected;clicktoselectallattributesinthe grouptobesavedtothescript. Boxdisplays (Windows)or (Macintosh):Oneormoreattributesinthegroup arenotselected;clicktoselectallattributesinthegrouptobesavedtothescript.

FillAttributes PenAttributes LineAttributes TextAttributes OtherAttributes

Savesfillforegroundandbackgroundcolorsandstyles Savespenforegroundandbackgroundcolorsandstyles Saveslineweight(thickness)andstyleandthepresenceandsizeofmarkers Savestextattributesincludingfont,size,style,spacing,andjustification(alignment) Savesotherattributessuchasclasses,layers,symbols,tools,andSmartCursorsettings (snappingparametersettings,aswellaswhichsnappingtoolsareactiveontheSnapping palette)

3. ClickOK. 4. Whenprompted,nametheVectorScriptcontainingthesavedsettings. Thescriptdisplaysinascriptpalette,andcanbedoubleclickedtoexecute.

874

| Chapter 21: Using Scripts

Creating VectorScripts
VectorScriptsarecustomwrittenscriptsforperformingtaskswithinthefile,andtheyaresavedasresources.Like otherscriptscreatedusingtheautomatedscriptcreationtools,VectorScriptsarestoredinscriptpalettescontained withinthefile. TocreateaVectorScript: 1. SelectWindow>Palettes>ResourceBrowser. TheResourceBrowseropens. 2. FromtheResourcesmenu,selectNewResourcetodisplaytheNewResourcemenu. 3. SelectVectorScript. Ifnoscriptpaletteexists,enteranameforanewscriptpalettewhenprompted,andclickOK. Ifmultiplescriptpalettesexist,butarenotcurrentlyactive,theSelectScriptPalettedialogboxopens.Selectthe palettetoaddthescripttoandclickAdd. 4. EnteranameforthenewVectorScriptandclickOK. 5. TheVectorScriptEditoropenstobeginascripteditingsession. Forinformationoncreatingscripts,seetheVectorScriptLanguageGuide,availableinthehelpsystem,andthe VectorScriptFunctionReference,whichisacomprehensivecommandreferenceavailableonline.Itislocatedin VWHelp/VectorScriptReference/VSFunctionReference.html 6. ClickOKtosavethescriptintheactivescriptpalette.

Running VectorScripts
VectorScriptscanberuninavarietyofways.

Running VectorScripts from the Resource Browser


TorunaVectorScriptfromtheResourceBrowser: 1. FromtheResourceBrowser,selectthepalettecontainingtheVectorScripttorun. 2. Rightclick(Windows)orCtrlclick(Macintosh),andselectEnterfromthecontextmenutodisplaytheavailable VectorScriptsinthepalette. 3. SelecttheVectorScripttorun.Rightclick(Windows)orCtrlclick(Macintosh),andselectRunfromthecontext menu.(Alternatively,doubleclicktheVectorScriptresourcetorunitordragtheVectorScriptresourceintothe drawingarea.)

Running VectorScripts from the Script Palette


TorunaVectorScriptfromascriptpalette: 1. SelectWindow>ScriptPalettesandselecttheVectorScriptpalettecontainingthedesiredVectorScript. ToopenthescriptpalettefromtheResourceBrowser,selecttheVectorScriptpalettecontainingthedesired VectorScript.Rightclick(Windows)orCtrlclick(Macintosh)onthepalette,andselectOpenfromthecontext menu 2. DoubleclicktheVectorScripttorunit.

Managing VectorScripts |

875

Running VectorScripts as Files


Somescriptsmayexistastextfilesonly,iftheywerecreatedinaseparatetexteditorprogram.Thesescriptsarenot storedinthescriptpaletteasaresource. 1. SelecttheTools>Scripts>RunVectorScript. TheChooseVectorScriptFiledialogboxopens. 2. SelectthedesiredscriptandclickOpentorunthescript.

Managing VectorScripts
VectorScripts,likeanyotherVectorworksresource,canbeedited,moved,copied,renamed,ordeleted.VectorScripts alsohavetheaddedabilityofbeingencryptedtopreventediting. ForinformationontheVectorScriptEditor,seeTheVectorScriptEditoronpage 109intheVectorScriptLanguage Guide.TheVectorScriptLanguageGuideisavailableaspartofthehelpsystem,andalsoasaPDFfileinthehelp system.

Editing VectorScripts
ToeditaVectorScript: 1. SelectWindow>Palettes>ResourceBrowser. TheResourceBrowseropens. 2. Selectthescript,andthenselectEditfromtheResourcesmenu. TheVectorScriptEditordialogboxopens.

876

| Chapter 21: Using Scripts


Description
ClicktodisplayalistofoptionsforselectingpredefinedVectorScripttextforinserting intheVectorScriptEditordialogbox;theseoptionscanalsobeaccessedfromshortcut keys ClicktoopentheFormatTextdialogboxforchangingsettingsforthescripttext;see FormattingTextonpage 359 ClicktocompiletheVectorScript

Parameter

3. Whenascripteditingsessioniscomplete,clickOKtosavechanges,orclickCancel(orpresstheEsckey)to discardscriptchanges. Alternatively,VectorScriptscanbeediteddirectlyfromthescriptpalettebyOptiondoubleclickingthescript nameinthepalette(AltdoubleclickonWindows).TheVectorScriptEditoropensandthescriptcanbeedited.

Renaming VectorScripts
TorenameaVectorScript: 1. SelectWindow>Palettes>ResourceBrowser. TheResourceBrowseropens. 2. Selectthescripttobeedited,andthenselectRenamefromtheResourcesmenu. TheAssignNamedialogboxopens. 3. Enterthenewscriptname. 4. ClickOK.

Duplicating VectorScripts
ToduplicateaVectorScript: 1. SelectWindow>Palettes>ResourceBrowser. TheResourceBrowseropens. 2. Selectthescripttobeduplicated,andthenselectDuplicatefromtheResourcesmenu. TheAssignNamedialogboxopens. 3. Enterthenamefortheduplicatedscript,andthenclickOK. Theduplicatescriptiscreatedinthesamepaletteastheoriginalscript.

Deleting VectorScripts
TodeleteaVectorScript: 1. SelectWindow>Palettes>ResourceBrowser. TheResourceBrowseropens. 2. Selectthescripttobedeleted,andselectDeletefromtheResourcesmenu.

Managing Script Palettes |


3. Whenprompted,clickOKtodeletethescript.

877

Importing VectorScripts
ToimportascriptfromanotherVectorworksfile: 1. SelectWindow>Palettes>ResourceBrowser. TheResourceBrowseropens. 2. Locatethefilecontainingthescript.Selectthescripttobeimported,andthenselectImportfromtheResources menu.(Alternatively,dragtheVectorScriptresourceintothedesiredVectorworksfile.) Thescriptisimportedintotheactivescriptpalette.Ifnopaletteisactive,selectthedestinationfortheimported script,whenprompted.

Encrypting VectorScripts
Ascriptcanbeencryptedandlockedtopreventediting. ToencryptaVectorScript: 1. SelectTools>Scripts>EncryptVectorScript. TheChooseVectorScriptFiledialogboxopens. 2. Locateandselectthescripttextfiletoencrypt. 3. ClickOpen. TheSaveEncryptedVectorScriptCodeDocumentdialogboxopens. 4. Enteranewnameforthescript,andthenselectthelocationforsavingthefile. 5. ClickSave. Thescriptissavedinanencryptedformat.

Managing Script Palettes


UsetheResourceBrowsertomanagescriptpalettesaswellasindividualscripts.

Opening a Script Palette


Toopenascriptpalette: 1. SelectWindow>Palettes>ResourceBrowser. TheResourceBrowseropens. 2. Selectthescriptpalettetobeopened,andthenselectOpenfromtheResourcesmenu. Thescriptpaletteopens.

Moving a Script to a New Palette


TomoveascripttoanewpaletteusingtheResourceBrowser: 1. SelectWindow>Palettes>ResourceBrowser.

878

| Chapter 21: Using Scripts


TheResourceBrowseropens.

2. Selectthescriptpalettecontainingthedesiredscript,andthenselectOpenfromtheResourcesmenu. Thesourcescriptpaletteopensinthedrawing. 3. Selectthescriptpalettewherethescriptwillbemoved,andthenselectOpenfromtheResourcesmenu. Thedestinationscriptpaletteopensinthedrawing. 4. Clickonthescripttomove,andthenpressCommand+X(Macintosh)orCtrl+X(Windows).Thescriptis removedfromthepaletteandplacedintotheclipboard. 5. Clickonthedestinationscriptpalette,andthenpressCommand+V(Macintosh)orCtrl+V(Windows).Thescript isplacedintotheselectedscriptpalette. EachscriptpalettecanalsobeopenedfromtheWindowmenu.

Importing a Script Palette


ToimportascriptpalettefromanotherVectorworksfile: 1. SelectWindow>Palettes>ResourceBrowser. TheResourceBrowseropens. 2. Locatethescriptpalettetobeimported. ForinformationonusingtheResourceBrowsertolocateresourcesinotherVectorworksfiles,seeUsingthe ResourceBrowseronpage 159. 3. Selectthescriptpalettetobeimported,andthenselectImportfromtheResourcesmenu.(Alternatively,dragthe scriptpaletteresourceintothedesiredVectorworksfile.) ThepaletteandanyscriptsitcontainsareimportedintotheactiveVectorworksfile.

Using the Workspace Editor

TheFundamentalsworkspaceisinstalledwiththeVectorworksFundamentalsproductin[Vectorworks]\Workspaces. IftheRenderworksproductisinstalled,alloftheuserinterfaceelementsareaddedtotheFundamentalsworkspace. EachVectorworksDesignSeriesproductisinstalledwithaunique,industryspecificworkspace.Anychangesmadeto thedefaultworkspacesaresavedintheUserDataandPreferencesfolder,tomaintaintheintegrityofboththedefault andcustomworkspaces(seeUserFoldersPreferencesonpage 26). Afteracustomworkspacehasbeencreated,userspecifiedchangestopalettepositionandsettingsareremembered acrossVectorworkssessions,butdonotcreateanewversionoftheworkspace.Torevertthepalettepositionand settingsbacktothesettingsestablishedwhenthecustomworkspacewascreated(intheUserDataandPreferences folder),clickResetSavedSettingsfromtheSessiontabofVectorworkspreferences(seeSessionPreferenceson page 21). Tocreateacustomworkspace,youcaneditthecurrentworkspace,editacopyofthecurrentworkspace,orcreatea newworkspace.Createmultipleworkspacesfordifferentdrawingneeds,orcustomizeasingleworkspacetoyour personalpreferences. Workspacecustomizationoptionsinclude: Addmenus,toolpalettes,toolsets,tools,andcommands Removeunusedmenus,toolpalettes,toolsets,tools,andcommands Rearrangetheorderandthepositionofmenus,toolsets,tools,andcommands Add,modify,deleteandprintthekeyboardshortcutsfortoolsandcommands Configurethecontextmenus Establishpalettepositionsandsettingstobeusedintheworkspace Youcanalsocreatecustomizedplugintools,commands,andobjects.SeeUsingVectorScriptPluginsonpage 87in theVectorScriptLanguageGuide.TheVectorScriptLanguageGuideisavailableaspartofthehelpsystem,andalsoas aPDFfileinthehelpsystem.

Creating or Editing a Workspace


Tocreateoreditaworkspace: 1. SelectTools>Workspaces>WorkspaceEditor,orselectCustomizefromatoolpalettesutilitymenu. TheWorkspaceEditorOptionsdialogboxopens.

2. Selecttheworkspacetoedit.

880

| Appendix A: Using the Workspace Editor


Description
Changesthecurrentlyactiveworkspace Createsanexactduplicateofthecurrentworkspace;thisisthe recommendedoption Createsanewworkspacewherealltoolsandcommandsmustbearranged (fromscratch)

Option
Editthecurrentworkspace Editacopyofthecurrentworkspace Createanewworkspace

3. Enteraworkspacenameifthisiseitheranewworkspaceoracopyofthecurrentworkspace. 4. ClickOK. TheWorkspaceEditordialogboxopens. Clickdragthetoporbottomedge(Windows)orthelowerrighthandcorner(Macintosh)oftheWorkspace Editordialogboxtoresizeit.Thisisusefulfordisplayinglonglistsoftoolsandcommandswhilecustomizing workspaces.

5. Modifythemenus,contextmenus,tools,keyboardshortcuts,andpalettepositionsandsettingsasdescribedin thefollowingsections: ModifyingMenusandCommandsonpage 881 ModifyingContextMenusonpage 883 ModifyingToolPalettesandToolSetsonpage 884 ModifyingSnappingandModeShortcutsonpage 887 ModifyingPalettePositionsandSettingsonpage 888

Creating or Editing a Workspace |

881

SomeshortcutsarereservedbytheVectorworksprogramorbytheWindowsorMacintoshoperatingsystem. TheWorkspaceEditordoesnotpreventsuchshortcutsfrombeingassignedtoapaletteoratool.Ifthisoccurs, theWindowsorMacintoshshortcuttypicallyoverridestheshortcutassignedintheVectorworksprogram. Ifaduplicateitemisaddedtoamenu,apalette,oratoolset,theitemdisplaysinbothlocations.Highlightthe undesiredoccurrenceofthetoolorcommandandpresstheDeletekeytoremoveit. 6. Ifdesired,clickExportWorkspacetoTextFiletoexportatextfilelistofallmenuitems,tools,andkeyboard shortcutscontainedinthecurrentworkspace;whenprompted,specifythefilenameandthelocationforthefile andclickOK.ThetextfilealsolistskeysreservedbytheVectorworksprogramortheoperatingsystem,shortcuts thatcannotbeusermodified,andshortcutsthatcanbemodifiedfromwithintheWorkspaceEditor.

Modifying Menus and Commands


Modifymenusandassignkeyboardshortcutstocommands,asneeded. Toadd,modify,ordeleteamenuoracommand: 1. AccesstheWorkspaceEditordialogboxasdescribedinCreatingorEditingaWorkspaceonpage 879. ClicktheMenustab.Theleftsideofthedialogboxdisplaysallavailablecommands,groupedbycategory.The rightsideofthedialogboxdisplaysthemenusandcommandscurrentlyassignedtotheworkspace.Toeasily identifywhatchangedinthisrelease,theRecentChangesfolderliststhenewandrevisedmenusandcommands forthecurrentandpriorversionoftheVectorworkssoftware;italsoliststhosemenusandcommandsthatare nowconsideredobsolete(legacy).Modifythemenusandcommandsasdescribedinthefollowingtable.
Click the triangle (Mac) or plus (+) sign (Windows) to display current commands under the menu item Menus and commands in the current workspace Context menus and commands in the current workspace

All available commands, listed alphabetically All new, revised, or obsolete menus and commands in the current and prior version of Vectorworks All available commands, listed by category Click the triangle (Mac) or plus (+) sign (Windows) to display the available commands in the category

Option
Addanewmenuorsubmenu Addacommandtoamenu

Description
ClickdragtheNewMenucommandfromtheCommandslisttothedesired positionintheMenuslist;typethenewmenunameinplaceofNewMenu Clicktheplussign(Windows)ortriangle(Macintosh)toexpandthelistof commands;clickdragthecommandfromtheCommandslisttothedesired positionintheMenuslist

882

| Appendix A: Using the Workspace Editor


Description
ClickdragtheSeparatorcommand(Windows)orseparatorline(Macintosh) fromtheCommandslisttothedesiredpositionintheMenuslist;aseparatorline displays ClickdragtheitemintheMenuslisttothedesiredposition SelecttheitemfromtheMenuslistandpresstheDeletekey,ordragtheitem outsideoftheMenuslistdisplayarea(Windows);deletinganitemwilldeleteits stackeditemsunlesstheyaremovedfrombeneaththatitemfirst SelectthemenufromtheMenuslistandtypethedesiredname;commands cannotberenamed

Option
Addaseparator

Moveanitem Deleteanitem

Changeamenuname

TheDocumentWindows,Font,ToolPalettes,andWorkspacesmenuitemsarepopulatedatruntime.Therefore, theycanonlybeplacedasthelastiteminalistofsubmenuitems. 2. Ifdesired,assignthecombinationofkeystouseasashortcuttoaccessamenucommand.


Macintosh 1. Select the command 2. Select a shortcut key combination 3. Press the desired key

Windows 1. Select the command 2. Select a shortcut key combination 3. Click the screen and press the desired key

Creating or Editing a Workspace | Shortcut Key Combination


Macintosh UseCmd+key UseCmd+Option+key UseCmd+Shift+key UseCmd+Option+Shift+key Windows UseCtrl+key UseCtrl+Alt+key UseCtrl+Shift+key UseCtrl+Alt+Shift+key

883

Description
AssignsthecombinationoftheCommandkeyandanotherkeytoaccessthis menucommand AssignsthecombinationoftheCommandkey,Optionkey,andanotherkeyto accessthismenucommand AssignsthecombinationoftheCommandkey,Shiftkey,andanotherkeyto accessthismenucommand AssignsthecombinationoftheCommandkey,Optionkey,Shiftkey,and anotherkeytoaccessthismenucommand

AssignsthecombinationoftheCtrlkeyandanotherkeytoaccessthismenu command AssignsthecombinationoftheCtrlkey,Altkey,andanotherkeytoaccessthis menucommand AssignsthecombinationoftheCtrlkey,Shiftkey,andanotherkeytoaccess thismenucommand AssignsthecombinationoftheCtrlkey,Altkey,Shiftkey,andanotherkeyto accessthismenucommand

Ifakeyboardshortcutisalreadyinuse,theoptiontoreassigntheshortcuttothecurrentmenucommandis presented.Iftheshortcutisreassigned,theoriginalcommandnolongerhasashortcut. 3. Ifnecessary,modifyordeleteakeyboardshortcut.

Option
Modifyakeyboardshortcut

Description
SelecttheshortcutfromtheMenuslist;selectanewshortcutkeycombination and/orenteradifferentkeyfortheshortcut(ifthatkeyisreservedbythe Vectorworksprogramorisalreadyinuse,amessagedisplays) SelecttheshortcutkeyfromtheMenuslistandpressDeleteorBackspace

Deleteakeyboardshortcut

4. ClickOKtoclosetheWorkspaceEditordialogbox.

Modifying Context Menus


ModifydocumentcontextmenusandobjectcontextmenusinthesamemannerasdescribedinModifyingMenus andCommandsonpage 881.Thesemenusdisplaywhenyouclickonanobjectoronthedrawingareawitha rightclick(Windows)orCtrlclick(Macintosh).Theobjectcontextmenuscontaincontextsensitivecommandsthat pertaintotheitemthatiscurrentlyselectedinthedrawingarea.

884

| Appendix A: Using the Workspace Editor

Modifying Tool Palettes and Tool Sets


Modifytoolpalettesandtoolsets,andassignkeyboardshortcutstotools,asneeded.Toolscanonlybeaddedtotool sets,nottotoolpalettes. Toprovidemoredrawingspace,stackthetoolsthathavesimilarfunctionality. Toadd,modify,ordeleteatoolpaletteoratoolset: 1. AccesstheWorkspaceEditordialogboxasdescribedinCreatingorEditingaWorkspaceonpage 879. 2. ClicktheToolstab.Theleftsideofthedialogboxdisplaysallavailabletools,groupedbycategory.Therightside ofthedialogboxdisplaysthetoolpalettes,thetoolsets,andthetoolsthatarecurrentlyassignedtothe workspace.Toeasilyidentifywhatchangedinthisrelease,theRecentChangesfolderliststhenewandrevised toolsforthecurrentandpriorversionoftheVectorworkssoftware;italsoliststhosetoolsthatarenow consideredobsolete(legacy).Modifythetoolpalettesandthetoolsetsasdescribedinthefollowingtable. FortheBasicpalette,theedittoolsandthetoolsfor2Dand3DobjectcreationarelistedintheView/Drawtool set.

Creating or Editing a Workspace |

885

All available tools, listed alphabetically All new, revised, or obsolete tools in the current and prior version of the Vectorworks program All available tools, listed by category Click the plus (+) sign (Windows) or the triangle (Mac) to display the available tools in the category

The tool palettes, tool sets, and tools in the current workspace Click a tool set label to display a preview of the current tools on the right side of the dialog box Click the plus (+) sign (Windows) or the triangle (Mac) to display the current tools or tool sets under the item

Option
Addanewtoolpalette

Description
ClickdragtheNewToolPalettecommandfromtheCreatelisttothePaletteslist; clicktheitemstextlabelandtypethenewpalettesnameinplaceofNewTool Palette ClickdragtheNewToolSetcommandfromtheCreatelisttothePaletteslist; clicktheitemstextlabelandtypethenewtoolsetsnameinplaceofNewToolSet Tochangethedefaulticonforthetoolset,selectthetoolset,clickSetToolSet Icon,andusethedialogthatopenstoselecta26x20PNGimagefiletouse Clicktheplussign(Windows)ortriangle(Macintosh)toexpandthelistoftools; clickdragthetool(ortheentiregroupoftools)fromtheToolslisttothedesired positioninthePaletteslist ClickdragtheiteminthePaletteslisttothedesiredposition SelecttheiteminthePaletteslistandpresstheDeletekey,or(onWindows)drag theitemoutsideofthePaletteslistdisplayarea. Ifyoudeleteanitemthathasotheritemsstackedbeneathit,allofthestacked itemsaredeletedalongwiththemainitem;topreventthis,movethestacked itemstoanotherlocationfirst.

Addanewtoolset Changeatoolseticon Addatooloratoolcategory toatoolset Moveanitem Deleteanitem

Changethenameofatool paletteoratoolset

SelecttheitemfromthePaletteslist,clicktheitemstextlabel,andtypethedesired name;toolscannotberenamed

3. Ifdesired,assignorchangethecombinationofkeystouseasashortcuttoaccessatool.

886

| Appendix A: Using the Workspace Editor

Macintosh 1. Select the tool 2. Select a shortcut key combination 3. Press the desired key

Windows 1. Select the tool 2. Select a shortcut key combination 3. Click the screen and press the desired key

Shortcut Key Combination


Macintosh Usekey UseOption+key UseShift+key UseOption+Shift+key Windows Usekey UseAltkey UseShift+key

Description
Assignsthiskeytoaccessthistool AssignsthecombinationoftheOptionkeyandanotherkeytoaccessthistool AssignsthecombinationoftheShiftkeyandanotherkeytoaccessthistool AssignsthecombinationoftheOptionkey,Shiftkey,andanotherkeytoaccessthis tool

Assignsthiskeytoaccessthistool AssignsthecombinationoftheAltkeyandanotherkeytoaccessthistool AssignsthecombinationoftheShiftkeyandanotherkeytoaccessthistool

Creating or Editing a Workspace | Shortcut Key Combination


UseAlt+Shift+key

887

Description
AssignsthecombinationoftheAltkey,Shiftkey,andanotherkeytoaccessthistool

Ifakeyboardshortcutisalreadyinuse,theoptiontoreassigntheshortcuttothecurrenttoolisprovided.Ifthe shortcutisreassigned,theoriginaltoolnolongerhasashortcut. 4. Ifnecessary,modifyordeleteakeyboardshortcut.

Option
Modifyakeyboardshortcut

Description
SelecttheshortcutfromthePaletteslist;selectanewshortcutkeycombination and/orenteradifferentkeyfortheshortcut(ifthatkeyisreservedbythe Vectorworksprogramorisalreadyinuse,amessagedisplays) SelecttheshortcutkeyfromthePaletteslistandpressDeleteorBackspace

Deleteakeyboardshortcut

5. ClickOKtoclosetheWorkspaceEditordialogbox.

Modifying Snapping and Mode Shortcuts


YoucanmodifythekeyboardshortcutsforswitchingbetweenmodesontheToolbar,andforactivatingsnapping functionality. Tomodifytheshortcutsformodesandsnapping: 1. AccesstheWorkspaceEditordialogboxasdescribedinCreatingorEditingaWorkspaceonpage 879. 2. ClicktheKeystabtodisplaythekeyboardshortcutsfortheworkspacecurrentlyinuse.Assignormodifythe keyboardshortcuts,asneeded.

888

| Appendix A: Using the Workspace Editor


Description
Setstheshortcutkeystoswitchmodesfortheactivetool;thekeyin1controlsthe firstmodegroup,thekeyin2controlsthesecondmodegroup,andsoon Setsthekeyboardshortcutsforthefunctionsbelow PressthiskeytotoggleonandofftheSmartCursorcuedisplay Pressthiskeytotogglewhetheranglesnapsaresetrelativetotheaxesortothe previouslydrawnsegment Pressthiskeytocreateadatumpointforsnappingatthecurrentcursorlocation PressthiskeytoopentheSnapLoupewindow Pressthiskeytosetasmartpoint,smartedge,orvectorsnaplockatthecurrent location Pressthiskeytotoggleonandofftheautomaticworkingplanefunctionality;see TheAutomaticWorkingPlaneonpage 208 Pressandholdthiskeytodisablesnappingtemporarily Pressandholdthiskeytoseeandselectobjectsthatarenormallyobscuredbehind 2Dobjectfills;seeXrayFillsModeonpage 62 Ifthecursorisovermultipleobjectsatthecurrentlocation,pressandholdthiskey andclicktoopenadialogboxfromwhichyoucanselectoneormoreofthe objects;seeCoincidentObjectSelectiononpage 61 SetsthekeyboardshortcutstotoggleonandoffeachSnappingpalettetool

Parameter
ModeGroups OtherKeys ToggleSmartCursorCues ToggleAnglesRelativeTo PriorSegment SetDatum SnapLoupe SetSmartPoint,Edge,or VectorSnapLock ToggleAutomatic WorkingPlane SuspendSnapping XrayFillsMode CoincidentSelection

SnappingKeys

3. ClickOKtoclosetheWorkspaceEditordialogbox.

Modifying Palette Positions and Settings


AftermakingcustomizationsintheWorkspaceEditor,returntothedrawingfiletomovepalettestothedesired position,andtoassignpalettedisplayandbehaviorsettings. Tomodifypalettepositionsandsettings: 1. Movepalettestothedesiredposition,setpalettesize,andsetwhetherpalettesshouldbeminimized,ordocked (Windowsonly);seePaletteLayoutOptionsonpage 10,MinimizingPalettesonpage 10,andDocking WindowsPalettesonpage 11. 2. Fortoolpalettes,setthetoolandtoolsetdisplayandsortstyle,andthetoolsetplacementoption;seeTool PaletteFeaturesonpage 11. 3. FortheObjectInfopalette,clicktheShape,Data,orRendertabtosettheactivepaneuponopening,and manuallypositiontheseparatorintheDatapane,asdesired. 4. FortheResourceBrowser,settheresourcedisplaystyleandgroupvisibilities;seeViewingResourceson page 160andHidingandShowingResourcesonpage 162. 5. FortheNavigationpalette(VectorworksDesignSeriesrequired),clickthedesiredtabtosettheactivepaneupon opening.

Updating Custom Workspaces and Plug-in Objects |


6. Oncepalettesarepositionedandsettingshavebeenestablished,selectWindow>Palettes>SavePalette Positionstosavethechanges.

889

7. Foreachcustomizedworkspace,repeattheproceduresintheWorkspaceEditordialogbox(customizemenus, contextmenus,tools,keyboardshortcuts),andwithinthedrawingfile(establishpalettepositionsandsettings).

Updating Custom Workspaces and Plug-in Objects


WhenaVectorworkssoftwareupgradeisinstalled,theworkspacesandpluginobjectsintheVectorworksrootfolder (wheretheapplicationisinstalled)arereplaced. Yourcustomworkspacesandplugins(inyouruserfolder)remaininplace;seeUserFoldersPreferencesonpage 26 fordetailsaboutuserfolders.ThefirsttimethenewversionoftheVectorworksprogramisopened,itautomatically convertsthecustomworkspacestothenewformatandsavesacopyoftheoriginalworkspacesinaLegacy Workspacesfolder(inyouruserfolder). TheVectorworksinstallerandupdaterprogramsbothmakebackupcopiesofallworkspaces.Theinstallerplaces backupcopiesofworkspacesinafolderentitledOriginal,withinthe[Vectorworks]\Workspacesfolder.Theupdater placesbackupcopiesofworkspacesinasequentiallynumberedfolderentitledBackup,withintheWorkspacesfolder. Eachtimetheupdaterisrun,anotherBackupfolderiscreated.Afterthebackup,boththeinstallerandtheupdater overwritetheworkspacesatthetopleveloftheWorkspacesfolder. Formoreinformationaboutwherepluginobjectsmaybelocated,seeHowPluginsWorkonpage 88inthe VectorScriptLanguageGuide.TheVectorScriptLanguageGuideisavailableaspartofthehelpsystem,andalsoasa PDFfileinthehelpsystem.

Migrating Custom Workspaces


YoucanautomaticallyconvertacustomworkspacethatwascreatedinapreviousversionoftheVectorworks program.However,thecustomworkspacewillnothaveanyneworrevisedfeaturesfromthelatestreleaseuntilitis migratedwiththeWorkspaceEditor.Fordetailsabouttheeditor,seeCreatingorEditingaWorkspaceonpage 879. Toenablethenewfunctionalityinthecustomworkspace,addthenewtoolsandcommands,andreplacethetoolsand commandsthathavebeenupdated. Typically,youshouldalsoremovefromthecustomworkspacethetoolsandcommandsthatarenolongerinthenew versionoftheVectorworksprogram.SomeitemsmaystillbeavailableundertheLegacyfolderintheWorkspace Editor,eventhoughtheyarenolongerinthenewerworkspaces.Ifso,youcanusetheminthecustomworkspace; however,theirfunctionalityisnotguaranteedorsupported.Onlytheitemscontainedinthelatestworkspacesare documentedintheusersguideandinthehelpsystem. IfthecustomworkspaceisfromaversionearlierthanVectorworks12,startwiththeworkspaceinthenew versionoftheVectorworksprogramandaddcustomizationstothatworkspace;donotmigratetheoldercustom workspace. TomigrateacustomworkspacetoanewversionoftheVectorworksprogram: 1. ReviewthelistofworkspacechangesforthisversionintheRecentChangesfolderoftheWorkspaceEditor dialogbox.Decidewhichmenus,commands,tools,andcontextmenusneedtobeadded,deleted,orupdatedin thecustomworkspace. 2. Placethecustomworkspacefileinyour[User]/WorkspacesfolderforthenewversionoftheVectorworks program. ThelocationofthisfolderdependsonthepreferencespecifiedinUserDataandPreferencesFolderonpage 27.

890

| Appendix A: Using the Workspace Editor

3. OpentheVectorworksprogram,whichautomaticallyconvertstheworkspaceandplacestheoriginalfileina LegacyWorkspacesfolderwithinyour[User]/Workspacesfolder. 4. SelectTools>Workspaces><<customworkspace>>toaccessthecustomworkspace. 5. Fromthecustomworkspace,accesstheWorkspaceEditor. TheWorkspaceEditorOptionsdialogboxdisplays.Selecttheoptiontoeditacopyofthecurrentworkspaceand specifyanewnamefortheworkspace. 6. Modifythemenus,contextmenus,tools,andkeyboardshortcutsasdescribedhere: ModifyingMenusandCommandsonpage 881 ModifyingContextMenusonpage 883 ModifyingToolPalettesandToolSetsonpage 884 ModifyingSnappingandModeShortcutsonpage 887 7. ClickOKtosavethechanges. 8. Inthedrawingarea,modifythepalettepositionsandsettings,andselectWindow>Palettes>SavePalette Positionstosavethechanges,asdescribedinModifyingPalettePositionsandSettingsonpage 888.

Standards and Resources


Libraries in Vectorworks Fundamentals and Renderworks

B
Vectorworks
X X X X X X X

ThefollowinglibrariesareprovidedasstandardresourceswiththeVectorworksFundamentalsorRenderworks products.Asubsetoftheseresourcesisalsoavailablebydefaultatthepointofuse(seeDefaultContentin VectorworksFundamentalsandRenderworksonpage 157).Alllibrariesareconsidereduniversal,meaningthatthey areinstalledregardlessofthedrawingunitselectedduringinstallation.Additionallibrariesareavailablefor VectorworksServiceSelectsubscribers;seeVectorworksServiceSelectonpage xiv.

Library Hatches
Hatches_ANSI.vwx Hatches_Cartographic.vwx Hatches_Detail.vwx Hatches_Miscellaneous.vwx Hatches_PavingPatterns.vwx Hatches_Plant.vwx Hatches_Surfacematerial.vwx

Renderworks

Image Fills
ImageFills_ExteriorFinishes.vwx ImageFills_FlooringForboArtoleum.vwx ImageFills_FlooringForboEffect.vwx ImageFills_FlooringForboEternal.vwx ImageFills_FlooringForboMarmoleum.vwx ImageFills_FlooringForboSmaragd.vwx ImageFills_InteriorFinishes.vwx ImageFills_MetalsPlasticsGlass.vwx ImageFills_Nature.vwx ImageFills_StoneAndBrick.vwx ImageFills_WoodArcitex.vwx X X X X X X X X X X X

Image Props
PropsHiRes.vwx PropsLoRes.vwx X X

Objects-Building Architecture & Interior


ArchitectSampler.vwx EquipOfficeEquipment.vwx X X

892

| Appendix B: Standards and Resources


Library
FurnitureOffice.vwx FurnitureOfficeCubicle.vwx FurnitureResidential.vwx

Vectorworks
X X X

Renderworks

Objects-Building Services
ElectricalAccurateLampsImp.vwx ElectricalAccurateLampsMetric.vwx HVAC1Line.vwx ProcessEquipt.vwx ProcessPiping.vwx ProcessValves.vwx X X X X X X

Objects-Landscape & Site


Objectsfromwww.caddetails.com(150files) SitePlanning.vwx PlantImages EnviroGraphicPhotorealistic/EnvirographicAU Plants.vwx OzbreedPhotorealistic/OzBreedAUPlants.vwx X X X X

Objects-Miscellaneous & Entourage


EEEngineering.vwx EELogic.vwx EEPCBoard.vwx EESchematics.vwx MachineDesignSampler.vwx MapSymbols.vwx X X X X X X

Textures
Textures_ExteriorFinishes.vwx Textures_FlooringForboArtoleum.vwx Textures_FlooringForboEffect.vwx Textures_FlooringForboEternal.vwx Textures_FlooringForboMarmoleum.vwx Textures_FlooringForboSmaragd.vwx Textures_InteriorFinishes.vwx Textures_MetalsPlasticsGlass.vwx X X X X X X X X

Cursors in Vectorworks Fundamentals | Library


Textures_Nature.vwx Textures_StoneAndBrick.vwx Textures_WoodArcitex.vwx Textures_Wood.vwx

893

Vectorworks

Renderworks
X X X X

Cursors in Vectorworks Fundamentals


ThecursorintheVectorworksFundamentalsprogramchangesdependingonwhichtool,mode,andmodifierkeysare currentlyinuse,aswellaswhattypeofobjectthecursorisoverinthedrawingarea.Thishelpsyoutoknowwhich actionsareavailableatanygiventime,withoutshiftingyourattentionfromthedrawing.

Cursor 2D Polygon tool

Description
PolygonfromInnerBoundarymodeisactive;clickinanenclosedareatocreatea 2Dpolygonbasedontheareasinnerboundary

Reshape tool (Top/Plan view)


MovePolygonHandlesmodeisactive,andthecursorisoverahandle;clickdrag tomovethehandle ChangeVertexmodeisactive,andthecursorisoveravertexhandle;clickto changethevertextothetypeselectedintheToolbar AddVertexmodeisactive,andthecursorisoverahandle;clickdragthehandle tocreateanewvertex DeleteVertexmodeisactive,andthecursorisoveravertexhandle;clicktodelete thevertex RectangularMarqueemodeisactive,andthecursorisnotoveranyhandle LassoMarqueemodeisactive,andthecursorisnotoveranyhandle PolygonalMarqueemodeisactive,andthecursorisnotoveranyhandle

Reshape tool (3D view)


Thecursorisoverahandleonaselected3Dobjectthatcanbedraggedvertically (forexample,thetophandleofanextrude) Thecursorisoverahandleonaselected3Dobjectthatcanbedraggedinany direction(forexample,anyhandleonaNURBScurve)

894

| Appendix B: Standards and Resources


Description
Thecursorisoverahandleonaselected3Dobjectthatcanbescaled(forexample, aradiushandleonasphere) ChangeVertexmodeisactive,andthecursorisoveravertexhandle;clickto changethevertextype AddVertexmodeisactive,andthecursorisoverahandle;clickdragthehandle tocreateanewvertex RemoveVertexmodeisactive,andthecursorisoveravertexhandle;clickto deletethevertex

Cursor

Align Plane tool


ClicktodefinetheXandYaxesontheselectedobject

Angular Dimension tool


AngularDimensionfromTwoObjectsmodeisactive;clicktwointersecting objectstocreatethedimensionobject

Attribute Mapping tool


Clickdragtoscalethefilllargerorsmaller(thecursorisoveracornerhandleof themappingobject) Clickdragtorotatethefill(thecursorisoveramiddlehandleofthemapping object) Clickdragtomovetheoriginofthefill(thecursorisoverotherpartsofthe mappingobject)
Near a handle Anywhere except a handle

Center Mark tool


Clickthehighlightedobjecttocreateacentermark

Chamfer Edge tool


SelectFacespreferenceoff Thecursorhighlightsedgesthatcanbeusedinthechamferoperation

Windows

Macintosh

SelectFacespreferenceon

Thecursorhighlightsfacesthatcanbeusedinthechamferoperation

Windows

Macintosh

Cursors in Vectorworks Fundamentals | Cursor Constraint tools


Clicktheobjectstobeconstrained

895

Description

Extract tool
ExtractPointor ExtractCurvemode Thecursorhighlightsedgesthatcanbeusedintheextractoperation

Windows

Macintosh

ExtractIsoparametricCurve orExtractSurfacemode

Thecursorhighlightsfacesthatcanbeusedintheextractoperation

Windows

Macintosh

Eyedropper tool
ApplyAttributesmodeisactive PickUpAttributesmodeisactive

Fillet Edge tool


SelectFacespreferenceoff Thecursorhighlightsedgesthatcanbeusedinthefilletoperation

Windows

Macintosh

SelectFacespreferenceon

Thecursorhighlightsfacesthatcanbeusedinthefilletoperation

Windows

Macintosh

Fixed Point Resize tool


Clickthepointontheselectedobjectthatistoremainfixed,andthenmovethe cursortoresizetheobject

Flyover tool
Clickdragtoflyoverthedrawing

896

| Appendix B: Standards and Resources


Description
Clickatoolorcommandtoopentheonlinehelptopicthatdescribesit
Windows Macintosh

Cursor Help (Whats This? command)

Loft Surface tool


Thecursorhighlightscurvesthatcanbeusedintheloftoperation
Windows Macintosh

Move Page tool


Clicktomovethepageprintboundary

Pan tool
ThePantoolisactive,orthepanmodeisactivatedwhenanothertoolisactive (Spacebarispressed)

Polyline tool
BzierVertexmode CubicVertexmode ArcVertexFilletmode

Project tool
Thecursorhighlightscurvesthatcanbeusedintheprojectoperation
Windows Macintosh

Push/Pull tool
InExtrudeFaceorMoveFacemode,thecursorhighlightsfacesthatcanbeused inthepush/pulloperation
Windows Macintosh

Radial Dimension tool


Clickthehighlightedcircletocreatearadialdimension

Cursors in Vectorworks Fundamentals | Cursor Render Bitmap tool


Clickdragtoselecttheareafromwhichtocreatearenderedbitmapimage

897

Description

Rotate View tool


Clickdragtorotatethedrawingview

Selection tool
Clicktoscaletheselectedobject Thecursorisoveranobject;clicktoselectorclickdragtomovetheobject Clickdragtoduplicatetheobject(theCtrlkeyispressedonWindows,orthe OptionkeyispressedonMacintosh) Thecursorisoveranobject;clicktoselectorclickdragtomovetheobject Clicktoaddanobjecttothecurrentselection(theShiftkeyispressed) Clickdragtoduplicateanobject(theCtrlkeyispressedonWindows,orthe OptionkeyispressedonMacintosh) Thecursorisnotoveranyselectableobject
Windows Macintosh

LassoSelectionmodeisactive PolygonalSelectionmodeisactive Thecursorisoveredgesorpointsofmultipleobjects;useeithertheCoincident SelectionkeyortheSelectCoincidentObjectscommandtoselecttheappropriate objects Thecursorisoveredgesorpointsofmultipleobjects,andtheShiftkeyispressed; useeithertheCoincidentSelectionkeyortheSelectCoincidentObjects commandtoselecttheappropriateobjectstoaddtotheselection Thecursorisoveredgesorpointsofmultipleobjects;useeithertheCoincident SelectionkeyortheSelectCoincidentObjectscommandtoselecttheappropriate objectstomove

898

| Appendix B: Standards and Resources


Description
Thecursorisovertheresizingpointsofmultipleobjects;useeithertheCoincident SelectionkeyortheSelectCoincidentObjectscommandtoselecttheappropriate objectstoresize

Cursor

Set Working Plane tool


Clicktoplacetheworkingplane Clickthesquarecentergripandmovethecursortomovetheworkingplane Clickared,green,orblueaxisgripandmovethecursortorotatetheworking plane

Shear tool
Clickthepointontheselectedobjectthatistoremainfixed,andthenmovethe cursortosheartheobject

Shell Solid tool


Thecursorhighlightsfacesthatcanbeusedintheshellsolidoperation
Windows Macintosh

Symbol Insertion tool


SymbolPickupModeisactive;clickasymboltomakeitactive

Text tool
Clicktocreateatextobject

Clicktoplacethetexteditingcursorinatextobjectorinafield

Translate View tool


Clickdragtotranslatethedrawingviewfromsidetosideorupanddown
Windows Macintosh

Trim tool
Clicktotrimtheobjectunderthecursor
Windows Macintosh

Cursors in Vectorworks Fundamentals | Cursor Walkthrough tool


Clickdragtosimulateawalkthroughofthedrawing
Windows Macintosh

899

Description

Worksheet object
Thecursorisoveraworksheetcell Thecursorisoveraworksheetcolumnheadercell Thecursorisoveraworksheetrowheadercell Clickdragleftorrighttochangethecolumnwidth Clickdragupordowntochangetherowheight Clickdragleft/righttoremove/addcolumns;clickdragup/downtoremove/add rows Clickdragtomovethecolumnorrowtoanewlocation

Windows

Macintosh

Zoom tool
MarqueeZoommodeisactive;clickandmovethecursortocreateamarquee aroundtheareatozoominon MarqueeZoommodeisactive,andtheAltkey(Windows)orOptionkey (Macintosh)ispressed;clickandmovethecursortocreateamarqueearoundthe areatozoomouton InteractiveZoommodeisactive;clickdraguptozoomin,orclickdragdownto zoomout

Context menus
(Macintoshonly) TheCtrlkeyispressedwhilethecursorisoveranopenareainthedrawing;click toopenthedocumentcontextmenu TheCtrlkeyispressedwhilethecursorisoveranobject;clicktoopentheobject contextmenu

900

| Appendix B: Standards and Resources


Description
Clicktobeginthetooloperation(suchasplacinganewdrawingobject,or splittinganexistingobject)

Cursor All remaining tools

Vectorworks Circle/Arc Conventions


DueEastis0.Positivedegreesruncounterclockwiseandnegativedegreesrunclockwise.

Survey Bearings
TheacuteanglebetweentheMeridianandalinemeasuredfromNorthtoSouth,towardEastandWestgivesareading oflessthan90.
90

Coordinates N " W add to 90 to get positive angle

Coordinates N " E subtract from 90 to get positive angle

Coordinates W " N subtract from 180 to get positive angle 180 Coordinates W " S subtract from -180 to get negative angle

Coordinates E " N add to 0 to get positive angle Coordinates E " S subtract from 0 to get positive angle 0

Coordinates Coordinates S " W add to -90 S " E subtract from to get negative -90 to get negative angle angle

-90

Correlated Color Temperature


ColortemperatureisasimplifiedwaytoindicatethehueofalightsourceindegreesKelvin(K).Lowercolor temperaturessuggestmoreofayellowreddishcolor,whilehighercolortemperaturestendtobemoreblue. Thefollowingchartcanbeusedtoapproximatevariouslightsourcesinarenderedscene.

Architectural Scale | Approximate Degrees K


1500 1800 2800 3200 5000 5500 6500 7000 9000 12000

901

Light Source Example


Candlelight Indoorhouseholdtungstenlightbulb Sunnydayatnoon Overcastsky Bluesky

Architectural Scale
Thefollowingtableprovidesthearchitecturalscaleconversion.

1" = 1' Fraction of inch equaling 1 foot


1/2=1 1/4=1 3/4=1 1/8=1 3/8=1 5/8=1 7/8=1 1/16=1 3/16=1 5/16=1 7/16=1 9/16=1 11/16=1 13/16=1 15/16=1 1/32=1 3/32=1 5/32=1 7/32=1 1/64=1 3/64=1

12 x 1/1 = 12 Inches/ foot multiplied by inverted fraction


12x2/1=24 12x4/1=48 12x4/3=16 12x8/1=96 12x8/3=32 12x8/5=19.2 12x8/7=13.714... 12x16/1=192 12x16/3=64 12x16/5=38.4 12x16/7=27.428... 12x16/9=21.333... 12x16/11=17.454... 12x16/13=14.769... 12x16/15=12.8 12x32/1=384 12x32/3=128 12x32/5=76.8 12x32/7=54.857 12x64/1=768 12x64/3=256

1 : 12 Number to be typed into Paper Scale


1 :24 1 :48 1 :16 1 :96 1 :32 1 :19.2 1 :13.7142857 1 :192 1 :64 1 :38.4 1 :27.4285714 1 :21.3333333 1 :17.4545454 1 :14.7692307 1 :12.8 1 :384 1 :128 1 :76.8 1 :54.8571428 1 :768 1 :256

902

| Appendix B: Standards and Resources

Renderworks Shader Definitions


Shader Types
Color Shaders
Shader
ObjectAttribute Image Color Color Brightness Fresnel EdgeColor CenterColor Bricks

Renderworkstexturesarecomposedoffourshaders:color,reflectivity,transparency,andbump.Thisappendix describeseachshadertypeandprovidesadescriptionoftheparametersobtainedwheneditingshaders.

Description
Selectstheobjectsfillcolorattributetoapplyasacolortexture Selectsanimportedimagetoapplyasacolortexture;theimagecanalsobetintedwith color(seeCreatingImagebasedShadersonpage 613) Specifiesacolortobeappliedasatexture Clickthecolorboxtoselecttheshadercolor Lightensordarkenstheselectedcolor Canbeusedtocreateatexturewithasomewhatfuzzyappearance,likethatofapillow thatappearsslightlydarkerorlighteronitsedges Selecttheedgecolorbyclickingthecolorbox Selectthemaincolorbyclickingthecolorbox Createsavariegatedbrickpattern

Scale(%) Bricks Colors Contrast(%) BrickWidth/Height Shift(%) HalfBrickRow HalfBrickShift(%)

SpecifiesthesizeofthebricksrelativetothetextureSize

Clickthecolorboxestoselectcolorvariationswithinabrick,orchoosethesamecolorfor novariation Setsthecolorcontrastbetweenthetwobrickcolors,establishingthedotlikevariation withinabrick Setsthebrickwidthandheightinrealworlddimensions Setsthehorizontaloffsetbetweenrowsofbricks Addsarowofhalfbricksatthespecifiedrowinterval Forhalfbrickrows,setstheamountofhorizontalshift

904

| Appendix C: Renderworks Shader Definitions


Description
Clickthecolorboxestoselectcolorvariationswithinthemortarjoints Setsthesizeofthemortarjointgapinrealworlddimensions Specifiesthewobblinessofthemortarjoints

Shader
Gaps Colors Size Noise(%) AltBricks Colors Row Column Noise Pattern

Clickthecolorboxestoselectalternativebrickcolorvariations Addsarowofalternatebrickcolorsatthespecifiedrowinterval Addsacolumnofalternatebrickcolorsatthespecifiedcolumninterval.Rowmustbe greaterthan0toshowcolumns.

Selectthetypeofnoisepatterntouse.Thepreviewhelpsdistinguishthedifferences amongthepatterns.AgenericnoisepatterntoselectisTurbulence.CellVoronoiisuseful forcreatingspecklednoise(setLowandHighCliparound70%each). Anexampleofeachpatternisshownusingdefaultvaluesforacolorshaderonasphere withwarmlightingonthetopandcoollightingonthebottom.Forcomparison,this spherehasnotextureapplied:

Shader Types | Shader


Pattern (continued)

905

Description
Thepatternmightlookdifferentonaplaneasopposedtothesphereusedforthe example.Inaddition,theappearanceofeachpatterncanbedramaticallyaffectedby changestoitsparameters.Thisexampleshowsthreevariationsoftheblisteredturbulence pattern.

VaryingonlytheLowClipandHighClippercentagescancompletelychangethe appearanceofthepattern.

Low Clip%: 0 High Clip%: 100

Low Clip%: 60 High Clip%: 100

Low Clip%: 0 High Clip%: 25

Low Clip%: 50 High Clip%: 50

Theselectedshadertypealsoobviouslyaffectstheappearanceofthepattern.This exampleshowstheblisteredturbulencepatternasacolorshaderandasabumpshader.

Box

Smoothed,randomcubepattern

906

| Appendix C: Renderworks Shader Definitions


Description
Varieddistributionoflightanddarkareas

Shader
Blistered Turbulence

Buya

Generallydarkbackgroundwithoccasionalrandomlightareas

CellNoise

Tiledpatternwithhighcontrast

Cranal

Looping,curvingpatternoflines

Shader Types | Shader


Dents

907

Description
Organic,twistedpatternoflightanddarkareas

Displaced Turbulence

Smoothversionofturbulence,withrandomlightanddarkareas

FBM

Finer,detailedpatternofrandomlightanddarkareas

Hama

Similartotheloopingpatternofcranal,butmoreabruptandwithhighcontrast

908

| Appendix C: Renderworks Shader Definitions


Description
Minerallikepatternofroughandmoredetailedareas

Shader
Luka

ModNoise

Similartothetiledpatternofcellnoise,butwithlesscontrast

Naki

Rough,concretepattern

Noise

Soft,random,andunfocusedpatternofwiderlightareasandsomedarkareas

Shader Types | Shader


Nutous

909

Description
Generallydarkbackgroundwithsmooth,flakedlightareas

Ober

Avarietyofroughanddetailedareas,interspersedwithlooping,flowinglines

Pezo

Generallydarkbackgroundwithsmaller,patchy,lighterareas

Poxo

Finegrained,detailedpattern

910

| Appendix C: Renderworks Shader Definitions


Description
Veryfineandevendetailedpattern

Shader
Random

Sema

Generallydarkbackgroundwithrandom,dripping/meltedlines

Stupl

Flowing,smearedpatternoflightanddarkareas

Turbulence

Softandsmooth,yetdetailednoisepattern

Shader Types | Shader


VLNoise

911

Description
Smoothed,varied,lessfocusednoisepattern

WavyTurbulence

Smooth,softnoisepatternwithoccasionalrandompeaks

CellVoronoi

Similartomodnoise,butwithirregularmosaicshapesratherthansquaretiles

DisplacedVoronoi

Organicvoronoipatternwithsmaller,innerpatternoffset

912

| Appendix C: Renderworks Shader Definitions


Description
Soft,unfocused,widepatternoflightanddarkareas

Shader
SparseConvolution

Voronoi1

Organic,detailedvoronoipatternofsmallcellshapes

Voronoi2

Blurredvoronoipatternwithoffsetsecondarypattern

Voronoi3

Sharporganicvoronoipatternofirregularcellshapes,highcontrastwithdarkoutlines

Shader Types | Shader


Zada

913

Description
Twisting,organicpatternwithsharploopingareasandflatareas

Wood

Detailedwoodgrainpattern

Marble

Marbled,veinedpatternwithhighdetail

Colors Scale Global(%) Relative(%)U,V, W Options

Clickthecolorboxestoselectcolorvariationswithinthenoisepattern

SetsthesizeofthepatternasapercentageofthetextureSize AllowsthepatterntobestretchedintheU,V,and/orWdirection;canbeusedtosimulate theappearanceofscratches

914

| Appendix C: Renderworks Shader Definitions


Description
Select2DWrappedor3DSolid.Wrappedshadersare2Dpatternsprojectedontoa3D objectsurface.Solidshadersare3Dpatternsappliedtoa3Dobjectsurface;whenthe shapechanges,theobjectandpatternarestilldisplayedcorrectly.

Shader
Dimensionality

Solid shader

Wrapped shader

Detail Cycles Low/HighClip(%)

Setsthelevelofdetailorresolutionformanyofthepatterns Createsarepeatingpatternofbandednoisetexture;setthenumberofrepetitioncyclesto use Thelowandhighclipdeterminetheabruptnessofthetransitionbetweennoisecolors andareoftensetasacombinationtoachieveadesiredeffect.SettheLowcliphigheror thehighcliplowerforasharptransitiontotheothercolor;settheclipsevenlytomake thetransitionbetweennoisecolorsmoreeven. Createstheappearanceofcrackedpavement;withnogaps,simulatesvariegated pavement,andwiththesametwocolors,simulatessolidpavement

Pavement

Scale(%) Stones Colors CoarseMarbling (%) FineMarbling(%) Gaps Colors Width(%)

SetsthesizeofthepavementasapercentageofthetextureSize

Clickthecolorboxestoselectcolorvariationswithinthepavement,orchoosethesame colorfornovariation Increasesordecreasesthecoarsemarblingappearanceofthestones Increasesordecreasesthefinemarblingappearanceofthestones

Clickthecolorboxestoselectcolorvariationswithinthepavementjoints SetsthewidthofthepavementjointgapasapercentageofthetextureSize

Shader Types | Shader


Softness(%) Grain(%) Smudges Colors Amount(%) Size(%) Tiles Pattern Brick1 Clickthecolorboxestoselectcolorsmudgingvariationwithinthepavementgaps Setstheamountofsmudgingforthepavementgapsmudges Increasesordecreasestheamountthatthesmudgingextendsfromthegapcenters

915

Description
Setsthebevelamountbetweenpavementstonesandpavementjoints Setstheamountofcolorvariationwithinthepavementgaps

Selectthetypeoftilepattern.Thepreviewhelpsdistinguishthedifferencesamongthe patterns.Someofthepatternsusetwoofthetilecolors,whileothersmakeuseofallthree. Alternatingbrickpatternwithtwocolors

Brick2

Alternatingbrickpatternwiththreecolors

Circles1

Alternatingpolkadotpatternwithtwocolors

916

| Appendix C: Renderworks Shader Definitions


Description
Offsetpolkadotpatternwithtwocolors

Shader
Circles2

Circles3

Offsetpolkadotpatternwiththreecolors

Hexagons

Alternatinghexagonpatternwiththreecolors

Lines1

Alternatingpatternoflineswithtwocolors

Shader Types | Shader


Lines2

917

Description
Linepatternwiththreecolors

Parquet

Parquetpatternwiththreecolors

Planks

Alternatingrectangularpattern,similartowoodplanks,withtwocolors

RadialLines1

Starburstpatternwithtwocolors

918

| Appendix C: Renderworks Shader Definitions


Description
Starburstpatternwiththreecolors

Shader
RadialLines2

Random

Irregularcellularpatternwithblendsofthreecolorsforastainedglasseffect

Rings1

Alternatingcircularpatternwithtwocolors

Rings2

Alternatingcircularpatternwiththreecolors

Shader Types | Shader


Sawtooth1

919

Description
Alternatingzigzagpatternwithtwocolors

Sawtooth2

Zigzagpatternwiththreecolors

Scales1

Alternatingscalepatternwithtwocolors

Scales2

Alternatingscalepatternwiththreecolors

920

| Appendix C: Renderworks Shader Definitions


Description
Alternatingspiralpatternwithtwocolors

Shader
Spiral1

Spiral2

Alternatingspiralpatternwiththreecolors

Squares

Alternatingcheckerboardpatternwithtwocolors

Triangles1

Alternatingtrianglepatternwithtwocolors

Shader Types | Shader


Triangles2

921

Description
Offsettrianglepatternwithtwocolors

Triangles3

Offsettrianglepatternwiththreecolors

Waves1

Alternatingwavypatternwithtwocolors

Waves2

Wavypatternwiththreecolors

922

| Appendix C: Renderworks Shader Definitions


Description
Basketweavepatternwithtwocolors

Shader
Weave

Colors RandomizeColors Dimensions GroutWidth(%) BevelWidth(%) Horizontal Orientation Scale Global(%) Relative(%)U,V

Clickoneachcolorboxtoselectthecolorforthegrout,anduptothreecolorsforthetiles Usesrandomlyselectedcolorsforthepattern,mixingtheselectedcolorsinnoparticular order

Setsthewidthofthegroutjointasapercentageofthetexture Setsthebevelamountbetweentilesandgrout Whenselected,tilesareorientedhorizontally;deselectforverticaltiles

SetsthesizeofthetilepatternasapercentageofthetextureSize SetstherelativescaleofthetilepatternintheU(width)orV(height),allowingthetilesto bestretched

Reflectivity Shaders
Shader
Image

Description
Specifiesanimportedimagetobeusedasthereflectivityshader(whiteis morereflective;blackislessreflective);seeCreatingImagebased Shadersonpage 613 Thisshaderisusefulforlampshades,lightbulbs,andcurtainsthatarelit frombehind.DeselectCastShadowsintheEditTexturedialogboxwhen usingthebacklitshader. Specifiesacolortobeappliedasabacklitcolor;clickthecolorboxto selectthecolor Controlsthebacklitbrightness Setstheamountofreflectiontouse,orsetto0fornoreflection Setstheamountofblurrinessforthereflection,orsetto0fornoblur

Backlit

Color Brightness(%) Reflection(%) Blurriness(%) Glass EdgeColor

Clickthecolorboxtosetthecolorappliedtotheglassatanangle,which isseenattheedgeoftheglass

Shader Types | Shader


CenterColor Blurriness(%) Glow Brightness(%) EmitLight AddMatteReflectivity Reflection(%) Blurriness(%) Metallic

923

Description
Clickthecolorboxtosetthecoloratthecenter(main)partoftheglass Setstheamountofblurrinessforthereflection,orsetto0fornoblur Theglowshaderoffersanalternativetocreatinglineorarealights,and cancreateneonsigns Setstheamountofglow Allowsthetexturetobecomealightsource,whenIndirectLightingis enabled(View>Lighting>SetLightingOptions) Createsapartiallyglowinglightthatisalsolitbyotherlightsources Setstheamountofreflectiontouse,orsetto0fornoreflection Setstheamountofblurrinessforthereflection,orsetto0fornoblur Createsmetalliceffects(alsotrycoloredmirrorshadersforpolished metaleffects) Metalliceffectsrequirethepresenceoflightobjectsinthedrawing. HDRIbackgroundlightingwillnotproducemetalliceffects.

Color Pattern

Clickthecolorboxtoselectthemetalliccolor Selectthetypeofmetallicpattern Metallic:providesametallicpainteffect(suchasforcarbodies) Brushed:providesabrushedmetalappearance Turned:createsamachineturnedroundpattern

Reflection(%) Blurriness(%) Mirror Color Reflection(%) Blurriness(%) Plastic Color Brightness(%) Roughness(%) Reflection(%) Blurriness(%) Bricks

Setstheamountofreflectiontouse,orsetto0fornoreflection Setstheamountofblurrinessforthereflection,orsetto0fornoblur

Clickthecolorboxtoselectthemirrorcolor;usegrayscaleforaregular mirroreffect,andselectcolorsformirroredmetalliceffects Setstheamountofreflectiontouse,orsetto0fornoreflection Setstheamountofblurrinessforthereflection;usinganongrayscale colorandsomeblurrinesscreatesaneffectivemetalliclook

Clickthecolorboxtoselecttheplasticcolor Setshowbrighttheshaderappears Setsthewidthofshinyareasontheplastic;increasethepercentagefor widershinyareas Setstheamountofreflectiontouse,orsetto0fornoreflection Setstheamountofblurrinessforthereflection,orsetto0fornoblur Theseparametersarethesameforallshaders;foradescription,see ColorShadersonpage 903

924

| Appendix C: Renderworks Shader Definitions


Description
Theseparametersarethesameforallshaders;foradescription,see ColorShadersonpage 903 Theseparametersarethesameforallshaders;foradescription,see ColorShadersonpage 903 Theseparametersarethesameforallshaders;foradescription,see ColorShadersonpage 903

Shader
Noise Pavement Tiles

Transparency Shaders
Shader
ImageMask Image

Description
Selectsanimportedimagetoapplyasatransparencymask(see CreatingImagebasedShadersonpage 613) Selectsanimportedimagetoapplyasatransparencytexture(see CreatingImagebasedShadersonpage 613),forcoloredtransparency andprojectedcoloredlightslikegoboprojectionsintheVectorworks Spotlightsoftware Specifiesacolortobeappliedasatransparency Clickthecolorboxtoselectthetransparencycolor Lightensordarkenstheselectedcolor Whenusingglasstransparency,settheaccompanyingcolorshadertoa darkcolor(orevenblack)forbestresults Setshowmuchlightpassesthroughtheglass;settoahighvaluewhen theglassisveryclear Aslightmovesthroughamedium,theindexmeasuresthechangeinthe directionofthelightsrays.Anindexof1.0indicatesnochange;atypical valueforwaterandiceis1.3,andforglassuse1.51.6. Tosavetime,useavalueof1.0x(justabove1)whentheglassisthin.

Color Color Brightness(%) Glass Transmission(%) IndexofRefraction

Color Blurriness(%)

Clickthecolorboxtoselectthecolorthatappearsinaverythinobject;for glass,thisisusuallysettowhite Blursthetransparencybythespecifiedamount,orsetto0fornoblur. Blurredglassappearsfrosted(andtakeslongertorender).

Shader Types | Shader


AbsorptionColor

925

Description
Clickthecolorboxtoselectthecolorthatalarge,thickobjectassumes, whenarayoflighthastraveledtheAbsorptionDistance

Different absorption colors (green, blue, and black, with the Color set to white)

AbsorptionDistance

DefinesthedistanceraysoflighthavetotravelbeforeAbsorptionColor replacesColor.Thelowerthevalue,themoreintensetheAbsorption Coloris.Thisappliestothickorthinglass.

Different absorption distances set, from low to high

Plain Opacity(%) RectangularMask

Providesplain,uniformtransparencyofaspecifiedamount Setshowopaquetheshaderis;settoalowervalueformoretransparency andtoahighervalueformoreopacity Usesthetextureasarectangularmasktoapplyasatransparenttexture (usuallycombinedwithanothershadertocreateaspecificmasking effect).Usefulfordecals. Indicateshowtodisplaythemask:asingleinstance,infiniterepetitions, orasetnumberofrepetitionsineachdirection Theseparametersarethesameforallshaders;foradescription,see ColorShadersonpage 903 Theseparametersarethesameforallshaders;foradescription,see ColorShadersonpage 903 Theseparametersarethesameforallshaders;foradescription,see ColorShadersonpage 903 Theseparametersarethesameforallshaders;foradescription,see ColorShadersonpage 903

Horizontal/VerticalRepetitions Bricks Noise Pavement Tiles

926

| Appendix C: Renderworks Shader Definitions

Bump Shaders
Shader
Image Bricks Noise Pavement Tiles

Description
Specifiesanimportedimagetobeusedasthesourceofthebumpmap displacement(seeCreatingImagebasedShadersonpage 613) Theseparametersarethesameforallshaders;foradescription,see ColorShadersonpage 903 Theseparametersarethesameforallshaders;foradescription,see ColorShadersonpage 903 Theseparametersarethesameforallshaders;foradescription,see ColorShadersonpage 903 Theseparametersarethesameforallshaders;foradescription,see ColorShadersonpage 903

Index
Numerics
2DDatabar 209 2DLocustool 255 2Dobjects,editingin3D 257 2DPlancommand 577 2DPolygontool 242,893 2DReshapetool 893 3DDatabar 209 3DLocustool 255 3Dperspective,simulating 324 3DPolygontool 249 3Dpolygon,reshaping 311 3DPowerPack 393 3DReshapetool 484,893 settingmeasurementunitsfor 75 snapping 139 AngularDimensiontool 727,894 Animations addingtextto 761 compressionsettingsfor 755,760 creatingalongapath 756 creatingusinganorbitpoint 753 editing 757 pausing 760 previewing 755,760 saving 755,761 viewing 761 Annotations addingsheetborders 376 addingtoviewports 775 creatingdrawinglabels 388 creatingreferencemarkers 391 creatingrevisionclouds 385 Antialiasing CustomRenderworksoption 694 OpenGLoption 685 Vectorworkspreference 20 ArcintoSegmentscommand 347 ArcLengthDimensiontool 729 ArcSmoothingcommand 280 Arctool 229 Architecturalscale,conversionchart 901 Arcs concentricconstraintsfor 747 conventionsfor 900 convertingtoangulardimension 730 creatingwithArctool 229 creatingwithQuarterArctool 234 dimensioning 724 dimensioninglengthof 729 dividingintosegments 347 tangentconstraintsfor 748 Arealights 675 Arithmeticexpressions,ineditfields 15 Arraysofobjects 273,511 Arrowkeyshortcuts 19,54 ArtisticRenderworkscommand 690 ArtisticRenderworksOptionscommand 696 Associativeandnonassociativehatches 541

A
ActivateClasscommand 35,112 ActivateLayercommand 35,104 ActivateObjectInfoPalettecommand 258 Activelayerplane 593 ActiveLayerScalecommand 72 Activeplaneslist 595 AddSolidscommand 343 AddSurfacecommand 340 Alertdialogboxes,turningonandoff 21 AlignLayerViewscommand 788 AlignPlanetool 605,894 AligntoGridcommand 294 Align/Distribute3Dcommand 293 Align/Distributecommand(2D) 292 AlwaysDisplayActiveDocument 159 Ambientlighting forlayers 661 forsheetlayerviewports 768 Analysistool 422 Angleofrotation,custom 286 Angletool 495 Angles constraining 741 dimensioning 727 measuring 739

928

| Index
BattInsulationtool 507 Battinsulation,usingatilefillfor 549 BzierSplineSmoothingcommand 279 Bitmaps compressing 295 tracing 296 Boomerangmode forpausingtools 15 whilemirroringobjects 287,288 whilemoving/duplicating/distributingobjects 266, 267 whilemoving/duplicating/distributingsymbolsin walls 516 whileoffsettingobjects 317 whilerotatingobjects 283,284 Border,ofdrawing SeeSheetborders Bottomcommand 575 Boxpositionindicator 259 BreakLinetool 218 Breakline,propertiesof 218 Bumpshaders definitionof 609 importingimagesfor 621 typesof 926

Associativedimensioning 30,714 AttachRecordcommand 199 AttributeMappingtool 561,642,894 Attributes applyingtoexistingobjects 526 associativehatchfills 561 changingdefaultswithEyedropper 528 fill 530 gradientfills 552,563 hatches 541 imagefills 557,564 linestyle 533 markers 538 opacity 532 pen 532 settingdefaults 526 settingdefaultsforaclass 109 settingdefaultsfornewobjects 80 settingforsymbols 202 settingwithascript 872 Tilefills 561 tilefills 548 transferring 526 usinghatchesas 541 Attributespalette 525 Autojoinwallspreference 18,454 Automaticdrawingcoordination 30 Autosavepreferences 24,44 Autoscrollfeature 57

C
Cabinets defaultcontentforhandles 157 Caching sitemodel 30 vectorinformation 20 viewportandradiosityimages 29,689 Callouttool 370 Cameraview adjusting 588 creating 586 linkingtosheetlayerviewport 590 CancelingoperationwithEsckey 15 Capitalizationcommand 361 CenterMarktool 726,894 Centeringobjects 293,294 Centroids creatingsweepswith 301 engineeringpropertiesof 346 ChamferEdgetool 438,894

B
Backcommand 575 Background(ofdrawingarea) changingtheblackbackgrounddisplay 65 changingthecolorof(standardbackground) 66 settingtheblackbackgroundpreference 20 Backgrounds(Renderworks) applying 656 creating 629 defaultcontentfor 157 purgingunused 271 usingHDRIas 631 usingimagesas 631 Backupfilepreferences 25,44 Basicpalette 9,11 BatchConvertcommand 46 Batchrendering 703

Index |
Chamfertool 337 ChangeAllFieldscommand 201 ChangeOneFieldcommand 201 ChangeSymbolAttrscommand 202 Channeltool 497 CheckforUpdatescommand ii CheckSpellingcommand 367 CINEMA4D(3Donly)command 793 Circletool 223 Circles concentricconstraintsfor 747 conventionsfor 900 creating 223 creatingtangenttothreelines 225 dimensioning 724 extruded 227 markingcenterof 726 tangentconstraintsfor 748 ClassOptionscommand 113 Classes applyingtextureswith 651 creating 106 descriptionof 2,105 dimensionclasspreference 30 duplicating 112 editing 108 importingfromstandardsorotherfiles 93 overridingviewportpropertiesof 780 purgingunused 272 savingcustom 93 setbyclass 111 settingactiveclass 19,35,111 settingattributeswhencreating 111 settingdisplay/snap/editoptions 113 settingvisibilityof 118 shortcutforswitching 19 usingstandardsfor 107 usingworkgroupreferencingfor 121 Clearcommand(Editmenu) 270 Clearcommand(Worksheetoption) 843 Clickdragvs.clickclickdrawing 18,51 ClipSurfacecommand 341 Cliptool 319 CloseAllcommand(Windowmenu) 43 Closecommand(Filemenu) 43 Clouds inRenderworksbackgrounds 630 indicatingrevisionswith 385 Collisioncontrol,forchaindimensions 716,719 Colorshaders definitionof 609 importingimagesfor 614 typesof 903 Colors activatingpalette 572 applying 566 blackandwhitedisplaypreference 29 blackbackgroundpreference 20 creatingchartinactivelayer 574 custompalettes 572 customizinginterfaceelements 71 defaultcontentforcolorpalettes 157 deletingpalettes 572 displayingandsortingoncolorpalette 569 importingfromanotherfile 573 palettemanager 571 pen 532 purging 572 selectingfromacolorpalette 570 selectingfromoperatingsystem 569 settingdefaultsforafile 567 settingdefaultsfordesignlayer 30,102 temperature 900 Columntool(allproductsbutVectorworks Architect) 520 ColumnWidthcommand 843 CombineintoSurfacecommand 341 Components applyingbetweendoublelines 217,248 creatinginwalls 455 deletingfromwalls 459 hidinginwalls 29 Composecommand 280 CompressImagescommand 295 Conetool 253 Connect/Combinetool 326 ConstrainedLinearDimensiontool 718 Constrainttools angle 741 coincident 747 colinear 746 concentric 747 cursorfor 895 distance 743 editingconstraints 748

929

930

| Index
CreateAnimationcommand 754,756 CreateBatchRenderJobcommand 703 CreateColorChartcommand 574 CreateContourstool 434 CreateDividingLinescommand 349 CreateDrapeSurfacecommand 412 CreateFilletSurfacecommand 412 CreateHelixSpiralcommand 432 CreateImagePropcommand 626 CreateInterpolatedSurfacecommand 402 CreateLayerLinkcommand 785 CreatePlanarCapscommand 417 CreatePolysfromWallscommand 463 CreateReportcommand 833 CreateRoofcommand 479 CreateSurfacefromCurvescommand 410 CreateSymbolcommand 175 CreateViewportcommand(Fundamentals) 762,765 CreateWallsfromPolygoncommand 460 CubicSplineSmoothingcommand 280 Cues,SmartCursor SeeSmartCursorcues Cursor,fullscreen 25 Cursors,tableof 893 Curves SeeNURBSobjects CustomRenderworksOptionscommand 694 CustomSelectioncommand 871 CustomTool/Attributecommand 872 Cut2DSectioncommand 784 Cut3DSectioncommand 783 Cutcommand(Editmenuoption) 268 Cutouts inroofs 484 insolids 434 Cylinders,creating 227

horizontaldistance 742 horizontalvertical 744 parallel 745 perpendicular 745 radius 741 tangent 748 verticaldistance 742 Constraints SeeParametricconstraints Content custom 158 defaultVectorworksFundamentalsand Renderworks 157 organizingthedisplayof 158 preferencefordisplayingdefaultcontent 22 Contextmenus cursorsfor(Macintoshonly) 899 customizing 883 descriptionof 34 Contours,creating 434 Conventionsusedinthisguide xi ConvertArctoRadiusPolyline 309 ConvertCopytoLinescommand 289 ConvertCopytoPolygonscommand 290 Convertto3DPolyscommand 290 ConverttoAreaLightcommand 675 ConverttoGenericSolidscommand 444 ConverttoGroupcommand 187 ConverttoLineDimensioncommand 730 ConverttoLineLightcommand 675 ConverttoLinescommand 289 ConverttoMeshcommand 290 ConverttoNURBScommand 400 ConverttoPolygonscommand 289 ConverttoViewportcommand 787 ConvertingVectorworksfiles batchoffiles 46 singlefile 49 Coordinates,ofobject 258 Copies duplicatingalongpath 277 ofObjectInfodata 258 usingCopycommand 268 usingDuplicateArraycommand 273,511 usingDuplicatecommand 273 Copycommand(Editmenu) 268

D
Dashstyles applying 533 creatingcustomstyles 535 defaultcontentfor 157 exportingtopreviousVectorworksversions 537 purgingunused 272

Index |
settingdefaultsforaclass 110 DashStylescommand 535 DashedHiddenLinecommand 682 Databar floating 212 generaldescriptionof 5 in2D 209 in3D 209 DataBarOptions 211 Databasecommand 844 DatabaseHeaderscommand 842 Databaserows addingtoworksheet 857 removingfromaworksheet 859 Datum(temporaryoriginpoint) 141 Decals creating 645 editing 649 Decomposecommand 281,788 Defaultcontent creatingcustomfiles 158 creatingresourcelibraries 172 listof 157 preferencefordisplaying 22 Degrees conventionsfor 900 measuring 739 settingasdocumentangleunits 76 DeleteAllGuidescommand 77 Deletecommand(Worksheetoption) 843 Deselectingobjects 58 Designlayers SeeLayers,design DetachRecordcommand 200 Dictionariesforspellchecking addingandediting 369 languagesavailable 367 Digitizingtablets 86 Dimensionalconstraints SeeParametricconstraints Dimensions addingtosheetlayerviewports 775 angular 727,729 associative 30,714 automaticallyassociatingwithobjects 30,715 baseline 721 chained 720 collisioncontrolfortextin 716,719 constrained 718 convertingobjectsinto 730 defaultclassfor 30,105 disassociating 714 dual 722 editing 731 managingcustomstandards 709 ofselectedobjects 722 ordinate(fromafixedpoint) 721 propertiesof 731 radial 723 settingadefaultstandardfor 31 settingthicknessofslash 31 settingunitsfor 73 unconstrainedbaseline 718 unconstrainedchained 717 unconstrainedlinear 715 DirectionofNURBScurve,showing 399 Directionallights 665 Distance constraininghorizontally 742 constrainingregardlessofangle 743 constrainingvertically 742 dimensioning 715 measuringwithoutrecording 738 snappingto 145 Distributingobjects 292,293 Dockingpalettes 11,22 DocumentPreferencescommand 28 Dormerwindows 487 DoubleLinePolygontool 247 DoubleLinetool 215 Doublelines creating 215 creatingpolygonswith 247 definingcomponentsbetween(lines) 217 definingcomponentsbetween(polygons) 248 DownloadingVectorworksupdates 22 DPI SeeResolution Draftingaids 347 Drapedsurfaces 411 Drawingarea 6 Drawingborders SeeSheetborders DrawingLabeltool 388

931

932

| Index
Exportcommand 791 ExportDXF/DWGcommand 810 ExportEPSFFilecommand 793 ExportHighDynamicRangeImage(HDRI) command 799 ExportIGEScommand 798 ExportImageFilecommand 794 ExportParasolidX_T(3Donly)command 797 ExportQuickTimeVRObjectcommand 802 ExportQuickTimeVRPanoramacommand 803 ExportStereoLithographycommand 798 ExportWorksheetcommand 793,869 Exportingfiles CINEMA4Dformat 793 databaseformats 792 DXF/DWGformat 792,806 EPSFformat 792,793 HDRIformat 799 IGESformat 793,797 imageformats 792,794 Metafileformats 792 olderVectorworksformats 793 ParasolidX_Tformat 793,797 PDFformat 792 PICTformat 792 QuickTimeformats 792,801 SATformat 793 StereoLithographyformat 793,798 VectorScriptcommands 793 worksheetformats 793,869 ExtendNURBScommand 431 Extensionlinesforsnapping 142 Extracttool 420,895 ExtrudeAlongPathcommand 298 Extrudecommand 297 Extrudes,reshaping 310 Eyedroppertool 526,895

Dualdimensions 722 DuplicateAlongPathcommand 277 DuplicateArraycommand 273,511 Duplicatecommand 273 DuplicateSymbolinWalltool 509 Dutchhiproofs 483 DXBfiles 812 DXF/DWG descriptionof 803 exporting 806 importing 818 informationlostintranslation 804

E
Edges chamfering 399,438 filleting 399,439 hidingandshowing 308 OpenGLoptionfor 685 selecting 396 snappingto 143 Edit2DComponentcommand(symbols) 185 Edit3DComponentcommand(symbols) 185 Edit3DWallHoleComponentcommand(symbols) 185, 518 EditAnnotationscommand 775 EditCameracommand 777 EditConstraintscommand 749 EditCriteriacommand 844 EditCropcommand 774 EditDesignLayercommand 773 EditGroupcommand 291 EditGroupOptions 211 EditMarkerListcommand 539 EditPolylinecommand 310 EditSymbolcommand 185 EditViewportcommand 771,774,776 Elevation,ofdesignlayer 98 EncryptVectorScriptcommand 877 EngineeringPropertiescommand 345 EvenDividecommand 350 ExitLayerLinkcommand 787 ExitSymbolcommand 187 ExitViewportcommand 774

F
Facesofsolids,selecting 397 FastRenderworkscommand 689 Favorites,inResourceBrowser 166,172 Feedbacksegment(SmartCursorcue) 147,153 Files appendingextensionstonamesof 22 closing 43

Index |
converting 45 creatinganewfileonstartup 22 displayingwatermarks 82 exporting 791 fingerprinted 40 importing 789 linking 121 listofrecentlyused 39 new 39 openingexisting 39 printing 83 recoveringcorrupteddata 95 reducingsizeof 19,29,270,295,444 saving 43 savingasaresourcelibrary 172 savingasatemplate 80 savingautomatically 24,44 savinginarenderedmode 689 VectorScript 874 watermarked 40 Fill applyingtightfilltotextobjects 356 applyingtoobjects 530 editinggradients 563 editingimagefills 564 mappingassociativehatchesandtiles 561 settingdefaultsforaclass 109 usinggradientsas 552 usinghatchesas 541 usingimagesas 557 usingtilesas 548 FilletEdgetool 439,895 Fillettool 335 Fillets creatingbetweenobjects 335 creatingbetweensurfaces 412 editingedgesof 399 joiningdoublelineswith 325 reshapingedgeswith 439 FinalQualityRenderworkscommand 689 FinalShadedPolygoncommand 683 FindResourcecommand 168 FindReplaceTextcommand 369 Fingerprintedfiles 40 FittoObjectscommand 591 FittoPageAreacommand 592 FixedPointResizetool 320,895 FlipHorizontalcommand 285 FlipVerticalcommand 285 Floatingdatabar 212 Floorcommand 445 Flyovertool 578,895 Fonts listofrecentlyused 361 mappingmissing 21,40 settingdefaultsfornewtext 354 settingforworksheets 848 ForceSelectcommand 35 FormatCellscommand 842,846 FormatTextcommand 359 Formulas,worksheet 852 Freehandtool 236 Frontcommand 575 Functions,worksheet 861

933

G
Gableroofs 482 GDI+imaging(Windows) 20 Geometricconstraints SeeParametricconstraints Glowshaderforgeometry 675 Gradians,settingasdocumentangleunits 76 Gradientcolors,inaRenderworksbackground 631 Gradientfills applying 554 creating 552 defaultcontentfor 157 editing 563 editingdefinitions 557 purgingunused 271 settingdefaultsforaclass 110 Graylayersandclasses 113,119 Grayscale,simulatingforprintsandPDFs 29 Grid activatinggridsnapping 135 aligningto 294 changingcolorof 67 printing 136 settingsfor 135 shortcutformovingobjectson 19 showingindrawingarea 136 Groundplane 66 Groupcommand 291 Groups

934

| Index

creating 291 editing 16 returningtotoplevelofnested 292 scaling 321 showingotherobjectswhileediting 20 ungrouping 291 Guideobjects 77

I
Ibeamtool 498 Imagefills applying 559 compressing 295 creating 557 defaultcontentfor 157 editing 564 inlibraries 891 settingdefaultsforaclass 110 Images asbackgrounds 631 asbumpshaders 621 ascolorshaders 614 asHDRIbackgrounds 631 asprops 626 asreflectivityshaders 615 astransparencyshaders 617 compressing 19,295 exportingdrawingsas 794 extracting 170 importing 790 purgingunused 271 referencing 124 Importcommand 789 ImportDXF/DWGcommand 820 ImportImageFilecommand 790 ImportSingleDXF/DWGcommand 822 Importing classes,layers,andobjects 93 colors 573 images 613 MicrosoftWordtable 869 resources 165 scriptpalettes 878 symbolsinfolders 189 VectorScript 877 Importingfiles DXF/DWGfilesassymbols 821 DXF/DWGformat 789,818 EPSFformat 789 IGESformat 790 images 790 Metafileformat 790 ParasolidX_Tformat 790 PICTformat 790 SATformat 790 VectorScript 790 worksheetformats 790,868

H
Handles customizingdisplayof 65 descriptionof 64 preferencefornumberof 18 Hatchcommand 546 Hatches applyingassociative 544 applyingnonassociative 546 associative 541 creatingnewfrommapped 563 defaultcontentfor 157 definingpatternfor 541 editingdefinitions 547 exampleofcreating 544 inlibraries 891 mappingassociativehatchfills 561 nonassociative 541 purgingunused 271 settingdefaultsforaclass 109 HDRIbackgrounds 631 Helixes 432 Helpsystem,descriptionof xii Hemispheretool 252 HiddenLinecommand 682 HideGuidescommand 77,78 Highlighting customizingdisplayof 65 descriptionof 63 preferencesfor 26 Hiproofs 480 Historyofviewchanges 592 Holesinobjects 319 Horizontalconstraints ConstrainHorizDistancetool 742 ConstrainHorizVerticaltool 744 Hybridobjects creatingsymbolsfrom 176 ungrouping 292

Index |
Indirectlighting 662 Insertcommand 843 InstallingVectorworks i Insulationfills 549 InterpolatedNURBSsurfaces 402 IntersectSolidscommand 343 IntersectSurfacecommand 340 InvertSelectioncommand 58 Invisiblelayersandclasses 113,119 Isoparametriccurve 394

935

J
Joincommand 324

K
Keyboardshortcuts SeeShortcuts Keys,specialfunctionsof 15

L
Label,drawing 388 Languages,forspellchecking 367 Layerlinks convertingtoandfromdesignlayerviewports 50,787 cropping 786 unlocking 786 LayerOptionscommand 113 Layerplane,definition 207 Layers,design aligningviewsforalllayers 788 applyingbackgroundsto 656 changingforsimilarobjectcreation 22 changingstackingorderof 99 convertingreferencedlayersintodesignlayer viewports 50 creating 94 creatingbackgroundsfor 629 creatingcustom 93 descriptionof 93 elevationanddefaultwallheight 98 importingfromstandardsorotherfiles 93 linking 784 overridingviewportpropertiesof 777 propertiesof 97 purgingunused 272 settingactive 19,35,103

settingcolor 102 settingdisplay/snap/editoptions 113 settingopacity 100 settingscale 71 settingtransfermode 100 settingvisibilityof 118 shortcutforswitching 19 usingstandardsfor 95 usingworkgroupreferencingfor 121,123 Layers,sheet creating 94 creatingcustom 93 descriptionof 93 importingfromstandardsorotherfiles 93 propertiesof 104 savingseparateviewsfor 18 LeaderLinetool 375 Leftcommand 575 LeftIsometriccommand 575 LeftRearIsometriccommand 575 Length,measuring 738 Libraries VectorworksFundamentalsandRenderworksdefault content 157 VectorworksFundamentalsandRenderworks objects 891 Licenseagreement ii Lighttool 665 Lighting addingareaandlinearlights 675 addingcustomlights 678 addingdirectional,point,andspotlights 665 changinglightsourcedirection 673 displayinglightobjects 20 indirect 662 lightsourcepreferences 666 lightsourceproperties 670 loadinglightdistributionfiles 679 settingambientlightoptions 661 settingsunlightoptions 663 turninglightsourcesonandoff 666 usingforweathereffects 631 LineintoSegmentscommand 348 Linelights 675 LineRenderOptionscommand 686 Linestyle applying 533 creatingcustomdashstyles 535

936

| Index
MakeGuidecommand 78 Mappingtextures withAttributeMappingtool 642 withtheObjectInfopalette 639 Margins,oftextblocks 358 Markertypes applying 538 byclass 110 editing 539 editingthemarkerlist 539 Masktransparencyshader 618 Math,inObjectInfopalette 15 Measuring angles 727 arclengths 729 distances 738 objects 709 objectsin3DwithNURBScurves 401 Menubar 5 Meshes convertingobjectsto 290 smoothingwhenrendering 30 Messagebar 6 Migratingfrompreviousversion Renderworks 608 Minimizingandmaximizingpalettes 10 Mirrortool 286 Missingfonts,mapping 21,40 Modelingdirectly 434 ModelinginVectorworks 207 Mouse activatingflyoverwithmousewheel 580 drawingwith 51 panningwithmousewheel 53 scrollingwithmousewheel 18,57 zoomingwithmousewheel 18,55 Move3Dcommand 264 MovebyPointstool 265,514,517 Movecommand 263,513 MovePagetool 54,896 MovePolygonHandlesmode(Reshapetool) 305 Movies SeeAnimations Movingobjects,shortcutfor 19 MultipleExtrudecommand 298

creatingcustomlinethicknesses 534 settingdefaultsforaclass 110 LineThicknesscommand 534 Linetool 214 Lines convertingobjectsto 289 convertingtodimensions 730 creatingacircletangenttothree 225 creatingbreaklines 218 creatingcolinear 746 creatingdouble 215,247 creatinghorizontalorvertical 744 creatingparallel 745 creatingperpendicular 745 creatingsingle 213 creatingtangent 748 dividingintosegments 348 leaderline 375 scalingwhiledrawing 214 LinkTexttoRecordcommand 197 Linking designlayers 784 fileswithworkgroupreferencing 121 symboltexttoarecord 197 ListSymbolscommand 203 LitFog(Renderworksbackground) 631 LocateinResourceBrowsercommand 169 Loci displayinglociobjects 20 effectswhenaligningordistributingobjects 293 extractingfrom3Dobjects 420 in2D 255 in3D 255 markingcentroidsofobjectswith 346 Locking Databarvalueswhensnapping 152 objects 282 LoftSurfacetool 404,896 Loggingprogramtime 21,27 LowerLeftIsometriccommand 575 LowerLeftRearIsometriccommand 575 LowerRightIsometriccommand 575 LowerRightRearIsometriccommand 575

M
Magnification SeeZooming

Index |

937

N
NarrowPerspectivecommand 578 Nestedgroups 291 Networkprotection ii Newcommand 39 Newfeatures inRenderworks ix inVectorworks iii NextView(onViewbar) 7,592 NoSmoothingcommand 279 Noneclass 105 NormalofNURBSsurface,showing 398 NormalPerspectivecommand 578 NormalScalecommand 57 Nudging shortcutfor 19 symbolsinwalls 513 NURBSarc 229 NURBScircle 224 NURBSCurvetool 400 NURBSobjects analyzing 422 combiningtwoobjects 331 composingmultipleobjects 280 connectingtoaboundaryobject 328,331 creatingcontours 434 creatingcurves 400 creatingdrapesurfaces 411 creatingfilletsurfacesbetween 412 creatinghelixesorspirals 432 creatinginterpolatedsurfaces 402 creatingplanarcaps 417 creatingshellsfromsurfaces 442 creatingsurfacesbyrevolvingprofiles 417 creatingsurfacesfromcurves 410 creatingtaperedextrudesfrom 300 decomposing 281 editingfillets/chamfers/shells 399 editingsurfacepropertiesof 419 extending 431 extractingcurvesfromsolidedges 420 extractingsurfacesfromsolidfaces 420 overviewof 393 projectingandaddingsurfaces 429 projectingandsplittingsurfaces 428 projectingandtrimmingsurfaces 428 rebuilding 426

reshapingcurves 312 reshapinggeometry 435 reversingcurvedirection 399 selectingconnectedobjects 281 showingcurvedirection 399 showingsurfacenormals 398 splittingbyline 335 splittingbypoint 333 stitchingandtrimmingsurfaces 443 NURBSsurfaces reshaping 313 sectioning 344 UandVdirection 419

O
Objectattributes,default 80 ObjectInfopalette activating 258 assigningtextures(Rendertab) 257,623 boxpositionindicator 220,259 copyingandpastingdata 258 editingproperties(Shapetab) 258 editingrecordinformation(Datatab) 262 reshapingwith 261 Objects,editing adding(AddSolidscommand) 343 aligningin3D 293 aligninginscreen 292 aligningtogrid 294 aligningtotheworkingplane 605 applyingattributesto 525 applyingtexturesto 639 applyingtransparency 532 centeringin3D 294 centeringinscreenplane 293 chamfering(ChamferEdgetool) 399,438 chamfering(Chamfertool) 337 changingstackingorder 269 clipping(ClipSurfacecommand) 341 clipping(Cliptool) 319 clipping(IntersectSurfacecommand) 340 clipping(SubtractSolidscommand) 344 combining(CombineintoSurfacecommand) 341 combining(Composecommand) 280 combining(Connect/Combinetool) 326 convertingacopytolines 289 convertingacopytopolygons 290 convertingfrompreviousversions 45 convertingtogeneric 443

938

| Index
spacinginscreenplane 293 splitting 332 stitchingandtrimmingsurfaces 443 transferringattributes 526 trimming 319 ungrouping 291 unlocking 282 withObjectInfopalette 257 ObliqueCabinetcommand 577 ObliqueCavaliercommand 577 Offsettool 315 Offsetting duplicatedobjects 18,315 fromadatumpoint 143 fromasmartedge 144 symbolsinwalls 181 Opacity designlayer 100 interfaceelements 71 objects 532 OpenGLcommand 682 OpenGLrenderoptions 685 Operators,inObjectInfopalette 15 Orbitpointanimations 753 Ordinatedimensions 721 Organizationcommand 89,94 Origin disablingdraggingof 79 movingwithSetOriginButton 79 settingfordrawingarea 78 settingforsheetlayer 105 switchingbetween 79 usingtemporarydatumpoint 141 Orthogonalcommand 577 Ovaltool 227 Ovals creatingbybox 228 creatingbywidthandheight 228 extruded 228,233 markingcenterof 726 Overrides forclasspropertiesinsheetlayerviewports 780 forlayerpropertiesinsheetlayerviewports 777

convertingtolines 289 convertingtopolygons 289 creatingshellsfromsolids 399,441 customselectionwithascript 871 cutting/copying/pasting 112,268 decomposing 281 deleting 270 deselecting 58 distributingin3D 293 distributinginscreen 292 duplicating(DuplicateAlongPathcommand) 277 duplicating(DuplicateArraycommand) 273 duplicating(Duplicatecommand) 273 duplicating(MovebyPointstool) 265 enteringandexitingobjects 16 extractingsurfacesfromsolidfaces 420 extruding 297 filleting(FilletEdgetool) 399,439 filleting(Fillettool) 335 grouping 291 intersection(IntersectSolidscommand) 343 joining(Joincommand) 324 joining(WallJointool) 462,470 locking 282 mappingtexturesto 638 markingcenterof 726 measuring 709,722 measuringdistancesbetween 738 mirroring 286 moving(Move3Dcommand) 264 moving(MovebyPointstool) 265 moving(Movecommand) 263 moving(Selectiontool) 58 nudging 19,513 offsettingduplicatesof 315 preventingresizingof 742,743 preventingrotationof 744 reshaping(Freehandtool) 237 reshaping(Reshapetool) 302,308,310 reshapingsolids 434 resizing 58,320 rotating 282 scaling 321,322 sectioningsolids 344 selecting 58,396 selectingconnectedobjects 281 settingdefaultattributes 80 shearing 324 smoothing 279 spacingin3D 294

P
PageSetupcommand 81 Palettes

Index |
Attributes 80,525 Basic 9 color 567 docking 11,22 minimizing/maximizing 10 modifyingwithWorkspaceEditor 884 ObjectInfo 257 resettingsavedpositions 10,23 resizing 5 ResourceBrowser 159 savingpositionsof 10,888 Snapping 133 specifyingmarginsfor 10,23 toolpalettefeatures 11 ToolSets 9 VectorScript 877 visualization 705 WorkingPlanes 602 Pantool 53,896 Panning,shortcutfor 19 Parallelobjects creatingwithConstrainParalleltool 745 creatingwithOffsettool 315 Parametricconstraints deleting 748 descriptionof 740 dimensionalconstraints 741 editing 748 errors 750 geometricconstraints 744 hiding 20,740 Parasolidmodelingkernel,convertingoldfilesto 49,50 PasteasPicturecommand 269 Pastecommand 268 PasteCriteriacommand 842,855 PasteFunctioncommand 842,854 PasteinPlacecommand 269 Paths creatingtextalong 362 duplicatingobjectsalong 277 editing 17 Patterns applyingtoobjects 530 defaultsforfile 531 settingdefaultsforaclass 109 Pausingthecurrenttool 15 Peaks addingtowalls 468 removingfromroofs 487 removingfromwalls 469 Penstyle applyingtoobjects 532 settingdefaultsforaclass 110 Perpendicularconstraints 745 Perspectivecommand(Projectionmenuoption) 577 Perspectivecommands(Viewmenu) 578 Perspective,andSheartool 324 Pillarcommand 461 Pillars,joiningtowalls 462 Planarobjects definition 207 extruding 208 Plane SeeWorkingplane,ActiveLayerplane Plants,adding(VBvisualPlanttool) 628 Pluginobjects creatingwithVectorScript 174 insertingfromatoolset 174 placingandediting 174 Pointlights 665 Polygons changingverticesof 306 combining 326 convertingto 289 creatingfromwalls 462 creatingroofsfrom 479 creatingwallsfrom 459 creatingwith2DPolygontool 242 creatingwith3DPolygontool 249 extruded 246 hidingandshowingedgesof 308 movinghandlesof 305 regular(equalsided) 248 smoothingcornersof 279 usingdoublelines 247 Polylinetool 234,896 Polylines changingverticesof 306 combining 326 convertingtextto 362 creatingfromwalls 462 creatingroofsfrom 479 creatingspirals 239 creatingwithFreehandtool 236 creatingwithPolylinetool 234 editing 310

939

940

| Index
resolution(documentpreference) 32 resolution(EditSheetLayersdialog) 105 resolution(Printdialogoption) 84 scaling 83 showingpageboundaries 82 worksheets 843 Profilesofobjects,editing 17 Projecttool 427,896 Projectioncommands 577 Propertiescommand 35 Properties,engineering 345 Props,usingimagesas 626 Protractortool 739 Purgecommand 270 Push/pullmode 208 Push/Pulltool 434,896

extruded 236 hidingandshowingedgesof 308 movinghandlesof 305 smoothingcornersof 279 Postscript,printingwith 84 PowerPack,3D 393 Preferences,document Dimensionstab 30 Displaytab 29 Resolutiontab 31 Preferences,Quick 33 AutoJoinWalls 33 Autosave 33 BlackandWhiteOnly 33 BlackBackground 33 DataBarandEditGroupOptions 34 HideDetails 34 ShowAcquisitionHints 34 ShowGrid 34 ShowOtherObjectsWhileinEditModes 34 ShowPageBoundary 34 ShowRulers 34 UseLayerColors 34 ZoomLineThickness 34 Preferences,Vectorworks 3Dtab 23 Autosavetab 24 Displaytab 19 Edittab 17 Interactivetab 25 resetting 28 Sessiontab 21 UserFolderstab 27 Previewing animations 755,760 fileimage 42 hatches 547 textures 611 thumbnailicons(MacintoshQuickLook) 42 PreviousSelectioncommand 61 Previousview(onViewbar) 7,592 Printcommand 83 Printing descriptionofprintarea 81 displayingprintarea(FittoPageArea) 592 drawings 83 grid 136 printersetupfordrawings 83 printersetupforworksheets 843

Q
QuarterArctool 234 Quartzimaging(Macintosh) 20 QuickLook(Macintosh) filepreview 42 filethumbnail 42 QuickPreferences 33 AutoJoinWalls 33 Autosave 33 BlackandWhiteOnly 33 BlackBackground 33 DataBarandEditGroupOptions 34 HideDetails 34 ShowAcquisitionHints 34 ShowGrid 34 ShowOtherObjectsWhileinEditModes 34 ShowPageBoundary 34 ShowRulers 34 UseLayerColors 34 ZoomLineThickness 34 QuickTimeanimations 753 QuickTimefiles 802,803 QuickTimeVRObjectcommand 792 QuickTimeVRPanoramacommand 792 Quitcommand 51

R
RadialDimensiontool 723,896 Radians,settingasdocumentangleunits 76

Index |
Radius constraining 741 dimensioning 725 editingin2Dobjects 302 editingin3Dobjects 310 offillets 336 RadiusSmoothingcommand 280 Rails loftingsurfaceswith 404 revolvingprofilesalong 417 Rasterizingprintoutput 85 RebuildNURBScommand 426 Recalculatecommand 842 Recordformats attaching 193 attachingtosymbols 199 changingallfieldvaluesforasymbol 201 changingonefieldforasymbol 200 creating 191 detachingfromsymbols 200 editing 195 editingforobjects 262 linkingtextwithinasymbolto 197 purgingunused 271 retrievingdataforworksheets 860 viewingdetailsof 262 Rectangletool 218 Rectangles creating 218 extruding 221 markingcenterof 726 rounded 221 rounded,extruded 223 RectangularTubingtool 500 Redocommand 53 Referencegrid definitionof 77 settingsfor 135 ReferenceMarkertool 391 Referencepoint(2Dlocus) 255 Referencing SeeWorkgroupreferences Reflectivityshaders definitionof 609 importingimagesfor 615 typesof 922 Refreshingthedrawingview 53 RegularPolygontool 248 RemoveWallBreakstool 470 Renaming VectorScript 876 workingplaneposition 604 RenderBitmaptool 19,701,897 RenderModes(onViewbar) 681,689 Rendersettings,saving 115 Renderingtime,optimizing 659 RenderingwithVectorworks cancelingarenderprocess 681 linerenderoptions 686 OpenGLoptions 685 smoothingmeshobjects 30 Renderworks advancedlighting 674 applyingandmappingtextures 257,635 applyingRenderworksbackgrounds 656 artisticoptions 695 batchrendering 703 cancelingabatchrender 705 cancelingarenderprocess 689 conductingshadowanalysis 664 creatingimageprops 626 creatinglayerbackgrounds 629 creatingtexturesandshaders 609 customoptions 694 editingtexturesandshaders 622 exportingrendereddrawings 799 optimizingperformance 659 preparingtorender 681 previousversionfiles 608 purgingunusedbackgrounds 271 renderingaselectedarea 701 renderingmodes 689 settingacameraview 586 smoothingmeshobjects 30 summaryofcommandsandtools 607 RenderworksCameratool 586 Renderworksstyles 690 applying 693 creating 690 defaultcontentfor 158 editing 693 Reports,creating 833 Resetting savedsettings 23 Vectorworkspreferences 28

941

942

| Index
default 157 deletingsymbols 190 editingreferenced 130 editingsymbols 185 finding 167 findingfromdrawing 169 identifyingduplicate 169 importingorreferencingfromanotherfile 165 importingsymbols 189 insertingsymbols 178 linkingtofavoritefiles 166,172 movingsymbols 188 purgingunused 270 usingworkgroupreferencingfor 121,128 VectorScriptpalettes 877 VectorScripts 874 VectorworksFundamentalsandRenderworks objects 891 ReverttoSavedcommand 45 RevisionCloudtool 385 RevolvewithRailcommand 417 Ribs,creating 430 Rightcommand 575 RightIsometriccommand 575 RightRearIsometriccommand 575 RoofFacecommand 473 Rooffaces connecting 475 creating 473 creatingcutoutsin 477 reshaping 475 Roofs addingdormerwindowsto 487 addingskylightsto 490 addingverticesto 486 applyingtexturesbyclass 655 applyingtexturesbymapping 637 applyingtexturesto 640,655 changingtoaDutchhipshape 483 changingtoagableshape 482 creating 478 creatingcutoutsin 484 editing 480 removing3Dpeaksfrom 487 reshaping 484 Rotate3Dcommand 285 Rotate3DViewcommand 583 Rotatecommand 361

Reshapetool 302 Reshaping 2Dobjects(Freehandtool) 237 3Dpolygons 311 extrudesandsolidprimitives 310 NURBScurves 312 NURBSsurfaces 313 overview 302 preferencefornumberofhandles 18 roofobjects 484 walls 465 Resizing objects 310,320 objectsinteractively 59 Resolution forPDFexport(Quartzonly) 32 forPICTexport 32 forprinting(documentpreference) 32 forprinting(Printdialogbox) 84 forprintingandviewing(EditSheetLayers dialog) 105 forprinting,summaryof 86 forWMFexport 32 of2Dobjectdisplay 18 of3Dobjectdisplay 24 ofbitmapdisplay 32 ofprintedpatterns 85 ofrotatedtextdisplay 32 ResourceBrowser contextmenu 164,170 descriptionof 159 favorites 166,172 hidingandshowingresourcetypes 162 menucommands 170 opening 159 viewingthumbnailimages 161 ResourceBrowsercommand 159 Resources browsingdocumentsfor 165 creating 163 creatingandusinggradients 552 creatingandusinghatches 541 creatingandusingimagefills 557 creatingandusingtiles 541,548 creatinglibrariesof 172 creatingrecordformats 191 creatingsymbolfolders 188 creatingsymbols 175 creatingworksheetsfrom 836

Index |
RotateLeft90Degreescommand 285 RotateRight90Degreescommand 285 Rotatetool 282,361 RotateViewtool 582,897 RotatedRectangletool 220 Rotating 3Dviews 582 controllingdisplayduring 24 objectswithmouse 282 preventingrotationofobjects 744 symbols 181,183 unrotating3Dobjects 286 withSelectiontool 59,282 workingplane 600 RoundTubingtool 501 RoundWalltool 453 RoundedRectangletool 222,223 Rounding,settingsfor 75 RowHeightcommand 843 Rulers descriptionof 6 showingandhiding 19 RunVectorScriptcommand 875 interactive,multipleobjects 59 interactive,singleobject 59 normal 57 ofcallouts 375 ofdesignlayers 71 ScaleObjectscommand 321 Scaling objects 321 symbols 323 Screenplane,definition 207 Screentips 15 Scriptpalettes 877 Scripts SeeVectorScript Scrolling automatically 57 showingandhidingscrollbars 19 withmousewheel 18,57 withscrollbars 57 SectionSolidscommand 344 Sections,cutting 783 SelectAllcommand 61 SelectCoincidentObjectscommand 61 SelectConnectedObjectscommand 281 SelectDataItemscommand 845 SelectGuidescommand 78 SelectItemcommand 845 Selecting allvisibleobjects 61 coincidentobjects 61 connectedobjects 281 drawingobjectswithcustomselectionscripts 871 edgesandfaces 396 guides 78 highlightingandhandles 63,65 highlightingpreferences 26 modifierkeysfor 58 objects 58 previouslyselectedobjects 61 Selectiontoolcursors 897 text 359 Selectionbox definition 150 settingsfor 25 Selectiontool 58 SendBackwardcommand 270 SendForwardcommand 270

943

S
SaveaCopyAscommand 44 SaveAscommand 44 SaveAsTemplatecommand 80 Savecommand 43 SavePalettePositionscommand 10,162,889 SaveViewcommand 114 SavedViewspalette 117 Saving animations 755,761 autosavepreferences 24 files 43 filesautomatically 44 palettepositions 10 revertingtolastsavedversion 45 toolattributesasascript 872 workingplanelocation 604 Scale architecturalconversionchart 901 importing 825 inprintersetup 83 interactive,disable 59

944

| Index
assigningtotools 884 documentandobjectcontextmenus 883 exportingtoatextfile 881 forarrowkeys 19 forselectingmodesonToolbar 6 ShowGuidescommand 78 ShoworHideConstraintscommand 740 SimpleStairtool 522 Sitemodels caching 30 Sketchstyles purgingunused 271 Skylights addingarealightsfor 675 creating 490 Slabstyles purgingunused 271 Slottool 507 SmartEdgetool 143 Smartpointssnapping 141 SmartPointstool 141 SmartCursorcues listof 153 usingwithparametricconstrainttools 740 SmartCursorSettingscommand 133 Snapbox definitionof 150 settingsfor 25 Snapgrid aligningto 294 definitionof 77 settingsfor 135 Snaploupe 152 SnaptoAngletool 139 SnaptoDistancetool 145 SnaptoGridtool 135 SnaptoIntersectiontool 146 SnaptoObjecttool 137 SnaptoTangenttool 147 SnaptoWorkingPlanetool 147 Snapping acquisitionhints 150 controlling 148 coplanar 135 customizingdisplayof 65 example 147

SendtoBackcommand 270 SendtoCINEMA4D(3Donly)command 793 SendtoFrontcommand 270 Serialnumber i,23 Set3DViewcommand 585 SetCriteriacommand 844 SetLightingOptionscommand 661 SetOrigincommand 78 SetPerspectivecommand 578 SetRenderworksBackgroundcommand 657 SetSizecommand 362 SetSunPositioncommand 663,664 SetWorkingPlanetool 597,898 ShadedPolygoncommand 683 ShadedPolygonNoLinescommand 683 Shaders definitionof 608 editing 622 editingfromResourceBrowser 625 editingselected 624 imagebased 613 parameters 903 Shadowanalysis 664 Shadows area/linelightoption 676 customlightoption 680 CustomRenderworksoptions 695 lightsourceoptionfor 667,670 OpenGLoptionfor 685 ShaftBreaktool 506 Sheartool 324,898 SheetBordertool 376 Sheetborders addingacustomtitleblock(Fundamentals) 382 addingatitleblock 381 placing 376 propertiesof 378 Sheetlayers SeeLayers,sheet ShellSolidtool 441,898 Shortcuts assigningkeystomodes 887 assigningkeystotoolpalettes 884 assigningtocommands 881 assigningtomodes 887 assigningtosnapping 887

Index |
incongesteddrawing 152 lockingvalueswithDatabar 152 overviewof 147 settingparameters 133 SmartCursorcues 153 suspending 133 toangles 139 todistance 145 tointersection 146 toobject 113,137 toplanrotationangle 140 totangent 146 toworkingplane 147 typesofsnappoints 148 usingthesnaploupe 152 vectorlocks 151 withaudiblecues 21 withextensionlines 142 withsmartedge 143 withsmartpoints 141 Snappingpalette 133 Solidprimitives,reshaping 310 Soundcues,turningonandoff 21 SpaceNavigatormouse 584 Spacingobjects 293,294 Spellcheckingtext 367 Spheretool 251 Spiraltool 239 Spirals in2D(Spiraltool) 239 in3D(CreateHelixSpiralcommand) 432 Splittool 332 Spotlights 666 Spreadsheetcommand 844 Spreadsheetrows,addingtoworksheets 851 SquareTubingtool 502 Stackingorder ofdesignlayers 99 ofobjects 269 Stairs hidingdetails 29 Stairs,creating(SimpleStairtool) 522 StandardViewscommand 575 Standards forclassesandlayers 93 fordimensions 31,709 StartBatchRendercommand 704

945

StitchandTrimSurfacescommand 443 Structuralshapes,defaultcontentfor 158 SubtractSolidscommand 344 Sunlightlightingoptions 663 Surfaces SeeNURBSobjects Surveybearings 900 Sweepcommand 301 SymbolInsertiontool 179,898 Symbols activatingwithpickupmode 182 advantagesofusing 173 applyingtextureto 651 attachingrecordsto 193,199 black,blue,green,andred 173 changingallfieldsof 201 changingattributesof 202 changingonefieldvalue 200 convertingtoagroup 187 creating 175 creatingalistof 203 creatinganewfolderfor 188 creatingholesin3Dwalls 518 deleting 190 detachingrecordsfrom 200 dragginganddropping 179 editing 183 editingdefinitionof 185 editinginwalls 517 editingrecordvalues 197 editingwallinsertionoptions 186 importing 189 importingfoldersof 189 inserting 178,179 insertinginwalls(dragginganddropping) 512 insertinginwalls(DuplicateArraycommand) 511 insertinginwalls(DuplicateSymbolinWalltool) 509 insertionoptions 176 makingglobaledits 199 movinginwalls(MovebyPointstool) 514,517 movinginwalls(Movecommand) 513 movinginwalls(nudging) 513 movinginwalls(Selectiontool) 512 movingintofolders 188 overviewof 173 propertiesof 183 purgingunused 271 purgingunusedfolders 272 removingfromwall 183

946

| Index
TextAlongPathcommand 363 Textstyles defaultcontentfor 158 purgingunused 272 Texttool 353 Textures applyingbyclass 651 applyingtoanobject 639 applyingtoobjectparts 640 applyingtosymbols 652 applyingwithAttributeMappingtool 642 creating 609 decals 645 defaultcontentfor 158 definitionof 608 editingfromObjectInfopalette 622 editingfromResourceBrowser 625 orientationof 638 previewing 611 purgingunused 271 Tilefills applying 550 creatingnewfrommapped 563 defaultcontentfor 158 defining 548 editingdefinitions 552 mappingtilefills 561 purgingunused 272 settingdefaultsforaclass 109 Titlebar 5 Titleblocks addingtoasheetborder 381 customizingforFundamentals 382 defaultcontentfor 158 Toolbar,keyboardshortcutsfor 6 ToolSetspalette 9,11 Tools changingdisplayof 12 creatingcustomscriptsfor 872 cursorsfor 893 modifyingwithWorkspaceEditor 884 pausing 15 popouttools 12 resettingsavedmodesettings 23 selectingtoolsets 13 viewingmultipletoolsets 13 Topcommand 575 TopLevelcommand 292

replacing 184 rotating 183 scaling 323 showingotherobjectswhileediting 20 typesof 173

T
Tabletcommand 86 Tabs,intext 356 Tangentconstraints 748 TapeMeasuretool 738 Taperedextrudes 300 Teetool 504 Templates changingthedefault 81 creatingnewdocumentsfrom 39 savingdocumentsas 80 Text activatingeditingmode 357 addingtabsto 356 checkingspellingof 367 convertingtopolylines 362 creatingalongapath 362 creatingasablock 354 creatingasasingleline 354 creatingrotated 355 creatingwithatightfill 356 cursorsforcreatingandediting 898 editingpropertiesof 358 findingandreplacing 369 formatting 359 formatting,indimensions 731 inanimations 761 incustomdimensions 711 insheetlayerviewports 775 inworksheets 847 keyboardshortcutsforediting 358 linkingtorecordformats 197 pasting 357 position,indimensions 735 preferenceforadjustingflippedtext 30 preferenceforcreatingwithoutfill 20 preferenceforeditingrotatedtexthorizontally 18,355 rotatingexisting 361 selecting 359 settingdefaultsfor 354 unrotatingforediting 358 wrapping 355,361 wrapping,inworksheets 847

Index |
Top/Plancommand 575 TraceBitmapcommand 296 Transfermode,designlayer 100 TranslateViewtool 581,898 Transparency designlayer 100 objects 532 Transparencyshaders definitionof 609 editing 624 importingimagesfor 617 typesof 924 Triangletool 241 Trimcommand 318 Trimtool 319,898 TrueTypetoPolylinecommand 362 VectorScript creatingcustomselectionscripts 871 creatingcustomtool/attributescripts 872 creatingscriptsfromscratch 874 deletingscripts 876 descriptionof 871 duplicatingscripts 876 editingscripts 875 encryptingscripts 877 exporting 792 importingscriptpalettes 189,878 importingscripts 790,877 movingscriptstonewpalettes 877 openingscripts 877 renamingscripts 876 runningscripts 874 stoppingscriptsonwarnings 21 VectorScriptPluginEditorcommand 174 Vectorworks convertingpreviousversionfiles 45 exiting 51 exportingpreviousversionfiles 793 installing i previousRenderworksfiles 608 resettingsavedsettings 23 serialnumberfor i,23 updating ii,22 VectorworksPreferencescommand 17 VectorworksServiceSelect xiv Verticalconstraints ConstrainHorizVerticaltool 744 ConstrainVerticalDistancetool 742 Vertices addingtoapolygonorpolyline 306 addingtoaroof 486 addingtoawall 468 changingtocontrolpoints 306 movingon2Dobjects 309 movingonaNURBSsurface 313 reducinginNURBS 426 removing 307 selecting 313 shearingwith 324 Viewbar 7 settingactiveclasswith 112 settingactivelayerwith 103 Viewports,sheetlayer addingannotationsanddimensionsto 775 advancedpropertiesof 768

947

U
UnconstrainedLinearDimensiontool 715 Undocommand 52 Undo,preferencesfor 21 Ungroupcommand 291,788 Units customizingforadrawing 76 forlinethicknesses 535 indimensions 723 inimportedDXF/DWGfiles 825 settingoptionsforadrawing 73 usingformeasurements 738 Unitscommand 73 Unlockcommand 78,282,786 Unrotate3DObjectscommand 286 UnshadedPolygoncommand 682 UpdateAllViewportscommand 783 UpdatePluginObjectscommand 45 UpdateSelectedViewportscommand 783 UpdatingVectorworks ii,22

V
VBvisualplant adding 628 defaultcontentfor3Dplants 158 VBvisualPlanttool 629 Vectorlocks 151 VectorCachingpreference 20

948

| Index
applyingtexturesbyclass 654 applyingtextureswithbasicmapping 640 attributesbyclass 450 automaticallyjoining 18,454 changingelevationofpeaks 467 changinglengthof 466 changingroundwallradius 469 changingtextureorientationon 638 creating 445 creatingcomponentsfor 455 creatingfromapolygon 459 creatingpolygonsfrom 462 creatingpolylinesfrom 462 creatingroofsfrom 478 defaultcontentfortextures 158 deletingcomponentsfrom 459 directionof 454 editingcomponentsin 458 editingpropertiesof 464 editingsymbolsin 517 editingsymbolstocreate3Dholes 518 hidingcomponents 29 insertingsymbolsin(dragginganddropping) 512 insertingsymbolsin(DuplicateArraycommand) 511 insertingsymbolsin(DuplicateSymbolinWall tool) 509 insertingsymbolsinto 59,179 joining 324,470 joiningtopillars 462 movingsymbolsin(MovebyPointstool) 514,517 movingsymbolsin(Movecommand) 513 movingsymbolsin(nudging) 513 movingsymbolsin(Selectiontool) 512 preferencesfor 447 removing3Dpeaksfrom 469 removingbreaksfrom 470 reshaping 465 reshapingheightof 467 round 453 straight 446 trimming 318 Watermarkedfiles 40,82 WhatsThiscommand 896 Wheelmouse panningwith 53 scrollingwith 18,57 zoomingwith 18,55 Whitecardrendering 695 Wideflangetool 505

ambientlightingoptionsfor 768 annotatingobjectswithfilledpolygons 245 cachingrenderingandradiosityimages 29,689 creatingfromadesignlayer 762 creatingwithacropobject 765 croppingexisting 774 editinganassociateddesignlayer 771 editingRWcamera 776 imagetoclipboard 771 movingandediting 770 overridingclassproperties 780 overridinglayerproperties 777 propertiesof 766 showingotherobjectswhileediting 20 statusdisplay 770 transferringattributesbetween 526 updating 782 Views aligningforalldesignlayers 788 changingwithFittoObjectscommand 591 changingwithRotate3DViewcommand 583 changingwithRotateViewtool 582 changingwithSet3DViewcommand 585 changingwithTranslateViewtool 581 changingwithWalkthroughtool 580 deletingsaved 114 descriptionof 2 editingsaved 116,117 openingsaved 117 panning 53 preferenceforcenteringautomatically 20 refreshingwithPantool 53 saving 114 settingwithRenderworksCameratool 586 switchingtonextandprevious 592 usingstandard 575 Visibilityofclassesanddesignlayers,setting 118 Visualizationpalettecommand 705 VolumetricPropertiescommand 346

W
Walkthroughtool 580,899 WallJointool 470 Wallstyles purgingunused 272 Walltool 446 Walls adding3Dpeaksto 468,486

Index |
WidePerspectivecommand 578 Windows,dormer 487 Wireframe 578,689 Wireframecommand 682 WireframeOptionscommand 683 Workflows DXF/DWGexport 808 DXF/DWGimport 818 snapping 147 symbols 173 workgroupreferencing 121 workspaceeditor 879 Workgroupfolders(Vectorworkspreference) 28 Workgroupreferences correctingbrokenlinks 127 creatingandediting(layerimport) 123 deleting 130 descriptionof 121 editingreferencedresources 130 openingreferencedfiles 131 prioritiesofmultiplefiles 126 settingreferencingoptions 122 updatingfrommasterfiles 126 usingresourcesfrommasterfiles 128,165 Workingplane aligningobjectsto 605 appearanceof 596 automatic 208,594 changingappearanceof 67 deletingposition 604 descriptionof 593 manipulating 600 mirroringobjectsacross 288 renamingposition 604 rotating 600 savingposition 604 settinglocationof 597 showingaxislabels 136 showingZaxis 136 switchingtopreviouspositions 603 viewandmodes 605 WorkingPlanespalette 602 Worksheets addingrowsorcolumnsto 841,843 creatingablankworksheet 836 creatingwithCreateReportcommand 833 cutting,copying,andpastingcellcontents 841 deletingrowsorcolumnsfrom 843 descriptionofcursorsfor 899 displayingdatabaseitem 845 editingcellcontents 839 enteringdataindatabaserows 857 enteringdatainspreadsheetcells 851 errorcodes 853 exportingdatafrom 869 formattingcellsof 846 formulasyntaxfor 852 functionsof 861 importingdatainto 868 keysformovingaroundin 838 listofcommandsfor 842 mergingcells 848 movingacopyofrowsandcolumns 841 movingrowsandcolumns 841 openingexisting 837 placingondrawing 838,870 preferencesfor 843 printing 843 recalculating 842 resizingrowsandcolumns 840 retrievingrecordinformationinarow 860 selectingcellsin 839 selectingobjectsusingdatabaserows 859 sortingcolumnsin 845 summarizingidenticalitemsin 845 usingcellreferencesinformulas 856 zooming 843 Worksheetscommand 837 Workspaceeditor contextmenus 883 menuandcommandshortcuts 881 overviewof 879 paletteandtoolshortcuts 884 snappingandmodeshortcuts 887 WorkspaceEditorcommand 879 Workspaces creatingandediting 879 duplicating 880 exportingtotextfile 881 featuresof 4 migratingcustom 889

949

Z
Zoomcommand 843 Zoomtool 55 Zooming interactive 56 marquee 56

950

| Index

preferenceforlinethickness 20 withFittoObjectscommand 591 withFittoPageAreacommand 592 withthemousewheel 18,55 withtheViewbar 8,55 withtheZoomtool 55 Zoomtoolcursors 899

You might also like